,|i|Li||);^ '<"\\
'iiiliiili
.111
Wmm
fiilii
Hlmliiii!:
1 ' : :)il ■ i;»' J ; 1' . i
niiiiiii'
il!HMin|i«llt||nij|lHi|!|
m
■I
liisiiijilili
liiilil
^BiiSI
Hiiifflliiiiiiiilili!;-
■iiiiHIi^
w§m
aiiiiiiiliijiiilliilii
;iii
:,l-
ill M
iifci
-^""-^iillliiiiinifijiiisitlliiliiili,
. . LIBRARY . .
Connecticut
Agricultural College.
VOL lA.X.RX
CLASS NO .4?.....v? >-'
COST ^HN"
DATE Zr^-i ... 3 . 19/4,
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2009 with funding from •
Boston Library Consortium IVIember Libraries
http://www.archive.org/details/geologyoflakesupOOvanh
UNITED STATES GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
GEORGE OTIS SMITH, Director
THE GEOLOGY OF
THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION
BY
t
CHARLES RICHARD VAN HISE
AND
CHARLES KENNETH LEITH
5SC£/MLHij DtPARTMENT
RECEIVED
JAN 2 1C6?
Wilbui Cross Library
Univeisity ci Connecticut
WASHINGTON
GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
1911
M 1 ^X.
CONTENTS.
Page.
Chapter I. Introduction 29
Outline of monogra]5h 29
Acknowledgments •. 30
Geography 30
Topography 33
Relief '. 33
Drainage 33
Chapter II. History of Lake Superior mining 35
The Keweenaw copper district of Michigan 35
Copper mining on Isle Eoyal and elsewhere 37
Marquette iron district 38
Menominee iron district 39
Crystal Falls, Florence, and Iron River iron districts 39
Gogebic iron district 40
Vermilion iron district 40
Mesabi iron district 41
Accounts of the district before its opening 41
Opening and development 42
Cuyuna iron district 44
Baraboo iron district ., 45
Less important developments 45
Clinton iron ores of Dodge County, Wis 45
Paleozoic iron ores in western Wisconsin .■ 45
Iron ores of the north .''hore of I^ake Superior 45
Silver mining on the north shore of Lake Superior 46
Lake Superior gold mining 46
General remarks 47
Industrial changes 47
Smelting 47
Influence of physiography on industrial development 48
Production of iron ore 49
Chapter III. History of geologic work in the Lake Superior region 70
General statement 70
Work of individuals 70
Growth of geologic knowledge 72
Bibliography 73
Michigan 74
Northern Wisconsin 77
Minnesota 78
Ontario 81
Lake Superior region (general) 83
Chapter IV. Physical geography of the Lake Superior region, by Lawrence Martin 85
Topographic provinces 85
The Lake Superior highlands 85
Topographic development 85
The broad uplands - - . . 89
Position, relief, and sky line 89
Relation of original and present topography 89
Monadnocks 90
Valleys in the peneplain 90
■ 5
6 CONTENTS.
Chapter IV. Physical geography of the Lake SuiJerior region, }>y I^awrence Martin — Continued. Page.
The Lake Superior highlands — Continued.
The broad uplands — Continued .
Soil and glacial topogra])h y 91
Description of dif trict.s in detail 91
Gabbro ])lateau 91
St. Louis plain 92
Vermilion district 94
Rainy Lake and Lake of the Woods district 92
Hunters Island and Thunder Bay region 94
Region north of Lake Superior 95
Region northeast of Lake Superior 95
Michipicoten district 95
Region north of Sault Ste. Marie 95
Marquette district 96
Menominee district 96
Crystal Falls district 96
Keweenaw Point 97
Northern ^Wisconsin 97
Central Wisconsin 98
Northeastern Wisconsin 98
Linear monadnocks and other ridges 98
General description 98
Keweenawan monoclinal ridges 99
General statement , 99
Northeastern Minnesota 99
Isle Royal and Michipicoten Island 99
Keweenaw Point and northern Michigan and Wisconsin 100
Keweenawan mesas 100
Huronian monoclinal ridges and valleys 102
Gunflint Lake district 102
Penokee Range 102
Giants Range 103
Marquette district 105
Menominee district 106
Crystal Falls district 107
North-central Wisconsin 107
Northwestern Wisconsin 108
The lowland plains 108
Area 108
Character and structiu-e 108
Denudation 109
The belted plain 109
The Minnesota lowlands 110
The basin of Lake Superior 110
General character and origin ' 110
Description of escarpments 112
Duluth escarpment 112
Keweenaw escarpment 115
Escarpment of northern Wisconsin (Superior escarpment) 115
Isle Royal escarpment 115
Age of escarpments 116
Bearing of escarpments on age of peneplain 116
Chapter V. The Vermilion iron district of Minnesota 118
Location, area, and general geologic succession 118
Topography 119
Archean system 119
Keewatin series : 119
Ely greenstone 119
Distribution 119
Appearance and structiu-e 119
Mineral constituents 120
Clastic rocks 121
CONTENTS. 7
Chapter V. — The Vermilion iron district of Minnesota — Continued. Page.
Archean system — Continued.
Keewatin series — Continued.
Ely greenstone — Continued.
Acidic flows 121
Intrusive rocks 121
Extension of Ely greenstone beyond district 122
Soudan format ion 122
Distribution 122
Deformation 123
Lithology 124
Origin 126
Relations of Ely greenstone and Soudan formation 126
Laurentian series 128
Porphyry 128
Granite of Basswood Lake 128
Algonkian system 129
Huronian series 129
Lower-middle Huronian .• 129
General statement 129
Ogishke conglomerate 129
Distribution 129
Deformation 129
Lithology 130
Greenstone conglomerate 130
Granite conglomerate 130
Porphyry conglomerate 131
Chert and jasper conglomerate 131
Common Ogishke rock 131
Metamorphism 131
Relations to adjacent formations 132
Thickness 132
Agawa formation 132
Knife Lake slate 132
General statement 132
Lithology 133
Microscopic character '... 134
Deformation 135
Relation to adjacent formations 135
Thickness 135
Intrusive rocks 135
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) and Keweenawan series 136
Theironoresof the Vermilion district, Minnesota, by the authors and W. J. Mead 137
Distribution, structure, and relations 137
Chemical composition 139
Mineral composition of the ores and cherts 140
Physical characteristics of Vermilion ores 140
Texture 140
Density 141
Porosity 141
Cubic contents 141
Secondary concentration of Vermilion ores 141
Precedent conditions 141
Mineralogical and chemical changes 142
Sequence of secondary alterations and development of textures 142
Volume change in Ely ore 142
Distribution of phosphorus , 143
Chapter VI. The pre-Animikie iron districts of Ontario 144
Lake of the Woods and Rainy Lake district 144
Introductory statement 144
Archean system 144
Keewatin series 144
Laurentian series 145
8 CONTENTS.
Chaptek VI. The prc-Animikie iron districts of Ontario — Continued. Page.
Lake of the Woods and Rainy Lake district.— Continued.
Algonkian sy.-ftoin 146
Iluronian series 14(5
Steep Rock Lake district 147
General geology 147
Iron ores 149
Atikokan district 149
Kaministikwaa and Matawdn district : 149
Michipicoten district 150
Geography and topography 150
Succession 150
Archcan system 151
Keewatin series 151
Gros Cap greenstone 151
Distribution 151
Petrographic character 151
Wawa tuff 151
Distribution 151
Petrographic character 151
Structure and thickness 1.52
Helen formation 152
Distribution 152
Structiu'e and thickness 153
Petrographic character 1,53
Relations to other formations 153
Eleanor slate 154
Laurentian series 154
Algonkian system 154
Huronian series 154
* Lower-middle Iliuonian 154
Dore conglomerate 154
Distribution, topography, and structure 154
Petrographic character 154
Thickness 1.55
Relations to underlying rocks 155
Michipicoten extensions 155
The iron ores of the Michipicoten district, by the authors and W. J. Mead 156
General statement 156
Chemical composition 156
Mineral composition 156
Physical characteristics 157
Color and texture 157
Density 157
Porosity 157
Cubic feet per ton 157
Secondary concentration of the Michipicoten ores 157
Chapter VII. The Mesabi iron district of Minnesota 159
General description 159
Archean system or "Basement Complex" 160
Distribution 160
Kinds of rocks 160
Structure 161
Algonkian system. . .'. 161
Iluronian series 161
Lower-middle Huronian 161
Distribution ^ 161
Graywackes and slates 161
Conglomerates 162
Giants Range gi'anite 162
Relations of Giants Range granite to the lower-middle Htu-onian sediments and of both to other
rocks 162
Structure and thickness 163
Conditions of deposition : 163
CONTENTS. 9
Chapter VII. The Mesabi inm district of Minnesota — Continued.
Algonkian system — Continued .
Huronian series — Continued.
Upper Hm-onian ( Aniniikie group) Igg
General character and extent 163
Pokegaraa quartzite 1(;4
Biwabik formation Ig4
Distribution Ig4
Kinds of rocks Ig5
Greenali'te rocks 165
Ferruginous, amphibolitic, sideritic, and calcareous cherts 168
Siliceous, ferruginous, and amphibolitic slates 170
Paint rock 171
Sideritic and calcareous rocks 171
Conglomerates and quartzites 171
Thickness ; 171
Alteration by the intrusion of Keweenawan granite and gabbro 171
Virginia slate 172
Distribution 172
Slate 173
Cordierite homstone resulting from the alteration of the Virginia slate by the Duluth gabbro. 173
Relations to the Biwabik formation 174
Structure 174
Thickness I74
Structm-e of the upper Huronian ( Animikie group) 175
Relations of the upi)er Huronian (Animikie group) to other series 176
Conditions of deposition of the upper Huronian (Animikie group) 176
Keweenawan series 177
Duluth gabbro I77
Diabase 177
Embarrass gianite 178
Cretaceous rocks 178
Distribution and character 178
Fossils 179
Pleistocene glacial deposits I79
The iron ores of the Mesabi district, by tlie authors and W. J. Mead 179
Distribution, structure and relations I79
Chemical composition of ferruginous cherts and ores 180
Analyses ISO
Representation by means of triangular diagram 182
Mineralogical composition of ferruginous cherts and ores 183
Physical characteristics of the ores 183
Texture 183
Density 184
Porosity 184
Cubic contents 185
Magnetic phases of the iron-bearing formation 185
Occurrence 185
Chemical composition 185
Secondary concentration of Mesabi ores 186
Structural conditions 186
Original character of tlie iron-bearing formation 186
Alteration of sideritic or greenalitic chert to ferruginous chert (taconite ) 187
Chemical change 187
Mineral change 187
Volume change 187
Development of porosity 187
Alteration of ferruginous cherts (taconite) to ore 188
Volume changes 188
Method of expressing volume changes by triangular diagram 189
Data used in triangle 189
Consideration of the triangular diagram 190
Alterations of associated rocks contemporaneous with secondary alteration of the iron-bearing for-
mation 191
10 CONTENTS.
CuAiTKR \'II. The Mcsalii iron dit-trift of Minnesota — Continued. Page.
The iron ores of I lie Mesabi district, liy the authors and W. J. Mead— Continued.
Pliosplionis in Me.s;il)i ores 192
Dislrilnition in the iron-bearing formation '. 192
Secondary concentration of pliosphorus 194
Explanation of phosphorus in the paint rock •. . 19.5
Phosphorus in the amphibole-inagnetite phases of I lie iron-bearing formation 195
Minerals containing phosphorus 195
Detrital ores in the Cretaceous rocks 190
Sef[uence of ore concentration in the Mesain district 197
Chapter VI 11. The G\inflint Lake, Pigeon Point, and Animikie iron districts of Minnesota and Ontario 198
Gunllint Lake district 198
Geography 198
Succession of rocks 198
Algonkian system 198
Huronian series 198
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 198
General description 198
Gunflint formation 199
Distribution ' 199
Structure 199
Potrographic character 200
Contact metamorphism 200
Thickness 200
Eove slate 200
Distribution 200
Structure 201
Petrographic character 201
Contact metamorphism 201
Thickness 201
Keweenawan series 201
Duluth gabbro. 201
Logan sills 202
Relations of the Keweenawan rocks to one another and to adjacent formations 202
Geologic relations 202
Topography as related to geology 20,3
The iron ores of the Gunflint Lake district 203
Chemical composition 204
Physical characteristics 204
Pigeon Point district 204
Animikie or Loon Lake district of Ontario 205
Location and general succession 205
Archean system 205
Algonkian system 205
Huronian series 205
Lower-middle Huronian 205
Kinds of rocks 205
Intrusives 206
Upper Huronian (Animikie group i 206
General description 206
Iron-bearing formation 206
Conglomerate 206
Lower iron-bearing member 207
Interbedded slate 207
Upper iron-bearing member 207
Upper black slate 207
Keweenawan series 207
General description 207
Logan sills 208
Structural features 208
General topographic features in their relations to geology 208
Westward extension of the Animikie district 209
CONTENTS. 11
Chapter VIII. The Gunflint Lake, Pigeon Point, and Animikie iron districts of Minnesota and Ontario — Con. Page.
Animikie or Loon Lake district of Ontario — Continued.
The iron ores of tlie Animikie district of Ontarii i 209
Occurrence 209
Character of the ore 210
Secondary concentration of tlie Animikie ores 210
Structural conditions 210
Original character of the iron-bearing formation 210
Nature of alterations 210
Sequence of ore concentration 210
Chapter IX. The Cuyuna iron district of Minnesota and its extensions to Carlton and Cloquet, and the Minne-
sota River valley of southwestern Minnesota 211
Cuyuna iron district and extensions to Carlton and Cloquet 211
Geography and topography 211
Succession of rocks 211
Algonkian system 212
Huronian series 212
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 212
■' General statement 212
' Distribution and structure 212
Lithology and metamorphism 213
Correlation 213
Keweenawan series (?) 215
Cretaceous rocks 215
Quaternary system 216
Pleistocene glacial deposits 216
The iron ores of the Cuyuna district, by the authors and Carl Zapffe 216
Distribution, structure, and relations 216
Character of the ores ? 219
General appearance 2*19
Chemical composition 220
Mineralogical composition 221
Texture 223
Secondary concentration of Cuyuna ores 223
Structural conditions 223
Original character of the Deerwood iron-bearing member 223
Mineralogical and chemical changes 223
Phosphorus in Cuyuna ores 224
Minnesota River valley of southwestern Minnesota 224
Chapter X. The Penokee-Gogebic iron district of Michigan and Wisconsin 225
Location, succession of rocks, and topography 225
Archean system 226
General statement 226
Keewatin series 226
Laurentian series 226
Relations of Keewatin and Laurentian series • 227
Algonkian system 227
Huronian series 227
Lower Huronian 227
Sunday quartzite 227
Lithology and distribution 227
Relations to adjacent formations 228
Bad River limestone 228
Distribution 228
Lithology 228
Metamorphism 228
Relations to adjacent formations 228
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 229
General statement 229
Palms formation 229
Distribution 229
Lithology 229
Relations to adjacent formations 230
12 CONTENTS.
Chapter X. The Penokee-Gogebic iron district of Michigan and Wisconein — Continued. Page.
Algonkian system — Continued.
Huronian scries — Continued.
Upper Ilitfonian (Aniraikie group) — Continued.
Ironwood formation : 230
Distribution. 230
Lithology 231
Relations to adjacent formations 232
Tyler slate 232
Distribution 232
Lithology 232
Metamorphism 232
Relations to adjacwil formations 233
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) of the eastern area 233
Keweenawan series 234
General description 234
Relations to adjacent series 234
Cambrian sand.^tone 235
The iron ores of the Penokee-Gogebic district, by the authors and \V. J. Mead 235
Distribution, structure, and relations 235
Chemical composition of the ferruginous cherts and ores 238
Mineralogical composition of the ferruginous cherts and ores 240
Physical characteristics 240
General appearance -40
Density 240
Porosity 241
Cubic contents 241
Texture 241
Magnetitic ores 24 1
Secondary concentration of Gogebic ores 242
Structural conditions 242
Original character of the iron-bearing formation 243
Alteration of cherty iron carbonate to ferruginous chert 243
Chemical change 243
Mineral change 243
Volume change 243
Development of porosity 243
Alteration of ferruginous chert to ore 244
Triangular diagram illustrating secondary concentration of Gogebic ores : 246
Alteration of rocks associated with ores during their secondary concentration 240
Occurrence of phosphorus in the iron-bearing formation 247
Phosphorus content 247
Minerals containing phosphorus 248
Behavior of phosphorus during secondary concentration 249
Sequence of ore concentration in the Gogebic district 2.50
Chapteh XI. The Marquette iron district of Michigan, including the Swanzy, Dead River, and Perch Lake
areas 251
Marquette district 251
Introduction -• 251
Location, succession, and general structure 251
Archean system 253
Northern area 254
Keewatin series 254
Laurentian series 255
Southern area 255
Isolated areas of Archean rocks 256
Algonkian system 256
Huronian series 2.5G
Lower Huronian 256
Mesnard quartzite 2.56
Name and distribution 256
Lithology 256
Metamorphism 257
CONTENTS. • 13
Chapter XI. The Marquette iron district of Michigan, etc.— Continued. Page.
Marquette district— Continued.
Algonliian system— Continued.
Huronian series — Continued.
Lower Huronian — Continued.
Mesnard quartzite — Continued.
Relations to adjacent formations 257
Thickness ^^^
Kona dolomite
Name and distribution ~^^
Lithology ~^^
Metamorphism ""_
Relations to adjacent formations '-^^
Thickness -^*
We we slate -^^
Distribution 258
Lithology 2^^
Metamorphism '''^^
Relations to adjacent formations 259
Thickness 259
Middle Huronian 2o9
Ajibik quartzite ■
Name and distribution "^^
Deformation "
Lithology'. 260
Metamorphism """
Relations to adjacent formations - ■ ■ • 260
Thickness 261
Siamo slate ""
Name and distribution 2G1
Deformation 261
Lithology 261
Metamorphism 261
Relations to adjacent formations 262
Thickness 262
Negaunee formation -"2
Name and distribution 262
Deformation -^'-
Lithology, including metamorphism 263
Relations to adjacent formations 264
Thickness 264
Intrusive and eruptive rocks 264
Upper Huronian ( Animikie group) 265
Goodrich quartzite -"^
Distribution and structure 265
Lithology, including metamorphism 265
Relations to adjacent formations 265
Thickness 265
Bijiki schist 266
Name and distribution 266
Lithology, including metamorphism 266
Relations to adjacent rocks 266
Thickness 267
Michiganime slate " '
Name, distribution, and correlation 267
Deformation -"'
' Lithology 267
Metamorphism -"' .
Relations to adjacent formations -"'''
Thickness 268
Clarksburg formation -"^
Distribution 268
Lithology 268
14 • CONTENTS.
Chapter XI. The Marquetto iron flistrii-l of Michigan, etc. — Continued. Page.
Marquette district — Continued.
Algonkian system^Continued.
Huronian series — Continued.
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) — Continued.
C'lark.slmrg formation — Continued.
Relations to adjacent formations 268
Thickness 268
Intru.'ive igneous rocks 268
Cambrian .•<and.-^tono 269
Quaternary deposits 269
The iron ores of the Marqtieltc district, by the authors and \V. J. Mead 270
Distribution, structure, and relations of ore deposits 270
Chemical rompo.'rition of Marquette ores 273
Chemical composition of iron-bearing Negaunee formation 273
Mineral compo.^iition of Marquette ores 274
Physical charac'teristics of Marquette ores 274
Secondary concentration of Marquette ores 275
Structural conditions 275
Chemical and mineralogical changes in secondary concentration of Marquette ores 276
Volume changes in secondary concentration of Marquette ores 276
Representiition of ores and jaspers on triangular diagram 278
Sequence of ore concentration in the Marquette district 278
Occurrence of phosphorus in the Marquette ores 279
Distribution of phosphorus 279
Mineralogical occurrence of phosphorus 281
Phosphorus in relation txj secondary concentration 281
Swanzy district 283
Geography and topography 283
General succession and structure 283
Archean system 283
Algonkian system 285
Huronian series 285
Upper Huronian ( .\nimikie group') 285
Goodrich quartzite 285
Michigamme slate 285
Paleozoic sediments 285
Quaternary deposits 285
Correlation 286
The iron ores of the Swanzy district, by the authors and W. J. Mead 286
General description ; 286
Secondary concentration of Swanzy ores 286
Dead River area , 287
General succession 287
Archean system 287
Keewatin series 287
Laurentian series 287
Algonkian system 287
Huronian series 287
Middle Huronian 287
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 288
Perch Lake district (including western Marquette) 288
Geography and topography 2§8
General succession 288
Archean system 288
Laurentian series 288
.Vlgonkian system 289
Hmcmian series 289
Middle Huronian 289
Upper Huronian (.Vnimikie group) 289
Quaternary deposits 290
CONTENTS. 15
Chapter XII. The Crystal Falls, Sturgeon, Felch Mountain, Calumet, and Iron River iron di.strict.'i of Michi- Page.
gan and the Florence iron district of Wisconsin 291
Crystal Falls iron district 291
Location and area 2!J 1
General succession and structure .- 291
Archean system 293
Laurentian series 293
Algonkian system 293
Huronian series , 293
Lower Huronian 293
Sturgeon quartzite 293
Randvillo dolomite 293
Middle Huronian (?) 294
Hemlock formation 294
Distribution and general character .• 294
Area south and west of the westernmost Archean oval 294
Fence River area 29.5
Other areas of the Hemlock formation 29.5
Iron-bearing slate member ("Man.sfield slate") of the Hemlock formation 29.5
Negaunee (?) formation 296
Magnetic belts northeast of Fence River 296
Negaunee (?) formation at Michigararae Mountain and in the Fence River area 296
Ferruginous quartzite associated with iron-bearing formation north of Michigamme
Mountain 298
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 298
•Michigamme slate 298
General character 298
Vulcan ii-on-bearing member '. 298
Intrusive and extrusive rocks in upper Huronian 299
Relations of the upper Huronian to underlying rocks 300
Cambrian sandstone 300
Sturgeon River district 300
Location and area 300
General succession 300
Archean system 301
Laurentian series 301
Algonkian system 301
Huronian series 301
Lower Huronian 301
Sturgeon quartzite 301
Randville dolomite 301
Middle Huronian (?) 301
Negaunee ( ?) formation 301
Igneous rocks 301
Keweenawan series (?) > 301
Felch Mountain district 302
Location, structure, and general succession 302
Archean system 302
Laurentian series 302
Algonkian system 302
Huronian series ; 302
Lower Huronian 302
Sturgeon quartzite _. 302
Randville dolomite .' 302
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 303
Felch schist 303
Vulcan formation 303
Keweenawan series (?) 304
Intrusive rocks 304
Paleozoic sandstone and limestone 304
Correlation 304
Laurentian series 304
Lower Huronian 30.5
16 CONTENTS.
CiiAi'iKH XII. The Crystal Falls, Sturgeon, Felch Mountain, Caluiiiel, and Iron River districts, etc. — Conta. Page.
Fclcli Mdunlain di.-Jtrict — Conlinur-d.
Correlation — Continued.
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 305
Keweenavvaii series (?) .• 30.5
Calumet district 306
Location and general succession 30C
Arehean system 306
Laurentian series 306
Algonkian system 306
Huronian series 306
Lower Huronian 306
Sturgeon ([uartzite 306
Randville dolomite 306
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 307
Felch schL^^t 307
Vulcan formation 307
Michigamme slate 307
Paleozoic limestone and sandstone 307
Correlation 307
Iron River distrirt, by R. C. Allen 308
Location and extent 308
Topography and drainage 308
( 'haracter of the glacial drift 309
General succession 309
Arehean (?) system 309
Keewatin series (?) 309
Algonkian system 310
Huronian series 310
Lower Huronian 310
Saunders formation 310
Distribution 310
Lithologic characters 310
Structure 311
Thickness 311
Relations to adjacent formations 311
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 311
Michigamme slate 311
Distribution and general characters 311
General structure 312
Vulcan iron-bearing member 313
Distribution and exposures ■ ■ ■ 313
Relations to Michigamme slate 313
Thickness and structure 314
Lithologic characters 314
Distribution and local structure 315
Local magnetism in the Vulcan iron-bearing member 317
Intrusive and extrusive rocks in the upper Huronian (Animikie group) 318
Relations of upper Huronian (^nimikie group) to luiderlying rocks 318
Ordovician rocks 319
Florence (Commonwealth) iron district of Wisconsin 320
Location and general succession 320
Algonkian system 321
Hiu'onian series 321
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 321
Michigamme slate 321
General character and distribution 321
Vulcan iron-bearing member , 321
Intrusive and extrusive greenstones and green schists 322
Quinnesec schist 322
Intrusive and extrusive greenstones and green schists other than Quinnesec 322
Granite and gneiss intrusives 323
Paleozoic sandstone 323
Quaternary deposits 323
CONTENTS. . 17
Chapter XII. The Crystal Falls, Sturgeon, Felch Mountain, Calumet, and Iron River districts, etc. — Contd. Page.
The iron ores of the Crystal Falls, Iron River, and Florence districts, by the authors and \V. J. Mead 323
Distribution, structiu-e, and relations 323
Chemical composition : 324
Mineral composition • ■ 325
Physical characteristics .• 325
Secondary concentration 320
Structural conditions 326
Chemical and mineralogical changes 326
Time of concentration 326
The iron ores of the Felch Mountain and Calumet districts, by the authors and W.J. Mead 326
Felch Mountain district 327
Cahmiet district 327
Secondary concentration of the Felch Mountain and Calumet ores 328
Structural conditions 328
Chemical and mineralogical changes 328
Chapter XIII. The Menominee u'on district of Michigan 329
Location and extent 329
Topography 329
Succession of formations 329
Archean system 330
Laurentian series and unseparated Keewatin 330
Algonkian system 331
General character and limits 331
Huronian series 332
Lower Huronian 332
Succession and distribution 332
Sturgeon quartzite 332
Distribution 332
Lithology 332
Deformation 332
• Relations to adjacent formations 332
Thickness 333
Randville dolomite 333
Distribution 333
Lithology 333
Deformation 334
Relations to adjacent formations 334
Thickness • 334
Middle Huronian 334
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 335
Vulcan formation , 335
Subdivision into members 335
Distribution '. 336
Traders iron-bearing member 337
Brier slate member 337
Curry iron-bearing member 337
Deformation 338
Relations between the members of the Vulcan formation and the ilichigamme slate 338
Thickness 339
Michigamme ("Hanbury ") slate 340
Distribution 340
Name 340
Lithology 340
Defor^iation 341
. Thickness 342
Relations of Upper Huronian to underlying rocks ._ 342
Relations between Vulcan formation and the lower Huronian 342
Relations between Michigamme ("Hanbury") slate and the middle or lower Huronian... 343
Igneous rocks in the Algonkian 344
Quinnesec schist 344
Green schists at Fourfoot Falls 345
47517°— VOL 52—11 2
18 . CONTENTS.
Chapter XIII. The Menominee iron district of Michigan — Continued. Page.
Paleozoic rocks 345
Cambrian system 346
Lake Superior sandstone 346
Lithology 346
Relations to adjacent formations 346
Cambro-Ordovician 346
Hermansville limestone 346
The iron ores of the Menominee district, by the authors and W. J. Mead 346
Distribution, structure, and relations 346
Chemical composition of the ores 350
Average iron content of the iron-bearing formation 351
Mineral composition of the ores 351
Physical characteristics of the ores 352
Iron ore at base of Cambrian sandstone 353
Secondary concentration of the Menominee ores 353
Structural conditions ■ 353
Mineralogical and chemical changes 354
Sequence of ore concentration in the Menominee district 354
Chapter XIV. North-central Wisconsin and outlying pre-Cambrian areas of central Wisconsin • 355
Northern Wisconsin in general 355
Wausau district 355
Location, area, and general geologic succession 355
Archean (?) system 356
Algonkian system 356
Huronian series 356
Middle Huronian (?) 356
Rocks intrusive in middle Huronian (?) and Archean (?) 357
Upper Huronian (?) 357
Cambrian system 357
Barron, Rusk, and Sawyer counties 357
Vicinity of Lakewood 358
Necedah, North Bluff, and Black River areas 358
Baraboo iron district 359
Location and general geologic succession 359
Archean system 360
Laurentian series 360
Algonkian system 361
Huronian series • 361
Middle Huronian (?) 361
Baraboo quartzite 361
Seeley slate 361
Freedom dolomite 361
Upper Huronian (?) 361
Paleozoic sediments 361
Quaternary deposits 362
The iron ores of the Baraboo district, by the authors and W. J. Mead 362
Occurrence 362
Chemical composition 362
Mineralogical character 363
Physical character 363
Secondary concentration 363
Structural conditions 363
Original character of the iron-bearing member 363
Mineralogical and chemical changes ^ 364
Waterloo quartzite area 364
Fox River valley 365
Chapter XV. The Keweenawan series 366
General characteristics 366
Distribution 366
Succession 366
CONTENTS. 19
Chapter XV. The Keweenawan series — Continued. Page.
Black and Nipigou bays and Lake Nipigon 3G7
Lower Keweenawan 367
Middle Keweenawan 368
Black and Nipigon bays and adjacent islands 368
Lake Nipigon 368
Relations of the Keweenawan of Black and Nipigon bays to other rocks 369
Northern Minnesota 370
The Keweenawan area 370
Lower Keweenawan 370
Middle Keweenawan 371
Effusive rocks 371
Intrusive rocks 372
A. Basic rocks 372
■^ Duluth laccolith 372
Area and character 372
Relations to other formations •. 372
The Beaver Bay and other laccoliths and sills 373
Anorthosites 374
' Basic dikes 374
Acidic rocks ' 374
Keweenawan rocks in the Cuyuna district of north-central Minnesota 375
Thickness of the Keweenawan of Minnesota 375
Northern Wisconsin and extension into Minnesota 376
Distribution 376
Structiire 376
Lower Keweenawan 376
Middle Keweenawan 377
Upper Keweenawan 378
Relations of the Keweenawan to other series 378
Keweenawan granites of Florence County, northeastern Wisconsin 379
Northern Michigan 380
Distribution 380
Keweenaw Point 380
Succession and correlation 380
Lower and middle Keweenawan of Keweenaw Point 381
Order of extrusion 381
Presence of basic intrusive rocks 381
Acidic intrusive rocks 382
Nature and source of detrital material 382
Variations in thickness of sedimentary beds 382
Faults 383
Upper Keweenawan 383
Relations to Cambrian rocks 384
Main area west of Keweenaw Point, including Black River and the Porcupine Mountains 384
The South Range 385
Rocks of possible Keweenawan age in outlying areas 386
Thickness of the Keweenawan of Michigan 386
Eagle River section 386
Portage Lake section 387
Black River section 388
Relations of the Keweenawan of Michigan to underlying and overlying formations 388
Isle Royal 389
Michipicoten Island 390
East coast of Lake Superior 391
General consideration of the Keweenawan series 393
Lower Keweenawan ■■ 393
Middle Keweenawan 394
Igneous rocks 394
Varieties 394
Review of nomenclature of Keweenawan igneous rocks, by A. N. Winchell 395
The grain of Keweenawan igneous rocks — the practical use of observations 407
The extrusive masses 408
20 CONTENTS.
Chapter XV. The Keweenawan series — Continued. Page.
General consideration of the Keweenawan series — Continued.
Middle Keweenawan — Continued.
Igneous rocks — Continued.
The intrusive masses 410
Source of lavas '"1
Sedimentary rocks 412
Source and nature of material 412
Extent of sediments 413
Upper Keweenawan 413
Relations to underlying series 414
Relations to overljdng series 415
Conditions of deposition 416
Thickness of the Keweenawan rocks 418
Areas of Keweenawan rocks 419
Volume of Keweenawan rocks 419
Length of Keweenawan time 420
Jointing and faulting 420
The Lake Superior synclinal basin 421
Metamorphism '■ 423
R6sum6 of Keweenawan history 424
Chapter XVL The Pleistocene, by Lawrence Martin 427
The glacial epoch 427
Plan of presentation 427
Ice advances 427
Driftless Area :■ = 429
Retreating ice - - -. ^"^
Contrasted general effects of glaciation - 430
Destructive work of the glaciers trj 430
Removal of weathered rock ^,..- 430
Striae and roches moutonn^es - - 431
Broadened and deepened valleys 431
Glacial rock basins 431
Transporting work of glaciers 432
Constructive work of glaciers 433
Ground moraine 433
Drumlins 433
Eskers *134
Terminal moraines 434
Kames 435
Recessional and interlobate moraines 435
Drainage of drift-covered areas 435
Differences between younger and older drift 435
Effect of nunatak stages on distribution of drift 436
Variation of deposits with slopes 436
Outwash deposits 437
Pitted plains ■ 438
Loess - 438
Valley lakes due to variation in stream load 438
Distribution of glacial drift 439
Marginal lakes 441
Glacial Lake Agassiz 442
Marginal glacial lakes 442
Lake Nemadji 443
Lake Duluth 444
Intermediate glacial lakes 445
Lake Algonquin 446
Nipi.ssiiig Great Lakes 447
Effect of tilting on glacial lakes 448
Present iiosition of raised beaches 449
Glacial-lake deposits 452
The four Pleistocene provinces 453
Grounds for distinction 453
CONTENTS. 21
Chapter XVI. The Pleistocene, by Lawrence Martin — Continued. Page.
The four Pleistocene provinces — Continued.
Drif tless Area 454
Area of older drift 454
Area of last drift 454
Areas of glacial-lake deposits 454
Postglacial modifications 455
Modifications on the land 455
Modifications in and around the Great Lakes 456
Summary of the Pleistocene history 459
Chapter XVI I . The iron ores of the Lake Superior region, by the authors and W.J. Mead 460
Horizons of iron-bearing formations 460
General description of ores of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian sedimentary iron-bearing formations 461
Introduction 461
Kinds of rocks in the iron-bearing formations 461
Chemical composition of the iron-bearing formations 462
Ratio of ore to rock in the iron-bearing formations 462
Structural features of ore bodies 462
Shape and size of the ore bodies 475
Topographic relations of the ore bodies 476
Outcrops of the ore bodies 476
Chemical compo.sition of the ores 477
Mineralogy of the ores 479
Physical characteristics of the ore 480
General character 480
Cubic contents of ore 481
Range and determination 481
Use of the diagram 482
Construction of the diagram 482
Effect of porosity 482
Effect of moisture 483
Moisture of saturation 433
Excess of moisture handled in mining 434
Exploration for iron ore 434
Magnetism of the Lake Superior iron ores and iron-bearing formations 486
Manganiferous iron ores 433
Iron-ore reserves 433
Data available for estimates 433
Availability of ores 433
Reserves of ore at present available 439
Estimates 43g
Life of ore reserves at present available 499
Reserves available for the future 49]^
Estimates 492
Comparison of Lake Superior reserves with other reserves of the United States 492
Lowering of grade now discernible 493
Effect of increased use of low-grade ores 494
Comparison with principal foreign ores 495
Tra,usportation 4g5
Mine to boat 495
Docks 496
Boats 497
Dock to furnace 497
Total cost of transportation 497
Methods of mining 497
Rates of royalty and value of ore in the ground 499
Origin of the ores of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian sedimentary iron-bearing formations 499
Outline of discussion 499
The iron ores are chiefly altered parts of sedimentary rocks -. 500
Conditions of sedimentation 5OO
Iron-bearing formations mainly chemical sediments 5OO
Order of deposition of the iron-bearing sediments 5OX
Are the iron-bearing formations terrestrial or subaqueous sediments? 5OI
22 CONTENTS.
Chapter XVII. The iron ores of the Lake Superior region, by the authors and W. J. Mead — Continued. page.
Origin of the ores of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian sedimentary iron-bearing formations — Continued.
Conditions of sedimentation — Continued.
Pog and lagoon origin of part of tlie iron-bearing rocks 502
Hypothesis of bog and lagoon origin not applicable to the main masses of the iron-bearing sediments. . 502
Hypothesis of glauconilic origin not. applicable 503
Iron-bearing sediments not laterite deposits 503
Iron-bearing sediments not characteristic transported deposits of ordinary ero-sion cycles .503
As.-!Ociation of iron-bearing sediments with rontemporaneotis eruptive rocks ,506
Association of iron-bearing sediments and eruptive rocks outside of the Lake Superior region 508
Significance of ellipsoidal structure of eruptive rocks in relation to origin of the ores 510
Eruptive rocks associated \yith iron-bearing sediment;* of Lake Superior region carry abundant iron. 512
Genetic relations of upper Huronian slate to associated eruptive rocks 513
Main mass of iron-bearing sediments probably derived from associated eruptive rocks 513
Direct contributions of iron salts in hot solutions from the magma 513
Contribution of iron salts from crystallized igneous rocks in meteoric waters 514
Contribution of iron salts by reaction of hot igneous rocks with sea water 515
Conclusion as to derivation of materials for the iron-bearing formations 516
Variations of iron-bearing formations with different eruptive rocks and different conditions of
deposition 516
Chemistry of original deposition of the iron-bearing formations 518
Natiu'e of the problem ; 518
Formation of iron carbonate and limonite 519
Nature of carbonate precipitate 520
Precipitation of greenalite 521
Processes 521
Nature of greenalite precipitate 522
Source of alkaline silicates necessary to produce greenalite 525
Reactions betwaen greenalite and iron carbonate, or carbon dioxide 526
Source of carbon dioxide for reactions with greenalite 527
Deposition of hematite, magnetite, and silica directly from hot solutions 527
Deposition of iron sulphide 527
Correlation of laboratory and field observations 527
Secondary concentration of the ores 529
General statements 529
Chemical and mineralogical changes involved in concentration of the ore under surface condi-
tions 529
Outline of alterations 529
Oxidation and hydration of the greenalite and siderite producing ferruginous chert 530
Alteration of ferruginous chert to ore by the leaching of silica, with or without secondary intro-
duction of iron 537
Processes involved 537
Conditions favorable to leaching of silica 538
Solution of silica favored by alkaline character of waters ^. 538
Transfer of iron in solution 539
Secondary concentration of the ores characteristic of weathering 539
Mechanical concentration and erosion of iron ores 540
General character of mi ne waters 540
Localization of the ores controlled by special structural and topographic features 544
Quantitative study of secondary concentration 545
Alterations of iron-bearing formations by igneous intrusions 546
Ores affected 546
Possible contributions from igneous rocks 546
Temperature at which contact alterations were effected 549
Character of iron-bearing formations at the time of intrusions of igneous rocks 549
Chemistry of alterations 550
Banding of amphibole-raagnetite rocks 551
Recrystallization of quartz 552
High sulphur content of amphibole-magnetite rocks 552
Secondary iron carbonate locally developed at igneous contacts 552
Contact alterations not favorable to concentration of ore deposits 552
SiU'face alterations of amphibole-magnetite rocks 553
Summary of alterations of iron-beaiing formations by igneous intrusions 554
CONTENTS. 23
Chapter XVII. The iron ores of the Lake Superior region, by the authors and W. J. Mead — Continued. Page.
Origin of the ores of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian sedimentary iron-bearing formations — Continued.
Alteration of iron-bearing formations by rock flowage 554
Cause of varying degree of hydration of the Lake Superior ores 555
Sequence of ore concentration 557
Origin of manganiferous iron ores 5(j0
Part of the metamorphic cycle illustrated by the Lake Superior iron ores of sedimentary type 500
Titaniferous magnetites of northern Minnesota 561
Magnetites of possible pegmatitic origin 562
Brown ores and hematites associated with Paleozoic and Pleistocene deposits in Wisconsin 562
Ores in the Potsdam 562
Brown ores in "Lower Magnesian " limestone 562
Geology and topography 565
Oilman brown-ore deposit 565
Cady brown-ore deposit 565
Origin of Spring Valley brown-ore deposits 566
Postglacial brown ores 566
Clinton iron ores of Dodge County, Wis 567
Occurrence and character 567
Origin of the Clinton iron ores 568
Summary statement of theory of origin of the Lake Superior iron ores 568
Other theories of the origin of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian iron ores 569
Genetic classification of the principal iron ores of the world 571
Chapter XVIII. The copper ores of the Lake Superior region, by the authors, assisted by Edward Steidtmann. 573
The copper deposits of Keweenaw Point 573
General account 573
Transverse veins of Eagle River district 575
Dipping veins of Ontonagon district 576
Amygdaloid deposits 576
Copper in conglomerates 577
Composition of copper-mine waters .579
Copper in Keweenawan rocks in parts of the Lake Superior region other than Keweenaw Point 580
Origin of the copper ores 580
Common origin of the several types of deposits 580
Previous views of nature of copper-depositing solutions and source of copper 580
Outline of hypothesis of origin of copper ores presented in the following pages 581
Association of ores and igneous rocks 581
Ore deposition limited mainly to middle Keweenawan time 581
Deposition of the copper accomplished l)y hot solutions 582
Nature of gangue minerals 582
Nature of wall-rock alterations ; 582
Paragenesis of copper and gangue minerals 585
Contrast with present work of meteoric solutions : 585
Source of thermal solutions 586
Three hypotheses 586
Were the thermal solutions derived from extrusive or from intrusive rocks? 587
Significance of sulphides of copper in the intrusives and lower effusi^■es 588
Conclusions as to source of copper-bearing solutions 588
Chemistry of deposition of copper ores 589
Cause of diminution of richness with increasing depth 591
Relation of copper ores to other ores of the Keweenawan 591
. Chapter XIX. The silver and gold ores of the Lake Superior region 593
Silver ores 593
Production T 593
Silver Islet 593
General account of silver in the Animikie group 594
Origin of silver ores in the Animikie group 595
Gold ores 595
Chapter XX. General geology 597
Introduction 697
Principles of correlation 597
General character and correlation of the Archean 599
Keewatin series 599
24 CONTENTS.
Chapter XX. General geology — Continued. Page.
General character and correlation of the Archean — Continued.
l.aurentian scries 600
General statements concernini; the Archean system 601
General statements concerning the Algonkian system 602
Character and subdivisions 602
Northern Huronian subprovince 602
Lower middle Huronian 602
Lithology and succession 602
Igneous rocks 603
Conditions of deposition 603
Correlation 603
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 604
Lithology and succession .' .604
Igneous rocks 604
Conditions of deposition 605
Correlation 605
Southern Huronian subprovince 605
Lower Huronian 605
Lithology and succession 605
Igneous rocks 605
Conditions of deposition 606
Correlation 606
Middle Huronian 607
Lithology and succession 607
Igneous rocks 607
Conditions of deposition 607
Correlation . i 608
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) 608
Lithology and succession 608
Igneous rocks 609
Conditions of deposition 609
Correlation 609
General remarks concerning the upper Huronian ( Animikie group) of the Lake Superior region 610
Character 610
Conditions of deposition of the upper Huronian (Animikie group) 612
Keweenawan series 614
Lithology and succession 614
Igneous rocks 615
Conditions of deposition 615
Correlation 615
Paleozoic rocks • • - ■ 615
Cretaceous rocks 616
Pleistocene deposits 617
Pre-Cambrian volcanism 61"
Pre-Cambrian life 617
Unconformities 617
Unconformity lietween the Archean and lower Huronian 617
Unconformity between the lower and middle Huronian 618
Unconformity at the base of the upper Huronian ( Animikie group i 619
Unconformity at the base of the Keweenawan 619
Unconformity at the base of the Cambrian 619
Deformation and metamorphism 620
General conditions , 620
Principal elements of structure 621
The Lake Superior basin 622
R6sum6 of history 623
Index 627
ILLUSTRATIONS.
Page.
Plate I. Geologic map of the Lake Superior region, wilh sections In pocket.
II. Relief map of the Lake Superior region, showing the larger topographic features 86
III. .4, Pre-Oambrian peneplain in Ontario, near Michipicoten; B, Jasper Peak, near Tower, Minn. ... 88
IV. A, Topographic map of Rib Hill, Wis.; B, Typical monoclinal ridge topography, U\e Royal, Mich.. 90
V. A, The Duluth escarpment and even upland of peneplain on Duluth gabbro in Minnesota; B, Lake
shore escarpment of Archean schists and Iluroniauquartzite near Marquette, Mich. .' 112
VI. Geologic map of the Vermilion iron-bearing district, Minn 118
VII. A, Ellipsoidal parting in Ely greenstone; B, Ellipsoidally parted Ely greenstone, showing spheru-
litic development ^
VIII. Geologic map of the Mesabi iron-bearing district, Minn In pocket.
IX. Sharp folding of beds of iron-bearing Biwabik formation in Mesabi district, Minn.; A, Hawkins
mine; B, Monroe mine ^"^
X. Typical cross section through iron-bearing Biwabik formation, Mesabi district, Minn., from drill
records ■.■■'.■■'
XI. A, Panoramic view of the Mountain Iron open-pit mine, Mesabi district, Minn.; B, Panoramic view
of the Shenango iron mine, Mesabi district, Minn 180
XII. Geologic map of Pigeon Point, Minn • -O'l
XIII. Geologic map of the Animikie iron-bearing district, north of Thunder Bay, Ontario 206
XIV. Map of central Minnesota, including Cuyuna district 212
XV. Map of part of the Cuyuna iron district of Minnesota, showing magnetic belts 212
XVI. Geologic map of the Penokee-Gogebic district 226
XVII. Geologic map of the Marquette iron-bearing district, Mich In pocket.
XVIII. Map of Carp River fault, sees. 4, 5, and 6, T. 47 N., R. 25 W., Mich 252
XIX. Detailed map of quartzite ridges of Teal Lake, showing faulting and unconformity of Ajibik and
Mesnard formations -^'*
XX. Geologic map of Dead River area, Mich 286
XXI. Map of Perch Lake district, Mich., showing distribution of outcrops In pocket.
XXII. Geologic map of the Crystal Falls district, Mich., including a portion of the Marquette district. In pocket.
XXIII. Geologic map of the Calumet district, Mich 306
XXIV. Geologic map of the Iron River district, Mich -' In pocket.
XXV. Geologic map of the Florence iron district, Wis In pocket.
XXVI. Geologic map of the Menominee iron district, Mich In pocket.
XXVII. Vertical north-south cross sections through the Norway-Aragon area, Menominee district, Mich.,
illustrating geologic structure 346
XXVIII. Geologic map of the Keweenaw Point copper district, Mich - . 380
XXIX. A, Hanging valley near Helen mine, Michipicoten; B, Lake clay overlying stony glacial till in
Mountain Iron open pit, Mesabi range, Minn 43-
XXX. .4, Terminal-moraine and outwash-plain topography in glaciated area of western Wisconsin; B,
Glaciated valley of Portage Lake on Keweenaw Point, Mich,, with hanging valley of Huron Creek. 434
XXXI. A, Characteristic Driftless Area topography in northern Wisconsin; B, Characteristic muskeg and
ground-moraine topography in glaciated area of Minnesota 436
XXXII. Jaspilite from Marquette district, Mich 464
XXXIII. A, Folded and brecciated jaspilite of the Soudan formation, Vermilion district, Minn.; B, Hema-
titic chert from Negaunee, Marquette district, Mich 466
XXXIV. Ferruginous chert and slate of iron-bearing Biwabik formation, Mesabi district, Minn 468
XXXV. .4, Amphibole-magnetite chert from Republic, Mich.; B, Sideritic magnetite-grunerite schist from
Marquette district, Mich 4/0
XXXVI. .4, Jaspery filling in amygdules from ellipsoidal basalt of the Crystal Falls district, Mich.; B, Cherty
siderite from Marquette district, Mich.; C, Cherty siderite from Penokee district, Mich 472
XXXVII. Greenalite rock from Mesabi district, Minn 474
25
26 ILLUSTRATIONS.
Page.
Plate XXXVIII. Characteristic specimens of iron ores 480
XXXIX. CharacteriHtic specimens of iron ores 480
XL. Diaf^ram showing relation of density, porosity, and moisture to cubic feet per ton 480
XLI. yl. Ore dock.s at Two Harbors, Minn.; B, Excavations at Stevenson, Minn 496
XLII. Photomicrosiraphs of natural and artificial greenalite granules, cherty siderite, and concre-
t ionary ferruginous chert 524
XLIII. Photomicrographs of greenalite granules 532
XLIV. Photomicrographs of ferruginous chert showing later stages of the alteration of greenalite
granules 534
XLV. Photomicrographs of granules and concretionary structtires in Clinton iron ores 536
XLVI. A, Ore and jasper conglomerate from Marquette district, Mich.; B, Ferruginous chert from
Marquette district, Mich 542
XLV II. Photomicrographs of ferruginous and amphiboli tic chert of iron-bearing Biwabik formation
near contact with Duluth gabbro 548
XLVIII . Ferruginous chert or jasper, of possible pegmatitic origin, in basalt 564
XLIX. Map showing location of copper-bearing lodes and mines on Keweenaw Point 574
Figure 1. Key map showing location of Lake Superior region 31
2. Sketch map of the Lake Superior region, showing iron districts, shipping ports, and transportation
lines - 32
3. Diagram showing annual production of iron ore in Lake Superior region since the opening of the region. 49
4. Generalized topographic map of the Lake Superior region 87
5. The topographic pro\ances of the Lake Superior region, with some subdi^dsions of the peneplain 88
6. True-scale cross section of Keweenawan monoclinal ridges near the end of Keweenaw Point 99
7. Hypothetical cross section showing relation of secondary lowlands, mesas, monoclinal ridges, etc.,
to peneplain - 101
8. Graben or rift valley of western Lake Superior, showing escarpments on either side and peneplain
above 112
9. The drainage of the St. Louis and Mississippi headwaters before the stream captures along the Duluth
escarpment 113
10. The drainage of the St. Louis and Mississippi headwaters at present, after stream captures and
diversions 113
11. Structure profile in northern Wisconsin, showing the south edge of the peneplain on the pre-
Cambrian rocks and the northern part of the belted plain of the Paleozoic 116
12. Diagram to illustrate folding of "drag" type, common in the Vermilion and other ranges 123
13. Section across jasper belt in sees. 13 and 14, T. 62 N., R. 13 W., Vermilion iron range, Minn 123
14. Transverse sections of Chandler, Pioneer, Zenith, Sibley, and Savoy mines, Vermilion district,
Minn 138
15. Diagram illustrating volume changes involved in the alteration of jasper to ore at Ely, Minn 142
16. North-south cross section of an ore deposit on the Mesabi range near Hibbing, Minn 180
17. Triangular diagram showing composition of various phases of Mesabi ores and ferruginous cherts 182
18. Section through iron-bearing Biwabik formation transverse to the range, showing nature of circula-
tion of water and its relations to confining strata 186
19. Dia"-ram showing volume changes observed in the alteration of ferruginous chert to ore 188
20. Graphic representation of the changes involved in the alteration of greenalite rock to ferruginous
chert (taconite) and ore 189
21. Triangular diagram representing volume composition of the various phases of ferruginous cherts and
iron ores of the Mesabi district 190
22. Diagram showing relation of phosphorus to degree of hydration in Mesabi ores 192
23. Diagram showing relative amounts of phosphorus and lime in Mesabi ores 196
24. Cross section of iron-bearing Gunflint formation east of Paulson mine, Gunflint district, Minn 199
25. Plan and cross section of the iron-ore deposit in sec. 12, T. 43 N., R. 32 \V., Crow Wing County, Minn. 218
26. Triangular diagram showing mineralogical composition of various phases of iron ores and ferruginous
cherts of the Cuyuna district, Minn ■ 2_1
27. Triangular diagram showing volume composition of various phases of iron ores and ferruginous
cherts of the Cuyuna district, Minn ""-
28. Cross section showing the occurrence of ore in pitching troughs formed by dikes and quartzite foot-
wall, in the Gogebic district -36
29. Ore depo.sits of the Penokee-Gogebic district ; 237
30. Triangular diagram showing chemical composition of various jihases of Gogebic ores and ferruginous
cherts - ■ ^39
31. Diagrammatic; rei)re.sentation of the changes involved in the alteration of cherty iron carbonate to
ferruginous chert and ore, Gogebic district "^
ILLUSTRATIONS. 27
Page.
FiGtJRE 32. Triangular diagram showing volume composition of the ferruginous cherts and iron ores of the Gogebic
range 245
33. Diagram showing relation of phosjihorus to degree of hydration in Gogebic ores 248
34. Diagram showing relative amounts of phosphorus and lime in Gogebic ores 249
3.5. Idealized north-south section through the Marquette district, sho^ving abnormal type of synclinorium. 2.53
36. Ore deposits of the Marquette district .• 270
37. Graphic representation of the volume composition of the principal phases of the iron-bearing Negaunee
formation 276
38. Triangular diagram showing the volume composition of the several grades of ore mined in the Mar-
quette district in 1906 277
39. Diagram showing relation of phosphorus to degree of hydration in Marquette ores 280
40. Diagram showing relative amounts of phosphorus and lime in Marquette ores 282
41. Outcrop map of Swanzy district, Mich 284
42. Geologic map of west end of Marquette district, Mich 289
43. Sketch map to show general relations of iron-bearing rocks, principally upper Huronian, in Crystal
t- Falls, Iron River, Florence, and Menominee districts 292
I 44. Section showing roughly the succession of beds in the Vulcan iron-bearing member near Atkinson,
in the Iron River district, Mich 318
45. Geologic map and cross section of Iron Hill, Menominee district, showing relations of lower and mid-
dle Hiu-onian 3^5
46. Horizontal section of the Aragon mine at the first level, Menominee district, Mich 347
47. Horizontal section of the Aragon mine at the eighth level, Menominee district, Mich 348
48. Vertical north-south cross section through Burnt shaft. West Vulcan mine, Menominee district, Mich. . 349
49. Sketch to show pitch of a drag fold in a monoclinal succession 350
50. Triangular diagi-am representing the volume composition of the various grades of ore mined in the
Menominee, Crystal Falls, and neighboring districts in 1907 352
51. Sketch map showing occurrence of quartzites of Huronian age in Tps. 33 and 34 N., Rs. 15, 16, and
17 E., Wis ■ 358
52. Sketch map showing occurrence of Huronian quartzite near Necedah, Wis. 358
53. Sketch map showing Baraboo, Fox River valley, Necedah, Waushara, and Waterloo pre-Cambrian
areas of south-central Wisconsin 359
54. Generalized cross section extending north and south across the Baraboo district 360
55. Vertical section of Illinois mine 364
56. Section on south cliff of Great Palisades, Minnesota coast " 371
57. Sketch showing unconformable contact between Keweenawan diabase porphyry and Cambrian sand-
stone at Taylors Falls, Minn 379
58. Diagrammatic section illustrating the assigned change of attitude of a series of beds, like the Kewee-
nawan, from an original depositional inclination to a more highly inclined attitude 419
59 Map of the Lake Superior basin, designed to show the structure and e.xtent of the Keweenawan
trough 422
60. Sketch map showing the glaciation of the Lake Superior region, giving names of lobes and probable
general directions of ice flow 428
61. Sketch showing the glacial cirque, the rock basins, and the hanging valley near the Helen mine,
Michipicoten 432
62. Sketch showing the origin of the drift deposits overlying the ore in the Mesabi iron range 443
63. Glacial Lake Nemadji 444
64. Glacial Lake Duluth 445
65. Hypothetical intermediate stage vrith the expansion of glacial Lake Chicago and the later stage of
glacial Lake Duluth 446
66. Glacial Lake Algonquin 447
67. Part of Nipissdng Great Lakes 448
68. Sketch map shoiving Driftless Area and regions of older drift, last drift, and lake deposits 453
69. St. Louis Ri\-er at the stage when it cut its valley and emptied directly into Lake Nipissing 456
70. The present St. Louis River, which has been converted into an estuary by post-Nipissing tilting 457
71. Triangular diagram showing chemical composition of all grades of iron ore mined in the Lake Supe-
rior region in 1906 478
72. Textures of Lake Superior iron ores as shown by screening tests 481
73. Diagram showing relation between estimated ore reserves of the Lake Superior region and rate of pro-
duction 490
74. Diagram representing decline in grade of Lake Superior iron ore since 1889 493
75. Cross section of Keweenaw Point near Calumet, showing copper lodes in conglomerates and amyg-
daloids ^"4
76. Triangular diagi-am comparing the amomita of undecomposed silicates, quartz, and residual weathered
products in different kinds of muds, shales, and weathered rocks 612
THE GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
By C. R. Van Hise and C. K. Leitii.
CHAPTER I. INTRODUCTION.
OUTLINE OF MONOGRAPH.
The Lake Superior rejjion is a part of the southern margin of tlie great pre-Cambrian shield
of northern North America. It is bordered and overlapped on the south by Paleozoic rocks of
the iEssissippi Valley and on the southwest by Cretaceous deposits. The pre-Cambrian rocks .
of the area, which may be divided into a considerable number of lithologic and time units,
contain the great iron and copper deposits by which the region is most widely known. The
great development of the mineral industry in this region has afforded the geologist unusual
opportunity for study, as it has not only made the region more accessible but has justified
larger expenditures for geologic study than would otherwise have been made. Tliis fortunate
combination of a field containing an exceptionally full record of a little-known part of the
geologic column \vith the means of studying it has warranted tlie study of the pre-Cambrian
with a degree of detail that has been practicable in but few other significant pre-Cambrian
regions.
Geologic surveys of various parts of the Lake Superior region have been conducted under
national, state, and private supervision almost without interruption since the early part of the
nineteenth century, especially since the opening of the mining industry in the middle of the
century. The later reports have naturally been more adequate than the earlier ones, because
they have included the results of the earlier work and have gained the advantage derived from
the greater accessibility of the district. The reports thus far issued have dealt with small parts
of the region or with certain phases of its general geology. State and private surveys have neces-
sarily worked within jirescribed areas, so that notwithstanding the multiplicity of reports
certain parts of the region have not yet been adetpiately covered. It has been the proper func-
tion of the United States Geological Survey to make detailed surveys designed to accomplish
the uniform treatment and correlation of the several ore-bearing districts, and finally to publish
a monographic report on the region as a whole. Work under a general plan for these surveys
was begun in the early eighties under the direction of Prof. R. D. Irving, whose monograph on
the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior " appeared in 1883, though it was partly prepared at
an earher date, while he was connected with the Wisconsin Geological Survey. The develop-
ment of this plan has since been continuous. Until 1888 the work was in charge of Professor
Ir\ang: since that time it has been under the direction of Dr. Charles R. Van Hise, the senior
author of this monograph. Detailed monographs on the live leading iron ranges have been
published and also papers covering different phases of the general geology of the region.
This monograph represents the first attempt to give a connected account of the geology of
the Lake Superior region as a whole, with special reference to the iron and copper bearing for-
mations. Attention is dii'ected primarily to general features of correlation of the formations,
o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883.
29
30 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
to the geologic history of the region, and to tlio origin of the iron and copper ores. In addition,
brief chapters are presented on several parts of the district which had not yet been reported
on by the United States Geological Survey. No attemj)t is made to give details. For these
tlie reader is referred to the pul)lications of the United States Geological Survey and of state
geological surveys and to other sources specified in ai)j)ropriate places in this volume.
Tiiough tills monograph may be regarded as completing a stage in the jjrogress of the
geologic survey of tlie region, and lience may be considered final in one sense, it may also properly
be regarded as only the first of a series of general studies of tlie tlistrict. The area is so large
and the record is so complex that this monograph will accomplish its purjjose if it discloses the
elements of some of the major j)rol)lcms of the region and affords a basis for a better-directed
attack on them than has heretofore been possible. Future monographs will untloubtedly be
written on each of the many phases of subjects that are barely touched upon in this monograph,
such, for instance, as the petrography and consanguinity of the igneous rocks of different periods,
the conditions of sedimentation of various series, the relations of volcanism to ore deposition,
and the correlation of major and minor structural features of the Lake Sujjerior region with one
another antl with the various structural features of Xortli America. Besides, certain areas not
yet fully reported on will require detailed monographic description. It is hoped that the work
of the United States Geological Survey in the Lake Sujierior region may be continued along
the lines indicated.
Parts of the region have been studied at different times by men occup3'ing different view-
points. Some areas which have recently become commercially prominent have not yet been
adcciuately studied in detail. Finally, mining, drilling, and various public and private surveys
are so rapidly extending the knowleclge of the geology of the region that it is practically impos-
sible at the present time to write a monograph that will not require modification in some par-
ticulars almost before it comes from the press. Because of these facts this work shows inequal-
ities and inadequacies of treatment for different parts of the region and for different phases
of the subject. It is hoped, however, that the monograph will be measured by the advance it
represents over previous available knowledge and especially by its attempt to bring out sig-
nificant general features of the geology not heretofore discussed, and not by its deficiencies,
of which the writers have a lively appreciation.
The parts of the report written partly or wholly by others than the authors bear the
names of the writers. It will be understood that any chapter or section for which no names
are given has been written by C. R. Van Hise and C. K. Leith.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS.
The completion of tliis monograph and the detailed studies leading up to it have been
facilitated by the cordial cooperation of the mining men of the region. To attempt to mention
the names of all who have gone out of their way to render aid in these studies would involve the
publication of a list including the greater number of local mining men, and even from such a list
some names would probably be inadvertently omitted. Especially valuable has been the infor-
mation furnished by the Ohver Iron Mining Company (United States Steel Corporation), which
has a most highly developed and efficient engineering and geologic staff. Valuable aid has been
given by state and provincial surveys and by the Minnesota tax commission. To all these
men and organizations we express our indebtedness and thanks.
We are indebted to Messrs. W. J. Mead, Lawrence Martin, Alexander N. Winchell, A. C.
Lane, R. C. Allen, and Edward Steidtmann for sections of this report bearing their names,
and to numerous other men mentioned in the report who have contributed in ilifferent ways.
Not the least of our indebtedness is to Mr. A. C. Deming for efficient clerical service.
GEOGRAPHY.
The Lake Superior region comprises parts of Michigan, Wisconsin, Minnesota, and Ontario-
adjacent to Lake Superior. (See figs. 1 and 2.) The accoiii])anying general geologic map-
INTRODUCTION.
31
(PI. I, in pocket) covers the area between parallels 44° and 49° north and meridians 84° and
95 west, comprising ai)proximately 1,81,000 s(|uare miles — an area almost equal to that of the
sLx New England States and New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, and Maryland, or that of
Sweden and Belgium.
v^-O KENTUCKYy-^j^^j^i^
'OKLAHOMA I ) ''"
200 300 WILES
FiGiTRE 1. — Key map showing location of Lake Superior region.
The region includes several ore-bearing districts of comparatively small area — the Ke-
weenaw copper-bearing district of Keweenaw Point, Michigan, about 1,350 square miles; the
Marquette iron-bearing district of Michigan, extending westward from the city of Marquette
82
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
on tlic hike slioro, about .330 s(|uare miles; the Menominee iron-hearir^s^ district, e.\tendin<^
from Iron Mountain in Michigan eastward alon» Menominee River, a<!;gre<^ating 112 square
miles: tlie Crystal Falls iron-l)earin<; district in MicJiigan, in tiie vicinity of tlie town of Crystal
Falls, 540 square miles; the Iron River district, west of the Crystal Fails district, in the vicinity
of the town of Iron River, 210 square miles; the Florence iron-bearing district, in Wisconsin,
west of the Menominee district, 75 square miles; the Calumet and Felch Mountain iron-bearing
districts of Micliigan, in Dickinson County, aggregating 200 square miles; the Fenokce-Gogebic
iron-bearing district, in Michigan and Wisconsin, aliout 450 square miles: tiie Vermilion and
^lesabi iron-bearing districts of Minnesota, trending east-northeast in parallel areas along the
nortliern boundary of the State, 1,400 s(|uare miles: the Cuyuna iron district of Minnesota, in
Figure 2.— Sketch map of Lake Superior region, shovvinj: iron districts, shipping ports, and transportation lines.
the vicinity of Brainerd, about 300 sf|uare miles; the Micliiijicoten district of the northeast
shore of Lake Superior, aggregating 140 square miles, and others of less importance. The
total area of these principal ore-bearing areas is thus less than 3 per cent of that of the entire
Lake Superior region, but these districts are commercially important and the remaining por-
tions are not; for the most part also they include a fuller succession of pre-Cambrian rocks than
the intervening areas, and the detailed geologic mapping has been largely confined to them.
For these reasons the tei'm "Lake Superior region" is commonly used as a collective designa-
tion of the ore-bearing districtG, notwithstanding the fact that they comprise only a small
percentage of the entire Lake Superior region.
INTRODUCTION. 33
TOPOGRAPHY."
RELIEF.
The principal topographic feature of tlie.Lake Superior region is the Lake Superior basin,
which has a general easterly and westerly trend. Most of the ridges and valleys in the adjacent
areas lie parallel to the axis of the Lake Superior syncline, and are due to the erosion of parallel-
trending folds, faults, and cleavage produced during deformations parallel to the axis of the
Ijake Superior basin.
The topography has been modified by glacial action. Ridges have been smoothed and
rounded and some of the valleys deepened, and the features have been then masked under a
varying thickness of glacial drift.
Lake Superior' covers about 17 per cent of the area. Its mean water level is about 602
feet, about 21 feet higher than Lakes Michigan and Huron, whose mean level is 581 feet. The
basin of Lake Superior descends 978 feet below lake level, nearly 400 feet below sea level. The
greatest depth in upper Lake Michigan is 870 feet, or about 289 feet below sea level.
On the several sides of Lake Superior the land rises abruptly, reaching elevations of 1,400
to 1,700 feet (locally 1,900 feet) in northern Michigan and Wisconsin on the south; 1,.300 to
1,700 feet (locally l,90Qto 2,200 feet) in northern Minnesota on the northwest; and 1,100 to 1,300
feet (locally 1,700 to 2,100 feet) in Ontario on the north and northeast. The range of eleva-
tion (from a maximum of 2,230 feet in the Cook County region of Minnesota to 376 feet below
sea level northeast of Keweenaw Point in Lake Superior) is 2,606 feet, but the actual observable
relief is about 1,628 feet, from the level of Lake Superior to the high point in Cook County
northwest of Grand Marais, Minn.
As the topographic map (fig. 4, p. 87) shows, the Lake Superior region falls into tlu-ee natural
divisions — the uplands, the lowlands, and the lake basins. All of the Upper Peninsula of Michigan
from Marquette eastward to Sault Ste. Marie is lowland, nowhere rising more than 900 feet
above sea level or 300 feet above Lake Superior. A similar very narrow lowland belt skirts
the south shore of Lake Superior, with many interruptions, from Marquette westward to the
head of the Lakes at Duluth and Superior. Elsewhere, except at some less important points,
the upland borders the lake closely, and it includes the remainder of the Lake »Superior region,
lying between 1,000 and 1,700 feet (except locally) above sea level, 400 feet higher than the
lake. In this upland division are situated nearly all the mining districts. Parts of Lakes
Superior, Michigan, and Huron occupy the depressions.
DRAINAGE.c
Lake Superior is situated south of tlie Height of Land, near the intersection of three major
drainage systems. It is near the watersheds of the Hudson Bay, the St. Lawrence River, and
the Mississippi River drainage.
A large part of the Lake Superior region is tributary to Lake Superior and Lake Michigan,
and hence to the St. Lawrence River drainage system. The principal streams flowing into
Lake Superior are Carp, Ontonagon, Black, Brule, Bad, Nemadji, and Montreal rivers in Michi-
gan and Wisconsin, on the south side of the lake, St. Louis River of Minnesota on the west side
of the lake, and Kaministikwia and Nipigon rivers on the north side of the lake. St. Marys
River, discharging from Lake Superior into Lake Huron, carries a larger volume than any other
stream in the area. It has been estimated"* to carry 86,000 cubic feet of water a second past
Sault Ste. Marie.
a For detailed account of topography and drainage, see Chapter IV.
I> The general topography of this lake has been reviewed by M. W, Harrington (Nat. Geog. Mag. vol. 7, 1S9G, pp. 111-120). who hasalso studied
the currents in the Great Lakes in detail (Bulletin B, Weather Bur., U. S. Dept. Agr., 1895).
c The physical geography of a part of this region was described in its larger aspects in 1S50 by Foster and Whitney, Report on the geology
and topography of a portion of the Lake Superior land district in Michigan, vol. 1, pp. lS-83.
liSeliermerhom, L. Y., Am. Jour. Sci., 3dser., vol. 33, 1887, p. 282. •
47517°— VOL 52—11 S
34 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
A number of short streams, such as Manistique, White, and Escanaba rivers, flow south-
ward into Lake Michigan and Green Bay. Menominee River, which forms the Michigan-
Wisconsin boundary, flows southeastward into Green Bay, receiving as tributaries the Paint
and the IMichigamme. Peshtigo and Wolf rivers drain northeastern Wisconsin. A number of
small streams drain the northeastern part of the Lower Peninsula of Micliigan.
Another large part of the Lake Superior region in Wisconsin and Minnesota is tributary
to the Mississippi and so to the Gulf of Mexico. The principal tributaries in tliis area are
Wisconsin, St. Croix, Black, Chippewa, Swan, and Prairie rivers.
A third large part of the Lake Superior region, in northern Minnesota and western Ontario,
is tributary to Lake Winnipeg, and hence to Nelson River and Hudson Bay. This system com-
prises the numerous large lakes occupying a large portion of the area of northern Minnesota
and western Ontario, including Lakes Rainy and Vermilion and Lake of the Woods.
The divide between the St. Lawrence and the Mississippi drainage systems extends from
Portage in central Wisconsin, between Wisconsin and Fox rivers, north to the Wisconsin-
Michigan boundary (fig. 4, p. 87) thence northwest and west into Minnesota, and thence north
between upper Mississippi River and St. Louis River to the Giants Range. The Giants Range,
extending east-northeast across the northern part of Minnesota, separates the Mississippi and
the St. Lawrence systems on the southwest and southeast, respectively, from the Nelson River
and Hudson Bay system on the north. The areas of these three large drainage systems within
the Lake. Superior region are as follows: St. Lawrence, 107,000 square miles; Mississippi,
52,000; Hudson Bay, 22,000.
As a whole the drainage of the Lake Superior region is very imperfect. The rxumerous
lakes, swamps, waterfaUs, and rapids are features of an immature drainage.
CHAPTER II. HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
THE KEWEENAW COPPER DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN (1844).°
The existence of copper was known to the Chippewa Indians met in the Lake Superior
region bj^ the earliest explorers. They exhibited crude ornaments of native copper but seemed
to make no further use of their knowledge. There is evidence that mining was carried on at
a far earlier period.
■^Tiether the mining was done by ancestors of the aboriginal tribes discovered in possession of the Lake district
by the earliest white explorers, or by some antecedent people of higher civilization, is a point that archaeologists and
ethnologists are still arguing. Whatever may have been the derivation or fate of that prehistoric race of copper miners
vaguely termed "mound builders," it is certain that they enjoyed at least a rudimentary civilization and were suc-
cessful metallurgists, for they possessed the art of tempering copper. Weapons for the chase and war and domestic
utensils of good finish and style and highly tempered are dug from mounds and found in sand dunes along the southern
shore of Lake Superior from time to time. 6
The existence of native copper on Keweenaw Point was reported by La Garde in 1636, by
the Jesuit missionaries in the "Relations," extending from 1632 to 1672, by Baron Le Houtan in
1689, by P. de CharlevoLx in 1721, and by Jonathan Carver in 1765. The report of Captain
Carver led to the formation of a mining company which actually mined copper ore in 1761 and
1762, but \vithout commercial success. In 1771 Alexander Henry, an Englishman, began
mining operations, but he desisted in 1774. The copper ores were noted in 1819 by H. L. School-
craft and in 1823 by Major Long, both of them conducting explorations for the Government.
The first systematic survey and study of the copper ores was made by Douglass Houghton
for the first Micliigan Geological Survey. In 1830, in company with Gen. Lewis Cass, he
first visited the copper region, and some years later began combined geologic and topographic
surveying, for which, by considerable effort, he had procured support from the Michigan
legislature. His first report was published in 1841.
Previous stories of mineral wealth on the southern shore of Lake Superior had been too vague and confused to
interest capitalists sufficiently to venture their money in attempts at mining in a country which was then much farther
from the centers of wealth and population than is Cape Nome to-day, measured by time and transportation facilities.
This apathy was dispelled by Dr. Houghton's first report, which was clear and concise and bore upon its face the
stamp of truth. He told the world that vast stores of copper existed upon the southern shore of Lake Superior. Pressure
was brought to bear upon the Federal Government, and in 1843 an arrangement was concluded with Dr. Houghton
by which he was to combine a linear survey for the United States with a topographical and geographical survey he was
then making for the State of Michigan. It was necessary that the linear survey be made before mining locations could
be granted by the federal authorities, as there were no boundaries other than those of nature before that time. The
work was begun in 1844, and during that and the following year rapid progress was made. Dr. Houghton's career
was brought to an untimely end by his accidental drowning in Keweenaw Bay in the late fall of 1845, but his work
was then so far advanced that it was taken up and pushed to early completion by competent successors."
The first actual copper mining at Lake Superior was done in 1844, and the first product secured was a few tons
of oxide ore — not native copper — taken from a fissure vein near Copper Harbor, Keweenaw County, by the Pittsburg
and Lake Superior Mining Company, which later developed the Cliff mine, nearly 20 miles to the southwest. The
Minnesota mine, in Ontonagon County, was opened shortly after. <*
The subsequent history of the copper district is one of continuous rapid growth with only
minor fluctuations.
o In the following history of the Keweenaw copper district the authors have drawn freely on the excellent brief account of early conditions
in the Copper handbook, by Horace J, Stevens.
(■Stevens, H, J., Copper handbook, vol. 6, 1906, p, 14,
tidem, vol, 2, 1902. pp, 16-17,
rfldem, vol, 0, 1906, p, 17.
35
36
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The following table of annual iiroduclion sliows, in amount ami in percentage, tin' relation
of Lake Superior shipments to those of the United States:
Anmuil production of Lake Superior copper district, compared with annual production of United States, 1850 to 1907. "^
Lake Superior
Lake Superior
Lake Su
>erior
or Michigan dis-
or Miciiigau dis-
or Mictiigau dis- |
trict
trict.
trict
Year.
United
States.
Year.
United
States.
Year.
United
States.
Per-
Per-
Per-
Amount.
cent
age.
Amount.
cent-
age.
Amount.
cent-
age.
Long tons.
Lomi tons.
LoTUi Ions.
Long tons.
Long tons.
Long tons.
1850
MO
572
88
1871
13.000
11.942
91
1892
154,018
54.999
30
1851
900
779
86
1872
12.500
10.961
87
1X93
147.0.3:!
50,270
34
1852
1,100
792
72
1873
15.500
13.433
86
1894
158.120
51,031
32
1853
2.0OO
1,297
65
1874
17, .500
15, ,327
87
1895
109.917
57,7.37
34
1854
2.250
1,819
81
1875
18,000
16,089
89
1896
205,384
63, 418
31
1855
3.000
2,593
86
1876
19,000
17,085
89
1897
220,571
«i,706
29
1856
4,000
3.666
91
1877
21,000
17, 422
83
1898
2.35.050
06,056
28
1857
4.800
4.255
88
1S78
21,500
17,719
82
1899
253.870
fo,(103
20
1858
5.500
4,088
74
1879
23, OOO
19, 129
83
1900
269,111
63.461
24
1859
6.300
3.985
63
I8.S0
27.000
22, 204
82
1901
268,522
09,501
26
1860
7,200
5,388
74
1881
32,000
24,363
76
1902
294.297
76. 050
26
1861
7,500
6,713
89
1S.S2
40, 467
25,439
62
1903
311.582
86,848
27
1862
9.000
6,005
67
1883
51,574
26. 663
51
1904
.362. 739
93,001
26
1863
8,500
5,797
68
1884
64, 708
30, 961
47
1905
402,704
102.874
25
1864
8,000
5,576
69
1885
74,052
32,209
43
1900
409. 414
102.514
25
1865
8,500
6,410
75
1S86
70,4.30
36, 124
51
1907
386. 655
96, 480
25
1866
8,900
6,l38
69
1887
81,017
33.941
42
1908
420.953
99, 408
23
1867
10,000
7,824
78
1888
101,054
38.604
38
1909
502, 425
103,290
20. S
1868
11, (»0
9,346
80
1889
101,239
39.364
38
1910
493,705
99,545
20
1869
12,500
11, .886
95
1890
115,966
45.273
39
1870
12,600
10,992
87
1891
126,839
50,992
40
c Stevens, H. J., op. cit., vol. 9, 1909, p. 1594. Production for 1909 and 1910 from Engineering and Mining Journal,
For many years the district held first place as a producer of copper ore in the United States,
and in total production it is stUl first; but in 1887 and later years, except 1891, its annual ship-
ments have been surpassed by those of the Butte district of Montana and since 1904 by the
copper districts of Arizona.
The deposits first to be developed were the transverse fissure veins, rich m mass copper,
cutting across the strike of the beds in the Eagle Harbor region, at the northeast end of the
district. The Cliff mine was discovered by Charles T. Jackson in 1845. Production contmued
in this district until 1895. It is now inactive but has been newly explored with a view to a
reojienmg.
Next to be developed were the vein or mass-copper deposits following the trend of the
Keweenaw beds in Ontonagon County, at the southwestern end of the district. The presence
of copper in this district was known for many years, but systematic mining was not started
until a few years after the Eagle River district was opened. The principal mines were the Min-
nesota (now the Michigan), the National, and the Mass. The Minnesota was discovered in 1847
by S. O. Knapp, through surface indentations of ancient workings. In one of these was found
a mass of copper weighing 6 tons, together with rotted timbers on wMch it had been supported.
The first shipment from tints mine was made in 1848, and for fourteen years 70 per cent of the
ore was "mass." The opening of the Minnesota mine was followed by that of the National,
Mass, and other mines. The district is still actively producing, but prmcipally from the ain^g-
daloidal beds, mass copper at present (1908) constituting only about 25 per cept of the ore
produced.
The am3-g(ialoid deposits of the central part of the district were the next to receive atten-
tion. The first of these deposits was discovered, in 1848, on the present Pewabic location, and
the second on the Isle Royal location. The Quincy had been opened in 1847 on a transveise
vein, but the Quincy ain3-gdaloid was not found until 1S5(), the same year that the main
"Pewabic" bed was found. During 1856 the Quincy proihiced 13,462 pounds of cojiper. liut
it did not become profita])le until ISOO. In 1877 tlie Osceola amygdaloid was discoveretl, and
that 3'ear the Osceola mine pi-oduced 2,744,777 pounds of coj)per. The 'Wolvei'ine was opened
before 1890 but was not profitable until 1S97. The Atlantic niuie was openeil in 1872. The
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
37
richest amygdaloid bed in the district is tire "Baltic," whicii was ffrst f)r()ved valuable by
the Baltic mine in 1S97, and a few years later was discovered on the Champion location.
The amygdaloid deposits are now the most numerous, and in 1907 produced 73.1 per cent
of the total copper ore of the district, of which about 75.5 per cent came from Houghton County.
A larger proportion of the production will come from the amj^gdaloids in the future.
The last of the inincipal types of deposits to be discovered were those in the Allouez con-
glomerate and the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate. Both conglomerates were discovered by
E. J. Hulbert and associates. The Allouez conglomerate was found, in 1S59, at tlie site of the
Allouez mine, and was worked for a short time, but soon proved to be unj)roductive, in this
locality at least. Later it was found to be productive farther south, on the Boston and Albany
location, later the Peninsula and now the Franklin Junior. The Allouez conglomerate has
jdelded but little profit.
The site of the Calumet and Hecla was bought by Hulbert in 1860, the evidence being a
number of copper-bearing conglomerate bowlders and a few depressions, sucii as in other parts
of the district were found to indicate ancient workings. In 1S69 Hulbert and liis associates
returned to the spot and dug through an amygdaloid into the conglomerate bed. The Calumet
and Hecla paid their first dividends in 1869 and 1870. Up to January, 1910, ths dividends of
the Calumet and Hecla have aggregated .1110,550,000 on a capital of .S2, 500,000.
The table below shows the relation in percentage of the annual production of the Calumet
and Hecla mine, from 1867 to 1908, to the amiual production of the Alichigan district for the
same period.
Percentage of total Michigan copper production produced by the Calumet and Hecla mine, 1867 to 1908."
1867.
1868.
1869.
1870.
1871.
1872.
1873.
1874.
187.5.
1876.
1877.
1878.
1879.
1880.
7
5
24
4
46
0
57.
0
61
0
66.
0
62
5
5S
5
5
59.
56.
5
60.
0
63.
5
61.
0
63.
5
1881
57.5
1882
56.0
1883
52.5
1884..
58.0
1885...
. 65.'5
1886
62.5
1887
60.5
1888
58.0
1889
55 0
1890
. . 59. 0
1891
56. 5
1892
4fi. 0
1893 53 5
1894
53.5
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
1902.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
61.5
63.0
58.0
58.5-
61.0
54.5
53.5
47.6
39.8
38.7
41.2
43.6
37.9
36.6
The onh" other mine now operating on the conglomerates is the Tamarack, opened m 1881.
COPPER illNING ON ISLE ROYAL AND ELSEWHERE.
Isle Royal is unusually rich m interesting evidences of prehistoric copper mining. The
first minmg of historical record was begun soon after the opening of Keweenaw Point, in 1844,
culminating in 1847 and 1848 and wanmg in 1855, when the island was again without perma-
nent inhabitants. Another brief period of development, from 1871 to 1883, resulted in the
opening on the island of the Saginaw and Minong mines, with a combined production of less
than 10,000 tons of copper. Since the nineties exploration has been going on intermittently,
but without success. No mines are operating at the present time. The ores are essentially the
same as those of Keweenaw Point. As mined they were low grade, probably less than 1 per
cent. They occur principally in fissure veins m the traps.
The copper-bearing formation has been found elsewhere in the Lake Superior region, but
the copper-mining industry has practicallj" not extended beyond Keweeiraw Point and Isle
Royal. The southwestern extension of the Keweenaw district in Wisconsin and Minnesota is
a Calculated from data in Stevens's Copper hand book, vol. 9, 1909.
38 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
being extensively exploted and opened for mining, l)ut thus far the production has not been
important. As the copper-producing area has been restricted to that of the early discoveries
and as the co]iper-mining industry has developed evenly, it is unnecessary' for our purposes to
follow its lustory in greater detail. ,
IVLiRQUETTE IRON DISTRICT (1848).
Iron was first discovered in 1844 near the site of Negaunee by the Government linear
surveying party in charge of William A. Burt, himself under the direction of Douglass
Houghton. The Michigan legislature having failed in 1843 to renew appropriations for the
Michigan Survey, Dr. Houghton had turned to the Federal Government and had succeeded
in procuruig an additional allowance per mile for geologic work in connection with the linear
survey of the Upper Peninsula, which liad already been begiui, and he iiimself took the contract
for the linear survey in order to have the direction of the work.
In 1848 iron ore was mined by the Jackson Association (subsequently the Jackson Iron
Companj^) and carried by team to a Catalan forge which they had constructed near Carp River.
The project was not commercially successful and was closed in 1850. The ilarquette Iron Com-
pany opened the Cleveland mine near the present town of Ishpeming in 1849 and carted its ore
to a forge at Marquette. This also was a financial failure and was discontinued in 1854. In
1850 and again m 1852 a few tons of ore were shipped from the district to Pemisylvania for
trial in Pennsylvania furnaces. The openmg in 1855 of the ship canal along St. Marys River,
connecting Lake Huron and Lake Superior, was followed in 1856 by the first regular shipments
of iron ore from the Marquette district to the lower lakes, amoimtmg to 6,.343 tons. Up to that
time the local forges had consumed about 25,000 tons of ore. The completion in 1857 of the
Iron Mountain Railway (later the Houghton, Marquette and Ontonagon Railway and ulti-
mately the Duluth, South Shore and Atlantic Railway) between Marquette and the mines
gave easy transit to the lake, and 22,876 tons were shipped in 1858 and five times that amoimt
in 1860.
From 1855 to 1862 transportation facilities were so far improved as to make it possible to get ore out, but the
mines had not yet been really brought into relation with the iron market. Therefore the companies met with no real
success whether they tried to make iron themselves or to send their ore down to the furnaces of Ohio and Pennsyl-
vania. The Lehigh Valley, and not Pittsburg, was still the iron center of the United States. The war suddenly
changed the whole outlook. A great demand sprang up for all kinds of iron goods, and both mining and iron making
on the Upper Peninsula received a strong impetus. Shipments increased from 49,000 tons in 1861 to five times that
amount in 1864, while the companies made fabulous profits. * * * The year 1865 marked a slight retrogression,
but the eight years following saw a wonderful growth, the boom in iron and steel reflecting the rapid industrial develop-
ment of the country, and from 1870 to 1873 registering its speculative excitement. * * * In 1863 but three mines
shipped ore; in 1864, five; in 1865, seven; in 1866, nine; 1868 added tour more mines, 1870 three more, while in
1872 the table of shipments increases the total number of mines by 11 to 29, and in 1873 no less than 40 are
represented. The total shipments of 1866 were just below 300,000 tons; those of 1873 almost exactly foiu- times that
amount."
The opening of the Republic, Michigamme, and Spurr mines in 1872 practically completed
the area of the Marquette district as known at present, though a few discoveries of importance
have been made within the area since that time. Exploration is still vigorous. The field
for deep exploration opened by recent discoveries is a large one.
The necessary increase in means of shipment was made by the building of the Chicago and
Northwestern Railway from Negaunee to Escanaba and bj^ increase in the capacit}' of the
docks already built at Marquette. As a result of the panic of 1873 —
development work ceased, production fell off almost 25 per cent in 1874 and yet further in 1875, and the number of
mines reporting shipments declined from 40 in 1873 to 33 in 1874 and to 29 in 1875. The working force of those
that continued operations was largely reduced, and only five mines showed a larger output in 1874 than in 1873. &
a Mussey, H. R., Combination In the mining industry: Studies in history, economics, and public law, Columbia Univ., vol. 23, No. 3, 1905,
pp. 55,57, 59.
I> Idem, p. 73.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING. 39
Returning prosperity brought an increase in shipments of 80 per cent between 1878 and
1882, and tlie number of producing mines increased from 29 in 1875 and 1877 to 48 in 1882.
The foUowmg year saw a considerable depression because of overproduction, but thenceforth
the production showed a general increase until 1891, with a minor depression in 1885. The
years 1891 and 1893 saw another falling off in production, the latter contemporaneous with the
general panic of 1893. From that time to the present there has been a general increase in
production, with shght recessions in 1904 and 1906. The Lake Superior and Ishpeming Railway
was constructed in 1896 to carry the ores of the Cleveland-Chffs Iron Company from the Ish-
peming district to Lake Superior.
The table of production of iron ore from the Marquette range (pp. 51-60) summarizes the
development of the district.
The Swanzy district, southeast of the Marquette district proper, is reached by the Chicago
and Northwestern Railway; its production is usually credited to the Marquette district. The
district was first explored in 1869, and the Smith (later the Cheshire and Princeton) mine was
opened in 1871. Systematic exploration by drilling, begun in 1902 by the Cleveland-Cliffs
Company, greatly extended the ore reserves and determined the probable limits of the district.
A largely increased production may be looked for.
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT (1872).
The Marquette district had been the sole producer of iron ore in the Lake Superior region
for nearly thirty years when its first competitor, the Menominee district, entered the field.
The first practical discovery of iron ore in Menominee County was made by the brothers Thomas and Bartley
Breen some time previous to 1867, though the veteran explorer S. C. Smith claims to have been and probably was
aware of its existence in that section as early as 1855, in which year he traversed what he called a new range, south
and east from Lake Michigamme to Escanaba, locating what is now the estate of the Republic Iron Company on the
way. The first practical work in the way of development was done by N. P. Hulst for the Milwaukee Iron Company
at the Breen and Vulcan mines in 1872, and by John L. Buell at the Quinnesec the following year."
The existence of ore in shipping quantity had been demonstrated in 1874, but the distance
of the district from the Great Lakes and the lack of facilities for shipment prevented its further
development until the extension of the Menominee branch of the Cliicago and Northwestern
Railroad from Escanaba to Quinnesec. This was carried through to Iron Mountain in 1880, and
thence northwest to Iron River and the Gogebic range. The Chicago, Milwaukee and St. Paul
Railway entered the district in 1886 and the Wisconsin and Michigan Railway in 1903. When
shipment had once started it increased much more rapidly than that of the Marquette district.
The first year's output of 10,405 tons jumped to 95,221 tons the following year, to 269,609
tons the third year, and to 592,086 tons the fourth year, and reached the million mark in 1882.
In 1901, 1902, and 1903 the Menominee surpassed the Marquette range in shipment, but for
the most part in later j'ears it has been producmg about the same amount yearly as the Mar-
quette district. Its total slupment to the end of 1909 is 71,212,121 tons as compared with a
total of 91,838,558 tons from the Marquette district. The table (pp. 61-65) includes shipments
from the outlying Florence, Iron River, and Crystal Falls districts to the northwest.
CRYSTAL FALLS, FLORENCE, AND IRON RIVER IRON DISTRICTS (1880).
The Crystal Falls, Florence, and Iron River districts may be regarded as northwesterly
outliers of the Menominee range, and they are included in it in tables of production.
For a number of years after the opening of the Menominee range prospectors worked in various places, among
others in the vicinity of Crystal Falls, seeking to follow the iron range west of the Menominee River. As a result
of this endeavor, the deposits at Florence, Wis., and then those farther north and west at Crystal Falls, Mich., were
in turn located. It was not until 1881 that sufficient exploratory work had been done at Crystal Falls to warrant a
belief in the future of this iron-bearing area. In April, 1882, the Chicago and Northwestern Railway completed
o Swineford, A. P., .\nnual review of the iron mining and other industries of the Upper Peninsula for the year ending December 31, 1881; Mar-
quette, 1882, p. 119.
40 GEOLOGY OF THE LAIvE SUPERIOR REGION.
its branch to Crystal Falls, and the shipment of ore began. The Amasa deposits were not exploited to any great extent
until the year 1888, when the Chicago and Northwestern Railway built a branch from Crystal Falls to Amasa. The
Chicago, Milwaukee and St. Paul Railway in 1893 completed a line from Channing to Sidnaw, which runs through
Amasa."
These districts have as a whole (hn-cloped slowly as compared witli tlio other principal
iron districts of the Lake Superior country, partly because of the slightly lower grade of
many of the ore bodies and partly because of the lack of exposure, making exploration difricult
and costly. Consequently large areas remain to be tested underground. The increasing
demand for iron ore of the lower grades has brought about a revival of exploration in this area
during the last few years. This is one of the most promising fields of exploration yet remain-
ing ui the Lake Superior region, and the next few years are likely to see large developments.
GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT (1884).
The Gogebic range of Michigan and its extension, the Penokee range of Wisconsin, some-
times referred to together as the Penokee-Gogebic district, were long known to explorers and had
been mapped by the geologists of the Michigan and Wisconsin surveys prior to their opening
in 1884. The first recorded notice of their discovery appears on the plats of the township
surveys. It is remarkable that subsequent discoveries have been restricted to the areas
first determined by the geologic mappmg. Early exploration was largely confined to the weU-
exposed magnetic portions of the formation at the west end of the range, which have been
less productive than the central, less well exposed portions of the iron-bearing formation.
In 1884 the first shipment of 1,022 tons was made from the Colby mine to Marquette. In
the following year the shipment reached 119,860 tons, owing to good transportation facilities
and to the remarkable speculation wliich in 1886 and 1887 led to the formation of mining
companies in this district with a nominal capital exceeding $1,000,000,000. The inevitable
collapse in the fall of 1887 took the savings of smaller investors and many mines were closed
down, but the stronger companies weathered the storm and in spite of the speculative failure
the production of ore steadily increased until 1890, when for a period of several years the
shipments reflected the depressed and unstable conditions which affected the Lake Sui)erior
region as a whole. In the autumn of 1885 the Milwaukee, Lake Shore and Western Rail-
way (subsequently part of the Chicago and Northwestern) was finished froni the mines to
Ashland.
The Wisconsin Central Railway crossed the range at Penokee Gap in 1873, connecting
with Ashland, and in 1887 extended a branch to the center of the district. The Duluth, South
Shore and Atlantic Railway already paralleled the range on the north at the time of its dis-
covery and afforded easy connection with the lake.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT (1885).
J. M. Clements describes the opening of the Vermilion district, in Minnesota, as follows:''
The first mention of the occurrence of iron ore in the Vermilion district was made by J. G. Norwood, who obser^-ed
it during his explorations in 1850 and published a statement concerning it in the report accompanjdng that of D. D.
Owen.c The iron he observed is that which occurs near Gunfiint Lake, at the extreme ea.st end of the district, and
which geologically belongs vnth the ores of the Mesabi range. In this part of the Vermilion district the ores have
never been exploited to any extent and are at present of little commercial importance.
Interest in what is now known as the Vermilion iron-bearing district was aroused in the .sixties by the reported
occurrence of gold in the \-icinity of Vermilion Lake. There was considerable excitement tor several years and a
small rush to the district. Shafts were sunk and stamp mills were erected, the machinery ha\ing been jiacked in
from Duluth over the Vermilion tr^il. A town site was laid out near Pike River, at the southwest extremity of \'er-
milion Lake, and some buildings were erected. In all a good deal of money was fruitlessly expended, as no gold
deposits of any importance were found.
a Clements, J. M., and Smyth, H. L., The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. V. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 30, 1899, p. 175.
kClcnients, J. M., The Vermilion iron-bearing districi of .Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, pp. 213-215.
c A report of the geological survey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, p. 417.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING. 41
Some time after this, in 1875, the first exploration for iron ore in this district was taken up by Mr. George R.
Stuntz, accompanied by Mr. John Mailman, who began to prospect the iron formation and iron ore exposed on Lee
Hill, southwest of the Bay of Vermilion Lake, which is now known as Stuntz Bay, named after Mr. Stuntz. The
ore deposits on Soudan Hill were then discovered. In 1880 Prof. A. H. Chester examined the Vermilion Lake iron
f>>rmation for private parties and Mr. Bailey Willis studied it for the Census Office. Systematic and extensive efforts
were made in the late seventies and the early eighties to develop the iron ores. By this time the Minnesota Iron
Company had been organized and all of the properties which at that time were known to contain ore and great stretches
of country which were in the continuation of the ore range had been purchased, the company owning over 20,000
acres of land on the Vermilion range proper and in the vicinity of the good harbor on Lake Superior known now as
Two Harbors. On August 1, 1884, the Duluth and Iron Range Railroad was completed from Two Harbors to Tower,
near Vermilion Lake. This road was 72 miles long. At a later date it was connected with Duluth, 25 miles away.
During the first year (1884) 62,124 tons of ore were shipped, some of this having come from the stock piles which
had been growing during the years of development preceding the opening of the railroad.
Prospectors were busy in the years prior to the opening of the railroad in prospecting the district to the east
of Tower, and in 1883 outcrops of ore were found by Mr. H. R. Harvey in sec. 27, T. 63 N., R. 12 W.., near the present
town of Ely. The body of iron ore indicated by these outcrops was further tested in 1885-6 and led to the opening
up of the great deposits at Ely on which are now working the Chandler, Pioneer, Zenith, Sibley, and Savoy mines.
During 1888 there were shipped from the Chandler mine 54,612 tons of high-grade ore.
•• From this time on the development of the range was rapid and steady, as is shown by the annual increase in the
shipments of ore.
The Vermilion range was thus opened at about the same time as the Gogebic range, but
its mines, in contrast to those of the Gogebic, were from the start in the hands of a strong
company, which controlled the railroad and prevented active competition. To quote from
Mussey :
A comparison of the output of the two ranges by years discloses an interesting contrast between centralized control
backed by adequate capital in the Vermilion district and competitive exploitation based on small undertakings and
insufficient funds in the Gogebic district. The Gogebic district, which was not really opened up till 1885, in the second
year following produced more than a million tons; the A'ermilion, though opened a year earlier, did not reach the
million mark till 1892, when the Ciogebic produced almost three millions, only to fall off to less than half that amount
the next year. Production on the Gogebic moves upward by leaps and starts, one season rising to excess, the next
sinking back to deficiency; the output of the Vermilion, on the other hand, climbs with a regularity that is surprising,
when one considers the variable conditions of the market in which it had to be sold.''
MESABI IRON DISTRICT (1891).
ACCOUNTS OF THE DISTRICT BEFORE ITS OPENING.
In penetratmg the vast wilderness north and west of the Great Lakes country, the early
explorers were compelled for the most part to stick close to the waterways, for the nature of
the country made travel for long distances exceedingly arduous by any other method than
'canoeing. Three of tlie canoe routes to the country northwest of Lake Superior cross the Giants
or Mesabi Range* and its eastward continuation. Mississippi River and its tributaries, Prairie
and Swan rivers, touch the western portion of the district. Embarrass Lake, tributary to
St. Louis River, and thence to Lake Superior and the St. LawTcnce, crosses the Giants Range
near its east-central portion. Gunfiint Lake, one of a chain of lakes tributary to Rainy River
and Nelson River and thence to Hudson Bay, lies far to the east, on a continuation of what is
now known as the Mesabi district. Hence the first published references to the Mesabi district
concern the parts of the district immediately adjacent to these canoe routes. Brief descriptions
of Pokegaana Falls on Mississippi River and of adjacent areas were made by Z. M. Pike in
1810, by James Allen and Henry R. Schoolcraft in 1832, and by J. N. Nicollet in 1841. In
1841 also Nicollet published his map of the hydrograpliic basin of the upper Mississippi, on
which the Giants or Mesabi Range, called "Missabay Heights," was for the first time delineated,
a Mussey, H. R., Combination in the mining industry: Studies in history, economics, and public law, Columbia Univ., vol. 23, No. 3, pp.
90-91.
t The name "Mesabi" has been variously spelled and applied with various limits to the ridges of this district, and the use of the same term
to denote the iron-l>earing district as such has added to the confusion. The spelling "Mesabi" has been adopted by the United States Geo-
graphic Board. It has become usual, for the sake of clearness, to speak of the main topographic feature as the Giants Range. In this report the
terms are definitely distinguished, Mesabi range being applied only to the iron-bearing district that occupies a linear belt of low sloping land at
the base of the Giants Range.
42 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
by hachures, although very imperfectly. In 18.52 J. G. Norwood reported the occurrence of
iron-bearinj^ rocks at Gunflint Lake and mentioned fjranite and gneiss seen in crossing the
range at Embarrass Lake. In 1866 Charles 'V\liittles<^y reported on explorations made m
northern Minnesota durmg the years 1848, 1859, and 1864. He mentioned Pokegama Falls and
made vague reference to the granitic rocks of the range. "Mesal)i Range" was used in an
indefinite way to cover what are now known as the Giants and Vermilion ranges. In 1866, also,
Henry H. Fames, the first state geologist of Minnesota, reported granite and gneiss seen on a
trip across the range at Emliarrass Lake. In describing the ranges of the northern part of the
State, including the "Missabi Wasju," he stated that they appear to be traversed by metal-
bearing veins. Presumably, however, this statement refers mainly to the Vermilion range. In
a second report, published the same year, Mr. Fames is more explicit, and, referring to the
general elevated area of the northern part of the State, including tlie Giants Range, states:
"In this region are found also immense bodies of the ores of iron, both magnetic and hematitic,
occurring in dikes and associated with tlie rock in which it is found; in some of these formations
iron enters so largely into its composition as to affect the magnetic needle." Pokegama Falls
and Prairie River Falls were visited, and at the latter place the presence of "iron ore " was noted.
Tlu'se reports of Fames contain the first references to iron ore in the Mesabi district proper,
although iron-bearing rocks had been noted by Norwood in 1852 at Gunflint Lake.
From this time on desultory exploration work was done in certain portions of the district.
It was confined for the most part to the area west of Birch Lake, in Rs. 12, 13, and 14 W.,
and to the vicinity of Prairie River. No published accounts of the earlier portion of this explora-
tory work are to be found.
The first examination of the Giants Range by a mining expert with particular reference to
the occurrence of iron ore in workable deposits, noted in print, was made in 1875 by A. H.
Chester, of Hamilton College, New York. Reaching the Giants Range at Embarrass Lake, he
worked eastward toward Birch Lake. In his report (published in 1884) he called attention to
the magnetic character of the iron m this area and to the fact that the alternating iron laj^ers
are not thick or continuous. The percentage 44.68 was given as a fair average of iron in the
rocks of this part of the district. In general, one gathers the impression that he was not favor-
ably impressed with the economic prospects of this area. Between the time of Chester's exam-
ination of the range, in 1875, and the publication of his report, in 1884, N. H. Winchell, state
geologist of Minnesota, briefly noticed the Mesabi district in two of his reports. In 1879 he
told of the occurrence of iron ore in R. 14 W. and published analyses. In 1881 he told of a
trip from Embarrass Lake east to range 14 and noted the magnetic character of the iron-bearing
formation in range 14, as well as its similarity to the formation at Gunflint Lake. Indeed, the
iron-bearing formation in range 14 was called the "Gunflint beds." In 1883 Irving called the
iron-bearing rock series in the Mesabi district Animikie, a term which had been applied to similar
rocks at Thunder Bay and westward to Gunflint Lake, and correlated the Animikie rocks with
the original Huronian rocks of the north shore of Lake Huron and with the iron-bearmg forma-
tion and associated rocks of the Penokee-Gogebic iron range of Michigan and Wisconsin. From
this time on the term Animikie is much used in the literature on the Mesabi range to designate
the iron-bearing formation and associated rocks. In 1884, in the same volume in which Chester's
report was published, N. H. WincheU discussed the age of the Mesabi rocks, assignmg them to
the "Taconic," then regarded as Lower Cambrian, and, following Irving, correlated them with
the iron-bearing rocks of the Penokee-Gogebic district. In the late eighties a number of other
reports on the district were issued by the Minnesota Survey, but they contain no important
points not noted in reports above cited. This brmgs us to the openmg of the district for minmg.
OPENING AND DEVELOPMENT.
Since the late sixties there had been more or less exploration, particularly along the eastern
portion of the district, from Embarrass Lake to Birch Lake, and the presence of iron-bearmg
rocks had been recognized and discussed in the reports mentioned above. However, not a single
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING. 43
deposit of iron ore of such size and character as to warrant mining had been revealed. In fact,
the range had been "turned down" by many mining men who had examined it. This was
largely because of the fact that they confined their attention principally to the eastern, magnetic
end of the range, where exposures of the iron-bearing formation are numerous. Even up to the
present time no ore has been fovmd there in quantity. Yet the impression was gradually develop-
ing that iron ore in large quantity was to be found in this district, and a few prospectors were
working diligently.
Among the more persistent of the Mesabi range explorers were the Merritts — Lon Merritt,
Alfred :\Ierritt, L. J. Merritt, C. C. Merritt, T. B. Merritt, A. R. Merritt, J. E. Merritt, and W. J.
Merritt — of Duluth, Minn. Their faith in the range was the first to be rewarded. On November
16, 1890, one of their test-pit crews, in charge of J. A. Nichols, of Duluth, struck iron ore in the
NW. i sec. .3, T. 58 N., R. 18 W., just north of what is now known as the Mountam Iron mine.
This was followed in 1891 by the discovery of ore in the area now covered by the Biwabik and
Cincinnati mines. John McCaskill, an explorer, observed iron ore clinging to the roots of an
upturned tree on what is now the Biwabik property. Test pitting by the Meiritts, in charge
of W. J. Merritt, led to the discovery of the Biwabik in August, 1891. The Cincinnati mine
was opened the same fall. The Hale, Kanawha, and Canton mines were opened in the
spring of 1892.
The discovery of ore near the sites of the present towns of Virginia, Eveleth, McKinley, and
Hibbing followed in rapid succession. The excitement followmg the fu'st discovery of ore at
Mountain Iron was greatly augmented by each succeeding find, and in 1891 and 1892 there was
the inevitable rush of explorers.
Up to October, 1892, there were two railways touching the range— the Duluth and Iron
Range, crossing the range at Mesaba station on its way to the Vermilion range, and the old Duluth
and Winnipeg (now the Great Northern), reaching the range at Grand Rapids. Both these places
were far removed from the exploring centers. Most of the explorers went through Mesaba
station. Reaching this place by rail, they were compelled to travel 12 to 50 miles to the west
along "tote roads" which were all but impassable. The time, money, and energy needed to
conduct even modest explorations at this time can be appreciated only by those who have
experienced the difficulties of inland travel in the Lake Superior region away from railways.
The stories of this "totmg" period contain the usual records of misfortunes, lucky strikes, and
enterprise incidental to a mining boom.
The railways were not long in getting into the field. In October, 1892, two lines were put
in operation. The Duluth, Missabe and Northern Railway was built to connect the Mountain
Iron mine with the old Duluth and Winnipeg Railway (now the Eastern Railway of Minnesota, a
part of the Great Northern system) at Stony Brook Junction, and later was extended to Duluth.
Almost immediately after the connection with Mountain Iron a branch was sent out to Biwabik.
About the same time the Duluth and Iron Range Railroad sent out a branch from its main line
to the group of mines at Biwabik. Very soon thereafter both railways got into Virginia. Hib-
bing was reached by the Duluth, Mssabe and Northern in 1893. Eveleth was reached by the
Duluth and Iron Range in 1894 and by the Duluth, Missabe and Northern very soon thereafter.
The Mississippi and Northern (Eastern Railway of Minnesota) about the same time projected a
spur from Swan River to the Hibbing district.
With the advent of railways the development of the range went on by leaps and bounds.
This marvelous development has continued to the present time. The only considerable check
occurred during the period of general financial depression wliich the country underwent in 1894,
1895, and 1896. Almost an untouched wilderness m 1890, the district is to-day the greatest
producer of iron ore in the world. The rapidity of the development of the nuning industry of
the district, carrying with it all the prosperity of the range, can not be better told than by the
table of sliipments from the district (pp. 65-68).
The development of the Mesabi range eastward toward the magnetic portions of the iron-
bearing formation has been less satisfactory than that to the west. A small amount of ore
44 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
was opened up at the Spring mine, formerly the site of the Mailman mine, leading to the ron-
struction of a spur railway, and minor discoveries not yet exploited have been reported frmii
places farther east. Also certain ore deposits have been developed in the vicinity of the town
of Mesaba, near the Iron Range Railway track. The last-named depo-sits mark about the
eastern limit of the principal mining operations.
The most noteworthy developments of tiie district in late years have been the exploration
and exploitation of the ores in the western part of the district, wliich, because of their content
of loose quartz grains, giving them the name "sandy taconite," were long regarded as worthless.
As a result of elaborate experiments in washing tests it was found possible to utihze these ores,
and mining operations are now being conducted and planned on an enormous scale. Since 1900
several to^\^as have sprung up in what was before a wilderness. The town of Coleraine, built
by fiat of the OUver Iron Alining Company, is an example of what may be accomphshed in a
short time by large capital intelligently expended by a single group of indi\nduals working on a
uniform plan. The railways have followed up and made possible much of the development of
the western Mesabi district. It is reached by spurs from both the Duluth, ilissabe and Northern
and the Great Northern railways, leaving the main lines south of Hibbing. ,
Still more recent has been the extension of the district by exploration for 12 miles or more
west of Pokegama Lake, near Mississippi River. The ores have been found to be lean but
probabty merchantable. The iron-bearing formation pinches out at the southwest end of the
district, the overl^ang slate coming into contact with the underlying quartzite. This part of
the district, together wdth magnetic belts farther west, particularly the one running through
Leech Lake, the east end of which comes within 12 miles of the Mesabi district, affords interesting
possibiUties for exploration, which will be adequately undertaken.
CUTUNA IRON DISTRICT (1903).
The development of the Cuyuna, the newest of the Lake Superior iron districts, in the
same geologic group as the Mesabi district, is unique in a way. The other iron ranges of the
Lake Superior region were all discovered through more or less conspicuous surface indications
of ore bodies. Outcrops of the ore or of iron-bearing rocks existed. There are no rock out-
crops in the Cuyuna district, the drift mantle being SO to 3-50 feet thick, and the first tliscovery
of magnetic iron-bearing rocks in tliis region was made with the dip needle by Cuyler Adams,
about 1895.
The dip needle was the sole factor used in the subsecpient tracing of the ore formations b}"
Cuyler Adams and afterward by others, preparatory to drilling, from the time of the first
discovery of magnetic iron-bearing formations until 1907, when more or less indiscriminate
drilling began.
The first drilhng was done hi 1903 at a point just south of Deerwood, ^liim., by Cuyler
Adams, and has continued in greatly increasing amount to the present time, some 2,000 drill
holes and two shafts having been put down, resulting in the discovery of a number of ore
deposits. (See pp. 216-219.) The distribution of the ore bodies and the limits of the district
are yet very imperfectly known.
Extension of magnetic surveys to the west and north have shown isolated magnetic belts
at several places, some of them beyond the western boundary of Minnesota. The ilistribution
of some of these belts is showm on the general map. Underground exploration of these belts
has just begun. The next few years wiU see rapid exploration of the Cuyuna range and the coun-
try to the north and west.
For some time before the drilling began, geologists had suspected the existence of iron-
bearing formation in the CuAnma district. The general geologic map of Minnesota, published
by the Minnesota Cieological and Natural History Survey in 1901, showed this area as occupied
by a .southwestern extension of the slates and cjuartzites of the Mesabi district. In 1903 C. K.
Leith published a sketch showing tlie hypothetical extension to the southwest of the iron-
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING. 45
bearing formation of the Mesabi district through the since chscovered Cuyuna district. A
similar view of the geologic possibilities was held by W. N. Merriam, geologist for the United
States Steel Corporation.
The Northern Pacific Railway extends tliroughout the length of the Cuyuna district and
affords easy access to the ores. It also runs near some of the magnetic belts west and north-
west of the Cuyuna district. The Minneapolis, St. Paul and Sault Ste. Marie Railway passes
the district on the southeast and in 1910 completed a spur into the district. For both rail-
ways the lake port ^dll be Superior.'
BARABOO IRON DISTRICT (190.3).
The discovery of ore in the outlying and relativel}'- small Baraboo district, in Wisconsin,
■was not made until 190.3. The quartzite ranges here conspicuously exposed had long been
recognized as Iluronian, and suggestion had been made that iron-bearing rocks might be asso-
ciated with them. In fact, for several years the Cliicago and Northwestern Railway had quar-
ried small amounts of paint rock' within a few feet of what is now known as the Illinois mine.
Because of the covering of Cambrian sandstone and glacial deposits the ore deposits them-
selves escaped detection until drilhng was, in 1900, begun by W. G. La Rue in the vicinity
of the Illinois mine near North Freedom. Since that time, as a result of almost uninterrupted
exploration, ore deposits have been found at various places in the Baraboo syncline. Only
three shafts have been sunk and ore has been slupped from only one, the Illinois mine. The
development of the district has not been rapid because of the relatively low grade of ore, the
considerable cost of mining, and the great expense of deep drilling, although these factors have
been partly offset by lower freight rates to Cliicago. Both mining and exploration in the
Baraboo district are in their infancy.
LESS IIMPORTANT DEVELOPMENTS.
CLINTON IRON ORES OF DODGE COUNTY, WIS. (1849).
There is no record of the fu-st discovery of the Clinton iron ores in Dodge County, Wis., for
they are exposed at the surface in accessible country. Ore was first mined from them in 1849.
The ores have been partly used in local charcoal furnaces at Mayville and Iron Ridge and
partly sliipped to ^Milwaukee, Cliicago, and adjacent points. Because of their low percentage
of iron, liigh phosphorus, and moderate quantity, they have not figured largely in Lake Superior
production.
PALEOZOIC IRON ORES IN WESTERN WISCONSIN (1857).
Small hematite deposits scattered through the driftless portion of the Cambrian sandstone
area north of Wisconsin River, in Wisconsin, were opened up about the time of the discovery of
the Marquette district. In 1857 a charcoal furnace was built at Ironton, in Sauk County, to
use these ores. Another was built at Cazenovia, in Richland County, in 1876, and torn down
in 1879. None of these ores has been mined since 1880. Records of production are not avail-
able, but before 1873 about 25,000 tons of ore was mined from these deposits.
Farther north, at Spring Valley, in Pierce County, Wis., brown-ore deposits dissociated
■wdth Ordovician limestone were opened about 1890, and a charcoal furnace was built to use
these ores in 1893. At a later period coke supplanted charcoal as a fuel.
IRON ORES OF THE NORTH SHORE OF LAKE SUPERIOR (1900).
Since the opening of the Lake Superior region for mming the north shore has been more or
less explored and a considerable number of iron-bearmg belts have been located in the territorv
extending from the Lake of the Woods beyond Michipicoten. Only three ore bodies have been
found. The best knowTi of these is the Helen ore body, which was discovered in 1897 ui the
46 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Michipicoten district, on tlie northeast side of Lake Superior. This district was cortnected with
Lake Superior l)y tlie buildmjx of the Algoma Central and Hudson Bay Railway (12 miles) in
1899 luul bof^an shii)nieMt in 1900.
Discovery of the Helen mine led to rather vigorous exploration in tne many kno\ui iron-
bearing belts in the immediatel,v adjacent territory, m some places by drilling, but without
conspicuous success. A small body of ore was found iit the Josephine mine, a few miles north-
east of tlie Helen mine.
The Atikokan ore <le|K)sit was discovered in 1889, was explored by tunnel and drilling in
1898 and 1899, and became accessible for mining when the Canadian Northern Railway passed
it m 1901. Utilization of the ore has been restricted by its high suljjhur content. A furnace
has been constructed at Port Artlnir on Lake Superior for the pur[)ose of utilizing this ore, but
thus far little has been actually mined and smelted.
At Steep Rock Lake a small botly of ore was discovered m 1901 by the Oliver Iron Mining
Company. No ore has yet been mined.
The presence of an iron-bearing formation in the Animikie group in the vicinity of Port
jVrthur and at pomts lying east and west of that place for several miles was noted by the
earliest visitors to this region. A considerable amount of more or less desultory exploration
has shown that the formation as a whole is lean and unmarketable. At Loon Lake, about 25
miles east of Port Arthur, vigorous explorations begmi in 1901-2 disclosed a few thin layers
of lean ore of considerable horizontal extent, which may be mined m the future.
In general the results of exploration for iron ore on the north shore of Lake Superior have
been disappomtiiag. The returns have not been proportionately so large for money expended
as they have been on the south shore, partly owing to the fact that the iron-bearing formations
are mainh' of the Keewatin series, which on the south shore are foimd to have smaller quan-
tities of iron ore than those of the upper Huronian (^\jiimikie group). On the other hand,
exploration has been slight relative to the extent of the known iron-bearing formation and
the large and not easil}^ accessible areas open for exploration; moreover, the exploration has
been largely confined to the surface. Future exploration and mining in this territory will
be greater than that which has already been done.
SILVER MINING ON THE NORTH SHORE OF LAKE SUPERIOR (1868).
One of the interesting incidents m the development of the Lake Superior region was the
discovery in 1868 of silver ore on Silver Islet, near Thunder Cape, on the northwest coast of
Lake Superior. Before the mine closed in 1884 it had j'ielded about S.3,250,000 worth of silver.
The island is so small that it was necessary to inclose parts of the vein by a cofferdam to prevent
the inflow of the lake.
This development was followed bj' active exploration of a number of silver veins in the
Animikie group to the west. The principal mines were the Shmiiah, Rabbit Momitain, and
Silver Mountain groups, which have yielded approximately .$1,885,000 worth of silver, but
which are not now active.
LAKE SUPERIOR GOLD MINING (1882).
Still another less important phase of mmmg development m the Lake Superior region
has been the production of small cjuantities of gold. Between 1882 and 1897 the Ropes gold
muie m tlie Marquette district of Michigan produced about §650,000 worth of gold. On the
Ontario side of the lake approximately $2,250,000 worth of gold has been mined, prmcipally
m the Raiu}^ Lake district, which was opened in tiie early nmeties and reachetl its greatest
development in 1899. At present the production of gold in the Lake Superior region is prac-
tically nil, but ex|)loration contmues active, and from tune to time considerable sums are spent
in opening up muies and builduig mills on low-grade gohl tleposits.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING. 47
GENERAL REiMARKS.
INDUSTRIAL CHANGES.
The foregoing chronologic account of the opening of the Lake Superior mining industry
gives no adequate idea of the magnitude and difficulty of tlie work and the forces involved.
The bare statement that a district "had been known to exj)lorers for many years prior to its
opening" but poorly expresses the persistent limit of many explorers for many years at the
expense of money and bodily fatigue tlirough a wilderness difficult to reach and superlatively
difficult to penetrate and explore. Since the openmg of the first mine m tlie region there has
been no time m which such men have not been vigorously i)rosecutmg the search. vSurface
exploration has been foOowed in favorable localities by test pittmg and drilling at enormous
expense. In the Vermilion district $2,000,000 is probably a conservative estimate of the
amount spent in exploration with the drill, much the largest proportion of it entirely without
success. In the Mesabi district 30,000 test pits and drill holes have been sunk in exploration
of the range. The total expenditure on preliminary underground exploration in the Lake
Superior region is probably not less than .122,000,000. (See p. 4.S5.)
Since the advent of large capital into the region exploration has been systematized and
now often includes, as a prelimuiary or accompanying step, the complete geologic, topographic,
and magnetic mappmg of the areas to be explored.
The early development of the Lake Supsrior iron minhig district, from the openmg of
the Marcjuette range to 1873, was for the most part accomj)lished by small companies and
small capital. The period from 1873 to 1892 was marked by the presence of larger companies
with moderate capital; and since 1892 mines have been operated by strong companies with
large capital. This increase in capital has been accompanied by combmation of the mming
companies.
At present considerably more than half of the Lake Superior iron-ore reserve is controlled
by the Oliver Iron Mming Company, the mmmg branch of the Lhiited States Steel Corporation.
The Minnesota tax commission's report for 1908 credits the Oliver Company with 76.6 per
cent of the reserve of u-on ore for Mumesota.^ It is not clear tliat the company's dominance
in Michigan is so great as this, but in view of the fact that the jMinnesota reserve is so far in
excess of that m Michigan it is not likely that the Oliver Company's percentage of the Lake
Superior reserve is far short of that given for Minnesota.
SMELTING.
The Lake Superior iron mines were openetl at the time when anthracite and coke first began
to be largely used in the smelting of iron. Before that time the fuel used in local furnaces was
largely charcoal. Charcoal was surpassed in amount by anthracite in 18.55 and by coke in 1869.
More anthracite than coke was used until 1875, but since then coke has gradually but almost
completch' replaced anthracite for smelting. The use of anthracite and coke made possible
both a large increase and a centralization in pig-iron production, and the growth of the Lake
Superior iron-mining industry is practically concurrent with the increased use of these substances
instead of charcoal. Since the opening of the Lake Superior region much the larger part of its
output has been used in coke and anthracite furnaces of the lower lake region.
The smelting of iron ore within the Lake Superior region itself has been thus far on a
relatively small but still considerable scale. Detailed figures are not available, but it is roughly
estimated that about 3 per cent of the total production has been locally smelted. Several small
forges were built in the ilarquette district of Michigan in the decade before the first shipment
was made to the lower Lakes. Since then about 25 charcoal furnaces, most of them now aban-
doned, have been built in the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, also one at Ashland, Wis., and several
in the northern part of the Lower Peninsula of ]\Iicliigan, using almost entirely Lake Superior ores.
<» First biennial repoft of the Minnesota tax commission to the governor and legislature of the State of Minnesota, St. Paul, 1908, p. 122.
48 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
In addition several small furnaces in Wisconsin, built principally for the use of local ores, have
used small amounts of Lake Sui)erior ores. Coke furnaces have been established at Duhith,
i^fhm., and at Sault wSte. Mario, Ontario, and several of the charcoal furnaces, on account of tlie
dopictiunof tiie charcoal supi)ly and the increase in the availibihtyof coke, have substituted coke
as fuel. Milwaukee, Chicago, Detroit, and adjacent points have of coui-se been hvrge users of
iron ore in cok(> furiuues, but these lake ports are outside of the region. In 1908" there were in
operation a coke furnace at JXduth, Minn., tliree in Wisconsin outside of Milwaukee, five char-
coal furnaces in the Upper Peninsula of ^Michigan, three furnaces in the northern part of the
Lower J'eninsula of Michigan, and the steel plant at Sault Ste. Marie, Ontario. The largest plant
yet projected for the local use of iron is to be buUt for steel making in West Duluth by the L'nited
States Steel Corporation; it may be in operation in 1912.
In recent years there has been an attempt to recover by-products from the charcoal burned,
the first notable project being the Cleveland-Cliffs furnace at Presque Isle, in the Marf(uette
district. This plant is most elaborately eciuijiped for the recover}-, as by-products, of wood
alcohol and creosote. The Lake Superior Iron and Chemical Company, at Ashland, Wis., also
has a well-equipped by-product plant. The Zenith furnace at Duluth has been rebuilt on a
large scale to recover by-products from coke. At present it is supplying gas to the city of
Duluth. The steel plant now planned at Duluth by the United States Steel Corporation will
utUize the gases as fuel.
With increase of population directly tributary to the Great Lakes it is very likely that the
local smelting of the ores will increase. The depletion of the timber \vill prubabl}- compel
mcreased use of coke instead of charcoal. Peat, which is found locally in large quantities, may
be considered as a possible fuel for the future.
INFLUENCE OF PHYSIOGRAPHY ON INDUSTRIAL, DEVELOPMENT.
One of the principal relations between the physiography and history of the industrial
Lake Sui)erior region seems sufficiently distinct to be summarized in a few words. The early
stages of development were closely controlled by conditions of accessibility. The early explor-
ers, traders, and prospectors were confined to the lake and river shores and to country easily
accessible from them. Wlien mining and lumbering began there was also a distinct localization
of these mdustries in accessi])le jjlaces. With the growth of theindustiy and the introduction
of railways the influence of physiography on the local distribution of activity gradually
became less marked, until at present this distribution is but little affected by the configuration
of the surface and tlrainage. The situation of ore deposits has of course localized the mining
development. Favorable conditions of access, though advantage has been taken of them, have
been subordinate factore. An iron deposit would be utilized whether it was in a swamp or on
a mountain, whether easily accessible or not. In other words, increased demand for the raw
materials of the Lake Superior region, due to general commercial conditions and the westward
movement and increase of population, has gradually overridden and more or less obliterated the
natural phj'siographic channels of development.
The relation of the Great Lakes to cheapness of water transportation and of the simple
topography of the region to ease of railway construction to any mineral-proilucing district
continues to be an important physiographic influence and one that is unusual in a mining
district.
<• Map of the United States showing location of lilast furnaces in 19Wf, compiled by W. T. Thom from Swank's Iron and steel works directory tor
1908: Mineral liesources U. S. for 1908, pt. 1, V. S. Geol. Survey, 1910, PI. II.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
49
PRODUCTION OF IRON ORE.
The production of iron ore from the several producing ranges of the Lake Superior region
since their opening is given in the following table, compiled principally from the Iron Trade
Review. The figures refer mainly to shipments rather than to production. The figures of
the United States Geological Survey do not go back far enough for the purposes of this table.
The facts of the table are graphically expressed in figure 3.
45 ,000,000
40,000,000
35 ,000,000
30,000,000
(0
O 25,000,000
(D
Z
o
-■ 20,000,000
15,000,000
5 ,000,000
1550
1855
1660
1865 1870 1875 1880 I6S5 1890
YEAR5
FiGUKE 3.— Diagram showing annual production of Iron ore in Lake Superior region since the opening of the region.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date.<^
Gogebic Range.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
lSS-1.
1SS5.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
Ada. (Included in Ironton.)
Anvil
10,075
175,563
1.369
159. 252
16, 101
1,799
21,721
29,763
24,676
174, 183
47,000
257,915
45.690
435,949
73
267,439
42,090
6.741
74,015
231,896
Atlantic
5,422
94,553
4,788
179,937
199, 865
246,695
83,554
319,482
8,880
2,697
40,639
53, 267
56,542
80,486
152,878
46,574
131,896
130,833
119,676
CastiJe
Colby c
1.022
84,302
257,432
258,518
285,880
136,833
193,038
1,497
23,794
21, 150
9,619
69,968
21,754
13,907
6,778
10.055
8,515
1,997
Geneva
o Figures for 1893-1909, inclusive, from Supplement to the Iron Trade Review, vol. 46, No. 9. March 3,1910. Figures for previous years compiled
from the annual tables published by the Iron Trade Review and from "Annual review of the iron mining and other industries of the Upper Penin-
sula for the year ending December, 1880," by A. P. Swineford.
b Under Norrie group after 1904.
c Includes Tildeu prior to 1891.
47517°— VOL 52—11 4
50
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to dale — Continued.
Oogeblc Range— Continued.
[Gross tons. J
Name of mine.
18S4.
1885.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
5,468
19,734
61,714
53,918
28,721
30,000
103,169
76,545
51,551
52,000
63,903
110,368
22,383
15,759
1,506
4,283
Iinju'iial. (See Federal.)
161,635
9,950
551
18,424
2,249
Iron King. (See Newport.)
24,762
8,635
6,247
300
3,944
18,497
52, 179
1,228
2,882
10,144
64,779
Mik'iiio
Montreal f Section 331
23,013
20,184
4,105
124,844
13, 714
17,979
43,989
75,660
23,217
237,254
30, 475
19,906
1,414
38,015
69,145
1,313
412. 196
5,412
49,976
9,725
26,087
116,094
36,987
143,691
71,488
108,684
105,606
73,409
New Davis. (See Davis.)
165,962
15,419
674,394
13,354
116,376
35,245
574
906,728
1,005
172,060
50,004
758,572
985,216
6,711
Pabst *>
1,103
130,226
32,227
113,245
102,382
Pike
16,388
45,000
3,058
9,472
11,694
913
Section 33. (See Montreal.) |
2,912
1,405
10,963
18, 137
6,010
64,902
28.41S
56,046
Tilden c
233,356
10,780
12,764
2,387
10,683
1,878
Vaughn. (See Aurora.)
14,576
37,210
97
53,242
Wisconsin. (See Davis.)
Yflle ^\Vc<;t Colbvl
1,022
119,860
753,369
1,324,878
1,437,096
2,008,394
2,847,810
1,839,574
2,971,991
Name of mine.
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
Ada. (Included in Ironton.)
13,297
83,020
68,064
126,096
70, 989
245,883
57,483
91, 149
60,727
187, 169
5,037
123,208
38,058
133,076
1.101
66,067
111,625
50,307
166, 122
154, 615
19,964
170,309
232.961
135,955
193,111
286.399
190. 13.5
179,028
203, 152
223.747
Brotherton
18,905
28,578
47,148
47, 156
40,567
52,349
50,490
38,821
46,186
37,308
73. 198
43,162
78,858
62,524
89,804
125,496
103.109
179,374
Castile
504
48.492
633
32.572
3,569
59,346
15,210
31,385
32,616
22,921
152,875
103,239
5,029
23,475
10,253
26,105
18,329
4,544
7,964
1,015
1,255
986
7,728
54,664
10,358
21,475
Imperial. (See Federal.)
Iron Ilelt .
23,976
45,109
148,228
81,351
96,763
58,418
105,934
43,883
Trnii Chief No 2
Iron King. (See Newport.)
7,977
25,047
33.893
1,651
1,265
19,988
9,604
11,782
332
10,324
153,307
263,711
7.844
1.090
107,524
217,201
34,140
Mikado
4,788
138,882
157,821
11.397
191, 106
150,979
91.846
Montreal (Section 33)
New Davis. (See Davis.)
34,299
109,718
46,037
150,392
131,531
142,369
270,776
196,953
72,945
190,448
472,062
3,930
104.510
2,058
621,608
2,4.37
206,074
37,911
738,480
329,068
604,281
700,990
714,069
666,389
660,965
219.960
46,905
68,984
114,108
13,185
220.496
207, 153
120
223.891
175,925
263.869
154,705
239,242
139,658
198. 6S6
7.603
Pike
3.434
6,346
1
21.788
Section 33. (See Montreal.)
1
12,196
10, 102
15,691
11,819
r,
1
1,950
20.970
418,188
22,876
135, 118
34.323
209,077
89.441
250,205
45,815
270,890
i2,526
500,830
74.097
481.909
89.997
Tildcnc
287,203
446,670
o Includes Aurora after 1904 and Pabst afti^r 1901.
ftUniier Norrio ^roup after 1901.
eUnder Colby prior to 1891.
d linder Norrie group after 1904.
' Includes Tilden prior to 1891.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
51
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Gogebic Range — Continued.
[Gross tons-l
Name of mine.
1894.
1895. 1896.
1897.
1899.
1900.
1901.
Trimble
Tylers Forks
Upson
Valley
Vaiigim. (See Aurora.)
Windsor (now Gary)
Wisconsin. (See Davis.)
Yale (West Colby)
2,474
11,438
1,329,385
1,809,468 2,547,976
488
2,875,295
841
12.836
2,938,155
Name of mine.
Ada. (Included in Ironton.)
Anvil
Ashland
Atlantic
Aurora «
Bessemer
Blue Jacket '
Brotherton
Cary (and Superior)
Castile
Chicago ,
Colbyi)
Davis ( W'isconsin)
Eureka
Federal
First National
Geneva
Germania ( Harmony)
Hennepin ".
Imperial. (See Federal.)
Iron Belt
Iron Chief
Iron Chief No. 2
Iron King. (See Newport.)
Ironton
Jack Pot
Kakagon (now Cary)
Meteor (Comet)
Mikado
Montreal (Section 33)
New Davis. (See Davis.)
Newport
Nimikon (now Cary)
Norrie group f
Ottawa (Odanah)
Pabstd
Palms
Pence
Pike
Puritan (Ruby)
Section 33. (See Montreal.)
Shores
Sparta
Sunday Lake
Tilden'e
Trimble
Tylers Forks
Upson
Valley
Vaughn. (See Aurora.)
Windsor (now Cary )
Wisconsin. (See Davis.)
Yale (West Colby)
1902.
135, 502
301,824
190, 213
402,981
63,256
136,896
44,625
22,526
31,. WO
20, 502
36,383
79,121
8,555
102
19,117
98.834
136,354
141,571
1,080,032
26, 141
32,113
"'6.' 343
144,630
468, 672
11,065
26,043
11,309
274, 138
148, 385
356, 365
94,986
89,221
22,965
54,915
734
7,108
2,240
862
26,353
16,875
31,709
6, 150
108, 709
93, 139
790,346
87,929
60,800
115
91.383
211,534
46,211
45, 595
344, 102
77, 224
212,920
84,870
01,860
81,141
11,225
23,364
23,197
6,638
59, 587
26,611
163,021
618, 638
30, 420
53,718
50, 625
204,681
1905.
82, 118
409, 131
208,039
137,351
146, 414
S3. 736
3,160
2,973
2,589
140, 740
107,854
1, 627, 128
21,980
13,963
'iiiiei
79, 209
188, 104
1900.
79, 493
341,841
97, 689
147.281
216. 992
2,108
113,001
9.436
6,768
3,227
106, 168
154, 043
139,202
1,245,!>97
57,219
5,622
'i7,'934
86,879
169,697
56,667
3,664,929 2,912,708 2,398,287 3,705.207 3.643,514 3.037,102 2.699.866 4.088,067
1907.
39, 496
298,056
91,759
104.224
209,407
6, 157
17,. 347
190. 9(«
163,891
169, 763
1,109,085
46,424
24,922
101,899
312,490
38,010
1909.
35, 937
2.59,611
41.4I!6
22,927
269. 612
124,846
96, 776
96,3.18
103,090
224,251
26, 982
68.305
'i22,'324
170,095
'ii5,'6()2"
2,508
152
44,560
277,694
80,617
177.006
99, 195
191,611
773,243
33,893
977, 054
100, 223
22, 174
111,130
111.184
93.712
154. 506
14,874
71,4.58
Total.
706, 962
5,. 387, 166
1,547,123
3,961,683
20,889
1,799
1,762,498
2,289,618
36, 247
68,727
2.450,347
103, 961
462,134
36,443
1,997
7. 108
422,239
259,733
1,186,602
12. 199
551
848,986-
99,090
71,904
216,307
997, 0&5
2,861.252
5,845,039
28,035
17, 744, 658
481,359
2,360,583
1,284,489
40, 566
98, 732
109,572
55.808.
4.862
1,306,975
5. 088. 635
25. 931
10.683
11,375
1,878
148,905
373, 173
60, 896, 457
Marquette Range.
Name of mine.
Years un-
known.
1854.
1855.
1856.
1857.
1868.
1859.
1800.
1801.
1862.
Bessemer. (See Lillie.)
Beaufort ( Ohio )
a Under Norrie group after 1904.
t> Includes Tilden prior to 1891.
c Includes Aurora after 1904 and Pabst after 1901.
d Under Norrie group after 1901.
f Under Colbv prior to 1891.
/ Under Iron Clifis, 1890-1895; under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1895.
52
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKIOIt REGION.
Tabic of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Marquette Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
Years un-
known.
1854.
1855.
185C.
1857.
1858.
1859.
1860.
1861.
1802.
Blue. (See Queen group.)
T> . j/Mitohell -^,.
Braastad|\^.i,„l,^„p;;;;;;;;--_'";;;;;;;
Breitung Uematite No. 2 ■^..
BulTaloi
Cambria
... .
Cheshire. (See Princeton.)
Chester. (See Rolling Mill.)
Cleveland &. . .
3.000
1,44&
6,343
13,204
7,909
15, 787
40,091
11,793
40 364
Cleveland Hematite. (Included under
Cleveland.)
Curry
Dalliba (Phenix)
Detroit
Dexter
Dey
East New York
Edison
Edwards. (See Samson.)
Erie
Etna
Fitch
Fosterd
Foxdale
Gibson
Goodrich . .
Grand Rapids ( Davis)
Green Bay. (See Bay State.)
Hartford
Home (P. and L. S.) (now Volunteer),..
Tmpprial
Indiana. (See Bay State.)
Iron Cliffs «
30,000
12,442
10,309
28,377
41.295
. i2,9i9
46,096
Keystone. (See East Champion.)
Lake Angeline
Lake Superior,
4,658
24,668
33,015
25,195
37,709
Llllie
Maas
Manganese (Negaunee) . . .
Mary Charlotte
Mesahi's Friend
Miphic;iTnTnp e
Miller
Milwaukee
Mitchell
Moore
Negaunee
New York (York). .
North Champion. (See Hortense.)
'
Nortnwest
Ogden
1
Palmer (Cascade). (See Volunteer )
Pioneer
i
Pittsburg and Lake Angeline. (See
under Lake Angeline.)
Piatt
Portland
Prince of Wales <»
Queeno
a Under Queen ^roup after 1890.
6 UndcT ricvclaii.l-ClilTs group after \HXi.
c Iiicliidos Clovrhmd nfti'r 1S.S3; incUidos nanuim. Foster. Iron Clifls, Uichigamme, and Salisbiuy after 1895.
drndcr Iron CliiTs, 1S91-1S;W: under rieveland-Clifls group alter 1S95.
< Under Clcveland-riills group after 1895.
/ Under Winthrop after 1892.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
53
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Coiitiuued.
Marquette Range — Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
Years un-
known.
1S54.
1855.
1856.
1857.
1858.
1859.
18l».
1861.
1862.
Queen group o
Republic
Richards
Riverside
Roiling MiU
Saginaw
Sam Mitchell. (See Mitchell.)
Schadt
Section 12
Smith. (See Prmcetou.)
South Buffalo c
Spurr
Star West (Wheat)
'
St. Lawrence. (See Nonpareil.)
Sterling. (See American.)
Taylor
Teal Lake. (See Cambria. )
Titan
Washington ^
Webster <
West Republic
Wheeling
Wheat. (See Star West.)
30,000
3,000
1,449
6,343
25,646
22,876
08,83?
114.401
49,909
124, 169
Name of mine.
1863.
1864.
1866.
1866.
1867.
1868.
1869.
1870.
1871.
1872.
American (Sterling)
Austin
Bamum «
14, 385
33, 484
44,793
45, 939
38 381
Bay State
Bessemer. (See Lillie.)
Bessie
Beaufort ( Ohio)
Blue. (See Queen group.)
T> *- J (Mitchell
197
BraastadVi„jjj^„p
3, 409
11.088
14,239
Breitung llematite No. 2
Butfalo c
Cambria
6,255
21,635
73,161
67,588
68,408
Cheshire. (See Princeton.)
Chester. (See RolUng Mill.)
Cleveland /
40, S42
. -
44, 959
33, 355
42,680
75,864
102, 112
100, 133
132,884
142,058
151, 724
Cleveland llematite. (Included under
Cleveland.)
roliiTTiIiia. (Klmnani
ClUTV
Dalliba ( Phenix)
Detroit
Dexter
Dey
East Champion
East New York
Edison
Edwards. (See Samson).
Empire
Erie
-■>
Etna
Fitch
6,000
14,540
23, 458
13,532
18,684
Foxdaie .
Goodrich
Oreen Bay. (See Bay State.)
Hartford
"Includes Buffalo, Prince of Wales, Queen, and South Buffalo after 1890.
6 Under Iron Cliffs, 1891-1895; under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1895.
c Under Queen group after 1890.
d Prior to 1890. see Braastad: includes Marquette after 1892.
« Under Iron Cliffs, 1S:10-1S95; imdor Cleveland-CUas group after 1895.
/ Under Cleveland-ClilTs group after 18.83.
s Includes Cleveland after 1SS3; includes Bamum, Foster, Iron Cliffs, Michigamme, and Salisbury after 1895.
54
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Marquette Range— Continued.
[Gross tons. J
Name of mine.
1803.
18G4.
1865.
1860.
1867.
1868.
1869.
1870.
1871.
1872.
1,160
4,782
15,150
25,440
35,757
58,402
79,702
48,725
38,841
Indiana. (See Bay State.)
77,237
83,905
19,500
86,763
65,505
20,151
50,201
92,287
24,073
08,002
127, 491
46,607
119,935
130,524
27,051
105,745
125,908
35,432
131,343
127,642
.53, 407
100,582
132,297
33,645
158,047
119,910
Keystone, (See East Champion.)
35,221
78,970
185,070
Lillie
4,866
15,942
24,153
Marv Chirlotte
141
8,000
12,214
33,761
43,302
43,665
71,456
94,S09
1,809
70,381
2,921
68,950
9,925
North Champion. (See Hortense.)
.
Pendill
Palmer (Cascade). (See Volunteer.)
Pittsburg and Lake Angeline. (See
under Lake Angeline.)
Piatt
Portland
13,445
1
■
11,025
Rolling Mill
236
6,772
18,503
Salisbury e ...
545
SamMitcheU. (See MitcheU.)
2,843
4,928
17,360
19, 151
24,232
26,437
28,380
Schadt
Section 12
Smith. (See Princeton.)
South Buffalo c
Star West ('^Tieat)
Sterling. (See American.)
Teal Lake. (See Cambria.)
4,171
39,495
West Republic
Wiiithrop /
Wheat. (See Star West.)
203,055
243,127
186,208
278,796
443,567
491,454
617,444
830,934
779,607 893,169
a Under Cleveland-riiffs group after 1895.
bUnder Winthrop after IS92.
c Under Queen group after 1890.
d Includes Uullalo. I'rince of Wales, Queen, and South Buffalo after 1890.
« Under Iron Cliffs, 1891-1895: under Cleveland-Clifls group after 1895.
/ Prior to 1890, see Braastad; includes Marquette after 1892.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
55
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Marquette Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1873.
1874.
1875.
1876.
1877.
1878.
1879.
1880.
1881.
1882.
797
4,702
8,006
Amps
48,076
41,403
43,209
37,6,32
8,583
37,909
26,680
24.015
3,336
24.522
2,208
27,883
583
41,778
1,236
Bay State...
Bessemer. (See Lillie.)
Bessie
Beaufort (Ohio)
5,532
18,245
Blue. (See Queen group.)
6,478
13,279
45,247
14,824
21,146
43, 630
■D * J (Mitchell.
8,658
33,456
7, .549
7,549
, 5, 696
27,236
3,898
12,549
4,259
23,740
11,131
26,595
33,396
Braastadj^^.j^j^^^p ■-;;•;;;;;;;;;■;;;;;;
7,502
23,005
Butialo &
Camliria
2.610
47,097
6,329
66,002
10,083
70,883
3,754
73, 464
6,724
94,027
949
131,167
6,958
112,401
2,415
212,748
19,246
145, 427
5,531
198,569
64, .545
72,782
56,877
1.59,009
Cheshire. (See Princeton.)
Chester. (See Rolling MUl.)
Chicago
Cleveland c...
133,265
105,858
129,881
140,393
152, 188
152,737
206, 120
Cleveland Hematite. (Included under
Cleveland.)
21,065
35,088
8,059
6,663
11,158
12,066
Dalliba(Phenix)...
10,986
44,836
Detroit
5,402
Dey
10,426
5,227
3,346
7,715
14, 495
5,401
4,029
10,217
3,408
4,002
Edison
Edwards. (See Samson.)
Erie
2,731
Etna.. .
Fitch
18, 107
4,719
847
i25
4,804
1,122
3,011
11,648
Foxdale
Gibson
Goodrich
/6,.338
503
7,547
3,992
11,131
10,245
9,998
Green Bay. (See Bay State.)
Hartford
Hortense (North Champion)
Home ( P. and L. S. ) (now Volunteer) . . .
Himiboldt (Washington).
21,498
38,014
1.362
27,890
1,225
23,921
492
18,204
285
14,726
9,642
3,333
16, 545
20, 302
43,463
Indiana. (See Bay State.)
IronClifls?
Iron Moimtain
Jackson
130, 131
43,933
158,078
105,600
31,526
114,074
90,568
26, 370
129,339
98, 480
22.5.39
111,766
5,945
17,276
80,340
19,112
127.349
10, 127
19,691
83,121
28, 161
109,674
8, 506
30, 180
103,219
25,321
173,938
22,380
28,962
i26,626
14,928
204,094
18,347
31,200
118,939
18,0150
262.235
16, 748
28,051
90, 830
Keystone. (See East Champion.)
Lake Angeline...
14.326
296,509
Lillie
27,494
Lucy (McComber)
38,969
2,642
10,407
40,406
Maas
Manganese (Negaunee)
Mesabi's Friend
29,107
45,294
44,763
70,074
28,238
58,622
56,970
52,766
57,272
43, 712
Miller
Milwaukee
941
13, 142
31,635
40,891
Mitchell .
National . .
4,191
33,310
29,351
24,833
23,366
Negaunee Construction Works
1,177
New York (York)
70,882
6,629
77,017
70, 103
987
58,863
556
55,581
3,307
21,903
4.547
57,528
2,609
58,512
2,192
50,074
56,806
New York Hematite
2,105
North Republic
9,998
18,880
Pendill... . . ...
4,000
12, 549
3,959
13,686
9,987
Palmer (Cascade). (See Volunteer.)
Pittsburg and Lake Angeline. (See
under Lake Angeline.)
a Under Iron Cliffs, 1890-1895; under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1.S95.
' Under Qucon group after 1890.
c Under Clevoland-Clifls group after 1883.
d Includes Cleveland after 18.83; includes Barnum, Foster, Iron Cliffs, Michigamme, and Salisbiu-y after 1895.
' Under Iron Cliffs, 1S91-1.S95; under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1895.
/ Includes shipments for prior years.
e Under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1895.
» Under Winthrop after 1892.
56
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Marquette Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of in [nc.
1873.
1874.
1875.
1876.
1877.
1878.
1879.
1880.
1881.
1882.
Piatt
Portland
Princeton (Swauzey or Cheshire)
9,328
187
225
8,434
16,924
17,985
13,202
15,011
31,498
105,453
122,639
119,726
120.095
165,836
176,221
135,231
235,387
233,786
235,109
Rolling Mill
11,319
37,138
11,023
38,968
16. 643
45.486
6,730
2,849
37.806
55.318
4.571
12,804
53,265
56.979
20. 510
19,330
38, 121
44.005
37.869
10, 419
30. 773
54.097
52.155
10,351
10,039
43,396
39,293
5,455
15, 172
35,059
21,457
1,668
30.793
43,690
4,584
163
16,276
42,243
Sam Mitchell. (See Mitchell.)
12,421
Schadt
5,027
330
13,243
3,287
Smith. (Sec Princeton.)
31.933
1,091
42.068
2,139
23,094
20,276
22,801
2,225
1,409
851
2,746
9,040
8,873
Star West fWheatl
3,323
9,554
St. Lawrence. (See Nonpareil.)
Sterling. (See vVmerican.)
1,110
10,559
15,146
Teal Lake. (See Cambria.)
1,778
28,920
18, 198
4,071
15,324
20,211
4.704
24. 141
38,596
39,276
41,456
4,443
7,354
27,865
1,777
Wheeling
Wheat. (See Star West.)
1,158,249
919,257
889,477
1,006,785
1,010,494
1,023.083
1,130,019
1,384,010
1,579,834
1,829,394
Name of mine.
1883.
1884.
1885.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
American (Sterling)
3,618
2,916
1,483
13,099
20,032
21,000
21,604
15,076
62.752
631
69,408
47,458
52,975
16,123
10,211
12,835
Bessemer. (See Lillie.)
847
Beaufort (Ohio)
18,976
20, 190
18,360
2,218
17. 166
17,354
12,829
Blue. (See Queen group.)
7,017
58,743
16,419
74,067
4,091
86,789
Braastad|^/j'^^{{^^;j^-p
50,143
73,144
53,913
155,341
10,860
58,784
137,593
24,686
41,130
146,330
30.801
57.861
174,680
50.919
72.780
215,098
100.464
80.359
223,442
Cambria. .
47.508
104,960
117
218.219
59,742
210, 180
50,796
173,915
34. (»2
133.413
41.549
109.978
Che^shire. (See Princeton.)
Chester. (See Rolling Mill.)
Cleveland TTematite. (Included under
Cleveland.)
225,674
218,757
203,664
207,441
184.316
274,048
331,713
221,788
310,907
714
Curry
16,671
Dalliba ( Phenix)
i.687
12.314
4,878
1.605
26,099
Detroit.
3.809
16.202
2.709
19.125
750
39,400
18.500
1,821
10,112
3,895
6,080
9,130
5.448
13.000
Bey..
5,039
2.697
29,739
893
East New York
13.094
36,431
50,293
35,175
Edison
Edwards. (See Samson.)
Empire.. . ....
Erie
5. 405
1.091
Fitch
16.550
21,949
15.093
Foster c...
10.029
9,675
9,643
Foxdale
a Under Queen group after 1890.
ftlnclu'ios liulTalo, Prince of Wales. Queen, and South Buffalo after 1896.
cUndor Iron C'lilTs. 1891-1895; under Cieveland-ClitTs group after 1895.
d Prior to IKOO. see Iira;istiid: includes Marquette after 1S92.
e Under Iron cliiVs. Iviii is'i.i; inider Clevcland-Clitfs group after IS9.').
/ Under Cli'veluiid-Clilfs croiii) afler IKti.
a Includes Cleveland after 1S83; includes Bamum, Foster, Iron Cliffs, Michiganune, and Salisbury after 1895.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
57
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Marquette Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1883.
1884.
1885.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
1,515
12,142
2,700
Grand Kapids (Davis)
1,200
11,611
20,058
566
7,757
26,426
9,362
22,823
Green Bay. (See Bay State.)
Hartford
5.678
886
5,685
16,246
'
TTnTTibnlHt. ( Wn.shinfjr.nn) . , ,
31.866
23,763
11,766
20,207
19,873
11,655
15,866
23,259
38,460
188,776
19,879
18,552
278,270
4,571
7,194
Indiana. (See Bay State.)
Iron Cliffs a . . .
87,346
393
109,906
191, 120
302, 909
23,041
12, 139
78.520
134,616
289,395
.Tnrt^nn
71,278
27, 259
200, 799
4,614
14,678
83,251
86,922
204,796
2, 683
68,657
111,051
226,040
708
89,370
131,731
267, 622
3,957
101,909
223,600
240, 225
.32,692
22,276
128,891
229,070
288,784
33,916
32,982
124,682
261,680
318,321
31,812
43,483
92,979
241,605
308,831
19, 551
27,683
92,507
Keystone. (See East Champion.)
Lake Angeline...
287,517
366, 715
T;illip
29.005
26,326
lU^ins
397
1,484
3,111
1,367
5,229
20, 441
7,060
70, 128
23, (,92
16,802
9,555
Minhigammeo
42,533
25,935
12,373
48,790
58,726
36,448
66,999
80,777
23, 169
1,894
Miller"
805
25,991
38,465
46,693
8,823
50. 490
8,411
48,908
540
52,727
24,763
Mitchell
21,178
13.987
Negaunee
5,259
45,304
78,318
76,488
64,218
85,846
Negaimee Construction Works
10.394
1,517
43
1.077
1.094
5,128
12,844
2, 422
11,220
New York Hematite.
North Champion. (See Hortense.)
289
ll,9i;i
1,436
Northwest..
1,687
2,200
3,553
12,605
1,594
18,249
10,072
Pendill
318
Palmer (Cascade). (See Vcflunteer.)
5,140
1,203
9,060
Pittsburg and Lake Angeline. (See un-
der Lake Angeline.)
Piatt ....
2,676
Portland
32, -115
Princeton (Swanzey or Cheshire)
13,730
3,557
8,328
2,842
7, .301
29, 403
491
66, 122
Queen c. . .
5,527
109.217
479. 509
191,127
379.719
Republic. .
152,565
277,757
250,835
241,161
220,624
87
1,374
235,062
21,030
287.390
22, 122
220,0(,5
3,915
167,991
5,022
402
3,712
6,783
Rolling Mill . .
1,528
9,108
17,028
15,700
1,820
946
26, 629
1,334
3,437
4,403
1,058
4,320
29, 503
51,667
1,133
48,304
74,947
4,512
72, 449
2,796
85,798
1,218
Sam Mitchell. (See Mitcheli.)
.^flm^nn (Arf^lp)
600
Schadt "
Smith. (See Princeton.)
4,964
24,706
69,359
146,383
Spurr
9,067
6,625
752
15,867
Star West (Wheat).
6,824
9,200
17, 538
4,987
7,997
15,141
4,412
St. Law-rence. (See Nonpareil.)
Sterling. (See American.)
6,155
13, 128
19,414
Teal Lake. (See Cambria.)
19,411
11,748
23,340
5,679
13,865
24,034
16,003
47,486
2,846
56,321
60, 1.56
141,524
92,699
127, 130
934
19, 623
4,585
4,098
6,229
10,558
10,756
2,054
12,872
3,335
74
448
1,510
19, 679
30,734
2,777
12,700
5,887
6,383
9.861
2,074
Winthrop /
109,576
122,042
191,658
Wheat. (See Star West.)
1,305,425
1,558,034
1,430,422
1,627,380 1,851,634 !l, 923,727
2,642,813
2,993,664
2,512,242
2,666,856
a Under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1895.
6 Under Winthrop after 1,S92.
c Under Queen group after 1890.
^Includes Buffalo, Prince of Wales. Queen, and South Buffalo after 1890.
e Under Iron Cliffs, 1891-1895; under Cleveland-Cliffs group after 1895.
/ Prior to 1890, see Braastad; includes Marquette after 1892.
58
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to daJf-Continued.
Marquette Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
American (Sterling)
Ames
.\ list in ;
ll;irnilin a *
W.w Slate
I!.',,i'iiier. (See LtUie.)
lic'.iufoi't (Oliio)
liluo. (See Queen group.)
Boston
, .(Mitchell
nraastaci^^-inthrop
Brc'iiiinp Hematite No. 2
liiillalo''
C'aiubria
Champion •
Clioshire. (See Princeton.)
Chester. (See Rolling MUl.)
Chiiaso
Cleveland "^ -.--.'•J j'"
Clevfhiii.l Hematite. (Included under
Cli'velunrl.)
Cleveland l-clifls group i
Cohiinliia ( Kloman)
Currv
Dallllia (Phenlx)
Detroit
Dexter
East Champion
East New York
Edison
Edwards. (See Samson.)
Empire
Erie
Etna
Fitch
Foster «
Foxdale
Gibson
Goodrich
Grand Rapids (Davis)
Green Bay. (See Bay State.)
Hartford
Hortense (North Champion)
Home (P. and L. S.) (now Volunteer).
Humboldt ( Washington)
Imperial ■
Indlaua. (See Bay State.)
Iron Clifls /
1894.
1,103
30, 445
61,648
218, 105
1896.
5,195 .
47, 218
42,788
143,706
41,656
100,398
587
95,086
113,375
1897.
7,833 21,740
911
352
6,513
Iron Mountain
Jackson : ■ ■ • •
Keystone (See East Champion.)
Lake .\ngeline
Lake Superior
Llllie
Lucy (McComber)
Maas
Magnetic (stock pile)
Manganese (Negaimee)
Marquette 0
Mary Charlotte
Mesabi's Friend
Mlchigamme /
Miller
Milwaukee
Mitchell
Moore
National
Negaunee
Negaunee Construction Works
New York (York)
New York Hematite
North Champion. (See Hortense.)
North Kepublic
Nonpareil (St. Lawrence)
Northwest
Norwood
Ogden
Pascoe
PendlU
Palmer
Palmer (Cascade). (See Volunteer.)
130,812
51,009
351,973
329,010
68. 861
21,964
221,153 513,119
13,752 18,903
12,073 6,764
940
253,760
935
69,732
'25,'666
32,288
355,453
344, 758
78,388
1,610
132,581
' 21,' 487
259,042
42,186
313,555
342, 439
54,285
5,503
3,214
67
1,532
'2,'297
110,648
141,728
718, 408
1,154
102,623
163, 190
869,482
1899.
124,930
215,074
1,011,048
80,710
342,251
469, 576
107,532
79, 102
489.685
376. 761
112.781
10,033
1900.
1901.
80,432
113,743
881,021
27,987
90,882 175,394
1,041
182, 169
55,012
460, 333
686, 563
211,023
11,846
23,235
88,230
464,988
682, 595
196,200
62, 321
31,714
389,128
709, 143
114,990
4,338
68,907
99,026
860,484
31,696
4,647
1902.
5,007
59,781
63,976
205,721
1,104,864
38,761
7,440
38,271
481,574
635,642
98,788
191,330
195,573
"'6,' 642'
4,648
'126,' 829
■3,' 327
15,449
304,125
832,796
79,919
37,655
'234,Vi3
204,286
Pioneer
Pittsburg and Lake .\ngeline. (See un-
der Lake Angeline.)
a Under Iron ClilTs. 1s;iii-1h;i.^,: under Clevelatid-Cliffs group after 1896.
6 Under Queen gruiip aflrr IS'ill.
SKdSae^la;^,! ai^if Is^S; 'IJSu^S-Barnum, Foster, Iron Cli.K Michigamme, and Salisbury after IS95.
« Under Iron CiiUs, ISM ls.i.5; under Clcveland-Cliils group after 189o.
/ Under Cieveland-Cliils group after 1895.
g Under Winthrop after 1S92.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
59
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Marquette Kange— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
1902.
Piatt
5,448
41,226
13, 198
11,296
Portland
Primrose
6,040
Prince of Walesa
Princeton (Swanzey or Clteshire)
19,096
•■■•'
6,593
25,247
55,802
75,037
67,051
118,048
Quartz
Queenu
120,673
64, 195
232, 469
105,719
204,957 1 323,057
242,293
124,342
61,022
140,312
342,978
137,085
398,298
130, 126
400,845
104, 604
418, 044
157,646
Republic Reduction Co
Ricliards
6,887
4,630
1,088
24,464
4,613
51,303
54^181
50,041
Riverside
43
Rolling Mm
3,975
22,685
22,815
24,874
Saginaw
Salisbury c
SamMltclieU. (See MitclieU.)
Samson ( A rgyle)
Scliadt
1,261
Section 12
Smitli. (See Princeton.)
Soutli Buffalo u
Spurr
Star West ( Wtieat)
5,550
51,207
9,658
942
6,716
15,987
St. LawTence. (See Nonpareil.)
Sterling. (See American.)
Steplienson
Tavlor
Teal Lalie. (See Cambria.)
Titan
Volunteer (see also Home)
69,561
26,946
32,672
53,216
l',617
29,983
47,578
32,736
Waslilngton
Webster
20,797
West Republic
Wlieeling
180,071
134,365
119,120
150,496
106,894
122,592
171,318
148,945
109
129,496
Wlieat. (See Star West.)
1,835,893
2,060,260 2,097,838 2,604,221
1 1
2,715,035
3, 125, 039
3,757,010
3,457,522
3,245,346
3,868,025
Name of mine.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
American (Sterling)
419
13,764
23, 222
90,001
240,339
0 ''98
Ames
Austin
195, 950
111,229
125,858
433,037
801 851
Barnum e
Bay State
16,037
Bessemer. (See Liliie.)
Bessie
29,718
134.648
21.S79
38,306
1.646
25. 781
78,029
01,035
72,987
Blue. (See Queen group.)
Boston
02 542
Ti t. J 1 Mitcliell
Braastadj^^j^^^^gp
831 445
Breitung Hematite No. 2
7,8.54
9,809
38,671
59, 667
55,849
129,673
301 583
Buflaloa
017 73U
Cambria ...
41,168
74,238
84,852
174
81,791
64,680
40,628
115,007
i 35. 145
107,577
85,977
313
136,815
11,199
9 037 717
4,394,335
9,012
2, son, 298
15,239,906
94,813
111,(371
5Q 114
Cliesltire. (See Princeton.)
Chester. (See Rolling Mill.)
Cleveland /
Cleveland Hematite. (Included under
Cleveland.)
810,845
743.263
1,288,416
1.330.944
1,030,928
438,379
877,433
Columbia ( Kloman)
Dalliba (Plienix)
140,841
Dexter
118 512
Dey
2,709
East Cliampion
7tt 002
East New York
22,523
7,299
33.095
Edison ..
893
Edwards. (See Samson.)
Empire
40,565
53,637
108,993
203 095
Erie .-
8.136
Etna...
1,0*11
Fitch
31,817
Fosterc
171,893
Foxdale
5.053
3,429
3,303
31.447
Cibson
16,357
a Under Queen group nftor 1,890.
6 Includes [iuil'iilo. I'riiicc of Wales. Queen, and South Buffalo after 1890.
cUniier Iron I'lilf^, ]v,ll-]S95; under Cleveland-CliUs group after 1895.
d Prior to 1S90, see Braastad: includes Marquette after 1.S92.
e Under Iron Clills, 1S90-1,S95; under Clevcland-CliUs group after 1895.
/Under Cleveland-Cliffs group after I8.S:!.
e Includes Cleveland after 1883; includes Barnum, Foster, Iron Clifls, Michigamme, and Salisbury after 1895.
60
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore ahipmcnlsfrom the larliial sldpmenl to date — Continued.
Marquette Range— Continuird.
[Gross tons.)
Name of mine.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
49.754
110,736
Green Bay. (See Bay State.)
Hartford '
20, 085
179,980
322,209
364,801
328,161
278,366
250,680
1,760,951
30,574
26,022
713,961
727
1,661
6,076
55,756
48,231
115,478
376, Ol
Indiana. (See Bay State.)
1,700,537
393
5,409
310,950
604,829
77,454
33, 180
374.183
727,378
9,868
5,066
269, 116
635,671
32, 781
85
61,345
283.373
674,066
80.545
11.060
280,298
349.435
61,708
1,672
159, 197
3,885,513
Keystone. (See East Champion.)
262,480
590. 339
63,209
220,410
261,955
8,632
1.115
29,030
8,285,400
14,931,563
Lillie
1,743,490
519,031
32,378
220,611
292
292
6.359
152.907
34,303
4S.8S5
221,738
257.088
155,633
99,104
240,433
1,057, IM
16.043
880,362
375, 451
MitrhplI
11,539
29.319
25,828
68.131
150.216
224,665
i45,i32
239,554
253,448
196, 170
232,219
312,217
3,61.2,127
12,708
Npw York- fYork")
1,123,071
37,587
North Champion. (See Hortense.)
^
289
23,395
1,687
5,753
986
59,806
45,993
13, 131
14, 172
Palmer (Cascade). (See Volunteer.)
15,409
Pittsburg and Lake Angeline. (See un-
der Lake Anceline.)
73,844
Portland
79,652
79,652
,
6,040
32,415
Princeton ( S wanzey or Cheshire)
84,223
76, 461
129,079
166,894
177,863
36,033
42,934
1,271,761
491
180,866
Queen group rf
254,658
155, 415
311,479
124,506
263,377
150,699
221.096
177,220
309.917
170,554
104,098
67,999
237,509
176,575
5,315,998
6,193,469
47, 174
8,261
55,593
68,134
86,129
89,563
35, 156
60,994
102,566
688,455
16, 160
Rolling Mill
6,786
28,766
49,204
52,147
133,139
578,916
451,424
686,411
Sam Mitchell. (See MVtcheli.)
267,805
Schadt
1.261
21,887
Smith. (See Trinceton.)
245.412
165.244
Star West fWheatl
204, 649
St. LawTence. (See Nonpareil.)
39,869
64,075
39,869
Sterling. (See American.)
Stephenson
6,305
52,588
■ 122,968
.32.970
Teal Lake. (See Cambria.)
Titan
90, .371
7,395
71,870
100,281
38,544
10,022
1,393.175
20,625
44,716
65.341
Webster
34.905
133.077
50.870
10..i55
WinthroD f
72,433
1,759.115
Wheat. (See Star West.)
3,040,245
2,843,703
4,215,572
4,057,187
4,388,073
2,414,632
4,256,172
91,83S,55S
a Under Clcveland-Clifls Rroup after 1895.
tUiKlor Winl.hrop nftor isaii.
c Under Queen group after 1890.
d Inclnde"! Buffalo. Prince of Wales, Queen, and South Buflalo afler 1890.
el'nder Iron ClilTs, 1891-1S95: under Clevelami riifTs p-oup after 1895.
/ Prior to 1S90, sec Braastad; mcludcs Marquette after 1S92.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
61
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Uenomlnee Range.
[Gross Ions.]
Xame ot mine.
1S77.
1878.
1S79.
1880.
1881.
1882.
I8,s:i.
1884.
1885.
Alpha
Antoinc (Clitt'ord)
Aragon
Armenia
Bauer
Baltic
Berkshire
Beta
Breen
5,812
4,796
1,463
5,359
Brier Hill
10,593
4,388
Bristol (Claire)
Calumet
5,847
29,239
3,627
Caspian
34,566
134,521
247,506
265,830
290,972
Chatham
Clifford :
Columbia
"
15,948
115,862
4,3,34
21,493
6,774
34,622
r^imninnwpnlth
9,643
30,856
97,410
11,816
42,947
Cornell
Crystal Falls
1,341
Cuff
Candy
12, 803
46, 168
21,851
14,368
17,534
12,644
13,374
18,287
3,676
22,675
3,410
10, 079
24,099
608
4,897
49,897
9,880
Cvclopsa
6,028
Delphic
Dober 6
T)iinTi
Eleanor (Appleton)
Emmett
12,397
22,474
31,136
. 648
Fairbanks c
8,045
160,165
455
40,232
Florence
14, 143
100, 501
Fogarty
Forest
Genesee (Ethel)
Gibson
Great Western
587
22,826
20,710
Groveland
Half and Half
Hemlock
Hersel
Hiawatha
Hilltop
HoUister
Hope
4, 280
29,115
4,362
100,369
636
52,684
2,739
56,693
Iron River d
James
Keel Ridge
11,496
19,611
23,425
6,033
Kimball
Lament (Monitor)
Lee Peck e
Lincoln
Loretta
Ludington /
8,816
3,374
52,152
102,632
101,165
124, 194
Manganate
Mansfield
3,477
18,677
18,187
McDonald
Metropolitan
23,854
36,643
27,577
Michigan Exploration Co
Millie (Hewitt)..
4,362
9,500
7,516
7,927
4,627
Monongahela
Munro
2,480
29 221
7^202
114,836
5,973
37,620
10,004
71,710
11,652
Northwestern
7,276
73,519
198, 165
137,077
165,547
6,515
Penn Iron Mining Co. »
Perry
3,138
Pewabic (see also Walpole)
Quinnesec
25,925
41,954
52,436
43,711
44,240
21,676
16,996
14 110
Riverton (see also Dober and
Iron River) h
13,465
49,196
60,406
73,648
76,514
38, 120
18,020
Selden
Sheridan
Shelden & Shafer (Union). (See
Columbia.)
South Mastodon
798
23,089
10,856
Sturgeon River
Tobin
Verona
a Under Penn Iron Mining Co. after 1892.
bUndor Riverton aficr 1900.
c Included in Paint Hivrr after 1S93.
d Under Riverton after 1892.
e Cherry Valley ore.
/ Included in Chapin after 1S94.
g Includes Curry. Cyclops, Norway, and Vulcan prior to 1S93.
ft Includes Iron River after 1S92; includes Dober after 190U.
62
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Menominee Range — Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1877.
1878.
1879.
1880.
1881.
1882.
1883.
1884.
1885.
V ulcan "
4,593
38,799
56,975
86,976
8o,2?4
94,042
79,874
101,722
124,125
Walpoleb
6,198
15,292
8,344
10,405
95,221
269,609
592,088 739,635
1,136,018
1,(M7,415
895,634
690,435
Name of mine.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
. 1893.
1884.
1
Antoine fCliffordl
1,745
50,275
46,609
26,649
96,829
167,948
127,901
138,209
^
Baltic
jj
1,585
1,226
1,400
'
Brier Hill
57,352
9,612
*
Chapin (see also Ludington)
198,871
336, 128
290,871
518,990
742,843
488,749
660,052
489,134
235,895
Columbia .
14,282
51.189
4,566
2,377
56,609
2,064
10,936
61,818
11,385
108,515
60, 133
116,786
70,770
134,982
57,682
249,113
22,426
151,291
10,300
174,921
Cornel!
3,974
CuH
. _
5,376
14,693
28, 722
6,101
72, 162
7,361
100,681
10,599
125,773
1,697
37,189
17,648
14,297
2,272
24,677
118,096
151,828
156,963
162,721
133,666
4,377
58,590
5,618
24,538
8,210
79,399
142,585
196, 269
218,570
48,806
48,246
9,634
2,726
Genesee (Ethel)
« 16,357
87,487
22,267
23,239
21,860
38,454
72,546
62,464
1,049
67
58,197
35,531
661
Half and Half
5,961
8,347
1,496
17,072
872
600
8,801
2,183
65,459
Hemlock
11,323
955
Hiawatha
1,683
Hilltop
HoUister
2,020
1,057
1,021
15,543
Hope
2,275
5,854
78,591
83,018
110,000
179,238
155,458
59,345
1,176
5,997
3,298
Kimball
12,348
31,139
26,226
42,819
2,844
26,019
13,777
2,600
Lincoln
1,813
8,757
8,131
109
Loretta
55,983
74,454
101,653
61,883
116,297
97,355
6,844
18,303
66,526
141,303
15,777
354
Mansfield
49,836
45,370
69, 2,i9
9,150
69. 558
23,485
41,640
48,792
51,463
63,511
McDonalil
Metropolitan
6,393
9,070
3,490
Michigan Exploration Co
505
77
Millie (Hewitt)
5,517
1,163
11,124
12,274
39,232
5,889
6,780
13,062
Miinro
5,400
30,460
5,744
3,441
13,200
Northwestern
93,878
13,933
95,726
10,240
87,260
12,506
68.044
32,700
61,717
62,654
4,089
45,435
44,767
18,390
Paint Uivertseealso Fairbanks). .
Penn Iron Mininc Co. i
280,450
i75,274
a Under Penn Iron Mininc Co. after 1892.
dlnclu'leil in I'l'wabii- uficr 1,S91.
c Under Kiverion after I'.iimi.
i Included in Paint River after 1893.
« Includes shipments lor prior years.
/ Under Riverton after 1892.
ff Cherry \';\IIey ore.
* Included in C'hapin after I.'!94.
» Includes Curry, Cyclops, Norway, and \'uk-un prior to 1S93.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
63
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Uenomlnee Range— Conlinucd.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
1893.
1894.
Peny
28,991
64, .507
115,273
165,745
304,010
13,442
6,585
2,249
Riverton (see also Dober and Iron
River) a ...
12,853
790
10,834
1,302
1^684
13, 354
11,971
1,102
4,005
595
1,476
7,137
45,745
2,234
Shelden & Shafer (Union). (See
Columbia.)
2,722
1,018
3,589
6,829
7,800
4,775
Vivian
Vulcan b ' 143, 930
305,03ii
1,740
r29,541
900
153,900
9,614
104,996
2,940
78,967
3,895
179,904
25,635
34,418
12,699
44,400
3,705
1
880,006
1,193,343
1,191,101
1,796,754
2,282,237
1,824,619
2,377,856
1,466,197
1,137,949
Name of mine.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
1902.
Antoine fCllfford) . . .
27.931
183, 296
2,045
110,821
95,809
98,847
149,694
104,510
295,821
93,025
337,807
119,940
404,645
63,429
477,212
18,750
110,993
646,203
100, 864
Baker
Baltic
17,326
64,664
Beta
Brier Hill ...
Bristol (Claire)
80,915
51,639
36,593
129,035
Chapin (see also Ludington)
618,589
420,318
643,402
724,768
940,513
929,937
929,701
966,812
Clifford
70,867
208,880
87,202
93,707
24.623
98,283
14,199
250,687
126.290
117,295
97,531
63,342
19,963
77,799
186,798
112,704
Cr v^tal Falls
13,037
44,526
95,210
128,233
147, 346
20,210
100,902
197, 770
38,209
141, 148
230,614
195,555
Cuff
3,395
41,942
76,877
178,800
183,052
Delnhic
52
5,009
49,381
'°:l^
49,203
90,885
2, 107
47,081
31,062
2,816
Fairbanks «
22,820
35,136
37,594
93,663
74,235
36, 756
15,395
130, 798
Forest
14,455
Gibson
14,643
33,851
43,316
98,550
123,361
11,444
42,470
7,699
Half and Half
949
94,646
96,032
69,865
110,209
72,413
149,966
123,331
Hersel
1,201
11,008
6,410
20,355
2,503
74,596
3,496
i
3,373
1
.
Keel Ridse
i9,44i
4,900
Kimball
1
67,652
31,323
47, 267
43,622
, 64,824
72.959
61,219
19,727
54,985
7,747
53,160
34,334
64, 104
68,447
128,300
1
37,182
1 60,739
86,607 90,155
74, 113
31,181
33, 733
60
McDonald
" Includes Iron River after 1S92; includes Dober after 1900.
^ Under Pfnn Iron Mining Co. after 1S92.
f Included in Pewabic after 1891.
d Under Riverton after 1900.
e Included in Paint River after 1S93.
/ Under Riverton after 1892.
g Cherry Valley ore.
ft Included in Chapin after 1894.
64
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to dale — Continued.
Menominee Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
1902.
1
1.071
10,924
216
10,374
53,272
25,935
Rlillii- < Hewitt).
21,815
17,430
15, 194
14,922
12,133
2,397
1
1
•
1,324
1,316
197,606
10,383
290,622
179,917
237,886
223,713
229,651
358,126
273,443
Pewabic (see also Walpole)
262,551
761
273,587
279,855
305,072
530, 129
11,050
2,202
374,043
25,967
71,004
507, 786
06,383
119,860
530,291
62,531
Eiverton (see also Dober and Iron
River) <^
215,850
2,161
Selden
16,754
3,419
146
31,104
8,063
Shelden A: Shafer (Union). (See
Columbia.)
■
Tobin
18,957
11,475
55,238
5,143
43,245
40,384
13
661
1,923,798
1,560,467
1,937,013
2,522,265
3,301,052
3,261,221
3,619,053
4,812,509
Name of mine.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
Alpha
1,370
107,886
522,035
31,901
1,370
Antrjinp CClitlordl
81,164
374, 944
16,577
138,395
423,098
195, 855
431,000
27,882
100,996
441,636
36,665
l,a53,792
Aragon
226,354
246,984
5,836,279
311,608
45,003
174,426
34,295
4o,«)3
Baltic
123,236
151,114
133,246
186,495 1
189, 119
129,037
3,440
1,10s, 663
37,735
Beta 1
:::::;:;:;:::::::::;::;.:::;
4,211
16,625
21,004 I
20,366
75,425
Brier Hill
I
14,981
246,581
132,420
210,388
298,031
15, 773
80,875
943,425
345,676
51,646
13S.S67
855,308
14,883
190,300
15,222
102,628
391,620
45,826
396,825
2,18.5,367
121,354
2,088
704,051
4,242
541,324
10,248
902,628
189,023
587, 647
68,730
103,626
527.971
Chapin (see also Ludington)
Chatham
16,182.416
129, 439
Clifford
103, 626
27,883
8,085
942,703
5,051
1,617
6,346
50,787
2,511,784
49,302
Crystal Falls
Cuff
117,096
180,983
152,255
111,871
114,158
296
986
1,735,251
58,419
iii,85i
1,410
5,512
844,889
416,928
286,093
Dclnhic
33,770
65,192
5,365
21,051
1,819
91,476
3,121
141,992
1,677
8,829
193,3%
1,521,871
18,719
66,655
8,500
95,877
153,452
233,858
169,459
178,905
7,949
140,354
32,560
231,191
77,356
2,718,019
Fogarty
117,Sll5
Forest
11,988
132,380
11,9SS
61,694
77,370
80,971
38,984
6S,,5S5
36.246
112,747
24,933
471,4.S9
4,548
124,246
9,123
57,151
101), 751
1,294
68, sis
4,737
191,265
311,218
234,492
13,913
1,872,228
Groveland
74,092
Half and Half.
7,524
96.072
79,420
136,232
124,450
106,437
117,181
83,834
112,481
1,589.818
Hersel
».t5
53,828
38,288
9,704
20
7,820
138,190
136,739
4SS.6I2
Hilltop
20, 229
6,371
10,671
25,842
46,;ts2
7,339
.
2s,.i.10
17.S71
904,,i,s7
2, .360
59,760
90,851
152.971
Keel Kidco
]
93, 101
Kimball
1
16,224
16,224
a Under Penn Iron Minfne To. aripr 1892.
t> Includes Curry, ryclops, Norway, and Vulcan prior to 1893.
« Includes IronRiv'i'r iificr 1n:i2: iucludes Dobor after 1900.
d Included in I'ewabic alter IS'.il.
e lender Riverton after 1900.
/ Included in Paint Kiver after 1893.
e Under Hiverton after 1892.
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
65
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to rfa<e— Continued.
Menominee Range— .ContiiiMcil.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
Lament (Monitor)
43,736
29,393
74,991
89,980
42,090
555,341
2,841
241,627
1,195,020
1,001,518
6,844
1,102,998
425, 708
1,144
107,027
153,797
368,265
9,310
278,556
373,765
36,810
1,291,352
371 289
Lee Pecko
Lincoln
15,606
87,939
17,577
54,720
19,539
118,738
5,890
140,390
714
99,779
1,657
96,613
13,354
Ludington >i
Manganate
Mansfield
51,440
79,163
38,584
183, 532
44,633
118,713
Mastodon
McDonald
1,144
Metropolitan
Michigan E.vploration Co
58,088
146
36,815
39,819
18,091
603
3,322
Millie ( Hewitt)
40,860
6,913
8,739
10,887
Monongaliela
Munro
32,332
9,080
92,183
91,238
47,454
91,792
46,834
53, 778
27,773
306
23,241
Nanatmo
Northwestern
17,280
Norway c
Paint River (see also Fairbanks)..
9,863
343,543
ii,257
141,948
11,973
423,244
28,321
496,582
75,805
381,128
Perm Iron Mining Co. t^
176,211
428,004
4,837,348
3,138
6,917,700
502,903
1,141,098
501,985
2,092
116.299
8,203
39,350
19,404
1,394,737
130,973
405,412
1 668 654
Perrv
Pewabic (see also Walpole)
Quinnesec
489, 175
49,708
97,633
372,791
33
81,543
633,413
493,891
457, 796
365,341
465,453
3,147
171,200
19,994
Riverton (see also Dober and Iron
River) «..
82,611
161,704
21,017
90,358
26,080
47,073
38,069
Saginaw (Perkins)
Selden
Sheridan
Sheldon & Shafer (Union). (See
Columbia.)
South Mastodon
Stephenson
Sturgeon River
Tobin
45,386
50,910
12, 122
113,669
20,202
81,354
166,529
235,867
237, 781
161,642
359,668
Verona
Vivian
90,426
122,577
48, 493
10,056
Vulcan c
Walpole/
19,089
375,385
161,425
12, 135
10,926
47,583
92,632
70,094
154,150
Youngs town
Zimmprman,
1,832
10,303
3,749,567
3,074,848
4,495,451
5,109,088
4, 964, 728
2,079,156
4,875,385
71,212,121
Mesabl Range.
Name of mine.
1892.
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
59,141
234,562
170,738
390,800
720,474
777,346
829,118
.Adriatic
Agnew
14,903
64,218
41,300
Albany
Alberta
.\uburn
108,210
"96,' 048"
376,970
"'247,069"
131,478
'"242," .56.5'
176,263
'427,404'
235.030
"383,'i86'
385.992
'553,' 836'
263, 692
' '924,"868'
427,510
'416,074
Bessemer
Biwabik...^ . ....
"isi.'soo'
Brav
Brunt
Burt
Canisteo
Canton
24.416
213,853
359,020
10,261
99,498
Cass
Chisholm
34, 573
26,372
17,187
57,324
32,912
246
Clark
63,071
199, 506
15,627
66, 137
7,213
22,003
60,798
80, 494
152,947
278,416
Crosby
Cyprus
Day
18, 651
1,975
Diamond
Duluth
37.026
112,155
564
166,435
9,647
128,587
121,707
150,024
224,630
Elba
Euclid
Fayal
136,601
248,645
642, 939
575, 933
1,072,257
1,252,504
1 656 973
Forest
Fowler
Franklin
46,617
223,399
280,423
231,080
30, 128
200.400
(iO,000
168,524
39,299
Franz
Genoa.,
17, 136
309,514
279,077
276. 559
253,651
332,022
Gilbert
o Cherry Valley ore.
!> Included in Chapin after 1894.
<: Under Penn Iron Mining Co. after 1892.
47517°— VOL 52—11 5
d Includes Curry, Cyclops. Norway, and Vulcan prior to 1893.
' Includes Iron River after 1892; includes Dober after 1900.
/ Included in Pewabic after 1891.
66
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPElilOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-orr shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Uesabl Range— Continued.
[Gross loiis.l
Name o! mine. 1892.
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896.
1897. 1898.
1899. 1900.
1901.
Glen
Grant ■.
Hanna
Hartley
Hawkins
Hector (Hale)
3,616
24,167
31,004
70,006
13.728
18,«07
32,901
30 929
Higpins No. 2
Hobart
HoUanil
i
Hull
Hull-Rust
Jordon
Kellogg
Kinnev
LaBelle.. .
Lake Superior group
58,123
67,659
259, 912
135,404
154,320
284,023
594,761
Larkin (Tpsoraj
Laura '.
Leonard.. .
'
Longyear. .
Mahoning.. .
117,8S4
167,245
519,892
.520. 751
750,341
28,615
911,021
65,340
705, 872
126,299
Mariska ■
Miller
13.858
2,140
Minorca
Monica .
Monroe
Morris
Mountain Iron (and Rath and Aetna) . . .
4,245
121,463
573,440
371,274
159,744
773,538
650,955
1,137,970
1,001,324
1,058,100
Pearce
Penobscot. . ...
11,933
29,652
85,619
146, Ml
221,080
Pettit
Pillsburv
99,691
106,487
57,847
101.032
41,905
120.723
Rol)erts".
18, 614
42, 756
Rust
Sauntrv- Alpena. .. . . .
53,004
1)8, 560
328,739
Sellers
47,433
153,037
112,765
174,867
56,280
34,918
Seville
Sharon ...
56,810
Sliver....
66,722
226,156
237,143
202,144
156,426
Spring
5,628
47,700
96,280
12,215
1,621
101,675
279,515
st.ciair ;:": r
St Paul
Stephens
56,031
666,273
Sweenev
Syracuse
Troy
8,297
93,109
Utica .
Virginia group
123,015
544,954
622,712
955, 739
749,499
560, »>8
293,651
417,473
5,420
Webb.
. 3,046
11,249
12,357
18.238
Wills
Yates
1
4,245
613.620
.793,052
2,781,587 2,882,079
1,275,809
4,613,766
B,626.3S4 ,7,809,535
9.004.890
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
67
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Mesabi Range— Continued.
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1902.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
Adams
1,242,923
1,109,750
940, 105
1,140,984
1,238,350
3,294
103, 2(X)
9,057
366,371
1,136,513
70, 187
149,084
765.. 592
108, li9
164, 486
1,829,372
107,317
151,536
12,585,828
288,927
923,851
207, 650
45,582
24,829
108,847
23,933
109,608
90,435
912
153,433
44,651
28,439
241,186
Albany
437,521
31,032
120,332
64,860
51, 143
35,747
368,057
1,731,036
82 175
Alberta
Alexander
15,073
60,547
231, 699
38,283
2,143,028
756,853
9,121,509
Bessemer
80, 303
647,614
112,630
1,092,987
131,791
807,374
78,012
803, 750
120,350
365,781
227,767
642,821
65,514
14, 212
1,660,101
85,505
623, 127
807,511
Bray ...
65,514
269,l>i4
75,401
1,376,875
178,935
1,501,272
5,454
636
1,460,998
2,760
Burt
1,860,462
7,859,698
93,719
713,048
241,343
1,946,993
152,075
2,942,375
16,987
2,201,854
636, 176
678 192
Canton
Cass
50, 155
168,831
29,554
130, 732
.59,552
231, 296
965
358,091
1,300
146,901
66,961
379, 156
1,373
274,394
36, 121
258,793
6,309
319,983
Chisholm
200,029
228,386
4,790
334,594
314,697
4,637
484,512
Clark
350,799
300,492
266,873
Commodore. . .
65,833
59,292
20, 436
34,043
249
30,131
263, 401
100,606
115,373
162,533
192,144
477,203
172, 326
227.365
349, 853
260,948
116,069
77,674
152,084
154,868
115,745
409, 148
135,366
183,470
159,038
107,685
Crosby
Croxton
18,594
100,297
121,818
107, 781
348
.244,343
84,530
130,228
235,351
1,075.759
1,278,034
319,453
171
Cynrus
106,516
Diamond
171
93, 120
134,488
150,220
207,454
150,053
93,616
149,819
123,425
142, 172
125,724
158,336
255,580
149,185
147,916
150,501
224,202
82,627
1,879,357
6,304
99,892
51,393
1,737,233
Elba
1, 668, 853
Euclid
82, 627
Faval
1,919,172
1,460,601
975, 102
85,280
1,358,922
99,785
1,634,8.53
41,647
1,878,812
4.840
34.014
30.921;
907
108,610
100,178
205,426
1,439,879
2.420
21.511
8,246
18,132,550
Forest
Fowler
155 417
111,085
92,019
65,528
62,884
244,150
66, 935
11,0C,8
179,468
1,712,008
145. 069
70.210
281,081
Genoa
399,719
303,700
2,985 287
Gilbert
336,927
272, 142
783, 683
396,591
1 220 788
Glen
23,875
51,946
171,705
18,928
280, 412
44,413
287, 835
49,227
279,424
1,917.410
164,514
Grant
Hanna
238,873
""3i6,'783'
30, 726
322,604
238 873
Hartley
334, 646
270.984
65, 952
173, 439
7,339
16,908
8,068
157,366
2,900.493
254,329
99,812
61,996
65,462
248, 246
390,108
1,646,523
418,336
1,111,146
8,314
270 864
Hawldns
5,892
54,289
107,905
99, 0.55
202, 070
4,990
238,598
294,588
.37.221
341,319
975
95,472
Hector (Hale)
Higgins No. 2
35,286
158, 484
1,682
163,020
2, 926, 083
151,071
18.313
118,529
31,331
176,510
391,157
400. 907
Hull
233,065
282,592
1,690.311
190,971
84,715
110,708
836 043
Hull-Rust
3,039,911
162,510
10, 477
13,754
165,468
287,431
7,464
27,216
10,557,398
877 767
17,562
50, 215
61,109
. .
013 317
Jordon
147,931
190,024
97,474
185,854
925,330
32,352
6,225
89, 161
57,691
145,989
796,349
7,464
473, 668
La Btlle
70, 753
766,311
48.298
1,226,066
89,554
1,415,884
78,597
50,466
56,146
51,638
4,963,469
94 722
Larkin (Tesora)
12,001
175,670
138,001
308.989
254,308
367,192
22,040
301,522
149,410
301.368
l.W,316
297,870
14, 030
79' 313
176, 726
289,490
46,661
366,543
178,110
653, 162
6,857
303,066
53,335
79,286
200,163
10.591
279.399
81,604
105,170
3,778
228,536
151,952
153,822
221
197,192
27,207
352.004
297,011
275.777
16,778
1,277.745
Laura . . .
16,453
28,784
768 970
2,263,496
858 095
Leonard
Lincoln
87,908
22,788
379, 219
2,144,263
121 391
17,706
1,564.332
82,065
137
113, .521
279,463
1.399
611.592
93,072
30,226
89,981
1,561,893
92,356
77,690
109, 086
1,038, (H5
222,640
1,009.446
11,675
706,325
66,641
1,011,661
139,853
1,274,232
115,763
12,531,132
1,044,325
Malta
lOS 053
107,244
234,071
2^0 7(>5
Miller..
118,520
224,321
525
80,330
119,439
277,119
1 133 484
16,523
900, 41)3
557 315
35,499
115,886
121,739
117,653
155,541
92,715
154,601
128, 870
119,164
210,291
7,614
147,621
1,831,187
Mohawk
7,014
628,899
7,316,409
279,396
Monroe
13,730
1,070.937
60,725
2,495.0,S9
188,508
310,839
1,809,743
64,073
2,563,111
228,451
156,809
2,076, 3,S8
34,935
1,973,519
153,770
19,172
621
71,645
528,154
1,571
206, 098
160,249
.35,571
1,617,772
49.409
1,348,714
33.012
1,168,855
Mountain Iron (and Rath and Aetna ) . . .
Myers
17,198 871
193. 698
11.940
59,389
914 736
31 112
Onondat^a
30,887
90 797
54,884
50, 204
235
66,862
242,830
68,RS3
706,071
59,029
496,830
1,040,265
190,154
997,065
700,140
1 IGS
Pearson
68,683
209,531
1,615
Perkins...
59,029
83,548
Pettit
17,278
238.122
28,972
52.700
229,133
27,088
140,239
161,924
82.757
33.646
30,074
489,718
57,140
59,889
Pillsbury.
Rust
272,114
284,617
213,355
227,079
249,837
Scranton
1, 168
207,990
193,428
251,631
261,501
241,031
155,000
354,780
026. 169
23,585
2 870 890
Seville
23,585
68
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Mesabl Range— Continued
[Gross tons.]
Name of mine.
1902.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
224,520
48,199
329,535
2, .328 605
Shenango. .
51,712
213,097
383,717
387,093
401,887
49,291
831.099
256,073
Sliver
.305,361
Sparta .
227,444
40,458
59,692
27,777
235
1,241,197
15,257
610,457
20.510
430,633
w
35, 773
SDruce (Cloauet) .
543,203
587,153
6,148
589,319
26,748
606,295
61,792
674,602
579,903
5,166,199
94,688
137.430
st.ciair ':::::;:::::::::::::
24,230
113,200
87,0,'i5
1,014,582
367,764
1.428,614
454 819
1,4.34,681
1,652,021
1,041.500
20,984
1,142.977
137,207
516. 770
182,352
7,579
1,030,742
243,049
9,984. 191
583,. 'J92
7,579
5,509
5,509
256,384
86,520
S8, 136
87,584
174,309
146,849
20, 691
268,281
64,820
5,674
6,766
165,604
17,685
190,903
100,730
61,825
.304,864
90,090
1,015,717
158,692
113, 334
35,267
174,6.33
40,283
20,937
57, 194
21.310
661,329
853 765
15.099
91.496
156,180
12,759
489.824
103,622
9,009
399 877
Utica
120,697
185,944
201.480
113,305
1,843,450
60,966
1,3' .3, 649
Victoria
2S9,.525
Virginia Rroup
5,131
5,866
5.395
402,224
8.218 097
2*'*6 424
Webb
71,235
19,610
369 783
Williams (Nortli Cincinnati) .
97 84''
Wills
12, 158
4,550
3,440
84,614
5, .362
45, 790
20.148
Winnifred
39,179
81.686
53.179
3,415
265,289
94,867
210, 726
15,453
61,341
86, 308
84, 446
365. 102
Yates
58,174
079, 038
145. 689
13,342,840
12,892,542
12,156,008
20,158,699
23,819,029
27,495,708
17,257,3.50
28,176,281
195,703,424
Vermilion Range.
Name of mine.
1884.
1885.
1886.
1887.
1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
1
54,612
306,220
3,144
336.002
12,012
373.969
3,079
651,655
2,651
Sibley
62,124
225,484
304,396
394,252
457.341
535,318
532,000
517,570
498. 353
Zenith
14 991
62, 124
225,484
304,396
394,252
511,953
844,682
880,014
894,618
1,167,650
Name of mine.
1893.
1894.
1895.
•
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
435.930
558.050
605.024
40.054
471.545
149.073
4.38.365
207. 103
715.919
123. 183
80?, 359
339.897
81.022
5.169
457.732
79.323
644.801
460.794
170.446
4,670
325.020
60.089
627.379
678 310
212,008
Sibley
Soudan (Minnesota)
370.303
14.388
390,463
432,760
448.707
18.765
592. 196
40,817
426,040
208 284
Zenith
60 082
820,621
948,513
1,077,838
1,088,090
1,278,481
1,265,142
1.771,502
1.655,820
1.786.063
Name of mine.
1902.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
Chandler
645,786
673,863
243.9.37
78,304
275, 168
167,205
460,548
696.736
169.616
113.595
175. 114
161.091
422.162
505.432
74.866
122.783
70.713
86,557
365,739
663,682
91,775
251, 170
205,002
109,818
318,990
766,853
106,9.33
271,496
146,503
181,580
245.684
830,700
43.320
226,8.35
102,977
236,751
50.639
477,606
82.521
127,544
53,070
50,264
9.537 378
477.226
83.167
151.009
74.862.
321,951
6.991.297
1.359.611
Siblev
1.352.575
Soudan (Minnesota)
8 2S1 752
Zenith
1.602.672
2,084,263
1,676,699
1,282,513
1.677,186
1,792,355
1,685,267
841.544
1.108.215
29.125.285
Miscellaneous (In WIsconslni.
Name of mine.
1892.
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
Illinois
Maj^ille
9,044
7,925
10,511
16,472
13,144
10,546
18, 151
ig.Tsi
20.986
22.400
9,044
7,925
10, .511
16,472
13,144
10,546
18,151
19,731
20,986
22.400
HISTORY OF LAKE SUPERIOR MINING.
69
Table of Lake Superior iron-ore shipments from the earliest shipment to date — Continued.
Miscellaneous (In Wisconsin)— Continued.
[Gross Ions.]
Name of mine.
1902.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1909.
Total.
Illinois
47,922
19, 558
26,562
71,413
39,978
20,610
67, 118
61,624
1.5,847
72,180
3.966
19,644
51, lOS
309,741
158,994
411,892
17,913
18,836
15,955
66,804
23,338
71,. 541
23,338
36,749
94,042
132,001
144,589
95,790
122,449
82,759
880,627
Sununaiy.
Years
unknown.
1854.
1855.
1856.
1857.
1858.
1859.
1860.
1861.
1862.
30,000
3,666
1,449
6,343
25,646
22,876
68,832
114, 401
49,909
124, 169
Grand total-...
30,000
3,000
1,449
6,343
25,646
22,876
68,832
114,401
49,909
124, 169
1863.
1864.
1865.
1866.
1867.
1868.
1869.
1870.
1871.
1872.
203,055
243, 127
186,208
278,796
443,567
491, 454
617,444
830,934
779,607
893, 169
203,055
243,127
186,208
278,796
443,567
491,454
617,444
830,934
779,607
893.169
1
1873.
1874.
1875.
1876.
1877.
1878.
1879.
1880.
1881.
1882.
1,158,249
919,257
889,477
1,006,785
1,010,494
10,405
1,023,083
95,221
1,130,019
269,609
1,384,010
592,086
1,579,834
739,635
1,829,394
1, 136, 018
1,158,249
919,257
889,477
1,006,785
1,020,899
1,118,304
1,399,628
1,976,096
2,319,469
2, 965, 412
1883.
1884.
1885.
1886.
1
1887. 1 1888.
1889.
1890.
1891.
1892.
1,022
1,558,034
895,634
1
119,860
430,422
690,435
1,
753, 369
627,380
880,006
1,324,878
1,851,634
1,193,343
1,437,096
1,923,727
1,191,101
2,008,394
2,642,813
1,796,754
2,847,810
2,993,664
2,282,237
1,839,574
2,512,242
1,824,619
2,971,991
1,305,425
1,047,415
2,666,856
2,277,856
4,245
62,124
225,484
304,396
394,252
511,953
844,682
880,014
894,618
1,167,650
9,044
Grand total .. .
2,352,840
2,516,814
2,466,201
3,565,151
4, 764, 107
5,063,877
7,292,643
9,003,725
7,071,053
9,097,642
1893.
1894.
1895.
1896.
1897.
1898.
1899.
1900.
1901.
1,329,385
1,835,893
1,466,197
613,020
820, 621
7,923
1,809,468
2,060,200
1,137,949
1,793,052
948,513
10,511
2, 547, 976
2,097,838
1,923,798
2.781,587
1,077,838
16,472
1,799,971
2,604,221
1,. 560, 467
2,882,079
1,088,090
13, 144
2, 258, 236
2,715,035
1,937,013
4, 275, .809
1,278,481
10,546
2, 498, 461
3,125,039
2,522,265
4,013,700
1,205,142
18,151
2, 795, 866
3,757,010
3,301,062
0,626,384
1,771,502
19,731
2, 875, 295
3,457,522
3,261,221
7,809,535
1, 655, 820
20,986
2, 938, 155
3,245,346
3,619,053
9,004,890
1,786,063
Miscellaneous (in Wisconsin)...
22,400
Grand total
6,073,641
7, 759, 753
10,445,509
9,947,972
12,475,120
14,042,824
18,271,535
19,080,379
20,615,907
1902.
1903.
1904.
1905.
1906.
1907.
1908.
1009.
Total.
3,654,929
3,868,025
4,612,509
13,342,840
2,084,263
23,338
2,912,708
3,040,245
3,749,567
12,892,542
1,676,699
36, 749
2,398,287
2,843,703
3.074,848
12,156,008
1,282,513
94,042
3,705,207
4,215,572
4,495.451
20, 158, 699
1,677,186
3,643,514
4,057,187
5,109,088
23,819,029
1,792,355
3,637,102
4,388,073
4,904,728
27, 495, 708
1,685,267
2,699,850
2,414,632
2,679,156
17,257,350
.841,. 544
4,088,057
4,256,172
4,875,385
28,176,281
1,108,215
82,759
60,896,457
Marquette range
91,838,558
71,212,121
Mesabi range
19.5,703,424
29,125,285
Miscellaneous (in Wisconsin). . .
132,001
144, 589
95,790
122, 449
880,627
Grand total
27,585,904
24, 308, 510
21,849,401
34,384,116 1 38.565.762
42,266.668 ! 26.014.987
42,586.869
449,656,472
CHAPTER III. HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE LAKE SUPERIOR
REGION.
GENERAL STATEMENT.
The Lake Superior region is .among the first in which detailed study and mapping of tlie ancient
crystalline complex have been extended over large^^ areas; it has had special attention })ecause
of the magnitude of the mining industry and the commercial importance in mining of a correct
understanding of geologic structure. Without the mines, expenditure for geologic work upon
so large a scale would scarcely have been undertaken in a district so inaccessible. The increase
of Ivnowledge concerning the geology of the region has closely followed the development of
mming.
The earlier geologic work in the Lake Superior region was of a most general nature and was
necessarily confined to the shores of Lake Superior and to parts immediately accessible from
canoe routes tributary to Lake Superior. The great distances and the difficulties of travel made
detailed mapping impracticable over large areas in the interior. Numerous important observa-
tions were made which have subsequently been found to be of value, but these were in the main
fragmentary. Detailed geologic work has been for the most part confined to the ore-bearing
areas and was not begun until these areas had been located or opened for mining.
WORK OF INDIVIDUALS.
On the Canadian shore of Lake Superior and in adjacent territory the geologic work has been
of a somewhat general nature except in one or two localities. This is so largely because no
ore-bearing districts have been discovered in this part of the region of sufficient commercial
importance to warrant large expenditures for geologic work. The geologists who have contrib-
uted most to the loiowledge of this portion of the district are Bigsby (1825, 1852, 1854), Bayfield
(1829, 1845), Logan (1847, 1852, 1863), Murray (1847, 1863), Macfarlane (1866, 1868, 1869, 1879),
Robert Bell (1870, 1872-1878, 1883, 1890), Selwyn (1873, 1883, 1885, 1890), G. M. Dawson (1875),
Lawson (1886, 1888, 1890, 1891, 1893, 1896), H. L. Smj^th (1891), Pumpelly (1891), W. II. C.
Smith (1892, 1893), Coleman (1895-1902, 1906, 1907, 1909), Willmott (1898, 1901, 1902), Van
Hise (1898, 1900), Mclnnes (1899, 1902, 1903), Parlis (1898, 1902, 1903), Clements (1900),
Miller (1903), W. N. Smith (1905), Burwash (1905), J. M. Bell (1905), and Moore (1907, 1909).
All were in the service of the Canadian government or of the Canadian Geological Survey except
Coleman, Willmott, J. M. Bell, Burwash, and Moore, who represented the Ontario Bureau of Mines,
and Pumpelly, II. L. Smyth, Van Hise, Clements, and W. N. Smith, American geologists. The
principal detailed mapping has been that in the Lake of the Woods and Rainy Lake district
by Lawson (1886-1888), that in the Steep Rock Lake region by Pumpelly and Smyth (1891),
and that in the Michipicoten iron district by Coleman, Willmott (1898), Burwash (1905), and
J. y[. Bell (1905). Closely related is the extremely important work of Logan and Murray (1863)
in the original Iluronian district east of Lake Superior and north of Lake Huron.
In the United States portion of the Lake Superior region early general observations were
made by exj)lorers sent out by the United States Government. Schoolcraft visited the south
shore of Lake Superior and ascended St. Louis River (1821, 1854). Owen (1847, 1851, 1852)
visited particularly the west end of Lake Superior and the upper Mississippi and its tribu-
taries. Norwood (1S52) ascended Montreal and St. Louis rivers. Wiiittlesey (1852, 1S76)
explored nortliern Wisconsin and northern Mijinesota. Whitne}' (1854, 1856, 1857) visited
70
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WOEK IN THE REGION. 71
nearly all parts of tho I^ake Superior shore. Houghton (lcS4U-lS41) made general observa-
tions on the Lake Superior region as a whole.
However, much the larger part of the early geologic exploration was confined to the
regions now known as the Marquette iron and Keweenaw copper districts, the extension of
the Keweenaw district into the Gogebic district, and adjacent parts of the Upper Peninsula.
The first important detailed report on the Keweenaw copper district was that of Douglass
Houghton, of the Michigan Geological Survey, in 1S41, based on work done several years
before. This report led directly to the opening of the Keweenaw copper district. He was
followed by Whitney (1847-1850), Foster (1848, 1850), Jackson (1849, 1S50), and Agassiz
(1850, 1867). Subsequent geologic work on Keweenaw Point of great importance was that of
Brooks and Pumpelly (1872, 187.3), Marvine (187.3), Rominger (1873), and others, for the
Michigan Geological Survey. Field study leading to the preparation of a monograph on the
copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior was begun by Irving prior to 1880 for the Wisconsin
Geological Survey and completed in 1882 for the United States Geological Survey. This
volume " has remained the standard reference book on the district to the present time, though
contributions of much value have been made by Hubbard, Lane, Seaman, and others.
The extension of Houghton's work in the copper district and that of Burt, his assistant,
led directly to the discovery and opening of the Manjuette iron-bearing district in 1848. The
important early geologic work in this district was done by Burt (1850), Foster and Wliitney
(1851), Kimball (1865), and Credner (1869),' all in the service of the United States Government.
Later followed the important contributions of the geologists of the Michigan Geological Survey —
Brooks (1873, 1876), Wright (1879, 1880), Rominger (1873, 1881), and others. Wadsworth's
contributions to the geology of the Marquette and Keweenaw districts (1880, 1881, 1S84, 1890,
1891) have been the subject of much controversy.
After the opening of the Keweenaw and Marquette districts geologic mapping began to
be extended to the south and west through the Upper Peninsula of Michigan and northern
Wisconsin. Particularly noteworthy are the reports of the Michigan Geological Survey on the
general geology of the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, but particularly of the Manjuette,
Menominee, and Gogebic districts, by Brooks (1873, 1876), Wright (1879, 1880), Rominger
(1881, 1895), and Alexander Winchell (1888). The Menominee range in its Wisconsin extension
was reported on by Wright (1880) and Brooks (1880) for the Wisconsm Survey, and Fulton
(1888). The Penokee district and adjacent territory in northern Wisconsin was described by the
geologists of the Wisconsin Survey —Lapham (1860), Whittlesey (1863), Irving (1874, 1877, 1880),
Sweet (1876), Chamberlin (1878), and Wright (1880). Early general observations in northern
Wisconsm were contributed by Percival (1856), Daniels (1858), Lapham (1860), Hall (1861-62),
Irving (1872-1874, 1877, 1878, 1880, 1882, 1883), Murrish (1873), Eaton (1873), Wright (1873),
Chamberlm (1877, 1878, 1880, 1882, 1883), Strong (1880), Sweet (1880, 1882), and Van Hise
(1884).
The detailed geologic work by the United States Geological Survey leadmg up to the prep-
aration of the series of monographs on the iron-bearing districts of Michigan and Wisconsin
was begun in the Gogebic district by R. D. Irving and C. R. Van Hise in 1884. On the comple-
tion of work there detailed work was taken up in the Marquette district, 1888 to 1895, by Van
Hise, Bayley, Merriam, Smyth, and others, and a monographic report ^ was issued in 1895;
similar work was done in the Crystal Falls district from 1893 to 1898 by Van Hise, Bayley,
Clements, Smyth, Merriam, and others, and a monograph'' was issued in 1899; and the Menomi-
nee district was examined by Van Hise, Baylej^, Clements, Weidman, and others, and a mono-
graph'* was issued in 1904. Since the completion of the work in the Menominee district in 1900
the United States Geological Survey has been devoting its attention to Mhuaesota, although a
small amount of general work has been done in Michigan and Wisconsin. While the United
States Geological Survey has been mapping the districts of the Upper Peninsula, the Michigan
Geological Survey has given relatively less attention to this area than it had previously,
. o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1SS3. c Idem, vol. 36, 1899, 512 pp., 53 pis.
* Idem, vol. 28, 1S95, 008 pp., 35 pis., and atlas. d Idem, vol. 40, 1904, 513 pp., 43 pis.
72 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
but durinf,' this poriod it lias issued important rp])()rts on tho districts of Keweenaw Point, Por-
cupine JMountains, and Isle Royal l)y Hubbard, Lane, Wri<j;lit, and others. Lane and Seaman
in 1909 and 1910 published an interesting summary of their views on Michigan geologJ^ In
1909 and 1910 R. C. Allen, successor to Mr. Lane as state geologist, mapped and rcj)orted on
the Iron River district of Michigan ami then took up the mapping of the region between the
Iron River district and Lake Gogebic.
The Wisconsin Geological Survey, after the completion of the work of Irving, ("hamberlin,
Wright, and others, was discontinued in 1SS3. The new Wisconsin Geological and Natural
History Survey, established in 1897, has been engaged continuously tlu-ough Weidman in
mapping the crystalline rocks of north-central Wisconsin and the outlying areas, including the
Baraboo iron district. Hobbs and Leith (1907) mapped tho volcanic rocks of Fox River in
central Wisconsin. In 1910 W. O. Hotchkiss, for the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History
Survey, took up the detailed mapping of the Florence iron-bearing district of northeastern
Wisconsin, and F. T. Thwaites, for the same organization, examined in detail the Kewee-
nawan and Cambrian sandstones on the southwestern shore of Lake Superior, with a view
of ascertaining their relations.
In Minnesota early work of a most general nature was done by Owen (1851, 1852), School-
craft (1821, 1854), Norwood (1847, 1852), Eames (1866), and WTiittlesey (1866, 1876). The
Minnesota shore and the Gunflint Lake areas were examined in detail by Irving and assistants
in 1880. The Minnesota Survey began its study of the crystalline rocks of northern Minnesota
in 1872 and continued it until 1901. The men engaged in this work were N. H. Winchell,
Alexander N. Winchell, H. V. Winchell, U. S. Grant, J. E. Spurr, and others. A number of
special reports were issued, but the final general account appeared in volumes 4, 5, and 6 of the
Minnesota Survey, published, respectively, in 1899, 1900, and 1901. The Minnesota Survey
was then discontinued. The work of the United States Geological Survey in ^linnesota was
begun in the Vermilion district m 1896 by VanHise, Clements, Bayley, and Leith, and a mono-
graphic report" was issued in 1903. Upon the completion of this work in 1899 work was taken
up in the Mesabi district by Leith under direction of C. R. A'an Hise, and the monograph* on
this district was issued in 1903. Since that time no detailed mapping has been done in the
Minnesota region by the LTnited States Geological Survey, but many general observations have
been made. Geologic work in ^Minnesota for commercial purposes has been done by Merriam
and Sebenius in the Vermilion and Mesabi districts and by Leith, Zapfl'e, and Adams in the
Cu3Tma district.
Detailed summaries of the work of all the men above mentioned and others will be found
in the United States Geological Survey monographs on the several Lake Superior districts, and
in Bulletin 360 of the United States Geological Survey, on the pre-Cambrian geologj^ of North
America. Only such names and reports have been mentioned here as seem necessary to a
general sketch of the history of geologic knowledge in the region. A number of the men
named have contributed, in addition to the reports specifically mentioned, valuable information
on the geology of the Lake Superior region in general.
GROWTH OF GEOLOGIC KNOWLEDGE.
An attempt has been made in Bulletin 360 (cited above) to sum up the salient features of
the history of the development of geologic knowledge concerning the Lake Superior region.
This summary will not be repeated here. It shows how the present Icnowledge of the district
has resulted from a long series of approximations, in general successively more adequate owino
to gradual accumulation of facts, improvement of means of studying them, and general advance
in knowledge of geologic principles. Needless but perhaps inevitable confusion has resulted
locally from duplication of geologic terms by difi"erent geologic observers anil from varying
inferences drawn b}^ different men from the same set of facts. It is indeed curious to note how
differently truth is revealed to diflferent observers. A chronologic series of geologic maps of
the Marciuette district shows how it is possible in the development of geologic knowledge gradually
a UoQ. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, 4ia pp., 13 pis., and atlas. >> Idem, vol. 43, 1903, 316 pp., 33 pis.
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE REGION. 73
to make closer approximations to actual conditions. It also illustrates well the fact, sometimes
lost sight of, that a geologic map represents an approximation to the truth, limited in its accu-
racy and adequacy by the general stage of advancement of the science, and perhaps falling short
of tliis limit if the map maker does not fairly represent that advance. The n'aps published
with tliis monograph are closer approxmaations to the truth than the maps previously pub-
hshed. These maps in turn will be superseded by better approximations as facts accumulate
and geologic knowledge advances. It is hoped that the user of these maps will measure them
by their advance over preexistmg maps rather than by the distance they fall short of the ideally
perfect map.
In the geologic literature on the Lake Superior region a progressive change may be noted
from the fragmentary descriptions of earlier writers to more elaborate descriptions accompanied
by attempts at stratigraphic and structural classification and the development of better prin-
ciples for that purpose, and in turn a change to better understanding of the principles of corre-
lation of the rocks, based on better knowledge of these rocks and of the conditions of the forma-
tion of rocks of tliis kind. The work on ore deposits similarly began with fragmentary descrip-
tions, followed by fuller descriptions and attempts at lithologic and structural classification,
then by hj^^otheses on the origin of the ore, which gradually gave way to accepted theories
based on qualitative evidence. The present monograph is believed to mark a further devel-
opment in the same direction by transferring the theories of origin of the ore more largely from
a qualitative to a quantitative basis.
Mention of names in connection with the general tendencies outlined above would lead
to endless detail, but the tendencies may be noted in terms of years and organizations. Before
1870 the geologic work was fragmentary, descriptive, and as a whole unorganized, though
work of exceptional merit was done by individuals. The period from 1870 to 18S0 was
marked by the better organized efforts of the Michigan and Wisconsin geological surveys, with
corresponding improvements m the organization of geologic knowledge of the parts of the Lake
Superior region studied, affording the first real contribution to the stratigraphic and structural
geology of the region. Then the kinds of geologic work really began which are now followed
in the Lake Superior region. In the early eighties the United States Geological Survey took
up the study of the district, its first reports being based largely on information previously
gathered by Irving and other members of the Wisconsin and other State geological surveys.
Since its entrance into the region the United States Geological Survey has studied the problem
more continuously than the state surveys, over a larger area, and with a uniform plan, with
the result that its publications since the early eighties mark the principal steps in the advance-
ment of knowledge of the region. This is said without disparagement of contemporaneous
work by the Michigan, Wisconsui, Minnesota, Ontario, and Canadian surveys, which have
issued reports on different phases of the problem, but for reasons mentioned above these
reports for the most part have been more limited in their scope than those of the LTnitetl States
Geological Survey. In recent years the Wisconsin Geological Survey has again taken up the
mapping of the crystalline rocks of northern Wisconsin with thorouglmess and with good
results. The Michigan Geological Survey also has now taken up work in the Upper Peninsula of
Michigan, on the iron-bearing district of Iron River and on the copper-bearing series, which is
rapidly advancing our knowledge. It is to be hoped that all local organizations will continue to
develop. Even though they do, however, there will still be need for attention to the region b\'
the United States Geological Survey, because its field of work is broader and it is in better
position to take up general correlation and structural problems common to the district.
BIBLIOGRAPHY.
The following bibliography comprises references to literature on the geology of the region
arranged first by districts and then by date. Reports on districts and mines that do not refer
primarily to the geology are not here included. Also no reference is made in the following
list to literature dealing with the physical geography or with the Pleistocene geology of this
region. iUl references to these subjects will be found as footnotes in Chapters IV and XVI.
74 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SI^PERIOK REGION.
MICHIGAN.
Third annual report of the Geological Survey of Michigan, by Douglass Houghton, State of Michigan, House
of Representatives, No. 8, pp. 1-33.
Fourth annual report of the state geologist, Douglass Houghton. Idem, No. 27, 184 pp. See also Metalliferous
veins of the Northern Peninsula of Michigan, by Douglass Houghton. Am. Jour. Sci., 1st ser., vol. 41, 1841, pp.
183-18G.
Geology of Porters Island and Copper Harbor, by John Locke. Trans. Am. Phil. Soc, vol. 9, 1844, pp. 311-312,
with maps.
Mineralogy and geology of Lake Superior, by 11. D. Rogers. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. HLst., vol. 2, 1840, pp.
124-125.
Report of observations made in the survey of the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, by John Locke. Senate Docs.,
1st sess. 30th Cong., 1847, vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 183-199.
Report of J. D. Whitney. Idem, pp. 221-230.
Report of J. D. Whitney. Senate Docs., 2d sess. 30th Cong., 1848^9, vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 1.54-1,59.
Report of J. W. Foster. Idem, pp. 159-163.
The Lake Superior copper and iron district, by J. D. Whitney. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 3, 1849, pp.
210-212.
On the geological structure of Keweenaw Point, by Charles T. Jackson. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1849, 2d
meetmg, pp. 288-301.
Report on the geological and mineralogical survey of the mineral lands of the United States in the State of Michigan,
by Charles T. Jackson. Senate Docs., 1st sess. 31st Cong., 1849-50, vol. 3, No. 1, pp. 371-935, with 14 maps. Contains
reports by Messrs. Jackson, Dickenson, Mclntyre, Barnes, Locke, Foster and \Miitney, Whitney, Gibbs, ^\^litney, jr.,
Hill and Foster, Foster, Burt, Hubbard.
United States geological survey of public lands in Michigan; field notes, by John Locke. Idem, pp. 572-587.
Synopsis of the explorations of the geological corps in the Lake Superior land district in the Northern Peninsula
of Michigan, by J. W. Foster and J. D. Whitney. Idem, pp. 605-626, with 4 maps.
Notes on the topography, soil, geology, etc., of the district between Portage Lake and the Ontonagon, by J. D.
"WTiitney. Idem, pp. 649-666. '
Report of J. D. "WTiitney. Idem, pp. 705-711.
Report of J. W. Foster. Idem, pp. 766-772.
Notes on the geology and topography of the country adjacent to Lakes Superior and Michigan, in the Chippewa
land district, by J. W. Foster. Idem, pp. 773-786.
To].)(>graphy and geology of the survey with reference to mines and minerals of a district of township lines south
of Lake Superior, by William A. Burt. Idem, pp. 811-832, with a geologic map opposite p. 880.
General observations upon the geology and topography of the district south of Lake Superior, subdi\'ided in 1845
under direction of Douglass Houghton; deputy surveyor, Bela Hubbard. Idem, pp. 833-842.
Geological report of the survey "with reference to mines and minerals" of a district of township lines in the
State of Michigan, in the year 1846, and tabular statement of specimens collected. Idem, pp. 842-S82, with a geologic
map.
Report on the geology and topography of the Lake Superior land district; part 1, copper lands, by J. W. Foster
and J. D. WTiitney. Executive Docs., 1st sess. 31st Cong., 1849-50, vol. 9, No. 69, 224 pp., with map.
Report on the geology and topography of the Lake Superior land district; part 2, The iron region, by J. W. Foster
and J. D. Whitney. Senate Docs., special sess. 32d Cong., 1851, vol. 3, No. 4, 406 pp., with maps. Sec also Aperfu
de I'ensemble des terrains Siluriens du Lac Sup&ieur, by J. W. Foster and J. D. AMiitncy. Bull. Soc. geol. France,
vol. 2, 18.50, pp. 89-100.
On the Azoic system as developed in the Lake Superior laud district, by J. W. Foster and J. D. Whitney. Proc.
Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1851, 5th meeting, pp. 4-7.
On the age of the sandstone of Lake Superior, with a description of the phenomena of the association of igneous
rocks, by J. W. Foster and J. D. Whitney. Idem, pp. 22-38.
Geology, mineralogy, and topography of the lands around Lake Superior, by Charles T. Jackson. Senate Docs.,
1st sess. 32d Cong., 1851-52, vol. 11, pp. 232-244.
Age of the Lake Superior sandstone, by Charles T. Jackson. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 7, 1860, pp. 396-398.
Age of the sandstone, by William B. Rogers. Idem, pp. 394-395.
First biennial rei)ort of the progress of the geological survey of Michigan, by Alexander Winchell. Lansing, 1861,
339 pp.
Some contributions to a knowledge of the constitution of the copper ranges of Lake Superior, by C. P. Williams
and J. F. Blandy. Am. Jour. Sci., 2d ser., vol. 34, 1862, pp. 112-120.
On the iron ores of Marquette, Michigan, by J. P. Kimball. Idem, vol. 39, 1865, pp. 290-303.
On the position of the sandstone of the southern slope of a portion of Keweenaw Point, Lake Superior, by Alexander
Agassiz. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 11, 1867, pp. 244-246.
Die vorsilurischen Gebilde der "Obcm Halbinsel von Michigan" in Xord-Amerika, by Hermann Credner.
Zeitschr. Deutch. geol. Gesell., vol. 21, 1869, pp. 516-554. See al.so Die Gliederung der eozoischen (vorsilurischen)
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE REGION. 75
Formationsgruppe Nord-Amcrikas, by Hermann Credner. Zeitschr. pesammtcn Naturwissenschaften, vol. 32, Giebel,
1868, pp. 353-405.
On the age of the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, by T. B. Brookn and R. Pumpelly. Am. Jour. Sci.,
3d ser., vol. 3, 1872, pp. 428^32.
Iron-bearing rocks, by T. B. Brooks. Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, pt. 1, 1869-1873, 319 pp., with maps.
Copper-bearing rocks, by R. Pumpelly. Idem, pt. 2, pp. 1^6„62-94, with maps.
Copper-bearing rocks, by A. R. Marvine. Idem, pt. 2, pp. 47-61, 95-140.
Paleozoic rocks, by C. Rominger. Idem, pt. 3, 102 pp.
Observations on the Ontonagon silver-mining district and the slate ciuarries of Huron Bay, by C. Rominger.
Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 3, pt. 1, 1876, pp. 151-166.
On the youngest Huronian rocks south of Lake Superior and the age of the copper-bearing series, by T. B. Brooks.
Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 11, 1876, pp. 206-211.
Classified list of rocks observed in the Huronian series south of Lake Superior, by T. B. Brooks. Idem, vol. 12,
pp. 194-204.
Metasomatic development of the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, by Raphael Pumpelly. Proc. Am.
Acad. Arts Sci., vol. 13, 1878, pp. 253-309.
First annual report of the commissioner of mineral statistics of the State of Michigan for 1877-1878, by Charles E.
Wright. Marquette, 1879, 229 pp.
Notes on the iron and copper districts of Lake Superior, by M. E. Wadsworth. Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard
Coll., whole ser., vol. 7; geol. ser., vol. 1, No. 1, 157 pp. See also On the origin of the hon ores of the Marquette dis-
trict, Lake Superior. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 20, 1878-1880, pp. 470-479. On the age of the copper-bearing
rocks of Lake Superior (abstract). Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 29th meeting, pp. 429-4.30. On the relation of the
"Keweenawan series" to the Eastern sandstone in the vicinity of Torch Lake, Michigan. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat.
Hist., vol. 23, 1884-1888, pp. 172-180; Science, vol. 1, 1883, pp. 248-249, 307.
Upper Peninsula, by C. Rominger. Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 4, 1881, pp. 1-248, with a geologic map.
Geological report on the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, exhibiting the progress of work from 1881 to 1884, by
C. Rominger. Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 5, pt. 1, 1895, 179 pp.
On a supposed fossil from the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, by M. E. ^^'adsworth. Proc. Boston Soc.
Nat. Hist., vol. 23, 1884-1888, pp. 208-212.
Observations on the junction l>etween the Eastern sandstone and the Keweenaw series on Keweenaw Point, Lake
Superior, by R. D. Irving and T. C. Chamberlin. Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 23, 1885, 124 pp., 17 pi.
Mode of deposition of the iron ores of the Menominee range, Michigan, by John Fulton. Trans. Am. Inst. Min.
Eng., vol. 16, 1887, pp. 525-536.
Report of N. H. Winchell. Sixteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1887, pp. 13-129.
Report of Alexander Winchell. Idem, pp. 133-391.
Unpublished field notes made by W. N. Merriam in the summers of 1888 and 1889.
Unpublished field notes made by C. R. Van Hise in the summer of 1890.
The greenstone schist areas of the Menominee and Marquette regions of Michigan, by George Huntington Williams.
Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 62, 1890, pp. 31-238, with 16 pis. and maps. See also Some examples of dynamic meta-
morphism of the ancient eruptive rocks on the south shore of Lake Superior. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 36th meeting,
1888, pp. 225-226.
A sketch of the geology of the Marquette and Keweenawan district, by M. E. \\'adsworth. Along the south shore
of Lake Superior, by Julian Ralph. 1st ed., 1890, pp. 63-82.
Explanatoi-y and historical note, by R. D. Irving. Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 62, 1890, pp. 1-30.
The Penokee iron-bearing series of Michigan and Wisconsin, by R. D. Irving and C. R. Van Hise. Mon. U. S.
Geol. Survey, vol. 19, 1892, 534 pp., with plates and maps. See also Tenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, for 1888-89,
1890, pp. 341-507, with 23 pis. and maps.
A sketch of the geology of the Marquette and Keweenawan district, by M. E. \\'adsworth. Along the south shore
of Lake Superior, by Julian Ralph. 2d ed., 1891, pp. 75-99.
On the relations of the Eastern sandstone of Keweenaw Point to the Lower Silurian limestone, by M. E. Wadsworth.
Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 42, 1891, pp. 170-171 (communicated).
The South Trap range of the Keweenawan series, by M. E. Wadsworth. Idem, pp. 417^19.
Unpublished field notes made by Raphael Pumpelly and C. R. Van Hise in the summers of 1891 and 1892.
The Huronian volcanics south of Lake Superior, by C. R. Van Hise. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 4, 1892,
pp. 435-436.
Microscopic characters of rocks and minerals, by A. C. Lane. Rept. State Board Geol. Survey Michigan for
1891-92, Lansing, 1893, pp. 176-183.
A sketch of the geology of the iron, gold, and copper districts of Michigan, by M. E. Wadsworth. Idem, pp. 75-174.
See also Ann. Repts. 1888-1892, pp. 38-73.
Subdivisions of the Azoic or Archean in northern Michigan, by M. E. Wadsworth. Am. Jour. Sci., vol. 45, 1893,
pp. 72-73.
The succession in the Marquette iron district of Michigan, by C. R. ^'an Hise. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 5,
1893, pp. 5-6.
76 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The geology of that portion of the Menominee range east of Menominee River, by Nclscm P. Ilulst. Proc. Lake
Superior Min. Inst., March, 1893, pp. 19-29.
A pontact between the Lower Iluronian and the underlying graiiile in the Ropublir trough, near Republic, Mich.,
by n. L. Smyth. Jour. Geology, vol. 1, Xo. 3, 1893. pp. 2G8-274.
Two new geological cross sections of Keweenaw Point, by L. L. Hubbard. Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 2,
1894, pp. 79-96.
Chai-acter of folds in the Marquette iron district, by C. R. Van Hise. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 42d meeting,
1894, p. 171 (abstract).
Relations of the Lower Menominee and Lower Marquette series of Michigan (preliminary), by II. L. Smyth. Am.
Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 47, 1894, pp. 216-223.
The quartzite tongue at Republic, Mich., by H. L. Smyth. Jour. Geology, vol. 2, 1894, pp. 680-691.
The relation of the \ein at the Central mine, Keweenaw Point, to the Kearsarge conglomerate, by L. L. Hubbard.
Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 3, 1895, pp. 74-83.
The Marquette iron range of Michigan, by G. A. Xewett. Idem. pp. 87-108. With geologic map.
The volcanics of the Michigamme district of Michigan (preliminary), l)y J. Morgan Clements. Jour. Geology,
vol. 3, 1895, pp. 802-822.
A central Wisconsin base-level, by C. R. Van Hise. Science, new ser., vol. 4, 1896, pp. 57-59. See also A northern
Michigan base-level. Idem, pp. 217-220.
Organic markings in Lake Superior iron ores, by W. S. Gresley. Science, new ser., vol. 3, 1896, ])p. 622-623;
Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., vol. 26, 1897, pp. 527-534.
The Marquette iron-bearing district of Michigan, by C. R. Van Hise and W. S. Bayley; with a chapter on the
Republic trough, by H. L. Smyth. Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, 608 pp. With atlas of 39 plates. Pre-
iminary report on same district published in Fifteenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1895, pp. 477-650.
The origin and mode of occurrence of the Lake Superior copper deposits, by M. E. Wadsworth. Trans. Am. Inst.
MLn. Eng., vol. 27, 1898, pp. 669-696.
Some dike features of the Gogebic iron range, by C. M. Ross. Idem, pp. 556-563.
Geological report on Isle Royale, Michigan, by A. C. Lane. Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898, 281 pp.
With geologic map.
Keweenaw Point, with particular reference to the felsites and their associated rocks, by L. L. Hubbard. Geol.
Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, 155 pp. With plates.
Unpublished notes by Prof. A. E. Seaman and thesis on the Gogebic district, by W. J. Sutton, Michigan College
of Mines.
The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan, by J. Morgan Clements and H. L. Smyth, with a chapter on
the Sturgeon River tongue, by W. S. Bayley, and an introduction by C. R. Van Hise. Mon. V. S. Geol. Survey, vol.
36, 1899. With geologic maps.
Geology of the Mineral range, by A. E. Seaman. First Ann. Rept. Copper-Mining Industry of Lake Superior,
1899, pp. 49-60.
Note sur la region cupriffere de Textremit^ nordest de la peninsula de Keweenaw (Lac Superieur), par Louis Duparc.
Archives sci. phys. et nat., vol. 10, 1900, p. 21.
The Menominee special folio, by Charles R. Van Hise and ^\■. S. Bayley. Geologic Atlas U. S., folio 62, U. S.
Geol. Survey, 1900.
Unpublished notes by Prof. A. E. Seaman made for Michigan Geological Survey, Michigan College of Mines, and
United States Cieological Survey. See also unpublished maps prepared for Michigan exhibit at St. Louis exposition,
1904.
Unpublished thesis by W. O. Hotchkiss, Geol. Dept. Univ. Wisconsin, 1903.
Report of special committee on the Lake Superior region to Frank D. Adams, Robert Bell, C. Willard Hayes, and
Charles R. Van Hise, general committee on the relations of the Canadian and the United States geological sur\-eys,
1904. Jour. Geology, vol. 13, 1905, pp. 89-104. The special committee consisted of Frank D. Adams, Robert Bell,
C. K. Leith, C. R. Van Hise. There were present by invitation W. G. Miller, A. C. Lane, and for parts of the trip
A. E. Seaman, W. N. Merriam, J. U. Sebenius, and W. N. Smith.
Maps of the Marquette, Menominee, and Gogebic districts, Michigan, prepared by A. E. Seaman for the St. Louis
exposition, 1904. Unpublished.
The Menominee ii-on-bearing district of Michigan, by W. S. Bayley. Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 46, 1904, 513 pp.
The geology of some of the lands in the Upper Peninsula, by R. S. Rose. Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., 1904,
pp. 88-102.
Unpublished notes of field work done in 1905, by G. W. Corey and C. F. Bowen.
Black River work, by A. C. Lane. Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1904, 1905, pp. 158-162.
Report of progress in the Porcupines, by F. E. Wright. Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1903, 1905, pp.
33^4. Also Preliminary geological map of the Porcupine Mountains and vicinity, by F. E. Wright and A. C. Lane.
Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1908, 1909, pi. 1.
The geology of Keweenaw Point -a brief description, by A. C. Lane. Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 12,
1907, pp. 81-104.
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE REGION. 77
Notes on the geological section of Michigan; part 1, the pre-Ordovician, by A. C. Lane and A. E. Seaman. Jour.
Geology, vol. 15, 1907, pp. 680-695. Also notes on the geological section of Michigan, part 2, from the St. Peter sand-
stone up, by A. C. Lane. Jour. Geology, vol. 18, 1910, pp. 393^29.
A geological section from Bessemer down Black River, by W. C. Gordon and Alfred C. Lane. Ann. Rept. Geol.
Survey Michigan for 1906, 1907, pp. 396-507.
Unpublished geologic maps of Menominee and Florence districts, Michigan and Wisconsin, prepared for Oliver
Iron Mining Company by W. N. Merriam.
Unpublished maps and report on geology of Crystal Falls, Menominee, and Iron River districts, Michigan, prepared
during commercial surveys, by C. K. Leith, R. C. Allen, and others.
Report on geology of Iron River district of Michigan, by R. C. Allen. Michigan Geo!, and Biol. Survey, pub. 3,
1910, 151 pp., with geologic map.
The intrusive rocks of Mount Bohemia, Michigan, by F. E. Wright. Ann. Rept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 1908,
1909, pp. 361-397.
NORTHERN WISCONSIN.
Report of a geological reconnaissance of the Chippewa land district of Wisconsin, etc., by David D. (.)wen. Senate
Docs., 1st sess. 30th Cong., 1848, vol. 7, No. 57, 72 pp.
Preliminary report containing outlines of the progress of the geological survey of Wisconsin and Iowa up to October
11, 1847, by Da\-id Dale Owen. Senate Docs., 1st sess. 30th Cong., 1847, vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 160-173.
Description of part of Wisconsin south of Lake Superior, by Charles WTiittlesey. Report of a geological survey of
Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, pp. 419-470.
The Penokee iron range, by Increase A. Lapham. Trans. Wisconsin State Agr. Soc, vol. 5, 1858-59, pp. 391^00,
with map. See also Report to the directors of the Wisconsin and Lake Superior Mining and Smelting Company, in
the Penokee iron range of Lake Superior, with reports and statistics showing its mineral wealth and prospects, charter
and organization of the Wisconsin and Lake Superior Mining and Smelting Company, Milwaukee, 1860, pp. 22-37.
Geological report of the State of Wisconsin, by James Hall. Report of the Superintendent of the Geological SiuT^ey
(1861), exhibiting the progress of the work, 52 pp.
Physical geography and general geology, by James Hall. Report on the geological survey of the State of Wisconsin,
vol. 1, 1862, pp. 1-72.
The Penokee mineral range, Wisconsin, by Charles Whittlesey. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 9, 1863, pp
235-244.
On some points in the geology of northern Wiscon.sin, by R. D. Irving. Trans. WiscoiLsin Acad. Sci., vol. 2, 1873-74
pp. 107-119. See also On the age of the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, and on the westward continuation of
the Lake Superior synclinal. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 8, 1874, pp. 46-56. Ann. Rept. Progress and Results of
Wisconsin Geol. Survey for 1876, pp. 17-25. Report of progress and results for 1874. Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 2,
pp. 46-49.
Notes on the geology of northern Wisconsin, by E. T. Sweet. Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci., 1875-76, vol. 3, pp
40-55.
Note on the age of the crystalline rocks of Wisconsin, by R. D. Irving. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 13, 1877, pp,
307-309.
Report of progress and results for the year 1875, by O. W. Wight. Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 2, 1873-1877, pp,
67-89.
Geology of central Wisconsin, by R. D. Irving. Idem, pp. 409-636, with 2 atlas maps.
On the geology of northern Wisconsin, by R. D. Irving. Ann. Rept. Wisconsin Geol. Sm-vey for 1877, pp. 17-25.
Report on the eastern part of the Penokee range, by T. C. Chamberlin. Idem, pp. 25-29.
General geology of the Lake Superior region, by R. D. Irving. Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 1-24. Geol-
ogy of the eastern Lake Superior district. Idem, pp. 51-238, with 6 atlas maps. Mineral resources of Wisconsin.
Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., vol. 8, 1880, pp. 478-508, with map. Note on the stratigraphy of the Huronian series of
northern Wisconsin, and on the equivalency of the Huronian of the Marquette and Penokee districts. Am. Jour. Sci.,
3d ser., vol. 17, 1879, pp. 393-398.
Huronian series west of Penokee Gap, by C. E. Wright. Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 241-301, with an
atlas map.
Geology of the western Lake Superior district, by E. T. Sweet. Idem, pp. 303-362, with an atlas map.
Geology of the upper St. Croix district, by T. (". Chamberlin and Moses Strong. Idem, pp. 363-428, with 2 atlas
maps.
Geology of the Menominee region, by T. B. Brooks. Idem, pp. 430-599, with 3 atlas maps.
Geology of the Menominee iron region (economic resources, lithology, and westerly and southerly extension), by
Charles E. Wright. Idem, pp. 666-734.
The quartzitea of Barron and Chippewa counties, by Moses Strong, E. T. Sweet, F. H. Brotherton, and T. C.
Chamberlin. Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 4, 1873-1879, pp. 573-581.
Geology of the upper Flambeau Valley, by F. H. King. Idem, pp. 583-615.
Crystalline rocks of the Wisconsin Valley, by R. D. Irving and C. R. Van Hise. Idem, pp. 623-714.
78 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
General geology (of Wisconsin), by T. C. Chaniberlin. Geology of Wiscontiin, vol. 1, 1SS3, pp. 3-:50O, ■n-ith an atlaa
map.
Lithologry of Wiscon.sin, by R. D. Irving. Idem, pp. 340-361.
Transition from the copper-bearing series to the Potsdam, by L. C. Wooster. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 27, 1884,
pp. 463^65.
Geology of the St. Croix Dalles, by C. P. lierkey. Am. Geologist, vol. 20, 1897, pp. 345-383; vol. 21, 1898, pp.
139-155, 270-294.
Preliminary report on copper-bearing rocks in Douglas County, Wis., by U. S. Grant. Hull. Wisconsin Geol.
and Nat. Hist. Survey No. (i, 1901.
The pre-Potsdam Peneplain of the pre-Cambrian of north-central Wisconsin, by S. Weidman. Jour. Geology,
vol. 11, 1903, pp. 289-313.
Unpublished thesis Univ. Wisconsin, 1905.
The geology of north-central W'isconsin, by S. W'eidman. Bull. Wisconsin Cieol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16,
1907. Summary fiu-nished by author in 1905.
MINNESOTA.
Account of a journey to the Coteau des Prairies, viilh a description of the red pipestone cpiarry and granite bowlders
found there, by George Catlin. Am. Jour. Sci., 1st ser., vol. 38, pp. 138-146.
Report of J. G. Norwood. Senate Docs., 1st sess. 30th Cong., 1847, vol. 2, No. 2, pp. 73-134.
Description of the geology of middle and western Minnesota, including the country adjacent to the northwest and
part of the southwest shore of Lake Superior; illustrated by numerous general and local sections, woodcuts, and a map,
by J. G. Norwood. Report of a geological survey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, pp. 209-418.
Report of the State geologist on the metalliferous region bordering on Lake Superior, by Henry II. Eames. St.
Paul, 1866, 23 pp.
Geological reconnaissance of the northern, middle, and other counties of Minnesota, by Henry II. Eames. St.
Paul, 1866, 58 pp.
Notes upon the geology of some portions of Minnesota, from St. Paul to the western part of the State, by James
Hall. Trans. Am. Philos. Soc, new ser., vol. 13, 1869, pp. 329-340.
Report on the geological survey of the State of Iowa, containing results of examinations and observations made
within the years 1866, 1867, 1868, and 1869, by Charles A. WTiite. Des Moines, 1870, vol. 1, 391 pp.; vol. 2, 443 pp.
First Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell, 1873, 129 pp.
Thegeology of the Minnesota Valley, by N. II. Winchell. Second Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minne-
sota, 1874, pp. 127-212.
Ueber die krystallinischen gesteine von Minnesota in Nord-.\merika, by A. Streng and J. H. Kloos. Leonhard's
Jahrbuch, 1877, pp. 31, 113, 225. Translated by N. H. Winchell in Eleventh Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota, 1883, pp. 30-85.
Sixth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1877, by N. H. WincheU, 226 pp.
Sketch of the work of the season of 1878, by N. H. Winchell. Seventh Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota, for 1878, pp. 9-25.
The cupriferous series at Duluth, by N. H. Winchell. Eighth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota,
for 1879, pp. 22-26. '
Preliminary report on the geology of central and western Minnesota, by Warren Upham. Idem, pp. 70-125.
Report of Prof. C. W. Hall. Idem, pp. 126-138.
Preliminary list of rocks, by N. H. Winchell. Ninth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Sur\-ey Minnesota, for 1880,
pp. 10-114.
The cupriferous series in Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 29th meeting, 1881, pp.
422-425. See also Ninth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1880, pp. 38.5-387.
Preliminary list of rocks, by N. H. Winchell. Tenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1881,
pp. 9-122.
Notes on rock outcrops in central Minnesota, by Warren Upham. Eleventh Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist.
Survey Minnesota, for 1882, pp. 86-136.
The iron region of northern Minnesota, by Albert H. Chester. Idem, pp. 154-107.
Note on the age of the rocks of the Mesabi and Vermilion iron district, by N . H. Winchell. Idem, pp. 168-170. See
also Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1884, 33d meeting, pp. 363-379.
The geology of Minnesota, by N. 11. Winchell and Warren Upham. Final Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota, voL 1, 1884, 695 pp.; vol. 2, 1888, 697 pp.
Notes of a trip across the Mesabi range to Vermilion Lake, by N. II. Winchell. Thirteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1884, pp. 20-24.
The crystalline rocks of Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell. Idem, pp. 36-38.
The crystalline rocks of the Northwest, by N. H. Winchell. Idem, i)p. 124-140.
Report of a trip on the upper Mississippi and to Vermilion Lake, by Bailey Willis. Tenth Census, vol. 15, 1886,
pp 457^67.
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE REGION. 79
Report of geological observations made in northeastern Minnesota during the season of 188G, by Alexander
Winchell. Fifteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, fur 1886, pp. 5-207.
Geological report of N. H. Winchell. Idem, pp. 209-399, with a map.
Report of N. H. Winchell. Sixteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1887, pp. 13-129.
Report of Alexander Winchell. Idem, pp. 133-391. See also The unconformities of the Animikie in Minnesota.
Am. Geologist, vol. 1, 1888, pp. 14-24. Two systems confounded in the Huronian. Idem, vol. 3, 1889, pp. 212-214,
339-340. Systematic results of a field study of the Archean rocks of the Northwest. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 37th
meeting, 1889, p. 205. The geological position of the Ogishke conglomerate. Idem, 38th meeting, 1890, pp. 234-235.
Report of H. V. Winchell. Sixteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1887, pp. 39-5-462,
with map.
The distribution of the granites of the Northwestern States and their general lithologic characters, by C. W. Hall.
Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 37th meeting, 1889, pp. 189-190.
Report of N. H. Winchell. Seventeenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1888, pp. 5-74.
See also The Animikie black slates and quartzites and the Ogishke conglomerate of Minnesota, the equivalent of the
"Original Huronian." Am. Geologist, vol. 1, 1888, pp. 11-14. Methods of stratigraphy in studying the Huronian.
Idem, vol. 4, 1889, 342-357.
Report of field observations made during the season of 1888 in the iron regions of Minnesota, by H. \'. \\'inchell.
Seventeenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1888, pp. 77-145. See also The diabasic schists
containing the jaspilite beds of northeastern Minnesota. Am. Geologist, vol. 3, 1889, pp. 18-22.
Report of geological observations made in northeastern Minnesota during the summer of 1888, by U. S. Grant.
Seventeenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1888, pp. 149-215.
Conglomerates inclosed in gneissic terranes, by Alexander Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 3, 1889, pp. 153-165,
256-262.
Some thoughts on eruptive rocks, with special reference to those of Minnesota, by N. II. \\'inchell. Proc. Am.
Assoc. Adv. Sci., 37th meeting, 1888, pp. 212-221.
The Stillwater, Minn., deep well, by A. D. Meads. Am. Geologist, vol. 3, 1889, pp. 341-342.
^ On a possible chemical origin of the iron ores of the Keewatin in Minnesota, by N. II. and H. V. \\'inchell. Idem,
vol. 4, 1889, pp. 291-300, 382-386. Also Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 38th meeting, pp. 235-242.
Some results of Archean studies, by Alexander Winchell. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 1, 1890, pp. 357-394.
The Taconic iron ores of Minnesota and of western New England, by N. II. and H. V. Winchell. Am. Geologist,
vol. 6, 1890, pp. 263-274.
Record of field observations in 1888 and 1889, by N. H. Winchell. Eighteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist.
Survey Minnesota, for 1889, pp. 7-47.
The iron ores of Minnesota, by N. H. and H. V. Winchell. Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 6,
1891, pp. 430, with a geologic map.
Geological age of the Saganaga syenite, by Horace V. Winchell. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 41, 1891, pp. 386-390.
Notes on the petrography and geology of the Akeley Lake region, in northeastern Minnesota, by W. S. Bayley.
Nineteenth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Mitmesota, for 1890, pp. 193-210.
The stratigraphic position of the Ogishke conglomerate of northeastern Minnesota, by U. S. Grant. Am. Geologist,
vol. 10, 1892, pp. 4-10.
Paleozoic formations of southeastern Minnesota, by C. W. Hall and F. W. Sardeson. Bull. Geol. Soc. America,
vol. 3, 1892, pp. 331-368.
The basic massive rocks of the Lake Superior region, by W. S. Bayley. Jour. Geology, vol. 1, 1893, pp. 433—456,
587-596, 688-716; vol. 2, 1894, pp. 814-825; vol. 3, 1895, pp. 1-20.
The crystalline rocks, by N. H. Winchell. Twentieth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for
1891, 1893, pp. 1-28.
Anorthosites of the Minnesota shore of Lake Superior, by A. C. Lawson. Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Min-
nesota No. 8, 1893, pp. 1-23.
The geology of Kekequabic Lake, in northeastern Minnesota, with special reference to an augite-soda granite, by
U. S. Grant; thesis accepted for degree of Ph. D. in Johns Hopkins University, 1893. Twenty-first Ann. Rept. Geol.
and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1892, 1893, pp. 5-58. With geologic map and plates.
The eruptive and sedimentary rocks on Pigeon Point, Minnesota, and their contact phenomena, by W. S. Bayley.
Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 109, 1893, with maps and plates.
Field observations on certain granitic areas in northeastern Minnesota, by V. S. Grant. Twentieth Ann. Rept.
Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1893, pp. 3.5-110.
Sketch of the coastal topography of the north side of Lake Superior, with special reference to the abandoned strands
of Lake Warren, by A. C. Lawson. Idem, pp. 181-289.
Actinolite-magnetite schists from the Mesabi ir(.in range, in northeastern Minnesota, by W. S. Bayley. Am. Jour.
Sci., 3d ser., vol. 46, 1893, pp. 176-180.
The Mesabi iron range, by H. V. Winchell. Twentieth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for
1891, 1893, pp. 111-180.
Preliminary report of field work during 1893 in northeastern Minnesota, by U. S. Grant. Twenty-second Ann.
Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, pt. 4, 1894, pp. 67-78.
80 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Notes on the geology of Itasca County, Minn., by G. E. Culver. Idem, pt. 8, 1894, pp. 97-114.
Preliminary report of field work during 1893 in northeastern Minnesota, by A. H. Elftman. Idem, pt. 12, 1894,
pp. 141-180.
The stratigraphic position of the Thompson slates, by J. E. Spurr. Am.. lour. Sci., Sdser., vol.48, 1894, pp. 1.59-1G.5.
The iron-bearing rocks of the Mesiibi range in Minnesota, by J. Edward Spurr. Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota No. 10, 1894, 2(i8 pp., with geologic maps.
The origin of the Archean greenstones, by N. H. Winchell. Twenty-third Ann. Repl. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota, for 1894, pt. 2, 1895, pp. 4-3.5.
Preliminary report on the Rainy Lake gold region, by II. V. ^^'inchell and U. S. Grant. Idem, pp. 36-105.
The iron ranges of Minnesota, by H. V. Winchell. Proc. Lake Superior Mining Inst., vol. 3, 1895, pp. 11-32.
Notes upon the bedded and banded structures of the gabbro and upon an area of troctolyte, by A. H. Elftman.
Twenty-third Ann. Kept. (iool. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1894, 1895, pt. 12, pp. 224-230.
The geological structure of the western part of the Vermilion range, Minnesota, by H. L. Smyth and J. Ralph
Finlay. Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Engineers, vol. 25, 1895, pp. 595-605.
The Koochiching granite, by Alexander Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 20, 1897, pp. 293-299.
Some new features in the geology of northeastern Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell. Idem, pp. 41-51.
The origin of the Archean igneous rocks, by N. H. Winchell. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 47, 1898, pp. 303-
304 (abstract); Am. Geologist, vol. 22, 1898, pp. 299-310.
Some resemblances between the Archean of Minnesota and of Finland, by N. H. Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol.
21, 1898, pp. 222-229.
The significance of the fragmental eruptive debris at Taylors Falls, Minn., by N. H. Winchell. Am. Geologist,
vol.22, 1898, pp. 72-78.
The oldest known rock, by N. II. Winchell. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 47, 1898, pp. 302-303 (abstract).
Sketch of the geology of the eastern end of the Mesabi iron range in Minnesota, by L'. S. Grant. Engineers' Year
Book L'niv. Minnesota, 1898, pp. 49-62. With sketch map.
The geology of Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell, V. S. Grant, James E. Todd, Warren I'pham, and H. V. Winchell.
Final Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 4, 1899, pp. 630. With 31 geologic plates. Structural geology
of Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell, assisted by U. S. Grant. Idem, vol. 5, 1900, pp. 1-SO, 972-1000. Vol. 4 contains
an account of detailed field work in northeastern Minnesota, with incidental discussion of general problems. The
area is treated by counties and smaller arbitrary geographic divisions, in the description of which several men have
taken part. This manner of treatment leads to repetition in the discussion of the general geologic features, and in
many cases it is extremely ditBcult to correlate the facts recorded in the different sections. Vol. 5 contains an account
of the general structural geology of the State based on the detailed work described in vol. 4. Grant's views, as in-
dicated in the detailed descriptions of special areas, in some cases differ somewhat widely from those of Winchell.
The gneisses, gabbro schists, and associated rocks of southwestern Minnesota, by C. W. Hall. Bull. V . S. Geol.
Survey No. 157, 1899, 160 pp. With geologic maps.
Mineralogical and petrographic study of the gabbroid rocks of Minnesota, and more particularly of the plagioclas-
tites, by Alexander Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 26, 1900, pp. 153-162. With geologic sketch map of northeastern
Minnesota.
L^npublished field notes, summer of 1900, by C. R. Van Hise and J. Morgan Clements.
Final Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 6, 1900-1901. (N. H. Winchell.)
Keewatin area of eastern and central Minnesota, by C. W. Hall. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 12, 1901, pp.
343-370, pis. 29-32.
Keweenawan area of eastern Minnesota, by C. W. Hall. Idem, pp. 313-342, pis. 27-28.
Sketch of the iron ores of Minnesota, by N. H. Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 29, 1902, pp. 154-162.
The Mesabi iron-bearing district of Minnesota, by C. K. Leith. Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, 316 pp.
The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota, by J. Morgan Clements. Idem, vol. 45, 1903, 463 pp.
Some results of the late Minnesota Geological Survey, by N. H. Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 32, 1903, pp. 246-253.
The geology of the Cuyuna iron range, Minnesota, by C. K. Leith. Econ. Geology, vol. 2, 1907, pp. 145-152.
The Cuyuna iron district of Minnesota, by Carl Zapffe. Unpublished bachelor's thesis L^niv. Wisconsin, 1907.
See also The Cuyuna iron-ore district of Minnesota, by Carl Zapffe. Supplement to the Brainerd (Minn.) Tribune,
Sept. 2, 1910, pp. 32-35, with map.
The iron-ore deposits of the Ely trough, Vermilion range, Minnesota, by C. E. Abbott. Proc. Lake Superior
Min. Inst, (for 1906), vol. 12, 1907, pp. 116-142.
Geological history of the Redstone quartzite, by Frederick W. Sardeson. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908,
pp. 221-242.
Contribution to the petrography of the Keweenawan (mth geologic ma]3'l, by Frank F. Grout. Jour. Geology, vol.
18, 1910, pp. 633-657.
The iron formation of the Cuyuna range, by F. S. Adams. Econ. Geology, vol. 5, 1910, ])p. 729-740; vol. 6, 1911,
pp. 60-70, 156-180.
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE REGION. 81
ONTARIO.
Notes on the geography and geology of Lake Superior, by John J. Bigsby. Quart. Jour. Sci., Lit. and Arts, voL
18, 1825, pp. 1-34, 222-269, with map.
Outlines of the geology of Lake Superior, by H. W. Bayfield. Trans. Lit. and IILst. Soc. Quebec, vol. 1, 1829,
pp. 1^3.
On the junction of the Transition and Primary rocks of Canada and Labrador, by Captain Bayfield. Quart. Jour.
GeoL Soc. London, voL 1, 1845, pp. 450-459.
On the geology and economic minerals of Lake Superior, by W. E. Logan. Rept. Prog. Geol. Survey of Canada
for 1846-47, pp. 8-34.
On the geology of the Kaministiquia and Michipicoten rivers, by Alexander Murray. Idem, pp. 47-57.
On the age of the copper-bearing rocks of Lakes Superior and Huron, and various facts relating to the physical
structure of Canada, by W. E. Logan. Eept. Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 21st meetmg, 1851, pp. 59-62, Trans.; Am. Jour.
Sci., 2d ser., vol. 14, 1852, pp. 224-229.
On the geology of the Lake of the Woods, south Hudson Bay, by Dr. J. J. Bigsby. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc.
London, vol. 8, 1852, pp. 400-406. With a geologic map of the Lake of the Woods.
On the physical geography, geology, and commercial resources of Lake Superior, by John J. Bigsby. Edinburgh
New Phil. Jour., vol. 53, 1852, pp. 55-62.
On the geology of Ramy Lake, south Hudson Bay, by Dr. J. J. Bigsby. Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, vol. 10,
1854, pp. 215-222. With a geologic map of Rainy Lake.
On the geological structure and mineral deposits of the promontory of Mamainse, Lake Superior, by John W. Dawson.
Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, vol. 2, 1857, pp. 1-12, with a section.
Report of progress of the Geological Survey of Canada from its commencement to 1863, by W. E. Logan, 1863,
983 pp., with an atlas.
On the Laurentian, Huronian, and upper copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, by Thomas Macfarlane. Rept.
Prog. Geol. Survey Canada, 1863-1866, pp. 115-164.
On the geological formations of Lake Superior, by Thomas Macfarlane. Canadian Naturalist, 2d ser., vol. 3,
1806-1868, pp. 177-202, 241-256.
On the geology and silver ore of Woods Location, Thunder Cape, Lake Superior, by Thomas Macfarlane. Cana-
dian Naturalist, 2d ser., vol. 4, pp. 37^8, 459^63, with a map.
On the geology of the northwest coast of Lake Superior and the Nipigon district, by Robert Bell. Rept. Prog.
Geol. Survey Canada, 1866-1869, pp. 313-364, with a topographic sketch map.
Report on the country north of Lake Superior, between the Nipigon and Michipicoten rivers, by Robert Bell.
Idem, 1870-71, pp. 322-351.
Report on the country between Lake Superior and the Albany River, by Robert Bell. Idem, 1871-72, pp.
101-114.
Notes of a geological reconnaissance from Lake Superior to Fort Garry, by A. R. C. Selwyn. Idem, 1872-73,
pp. 8-18.
On the country between Lake Superior and Winnipeg, by Robert Bell. Idem, pp. 87-111.
The geognostical history of the metals, by T. Sterry Hunt. Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., vol. 1, 1873, pp. 331-345;
vol. 2, 1874, pp. 58-59.
On the country between Red River and the South Saskatchewan, with notes on the geology of the region between
Lake Superior and Red River, by Robert Bell. Rept. Prog. Geol. Survey Canada, 1873-74, pp. 66-90.
Report on the geology and resources of the region in the vicinity of the Forty-ninth parallel, from the Lake of the
Woods to the Rocky Mountains, by George Mercer Dawson, 387 pp., with a geologic map.
The mineral region of Lake Superior, by Robert Bell. Canadian Naturalist and Geologist, 2d ser., vol. 7, 1875,
pp. 49-51.
On the country west of Lakes Manitoba and Winnipegosis, with notes on the geology of Lake Winnipeg, by Robert
Bell. Rept. Prog. Geol. Survey Canada, 1874-75, pp. 24-56.
Report on an exploration in 1875 between James Bay and Lakes Superior and Huron, by Robert Bell. Idem,
187.5-76, pp. 294-342.
Report on geological researches north of Lake Huron and east of Lake Superior, by Robert Bell. Idem,
1876-77, pp. 213-220.
Remarks on Canadian stratigraphy, by Thomas Macfarlane. Canadian Naturalist, 2d ser., vol. 9, 1879, pp. 91-102.
Report on the geology of the Lake of the Woods and adjacent country, by Robert Bell. Rept. Prog. Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Survey Canada, 1880-1882, pp. 11-15 c, with a map.
On the geology of Lake Superior, by A. R. C. Selwyn. Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, vol. 1, sec. 4, 1883, pp. 117-122.
Age of the rocks of the northern shore of Lake Superior, by A. R. C. Selwyn. Science, vol. 1, 1883, p. 11. See
also The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior. Idem, p. 221.
Notes on observations, 1883, on the geology of the north shore of Lake Superior, by A. R. C. Selwyn. Trans. Roy.
Soc. Canada, vol. 2, sec. 4, 1885, p. 245.
47517°— VOL 52—11 6
82 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Report on the geology of the Lake of the Woods region, with s])ecial reference to the Keewatin (Eluronian?) belt
of Archean rocks, by A. C. Lawson. Ann. Kept. Geol. and Nat. Ilist. Survey Canada for 1885, new ser., vol. 1, pp.
■5-1.51 cc, with a map.
Geology and lithology of Michipicoten Bay, by C. L. Herrick, W. G. Tight, and 11. L. Jones. Bull. Denison Univ.,
vol. 2, 188(), pp. 120-144, with 3 plates.
Thecorrelationof the Aniraikrie and Huronian rocks of Lake Superior, by Peter McKellar. Proc. and Trans. Roy.
Soc. Canada, vol. 5, sec. 4, 1887, pp. 63-73.
Report of the geology of the Rainy Lake region, by A. C. Lawson. Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Canada
for 1887-88, new ser., vol. 3, pp. 1-196 f, with 2 maps and 8 plates. See also The Archean geology of the region north-
west of Lake Superior. Etudes sur les schistes cristallins. Internat. Geol. Cong., London, 1888, pp. 66-88. Geology
of the Rainy Lake region, with remarks on the classification of the crystalline rocks west of Lake Superior; prelim-
inary note. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 33, 1877, pp. 473-480.
Report on mines and mining on Lake Superior, by B. D. Ingall. Ann, Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surs'ey Canada
for 1887-88, new ser., vol. 3, pp. i-131 n, \vith 2 maps and 13 plates.
Tracks of organic origin in rocks of the Animikie group, by A. R. C. Selwyn. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 39, 1890,
pp. 145-147.
The internal relations and taxonomy of the Archean of central Canada, by Andrew C. Lawson. Bull. Geol. Soc.
America, voL 1, 1890, pp. 175-194.
Geology of Ontario, with special reference to economic minerals, by Robert Bell. Rept. Roy. Comm. on Min.
Res. Ontario, Toronto, 1890, pp. 1-70.
Lake Superior stratigraphy, bj' Andrew C. Lawson. Am. Geologist, vol. 7, 1891, pp. 320-327.
The structural geology of Steep Rock Lake, Ontario, by Henry Lloyd Smyth. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 42,
1891, pp. 317-331.
Report on the geology of Hunters Island and adjacent country, by W. H. C. Smith. Ann.' Rept. Geol. Survey
Canada for 1890-91, vol. 5, pt. 1, G, 1892, pp. 5-76.
The Archean rocks west of Lake Superior, by W. H. C. Smith. Bull. GeoL Soc. America, vol. 4, 1893, pp. 333-348.
The laccolitic sills of the northwest coast of Lake Superior, by A. C. Lawson. Bull. Cieol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota No. 8, 1893, pp. 24-48.
Multiple diabase dike, by A. C. Lawson. Am. Geologist, vol. 13, 1894, pp. 293-296.
Note on the Keweenawan rocks of Grand Portage Island, north coast of Lake Superior, by U. S. Grant. Idem,
pp. 437-438.
Gold in Ontario; its associated rocks and minerals, by A. P. Coleman. Fourth Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, for
1894, sec. 2, Toronto, 1895, pp. 3.5-100, with 2 geologic maps of parts of the Rainy River district.
The hinterland of Ontario, by T. W. Ciibson. Idem, sec. 3, pp. 124-125.
The new Ontario, by Archibald Blue. Fifth Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, for 1895-96, pp. 193-196.
A second report on the gold fields of western Ontario, by A. P. Coleman. Idem, sec. 2, pp. 47-106.
The anorthosites of the Rainy Lake region, by A. P. Coleman. Jour. Geology, vol. 4, 1896, pp. 907-911; Canadian
Rec. Sci., vol. 7, 1897, pp. 230-235.
Malignite, a family of basic plutonic orthoclase rocks rich in alkalies and lime, by Andrew C. Lawson. Bull. Dept.
Geology Univ. California, vol. 1, 1896, pp. 337-362, pi. 18.
Third report on the west Ontario gold region, by A. P. Coleman. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 6, 1897, pp.
71-124.
The Michipicoten mining divL^^ion, by A. B. Willmott. Idem, vol. 7, 1898, pp. 184-206.
Geology of base and meridian lines in the Rainy River district, by W. A. Parks. Idem, pp. 161-183, with
geologic map.
Clastic Huronian rocks of western Ontario, by A. P. Coleman. Idem, pp. 151-160; Bull. Geol. Soc. America,
vol. 9, 1898, pp. 223-238.
Unpublished field notes by C. R. Van Hise, 1898.
The geology of the area covered by the Seine River and Lake Shebandowan map sheets, comprising portions
of Rainy River and Thunder Bay districts, Ontario, by Wm. Mclnnes. Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Canada, vol. 10,
pt. H, 1899, pp. 13-51, with geologic map.
Copper regions of the upper lakes, by A. P. Colejnan. Rept. Bm-. Mines Ontario, vol. 8, pt. 2, 1899, pp. 121-174.
Copper and iron regions of Ontario, by A. P. Coleman. Idem, vol. 9, 1900, pp. 143-191.
Upper and lower Huronian in Ontario, by A. P. Coleman. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 11, 1900, pp. 107-114.
Unpublished field notes by C. R. A'an Hise and J. Morgan Clements, summer of 1900.
The iron belt on Lake Nipigon, by J. W. Bain. Rept. Biu-. Mines Ontario, vol. 10, 1901, pp. 212-214.
Iron ranges of the lower Huronian, by A. P. Coleman. Idem, pp. 181-212.
The Michipicoten Huronian area, by A. B. Willmott. Am. Geologist, vol. 28, 1901, pp. 14-19.
The Michipicoten iron range, by A. P. Coleman and A. B. Willmott. Univ. Toronto studies, geol. ser.. No. 2,
1902, 47 pp. See also Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, 1902, pp. 152-185.
Rock basins of Helen mine, Michipicoten, Canada, by A. P. Coleman. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 13, 1902, pp.
293-304.
HISTORY OF GEOLOGIC WORK IN THE REGION. 83
Nepheline and other syenites near Port Coldwell, Ontario, by A. P. Coleman. Am. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 14,
1902, pp. 147-155. See also Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, 1902, pp. 208-213.
Region southeast of Lac Seul, by William Mclnnes. Summary Rept. Geol. Survey Canada for 1901-2, pp. 87-93.
The country west of Nipigon Lake and River, by Alfred W. G. Wilson. Idem, pp. 94-103.
The country east of Nipigon Lake and River, by W. A. Parks. Idem, pp. 103-107.
Iron ranges of northwestern Ontario, by A. P. Coleman. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, 1902, pp. 128-151.
Iron ranges of northern Ontario, by W. G. Miller. Idem, 1903, pp. 304-317.
Region lying northeast of Lake Nipigon, by W. A. Parks. Summary Rept. (ieol. SlU'vey Canada for 1902-3, pp.
211-220.
Region on the northwest side of Lake Nipigon, by William Mclnnes. Idem, pp. 206-211.
Nepheline syenite in western Ontario, by W. G. Miller. Am. Geologist, vol. 32, 1903, pp. 182-185.
Genesis of the Animikie iron range, Ontario, by F. Hille. Jour. Canadian Min. Inst., vol. 6, 1904, pp. 245-287.
The Animikie or Loon Lake iron-bearing district, by W. N. Smith (in charge of a party consisting of A. W. Lewis,
J. U. Warner, G. W. Crane, and R. C. Allen). Min. World, vol. 22, 1905, pp. 206-208, with geologic map.
Iron ranges of Michipicoten West, by J. M. Bell. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 14, 1905, pt. 1, pp. 278-355,
with geologic map. See also The possible granitization of acidic lower Iluronian schists on the north shore of Lake
Superior. Jour. Geology, vol, 14, 1906, pp. 233-242.
The geology of Michipicoten Island, by E. N. Burwash. Univ. Toronto studies, geol. ser.. No. 3, Toronto, 1905,
with map.
Pre-Cambrian nomenclature, by A. P. Coleman. Jour. Geology, vol. 14, 1906, pp. 60-64.
The Animikie iron range, by L. P. Silver. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 15, 1906, pt. 1, pp. 156-172.
Iron ranges east of Lake Nipigon, by A. P. Coleman. Sixteenth Ann. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, 1907, pt. 1,
pp. 105-135.
Iron ranges eaat'of Lake Nipigon, the ranges around Lake Windebegokan, by E. S. Moore. Idem, pp. 136-148.
Iron ranges of Nipigon district, by A. P. Coleman. Eighteenth Ann. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, 1909, pt. 1,
pp. 141-153.
Iron range north of Round Lake, by E. S. Moore. Idem, pp. 154-162.
Geology of Onaman iron range area, by E. S. Moore. Idem, pp. 196-253.
The quartz diabases of the Nipissing district, Ontario, by W. H. Collins. Econ. Geology, vol 5, 1910, pp.
538-550.
Diabase and granophyre of the Gowganda Lake district, Ontario, by Norman L. Bowen. Jour. Geology, vol. 18,
1910, pp. 658-674.
LAKE SUPERIOR REGION (GENERAL).
Narrative journal of travels through the northwestern regions of the United States, extending from Detroit through
the great chain of American lakes to the sources of the Mississippi River, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Albany, 1821,
419 pp., with map.
Report of Walter Cunningham, late mineral agent on Lake Superior, January 8, 1845. Senate Docs., 2d sess. 28th
Cong., 1844-^5, vol. 7, No. 98, 5 pp.
Mineral report, by George N. Sanders. Idem, No. 117, pp. 3-9.
Report of J. B. Campbell. Idem, vol. 11, No. 175, pp. 4-8.
Report of George N. Sanders. Idem, pp. 8-14.
Report of A. B. Gray. Idem, pp. 15-22.
Report of A. B. Gray on mineral lands of Lake Superior. Executive Docs., 1st sess. 29th Cong., 1845^6, vol. 7,
No. 211, 23 pp., with map.
On the origin of the actual outlines of Lake Superior (discussion), by William B. Rogers. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv.
Sci., 1st meeting, 1848, pp. 79-80.
The outlines of Lake Superior, by Louis Agassiz. Lake Superior; its physical character, vegetation, and animals
compared with those of other and similar regions, by Louis Agassiz and J. Elliot Cabot, pp. 417-426. See also Proc.
Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., 1st meeting, 1848, p. 79.
Abstract of an introduction to the final report of the geological siu'veys made in Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota,
in the years 1847, 1848, 1849, and 1850, containing a synopsis of the geological featm-es of the country, by Da%'id D.
Owen. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 5, 1851, pp. 119-131.
On the age, character, and true geological position of the Lake Superior red sandstone formation, by Da^dd D.
Owen. Report of a geological survey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, pp. 187-193.
Report of a geological survey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, and, incidentally, of a portion of Nebraska
Territory, made under instructions from the United States Treasury Department, by David D. Owen. 1852, 638 pp.
A geological map of the United States and the British Provinces of North America, with an explanatory text,
geological sections, etc, by Jules Marcou, Boston, 1853, 92 pp. See also Reponse a la lettre de MM. Foster et Whit-
ney sur le Lac Superieur. Bull. Soc. g^ol. France, 2d ser., vol. 8, 1851, pp. 101105.-
The metallic wealth of the United States, by J. D. Wliitney. Philadelphia, 1854, 510 pp.
Observations on the geology and mineralogy of the region embracing the sources of the Mississippi River, and the
Great Lake basins, during the expedition of 1820, by Henry R. Schoolcraft. Summary narrative of an exploratory
84 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
expedition to the sources of tlie Mississippi River in 1820, resumed and rompleted by the discovery of its orijjin in
Itasca Lalce in 1832. Philadelphia, 1854, pp. 303-362.
Remarks on some points connected with the geology of the north shore of Lake Superior, by J. D. Whitney. Proc.
Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 9, 1856, pp. 204-209.
On the occurrence of the ores of iron in the Azoic sy.stem, by J. D. Whitney. Idem, pp. 209-216.
Remarks on the Iluronian and Laurentian systems of the Canada Geological Survey, by J. D. \\1iitney. Am.
Jour. Sci., 2d ser., vol. 23, 1857, pp. 305-314.
Physical geology of Lake Superior, by Charles ^\liittlesey. Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 24, 1876, pt. 2, pp.
60-72, mth map.
The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, by R. D. Irving. Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, 464 pp.
15 1., 29 pis. and maps. See also Third Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1883, pp. 89-188, 15 pis. and maps; Science,
vol. 1, 1883, pp. 140, 359, 422; Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 28, 1884, p. 462; vol. 29, 1885, pp. 67-68, 2-58-259, 339-340.
The copper-bearing series of Lake Superior, by T. C. Chamberlin. Science, vol. 1, 1883, pp. 453—1.55.
On secondary enlargements of mineral fragments in certain rocks, by R. D. Irving and C. R. Van Ilise. Bull.
U. S. Geol. Survey No. 8, 1884, 56 pp., 6 pis.
Di\'isibility of the Archean in the Northwest, by R. D. Irving. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 29, 1885, pp. 237-249.
Preliminary paper on an investigation of the Archean formations of the Northwestern States, by R. D. Irving.
Fifth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1885, pp. 175-242, 10 pis.
Origin of the ferruginous schists and iron ores of the Lake Superior region, by R. D. Irving. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d
ser., vol. 32, 1886, pp. 255-272.
Is there a Iluronian group? by R. D. Irving. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 34, 1887, pp. 204-216, 249-263, 365-374.
A great Primordial quartzite, by N. H. Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 1, 1888, pp. 173-178. See also Seventeenth
Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, for 1888, pp. 25-56.
On the classification of the early Cambrian and pre-Cambrian formations, by R. D. Irving. Seventh Ann. Rept.
U. S. Geol. Survey, 1888, pp. 365-454, with 22 pis. and maps.
The iron ores of the Penokee-Gogebic series of Michigan and Wisconsin, by C. R. Van Ilise. Am. Jour. Sci., 3d
ser., vol. 37, 1889, pp. 32^8, with plate.
An attempt to harmonize some apparently conflicting views of Lake Superior stratigraphy, by C. R. Van Hise.
Idem, vol. 41, 1891, pp. 117-137.
The Norian rocks of Canada, by A. C. Lawson. Science, vol. 21, 1893, pp. 281-282.
The Norian of the Northwest, by N. H. Winchell. Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, No. 8, 1893,
pp. iii-xxii.
An historical sketch of the Lake Superior region to Cambrian time, by C. R. Van Hise. Jour. Cieology, vol. 1, 1893,
pp. 113-128, with geologic map.
■ Crucial points in the geology of the Lake Superior region, by N. 11. Winchell. Am. Geologist, vol. 15, 1895, pp.
153-162, 229-234, 295-304, 356-363; vol. 16, 1895, pp. 12-20, 75-«6, 150-162, 269-274, 331-337. See also Compt. Rend.
Congrfes gfol. intemat., 6th sess. (1894), 1897, pp. 273-308.
Pre-Cambrian fossiliferous formations, by Charles D. Walcott. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 10, 1899, pp. 199-244.
The iron-ore deposits of the Lake Superior region, by C. R. Van Hise, assisted in Mesabi and Vermilion sections by
C. K. Leith and J. Morgaii Clements, respectively. Twenty-first Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, pt. 3, 1901, pp. 305-
434, with geologic maps.
Geological work in the Lake Superior region, by C. R. Van Hise. Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 7, 1902,
pp. 62-69.
The original source of the Lake Superior iron ores, by J. E. Spurr. Am. Geology, vol. 19, 1902, pp. 335-349.
A comparison of the origin and development of the iron ores of the Mesabi and Gogebic iron ranges, by C. K. Leith.
Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 7, 1902, pp. 75-81.
The Eparchean interval ; a criticism of the use of the term Algonkian, byAndrew C. Lawson. Bull. Dept. Geology
Univ. California, vol. 3, 1902, pp. 51-62.
The Iluronian question, by A. P. Coleman. Am. Geology, vol. 29, 1902, pp. 325-334.
The nomenclature of the Lake Superior formations, by A. B. Willmott. Jour. Geology, vol. 10, 1902, pp. 67-76.
Report of the special committee for the Lake Superior region, by C. R. Van Hise and others. Jour. Geologj-.
vol. 13, 1905, pp. 89-104; Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, vol. 14, pt. 1, 1905, pp. 269-277; Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan
for 1904, 1905, pp. 133-143.
Report of the special committee for the Lake Superior region, personal comments, by A. C. Lane. Ann. Repl.
Geol. Survey Michigan for 1904, 1905, pp. 143-153. See also Comment on the report of the special committee on the
Lake Superior region, Jour. Geology, vol. 13, 1905, pp. 457-461.
A summary of Lake Superior geology with special reference to recent studies of the iron-bearing series, by C. K.
Leith. Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., vol. 36, 1906, jip. 101-153, with geologic map.
The movement of Lake Superior iron ores in 1909, with a map showing distribution of ores, by John Birkinbine.
Advance chapter from Mineral Resources U. S. for 1909, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1910, 7 l)p.
\n Algonkian basin in Hudson Bay — a comparison with the Lake Superior basin, by C. K. Leith. Ecou. Geol-
ogy, vol. 5, 1910, pp. 227-240.
CHAPTER IV. PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR
REGION.
By Lawkkxce Martin.
TOPOGRAPHIC PROVINCES.
The Lake Superior region as described in this report inchides three topos^rapliic provinces
(fig. 5) — (1) the Lake Superior highlands, a peneplain with hilly upland and lowland subdi-
visions; (2) a series of lowland plains surrounding the peneplain on the east, south, and west;
and (3) the deep basin of Lake Superior embraced between parts of the liighland and the low-
land. These three topographic provinces are in various stages of development and preservation,
depending on the underlying rock structure, the process by which they are being modified, and
the length of their period of development. The first consists essentially of Archean and Algon-
kian rocks; the second of Cambrian and other early Paleozoic rocks and of Cretaceous rocks;
the third is a present seat of rock deposition, and probably includes rocks of all ages represented
in the other provinces, in addition to the glacial drift of the Quaternary, which also partly man-
tles the rocks in the first province and almost completely buries those of the second.
The peneplain liighland was worn down from former lofty mountains." Diastropliism (warp-
ing, folding, and faulting) has notably modified the peneplain, tilting its borders and introducing
the deep basin of Lake Superior. (See PI. II.) Subsequent deposition of early Paleozoic and
Cretaceous rocks in the Lake Superior basin and about the margin of the peneplam (see fig. 5)
has been followed by the exhuming of fossil topography and the production of a belted plain with
alternate uplands and lowlands in the region of horizontal and gently tilted post-Algonkian
rocks. Continental glaciation has slightly modified the relief and completely altered the soil and
drainage of the region (Chapter XVI, pp. 427-459).
THE LAKE SUPERIOR HIGHLANDS.
. TOPOGRAPHIC DEVELOPMENT.
The highlands about Lake Sujierior fall into two classes — (1) those underlain by coarse-
grained homogeneous rocks, chiefly igneous, of both Archean and Algonkian age, and (2) those
underlain by banded (both areally and structurally) alternating weak and resistant tilted rocks,
chiefly sediments and lavas of Algonkian age. The areas of homogeneous igneous rocks still
preserve plateaus or liigh plains of slight relief, diversified only by monadnocks and by some
valleys of greater than normal depth; the areas including belts of sediments have narrow pla-
teaus, monoclinal ridges, and mesas isolated among broader .intermediate lowlands.
It is possible that the whole highland area was reduced to a peneplain, now represented by the
plateau surfaces, the crests of some of the higher monoclinal ridges, and the tabular surfaces
of tlie higher mesas, none of the adjacent lowland areas having been down-warped or down-
faulted or excavated when the peneplain was most nearly perfected.
c Van Hise, C. R ., Science, new ser., vol . 4, 1896, pp. 57-59 and 217-220; Weidman, Samuel, Jour. Geology, vol. 11, 1903, pp. 289-313; Wilson, A. W. G.,
Jour. Geology, vol. 11, 1903, pp. 015-667; Weidman, Samuel, Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16, 1907, pp. 592-603 and 385-395.
85
86
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Diastropliism during post-Algonldan time, by changing the altitude of tlie peneplain with
reference to base-level, enabled demidiitioti to reattack this peneplain. Stream erosion was
renewed actively along the fault escarpments, jjossibly being delayed in areas that had been
submerged and buried Ijy Paleozoic sediments (p. 116). This renewal of cutting was weak or
not yet active at all in regions remote from the escarpments (here also possibly being delayed
in the buried and protected parts), but was strongest in the areas of banded Algonkiau rocks,
especially those near the steeper slopes. In these areas of banded rocks the remnants of the
original peneplain surface are small and scattered, being largest where the vertical beds resisted
erosion best, smaller wliere gentle tilting made development of monoclinal ridges and interme-
diate valleys possible, and of least extent where horizontal beds allowed the opening of broad
lowlands with only isolated mesas, as in the Thunder Bay region, or with protruding reexposed
knobs, like the Baraboo range of Wisconsin and knobs north and east of it (figs. 5.3, 54, pp. 359,
360). The lowlands developed at several points may be incipient stages of a peneplain of a
later generation, developed with respect to a much lower base-level.
The older penejilain surface is found at various altitudes, some of which are shown in the fol-
lowing table;
Altitude of different parts of the Lake Superior hir/hlands.
Localitv.
Average
height
above sea
level.a
Feet.
Southeast of Michipicoten 1.500—1,000
Near Mic-hipkoten 'l. 2(»^1, 400
Northwest of Michipicoten ,*1, 200— 1,400
Near Heron Bay «!.10O-l,.3a0
North of Lake Superior * 900—1,050
West of Lalte Nipigon «1. 2.50— 1,500
Thunder Bay and Hunters Island region *1, 400— 1, 700
Rainy Lake and Lake of the Woods region *1.200— 1, 400
Gunfiint Lake , 1,800-2,000
VermiUon district I 1. IM>— 1 . 700
Mesabi district j 1,400—1.500
Gabbro plateau 1,400—1,700
Northern Wisconsin *I, 400— 1,500
Keweenaw Point About 1..350
Marquette dLstrict 1,400-1,600
Crystal Fails district ' 1, 400— 1, 600
Menominee district 1 1 . 200 — 1 , 400
North-central Wisconsin ' 1, .300— 1 , 500
Edge of Potsdam sandstone *About 1, 000
Highest
hill.
Feet.
1,700
2,120
Lowest
valley.
Feet.
± 1,100
1,700
2 232
i!910
1,920
2, 320
1,900
1,409
*1,950
1,900
1,370
1.940
1,072
1,547
1.300
1.400
1.400
1,400
± i.mo
1,120
800
1,100
« Altitudes marlced with an asterisk are accurate approximations based upon railway grades, etc. All other altitudes are averaged from
accurate topographic maps.
It will be noted (figs. 4 and 5) that the general peneplain surface lies between 1,000 and
1,700 feet, though it is a trifle low^er locally, and rises in monadnocks to exceptional heights of
a little more than 2,300 feet. The maximum relief of the peneplain proper (excluding the basin
of Lake Superior) is less than 1,450 feet (900 to 2,320), and these extremes are many miles apart.
The maximum local relief of any part of the peneplain at the time of its greatest perfection may
be quite safely placed between 400 and 500 feet, and the average relief would be much less,
perhaps 100 to 200 feet.
The present differences of elevation in the peneplain remnants might be explainetl as
inherited, for the writer does not conceive of peneplains as approacliing at all closely to a plane
or perfectly base-leveled surface. Possibly the peneplain in the Lake Superior region when
most nearly perfect stood at levels perhaps corresponding to present elevations of 1,400 feet
in central Wisconsin, 1,350 feet on Keweenaw Point, 1,600 feet in northeastern Minnesota, and
1,400 feet northeast of Lake Superior in Canada, etc. Because there was upon the well-
developed peneplain a series of old streams whose valleys laj- at lower levels than the low
intermediate ridges and at slighth' different levels with reference to one another, the surface
beveled back smoothly up the stream courses antl the Unes <lividing parallel drainage systems.
As we do not know where these ancient trunk streams were, we must regartl the various preserved
peneplain fragments merely as parts of a lowland worn down where mountains hat! been; and
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION.
87
it is quite unnecessary to assume warping to account for their discrepancies of level, as has
been clone with regard to numerous penei)hiins, though warping in this region is indicated on
other grounds.
The chief evidence of diastrophic modification qf the levels of the penepla,in is the rift
or graben faulting indicated by displacements and by the great escarpments and their drainage
coniHtions. (See p. 113.) One such modification of the peneplain took place when portions
of it on the site of the west half of the present Lake Superior were down faulted.
We have excellent evidence that the peneplain has been modified by warping. There are
three suggestive contlitions: (1) In Wisconsin the peneplain dips down under the Paleozoic
cover," being 1,000 feet above sea level at Grand Rapids and 500 feet at Kilbourne, or 385
75 100 125 150 MILES
Elevation above sea level
^
E3
5B0-I000ft. 1000-1700 ft. Above 1700 ft. Mississippi-St.Lav^rence-
Hudson Bay divides
Figure 4. — Generalized topographic map of the Lake Superior region.
feet below the surface, one of its monadnocks rising through the Cambrian sandstone in the
Baraboo range, wliile at Madison its surface hes 70 feet above sea level, or 810 feet below the
present surface; (2) the gradients of the peneplain surface, especially in central Wisconsin,
are greater than would be normal in aged rivers on a peneplain; (3) the Paleozoic rocks are in
such positions as almost to prove warping, for a broad north-south post-Cambrian anticline
is recognized in Wisconsin. All these suggestive conditions are corroborated by the well-
estabhshed fact, to be described in the chapter on the Pleistocene, that tilting of the originally
horizontal shore Unes of former glacial lakes definiteh- proves shght recent warping of the
region. The fact that such warping has been and is still taking place is ailecpiate ground for
sajing that the peneplain remnants are not at their original levels.
n Weidman, Samuel, Jour. Geology, vol. U, 1903, pp. 300-307; Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Uist. Survey No. IC, 1907, pp. 393-394.
88
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The peneplain might be conceived to represent facets of one or more earlier peneplains,
but tliis does not seem likelj'' unless the main peneplain is Cretaceous and parts of it represent
preserved facets of a late .ygonldan or early Cambrian peneplain. Earher possible peneplain
levels — ^in the Huronian, for example — would have been warped or folded by pre-Algonkian
deformation from their original nearly horizontal position to almost any conceivable angle.
The several great unconformities of the region tloubtless represent peneplain stages, and the
very fine material deposited after certain unconformities also suggests a low gradient of rivers
and a lack of coarse sediments — conditions characteristic of a nearly base-leveleil region. Some
of these unconformities, now exposed by denudation, reach the surface at low angles, but it
does not follow that a renmant of a lower Huronian peneplain is anj-where visible. In v\e\v
Peneplain Monoclinal ridges Monadnocks Mesas
Figure 5. — The topographic provinces of the Lake Superior region, with some subdivisions of the peneplain.
of the tremendous pre-Cambrian base-leveling, any such surface, in the writer's opinion, should
be regarded as either still buried or else long ago eroded away, unless definite evidence to the
contrary can be produced. If the peneplain is not Cretaceous but a dissected late Algonkian
or earl}' Cambrian peneplain, it seems hardly likely that any facets of its surface represent
earlier base-leveHng.
The age of the Lake Superior peneplain, where studied in parts of the area, has been tenta-
tively suggested by Van Hise to be Cretaceous." Weidman dates the Wisconsin i)art ()f it as
pre-Potsdam,* apparently recognizing it beneath the first Paleozoic rocks (Potsdam or Ipper
Cambrian) in Wisconsin. The LaiU'cntian peneplain described by A. W. G. Wilson ■■ docs not
include the Keweenawan areas of northeastern Minnesota, Isle Royal, northern Wisconsin,
and Keweenaw Point, and therefore represents for our area merelj^ the possibility of the several
a Science, new ser., vol. -1, 1S9U, pp. 59 and 220: Twenty-first .\nn. Kept. U. S. Geol. Survey, pt. 3, 1S.S9-1900, pp. 333-336.
t Jour. Oeology, vol. U, 1903, p. 310; Bull. Wisc-onsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Siurey No. 16, p. 388.
c Jour. Geology, vol. 11, 1903, pp. 615-669.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. Ill
A. PRE-CAMBRIAN PENEPLAIN IN ONTARIO, NEAR MICHIPICOTEN.
See page 89.
Jl. JASPER PEAK, NEAR TOWER, MINN.
A monadnock rising above tlie even upland of the Pre-Cambi ian peneplain. See page 90.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION.
89
pre-Keweenawan (Huronian and Archean) peneplains. The more specific fixirlg of tlie age of
tlie whole Lake Superior peneplain depends largely on the age of certain escarpments and of
certain faults and on the overlap of certain sediments; the trend of the evidence (see dis-
cussion of basin of Lake Superior) suggests an early origin of the peneplain, perhaps late AJgon-
kian or early Cambrian. It is not conclusively estabUshed that a later peneplain, perhaps
Cretaceous, was developed in the area, though the regions of low relief close to or witliin the
basin of Lake Superior ma\' be Cretaceous — as, for example, the lowlands of central jVIiimesota
and eastern upper ^licliigan.
THE BROAD UPLANDS.
POSITION, BELIEF, AND SKY LINE.
The Lake Superior highlands form a broad upland cut by valley's and tliversified by monad-
nocks and other ridges. The upland is made up cliiefly of the Aix-hean, but most of its ridges
and monadnocks are composed of rocks of Algonkian age. This is so because the Archean
rocks in tliis region are chiefly granites, greenstones, and other coarse-grained rocks, together
with scliists and gneisses, most of which are homogeneous over broad areas in their resistance
to weathering and erosion and at present generally still preserve the peneplain developed upon
them; whereas in the Algonkian areas, because of folding and faulting, the Huronian scliists,
gneisses, quartzites, etc., anti the Keweenawan lavas usuall^^ present homogeneous resistance to
weathering and erosion, not over broad areas but in narrow hnear belts, so that the former pene-
plain is dissected in these regions to hilly uplands and lowlands with notable ridge topography.
There are some exceptions, however, in the iUgonkian — for example, where the homogeneous,
coarse-grained Duluth gabbro of the Keweenawan northeast of Duluth and the similar granite
of northern Wisconsin, which is possibty lower Huronian rather than Ai-chean, form broad
uplands.
These broad pre-Cambrian uplands stand above the'adjacent relatively lower plains of the
Paleozoic and Cretaceous and above the deep basm of Lake Superior at an average height of
about 1,350 feet above sea level (fig. 4). Their local relief is slight. The following elevations
in representative areas are taken from topographic maps:
Northeast-southwest section along the Vermilion iron range in northeastern Minnesota.
Hilltops
Valley bottoms
East-west section, west of Marquette, Mich.
Hilltops
Valley bottoms
Feet.
1.1)20
1,380
Feet.
i,eso
1,300
Feet.
1,800
1,480
Feet.
2,120
1,760
Feet.
1,700
1,550
Feet.
1,750
1,550
Feet.
1,800
1,500
Feet.
1,550
1,350
East-west section in north-central Wisconsin.
Hilltops
Valley bottoms.
Feet.
1,340
1,200
Feet.
1,412
1,200
Feet.
1,440
1,100
Feet.
1,460
1,300
It will be seen that the average local relief here is about 240 feet. A few hills rise slightly
above the general level and many valleys are cut sliglitly below it, but from an emmence an
observer views a region of slight relief with an even sky line. (See PI. Ill, A.)
RELATION OF ORIGINAL AND PRESENT TOPOGRAPHY.
It is of interest now to compare the present surface, which bevels indifferently across
structural lines, with the surface which must have existed when most of the Archean and
Algonkian rocks received their present texture and structure. The granite and similar rocks
90 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
could have been made coarse grained only by cooling under a hea\-j- mantle of overlying rock.
(See lig. 11, p. 116, and cress sections on PI. X\'I1, in jwcket.) Evidently the surface when
the granite was intruded here was far higher than the present surface. The greenstones, some
of which cooled at the surface, arc truncated in such positions that the original folds, if restored,
would extend lugh above the present surface and deep into the earth (figs. 7, .p. 101; 35, p. 253).
Some of the gneisses and schists contain ciystals and show structures such as slaty cleavage
and schistosity which could have been produced only under a heavj' load of overlying rock.
Restoration of the missing parts of the folds, as revealed by study of the structure, shows that
all the gneisses and schists are parts of the arcliitectural scheme of an edifice entirely different
from the present Lake Superior i-egion. (See fig. 54, p. 360, and structure sections on Phs. I,
VIII, XVI, and XVII, in pocket.) In all other sorts of plains besides peneplams the strata
normally lie nearly horizontal, or nearly parallel to the surface of the plain. In tlie Lake
Su])erior region the strata almost nowhere coincide in position with the surface, the dips at
many places being almost vertical. The texture, the position, and the relations of the rocks
are such as are found in existing mountainous regions. Evidently this peneplain was anciently
a region of lofty mountains."
MONADNOCKS.
In some parts of the region knobs or monadnocks (fig. 5) rise conspicuously above the
penejilain surface. None of them is of great area or of great height. In fact, many of them
would not be noticeable if it were not for the evenness of the general upland surface of the
region. Of these monadnocks, Jasper Peak (1,710 feet), near Tower, Minn., is a good example
(PI. Ill, B) and will be described as typical of the class. Other monadnocks are Minnesota
Hill, at Soudan, Minn.; the 2,'230-foot peak among the Misquah Hills in Cook County, Minn.,
the highest in the Lake Superior region; Eagle Mountain and Brule Mountain, in the same
region; Tiptop Mountain (2,122 feet), northwest of the Michipicoten district, probably the
liighest in Ontario; Hematite Mountain (1,700 feet), at the Helen mine in the Michipicoten
district; the Porcupine Mountains and parts of the Huron Mountains in western upper Michi-
gan; and Rib Hill (PI. IV, A) (1,942 feet), Hardwood Hill, the Mosinee Hills, and Powers Bluff
in northern Wisconsin.
Jasper Peak is an oval eminence about one-half mile long from northeast to southwest
and three-eighths of a mile in the shorter dimension. It rises nearly 500 feet above the valleys
on eitlier side but only 350 to 400 feet above the general upland of the region. It stands up
as a monadnock because the jasper and ferruginous chert of wliich it is made are more resistant
to denudation than the adjacent rocks. Other resistant rocks to which monadnocks of the
Lake Superior region are due are the Archean gneiss in Tiptop Mountain, ferruginous chert and
iron-bearing formation in Hemlock Mountam in the Michipicoten district, and Huronian quartz-
ite in Rib Hill, Wis.* Various other resistant Huronian and Keweenawan formations stand
up as monoelinal or other ridges. The long ridges of this character that rise liigh enough above
their surroundmgs to be called monadnocks include the Giants Range of ^Imnesota, the Penokee
Range of Wisconsiji, and others which will be specifically described later.
VALLEYS IN THE PENEPLAIN.
There are, of course, general inequalities in the peneplain, hut there are also valleys cut
100 to 400 feet below the general level, which may be interpreteil as evidence of slight u|)lift
after the completion of the base-leveling that produced the peneplain. In general these vallej's
are fairly broad and mature, and most of them are most widely opened along the areas of the
weaker rocks. The original consequent drainage of this region was modified as the mountain-
ous area was worn down, and the streams on the belts of weaker rocks naturaU_y wore their val-
leys lower, received more w^ater, and captured tributaries from the more slowly ej-oding streams
o A different opinion has been advanced by A. C. Lawson (Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Canada, vol. 1, new ser., 1885, p. 23CC).
6 Van Hise, C. R., Science, new ser., vol. 4, 1896, p. 58; Weidman, Samuel, Jour. Geology, vol, 11, 1903, p. 297
2q
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 91
on the durable rocks. The stream systems are now subsequent rather than consequent — that Is,
they are adjustetl to the weaker structures — crossmg tlie ridges of resistant strata in narrow
transverse courses and flowing in greater depressions along the longitudinal belts of weak rock.
Most of the streams of the pre-Cambrian upland are in this adjusted condition; but Weidman
has discussed evidences of a lack of adjustment of the stream courses in northern Wisconsin,
the rivers being superposed indifferently upon weak and resistant beds because of original
courses consequent upon the dip of unconformably overlying Paleozoic sediments.
SOIL AND GLACIAL TOPOGRAPHY.
A striking feature in the uplands is the absence nearly everywhere of any local or residual
soil, such as would be derived fi-om the weathering and decay of the various strata during the
very long time necessary to reduce this from a mountainous region to a peneplain of sHght
relief. In the driftless portion of the region the ledges are deeply covered with residual soil
derived from their decay. Elsewhere the soil is of a cliflFerent kind from the underlying rock,
with which it forms a sharp contact. It shows almost no sign of decay. It is not a residual
but a transported soil, produced through erosion and deposition by the great continental ice
sheet. This ice sheet removed the residual soil, brought a new and less fertile soil or left the
ledges bare, displaced stream courses from the zones of weaker rock, producing many of the
existing waterfalls and rapids, clogged the longitudinal subsequent valleys so as to form one
class of lakes, ° deepened some of the valleys so as to form lakes of another type, and produced
numerous other effects, which are described in Chapter XVI (pj). 427-459). It is owing chiefly
to this glacial invasion that the region dift'ers from the normal peneplain type in minor topog-
raphy, in drainage, and in soils.
DESCRIPTION OF DISTRICTS IN DETAIL.
The following description of the upland topography in the several districts is designed to
exhibit its variations in accordance with the character of the constituent rocks. A geographic
order has been atlopted, starting with the part of the peneplain at the west end of Lake Supe-
rior, north of Dulutli, continiung around north of Lake Superior in Ontario, and thence pi'o-
ceeding to the districts south of Lake Superior in upper Michigan and Wisconsin.
GABBRO PLATEAU.
The area in northeastern Minnesota underlain by the various Keweenawan gabbros, por-
phyries, etc., is a broad upland or plateau and forms a typical well-developed part of the pene-
plain. The rocks of the gabbro jjlateau are prevailingly coarse grained and homogeneous
and hence furnish a notable exception to the hnear topography commonly developed in the
Algonkian. Locally they form ridges grading into the monoclinal ridge or sawtooth country
to the east and north, which is mostly composed of granite or felsite or diabase rather than
gabbro. The gabbro plateau surface is thus described by Grant r**
In general the surface of this area is in the nature of an undulating plain. Many small elevations occur, but few
which rise to a hundred feet above the surrounding country. * * * While the surface is in general one of low
relief, the minor irregularities are pronounced. Steep rock hills are common, and srnall vertical escarpments 10 tc
20 feet in height are of frequent occurrence. Some of the water bodies, none of which are deep, stretch through con-
siderable areas. * * * The general plainlike character of the gabbro-covered area can be ascribed to weathering,
erosion, and glaciation, acting upon a surface composed of a single rock mass (the gabbro) uniform in constitution,
grain, and resistance to disintegrating agents.
Clements'' refers to it as a peneplained upland with minor irregularities due to joints,
composition, etc., with irregular shallow lakes. He speaks of it as "reduced almost to base-
level." In places the gabbro forms a more hilly topography .<*
a Clements, J. M., The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, Tol. 45, 1903, pp. 43-46.
6 Grant, U. S., Final Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 4, pp. 434-435, 482, 492.
c Op. cit., pp. 37-38, 399-400.
* d Grant, U. S., op. cit., pp. 399, 420, 462.
92 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
In St. Louis tounty, nortli and nort.lioast of Duhith, the plutoau topotjraphy is mild"
(PI. V, A), being largely obscured b}' the glacial (h'ift. X. 11. Wincheil has referred to this
plateau topography '' as "very monotonous and nearly flat," with the gabbro "rising in iri'egular
rocky domes about 10 to 30 feet above the sunounding country." Grant speaks of it m Lake
and Cook counties, Minn.," as a "broad undulating plateau," with a "surface which is still
rough but has no marked elevations."
The areas of resistant red rock (fclsites, porphyries, syenites, and granites) form monad-
nocks and higher ridges, among these bemg the Misquah Hills, one of whose summits, reaching
a height of about 2,2.30 feet, is the highest point in Minnesota and the highest in the Lake
Superior region. Other monadnocks of the resistant "red rock," including Eagle Mountam,
rise to 2,100 or 2,200 feet. Certain anorthosites also form resistant knobs, such as Carlton
Peak, which rises 927 feet above Lake Superior; it has been described by A. C. Lawson.''
The diabases generally form monoclinal ridges of the type described on page 99; they
do not properly form a part of the topcjgraphic subprovince here discussed (the broad uplands)
but are located upon its margins.
The whole plateau is deeply covered with glacial deposits, which conceal the ledges and
the preglacial topography to some extent and have disarranged the drainage so that there
are abundant lakes, swamps, and muskegs.
The east border of the plateau is the steep escarpment which descends abruptly to Lake
Superior (PI. V, A). The west boundary is obscured by glacial deposits, so that the topo-
graphic relationship of the Keweenawan of the plateau and the upper Huronian slates south
of the Giants Range is obscure. The north boundary of the gabbro plateau, as described by
Clements « and by Leith, is a "conspicuous northward-facing escarpment overlooking the
low-lying area of Virginia slate and iron formation immediately to the north. To this the'
name 'Mesabi Range'/ was first applied."^ In places the gabbro overlies the granite arid
there is no intermediate lowland.
ST. LOUIS PLAIN.
West of the gabbro plateau, in the region drained by St. Louis River and its tributaries,
the homogeneous upper Huronian slates form a broad plain at a lower level, extending north
to the Giants Range anil in most places deeply covered by glacial drift but still retaining the
even penejilain topography.
VERMILION DISTRICT.*
In the Vermihon district, which is separated from the gabbro plateau and the slate plateau
of upper .St. Louis River by a great linear monadnock called the Giants Range, the peneplain
topography is also well developed. Here, however, the even-featured surface bevels across
Archean and Huronian rocks rather than Keweenawan gabbros. The truncated folds of con-
glomerates, slate, iron formation, etc., and the exposed masses of greenstone, granite, etc.,
indicate, however, that tliis was originally the heart of a loftj^ mountain region. (See structure
profiles. Pis. I, XXVI, in pocket.) The peneplain seems to have been base-leveled and subse-
quently slightly uplifted, so that the streams have incised valleys, between which flat uplands
and ridges rise to the peneplain level. The present topography has been describeil by C. K.
Van Hise' as follows:
a See topographic map of Duluth quadrangle, U. S. Geol. Survey, and maps of St. Louis, Cook, and Lake counties In atlas accompanying
Final Rept. (led. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota.
i> Final Rcpt. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 4, pp. 212, 2G5.
c Idem, pp. 207, 317.
<t Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. S, 1893, pp. 18-19.
' The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota; Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, I9a3. pp. .399-400.
/ The name "Giants Range" is generally applied to the high ridge area underlain by the Huronian granite, though there is a tendency to
extend the name eastward to the somewhat disconnected peaks (Misquah Hills, etc.,) underlain by the "red rock" (a Keweenawan granite). See
footnote on p. 103.
0 The Mesabi iron-bearing district of Minnesota, Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, p. 182.
A A brief statement about the topography is included in each of the chapters on the iron-producing districts.
' Manuscript notes.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 93
The ridges correspond in direction with the greater extent of the district. Tliey are parallel with the major structure
and also with the secondary structures, such as cleavage and schistosity. The trend of these ridges is therefore about
N. 70° E., although locally they vary much from this direction.
These ridges vary in altitude somewhat rapidly in the direction of their trend, and a single ridge is usually no
longer than a fraction of a mile to a few miles, ordinarOy 1 or 2 miles. The slopes parallel with the trend of the ridges
are comparatively gentle. The slopes transverse to the course of the ridges are steep between the ridges, the valleys
being deep and many of them narrow. Also the cross section of a single ridge may be complex, so that it consists of a
series of minor ridges between which are minor valleys. Though the major features of the region are undoubtedly
preglacial, the action of the ice has been very important, so that the hills and bluffs are now round-topped, the slopes
steep, and the valleys flat-bottomed and U-shaped. This form is, however, subordinatel;^ due to filling rather than
to erosion.
Many of these valleys are occupied by lakes. The greater number of these lakes are almost exactly parallel to
the trend of the ridges and are generally several times as long as broad. This is true not only of the main body of
each lake but also of its arms. Characteristic lakes of this class are Long Lake, Fall Lake, Moose Lake, New Found
Lake, and Knife Lake.
Where the structure of the district locally is not linear, as in the granites, the lakes also lack the linear character.
As illustrating this may be cited Snowbank Lake, Gabimichigama Lake, Gull Lake, and Lake Saganaga.
From high knobs or recently burned areas may be had the best views of the topography. From a point like Jasper
Peak, or Disappointment Mountain, or one of the high ridges in the neighborhood of Gunflint, an observer sees in
the foreground the linear ridges, rcjugh and partly covered by trees in various stages of growth, in the valley at his
feet a lake, and along the range, if the point of view is advantageous, many lakes. From Jasper Peak he may follow
nearly all the bays and arms of the largest and most complex of the lakes of the district, Vermilion Lake [PI. VI].
However, if the observer ignores the immediate surroundings and looks farther away, he gets an idea of the more ancient
topography of the region. Southward from a high point in the western part of the range his view extends over a number
of ridges and valleys, and as a horizon line he sees the Giants Range north of the Mesabi district. This range in the
western part of the district is composed of the Giants Range granite and in the eastern part of the district of the Ke-
weenawan gabbro. To the north his range of vision is limited by the granitic hills of Basswood Lake.
From the various points of view he learns that, though the Vermilion district has numerous hUls and bluffs not
inferior in altitude to the areas north and south of the district, on the whole it is an area in which erosion has played
an important role, the valleys being wider and deeper and containing lakes in especial abundance.
Ignoring all these minor irregularities, he is astonished at the apparent horizontality of the sky line. A few points,
however, project above this sky line — for instance, Jasper Peak [PL III, B].
This impressive feature of the topography suggests very strongly that this region was at some time in the distant
past nearly base-leveled; that the high projecting points were not reduced to this level; that since that ancient time
a new cycle of erosion has far advanced. Into this base-leveled plain the present topography of the Vermilion district
has been incised. It almost surely was mainly accomplished by river erosion in preglacial times. However, the
glacial erosion has been exceedingly vigorous here. It was preeminently an area of glacial erosion and not of deposition.
The hills and bluffs are almost devoid of glacial debris; even the valleys contain comparatively little as compared
with moraine areas of Wisconsin and Minnesota. The present forms of topography are not typical river-sculpture
forms; they are rather such forms considerably modified by glacial sculpture and glacial deposition.
J. M. Clements reviews the relation between topography and structure in this district, empha-
sizing many points bj^ local examples." He refers to the whole region ** as " characterized by
ridges trending N. 70°-80° E., with intervening valleys, the larger ones usually occupied by
streams or lakes. In tliis area the topography is rugged but the range of altitude is not very
great."
Clements'' has described in detail the topography characteristic of the various Ai-chean
formations in the Vermilion district as follows:
Ely gi-eenstone: Prominent east- west hills and ridges, or broad, low, rounded knobs and ridges.
Soudan formation (iron bearing): No great effect upon topography usually, though locally very important, as where
its jaspers form prominent peaks, such as Jasper Peak, Lee and Tower hills, and other notable knobs and ridges, some
of them monadnocks.
Granites of Vermilion Lake: Usually occupies hill crests or ' ' occm-s in rounded or oval hills higher than those occupied
by the surrounding rocks."
Granites of Trout, Bumtside, and Basswood lakes: "Does not seem to affect the topography very materially."
Topography rough in detail but with no notable relief. Irregular or rounded lakes contrast strikingly with linear lakes
of sedimentary areas. Has small area, pcssibly base-leveled in second cycle.
Granites between Moose Lake and Kawishiwi River: Exposures numerous in oval mass.
Granites of Saganaga Lake: LTnemphatic topography, with low rounded hills rising to same level and suggesting
rather complete peneplaining.
a The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, pp. 431-436.
b Idem, pp. 19, 36-37.
c Idem, pp. 134-135, 175, 248, 259, 264, 266.
94 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The several Iluronian intrusivcs of smaller area also produce a typical peneplain topojr-
raphy in the somewhat isolated highlands of the plain of Iluronian slate at the edge of the
Keweenawan gabbro. Their several efTects are thus described bv Clements:"
Giants Range granite: Low rounded to oval hills, perhaps a topograi)hic continuation, though lower, of the Giants
Range north of the Mesabi iron range. lias small area, possibly base-leveled in second cycle.
Granite of Snowbank Lake: Rounded topography characteris.tic of glaciated granite. Stands lower topographically
than might be expected from its position in center of a structural anticline.
Cacaquabic granite: Occupies prominent position, with fairly high hills.
Acid dikes: Locally form knolls and ridges.
The Huronian beds are nearly always associated with depressions or witii minor ridges
and the slates form a linear lowland with local ridges and knobs. Clements'' has described
the topography developed upon the lower Huronian sediments as follows:
Conglomerates and slates of Vermilion Lake area: Depressions underlying lakes, swamps, etc., or generally low land
between ridges of Archean gi-eenstone and iron formation, trending north-northeast and south-southwest.
Conglomerate, iron-bearing Agawa formation, and Knife Lake slate of Knife Lake area: Much rougher topography
than in \'ermilion Lake area to west. Relief of 400 feet or 600 feet including depth of lakes. Normally conglomerates
form ridges and slate forms depressions. Ridges and valleys, all on comparatively small scale, trend east-northeast and
west-southwest. Locally siliceous slates form sheer clirfs of 100 feet.
RAINY LAKE AND LAKE OF THE WOODS DISTRICT.
The Rainy Lake and Lake of the Woods region, north of the international boundary, is under-
lain chiefly by the .Ajchean, but has subordinate linear areas of not clearly separated Huronian.
A. C. Lawson has characterized the topography near the Lake of the Woods as one which,
"although extremely hummocky or mammiUated in its surface aspects, presents extraordinarily
little variation in level. There are no great valleys or high hills. The whole country is prac-
tically a plateau of very moderate elevation above the sea for so inland a region." <■ He describes
the Rainy Lake region as "remarkably flat and devoid of prominent elevations, although the
surface in detail is extremely uneven and hummocky or mammiUated."'^
He regards the region as probably never having been mountainous, giving as his reasons
the lack of proof that phcations in general make mountains and the absence of immense valleys
or gorges. His report was WTitten, however, long before the idea was developed that the con-
dition of moderate relief in a peneplain belongs to a later state of denudation than that of the
mountains, deep gorges, etc.
Lawson " shows how- the variously folded weak and resistant beds form minor ridges and
valleys on the land, or peninsulas and bays and islands where lake waters -s^-rap around an
irregular series of valleys and hillocks produced by subaerial erosion previous to the formation
of the lakes. Near Rainy Lake elevations average only 100 to 200 feet, though certain excep-
tional ridges and knobs, which seem to be monadnocks held up on resistant schists, gneisses,
and granites, rise 300 to 500 feet above lake level, the highest being Kishkutena Ridge, approxi-
mately 1,700 feet above sea level and visible for long distances. The lakes average less than
50 feet deep, the greatest depth found being 165 feet.
HUNTERS ISLAND AND THUNDER BAT REGION.
East of the regions described by Lawson lies the region of Hunters Island and Thunder
Bar. W. H. C. Smith ' and William Mclnnes » have described the topography as belonging
to the same sorts and having the same relationships as that to the w-est. The greenstones,
o The Vermilion iron-l)earing district of Minnesota: Mon. \J. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, pp. 354, 3C1, 364, 370.
>> Idem, pp. 36, 278, 299.
c Geology ol the Lake of the Woods region: .\nn. Kepi, r.eol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Canada for 1885, new ser., vol. 1, 1886, Rept. CC, p. 22.
i Geology of the Rainy Lake region: .\nn. Rept. (Seol. and Nat. Hisl. Survey Canada for 1887-88, vol. 3, new ser., 1889, Rept. F, p. 10.
t Op. cit., vol. 1, Rept. CC, pp. 15-25 and 2f.-2.S; vol. 3. Rept. F, pp. 10-20.
/ Geology of Hunters Island and adjacent country: Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Canada for 1890-91, new ser.. vol. 5, 1893, Rept. O, pp. 9-11.
a Geology of the area covered by the Seine Uiver and Lake Shebandowan map sheets: Ann. RepL Geol. Survey Canada for 1S97, new ser.,
vol. 10, 1899, Rept. U, pp. 0-10.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 95
jaspilites, and iron formation and certain schists form ridges rising at most 300 feet above tlio
neigliboring lakes, whose greatest depth is 280 feet; the other Arclaean rocks are "characterized
by low, rouniled hills, with softened outlines."
REGION NOKTII OF LAKE SUPERIOR.
W. H. Collins " describes the region between Nipigon Ba}^ and Heron Bay and northward
to the Height of Land as "a peneplain of rounded hills of crystaUine rocks 300 to 400 feet high,
terminating abruptly along the south, " and with steeply descending streams affording excellent
water power.
Collins '' also describes the Archean area north of the Canadian Pacific Railway and west
of Lake Nipigon as possessing "a surface of low relief and moderate altitude." Water levels
vary from 1,149 to 1,382 feet. Few hills reach 250 feet in height. The sky line is exceedingly
even. The area also possesses the linear topography of the Algonkian in places and the mesa
topography of the Keweenawan near Lake Nipigon and to the west.
REGION NORTHEAST OF LAKE SUPERIOR.
J. M. Bell " has characterized the region north of Lake Superior and west of the Michipicoten
district to Heron Bay as hilly, with greater ranges of relief than elsewhere in the Laurentian
peneplain, witli valleys opened on weak rocks, ridges formed on resistant beds, and with monad-
nocks rising above the general peneplain level on the site of the still more resistant beds.
MICHIPICOTEN DISTRICT.
The part of the peneplain that includes the Michipicoten district has been described as
follows:''
The topography is of the rugged character usual on the north shore of Lake Superior, and Hematite Mountain, the
highest point, rises 1,100 feet above the lake within a distance of 7 miles. In general the hills form steep ridges with a
direction of about 70° east of north, corresponding to the strike of the schists, and traveling is difficult across the line of
strike. * * * From the summit of Hematite Mountain, which is situated about in the middle of the region and
rises 200 feet above any of its neighbors, there is presented more than the usual variety of surface, including long ridges
of Huronian schist, rounded hills of eruptives, which sometimes rise like islands out of lacustrine plains, stretches of
the hummocky surface so common in glaciated Archean districts, lake basins, rock rimmed or bordered with muskeg,
rivers with lakelike stretches of dead water, tumultuous rapids over morainic bowlders and falls over rocky descents,
and, finally, the splendid promontories of the shore of Lake Superior. * * * The intimate dependence of the
topography on the geological history of the country is well brought out in the Michipicoten region, where the folding of
the schists has determined the direction and steepness of the main ranges of hills; while bosses and irregular masses of
eruptives give rise to less uniform hills associated with the ridges or standing isolated. The basis of the topography is
to be found in the pre-Cambrian arrangement and the varying power of resistance to weathering and erosion shown by
the different rocks; so that the prominent features may be of very ancient date, even Paleozoic.
REGION NORTH OF SAULT STE. MARIE.
In the upland north of Sault Ste. Marie and east of Michipicoten relief of as much as 100 to
200 feet is common. Nearer the lake and southeast of Michipicoten there are several very
deep valleys, notably those of Agawa, Montreal, Batchawana, Chippewa, and Goulais rivers.
Owing to the considerable rehef , some very liigh and expensive trestles will' be required where the
Algoma Central and Hudson Bay Railway is to cross the first three rivers mentioned; and
the building of the railway heyond Pangissin has been hindered by the necessity of high steel
bridges, though the railway is graded all the way to the Michipicoten district. Such expense in
railroad building in the Lake Superior region away from the lake shore is distinctly excep-
tional and indicates the high degree. of the local relief.
tt Summary Rept. Geol. Survey Canada for 1905-0, pp. 80-81.
i> Idem, p. 103.
••Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 14, 1305, pt. 1, pp. 281-299.
d Coleman, \. P., and Willinott, A. B., The Michipicoten iron ranges: Univ. Toronto studies, Geol. ser., 1902, pp. 4-6; also Eleventh Rept.
Bur. Mmes Ontario, 1902, pp. 153-154.
96 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The areas between these deep valleys are broad aiul relatively Hat or round topped, and
some of the hills "present steep slopes toward the valleys and often dropoff in impassable cliffs
100 feet or more in height. None of the hills rise much over 1,000 feet above Lake .Superior,
but many reach 900 feet "" (1,500 to 1,600 feet above sea level). The surface bevels indifferently
across variously durable structures of gneiss, schist, and granite in a characteristic peneplain sur-
face, with the usual nionadnocks. The deep valleys resemble those of the north shore of Lake
Superior, which arc crossed near their moutlis by expensive britlges and trestles of tiie Canadian
Pacific Railway ; in both regions they are deep cut because of the low adjacent base-level of Lake
Superior.
MARQUETTE DISTRICT.''
North of ^larquette the granite area forms a monadnock group known as tlie Huron Moun-
tains, rising about 1,200 to 1,350 feet above the lake.*^ The elevations were thus described by
Foster and Whitney:
They do not range in continuous chains, but exist in groups radiating from a common center, presenting a series of
knobs rising one above another until the summit level is attained. Their outline is rounded or waving, their slope
gradual. The scenery is tame and uninteresting.
C. A. Davis "* writes with regard to the same region:
The hills are only 150 or 200 feet above the valleys, hence the general level is relatively high and the district is a
plateau, or high peneplain, rather than mountainous.
The granite of the Archean south of Marquette was early described by Brooks as having an
irregular topograph j', with low knobs, ridges, and cliffs.* Rominger contrasts the area south of
Marquette,^ where the granites occupy lower levels than the Huronian, with the northern granite
outcrops, wliich "occupy the highest elevations and constitute the most conspicuous ridges."
The topography (see topographic map and structure profiles, PI. XVII, in pocket) characteristic
of the Archean formations in this district has been described in greater detail by C. R. Van
Hise and W. S. Bayley s as follows:
Northern complex:
Mona schists: Minor rugged hills, strongly glaciated.
Kitchi schists: Rugged hills similar to those of Mona schist.
Gneissoid granites: Rounded knobs, invariably smoothed by glaciition.
Hornblende syenite: Exactly like that of granite.
Southern complex: Knobs, as in northern granite areas.
MENOMINEE DISTRICT.*
W. S. Bayley ' has described the topography associated witli the various Archean rock
series in the Menominee district (PI. XXVI, in pocket) as follows:
Quinnesec schist (southern area): Rough and broken, forming deep gorges, with many ridges and elongated hills.
Quinnesec schist (western area): Without distinctive peculiaiities except small rugged knobs.
Granites, gneisses, and schists of northern comijlcx: Irregular rugged knolls, intensely glaciated.
CRYSTAL FALLS DISTRICT..'
The topography characteristic of the Archean in the Crj'stal Falls district (PI. XXII, in
pocket) has been described by J. M. Clements, H. L. Smyth, and W. S. Bayley * as follows:
Granite: Small rounded isolated knobs, chiefly obscured by glacial drift (gaps in granite range where resistant
greenstone dikes cross) .
a Coleman, A. P.. Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 15, pt. 1, 1906, pp. 175-177.
b For topography of Marquette and adjacent districts see also the chapters on these di-stricts.
r Report on the geology and topography of the Lake Superior land district, ISoO, pt. 1, p. 34.
It ..>,nn. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan, 1900, p. 2(i0.
e Brooks, T. B., Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, 1873, pp. 72-73.
/ Rominger, Carl, Geol. Survey .Vlidiigan, vol. i, ISSl, p. 1.3.
e The Marquette iron-hearing district of Michigan: Mon. V. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1895, pp. 152. 102, 170, 170, 191.
ft See also chapter on Menominee district, where topography is discussed.
( The Menominee iron-hearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 46, 1904, pp. 132, 159, 16^.
> See also chapter on Crystal Falls district, where topography is discussed.
t The Crystal Falls Iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 30, 1899 (western, p. 38; eastern, pp. 329, 386. 428, and 463).
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 97
Archean crystallines: Mammillated with rocky knobs separated by bowl-like depressions, the hummocks and
bowls being generally elongated east and west.
Granites, gneisses, schists, and amphibolites of Felch Mountain district: Characteristic rough topography with
east-west elongated hummocks and bowls. A topographic depression always exists along the contact of the Archean
and Algonkian, usually holding a swamp or stream.
Gneissoid granites and various schists of Sturgeon River tongue: Scattered bare knolls.
West of the Crystal Falls, Menominee, and Marquette districts (fig. 43, p. 292; PL XXIV, in
pocket) there is a general plain produced by erosion upon the homogeneous slates, in places
deeply cut by streams antl partly obscured by the glacial drift. Through both slates and drift
certain knobs of resistant greenstone, etc., project as eminences.
KEWEENAW POINT.
On Keweenaw Point the highland peninsula, generally referred to in atlases and maps as
the Copper Range, has rocks vertical or very highly inclined. Erosion has thus far been unable
to significantly alter the plateau " or peneplain '' which was developed on these inclined beds in
the period of base-leveling. This is the case on the part of Keweenaw Point (fig. 59, p. 422) that
extends southward from Gratiot River to Portage Lake, where the ridges of the eastern tip of
the point, as described by Irving, merge into "one broad swell" or "a broad central ridge"
which extends west as far as the Porcupine Movmtams, beyond which it resumes its continuity
to the neighborhood of Bad River, Wisconsm. Upon this long, narrow plateau relief is not
wanting, small monadnocks rising above the general level, which other^vise bevels indifferently
across the various weak and resistant beds. This plateau surface is also diversified between
Porcupine Mountams and Bad River by "rounded ridges and knobs with cliffs facmg indiffer-
ently in all directions." It is still, however, essentially a peneplain, the valleys cut in it not
havmg notably dissected its surface into distinctive forms like monoclinal ridges or mesas.
To the northeast, at the tip of Keweenaw Pomt, there are monoclinal ridges and longitudinal
valleys, replacing the former peneplain surface, above whose level monadnocks like Mounts
Houghton and Bohemia still rise, the former owing its emmence to a resistant red felsite.''
In the plateau region, where the dips have prevented equally rapid dissection, the peneplain
surface remains. It is marginally cut by deep gorges, to be sure, but these valleys are of mod-
erate area and are not separated by monoclinal ridges or by mesas, such as occur where the
dips are below 30° or nearly horizontal respectively. Minor monadnocks rise everywhere above
the partty dissected peneplain.
The moderate elevation on the south shore of Lake Superior known as the Porcupine
Mountams "^ forms a monachiock area rising 600 to 1,421 feet above the lake and averaging
1,800 feet above sea level. The highest pomt is 2,023 feet. These mountains owe their relief
to the resistant quality of a body of quartz porphyries and felsites here faulted up against the
adjacent weaker beds on the south and exposed by denudation. That they form a group of
monadnocks was fii'st noted by Van Hise.''
NORTHERN WISCONSIN.
R. D. Irving ^ in 1878 briefly described the topography of the Archean area south of the
Penokee-Gogebic range as the "elevated interior" or "interior table-land," with a gently
undulatmg surface, few ledges, low granite domes, and abundant glacial lakes and swamps.
In their report on the Penokee-Gogebic district Irving and Van Hise f have not specifically
described the topography associated with the north edge of the peneplain within that district,
but the Archean gneisses and schists there may be mferred to have characteristic knobby topog-
raphy (PI. XVI, p. 226).
a Brooks, T. B., Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, 1873, pp. 69-70; Irving, R. D., Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 164-166, 186.
h Van Hise, C. R., Science, new ser., vol. 4, 1896, p. 217.
c Irving, R. D., Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. S, 1883, pp. 181-182.
i Idem, pp. 206-225, and geologic section 3, pi. 20. Also Wright, F. E., Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan, 1903, pp. 35-44.
« The geology of the eastern Lake Superior district: Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1S7.V1S79, pp. 61-1)2, pi. 11.
/ The Penokee iron-bearing series of Michigan and Wisconsin: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 19, 1892, p. 104.
47517°— VOL 52—11 7
98 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKlOli liEGION.
CENTRAL WISCONSIN.
R. D. Irving "■ wrote as follows regarding the topography of central Wisconsin:
The region of crystiilliiu' rocks (Archeau and lluronian) of north-rcntral Wisconsin, descending gradnally south-
ward, has a gently undulating surface, which is, however, often broken in minor detail by low. abrupt ridges with
outcropping tilted rock ledges.
Weifhnan'' has described the topography associated with the Archoaii formation in north-
central Wisconsin (Pis. IV, A, p. 90; XXXI, i\., p. 436) as follows:
The basal group (gneiss and schists) forms a gently sloping plain, with low crystalline ledges sometimes thinly
covered by sandstone, sometimes by glacial drift, but generally exposed in the ri\-er beds.
The Hiironian granite and syenite form the princij)al undiversified peneplain here.
- NORTHEASTERN WISCONSIN.
With regard to the topography in northeastern Wisconsin, T. C. Chamberlin '^ says:
The Archean surface is very irregular, and here and there knobs rise through the superincumbent formations,
giving rise to isolated hills of quartzite, porphyry, and granite in the midst of the areas of lower rocks.
He infers that these knobs are protruding through the Paleozoic sediments, not intrusive
in them.
LINEAR MONADNOCKS AND OTHER RIDGES.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
Besides the smaller monadnocks which rise above the broad uplands of the peneplain, there
are numerous Imear monadnocks and elongated ridges below the peneplain level, which are
related to the formations that outcrop in narrow bands, notablj' the Algonkian formations
but to some extent also the Archean. A few linear monadnocks also rise above the level of
the peneplain.
Where the rocks are gently inclined erosion has been able to attack them more success-
fully than in the areas of steeper dips, and has developed the monoclinal ridge (PI. IV, B),
which has its gentler slope following the dip of the beds and its steep escarpment on the opposite
side. Part of these monoclinal ridges are monadnocks, but a number are not.
In the Keweenawan rocks of the Lake Superior region these monoclinal ridges are best
developed in northeastern Mimiesota, on Isle Koj^al, and at the end of Keweenaw Point;
among the lluronian rocks they are well developed in northern ilinnesota and southern Ontario,
near Gunflint Lake, m the Penokee Range, in the Giants Range, and in all the iron districts,
and as monadnocks m the peneplain (fig. 5).
The origin of these monoclinal ridges as specialized forms due to differential erosion (fig. 6)
upon weak and resistant strata has not been agreed to by all the workers in the Lake Superior
region. N. H. WinchelH ascribed the Sawteeth Mountains of the Minnesota coast to faulting
and has been followed by A. C. Lawson,*^ who ascribes the monoclinal ridges of the Animikie
in southern Ontario and northern Minnesota to faulting, and by A. H. Elftmann.-' Irving,*' on
the other hand, points out that the topography "is just such as is found in every region of
flat-dipping hard rocks, and especially where softer layers are interleaved, as ill this case."
He also cites numerous monoclinal ridges of similar type in equivalent nonfaulted rocks on
eastern Keweenaw Point, in northern Wisconsin, and elsewhere, where the sawtooth shape is
well developed. U. S. Grant '' writes:
The numerous northward-facing cliffs suggest the iiroljability of a series of compai'ati\'cly recent east and west
fault lines, along the north sides of which the strata are depressed. * * * The evidence of profound faulting in
these strata, aside from the evidence of topography, is small. It seems that the present siu'face configuration could
<■ Geology ot Wisconsin, vol. 2, 1873-1877, pp. 453, 462.
i> Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin No. IC, 1907, p. 10.
c Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 2, 1S73-1S77, p. 248.
d ScTcnlh .\nn. Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1878, p. 12.
c Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 8, IS'13, p. 33; Twentieth .\nn. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Sun-cy, Minnesota, 1S91, p. 192.
/ Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1898, p. 183.
» Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 18&3, pp. 142-143.
ft Final Hept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 4. 1899, pp. 483, 485.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPPIY OF THE REGION.
99
have been brought about by eroaioii acting on gently inclined strata of different degrees
and fissile Animikie slates being more susceptible to disintegration and erosion than the
Grant subsequently proved absence of faulting in one of the
"supposetl fault scarps" to the satisfaction of a number of accom-
panj'ing geologists, including N. H. Winchell ami A. II. Elftmann,
two of the advocates of the fault origin of these monoclinal ridges.
As major faulting has never been proved to be associated with
the scarps of the monoclinal ridges, as their origin by differential
erosion in nonfaulted strata has been rejjeatedly shown, and as they
are associated only with marked cross faults — for instance, on Isle
Royal and north of Thunder Bay — the fault hypothesis for the mono-
clinal ridges (sawteeth) is regarded as not warranted. Indeed, in the
Vermilion monograph J. M. Clements," who discusses this type of
topography, does not even mention the possibility of faulting.
As the strike of the Algonkian rocks is generalh' northeast and
southwest, the trend of the monoclinal ridges and of the subsec[uent
valleys between is in the same direction, the longitudinal valleys that
extend parallel to the strike of tlie rocks being usually broatl and
persistent, whereas the transverse valleys extendmg across the strike
of the rocks are narrow and irregularly arranged.
T^Tiere these ridges and vallej^s are partly submerged the resulting
bays are extreme!}' long, straight, and persistent, and the peninsulas
and islands are in long parallel hnes, as on the coast of Isle Royal.
Glaciation, acting upon tliis monoclinal-ridge topography, has pro-
duced one striking series of lakes in northeastern ilinnesota; these, as
well as similar lakes in other parts of the region, are due to glacial
clogging of the subsecjuent axial valleys between the monoclinal ridges.
KEWEENAW AN MONOCLINAL BIDGES.
GENERAL STATEMENT.
In northeastern Minnesota, on Isle Royal, on the end of Ke-
weenaw Point, and in northern Michigan and northern Wisconsin, the
monoclinal-ridge type of topography is so well developed that the
name Sawteeth Mountains* has been given to these ridges on
account of their resemblance to the jagged teeth of a saw when seen
in profile. The same name is also applied to the Huronian mono-
clinal ridges near Gunflint Lake and northward in Ontario. (See fig.
5, p. 88.)
NORTHEASTERN MINNESOTA.
Ridges of this sort in Minnesota, near Grand Marais, with back
slopes of 5° to 10° and steep escarpments, are described by Irvmg" as
forms due to differential erosion on weak and resistant beds.
ISLE ROYAL AND MICHIPICOTEN ISLAND.
of resistance,
diabase sills.
the 111 in-bedded
^•Q
^
t
^
La
;\?.
i^\ s.
«S'
The monoclinal ridges on Isle Royal (PI. IV, B) are described by
Lane."* No other information concerning the relation of the geology to the minor topography
of Michipicoten Island has been obtained by the writer.
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 190.3, pp. 400-401.
i> Irving, E. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lalie Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol, o, 1SS3, fig. 1, p. 142; also flgs. 16, 26, and 29, on
pp. 297, 32.1, and 320.
cidem, pp. 141-143. '' Lane, .V. C, Geol. Survey Micliigan, vol. 0, 1S93-1S97, pp. 1S0-1S3.
100 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
KEWEENAW POINT AND NORTHERN MICHIGAN AND WISCONSIN.
The parallel monoclinal ridges and intervening valleys near the enil of Keweenaw Point
(fig. 6) were early described by Marvine" and later in some detail by Irving,'' who associated
the various valleys and "parallel ridges with cliffy southern and flat northern faces" with
specific gently dipping Kewcenawan beds — the valleys with weak amygdaloids and easily decom-
posable diabases, the ridges with resistant melaphyres, coarse diabases, and bowlder conglom-
erates— and showed the topogiaphy associated with them in various profiles.'^ In regard to
the east part of Keweenaw Point, Irving'* emphasizes the relation of dip to topography:
Where the dip flattens the structure comes out finely in a series of bold ridges. Toward Portage Lake, however,
the dip becomes as high as 50° or more and the several ridges merge into one broad swell. This holds until the
Porcupine Mountains are reached, where, although the dip angle is as high as 30°, the .structure is most beautifully
illustrated in the outer ridge. « This ridge rises from the lake shore somewhat more gradually than the dip to a height
of over 1,000 feet and then drops off in a bold escarpment of 400 feet into the valley of Carp Lake.
This cliff/ extends nearly continuously across T. 51 N., R. 43 W., a distance of over 6 miles. The crown of the
cliff is from 800 to 1,000 feet above Lake Superior and from 400 to 600 feet above the valley of Carp Lake. The base
of the cliff is marked by a long slope of fragments fallen from the diabase and amygdaloid which forms its upper por-
tions, but through the greater part of its length there is a perpendicular face of about 400 feet above the talus.
Farther west again, as far as Bad River,ff the dips are high, often reaching 90°, and the harder rocks constitute
merely rounded ridges and knobs with the cliffs facing indifferently in all directions. Beyond Bad River and all
across Wisconsin to the St. CroLx the dips flatten once more, and the "sawtooth" shape in the ridges is everywhere
well marked.''
This is notably true throughout Douglas County, Wis.''
U. S. Grant •' refers briefly to the surface features characteristic of the Keweenawan in
Douglas County, Wis., where four belts of different topography are produced, vaiying with
the part of the Keweenawan exposed, the dip, and the glacial overburden. The more resistant
portions of the Keweenawan form two main ranges in northern Wisconsin because of the s^-n-
clinal structure there. T. C. Chamberlin, writing as editor of the notes of the late Moses Strong,
in reviewing the surface features of northwestern Wisconsin * says that the linear topography
referred to and represented in ])rofiles shows sjtlendid Keweenawan monoclinal ridges.
KEWEENAWAN MESAS.
On the north shore of Lake Superior the tabular-mesa topograjihy (fig. .5, p. 8S) is develo]>ed
in places where the Algonkian beds lie practically horizontal and weaker strata underlie more
resistant beds, so that erosion has been able to open lowlands on the weak rocks and leave iso-
lated highlands or ridges. Three great valleys have been opened up in the weaker beds in the
upper Iluronian (Animikie group) and the Keweenawan, and two great mesa ridges have
been left between these valleys. The waters of Lake Superior have subsequently risen to such
a level that they occupy the floors of these valleys and form Thunder, Black, and Xipigon
bays (PI. II, p. 86). Thunder Cape, the narrow end of one of the peninsulas, is a cliaracteristic
bit of mesa topography, its flat top rising 1,350 feet above the level of the lake. Pie Island is
another mesa of the same kind which erosion has isolated completely, the lake waters covering
the valley bottoms surrounding it, and Mount McKay,' south of Mount William, is a similar
a Marvine, A. R., Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, 1S73, pt. 2, p. 95.
6 Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 164-106.
c Idem, fig. 2 on p. ITS, and pi. 18.
d Idem, pp. 142-143.
c Described by Foster and Whitney, pt. 1, 1850, p. 35. Shown well in topographic map by Michigan fleol. Survey, .Vnn. Kept, for 1905, fig.
3, p. 15. Just east oi the I'onupine Mount.iins, in the ISIack River region, between Bessemer and Lake Superior, the topography o( the Kewee-
nawan in a typical strip from the I'enokee Range to Lake Superior is described by W. C. Gordon, who has prepared an excellent topographic map
(Geol. Survey Michigan, Ann. Rept. for 1906, pp. 40S-109, 420; pi. 32).
/ Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, p. 218.
0 Idem, p. 143.
» See also Irving, R. D., Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 187.3-1879, pp. (12, 67-(iS.
• Sweet, E. T., Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1S73-IS79, pp. 310-329.
} Grant, U. S., Bull. Geol. and Xat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin No. 0, 1901, pp. 6-8.
tocology of the upper St. Croi.\ district: Geology of Wisconsin, vot. 3, 1873-1879, pp. 367-381.
iMon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, p. 374.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 101
mesa perhaps small enough to be called a butte, rising 980 feet above Lake Superior, and isolated
in the broad, unsubmerged valley of Kaministikwia River. William Mclnnes "■ refers to the
area of flat-lj'ing Animikie rocks near Thunder Bay as showing "table-topped hills, and escarp-
ments with perpendicular faces and sharply angular outlines."
A. C. Lawson, who ascribed the escarpment of the monoclinal ridges near Gunflint Lake to
faultmg, has also indicated his belief that the east side of Thunder Bay, which "presents a very
bold and remarkably straight cliff several hundred feet high composed of Keweenawan sandstone
resting on Animikie slate, both flat-bedded and in apparent unconformity, * * * ig prob-
ably originally and genetically a fault scarp."'' The writer feels inclined to ascribe this escarp-
ment to subaerial denudation, partly (1) because of the insufficient evidence of larger faulting
here,"^ as pointed out in the discussion of the cliffs of the monoclinal ridges (p. 99), partly (2)
because denudation m the region is producing just such escarpments wliere rei^istant horizontal
strata overlie weaker beds, and partly (3) because a fault scarp m this location could not pos-
sibly have retained its present position and form since the latest possible date of formation
unless it were protected by some lately removed mantle, as the larger possible fault scarps of
the northwest coast of Lake Superior and the southeast side of Keweenaw Point seem to have
been. (See pp. 112-116.) The chief reason for doubting the fault origin of the east boundary of
Thunder Bay is that such an origin would imply the fault origm of the boundaries of all the
mesas in this district which have escarpments that are very similar topographically and geo-
logically. Because of the great complexity of block faulting that would isolate Thunder Cape
and the adjacent peninsulas, as well as Pie Island and Mount McKay, etc., and the total absence
of evidence of such faulting, it seems far more reasonable to ascribe these forms to the well-
established cycle of forms resulting from normal subaerial denudation.
North of Lake Superior, in Ontario, near Lake Nipigon and to the east and west, there
seems to be a great many more mesas and valleys of exactly this kind,"* all in an area underlain
by Keweenawan rocks or by upper Huronian (Animikie) slates and Logan sills, as along the
Canadian Pacific Railway east of Port Arthur and especially beyond Nipigon. A. C. Lawson «
writes :
It is to the presence of these trap sheets (the Logan sills) that the bold and picturesque topography of Thunder
Cape, Mount McKay, Pie Island, Nipigon Bay, and the many sheer-walled mesas and tilted blocks of the region is
due.
All these mesas apparentl}' have their present form because erosion has had more power
to open up broad valleys in a region where the rocks lie practically horizontal than in adjacent
regions where the rocks are more highly inclined.
Three topographic types are well represented in the Keweenawan division of the Algonkian,
where they seem to form a distinctly graded series (fig. 7) ratlier directh' associated with the
Monoclinal
Peneplain with monadnocks ^ I^i^lf? Mesas
Figure 7. — Hypothetical cross section showing relation of secondary lowlands, mesas, monocllDal ridges, etc., to peneplain.
dip of the constituent beds./ In exactly the same length of time precisely the same erosional
agencies have been able to produce almost no effect upon the vertical and highly inclined beds
(merely cutting gorges in the peneplain), to develop longitudinal valleys between monoclinal
a Geology of the area covered by the Seine River and Lake Shebandowan map-sheets, comprising portions of theRainy River and Thunder
Bay districts of Ontario: Geol. Survey Canada, new ser., vol. 10, 1S97, Rept. H, p. 6.
b Twentieth Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1S91, pp. 265-266.
<^ Mmor faults extending in another direction with smaller possible fault escarpments are described by R. C. Allen in an unpublished thesis
(1905) of the University of Wisconsin. Allen also appeals to faulting to explain the Mackenzie Valley (PI. XIII), the depression which nearly
connects Thunder and Black bays and is followed by the Canadian Pacific Railway: the writer believes it to be due to normal denudation.
d Collins, W. H., Summary Rept., Geol. Survey Canada, 1906, pp. 103, 105; Coleman, A. P., Rept. Bur. Mines, Ontario, vol. 16, pt. 1, 1907, pp.
107, 110.
« The laccolithic sills of the northwest coast of Lake Superior: Bull, Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. S, 1893, pp. 24, 43.
/Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1S,S3, pp. 142-143, 166.
102 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ridges on the gently inclined beds, and to advance the region where the l)e<ls are horizontal to a
maturity of form witli l)roa(l viiilovs and small isolated uplands (mesas).
HURONIAN MONOCLINAL RIDGES AND VALLEYS.
Monoclinal ridges, however, are not confined to the Keweenawan series of the Algonkian.
In a number of localities in the Tluronian, diabases, quartzites, and other strata with a mo<h^r-
atcly gentle dij) have developed monoclinal ridges which have tlie usual uns\-mmetrical profile
with a gentle slope and a steep scarp face. (See fig. 5, p. 88.)
GUNFLINT LAKE DISTRICT.
Near Gunflint Lake and in adjacent regions of Minnesota monoclinal-ridge topography,
described by U. S. Grant," is developed in the upper Humnian. Tlie slates of the Animikie
group are intruded by the Keweenawan Logan sills, which are now gently tilted and exposed,
forming the crests of monoclinal ridges (fig. 24) whose scarp faces show the weaker slates.
These consist of "long jiarallel ridges running approximately east and west, with sharp mural
escarpments on the north sides of the ridges and on the south gentle slopes." This topog-
raphy is also described by J. M. Clements,'' in effect as follows:
Upper Huronian (.Vnimikie group):
Gunflint formation: Lower slope of escarpments in monoclinal ridges.
Rove slate: Weak lower slope of monoclinal ridges, in many places talus-covered.
Keweenawan Logan sills: Usually cap monoclinal ridges, at many points forming perpendicular cliffs, above
gentler talus-covered slopes of Gimflint formation or Rove slate.
In this region, as in many parts of the Huronian where notably long and narrow monoclinal
ridges are formed, the drainage, whatever it may have been initially, has become so thoroughly
adjusted to the topography that the streams flow in longitudinal (subsequent) courses along the
strike of the weaker rocks, generally with rather broad valleys. In nearly all places where the
streams cross the ridges of more resistant rocks they are in much steeper-sided valleys.
PENOKEE RANGE. "^
In the Penokee-Gogebic iron range the lulls show tliis topographic quality most distinctly.
(See structure profile, PI. XVI, p. 226.) The Penokee Range consists of a series of hills, in the
north slopes of which are iron mines. North of this range there is a broad longitudinal valley.
The range is not made up of one continuous ridge but rather of a series of disconnected Hnear
liighlands (PI. XVI) cut through by narrow gaps wliich cross the strike of the more resistant
beds, including the iron formation, and are therefore not so ■wide as the subsequent valley, wliich
follows the strike of the weaker slates. The northern boundary of the valley is a range of
Keweenawan hills with well-developed monocUnal ridges, which are also cut through by narrow
transverse valleys that continue northward toward Lake Superior. The narrow transverse
valleys are probably consequent upon the original slope. The broad longitudinal valley is a
consequent lowland, though not yet drained by any single trunk stream.
South of tins principal longitudinal valley another lowland seems to be developing in
places; it stands at a rather lugher level than the northern one and is less continuous from end to
end, because interrupted by low ridges, wliich extend back from many of the higher liills in the
Penokee Range proper. It is a subsequent lowland in process of formation between the resist-
ant granite and the resistant rocks of the Penokee Range. South of tliis incipient valley rises
the northein edge of the Archean peneplain, with rather ragged liills of granite, Mluch in many
places reach directly to the foot of the Penokee Range without any intervening lowland.
R. D. Ining"* first described the topography of the Penokee Range, "the ridge or mountain
belt," as well as that of the Copper Range to the north. The former rises to about 1,.500 to
a Final Kept. Oeol. and Nat. Hist. Sun-ey Minnesota, vol. 4, 1899, pp. 4S2-4S3, 492, 49fi.
ft yermilicn iron-liciring di.strict of Minnesota: Mon. IT. S. Oeol. Survey, vol. 45. 1903, pp. .I.*. 370, 391-392, 399-401.
cSec also the lirief statement aljoiit topography in the chapters on the Penokee-Gogebic district.
d Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1S73-1ST9, pp. 02-70, 101-103.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 103
l.SOO feet, 100 to 300 feet above the lower land to the south, with a less abrupt north slope,
varying from a ridge a few rods wide to a broad swell of a mile. It is a continuous ridge for ncarl v
50 miles from the northern half of sec. 24, T. 44 N., R. 4 W., Wisconsin, eastward beyond Sunday
Lake in Michigan." Beside this there are detached ridges with the same ahgnment to the
west and to the east.
In places the ridge rises from 100 to 300 feet above the elevated swampy area south of it and from 100 to 600 feet
above the lower area north. In its more western portions this range is wide and has a rather narrow serrated crest,
while eastward from Tylers Fork it becomes more and more of a gentle swell until a point west of Sunday Lake is
reached, where there is again a broader ridge. In much of this distance the ridge forms the most prominent feature
of the topography of the country, being visible from the waters of Lake Superior in the vicinity of the Apostle Islands
as a blue line against the horizon.
At Penokee Gap, where there is a notable fault, there is also a marked offset in the crest
of the range" (PI. XVI).
Irving and Van Hise "^ have described the detailed topography associated with the various
Algonkian rocks in the Penokee-Gogebic district in effect as follows, also reviewing in a paragraph
the relationship of the various formations to the crest, slopes, etc., of the ridge in various
locaHties and showing the topography by three detailed topographic maps.** (These contours
are used in PI. XVI of this report.)
Cherty limestone: In one place forming a bluff 200 feet high and half a niilo long.
Quartz slate member: Conspicuous outcrops forming the base or capping the Penokee Range.
Iron-bearing member: Shares with quartz slate member in forming crest of conspicuous Penokee Range, 100 to
600 feet high.
Upper slate member: Forms great east-west valley between Penokee Range and Keweenawan ridges.
Fragmental rocks south of greenstone conglomerate: Quartzite outcrops in bold exposures.
The greenstones: Form a conspicuous east-west ridge 500 feet high.
GIANTS RANGE. «
The Giants Range 1 (see PI. VTII, in pocket ; fig. 5, p. 88) is one of the most striking features
in the topography of the Lake' Superior region. It is a long, narrow range extending east-north-
east and west-southwest in northern Minnesota for 80 to 100 miles, conspicuous becau.se it rises
above low, flat country on either side. It rises 400 to 500 feet above the adjacent country
near the east end, the greatest height above sea level being about 1,900 feet. West of the
Duluth and Iron Range Railroad the range gradually decreases in height toward the southwest,
and near Grand Rapids, Minn., where it crosses Mississippi River, its height above the adja-
cent country is relatively small. Beyond Pokegama Lake the Giants Range loses its individu-
ality and is completely buried beneath glacial drift, grading into the general level of the country
at 1,400 feet. It is not a continuous range but is "made up of a great number of small hill
ranges, having in general the trend of the main range to which they belong."^ The west part
is low and the divide at some places is on the quartzite'* instead of the granite. There are many
gentle bends in the crest and one market! bend where tlie i-ange extends southward 6 miles, at
Virginia and Eveleth in the "Horn."
The crest of the range is in places broad and flat, m others comparatively narrow and sharp. The southern slope
is very gentle; the northern slope is somewhat less so. At frequent intervals both crests and slopes are notched by
drainage channels. «
a Irving, R. D., and Van Hise, C. R., The Penokee iron-bearing series of nortliem Wisconsin and Micliigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Sur\'ey, vol. 19,
1892, p. 18S.
6 Irving, R. D., Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1873-1879, pp. 103-104.
cMon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 19, 1892, pp. 145, 188-189, 301, 361, 308, 374, 387, and 410.
il Idem, Pis. VII, IX, and XI.
« See also the brief description of the topography in the chapter on the Mesabi district.
/ Final Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 4, Pis. LXX-LXXXI; also Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1S03, pp. 35-36; also
Mon. U.S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, p. 21. The Giants (or Mesabi) Range is called Missabay Heights in many atlases and geographies in .\merica
and Europe. See footnote on p. 02.
3 Clements, J. M., The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, p. 30.
ftSpurr, J. E., The iron-bearing rocks of the Mesabi range: Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 10, 1894, p. 13.
• Leith, C. K., The Mesabi iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. s. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, p. 21.
104 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Several stream valleys cut com])letcly across tiie Giants Range in deep, narrow gorges or
water gaps, that of the Mississipjii being relatively sliallow. Of the deeper water gajis, that
occupied by Wine Lake and Embarrass River is the most prominent. Another transverse
valley, not occupied by a stream, is traversed by the Duluth and Iron Range Railroad; tliis
col or wind gaj) is 100 feet above the adjacent country and 2()() feet below the crest of tlie Giants
Range. There are a number of similar wind gaps, each of wliich was doubtless formed Vjy a
stream that abandoned its course while the land surface to tlie north stood at the level of the
gap, having been captured by an adjacent stream that continued to cut its water gap down.
The water gaps which cross the range are much deeper than the wind gaps, that of Embarrass
River (Wine Lake) being cut down to an elevation of 1 ,.380 feet, or more than 400 feet below
the crest of the range; soundings in the lake and diamond-drill records to the south show the
valley to be many feet deeper.
C. K. Leith" has described several of the transverse valleys as deep, steep-sided gorges,
cut or deepened by glacial waters when a glacial lake to the north overflowed southward across
the Giants Range. Some of the gorges are liigh up in the range and are no longer occupied
by streams. One such gorge 40 feet deej) is sho^vn on a topographic map (fig. 5) in Monograph
43; that crossed by the railway is well shown on the general topograpliic and geologic map of
the Mesabi district (PI. VIII) . It seems possible that these gaps or cols were already in exist-
ence when the glacial streams found and modified them in the manner described by Leith. The
lower wind gaps, especially tliat followed by the Duluth and Iron Range Railroad, suggest a
preglacial origin; no question is raised, however, of their occupation and modification by run-
ning water when the marginal glacial lakes referretl to existed.
The rock underlying the Giants Range itself is cliiefly lower Huronian granite, but Kewee-
nawan granite and Archean igneous rocks are also represented. The topographic anomah' of an
exceedingly long, narrow range (figs. 4 and 5) owing its prominence to the resistant quahtics of
granite is so great that it seems to require a word of especial explanation. It is common for
a quartzite or other sedimentary rock to form a long, narrow range of just tliis kind. It is
usual for the protruding edge of a dike or a sill of sufficient resistance to form just such a long,
narrow eminence as this. Granite, however, is not normally intruded in the form of lUkes and
sills, and we must therefore account for this occurrence by some selective process of folcUng,
faulting, or erosion.
Three hypotheses accordingly present themselves. The first is that of folding. Under this
hypothesis it might be conceived that the Giants Range since its intrusion has participated in
the folding of a long east-northeast to west-southwest antichne. Such a deformation might
result in the production of a long, naiTow ridge. In the front ranges of the Rocky Mountains
granites outcrop in long, narrow bands, none of which, however, is so narrow in proportion to
length as the Giants Range. Moreover, there is no evidence in the Mesabi region of any such
movement, though N. H. Winchell has conceived ** that the Giants Range was uphfted in a
contemporaneous isostatic adjustment with the extrusion of tlie gabbro, and R. D. Irving
implies tliis sort of origin in his diagram ■" of the relationship of tlie Huronian on ojiposite sides
of the Giants Range. The imphed equivalence of highly folded and nearly horizontal rocks on
opposite sides of the range has since been disproved by the weU-established unconformity
between these two series.
The second hypothesis supposes that faulting has occurred along a fine parallel to the
Giants Range and that the granite appears in its present position^as the edge of a larger faulted
granite block wliich is exposed only along tlie narrow width because other rocks overlie the
granite elsewhere. Tliis In'pothesis has little more support than the first, and it seems jirobable
from otlier e\'idence in the region that no great fault movement such as would form the Giants
Range occurred since the upper Huronian, though the Duluth escarpment of Keweenawan galibro
suggests such a faulting.
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, pp. 193-194, 199.
6 Twentieth Ann. Rcpt. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1S91, pp. lJO-121.
' Mon. U. S. Cieol. Survey, vol. 3, 1SS3, fig. 34, p. 399.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 105
The third hypothesis supposes that the granite is the outcropping edge of a great intruded
granite mass, exposed for a great distance east and west by erosion upon the granite as a retreat-
ing escarpment, and revealed for only a narrow width because it is, or has recently been, capped
and protected by a resistant bed of quartzite. In other words, the Giiints Range may be
regarded as a monoclinal ridge exactly similar in most respects to the other monocUnal ridges
of the Algonkian, but with an immensely greater length and a rather marked relief above the
adjacent region because of the resistant powers of the granite, giving the Giants Range its
present topographic prominence.
The Giants Range is the largest monadnock in the Lake Superior region. It is such a barrier
to trafiic that travel across it is limited to the valleys (PI. VIII, in pocket). Rather curiously,
the railway, in order to cross this range, selected not a water gap but a wind gap, because the
glacier and stream erosion in the lower part of the adjacent water gap (the valley of Embarrass
River and Wine Lake) has so deepened it and so steepened its sides that it is not a convenient
pass for either a highway or a railroad.
Upon the south slopes of the Giants Range — that is, in the Mesabi iron range — the minor
monoclinal-ridge topography is exceedingly well developed in one or two places, and i,t is sus-
pected that even better development would be apparent in places were it not for the thick drift
mantle nearly everj'where obscurmg the preglacial topography. Northwest of Hibbing, for ■
example, the Pokegama cjuartzite stands up as a distinct monoclinal ridge, with a lowland to
the north between the cjuartzite escarpment and the granite and a gentler slope southward
toward the iron mines. The topographic map shows this relationship in many places not
visited by the writer. Rarely in other parts of the Mesabi iron range the rpiartzite seems to
be weaker than the iron-bearing Biwabik formation, forming a lowland between the older rocks
and an iron-formation ridge. In the 1 ,S20-foot hiU between Virginia and Eveleth, on the west
side of the Horn (PI. VIII), there is a quartzite lowland of this sort with an escarpment and
monoclinal ridge of a resistant part of the iron formation, though the quartzite rises up to form
the base of tliis escai-pment. There are other iron-formation ridges on the east side of the Horn
and elsewhere.
MARQUETTE DISTRICT.
In the Marquette district also linear topography is developed (PI. XVII, in pocket) in
the area underlain by the Algonkian rocks, though before detailed studies were made it was said
to have a notabl}" hilly surface without obvious systematic relation to the structure." The
relief was said by Rominger to be comparatively slight, 50 to 100 feet and rarely 200 feet,**
though the recent topographic maps show greater extremes and an average relief of 200 to 400
feet. Upon the basis of the more detailed work the topography characteristic of the several
Algonkian formations in the Marquette district has been described by Van Hise and Bayley,"
detailed studies revealing a most faithful correspondence of the low hills and vallej^s to resistant
and weak beds. Van Hise and Bayley<* characterize the region as worn dowai from mountains
but now "merely bluffy," with maximum elevations of 400 feet or less, the valleys and ridges
being due to difl'erential erosion of weak and resistant beds. The following classification of the
topography and rock formations gives the substance of their descriptions:
Mesnard quartzite: Prominent ranges with minor sharp ravines and steep ridges. ,
Kona dolomite: Steep hills with vertical ragged cliff.s.
Wewe slate: Forms valleys, except in a few places.
Ajibik quartzite: Bdid ridges with precipitous bluffs and steep ravines. Some ridges 200 feet high.
Sianio slate: Prevailingly forms valleys.
Negaunee formation: Forms valleys, except locally.
" Brooks, T. B., Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, 1873, pp. 70-72.
i> Rominger, Carl, Geol. Sur\-ey Michigan, vol. 4, 1881, pp. 1-3.
' The Marquette iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1895, pp. 222, 241, 257, 283-284,314, 331-.332, 410, 417,
444-445, 461, 4,88-189, 499, 572-573: also in Fifteenth .\nn. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1895.
<i Fifteenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1895, pp. G44-U45.
106 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKIOK REGION.
Ishpeming formation:
Goodrich quartzite: In some places forms prominent range.
Bijiki schist: Conspicuous ridges and headlands in Lake Michigamme.
Michigammc formation: Ubually lowlands, except locally.
Clarksburg formation: Roimdcd knobs and narrow ridges.
Pre-Clarksburg greenstones: Prominent irregular knobs or long narrow ridges.
In the Republic trough the topograpliy of the Archcan ui)lan{ls, as briefly described by
H. L. Smyth," sliovvs characteristic granite knobs, rounded and gluciati-d ; Michigamme River
flows througl; the lower land undcriam b}' the bedded rocks (Algonkian), and the various fjuartz-
ites, mica schists, ferruginous schists, and igneous intrusives form the usual elevations and
depressions, nowhere rising to the height of the granite uplands on the east and west except in
Republic Mountam.
So many of the ridges are related to resistant beds and so many valleys to weak beds that
the character of the rocks maybe predicted with some assurance from the general form of to]iog-
raplij' . Local variations, however, make it impossible always to feel sure, for example, tliat the
same weak slate which in one place forms a valle}'^ will also be found in the lowland in an adja-
cent locality. An exception of this kind is found in the Siamo slate of the middle Huronian,
whose outcrop east of Teal Lake, near Negaunee, is marked by a very distinct east-west trending
valley, which is followed farther east by Carp River. Directly south and west of Teal Lake,
however, some more resistant members of the Siamo slate are found in the Siamo Hills and adja-
cent ridges, and for the next 10 or 12 miles westward the Siamo slate locally forms ridges, though
more commonly found in the valleys.
Just south of Negaunee and east of Ishpeming there is a series of rather abrupt knobs which
are not exactly of the class characteristic of this region. A number of diorite and diabase masses
intruded in the middle Huronian iron formation have been so resistant to erosion that many of
them form knobs which rise above the adjacent valleys. At near-by points, however, the iron
formation itself is so resistant that it stands up as a distinct knob or ridge.
Li this region the glacial deposits have not masked the preglacial topography to a great
degree, because the region seems to have had rather marked rehef in preglacial times, somewhat
in contrast with the Crystal Falls district. Immediately adjacent to the ilarquette district on
the east and south are lowlands where the lack of relief in glacial time is indirectly reflected by
the masldng of the bed-rock topography almost entirely by glacial deposits.
MENOMINEE DISTRICT.
The topography of the Menominee district has been described by Bayley,'' who speaks of
the area as forming two plains (PI. XXVI, in pocket), one in the bottoms of the present valleys,
the other on the level of the tops of the hills. The effect of erosion on the Huronian beds of the
Algonkian system has been to produce a series of east-\\est trending valleys and ridges which
correspond very closely to the weak and resistant members of the Huronian series. There is
clear evidence that the ridges and valleys in the Menominee district east of Iron Mountain,
Mich., were formed in ])re-Cambrian time and that they have been preserved since that time
because of their burial beneath the Cambrian sandstone, which served as a protectmg nuintie.
Erosion has recently removed most of these Cambrian overburdens and has reexposed the pre-
Cambrian topography. To-day the hills rise appro.ximately 300 to 400 feet above the valley
bottoms. They are a little higher than they were before the Upper Cambrian sandstone was
deposited, because a cap of sandstone still surmounts most of the hilltops. From tlu' valleys
it has been largelj- removed. The old cliffs and bluffs against which the Cambrian sandstone
was deposited are still exposed in the valley slopes; the drainage was in preglacial time almost
as well adjusted to the weak and resistant rocks as it had been before the Cambrian trans-
gression, though Bayley has supposed the topography then to have been sharper and more
rugged. Glaciation has, however, somewhat modified the stream courses, and the perfect
adjustment of preglacial time is lacking, as the gorges and w'aterfalls suggest;
a Mon. U. S. Oeol. Survey, vol. 2.8, 1895, p. 520.
I> Idem, vol. 40, 1904, pp. 125-129; Menominee special folio (No. 82), Geol. .\tlas V. S., U. S. Geol. Survey, 1900.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 107
Bayley" has described the toj^ography associated with the various Algonkian rock for-
mations in the Menominee district in effect as follows :
Sturgeon quartzite: Great bare regular bluffs with smooth tops and almost precipitous sides.
Randville dolomite (northern belt): Valleys and other depressions.
Randville dolomite (central belt): Usually insignificant, forming bases of hills and rarely little plateaus with small
escarpments.
Randville dolomite (southern belt): Conspicuous irregular cliffs or blul'fs.
Vulcan iron formation: Either inconspicuous in valleys or clinging to slopes of dolomite. Ledges rarely
prominent.
Hanbury slate: Entirely confined to low ground, forming njinor protrusions only where the slate is locally harder.
CRYSTAL FALLS DISTRICT.
In the Crystal Falls district, whose physiograjih}' lias been described by J. M. Clements
and H. L. Smyth,'' the adjustment of ridges and valleys to resistant and weaker structures has
been somewhat similarly developed (PI. XXII, in pocket), except that here the ridges and valleys
are arranged in a less simple and orderly way. The average relief is 200 feet in the western part.
The Cambrian has been almost entirely removed. Furthermore, this region seems to have
been, even in pre-Cambrian time, one of less relief than the Menominee region; certamly it
was a region of very slight relief (called by Clements "an approximate peneplain") when the
continental glacier overrode it, and as a result the glacial deposits are far more prominent and
have more thoroughly obscured the preglacial topography than in any other iron district in the
Lake Superior region except the Mesabi.
The topography characteristic of the several Algonkian formations in the Crystal Falls dis-
trict has been described by J. M. Clements, H. L. Smyth, and W. S. Bayley,*^ in effect as follows:
Western part.
Rand\dlle dolomite: No marked effect on topography or drainage (in depressions).
Mansfield slate: Marked depressions, followed by Michigamme River.
Hemlock formation: Exceedingly irregular topography; tuffs forming valleys; lava flows or intrusives forming
higher ground, and resistant tuffs forming high hills.
Bone Lake crystalline schists: Apparently forms knobs, but usually covered by glacial drift.
Upper Huronian: In many places covered by glacial drift or by Cambrian sandstone. Shales form valleys and
softly rounded hills. Graywackes and cherty rocks form more striking topography.
Eastern part — Felch MounUiin.
Sturgeon quartzite: Linear ridges, usually lower than those in the Archean, though locally lower than dolomite.
Randville dolomite: Low, steep-sided knolls, occasionally linear ridges.
Mansfield schist: No depressions; occasionally steep-sided valleys.
Groveland formation: Moderately resistant, forming elevations such as Felch Mountain and Groveland Hill,
100 feet high.
Upper Huronian mica schists and quartzites: Lowlands and low flat-topped ridges.
Eastern part — Michigamme Mountain and Fence River:
Sturgeon formation: Apparently here weak and forming lowlands; Randville dolomite underlying swamp.
Mansfield formation: Indistinguishable topographically in gently rolling plain of dolomite (miniature ridges).
Hemlock formation: Rough topographical details, with abrupt ridges and narrow ravines (in some parts till
covered).
Groveland formation: No topographic prominence except in Michigamme Mountain; in Fence River area topog-
raphy less important than that of glacial drift.
NORTH-CENTRAL WISCONSIN.
Weidman'' has described the topography associated with the various Algonkian formations-
in north-central Wisconsin (see Pis. IV, A, p. 90; XXXI, A, p. 436) in effect as follows:
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 46. 1904, pp. 177, 200, 291, 402.
b Idem, vol. 36, 1,S99. pp. 29-36, 331-335.
cidem, vol. 36, 1899 (western, pp. .50-51, 54, 73, 148. 155. 187-190; eastern, pp. 331, 398, 406. 411, 415, 423, 4.30, 431, 438, 440. 446. 471-473).
d Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin No. 16, 1907, pp. 42, 55, 62, 82, 88, 91, 100, 112, 118, 177, 358, 306, 371.
108 GEOLOGY OF THE LAIvE SUPERIOR REGION.
Lower sedimentary series (lower Buroniant).
Rib Hill quartzite: Bold knobs forming the highest land in the region in monadnocks, and jirominent because
surrounding weaker granite and syenite are base-leveled.
Wausau graywacke: Not prominent, forming very few low exposures.
Hamburg slate: Not forming valleys lower than adjacent more resistant formations because of lack of dissection
of perfected pene])lain.
Powers lUuff (luartzite: Forms notable prominence 300 to 400 feet below sunoundings; smaller ridges.
Quartzite at Rudolph: Low ridges and knobs.
Juration City quartzite: No notable topography.
Igneous intrusive formations (rhyolite series).
Wausau area: Absence of sharply rugged topography, though low ledges project slightly through younger formations.
Rhyolite schists of Eau Claire River: Forms striking cliffs in dells of Eau Claire River, due to joints.
Rhyolite schists of Pine River: Marked gorge, a mile long, IKO feet deep, known as dells of Pine River, with sharp
tributary gorges related to joints.
Upper sedimentary series {middle Huronianf).
Marshall Hill graywacke: Steep slopes and ledges. i^
Arpin quartzite: Low sloping land; less resistant than Powers Bluff quartzite and more resistant than adjacent
granite.
North Mound quartzite: Prominent mound rising above surrounding Cambrian lowland.
NORTHWESTERN WISCONSIN.
The Iluronian quartzites of Barron and Chippewa counties, Wis.,° form notably prominent
monochnal ridges rising as much as 300 feet above the adjacent plain ant! ha\nng gentle dip
slopes and steep escarpment faces with talus at the base.
THE LOWLAND PLAINS.
AREA.
The lowland region of horizontal or gently folded post-Algonkian rocks (figs. 4 and 5, pp. 87,
88, Pis. I, in pocket ; II, p. 86) includes cliiefly rocks of Cambrian and other early Paleozoic age so
generally buried beneath glacial deposits that ledges are comparatively rare tliroughout the
area and the preglacial topography is partly or wholly masked. A small area of drift-covered
Cretaceous, also flat lying, is found in northern Mimiesota.
The lowland is made up of narrow areas on the south shore of Lake Superior, a broad belted
plain in Micliigan, Llinnesota, and Wisconsin, and another plain in Miimesota. As the map
(PI. I) indicates, there is a narrow strip at the west end of Lake Superior, on the south shore,
and a narrow strip fringing the shore from L'Anse to Marquette. Besides tliis rather small
Httoral zone, a considerable area now buried by the waters of Lake Superior is, without much
doubt, covered by horizontal Paleozoic rocks.
These early Paleozoic rocks cover all of the Upper Peninsula of I\Iichigan east of Marquette
and overlap the highland country of northern Wisconsin and upper ilichigan, including the
Archean and Algonkian areas, in a great semicircle which extends southwestward into Wiscon-
sin to the vicinity of Grand Rapids and thence northwestward through Chippewa Falls, etc.,
to the region where the Paleozoic overlaps the Keweenawan of northern Wisconsin and sends
a narrow tongue northeastward to join the horizontal Cambrian of the head of Lake Superior
at Duluth. Very small patches are found on the north shore of Lake Superior.
CHARACTER AND STRUCTURE.
These early Paleozoic rocks consist chiefly of Upper Cambrian sandstone overlain in
places by a conformable or nearly conformable series which extends upward to the Silurian in
Wisconsin and to Devonian and Carboniferous in lower Michigan. North of the Archean and
o Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 4, 1873-1879, pp. 575-581.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 109
Algonkian of upper Wisconsin and IVIicliigan tliis Cambrian sandstone (Lake Superior sand-
stone) lies essentiall}' horizontal and is probably preserved because it is downfaulted. In
upper and lower iliclugan, in Wisconsin, and in Minnesota, however, there is evidence that the
sedimentary rocks have been thrown into a series of broad folds — a synclinal basin in Michigan
and a broad anticline in south-central Wisconsin. The Cretaceous in northern Minnesota is
essentially horizontal.
DENUDATION.
Earth movements have left some areas of Paleozoic rocks higher than others, and as a result
of the elevation and inclination of these beds eroding agencies have removed them entirely
from some areas, the boimdaries of wliich have a direct relation to the broatl folding. The
upper beds of the Paleozoic are almost entirely absent in northern and central Wisconsin and
northwestern Micliigan (fig. 1 1, p. 116), from wliich it is inferred that, though they were once present
over the whole of tliis area, they have since been removed by the active erosion which has taken
place in tliis elevated region. As an evidence of the former greater distribution of the Paleozoic
sediments we may refer to the isolated horizontal Cambrian beds that cap the ridges in the
Menominee district east of Iron Mountain, Mich. (PI. XXVI, in pocket), and various outliers of
Cambrian age, wliich form mounds rising above the general peneplain level in Portage, Wood,
and Clark counties. Wis.," far north of the area of Cambrian rocks. Quite in contrast to these
mounds of the border zone between the Paleozoic and pre-Cambrian in Wisconsin are the knobs
of the older rocks wliich project through the thin Paleozoic edge. The knobs are inliers; the
mounds are outhers. Chamberhn '' refers briefly to such knobs that protrude through the
Cambrian in northeastern Wisconsin. Tlie Baraboo quartzite ridges and those at Necedah,
Waterloo, etc. (figs. 53, 54, and 55, pp. 359, 360, 364), are features of the same sort. Because
of their conspicuous positions as monadnocks on the pre-Cambrian peneplain they have been the
first of the older rocks to emerge when the Paleozoic sediments which formerly covered their
tops were eroded.
THE BELTED PLAIN.
The distribution of the Paleozoic sediments in a broad semicircle on the south flank of the
Archean peneplain is to be explained, therefore, as a result of erosion after unequal upUft."^
The lowest bed, the Cambrian sandstone, is distributed in a curAang lowland belt around the
Archean (PI. I, in pocket), with outhers scattered far back upon the Archean surface, and the
overhnng Paleozoic formations are distributed in parallel curving belts, the more resistant beds
standing up as highlands, the weaker beds being worn down into lowlands. A hnear series of
iTunor liiglilands underlain by the " Lower Magnesian " limestone stretches southwestward in
Micliigan and eastern Wisconsin (PL I), and thence northwestward in central and western Wis-
consin. South and east of this is a broad valley wliich has been eroded upon the weaker members
of the Ordovician, especially the Upper Ordovician (Cincinnatian) shales ami parts of the
Galena and Trenton limestones. The waters of Green Bay have filled part of this great lowlantl
valley, wliich extends southward, inclucUng the broad, shallow depression containing Lake Win-
nebago (PI. II, p. 86). East of tliis valley there is a long, low monochnal ridge, wliich was
produced by the effects of erosion on the resistant eastward-dipping Niagara limestone, and
which has a steep scarp face on the northwest side and a gently dipping back slope toward
Lake Michigan, diversified by minor monochnal ridges due to weak and resistant members of
the Niagara. It is overlain by glacial and lake deposits. It forms an upland ridge (fig. 5,
p. 88) east of Lake Winnebago and extends north in the Door Peninsula, Washington and
adjacent islands of Wisconsin, and the Garden Peninsula of upper Mchigan; the scarp con-
tinues first northeast, then south as the Niagara escarpment of Georgian Bay, southern Ontario,
and northern New York. East of this ridge is the lowland of weak rock in wliich Lake Michigan
ies and the upland of the northern part of lower Michigan.
o Weidman, Samuel, Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin No. 16, 1907, pp. 400, 405-407.
i> Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 2, 1873-1877, p. 248.
cidem, vol. 1, 1873-1879, pp. 24S-252.
110 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The topography in the part of western Wisconsui inchidcd in this report is (Icscribeil by
Moses Strong," that in central Wisconsin by R. D. Irving,* and that in eastern Wisconsin by
T. C. ChaniberUn.'^ Tlip physiography of Wisconsin as a whoK> is briefly treated by G. L. Collie.''
Russell <^ has shown that in the greater part of the northern peninsula of Micliigan the
wearing dowm of the gently inchned Paleozoic rocks has resulted in belts of upland and lowland
of a sufficient degree of rehef to be apparent beneath the glacial deposits. The topograpliy of
this region was described previously in a more general way by Douglass Houghton ■'^ and by
Brooks. 3
The portion of the southern peninsula of Michigan here mapped as within the Lake Superior
region has been described by Rominger '' anil by Lane.'
The arrangement of the gently inclined Paleozoic rocks in curving zones has led W. M.
Davis to describe Wisconsin as an ancient coastal plain, referring to the peneplained Archean
area of northern Wisconsin as an oldland, the area underlain by Cambrian sandstone as an
inner lowland, with a first and a second cuesta (monoclinal ridge) extending around its margin
along the outcrop of the " Lower Magnesian" and the Niagara limestones respectively.-' Objec-
tion has been raised to the use of the term "ancient coastal plain" on the ground that the
upland area of northern Wisconsin is not known to be the old land from wliich the local Paleo-
zoic sediments were derived. Though it is hence not permissible to classify Wisconsin as an
ancient coastal plain, there is good warrant for describing these parts of Wisconsin and Michigan
as a belted plain (fig. 5, p. 88 ; fig. 1 1 , p. 116) with upland and lowland zones sj^stematically related
to the weak and resistant rocks.
THE MINNESOTA LOWLANDS.
In the western part of the Lake Superior region, extending into the vallevs of Red River
of the North and Mississippi River, is a great lowland region, which seems to have been reduced
to a peneplain in Mesozoic time, perhaps in the Cretaceous.* The Cretaceous peneplain extends
into the Lake Superior region from the west and southwest and Cretaceous sediments overlap
all the westward extension of the Giants Range. Just what this distribution of the Cretaceous
may mean can not be said at present; but it seems probable either that sedimentation did not
take place in the Lake Superior basin during the Cretaceous or else that wliile the Cretaceous
base-levehng was going on over a great part of the United States the great mass of Paleozoic
and perhaps later sediments were being removed from the basin of Lake Superior and the
adjacent Mglilands, perhaps uncovering the several great escarpments presently to be described
and producing the several lowland belts adjacent to Lake Superior and the Paleozoic areas to
the south.
THE BASIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR.
GENERAL CHARACTER AND ORIGIN.
The basin (PI. II) wliich contains the largest of the North American lakes probably includes
parts of every system of rocks known to be in the region, from the Archean to the Recent.
It is not known whether Paleozoic or Keweenawan rocks occupy the greater part of the basin.
The Lake Superior basin is e.xcejjtional in that it is nearly surrounded by liiglilands. Going
back from Lake Superior in any direction except the southeast, one soon comes to an escarp-
ment, as at Diduth or on the south shore, above wliich is a distinct upland wliicli overlooks
the lake basin. In some places this escarpment overlooks the waters of the lake directly (PI. V) :
in others it is some distance back (PI. II and figs. 4 and 5). Moreover, this escarpment (400 to
800 feet in height) at many points descends into very d<>op water (500 to 900 feet), so that the
o Ooology of Wisconsin, vol. 4, 187;i-1879, pp. 7-37. s Idem, vol. 1, 1S73, pp. 68-09.
i> Idem. vol. 2, 1873-1877, pp. 453-153, S3!, 548. * Idem, vol. 3, lS7o, pp. 1-20.
eldem, pp. 97-100. < Watcr-Supplj- Paper U.S. Geol. Survey No. 30, 1S99, pp. 57-.58, 9i>-91.
d Bull. Am. Bur. Oeography, vol. 2, 19;)1, pp. 270-287. i Davis, W. M., Physical geography, 1S9S, pp. 13(>-137, flg. S5.
c Ann. Kept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1904, pp. 52.^).' * Leith, C. K., Kcon. Geology, vol. 2, 1907, p. 149.
/ Geol. Survey -Michigan, vol. 2, 1873, p. 241.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. Ill
whole height of the suiroundinp; rim is not everywhere apparent. Some of the other Great
Lakes have siicli a bounchiry on one sitle, hut none is so nearly walled in as Lake Supciior.
As the submerged contours (PI. II) show, this basin has a depth of almost 1,000 feet, the
deepest sounding being 163 fathoms, or 978 feet, near latitude 87° W., longitude 47° 45' N., or
nearly 400 feet below sea level, without considering the possible filling of recent lake silts or
glacial deposits. There is a notable depression between the pre-Cambrian of northern Wis-
consin and the pre-Cambrian of Minnesota and Canada. This depression consists of a long,
narrow trough trending northeast and southwest and limited on the north by the great escarp-
ment wliich extends from Duluth northeastward to the mouth of Nipigon Bay, a distance of
250 miles. This trough is 25 to 70 miles TOde. Its southern boundary is Keweenaw Point and
the Michigan and Wisconsin shore; at Oronto Bay, east of Ashland, there is an angular offset
in passing the Apostle Islands, diminisliing the width of the lake by half. Thence the wall of
the depression goes on parallel to and near the Wisconsin shore, the fault line converging west-
ward toward the Duluth escarpment fault line, probably meeting it west of the head of the
lakes in Minnesota.
From th^ mouth of Nipigon Bay the border of the Lake Superior depression extends
southeastward to Sault wSte. Marie as a high wall or escarpment of xmknowni origin. Here it is
not a straight line but has great embayments and salients. On the south shore a fault escarp-
ment extends southward on the east side of Keweenaw Point. The liighland border thence
trends irregularly southeastward to the vicinity of Marcjuette, beyond which it extends south
and a httle west of south into Wisconsin. The area between Marquette and Sault Ste. Marie
on the south shore is lowland.
The North American Great Lakes are situated in pairs on either side of an escarpment
which faces the boundary between the resistant pre-Cambrian and the relatively weak Paleozoic
rocks. In this respect they resemble the great lakes of the pre-Cambrian area of northwestern
Europe. An escarpment thus situated and formed is called by Suess a glint line. Lake
Superior, however, should not be included among the glint lakes, where it is classified by
Suess," together with Lake Ontario, Georgian Bay, Lake Winnipeg, etc. The southeastern
part of Lake Superior might be considered a glint lake because it has one early Paleozoic and
one Archean shore, as was pointed out by Agassiz,** if it were not known on other- evidence to
be chiefly a structural basin.
In the origin of its basin, also. Lake Superior is exceptional. The other great lakes, four
to the east in the United States and four to the north in Canada, lie in lowland areas where
differential erosion acting upon alternate weak- and resistant beds would produce basins if
aided by glacial erosion, glacial clogging, etc., though some of the basins are possibly also in
part structural. Lake Michigan, for example, lies between the broad, anticlinal, southward-
pitcliing fold of central Wisconsin and the basin-like syncline of central Micliigan, its location
suggesting a partly structural basin, as does also the knowm warping in the basins of the other
great lakes, though the structural feature is certainly of minor importance. The correspondence
of the Lake ^Michigan lowland with a belt of weak strata (Silurian and Devonian), perhaps
somewhat deepened by glacial erosion,"^ is probably of principal importance.
The reason for the present depression. of the Lake Superior basin is somewhat doubtful,
the earliest explanations being regarded as inadequate to account for certain features of it.
The fact that it is a synchne (see structure section, PI. I, in pocket), first pointed out by Foster
and Whitney "^ and amplified by Irving," has never been called in doubt, for there is ample
proof of it. But for so old a structural basin to remain unfilled f and for it to retain abrupt
boundaries which bear all the characteristics of youth are departures from the normal con-
dition wluch require special explanation.
» Su3ss, Ediiard, The face of the earth (Das Antlitz der Erde), translated by H. B. C. and W. J. SoUas, vol. 2, O.xford, 190G, p. 65.
6 Lake Superior, etc., 1S50, p. 420.
« Chamberlin, T. C, Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 1, 1S73-1879, pp. 253-259.
i Report on the Lake Superior land district, pt. 1, 1850, p. 109.
c Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, l.SS.^, pp. 410-418.
/ Barrel! f.Jour. Geology, vol. 14, laoti, p. .33.5) has computed that it would take Mississippi River only 60,000 years to completely fill Lake
Superior if it flowed into that water body with its present volume and load.
112 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The hypothesis that the present Lake Superior basin exists because of a geosyncline, as
first stated, needs to be modified, therefore, bj' consideration of the possibihty of graben or
rift fauhing. The amphfication of this revised hypothesis and its verification in detail remain
for future work. The possibility, however, seems worth outlining here.
It is thought reasonable to suppose that after the late Algonkian deformation, whose struc-
tural warping produced or redeepened the major sjTichne, the basin was filled to a considerable
extent by lavas and by sediments overlj-ing the Keweenawan flows. Between the close of tliis
period of deposition and the beginning of the Upper Cambrian a great period of denudation
produced the pre-Cambrian peneplain, whose surface of low relief beveled across the weak and
resistant members of the Archean and Algonkian, the syncUnal basin perhaps being filled with
the material worn away in making the peneplain or perhaps ])eing replaced bj' part of the
peneplain surface. At some subsequent date, probalily also pre-Cambrian, faulting took place,
producing the great escarpment which extends northeastward from Duluth and smaller nearly
parallel escarpments on the south shore of the lake. These two fault fines bound what is
perhaps a great graben or rift, which forms the rectangular body of northern and western Lake
Superior (fig. 8). The evidence of the fault origin of these escarpments may be gathered from
a detailed consideration of their characteristics.
PENEPLAIN _.^ gsCARgMENT
CAMBRIAN
\ LAKE SUPERIOR GRABLN
Sea level
UPPER HURONIAN MEWEENAWAN KEWEENAWAN
(ANiMmi£ group)
FiGUKE 8.— Graben or rift valley of western Lake Superior.tshowing escarpment on either side and ^J^neplain above.
DESCRIPTION OF ESCARPMENTS.
DULUTH ESCARPMENT.
Rising steeply above the waters of Lake Superior for about 600 to 800 feet at Duluth and
with diminishing height toward the northeast is the Duluth escarpment (PI. II, p. 86). It has a
slope at Duluth of 450 to 1,000 feet to the mile, and the steeply ascending face is 1^ to 2 miles
wide (PI. V, A). Above rises the fairly level-topped gabbro plateau, wluch extends north-
ward as part of the peneplain. The escarpment, wlxich bounds tliis plateau on the southeast,
is remarkably simple in its outhne, with none of the irregularity which characterizes slopes
long eroded by streams. Tliis simplicity of outline is shared by the gently curved escarpment
of Keweenaw Point and by that of northern Wisconsin, both of which are kno\vn to foUow fault
fines. Lawson has suggested that the Duluth escarpment also foUows a fault line." We have
then to account for its fresh and uneroded form, for it is quite inconceivable that a fault scarp
could have been produced, as tliis may have been, in pre-Paleozoic or verj' early Paleozoic time
and not have been more largely altered by weathering and stream erosion.
The streams of the Duluth escarpment descend very steeply to Lake Superior; few of
them head more than 4 or 5 miles from Lake Superior (PL II), the greatest distance being 12
to 14 miles, in contrast with lengths of 30 to 75 miles on the north and northeast shores of Lake
Superior. Many of them have as steep an average grade as 150 to 250 feet to the mile (PI. V, ^-1),
the general average being 80 to 160 feet to the mile. No one of these rather tumultuous streams
has cut a significantly deep valley in the face of the escarpment and most of them have only
cut short gorges with small rapids and waterfalls.
Quite in contrast with these steep-graded, rapidly falling streams of the escarpment are
the leisurely flowing streams of the plateau surface above. The Cloquet, the upper St. Louis,
and various other rivers have an average slope of about 8 or 10 feet to the nnle. It is well
established that a rapidly flowing stream with a steep grade is able to deepen its vaUey rapidly
and to extend its headwater area so that it encroaches upon the area drained by an adjacent
a Twentieth Ann. Rept. Ocol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1891, p. 192.
U)
1- .
m uj
(A
it
O III
in 3
N
_ n
*-»
O rr
11
q: <
< iij
7
c
o
1, 2:
<
«;
13
O lu
0
■2
>
(-
T
"-*
a>
zr^
U
■3
g
bJ q:
5
'J
T
^
^ <•
0
Q- D
c;
It n
0
<
o
() ^
m <
Ul2
iLl 0
0
tt ir
0 3
1 1
0)
UJ
ic
<
J
n <
7 1-
< V
B
1 ^1
1
Q. Ill
S
-1 Z
Z
■'
z ?
l^ ^
T
> ^
D
1
n fi
-)
O
Q
1-
<
0
s
CM
1
1>
/• T
a;
1
UJ H
13
M
Q.
0
S
fr 3
U)
ii
< Q
hi
0
UJ 0
I
■■J
7
T —
H "^^
-
^z
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION.
113
FiGUEE i
-The drainage of the St. Louis and Mississippi headwaters before the stream captures
along the Duluth escarpment.
leisurely flowing stream (fig. 9), capturing and diverting the latter or some portion of its head-
waters. Stream captures or piracies, as they are called, of tliis Icind are common. We should
expect, then, that in the course of stream development for a great length of time several of the
swiftly flowing streams of the escarpment would have extended their headwaters back to the
region drained by the leisurely flowing streams of the plateau surface and captured part or
all of these drainage systems.
The fact that many of the
large streams have not done
so is evidence of their youth.
The largest stream in the
region, however, seems to
have already done just what
would be expected (fig. 10),
and it is natural that the
largest stream should be able
to do tliis first. St. Louis
River, cutting back at a point
near the end of the escarp-
ment where it is rather low,
has been able to extend its
headwater region northwest-
ward until it has captured the
southwestward-flowing Clo-
quet and the southwestward-flowing stream that forms the present headwaters of the St.
Louis itself. These captured streams had been a part of the leisurely drainage system of
the plateau surface, and, it seems certain, were withm the Mississippi basin (Pis. I and II).
Indeed, a large valley extending southwestward from the town of Floodwood, where the
St. Louis now turns abruptly to the southeast, indicates that this is probably the latest
elbow of capture at which the piratical St. Louis has been able to divert to the Lake Supe-
rior-St. Lawrence drainage
system a large headwater
tributary of Mississippi
River, as it had previously
diverted the Clociuet, an-
other ^Mississippi head-
water, or possibly one of
the St. Croix.
A study of similar fault
scarps acted upon by
stream erosion in other
parts of the world indi-
cates that this fault scarp
has not been acted upon
by erosional agencies for
a great length of time.
If it had been so eroded
for a long period, we should
find it deeply cut by valleys with outlymg knobs on the lower slopes, like the erosion escarji-
ment at ^larciuette (PL V, B), and with stream captures at the upper shoulder, where the
escarpment meets the plateau top.
Comparison of this escarpment with the ec[ually abnipt escai'pments on the north shore of
Lake Superior from Thunder Bay to Sault Ste. Marie emphasizes the freshness of the Duluth
escarpment; there is a striking contrast in stream and vallej^ distribution. The north-shore
47517°— VOL 52— 11 8
Figure 10. — The drainage of the St. Louis and Mississippi headwaters at present, after stream
captures and diversions.
114 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
escarpment has much lonj^er streams flowing directly to the lake from tiie north, with deep
valleys everywhere cut to lake level. It is a mucii-breached wall; the Duluth escarpment is an
unbroken barrier. Tlie drainage of the former proclaims greater length of time for stream
dissection in the same language by which the drainage of the hitter aimounces youth.
It seems possible that erosion by the Lake Superior lobe of tlui Labrador ice sheet might
have so smoothed the face of this escarpment and steepened and intensified it that topography
of the kind suggested wouhl be destroyed or that longer streams draining to Lake Superior
would be diverted by the ice barrier and acquire new courses. Such modification may have
taken place to a slight degree, but even if the maximum of glacial erosion is assumed the lack
of stream diversions is c(uite unexplained, as is also the resemblance to the acknowledged fault
scarp on the east side of Keweenaw Point.
Along the line by which this escarpment can be discriminated as a form initially produced
by faulting rather than by glacial erosion a scrutiny of the submerged continuation of the
same escarpment reveals several significant facts. Fortunately the detailed soundings made
by the Corps of Engineers of the United States Army in charting the Great Lakes give us detailed
information (PI. II) concerning the escarpment below present lake level. First, it continues
to descend at as steep or steeper angles than on the land, a depth of 400 to 600 feet being found
within 2 to 3 miles from any part of the shore. The escarpment, therefore, is not merely 400
to 600 feet but 1,000 to 1,200 feet in height. Second, it extends directly across the moutlis
of the several large bays (Thunder, Black, and Nipigon) at the north end of the lake, where the
escarpment feature in the unsubmerged land surface is interrupted by these broad valleys,
partly drowned beneath the present lake level. These are therefore hanging valleys, entermg
the lake basin or the linear depression to which they are tributary at levels 400 to 600 feet "
above its bottom. (See PI. II.) This submerged hanging valley condition might be explained
either by glacial erosion or by faulting.
The facts in favor of glacial erosion are (a) known ice flow along this coast and parallel to
it; (h) probably accentuated erosive ability in this portion of the Lake Superior basin, where
more rapid movement would result from the constriction of the ice between Isle Royal and
the mainland; (c) the known ability of glaciers of no greater thickness and less width to erode
so deeply that main valleys receive discordant tributaries (hanging vallej-s) as much as 500
to 1,000 feet above, as in Alaska, the Swiss Alps, Scotland, Norway, New Zealand, etc.
Points in favor of faulting are the following: (a) The straightness of the escarpment;
(h) the continuation below lake level of a topograpliic feature whose drainage and other land
phenomena are inexplicable by glacial erosion alone; (c) the uniform level at which the sub-
merged hanging valleys stand (Thunder Bay 22 to 23 fathoms, Black Bay 22 fathoms, Xipigon
Strait 20 to 21 fathoms). Such uniformity is unusual in glacially eroded hanging valleys,
where the size of the glaciers in tributary valle^^s, their width, tliickness, and eroding power,
produce hanging valleys at diverse levels. Glaciers of the unecjual sizes denoted by these
bays would surely have done so. (d) The varying age, character, and resistance of the rocks
beveled across by this supposed fault (Cambrian sandstones, Keweenawan lavas and sediments,
upper Huronian intrusives and slates, and older rocks).
The escarpment therefore seems to have features inexplicable b\' glacial erosion alone,
but none that do not fit the hypothesis of glacial erosion motlifying a faulted form. The
exceptional depth of water just opposite the mouth of Thunder Bay (156 fathoms), making this
point 936 feet deep, or more than 300 feet below sea level, and the second deepest place in tlio
lake, can be readily explained by glacial scooping at just this point, for such irregularity in the
bottoms of glacially eroded channels like the Norwegian and Alaskan fiords are not uncommon.
The writer accordingly feels that there is a reasonable possibility that the northwest shore
of Lake Superior from a point west of Duluth to St. Ignace at the north, with its direct but
broadly-curving course, represents the position of a fault line. This fault scarp, with 1 ,000 feet
or more of throw, may either be very recent, though several considerations lead to the belief
o Bottom of Thunder Bay, 22 fathoms or 132 feet; depth of trough opposite mouth, US fathoms or 0T8 feet.
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 115
that this is not so, or else it may have been faulted long ago and then buried and protected so
that erosion has only recently begun to attack it. Accordingly it may owe the preservation
of its southwesterly portion (Minnesota shore) to protection by Cambrian or later sediments
and the dissection of its northeasterly part (Ontario shore) to the earlier removal of such a
protecting Cambrian mantle. Glaciation is believed to have modified this escarpment in its
minor features only, as in changing a more precipitous slope to the present flaring wall and in
locally deepening the depression at its base.
KEWEENAW ESCAKPMENT.
The escarpment of the east side of the Keweenaw Point "■ very closely resembles the Duhith
escarpment in form and condition of erosion though not so high nor so steep (PI. II). A north-
east-southwest trendmg escarpment borders the east side of "an elongated promontory,* not
greatly dissected by erosion nor deeply undulate nor serrate in its crest line," whose flat top
has been formed by the base-levehng '^ of a series of steeply dipping Keweenawan beds and whose
western and northwestern sides slope more gradually to the level of Lake Superior; the east
side slopes steeply to the open lake near the tip and is elsewhere separated from the lake by the
low-lying flat portion imderlain by the Cambrian sandstone (PI. XXVIII, p. 380).
This escarpment differs, however, fi-om the Duluth gabbro escarpment in one important
respect. It is cut entirely through by stream valleys in at least two places. It is believed
that the great transverse valley of Portage Lake (PI. XXX, B, p. 434) and the valley of Ontonagon
River were formed before the present Lake Superior existed, by streams which were superposed
on this long, narrow peninsula through a mantle of Cambrian (Lake Superior) sandstone, whose
remnants are still preserved high ujjon the fault scarp near the highest part of Keweenaw
Pomt.'' Irving and Chamberlin," after careful consideration of the many earlier hypotheses,
reach the conclusion that the Keweenaw Point scarp is a pre-Potsdam fault modified by wave
work, buried, and slightly refaulted in post-Potsdam or post-Cambrian time. (See fig. 75, p. 574.)
ESCARPMENT OF NORTHERN WISCONSIN (SUPERIOR ESCARPMENT).
The escarpment wliich forms the boundary of the northern highlands of Wisconsin f and
overlooks the basm of Lake Superior from a point west of Duluth eastward to the Apostle
Islands is a lower and more gently sloping scarp (PL II). It has the characteristics of the
other two escarpments in being without topographic outliers and in having short, steeply
sloping stream courses which have not extended headward much beyond the shoulder of the
escarpment.
Chamberlin? concludes that this escarpment of Bajrtield and Douglas counties, Wis., is a
pre-Potsdam fault scarp, and Grant ^ has supported this conclusion but makes its age post-
Potsdam. Like the Duluth and Keweenaw escarpments, it seems to have been protected so that
its dissection has been somewhat postponed Its youth is therefore not so anomalous as W. M.
Davis has suggested. *
ISLE ROYAIi ESCARPMENT.
On the north side of Isle Royal there is a submerged escarpment of 400 to 500 feet, suggest-
ing a parallel fault here (PL II) , wliich Irving and Chamberlin ' conceived of as possibly a contin-
uation of the fault of Bayfield and Douglas counties on the south shore. There is no continua-
0 Ir^dng, R. D., and Chamberlin, T. C, Observations on the junction between the Eastern sandstone and the Keweenaw series on Keweenaw
Point: Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 23, 1885, pp. 12, 98-119.
6 Idem, p. 103.
<■ Van Hise, C. R., Science, new ser., vol. 4, 1896, pp. 217-220.
i Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 23, 1885, pp. 109-110.
t Idem, p. 119.
f Chamberlin, T. C, Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 1, 1SS3, pp. 105-100. Grant, U. S., Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin No. 6,
I90I, p. 0.
9 Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 1, 1883, p. 105.
» Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin No. fi, 1901, pp. 17-20.
* Science, new ser., vol. 15, 1902, p. 234.
1 Bull. U. S. Geo!. Survey No. 23, 1885, p. 111.
116 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
tion of this steep slope northeast or southwest of Isle Royal, wliich stands on a high base with
steep descents on all sides of it, especially the northwest and southeast. If the channel north-
west of Isle Royal is ascribed to block faulting, the island itself must be regarded as a land
mass that stands as a horst above the deep surrounding basin because of failure to be faulted
down.
Isle Royal and Keweenaw Point accordingly have certain features in commcjn aside from
familiar fact that the Keweenawan rocks in Isle Royal dip soutlieast and those at Keweenaw
Point dip northwest. The slopes facing each other seem to be dip slopes, but of the sides facing
awiiy fiom each other that of Keweenaw Point is known to be a fault Une, and that of Isle
Royal may possibly be a smaller one. This structural feature, then, would be a great synchnal
trough between Isle Royal and Keweenaw Point, with downfaultmg on each side.
Massing of the contours in other parts of the lake (PI. II) suggests submerged escarpments
east of this trough, but there is not enough information for detailed discussion.
AGE OF ESCARPMENTS.
For all these subparallel escarpments grouped about the west end of Lake Superior the
hypothesis is advanced that they have been formed by faulting. Their later liistory may
have accorded with one of two hypotheses. One supposes that they are old escarpments
(pre-Cambrian) sHghtly modified by stream erosion and in places possibly developed mto sea
chffs and then buried beneath Paleozoic sediments. Durmg the ensumg long period of denuda^
tion the escarpments themselves were protected from erosion by the overlyuig sediments.
They were gradually uncovered and are now just in the begiiming of a cycle of erosion, wliich
was postponed until their rather recent disinterment. The alternative hypothesis that these
are much more recent fault scarps (post-Cretaceous or pre-Pleistocene) is supported by the
evidence of slight post-Cambrian movement along two of these scarps (along which tliere was
surely much greater pre-Cambrian f aultmg) and by the evidence of post-Cretaceous and of post-
Pleistocene faulting in other parts of the area. The question of the date of this faulting is a
large one, involving the determination of the age of the great peneplam of the area and the
age of the present Lake Superior basin.
BEARING OF ESCARPMENTS ON AGE OF PENEPLAIN.
There are three fields for attacking the problem of the age of the peneplain in the Lake
Superior region. The first is m northern Wisconsm, where the truncated siu-face of the pre-
Cambrian now dips down imder the Paleozoic. The conditions here are shown m figure IL
BELTED PLAIN
''^^'^,^'.'l;n.. , . CL -. - -— A '-°r^L^!l.°f°'?. -.—„.„-_- ....
HUPONIAN SERIES
FiGUEE 11.— Structure profile in northern Wisconsin, showing the south edge of the peneplain on the pre-Cambrian rocks and the northern part of
the belted plain of the Paleozoic.
Weidman has demonstrated that h-c is a buried pre-Potsdam peneplain and mferred that a-h is
its exhumed equivalent. Van Ilise previously referred to h-d as a Cretaceous i>eneplaui and to
a-h as its equivalent. So far as the writer can see, evidence for decidmg conclusively between
these two hypotheses is not present, though the Paleozoic outliers on the peneplain suggest that
it is pre-Potsdam rather than CYctaceous.
The second field of attack is in the region to the west, in Minnesota (PI. XIV, p. 212). 'Ilere the
Cretaceous overlaps the peneplain. Numerous diamond-drill holes tlirough tlie glacial drift on
the Cuyuna range show the Cretaceous as a thin mantle on the peneplam of pre-Cambrian rocks.
Elsewhere the drift covers it deeply, but on the border of the Giants Range monadnock, in the
]\Iesabi iron range, Cretaceous outliers are found m valleys and on ridge slopes (PI. MIT, in pocket).
These are marme Upper Cretaceous, so the peneplam might perfectly well be either pre-Cambrian
PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF THE REGION. 117
or early Cretaceous in age. If the Cretaceous cau be found in valleys in the peneplain as well
as in valleys on the slopes of its monadnocks, the probability of pre-Cambrian age will be
strengthened .
The thirtl and most jiromising field for investigation is in tlie fault scarps themselves. The
escarpments were clearly made after the great peneplain was developed, for the nearly base-
leveled upland areas now extend neatly up to the edges of these steep slopes (fig. 8, p. 112) and could
not have done so when the peneplain was formed. The two latest periods of great base-leveling
in the area are thought to be pre-Cambrian (pre-Potsdam) and Cretaceous. The known periods
of faultmg are pre-Cambrian, post-Cambrian, post-Cretaceous, and post-Pleistocene. The Lake
Superior basin was surely here in pre-Pleistocene time, so the post-Pleistocene may be elimmated
as a period of major faulting. The choice seems to lie between (a) regarding the peneplain as
due to Cretaceous base-leveling and the escarpments as due to post-Cretaceous faulting, to
which there are certain objections, and (b) regarding the peneplam as an exhumed slightly
dissected pre-Cambrian surface and the escarpments as due to pre-Camorian faulting. The
assimaption of protection by Paleozoic sediments is necessary in order to explain the relatively
fresh fault-scarp forms,' and from this assumption naturally follows the hypothesis of the clear-
ing out of the basin and exhumation of the escarpments iluring th,e Cretaceous base-leveling and
the glacial period, all the later faulting beuig considered of slight amomit. There are objections
to this hypothesis also, but in the mind of the writer they are of less weight.
CHAPTER V. THE VERMILION IRON DISTRICT OF MINNESOTA."
LOCATION, AREA, AND GENERAL GEOLOGIC SUCCESSION.
'Ihe Vcnnilion iron-bearing district lies in northeastern Minnesota, in St. Louis, Lai<e, and
Cook counties (Pi. VI). The district extends about N. 70° E. from near the west end of \'er-
niilion Lake, in west longitude 92° 30', to the vicinity of Gunflint Lake on tiic international
boundary, longitude 90° 45', and lies between 47° 45' and 4S° 15' north latitude. The district
is for the most part 5 to 10 miles broad but locally as much as 12 or 15 miles, and at the east-
ern end it is divided into two narrow belts by the granite of Saganaga Lake. The length of
the district is about 100 miles.
The jjrotkictive iron-bearing rocks are bounded on the north In' the granite of Basswood
Lake, on the east by the granite of Saganaga Lake and the Animikie group, and on the south
in turn from east to west by the Keweenawan Duluth gabbro, lower Iluronian granite, and
Archean granite. On the west the iron-bearing and other formations disappear under the Pleis-
tocene. Part of the eastern half of the Vermilion range extends north of the international
boundary into Hunters Island. The rocks of the eastern extension of the north arm of tiie
VermiHon range are known locally as the Hunters Island iron-bearing series.
The stratigraphic succession in the Vermilion district is as follows, in descending order:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene series Drift.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series Duluth pabbro and Logan sills.
Unconformity.
Huronian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) * J „■ '
[Guniiint formation (iron beanng).
Unconformity.
Intrusive rocks: Granites, granite por-
phyries, dolerites, and lamprophyres.
Knife Lake slate.
Agawa formation (iron bearing).
Ogishke conglomerate.
Unconformity.
Archean system :
Laurentian series Granite of Basswood Lake and other intru-
sive rocks.
{Soudan formation (iron bearing).
Ely greenstone, an ellipsoidally parted
basic igneous and largely volcanic rock.
This chapter is primarily concerned with the Archean and the lower-middle Huronian,
■which really constitute the rocks of the Vermilion district. The higher rocks will be mentioned
only so far as it is necessary to do so in order to give a satisfactory treatment of tlie lower rocks.
The Animikie group, which occurs at the east end of the district, and the Keweenawan series,
which borders a large part of the southern portion of the district, will be treated in Chapters
VIII and XV.
Lower-middle Huronian.
a For a further detailed description of the geology of this dlstriot, see Clements, J. M. , The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon.
U. S. Geoi. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, and references there given.
'Confined to eas; end of district.
118
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE VI
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 119
TOPOGRAPHY.
The topography of the district may be defined briefly as characterized by hiK^-ir l)lufl^y
ridges, in the depressions between whicli are numerous hnear lakes, the whole constituting a
relatively even peneplain with a few monadnocks. The general physiography is discussed in
Chapter IV.
The position of the ridges and valleys is determined by the character of the rocks. The
more resistant rocks form the ridges, the less resistant the valleys. On the whole the most
resistant rock of the region is the Ely greenstone, and this constitutes a greater proportion of
the bluffs of the district than any other formation.
Next in importance to the greenstone as a bluff-makmg formation is the iron-bearing
Soudan formation. This independently constitutes a number of high bluffs, and conjointly
with the greenstone helps to make many others.
The depressions, especially those containing lakes, are mamly engraved in the Knife Lake
slate. This is true of most of the important lakes of the district, such as Vermilion Lake, Long
Lake, Fall Lake, Moose Lake, Ogishke Lake. However, some of the lakes, especially those that
are roundish, are in other formations, notably the granite, which in this district seems to be
not much more resistant than the slate. Important lakes of this class are Wliite Iron Lake,
Basswood Lake, Snowbank Lake, and Saganaga Lake.
The Ogishke conglomerate is intermediate in resisting power between the slates and green-
stones. In places, therefore, it occupies the valley, as at ^"erniilion Lake, and in places makes
considerable bluffs, as in the eastern part of the district; but more commonly the conglomerate
is found on the slopes, because it lies structurally between the harder greenstones and the softer
slates.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
The Archean is represented by both the Keewatin series and the Laurentian series. The
Keewatin comprises the Ely greenstone and the Soudan formation. The Laurentian includes
granites, porphyry, and associated acidic rocks.
KEEWATIN SERIES.
ELY GREENSTONE.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Ely greenstone is the most conspicuous and extensive formation of the district. From
Vermilion Lake to the central part of the district it occupies the larger part of the area between
the granites to the north and south. In the eastern half of the district it is less extensive.
The formation is conspicuous not only because of its areal extent, but because of its topo-
graphic importance. In general its rocks are resistant, and many of the high knobs of the dis-
trict are composed of them — for example, those about Tower and Ely. They form Disappoint-
ment Mountain, near Disappointment Lake, one of the most prominent features of the district.
They compose the great promontory of Knife Lake, in sec. 21, T. 65 N., R. 7 W., so conspicuous
a feature along the mternational boundary. In fact, most of the high knobs to be seen from
almost any commanding point of view between the northern and southern granites are composed
of the Ely greenstone. Such knobs are consj^icuous even where the areas of the greenstone are
subordinate — for example, the high bare headland above Moose Lake.
A few of the important bluffs are due to the resistant quality of the Ely and Soudan for-
mations together — for instance, Soudan and Lee hills, near Tower, and a number of the promi-
nent bluffs of Hunters Island, along the north side of Otter Track Lake, and elsewhere.
APPEARANCE AND STRUCTURE.
The Ely greenstone has as its dominant color various tones of green. It comprises green-
stones, tuffs, and slates, but the latter two varieties of rock are very subordinate. The domi-
nant rocks of the formation are called greenstone rather than a jietrographic name because
120 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
niiiny of them have been so modified by metamorphism that in the field it is often impossible
to determine their character or to discriminate between the difFerent i)hases. This alteration
is no more than one would expect from their great age. For the most part the changes are
dominantly metasomatic rather than dynamic, so that the massive rocks still retain their original
structures and textures, though their mineral composition is now largely or wholly changed.
Clements's petrograpliic study of these greenstones shows that they correspond to inter-
mediate aadesites and basic basalts. The massive exposures of this greenstone very commonly
show one or more of the three structures — the amygdaloidal, spheruhtic, and elhpsoidal. Xot
only are these macroscopic structures common, but textures such as ophitic, poikilitic, and
porphyritic often may be seen. The rocks vary greatly in their fineness of grain from aphaiiitic
to coarse gramed.
Of the structures mentioned as characteristic of the rocks the most common is tlie amyg-
daloidal, tliis structure usually being found in the fuier-grained varieties. It is especially
noticeable on the weathered surface.
The greenstones not uncommonly show true spheruhtic structures, but these are not by
any means so common as the amygdaloidal structure. This structure, though very rare in basic
rocks, is exliibited m this ancient formation in as great perfection as in modern acidic rocks.
The third structure, tlie ellipsoidal, is the most distinctive one of the formation. Almost
any large mass of the Ely greenstone encountered between Tower and Gunflint Lake will exliibit
this structure. The rock, observed at a distance, seems to be mainly composed of a mass of
elhpsoids of rock, var\-ing from a few inches to several feet in diameter (PI. VII). Ordinarily,
however, the elhpsoids range from 6 inches to 3 feet in diameter, and perhaps most commonly
they are between 1 and 2 feet in diameter. These ellipsoids are set in a matrix of material not
greatly different from the ellipsoids themselves but usually of slightly different color and text-
ure. In many ])laces they have undergone peripheral alteration, so that they exhibit a zonal
arrangement.
If the ellipsoids are examined somewhat more closely, many of them are found to be amj'g-
daloidal; moreover, in many of the spheroids the amygdules are more abundant near the border
than m the interior, and not uncommonly all the ellipsoids of an exposure are more amygdaloidal
on the same side. The origin of these elhpsoidal rocks is discussed by Clements in the mono-
graph on the Vermilion district and by the authors on pages 510-512 of this monograph.
Within short distances the greenstones vary from fuie to coarse textures and from varieties
which exliibit the structures mentioned to others in which they are absent. In many i)laces
these phases alternate at short mtcrvals.
Everj^ gradation maj^ be found from the undeformed elhpsoids to a schist. In the transition
the elhpsoids become flatter and flatter, until finaUy the representative of each is f£ lenticular
area perhaps many times as long as it is broad. Since the exterior of tlie ellipsoids, as has already
been explamed, usually has a diirerent color from the core and a somewhat different texture, an
extremely flattened ellipsoid has tliree bands. The occurrence of this phenomenon in the manj'
ellipsoids transforms the greenstone to a fissile banfled schist which has a ver}* marked sedi-
mentary appearance. Indeed, m dealing Adtli the extremely altered phases it is difficult to
believe that the rock is not a sediment rather than a metamorphosed lava.
In many places, without reference to the ellipsoidal structure, the greenstones are scliistose.
However, this schistosity is not nearly so common as in the Marquette and ^Icneminee districts.
In consequence of the relative lack of schistosity, the original cliaracters of the iVi-chean green-
stone are better exhibited in this district tlian in any other on the iVmerican side of the boundary.
It is not unreasonable to suppose that it may be possible by further detailed mapping to work
out the succession of flows for the Ely greenstone.
MINERAL CONSTITUENTS.
A microscopical study of the greenstones shows that the original minerals are largely
altered. The following origuial constituents are disclosed: IIornl)lcn(le, augite, plagiodase,
quartz, titaniferous magnetite, and apatite. The original hornblende is the common l)rown
variety. The augite varies from yellow to yellowish green and possesses its normal cliaracters.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. VII
.1. ELLIPSOIDAL PARTING IN ELY GREENSTONE.
After Clements. See page 120.
Ji. ELLIPSOIDALLY PARTED ELY GREENSTONE, SHOWING SPHERULITIC DEVELOPMENT.
After Clements. See page 120.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 121
The feldspar is generally so much decomposed that one can not determine its exact characters.
It is presumed to be a labradorite. There is very little quartz, but some was found in micro-
pegmatitic intergrowth with the feldspar and is presumed to be a primary constituent. It may
fill irregular interstices between the other minerals as primary quartz representing the last
product of the crystallization of the rock.
The secondary constituents are calcite, common green hornblende, actinolite, biotite,
clilorite, sericite, epidote, zoisite, sphene, rutile, feldspar, quartz, pyrite, and hematite. The
feldspar has usually altered to a mass of sericite, kaolin (?), feldspar, and quartz. In some
places it is completely saussuritized. There were observed occasional irregular but in general
rounded serpentinous areas, which strongly suggest aggregates of olivine individuals in wliich
the olivine possesses no definite crystallographic outline. Locallj' the rock is largely replaced
by calcite. The abundance of secondary calcite is one of the conspicuous features of the
formation.
CLASTIC BOCKS.
At a very few localities associated with the greenstones are small masses of tuffaceous-
looking rocks wliich are believed to have been interbedded volcanic elastics. Locally these
tuffaceous rocks grade into fine-grained volcanic ash, and in some places this passes into a well-
banded slavy rock, the material of which was doubtless arranged by water. It is probable that
by far the greater amount, if not all, of the material for the slate has been derived from other
parts of the Archean Ely greenstone. Parts of the iron-bearing Soudan formation have similar
relations to the Ely greenstone. (See pp. 126-128.)
ACIDIC PLOWS.
Interbedded and conformable with the ellipsoidal basalts are frequently to be observed
intermediate and acidic flows with surface textures, in many places closely associated with
thin layers of the Soudan formation. These acidic flows have been connected with a dike of
quartz porphyry similar to the porphyry cutting the Ely ellipsoidal flows, as in sees. 13 and
14, T. 62 N., R. 13 W. (See fig. 13, p. 123.) These flows seem to be later, more acidic phases of
extrusion than the Ely basalts and undoubtedly have a close relation to the acidic intrusive
rocks discussed under later headings.
INTRUSIVE KOCKS.
The Ely greenstone is intruded by the great batholithic area of Archean granite of Basswood
Lake on the north and by Ai'chean, Huronian, and Keweenawan granites on the south. There
is a considerable zone, varying from less than half a mile to 1 J or even 2 miles in extent, adjacent
to these intrusive masses, in which profound metamorphism has taken place in consequence
of the intrusions. The amount of metamorphism is least at a distance from the granite and
gradually becomes more intense as the distance lessens.
The fu'st of the changes that are noted m passmg from the greenstone toward the granite area
is that the greenstone becomes more schistose and crystalline; also there is a large development
of hornblende. Thus the rock becomes a hornblende schist. With approach to the granite
the hornblende scliist becomes better and better developed until it is a coarsely crystalline
typical hornblende schist. The schist may be injected parallel to the schistosity, so that there
is produced a banded gneiss, a part of the layers of which consist mainly of the modified green-
stone in the form of hornblende cchists and the other part of the grumite. Both parts are
igneous rocks, the more basic parts being dominantly profoundly metamorphosed lava, the more
acid parts mainly an intrusive rock. Witliin the breadth of a hand specimen there may be
a dozen or more alternations of this schist and granite. In many places where the granite
can not be distinguished as clear-cut parallel layers in the schist granitic minerals are found
along the lamin^E, so that the rock has abundant feldspar. There are all transitions from the
little-altered greenstone to the hornblende schist, and from this kuid of rock to rocks in which
feldspathic minerals are developed along the laminje, and from tliis variet\' to rocks in which
the granite is clearly injected in parallel layers, thus producing a gneiss.
122 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
No better instance is known to us of the production of schists and gneisses the different
parts of which are of different origins and ages. The background of the schist or gneiss is an
ancient basic or intcrmodiato Lava; another portion is a deop-soatod acidic uitrusivc rock. By
combinadoii of dynamic and contact action tlie profoundly metamorphosed rock has been
producetl.
A microscopic study sliows that the schists and gneisses contain tlie following constituents
in varying jjroportions: Common green iiornblcndc, actinolitc, biotite, muscovite, cidorite,
epidote, calcite, sphene, quartz, feldspar, pyrite, and magnetite. The mica is present in ver\'
small quantity and is invariably associated with amphibolc.
The more metamorphosed rocks not onl\- contain minute granitic injections but also are
cut by many large and small granite dikes, whicli may run ])arallel to the scliisto.se structures
or traverse them at any angle.
Also within the uitrusive rocks are fragments of the Ely greenstone, ranging from small
to great. These are usually profoundly metamorphosed and some of them arc partly absorbed.
The cliaracter of the contact metamorphism may be particularly well seen on the islands
and mainland along the northern part of Vermilion Lake and m the area between Ely and
White Iron Lake. The relations illustrated between the granite and the greenstone are identical
with those which have been described by Lawson with reference to the Keewatin and Lau-
rentian of the Rainy Lake and Lake of the Woods district.
The Ely greenstone where intruded by the gabbro, at the south side of the east end of the
district, has been metamorphosed into a spotted hornblendic rock with less schistosity than
the rock along the granite contacts.
EXTENSION OP ELY GREENSTONE BEYOND DISTRICT.
It has already been noted that the Ely greenstone extends to the northeast into Hunters
Island. This formation has a very wide extent in that district and the Rainy Lake and Lake of
the Woods region; in fact, it is the most characteristic rock of the Keewatin of the Lake Superior
geologic province. It is therefore clear that this volcanic formation is regional rather than
local.
SOTTDAN FORMATION.
DISTRIBUTION.
The chief exposures of the iron-bearing Soudan formation occur between Tower on the
west and a few miles east of Ely on the east, a distance of less than 30 miles. Numerous smaller
exposures of the formation are found within the area of the Ely greenstone for 12 or 15 miles
farther east, and large exposures are also known to exist in the eastern part of the district, in
the vicinity of Emerald Lake. A few of the more important localities in wliich the formation
may be well studied are Tower, Lee, and Soudan hills and Jasper Peak. The Soudan formation
is confined to the area of the Ely greenstone and its border. Even the belts mapped as Sou(hui
formation consist of bands of the iron-bearing formation interbedded or at least interlaminated
with small quantities of clastic roclvs and associated with large quantities of the Ely greenstone
and later intrusive roclvs. From tlie large belts more than half a mile wide, dominantly com-
posed of the Soudan formation, to very narrow stringers or patches in the El\' greenstone there
are all variations. Though here and there the large areas are well exposed, on the whole the
formation is relatively soft as compared with the Ely gi-eenstone, and therefore it usually forms
valleys. This is true even of the belt at Ely, which has been so great a producer of iron ore.
Westward and southwestward from Lake Vermilion, beyond the limits of the Vermilion
map (Pi. VI), Keewatin, Laurentian, and Iluronian formations have been traced for a consid-
erable distance. An iron-bearing formation, correlated with the Soudan, forms a consitlcrable
belt extending from Tps. 60 and 61 N., R. 22 W., southwestward to T. 5S N., R. 27 W. It
is sparsely exposed and is known principally by its disturbance of the magnetic field. A small
amount of exploration has been done on this belt. For the most part this iron formation
seems to be lean and unpromising.
VEKMILION IRON DISTRICT.
123
DEFORMATION.
The folding of the Soudan formation is of the most complicated character. The major
folds extend parallel to the trend of tlio range. The pressure has been so great as to give at
many jalaces monoclmal dips entirely across the formation. For instance, at the section near
Tower the dips are almost uniformly to the north, the angles running as low as 50°. However,
at many places on Tower, Lee, and Soudan hills the dips are nearly vertical, and at one place
on Lee Hill, on the south side, they are steep to the south.
The cross folding of the district has been only less severe than the major folding. The
pitches of the folds are ordinarily steep, from 50° to 60°, and at many places are vertical or
even overturned.
Both the longitudinal and the cross folds are composite — that is, folds of the second order
are superposed upon the major folds in each direction, and upon tliese folds are folds of the
FiGUBE 12. — Diagram to illustrate folding of "drag" type, common in the Vermilion and other ranges. Note the facts that folding tends to
multiply the thickness by 3 and that folding of adjacent beds may not be marked.
tliird order, and so on down to minute plications. The pressure has been so great as to produce
all varieties of minor folds, including isoclinal and fan-shaped. Moreover, these varieties of
folds may be almost equally well seen in a ground plan or in a vertical cross section. They are
beautifully shown at various places about Tower and Ely, but perhaps the most extraordinary
complex folding to be seen is that at the west end of the large island in the east part of Emerald
Lake. A common t_ype of fold is a drag fold (illustrated in fig. 12), by which the formation
m
mm
TT
1
1
-'-■.;-J*liN
>1
mm
lit
lik
Pi? o
S 11
Basalt extrusives Porphyry intrusives
and extrusives
Jasper
FiGtJEE 13.— Section across jasper belt in sees. 13 and 14, T. 03 N., R. 13 W., Vermilion iron range. Minnesota, Scale, 1 inch=about 85 feet.
becomes locally buckled along an axis lying in any direction in the plane of bedding. This
type of folding, while leaving great local complexity", does not destroy the general attitude or
trend of the bed. It is frequently possible, where these folds are present, to work out the general
trend of the formation and its top and bottom — as, for instance, in sees. 13 and 14, T. 62 N.,
R. 13 W., Minnesota (see fig. 13) — and for other areas it will be possible by close detailed surveys
to work out the stratigraphy of the Keewatin series.
124 GEOLOOY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
'rii(> folding, notwithstanding tlio extraordinarily l)rittle character of the rock, was accom-
plished without major fracture. Frequently Sr solid belt of jasper may be seen bent back
upon itself within its own radius with no sign of fracture. The deformation, therefore, was in
the zone of rock flowage, and no bettor instance is knowTi to us of this kind of earth movement.
Though the folding is so complex as to give isoclinal or fan-shaped folds, ordinarily the turns
are round rather than acute, as they commonly are in the Menominee district.
Folding without brecciation is tlie rule, but in some places the Soudan formation has
been brecciated in an extraordinary manner. It is broken tlarough and through by cracks
and crevices, along which minor faulting has taken place. In some places the grinding of the
fractured fragments over one another has been so marked as to give them a well-rounded char-
acter, and such a rock resembles a conglomerate, though it is really autoclastic. This local
brecciation of the Soudan formation has been favorable to the deposition of the ores, and it
may be suggested that the general absence of the brecciation is the partial explanation, at
least, of the very irregular tlistribution and scarcity of the ore bodies.
The VermiUon district affords excellent illustrations of complex folds, or folding in two
directions at right angles, and the formation which best exliibits tliis folding is the Soudan.
This is because the banding of the formation is very marked, so that the position of bedding is
readily determined, and also because for the most part the rock does not take on schistosity.
Schistose structure is absent partly because the minerals of the rocks are not adapted to a
parallel arrangement. Furthermore, the Soudan rocks are frec[uently found in contact wdth.
the Ely greenstone, and the contacts give the pitches of the cross folds.
The remarkalile complex folding partly explains the distribution of the Soudan formation
with reference to the Ely greenstone. As upon the major folds are superposed secondary and
tertiary folds, numerous patches of the jasper are naturally found in the greenstone. More-
over, because of the cross folding these patches may be very narrow at one place, widen out
within a very short distance so as to make a thick formation, and again become narrow.
Wlien the extraordinary complexity of this folding is understood it is only necessary to
premise an erosion extending to different depths in the Soudan formation before the lower
Huronian was deposited in order to see how in the greenstone there may be patches of jasper
ranging from a few feet in wiilth and length to the dimensions of great continuous formation
about Tower and Ely. But folding is not the only cause of the present relations, as is shown on
page 126.
LITHOLOGY.
The iron-bearing Soudan formation comprises two classes of rocks. To all the varieties
of the first the miners apply the name "jasper," although only a portion of it falls strictly under
this designation. This is the dominant variety of the rock. Locally interstratified with the
"jasper" or under it is an argillaceous variety, which is mainly slaty but in some places is
conglomeratic.
The "jaspery" phase of the Soudan formation consists of interlaminated bands of finely
crystalline quartz, iron oxides, and various mixtures of the two. With these preponderating
minerals are various subordinate constituents, among which amphibole is the most abundant,
including actinolite, cummingtonite, and griinerite. Pyrite is also present in many places. The
alternate bands of material of different color, combined with the complicated fracturing' and
brecciation of the formation, make it a striking rock which alwaj's attracts the attention of
the traveler, even if he is not accustomed to closely noticing rocks. The bands of material
of different color vary from a fraction of an inch to several inches across. The quartzose
bands havfiT various colors — nearly pure white, gray, red of various hues, including brilliant
red, and black. The diirerence in the color is chiefly caused by the contained iron. Hematite,
if in sufficiently fine particles, gives the brilliant red colors; magnetite and hematite in larger
particles give the grays and blacks.
Between the bands dominantly (|uartzose ai-e usually liands nuiiniy composed of non oxide
Tliis iron oxide may be either hematite or magnetite or various intermixtures of the two-
Occasionally also some limonite is present.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 125
The chief varieties of the "jasper" are (1) the cherty variety, (2) the black-handed
variety, (3) the red-banded variety, and (4) the white-banded variety. With these are
subordinate masses of (5) the carbonated variety and (0) the ore boilies.
1. The cherty variety is characterized by the presence of a predominating amount of
gray cliert, the iron oxide being subordinate. The rock is there a sliglitly ferruginous well-
banded chert.
2. The black-banded form of the Soudan formtvtion has dark-gray or black chert bands
interlaminated with black iron-oxide bands. Tiie iron oxide is commonly in large part mag-
netite. Usually associated with this magnetite are some of the amphibole minerals already
mentioned.
3. In the red-banded kind the quartzose layers are stained with innumerable minute
flakes of hematite, which give the rock a red color, in many places a brilliant red. The iron
oxide between the red bands is ordinarily hematite, usually specular hematite. With this hema-
tite may be some magnetite. This red-banded variety is a well-known jasper of the Lake
Superior region, to which Wadsworth has applied the name jaspilite.
4. In the white-banded kind the quartzose bands contain comparatively little iron oxide.
The iron-oxide bands between the layers of chert are generally hematite, but this hematite
differs in many places from that of the jaspilite bands in that it is of the red or brown variety.
With it also, in many places, there is a certain amount of limonite.
5. The banded carbonate variety, while subordinate in quantity, is important in refer-
ence to the genesis of the formation. It is a gray-banded rock, the light-colored layers of which
consist largely of siderite. Between this sideritic rock and the ordinary forms there are aU
stages of gradation.
6. The positions of the iron-ore bodies will be fully discussed later. In the iron ores the
silica is very subordinate, the place of the quartzose bands being taken by iron oxide. The
iron ore is dominantly hematite.
At the contact of the Soudan formatioii and Ely greenstone the cherty variety of rock is
very common indeed. In many places the rock at this horizon is much brecciated and com-
monly has a conglomeratic appearance, which, however^ is believed to be due to movement
rather than to deposition as a conglomerate. Ordinarily this cherty variety of the formation
is not more than a few feet thick. Resting upon the cherty zone in many places is the black-
banded kind. Ordinarily at the top of the formation is the red-banded rock, jasper, or the
white-banded kind.
The succession given above prevails in many places where the formation is now thick.
Where the formation is thin the red and white banded rocks extend from the top to the bottom,
and as at many places the formation is rather thin it may be said that the entire Soudan forma-
tion for much of that district consists of these kinds of rocks, the cherty variety and the black-
banded variety not appearing.
The sideritic rock is notably local in its occurrence. It is generally found close to the over-
lying upper Huronian rocks.
The slaty phase of the Soudan formation differs from the ordinary phases in having between
the silica and iron-oxide bands so large an amount of argillaceous material as to make laminae
of slate. In some places a slaty cleavage has developed in the clayey layers but does not pass
through the iron-oxide bands, and this may be so even where the bands of slate are not more
than one-fourth inch across. Locally the slate may be in a belt several feet thick without inter-
stratified jaspery material. In some places this slate is graphitic. At a few places at the bot-
tom of the Soudan formation the slate passes down into a fme-grained conglomerate or into a
tuff. A microscopic examination of the argillaceous varieties of the slates shows these sedi-
ments to be made up of chlorite, actinolite, epidote, sericito, sphene, quartz, carbonaceous
material (graphite), and some iron oxides, in various proportions. The graphitic slates consist
essentially of graphite and quartz in exceedingly fine grains and in some specimens in very
small quantity.
126 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The conglomeratic phases of the formation, when studied under tlie microscope, are founri
to be substantially identical with the tuffs of the Ely greenstone. Thej^ now consist largely of
actinblite, clilorite, cpidote, and cjuartz.
ORIGIN.
From the foregoing facts it is clear that the Soudan is a sedimentary formation, mainly of
nonclastic character. This would ])crhaps be evident from the well-bedded character of the
formation and especially from the iron carbonate. Also, as already indicated by the descrip-
tion of the different rock varieties, certain phases of the formation have argillaceous bands
between the iron-oxide bands, which are not uncommonly graphitic. Finally, it contains local
conglomerates.
There is reason for believing that many varieties of rock in the Soudan formation are
derived from siliceous iron-bearing carbonate, precisely as similar rocks are derived from this
material in other districts of the Lake Superior region. The analogy between the vSoudan
formation and the Negaunee formation of the Marquette district is especially close. Substan-
tially every variety of rock which is found in one district may be found in the other. A variety
may be somewhat more prevalent, however, in one district than in the other; for instance, the
amphibole minerals are less abundant in the Soudan formation than in the Xegaunee formation.
In the absence of local specific evidence of the original character of the iron-bearing rocks in
the Vermihon district it is probably not safe to put too much stress on the similarities with.
other districts where the original character of the rock is certainly knowTi. One must admit
the distinct possibility that the iron-bearing sediments may have been originally deposited sub-
stantially as banded chert and iron oxide of the jasper type.
RELATIONS OF ELY GREENSTONE AND SOUDAN FORMATION.
The main mass of the Soudan formation seems to be above the Ely greenstone. In certain
places it is Itnown to be in pitching troughs formed by folding, the greenstone forming the
walls and bottom, as, for instance, at Ely and Soudan.
Some of the jasper belts of the Vermihon district are clearly interbedded with successive
basalt extrusives. Such beds, but a few feet thick, may be traced for hundreds of yards with
uniform widths, even contacts, and lack of folding. Wlien tiie adjacent igneous rocks arc
examined closely it is found that the sedimentary bands lie parallel to the tops and bottoms
of separate flows, as marked by amygdaloidal and other surface textures, without intervening
fragmental sediments. This is well illustrated in sees. 13 and 14, T. 62 \., R. 13 W., Mimiesota.
(See fig. 13, p. 123.)
Many of the jasper bands are associated even more closely with intrusive and extrusive
porphj^ries than with the greenstones. (See p. 128.) These porphyries are found to be
closely related to the extrusive basalts but on the whole to follow them and to be associated
with their later phases of extrusion. This association of the iron with the later acidic phase
of extrusion is also seen in the Woman River district of Ontario. Its significance is discussed
on page 513.
The most common contact between the Ely greenstone and the Soudan formation is
perfectly sharp — indeed, knifelike in its sharpness. The rocks are as sharply separated from
each other as if the Soudan formation were intersected by the greenstone by intrusion, and
doubtless this is, at least in a few places, the true significance of the relations. Contacts of
the kind mentioned may be seen at many places in both the west and the east end of the
district. They are especially clear and numerous in liimters Island and at Jasper Lake, Birch
Lake, and Emerald Lake. At each of these lakes, almost at every large outcrop of Soudan
material, somewhere along the base of the formation the contact may be found.
The kind of contact next most common to that just described is that in which a brecciated
rock occurs between the iron-bearing Soudan formation and the Ely greenstone. This breccia
ordinarily is not more than a few feet wide. In some places it mvolves only the greenstone,
elsewhere the Soudan formation only, in still other places both. Thus a conglomerate-like
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 127
rock may show fragments and matrix mainly of greenstone or almost wholly of Soudan
formation, or the two intermingled. In the last case the greenstone is more likely to be the
matrix and the Soudan rock to constitute the fragments. A breccia of the greenstone class is
well seen on an island near the west end of Otter Track Lake. The brecciated Soudan forma-
tion is well exhibited in belts of Soudan rock north of Robinson Lake, in sec. 7, T. 62 N., R. 13 W.
A breccia composed of greenstone and Soudan material is seen at various places on Lee Hill.
Here is a green schist matrix containing numerous fragments of red jasper, each exhibiting its
banding, which lies in diverse directions. Some of these fragments are well rounded; others
are subangular; many others have angular rhomboidal forms, such as are produced by shear-
ing stresses. However, these fragments are not more, angular than those in a basal conglom-
erate at many localities.
The c^uestion may be asked whether the breccias were conglomerates before they were
breccias. At present their dominant structure is doubtless that of a dynamic breccia, but it
is also possible that some of them at least were originallj^ conglomerates and were subse-
quently brecciated. This question, early asked, is still unanswered. Probably certain of the
rocks referred to are wholly breccias, being produced by readjustment along the contact of
the two formations during orogenic movements. A sharp contact of the first class might, by
close folding and adjustment between the formations, produce a contact of the second class
by brecciation and rounding of the fragments, thus forming a pseudoconglomerate.
At contacts of a third kind is a rock which seems to be a metamorphosed mechanical
sediment. As a rule, this rock varies from a few inches to several feet in thickness. It consists
of alternating laj'ers of green schist or slate and light-colored, strongly siliceous, graywacke-like
material. These alternations of schist and graj^wacke naturally give a remarkably sedimentary
appearance; in fact, it seems as if the banding could have' been produced in no other way.
The two localities which best exhibit these materials are a neck of land between two small
lakes about a mile north of Moose Lake and one place on Lee Hill. At the first locality
alternating bands of slate and graywacke rest against perfectly typical ellipsoidal greenstone,
and interstratified with these slates and graywackes are narrow bands of jasper. These alter-
nations are overlain by a broader belt of jasper. The probable interpretation of the phenomena
seen here is that a few feet of mechanical sediments were deposited upon the Ely greenstone
before the deposition of the nonclastic material of the Soudan formation. Moreover, it seems
that there were alternations between the condition of mechanical deposition and the peculiar
condition of chemical or organic deposition of the Soudan formation.
The relations at Lee Hill are substantially the same, except that at this place the folding
is so close that a cross cleavage cuts through the finer-grained sediments, and on account of
tlus close folding and the secondary cleavage the phenomenon is more difficult to certainly
interpret. However, the slate and graywacke appear to plunge under the jasper of the Soudan
formation, and the explanation is with little doubt the same as for the contact noi-th of Moose
Lake.
A contact of a fourth kind is marked by a thin belt of greenstone conglomerate. The
best localities at which this is seen are north of Robinson Lake and at the pits of the Lee mine.
At the first locality, at the west end of the belt of Soudan formation, the ellipsoidal greenstone
is overlain by a layer a few feet thick of greenstone conglomerate, which passes up into gray-
wacke. The pebbles of this greenstone conglomerate are flattened, and it could not be said
positively that the rock is not a tuff rather than a conglomerate.
Finally, the Soudan and Ely formations may be separated by a thin layer of graphitic
black slate, well shown on the southwest .side of vSoudan Hill.
From the fact that the greater masses of the Ely greenstone were deposited before the
larger masses of the Soudan formation it is believed that the great volcanic period of the Ely
greenstone had practically ceased before Soudan time. However, the extremely intricate
relations and apparent interstratification of the minor masses of the Soudan formation ■with
the Ely greenstone and the fact that both the Ely and Soudan formations locally contain
interstratified fragmental material lead to the belief that volcanic* activity had not entirely
128 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
died out in lUl parts ot tlie district at the time of tiic deposition of the earliest Soudan rocks.
In consequence tiiere are interlaminations of rocks essentially belonginj^ to t lie Ely with rocks
essentially belonging to the Soudan.
Wliat were the physical contlitions which peiinitted the deposition of the nonmechanical
Soudan formation upon the Ely greenstone with so insignificant an amount of intci-vening
mechanical sediment and erosion surfaces ? If the Ely greenstone was subaerial, it is dilhcult
to understand how tliis material could have got below the water without the deposition of a
greater thickness of mechanical sediments than exists in the Veraiilion district. We know
that such lavas are very rough in their surface expression and vary greatly in thickness, and
therefore in altitude. It is impossible to believe that the sea could advance over such an area
without the production somewhere of mechanical sediments of considerable thickness. The
answer to this question seems to be that the eruptions of the Ely greenstone were submarine.
The ellipsoidal textures are regarded as evidence of submarine flows, for reasons given on
pages 510-512. The lack of erosion surfaces in the flows and the absence of fragmental mate-
rial at the base of the formation itself are evidence of such an origin. If these lavas issuing
from the interior of the earth were spread out below the surface of the water, after the period
of volcanism had ceased and conditions became quiescent nonmechanical sediments of the
iron-bearing formation might at once be deposited, provided the conditions were proper. The
conditions of sedimentation are further discussed in the chapter on the origin of the iron ores.
LAURENTIAN SERIES.
PORPHYRY.
Intrusive into the Ely greenstone and Soudan formation are various Archean felsites and
porphyries in dikes and bosses. These are exceptionally well seen in the Vermilion Lake area,
especialty at Stuntz Bay. As already noted, these intrusives may be in part connected with
acidic flows interbedded with some of the later flows of basalt in tlie Ely greenstone. (See
p. 126.)
Petrographically the porphyry comprises rhyolite porphyry, feldspathic porphyry, micro-
granite, granite, microgranite porphyry, and granite porphyry. In places these rocks have
been metamorphosed into sericite schists and chlorite schists. There is no doubt that these
rocks are older than the lower Huronian, because they yield fragments t© the Ogishke conglom-
erate, but at various places their relations to the conglomerate are extremely intricate. (See
p. 131.) The folding has formed breccias and pseudoconglomerates from the felsites and
porphyries, which when very much mashed have been sometimes confused with the true
Ogishke conglomerate.
GRANITE OF BASSWOOD LAKE.
The granite of Basswood Lake extends as a great continuous formation north of the Ely
greenstone and the Huronian rocks from the western to the eastern end of the district, where it
is locally known as the "Saganaga Lake granite." Lakes are rather numerous in this great
granitic area, but they are not so numerous nor so regularly ordered as those in the Ely and
Soudan formations. On the whole the granite area is one of highlands and divides between
the waters running north and south.
Petrographically the granite varies from hornblende and mica granite to syenite. Struc-
turally it varies from massive granite through schistose granite to gneiss. Texturally it includes
granites and granite porphyries. The mineral constituents arc green hornblende, ])iotite,
orthoclase, quartz, and plagioclase, with accessory sphene, zircon, and iron oxide. In many
places these minerals have been very much altered, so that their places are taken largely l)y
secondar}^ minerals, of which chlorite is the most prominent and ejjidote, sericite. and secondary
feldspar come next. There is a variation in the mineral character, hornblende being virtually
absent in some specimens and abundant in others. No specimens were found in which quartz
was not present, but the amount is small in some of them.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 129
The granite is intrusive into the Elj^ and Soudan formations. The field relations are most
complex but are practically the same in all parts of the district — that is, the phenomena to
be seen in passing from the other Ai'chean formations to the granite are substantially the same
whether the traverse be made at Vermilion Lake, at Bumtside Lake, at Basswood Lake, or at
any other point.
In apjM-oach to the granite from the Ely greenstone side little stringers of quartz first
appear in the greenstone, then sparse veins of feldspar, then clean-cut dikes of granite, usually
of small size. With closer approach these increase in number and size until they constitute a
plexus of granite dikes in the greenstone. Still farther north the greenstone and granite may
be found in such confused and intricate relations as to make it difficult to say which is the
more abundant. Here great knobs of granite as well as dikes occur in the greenstone masses.
In the granite knobs are included fragments of the greenstone, large and small, in many places
in great numbers. Farther north the granite becomes dominant and finally altogether excludes
continuous masses of greenstone. If any greenstone is found it will be only in the form of
included masses. In brief, the relations are like those, so clearly described by Lawson, between
the batholiths of granite and the contiguous greenstones of Rainy Lake and Lake of the Woods.
The granite has been spoken of as if its intrusion were a single episode. This is not sup-
posed to be true. On the contrary, the relations of the different granites to one another and to
the greenstones are very intricate, hence it is thought that various intnisions were separated
by long intervals of time, that many of the intrusions were of themselves complex and long
continued, and that, in fact, this igneous period was a complex and long-continued one.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER-MIDDLE HITRONIAN.
GENERAL STATEMENT.
The inferior series of Huronian rocks occupies the general position of the lower and middle
Iluronian of the south shore. It will be called lower-middle Huronian, with the understanding
that it may include either or both lower Huronian and n)id(lle Iluronian.
The lower-middle Iluronian consists of four divisions — (1) a lower division, predominantly
conglomeratic, which is most typically developed near Ogishke Muncie Lake and is known as
the Ogishke conglomerate; (2) a division represented only in the eastern portion of the district,
consisting of iron-bearing rocks and known as the Agawa formation; (3) a division which is
predominantly a slate formation and which is called the Knife Lake slate because it is well
developed and splendidly exposed on and near Knife Lake; and (4) intrusive rocks.
OGISHKE CONGLOMERATE.
DI.STRIBUTION.
The Ogishke conglomerate extends from the western end of the district to the east end,
though it varies greatlj' in thickness. In places it is a great formation; in other places it is
nearly absent or is so thin that it can not be represented on the maps without a gross exaggeration.
The localities at which the conglomerate can be best studied, beginning at the west, are ( 1)
southeastern Vermilion Lake and especially Stuntz Bay and vicinity; (2) Moose, Snowbank,
and Disappointment lakes and vicinity; (3) Ogishke Lake and the extensions of the. belt there
to the southeast, northeast, and west.
DEFORMATION.
The Ogislike conglomerate is infolded in an extremely intricate manner with the luulcr-
lying formations. This infolding is almost if not quite as complex as the infolding of the Soudan
formation and the Ely greenstone already described. Owing to isoclinal folding and cross
folding with steep pitches, a rock surface cutting diagonally across the plane of contact shows
47517°— VOL 52—11 9
130 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
tho most extraordinarily irregular distribution of the Ogishke and the underlying formations.
Because of this it was supposed by a number of the early geologists that the Ely greenstone
and the porphyry of Stuntz Bay were intrusive into tlie Ogishke conglomerate.
UTHOLOOY.
In general all the belts of conglomerates arc coarser below and become finer toward higher
horizons. This statement is, however, only true as an average. There are places where the
conglomerate is somewhat fine at the bottom, is coarser above for a certain thickness, and
thence becomes finer upward.
The character of the Ogishke conglomerate depends largely on the nature of the underlying
formations. These formations, as already noted, are the Ely greenstone, the* Laurentian granite
of Basswood Lake, the Soudan formation, and the Laurentian porphyry of Stuntz Bay. \Miere
the conglomerate rests on one of these formations the material comjiosing it is mainly derived
from that formation. There are four special varieties of the Ogislike conglomerate — (1) green-
stone conglomerate, (2) granite conglomerate, (3) porphyry conglomerate, (4) chert and jasper
conglomerate. The common kind of Ogishke conglomerate (5) represents combinations of the
special phases.
Greenstone conglomerate. — The Ogishke is a greenstone conglomerate at those localities
where the conglomerate rests upon the Ely greenstone and other lower formations are not atlja-
cent. One of the localities which exhibit this greenstone conglomerate in its typical character
is the south side of Ogishke Lake and, peripheral to the Ely greenstone massifs, to the east
on Frog Rock Lake. The rock is also found in equally good development on Hunters Island,
at the southwest of Lake Saganaga.
At these localities the greenstone conglomerate consists for the most part of very well
rounded fragments of the Ely greenstone set in a matrix derived from the same source. These
fragments are ordinarily of a size to make pebble conglomerates, but at some places many of
them are so large as to constitute bowlder conglomerates. Between the bowlders and pebbles
are smaller fragments of the same material, and between these is a finer matrLx derived from the
same source. In most places upon the weathered surface the conglomerate character of tliis rock
is e\'ident, but on a freslily broken surface tlie matrix and pebbles are so similar that the rock
seems to be a continuous mass of greenstone. The conglomerate character is especially diificult
to discover in the unbroken forests, wliere the rocks are covered witli moss and otlier vegetation.
The debris, being derived from the Ely greenstone, consists of all tlie varieties of rocks shown by
that formation. There are, accordingly, fragments of dense, massive greenstone, of amygdaloidal
greenstone, of various kinds of ellipsoidal greenstone, etc. These rocks grade locally into rocks
that may be tuft's. In certain places the conglomerate is discriminated from the tuff only by
finding that the rock occupies a definite stratigrapliic zone at the base of the lower Huronian
sediments. Locally discrimination is still impossible.
Granite conglomerate. — The granite conglomerate occurs along the west border of Lake
Saganaga. At the west side of the south arm of Cache Bay is a great bowlder conglomerate
the fragments of which are directly derived from the granite. The matrLx also came almost
wholly from tliis source. The exact contact of the conglomerate and granite may be seen.
Tha bowlders and pebbles of the granite conglomerate are well rounded, and in every respect
tliis conglomerate bears the same relations to the granite that the greenstone conglomerate does
to the Ely greenstone.
The granite conglomerate is associated with a peculiar variety of rock, which may be called
recomposed granite. It appears tliat when the Ogislike formation was laid down the granite
only locally jnelded coarse debris. For the most part it yielded the separate individual minerals
of the coarse gi-anite — that is, feldspar, cjuartz, etc. As a result a clastic formation was laid down
upon the granite, the particles of which were the individual minerals of the granite. Further-
more, these particles were but little waterworn. The result is that when they were recemeuted
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 131
a rock was produced which closely resembles the gi-anite. This resemblance is, indeed, so close
that the rock was first mistaken by a number of geologists for the granite.
This rock is exposed along the west side of Cache Bay, at Swamp Lake, at the west side of
West Seagull Lake, and at intervening points. For much of tMs distance this peculiar forma-
tion has a breadth of nearly half a mile.
Porphyry conglomerate. — The porphyry conglomerate is confmed mainly to the area
about Stuntz Bay, the debris being derived from the Laurentian porphjrry. In the past it has
been known as the "Stuntz" conglomerate. In places there is a coarse bowlder conglomerate,
in other places a fine conglomerate, and in still other places a graywacke composed of the
individual minerals of the porphyry, so that the rock closely resembles the original porphyry.
Furthermore, so similar are the bowlders and the matrix that the conglomerate itself has been
confused with the brecciated porphyry.
Chert and jasper conglomerate. — The chert and jasper conglomerate is found where the
underlyuig formation is the Soudan. Tliis conglomerate is, however, not anywhere known to
be solely composed of the Soudan material. In tliis respect this variety of rock cUffers from the
varieties already described. Locally, however, the conglomerate is predominantly composed
of material derived from the u-on-bearing formation. This variety of rock may be seen on Lee
Hill, just north of Tower, on the Burnt Forties southeast of Vermilion Lake, and at other
localities.
Common OgishJce roclc. — The varieties of the Ogishke conglomerate heretofore described,
each consisting largely of material from a single source, are, on the whole, rather exceptional,
though the greenstone conglomerate and the porphyry conglomerate occupy considerable areas.
It is natural to suppose that the Ogishke would have material derived from more than one of the
previously existing formations, and ordmarily it has. Thus the normal Ogishke conglomerate
consists of interrmxtures in various proportions of the materials derived from the Ely and
Soudan formations, the granite of Basswood Lake, and the Laurentian porphyry, or two or more
of them. Hence there is every gradation between the average form of the Ogishke conglomerate
and the special forms wliich have been described. Witliin the Ogishke conglomerate, in addition
to the common fragments already enumerated, there are occasional unciuestionable slate frag-
ments. These are seen at various places, but are especially abundant south of Moose Lake. It
is believed that the source of the fragments of tliis kind is the slate and graywacke of the Ely and
Soudan formations.
METAIIORPHISM.
The Ogishke conglomerate varies greatly in its metamorphism. In general the processes
of the change have been mainly those of metasomatism and cementation, but locally the con-
glomerate is recrystallized and schistose. These phases are especially likely to be adjacent to
the massive granite, greenstone, or other rock against wliich they rest. Wliere the process has
gone to an extreme it is difficult to place the exact cUviding line between the original and
recomposed formations. The difficulty is particularly likely to occur in reference to the green-
stone conglomerate and the Ely greenstone.
The extreme phase of the metamorphism of the Ogishke conglomerate results from the intru-
sion of igneous rocks, and especially the Huronian Snowbank granite and the Keweenawan
Dulutli gabbro. Adjacent to these intrusives the conglomerate is a conglomerate schist or
gneiss, the matrix of wlucli is usually mica schist where the Huronian is of an acidic Ivind or
ampliibole scliist where it is of a basic kind.
The conglomerate scliist adjacent to the gabbro may be found from points east of Fay Lake
to Lake Gabimiclugami. The conglomerate scliist near Snowbank Lake and Disappointment
Lake has suffered the metamorphosing effect of the Snowbank gi-anite and the Duluth gabbro.
The_ changes in the conglomerate are analogous to those wliich have taken place in the Knife
Lake slate, which is in a similar position with reference to the granite. (See pp. 133-135.)
132 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
RELATIONS TO ADJACENT FORMATIONS.
The Ogishkc conglomerate, as the foregoing description plainly shows, is unconformable
with the iiiulcrh'ing formations. It may safely be inferred tiiat this unconformity is one of
great magnitude. TJie evidence is of two kinds — the ciiaracter of the detritus and the
structural relations.
The detritus mcludes every variety of each of the formations of the Archean, including the
many phases of the Ely and Soudan formations and the granite of Basswood Lake. Jn order
to produce these many varieties, the Archean went tlu-ough a long and complex history of
folding, intrusions, metamorphism, and erosion.
As to the structural relations, the Ogishke conglomerate is here in contact with one of the
underlying formations, there with another. It is therefore clear that after the Archean complex
was produced it underwent deep erosion before the deposition of the Ogishke conglomerate, for
some of the formations constituting the Archean were produced at great depth.
Upward the Ogishke conglomerate grades into finer and finer material and passes con-
formably into the Agawa formation or the Knife Lake slate.
THICKNESS.
The tluclcness of the Ogishke conglomerate varies greatly. It is nowhere possible to
make accurate measurements, o\ving to the general absence of bedding and to the clo.se folding,
but it is certain that the formation has a considerable thickness, certainly several hundred feet,
and perhaps in some places more than 1,000, possibly 2,000. From this maximum thickness
the foi-mation varies to a thickness of only a few feet or less, and is absent in places.
AGAWA FORMATION.
In the eastern part of the district, above the Ogishke conglomerate, or, where that forma-
tion is absent, beneath the Knife Lake slate, is an non-bearmg formation called the Agawa.
On the American side of the international boundary this formation is so thin that it can not
be regarded as continuous. On the Canadian side of the boundary, especially at That Mans,
Agawa, This Mans, and Other Mans lakes, the formation ranges up to 50 feet in thickness and
has all the characteristic rocks of the other iron-bearing formations of the Lake Superior region,
includmg ferruginous caibonate, ferruginous slate, ferruginous chert, jasper, and iron oxides.
Interlaminated wath the ferruginous varieties are belts of slate. Thus the iion-l)earing forma-
tion is both small and impure. There is every reason to suppose that the origin of this iron-
bearing formation is similar to that of the other Lake Superior iron-bearing formations.
The Agawa formation, so far as at present knowTi,has no economic importance, but it may
have a geologic significance, considering that it is in the lower-middle Huronian. The only
iron foiTnation at this horizon in other parts of the Lake Sujierior region is the Negaunee, and
so correlation would l:)e suggested with that formation. The bearing of this suggestion on the
position of the group to which the Agawa belongs is pointed out elsewhere (pp. 603-604).
KNIFE LAKE SLATE.
GENERAL STATEMENT.
The Knife Lake slate was so named because it occurs in its typical character at Knife
Lake. Nearly all the long arms of that lake lie withm the slates, and by far the greater
number of the many islands and headlands are composed of them.
The slates are found in two great areas, one in the western part of the district and the
other in the central and eastern parts. The western area extends from the east end of Vemiilion
Lake westward to parts where the rocks are covered by the Pleistocene. It occu])ios much of
the shore and many of the islands of Vermilion Lake. The eastern area begins west of Long
Lake and extends eastward, becoming gradually broader, and m the eastern part of the district
is the most extensive formation there found.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 133
LITHOLOGY.
The Knife Lake slate comprises the following main varieties:
1. Argillaceous slates.
2. Cherty slates.
3. Graywacke slates and graywackes.
4. Conglomerates.
5. Tuffaceous slates.
6. Micaceous (and, less commonly, amphibolitic) schists and gneisses.
7. Graj' granular rocks.
There ai'e also all gradations between these varieties. The materials of different coarse-
ness are in many places finely interlaminated, so that it is easy to ascertain strikes and dips.
The argillaceous slates vary in color from gray to black. They are usually very dense,
break with a smooth, conchoidal fracture, and have a perfect cleavage, which in a general way
commonly follows the trend of the district but whose direction varies much locally, depending
on the surrounding rocks, the folding, and other factors.
The chertj^ slates differ from the argillaceous slates in that they contain an unusual amount
of finely crystalline quartz. In many places this quartz is the dominant constituent. Between
the beds of very siliceous slate in many places there are also pure bands of chert. These cherty
bantls m most places appear to be secondary segregations. In many places the amount of the
fhiely crystallme quartz in the separate cherty bands and in the main mass of the slate is so
great as to suggest that the deposits of fine mud had mingled with it silica of organic or chemical
origm. Conchoidal fractures are especially characteristic of the cherty slates.
The argillaceous slates and cherty slates pass into varieties which may be called graywacke
slate and graywacke. These differ but little from the finer-grained slates except that cleavage
is less likely to be developed in them. Cleavage is usually present in the graywacke slates but
not in the graywackes.
Not uncommonly the graywackes pass into conglomerates. The fragments found in the
conglomerate comprise all the varieties of material found in the Ogishke conglomerate. These,
it may be recalled, are the many phases of material derived from the Archean. Indeed, there
is no essential difference between these conglomerate bands antl the Ogishke conglomerate,
except that the conglomerate bands of the Knife Lake slate are ordinarily fine grained and
are subordinate in quantity to the slates.
During Knife Lake time there was volcanic action, and close to the volcanoes, as at
Lake Kekekabic, ash and larger fragments produced by explosive volcanic action are mingled
with the other materials of the Knife Lake slate. These volcanic materials constitute the
tuffaceous slates. Between the tuft's and the conglomerates antl slates there are all gradation
varieties. Indeed, microscopic examinations show that the ashy products of the volcanoes
were widely distributed and are important constituents of the varieties of the formation already
described — the argillaceous and cherty slates and graywackes.
The mica slates, mica schists, and mica gneisses are confuied to areas adjacent to subse-
quent intrusive rocks. The most important areas are south of Tower, along Kawisliiwi River,
adjacent to Snowbank, Disappointment, and Kekekabic lakes, and adjacent to the Kewee-
nawan gabbro.
At Snowbank Lake and near it the granite has been intruded into the slates in a most com-
plex fashion, and here next to the granite the Knife Lake slate is represented by mica schists.
Between the mica schists and the ordinary slates there are gradations through mica slates.
Here the granite is found in numerous great dikes intersecting the Knife Lake slate. Moreover,
in many places the granite injections have followed the banding of the slate so as to give close
parallel mjections. In some places there are %vithin a single hand specimen several bands of
granite. Also bands are found intermediate in character between the well-recognized granite
and the slate. There is no doul)t that these bands ai'e due to granitization. Wlrere the injection
is of the most complex kind the rock is a mica gneiss, the darker-colored bands of which are
134 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
largely the extremely metamorphosed granite. However, some material in the black bands
has doubtloss been doriviMl fiom the granite and some material in the light bands has been
derived from the slate.
The scliists and gneisses are especially well exposed on the north side of Snowbank Lake.
South of Tower, adjacent to the granite, and especially at localities near the Duluth and Iron
Range liailroad, the alterations are essentiaUy the same as at Snowbank Lake, excei)t that the
amphibole schists are more prominent. Also the alteration phenomena at Kekekabic Lake
are in the same direction as at Snowbank Lake, but the processes have not gone so far.
At Kawisliiwi River southwest of Snowbank, and at Disappoiatment and Gabimichi-
gami lakes, the great gabbro mass of the Keweenawan has profoundly affected the character of
the Knife Lake slate and has produced a peculiar gray granular rock wluch the Miimesota
geologists have called "muscovado." These rocks differ from the slates and schists about
Snowbank Lake in being almost massive. They are particularly well seen at Disappointment
Lake. Between the schists north of Snowbank Lake and the granular rocks of Disai)pointment
Lake there are gradations. These granular metamorphic rocks adjacent to the gabbro are
regarded by Grant as the result of contact metamorpliism of the Knife Lake slate. They
recrvstallized under deep-seated static conditions at high temperature and probably influenced
by abundant moisture. The difference between them and the scliists and gneisses of Snowbank
Lake shows how important a part orogenic movement probably had in the production of the
structures of the latter rocks. The schists and gneisses of the Knife Lake slate are the joint
product of djTiamic and contact action. The granular rocks wliich are adjacent to both tlie
Snowbank granite and to the gabbro have doubtless undergone two periods of metamorphism,
the earlier one at the time of the introduction of the Huronian Snowbank granite and a later one
by the Keweenawan gabbro. At the earlier time doubtless schists and gneisses were produced
under dynamic conditions which at the earlier time were transformed to granular rocks under
static conditions.
MICROSCOPIC CHARACTER.
Clements's microscopic study shows that the rocks of the Knife Lake slate, iacluding
argillaceous and cherty slates, graywacke slates, graywackes, conglomerates, and tuffs, have as
recognizable primary constituents feldspar, quartz, brown mica, wliite to green and violent-brown
pyi-oxene, and greeuish-browai hornblende. The clastic mineral grains very commonly have
been extensively altered, and from these have been produced the following secondary namerals,
which, in some places where the rocks are completely recrystalhzed, are the sole constituents:
Chlorite, epidote, sericite, actinolite, massive dark-bro\\-n and green hornblende, quartz, calcite,
and pyrite. The minerals between the grains in the coarser sediments are sericite, chlorite,
epidote, quartz, and feldspar. These are believe<rto have been produced from the recrvstal-
lization of the fiine detrital material originally lying between the larger grains.
The miuerals constituting the mica slates, mica scliists, and mica gneisses, recrystalhzed
under the influence of the granite intrusion, are usually biotite and locally some muscovite,
hornblende, actinolite, quartz, feldspar, epidote, and garnet.
The granular rocks metamorphosed by the gabbro are mica, hornblende, and p^Toxene
feldspar rocks containing Httle quartz. The mica (chiefly biotite, but with some muscovite)
and honiblenile together predominate over the feldspar, and the mica is usually more abun-
dant than the hornblende. With these chief constituents there occur considerable amounts of
hypcrsthene, light-green pyroxene, olivine (?), and magnetite, and with these suborilinate
amounts of titanite, epidote, garnet, and chlorite. Exceptionally in these gabbro contact rocks
the hypersthene is the jiredominant constituent, when it is usually associated ^\•ith considerable
mica and magnetite. In general we may say that the production of miuerals rich m magnesium
and iron is characteristic of the gabbro contact.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 135
DEFORMATION.
The Iviiife Lake slate lias undergone the same orogenic movements as the Ogishke con-
glomerate. The slates have tiierefore been folded in a composite and com[)lex fashion. For
the most part it is cUfhcult to make out in detail the structure of the slates, but enough has
been done to show that the foldmg is exceedingly complex. Superimposed upon folds of the
first order are those of the second order; on these there are those of tiie third order, and so
on indefinitely. The relations of the Knife Lake slate to the Ogishke conglomerate and to the
Ely greenstone disclose in a general way the character of the major folds.
Usually the slates are in synclmes between anticlines composed of the Ely and Ogishke
formations or one of them. As the formation is relatively nonresistant, many of the lakes are
in the centers of these synclines. Such synclines are occupied by the following linear lakes or
groups of lakes: Vermilion Lake; Long and Fall lakes; Pme, Moose, New Found, Sucker,
Birch, and Carp lakes; That Mans Lake, Agawa Lake, Tliis Mans Lake, and No Mans Lake;
Knife Lake and its two principal arms; Kekekabic and Ogishke lakes. Not uncommonly the
synclines of slate are broken up into two or more minor folds by sul)ordinate anticlines, which
may be marked by the appearance at the surface of the Ogishke conglomerate.
RELATION TO ADJACENT FORMATIONS.
The Knife Lake slate in the eastern part of the district reposes on the Ogishke conglomerate
or the Agawa formation. For the western part of the district it lies on the Ogishke conglom-
erate. In both places the transition to the EJiife Lake slate is conformable. The Knife Lake
slate is not in observed contact with the Animikie group Avithin the Vermilion chstrict, but there
is almost certainly an unconformity between them. The lower-middle Iluronian rocks are
characteristically steeply inclined and schistose, contrasting with the less folded and less schis-
tose Animikie rocks. Also, rocks similar to the lower-middle Iluronian of the Vermilion dis-
trict are on satisfactory evidence found in the Mesabi district to be unconfoi-mably below the
Animikie or upper Huronian.
THICKNESS.
On account of the complicated folding of the Knife Lake slate it is impossible to determine
its thickness with any degree of exactness. But the extent of the areas which the formation
continuously covers in the eastern and western parts of the district — a district which has been
profoundly folded — leaves no doubt that the formation is one of great thickness, probably
thousands of feet.
INTRUSIVE ROCKS.
Later than the deposition of the I^ife Lake slate, in several parts of the district many
igneous rocks were intruded. These vary fi-om comparatively small masses to those covei-ing
very considerable areas. In chemical character they include basic, acidic, and intermediate
rocks. In texture they include por])hyritic, ophitic, and granolitic rocks. In age the intru-
sives range from rocks which are slightly later than the Knife Lake slate, and which therefore
suffered orogenic movements and metamorphism with that formation, to intrusive rocks of
much later age, which have been but comparatively little modified.
The more extensive of these intrusive masses are the Giants Range granite, the Snow-
bank granite, and the Cacaquabic granite. In addition to these there are many smaller
areas of acidic and basic intrusive rocks.
The Giants Range granite extends for 20 miles or more along the Vermilion range in contact
with various formations. It includes a series of granites ranging m color from light gray to very
dark gray, to flesh color, puik, and red. The rock varies from very dense fuie-grained granites
through medium to coarse-grained ones. Though this rock is as a rule granitic in texture, there
are also variations to granite porphyries and exceptionally to some that can be spoken of as
rhyolite porphyries. The constituents of these granitic rocks as disclosed by the microscope
136 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
are orthoclase (microcline), plagioclase, quartz, hornblende, niica, zircon, apatite, sphene, and
.1 little iron oxide.
This granite is intrusive into the iVrchean and the lower-middle Iliu'onian. The contacts
will not be further mentioned, as descriptions of them and their resultant metamorphism luive
been given in connection with the formations which have been intruded.
The Snowbank granite is confined to Snowbank Lake and vicinity. It varies from the
fine-grained to the coarse-grained form, the medium-gramed facies being most abundant.
Porpliyritic facies of the granite also occur. Mineralogically the Snowbank granite varies
from a normal mica and hornblende granite to an augite granite and, by loss of (juartz, to a
syenite. The Snowbank granite is intrusive into both the Ogishke conglomerate and the
Knife Lake slate. The character of the contacts and the resultant metamorphism have been
described in connection with those formations.
The Cacaquabic granite has been carefully mapped and described by U. S. Grant," and
from his report the following summary is taken.
The granite occupies an oval area south of Kekekabic Lake; also many of the islands
of tliat lake and a few small isolated areas in the vicinity of the lake. Petrogra])hicullv
the rock is an augite granite, ricli in soda. Its main mass has a granolitic texture; small
masses are porphyritic. Grant inclines to the view that the latter is somewhat later than the
former. He also regards the granite as intrusive in the Ogishke conglomerate and the Knife
Lake slate, because where it is in contact with the conglomerate the granite is uniformly finer
grained than elsewhere, and because the slate at one place on the north shore of Kekekabic
Lake is cut by "a small irregular dike of granite, which sends many stringers into the argillite
and also mcludes fragments of it." * Grant mentions no metamorphic effects of the granite
on tlie Ogislike conglomerate and Knife Lake slate.
In addition to these granites, acidic dikes have been found cutting tlirough the formations
of the district. They are supposed to have relations with the large eruptive masses, but for
the most part this connection has not been definitely traced, though it is very strongly indicated
by the greater abundance of the acidic intrusive rocks adjacent to the large granite masses
already described than at points remote from them.
At many places in the district are basic intrusive rocks which have a more or less well-
developed schistose structure and are otherwise metamorphosed. These intrusives evidently
reached their present position before the strong orogenic movements following upper Huronian
time had ceased. A considerable body of these rocks occurs near Epsilon Lake and is called
porphyrite by Grant.*^ Metamorphosed basic intrusive rocks of upper Huronian age are known,
but they are very subordinate and unimportant in this district.
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROtIP) AND KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
The upper Huronian (Animikie group) occurs in a small area in the eastern part of the
district just west of Gunflint Lake and in a few patches between the lower-middle Huronian
and the Keweenawan as far west as Gabimichigami Lake. The relations of the Archean and
lower-middle Huronian to the upper Huronian in this region are interesting, but they are dis-
cussed more appropriately in Chaj)ter XX (pp. 599 et seq.). It is here merely to be remarked
that in the Vermilion district these relations are not clear, and that for a time it was supposed
that the Animikie group represented rocks equivalent to the lower-middle Huronian but less
metamorphosed. Later studies of the relations of these rocks, especially in the Mesabi and
I^oon Lake districts, show clearly that between the lower-middle Huronian and the ,\jiimikie
groups there is a very marked unconformity. (See Chapter VIII, pp. 198-210.)
a Kept. Geol. Survey Minnesota, vol. 4, 1S99, pp. 442-448.
6 Idem, p. 444.
f The geology of Kekequabic Lake in northeastern Minnesota, with special reference to an atig)te>soUa granite; Twenty-first Ann. Rept. GeoL
anil Nat. Hist. Sun'ey Minnesota. 1S93, p. 53.
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 137
As has been noted, the Keweenawan Duluth gabbro bounds the eastern half of the Ver-
mihon district on the south. In the lower-middle Huronian and Archean rocks are numerous
comparatively fresh dolerite dikes and bosses. There are also more sparingly late acidic dikes
in the Archean and the Huronian. It is supposed that these fresh rocks, showing compara-
tively little orogenic movement, are of Keweenawan age, although they have not been con-
nected areall}^ with the greater masses of Keweenawan rock^. The metamorphosing effects
of the Keweenawan gabbro upon the Archean antl Huronian have already been considered.
The Keweenawan rocks themselves are discussed in Chapter X^' (])p. 866-426).
THE IRON ORES OF THE VERMILION DISTRICT, MINNESOTA.
By the authors and \V. J. Mead.
DISTRIBUTION, STRUCTtTRE, AND RELATIONS.
The iron ores of the Vermilion district occur in the Soudan formation, belonging to the
Keewatin series of the Archean system. This formaticm rests upon the Ely greenstone, is in
places interbedded with it, is interbedded with and intruded by acidic porphyries, and as a
whole has been closely folded, with the result that the iron-bearmg formation stands with
contorted and steeply inclined bedding, with steep walls and bottoms of green schist and mashed
porphyry. These constitute deep, narrow, pitchmg troughs in which the ores are found. The
jaspers constitute for the most part the hanging wall of the ore.
The total area of the ores is but a minute fraction of that of the iron-bearing formation of
the district. It is significant that notwithstanding the enormous sums of money spent in the
exploration of the district no ore deposit of magnitude has been developed outside of the two
principal series of deposits at Tower and Ely, which were the first discoveries in the district.
One additional deposit in sec. 30, T. 63 N., R. 11 W., about 4 miles east of Elj^, has been
considerably explored, leadmg up to the first shipment of ore in 1910.
On Soudan Hill near Tower the structural relations of the iron-bearing formation to the
green schists and mashed porphyries are so complex that it is extremely difficult to follow the
ore bodies. The steeply pitching troughs branch, change their pitch, and are duplicated by
parallel troughs to such an extent that m spite of the enormous amount of underground explora-
tion to which the hiU has been subjected it is not certain yet that all the ore deposits have been
found. The Soudan ores may have (a) "paint rock" or "soapstone" as foot wall, below which
is jasper, and similar paint rock or jasper as the hanging wall; or (&) they may have jasper
both as a foot and a hanging wall, and hence may lie within it and grade in all dhections into
the Soudan formation. Deposits of this kind are small. The Soudan ores are mainly of the
first form. They have now been found to a depth of 2,000 feet.
At Ely there is a single trough of the iron-bearing formation in the greenstone, beginning
as a comparatively wide body at the west and narrowing and deepening toward the east. The
northeast side of the trough seems to be formed in part by lower Huronian slates or graywackes.
The greenstones associated with the ores are altered to paint rock along the contacts. This
trough is a comparatively simple one, but there is also a minor parallel anticline separating
the Zenith ore deposits into two portions and separating the trough longitudinally into two
great s\Ticlines, one between the Zenith and Pioneer mines and the other between the Zenith
and Savoy mines. (See fig. 14.) Here also parts of the formation are found separated from
the main mass by greenstone masses in such a manner as to make it difficult to explain them
on the basis of occurrence in troughs alone. It would seem that the main mass of the ormation
here has been infolded in such a manner as to give a steep monoclinal trough dipping northward,
but that in addition to this main mass, which originally rested upon the greenstone, minor
masses of the iron-bearing formation may be mterbedded with the greenstone, so that after
the folding they would be separated from the main mass by la3-ei's of greenstone.
138
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The deposits of Soudan Hill come to the surface near the crest at an elevation of 1,660 feet,
about 150 feet above a cross valley to the east between Sf)U(l!Ui Hill and Jasper Peak. The Ely
ore dcj)osits are below comparatively low-lyinj; <j:roun(l, the upper part of the dejiosits being at
about the 1,400-foot contour, and are surrounded on the north, west, and south by an amphi-
theater of hisjli ground comijoscd of the Ely greenstone, the higher points of which rise to an
elevation of 1,500 feet. Farther east is a cross valley wliich is somewhat less than 1,400 feet
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT.
139
high. To what extent the cross valley is filled is unknown, hut the drift covering is moder-
ately thick. The pitch ol' the ore deposits is parallel to the range, as it is in the Menominee,
Martjuette, and Penokee-Gogebic districts and toward tliis valley. The ores in general are
located below crests and slopes.
The newly developed Section 30 mine, in sec. 30, T. 63 N., R. 11 W., is located on a bend of
the iron-bearing Soudan formation, trenchng a httle east of south. The jasper is bounded on
both sides by greenstone, that to the south probably being basal and that to the north being
overlying. The bend in the jasper seems to represent the result of shearing between these two
gi-eenstones. Outcrops of rich, highly contorted jasper led to the sinking of the shaft. Below
the surface the jasper becomes in general softer and small leads of ore in the jasper widen
out into shoots of commercial value. Mining operations have shown the ore to come to the
surface where covered hj the drift. The ore body is yet too little developed to permit an
accurate description of tlie structure. The ore thus far developed seems to be in two main
masses — one in the soutlieast with an easterly or southeasterly linear trend, pitching west at
the west end, apparentlj^ east at the east end, and with minor rolls between; and another ore
body north of the west eml of this one, having a similar trend and seeming to pitch to the
west. There is little doul^t that these ore bodies are developed along the axial lines of the
pitcliing drag folds in the jasper. Their greatest dimension is in the direction of the pitch.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
The average composition of all ore niinetl in the Vermilion district in 1909, obtained by
combining average cargo analyses in proportion to their respective tonnages, is shown below.
The range for each constituent is from the cargo analyses and represents the variation in com-
position of the marketed ore and not of the ore in the mine.
Composition of ore shipped from the Vermilion district in 1909 {1,108,790 tons).
Range.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.)
Analysis of dried ore:
Iron
Phosphorus
Silica
Manganese
Alumina
Lime
Magnesia
Loss on ignition
0.75 to 5.06
60.91 to 65. 34
. 037 to . 168
3.06 to
to
to
to
to
to
.09
1.40
.20
.04
.40
;.07
.15
3.27
.47
.15
2.18
Partial average analyses of ores and jaspers.
Average
analyses of
ore from
Soudan Hill
in 1906.
Average
analyses of
ore'from
Soudan Hill
inl909.
.\verage
analyses of
ore from
mines at Ely
in 1906.
Average
analyses of
ore from
mines at Ely
in 1909.
Average of
10 partial
analyses of
jasper from
Soudan Hill.
Average of
,^.ve^age of 20 analyses of
several par- iron forma-
tial analyses tion bands
of jasper from, from sees. 13
mines at Ely. and 14, T. 02
N., R. 13 W.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.)
1.37
0.79
5.26
5.37
Analysis of dried material:
Iron :
00.07
.088
3.43
.10
1.27
.13
.02
.55
64.85
.107
4.70
.09
1.57
.36
.08
.47
65.00
.046
3.39
.11
1.90
.34
.06
1.24
03.70
.049
4.91
.10
3.03
.22
.05
.90
38.27
28.97
.022
16.20
.042
70.95
a Loss on ignition includes both water of hydration and CO2, as well as minor amounts of organic matter. The ores from the mines near Ely
contain an appreciable amount of iron carbonate and the loss on ignition in these ores is probably largely CO3.
140
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR liEGION.
MINERAL COMPOSITION OF THE ORES AND CHERTS.
The priucipal ii-on miiierals of the ores urc licmatiU' and minor amounts of magnetite and
siderite. The siderite is noticeably abundant in tlie ore from the Savoy and Sibley mines. In
addition to the iron minerals are quartz, chlorite, calcite, kaolin, pyrite, and small amounts of
minerals bearing phosphorus, magnesium, and manganese, not suflieiently abuiulant to i)e iden-
tified. A variety of copper minerals, including native copper, malachite, azurite, cuprite, and
several sulphides of eoj)])er, are found locally in small amounts in l)oth the Ely mines and the
mines at Soudan Hill. These copj^er minerals are not sufhciently abundant, however, to afiect
the average composition of the ores.
Approximate mineral composition of ores and jaspers, calculated from the partial analyses given above.
Ore from mines at
Ely.
Ore from minrs at
Soudan Hill.
Ely
jasper.
Soudan
1906.
1909.
1900.
1909.
92.85
1.15
4.85
1.15
91.00
1.34
7.18
.48
94.50
1.9:(
3.22
.35
92.75
2.92
3.97
.36
41.40
I 58.60
54.50
45.50
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
100.00
All the ores of the Ely district are dark red and blue hematites, with a small amount of
magnetite and siderite. They are practically anhydrous, the water of hydration averaging less
than 1 per cent.
The jasper is a dense, brittle rock made up of layers of nearly pure anliydrous hematite
separated by layers of comparatively barren chert. The jaspers contain more or less magnetite;
in places nearly all of the iron is in that form.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF VERMILION ORES.
TEXTURE.
In texture the VermiUon ores show a complex gradation from dense massive hematite
through brecciated or broken ore to fine blue granular ore.
The Soudan ore is massive hematite, all of the ore requiring crushing.
The Ely ores exliibit a complete range from dense hematites with jiractically no pore space
to fine granular hematites with large porosity.
The textures of the ores of the VermiUon tlistrict are shown in the following table of
screening tests. These screening tests were made by the Ohver Iron Mmuig Company on three
of the typical grades of Vermilion ore representing a total of 1,034,221 tons. For each of the
grades samples were taken biweekly and quartered down monthly in proportion to the tonnage
mined, and at the end of the season the entire sample was quartered down to 100 pounds and
screened. A comparison of the textures of the ores of the several Lake Superior districts is
shown in figure 72 (p. 481).
Textures of Vermilion ores as shown bij scrccnitirj tests.
Held on J-inch sieve
J-inch sieve
No. 20 sieve
No. 40 sieve
No. 60 sieve
No. 80 sieve
No. 100 sieve
Passed through No. 100 sieve.
Ely ore.
Soudan
ore.
Per cent.
Per cent.
16.93
62.40
41.76
28.10
16.23
4.40
6.96
1.10
3.81
.60
.59
.40
9.32
.40
4. as
2.30
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT. 141
These screening tests show phiinly the difl'erejice in texture between the ores from the
mines at Soudan Hill and the ores from the vicinity of Ely. The former are dense massive
ores with practically no line material except what results from tlie blasting and crushmg due
to mining. The latter ores are of much Imer texture, being easily broken down with a pick.
The average ore of the Ely district is well described by the local term "broken ore," as it
is a rubble of more or less unconsolidatetl fragments of hard hematite, which range in size from
small grains to large masses. This rubble or brecciated material is cemented locally by infil-
trated hematite and iron carbonate, in some places the infiltrated minerals almost completely
filling the voids. The bedding of the jasper is plainh' preserved in the ore where slumping has
not destroyed it. In the Zenith mine a fresh surface of the ore showed perfectly the folded
structure of the jasper. No sharp line of contact exists between tlie ore and jasper, the gra-
dation being complete. The slumping of tlie ore has in most places produced a drag which
destroys the bedding texture in this transitional zone, producing a mixtm-e of broken ore and
jasper.
DENSITY.
The mineral density of the ores varies with the iron content and ranges from 5.10 for the
pure hematites to 4.40 in the lower-grade ores. The average for the district (1906 production)
is approximately 4.SS. As the ores consist essentially of hematite and quartz, the approximate
mineral density may be readily calculated from chemical analj'ses.
POROSITY.
Owing to the texture, porosity determinations on the Ely ores are rather difficult to obtain.
Ten determinations made on typical specimens of the cemented brecciated ore showed an aver-
age pore space of approximately 20 per cent of the volume of the ore. If the average moisture'
content of the ore as given above is assumed to be the moisture of saturation of the ore, cal-
culation shows that it represents a porosity of 21.5 per cent. This moisture content, however,
is probably less than the moisture of saturation of the ores; hence the porosity of the average
ore may be assumed to be greater than the moisture determination indicates. Engineers esti-
mate 9 to 10 cubic feet of the ore in place to the ton. If the average mineral specific gravity
for the ore is 4..93, as calculated above, this figure indicates an average porosity of from 20 to
28 per cent. Though these estimates of porosity are all approximations, their rather close
accordance indicates their probable correctness.
The Soudan ores are much more compact than the Ely ores and have an average porosity
of less than 10 per cent.
CUBIC CONTENTS.
Calculations based on the mmeral density, porosity, and moisture of the ores give an aver-
age of 8.75 cubic feet ])cr lung ton for Soudan ore and approxinuitely 9.5 cubic feet per ton for
Ely ore.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF VERMILION ORES.
. PRECEDENT CONDITIONS.
In the Vermilion chstrict the steeply pitching foot walls of Keewatin greenstone and asso-
ciated jiorphyry afford impervious basements and troughs for the concentration of waters from
the surface. This is especially well shown in the western end of the eastward-pitching Ely
trough. (See p. 137.)
Originally the iron-bearmg Soudan formation consisted largely of cherty iron carbonate
interlayered with more or less of sideritic slates and perhaps l)anded chert and iron oxide.
142
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
MINERALOGICAL AND CHEMICAL CHANGES.
Tlie alteration of the clicrty iron carbonate to ore has been accomplished in the general
manner described (p. 529) as typical for the region — (1) oxidation and hydration of the iron
minerals in place; (2) leaching of silica; and (.3) introduction of secondary iron oxide and
minor amounts of iron carbonate from other parts of the formation. These changes may start
simultaneously, but the first step is usually far advanced or complete before the second and
third are conspicuous. The early products of alteration, therefore, are ferruginous cherts —
that is, rocks in wliich the iron is oxidized and hydrated and the silica is not removed. The
later removal of silica is necessary to produce the ore, except in layers originally rich enough
in iron to make ores without the removal of siUca.
It is shown in discussing the secondary concentration of the Mesabi and Gogebic ores that
the degree of hydration of the iron-oxide laj^ers in the cherts and jaspers is not changed by the
alteration to ore. This appears to be true also of the Vermilion ores, as both the jaspers and
the ores are practically anhydrous.
SEQUENCE OF SECONDARY ALTERATIONS AND DEVELOPMENT OF TEXTURES.
Before lower Huronian time the iron-bearing formation at the surface at Soudan liad been
altered to iron ores, cherts, and jaspers, for all these substances were yielded to the conglomerate
at the base of the lower Huronian. The concentration of the ore may be supposed to have
stopped while the formation was covered by the lower Huronian sediments. Close folding
following the lower Huronian deposition rendered the ores hard, anhydrous, and ciystalline,
developed green schists out of the basaltic wall rocks and talcose and sericitic schists from the
porphyry wall rocks, and Ln general developed a steep, vertical structure in both ore and wall
rock, making it difficult to decipher the structural relations. Erosion later exposed the iron-
bearing formation, but owing to its refractory character it was not further concentrated.
At Ely also the concentration began before the deposition of the lower Huronian and was
interrupted when the iron-bearing formation was covered by lower Huronian sediments. Later,
when the formation was again exposed to weathering, the concentration continued, and then
accomplished the greater part of its work,
the process difTering m this respect from
that undergone by the ores at Soudan,
which were comparatively little affected by
the later concentration. The fact that the
iron-bearing formation at Ely was less
closely folded anil rendered less scliistose
than the iron-bearing formation at Soudan,
thereby retaining more openings through
which concentratmg solutions might work,
may explain why concentration was so
effective after the folding. That at least a
part of the concentration followed the fold-
ing is shown by the retention in the ore of
the folded bedded structures of the jasper
and by the development of pore space as a
result of the leachmg of siUca from the
folded jasj)er, discussed below.
VOLUME CHANGE IN ELY ORE.
X
X
\
Pore space
N.
N.
\
>v
\
Quartz
N
Quartz and other
and other
minerals
minerals
/
/
/
/
Hematite
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
Hematite
Jaspe
Ore
Figure 15.— Diagram illustrating volume changes involved in the altera-
tion of jasper to ore at Ely, Minn. From average analyses and porosity
detemiinations.
Comparison of tlie volume compositions
of the ore ami jasper shows the removal of
a large amount of silica from the jasper. In order to suliiciently reduce the silica content it is
necessary that silica equivalent to 63.7 per cent of the volume of the jasper be removed. The
VERMILION IRON DISTRICT.
143
ayerage porosity of the ore is approximately 22 per cent of its volume; hence the remaining
space left by the removal of silica, or 41.7 per cent of the volume of the jasper, has been filled
by infiltration of iron and by mechanical slumping of the ore. The relative importance of these
two factors can not be definitely determined, but it is known that both have been efl'ective.
The broken and brecciated condition of the ore and the drag at the jasper contacts give abun-
dant evidence of slump, and secondary hematite and siderite cementing the ores indicate that
a considerable amount of iron has been introduced in solution. Figure 15 illustrates the vol-
ume changes above discussed.
DISTRIBUTION OF PHOSPHORUS.
Phosphorus and iron contents of the Vermilion ores and associatetl ri^cks are as follows:
Phosphorite and iron contents of Vermilion ores and associated rocks.
Phos-
phorus.
Relation
of phos-
phorus to
iron.
Average ore at Ely
Average jasper at Ely
Average ore at Soudan
Average jasper at Soudan
Paint rock from Pioneer mine
Per cent.
65.00
28.97
65.21
38.27
16.32
Per cent.
0. 0469
.0213
.108
Per cent..
0. 0707
.0759
.1655
.127
.778
As calculated from the figures of the Lake Superior Iron Ore Association, 89. 3 per cent of
the total production of the Vermilion range in 1906 was of Bessemer grade. The lowest phos-
phorus grade was Pilot lump (iron 67.22 per cent, phosphorus 0.0297 per cent), and the high-
est phosphorus grade was Vermilion lump (iron 66.07 per cent, phosphorus 0.0878 per cent).
The phosphorus contents of individual samples show a much greater range than the grade
analyses, the ore containmg as high as 0.500 per cent of phosphorus locally.
The paint rock is an altered phase of the greenstone and porphyry, consisting principally
of kaoUn more or less stained with hon oxide. It is similar both m appearance and composition
to the altered dike rocks of the Gogebic range. These altered igneous rocks are higher m phos-
phorus than the ores (the above analysis being a typical one), owing probably to the high
phosphorus m the greenstone.
"Chemical maps" have been made by the chemists and engineers of the Oliver Iron Mining
Company of the mines on the Vermilion range operated by that company, the phosphorus and
iron contents of the ore being entered hi the proper place directly on the nfine maps. Study
of these maps fails to show any relation between the distribution of phosjihorus and the wall
rocks. The only general conclusion that may be drawn is that in general the phosphorus content
is lowest in the largest ore bodies and has a tendency to be liigh m the small shoots of ore away
from the mam ore body. The maps show no relation between high-phosj)horus ore and i)amt
rock; in fact, in several places ore running as low as 0.030 per cent of phosphorus occurs m
the immediate vicinity of high-phosphorus paint rock.
Owmg to the very small amomit of phosphorus even m what are termech " high-phosphorus "
ores, very little is known as to its mmeral occm-rence. So far as is known, no phosphorus minerals
have been identified in the ores or jaspers; hence any conclusions regarding the chemical combi-
nations m which phosphorus exists are necessarily based entirely on chemical evidence. Phos-
phorus is present in the ores in at least two different forms, knowTi to the Iron-ore chemists as
"soluble" and "insoluble" phosphorus, part of it being easily dissolved in hydrocliloric acid
and the remamder requiring ignition before it can be dissolved. Chemical analysis of the
insoluble residue shows it to be an alummum phosphate. This occurrence of both soluble and
insoluble phosphorus is common to ores of the other Lake Superior districts, particularly those
of the Marquette range.
CHAPTER VI. THE PRE-ANIMIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO.
LAKE OF THE WOODS A^'D RAINY LAKE DISTRICT.
INTRODUCTORY STATEMENT.
The Lake of the Woods and Rainy Lake distriet includes these hirge hikes and the sur-
rounding lands. The district may be considered as being bounded on the south by j)arallel
48° 30', on the north by parallel 50°, on the east by meridian 92° 30', and on the west by merid-
ian 95° 30'. The area which has been most closety studied is an angular one running north-
west and southeast. The Canadian Survey has published detailed reports by A. C. Lawson
on the Lake of the Woods " and Rainy Lake * district and one by W. H. C. Smith <^ on Hunters
Island.
The geology of tliis region may be said to duplicate in most essential respects, save the
distribution of the formations, the geology of'the Vermilion district of Minnesota. The rocks
therefore include lower-middle Huronian, Laurentian, and Keewatin.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
KEEWATIN SERIES.
The series of Keewatin rocks in the district of the Lake of the Woods is that to wliich the
term was first applied. Lawson's study of it, supplemented by later work of others, shows
that the Keewatin series is dominantly igneous but includes subordinate amounts of sediments,
precisely as in the Vermilion district. The igneous rocks comprise ancient lava flows, volcanic
elastics, and contemporaneous and subsequent intrusives. They are dominantly of basic and
intermediate varieties, exactly as in the Vermilion district, and among these the characteristic
ellipsoidal greenstones are conspicuous. Locally felsites and quartz porphyries occur. In
many areas subsequent dynamic action has gone very far, so that the rocks uncommonly have a
slaty or scliistose structure. These belts of slaty and schistose rocks Lawson has separated
into two divisions,'' one of which he describes as hydromicaceous schists and nacreous schists,
with some associated chloritic schists and micaceous schists and included areas of altered quartz
porphyry, and the other of which he calls clay slate, mica schist, and quartzite with some fine-
grained gneiss. Subsequent examinations of the areas by other geologists have led to the con-
clusion that large areas of these rocks are but altered facies of the ordinars^ varieties of the
Keewatin igneous rocks. Thus the slates are to a large extent mashed varieties of the ellij>-
soidal greenstones and tuffs. At various places the transition between the ellipsoidal green-
stones and slaty varieties of rocks produced from them by metamorphism is well shown.
However, there are present with the slaty and scliistose rocks of igneous origin subordinate
amounts of sedimentary graywacke and slate, including small belts of ordinary black slate
which are in some parts carbonaceous. There has not yet been discovered in the Lake of the
Woods district any iron-bearing formation corresponding with the iron-bearing vSouilan forma-
tion of the Vennilion district, and tliis is the chief cUfference between the two series. The only
rocks which could possibly be regarded as a correlative of the iron-bearing Soudan formation
o Geology of the Lake of the Woods region, with special reference to the Keewatin (Huronian?) belt of the Arehean rocks: Ann. Rept. Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Survey Canada for 1S85. vol. 1 (new ser.), 1.S8H, Rept. CC, pp. 5-l.*)l. with map.
!> Geology of the Rainy Lake region: .\nn. Rept. Geol.andNat. Hist. Survey Canada for IS87-18S8. vol. 3 (new ser.), pi. 1. 18S.S. Rept. F, pp. 1-182,
with two maps.
c Geology of Hunters Island and adjacent counlry: .\nn. Rept. Geol. Survey Canada for hst«HS91, vol. 5 (new ser.). pi. 1. 1S92. Rept. G»
pp. 1-7G. S(H^ also The .\ri-hean rocks west of Lake Superior: Bull. Geol. Soc. .\merica. vol. 4, 1S93, pp. 3.'13-34S.
d Geology of the Lake of the Woods region, p. 5G.
144
PRE-ANIMIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 145
are very subordinate beds of limestone which occur at various phiccs. The nature of this lime-
stone is represented by that at Scotty Islands, where there are narrow bands from a fraction
of an inch to 2 feet wide in a schistose and banded greenstone. The layers are usually lens-shaped,
and along their strike they may become narrow and pinch out. Commonly the division between
the limestone and the greenstone is rather sharp.
For the Lake of the Woods district Lawson " gives various sections of the Keewatin, ranging
from 6,500 feet to 23,756 feet in thickness. As tliis is a volcanic series and practically all the
structures are secondaiy, it may be doubted whether these figures have any real significance.
In conclusion it may be well to give the statement of the International Geological Committee,''
consisting of Messrs. Frank D. Adams, Robert Bell, A. C. Lane, C. K. Leith, W. G. Miller, and
Charles R. Van Hise, concerning the Keewatin of the Lake of the Woods:
In the Lake of the Woods area one main section was made from Falcon Island to Rat Portage, with various traverses
to the east and west of the line of section. The section was not altogether continuous, but a number of representatives
of each formation mapped by Lawson were visited. We found Lawson's descripti<')ns to be substantially correct. We
were unable to find any belts of undoubted sedimentary slate of considerable magnitude. At one or two localities
subordinate belts of slate which appeared to be ordinary sediment and one belt of black slate which is certainly sedi-
ment are found. In short, the materials which we could recognize as water-deposited sediments are small in volume.
Many of the slaty phases of rocks seemed to be no more than the metamorphosed ellipsoidal greenstones and tuffs,
but some of them may be altered felsite. However, we do not assert that larger areas may not be sedimentary in the
sense of being deposited under water. Aside from the belts mapped as slate, there are great areas of what Lawson
calls agglomerate. These belts, mapped as agglomerates, seem to us to be largely tuff deposits, but also include exten-
sive areas of ellipsoidal greenstones. At a number of places, associated and interstratified with the slaty phases are
narrow bands of ferruginous and siliceous dolomite. For the most part the bands are less than a foot in thickness, and
no band was seen as wide as 3 feet, but the aggregate thickness of a number of bands at one locality would amount to
several feet.
LAURENTIAN SERIES.
The Laurentian series is represented mainly by granite, sj-enite, granite gneiss, and syenite
gneiss. These rocks occur in masses varying from small areas to those many miles in diame-
ter. They are intrusive in the Keewatin series and comprise batholiths, bosses, dikes, and
stringers. The nature of the contacts between the Laurentian and Keewatin in the Lake of
the Woods area is identical with that of the contacts in the Vermilion district. Along the
borders of the batholiths the Keewatin is metamorphosed into hornblende schist or gneiss,
exactty as it is in the Vermilion district. Indeed, between the more metamorphosed varieties
of these rocks and their less metamorphosed forms there are all gradations. Included in the
great batholiths of granite are various masses of Keewatin which have generally been pro-
foundly metamorphosed and in many places partly absorbed.
The chemical and mineralogical compositions of the batholiths have thus, to some extent at
least, been affected by the included material. Similarly the chemical and mineralogical charac-
ters of the Keewatin have been affected by the material derived from the granite. Indeed,
there are few better examples of endomorphic and exomorpliic effects than those furnished by
this district. All these relations may be conveniently studied in the vicinity of Rat Portage.
Intrusive into both the Keewatin and Laurentian are later masses of granite and also various
basic rocks, including diabase, gabbro, and peridotite.
Lawson's maps of the Keewatin and Laurentian in the Lake of the Woods and Rainy Lake
district show certain interesting features which have here been better worked out than any-
where else in the Lake Superior region. The great batholiths have a tendency to a schistose
structure, which is parallel to their borders and is more marked at their exteriors than at their
interiors. The Keewatin schists around the borders are in bands, the schistosity of which is
rouglily parallel to the batholith boundary. Very commonly a band of Keewatin widens or
narrows within a short distance or separates into two or more bands. This subdivision may go
on until a band is lost in stringers in a granite mass. With many large areas of schists there
appear subordinate granite batholiths, bosses, and dikes.
o Geology of the Lake of the Woods region, pp. 104-112.
l> Report of the special committee on the Lake Superior region, with introductory note: Jour. Geology, vol. 13, 1905, pp. 96-96.
47517°— VOL 52—11 10
146 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION. .
Tlio area covcrod by the Laurentian granites is muc'li jjreater tlian tliat covered by tlie
Keowatin. It is certain that after the Keewatin volcanic rocks were once spread over tlie
entire region, as tliey doubtless were, the}^ must have been raised in great domes, pushed aside,
and jammed in between the batholithic intrusions. It is probable that the greater areas of
Keewatin which once overlaid tliese batholiths have been removed by erosion anrl that the
existing masses of Keewatin are but mere renmants of a great volcanic formation which once
covered the entire district. It has been suggested also tliat parts of the Keewatin may have
foundered and suidv in tlie granite batholiths at thi^ time of intrusion."
The foregoing facts in reference to tlu! relations of tlie Laurentian and Keewatin have led
Lawson '' to his subcrustal fusion theory, his idea being that the Laurentian represents the
fused and recrystallized nuxsses of the Keewatin. There is no doubt tliat along the border of the
batholitJiic masses a certain amount of Keewatin material has been aljsorbed, and no doubt that
the Keewatin along tlie borders of the granites has derived material from them; thus there
appears in some places to be an approach to chemical gradation between the two.
The known facts, then, are these: The Keewatin volcanic period antedated the Laurentian.
The Keewatin rocks were intruded by the various Laurentian granites and syenites, extending
tlu-ough an enormous period of time. There were important exoniorphic and endomorphic
effects. There is difference of opinion as to the amount of tlie Keewatin which has been absorbed
by the Laurentian. Our own view tends toward conservatism in this matter.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
The Huronian rocks in this district belong to the lower-middle Huronian. They are
chiefly confined to the southern part of the Rainy Lake area. From west to east their northern
boundary roughly follows Rainy River, the central body of Rain}- Lake, and Seine River with
its various enlargements. From this line the Huronian extends across the mternational bound-
ary into Minnesota for distances not yet determined, except at a few points. Tliis is the main
mass of rocks to which Lawson gave the name "Coutchiching." In the area imder discussion
the rocks consist dominantly of mica schists, but there are argillaceous slates, mica slates, gray-
wackes, and conglomerates at the bottom. All the evidences of imconformable relations
between these rocks and the Laurentian and Keewatin series are found in many places along
the contact. Where the underlj'ing rocks are Keewatin detritus is mainl}' derived from that
series; where they are granite, as at Bad Vermilion Lake, the detritus is mainly derived from
granite. In intervenmg areas both granite and greenstone are found. Also with these mate-
rials is found detritus of other kinds, such as felsites, quartz porphyries, and gneiss. The
materials include practically all the varieties of the Keewatin rocks. In places the conglom-
erate passes up into a feldspathic quart zite and tliis mto a micaceous graywacke or slate.
Wherever the bedding can be recognized the dip is steep to the south.
The main areas of the lower-middle H\u"onian micaceous schists have been intruded by
large masses of granite which maj' be especially well seen at the end of the southeast arm of
Ramy Lake and in Namakon Lake along the international bouudarj-. From masses of very
considerable size the intrusive granite varies to masses of much smaller size, and cutting through
the mica schists are very numerous granite dikes, a large number of which are roughly parallel
to the foliation. Large Ij" in consequence of the mtrusions of the granite the mam mass of the
lower-middle Huronian has been transformed to a well-crystallized mica schist. As a result
of these intrusions, from the end of the southeastern arm of Rainy Lake northwestward to the
base of the series the rocks are less anil less metamorphosed. Possibly this grailation was one
of the factors in Lawson's conclusion that the Keewatin series was higiicr and rested uncon-
formably upon his "Coutcliiching," which exactly reversed the true relation. As the relation
<• Daly, R. .\., The mechanics of igneous intrusion: .\ni. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 26, 190S, p. 30.
6 Geology of the Rainy Lake region, p. 131.
PRE-ANIMTKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 147
of the great mica schist series to th(> Keewatin is one about \vlii( li tliere is difference of opinion,
the statement of the International Geological Committee/' consisting of Messrs. Frank D.
Adams, Robert Bell, A. C. Lane, C. K. Leith, W. G. Miller, and Charles R. Van Hise, who
visited this district and examined the contact, is here quoted:
In the Rainy Lake district the party observed the relations of the several formations along one line of section at
the east end of Shoal Lake and at a number of other localities. The party is satisfied that along the line of section
most closely studied the relations are clear and distinct. The Coutchiching schists form the highest formation. These
are a series of micaceous schists graduating downward into green homblendic and chloritic schists, here mapped by
Lawson as Keewatin, which pass into a conglomerate kiio\vn as the Shoal Lake conglomerate. This conglomerate lies
upon an area of green schists and granites known as the Bad Vermilion granites. It holds numerous large well-rolled
fragments of the underlying rocks, and forms the base of a sedimentary series. It is certain that in this line of section
the Coutchiching is stratigraphically higher than the chloritic schists and conglomerates mapped as Keewatin. On
the south side of Rat Root Bay there is also a great conglomerate belt, the dominant fragments of which consist of green
schist and greenstone, but which also contain much granite. The party did not visit the main belts colored by Lawson
as Keewatin on the Rainy Lake map, constituting a large part of the northern and central parts of Rainy Lake. These,
however, had been visited by Van Hise in a previous year, and he regards these areas as largely similar to the green-
schist areas intruded by granite at Bad Vermilion Lake, where the schists and granites are the source of the pebblee
and bowlders of the conglomerate.
As to the existence of areas of sediments equivalent in age to the lower-michlle Huronian in
other parts of the Rainy Lake and Lake of the Woods district, no defmite statements can yet
be made. It is probable, however, that close structural studies of tliese areas will disclose such
sediments. Indeed, a traverse of the Rainy Lake section by the senior author led him to think
that in the belt of rocks mapped as Keewatm, running from the southeastern end of Crow Lake
to Manitou Lake, there are representatives of this upper series, but the area was not sufficientlv
studied for its areal distribution to be given. On the other hand, it is certain that some areas
which have been mapped as "Coutchiching" on the Ramy Lake sheet of the Geological Survey of
Canada, and especially on adjacent sheets, are but the chloritic and hornblendic schists of the
Keewatin metamorphosed by the intrusive granite. It is plain that the term "Coutchiching,"
if it is to have any structural significance, must be restricted to the sedimentary series of Ramy
Lake, its extensions and equivalents. It must not be used as a term to cover the more schis-
tose varieties of rocks of the region without reference to their stratigraphic position.
As to the thickness of the so-caUed "Coutchichmg," Lawson '' gives estimates varying
from 23,760 feet to 28,754 feet. These measurements, however, are clearly based on cleavage
structures rather than on bedding, and close examination shows that the two do not conform;
hence there is grave doubt whether the thickness of the series is more than a fraction of these
estimates.
It has already been indicated that in the lower-middle Hiu-onian schists ("Coutclaiching"
of Lawson) there are intrusive masses of granite which have produced metamorphic effects.
In addition to these granitic masses cutting all the formations of the district are later diabases,
dikes, and bosses which are supposed to be of Keweenawan age.
STEEP ROCK LAKE DISTRICT.
OENfiRAL GEOLOGY.
The Steep Rock Lake district has been described and mapped by II. L. Smyth "^ and W. N.
Merriam.'* The authors have visited the district for general correlation purposes but have
not studied it in detail. The following account is based principally on Merriam's work.
ajour. Geology, vol. 13, 1905, p. 95.
6 Geology ol the Rainy Lake region, pp. 131-102.
(■Structural geology of Steep Rock Lake, Ontario: Am. Jour. Sci., 3(i ser., vol. 42, 1891, pp. 317-331.
d Private report.
148 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The geology of the Steep Rock Lake district is similar in essential respects to that of the
Vermilion and Rainy Lake districts. The succession, in descending order, is as follows:
Algonkian system:
Intrusive rocks.
Huronian series:
Lower Huronian... I iilerbedded sediments and eruptive rocks: Dark-gray slate, agglomerate,
greenstones and green schists, conglomerates, and limestone, .forming
part of Steep Rock "series" of Smyth, estimated by Smyth to be 5,000
feet thick.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses intrusive into Kecwatin.
Keewatin series Ellipsoidal greenstones and green schists containing iron formation.
The lake resembles an irregular letter M, of wliich the western arm runs north and south
and the eastern arm northwest and southeast.
The Keewatin greenstones have a wide distribution on the south side of the lake, especially
near Straw Hat Lake. They are in isolated areas surrounded and overlapped ])y the lower
Huronian sediments. The principal showing of iron-bearing formation is southwest of Straw
Hat Lake. It is in contact with elhpsoidal greenstone on the west side, but the relation on
the cast is not Ioiowti. Lean iron ore also outcrops on the west side of the lake and in various
other parts of the district. Glacial fragments of iron ore have been found on the south side
of the lake opposite Mosher's Point.
The Laurentian granites and gneisses are exposed principally on the north and east sides
of the lake. Along the contact of the Laurentian and Keewatin in the southeastern part of
the district there is a great series of hornblende schists intricately associated with both Kee-
watin and Laurentian rocks. These are regarded as contact phases of the Keewatin where it is
intruded by the Laurentian, similar in all respects to those of the Verniihon district. Smyth
regards them as overlying the lower Huronian sediments and as passing upward into the schists
of Atikokan River, which he designates as the "Atikokan series."
The lower Huronian fringes the Laurentian on the southwest. Its principal exposure
is on the south and west shores of the lake, but small patches of it rest against the granite on
the points projecting from the east and north sides of the lake. It dips at 60° to 80° away
from the Laurentian. The basal conglomerate carries fragments of various phases of Lauren-
tian and Keewatin rocks. Where the conglomerate rests against the granite it is made up so
largely of granitic debris and has been so metamorphosed that it is frequently difficult to deter-
mine the exact contact of the granite and the sediments. According to Smyth, the succession
above the conglomerate is: Lower limestone, ferruginous horizon, interbedded crystalhne traps,
calcareous green scliists, upper conglomerate, greenstones and greenstone schists, agglomerate,
and dark-gray clay slate. Some of the greenstones and green scliists included by Smyth in
the lower Huronian are regarded by Merriam and by the authors as, at least in "part, Keewatin
unconformable beneath the Huronian.
According to Smyth, the Steep Rock group is folded into an eastern syncUnal, a middle anti-
clinal, and a western synclinal, the latter being faulted. The axes of these folds have a liigh
pitch to the south, varying from 60° to nearly 90°. Throughout the whole area is a regional
cleavage which has a nearly uniform direction transverse to all the members of the Steep Rock
group and also to the contact between this group and the basement complex. This has largeh*
obliterated the original lamination of the sediments and is now the donunant structure. It is
therefore the effect of the last force which has left its marks upon the rocks of the lake.
Before this last force acted upon tlic rocks the Steep Rock group had been folded into a south-
westward-tlipping monoclinal, which, under the action of the cleavage-prochicing force in a
northeast and southwest direction, caused the present fluted outcrop of the formations of the
Steep Rock group. That the basement complex itself yielded to tliis latter force is sliowni by
the irregular outcrops of the dikes cutting it.
At least three varieties of intrusives cut the Laurentian ami Keewatin and have supplied
pebbles to the conglomerate at the base of the lower Huronian. Other iiitrusivcs cut the
PRE-ANIMIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 149
Keewatin, Laurentian, and lower Iluronian rocks but have been subjected to folding. Finally,
a single massive dike appears to be subsequent to the latest period of folding.
IRON ORES.
Lean, banded iron-bearing rocks appear in the Keewatin of the Steep Rock Lake district.
The principal showing is southwest of Straw Hat Lake. The rocks are in contact mth ellipsoidal
greenstone on the west side, but the relation on the east is not known. Lean iron ore also
outcrops on the west side of the lake and in various other parts of the district. Glacial fragments
of iron ore have been found on the south side of the lake opposite Mosher's Point. Explorations
southwest of Straw Hat Lake are reported to have recently disclosed an ore deposit.
ATIKOKAN DISTRICT.
The existence of iron ore along Atikokan River and Sabawe Lake to the east of Steep
Rock Lake requires mention of the geology of tliis area. The area has not been geologically
mapped in detail.
As a result of visits to the district Mr. Merriam and the authors behevo the geology to be
similar in all essential features to that of the Steep Rock Lake and VermiHon districts — that
is, there are represented in this district Keewatin, Laurentian, and lower Huronian rocks.
The ores are in the Keewatin series.
The Atikokan iron ores are 3 miles north of the Canadian Northern Railway, on the north
side of Atikokan River, just east of its expansion into Sabawe Lake. Here is a ridge of magnet-
ite, green scliist, massive greenstone, and iron carbonate running approximately parallel to the
river. The greenstone is essentially a diorite with a large proportion of hornblende. The
magnetite is coarsely crystalline and dense and carries abundant ampliibole and iron pyrites
and small amounts of the nickel minerals. The relations of the magnetite and greenstones
are complex, as in the VermiUon district, but as a whole the greenstone seems to be intrusive
into the magnetite. To the west of the main magnetite exposure iron carbonate appears in
similar relations to the greenstone. So intricate are the relations of the ore to the greenstone
that it is difficult to determine the true shape of the magnetite deposit from the surface outcrop.
The bands are narrow, at most not more than 44 feet, and extend along the bluff for more than
400 yards. They are now being opened for mining. The ores will be roasted and used in
furnaces at Port Arthur.
To the west, down the river, the iron-bearing formation is exposed with similar association
to greenstone and green scliist at a number of places.
KAMINISTIKWIA AND MATAWIN DISTRICT.
The Kaministikwia and Matawin district is characterized by lean, slightly magnetic cherts
and jaspers in vertical bands and lenses, very irregular, closely associated with green schist and
ellipsoidal basalt typical of the Keewatin series. Granite and quartz poii^hyry intrude the
Keewatin at many places. The association of the jasper and greenstone and porphj'ries pre-
sents all the problems of the Vermilion district. The principal exposures are along Kaministi-
kwia River between Kamjnistikwia and Mokoman. Just north of the railway, a mile north of
Mokoman, is a jasper and greenstone breccia and conglomerate. The rock here exposed has
essentially the features of a breccia, but parts of it contain fragmental quartz and are truly
conglomerate, suggesting that it is perhaps the basal conglomerate of the lower Iluronian.
Still farther south, near Kakabeka Falls, the flat-lying iron formation and slates of the
Animikie group (upper Huronian) are exposed along the river and at Kakabeka Falls.
Farther west in the same township (Conmee) are more extensive outcrops of banded jasper
m chert containing impure siderite. It is strongly magnetic.
Farther south in Conmee Township, on the south half of lot 7 in the sixth concession, the iron range is found again
with a trend of about northwest and southeast and a nearly vertical dip on a long ridge about 150 feet wide. The
silica is mainly jasper, often of beautiful color, banded with magnetite, the bands often folded in complex ways, and
here also there is more or less of a peculiar breccia of grained silica or jasper in a fine gray matrix. '
150 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLtPERIOR REGION.
In the southeast end of lot 7 in the fifth concession there is finely banded jasper and some impure carbonate
intermixed, but on lot 4 in the third concession the rock is unusually black from the presence of magnetite, and some
specimens are heavy enough to make fairly good ore. Bands having a width of 1 or 2 feet appear to be nearly solid
masnotite and seem rich enough to work, though a small amount of pyrite present would lower the grade of the ore.
The banding varies in direction from southeast to south; and here again a conglomerate or breccia is commonly found
mixed with the ore, the wliole having a length of 10 chains and a width of 135 feet.
Altogether this series of iron dejjosits has been traced for about 8 miles, running parallel, it is said, to a similar
range located by Tumpelly and Smyth L' miles to the southwest; and probably both are continuations of the Matawin
ranges, though curvdng in a somewhat different direction."!
The Matawin iron bolt e.xtends from Kaministikwia station westerly beyond Greenwater
Lake. Banded magnetic and hematitic cherts and jaspers outcrop at many places on Matawin
and Shebandowan rivers. West of this belt banded iron ores were seen outcropping at Copper
Lake, south of Shebandowan Lake, and on the eastern shore of Greenwater Lake. Ores which
probably form an extension of the same belt occur south of Moss Township, on the farther side
of the gneiss area of Greenwater Lake.
MICHIPICOTEN DISTRICT.
The following account of the Michipicoten district is taken largely from the writings of
A. P. Coleman and A. B. Willniott'' and of J. M. Bell."^ The present writers have made no
detailed survey of the district, but have visited the area and agree with the essential conclusions
reached by the men named.
GEOGRAPHY AND TOPOGRAPHY.
The Michipicoten district, on the northeast shore of Lake Superior, is about 25 miles in
length from southwest to northeast, with a greatest width of about 7 miles, and runs from the
mouth of Dore River, a few miles beyond Parks Lake on the northeast. It lies northwest of
Michipicoten River near its entry into the bay of the same name on the northeast side of Lake
Superior and shows the rugged topography so characteristic of that shore.
The country rises rapidly from the lake in steep hills, often ridgelike, with the general direction of the strike of
the schists about 70° east of north, and culminates in the ridge of iron-range rock just east of the Helen mine, called
Hematite Hill or Mountain, which reaches a height of 1,100 feet above the lake or 1,700 feet above the sea. This is
the highest point for many miles around and makes a conspicuous landmark, though other hUls reach a level of 800
or 900 feet.
As Hematite Mountain is only 7 miles from Lake Superior, the rLse is rapid, and the location of the railway to the
Helen mine, which is at a level of G50 feet, just at the foot of the mountain, required some skill in the choice of a
route, old lake beaches and sand plains being utilized where possible. 6
SUCCESSION.
The succession of formations here given is that of Coleman and WLllmott, but the names
of the series are changed m accordance with the recommendation of the special committee on
the Lake Superior region and the series are grouped into the Algonkian and Archean systems. "^
Algonkian system:
Huronian series:
Lower-middle Huronian fBasic eruptive rocks. ^
("Upper Hiuonian" of | Acidic eruptive rocks.
Coleman and Willmott). [Dor6 conglomerate.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses intrusive into Keewatin series.
Eleanor slate.
Helen formation (iron-bearing).
W'awa tuff.
Gros Cap greenstone.
Keewatin series ("Lower Hu-
ronian' ' of Coleman and Will-
mott).
0 Coleman, ,\. P., Iron ores of northwestern Ontario: Eleventh Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, 1902, p. 130.
!> Tlie Midiiplcoten iron ranges: fniv. Toronto Studies, geol. ser., No. 2, 1902. 47 pp. See also Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, 1902. pp. 152-llW.
c Iron ranges of Michipicolen West; Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, vol. 14, 1905, pt. 1. pp. 278-3.''», with geologic map.
rf Report of the special committee on the Lalte Superior region: Jour. Geology, vol. 13. 1905, pp. 89-104.
PRE-ANIMIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 151
The geology of the Michipicoten district is remarkably similar to that of the Vermilion
district of Minnesota in regard to hthology, succession, and structure.
ABCHEAN SYSTEM.
KEEWATIN SERIES.
GROS CAP GREENSTONE.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Gros Cap greenstone is well exhibited just west of Michipicoten Harbor and on the
trail to the old fishing station at Gros Cap.
The most extensive area of the Gros Cap greenstones is the one extending from Gros Cap eastward to Magpie River
and thence north from Michipicoten River to the eastward bend of the Magpie. Other large areas exist northeast of
Eleanor Lake, including most of the shore of Loonskin Lake, and along the Josephine branch railway from mile LH
to mile 17.
Numerous smaller areas have been mapped. There are bands of greenstone and green
schist in the Wawa tuff that have the same characteristics.
PETROORAPHIC CHARACTER.
The Gros Cap greenstone consists of ellipsoidally parted basic igneous rocks formed partly
of lava flows, in all respects similar to the Ely greenstone of the Vermilion district of Minnesota.
Many parts of the greenstones do not show the ellipsoidal structure and are apparently greatly weathered dia-
bases, while still other parts are distinctly schistose; but the three varieties run into one another and can hardly be
separated in mapping. The chloritic schists are probably tuffs of the volcanoes which poured out the lavas. The
whole series is greatly weathered and saussuritic in thin sections.
WAWA TUFF.
DISTRIBUTION.
The extent of the Wawa tuffs and their boundaries can be given only approximately, partly because of the sand
plains covering them and partly on account of the intermixed later eruptive rocks. Beginning at the southwest is a
narrow band of quartz porphyry schist and felsite schist along the northern boundary of the Dore conglomerate area,
between the latter rock and the Laurentian. Where the Dore conglomerates narrow toward the northeast, the northern
fringe of quartz porphyry schist seems to widen correspondingly, though greatly interrupted by later acid and basic
eruptives. Still farther northeast the sand plains of the Magpie Valley hide the rocks almost completely, not to reap-
pear until near Talbott Lake, where the Wawa schists are extensively developed. From here to the northeast end of
the region mapped the Wawa schists are found on each side of the bands of the iron range as the immediately inclosing
rocks, except where broken by masses of greenstone or later diabase, and they extend northeast to the end of the region
mapped.
PETROGRAPHIC CHARACTER.
The Wawa tuff generally has the composition of quartz porphyry or felsite, and in some places
evidently consists of mashed and rearranged rocks with crystals of quartz and feldspar still to be
seen in them. In general, however, the formation apparently consists of tuffs or ash rocks, prob-
ably erapted in connection with the quartz porphyry and deposited in water, so that they have
a more or less stratified character. A few of them are brecciated, some crashed breccias, others
perhaps agglomerates formed of volcanic fragments larger than the ash. Some rare forms
have much the appearance of water-formed conglomerates with rounded pebbles, one singular
example of the sort occurring on a steep hill slope at the west end of Lake Wawa. In a gen-
eral way this resembles a beach deposit with pebbles cemented by a finer-grained greenish
or yellowish matrix, but on closer examination the apparent pebbles are found to be really
concretions.
There is no sharp line between this phase of the rock, which occurs in sipaller amounts at other points also, and
varieties like ordinary quartz porphyry schist, so that one may suppose it to be merely a phase of the series of acid
schists in which there has been concretionary action.
152 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION
Since the materials forming the schists were laid down, or else during their deposit, important chemical changes
have taken place in them, probably by circulating hot water, bo that sheared and crushed quartz porphyry or porphy-
rite has been greatly silicified, at times even transformed into thick bands of pale-gray or green chert or chalcedony,
with a small amount of eericite. This phase is similar to parts of the Palmer gneiss of the Marquette district. In other
cases a considerable amount of siderite or of a carbonate like aiikerite, dolomite, or calcite has been deposited with
cryptocrystalline or microcrystalline silica, suggesting a change to the iron-range rocks which form the uppermost
series of the lowor Iluronian. It is probable that this change went on at the time when the original iron-range rocks
were deposited and under the same conditions.
In a gcneial way it may l>o stated that tlie Wawa tuff is accompanied by lenses or bands
of carbonates, inckiding impure siderite.s, dolomites, and limestones. In most places some
granular silica also is present, and it may be that these lenses or bands are chemical sediments.
In a general way the Wawa tuffs tend to bo more siliceous and to contain more siderite as they approach the iron
range, and to be somewhat coarser in grain and gneissoid in look on the sides toward the I.aurentian, as though the
proximity of these rocks had influenced their crystalline character and chemical composition. The boundary between
them and the Helen iron-range rocks is sometimes quite sharp, a thin sheet of black slate occasionally intervening
between the two, but in other cases there are schistose varieties of the siderite of the iron range which form a transition
toward the quartz-porphyry schists.
STRUCTURE AND THICKNESS.
The Wawa tuffs have on the average a strike of 70° east of north, though with considerable local variations, and a
dip toward the south of from 50° to verticality. Near the Helen mine they are shown to form a syncline pitching
toward the east and inclosing in their trough the iron-range rocks. As the dip is much the same on each side of this
synclinal axis, the fold must have been a closed one; and since it was formed erosion has eaten down the Archean sur-
face until at various points, such as west of the Helen mine and south of Lake Eleanor, the iron range in the central
trough has been completely removed, leaving the lower schists across the whole width.
The greatest measured thickness of the schists is to the south of Sayers Lake, where they are known to reach
across Lake Wawa, a distance of about two miles and a quarter, which at a dip of 70° would give more than 11,000 feet.
HELEN FORMATION.
DISTRIUUTION.
Beginning at ttie southwest, several bands of the granular sUica variety occur on the Gros Cap Peninsula, the largest
being at the Gros Cap mine on the south shore of the peninsula." The materials here are chert and granular silica
interbanded with hematite, and the width is in all about 150 feet. To the east another narrower band of rusty siliceous
rock is seen, and just around the eastern point, near the beacon, is a third still narrower band, differing from the others
in containing magnetite and much pyrite. All of these bands of iron range run about northwest and southeast and
have a dip of perhaps 50° to the southwest. A similar band is seen on the west shore somewhat south of the portage
across the neck of the peninsula, probably an extension of one of the bands mentioned before. About 150 yards north
of the portage are several narrow bands of the rock, usually very pyritous, associated with quartz porphjTy schist and
striking about east and west with a dip to the south. This belt probably extends to the east, where an outcrop of
brown sandy-looking grained silica occiu's a little inland fi'om the old fishing station. The band just mentioned is nearly
parallel to the great area of schist conglomerate to the north and is the nearest part of the iron range to it, so that it
may ha\-e furnished part of the pebbles of granular silica in the conglomerate.
Two or three small patches of the iron range are found in the greenstone east of Michipicoten Harbor, after which no
more is known for about 8 miles, when the Helen iron range begins. All of the outcrops mentioned thus far appear
to be inclosed in the greenstones as if swept off eruptively.
The prmcipal belt outcrops near the Helen mine.
Beginning on the west, the iron range as found at the Helen mine is in two long fingers reaching the shore of Talbott
Lake, but not crossing it. The southern finger, long and narrow, possibly reaches a short distance into the water of
the lake, but does not appear on the opposite side. It extends eastwardly uji the valley of a small creek until it reaches
the main body of the formation near Sayers Lake. Following the boundary northward are several minor folds which
are seen to rest on Wawa tuffs. Then crossing the railway track near the outlet of the lake, the range extends westward
down to the shore of the lake, where it comes to an end within a few feet of the shore, being bottomed by Wawa tuffs.
A comparatively recent development has been the finding of a large band of iron-bearing
formation witliin 2 miles to the northwest of the Helen mine in an area Avhich was supposed
to have been carefully explored. It is associated with a thick belt of black slate, but most
of the inclosing rock is of the Gros Cap and Wawa formations.
o Kept. Geol. Survey, Canada 1863-1869, p. 131; also Eighth Kept. Ontario Bur. Mines, pp. 145, 254.
PRE-ANIMIKIE lEON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 153
On the north side the range seems to extend quite regularly toward the east, the formation standing almost ver-
tically. [From the Helen mine the range] runs for a mile and three-quarters a little north of east, when another inter-
ruption occurs, thought by some to be caused by a fault. The evidence for this does not seem conclusive, and more
careful exploration may bring to light in the heavily wooded region to the east some links connecting it with the
Lake Eleanor band, which commences after a gap of a mile and a half and runs northeast to the Grasett road between
Lakes Wawa and Eleanor. The road follows a depression between hills that probably represents a line or zone of fault-
ing, for the iron range here jogs three-eighths of a mile to the north and then continues the usual strike of about 60°.
Between the two main outcrops and just east of the road are two small ridges of rusty granular silica pointing a little
east of north, perhaps remnants left during the dragging of the strata in faulting.
The iron range south of Lake Eleanor gives the best exposure of the range between the Helen and Josephine mines.
In a general way it suggests that of the Helen mine, though on a smaller scale.
The strike of the ii-on-range rocks at the extreme southwest end is not far from north and south, with a dip running
from 30° to 90° to the east, pointing toward the two hills of granular silica to the east of the road. Less than 100 paces
eastward along the top of the ridge the strike becomes G0° to 80° and keeps this direction until the east end of the little
lake is passed, when it changes to 45° for a short distance, and the range ends abruptly in a mass of greenstone. Beyond
this it has not been traced, but the country is very mossy and forest covered, so that it is hard to say positively that there
may not be exposures of the iron range yet undiscovered.
The next point at which the iron-bearing rocks have been found is 2J miles to the northwest of the Lake Eleanor
range, where they begin just east of a long unnamed lake and run about 60° east of north past the north side of Brooks
Lake almost to Bauldry Lake, a distance of about 2 miles. Here again a fault of great magnitude has been suggested,
the plane of faulting running northwest and southeast; and there is much in favor of this view, though it can not be
said to have been proved, since very little work has been done on the geology of the country between the two iron
ranges. The only rocks known to exist between them are greenstones and green schists.
The iron-bearing formation appears again near the south side of Baukhy Lake and
extends eastward past the south side of Long Lake. Beginning at Goetz Lake and rimning
east through Brooks Lake and Kimball Lake is a considerable belt of iron formation, on vvliich
the Josephine mine is located. Ore has been foimd here in small amount by driUing, but has
not been mined.
STRUCTURE AND THICKNESS.
In a general way the rocks of the Helen iron formation, though so narrow, rarely exceeding 1,000 feet in width,
are the most distinctive features of the lower Huronian, since they are very easily recognized and nearly always rise
as sharp ridges above the sui'rounding region. Except on Gros Cap, where the bands strike about northwest and south-
east, the different ridges have a surprising uniformity of strike, about N. 60° to 70° E., the same direction as one finds
prevalent in the adjoining schists. Though the general strike is so uniform, it is evident that along with the other
rocks of the region the u'on formation has been interrupted frequently by eruptive masses, and apparently also by
faults of great magnitude, the effect always being to shift the part east of the fault plane toward the north.
It is probable that the bands of iron range are not simple tilted strips of rock but closely folded sheets, only the
lower portion of which is still preserved, and it may be that the apparent gaps between the ranges are really due to the
erasion of the general rock surface so far down as to cut off the folded upper part of the lower Huronian altogether, leaving
only the schists beneath. If this is the case the depth to which the iron-bearing rocks descend may be quite limited,
though the amount of mining and diamond drilling done on the range does not give very certain evidence in this
respect.
The iron-bearing formation at the Helen mine underlying the Boyer Lake basin is peculiar
in that the lake bottom is much below the outlet. The origin of tliis is discussed elsewhere
(p. 158).
PETKOGBAPHIC CHARACTER.
Five species of rock may be distinguished in the iron-bearing Helen formation — banded
granular silica or ferruginous cherts with more or less iron ore, black slate, sitlerite with varying
amounts of sihca, griinerite schist, and pyritic quartz rock. All are found well developed at the
Helen mine, and all but the griinerite schist have been found in the Lake Eleanor iron range
also ; granular sihca and siderite occur in large quantities in every important part of the range,
though small outcrops sometimes show the silica alone. The ferruginous cherts are in many
places soft and sandy, like the ferruginous cherts or taconites of the western Mesabi. Jaspery
varieties have not been found on this range, but they occur only a few miles to the north.
RELATIONS TO OTHER FORMATIONS.
The Helen formation is very closely related to the Gros Cap greenstone and Wawa tuff.
Its relations to the associated rocks of the Keewatin series are almost identical with the rela-
tions of the Soudan formation of the Vermilion district of Minnesota to the adjacent Keewatin
154 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTEKIOK REGION.
rocks. In general the iron-bearing formation from its structure seems to be at upper hori-
zons of the Keewatin and to rest on the other rocks, being fol'ded in with (hem; bvit tlie forma-
tion lias been also intrudeti by basic rocks wliich have been mapped as Gros Cap greenstone,
and some of them may be intei-bedded with the surface flows of the Gros Cap greenstone. For
a discussion of the problem the reader is referred to the chapter on the Vermilion district and
also to the (Hscussion of the origin of tlie ores. (Sec Chapters V, pp. 118 et seq., and XVII,
pp. 460 et seq.)
ELEANOR SLATE.
In addition to the slates of the Wawa formation, i^lates of a distinctly sedimentary kind occur as thin bands in
the northeastern part of the region near Eleanor Lake and elsewhere. .Slate or shale of the kind described is traceable
at intervals for a mile along the north shore of Parks Lake, and is found underlying the Dot6 conglomerate north of
Eleanor Lake on the Grasett road. They are buff to dark -gray or black rocks with slaty cleavage, sometimes forming
an angle of 25° with the well-marked bedding. Some varieties of them are carbonaceous, and at a point east of Wawa
Lake such a slate was taken up as a coal mine. \\'hether the black graphitic slate often cormected with the iron
ranges belongs with Eleanor slates is not certain, nor has it been determined positively whether the slates are older or
yotmger than the adjoining iron-bearing rocks.
LAURENTIAN SERIES.
The Laurentian series includes various types of granite, quartz porphyry, quartz por-
phyrite, felsite, and quartzless porphyry. They are intrusive mto the Keewatin series and
in part into the overlymg lower-middle Huronian sediments, but in large part also they he
miconformably below the Hm-onian, as is shown by the numerous pebbles of Ijaurentian
gneiss and granite included in the basal conglomerate of the Huronian. It is not desirable
that all these mtrusives should be classed with the Laurentian, as that term is properly appUed
only to the pre-Huronian rocks, but they have not been sufficiently w^eil discriminated and
mapped to warrant a separate classification.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJBONIAN SERIES.
LOWER-MIDDLE HUKOXIAX.
dor£ COITGLOMEKATE.
distribution, topography, and stritcture.
The conglomerate occurs fi-om point to point along the shore as far as Dog River, 10 miles to the west, and east-
ward to about the third milepost on the railway from Michipiroten Harbor to the Helen mine, a distance of 4 miles;
while the greatest width measured during last summer's work is about a mile and a half, on a line due north of the
harbor.
In general the topography of the conglomerate band is very rugged and hilly, with numerous successive ridges
running parallel to the strike, which averages about 70°; and with very steep slopes on each side, but especially toward
the north, where the narrow hills often drop off vertically or even overhang. The cause of this is to be found in the
unequal resistance of the different layers to weathering and in the fact that the dip is usually very steep, from 60° to
90°, averaging about 75° to the south. Dips to the north have only rarely been noticed. The steep cliffs formed in
the way described often have a height of 50 or more feet, and on the north side are frequently unscalable for consider-
able distances. Perhaps the most rugged portion of the region is directly north of Michipicoten Harbor, where within
2 miles of the shore there are several of these ridges, with Valleys between, rising finally to over 600 feet above Lake
Superior.
\\Tiile the general strike is about 70° there are great local \'ariations, especially in the vicinit)^ of eruptive masses.
Near the second mile on the railway the strike is nearly north and south for more than 400' yards, but on each side the
usual directions of from 70° to 75° are found. There is good reason to believe that in general the strike of the schistosity
corresponds to that of the sedimentation, for bands of rock free from pebbles follow the same direction, but in a few cases
the schistose structure seems to cross the direction of sedimentation, having a bearing of about 45°, while the general
course of the ridges is 70° to 80*".
PETROGRAPHIC CHARACTER.
Tilie conglomerates are for the most part large and well rounded. They consist of dark-
green schist, granite, ferruginous chert, spotted gray-green scliist, porpiijTj-, felsite, and con-
glomerate or breccia. All have been more or less flattened during the development of schistosity
in the rock.
PEE-ANIMIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 155
The conglomerate is in many places penetrated by dikes of quartz porphyry, or sometimes quartzless porphyry,
running parallel to the stratification as a rule, and in many cases squeezed or sheared into felsite schist in which the
porphyritic structure is almost lost.
In addition to the porphyry dikes there are numerous masses and dikes of diabase rising through the conglomer-
ate, apparently later in date than the porphyries, since they are seldom squeezed into schists so far as ob.served. The
diabase seems to be the most resistant rock of the region with the exception of the iron range of the Helen mine, and
accordingly forms in many cases the tops of the highest ridges.
THICKNE.SS.
The general attitude of the large area of schist conglomerate just described suggests a continuous series of strata,
as supposed by Logan, since in most cases the dip and strike are fairly uniform; and any marked variations maybe
accounted for by the presence of eruptive rocks. This would give them a thickness of about 7, .500 feet, for the greatest
width is 8,000 feet, with an average dip of about 7.5°.
However, it is not easy to imagine the mass as tilted bodily, and it is more natural to think of the series as form-
ing a close fold, most probably a syncline with the two sides closely squeezed together, and tilted slightly against the
Laurentian mass' to the north. In this case we may suppose that the schists were to some extent pulled asunder at the
base of the fold, which was in tension, allowing the felsites and diabases to penetrate parallel to the cleavage. There
is no doubt, however, that some of the diabase dikes are later in age and cut diagonally across the schistose structure.
One feature of the arrangement of the conglomerates supports the view that they form a syncline. Toward the
western end of the series of rocks we find bands of well-defined conglomerate along each side with gray and green schists
showing few or no pebbles between, as if there was an upper layer of finer sediments nipped in between the two sides
of the conglomerate. The absence of pebbles in this central area may, however, be due merely to a greater amount
of compression, flattening them beyond recognition. Toward the eastern end there are very few gaps where pebbles
have not been seen.
RELATIONS TO UNDERLYING ROCKS.
The T)or6 conglomerate near Michipicoten Harbor is nowhere found in contact with undoubted Archean rocks,
though what look like Wawa tuffs and have been mapped as such occur as a narrow band to the north between the
conglomerate and the Laurentian; and schists with some granular silica, certainly lower Huronian, are found near the
north end of the peninsula of Gros Cap, though a small sand plain separates them from the conglomerate. The Lauren-
tian eruptives have not been seen in actual contact with them on the north, though some belts of green schists in the
Laurentian a little way from the hidden contact may be gi'eatly metamorphosed conglomerate swept off at the time of
eruption.
The relationship to the south is more distinct, and the Gros Cap greenstones appear to be the underlying rock
folded into a syncline with them; so that south of the railway half a mile from the harbor the greenstone seems to over-
lie the conglomerate, both having a dip of about 70° to the south.
The pebbles, however, are clearly derived from the rocks of the adjacent Keewatin and
Laurentian. Their variety and large size characterize the conglomerate as a basal conglomerate
marking a great unconformity.
MICHIPICOTEN EXTENSIONS.
Many areas of iron-bearing rocks near the Michipicoten district have been reported and
mapped by Coleman, Bell, and others. Their lithology and association are similar to those of
the Michipicoten district. No attempt Avill be made here to describe in detail the individual
belts. None of them are productive and in few of them have detailed geologic maps been made.
J. M. Bell"^ has reported on the iron ranges of Micliipicoten West, covering the northern
and western extensions of the producing Micliipicoten iron-range district, adjacent to Micliipi-
coten Bay. The northern range lies between Magpie River and the western branch of Pucaswa
River, practically continuous with the old Michipicoten range. The western range, separated
from the other by granite, lies between Otter Head and Bear River, on the Lake Superior shore,
and extends but a short distance north of Lake Michi-Biju. The lithology and succession are
essentially the same as in the Micliipicoten district. The Helen formation consists of sideritic
and pyritous cherts, jaspers, amplubolitic scliists, siderite, iron ores, cjuartzite phyllites, and
biotitic and epidotic sclusts. For the most part the iron-bearing bands are lean ore. Explora-
tion has been carried on somewhat extensively at Iron Lake, Frances mine, and Brotherton Hill,
a Iron ranges of Micliipicoten West: Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, vol. 14, 1905, pt. 1, pp. 278-355.
156 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTERIOR REGION.
at the Leach Lake bands in the northern range, and in Laird's claims, the Julia River bands,
tlie David Katossin claims, and the Lost Lake claims in the western range, but no important
ore deposits have yet been found.
THE IRON ORES OP THE MICHIPICOTEN DISTRICT.
By the authors and W. J. Mead.
GENERAL STATEMENT.
The Micliipicoten district has one producing mine, the Helen. The Helen ore bodv Hes
in a great anipliitlieater opening westward on Boyer Lake, the east wall of wliicli is formed by
iron carbonate, the north by ferruginous cherts, and the south by Wawa tuff. The tuffs and
ferruginous cherts stand vertical. Boyer Jjake has been drained, and the basin, a (juarter of a
mile long and 130 feet tleep, is apparently cut out of solid rock. A dike of diabase crosses the
basin from north to south near its east end, as shown by mining operations, and its outcrop on
the edge of the basin can now be seen. Most of the ore mined is east of the dike, but ore^ is
known west of it. Alining operations are 300 feet below- the original level of Boyer Lake.
The ore body seems to dip eastward as if passing under the siderite hill. A drift under this
hill has developed several hundred thousand tons of iron pyrites. Along the south margin of
the ore body ocher or paint rock marks the limit against the green schists. To the north the
ore runs gradually into lean material, with too much white silica to be worth mining.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
Following is the average analysis of all ore sliipped from the Micliipicoten district in 1907:
Average composition of all ore shipped from the Michipicoten district in 1907.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.) 5. 70
Analysis of dried ore :
Iron 58. 20
Phosphorus 127
Silica 4. 40
Manganese 165
Alumina 88
Lime 23
Magnesia 14
Sulphur 127
Loss by ignition 10. 40
Chemically the ore most closely resembles some of the more hydrous Mesabi ores. It is
low in alumina and high in combined water, which makes almost all of the loss on ignition.
MINERAL COMPOSITION.
Mineralogically the ores are made up of hydrated iron oxide and silica, with small amounts
of clay and other minor constituents. The following approximate mineral composition Vvas
calculated from the above average analyses:
Mineral composition of Michipicoten ores, calculated from above analyses.
Hematite 23. 60
Limonite 69. 60
Quartz ' 3. 36
Kaolin 2. 23
Iron sulphide 24
Apatite 41
Miscellaneovis .56
100.00
PRE-ANIMIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF ONTARIO. 157
The hydrated ferric oxide is calculated as hematite and limonite in order to afTord com-
parisons with other ores similarly calculated. It is known that liydrated iron oxides other
than limonite are present, and it is probable that practically all of the ore is more or less
hydrated; hence the amount of hematite present is probably less than is indicated above. No
phosphorus minerals have been identified, but the presence of calcium sugg:ests calcium phos-
phate (apatite). Calculation shows, however, that sufficient calcium is not present to account
for all the phorphorus as apatite. Iron sulphide is locally abundant in the ores, occurrmg in
pockets of "pyritic sand."
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS.
Color and texture. — In color the ore ranges from liglit-yellow ocber, suitable for paint,
tlu-ough a variety of shades of red and brown to dark brown or nearly black. In texture the
ore varies from soft earthy material to rough, slaglike limonitic ore, and locally hard blue
hematite is found.
Density. — The average mineral density of the ore, calculated from the average mineral
composition given above, is approximately 3.85.
Porosity. — The porosity of the ore varies to an extreme degree, ranging from a minimum of
less than 5 per cent m the dense ore to a maximum of over 50 per cent (locally 60 per cent) in
the limonite. The average is rather difficult to estimate, but is probably between .30 and 40
per cent.
Cubic feet per ton. — Owing to the extent to wliich it varies in density, jiorosity, and moisture,
the cubic content of the ore ranges within wide limits. The average is approximately 1.3.5
cubic feet a ton.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE MICHIPICOTEN ORES.
The Helen mine has impervious walls, but the direction and nature of the concentrating
waters are not yet clear.
Tlie u'on-bearing formation was originally cherty iron carbonate. The hill east of the ore
body exhibits one of tlie largest masses of unaltered carbonate known in the Lake Superior
region. The alteration of the iron carbonate can be seen in all its stages, first into ferruginous
chert and then into ore, and locally directly into ore. The bottom of the lake basin is partly
covered with large masses of yellow ocher dissolved from the carbonate and redeposited.
The iron carbonate is thoroughly impregnated with sul])hide minutely disseminated tlirough
the carbonate and m veins in it. During the alteration of the iron carbonate to the iron ore this
sulphide has remained relatively intact, for it is included with the oxides of iron in large masses.
In the deeper levels of the Helen mine the iron sulphide is in such large masses as to constitute
a great obstacle to mining. Nevertheless, some of the sulphide has been altered and is rep-
resented in the limonite forming the lake bottom. The waters of the lake are liighly charged
with sulphuric acid, which has a strong deleterious effect on the pipes.
Associated with the limonite in the lake bottom is a peculiar green mud, the composition
of which is as follows:
Analysis of dark-green mud from lake bottom.
SiOj 47. 58
Fe 11. 23
Mn 14
CaO 95
CO, 3.19
158
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Embedded in tliis imid was found a glacial bowlder consisting largely of serpentine, showing
peripheral alteration to a depth of several inches. Analyses made ]>y R. D. Hall of the center
and outer ]iortious are as follows:
Analyses oj altered bowlder jrom bottom o/ Boyer Lake.
SiO;...
AljOs..
Fe.Oj.
FeO...
MgO..
CaO...
NasO..
KjO...
HaO-.
H2O+.
TiOs. .
SO3...
COs...
Center of
bowlder.
39.36
3.48
0.S4
6.82
31.04
3.22
.n
.90
.20
7.44
.13
.18
Trace.
Altered
portion.
37.80
3.76
9.13
7.76
28.02
3.50
.06
.10
.62
8. 58
.38
.40
.10
Altered
portion.
assuming
FejOa
constant.
28.30
2.82
(1.84
5.81
21.00
2.62
.04
.07
.46
6.41
.28
.30
.07
The inner portion of the bowlder was a dense dark-green rock and the altered portion a
lighter-green earthy material. The alteration appe.u-s to have been brought about essentially
by solution. Oxidation has been practically nil, as has also earbonation. The ferric iron
occurs essentially as magnetite. If this mineral is assumed to have been unaltered, it follows
from a comparison of the first and third columns in the above table that there has been a loss
of all constituents except ferric iron, SO3 and CO,. The nature of the alteration differs essen-
tially from typical \yeathering.
The abundant evidence of decomposition of the substances of the lake bottom and the
presence of sulphuric acid in the lake waters have suggested to Coleman and Willmott" that
Boyer Lake represents a solution basin. The bottom of the lake is considerably below its
outlet. Though ilecomposition has undoubtedly aided in the erosion of the lake bottom,
there is also evidence, summarized by Martin (see pp. 430-431), that the lake basin is a glacial
cirque developed largely by mechanical means.
1 The Michipicoten iron ranges: Univ. Toronto Studies, geol. ser., No. 2, 1902, p. 23.
CHAPTER VII. THE MESABI IRON DISTRICT OF MINNESOTA.^
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
The Mesabi iron district lies in the jiart of Minnesota northwest of Lake Superior. In shape
and trend it is simiLar to the other iron districts of the Lake Superior re(:i;ion. (See Ph VIII,
in pocket.) It extends from a point west of Pokegama Lake, in T. 142 N., R. 25 W., east-north-
east to Birch Lake, a distance of approximately 110 miles, with a width varj-ing from 2 to 10
miles. Its area is about 400 square miles. To the east from Birch Lake to Gimflint Lake
and beyond are small patches of u-on-bearing rocks, constituting remnants of an eastward
extension of the ^lesabi district.
The main topographic feature of the district is a ridge or "range" parallel to the longer
direction of the district, known as the Giants or Mesabi Range.'' Mesabi (spelled also Mesaba
and Missabe) is the Chippewa Indian name for "giant." In the west end of the district the
Giants Range merges insensibly into the level of the surrounding country, about 1,400 feet
above sea level, or 800 feet above Lake Superioi-. Toward the east the elevation with
reference both to Lake Superior and to the surrounding country increases; from range 18 to
range 12 elevations of 1,800 and 1,900 feet above sea level, or 400 and 500 feet above the level
of the surrounding country, are reached. For many miles both north and south of the range
there is a comparatively low, flat area, and the Giants Range, particularly its eastern portion,
is a conspicuous feature in the landscape.
While the general trend of the range is east-northeast, there are many gentle bends in
the crest line, and m range 17 a spur known locally as the "Horn" projects in a southwesterly
direction for 6 miles. The crest of the range is in places broad and flat, in others comparatively
narrow and sharp. The southern slope is very gentle; the northern slope is somewhat less so.
At short intervals both crest and slopes are notched by dramage channels.
The Giants Range for the most part forms a drainage divide, although it is crossed by
drainage channels at several places. The dramage of the district is apportioned among three
of the great river systems of the country — tJie Mississippi, St. Lawrence, and Nelson.
The succession of formations in the Mesabi district appears in the following statement:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene series Deposits of late Wisconsin age.
Unconformity.
Cretaceous system.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series Great basal gabbro (Duluth gabbro) and granite (Embarrass
granite), intrusive in all lower formations.
Unconformity.
Huronian series:
fAcidic and basic intrusive rocks.
Upper Huronian (Animi-J Virginia slate.
kie group) 1 Biwabik formation (iron-bearing).
[Pokegama quartzite.
Unconformity.
(Giants Range granite, intrusive in lower formations.
Lower-middle Huronian. .I^'''''''"'^'''^^^^^'^'^'^"™""'''™®'''^''® formation (equivalent to the
Ogishke conglomerate and Rnife Lake slate of the Vermilion
district).
a For turther detailed description of the geology of this district see Men. V. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, and references there given. Mining
men and others have cooperated cordially in the preparation of this chapter, hut we would acknowledge jjarticularly our indebtedness to Mr. J. U.
Sebenius, who, having been in charge of explorations in the Mesabi district since its discovery and being now chief engineer of the United States
Steel Corporation, has perhaps closer knowled^'e of the geology of the iron-tearing rocks here than any other person.
i>For the use of the terms "Giants Range" and "Mesabi range" in this report, see footnote on p. 41, also Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol, 43
1903, p. 21.
159
160 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Liiurontian series Granites and porphyries.
Keewatin scries Greenstones, green schists, and porphyries.
The core of the Giants Ranee is made up principally of j^ranitc of lower-middle Iluronian
and Keweenawan a<;e and subordinately of Archean igneous rocks. To the south of the igneous
core, for a part of the district, arc lower-middle Huronian sedimentar}'^ rocks, with bedding
approximately vertical. Against the southern boundary -f the lower-middle Iluronian, or,
where the lower-middle Huronian is lackmg, against the igneous core, he the upper Iluronian
sedimentary rocks (Animikie group). They dip gently to the south and underlie the greater
portion of the southerly slopes of the range. On the southeast the Huronian rocks are limited
by the Keweenawan Duluth gabbro, the north edge of which cuts across the Huronian forma-
tions diagonally from southwest to northeast. The Archean, lower-middle Huronian, and
upper Huronian are separated from one another by unconformities. Glacial drift cover.s the
district so thickly that rock exposures are rare on the lower slopes of the range and only fairly
numerous near the crest.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM OR "BASEMENT COMPLEX."
DISTRIBUTION.
The Archean rocks of the Mesabi district are confined to its central portion. They are
found north and northwest of Nashwauk; northwest of Hibbing; north and northeast of Motm-
tain Iron; in the southerly projection of the Giants Range known as the "Horn," bounded by
the cities of Virginia, Eveleth, Sparta, and Mcliinley; north of Biwabik; and eastward nearly
to the east Hue of R. 16 W. With the exception of the portion of the Archean area east of
Embarrass Lake, exposures are sufficiently common to allow a fairly close determination of
the boundaries. East of Embarrass Lake the mapping is based on the presence of abundant
Archean fragments in the drift.
Included in the areas mapped as Archean north of Mountain Iron are several small patches
of lower-middle Huronian rocks. Exposures are so few, they are so mixed in t* e same exposure
.with Archean rocks, and they are metamorphosed to such difficultly recognizable forms that
their accurate delimitation on the general map is not possible.
KINDS OF BOCKS.
The Archean is represented, about in order of abundance, by micaceous, chloiitic, and
hornblendic scliists, basalts, dolerites, porphyritic rhyolites, granites, and diorites. The basic
rocks have commonly a green color and are usually referred to locally as greenstones or green
schists. They are given one color on the general map of the ilesabi district and are to be
-correlated with the Keewatin series (PI. VIII). The acidic igneous rocks, consisting of the
porph}-iitic rhyoHtes and the granites, are mapped under another color and are correlated with
the Laurentian.
All these rocks have their counterparts in other iron districts of the Lake Superior region.
In the .Vermihon and Crystal Falls districts, where especially well developed, Clements has
descril>ed each i)hase in great detail. For details of petrography the reader is referred to the
description of the Archean rocks in the monographs on the Crystal Falls and the Vermilion
districts."
Nowhere iu the district have sediments been found which are demonstrably of Archean
age, but slate fragments in the basal conglomerate of the lower-midcUe Huronian point to the
former existence of Archean sediments.
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vols. 36 and 45.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 161
STRUCTURE.
Most of the Archean rocks show some cleavage, and perhaps about half have enough cleavage
to warrant calling them scliists. In general the plane of cleavage is nearly vertical and strikes
parallel to the range, about N. 60° E. The hornblendic schists north of Mountain Iron have
a cleavage of a linear parallel type, and the lines of the cleavage dip steeply to t-he northeast.
In addition to cleavage, there are many joints and faults ^\^th displacements of a few inches or
feet, but no regular systems have been determined.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER-MIDDLE HURONIAN.
DISTBIBUTION.
Sedimentary rocks of lower-middle Huronian age appear in two considerable areas in the
Mesabi district. One vnth an average width of perhaps a mile extends, from Eveleth northeast
to Biwabik ; the other, somewhat less than a mile in width, extends from near the Duluth and
Iron Range Railroad northeast to near the center of sec. 11, T. 59 N., R. 14 W. In the former
belt there are areas of green schist forming the cores of the hills. One of them has been mapped,
but others, though their presence is known by isolated exposures, are not sufRcientl}^ exposed
to warrant their separation on the map. A number of small patches of lower-middle Huronian
sediments are known also in other parts of the district.
Granite of lower-middle Huronian age forms most of the core of the Giants Range and,
except north of Mountain Iron, where it is interrupted for a short distance by Archean horn-
blendic schists, is exposed continuously along the crest to where it is succeeded on the east by
the younger Embarrass granite in R. 14 W. This lower-middle Huronian granite, known as
the Giants Range granite, thus bounds on the north the other formations for most of the district.
Detailed work has not gone farther north than the granite boundary.
GRATWACKES AND SLATES.
•
The interbedded graywackes and slates form the greater part of the lower-middle Huronian
sediments. They are dull dark-gray and dark-green rocks which usually weather to a somewhat
lighter green or gray or to a dirty hght yellow. The grain is usually fine, although it varies
considerably. The bedding, shown by both color and texture, is conspicuous. Parallel to
the bedding a secondary cleavage has been developed. As a result of variation in texture,
bedding, and secondary cleavage, there appear all gradations between metamorphosed coarse
graywackes, banded graywackes, and finely fissile slates. Along the parting plane of some of
the graywackes and slates may be seen glistening plates of mica or chlorite, conspicuous because
of the fact that they appear in separate spangles on the dark background rather than in con-
tinuous layers, although, indeed, some of the more fissile slates show mica and chlorite in the
continuous layers characteristic of slates.
The graywackes and slates above described have resulted from the alteration of fine mud
and feldspathic sand deposits. Some of the mica, especially that in separate clear-cut plates,
may have been originall}' deposited in its present position, but most of it, and especiallj^ that
in continuous sheets on the parting surfaces, is undoubtedly a secondary development due to
dynamic movement in the rock.
The intrusion of granite below described has further greatly metamorphosed the graywackes
and slates. In approacliing the granite they become more chloritic, hornblendic, and micaceous,
and a marked and usually much contorted schistosity obhterates the bedding. Under the
microscope may be seen abundant development of secondary chlorite and hornblende and a
47517°— VOL 52—11 11
162 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTPERIOR REGION.
lesser development of secondary biotite and muscovite. Accessories inclmlo tourmaline, stauro-
lite, <rarnet, rutiio, ilmeiiitc, magnetite, and apatite. The alteration of tlie ilmenite and rutile
to sphene (titanoniorphic) is well exhibited.
CONGLOMERATES.
The conglomerates are abundantly and typically exposed in a belt nmning from the cut
along the Duluth and Iron Range Railroad, in sec. 22, T. 58 N., R. 17 W., southwest through
sees. 22 and 21 into sees. 20 and 29, T. 58 N., R. 17 W. Similar conglomerates are known in
small patches bordermg the greenstones north of the Genoa mine at Sparta.
The conglomerates are massive rocks for the most part, with various shades of green on
fresh surface and a lighter green on the weathered surface. The pebbles vary in diameter from
6 inches to a small fraction of an inch. In kind they are, for the most part, identical, both macro-
scopically and microscopically, with the rocks of the Archean above described, including diabases,
basalts, and granite porphyries. The more basic pebbles are in greater quantity than the acid
ones.
The conglomerates, in common with the rest of the lower-middle Iluronian rocks, have
sufl'ered metamorphism, but the extent of the alteration varies greatly from place to place.
East of Mariska, in the railway cut referred to, the rocks show only recrystallization of the
mineral particles, without marked development of schistosity. The alteration of the minerals
is the same as that described above for the various rocks of the Archean. To the southwest of
this cut the conglomerates have been much srjueezed and are now very schistose. The recrys-
tallization accompanymg the squeezmg has made the rocks very chloritic and micaceous,
and, m many places at least, has completely obliterated the clastic texture in the finer-grained
portions. The pebbles have been elongated in the plane of schistosity (vertical and striking
N. 60° E.), and on the weathered surface stand out in lenticular and oval forms from the finer,
more schistose, and more easily eroded matrix. Rocks of this character may be traced into
schistose rocks in which, in pebbles and matrix alike, nearly every vestige of sedimentary texture
has been lost.
GIANTS RANGE GRANITE.
At Birch Lake the lower-middle Iluronian granites are coarse gray and pink hornblende
granites. From the east line of R. 14 W. to the neighborhood of Mountain Iron the granites are
similar to those on Birch Lake. It is noticeable that the coarser phases appear in the eastern
end of this area. The hornblende varies m abundance, but is usualh' conspicuous. Rarely,
as near the Mailman camps, the dark constituent is augite instead of hornblende, or, again, it
may be partlj^ biotite. In places the rock becomes very slightly gneissic, and immediately next
to its contact with the lower-middle Hui'onian sediments it becomes very fine grained. Xext
to the contact of the granite with the Keweenawan Duluth gabbro on Birch Lake is a meta-
morphic rock resembling granite, wliich is described in connection with the gabbro.
From the neighborhood of Mountain Iron westward to the west end of the district the pre-
ponderating granite is somewhat finer grained than the granite to the east, possibly somewhat
more gneissic, and usuallj^ of a pink color. Certain phases of this finer granite are similar to the
hornblende granite to the east, but by far the larger poi'tion shows a considerabl}^ greater con-
tent of (piartz and a smaller content of the basic minerals.
Associated with these two prevailing types are dikes of exceedingly fine-grained pink granite
showing very little biotite. They may be well observed in the cuts along the main lino of the
Duluth and Iron Range Railroad. Other dikes are pegmatitic granite consisting of a pink feld-
spar with very abundant quartz, and with the ferromagnesian minerals almost totally lacking.
They may be seen to advantage at the upper falls of Prairie River.
RELATIONS OF GIANTS RANGE GRANITE TO THE LOWER-MIDDLE HURONIAN SEDIMENTS AND OF BOTH TO
OTHER ROCKS.
The Giants Range granite is throughout intrusive into the lower miildle Iluronian sedi-
ments. Actual intrusive contacts are to be observed in a number of jiJaces. The lower-middle
Iluronian sedimentary rocks show the metamorphic eli'ects of the hitrusion, and near the con-
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 163
tactg no conglomerates are to be observed. The contact of the granite and the sediments is
well exposed northwest of Mesaba station.
Though the evidence is conclusive that the great mass of the granite is intrusive into the
lower-middle Iluronian sedunents and not into the upper Iluronian (Animikie group), it is likely
that in minor areas the granites here mapped and described as lower-middle Huronian may con-
tain granite of later date, which is known to be present in the district.
The conglomerate forming the great part of lower-middle Huronian sediments affords
conclusive proof that the lower-middle Iluronian sedunents rest unconformably upon the'Archean
rocks. Every kmd of pebble found in this conglomerate, with the possible exception of a few
cherty slate pebbles, can be matched among the Archean rocks.
Both the lower-middle Iluronian sediments and the Giants Range granite are unconformably
underneath the upper Huronian (Animikie group), as shown both by structure and by con-
glomerates at the base of the upper Huronian sediments. This unconformity is described in
connection with the upper Huronian.
STRUCTURE AND THICKNESS.
The lower-middle Huronian beds now stand on edge, the dip seldom varjdng more than
5° or 10° from vertical. Superposed upon the original bedding structure is an excellent secondary
cleavage. The cleavage planes, for the most part, are approximately parallel to the bedding
planes. The strike of both bedding and cleavage is imiform, about N. 60° E., though locally
var3dng 10° to 20° from this direction.
Both the lower-middle Huronian sediments and the Giants Range granite are jointed, the
sediments particularly so. The sediments, moreover, show conspicuous faulting and brecciation.
The breccias at some places might be mistaken for conglomerate. A thickness of 3,000 to 5,000
feet is probably as great as can safely be assigned to the lower-middle Iluronian sediments of the
Mesabi district.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
It is suggested in Chapter XX (pp. 603 et seq.) that the lower-middle Iluronian deposits
of the north shore may be in part subaerial continental deposits.
UPPER HUBONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
GENERAL CHARACTER AND EXTENT.
The sedimentary rocks of upper Huronian age occujiy practically all the southern slopes
of the range from one end of the district to the other and extend also an unknown tlistance
south beneath the glacial drift. The surface width of the Animikie group in the area included
in the district described varies from less than 1 mUe to 5 miles or more. Tlie beds have a
flat dip to the south. Their upper edges being truncated, they appear in belts \vinding along
parallel to the range, the northerly belts representing the lower beds and the southerly belts
the higher beds of the series.
The exposures of the upper Iluronian, particidarly on the lower slopes, are so widely
separated that the mapping of the rocks woidd have been an impossibility had it not been
for numerous drill holes and pits sunk in search for ore, which were bottomed in the upper
Huronian. These are particularly numerous along the central portion of the range and have
enabletl the distribution of the upper Huronian rocks to be mdicated within rather close
limits for this part of the range.
The upper Huronian comprises from the base up (1) the Pokegama quartzite, consist-
ing mamly of quartzite but contaming also conglomerate at its base; (2) the Biwabik forma-
tion, consisting of ferruginous cherts, iron ores, slates, greenalite rocks, and carbonate rocks,
with a small amount of coarse detrital material at its base; and (3) the Virginia slate. Between
the Pokegama quartzite and the Biwabik formation there is a slight break indicated by
conglomerate. The Biwabik formation grades conformably into the Virginia slate both ver-
tically and laterally.
164 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
POKEGAMA QTJARTZITE.
The Pokegama quartzitc is the basal formation of (lie upper Huronian (Animikie group).
Because of the southcrl_y dip and truncation of the rocks, (lie cjuartzite appears as a beU imme-
diately south of and contiguous to tlie lower-middle lluronian antl Archean formations. The
belt, varying from a few steps to half a mUe or more in width, extends from the west end
of the Mesabi district continuously to a point north of Mountain Iron. From here on to the
east end of the range data are insullicient for mapping the quartzitc as a continuous belt,
and it is accordingly mapped as a number of discontinuous areas of varying width and length.
It is likely that future exploration, as in the past, will result in extending and connecting
some of these areas, but it is also certain that some of them are really cut off from one another
because of the overlapping of the iron-bearing formation.
The Pokegama consists of vitreous quartzites of various colors and textures, with some
micaceous quartz slates and conglomerates.
The thickness of the Pokegama quartzitc ranges up to 200 feet.
BIWABIK FORMATION.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Biwabik formation extends along the slopes of the range for its entire length, from
T. 142 N., R. 25 W., west of Grand Rapids, to Birch Lake, a distance of nearly 110 miles.
The width of exposure averages perhaps 1^ miles, but is in places as great as 3 miles and in
others as little as a quarter of a mUe. The total area is approximately 135 square miles.
The boimding formation on the north is for the most part the Pokegama quartzitc, but where
this is lacking the Biwabik formation comes into contact with the lower-middle Huronian
and Archean rocks. To the south the iron-bearing formation is bounded by the Virginia
slate, except in range 12 and a part of range 13, at the east end of the range, where the Kewee-
nawan Duluth gabbro laps up over the formation. On the east the iron-bearing formation
is cut off by the overlapping Duluth gabbro; on the west it gradually tliins out, the overlying
slate and underlj'uig quartzitc coming together.
On account of the covermg of glacial drift, exposures of the iron-bearing formation, except
in the eastern end of the district, are few. But the formation has been reached and pierced
in thousands of places by drUls and mining excavations, and it is therefore possible, particu-
larly along the part of the range at present productive, to delimit it with a fair degree of
accuracy.
Much attention has been paid in recent j-ears to following up the westward extension of
the iron-bearing formation, which, in the vicinity of Grand Rapids and westward, becomes
deeply buried under glacial drift. By drilling a large number of holes it has been possible
to follow the formation into T. 142 N., R. 25 W., where it becomes thin and appariently dis-
appears, the slate and quartzitc coming together. These results have not seemed to warrant
continuation of drilling in this direction, but until suflicient drilhng has been done to demon-
strate clearly what the structure and distribution are there it can not be said that the pos-
sibilities at this end of the district have been exliausted. Folding or faulting or changes in
sedunentation might easily cause variations wliich would make it difllcult to follow the forma-
tion. Twelve miles to the northwest of the westernmost Biwabik formation (iron-bearing)
of the Mesabi district there begins a magnetic belt which extends from T. 144 N., R. 26 W.,
through Leech Lake to T. 142 N., R. 35 W., a distance of about 50 miles. This belt has not
been proved. The few holes that have been put down seem to indicate that the formation
is of Vermilion type, but the continuity and the breadth and length of the belt arc exceptional
for Vermilion iron-bearing rocks. It has been thought possible that this belt might rep-
resent an extension of the Mesabi district thrown to the north by a fold or a fault. Wli!i(-
•ever it is, its trend indicates that the same general lineaments of structure of the Vermilion
and Mesabi districts are following out here to the west, and even if the belt ultimately proves
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 165
to be Vermilion it would then serve to limit the distribution of the Animikie (including the
Biwabik iron-bearing formation) on the north, and thus serve as a guide to further exploration.
The iron-bearmg formation in general occupies the middle slopes of the Giants Range,
and its north and south boundaries have fairly uniform altitudes for considerable distances.
By an examination of the map, however, it may be seen that the elevation of the formation
increases from the west end of the district to the east, the total dill'ercnce amounting to as much
as 500 feet. This corresponds with the increased elevation of the range as a whole in this direc-
tion, although the higher elevation of the southern limit of the formation at the east end of the
range is in part due to the fact that the lower parts of the formation are overlapped by gabbro.
It may be further seen that the elevations of the north and south boundaries show local fluctu-
ations as great as 200 feet, due to the folding of the formation and to differences in depth of
erosion.
KINDS OF ROCKS.
The great bulk of the Biwabik formation is ferruginous cliert more or less am])hiholitic,
calcareous, or sideritic and gray, red, yellow, brown, or green, with bands and shots of iron ore.
It is analogous to the jaspers of the other iron ranges, but differs in certain particulars, as is
shown on pages 461-462.
Associated with the chert, mainly in the middle zone, are the iron ores. Their surface
area is only about 5 per cent of the total area of the iron-bearing formation, and the proportion
of their bulk to that of the iron-bearing formation is much less. Near the bottom of the Biwabik
formation is a small amount of conglomerate and quartzite — that is, coarsely clastic sediments.
A minute conglomeratic layer has also been observed in the Mahoning mine, in about a central
horizon of the formation.^ In thin layers and zones throughout the iron-bearing formation,
and particularly in its upper horizons, are layers of slate and of paint rock, the paint rock usually
resulting from the alteration of the slate. Between the slate and the paint rock and the ferru-
ginous chert are numerous gradational varieties, most of which come under the head of ferru-
ginous slate. Associated with the slaty layers in the iron-bearmg formation or closely adjacent
to the overlying Virginia slate are green rocks made up of small green granules of ferrous silicate
which are li.ere called greenalite, in a fine-grained cherty matrix. It will be shown later that
these are the original rocks from which most of the other phases of the iron formation, mcluding
the ores, have resulted by alteration. Finally, certain calcareous and sideritic rocks are present
in small quantity, particularly^ near the upper horizons, associated with the greenalite rocks.
The rocks of the iron-bearing formation are described below, beginning with the original type —
the greenalite rock.
The origin of the ores and iron-bearing rocks is discussed in Chapter XVII (pp. 499 et seq.).
GREEN.\LITE ROCKS.
In moderate quantity, just below the Virginia slate or associated with some slate layer
in the iron-bearing formation, are didl dark-green rocks of rather uniform fine grain and con-
choidal fracture. Layers of slate, iron ore, and other phases of the iron-bearing foi'mation
usually mark their bedding. On close examination, particularly when the surface is wet,
there may be observed numerous ellipsoidal granules of a green substance of a very slightly
lighter green than the matrix in which they lie. They are so small and of a color so nearly like
that of the matrix that they are likely to be overlooked unless especially selrched for. An
occasional one is of much greater size than the average and looks like a conglomerate pebble
in the rock.
Under the microscope the gramdes are conspicuous. Their cross sections are roinid,
oval (in some cases with much elongation), crescent-shaped, lens-shaped, gourd-shaped, or
even sharply angular. Here and there a curved "tail" seems to connect one granule with
its neighbor. Wliere in contact with a layer of iron carbonate or calcium carbonate, as many
of them are, the granules are more irregular in shape and project into or are included in the
carbonate layers as irregular filaments and fragments. The carbonate is largely secondary
166 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
and clearly replaces the fjraniiles, but some of it is |)erhaps orii^inal, and in this case the variation
in shape of the granules where associated with the carbonate layers has a bearing on the origin
of the ores, which is discussed elsewhere (p. 187). One hundred and twenty measurements of
the granules show an average greater diameter of 0.4.5 millimeter and an average least diameter
of 0.21 millimeter, with average ratio of greatest to least of 100 to 47. The diameters rarely
reach 1 miUimeter and few are below 0.1 millimeter. Occasionally certain of the granules may
be seen to be aggregated into larger granules with well-rounded outlines, making the conglom-
erate-like fragments above mentioncnl. The greater diameters of the granules, for the most
part, are parallel to the bedding, and in fact this arrangement largely determines the bedding.
In ordinary light the granules are green, greenish yellow, brown, or black. The green and
yellow ones are transparent and the brown and black are nearly or quite opaque. Under
crossed nicols the granules are either entirely dark or show a very faint lightening, hardly
sufficient to disclose a color. Here and there incipient alterations to chert, griinerite, ciunmiiig-
tonite, or actinolite, scarcely discernible in ordinary light, give low polarization colors in minute
spots and make the term "aggregate polarization" applicable. In reflected light the transpar-
ent green and yellow granules appear black, dark green, or dark yellow, while the opaque brown
and black granules exliibit a rough light-green surface. Were it not for the light-green surface
in reflected light, certain of the opaque dark-brown granules would be mistaken for iron oxide
in ordinary and polarized light.
The matrix of the rocks containing the unaltered green granules varies widely in amount,
from a mere interstitial filling to an abundant mass in which granules are widely separated.
The matrix may be almost pure chert; it may be nonaluminous, monoclinic amphibole, actinolite,
griinerite, or cummingtonite ; it may be largel}" iron or calcium carbonate, although where the
carbonate is abundant the granules are usually sparse and irregular; it maj' consist of any
combination of chert, amphibole, and carbonate with a small amount of accessor}- iron oxide.
Origmally the matrix may have had a somewhat different character. In the rocks con-
taining the least altered granules the matrix is predominantly chert and subordinately light-
colored amphiboles and carbonate. As the rocks become altered they contain more iron oxide
and dark amphiboles, wliich will be shown on a subsequent page to develop from the alteration
of the granules. The lighter amphiboles are themselves known to be a secondary development
from chert and carbonate rocks. It seems likely, therefore, that the original matrix of the
green granules was largely chert and in small part carbonate. In the freshest rocks now found
the chert is much recrystallized and the original carbonate is largely leached out or replaced
by actinolite.
The specific gravity of the unaltered granules can not be satisfactorily determined because
of the practical impossibility of separating the granules from the matrLx. Determinations of
the specific gravity of the rock as a whole give results ranging from 2.7 to 3. As the matrix
is largely quartz in the form of chert, which is known to have a specific gravity in the neighbor-
hood of 2.65, the figures above given for the unaltered rock are too low for the granules them-
selves, although their incipient alterations to iron oxide and amphiboles tend to raise the specific
gravity. So far as the matri.x is colorless amphibole it is apparent that the specific gravity
of the green granules is lower than the figures obtained for the rock, for the specific gravity of
the colorless amphiboles is above 3. One exceptionally fresh specimen in wliich the granules
lie in a matri.x (^ chert gave a result of 2.7. The matrLx in this case makes up something more
than half of the rock mass, and it therefore seems probable that the true specific gravity of the
granules is a little above 2.75.
Four analyses of rocks containing the least altered granules observed have been made
by George Steiger, of the United States Geological Survey. He found that by treatment
with hot concentrated hydrochloric acid most of the granules and their associated alteration
products dissolved out, lea\-ing a residue of almost clear silica, which probably mainly repre-
sents the matrix.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
Analyses of greenalite rocks.
167
1.
2.
3.
4.
Soluble.
Insoluble.
Soluble.
Insoluble.
Soluble.
Insoluble.
SiO"
13.45
.37
15.00
10.28
2.33
.28
None.
None.
2.60
4.17
None.
2.04
None.
48.45
.04
O19.30
.01
1.3. ,83
17.57
3.22
None.
None.
None.
2.38
5.74
None.
None.
None.
36.50
.70
33.11
..56
6.44
30.93
5.35
None.
None.
None.
1.34
6.13
None.
None.
None.
13.01
2.60
150.96
Al-Oa
1.09
5.01
FeO
30.37
jjgO
5.26
CaO
.04
Na"0
K^O
HoO
.75
H'.0+
6.41
TiOo
None.
COt
Pjds
None.
s
Trace.
MuO
None.
BaO
.21
.52
.15
.38
50.42
49.01
49.61
62. 05
.37. 41
37.41
83.86
15.99
15.19
100.10
100.03
100.06
99.85
" Ot which 3.3 was found in the rocli upon treatment with HCl (probably opal).
i> Of which 23.96 is soluble.
1. Specimen 45758. From 250 paces west. 83 paces north, of the west quarter post. sec. 35, T. 59 N., R. 15 W. The finely ground rock was
evaporated on the water bath to dryness with 50 cc. of 1-1 UCl. taken up with water slightly acidified with HCl, and filtered. Soluble sdica was
then determined in this residue by ijoiling with 5 per cent solution of NasCOa. A determination of soluble SiOs was then made in the rock before
treatment with HCl and subtracted from the first soluble SiOs found, which gave the figure for SiO^ in the soluble portion.
2. Specimen 45705. From test pit in Cincinnati mine. The soluble portion was found by evaporating to dryness on the water bath with 50 cc.
of 1-1 HCl, and taking up with water slightly acidified with HCl. The residue was then boiled fifteen minutes with a 5 per cent solution of NaaCOa
to dissolve any soluble silica, this silica determined and placet! with the soluble portion. The residue was ignited and finally heated for fifteen
minutes over the blast lamp, weighed, and then a rough analysis made, which is found in the second column. The small amount of iron shown
in the insoluble portion could easily have been carried down mechanically. A determination of soluble silica was then made in the rock before
treatment with HCl and found to be 3.3 per cent. Subtracting this from the total soluble silica, 10 per cent of soluble silica remains for the part
dissolved in HCl.
3. Specimen 45766. From test pit in Cincinnati mine. The finely ground rock was evaporated on the water bath to dryness with 50 cc. of
1-1 HCl. taken up with water slightly acidified with HCl, and filtered. Soluble sihca was then detennined in this residue by boiling with 5 per
cent solution of Na^COa. A determination of soluble Si02 was then made in the rock before treatment with HCl and subtracted from the first soluble
SiOo found, which gave the figure for SiOa in the soluble portion.
4. Specimen 45180. From 500 paces west, 100 paces north of the southeast comer of sec. 22, T. 59 N., R. 15 W. Owing to presence of organic
matter, tlie determination of ferrous iron is probably high.
From the detailed consideration of these results, which is not I'epeated here, it appears
that the ferric iron occurs in the rock mainly as sesquioxide, for the soluble silica is accounted
for by the ferrous iron and magnesia present, leaving none for the ferric iron; that in tliree
slides of the four of the rocks analyzed the ferric oxide may be observed to be present and to
be probably secondary, and hence that the iron oxide shown by the analyses is mamly sec-
ondary and not to be considered as belonging with the substance of the unaltered granules.
It appears further that the alumina and lime are in such small quantity as to be practically
negligible. It appears still further that there is far more than enough combined water to com-
bine with the ferric iron to form ferric hydrate, and thus that a considerable portion of combined
water shown by the analyses may be taken to belong to the green granules. Finally, it appears
that the substances which can not be accounted for in any other way and which clearly belong
with the green granules are silica, ferrous iron, magnesium oxide in small proportions, and water.
It is therefore concluded that the substance of the green granules is essentially a hydrous
ferrous silicate with a subordinate amount of magnesium, and that if ferric iron is present at
all as an original constituent of the green granules it is in small cjuantity.
This conclusion is essentially in accord with that reached by J. E. Spurr in his report on
the Mesabi district published in 1894."
Having concluded the substance of the green granules to be mainly silica, ferrous iron,
magnesium oxide, and water, we may ascertain whether or not there is any uniformity in the
proportions of these elements. The ratios of the silica, ferrous iron, and magnesium in the four
analyses, calculated on the basis of 100, appear in the table on page 168. The percentage
of water is not included for the obvious reason that, while it is certain that much of it belongs
with the granules, no quantitative estimate can be made of its amount because of the uncer-
tainty as to the portion which belongs with the ferric hydrate.
a Bull. Geol. Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 10.
168
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
1.
2,
3.
i.
Average.
SiOi :
55.1
42.1
2.8
43.7
47.5
8.8
47.7
44.6
7.8
40.2
50.9
8.9
46.8
FeO
46.3
MgO . .
7.1
The relative proportion of the ferrous iron and silica above shown suggests a combina-
tion of the two on the basis of one molecule of each. Theoretically the percentages of the two
in such a combination would be —
Silica '. 45. 62
Ferrous iron 54. 38
The average of the ferrous iron, 46.3, is about 8 per cent less than tne theoretical percent-
age. The magnesium oxide, which has a higher combining power than the iron, more than
makes up for this deficiency.
On a subsequent page is given an analysis of a rock in which the green granules have been
altered to a dark-green and brown amphibole, probably griinerite, apparently through simple
recrystallization and dehydration. The alteration has occurred under deep-seated conditions,
and it is probable that little if any addition or subtraction of material has taken place other
than that involved in dehydration. The composition of the amphibole ought to give a clue
to the composition of the original green substance. It is there found that the principal constit-
uents of the amphibole are silica and ferrous iron in the following proportions:
SiOo.
Fed-
47.5
52.5
The correspondence of these percentages with those above given is evident.
The above results are not sufficiently accordant to show that the substance under dis-
cussion has a definite and uniform composition. On the other hand, the impurities and altera-
tions cause such variations that it can not be said that the green granules do not have definite
chemical composition. If the granules do have a definite composition, the above results indi-
cate the most probable formula to be Fe(Mg)O.Si02.nH20.
Dr. Spurr, after his study of the green granules, concluded to call them "glauconite." In
view of the fiict that potash is by most mineralogists insisted upon as one of the essential con-
stituents of glauconite, the entire absence of potash in the substance under discussion is taken
to preclude the application of the term "glauconite." The substance apparently corresponds to
no known mineral species. As a convenient term by which to refer to it the name "greenalite"
was coined for use in the monograph on the Mesabi district and is used in this report also.
The origin of greenalite and the details of the similarities and differences between greenalite
granules and granules of glauconite, concretions of iron oxide and chert, and other granule
and concretionary structures are discussed in Chapter XVII, on the origin of the iron ores.
FERRUGINOUS, AMPHIBOLITIC, SIDERITIC, AND CALCAREOUS CHERTS.
The following description applies to the normal types of chert occurring through the central
and western portions of the range. The highly metamorphosed chert characteristic of the east
end of the range is given a separate description on a subsequent page.
The cherts are gray, yellow, red, brown, or green rocks, mth irregular bands and shots
and granules of iron oxide varying in quantity from predominance almost to disappearance.
A slight brecciation thoroughly recemented may be occasionally observed, and a pitted surface,
due to the solution of certain of the constituents, is not uncommon. The iron oxide is mainly
intermediate between hematite and limonite, and to a subordinate extent is magnetite, and its
color accordingly ranges from red to yellow or to black. The variety of colors of the chert and
the iron oxide, their irregular association, and their variation in relative abundance give the
cherts most highly varied aspects; yet no phase of the cherts is likely to be mistaken for any
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 169
other rock by anyone reasonably familiar with the iron-bearing rocks of the Lake Superior
region. To the casual observer the massive lighter-colored cherts, containing little iron oxide,
resemble quartzite, and indeed have been frequently so called. However, the splintery frac-
ture of the chert and the absolute lack of rounded clastic grains, aside from the usual content of
iron oxide in layers or spots or minute grains, are unfailing criteria for the discrimination of the
two. The ferruginous cherts difi'er from the jaspers or jaspilites of the old ranges of Lake
Superior ia lacking their even banding and brilliant red color as well as the microscopic features
described below.
When studied under the microscope it appears that all the rocks hero described as chert
are genetically connected. In lookmg over 250 slides but few have been observed which do not
show some evidence of the derivuuon of the rock from the greenalite rocks above described.
The granule shapes are stUI largely preserved," but the alterations have tended in some places
to make the shapes more irregular and partly or wholly to obliterate them. The alteration of
the granules has been almost entirely metasomatic, for thero is little evidence of dynamic move-
ment resulting in the breaking up of the constituents of the rock.
The greenalite has been replaced by cherty quartz, magnetite, hematite, limonite, siderite,
calcite, grunerite, cummingtonite, actinolite, epidote-zoisite, or any combination of them.
The extent and nature of the alteration replacement vary withm wide limits. The granule
may be mainly greenalite, showing incipient crystallization of quartz, griinerite, or actinolite,
visible only under crossed nicols. The granules may be represented almost wholly by hematite,
limonite, magnetite, intermediate varieties, or any combination of them. The oxides may be
arranged irregularly or concentrically. In the iron ores the granules are entirely represented
by iron oxide, although their shapes are in part obliterated. The granules may be represented
almost wholly by chert, which may be distinguished from that of the matrix by its coarser or
finer texture, or, if not by texture, by distribution of pigment. In ordinary light chert granules
may be marked by the pigments which in parallel polarized light are completely obscured by the
crystallization of the chert, or the granules may not be seen in ordinary light and be conspic-
uous under crossed nicols because of the crystallization. Or the crystallization of the chert
may have entirely obliterated the granules for much of the slide, both m ordinary and polarized
light. The granules may be represented entirely by green, yellow, and brown grunerite, cum-
mingtonite, or perhaps actinolite, or aU, which in ordinary light may be scarcely distinguishable
from the unaltered greenalite granules but which become apparent under crossed nicols by
their double refraction. The granules may be represented by calcite or siderite in rhombs or
irregular grains, sometimes showing zonal growth, which for the most part are clearly replace-
ments of the granules. Most commonly the granules are represented by a combination of any
or all of the minerals above named. Of these combinations, that of chert and iron oxide stands
first. The two substances occur in all proportions with a great variety of arrangement. The
two may be irregularly intermingled, or the iron oxide may form a rim about a cherty interior,
or, though not commonly, the chert and iron oxide may be in concentric layers in the manner
of normal concretions, or polygonal areas of fine chert may contain spots of iron oxide in the
center of each as well as a rim of iron about the periphery, suggesting an organic structure.
The alteration and replacement of the greenalite and the conditions favoring the development
of the different minerals are discussed under the origin of the ores (pp. 187 et seq.).
In addition to the derivatives of the greenalite granules, there are present a few concentric
concretions of iron oxide and chert about quartz, which may have been secondarily developed
from some substance other than the greenalite. These are similar to concretions in the iron-
bearing formation of the Penokee-Gogebic district, where they have developed from the alteration
of an iron carbonate. The secondary concretions in the Mesabi district may also be develop-
ments from iron carbonates, which are now associated with unaltered portions of the formation
and probably existed formerly in the portions which are at present altered. The secondary
concretions are different from the greenalite granules in their beautifully developed concentric
1 Spuir (Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 10) has applied to this texture the term "spotted granular."
t>
170 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
structure. Though a few of the granules themselves have a concentric structure resulting from
zonal alteration, this is usually poorly developed and there is ordinarily little difficulty in distin-
guishing it from that of the secondary concretion, though in some places it is possible that some of
the supposed secondary concretions formed from carbonate may be really secondary alterations
of original granules.
Spherulites of epidote, rarely to be observed, though in part replacements of the granules,
are also clearly secondary developments in the matrix.
The matrix of the chert may be a sparse interstitial filling between the granules or it may
form most of the rock mass and contain but few isolated granules. The matri.x is similar to
that of the unaltered greenahte rocks in that it is mainly chert, but it differs in containing far
more actinolite, gri'inerite, cummingtonite, iron oxide, calcite, and siderite, and rarely epidote-
zoisite in spherulitic form. Sometimes also green chloritic substances are abundant, either
irregularly distributed tlirough the matrix or forming a definite rim about the granule. In the
latter case the chlorite is in part in the fibrous form known as delessite and much resembles
uralite. The recrystallization of the rock has in some places made the chert in the matrix
coarser than that of the granules and in other places the reverse. The leaching out of the car-
bonates and greenahte from the matrix has occasionally left cavities which give the pitted char-
acter to the weathered surface of the cherts.
Accompanying the recrystaUization of the chert has been its frequent adoption of radial or
sheaf-hke forms, giving black crosses under crossed nicols. These sheaves, as well as the
sheaves of actinolite, griinerite, and cummingtonite, and rarely epidote, frequently lie with their
butts against the outhnes of the granules and send their points outward until they interlock
with similar projections from adjacent granules. Commonly also one or more of the constitu-
ents of the matrix may be observed to lie partly in the matrix and partly in the granule, thus
helping to obhterate the granule. Indeed, under crossed nicols the granules may not be observed,
while in ordinary light their position may be indicated by the distribution of the fine pigment.
All of the constituents in the matrix are secondary except, perhaps, a part of the chert,
and even this has been thoroughly recrystaUized. The amphiboles and iron oxide may be
observed to have developed by the alteration of the granules and some of the lighter amphiboles
by the alteration of carbonate and chert in the matrix. The carbonate is largely though not
entirely replacement from without, for it may be observed replacing nearly all the other con-
stituents of the rock and occurring in minute veins crossing the rock.
The composition and origin of the ferruginous cherts are discussed on pages 186-187.
SILICEOUS, FERRUGINOUS, AND AMPHIBOLITIC SLATES.
Under this head are grouped a variety of slaty rocks which are interstratified with the
other phases of the iron-bearing formation. They include dense black, dark-gray, green, or
reddish rocks with a tendency toward conchoidal fracture and the slaty parting poorly devel-
oped, if at all; rocks showing banding of dark-green, black, gi-ay, red, or brown layers parallel
to the bedding and a well-developed cleavage parallel to the same structure; gradational
varieties between these two, between them and the ferruginous cherts, and between them and
the iron ores. Any of them may be hard or soft, carbonaceous or noncarbonaceous, fine grained
or medium grained.
Under the microscope the slates are seen to contain principally cherty quartz, iron oxide,
either hematite or magnetite, usually in octahedra, or some hydrated oxide, monoclinic amphi-
bole which may be griinerite, cummingtonite, or actinolite, ami possibly even common horn-
blende, a small amount of carbonate of calcium or iron, a little zoisite, and possibly also a
httle chlorite. From the optical properties and from the analysis of the rock it is thought that
the ampliibole is mainly griinerite and cummingtonite. There is much variation in the relative
proportion of the principal constituents. Some of the slates consist almost entirely of fine
cherty quartz, with subordinate quantities of dark amphibolo in radial aggregates or in irregular
masses, and of the iron oxides. Others are composed mainly of in)n oxide, showing but small
quantities of the quartz and dark amphibole. Others are composed of a tangled mass of yel-
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 171
lowish, brownish, and greenish amphibole fibers containing minute particles of iron oxide, siUca,
and other subordinate constituents. The griinerite is far more abundant than the actinoUte.
The banding shown in many specimens is due to the segregation of the above-named elements
into layers. ^AHiile it may be convenient in description to refer to tliis or that slaty rock as a
ferruginous slate, a siliceous slate, an amphibolitic slate, or an actinolite slate, depending upon
the relative abundance of the constituents, usually all tliree constituents are present in one rock,
and the rocks are really amphibolitic, siliceous, and ferruginous slates. Perhaps the most char-
acteristic feature of the slates as a group is the abundance of the dark amphibole.
PAINT ROCK.
Tlu-oughout the iron-bearing formation, and particularly adjacent to the ore deposits, are
thin seams of paint rock, wliich have resulted from the alteration of the slates above described.
The paint rocks are essentially soft red or yellow or white clay. They retain the original bedding
of the rocks from wliich they were derived, the structure being marked by alternation of bands
of dift'erent color. In place the paint rocks are moist and soft. When taken out and dried they
become harder but retain a soft,- greasy feel.
The alteration of the paint rocks from slates is proved by the numerous intermediate phases
to be observed. For analyses of paint rock see page 191.
SIDEEITIC AND CALCAREOUS ROCKS.
Associated with the slaty layers in the iron-bearing formation, and particularly with the
greenalite rocks, are carbonates of iron and calcium in small quantity. Most of the carbonate
reacts readily with cold dilute hydrochloric acid and is certainly limestone, which, from the
analysis of rocks containing it, is doubtless magnesian. Some of the carbonate, however, is
certainly siderite, as shown by analysis. The carbonates occur in minute clear-cut layers
interbedded M-ith the other rocks of the iron-bearing formation, in veins cutting across the
bedding, and in irregular aggregates and well-defined rhombohedral crystals in the layers of the
iron formation. In the carbonate bands are small quantities of iron oxide, ferrous silicate, and
chert, and in the bands of these minerals are small quantities of the carbonate. In some places
the carbonates are coarsely crystalhne and fresh and clearly have resulted from the replacement
of the other constituents in the rock, particularly the ferrous silicate, or fi-om infiltration along
cracks and crevices. In other places, especially where in distinct layers interbedded with
unaltered ferrous sihcate phases of the formation, the carbonate layers seem certainly to be
original. At the top of the iron-bearing formation and closely associated with the basal horizons
of the Virginia slate are several feet of clear calcium carbonate, which is described in connection
with the Virginia slate.
CONGLOMERATES AND QUARTZITES.
At the base of the iron-bearing formation is a thin layer of fairly coarse fragmental material
consisting in places of conglomerate alone and in other places of conglomerate and quartzite.
THICKNESS.
The average thickness of the iron-bearing Biwabik formation is about 800 feet. This
figure is based on average dips of the formation, width of outcrop, and drUl records. Local
averages are likely to be either larger or smaller. In both the east and west ends of the district
the thickness diminishes somewhat, the iron-bearing formation apparently giving way along the
strike to slate.
ALTERATION BY THE INTRUSION OF KEWEENAWAN (iRANITE AND GABBRO.
Through ranges 12 and 13, near Birch Lake, the Biwabik formation is intruded on the north
by granite and on the south by the Duluth gabl^ro and has undergone considerable meta-
morphism in consequence. This metamorphism has extended even farther west, for, though
the gabbro does not come into actual contact with the iron-bearing formation through range
172 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
14, it abuts against the overlying Virginia slate and has metamoq^hosed both the slate and the
iron-bearing formation in this area."
In general through the western and central portions of the Mesabi district the iron oxide
of the iron-bearing formation is mainly hydrated hematite, and magnetite is in subordinate
quantity. Eastward from Mesaba station the iron oxide is mainly magnetite, and hematite
is in subordinate quantity. Westward from Mountain Iron the amijliiboles are almost entirely
lacking; from Mountain Iron eastward to Mesaba station the amphiboles are present in the
iron-bearing formation but are not a])un(lant until Mesaba station is approached ; eastward from
Mesaba station they become abundant and make up an important constituent of the formation.
In the eastern portion of the range the chert is correspondingly less abundant than in the west-
ern and central portions of the district, and in some places is almost entirely absent. The chert
becomes also distinctly coarser in this area. In range 12 the grains commonly reach a diameter
of 3 or 4 miUmieters, and there are a few smaller particles, and in the central and western por-
tions of the district they are seldom greater than 0.1 millimeter and almost invariably are asso-
ciated with smaller particles. Toward the east there is a tendency for the texture to become
more even, although there are many wide variations from uniformity. The chert grains, instead
of being in irregular, roundish, and scalloped cherty forms, as in the central and western por-
tions of the district, are in rouglily polygonal shapes and united in a fairly uniform mosaic.
Accompanying these changes is a more pronounced segregation of the magnetite and the ampliib-
olitic chert into irregular laj-ers and lenses, with the result that the iron-oxide layers, instead
of contairdng various other minerals, are comparatively free from them. The characteristic
granules of the ferruginous cherts are still conspicuous in the east end of the district, but in the
most highly metamorphosed phases of the rocks, as in range 12, they have entirely disappeared,
being obscured by magnetite, amphibole, and chert. In the phases not showing the maximum
alteration they are marked by magnetite, either as a rim about the granule, as a solid mass
filling it, or in evenly disseminated particles through it. Not unconunionly the granules may
be observed only in ordmary light and then by distribution of the magnetitic particles; in parallel
polarized light they are obscured by the polarization of the amphibolitic and cherty constituents.
Finally, in the eastern portion of the district certain minerals have developed which have not
been found in the less altered rocks of the central and western portions of the Mesabi district.
In the latter areas the amphiboles are entirely grunerite and actinohte, with little or no horn-
blende. In the eastern portion of the district the amphiboles include grunerite and actinolite,
and in addition green and brown hornblende in considerable quantity. Associated with these
minerals are small quantities of biotite, glaucophane, andalusite, zoisite, and garnet. Though
hypersthene, augite, and olivine are abundant and characteristic in the true gabbro of range 12
and westward, these minerals are nearly if not quite lacking in the Biwabik formation.
Although to the east toward Gunflint Lake the gabbro alone has been able to produce even
greater metamorphic effects on the iron-bearing rocks, it is probable that the metamorphism of
the iron-bearing rocks in the region untler description has been produced jointly bj' Kewee-
nawan gabbro and granite.
VIRGINIA SLATE.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Virginia slate bounds the iron-bearing Biwabik formation on the south from the west end
of the district nearly to the east side of sees. 5 and 8, T. 59 N., R. 13 W., where the slate is overlapped
by the gabbro. Still farther east, in the SW. i sec. 25, T. 60 N., R. 13 W., drilling has shown
altered slate to lie between Keweenawan Duluth gabbro on the south and Kewecnawan diabase
on the north, but whether it is an isolated mass at this point in the Keweenawan area or is
continuous with the slate to the west explorations or exposures do not yet tell. The slate
underlies the lower slopes of the Giants Range and continues south under the low-lying swampy
a The metamorphism of the Biwabik formation by the Duluth gabbro in the area adjacent to Birch Lalte and to the east in the ^•ieinit5• of
.\lceley and Ciinllint lakes has been described in detail by U. S. Grant, W. S. Bayley, and Carl Zaplle and has been briefly considered or mentioned
by N. U. Winchell. 11. V. Winchell. A. U. Elftmann. J. E. Spurr. J. Morgan Clements. C. R. Van Hise.and others. The reader is referred to Chap-
ter Vin, on the Cunllint district (pp. 198-204), for a fuller account of the alterations near the gabbro.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
173
area south of the Giants Range for an unknown distance. The area overlain by slate is so
thickly covered with drift that exposures of the slate are almost entirely lacking; its presence
and distribution have been determined by drilling and test pitting in the search for iron.
Tlirough the central portion of the district enough of such work has been done to show the posi-
tion of the slate boundary with a fair degree of accuracy, although even here there are con-
siderable stretches where records of the occurrence of slate are wanting. In the western and
eastern portions of the district the distribution of the slate is" less well known, particularly
in the western end of the district. In drawing the slate line on the map of this portion of
the area all that can be done is to connect the separated explorations which reveal slate.
Wherever exploration has been detailed it is found that the slate boundary is not straight but
in gentle curves, and it is reasonable to expect, therefore, that future work will show numerous
additional undulations in the slate boundary for the area at present not completely explored.
The normal Virginia slate is usually a gray rock, though in part black, reddish, or brown,
with bedding shown by alternating bands of varying color and texture. Some of the beds are
almost coarse enough to be called graywackes. Indeed, in the field the rock has been called a
banded slate and graywacke. Some of the slate is hard and siliceous; other phases, especially
the nonsiliceous and carbonaceous ones, are soft, and can be wliittled with a knife. Near the
contact of tlie slate with the iron deposit in the underlying iron-bearing formation, as at Biwabik
and in sec. 3, T. 58 N., R. 15 W., the slate becomes iron stained and soft and grades into paint
rock. The slate in general has a very poor parting parallel to beddmg planes, and there is little
or no development of secondary cleavage. Wliat there is of secondary cleavage has been
developed parallel to the bedding planes and is marked by minute particles of mica there found.
The rock in general aspect and mineralogical and chemical composition looks like slate, but it
differs from true slate in lacking a true cleavage, and as this is one of the essential characteristics
of slate it ma}' be doubted whether the term "slate" ought to be applied to the rock. Yet the
rock is not a shale, for it is too much metamorphosed and lias too poor a partuag parallel to the
bedding. In the Cuyuna district the same formation shows the charactci-istics of a true slate,
and the formation both there and in the Mesabi district proper has been known locally and
in geologic literature as slate. Hence the term is here retained.
Analyses of Virginia slate.
1.
2.
SiOs
62.26
10. S9
1.76
4.55
2.95
.42
2.29
3.02
.70
3.8S
.60
None.
.20
56 Gl
AlsOs.
17.76
3.29
5.15
Fe-Oa
FeO
MgO
CaO . •
1.00
NajO
K2O
4 04
HjO-
H2O +
4 18
TiOj
COj
PjOs
Organic undetemiincd
C and c
99.52
99.56
1. Analysis by Oeorge Steiger. of the United States Geological Survey, of a composite sample of the Virginia slate made up bv assembling several
specimens from two localities (specimen 45767 from excavation for water tank of Eastern Railway of Minnesota, at Virginia; specimen 45463 from
a point south of the Biwabik mine).
2. Analysis of Virginia slate by R. D. Hall, University of Wisconsin, of a sample representing 900 feet of drill core from a drill hole at the south-
east comer of sec. S, T. 58, E. 15.
CORDIERITE HORNSTONE RESULTING FROM THE ALTERATION OF THE VIRGINIA SLATE BY THE DULUTH GABBRO.
In approaching the Duluth gabbro, which overlaps the Virgmia slate in ranges 14 and 13,
the slate becomes more crystalline, harder, and characteristically breaks with a conchoidal
fracture, and the color becomes darker and in many places is a bluish black. The rock, indeed,
174 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTPEKIOR REGION.
becomes a hornstonc'. Moreover, there appear minute light-colored specks which on tlie
weatlicred surface arc likely to have disappeared and to be represented by pits. Under the
microscope the wlute specks are found to be cordierite in typical development, standing as
numerous phenocrysts in a fine-grained matrix of biotite, feldspar, magnetite, and certain
doubtful microlites wliich may be actinolite or sillimanite, or botli.°
RELATIONS TO THE BIWABIK FORMATION.
Reference has already been made to the fact that tlic relations of tlie Virginia slate to the
underlying Biwabik formation are those of gradation, both lateral and vertical. It remains
to discuss tliis gradation somewhat fully. The iron-bearing formation contains slate layers
tlu-oughout. At upper and middle horizons they are perhaps more numerous than at lower
horizons. Just below the solid black Virginia slate there is a zone in which there are many
interlaminations of iron-bearing formation and slate, the layers varying in thickness from several
feet to a fraction of an inch. Tliis zone is of varying and uncertain thickness. In many places
at least the zone of minute interbanding is thin, not more than 15 or 20 feet, but, as already
noted, layers of slate are found well down in the iron-bearing formation and layers of the iron-
bearing formation are found well up in the slate, so that in a broad way the gradation zone m.'iy
be several hundred feet.
Drilling shows much irregularity in the alternation of layers. Slate layers are more abun-
dant in the eastern end of the district, and westward from Grand Rapids the iron-bearing
formation rapidly thins, its place being taken by slate in T. 142 N., R. 25 W. Wliether the
iron-bearing formation extends indefinitely southward under the slate or gives place to slate
in that direction is not known. All di-ill holes put down near the northern margin of the Vir-
ginia slate in the Mesabi district have shown the Biwabik formation below. For reasons cited
on pages 517-518, however, it is regarded as not impossible that farther south the iron-bearing
formation thins and becomes discontinuous, its place being taken by the black slate.
An examination of the map will show the Vii'ginia slate to encroach on the south margin
of the iron-bearing formation to greatly varying distances, with the result that the surface outcrop
of the iron formation ranges in width from 2 miles or more to less than a cjuarter of a mile.
This is due in part to steeper dips at the narrow places than at the wide places in the iron-
bearing formation, erosion having thus uncovered less of the iron formation where the dips were
steep; it is due in part to faulting, as at Biwabik and eastward; it is due in part to the greater
dip of the present plane of surface erosion, either atmospheric or glacial, in places where the
formation is wide than where narrow, the greater dip of the surface bringing it more nearly
parallel with the dip of the iron-bearing formation, and thus uncovering more of it; but so far
as present evidence goes these factors are not adequate to account for the observed variations
in width of the iron formation. The known irregular alternation of iron-bearing formation and
slate both across and along the beds is therefore regarded as a cause of the varying widths
of the iron-bearing formation.
STRICTURE.
Opportunities for studying the structure of the Virginia slate in place are so few that if
the obsei-ver were dependent upon such obsei-vations alone he would be unable to make any
statements concerning the structure of the formation beyond the fact that it dips at low angles
away from the high land adjacent.
THICKNESS.
The thickness of the Virginia slate can not be determined in the Mesabi district. The
drift covering is thick, mining exploration stops to the south where the slates are encountered,
and the southerly extent of the slate belt is thus unknown.
o Cordierite in this fonnation was first noted and described by N. II. Winchell, Final Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Surrey Minnesota, vol. S, 1900.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 175
STRUCTURE OF THE UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP).
As a whole the upper Huronian (Animikie group) is a well-bedded series of sediments.
The bfedding is most pronounced in the mitldle and upper horizons. The beds have gentle dips,
averaging between 5° and 20°, though locally greater or less, in southerly and southeasterly
tlirections away from the older rocks forming the core of the Giants Range, but locally the dips
show much variation both in degree and direction. About the southerly projecting tongue of
the Giants Range, in the vicinity of Virginia, Eveleth, antl McKinley, the dips are westerly on
the west side of the tongue, southerly at the end of the tongue, and southeasterly on the south-
east side — thatis, throughout approximately normal to its periphery. Even more conspicuous
than the change of dip at such a place are the minor variations between exposures. Seldom is
it possible to get two identical readings in dip at exposures of rock separated by even short
intervals, although the direction and amount of the dip come within the above limits. These
facts indicate that the upper Huronian beds are tilted away from the core of the Giants Range
in directions normal to its trend and that the gently tilted beds are not plane surfaces but are
gently flexed. By tabulation and comparison of the dips it becomes further apparent that the
greater flexures are not random ones but generally have their axes normal to the trend of the
range. On examination of the attitudes of the beds still more in detail it appears that the
great flexures themselves are not simple but have many subordinate flexures, some of them
transverse to the major ones. The complexity of the structure may be likened to that of water
waves. On the great swells and troughs there are smaller waves, on the smaller waves there
are stUl smaller ones, and so on down to the tiniest disturbance of the surface. Though perhaps
the majority of the minor flexures in tlie upper Hui'onian rocks have attitudes similar to the
larger ones, many of them vary greatly in direction. They may be observed at almost any
single exposure of the upper Huronian.
The great flexures are ver\'- gentle, involving very small changes in degree and direction of
dip. Many of the minor flexures superimposed upon the greater ones are sharp and conspicuous.
The local dips may vary as much as 50° witliin a few hundred feet and change their direction
considerably. Dips as liigh as 45° or even 60° may be seen in the layers of the iron-bearing
formation in some of the open pits of the mines, as at the Stevenson, the Sauntry-Alpena, the
Kanawha, and the Sparta. At the Hawkins and Agnew mines the iron-bearing formation
exliibits steep, sharp fokls. The iron-bearing formation shows more minor contoi'tions than
the rest of the upper Huronian rocks, because of the great chemical changes which it has under-
gone, but it is not probable that there is any great dift'erence in the major folding.
The prevailing gentle southern tflt of the upper Huronian and the manner in which it
laps around the salients in the older rocks suggest that the major features of upper Huronian
"Structure may be due partly to initial dip as well as to subsequent folding — in other words,
that the upper Huronian sediments are essentially in the position in which they were deposited
against an old shore and have undergone minor deformation since.
Accompanying the tilting and minor folding of the upper Huronian there has been a very
considerable amount of fracturing, especially in the comparatively brittle Pokegama and
Biwabik formations. Indeed, it seems likely that the folds of the two lower formations of the
upper Huronian are mainly the result of lelatively small displacement along fractures, and only
to a small degree the result of the actual bending of the strata without breaking. The pondmg
of water beneath the Virginia slate would seem to indicate that this formation has been less
fractured than the iron-bearing formation because of its less brittle character, and has thus
yielded to deformation by actual bending rather than by bi'eaking. On almost every exposure
of Pokegama and Biwal^ik formations joints and minute faults are to be obsei'ved cutting almost
perpendicularly across the bedding. In each case the joints seem to make up two or more
systems crossing each other at various angles, but such sets have little constancy of direction in
widely separated exposures, unless we except a set of joints which at a number of places have
an average direction of somewhere between N. 60° and 70° E. — that is, approximately parallel
to the trend of the range. In the massive rocks the joints are clear cut and continuous for
176 GEOLOCn' OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
considerable distances. In the well-bedded rocks — as, for instance, in the thin-bedded portions
of the iron-bearing formation — the joints are usually more irregular, less continuous, and less
conspicuous. In such jjIuccs each individual bed may be more or less jointed witliout reference
to the la^'ers above or below.
The displacement or faulting along joints has been, in general, small. The displacement
is rarel}' 3 or 4 feet, and commonly it is measured by a few uiclies.
There is a displacement of about 200 feet along a nearly vertical fault strike running east-
ward along the north side of the Biwabik mine parallel to the northern margin of the upper
Iluronian past Embarrass Lake. The south side of the fault has droppetl, with the result that
the layers of the u'on-bearing formation are somewhat tilted along the contact and the width
of the outcrop lessened. The eastward extension of tliis fault carries it tlirough the peculiar
point of Pokegama quartzite projecting eastward into the iron-bearing formation cast of Embar-
rass Lake. Though the structure has not been worked out in detail east of Embarrass Lake,
it seems not unlikely that the peculiar features of the distribution of the quartzite and iron-
bearing formation there may be partly explained by faulting, though original configuration of
the shore line in upper Huronian time may have something to do with it. Other great faults
are almost certainly present in the district, but evidence for them has not been correlated.
Certain of the joints and faults have been filled with vein quartz and others have not. It
is rather siu'prising that so little vein quartz is to be observed. In the harder rocks, where the
joints are clear cut and continuous, the quartz veins also appear so. In the well-bedded por-
tions of the iron-bearing formation, where the joints are irregular and discontinuous, the distri-
bution of the vein quartz is also irregular and discontinuous, being rather in a confused zone
than in a well-defined plane.
After the upper Huronian was tilted and folded the upper edges of the beds were eroded
awaj', with the result that the rock surface is now in-egular, ^\^th dips corresponding roughly
in direction but not in degree with those of the underlying rock strata, being in general less
steep.
RELATIONS OF THE tTPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKLE GROUP) TO OTHER SERIES.
The upper Huronian lies unconformably upon the Archean and lower -middle Huronian
rocks. The proof of unconformity is as follows:
1. The conglomerates at the base of the upper Huronian" contain' fragments derived
from the underlying rocks.
2. There is discordance in dip. The underlying formations, where they have any parallel
structure at all, are almost vertical. The upper Huronian is well bedded, with a low dip.
Moreover, in approaching the contact no change of dip is to be observed either in the upper
Huronian or in the underlying rocks.
3. There is a difference in the amount of minor folding, fracturing, secondary cleavage,
and further consequent metamorphism of the two boches, the upper Huronian being much
less affected than the older rocks.
4. The upper Huronian belt overlies Archean and lower-middle Huronian rocks indiscrim-
inately. Near Biwabik, for instance, the northern edge of the upper Huronian lies diagonally
across the contact of the Archean and lower-middle Huronian rocks.
5. The lower-middle Huronian sediments are intruded by the Giants Range granite, which
composes most of the core of the Giants Range. The u])per Huronian is not intruiletl by the
Giants Range granite, and, moreover, in the conglomerate at its base it beare fragments of
this granite. The ui)per Iluronian in ranges 12 and 13 is in eruptive contact with the Kewee-
nawan granite and gabbro.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION OF THE UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP).
The conditions under which the upper Huronian 0\jiunikic group) was de|)osited are dis-
cussed for the Lake Superior region in Chapter XX. It may be noted here that the rocks of this
group are believed to be subaqueous deposits grading upward into delta deposits. The Mesabi
"Listed in Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, pp. 94-9S.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 177
district may represent shore conditions' of deposition as contrasted with the Cuyuna district
farther soutli, wliich may represent offshore conditions. The well-assorted sands at the base of
the group in the Mesabi district seem to show variation in tliickness and area corresponding
to the coiiliguration of the older rock surface. For instance, the point of Pokegama quartzite
extending eastward from Embarrass Lake suggests a sand spit,, though distribution may be
complicated by faulting. The peculiar conditions determining the deposition of the iron-
bearing formation are discussed on pages 499 et seq.
KEWEENAWAN SERIES."
DULUTH CABBRO
A portion of the great mass of Keweenawan gabbro of northern Minnesota comes within
the limits of the Mesabi tlistrict. The northern edge of the mass lies diagonally across the east-
ern end of the district, extending from near the Duluth and Iron Range track, in range 14,
northeastward through ranges 13 and 12 to Birch Lake. Through range 14 the gabbro is in
contact with Virginia slate; in ranges 13 and 12 it is in contact with the Biwabik formation,
and north of Birch Lake it is in contact with lower-middle Huronian granite. The northern
edge of the gabbro forms a conspicuous northward-facing escarpment overlooking the low-
lying area of the Virginia slate and of iron-bearing formation immediately to the north. To
this the name "Mesabi Range" was first applied. In the neighborhood of Birch Lake the
gabbro comes well up on the crest of the Giants Range, and here it does not stand above the
adjacent rocks.
DIABASE.
There are in the Mesabi district certain rocks associated with the Duluth gabbro which
are not covered in the above general account. In range 13 exposures of fine-grained diabase
appear in the SW. i sec. 25, T. 60 N., R. 13 W., and in the central and northern portions of
sec. 35, T. 60 N., R. 13 W. Bowlders of the same material indicate its extension for several
miles east and west, and, taken together with the exposures, indicate a belt with a possible
width of somewhat less than a mile, a length of at least 3 miles and probably much more, and
a trend northeast and southwest — that is, parallel to the general strike of the formation bound-
aries in this part of the district. The diabase is a fine-grained dark-gray rock which under the
microscope shows a weU-developed ophitic arrangement of plagioclase feldspar crystals and the
presence of abundant hornblende and less abundant ilmenite and magnetite. The diabase corre-
sponds Uthologically to the diabase sills intruded in the iron-bearing formation in the neighbor-
hood of Gunflint Lake, and there supposed to be either offshoots of the gabbro or intrusives both
in the gabbro and adjacent rocks. The trend of recent opinion is toward the former conclu-
sion. In the SW. { sec. 25, T. 60 N., R. 13 W., south of the diabase, drill holes have recently
penetrated altered slate (cordierite hornstone). The relations of the slate to the surrounding
rocks are unknown because of lack of exposures and exploration. If the slate is continuous
with that to the west, which had not heretofore been known to extend farther east than sees.
5 and 8 of the same range, the diabase must be a sill intruded in the upper Huronian (Animilde
group). If the slate is not continuous with the main belt of slate to the west, it must be an
isolated mass in the Keweenawan rocks, and the diabase would belong with the main mass of
the Keweenawan. From the analogy of its hthologic character with that of the diabase sills
to the east, from its distribution, and from the occurrence of slate to the south it is thought
that the diabase is probably a siU, but lack of exposures and of sufficient exploration makes
it quite impossible at present to show its boundaries on the map. The area south of the diabase,
including that in wliich the slate has been found, is therefore mapped as Keweenawan.
A httle southeast of the northwest corner of sec. 34, T. 59 N., R. 14 W., E. J. Longyear
found diabase at the depth of 984 feet, in a drill hole which had passed through 16 feet of drift,
392 feet of black slate, and 576 feet of iron-bearing formation. Diabase was penetrated for 309
o For a general account of the Keweenawan series of Minnesota see Chapter XV (pp. 366 et seq.)
47517°— VOL 52—11 12
178 GEOT.OGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
feet before the work was stopped. The iron-bearing formation is IioiiihIciI on the north by
lower-middle Huronian graj^wackes antl slates, upon the eroded edges of which lies the iron-
bearing formation, with perhaps a tliin layer of Pokegama (juartzite between. The fact that
the diabase rather than the Pokegama quartzite or lower-middle Iluronian graywacke and
slate was reached by the drill below the iron-bearing formation would be in accord with the
supposition that the diabase formed a sill intruded into the iron formation at this place.
In the NE. i SE. i sec. 13, T. 57 N., R. 22 W., drilUng has penetrated 20 feet of diabase
with iron-bearing formation both above and below.
EMBARRASS GRANITE.
Through ranges 12 and 13 and as far west as sec. 2, T. 59 N., R. 14 "W., a distance of 15
miles, the granite forming the core of the Giants Range is intrusive into the upper Huronian.
Wliether it was intruded at the close of the upper Huronian epoch or during the succeeiling
Keweenawan is a matter of doubt and indeed is a matter of small consequence. The fact that
granite dikes cut the Keweenawan series in other parts of northern Minnesota makes it a plausible
assumption that the granite was intruded in Keweenawan time, but no relations of the granite
to the Keweenawan have been observed in the Mesabi district. The granite is named the
Embarrass granite from its lithologic similarity to granite exposed at Embarrass station on the
Duluth and Iron Range Railroad, just north of the Giants Range.
The Embarrass granite is a pink hornblende granite. It is usually of coarse grain but
shows much variation. In general the grain becomes finer toward the west. The character-
istic feature of the granite is its large content of quartz in small and large grains, which are verj^
conspicuous, especially on the weathered surface. The quartzes range in diameter from a few
miUimeters to more than a centimeter. The large one>s have a characteristic purplish-blue
color. In its content of quartz the Embarrass granite is readily distinguished from the lower-
middle Huronian granite (Giants Range granite) in the central and western parts of the range,
in which the quartz is exceedingly rare or entirely lacking. Other constituents are pink ortho-
clase feldspar, which sometimes occurs as porphyritic crystals almost an inch long, and a rather
small amount of hornblende. The relative abundance and coarseness of aU the constituents
of the granite of course show the usual variations of a large granitic mass.
Cutting the granite are a few dikes of finer-grained, lighter-colored quartzose granite,
wluch under the microscope is found to differ from the one just described only in lacking
hornblende and the rare elements mentioned.
In the Mohawk mine and elsewhere near Aurora granite forms the foot wall of the ore
bodies, in one place coming within 16 feet of the rock surface. From tliis vertical dikes cut
across the formation. The relations seem to be those of intrusion of granite principally parallel
to the bedding but partly across it. These relations may be correlated with those of the
Embarrass granite at the east end of the range.
CRETACEOUS ROCKS.
'>'■■ ^-' '
Distribution and character. — Recent explorations have showTj Cretaceous conglomerates,
shales, or iron ores as a tliin mantle over most of the western part of the district and in isolated
patches as far east as Embarrass Lake. It is therefore thought inadvisable to attempt to
show Cretaceous deposits on the map. Especially noteworthy is the discovery of small con-
glomeratic Cretaceous ore bodies overlying the contact of the iron-bearing Biwabik formation
and the Virginia slate. From the distribution of the remnants now known it is certain that
Cretaceous rocks once overlay all of the district west of range 16, that they may have extended
farther east, and that erosion has largely removed thein»from the area they did occupy. It is
not unlikely that some of these remnants have been protected because faulted do^Tn in post-
Cretaceous time.
The rocks consist of conglomerate and shale. The conglomerate in the occurrences known
overlies iron-bearing rocks and in some places iron ore. As woukl be expected, therefore, the
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 179
fragments of the conglomerate are (.lerivcd from the iron-bearing formation; in the western
part of the range the conglomerate is locally rich enough to mine. The conglomerate fragments
consist mamly of heavy ferruginous chert and iron ore, both hematite and limonite. Except
locally, and especially where the pebbles are of hard material, they are not well rounded. There
are present in the conglomerate also fossils which are described below. The fragments are but
loosely cemented. When broken out of the ledge the rock is fairly compact, but on being exposed
to weathering it soon disintegrates. The cement is largely ferruginous, but there is present also
a considerable amount of white or yellow substance which A. T. Gordon, chemist of the Mountain
Iron mine, found to consist of silica and alumina and hence to be essentially a clay. Occasion-
ally there may be observed also minute greenish-yellow particles in the cement which may be
glauconite grains, so common in the Cretaceous. Analyses disclose abundant phosphorus.
The general appearance of tliis Cretaceous iron-ore conglomerate is very like that of "canga"
or rubble ores formed subaerially on the surface of iron formations in the Minas Geraes district
of Brazil.
The shales are soft, thm-bedded rocks of a bluish-gray color when fresh but in many places
are of a light color due to bleaching. These, too, contain fossils.
Fossils. — Selected specimens of the shale and conglomerate containing fossils were sub-
mitted to T. W. Stanton, paleontologist, of the United States Geological Survey, for examina-
tion. He pronounced them to be "unquestionably Upper Cretaceous forms, not older than the
Benton and probably not younger than the Pierre."
In addition to the fossils above noted, the Cretaceous of the Mesabi district has been found
to contain small shreds of lignitic material. The presence of this material well up on the Mesabi
range suggests the possibility of finding lignite deposits in the low area to the west, north, or
south of the Mesabi range.
PLEISTOCENE GLACIAL DEPOSITS.
The Mesabi district is covered by a mantle of glacial drift, of the late Wisconsin epoch, which
effectually conceals the greater part of the imderlymg rocks. On lower slopes the drift is thick,
sometimes reaching 150 to 200 feet, and here of course rock exposures are rare: on middle slopes
the thickness commonly does not exceed 50 or 60 feet, and 20 to 50 would measure much of it; on
the upper slopes of the range the drift is thin or altogether lacking and rock exposures are corre-
spondingly abundant. In the eastern portion of the district also, where the Giants Range
granite has a higher elevation than to the west, the drift is thm and allows numerous rock masses
to project through; toward the west, as the elevation of the Giants Range decreases, the drift
becomes thicker, until westward from Grand Rapids it buries even the crest of the Giants Range
to a depth of more than 100 feet.
The Pleistocene deposits are fully discussed in Chapter XVI (pp. 427-459).
THE IRON ORES OF THE MESABI DISTRICT.
1
By the authors and W. J. Mead. .
DISTRIBUTION, STBTJCTTJRE, AND RELATIONS.
The iron-bearing Biwabik formation rests on the middle south slope of the Giants Range,
with a low dip to the south, 4° to 20°, affording an exposure of considerable width at the surface.
The elevation of this exposure varies between 1,400 and 1,600 feet. The distribution of the
Biwabik formation and the possibilities of westward extension are discussed on pages 164-165.
Possibilities of extension southward are mentioned on page 174. The ore bodies are in patches
along the erosion surface of the iron-bearing formation, generally less than 200 feet thick, but
reaching 500 feet at greatest.
The aggregate area of all the iron-ore deposits of present commercial grade known at this
writing at the surface is about 15 square miles, constituting a little less than 8 per cent of the
exposed surface of the iron-bearing formation in its productive portion between the east line of
180
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
>
4
i\i
H
X
1^
range 14 on the east and west side of nintje 26 on tlie west. If low-grade ores were counted the
area would be approximatelj' douMcd,
East of ran^c 14 the nature of the formation is influenced by tlic great Keweenawan Duluth
gabbro mass overlying the east end of the district. The
ore bodies are few and snuill and are more largely niagnet-
itic and amphibolitic than hematitic. Toward the west end
of the district also the ores become lower in grade, owinf
to increasing content of loosel}' disseminated chert, locally
called sand, so abundant in certain of the ores that they
require washing to attain the present commercial grade.
The rocks immediiitely associated with the ores are
mainl}^ ferruginous cherts, locally called "taconite, " form-
ing both the walls and basements of the deposits. The
ores usually do not rest directly upon the quartzite under-
lying the iron-bearing formation. Their lower hmits are
locally marked by thin layers of paint rock a few inches
thick. A horizontal plan of the Mesabi ore dej>osits is
exceedingly irregular both in major outline and in minor
features. The deposits are in many places bounded hj
intersecting plane surfaces of joint or fault planes. In
A^ertical section the ore deposits in general are widest at the
top and narrow below, in the form of a shallow basin. The
slopes of the basin are rarely symmetrical and few slopes are
uniform; a slope is generally a series of steps, some of them
overhanging the ore or projecting into it. The bedding
of the iron ores is continuous with that of the adjacent
ferruginous cherts of the iron-bearing formation except
where there has been local slump or faulting at the contact.
The shunp is sometimes accompanied by close crumpling
of the layers of the iron-bearing formation (PI. IX). It
will be shown later that the slump results from the leaching
of silica. Obviously the layers have been originally too
long for their present positions and have crumpled to ac-
commodate themselves to the new conditions. The bed-
ding of the ores is thus essentially parallel to that of the
upper Huronian of this district — that is, sloping gently south-
ward at angles from 4° to 20°, with minor gentle folds whose
axes pitch in that direction. A good general conception of
the structural relations of the Mesabi ores may be obtained
by thinking of the ores as irregular rotted upper portions of
the slightly tilted and beveled iron-bearing formation, the
rotting having been favored in certain spots, as will be shown
later, by the fracturing of the formation or by the minor
folds in which the formation rests. (See fig. 16; PI. X,
which is a north-south cross section; and PI. XI.)
a a
a a
I
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF FERRUGINOUS CHERTS
AND ORES.
AX.VLTSES.
of theores and related rocks is
« The chemical composit ion
g here exhibited by partial and comi)lcte analjses from vari-
'^'"'"""°'~'" ous sources. A large number of the analyses employed
were kindly furnished ])V the several mining companies. .\.ll the other analyses except those
previously published were made hj Lerch Brothers in their laboratories at Ilibbing and
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. IX
*^.
s.
>^,
'm^^^
^■ijf«y',^^.-*;:;f-:.v.s_
A. HAWKINS MINE.
B. MONROE MINE.
SHARP FOLDING OF BEDS OF IRON-BEARING BIWABIK FORMATION IN
MESABI DISTRICT, MINN.
See page 180.
U. 8. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH LM PL. X
5BN..n.20E. , Sec 2e,T, 53N.,R.E0E.
Datum 9(J0ft aboy LakeSiipenof
■.^- . _ - -^^ -.Sfe^i
^
Decoinpoaedlaconile Tacoiiile
(uaJDt rock) (tl^composedat
(with rurruffinous slate and points maihed Ct)
3om^green alats ut h)
NORTH-SOUTH CROSS SECTION THROUGH IRON-BEARING BIWABIK FORMATION, MESABI DISTRICT, MINNESOTA.
Compiled by 0. B. Warren from drill records.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH LI1 PL. Xr
PANORAMIC VIEW OF THE MOUNTAIN IRON OPEN-PIT MINE, MESABI DISTRICT, MINN.
Looking east. From photograph presented by J. F. Lindberg, Hibbing, Minn- See pages 180, 497.
B. PANORAMIC VIEW OF THE SHENANGO IRON MINE, MESABI DISTRICT, MINN.
See pages 180, 497.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
181
Virginia, Minn. The average cargo analyses for the various grades of ore were obtained from
the hst pubHshed by the Lake Superior Iron Ore Association.
Nine tj'jjical analj'ses of taconite are given in the followmg table. These analyses include
carefully selected samples from several drill holes giving complete sections through. the formation.
Partial anali/sts of ferruginous chert {laconilf) from the Memhi range.
(Samples dried at 212° F.I
La Rue mine, see. 29, T. 57 N., R. 22 W
Stevenson mine, sees. 7 and 8, T. 67 N. , R. 21 W
Crosby mine, sec. 32, T. 57 N., R. 21 W
Do
Drill core from three holes in T. 57 N., R. 22 W., in all 800 feet
Drill core, 30) feet
La Rue mine, sec. 29, T. 67 N., R. 22 W
Burt, mine, see. 31 , T. 6S N . , R. 20 W
Do
Average
32.24
24.99
11.79
19. 5(i
30.24
23.80
32.26
23. 98
32.62
25.71
SiOj.
68.70
P.
0.021
.024
.010
.013
.038
.030
.018
.013
.020
.021
-MiO..
Loss on
ignition.
0.37 i
.21
.29 I
.%i
.84
1.20
.30
.91
.42
..54
0.62
.60
.67
.25
5.16
7.52
.45
1.33
1.07
1.96
The large loss on ignition in tlie drill-core samples is in part due to the presence of CO2 in
carbonates. The samples represent the hard phases of the formation, showing little concentration
to ore. When all of the iron-bearing formation outside of the available non-ore deposits is aver-
aged, including both the hard lean parts shown in the above table and the partly concentrated
portions of the formation, the average iron content runs higher. An average of 1,094 analyses,
representing 5,400 feet of drilling in the district away from the available ores, gives 38 per
cent. This does not include the ores. Because of the great mass of such rocks as compared
with the ores, this figure of 38 per cent represents approximately the general average u'on
content of the entire formation.
The average composition of the Mesabi ore for the years 1906 and 1909 was obtained by
combining average cargo anah'ses of all grades mined for each of those j^ears in proportion to
the tonnage represented by each grade. In this manner an average analysis was obtained
which represents as exactly as possil)le the composition of all of the ore mined in the Mesabi
district during the years 1906 and 1909.
Average composition of all ore mined in the Mesabi district during the years 1906 and 1909.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.).
Analysis of dried ore:
Iron.
Phosphorus.
Silica
Manganese . .
Lime.
Alumina..
Magnesia.
Sulphur.
Loss on ignition .
60.70
.0559
5.58
1.58
'4.' 57"
1909.
12.27
58.83
.062
6.80
.816
.32
2.23
..32
. 069
4.72
Range in composition of ores mined in the Mesabi district, as shown by average cargo analyses for 1909.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.) 7. 15 to 15. 79
Analysis of dried ore:
Iron 52. 40 li . 64. 05
Phosphorus 019 to .105
Silica 2.50 to 19. 90
Manganese 20 to 2. 84
Alumina 16 to 5.67
Lime 0 to 1.82
Magnesia 0 to 2. 06
Sulphur 004 to .440
Loss on ignition 1. 71 to 9. 45
182
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKTOI! I!EGTOX.
KEPRESENTATION BY MEANS OF TRIANGITLAK DIAGRAM.
In figure 17 the triangular method of phitting is employed to show the chemical cf)mposi-
tion of the various phases of taconite and ore studied. Here actual percentage weights of the
constituents are indicated, and no account is taken of volume or porosity. Each point, by its
position in the triangle, indicates an individual analysis. The diagram consists of an equilateral
triangle crossed by equally spaced lines, 100 parallel to eacii side. Distances measured i)er-
pendicularly from the three sides to any point within the triangle (by means of the divisions in
the triangle) represent severally percentages of ferric oxide, silica, and the remaining constit-
FERRIC OXIDE
MINOR SILICA
CONSTITUENTS
Principally alumina and
water of hydration
Figure 17. — Trian;ular diagram showing composition of various phases of Mesabi ores and ferruginous cherts in terms of ferric oxide, silica, and
minor constituents (essentially alumina and combined water). The ores and cherts here represented are shown in flguro 21 in terms of
percentage volumes of iron minerals, silica, and pore space.
uents. Thus any point in the triangle indicates a certain definite combination of these three
factors. The grouping of the points in the triangle shows that the principal variation in com-
position lies between the iron and the silica. In the process of concentration of ore from the
ferruginous chert the percentage of iron increases in proportion to the decretisc in sUica, while
the percentage of minor constituents remains practically constant; hence this concentration
would be represented by a series of j)()ints in a line parallel to the right-hand side of the
triangle. A taconite with a higii content of alumina produces an ore high in kanlin. tmd
conversely.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
183
MINEBALOGICAL COMPOSITION OF FERRUGINOUS CHERTS AND ORES.
Mineralogicall}' both the cherts and the ores consist essentially of hydrated oxides of iron,
chert, or quartz, aluminum-bearing minerals, usually kaolin, and a small amount of minor
constituents. In the calculation of the approximate mineral composition of the various rocks
and ores these minor constituents — alkalies, sulphur, phosphorus, etc. — were disregarded, the
error thus introduced being small. The iron is present in the ores and cherts as a partly
ly'drated ferric oxide. To ascertain in each case the particular hydrated iron-oxide mineral
present would be impracticable, but by calculating the iron as hematite and limonite the
degree of hydration is expressed by relative amounts of the two minerals. The amount of
limonite is found by assigning to the volatile matter or water of hydration available the proper
amount of iron, the remainder of the iron being calculated as hematite. The practice of assign-
ing to the iron mineral all the water of hydration not in aluminum silicates may introduce minor
inaccuracies because of the possible slight hydration of the chert.
The mineralogical compositions of the ores and ferruginous cherts of the Mesabi range
calculated from the average analysis by the methods describetl above are as follows:
Approximate mineral compositions of average ores and ferruginous cherts.
Ferrugi-
nous
cherts.
Ores.
1906.
1909.
Hematite . .
26.30
12.22
58.07
1.37
2.04
as.oo
27.00
4.10
4.08
1.82
61.81
Limonite
25.95
Quartz . .. .-
'4.10
5.30
Miscellaneous . .
2.84
100.00
100.00
100.00
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ORES.
TEXTURE.
The Mesabi iron ores are for the most part soft, somewhat hydrated hematite, though
approximately pure limonite ores are present in subordinate quantity. The ores as a whole
are of finer texture than those of any other Lake Superior district. Their texture varies from
exceedingly fine-grained "flue dust" to a fairly coarse, hard, and granular ore breaking into
parallelepiped blocks. Usually the ore needs but little blasting to allow the steam shovel to take
it from the bed. The average texture of the Mesabi ores is shown by the following table, repre-
senting an average of screening tests on eight grades of typical Mesabi ore totaling 18,313,570
tons in 1909. These screening tests were made by the Carnegie Steel Company and represent
the total 3'ear's output of each of the grades tested. The textures of the ores of the several
Lake Superior districts are compared in figure 72 (p. 4S1).
Textures of Mesabi ores as shown by screening tests.
Per cent.
Held on J-inch sieve 25. 98
^-inch sieve 26. 24
No. 20 sieve 11. 54
No. 40 sieve 9. 90
No. 60 sieve 8. 54
No. 80 sieve 2. 16
No. 100 sieve 2. 28
Passed through No. 100 sieve 13. 68
The fineness of many of the ores has required mixture with coarser grades for blast-furnace
charges. The average mixture is approximately indicated by the proportions of Mesabi to
other Lake Superior ores, which has increased to 69 per cent in 1910.
184
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKlOll KEGIO.X.
DENSITY.
Several methods were employed in the determination of density — (1) determination of
density of finely powdered specimen by means of specific-gravity bottle; (2) determinations of
density from hand specimens by the common metliod of weighing in air and in water, the
pores of the rock being filled with water by prolonged boiling before weighing under water;
(3) calculation of specific gravity of tlie rock or ore from mineral composition by proper combina-
tion of tlie thaisities of the several minerals present. The density of the ores or cherts calcu-
lated l)y using the density of the iron minerals given by Dana was uniformly liigher than the
density iound by gravity methods. The iron minerals in an earthy form have a lower density'
than those in the hard ores, and it was found that the two methods could be made to agree by
assigning to hematite a density of 4.5 and to limonite one of 3.6.
By combining the specific gravities in proportion to the percentages of the minerals the
average density of the ferruginous cherts is found to be 3.27.
Actual density determinations on eleven specimens of ferruginous cherts gave an average
of 3.02. (See table below.) This figure is lower than the average figure computed above,
for two reasons: The eleven specimens on which the detenninations were made contained a
smaller percentage of iron than the average analysis above. The close texture of the specimens
prevented complete saturation by immersion in water and also prevented complete drying;
hence both density and porosity determinations are somewhat lower than they should be.
For these reasons it is believed that the specific gravity as calculated from the average anah^sis
above (3.27) represents most closely the average specific gravity of the taconite.
The average specific gravity of the ore, as calculated from the mineralogical composition
of the average ore, is fountl to be 4.10.
POROSITY.
In all rocks and ores of which hand specimens could lie collected the porosity was deter-
mined by comparing the weight of the specimen when saturated with water with its weight
when dried. This manner of determination is formulated as follows:
Weight of water absorbed
Weight of rock when saturated
Porosity =
= moisture of saturation = M.
M
1 -M
G
+ M
where G equals specific gravity. From this formula it is obvious that a determmsition of
density is necessary in connection with each porosity determination.
The porosity determinations on eleven specimens of ferruginous chert by tlie method
described follow.
Porosity detenninations of chert.
Specimen No.
44051.
45S88
45309
4S305
40651
4.5021
45596
Specific
gravity.
3.25
3.04
2.86
2.88
2.90
3.22
2.92
Porosity
(per cent
of total
volume).
6.5
2.3
9.45
5.1
6.25
6.00
3.75
Specimen No.
45603
45692
4,5672.\
45.590
Average
Specific
gravity.
2.80
2.87
2.96
3.07
Poro*:ity
(percent
of total
volume).
3.02
3.50
.3.80
6.45
3.55
4.72
To unconsolidated material, such as a large part of the Mesabi ores, the above method could
not be applied. The porosity of such material was found by comparhig its actual density
when in place, including jiore space, with the calculated mineral diMisity, which does not include
pore space. The actual density of the material in ])lace was detcrmmed by weighing the
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 185
amount removed from an excavation made on a leveled surface of the ore, the volume of the
excavated material being determined by measuring the amount of grain necessary to fill the
excavation. Another method for the determination of cubic content of the Mesabi ores is one
employed by O. B. WaiTcn, of Hibbing, Minn. Mr. Warren used a bottomless box 4 feet
long, 3 feet wide, and 1 foot deep. These dimensions were chosen as representing the average
volume of a ton of ore. This box is set up on a leveled surface and the ore removed from the
inside of the box until the sides are sunk to the level of the surface. In this way exactly 12
cubic feet of ore are removed and weighed, a sample for analysis being taken at the same time.
The porosity of the ore may also be determined by saturating a portion in place by an
abundant application of water. Placing a sample of the saturated material immediatelv in a
closed vessel permits the determination of the moisture of saturation, from which the porosity
may be calculated as shown above. Where the ore to be tested is in a vertical wall a small
niche should be cut to afford a horizontal surface for the application of the water. It will be
seen that this method does not differ essentially from the determination of porosity of hand
specimens, except that the material is saturated in place and not after removal from the ground.
More than 100 determinations by the various methods show the average porosity of the ore
to be approximately 40 per cent of the volume. (See fig. 21, p. 190.)
CUBIC CONTENTS.
Owing to the wide variation in the three essential factors, densit}', porosity, and moisture,
there is a wide variation in the number of cubic feet per ton of the ores. This number ranges
from 9 cubic feet per long ton in some of the highest-grade blue granular ores to 17 or 18 in
the low-grade limonites. The average for the district is approximately 12 cubic feet per long
ton. The method of calculation is discussed on pages 480-484.
MAGNETIC PHASES OF THE IBON-BEABING FORMATION.
OCCURRENCE. •
Eastward from the town of Mesaba, on the Duluth antl Iron Range Railroad, the iron-
bearing Biwabik formation becomes progressively more magnetic, more coarsely crystalline,
and the red or bro\viiish tones of the ferruginous cherts give way to black and gray colors.
Ore deposits are rare. Such as there are consist of mixtures of liematite and magnetite. In the
most magnetic and crystalline parts of the formation ore deposits seem to be entirely lacking.
In addition to the magnetite and tjuartz, there are present various anhydrous silicates, such as
griinerite, actinolite, augite, and others. The parts of the formation rich in magnetite are
concentrated into definite layers a few inches to a few feet in thickness and interlayered with
layers less rich in magnetite. Mining would require not only hand sorting but presumably also
crushing and magnetic concentration.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
The chemical composition of the amphibole-magnetite rock is about the same as the average
of the iron-bearing formation elsewhere in the Mesabi district outside of the iron-ore deposits,
as is shown by the following average :
Average chemical composition of amphibole-magnetite rock in the Mesabi district-
SiO, 60. 51
AUO3 ] . 20
Fe 25. 22
MgO 52
CaO 67
HoO Small.
P2O5 05
S 59
MnOo 92
TiOj None.
186
GEOT.OGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The reasons for the hick of concentration of ore in this part of tlie formation are discussed
on page 553.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF MESABI ORES.
STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS.
In the Mesabi district waters faihng on the south slope of the Giants Range have flowed
southward, entered the eroded edges of the slightly tilted Huronian series, and flowed through
the iron-I)caring formation, following both bedding and joint planes. There are genth' pitching
rolls in the formation, but they are so light that their control of the circulation is small as com.-
pared with that of the bedding and joints. The result is the extreme irregularity in- the shape
and distribution of the Mesabi ore deposits.
On the south the iron-bearing formation is overlain by slate. The percolating waters un-
doubtedly permeate the iron-bearing formation beneath the slate, but it is altogether likely
that there they are ponded and have a relatively slow movement. Drill holes put down through
the slate into the iron-bearing formation occasionally meet water under artesian pressure.
The principal zone of escape doubtless is the north edge of the slate — that is, the water over-
flows to the surface before passing far under the slate (fig. 18). Tliis doubtless explains the
comparative lack of alteration of the iron-bearing formation or the existence of ore deposits far
under the Virginia slate.
The ponding effect of the slate also probably aids in diminishing any possible effect which
the southward-pitching synclines in the iron-bearing formation might have on the localization
of the ores, for the reason that near the slate flowage of water is controlled by the point of escape
at the edge of the slate rather than by the configuration of the basin in which it might othei-wise
Iron-bearing forma,tion
FlQUBE 18.— Section through iron-bearing Biwabik formation transverse to the range, showing nature of circulation of water and its relations to
confining strata.
flow, and this point of escape may be higher than the anticlines in the basement, thus ahowing
the waters to flow equally well over anticlines and synclines in the basement.
The impervious basement in the Mesabi district is usually some laj^er in the iron-bearing
formation itself, commonly a shaly layer which has subsequently been altered to paint rock.
In no place does the ore rest directly upon the underlying quartzite.
The greatest depth of the Mesabi ore deposits must be less than the depth of the iron-bear-
ing formation, and as the greatest thickness of the formation is only near the slate margin, where
the waters are escaping and are not doing their best work, it follows that the ore deposits are not
likely to reach this maximum depth. The greatest depth thus far known in the Mesabi range
is 500 feet. The common depths ai-e less than 300 feet.
The Giants Range furnishes the head for the percolating waters. Toward the west end
of the district the range becomes lower and the grade of the ore becomes correspondingly lower,
suggesting that the circulation of the ore-concentrating solutions was less vigorous at the west-
ern end because of the lower elevation. The ores have no close relation to the minor hills on the
Giants Range slope, though they tend to occur in the depressions, principally because in such
places denudation is relatively deep owing to softness. Were it not for the irregular covering
of glacial drift, their relations to minor valleys would be more apparent.
ORIGINAL CHARACTER OF THE IRON-BEARING FORMATION.
The iron-bearing Biwabik formation originally consisted dominantly of greenalite rocks and
subordinately of cherty iron carbonate, the characters of wliich are described on pages 165-170.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 187
The alteration of these rocks to the ore has been accompHshed in two stages, mainly successive
but partly overlapping — first, by alteration to ferruginous chert; second, by leaching of silica
from the ferruginous chert.
ALTERATION OF SIDERITIC OR GREENALITIC CHERT TO FERRUGINOUS CHERT (TACONITE) .
Chemical change. — Tiie chemical change consists of oxidation of the iron according to the
following reactions :
For greenalite —
2FeSi03.nH,0 + O = Fe AnH,0 + 2SiO, ± H^O.
For siderite —
2FeC03 + nH,0 + O = Fe^Oj.nH.O + 2C0,.
Mineral change. — The greenalitic cherts or greenalite rocks are composed essentially of
rounded granules of greenalite in a matrix of chert. The tendency to banding is not as distinc-
tive as in the cherty iron carbonates. The greenalite alters to hydrated iron oxide. The silica
remains or goes out. Mineralogically the sideritic cherts consists essentially of siderite and chert
more or less segregated into alternate layers. The siderite is changed to hydrated iron oxide.
Either removal or retention of silica may accompany this change.
Secondary siderite, usually differing from original siderite in having coarser grain, is a
minor product of alteration of both greenalitic and sideritic cherts.
VoluTne cJuinge. — Though the alteration is distinctly of a katamorphic nature, the change
is from a light to a denser mineral, and hence involves a reduction in the volume of the iron
mineral. Like the oxidation of the siderite, the oxidation of the greenalite involves a change
from a lighter to a denser iron mineral and a decrease in the volume. The volume changes
involved in the above alterations are as follows:
Alteration of siderite to hematite, 49.25 per cent loss.
Alteration of siderite to limonite, 18.30 per cent loss.
Alteration of greenalite to hematite and quartz, 24.50 per cent loss.
Alteration of greenalite to limonite and quartz, 9 per cent loss.
As the chert is at first unchanged in the alteration of the greenalite and carbonate to iron
oxide, the volume change accompanying these alterations is effective on only a portion of the
rock. Chemical analyses of both the sideritic cherts and the greenalitic rocks show that
approximately 60 per cent of their volume is chert. Hence the change in volume is effective
on only 40 per cent of the total volume of the rock. The loss in volume, then, for the entire
rock, taking into account both the iron and the sUica, ranges from 3.6 per cent to 19.7 per
cent, according as the original rock bore siderite or greenalite and according to the degree of
hydration of the resulting product.
Development of porosity. — This volume change, due to oxidation of greenalite or siderite,
develops pore space. Determinations of porosity on eight typical .specimens of greenalitic
rock and sideritic chert showed the average porosity to be 0.96 per cent of the volume of the
rock. An average of twelve determinations on type specimens of ferruginous chert (taconite),
from which apparently no silica had been leached, gave a porosity of 4.72 per cent. The
porosity resulting from the reduction in volume, due to the oxidation of greenalite, in a rock
containing 40 per cent by volume of that mineral should be 9.8 per cent of the volume of the
rock when the product is hematite and 3.6 per cent when the product is limonite. The ratio
of hematite to limonite in the average taconite is about three parts of hematite by volume
to two of limonite; hence the porosity resulting from the alteration of average greenalite rock
to average ferruginous chert should be approximately 7.3 per cent of the volume of the chert.
This figure does not differ greatly from the observed porosity of the ferruginous chert — 4.72
per cent. It is to be expected that the observed porosity would be less than the porosity as
calculated above, for several factors, such as cementation and mechanical agencies, would tend
to close openings formed.
188
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKIOll JJEGIOX.
ALTERATION OF FEllKUGINOUS CHEKTS (tACONITE) TO ORE.
The alteration of ferruginous chert.s (taconite) to ore consists essentially in removal of silica.
It has ah-eady been shown that the alteration of ferruginous cherts to ores is essentially later
than that of the original greenalite and carbonate rocks to ferruginous cherts.
During the change from the ferruginous cherts to ore the iron oxide remains essentially the
same in absolute quantity (not in i)ercentage) and in degree of hydration, as will apjjear from
some of the following analyses and calculations.
VOLUME CHANGES.
At many places in the district the actual gradation from ferruginous chert to ore ma}- be
observed. In the following table are several series of analyses showing this gradation. Each
series represents a series of specimens taken from the same layer of taconite. In no case were
the members of one series taken from an area greater than 2 feet in extent, so that approximately
uniform original composition was insured throughout each series.
The first member of each series represents the least altered phase, each successive member
of the same series showing a greater degree of alteration.
Alteration of/erniginoiis chert..
Chemical composition.
.\pproximate volume composition.
Fe.
SiO,.
P.
AljOj.
Loss on
igniiioa.
Pore
space.
Hematite
+
limonite.
Quartz.
Kaolin.
f 29.47
J 33.01
1 35.26
I 48.88
f 44.33
1 45. 30
1 48.51
49.18
32.20
38. 84
44.49
52.89
50.08
43.44
23.03
34.24
31.05
20. 42
23.60
50.78
42.69
34.33
0.016
.016
.013
.015
.013
.014
.013
.010
.018
.012
.010
0.62
.33
.40
.21
.37
.23
.33
.32
.30
.24
.22
2.92
1.65
4.48
3.83
1.81
2.73
2.07
2.64
.43
.74
.69
S.OO
16.30
20.30
52.70
38.00
39.70
42.40
43.40
4.00
23.20
24.20
32.33
31.23
33.51
30.81
33.12
34.65
36.05
35.70
33.55
33.73
39.89
57.90
51.40
39.30
•16. 18
28.10
25.20
20.88
18.25
61.10
42.30
35.35
1.74
.93
.92
.34
.77
.48
.70
.05
.90
.61
.57
Series 3 La Rue mine
Series 1 was taken near the top and to one side of the ore bod}-; there was apparently no
slump, as is shown by the constant volume of the iron mineral. Figure 19 is a graphic repre-
Pore space
"""""^
Pore space
^— ^
Pore space
S
PoKspzce
saica
Kaolin
Silica
KaoJin
Silica
Kaolin
SUica
Kaolin
Iron
minerals
Iron
minerals
Iron
minerals
Iron
minerals
Iron 33.01 %
Iron 35.26 K
Intermediate phases
Iron 4S.S^ ft,
Ix>w-grade
ore
Iron 29.J7 yb
Ferruginous
chert
[taconite]
Figure 19.— Diagram showing volume changes observed in the alteration of Icmiginons chert to ore. The four specimens represented were
collectcil from a single band of ferruginous chert in the .'Jlcvenson mine, Mesabi district, Minnesota. (See analyses, above.)
sentation of the series. Both the other series showed slight evidence of slumping, the chert
bands being thinner at the most altered end: consequently the increase in volume of the iron
mineral was expected.
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
189
Figure 19 shows very well tluit the essential process in the alteration of the taconite is the
leaching of silica. This removal of material causes an increase in pore space. The development
of porosity beyond certain limits weakens the rock and results in slumping or crushing; lience
the volume of silica removed may be greater than the porosity observed. In order properly to
compare the various phases of taconite and ore studied, it is necessary to consider them
in terms of volume composition rather than of weight. By so doing the factor of porosity is
included in each phase studied, the volume composition being given in terms of hydrated iron
oxide, silica, pore space, and minor constituents (principally kaolin). The alteration as showTi
by tlie average analyses of greenalite, taconite, and ore is expressed diagrammatically in figure 20.
. Average greenalite rock
Average ore -
Figure 20.— Graphic representation of the changes involved in the alteration of greenalite rock to ferruginous chert (taconite) and ore, Mesabi
district, Minnesota. The mineral composition of the various phases is represented in terms of volume by vertical distances. The mineral
composition of the greenalite rock, ferruginous chert, and ore as represented was obtained by averaging a large number of analyses.
METHOD OF EXPRESSING VOLUME CHANGES BY TRIANGULAR DIAGRAM.
While the method of representation shown above (figs. 19 and 20) expresses well the average
results, it is not a convenient way of handling a large number of detailed figures. In order that
many individual comparisons may be made on a single diagram, the volumes of the principal
constituents — silica, iron minerals, and pore space — are platted on a triangle (fig. 21) in which all
these factors are indicated by position in the diagram. Tlie triangular method of representing
percentages of tliree constituents has been described on page 182. In figure 21 the same method
is employed to represent the volume composition of the various phases of the iron-bearing
formation studied. As is indicated on the triangle, distances measured from the tliree sides
represent severally percentage volumes of iron minerals, silica, and pore space. Tlius any point
in the triangle represents amounts of pore space, quartz, and iron minerals totaling 100 per cent.
In actual analyses, however, it is found tliat these three factors seldom total 100 per cent, a
small percentage of minor constituents being present, principally kaolin, which makes it im-
possible to represent the volume composition by a single point in the diagram. This difficulty
is obviated, however, by representing the percentage volume of each of the three principal
constituents by a short line drawn parallel to each side at the proper distance, thus constructing
a small equilateral triangle within the larger one. The altitude of this small triangle repre-
sents, by the divisions in the large triangle, the percentage volume of the minor constituents.
We may then represent by the position and size of a small parallel triangle within the large
equilateral triangle the volume composition of any chert or ore in terms of pore space, silica,
iron minerals, and mmor constituents.
DATA USED IN TRIANGLE.
Chemical analyses, together with density and porosity determinations, were procured for
120 taconite and ore specimens, including gradation phases between the taconite and ore, slaty
phases of the taconite, and paint rock. These data, when platted on the triangular diagram,
190
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
show the relations of the various ])hases of the iron-bearing formation and cnah'e one to deal
with a large number of individual cases as easily as with averages. Each of the small triangles
within the large one represents an actual specimen or sample from the iron formation.
CONSIDEHATION OF THE TRIANGULAR DIAGRAM.
The imaltered taconite is repre.'icnted by the small triangles in the lower left-liand side of
the triangle, where porosit}' is low and silica liigh. If the taconite represented by an}' one of
these triangles is to be altered to ore, it is necessary that part of the silica be removed to permit
an increase in the iron content. If silica is removed, there must be an increase in the percentage
IRON MINERALS
High-grade soft ore
Average ore
( Cargo analysis for 1906 )
Average unaltered
ferruginous chert
Lowz-grade ore
ocherous and clayey
SILICA PORE SPACE
FiGDRE 21.— Triangular diagram representing in terms of pore space, iron minerals, silica, and minor constituents (clay, etc.) tlie volume compo-
sition of the various phases of ferruginous cherts and iron ores of the Mesabi district. For detailed explanation see page 189.
of volume either of pore space or of iron. If we suppose the change to lie between silica and
pore space, iron being unchanged, the alteration of the chert ^\ill be represented bj^ a succession
of triangles reaching across the diagram to the right at a constant distance from the base, silica
decreasing and porosity increasing. If the sample selected is high enough in iron and low
in silica, sufficient siUca may be removed to produce ore without developing an impossible
porosity. On the other hand, if the small triangle selected is near the base of the diagram,
representing a taconite that is composed largely of silica and contains only a small amount of
iron, it is evident that removal of sufficient silica to brmg the percentage of u'on up to the ore
grade without slump would develop a very large porosity. It is probable that the porositj' would
increase until the material became too porous to support itself and the weight above, when
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
191
slump would -occur, decreasing the pore space and increasing the percentage volume of iron.
This change would be represented on the diagram by an upward movement of the triangle
selected. Actual infiltration of iron in solution would also cause decrease in porosity and
increase in iron, but field observation shows that infiltration of iron is very sHght in tliis dis-
trict, and hence any shortage of pore space must be explained by slump. Calculations sliow
that on an average this slump amounts to approximately 45 per cent of the volume of the
original taconite, wliich would give a vertical slump of 82 feet for every 100 feet depth of ore.
This figure, though apparently large, is well in accord with the observed facts. The degree of
slump in an ore body may best be measured by observing the amount of sag in the paint-
rock layers which have been bent downward by the slump of the underlying ore. Figure 16
shows a typical cross section of an ore deposit in the Ilibbing district; the amount of slump in
the ore beneath the paint rock is seen to be of the same magnitude as the above figures. The
diagram (fig. 21) shows that where the original content of iron in ferruginous chert is high the
amount of siHca to be leached is small and the resulting pore space is small, but that where
tlie iron is low the pore space is proportionally greater. It follows, then, that ferruginous cherts
originally low in siUca are much more easily and quickly altered to ore than those high in silica.
It is also seen from the diagram that the ores high in alumina or clay (represented by the
larger triangles) have a greater porosity in rough proportion to the alumina content. The
alumina is very largely in the form of kaolin, a substance characteristically very porous and
not so easily affected by slump as the coarser and more granular ores; hence the larger porosity.
ALTERATIONS OF ASSOCIATED ROCKS CONTEMPORANEOUS WITH SECONDARY ALTERATION OF THE
IRON-BEARING FORMATION.
The shaly layers in the original iron-bearing formation become transformed to paint rock
or ferruginous slates during the ore concentration. Abinidant phases of the formation inter-
mediate between the shales and carbonates or greenalites become, after alteration, either ores
or cherts with a pronounced shaly or slaty structure. These are variously called ferruginous
slates, slaty ores, or paint rock, according to their kon and clay contents. The nature of the
alteration is a leacliing of silica and the more soluble bases, leaving a mixture of clay and iron
oxide. Following are typical analyses of the phases mentioned above:
Typical analyses of unaltered slaty phase of iron-bearing formation and paint rock.
Unaltered slaty ptiase of iron-
bearing formations.
Paint rock.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Si02.
37.11
2,41
17.51
53.86
9.14
23.80
7.95
5.97
9.54
7.00
77.30
20.94
19.01
AI2O3
3 28
FesOa
Fe .
15.90
30.88
25 60
FeO
26.13
3.70
.75
.09
.62
.95
2.57
.22
6.16
1.21
.73
32.21
5.89
4.67
.29
.18
} 4.28
.45
MgO
CaO
NajO
K-O
H-O -
]■ 13.44
H2O +
{
{:;;:;:;;:
TiOz
.61
C02
.14
11. 84
MnO
c
Volatile
3.35
P2O5 .'
.09
.04
.20
1. Specimen 45461 from Moss mine; analysis by George Steiger.
2. Specimen 4.W00 from point near the southeast corner of the NE. J SW. J sec. 21, T. 58 N., R. 20 W.; analysis by H. N. Stolies
3. Specimen 112 (Chem. series No. 240). NE. J SE. J sec. 17, T. 58 N., R. 19 W.; analysis by A. D. Meeds for 1. E. Spurr. (See Geo!, and Nat.
Hist. Survey Minnesota, Bull. No. 10, p. 10).
4. Specimen 40661 from Mahoning mine; analysis by George Steiger.
5. Darlc portion of banded red and white paint rock (specimen 4564{;) from Mountain Iron mine; analysis by A. T, Gordon.
6. Paint rock (specimen 4,5594) from Penobscot mine, Ijeneath ore; analysis by H. N. Stokes.
Where igneous rocks have been intruded into the formation before its alteration these have
suffered similar alterations to the slate. Theh- bases have been leached and they remain essen-
tially as clay, retaining the igneous textures.
192 GEOLOGY 01'^ THE LAKE SUPElilOR REGION,
PHOSPHORUS IN MESABI ORES.
DISTRIBUTION IX THE IKON-BEARING FORMATION.
Tho distribution of phosphonis in tlie various phases of the iron-bearing formation is as
follows -.
J'husphorus in iTon-bmrimj formation.
Groenulite rock, average of six typical specimens
Ferruginous chert:
Average ■ ■ -
Iron layers In (erniginous chert (Specimen 440oi ) . . .
Chert liivers in ferruginous chert (Specimen 44031)..
Iron lavers in ferruginous chert (Specimen 44nriO). .
Chert lavers in ferruginous chert (Specunen 440.50)..
Iron lavers in ferruginous chert (Specimen 44071 ) . .
Chert lavers in ferruginous chert (Specunen 44071 )..
Slate In iron foraiation. typical analysis
Paint rock, typical analysis
Amphibole-magnetite rock
Iron ore, average of 1906 output
Ratio of
Iron.
Phos-
phos-
phori:s.
phorus
to iron.
25.05
0.012
0.000479
25.71
.021
.000820
fil.69
.074
.001200
24.50
.019
.000770
51.27
.035
.000680
11.55
.010
.000870
58.39
.052
.00089
38.33
.018
.00047
29.90
.098
.00328
<0.80
.189
.00462
23.56
.0394
.00167
60.70
.0559
.000920
There is a wide variation in the phosphorus content of the several grades of ore. In gen-
eral it may be said that the more hydrous ores tend to run high in phosphorus but are not
uniformly so. In figure 22 the increase of phosphorus %vith the degree of hydration of the ore
is shown, tlie data being average cargo analyses of all grades of ore shipped from the Mesabi
FlGUKE 22.— Diagram showing relation of phosphorus lo Uegiee ol hyilralion in .M.saM ores.
range in 1906. Percentages of phosphorus and of water of hydration are plattcil respectively as
ordinatcs and abscissas. Tiie arrangement of the points on the diagram seems to indicate that
high phosphorus is in general associated witli liigh content of combined water.
In the Mahoning open-pit mine large round concretions of rather hard yellow ore are fouml
embedded in darker ore. The concretions contain in their centers crystalline and botrj^oidal
MESABI IRON DISTRICT.
193
quartz and yellow hydrated iron oxide. Analyses of the outer shell and of the core of the con-
cretions were made from samples representing a number of individuals. The results of the
partial analyses given in the following table show a marked concentration of phosphoras at
the center of the concretion. As the concretions are of a distinctly geodal structure, the phos-
phorus in the interior was evidently one of the last constituents introduced.
Analyses of concretions from Mahoning mine.
Outer shell of concretions .
Center of concretions
Iron.
65.77
53.12
Phos-
phorus.
0.058
.143
Ratio of
phos-
phorus
to iron.
0.00088
.00269
In the Oliver open-pit mine, in 1899, a vein of limonite could be seen cutting down from the
surface, clearly as a result of an alteration by percolating waters along a fissure, and the per-
centage of phosphorus within the vein was much higher than in the ore immediately adjacent.
This occurrence of high phosphorus is similar to the high phosphorus in the Mahoning concre-
tions, in that it occurs with a more hydrated iron oxide than the surrounding ore, and is evi-
dently later than the concretion of the ore.
Another instance of the occurrence of high phosphorus with hydrated iron oxide was
furnished by Mr. A. T. Gordon, who analyzed hard black hematite and soft yellow limonitic
ore in the same hand specimen from the Mountain Iron mine with the following results: Hard
ore, iron 61.00, phosphorus 0.077; soft ore, iron 57.98, phosphorus 0.118.
To obtain further data on the association of phosphorus with the more hydrated phases of
the ore wasliing tests were made on samples of ore from the Sellers and Burt mines at
Hibbing, Minn. Each sample was stirred with water in a pail and after the mLxture had been
allowed to settle for ten minutes the water was poured off and filtered and a very finely divided
reddish-yeUow sediment was obtained. A portion of the remaining ore was then thoroughly
washed with water until free of coloring matter. Analyses made in Lerch Brothers' laboratory
at Virginia, Minn., of the samples thus obtained gave the following results:
Partial analyses from washing tests on Mesabi ores.
Iron.
Phos-
phorus.
Alumina.
Loss by
ignition.
Ore from Sellers mine:
46.64
67.92
69.92
49.57
60.65
0. 073
.052
.049
.073
.051
9.06
8.32
3. Dark-colored residue after washing with water . ...
1.34
8.31
2.00
3 54
Ore from Burt mine:
1. Finely rlh-irlpd 'jed'TTipnt hpld in sn<!ppnpinn Inngpr than in minntps
7 34
2. Dark-colored heavr residue
3.67
A calculation of the mineralogical composition of Nos. 1 and 3 from the Sellers mine and
Nos. 1 and 2 from the Burt mine from these analyses shows that the material is of the same
general composition as paint rock, being liigh in kaolin and hydrated iron oxide. The mineral
compositions follow:
Mineral composition calculated from analyses in the tabic above.
Sellers mine.
Burt mine.
No.l
(toe
material).
No. 3
(heavy-
material).
No.l.
No. 2.
Hematite. . .
36.^0
35.25
5.45
22.90
67.60
21. 10
7.90
3.40
45.00
30 25
3.75
21.00
69.00
Limonite . .. .
29.60
Quartz . .
5.45
Kaolin
5.06
47517
-VOL 52—11-
194
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
In the Meadow mine, at Aurora, Minn., ore immediately above an altered granite dike was
found to run higher in phosphorus than the ore farther from the contact. This fact suggests
that either the alteration of the granite contributed phospliorus to the ore or the dike acted as
an imper\'ious layer above which the phosphorus was concentrated. The tests show that the
phosphorus is in some manner associated with the kaolin and hydrated iron oxide and bear out
the statement that high phosphorus is related to the degree of liydration of the ore.
Phosphorus content of rocks associated with iron-bearing formations.
Virginia slate (Men. 43, p. 170) ■'■'■'
Giants Range granite, average twelve specimens
Basic intnisives in iron fonnatiun of Gunflint district
Granite ilike in iron-bearing Biwabik formation: |
1. Kaolinized and much iron stained
2. Near No. 1 but farther from ore, less iron stained
3. Completely kaolinized but preserving granitic texture; color light pink
Phos-
phorus.
Ratio of
phos-
phorus
to iron.
0.0885
.087
0.01868
.120
.059
.036
.020
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF PHOSPilOBUS.
Present differences in phosphorus content between various phases of the iron-bearing
formation may be due (1) to original differences or (2) to secondary changes, producing differ-
ences in phosphorus content not due to original differences in composition. These secondary
changes may be actual increase or decrease in phosphorus due to infiltration or leaching, or
relative increase or decrease due to the introduction or removal of other constituents.
A comparison of the partial analyses of the three principal phases of the iron-bearing forma-
tion— greenahte rock, taconite, and ore — successively developed during the secondary concen-
tration, shows a continuous increase in phosphorus and in the phosphorus-iron ratio during sec-
ondary concentration of the ore. The percentage of phosphorus increases from 0.012 in the
greenalite to 0.021 in the taconite and probably to more than 0.0559 in the ore (the average ore
shipped being lower in phosphorus than the average ore of the range). The corresponding
increase in the phosphorus-iron ratio is from 0.00048 to 0.00082 to 0.00092. In spite of possible
variance of these figures from true averages, the differences are so marked as to point very
strongly to an actual increase in the percentage of phosphorus during the alteration of the
greenalite rock to taconite and of the taconite to ore.
In the discussion of the secondary concentration of the ore it was shown that the concentra-
tion was accomplished by the removal of sihca and that the amount of iron carried in solution
was very small. If the phosphorus were as insoluble as the iron and if no phosphorus had been
introduced, the ratio of phosphorus to iron would necessarily have remamed constant during
the concentration — in other words, both elements would have been concentrated to the same
degree. As there is an actual increase in the ratio of phosphorus to iron during the alteration,
it appears that phosphorus has been concentrated to a greater degree than the iron. As iron
has not been largely removed, this increase in phosphorus may be explained only by actual
introduction of that element in solution from" sources outside of the iron-bearing formation or
from other parts of the formation itself. AU available evidence seems to mdicate that at least
part of the phosphorus in the ores is more soluble than the iron oxide; hence without the intro-
duction of phosphorus we should expect an actual decrease in the ratio of phosphorus to iron
during the concentration of the ores. This seems to show that the introduction of phosphorus
from without was even greater than the increase in the phosphorus-iron ratio indicates.
Most of the ores were at one time overlain by Cretaceous sediments, patches of which still
remain as far east as Virginia, Minn. Analyses from drill holes and test pits ilisclose a high
phosphorus content in the Cretaceous beds overlying the ores. Furthermore, they show that
there is a gradation in the phosphorus content from the Cretaceous down into tiie undoilying
ore. A typical series of analyses from a drill hole in the western part of the Mesabi district
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 195
shows the phosphorus content of the Cretaceous shale to be 1.353 per cent, that of the ore
hnmediately underlying to be O.ISO per cent, and that of lower levels to grade down to 0.045
per cent at a depth of 50 feet below the shale. It seems highly probable, then, that the most
abundant source for the phosphorus introduced into the ores of the Biwabik formation was the
Cretaceous rocks. As indicated in the table of analyses (p. 194), there are other sources for
phosphorus in the granites and slates outside of the iron-bearing formation, and it is possible
also that the slates of the iron-bearing formation itself have contributed phosphorus to the ore.
EXPLANATION OF PHOSPHORUS IN THE PAINT ROCK.
The paint rock of the Biwabik formation is a kaolinized alteration product formed by the
alteration of interbedded slate layers or of the lower layers of the overlying Virginia slate. The
change from slate to paint rock is of exactly the same nature as the alteration of taconite to ore,
the soluble bases together with quartz being leached and leaving the insoluble resi(hie of hydrated
iron oxide and kaolin. As there are all gradations between slate and taconite, we find the same
continuous gradation between paint rock and ore. The paint rock is characteristically high
in phosphorus, the analysis in the table on page 194 being typical, though occasionally paint
rock is found with comparatively low phosphorus content. Both the slate of the iron-bearing
formation and the Virginia slate are high in phosphorus, so it is believed that the high phos-
phorus of the pamt rock is to a large extent original, phosphorus remaining with the iron oxide
and kaolin during the leaching of the silica and other constituents.
But it appears necessary also to account for at least part of the phosphorus in the paint
rock as coming from outside sources, and the most obvious source is the Cretaceous, as
already indicated for the iron ores.
PHOSPHORUS IN THE AMPHIBOLE-MAGNETITE PHASES OP THE IRON-BEARING FORMATION.
In the Gunflint district the Gunflint formation appears to be an eastern extension of the
iron-bearing Biwabik formation, consisting almost entirely of silicated magnetite rock. An
average analysis representing 834 feet of drill core in the formation showed the average iron
and phosphorus contents to be 23.56 per cent and 0.0394 per cent respectively. This gives an
average phosphorus-iron ratio of 0.00167. Comparison of these figures with the analysis of the
other phases of the iron-bearing formation (p. 192) indicates that the average iron content is
very close to that of both the greenalite and taconite phases. This phosphorus content of the
silicated magnetite rocks is, however, much higher than that of either greenalite or taconite.
The reason for this high phosphorus in the silicated magnetite phase of the iron-bearing forma-
tion may he either in the original clifTerence in phosphorus content between the cHfferent parts
of the range or in the introduction of phosphorus from the closely associated intrusives. Pres-
ent knowledge does not permit a more definite conclusion. The average phosphorus content of
the intrusive gabbros is 0.12 per cent, which is much higher than the phosphorus content of the
iron-bearing formation, so that it furnishes an abundant source for the introduction of secondary
phosphorus.
MINERALS CONTAINING PHOSPHORUS.
So far as is knowTi, no phosphorus minerals have been identified in any of the iron-bearing
rocks of the Mesabi range. Obviously, then, discussion of the mmeral occurrence of phos-
phorus is entirely a matter of conjecture based on chemical evidence and on the nature of phos-
phorus-bearing minerals wliich have been identified m the other Lake Superior iron-bearing
formations. It is not unlikely that some of the phosphorus occurs in the form of apatite (cal-
cium phosphate). It seems reasonable to suppose that this mineral may be found in the iron-
bearing Biwabik formation, although careful search has not yet revealed it.
196
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
In figure 23 percentages of phosphorus in tlie various commercial grades of ore are platted
as ordinates and percentages of lime as abcissas. The diagonal line crossing the diagram indi-
cates tiie ratio of phosphorus to lime in apatite; hence all points ahove the line denote an excess
of lime over the amount necessary to form apatite and all points below the line indicate a
deficiency of lime. In other words, phosphorus in ore represented by points aljove the line
may be combined with lime to form apatite, and ore represented by points below tlie line neces-
sarily contains some phosphorus in forms other than apatite. This seems to show conclusively
that, though there is sufficient calcium in a large part of the ore to form apatite, in some grades
of ore a deficiency of calcium proves the existence of other piiosphorus minerals, possibly of
iron or aluminum. Another fact brought out by the diagram is that calcium is deficient only
in the ores highest in phosphorus. This suggests the possibility that the original phosphorus
FiGUBE 23:— Diagram sho^ving relative amounts of phosphorus and lime in Mesabi ores.
of the ores may be in the form of apatite but that secondarj- phosphorus takes some other form.
The association of high phosphorus with the hj^drated forms of iron and aluminum suggests that
this excess of phosphorus may be in phosphates of iron and aluminum. It is verj- probable that
at least part of the phosphorus is combined with the iron ami aluminum in no definite mineral
form.
DETRITAL ORES IN THE CRETACEOUS ROCKS.
In the western part of the Mesabi district, in T. 56 N., Rs. 23 and 24 W., a considerable
amount of detrital ore has been found in the Cretaceous rocks overlying the Biwabik formation
and the northern margin of the Virginia slate. Drilling has sho^\^^ up several million tons of
this ore of the following average composition:
MESABI IRON DISTRICT. 197
Average composition of Cretaceous ore from the west part of the Mesabi range.
[Samples dried at 212° F.]
Iron 54. 41
Phosphorus . us
Silica 6. 18
Alumina 8. 25
Manganese 49
As the ore has not been opened up, the sources of information as to texture, moisture
content, and other physical characteristics are Hmited to the results of th-iliing. The drilhng
shows that tlie ore is conglomeratic in nature, as is usual in detrital ores. There appears to be
considerable opportunity for further discoveries of ore of this character.
SEQUENCE OF ORE CONCENTRATION IN THE MESABI DISTRICT.
The sequence of ore concentration in the Mesabi district is similar to that in the Gogebic
district in that the upper Huronian (Animikie group) was but slightly tilted and eroded before
the Keweenawan gabbro was intruded into it. The gabbro thus came into contact with the
iron-bearing formation only at the east end of the district. Here it found in very small
quantity soft ores and ferruginous cherts developed by weathering and changed them to hard
ores and jaspers. The original greenalite rocks making up most of the iron-bearing forma-
tion were altered to amphibole-magnetite rock. The principal and present productive part of
the district was protected from the gabbro by a great mass of slates. The erosion following the
post-Keweenawan folding for the first time exposed the main mass of the iron-bearing Biwabik
formation from beneath the slates.
By Cretaceous time the concentration of the ore was far advanced, for we find the basal
detrital zone of the Cretaceous carrying abundant iron ore in the form of polished pebbles.
Since Cretaceous time all the Cretaceous has been stripped off except parts of the western part
of the Mesabi district, so that surface agencies have had opportunity to cpntinue tlie concen-
tration of the ore.
The amphibole-magnetite rocks of the east end of the district have resisted surface altera-
tion, except local discoloration by oxidation in a thin film at the surface.
CHAPTER VIII. THE GUNFLINT LAKE, PIGEON POINT, AND ANI-
MIKIE IRON DISTRICTS OF MINNESOTA AND ONTARIO.
Under the three names Gunflint Lake, Pigeon Point, and Animikie is discussed the strip
of territory extending from the east end of the Mesabi and Vermilion districts in the vicinit}-
of Gunflint Lake to Port Arthur on Animikie or Thunder Bay and thence eastward to the Loon
Lake district. The districts are geographically continuous and the principal geologic features
in each, given by the Animikie and Keweenawan rocks, are much the same, but because of
slight variations and because the districts have been studied from different standpoints by
different men they are described under the above three headings.
GUNFLINT LAKE DISTRICT."
GEOGRAPHY.
The Gunflint Lake district includes the lake of that name on the international boimdary
at the extreme eastern end of the Vermilion district of Minnesota, and extends in a narrow strip
about 10 miles east and 10 miles west of the lake. The rock succession and structiu-e are essen-
tially the same as in the Mesabi district to the west and the Animikie district to the east. It is
cut off from the Mesabi district by the great overlapping mass of Dulutli gabbro. It is con-
nected with the Animikie district by continuous exposure except for the drift.
SUCCESSION OF ROCKS.
The succession of rocks is as follows:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene series Glacial drift.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series Conglomerate, sandstone marl, diabase sills (Logan
sills), and gabbro (Duluth gabbro).
Unconformity.
Huron ian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikie group). .< „ a'-\. c »• /• i i
*^*^ ^ ° '' [Gunflmt formation (u-on bearing).
Unconformity.
Lower-middle Huronian Graywacke, with greenstone and" granite intrusives.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses intrusive into Keewatin.
Keewatin series Green schists, greenstone, mashed porphyry.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJBONIAN SERIES.
UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP).
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
The district is occupied principally by the upper Huronian (iVnimilde group), dipping to
the south at angles of 10° to 65° (fig. 24). The group laps from the south across the eastern
end of the Vermilion district and thus rests on the north against the varit)us older rocks of
that district, includmg the granite of Saganaga Lake in sees. 23 and 24, T. 65 N., R. 4 W., the
a See Clements, J. M., The Vermilion Iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903.
198
GUNFLINT LAKE DISTKICT.
199
Ely greenstone west of the granite, and the Ogishke conglomerate and the Eaiife Lake slate
still farther west. These rocks have already been described in connection with the Vermilion
district and will not again be referred to.
The base of the upper Huronian (Animikie group) is marked by a thin conglomerate which
in some places is almost lacking. The unconformity with the underlying rocks is determined
principally by the general structure and distribution. The Animikie group has uniform strike
and dip, differing widely from those of sedimentary beds to the north and contrasting with the
igneous rocks in wliich no strike and dip are found. It also laps successively across several
members of the older rocks without losing its continuity. Contacts are so poor in the Gunflint
district that these alone fail to give sufficient evidence of unconformity. In view of the broader
features indicated and also indubitable facts in the Mesabi district to the west and the Animikie
district to the east, the unconformity may be regarded as certain.
The lowest formation is the iron-bearing Gunfhnt formation. Above tills and outcropping
in a belt south of it is the Rove slate, named from its abundant exposures on Rove Lake to
the east. Intrusive sills of diabase (Logan sills) are found parallel to the bedding of the slate
and the iron-bearing formation. Above and south of the Animikie group is the Keweenawan
Duluth gabbro, closely related in age to the Logan sills. The gabbro at the western end of
the district laps directly across the Animikie group upon the underlying lower-middle Huronian
and. Archean. Eastward it laps successively against the Gunflint formation and the Rove
slate. Thus the outcrop of the Animikie group widens, V-shape, eastward. In the vicinity of
Gunflint Lake itself only the iron-bearing formation is exposed. Eastward more and more of
the slate appears.
Keewatin series
(greenstones)
Gunflint formation (iron-bearing)
Duluth 5
gabbro
^0/Vsv:x'-;v)Sif^\\\\\\\\\\\\^^^^^^
500
1000 feet
FiGxmE 24.— Cross section of iron-bearing Gunflint formation east of Paulson mine, Gunflint district, Minn.
GUNFLINT FORMATION.
Distribution. — The iron-bearing Gunflint formation is exposed in a nearly east-west belt
600 feet to half a mile wide. Northeast of the Paulson mine, sees. 21 and 22, T. 65 N., R. 4 W.,
there is an east-west tongue of the Gunflint formation projecting westward into Ely greenstone.
About three-fourths of a mile east of the Paulson mine, in sec. 27, T. 65 N., R. 4 W., where a
great north-south valley cuts directly across the Gunflint formation, the narrow belt of iron-
bearing formation joins a wider area of the same rock wluch extends over the greater portion
of sees. 23 and 26, T. 65 N., R. 4 W. The Gunflint formation is widest in these sections, its
great width being due cliiefly to the fact that a fairly wide synclinal fold has here been stripped
of higher formations, leaving exposed an unusually large area of the iron-bearing formation.
East of these sections, toward the international boundary, the width exposed is less.
Structure. — The structure of the Gunflmt formation is not very complicated. A small
northeast-southwest trending area of Gunflint formation is exposed on the southeast shore of
Disappointment Lake. Here the sediments have a strike corresponding very closely to the
trend of the area itself — that is, northeast-southwest — and they dip to the south. In rocks of
similar age on Gabimichigami Lake the structure is somewhat more complicated. Here the
sediments have been folded, and as a result they form in the main a syncline plunging toward
the northwest, but with a subordinate anticline near the center which has an axis plunging to
the southeast. In the narrow belt extending from sec. 34, T. 65 N., R. 5 W., eastward to the
great cross valley in sec. 27, T. 65 N., R. 4 W., the members of the formation rest upon the
older rocks and uniformly dip to tlie south. The regularity of this dip is, however, internipted
by a number of mmor flexures whose axes plunge southeast. As a result the amount of the
200 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
dip varies considerably, ranging from about 10° to 65° to the south, all the greater dips occur-
ring at the west end of the belt, the dips becoming flatter within short distances eastward.
The gradual diminution in the angle of dip as the sediments are followed to the east corresponds
to their less-folded condition in the eastern part of the area. Attention has already been
called to the areal distribution of the sediments and the westward-trending tongue of sediments
occurring in sees. 21 and 22, T. 65 X., R. 4 W., which is good evidence of an infolded syncline
of the sediments at this place. The dip of the sediments as observed on tiie outcrop in tliis
area gives further evidence of the existence of tliis syncUne.
Some very considerable Irregularities have been noted in a few places along the margins
of certain enormous masses of dolerite wliich occur in the midst of tlie seilimentary area. These
dolerites, it may be stated here, are intrusive in the sediments, and this fact sufficiently explains
the contorted character of the adjacent sediments, for this contorted character is confined to
their immediate vicinity, the uniform low southerly dip appearing at a short distance from
such centacts.
PctrograpJiic character. — Near Gunflint Lake the iron-bearing formation consists of sideritic
cherts grading into ferrodolomites associated with minor amounts of ferruginous cherts and
ferruginous slates. Westward toward the Paulson mine the rocks become black or dark-gi-een,
coarsely crystalline, banded rocks consisting essentially of magnetite, fayalite, cordierite, cjuartz,
and iron carbonate, in varying proportions in different bands and in different parts. Where
the iron carbonate is present the other minerals, aside from quartz, are absent. The iron car-
bonate is regarded as the original phase and the other minerals as their alteration products.
(See p. 529.) In small and highly varying ciuantities are hedenbergite, bronzite, gri'merite,
pyrrliotite, anthophyllite, hypersthene, actinolite, biotite, apatite, diopside, hornblende, augite,
perthite, pleonaste, and crocidoUte. Fayalite is conspicuous in association wdth magnetite
layers. Cordierite, so rare the world over, is perhaps the most conspicuous mineral of the
whole series, in many places forming a third of the volume of the rock. It has the pseudo-
hexagonal twinning and staurolite inclusions oriented in a definite manner with regard to the
optic axes of the cordierite, which are characteristic of this mineral. The cordierite for some
time has been recognized in the Huronian slates as an intrusive contact effect but has been
discovered in the Gunflint formation only recently by Zapffe," who has also distinguished a
number of the minor minerals noted. The texture is xenomorphic and the minerals include
one another in poikilitic fashion.
Contact mctamorphism. — Perhaps nowhere else in the Lake Superior country is there so
good an opportunity to study the metamorphic effects of the great gabbro intrusion and its
associated sills. The iron-bearing formation has been coarsely recrystalhzed and siUcated to
such an extent that it can be distinguished from the intrusives only with great difficulty. De-
tailed study of tliis metamorpliism has been made by Bayley,'' Clements, <^ Grant,'' and Zapffe."
Their conclusion in general has been that, though there has been minute intrusion of igneous
masses parallel to the bedding, there has been no considerable transfer of solutions from the
gabbro to the iron-bearing formation during the alteration. This subject is fiu'ther discussed
in connection with the origin of the ores. (See p. 548.)
TkicTcness. — The thicloiess, so far as it can be determined in this district, is approximately
the same as that of the Biwabik formation in the Mesabi district — that is, somewhat less than
1,000 feet.
ROVE SLATE.
Distribution. — The westernmost exposures of the Rove slate in the VermiUon district are
found in sec. 21, T. 65 N., R. 4 W., where the formation underlies a very narrow area in the
south-central part of the section. Eastward it rapidly wddens. The northern boundarj' of the
« Unpublished thesis, University of Wisconsin, 1908.
6 Bayley, W. S., The basic massive rocks of the Lalce Superior region: Jour. Geolof^-. vol. 1, 1S93, pp. 433-436. 3S7-596, 6S8-716; vol. 2, 1S94,
pp. 814-825; vol. 3, 1895, pp. 1-20.
o<"lement^ J. M., The Vermilion iron-bearing district,of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. .Survey, vol. 45. 1903. pp. 389-390. 419.
d Grant, U. S., Contact metamorpliism of a basic igneous rock; BuU. Geol. Soo. America, vol. 11, 1900, pp. 50.3-510.
GUNFLINT LAKE DISTRICT. 201
slate extends northeastward and is limited by the Gunflint formation and a great dolerite sill.
The southern boundary, marked by the Duluth gabbro, trends east-southeast. At the eastern
limit of the area mapped (PI. VI, p. 1 IS) the extreme width of the Rove slate area in the United
States is only about 2 miles, and a great deal of this width is taken up by intrusive sills of
dolerite. Beyond the limits of the district the slates have an enormous development in
Minnesota and in the adjacent portion of Canada.
Structure. — The slates have a very uniform dip of from 5° to 25° SSE. As indicated by
the variation in dip, the monocline is occasionally varied by minor southward-pitching rolls,
which may be noted by close examination of almost any of the great cliffs that give good ex-
posures.
PetrograpTiic character. — Slates form the bulk of the Rove formation, but with them are
associated graywackes, some slaty, others very massive, and also some fairly pure quartzite.
These sediments have been divided by Grant,"* of the Minnesota Survey, into a "black slate
member" and an overlying "graywacke slate member." In our work no attempt has been
made to discriminate between these two petrograpliic facies of the Rove slate. They are not
separable by any time interval but represent merely slight changes in the conditions of depo-
sition. Macroscopically they are very fine-grained black carbonaceous slates grading up into
dark-gray gra3^wacke of medium grain, with occasional bands of material almost sufficiently
pure to be called quartzite. Nowhere were any conglomerates, even fine-grained ones, found
associated with these. The slates are unquestionably the predominant kind of rock. These
carbonaceous rocks are commonly very fissile, but in places they are fairly massive.
Contact metamorphism. — The sediments of this formation have been found within 3 feet
of the gabbro — at the southeast end of Loon Lake — but not nearer. Here the rocks are inter-
banded slates and graywackes, quite crystalline and hard. Microscopic examination of them
shows that the gabbro has effected a partial recrystallization of the sediments and disclosed in
the sediments a large amount of secondary biotite and muscovite. Both of these occur in
relatively large porphyritic plates inclosing grains of the other materials constituting the slate,
recognizable quartz, and ferruginous material. Down the slope the rocks are less indurated,
and near tJie bottom of the section, at the water's edge, about 50 feet below the gabbro, the
sediments do not appear essentially different from the ordinary rocks of the same character
and age.
Along the southern and southeastern shores of Loon Lake the slate shows a spotted char-
acter and is a spilosite, such as is fairly common in sediments near the contact with the great
mass of gabbro ajid such as occurs also in other districts near great dolerite dikes. This spilosite
contains a large amomit of chlorite in spots in a matrix of quartz and presumably some feldspar.
In the Mesabi range some of the slates near the gabbro contact show clearly recognizable cor-
dierite, which forms the white spots; these slates have been metamorphosed to a cordierite
hornstone.'' In general the slate adjacent to these sills in the Gunfhnt district shows its normal
characters, with at most a little metamorphism due to cementation.
TMclcness. — Within the district only about 2,600 feet of the Rove slate is exposed beneath
the gabbro, but eastward the thickness rapidly increases.
KEWEENAW AN SERIES.
DULTTTH GABBKO.
The Duluth gabbro forms the southern boundary of the pre-Keweenawan rocks throughout
the greater portion of the Vermilion district. The westernmost points at which the Duluth
gabbro touches the district are in sees. 26 and 35, T. 63 N., R. 10 W., and sec. 3, T. 62 N., R. 10
W. From these sections on along Kawishiwi River the gabbro swings off to the northeast with
a broad sweep, extending just within the area mapped on Plate VI (p. 118) as far east as the
o Twenty-second Ann. Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1894, p. 74; Final Eeport, vol. 4, 1S99, p. 470.
6 Leith, C. K., The Mesabi iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, pp. 171-172.
202 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
vicinity of the Paulson mine, in sec. 28, T. 65 N., R. 4 W. From this place its edge trends to the
southeast, ])assin<j beyond the limits of the area mapped toward I^ake Superior. Two small
isolated outliers have been found north of Gabimichigami Lake. Tlie southernmost one is only
a quarter of a mile from the northern edge of the main mass of the gabbro, northwest of Paul
Lake, and the other is about tliree-fourths of a mile from tlie nearest point on the edge of the
gabbro and lies in the NW. \ sec. 29 and the NE. J sec. 30, T. 65 N., R. 5 W.
The petrographic character of the Duluth gabbro is described on page 372, in the chapter
on the Keweenawan series.
LOGAN SILLS.
The Logan sills lie well within the district, at varjnng distances north of the edge of the
gabbro mass. The first exposure of such a sill was noticed on the southwest side of Gabi-
michigami Lake, but this can not be traced far. The next one was seen near Bingoshick
Lake. This sill has been followed to the east for several miles to a point east of tlie Paulson
mine, having throughout this distance an almost continuous outcrop. Parallel to this sill
several small and relatively unimportant sills have been observed. Beyond the Paulson mine
the upper Huronian sediments (Animikie group) begin to widen, rapidly increasing in width
eastward, as already described. Corresponding with this widening there is an increasing
number of sills which in general trend east and west and lie approximately parallel to one
another. During several trii)s to Gunflint Lake and to the country to the south a number of
these sills were followed along their strike for short distances and were also crossed at right
angles to the strike. Their relations to the sediments were thus clearly seen. No attempt was
made to trace out the individual sills. This work has been done in previous years bj- Chau-
venet " and Merriam,* of the United States Geological Survey, and in more recent years by
U. S. Grant,'' of the Minnesota Surve}'.
RELATIONS OF THE KEWEENAWAN ROOKS TO ONE ANOTHER AND TO ADJACENT FORMATIONS.
Geologic relations. — The general features of the relations of the Keweenawan rocks are
described in Chapter XV, on the Keweenawan series. Here are described certain features of
these relations especially well exhibited in this district. These are particularly the superposi-
tion of the Duluth gabbro upon all underljnng rocks and the relations of the gabbro to the
Logan sUls intrusive in the Animikie group.
The gabbro and the sills are petrographically the same, and textural gradations have been
observed which indicate their close relationship. The gabbro, though predominanth" coarse-
grained and granular, is locally fine-grained and poikilitic; in one place it was foxmd as a dike
in the Animikie and there graded into a porphyritic facies and even into a fine-grained ophitic
dolerite. Locally in the midst of the thick sills the rock is a good granular gabbro in texture,
and it ranges fi-om this through ophitic poikilitic-textured dolerites into fine-grained aphanitic
intersertal-textured basalts upon the selvage. Mineralogicallj- they are the same, except that
in the relatively few specimens from the sills which have been studied no olivine nor Jiyper-
sthene has been observed, nor do the sills show such great mineralogical variation from titan-
iferous magnetite rocks to enormous anorthosite masses, though there are small anorthosite
masses in the sills. Such differences in variation are, however, easily expHcablc as due to the
enormous difference existing between the masses of magma forming the gabbro and that forming
the individual sills. The gabbro and niHs are therefore regarded as essentially contem])oraneous
and geneticallj' related.
The gabbro is believed to be a great laccohthic mass which in general follows approximately
the contact plane between the Animikie group and the Keweenawan. In the Ycrniilion district
there are local departures from this relation. Over a great part of the southern edge of the
o Chauvenet, W. M., manuscript notes.
6 Mon. U. S. Cieol. Survey, vol. 19, 1892, PI. XXXVH.
c Final Rcpt. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota,, vol. 4, 1899, pp. 487-t88,
GUNFLINT LAKE DISTRICT. 203
Vermilion district the gabbro followed essentially along the surface of unconformity between
the upper Huronian (Animikie group) and the lower-lying sediments, uplifting thereby the
upper Huronian sediments, for at several places on the edge of the Vermilion district and just
south of it isolated patches of the lowest part of the Gunflint formation are found included in
the Keweenawan gabbro.
In the eastern part of the Vermilion district the gabbro began to rise and cut across the
upper Huronian (Animikie group), reacWng higher and liigher beds to the east, and then spread
out essentiall}^ along the plane between the Animikie and the base of the Keweenawan, sending
sills and dikes into the Rove slate (upper Huronian) and also into the Keweenawan rocks, as
can be seen on Brule Lake.
Topography as related to geology. — The line of contact between the gabbro and the older
rocks adjacent to it is fairly well marked by a slight topograpliic break. The gabbro normally
has a steep north face, in some places showing an escarpment of varying height. It is nowhere
very liigh but is considerably higher than any topograpliic features in the area extending a
considerable distance north of it. The contact at many places is marked by a lake or a stream.
Tliis (Ufference between the topography of the gabbro area and that to the north exists at the
immediate contact, but in general the gabbro area is lower than that underlain by the older
formation to the north. Locally the gabbro area has been reduced almost to base-level. In
fact, this area may be described as very nearly a plain, with minor but pronounced irregularities.
The uniformity of the surface is due in great part to the homogeneous character of the gabbro
mass, owing to winch it has been about equally affected by the various agents which have
attacked it. Most of the minor pronounced irregularities are due to erosion, which has been
controlled very commonly by the joints of the gabbro, and to differences in composition where
they exist. For example, the anorthosite masses usually stand out conspicuously from the
surrounding more basic and less resistant portions of the gabbro.
The lakes of the gabbro area are as a rule shallow, and they are also very irregular and
can not be said to have uniform length in any one direction, as is so markedly true of the lakes
of the other portions of the Vermilion district. On the contrary, they spread out in all direc-
tions, sending off numerous bays, of which some are very long and narrow and all are very
irregular in shape.
The Logan sills exercise a very material influence upon the topography of that portion of
the district north of the gabbro in wliich they occur. It will be recalled that the upper Huronian
(Animikie) sediments in tliis vicinity have a monoclinal dip to the south. The sills have been
injected essentially parallel to the bedding of the sediments, though occasionally they are found
cutting across the beds at low angles. Erosion has been most active in tliis portion of the
district in a direction parallel to the strike of the beds, and consequently most of the large
valleys and lakes trend in agreement with these, approximately east and west. The resistant
sills now form the caps of the ridges, the slates having been removed down to the sills. The
massive rock forming the sills breaks off along the joint planes, and as a result perpendicular
cliffs are formed below the foot of which talus from the sills and from the easily weathering
Rove slate gives a gentle slope. These sills are sometimes very nearly concealed by the accu-
mulated talus derived from them.
The effects of erosion have produced a series of liills with very nearly vertical north escarp-
ments and a gentle slope from the crests to the south. Tliis slope corresponds very closely to
the dips of the Rove slate and the upper surface of the dolerite sills.
THE IRON ORES OF THE GUNFLINT LAKE DISTRICT.
In the vicinity of Gunflint Lake the iron-bearing formation (Gunflint formation) is mainly
cherty iron carbonate more or less recrystallized and silicated ami more or less oxidized and
hydrated at the surface and next to fissures and certain bedding planes. No attempt at mining
has been made here.
204 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The principal hope for ore in the Gunlhnt formation has been centered in the vicinity of
the Paulson mine, 5 miles west of Gunflint Lake. Here the formation consists of dark-green
to black, coarsely crystalline rocks, consisting of magnetite, quartz, ampliiboies, cordierite,
fayalite, augite, pjTrhotite, etc., tliinly interlayered in varying proportions. FayaUte is especially
abundant in rocks rich in magnetite.
Titaniferous magnetites in the Duluth gabbro are described on page 56L
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
An analysis representing an average of the rock from a drill hole penetrating 245 feet into
the iron-bearing formation antl an analysis of a surface sample taken across the entire width of
the formation give the followang average:
Chemical composition of iron-bearing Gunflinl /ormalion.
SiOj 60. 51
AI2O3 ; 1. 20
Fe..... 25.22
MgO 52
CaO 67
NajO 00
KjO 00
HjO Small.
P2O, 05
S 59
MnO, 92
Tliis is almost exactly the composition of the ferruginous cherts or taconites of the Mesabi
district. The significance of tlus resemblance is discussed in connection with the origin of the
iron ores, in Chapter XVII (pp. 499 et seq.). Bands of the formation a few feet tliick run as high
as 50 or 55 per cent in iron. At the bottom, where it rests against the greenstone, a 3-foot layer is
encountered running above 55 per cent in iron. The tliinness of the ore bands, the higJily crys-
talline, silicated, magnetic character of the ore, and the locally high sulphur preclude the use of
the ore under present conditions. On the otlier hand, the total amount is large, the phosphorus
content is low, and it lacks titanium, in tliis respect contrasting with the titaniferous magnetites
within the gabbro mass immediately adjacent. Magnetic concentration may make these ores
available for the future, though the tonnage of low-grade ores requiring no concentration, with
which these would have to compete, is so large that the time may be distant, if it ever comes,
when these ores can be concentrated and used with a profit.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS.
Tlie ores are in some places very coarse grained. The iron-bearing formation is medium
to coarse grained, dense, and tough. The pore space is less 'than 1 per cent and usually almost
zero. Specific gravity, determined by the pycnometer method, on a pulverized di'ill sample of
245 feet of the formation, is 3.62, and that for the ore layers is 4.08.
PIGEON POINT DISTRICT."
The oldest rocks of the Pigeon Point district (PI. XII) are interbedded slates and quartz-
ites of the Animikie group (upper Iluronian). Cutting the Animikie rocks is an olivine gabbro,
which occupies all the higlier portions of the point. It is in all probability the lower portion of a
large dike whose u])pcr part has been removed by denudation. Between the gabbro and the bedded
rocks in many places are successively a coarse-grained red rock, a fine-grained red rock (quartz
keratojihjTo), and a series of contact rocks. The main masses of the keratopluTe occupy a
position between the Animikie sediments and the gabbro. Tliis rock has all the characteristics
o See Bayley,\V.S., The eruptive and sedimentary rockson Pigeon Point, Minnnesota, and tlieir contact phenomena: Bull. U.S. Geol. Survey
No. 109, 1893.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
GEORGE OTIS SMITH, DIHECTQB
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XII
7j! /' .<=
0*#
CROSS SECTION
G E o jsr
D'abasf CROSS SECTION
GEOLOGIC MAP
OF
PIGEON POINT, MINNESOTA
By"W. S.Bayley 1890
Scale 1:22600
QUATERNARY
t'ontour interval 20 feet
101O
ALGONKIAN
KEWEENAWAN SERIES
Pl<*iHl.OL-en*' GriiJiular Iiitennedial'>
riejiosits rcdinck ividt
01i\-ii\e
gabbro
Slaies and SjK>tLeds!atP6
(luarl z,it es eui.I quartzites
Topography from U. S. Lake Survey
ANIMIKIE OR LOON LAKE DISTRICT. 205
of an eruptive younger than the gabbro. The coarse-grained rocks between the gabbro and
the keratophyxe are intermediate in character between the two and grade into them. They are
therefore regarded as a contact product formed by tlie intermingling of tJie gabbro and kera-
tophyre magmas. Between the keratophyre and tlie slates and (juartzites of the Animikie
group there are tliree zones sliowing different grades of alteration of the sedimentary rocks due
to the contact with the igneous rock.
ANIMIKIE OR LOON LAKE DISTRICT OF ONTARIO.
LOCATION AND GENERAL SUCCESSION.
The Animikie district proper includes the area about Animikie or Thunder Bay, on the
northwest coast of Lake Superior, but detailed study has been made ])rincipally of the part of
the district near Loon Lake, at the east end of the bay, about 25 miles east of Port Arthur (see
PI. XIII), and to this part of the district the following description applies. It is taken largely
from descriptions by W. N. Smith ° and R. C. Allen.''
The succession of rocks is as follows:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene series Glacial drift.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series Conglomerate, sandstone, marl, diabase sills (Logan sills).
Unconformity.
Huronian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikie aroup). .w , '^ . '
llron-bearmg formation.
Unconformity.
Lower-middle Huronian Graywacke, slate, and conglomerate, with greenstone and
granite intrusive rocks.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses, intrusive into Keewatin series.
Keewatin series Jreen schists, greenstone, mashed porphyries.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
The Keewatin series outcrops along Current River 5 or 6 miles northeast of Port Arthur,
along the Canadian Pacific Railway, near milepost 119 and west of it about a mile. It com-
prises a variety of green schists and mashed porphyries. Evidence of the extreme deformation
to which these rocks have been subjected is found in their folded and schistose structures. The
schistosity is nearly vertical with strike N. 70° E.
Laurentian rocks are not present in the district itself, but form part of the granitic hills
to the north.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER-MIDDLE HURONIAN.
KINDS OF SOCKS.
The lower-middle Huronian occupies the central part of the area between the upper
Huronian (Animikie group) and the Keweenawan on the east and the Animikie and the
Keewatin on the west. The detrital member of the lower-middle Huronian is represented
mainly by a great thiclcness of graywacke, which is believed to be correlated with the Knife
Lake slate of the Vermilion district of Minnesota. At the base of the graywacke is a considerable
thickness of schistose conglomerate carrying fragments of black jasper and of a great variety
of green schists. It marks the unconformity between the Keewatin and lower-middle Huronian.
a Loon Lake iron-bearing district of Ontario: Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, vol. 14, 1905, pt. 1, pp. 254-2'>n.
6 Unpublished thesis, University of Wisconsin. See also Silver, L. P., The Animikie iron range: Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, vol. 15, 1906, pt. 1,
pp. 156-172.
206 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The conglomerate grades up into the graj^wacke, which in its lower horizons is quartzose. The
actual contract l)ctwccn the lower-middle Iluronian and Keewatin was not observed, the two
usually being separated by a slight topographic depression, which near milepost 119 is but
14 paces broad.
The metamorphism of the graywacke has almost obliterated the bedding, but where
bedding was ol)scrved it was found to be more or less discordant with the cleavage, which
varies in dip from 65° S., a mile or more south of the Canadian Pacific Railway, through the
vertical to 6.5° \. on and north of the graywacke ridge which runs |)arallel to and a short distance
south of tiic Canadian Pacific Railway.
Near the base of the graywacke is found locally a considerable thickness of volcanic tuff
and amygdaloid. This formation is best exposed about 1^ miles south of milepost 110 on the
Canadian Pacific Railway, in a strip several hundred yards wide and a mile or more long. In
places it appears to be conglomeratic, showing a decided banding which looks very much
like bedding, and in other places it is vesicular, the vesicules being filled with secondary' minerals.
The gradation was but imperfectly observed in a single outcrop, but these tuffs and
amj'gdaloids seem to grade both parallel to the strike and across it into the normal phase of the
graywacke.
INTRUSIVES. 1
The graywacke is intruded by a variety of granites and greenstones. All the granites
and some of the greenstones are massive and cut across the strike of the cleavage in the graj--
wacke. Near some of these intrusive masses the graywacke is decidedly more schistose,
especially in the area north of the Canadian Pacific Railway, where the intrusion of the granites
is more intimate than elsewhere. Here the graywacke locally becomes a hornblende schist.
The granite forms the hUls north of the Anunikie district and is correlative in age and
topography with the Giants Range granite of the Mesabi district.
UPPER HtmONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP).
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
The iron-bearing Animikie group dips gently to the southeast across the steeply inclined
structures of the underlymg series at angles locally varying widely, but averaging from 2° to 7°.
It outcrops in two mam areas, the first between Loon Lake and the head of Thunder Bay, the
second along the shores of Thunder Bay in the vicinity of Port Arthur.
The Animikie sediments comprise two distinct zones, as follows:
Thickness.
A black slate formation (total thickness not present) 50 to 60 feet.
An iron-bearing formation, including:
An upper iron-bearing member 250 to 300 feet.
An interbedded black slate 25 to 30 feet.
A lower iron-bearing member 50 to 60 feet.
A thin basal conglomerate 5 to 18 inches.
The sediments are intruded by diabase sills varying up to 35 or 40 feet in thickness.
IRON-BEARING FORMATION.
The iron-bearing formation of this district is believed to be the same as the Gunflint for-
mation of the Vermilion district, for it has been seen in almost continuous exposure between
this district and the Vernulion district.
Conglomerate. — The base of the Animikie group is marked bj- a thin but persistent layer
of conglomerate, wiiich, as shown in open pits and by drill cores from bormgs m the vicinitj-
of Loon Tjake, varies from 5 to 18 inches in thickness. The pebbles m the conglomerate are
small anil predominantly of vein c(uartz. Small patches of it found on the graywacke ridge
east of McKenzie antl on the Keewatin schists near Current River, about 5 miles northeast of
Port Arthur, attest the original extension of the Animikie group over the entire area.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH LM PL. XIII
0 ;•• •• J
"^ ■•'•■"' -la
V '. ■■ '. •t'.h-ci '.' '■<■ '■- p. '.9 :'■■'?■
Conglomerate,
sandstone,and marl
Diatase sills
(Log'aa sills)
HURONIAN SERIES
' UPPER huronian(animikiegroup)
LOWER-MIDDLE HURONIAN
3 Miles
+ + + + +
h + + + -r H
+ + + + +
f + + + -t- ^
vCLl-'--;'
IroTi-l:>cririii'^' I'Muiation
ajad slate
Gra>Tvacke and
gre ens tone
Granite
GEOLOGIC MAP OF THE ANIMIKIE IRON-BEARING DISTRICT, NORTH OF THUNDER BAY, ONTARIO.
By W. N. Smith and R, C. Allen- See page 205. -
ANIMIKIE OR LOON LAKE DISTRICT. 207
Lower iron-bearing member. — In appearance the lower iron-bearing member resembles the
ferrugmous chert or "taconite" of the Mesabi district of Minnesota, but it is peculiar in that
it carries a large amount of calcium-magnesium-iron carbonate. The carbonate may be
wholly secondary. It occurs in large part as coarsely crystalline siderite. A smgle hand
specimen may be found to contain crystalline siderite, iron ore, and typical "taconite," which
contains small granules embedded in a cherty matrix, thus closely resembling the altered
greenalite rock of the Mesabi district. However, it may be that both the iron silicate and
most of the iron carbonate were deposited simultaneously. In the Mesabi district the original
iron-bearing rock was predominantly a ferrous silicate, in the Penokee-Gogebic district a
ferrous carbonate with very subordinate ferrous silicate. The lower iron-bearing member in
the Animikie district may have been originally made up of approximately equal amounts of
the sUicate and carbonate.
Certain of the layers of this member are sufficiently rich in iron oxide or low in siliceous
bands to give thin zones of iron ore. Bands 6 to 8 feet thick contain 30 to 46 per cent of iron.
The grade may be easily raised by sorting out the siliceous bands. The possible commercial
value of these deposits is in their wide horizontal extent. Ores also appear in small irregular
bodies, following the fault plane north of Deception Lake and extending eastward to Silver
Lake and south and east of Bittern Lake.
Interbedded slate. — Near the top of the "taconite" zone is found a black slate interbedded
at more or less irregular intervals with the "taconite" below and the Iron carbonate above.
The relations are those of gradation through continuous deposition.
Upper iron-bearing member. — The rock making up almost the whole of the upper iron-
bearing member is a cherty iron carbonate similar in every way to the iron carbonate of the
Penokee district. It exhibits all phases of alteration from iron carbonate to iron ore. Some
of it is coarsely crystallized, as though from secondary metamorphism.
The iron ores occur principally along the fault zones already mentioned in connection
with the lower iron-bearing member. These also cut the upper iron-bearing member.
UPPER BLACK SLATE.
In its normal phase the upper slate is made of thinly bedded layers, black but weathering
to a rusty bro'svn. Locally it bears an abundance of mica. Most of the mica plates lie with
their greatest and mean diameters in the plane of bedding, but many of them cut across the
bedding at various angles. This phase of the rock has not been studied microscopicaUy, but
the mica plates look more like detrital fragments than secondary minerals developed in place,
for they occur in separated spangles and not in continuous layers, as commonly sho%vn in rocks
having a development of secondary mica. Furthermore, where outcrops of the micaceous
slate occur there is no evidence of metamorphic conditions such as commonly develop mica;
and where it occurs in contact with intrusive diabase sills the metamorphic eifects of the intru-
sion are seen not to extend more than a fraction of an inch from the plane of contact, so the
mica is probably not a product of metamorphism attendant upon the intrusion of the diabase.
Therefore it is believed to be clastic in origin.
KEWEENAWAN SERIES."
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
Unconformably above the upper Iluronian (Animikie group) is a succession of conglom-
erates, sandstones, and impure marls, to which the term "Nipigon" series has been applied
by the Canadian Survey. These rocks, however, are now known to belong to the Keweenawan
series, and the name "Nipigon" has been abandoned by the United States Geological Survey.
This series is most fully developed east of Loon Lake. The unconformity between it and the
underlying rocks is marked in various ways. At the base of the Keweenawan is a coarse con-
glomerate containing waterworn pebbles and bowlders of all the underlying rocks, among
a See Chapter XV (pp. 366-426) for general discussion of Keweenawan series.
208 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
which, however, granite and the iron-bearing formation are predomiiumt. The Keweenawan
series shows comparatively little metamorphism, ev(!n less than the Aniniikie grotij). The
strikes and dips of the Keweenawan are always more or less discordant witii the strikes and
dips of the underlying formations. The strongest evidence of the great time interval repre-
sented by tlie unconformity is, however, the fact that the Keweenawan is found successively
overlying both tiie Animikie group and the lower-middle Humnian rocks, thus showing that the
entire Animikie group and part of the lower-middle Huronian had been truncated by erosion
before the Keweenawan series was deposited.
LOGAN SILLS.
The Animikie group is intruded, mainly parallel to the bedding, by a series of diabase
sills of Keweenawan age, which seem to follow j)referably the slate horizons. By jointing,
these sills have been broken up into great columnar blocks, the breaking off of which where
the sills are exposed maintains vertical cliffs, a characteristic feature of the topography in this
district. These sills are laccolithic in character." At one locality about half a mile south of
Deception Lake the diabase outcrojis in the shape of a great flat dome, the overlying slates
dipping away from it in all directions.
The metamorphic effect of the intrusion on the slates and iron-bearing formation is hardly
perceptible more than a fraction of an inch away from the plane of contact. In certain localities
the iron-bearing formation in the vicuiity of the diabase is very slightly magnetic, indicating
some development of magnetite. The slight metamorphic effect of the diabase intrusions
may be ascribed to rapid cooling of the magma. The fmeness of grain of the diabase suggests
that the sills were not deep-seated intrusives. Thus, being thin and also near the surface, they
cooled rapidly, the heat being conducted away from them by the cooler rocks adjacent.
The diabase which forms the laccolithic Logan sills of the Animikie group is also found
both overlying and cutting the Keweenawan sediments.
STRUCTURAL, FEATURES.
The main structural characteristic of the area is the general dip to the southeast ; in this
it conforms to its geographic position as a portion of the north side of the Lake Superior syn-
clinal basin. The upper surface of the Keewatin series and lower-middle Huronian rocks
shares in the general slope to the south, although, as previously noted, this does not apply to
the bedding and schistosity of the rocks. The normal strike of the Animikie group is to the
northeast, with an average dip of about 7° SE. Locally, however, the rocks have been closely
folded and the resulting strikes and dips are widely divergent from the normal. The general
strike of the Keweenawan is east of north, with flat dip to the southeast, although it also locally
shows the same severe folding and fracturing as the Animikie.
Faulting has been an important factor in producing the present structural and topogi-aphic
features of the district. The faulting is believed to have been caused by the same general
forces that produced the Lake Superior basin. (See pp. 622-623.) The major fracturmg
occurred along certain approximately parallel zones, and in the vertical displacements that
followed the several fracture blocks acted as independent units, in which the northern units
became depressed relative to the southern units, thus producing a system of "block" faults.
The greatest vertical displacement defmitely determined is about 300 feet, as shown from
diamond-drill records and surface exposures along the east-west fault a short distance south
of Loon Lake.
GENERAL TOPOGRAPHIC FEATURES IN THEIR RELATIONS TO GEOLOGY.
As seen from a point north of Loon Lake on the high range of hills extending from Pearl
River station beyond McKenzie, the region as a whole presents a general slope toward Lake
Superior. To the north the country rises, the granite hills towermg one above another, and
a Lawson, A. C, The laccolitic sills of the northwest coast of Lake Superior: Buli. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Sun-ey Minnesota No. S, 1893,
pp. 2-1-48.
ANIMIKIE OR LOON LAKE DISTRICT. 209
to the south the hikeward slope is interrupted by the long, narrow McKenzie Valley, beyond
the southern rira of which the general slope is continued down to the shores of Thunder Bay.
East of Loon Lak§ the range of Keweenawan sandstone hills forming the southern side of the
valley swings at a right angle to the southeast, and the valley emerges on a broad flat timbered
with spruce and tamarack and sloping gently down to Black Bay. To the southeast the ele-
vated and much dissected area of Keweenawan sandstone projects into the lake a distance of
20 or 25 miles, forming a peninsula separating the waters of Black and Thunder bays. This
peninsula, crowned at its lakeward end by a great protective cap of diabase, terminates in a
bold headland over 1,300 feet high, laiown as Thunder Cape. The great escarpment of sand-
stone 600 to 800 feet high forming the northwestern side of this peninsula and extending 2 or 3
miles inland is one of the most striking scenic features of the north shore. West of Thunder
Cape, Pie Island, with its great flat protecting top of diabase rising 700 or 800 feet above the
water, stands like a sentinel at the entrance to Thunder Bay. North of the island, on the main-
land south of Fort William, McKays Mountain, another great flat sheet of diabase, supported
on Animikie sediments, rises abruptly from the plain of Kaministikwia River to a height of
over 1,000 feet. Thunder Cape, Pie Islantl, and McKays Mountain are magnificent examples
of the mesa type of topography, which is a distinct characteristic of the Thunder Bay region.
The origin of this mesa-like topography is found in the prevalence of diabase sills underlain
at varying altitudes by strata of weaker rocks, the sapping of which maintains a progressive
undermining of the great columnar blocks above them, thus producing vertical cUffs with
talus slopes beneath.
WESTWARD EXTENSION OF THE ANIMIKIE DISTRICT.
The Animikie group, containing the iron-bearing formation, extends westward from
Animikie Bay to the Gunflint Lake district, with structural and lithologic features like those
at its east end, although in the vicinity of Port Ai-thur and thence westward the amount of
slate exposed to the south and above the iron-bearing formation is much larger. The slates
with their intrusive sills are beautifully exposed in Pie Island and McKays Mountain and many
of the hills to be observed along the line of the Port Arthur and Western Railway. The saw-
toothed topography characteristic of both the Gunflint and the Loon Lake districts is every-
where to be seen, with its gently dipping slopes to the south, usually capped l)y diabase sills,
and abrupt slopes to the north. The drainage for the most part follows parallel to the strike.
The older rocks on which the Animikie group rests include the same kinds as were
observed in both the Animikie and Loon Lake districts, but they have not been mapped in
detail for all of this intervening area.
THE IRON ORES OF THE ANIMIKIE DISTRICT OF ONTARIO.
OCCURRENCE.
Iron ores approaching commercial grade are known only in a small area near Loon Lake,
25 miles east of Port Arthur. The ore deposits are thin but extensive layers of hematite in
the ferruginous cherts of the lower part of the formation. In one zone, and perhaps in others,
ores have developed along fault and joint planes. The thickness of the ore layers which can be
mined will depend on the grade wliich can be utilized and on the success with which chert layers
may be eliminated by hand sorting. Eight feet is about the greatest thickness of a bed which
would run as high as 45 per cent, but with a small amount of hand sorting two or three times
this thickness could be used. The commercial importance of the ores obviously depends on
their horizontal dimensions. The ores rest upon ferruginous cherts and grade into them lateraUy.
One of the beds is capped by a diabase sill intruded parallel to the bedding.
47517°— vol, 52— 11 14
210
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
CHARACTER OF THE ORE.
The ore is a lean, banded siliceous lieinatitc, more or less liydrated. Analyses of samples
taJien every 3 inches from four exposures representing vertical distances of 6 to 8 feet each are
given below. These are from the natural exposures which showed the greatest observed con-
centration and include both the hematite and associated siliceous material.
Analyses of Animikie ore.
Iron
Phosphorus
Sulphur
Silica
45.81
45.22
30.76
.020
.017
.160
.024
.028
.058
31.91
33.13
35. OC
30.21
.256
.036
37.1)
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE ANIMIKIE ORES.
Structural conditions. — The movement of waters here has obviously been controlled by the
bedding, for the ores constitute merely enriched layers with irregular lateral extent. To some
extent also the. waters have been concentrated in the intersecting faults. The formation i?
very thin and is subdivided by impervious igneous sills, making such movement of water as i?
possible in the formation essential!}" a horizontal one.
Original character of the iron-bearing formation. — As described- on page 207, the lower part
of the iron-bearing formation of tlie Animikie group was originally a greenalite rock with some
carbonate and the upper part was originally an iron carbonate with soine greenalite.
Nature of alterations. — The original greenalite and carbonate rocks have altered prin-
cipally to ferruginous cherts in the manner described for other ranges. Local and for the
most part subsecjuent alteration of the ferruginous cherts by leaching of sihca has devehjped
the ore. Coarsely crystalline secondary iron carbonate is abundant.
SEQUENCE OF ORE CONCENTRATION.
The alteration of the iron-bearing formation has occurred both before and since Kewee-
nawan time. Evidence of the pre-Keweenawan alteration lies in the abundant fragments
of ferruginous chert and iron ore wliich occur in the Keweenawan conglomerates. Evidence
of later alteration is the fact that the deformation which produced fracturing and breccia-
tion of the iron-bearing formation, and which in part determined the localization of tlie ore
concentration, was later than Keweenawan time, as is shown by the similar phenomena of
deformation in superjacent Keweenawan beds.
CHAPTER IX. THE CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT OF MINNESOTA AND ITS
EXTENSIONS TO CARLTON AND CLOQUET, AND THE MINNESOTA
RIVER VALLEY OF SOUTHWESTERN MINNESOTA.
CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS TO CARLTON AND CLOQUET.
GEOGRAPHY AND TOPOGRAPHY.
The Cuyuna iron district is the most recently discovered range in the Lake Superior region,
and as such is receivmg a large share of attention. It trends N. 50° E. along the line of the
Northern Pacific Railway, near Mississippi River, in the vicinity of the towns of Brainerd
and Deerwood, Crow Wing County; Aitkin, Aitkin County; and Randall, Morrison County,
in north-central Minnesota. (See Pis. XIV and XV.) Its boundaries are still being extended
and limits can not yet be drawn with certainty in any direction. The area of present
greatest activity lies south and east of Mississippi River in Tps. 4.3 to 48 N., Rs. 28 to 32 W.
The length is more than 60 miles and the area for exploration amounts approximately to 32,000
acres.
The general geologic and geographic relations of the Cuyinia district to the adjacent terri-
tory appear on Plate XIV. A larger-scale map of the Cuyuna district itself, showing magnetic
belts, is Plate XV. This map is not colored geologically for the reason that the district is heavily
drift covered and the distribution of the underlying rocks is known only incompletely from
drill holes. A:iy map attemjjting to show geologic l)oundaries would be sadly out of date by
the time of publication. However, the magnetic lines follow approximately the distribution of
the iron-bearing rocks.
The countiy is flat, being not less than 1,150 feet nor more than 1,300 feet above sea level.
It is covered with a heavy mantle of glacial drift and dotted with many glacial hills, lakes, and
swamps.
The rock surface beneath the drift shows slight local variations in elevation, and between
widely separated points, because of the general slope of the surface, may show a difl'erence of
elevation of as much as 250 feet. Frequently the soft slates are found to be at lower elevations,
because of erosion, than the hai-der iron-bearing formation adjacent — as, for instance, near Pick-
ands, Mather & Co.'s shaft in sec. 8, T. 45 N., R. 29 W. Notwithstanding these local irregu-
larities of the rock surface, it is generally flat. At many jilaces in the district and m adjacent
parts of Minnesota Cretaceous deposits are found just above the rock surface and beneath the
drift, suggesting that this flat surface may be part of a pre-Cretaceous base-level or peneplain.
The Cuyuna district has almost none t>{ the external aspects commonly associated with a
Lake Superior iron range. The conspicuous topographic ranges are lacking, as well as the
numerous rock exposures.
SUCCESSION OF ROCKS.
From the information so far available, consisting largely of drill samples, the succession of
rocks for the Cuyuna district is as follows:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene series Glacial drift of late Wisconsin age, 35 to 400 feet thick.
Cretaceous system Sediments, thin and in small areas.
211
212 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTERIOR REGION.
Algonkian eystem:
Keweenawan (?) Herios. . .Igneous rocks, extrusive and intrusivo, basic and acidic.
• Upper Iluroniiiii
(Animikie grou]j t
Huronian series:
Virginia ("St. Louis") slate: Chloritic and carbonaceous slates, with
small amounts of interbedded graywacke, quartzite and limestone.
Thickness unknown but great. Where intruded by Keweenawan (?)
igneous rocks, this formation consists of gametiferous and slaurolit-
ifcrous biotite schists and hornblende schists.
Deerwood iron-bearing member of ^'irginia slate, consisting princiiially
of iron carbonate where unaltered, but largely altered to amphibole-
magiietite rocks, ferruginous slate and chert, and iron ore. Found
in lenses in the Virginia slate, presumably near the base.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJBONIAN SERIES.
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
GENERAL STATEMENT.
The upper Huronian rocks of this district, comprising the Virginia ("St. Louis") slate
and its Deerwood iron-bearing member, are not separated for much of the district, but are
interbedded and have sunilar structure. They are accordingly described together. The slate,
hitherto knowai as the "St. Louis" slate, has been correlated with the Virginia slate of the
Mesabi district. The name "St. Louis " as apphed to this slate has priority over Virginia slate,
but it is preoccupied by the well-known Carboniferous formation of the Mississippi Valley.
The formation will therefore be called Virginia slate in this monograph. The iron-bearing rocks
in this district have not been satisfactorily correlated with the Biwabik formation of the Mesabi
district, and for them the new name Deerwood iron-bearing member is here introduced, from
their typical development at and near Deerw^ood, in this district. The iron-bearing beds, being
interbedded in the Virginia ("St. Louis") slate, properly constitute a member of the slate and
are so treated in this report.
DISTRIBTTTION AND STRTJCTTTRE.
Sediments of upper Huronian age occupy practically all of the rock surface beneath the
drift. They have been bent into repeated folds, as shown by drilling and magnetic work. In
the southern part of the district the folding has been so close that the beds generally stand at
angles of about 80° with the horizon, though locally varying at the ends of pitchmg folds.
Toward the north the folding is less close and flatter dips are common. The folding has been
accompanied by the development of cleavage in the softer layers, especially in the softer slates.
Wliere the cleavage can be definitely distinguished from the bedding, there is usually a slight
angle between them and the cleavage has the steeper dip. The iron-bearing member itself is
less aflfected by the cleavage than the slate. The axial lines of folds and cleavage strike east-
northeast — that is, about parallel with the axis of the Lake Superior synclihe.
The iron-bearing member thus far found seems to be in the fonn of lenses whose longer
dimensions are parallel to the higlily tilted bedding of the series. The wall rocks are various
phases of the Virginia ("St. Loiiis") slate. Intrusive rocks locally comphcate these relations.
Along the strike these lenses pinch out or widen and are locally buckled by the drag type of
fold (fig. 12, p. 123). It is dillicult to tell from the present state of exploration just how far the
parallel lenses are independent lenses at different horizons in the Virginia slate and Ikuv far
the)^ may be the result of duplication by folding. The broader features of ilistribiition are
undoubtedly to be explained by folding. There is a narrow zone of iron-bearing rocks known
locally as the "south range," extending from a point east of Aitkin southwest past Deerwood
and Brainerd and west of Mississi])pi River, as showni by magnetic attractions and by drilling.
This is made up of a large nuuiber of short parallel and overlapping belts. \Mietiier these
minor belts are repeated by folding or whether they are parallel independent lenses at difTerent
NVIMNOSTV
i-S £-;i;.;
.i.inTTi.jiTi ^rii.ti-.ti)
Snrpii[;nii ';»:(>mi
ST'
#^
1
I 1
!r.
■Hi?
^ V
!>,?-
•"
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XV
CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS. 213
horizons in the slate is not known. Six miles to the north, however, in the vicinity of Rabbit
Lake, there is another belt of iron-bearing rocks, known locally as the "north range," which
is undoubtedly brought up here by folding, for if it were an independent belt in a monoclinal
succession it would imply too great a thickness of intervening strata between the north and
south ranges. Still farther to the northwest, between Rabbit Lake and Mississippi River,
are at least two more belts of iron-bearing rocks repeated by folding. Whether the folds
reappear elsewhere prospectors are now trjang to determine. Inspection of the map (PI. XV)
tliscloses a westward divergence of the south range and the north range belts of iron-bearing
rocks. The best ores of the district are found in the angle between them. Divergence of
strike to the west is also to be noted between certain pairs of the minor belts, though not in
all. These facts may indicate either a general anticlinorium with eastward-pitcliing axis or
a syiichnorium with westward-pitching axis. The former is regarded as the more probable.
LITHOLOGY AND METAMORPHISM.
So far as the sedimentary rocks go, the emphasis in description should be placed on the
altered phases, for they have all been much metamorphosed. Failure to recognize the scliists
as parts of the sedimentary series has caused confusion in the local interpretation of drill records.
The changes in the quartzite and slate to scliists are the typical anamorpliic changes of the
zone of rock fiowage and igneous contacts.
Hall has shown how these slates, toward the south and west, where intrusive rocks are
abundant, become garnetiferous and staurolitiferous biotite schists and hornblende schists."
When subsequently exposed at the surface, there has been a leaclung out of all the basic
constituents, leaving light-colored, soft kaohnic and quartzose schists. This action is most
conspicuous in their upper 15 or 20 feet. It is especially confined to the areas near the iron-
bearing lenses. Farther south, where anamorpliism was more intense, the rocks were made
so hard and resistant that they have been affected but slightly by weathering where exposed
at the surface.
The iron-bearing member, originally mainly iron carbonate, has also undergone anamor-
pliism, resulting in the development of ampliibole-magnetite rocks essentially similar to
amphibole-magnetite rocks wherever they are found in other parts of the Lake Superior
region. Tliis action, however, was not sufficiently effective to destroy a large part of the iron
carbonate constituting the original mass of the member. Where exposed to weathering the
amphibole-magnetite rocks have been more resistant than the iron carbonates, but even they
have become softer, owing to leacliing of silica, which has resulted practically in the concen-
tration of the iron, which remains substantially as magnetite. The iron carbonate has been
altered to limonite at the surface. The result is a mixture of hematite, hmonite, and magnetite
in the iron-bearing member, soft and granular above and becoming harder and mofe siliceous
below and showing more of the unaltered carbonate phases with depth. The gradation phases
between the iron-bearing member and the slate have become ferruginous slates.
The anamorpliism of the rocks of the Cuyuna district is probably to be explained in large
part by the existence of intrusives in the area itself and west and south of it.
CORRELATION.
The sedimentary rocks of the Cuyuna district probably belong in the same series with the
slates and schists of the Carlton, Cloc^uet, and Little Falls areas. They show many similarities
in lithology, structure, and metamorphism and are geographically contiguous. Drilling in
numerous places in Crow Wing and Aitkin counties shows the same pyritic and carbonaceous
phases of slate as have been explored for coal in the vicinity of Mahtowa.
Succession and Hthology are in accord mth distribution and general structural relations
in pointing to the identity of the rocks of the Cuj^una-Carlton-Little Falls area with the upper
Huronian (Animikie group) of the Lake Superior region. The Animikie group as a whole,
o Hall, C. W., Keewatin area of eastern and central Minnesota: Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 12, 1901, pp. 343-376.
214 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
where best known in tlie Mesabi aiul Animikie and Gogebic districts, consists of a great slate
formation 2 miles or more thick, underlain by and intorbedded in its lower portions with an
iron-bearing formation of var^'ing thickness, but averaging perhaps 1,000 feet, and this in
turn underlain by quartzite varying from 1 to 200 feet in tliickness. Exploration has not yet
gone far enough to warrant a satisfactory estimate of the tliickness of the formations in the
Cuyuna district, but the information so far developed is in accord with the figures given for
the Animikie group as a whole, except for the iron-bearing member, which thus far has not
been found to be as thick as the average for the Lake Superior region. The Cuyuna range is
separated from the Mesabi range on the northeast by a flat swamp and lake area about 50
miles wide, which completely lacks rock exposures. The Animikie group in the Mesabi district
dips to the south under tliis low, flat area at an angle var\nng from 4° to 20°. It has long been
obvious that the group here disappearing under the surface might somewhere be brought up
to the south by folding.
In tlie Gogebic range, on the south side of Lake Superior, a similar group dips at an average
of 60° toward the northwest beneath the Lake Superior basin, and it has long been thought
that tills group represents the Animikie group as it comes up again on the south side of the
lake. An examination of the general structure of the west end of the Lake Superior liasin,
however, shows that the structure of the area between these two districts is not that of a simple
syncUne but of a syncline in wliich there are subordinate anticUnes — that is, a synchnorium.
One of these subordinate anticlines runs west and southwest from Duluth towanl Little Falls
and vicinity on Jklississippi River. If the Animikie group conies to the surface anj-where between
the Mesabi range on the north and the Gogebic range on the south, it should therefore appear
in tliis subordinate anticlinal fold in the western part of the general synchnorium connecting
these two regions, and it was on this hypothesis that the extension of the iron-bearing formation
of the Mesabi and Gogebic districts was drawn by geologists, prior to its discovery, through
the present Cuyuna district, wliich Ues near the north side of this subordinate anticlinal fold.
The existence of a cpiartzite exposure at Dam Lake, near Kimberly, and near Rabbit Lake,
as shown by drill records, points to the fact that here erosion has cut down to the lower part
of the Animikie group as it would in truncating an antichne. The course of ilississippi River
itself suggests the existence of the antichne in the vicinity of the Cuyima range, for after
crossing the Mesabi range it flows south until it reaches the Cuyuna district and then turns sud-
denly westward as though deflected along the anticline toward a lower point of escape. Where
it does break across, as at Little FaUs, rocks are exposed.
The slates of the Carlton and Cloquet districts were early assigned by Irving and other
geologists to the upper Huronian, but they were later referred by Spurr to the lower Iluronian
because of their greater metamorphism and folding than that of the upper Huronian slates in
the Mesabi district to the north and because they are intruded by granites supposed to be of
lower Huronian age. It is now kno\ra that the upper Huronian (Animikie group) of the Mesabi
district is also intruded by granite. The facts developed in the Cuyima chstrict seem to con-
&m Irving's view of the correlation.
In \new of the probable equivalence of the rocks of the Cu^nma and Carlton areas and the
occurrence of small iron carbonate bands and nodules in the slates about Carlton and Cloquet
and to the southwest similar to the broader bands in the Cuyuna area, the question naturally
arises why erosion should not somewhere in tliis great area of exposed slate between Carlton,
Cloquet, and Little Falls uncover the lower part of the Animilde group — in other words, the
iron-bearing member. It may be that the crest of the antichne runs parallel with the Cujiina
district itself, allowing erosion to cut down here only into the main iron-bearing member, wliile
to the south and southeast the tluck capping of slates has not been removed, or it may be that
the existence of great masses of intrusive granite and diabase and the intense metamorpliism
wliich they have accomplished have prevented erosion of the surface or have made the condi-
tions unfavorable for the direct oxidation of the iron-bearing rocks under surface katamorphic
conditions. Certainly enough facts are not yet available to warrant the assertion that the iron-
bearing member may not yet be found in tliis area.
CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS. 215
KEWEENAW AN SEBIES (?).
Igneous rocks are abundant in the area of the upper Iluronian (Animikie jjroup). These
inchule granites and basic rocks, many of the latter characterized bj' ophitic structure. Part
are sclustose; others are not. The granites outcrop conspicuously (thereby contrasting with
the adjacent upper Huronian sediments) in the southern part of the district in a general belt
extending from Carlton and Cloquet southwest beyond ^lississippi River. Other exposures are
known northwest of the district, in the vicinity of Randall and Motley. Basic igneous rocks
of diabase and gabbro types also outcrop, though less abundantly, over the same area. Dikes
of the basic rocks, up to 50 feet in width, are conspicuous in the Carlton area. The intrusive
character of these igneous rocks as a whole admits of no doubt. Their metamorphic effect on
adjacent sediments has already been described. Within and adjacent to the Deerwood iron-
bearing member driUing has disclosed much igneous rock, both basic and acidic, of yet unknown
extent and with unknown relations. The contacts are sharp, the adjacent members of the
upper Huronian have been locally metamorphosed, and no basal conglomerates have been found
in the sediments adjacent to the igneous rocks. From these facts it is concluded that the igneous
rocks cut in drill holes are probably intrusive into the upper Huronian sediments, just as are
the granites to the south. The textures and structural relations of some of the basic igneous
rocks suggest the possibility that they may be extrusives contemporaneous with the upper
Huronian rather than with later intrusives, but until mining operations disclose more under-
ground sections tlus can not be determined. In only three localities are extrusives known.
An acidic extrusive rock with amygdaloidal texture, in beds 15 to 25 feet tliick, has been
found by drilling to rest across the edges of the Virginia slate and Deerwood iron-bearing
member, in sec. 2, T. 44 N., R.31 W.; sec. 6, T. 44 N., R. .30 W.; and sec. 7, T. 45 N., R. 29 W.
The igneous rocks intrusive into the upper Huronian and the extrusives resting on the upper
Huronian are provisionally classed as Keweenawan, because the Keweenawan is the next
period of igneous activity, liecause abundant igneous rocks of Keweenawan age are known
elsewhere in the region to cut the upper Iluronian sediments, and because they are especially
abundant in that part of the Ci:yuna district which Kes approximately along the central axis
of the Lake Superior syncline, largely developed during Keweenawan time. (See pp. 421-422,
622-623.)
CRETACEOUS ROCKS.
Immediately below the surface, in widely scattered parts of the district in Crow Wing
County, remnants of a conglomerate have been found. Some consist of small pebbles of the
iron-bearing member in a slaty matrix; others of small pebbles of an extrusive rock. Gen-
erally the pebbles are about an eighth of an inch or less in diameter, but on two widely separated
properties the oval pebbles measure as much as an inch in their longest dimension. This
conglomerate is found resting unconformably, apparently in small depressions, on a rather
level erosion surface of the upper Huronian. It does not contain fossil remains to identify it,
but it is similar to the Cretaceous of the Mesabi range. An excellent opportunity to examine
it was offered when an exploration shaft was sunk in the SW. i SE. i sec. 8, T. 45 N., R. 29 W.
More Cretaceous sediments have not been identified, probably because, being poorly
cemented, they are chopped and brought to the surface in drilling as churnings. Drillers
frequently report imbroken shells in the lower portion of that which is reported as "surface, " and
clay immediately above bed rock and below the surface, and frequently the top drill samples
are light-colored, unconsolidated, and calcareous material, all of which might well be of Cre-
taceous origin. None of this has been very carefully examined. The common occm-rence of
large amounts of lignitic material in the glacial drift indicates a once wide distribvition of
Cretaceous deposits, possibly with remnants here and there such as are found in the Mesabi
range to the north. Cretaceous beds continuously cover the pre-Cambrian rocks of western
Minnesota. Those of the Cuyuna district may be regarded as outliers of the main Cretaceous
area.
216 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
QUATERNARY SYSTEM.
PLEISTOCENE GLACIAL DEPOSITS.
The glacial deposits in the eastern part of the district belong, according to Upham," to
the eighth moraine and those in the western part of the district belong to the ninth moraine,
counted back from the outermost moraine of the late Wisconsin glaciation. The}' vary from
35 to 400 feet in tliidcness. The heavy mantle of weathered material upon the rock surface is a
remnant of the product of preglacial weathering, which in the other districts has been removed
by glacial erosion. Obviously in the Cuyuna district glacial deposition has predominated over
glacial erosion.
THE IRON ORES OF THE CUYUNA DISTRICT.
By the authors and Carl Zapffe.
DISTKIBUTION, STBtJCTTJRE , AND RELATIONS.
The Cuyuna ores are scattered through a considerable area beginning a little east of Aitkin,
Aitkin County, Minn., and extending southwestward past Brainerd into Morrison County. (See
PI. XIV.) The Umits of the ore-bearing district are not yet known. The district lacks the
distinct range or ridge characteristic of the other iron-producing districts, though in general
it follows a drainage divide. The area is flat, heavily drift covered, and without exposures.
The development of the Cuyuna district is still in its exploratory stage. At tliis writing
no shipments have been made. In the absence of exposures, information is available from
about 2,000 drill holes and two shafts and from magnetic readings. The information is still
inadequate to warrant any extended discussion. In the following general outline emphasis is
placed on the facts thus far developed. No attempt at proportional treatment is made. This
may be possible later.
The Deerwood iron-bearing member is magnetic as a whole, and hence its distribution is
roughly shown by the magnetic belts outlined on Plate XV and by minor belts which do not
appear on this plat. Parts of the member, however, are very weakly magnetic; they are found
beneath very weak belts of attraction and extend laterally some distance away from the maxi-
mum magnetic line. The ore deposits may be more or less magnetic, usually less magnetic,
than the associated iron-bearing member, and hence are not ordinarily situated under the belts
of maximum variation, though they are not far from them.
Ore deposits of suflicient size and grade to be commercial!}- available Iiave been found in
both the north and south ranges, so called. The south-range ores occur at intervals along the
magnetic belts from a place a mile east of Deerwood more or less intermittently to the north-
eastern part of T. 43 N., R. 32 W., near jMississippi River southwest of Brainerd, a distance of
about 30 miles. The north-range ores are in intermittent deposits, in a shorter but wider belt,
extending from Rabbit Lake southwestward nearly to Mississippi River. The tonnage of the
deposits thus far found is about equal in the two ranges, but on the north range the ores are
more largely confined to a few large deposits of good grade, while on the south range the
number of deposits is larger and their individual size smaller.
The ores are in nearly vertical lenses and layers from a few inches to 125 feet or more wide-
on the south range and up to 400 or 500 feet on the north range. The depths on the two ranges
are variable as the widths. On the north range the greatest depth known is 850 feet and it
is quite likely that this figure may be exceeded, but up to the present time the average depth
is about 300 feet. On the south range the greatest depth Icnown is about 250 feet, and it does
not seem likely that tins will be greatly. exceeded. The average depth on the south range is
about 150 feet, but the higher-grade ores invariably occupy only tlie up])or 100 feet. The
strike is east-northeast for distances varying from a few feet to half a mile and to an unlcaown
greater distance.
a Minnesota Geol. Survey, vols. 2 and 4.
CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS. 217
Whether these lenses pitch in the chrection of strike, following the axes of drag folds, is not
yet disclosed by the drilling. (See fig. 49, p. 350.) From analogy with other districts the ore bodies
are likely to have a pitch, and this ]ntch is likely to be more or less uniform in direction and
degree, affording a guide for exploration. The drilling has not shown the pitch, because where
they are vertical the holes are stopped as soon as they run out of ore, and if they go into lean
rocks rather than ore they are ordinarily not carried far enough to locate any possible extensions
of the pitches. Wliere the holes are put to one side of the ore body and inclined they are
stopped as soon as they have penetrated the ore lens. These pitches are, as a matter of fact,
extremely difficult to locate by drilling. Closely associated with the ore on one or both walls,
or m layers within the ore, is amphibole-magnetite rock. At varying depths, but usually
within 125 feet on the south range, the ores tend to grade vertically into cherty iron carbonate
rocks, and at these depths also the amphibole-magnetite rocivs contam much more iron
■carbonate than at the surface. It may be found that down the pitch the depth of gradation
to iron carbonate is much deeper. The ores, with the associated amphibole-magnetite rocks
and cherty iron carbonates, constitute the iron-bearing member of this district.
The Deerwood iron-bearing member as a whole constitutes lenses or layers in the great
Virgmia ("St. Louis") slate formation, lying parallel, overlapping, or end to end. Each major .
lens may be divided into minor lenses by intercalated slate layers.
The wall rocks of the ore may therefore be any of the phases of the Deerwood iron-bearing
member or any of the phases of the Virginia ("St. Louis") slate. Characteristically one wall
may be chloritic or black graphitic slate of the Virginia formation and the other wall amphibole-
magnetite rock of the Deerwood iron-bearing member. The association of ore with carbona-
ceous slates finds its counterpart in the Iron River, Crystal Falls, and other districts of ^Michigan.
Dikes and irregular masses of basic intrusive rocks appear in all parts of this series and
are associated with almost every ore deposit yet known. These may constitute one wall of
the ore body or may be separated from the ore body on one wall by amphibole-magnetite
rock.
A characteristic occurrence of the ores is shown i.n plan and cross section m figure 25. It
is apparent from this figure that the information furnished from drill holes would depend largely
on the angle at wliich the drill penetrates the iron-bearing member. In a vertical lens a
vertical hole will tell notlung of the character of the material a few feet away across the strike.
An inclmed hole will mdicate the proportions of iron ore, amphibole-magnetite rock, and slate
layers, but may not show the greatest depth of the iron-ore lenses, or, on the other hand, it
may pass through the carbonate phases of the beds beneath the ore.
The ore, where associated with magnetite rocks, is in many places also magnetic. The
amphibole-magnetite rocks are somewhat more magnetic than the ores themselves, so that drill-
ing on the maximum magnetic attraction is likely to show amphibole-magnetite rocks with
the ores a few feet to one side or the other. A not uncommon relation is amphibole-magnetite
rock on the maximum attraction, intrusive material on one side of the maximum, and ore on
the other. The greatest distance from the maximum attraction at which ore has 3'et been
found is one-half mile. It will be shown elsewhere (pp. 552-553) that the magnetic character
of the member is not favorable to its richest concentration; this suggests that the best parts
of the Cuyuna ore may yet be found farther away from the magnetic belt.
The fact that the foot and hanguig walls of the ore deposits of most of the Lake Superior
ranges are uniformly different in their lithology has led to the assumption that the foot and
hanging walls of the Cuyuna ore deposits are uniformly different. Beginning in slate a few
hundred feet either side of the magnetic belt, an inclined drill hole penetrates the iron-bearing
member as the magnetic maximum is approached. The slate is ordinarily spoken of as "hang-
ing wall." The drill is then likely to penetrate ore more or less mterbedded with slate and
amphibole rock. As the magnetic maximum is approached the amphibole-magnetite rock is
likely to be more abundant. The drill may go beyond the maxinmm attraction into intrusive,
which would be spoken of as "intrusive foot wall." (See fig. 25.) The terms "hanging-waU
slate" and "magnetic foot wall" or "intrusive foot wall" therefore signify a certain tendency
218
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
toward uiiil'ormity of reliitions wliich it is well to identil'y by such terms. But the assumption
of uniformity imphcd by the use of these terms may lead to misapprehension of the facts.
Slate similar to thai of tlio lianjijing wall may bo on citlicr side of the iron-bearing member.
If the drills go far enough,
they are likely to find slate
in both walls. Slate layers
witidn the iron-bearuig mem-
ber itself, if first penetrated
by tlie drill, would be likely to
be called "hanging wall." In
short, the nature of the foot
and hanging w alls will depend
on the particular layers in
wliich the drill happens to
start ami where it stops in tlie
interlaminations of slate and
iron-bearing member. The re-
lations of the intrusive rocks
to the ore deposits are still
obscure, but it seems not un-
likely that these ma}' be
found to constitute a definite
foot wall for some of the oi^e
bodies.
The facts just given are
disclosed by drilling, but the
drilling yet done gives a ver}'
incomplete view of the struc-
ture, and for the larger struc-
tural featiu'es we must rely
principally on interpretations
of the magnetic field. Tlie
existence of five magnetic belts
in a zone 7 miles wide north
and south suggests that the
iron-bearmg member is re-
peated by folding. If the dips
were monoclinal and the sev-
eral magnetic belts represented
separate irou-bearuig zones in
the slate, the thickness of the
series to ho inferred would be
greater than is reasonable. On
the other hand, the drill cores
show variations in the <lip of
the bedding indicative of fold-
ing. The cleavage of the
siat(>s is inclinccl to the bed-
ding, and tiiis relation is itself
evidence of fohhng. These
folds have a strike east-nortli-
east parallel to the Lake Superior axis, to judge from the magnetic belts. Moreover, the
discontmuity of these belts, their distribution en echelon, and the varying intensity of the
Figure ;
-Plan and cross section of the ironKjre deposit in sei.-. 1_', '1'. 4i N.
^^'ing County, Minn. By Carl Zapffe.
K. 32 \V., Crow
CUYUNA IKON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS. 219
magnetic field along a single belt all accortl with the distribution recjuired by pitching folds,
which repeat tlie iron-bearmg beds, the number of times diil'ering witii the locality. If tlie
■crests and troughs of the folds were horizontal, the beds would appear as parallel lines upon
the horizontal erosion plane, but the actual crest and trough lines of the folds usually have a
pitch; in other words, they are cross folded, so that on tlie erosion plane the beds appear to
converge in the direction of the pitch. With folding of this type it is apparent that the beds
may strike with a considerable variety on the erosion plan(^, according to the section this
plane happens to make through the folds.
The magnetic belts fail to give all the information desired as to structure, for two reasons:
(1) It is not certain that the iron-bearing lenses in all parts of the district are at the same
horizons in the slate; indeed, it is known that within a few hundred yards tliere may be several
iron-bearing bands, so that the question is raised whether iron-bearing layei"s in other ])arts of
the district belong below, with, or above them stratigraphically. (2) It is difficult to tell
whether two nearly parallel belts close together represent truncateil iron-bearing layers on the
two limbs of a single fold or the axes of two indej)endent folds. The main belts of attraction
several miles apart doubtless represent separate folds, but the closely associated minor belts
making up each of the main belts may represent either the two limbs of a single fold or two
horizons on one limb of a fold.
It is concluded, in general, that the iron-bearing member constitutes closely associated
lenses and layers along a single general horizon in the slate. The finding of quartzite in a few
places near the iron-bearing member suggests that this horizon is near the bottom of the slate
formation, but this is not proved. The foldmg of the slates carrying the ii"on-bearing zones,
followed by erosion, has developed the present distribution at the surface.
CHARACTER OF THE ORES.a
j'
> GENERAL APPEARANCE.
The Cuyuna ores fall into two main groups, hard and soft ores.
The soft ores are black, brown, and reddish hydrated hematites, soft and earthy and much
like the soft ores of the Penokee-Gogebic district. They have large pore space. These soft
ores are of two types — a high-grade ore containing 55 to 63 per cent iron, soft and powdery and
of a brown to very dark color, and a lean reddish-purple ore containing 45 to 50 per cent iron.
The latter ore is not so soft as the former. It is easily broken do%vn with a juck but retams its
■stratified form and hangs together ia fairly large chunks. In this type cherty layers are scat-
tered through the mass at short intervals, the cherty impurity probably accounting for its low
grade. This ore also has a large pore sjiace.
The hard ores are also of two types. The bulk of the hard ore is a black to very dark brown
hydrated hematite. It is closely stratified and has suffered close brecciation as a result of
slumpmg caused by the leaching out of silica. This ore varies in iron content, but is mainly
high grade, ru;ming fi"om 50 to 60 per cent iron. Although this ore is brecciated it holds
together in large masses, owing to the partial cementing of the brecciated pieces by the second-
ary introduction of iron. Much of the ore of this type has been classed as soft ore by the
drillers because it is fairly easily penetrated by a churn drill and comes to the top broken up
in very fine angular pieces. It can be distinguished, however, from the true soft ore, which
is washed to the surface of the hole as a fine, even-grained, powdery mass. The Cuyuna hard
ore described above must not be compared to Vermilion dense blue hematite of that range.
It is much softer and more limonitic.
The other type of Cuyuna hard ore, small in amount as compared ^\^th that described above,
is a hard blue hematite running about 58 to 63 per cent iron. It is massive and unbrecciated.
This is a true hard ore and can only be drilled with diamonds. This ore occurs in layers in
the softer ores and is found more frequently close to the intrusives..
ain the description of the ores the writers have drawn on quantitative data assembled by F. S. Adams (Econ. Geology, vol. 5, 1910, pp. 729-740;
-vol. 6, 1911, pp. 60-70, 156-180).
220
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
It is impossible to state at lliis incomplete stage of exploration the proportion of hard to
soft ore on the Cuyuna nmge. The soft ores prol)al)l3- form flic lar<rer i)r()p()rti()n, but the hard
ore must be counted as a large factor ami may occur in a mucii larger percentage than has pre-
viously been supposed.
Locally on the north or Rabbit Lake range black, highly manganiferous ores have been
developed near the surface. These are unimportant in amount as comi)ared with the other
ores.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
Because of the minute interbanding of the ore with lean, magnetic, and slaty jjiiases, the
chemical composition shows rapid alternation across the strike. The percentage of iron of the
iron-bearing member ranges from less than 30 per cent in the lean siderite and amphibolc
phases to 60 per cent and more in certain of the iron ores. In certain estimates of tonnage
which have been made it has been calculated that of the ores rumiing above 40 per cent metallic
iron 44.5 run above 50 per cent in iron and 21.3 per cent above 55 per cent in iron. These
fio-ures are based on a sufficient number of drill holes to warrant the belief that this proportion
may have some general significance for the range. The average iron content of all ores above
50 per cent in iron on the north range, found by drilling to the time of wTiting, is about 1 per
cent higher than that for such ores on the south range. The chemical character of the iron
ore and interlayered masses as they stand in the ground may best be shown by the following
analyses from a drill hole cutting the formation at an angle of 60° :
Analyses of iron ore and interlayered masses from the Cuyuna district, Minnesota.
Deplh.
Fe.
P.
Mn.
SiOz.
.MjOs.
CaO.
MgO.
Los.*! by
ignition.
Pert.
175-180
180-185
185-190
190-195
195-200
2PO-205
205-210
210-215
215-220
220-225
225-230
230-235
23."v-240
240-215
245-250
250 255
255-200
200-2(15
205-270
270-275
275-280
280-285
285-290
290-295
295-300
58.70
59.73
■ 59.02
59.11
00.32
59. CO
59.44
(.0.93
01.10
57. 82
57. 93
55. 52
40. 00
49.07
45. 07
40. 82
47.95
48.74
48.28
41.47
41.80
40. 30
30.80
37.19
37. So
0.519
.547
.425
.004
.414
.385
.353
.264
.229
.287
.284
.337
0.24
.22
'.io
.20
.40
.51
.30
.40
.47
.44
.-10
.43
.94
4. SO
3.23
3. 78
4.10
li.35
7.22
7.34
. fi. OS
7.10
13.00
12. 90
15. 19
9.79
0.08
1.13
1.35
1.25
.03
.00
.02
.49
.44
.47
.48
.49
2.00
O.U
.15
.10
.17
.10
.08
.U
.18
.20
.10
.17
.10
.14
0.08
.14
.11
.10
.09
.08
.10
.07
.05
.04
.08
.07
.00
7.34
7.83
5.35
3.36
2.75
.48
29.30
.35
.13
.09
2.18
.40
20. 04
.59
.10
.10
.50
20.00
.52
.10
■ .06
2.62
.39
30.74
.54
.17
.08
1.12
32. 50
.73
.42
.30
l.O.n
3i.7i 1 .74
.44
.37
7.11
1
It will be noted that the principal variants here, as in other districts, are iron anil silica.
Phosphorus is usually high, averaging about 0.34 per cent, which brings the ore into the class
of the Iron River and Crystal Falls ores. The north range shows less phosphorus than the
south range. Locally on the north range there are streaks of Bessemer ore.
Loss by ignition is high. This consists princiindly of water combined in the hydrated
iron minerals but includes some carbon.
Manganese is usually in small amounts, but locally ami near the surface may run up to
10 or 12 per cent or even up to 28 per cent. One drill hole on the north range averaged 13 per
cent for the upper 35 feet. Another had an average of 1 1 .33 per cent for the ujiper 30 feet.
The percentage of free water in the ore as mined can not be determined through drilling,
and the ore has thus far been opened up by shafts to such a slight extent that the average free
moisture for the ores can not yet be given. Three determinations from the Rogers, Brown Ore
Co. shaft give moisture of O.SO per cent, 10.40 per cent, and 14.20 i)er cent, with an average of
CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS.
221
10.46 per cent, not far from the 'average of the Lake Superior region. Another determination
by Pickands, Mother & Co. for the ore from their shaft in sec. 8, T. 45 N., R. 29 W., gives 12
per cent of free moisture. In analyses of ore from drill holes the iron content is usually cal-
culated for the dried ore. If the moisture is included the iron content is lower. An average
moistureof 10 per cent indicates that an ore appearing as a 55 per cent ore in the drill hole will
mine as about 50 per cent. As prices are based on standard ores with moisture, this correction
is an important consideration.
The slate layers interlayered witli the iron-bearing member and intermediate phases between
the iron-bearing meml)er and the slate would run higher in alumina. The above analyses are
confined to the iron member itself.
IRON OXIDES
SILICA
ACCESSORIES
FiQUEE 26.— Triangular diagram showing mineralogioal composil ion of various phases of iron ores and ferruginous cherts of the Cuyuna district,
Minnesota. After F. S. Adams. For description of method of platting and interpretation of diagram, see p. 182. 1, Hard blue ore from the
Kabbit Lake section: 2, breeciated, hydrated hard ore (Rabbit Lake); 3, bard blue ore (sec. 21, T. 40 N., R. 28 W.); 4, soft ore (see. 21, T. 4G
N., R. 28 W.); 5, lean soft ore (Rabbit Lake); C, dense, black, highly ferruginous chert; 7, 8, average ferruginous chert; 9, weathered highly
siliceous chert.
MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITION.
The Cuyuna ores are more or less magnetic hydrated hematite with some limonite. The
principal impurity is chert in layers. A less common impurity is clay in layers. In still smaller
amount are iron carbonate and amphibole, which also show a tendency toward concentration
in layers. The color varies from a hght yellow through various brown and reddisji tones to
black, according to the hydration of fclie iron and the amount of magnetite in it. The liighly
222
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
nian^aniforous ores contain both the carbonates and oxitles of man<ianese. They are most
al)un(hint near the surface. The mineral canyin<j the pliosphorus is not known.
The mineraloo;ical composition, fifjured from the foregoing analyses in which loss by ignition,
was determined, is as follows:
Mineral composiiion of Deerwood iron-bearing member.
Depth.
Hematite.
Limonitc.
Quart z.
Kaolin.
Feet.
17r>-180
42.10
48.80
4. no
1.72
lSIO-195
40.80
50. 00
2. i;3
3. IB
20J-210
.54. i;o
35. .So
1.. 1.1
1.57
21.5-220
(i8. 20
22. 10
7.63
1.11
230-235
Ii4.10
17.80
14. (;2
1.24
2J5-250
6.1. 10
14.20
28.89
.89
2(;5'270
54. SO
Ui. 1:5
25. .35
1.49
295-300
13.85
47.23
30.84
1.87
IRON MINERALS
ico%
SILICA
PORE SPACE
Figure 27. — Triangular diagram representing volume ooinposilion o( various phases of iron ores and ferruginous elierts of Ihc Cuyuna district^
Minnesota, .\fler F. S. Adams. For description of metliod of platting and interpretation of diagram, see p. 189. 1 , M:is.<ive liard blue hema-
tite; 2, brecciated limonitic hard ore; 3, hard ore from jiee. 21, T. 4i'i N.. It. 28 W.; 4, soft ore from sec. 21, T. 40 N., R. 28 W.: .5. lean soft ore,
(Haliljit Lake); 0, dense, Idacli, highly ferruginous chert: 7, .s, banded ferniginous chert; 9, weathered chert; 10, typical paint rock; 11, average
ferruginous chert; 12, 13, average soft ore; 11, average ch<*rly iron carbonate.
The ore really consists of hematite, limonite, iiydrates iiilermediate helweeu licmatile and
limonite, and magnetite. As it is almost impossible to determine what degree of hydration
some of the minerals may have, tli(> analyses are expressed in terms of h(>inatite and limonite.
CUYUNA IRON DISTRICT AND EXTENSIONS. 223
Tliis is merely a conventional means of showing the degree of hydration for these ores. The
amount of magnetite is so small that its calculation as hematite does not materially affect the
result.
TEXTURE.
The density of the hard ores of standard grade averages 4.09. This includes both types
of liard ore. The low figure is due to the hydrated character of the Cuyuna hard ore. Tlic
density of the soft ores averages 4.19. The lean soft ore shows an average density of 3.73. Th(>
hard blue unbroken type of hematite has an average density of 4.26. The limonitic brccciatcd
hard ore shows a density of 3.95.
The pore s\rAce. of the hard ores averages 13.13 per cent l)y volume. This includes both
types. The soft ore has an average pore space of 36 per cent. The lean soft ore shows 33.3
jier cent pore space. The hartl ores show a range in porosity varying from 9 to 20 per cent by
volume.
The hard ores of both types average 10 culiic feet per ton. The hard blue hematite varies
between 9 and 10.5 cubic feet per ton. The hydrated brecciated hard ore ranges from 10 to
10.8 cubic feet per ton. The soft ores average 11.5 cubic feet per ton. The lean soft ore runs
12.6 cubic feet per ton.
An average figure to use in computing tonnage for a large deposit where various ores are
represented and a tonnage estimate of each type is out of the question Mould be about 11 cubic
feet per ton.
Notwithstanding the fineness of much of the ores, the texture is not disadvantageous, for
there is probabh' less of it that will act as flue dust in the furnace than there is of the
Mesabi ore, for the reason that it is as a whole less crystalline and more earthy and takes on a
more coherent texture when comjiressed.
SECOND AKY CONCENTRATION OP CUYUNA ORES.
Structural covAitions. — The structural relations of the Cuyuna ores are still so imperfectly
known ^that any statement concerning them must be made with much qualification. It is
nevertheless obvious here that the concentration has been greatest at the surface and less with
depth, and that at least in many places it has been very active next to the intrusives rocks
which cut the member or along foot-wall slates or am])hibole schist. Also it seems to have
followed axes of mmor drag folds. All the rocks have been weathered to a considerable extent.
At present glacial drift covers them at depths of 35 to 400 feet, so that water stands much above
the rock surface. The present condition is oliviously quite different fi-om that under which the-
ores were concentrated. It may be supposed that when the rock surface was exposed waters
penetrated into the iron-bearing member as it was exposed on the anticlinal areas betM'een
the impervious hanging wall and the impervious foot wall and that where the member M'as cut
by impervious igneous rocks they served further to control the circulation. The depth of cir-
culation is not yet known, nor is it clear what topographic features may have been present in
the past to control the depth of circulation.
Original character of the Deeru-ood iron-hearing memier. — The member was originally cherty
iron carbonate interbedded with slate.
Mineralogical and chemical changes. — The alteration of the original carbonate rocks Avas
in different sequence from that in most of the Lake Superior ranges, because before it was
exposed to weathermg it underwent folding and intrusion, which partly altered the cherty iron
carbonate to amphibole-magnetite rock. Subsequently, when erosion had exposed the mem-
ber, the surface agents of alteration therefore had two phases of the mendjer to work upon —
unaltered iron carbonate and amphibole-magnetite rocks. The former went through the
ordinary cycle of changes to ferruginous cherts and ore. The latter lost some of its silica
and amphibole but as a whole was much more resistant than the carbonate. The net result
of the alteration is a soft, hydrated ore containing much magnetite along certain bands, both
contaming silica as imj)urity and in increased amount with dej)th.
224 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
PHOSPHORUS IN CUYUNA ORES.
Phosphorus has been concent rated with the iron during the secondary concentration of
the ores. It is probable, for reasons simihxr to those discussed on pages 192-196 for the
Mesabi district, that phosphorus, leached from the overlying Cretaceous rocks, has been added
to the ore during its secondary concentration. In general there is not sufficient lime in the
'ore to combine with all the phosphorus as apatite, hence some phosphorus is ])robably com-
bined with the hydrous aluminum and iron minerals.
MINNESOTA RIVER VALLEY OF SOUTHWESTERN MINNESOTA."
Pre-Cambrian crystalline rocks of the Minnesota River valley of southwestern Mimiesota
appear in numerous exposures along the river, protruding from the drift, from a point south-
east of New Ulm to Ortonville on the northwest. The great bulk of the crystalline rocks are
granitos and gneisses. These ai)i)ear for the most part in the river bottoms but stand also
in a few isolated knobs on the higher ground south and west of the river. There are man}''
varieties of granites and gneisses and all gradations between them. They are taken as a
whole to represent the Archean or basement complex.
Associated with the granites and gneisses are a much smaller number of exposures of
gabbros and gabbro schists. These present many varieties, all of which are believed to have
resulted from the alteration of two original forms and their intergradations — a hypersthene-
bearing gabbro and a hypersthene-free gabbro.
Peridotite is found in one exposure only in this valley, 3 miles southeast of Morton. The
relations to the other rocks of the area could not be determined. Cutting the gneisses and
gabbro schists throughout the area are numerous dikes of diabase. They vary in width from
a fraction of an inch to 175 feet. Their age is probably Kew-eenawan.
Southeast of Redstone and near New Ulm are exposures of quartzite associated with
coarse c[uartzite conglomerate. Near Redstone the strike of the quartzites is N. 60-70° W.
and their dip varies from 5° to 27° N. In New Ulm the strike is N. 15° E. and the dip varies
from 10° to 15° SE. The quartzite is beheved to be the same as the quartzite found in a
tleep well at Minneopa Falls, near Mankato, Minn., which is covered by a quartzite conglom-
erate of Middle Cambrian age. The quartzite of Retlstone and New Ulm is above the Archean
granite and gneiss. It is believed to be of Huronian age, but whether upper or lower is
unknowTi. The crystalline rocks of the Minnesota River valley are separated from the \iv-
ginia slate series of the Cuyuna and St. Louis River areas by a drift-covered area at least
partly underlain by granite but partly unknown.
Overlying the crystalline rocks are Cretaceous shales and sandstones, whicli appear in
rare exposures in the valley, and glacial drift.
a For further detailed description see Hall. C. W., The gneisses, gabbro schists, and associated rocks of southwestern Minnesota: Bull. U. S.
Geol. Survey No. 157. 1899, 160 pp., with geologic maps.
CHAPTER X. THE PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN
AND WISCONSIN/
LOCATION, SUCCESSION OF ROCKS, AND TOPOGRAPHY.
The Pcnokee-Gogebic district lies soutli of the west lialf of Lake Superior, in the States of
Michigan and Wisconsin. It extends from Lake Numakagon in Wisconsin about N. 30° E.
to Lake Gogebic in Michigan, a distance of about 80 miles.
In the accompanying geologic map of the Gogebic range (PI. XVI) the only essential
change noted from earlier maps is in the vicinity of Sunday Lake, where faulting and perhaps
folds have caused a marked effect in the iron-bearing formation.
The succession of formations in the district is as follows:
Cambrian system Lake Superior sandstone.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series Gabbros, diabases, conglomerates, etc.
Unconformity.
Huronian series:
Greenstone intrusives and extrusives.
Upper Huronian (Animikie group).
Tyler slate.
Ironwood formation (iron-bearing).
Palms formation.
Unconformity.
Lower Huronian fBad River limestone.
ISunday quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Granite and granitoid gneiss.
Eruptive unconformity.
Keewatin series Greenstones and green srhista.
This chapter mainly deals with the Huronian series and especially with the upper Huronian
(Animikie group). The Huronian series for most of the district has a breadth varying from
less than half a mile to 2 or 3 miles.
The Huronian series has a simple structure. It consists of water-deposited sediments,
the origin of which has been for the most part determined. The rocks have simply been tilted
to the north at an angle which is convenient for determination of the succession of belts. They
are without foldmg so marked that the belts do not follow in regular order from south to north.
The series is terminated on -the east by the unconformably overlying horizontal Cambrian
sandstone and on the west by areas in which it has been entirely swept away by erosion, the
Keweenawan series coming tlirectly against the southern complex. It is marked off from the
underlying granitic ami gneissic rocks on the south and the Keweenawan series on the north
by great unconformities.
The major features of the topography of the district are dependent upon the relative
resistance of the formations. The strike of the harder fonnations largely controls the direction
of the ridges. Extending along the southern border of the Huronian rocks is a prominent
ridge, the crest of which in the western and eastern parts of the district is fonned by the iron-
bearing formation and in the central part of the district by the granitic rocks of the Archean.
The Keweenawan igneous rocks north of the Huronian mark a second distinct ridge, the so-called
Trap Range. Between these ridges, in the central two-thirds of the district, the soft Tyler
<• For further detailed description of the geology of this district see Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 19, and references there given.
47517°— VOL 52—11 15 225
226 GEOLOGY OK THE LAlvE SUPERIOR REGION.
slate, constitutps level tracts and swampy areas between the more resistant rocks to the south
and north.
The major lines of drainage are almost directly transverse to the ridges. All the important
streams of the district rise in the basement complex, traverse the entire Iluronian series, and
break through the Keweenawan Trap Range to the north on their wa\' to Lake Superior. Tiius
there are many notches in the east-west ridges. The elevation of the major portion of the dis-
trict is between 1,400 and 1,600 feet, but a few points reach an altitude of 1,700 or 1,800 feet.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
GENERAL STATEMENT.
The Archean rocks comprise the Keewatin series (greenstones and green schists) and the
Laurentian series (granites and gneisses), the latter being intrusive in the fonner. WTien the
relations were first appreciated for the Gogebic district the term "Mareniscan" was applied to
the greenstones and green scliist series." At that time it was not known that the rocks named
"Mareniscan" are equivalent to the Keewatua series of the Lake of the Woods district. Inas-
much as the relations between the Keewatin and the Laurentian were worked out by Lawson
for the two series of the Lake of the Woods before the tenn "Mareniscan" was proposed, Kee-
watin has precedence over "Mareniscan" as a general term.
KEEWATIN SERIES.
The Keewatin rocks are found in two principal areas, one in the central and the other in
the eastern part of the district. They are mainly scliistose basalts, for the most part fme
grained and compact. The strikes and dips of the scliistosity vary greatly, in tliis respect
contrasting strongly with the strikes and dips of the beds of the Iluronian sediments. The
chief mineral constituents of the Keewatin are quartz, a variet}^ of feldspar, hornblende, and
biotite, with chlorite, magnetite, sericite, and epidote as subordinate constituents, although
locally any one of these latter minerals may be very abundant. In places the schists have a
banded appearance and are true gneisses. For the most part the Keewatm scliists are com-
pletely crystalline and are allied to igneous rather than sedimentary rocks. Indeed, when the
Gogebic district was mapped no material was anywhere found which could be asserted to be
sedimentary, although patiently searched for. However, west of Sunday Lake a biotite schist
was found which was stated to present in thin section a "strong fragmental appearance."
Later work has showTi that south and east of this lake some of the material is banded, weathers
white, and appears to be true slate. It seems clear that here there is sedimentary material,
but it is difficult to draw a line between the sediments and the greenstones. It is to be noted
that the area in which the sediments are foimd is 2 miles from the Laurentian granite.
The existence of iron fomiation is reported in the Keewatin area near ^larenisco. This,
presumably, is analogous to the iron formation belts so common in the Keewatin in other parts
of the Lake Superior region. It has not been examined l)y the authors.
LAURENTIAN SERIES.
The Laurentian granite occurs m three large areas — in the western, central, and eastern
parts of the district. The granites of these areas, like all the other granites of the Laurentian
of the Lake Superior region, vary greatly in chemical composition, mineral content, and struc-
ture. In general, in the district under discussion the granites are of a somewhat acidic type.
However, in the central area, besides the granites there are syenites and even gabbros, and the
three rocks seem to grade into one another. Structurally the granites range from rocks which
have comparatively little schistosity to those which in general are strongly gneissoid. Aside
a Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 80, 1892, p. 490.
CAMBRIAN
KEWEENAWAN SERIES
LEGEN D
ALGONKIAN
HURONIAN SERIES
ARCHEAN
LAUftENTIAN SERIES KEEWATm SERIES
PENOKEE-GOGEBIO IKON DISTRICT. 227
from the various feldspars and quartz, the most abundant minerals are the micas and horn-
blende. There are other subordinate minerals, of which magnetite and chlorite are important.
In the dominant, more acidic phases of the rocks the alkaline feldspars, comprising orthoclase,
microclme, and acidic plagiociase, are invariably the cliief constituents and in many places com-
pose as much as three-fourths of the rock. The gneissoid varieties of the Laurentian may be in
part metamorphosed forms of granite. Correlative -with the structural changes are important
mincralogical changes. The most mteresting is that by which the feldspars alter into biotite
and quartz. Wliere this process has gone far little or no feldspar remains, this mineral being
replaced by a fuiely crystallme interlockmg mass of quartz and biotite. This results in a
somewhat coarsely crystallme feldspathic rock (normal granite), changing into a finely crystal-
line gneissoid biotite-quartz rock. It is interesting to note that identical changes of a feld-
spathic fragmental rock in the Tyler slate have formed a mica schist.
RELATIONS OF KEEWATIN AND LAURENTIAN SERIES.
The fact has already been mentioned that the Laurentian granites intrude the Keewatin
schists. It is characteristic for the district that with approach from the Keewatin rocks to
the contact of the Keewatm with the Laurentian granite the former rocks become coarser and
finally grade into coarse gneisses, not very different from granitoid gneisses. In many jDlaces
the granites are foxmd to cut through the schists in dikes and stocks. Indeed, there is between
the two series usually a zone of considerable breadth in wliich the two rocks are in approximately
equal proportions. In placing the boundary line between the series on the maps the plan has
been to mclude m the Keewatin all those rocks the hand specimens of wliich do not have a
strong granitic appearance. The relations between the two are plaiiily those which so charac-
' teristically obtaui between the Laurentian and Keewatin. The former rocks are batholithic
intrusions in the latter and have cut them intricately. Along the border the granites have pro-
foundly metamorphosed the Keewatin, producing marked exomorphic effects, so that the most
altered varieties of schists approximate the character of the granite.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER HURON IAN.
The lower Huronian in the Penokee-Gogebic district is represented only by the Smuday
quartzite and the Bad Iliver limestone.
SUNDAY QUARTZITE.
Liihology and distribution. — The Smiday quartzite is so named because of its exposures
east of Sunday Lake. It may prove to be the same as the Mesnard quartzite of the Marquette
district, but in the absence of defuiite proof that it is the same formation the new name Sunday
is here introduced for it. The only known exposures of the formation are those a short distance
east of Little Presque Isle Iliver and those near the Newport mine. The former are rather
extensive and the latter are small. Probably this quartzite is coextensive with the Bad River
limestone, although it is not usually exposetl. Wherever the Bad River limestone occurs there
is room between it antl the underlying Archean for the Smiday quartzite to be present. East
of Presque Isle River the formation is mainly quartzite, with a thickness of at least 150 feet.
Below the quartzite is a basal conglomerate, the fragments of wliich are largely derived fi-om the
immediately underlying Keewatin schists. This conglomerate for the most part is but a few
inches thick, but in places it has a thickness of 10 feet. The dip of the quartzite is about 30° N.
Near the Newport mine the Sunday quartzite is represented by a thm belt of conglomerate
clinging to the face of the granite. This conglomerate contains different kinds of granite,
228 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
porphyry, and various basic rocks. From tlio relations of tliis conglonacratc to tlie Palms
formatiojT it is believed to be tlic equivalent of the fonfjloiuerate east of Presquc Isle River.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The relati(jns of llie Sunday quartzite to the underlj^ing
formations, and especially to the Keewatin east of Presque Isle River, show that there is a great
unconformity between them. The actual contact between the two is beautifully exposed for
some distance. The scliistosity of the Keewatin abuts against the bedding of the quartzite
at various angles up to perpendicular. The Keewatin had been formed, metamorphosed, and
denuded before the deposition of the conglomerate. The Sunda}' quartzite grades upward into
the Bad Kiver hmestone.
BAD RIVER LIMESTONE.
Distribution. — The Bad River hmestone is so named because of its occurrence at Bad
River in the Penokee Gap section. The formation is present at several localities in the western
part of the district, at one place iii the central part, and in one area in the eastern part. The
eastern area shows the most extensive exposures of the district, the formation here being
continuous for several miles. Wlierever the formation is found it strikes approximately par-
allel to the formations of the upper Huronian, and the dip is always to the north, being as high
as 70° or 80° in the western part of the district and as low as 30° in the eastern part.
Lithology. — The formation is called a limestone because that is the predominant rock.
The limestone is heavily magnesian and in places approaches a dolomite. It commonly bears
sUicates, of wlxich tremolite is the most abimdant, but chlorite and sericite are not rmcommon.
The rock is very sihceous. The coarsest varieties of the silica are quartz, but chert is more
common. In many places the silica is closely intermingled with the dolomite. In other places
it occurs in bands varying from a fraction of an inch to a much greater width, antl in one place
a band of siliceous material 45 or 50 feet wide was observed. Thus the chert and limestone are
intermingled and iiiterstratified. The cherty limestone is a water-deposited sediment. Whether
the original carbonate was of chemical or organic origin we have no definite evidence, but there
is no more reason to suppose that life was not concerned in the deposition of tliis cherty hme-
stone than of those of later age.
MetamorpMsm. — The Bad River limestone has been much metamorphosed since its deposi-
tion. During its metamorphism the silica recrystalhzed. It was concentrated into bands.
It was rearranged into veinlike forms. During these changes a part of the silica may have
been introduced from an extraneous source or at least from parts of the formation now removed
by erosion. The abundant tremolite is evidence that the metamorphism took place under deep-
seated contlitions when the silica united with the calcium and magnesium to form sihcates,
the carbon dioxide being released at the same time. This is an anamorphic change which took
place with decrease of volume.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The relations of the Bad River hmestone to the Simday
quartzite have already been considered. It is probable that everywhere it grades down into
this formation, but whether it does so or not the distribution of the limestone at various phices
along the southern border of the Huronian, with a strike parallel to the upper Huronian, thus
contrasting strongly with the varying strikes and dips of the green scliist and gneisses, leaves no
doubt that between the Archean and the Bad River limestone there is a great imconformity.
Indeed, as chemical sedimentation at several points for a distance of 60 or 70 miles followed so
promptly after the burial of the southern complex below the sea, it appears probable that when
the limestone was laid down the Archean was reduced to an approximate plane. The lack of
continuity of the limestone formation is due to the erosion which took place after its deposition
before the lowest member of the upper Huronian was laid down. Evidences of this erosion
are given under the desciiption of the relations of tlie Palms formation to adjacent formations.
If formations later than tiie Bad River limestone belonging to the lower Huronian were depos-
ited, they were removed by erosion before the deposition of the upper Huronian, as was the
larger part of the Bad River hmestone itself. The limestone above the quartzite in the western
area has a thickness of at least 200 feet, and to the west the tluckuess is not less than 300 feet.
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT. 229
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
GENEKAL STATEMEITT.
The upper Huronian comprises the Pahiis, Ironwood, and Tyler formations. These
formations extend continuously from Presque Isle River, east of Sunday Lake, several miles
west of Bad River. They constitute a northward-dipping monocUne. Tliis monochne has
various minor pUcations which give local variations to the strikes and dips, but they are neither
abrupt nor large, the extreme variations in strike usually being between N. 60° W. and N.
60° E. At various places there are cross faults, the most notable of which are those at Penokee
Gap, with a throw of at least 900 feet, at Potato River, with a throw of 280 feet, and west of
Sunday Lake. Detailed studies of the iron-bearing formation, made in connection with the
exploitation of the iron ore, show the presence of very numerous small transverse faults as
well as numerous longitudinal faults, with hades parallel to the bedding, or nearly so. The
latter were detected by the displaced dikes. Part of the faulting was prior to Keweenawan
extrusions because it does not displace the Keweenawan. A notable instance of tlxis appears
in the great transverse fault just west of Sunday Lake. Other faults are clearly post-Kewee-
nawan, for they affect both Huronian and Keweenawan beds.
PALMS FORMATION.
Distribution. — The Palms formation is given tliis name because it occurs in typical develop-
ment south of the Palms mine. It comprises the lowest of the upper Huronian rocks of the
Penokee-Gogebic district.
It constitutes a well-marked zone traceable tlirough its entire extent, except in the volcanic
area at the east end. It strikes on the average about N. 70° E. Its dip is everywhere north,
varjang from about 40° to 75°, the usual dips being between 55° and 65°. For the larger
portion of the district the formation is 400 to 500 feet thick, but east of Sunday Lake it is
tliicker, the maximum being 800 feet.
Lithology. — The Palms formation consists of three members, of which the lowest is a thin
layer of conglomerate, the central and dominant mass of the formation is a clayey slate, and
the uppermost is a quartzite. The conglomerate is generally less than 10 feet thick and in
many places is not more than 1 to 3 feet. The quartzite layer at the top is about 50 feet tliick.
The conglomerate varies with the character of the rock with which the Pahns formation is
in contact. Where it is next to the Bad River limestone, as would be expected, there are in it
very abundant fragments of chert and hmestone, but with these are also granite, gneiss, and
schist from the Archean. Where the contacts are with the Keewatin, as at Potato River
and the west branch of Montreal River, the dominant fragments of the conglomerate are
derived from the schist. W^here the formation is in contact with the granite, as in the central
part of the area, the dominant fragments are from tlus formation, but in places — as, for instance,
south of the Palms mine — with these fragments there are also pebbles of jasper, chert, and quartz.
The central part of the formation is a pelite. It has many facies, varying from fuie-
grained clayey slates through novacuUtes to graywackes. For the most part the alterations
through wliich the pelite has gone are mainly metasomatic ones, such as quartz enlargement
and the alteration of the feldspar to other minerals, especially biotite, chlorite, and quartz.
In the western part of the district the feldspathic alteration and recrystallization are sufficiently
important so that in places the rocks have become chloritic and biotitic slates. This greater
metamorphism is doubtless connected with the intrusions so characteristic of this part of the
district. For the most part there seems to be Hthologic correspondence of the main mass of
the slate with the immediately underlying Archean rocks, the slate being substantially the
same whether north of the Keewatin schists or north of the Laurentian granite.
The upper part of the formation is a psammite which has been indurated by the process
of cementation to a clean, typical, vitreous quartzite. As this quartzite approaches the over-
lying iron-bearing formation it becomes stained with oxide of iron and at the contact it is
commonly of a deep brownish-red color.
230 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Relations to adjacent Jmrnations. — In giviiit; (he relations of tlie Palms to the inferior forma-
tions it is necessary to consider separately its relations with the Bad River Jinicstone of the
lower Huronian and -with the Archean.
The fact that where the belt of conglomerate at the base of the Palms formation lies
above the Bad River hmestone it bears much detritus from that hmestone sliows that the
limestone after deposition became indurated and was eroded before Palms time. In general,
the strikes and the dips of the two formations are approximately parallel, as are tho.sc of corre-
lated formations in the Menonunee district, but it is plain that the erosion was sulhcient to
remove the major portion of the Bad River limestone and also any later formations that may
have been deposited in the lower Huronian. The lack of marked discordance in the bedding
of the Bad River limestone and the Pahns formation is no evidence that the time gap between
the two was not long enough to have produced a pronounced discordance elsewhere, for the
Penokee district at tliis time may have been distant from areas of important folding and
thrusting wliich elsewhere may have occurred.
Between the Palms formation and the Archean there is a great unconformity. The proofs
of tliis unconformity may be summarized as follows: First, the Palms formation and the other
sedimentary formations of the upper Huronian strike with considerable uniformity across the
country, being here in contact with one variety of the Archean, there with another, everywhere
keeping their course, nowhere being penetrated or interfered with by any of the Keewatin
or Laurentian rocks, whether scliists, gneisses, or granites. Second, the Archean rocks are
either massive ones wloich are presumably igneous or schists and gneisses in which the extreme
of foliation and crystalline character is found, whereas the overlying upper Huronian rocks
are plainly water-deposited sediments. Third, in a dozen places or more above the Archean
are basal conglomerates or recomposed rocks which show the unconformable contacts. The
detritus in each place is dominantly the same in character as the rock on w4iich it rests. Where
the inferior rock is granite it must be inferred that deep erosion must have exposed it at the
surface prior to the deposition of the conglomerate. \^Tiere the basement rocks are Keewatin
green scliists their foliation had been tleveloped and has been truncated before Pahns time.
This is well illustrated at Potato River, where the conglomerate contains large* flat fragments
of green schists which have their scliistosity lying parallel to the bedding of the Pahns, which
is at right angles to the scliistosity of the Keewatin below. Fourth, the horizons of the upper
Huronian with wliich the Archean is in contact are witliin a zone not more than 300 or 400
feet thick at most. Tliis is the clearest sort of evidence that the underlying rocks were reduced
to a peneplain before the beginning of the deposition of the Palms formation. From the
foregoing fact it is clear that the break between the Palms formation and the Archean is profound.
It included the time represented by the unconformity between the lower Huronian and the
Archean, the time retjuired for the (lep<3sition of the lower Huronian, and the time between the
lower Huronian and the Palms formation.
IRONWOOD FORMATION.
Distribution. — The Ironwood formation was given tliis name from the fact that near the
town of Ironwood it is well developed, and in this vicinity occur the more important mines.
The formation is coextensive in its distribution with the underlying Palms formation. Its
strike and dip are conformable with those of the Palms. The belt lor the greater part of the
district has a breadth of 800 to 1,000 feet. West of Sunday Lake the surface width of the
formation is greater" and north and east of Sunday Lake the belt is narrower. Faults cross and
follow the bods. These aflFect the distribution of the ores and the iron-bearing formation,
as described on page 237. The average tliickness of the formation is about 850 feet. In the
extreme eastern part of the district, where volcanic action prevailed through much or all of
upper Huronian time, the Ironwood formation is broken into tliin and impure belts. West
of Sunday Lake it is divided into two or more belts by intercalated (luartzito and fjuartz slate
beds. In other parts of the district, notably near Upson, the formation is divided b}* slate
layers. In the main, in the western part of the district, except for the gaps whore the streams
o Recent work seems to show this widening to be due to pre-Keweenawan overthrust folding and faulting from the west.
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT. 231
break through it, the Ironvvootl formation is a continuous ridgo, and it was tliis range which
first attracted the attention of explorers at Penokee Gap and vicinity. In the central part of
the district the formation is softer and the prominent features are made by the Archean rocks
to the south. Still farther east, beyond Sunday Lake, the Ironwood formation again consti-
tutes prominent bluffs.
LitJiology. — The Ironwood is the iron-bearing formation of the district. In the memoir
on the Penokee iron-bearing series (Monograph XIX) it w-as simply called the iron-bearing
formation, without a geographic name. The greater portion of the formation contains more
than 25 per cent metallic iron and there are considerable thicknesses in which the amount
of iron averages 37 per cent. (See p. 238.) The ore bodies contain a higher percentage of
iron.
The Ironwood formation consists of four main varieties of rock — (1) slaty and commonly
cherty iron carbonate and ferrodolomite, (2) ferruginous slates and ferruginous cherts, (3)
actinolitic and magnetitic slates, and (4) black slates.
Tlie iron-bearing carbonates are usually found only near the upper part of the formation,
where they have been protected by the Tyler slate. The ferruginous slates and ferruginous
cherts are characteristic of the central iron-producing part of the district, and the actinolitic
and magnetitic slates are characteristic of the western and eastern parts of the district. The
latter also form a belt 20 to 300 feet wide bordering the Keweenawan rocks on the north. In
the intermediate areas there are of course gradations between the ferruginous slates and ferru-
ginous cherts and the actinohtic and magnetitic slates, as there are also gradations between
the cherty iron carbonates and the ferruginous slates and ferruginous cherts. Black slates
form thin intercalated layers in the iron-bearing formation. Quartzite is also found in layers
up to 100 feet thick well up from the base of the formation near Sunday Lake.
The slaty and cherty iron-bearing carbonates are composed largely of iron carbonate and
chert, but with these materials are various amounts of calcium carbonate and magnesium car-
bonate. Recent reexamination has shown that in these rocks there are also subordinate amounts
of greenalite. With these important constituents are other minor constituents, largely second-
ary, such as limonite, magnetite, carbonaceous and graphitic matter, iron pyrites, and rarely
fragmental quartz. The carbonate is both fine and coarse grained and both origmal and
secondary. Coarse-grained recrystallized carbonate is especiallj' abundant near the contact of
the Keweenawan in the Sunday Lake area.
The cherty iron-bearing carbonate was the original rock of the iron formation. The origin
of tliis class of rock is fully discussed in another place (pp. 499 et seq.) and therefore the subject
will not be considered here. From it the ferruginous cherts and actinolitic cherts have been pro-
duced. The actinolitic and magnetitic cherts were formed under deep-seated conditions largely
through the influence of the Keweenawan intrusive rocks, and especially of the great western
laccolith. These changes are anamoi'phic ones, which mainly took place in Keweenawan time.
Tlie ferruginous slates and ferruginous cherts formed from the cherty iron carbonates by
katamorphic changes largely in the belt of weathering and also in part in the belt of cementa-
tion. These changes were mainly post-Keweenawan, after erosion brought the iron-bearing
formation to the surface, and they have continued to the present day. Previously formed
actinolitic and magnetitic rocks were in a much more refractory condition than the unaltered
cherty iron carbonates and have been little affected by the alterations of the zone of katamor-
phism.
The ferruginous slates and ferruginous cherts have silica as their predominant constituent
in various forms of crystallization, from amorphous through partly crystalline and chalcedonic
material to finely crystalline quartz. With the silica are the various oxides of iron. Hematite
and brown hydrated hematite are especially prevalent. Limonite is common and some mag-
netite occurs. Where the hematite is in large quantity, to the exclusion of the hydrous oxides,
the rocks are genuine jaspers; but this variety is rather unusual in the district. The rocks
vary in their stratification from the regular lamination of a slate to irregularity. In many
places the laminae have the appearance of having been ilisrupted and recemented.
232 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The actinolitic, griineritic, and magnetitic cherts and slates, like the rocks of the second
variety, have quartz as their (h)ininant constituent. Tliis f|iiartz is crystalline throughout
and clearly nonclastic. The actinolite varies in amount from a verj' little to a constituent
of great prominence. The iron oxides are mainly in the form of hematite and magnetite.
The black slates are carbonaceous fragmental slates in la3'ers in the iron-bearing formation.
These exceptionally form the foot wall of the ore deposits. (See p. 242.)
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Ironwood formation rests conformably upon the
Palms formation. The change from the clastic quartzite to the nonclastic iron-beaiing
formation is astonisliingly abrupt. Generally it can not be said that there is any evidence of
the transition between them. Locally a thin conglomerate marks the contact. For some
reason the clastic deposits of the quartzite ceased and the nonclastic deposits of the Ironwood
formation began. Above, the Ironwood formation passes gradually into the Tyler slate.
TYLER SLATE.
Distribution. — The Tyler slate was given its name from the t3'pical occurrence of the
formation along Tylers Fork. It extends from a point about 6 miles west of Bad River
nearly to Sunday Lake — that is, it is confined to the central two-thirds of the district. In
breadth the formation varies up to 2^ miles at Tylers Fork. The strike of the formation is
parallel to that of the iron-bearing formation below. Its dip is also similar to that of the iron
formation. At this wider part its dip is from 70° to 75°. It apparently follows, therefore,
that for the central part of the district — that is, from Bad River to Montreal River — this forma-
tion has a tliickness ranging from 7,000 to 11,000 feet. It is plainly the great formation of the
district. It is probable that minor plications partly explain this apparent tliickness.
Lithology. — Study of the formation as a whole shows that it is dominantly a pelite but
locally it is a psammite, including both arkoses and feldspathic sandstones. There is a general
connection between the character of the rocks to the south and those of the slate belt adjacent.
The greater part of the belt has received its material in part from the granitic and in part from
the schistose areas; the part of the belt west of Penokee Gap has received nearly all its material
from the syenitic granite to the south and west. The different varieties of rocks of the Tyler
slate may be grouped under three heads — (1) mica schists and mica slates; (2) graywackes and
graywacke slates; (3) clay slates or phyllites. Each of these main types has the various phases
shown by the follo\\ang tabulation:
Mica schist and mica slate:
iMuscovitic.
Biotitic.
Musco\'itic and biotitic.
Micaceous and chloritic fChloritic and biotitic.
IChloritic and sericitic or muscovitio.
Graywacke and graywacke slate:
Micaceous jBiotitic.
iBiotitic and muscovitic.
Micaceous and chloritic Chloritic and biotitic.
fChloritic.
Chloritic JMagnetitic and chloritic.
[Ferruginous and chloritic.
Clay slate fChloritic.
\Chloritic and magnetitic.
It is not necessary to describe in detail the different varieties of these rocks, except as to
their alterations.
Metamorphism. — In the monograph on the Penokee iron-bearing series the alterations of
this slate are discussed. "^ It is there shown that each of the varieties of rocks mentioned above
has developed from pclitcs and psammites almost wholly by mctasomatic changes witliin the
formation itself, without the addition or subtraction of material from an extraneous source.
a Hon. U. S. Geo!. Survey, vol. 19, 1892, pp. 332-345.
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT. 233
In general, the eastern part of tlie formation is less altered than the western part. Here
the prevailing rocks are clay slates, graywackes, and graywacke slates. From tlie central to
the western part of the district the rocks become more crystalline, and at the extreme west end,
especially west of Penokee Gap, only mica slates and mica schists are found. Where the rocks
are much metamorphosed conlierite is sparingly developed.
The parts of the Tyler slate wluch contain large fragmental particles of quartz are those
in which the clastic character is easiest to recognize, for the grains of quartz everywhere
remain in their entirety. It may be and indeed it is usually true that they have undergone a
second growth and have thus become angular; but generally the original cores are easily dis-
covered. In the nearly pure feldspar sediments, on the other hand, where the feldspar has
changed to other minerals, it is more diilicult and in specimens of the most crystalline mica
schist impossible to make out the original fragmental character of tlie rock.
On the whole, the major modifications of the formation are those of the zone of anamorphism
rather than the zone of katamorphism. This is what would naturally be expected, for at the time
these alterations took place the rocks were buried to an unknown deptli below the overlying
Keweenawan rocks.
As the processes by which a clastic rock alters into a fine-grained crystalline mica schist were
first described in detail with regard to the Pcnokee-Gogebic district," the principles involved
in the development of this particular rock will be summarized here. As already indicated, the
setliments from which the mica scliists were derived were very feldspatliic. Without going
into details, the process which has resulted in the development of mica schists has been the
alteration of the feldspar into mica, both muscovite and biotite, with the simultaneous separa-
tion of quartz. For the change into muscovite the feldspar itself contains all the necessary
constituents. For the change into biotite a certain amount of iron and magnesium are neces-
^ry. For the iron it is not so clifRcult to account, as the sediments are ferruginous. In some
f^aces also the sediments contain more or less carbonate, and doubtless from tliis source has
been derived at least a part of tlie necessary magnesium. At the tune of the recrystallization
tlie newly formmg mica flakes developed with a parallel arrangement. At the same time the
quartz recrystallized. The total result was to produce from a somewhat coarsely crystalline
arkose a finely laminated mica slate or mica schist.
The Penokee-Gogebic district is an exceptionally good one in which to work out the changes
from the little-altered pelite to a mica schist, because of the very gradiial change in the amount
of alteration in passing from the central to the western part of the district.
At the time the Penokee-Gogebic monograph was written no reason was assigned for the
crystalline character of the rocks at the west end of the district. Later studies on meta-
morphism have led us to connect tliis alteration with the great laccoHth of the Keweenawan
gabbro, wliich, in the western part of the district, occurs m contact with and cutting the
Huronian rocks. The intrusion of tliis rock essentially parallel to the bedding would result in
great pressure, as well as in raising the temperature, and it was under these conditions that the
recrystallization took place. The absence of similar alterations m the central and eastern
parts of the district is explained by the fact that there immediately overlying the slate are the
surface Keweenawan lavas, which are locally interstratified with sandstones. It is plain that
the alterations of the pelites to mica slates and mica schists took place in Keweenawan time.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Tyler slate rests conformably on the iron-bearing
Ironwood formation. It is overlain unconformably by the rocks of the Keweenawan series.
UPPER HTJRONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP) OF THE EASTERN AREA.
In the eastern part of the district — that is, from about 6 miles east of Sunday Lake to
Gogebic Lake — the upper Huronian rocks have an exceptional character. In the larger part
of the district the conditions were those of quiet sedimentation, but in this eastern area
o Van Hise, C. R., Upon the origin of the mica scliists and black mica slates otthe Penokee-Gogebic iron-bearing series: Am. Jour. Sci.,3d ser.,
TOl. 31, 1886, pp. 453-459.
t>
234 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
throiipjliout the greater part of the upper Iluroiiiaii there was eontinuous volcanic action. In
conse()uence the rocks are hiva flows, volcanic tull's, conglomerates, agglomerates, and slates,
with all sorts of gradations, just such as one would expect if a volcano arose in a sea and
volcanic action continued for a great period. Naturally in this area it is not possible to map
any continuous sedimentary belts. The dominant rocks are greenstone conglomerates and
lavas and massive eruptives. The uppermost formation for the extreme eastern part of the
area is a ferruginous slate. This ferruginous slate, though dominantly clastic, contains narrow
bands of nonclastic sediments, such as chert, chertj^ ferrodolomite, ferrodolomitic chert. It is
believed that the ferruginovis slate is probably at the same horizons as the Ironwood formation
to the west and that its dominant fragmental character is due to the presence in tliis area of
one or more volcanic mountains which rose above the water and upon wliich the waves were
at work after the close of the period of active volcanic outbreaks.
KEWEENAW AN SERIES.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
Rocks of the Keweenawan series lie north of and are coextensive with the upper Huronian
rocks; indeed, to the west they extend far beyond tlie westernmost kno\\'n outcrop of the
Huronian. It is not the purpose here to describe this series more than is sufficient to show
its relations to the Huronian. It has already been indicated that for most of the district the
appearance of the Keweenawan is marked by a distinct range Ivnown as the Trap Range. For
the eastern part the Keweenawan rocks first encountered in traveling north are ordinary
basic, amygdaloidal lava flows characteristic of that series. One bed follows upon another
and it is easy to ascertam then strike and dip. These bedded lava flows may be very conven-
iently seen adjacent to Sunday Lake. Their strike and dip are easily determinable as almost
exactly parallel to the beds of the underlying Huronian.
In the central part of the district the Keweenawan rocks immediately above the Tvler
slate are sandstones and conglomerates. These are seen in Micliigan north of Bessemer and in
Wisconsin a few miles west of the State boundary. Above the sedimentary beds of the lower
Keweenawan follow lavas similar to those which occur farther east.
In the western part of the district the sediments and bedded lavas of the Keweenawan are
replaced by the great plutonic basal gabbro laccolitli of Wisconsm, analogous to the laccolith
of the north shore of Lake Superior.
RELATIONS TO ADJACENT SERIES.
The Keweenawan series reposes upon tlie upjier Huronian (^Vnimikie group) imconformably.
As the two series are nearly conformable in strike and dip, this fact was only slowlj^ appreciated.
The proof of the unconformity rests entirely upon broad field relations. In the central part of
the district the Keweenawan is upon a great slate formation (the Tyler slate) wMch has a
maximum tliickness of at least several thousand feet. At the east and west ends of the ilistrict
the Keweenawan cuts diagonally across these slates and comes into contact with the iron-
bearing Ironwood formation. In the west end of the district this relation might be supposed
to be explained by the intrusion of the Keweenawan laccolith, but this can not apply to the
eastern part of the district, for there the lower beds of the Keweenawan are the surface lava
flows. The time gap between the Huronian series and the Keweenawan series must have been
sufficient for a widespread orographic movement and tleep denutlation.
As the Keweenawan series is largely composed of igneous rocks and rests upon the Huronian
series, naturally the latter has been extensively intruded by the former. The intrusives in the
Huronian series, so far as known, are mainly doleritcs. ('onsideral)le masses of them in tlu'
eastern and western ends of tlic district appear to follow rouglily parallel to the range and
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT. 235
seem to be intruded sheets or laecoliths. Some of them may be surface flows contemporaneous
in origin with adjacent Iluronian sediments. In addition to those intercalated masses, numer-
ous dikes cut the Huronian formations. These dikes are found in all formations, but they have
an especial significance and importance in connection with the iron ore. (See pp. 235-238.)
In that part of the district which has been the seat of mining operations a large number
of these dikes cut the containing formations perpendicularly to the bedding. That these
dolerite ilikes are the avenues tlu'ough wliich have passed from deep witliin the earth the vast
amount of material which formed the overlying basic volcanic flows of the Keweenawan series
of the Trap Range to the north can hardly be doubted, for in chemical composition the lavas of
this range are practically identical with the dikes. (See pp. 404-405.) In general, the dolerite
dikes are very fresh, except in the lower parts of the Ironwood formation, where they have
been subject for a long time to the action of percolating waters. Analyses of the latter rocks
show that they have undergone extensive changes, which have been referred to in cormection
with the origin of the iron ores.
By far the greatest of the intrusive masses is the great gabbro laccolith at the west of
Bad River. This was at first supposed to be a great basal flow, but all their later studies lead
the writers to believe that it is a plutonic intrusive introduced comparatively late in Keweenawan
time, the major dimensions of the mtrusion being nearly parallel to the beds of the Huronian
and the lava flows of the Keweenawan, which were separated by the inwelling mass of gabbro.
CAMBRIAN SANDSTONE.
The Cambrian sandstone is found only in the northeastern part of the district, near Gogebic
Lake. It is there found as a flat-lymg reddish sandstone, known as the Lake Superior sand-
stone. It rests in horizontal position against the Keweenawan, the Huronian, and the base-
ment complex. In one place a basal conglomerate bears detritus from all the lower forma-
tions. It is plain that during and after Keweenawan time the Huronian and Keweenawan
series were turned up steeply. Lofty ranges, which must have been formed then, were removed
by denudation, and the Cambrian sandstone was deposited. Therefore a great unconformity
separates the Cambrian sandstone and all the earlier series.
THE IRON ORES OF THE PENOKEE-GOGEBIC DISTRICT.
By the authors and \V. J. Mead,
DISTRIBUTION, STRTJCTUBE, AND RELATIONS.
The iron-ore deposits occupy part of the district, extending from a point about 2 miles
east of Sunday Lake in Michigan to within 4 miles of Potato River in Wisconsin, a distance
of about 26 miles. Ore has recently been developed in sections 15 and 21, T. 47 N., R. 43 W.,
near Gogebic Lake, far to the east of the previously kno\vn deposits.
The iron-ore deposits constitute about 1 per cent of the area of the iron formation. This
percentage is less than that in the Mesabi, which is 8 per cent. However, the vertical dimensions
are much greater than in the Mesabi district. Ores have already been found to extend to a
depth of 2,500 feet, one of the largest ore bodies in the district now being known at that depth.
In both the east and west ends of the Gogebic district the character of the formation has
been influenced by intrusives, with the result that the iron oxides are largely magnetite dis-
seminated tlirough the formation and not concentrated to a commercial extent.
The ore deposits come to the surface most largely along the north-middle slopes, locally
on the lower slopes, of the topogi'aphic feature known as the Gogebic Range.
In the Gogebic district the u'on-bearmg Ironwood formation dips with the other forma-
tions of the upper Huronian toward the north at angles averaging about 65°. The under-
lying rock is the quartzite, at the top of the Palms formation, and it thus forms the foot wall of
the iron-bearing formation; the overlying formation is the Tyler slate. Slate and quartzite
236
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
also form Lnterbedded layers in the iron-bearing formation. Numerous greenstone dikes oi
Keweenawan age cut the entire series in such a manner that the intersection of the dikes with
the bedding usually pitches to the east. The intersections of the dikes with imjxTvious layers,
principally cjuartzite of the foot wall, but also slate layers within the iron-bearing formation,
constitute eastward-pitching troughs at angles from 15° to 30°, in wliicli most of the deposits
are found (fig. 2S).
Westward-pitching dikes intersecting with eastward-pitching dikes or continuous with
them, and both intersecting foot-wall quartzite, form canoe-shaped basins for the ore, as illus-
trated by the Aurora, Pabst, and Newport deposits. East of the Bessemer the main dike in the
Tilden mine has an eastward pitch
and the main dike in the Pahnsmine
has a westward pitch.
On the south the foot wall of the
ore is therefore generally quartzite,
locally slate, and on the north the
ore rests against greenstone dikes.
Slate foot walls are seen at the Iron
Belt, Mikado, Brotherton, and Sun-
day Lake mines, from 250 to 2,000
feet north of the quartzite foot wall.
The ore deposits are generally
sharply defined along the foot walls
and the dike rocks, but in many
places vary upward by imperceptible
stages into the ferruginous cherts of
the iron-bearing Ironwood forma-
tion, ^^liere there are a number of
parallel dikes, one below the other,
there may be several ore bodies one
below another — as, for instance, at
the Asldanil and Norrie mines. (See
fig. 29, a and h.) After many years
of mining on upper dikes in the New-
port mine one of the largest deposits
of the district has been found on a
lower dike. The main Norrie dike
is over .30 feet thick. The main
Aurora-Pabst-Newport dike is from.
20 to 25 feet thick. The mam Colby
tlike is over 90 feet tliick. "\Miere a
strong dike breaks intomany stringers
at a depth, as in the Colby mine, the
ore body is also likely to be broken
up and become small and perhaps
worthless. The dike rocks are altered
to soapstone or paint rock along tlieir
contacts with the ore l)y tlie leaching
of the bases.
An ore deposit is likely to have its maximum depth m the apex of a trougli, and from tlus
apex a belt of ore may extend to the north along the dike and to the south along the foot
wall. In many instances the ore bodies follow the foot walls almost exclusively, as at the
Norrie mine. (See fig. 29, c.) Usually where the deposits follow both the quartzite and tUkes
the former is larger and more continuous than the latter. Where an ore deposit follows both
it may divide before reaching the surface into two parts separated by rock, called the south and
ifc
0 100 JOO 400 Feet
FlGUKE 28.— Cross section showing the occurrence of ore In pitching troughs formed by
(lilies and quartzite foot wall, in the Gogebic district. Made up from mine plats and
slightly generalized.
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT.
237
north veins of the mines, but where such deposits are traced below the surface they unite into a
sino-le body. The ore grades above or laterally into the ferruginous chert or ferruginous slat«.
The conspicuous associa- ^ =• »
S g-^ g 5P 2 'S
S I I I g &
s B' ■■ -"" fi 1
'^ E. ^. -^ ^ lo
= » a s- 2 S
P) cr n*. ^ fT c
- ■ - o ^ -o
— . p- o
li
B
s>
rV
1 s
ffi
2". **j fB
O "1
p o a
o B fr
-•a S
& B- E
O <
5 S >^ g-
" 1=^ I' -
^ ft M ™
2, S o s
"• "> a °
c P £.
o "a "•
t3 B g.
'^ ^ 3
.?
Si O '
rr ^ ^ w
O 7Q to ^
^ ■ p cr c
-- §■ 1 1
o ^ s- ^
2, 3- 5 cr
^ ~ ?
p
Q T E _
? S a- „
&J I— - f^
D- P 0 o ^
' •- m :?
p O f
Pence -
Hennepin
Montreal
Moore and Jo
Bourne
Ottawa
Superior
West Gary
Gary
Windsor
Germania
Minnewawa
Ashland
O
o
P 3 ^
p
tion of the ores with pitclung
troughs formed by the inter-
section of dikes and foot-wall
quartzite for a considerable
time obscured the importance
of fracturing in localizing the
ore deposits. From evidence
now available it seems likely
that tlus factor also is of
great consequence. An ex-
amination of nune sections
taken almost at random in
the district shows ore cutting
tlu-ough the ferruginous cherts
and dikes in a most h-regular
way and quite independent of
the pitching troughs. Much
of it may be directly con-
nected with brecciation, fis-
suring, or faulting to be seen
in the ore and adjacent rocks.
It is altogether likely that
more fractures exist than are
known, because the concen-
tration of the ores is of a
nature to obscure evidences
of them. There are fault
planes both parallel with and
intersecting the bedding. The
displacements have both hori-
zontal and vertical compo-
nents. The faults intersecting
the bedding were first recog-
nized because of the ease of
detecting the displacements in
the bedding. Those parallel
to the bedding were for a long
time not observed, and proba-
bly there are still many to be
detected because of the diffi-
culty of distinguisliing the
evidence. They may be deter-
mined only from the displace-
ments of the cUkes, and as the
dikes are numerous and of
varying tliickness a consider-
able amount of ground must
be opened up before the va-
rious fractured dikes may be correlated. The ore in many places lies between the displaced
edges of the dike. At the Pabst mine the ore follows down over the broken and displaced ends
of the faulted dike toward another dike below, where it again develops into a large body.
-I (t -■' o
§-•00
3 S"S p
P 2. ;rJ G
■a -a ^ S.
a£ S
P 2.
T! o "2.
C3 CO O P
§ S o S- '«
I » ^ 52;
■g SB § g
w P P ^ C^
s-B
P- EO
5* {TO
tr o
CO OQ
5 &-
B- 2 ^ i
. a — a:
SS 3
■ o £•?
U
CO
w H „
o- =5-
: So .
Tyler Fork
Annie
Shores
iron Belt
Atlantic
Laura
Caledonia
Imion
Emma and
Daylight
Nome
East Norrie
Aurora
Aurora and Pabst
Newport
Wisconsin and
Geneva
Royal
Puritan
Ironton
Winona
Jackpot and
Yale
Colby g
Tiiden
Palms
>
2
EureKa
Black River
Section 8
Chicago
Pike
Brotherton
Sunday Lake
Iron Cnief
Castile
238
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOIl REGION.
Another important factor governing the location of tlie ore deposits has only recently been
clearly recognized. Certain of the iron formation layers were originally ricJKir in iron than
others, and the ores show a distinct tendency to follow these rich original beds. In some
d;>posits, like those of tlic Mikado, Brothcrton, and Rvmday Lake mines, this seems to be a con-
trolling factor, though the ores of the Brotherton and Sunday Lake mines and less certainly of
tJic ^Vlikado min? have suffered more or less secondary concentration along intersections of dike
and foot wall and along fissures.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE FERRUGINOUS CHERTS AND ORES.
The following analj'ses represent two completL' sections through tlie iron-bearmg forma-
tion. In the Norrie mine a crosscut, extending from foot-wall quartzite to the hanging-wall
slate, entirely in ferruginous chert, was sampled in five samples, each sample representing
approximately 120 feet of crosscut. In the Atlantic mine a crosscut m feiTuginous chert extend-
ing for several hundred feet across the formation was sampled. Anaylses are by Lerch Brothers,
Hibbing, Minn.
Partial analysis of fcrruijinous chert, Gogebic range.
[Samples dried at 212° F.)
Fe.
SiO".
1'.
AljOa.
Volatile
matter.
35.33
23.39
30.03
27.02
26.81
29.20
43.78
61.22
51.80
54.57
54. 02
52.07
0.143
.034
.037
.040
.074
.037
1.54
.71
1.09
1.78
1.94
.88
1.42
.85
Norrie mine No. 3 . . . .
1.48
1.67
Norrie mine No. 5 . . . . .
1.64
2.89
28.74
53.11
.062
1.32
1.66
It is believed that this average represents closely the true average composition of the
unaltered ferruginous cherts.
A large part of the ferruginous cherts shows partial alterations to ore. An average of 490
analyses, representing 5,S90 feet of drilling in tliis phase of the formation, wliich is probably
nearer to the true average of the formation, is 36.65 per cent.
The average composition of the Gogebic ores for the years lOOfi and 1909, calculated from
average cargo analyses for each grade, each analysis being weighted in proportion for the tonnage
represented, is given in the following table :
Average composition of ore mined on the Gogebic range in 1906 and 1909.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.).
Analysis of dried ore:
Iron
Phosphorus
Silica
Alumina
Manganese
Lime
Magnesia
Sulphur
Loss by ignition
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT.
239
Range in percentage of each constituent in Gogebic ores mined in 1909, as shown hij average cargo analyses.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.) 4. 51 to 15. 75
Analysis of di'icd ore:
Iron 43. 70 to G3. 40
Phosphorus 027 to .206
Silica 4.07 to 23. 52
Alumina 58 to 3. 29
Mangane.se 20 to 7.20
Lime 0 to .87
Magnesia 01 to .79
Sulphur ■. OOG to
Loss on ignition .
FERRIC OXIDE
.022
.56 to 5.80
MINOR SILICA
CONSTITUENTS
Principally alumina and
water of hydration
Figure 30.— Triangular diagram showing cliemical composition of various phases of Gogebic ores and ferruginous cherts in terms ot ferric oxide,
silica, and minor constituents (essentially alumina and combined water). These analyses include all of the ores and cherts shown in figure 32
and also a number of additional analyses.
In figure 30 the triangular method of j)httting is employed to show the chemical composition
of the various phases of the chert and ore studied. (See p. 182 for explanation of diagram.)
240
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
MINERALOGICAL COMPOSITION OF THE FEKKUGINOUS CHEKTS AND ORES.
The approximate miiu'iiil comijositioii of the ores and clicrts wa.s cak'idatcd from tlie
chemical analyses, as follows:
Approriinate mineral composition of average ferruginous chert and average ore of the Gogebic range.
Average
chert.
Average ore.
1909
Hematite (i lu-luding a small amount ot magnetite)
Limonite (other hydrated iron oxides calcnlated as llnionite)
Quartz
Kaolin
Other minerals
34.00
8.20
51.63
3.3S
2.82
73. SO
14.70
4.31
4.89
2.60
100.00
100.00
77.25
9.30
5.81
4.70
2.94
100.00
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS.
GENERAL APPEARANCE.
The iron ore of the Gogebic district is a soft red, somewhat hydrated hematite. Much of
it is so friable that it can be broken down with a pick, although as taken from the mines a large
portion of it is compact enough to hold together in moderately large lumps. These lumps
are porous, many of them more or less nodular, and many also roughly stratiform. The strata
conform in a general way to the strike and dip of the iron formation. Mingled ^\'ith this soft
hematite in a few mines is a small quantity of aphanitic hard steel-blue hematite, which breaks
with conchoidal fracture and is of remarkable purity. In general, this exceptionally hard
material is found in contact with or close to the diorite dikes of the mines.
DENSITY.
The specific gravities of the ores and cherts were determined by the two general methods
already discussed (see p. 184) — (a) calculated specific gravity obtained by properh* combining
the specific gravities of constituent minerals; (6) actual determinations by gravitj" methods.
The specific gravities of the minerals as used in determinmg the mmeral specific gra^Tit}' of the
ore or chert are as follows: Hematite, 4.5 for earthy ores and chert, 5.1 for crystalline and hard
ores; limonite, 3.6; kaolin, 2.62; quartz, 2.65.
The average mineral density of all ore mined in 1906, calculated from the above mineral
analysis, is 4.33.
Following are six analyses of ferruginous cherts and ores with specific gravities determined
by both methods, as a check on tlie accuracy of determination:
Density of individual cherts and ores determined by calculation and by measurement.
Chemical composition.
Mineral composition.
Specific gravity.
Fe.
SiOa.
P.
AljOa.
Volatile
matter.
Mn.
Moisture
of satu-
ration.
Hema-
tite.
Limonite.
Quartz.
Kaolin.
Calcu-
lated
from
analyses.
Deter-
mined
bypyc-
nometer.
3.30
30.30
43. 20
40. 80
52.00
63.40
«7.91
48.34
32.88
29.83
12.59
4.00
0.007
.027
.022
.013
.029
.078
6.81
6.30
4.40
1.32
7.40
2.94
0.41
1.S3
1.55
1.08
5.43
1.78
0.15
.50
.45
.85
.25
.70
3.70
9.30
3.35
10.50
7.15
10.50
4.71
43.30
61.70
63.30
57.70
86.20
79.91 17.25
2.73
3.38
3.80
3.83
3.89
4.79
2.68
3.38
3.809
3.89
3.90
4.74
43.24
27.70
28.28
3.89
.54
10.95
11.13
3.34
18.72
7.45
4.21
19.38
5.24
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT. 241
POROSITY.
Porosity was determined on hand s])ecimens by the usual method of saturation in water
described on page 185. An average of ten determinations on typical specimens of ferruginous
cliert gave 4.1 per cent pore space. The average of the porosity of all the ores examined was
approximately 34 per cent.
CUBIC CONTENTS.
The ores vary in cubic content from 7. .5 cubic feet to the ton in the small masses of pure
steel ore to 14 cubic feet in the softest yellow ores. The average calculated for the 1906 output
is approximately 10.75 cubic feet to the ton.
TEXTURE.
The average texture of the Gogebic ores is shown by the following table of screening tests.
Thes3 were made by the Oliver Iron Mining Company and represent all of the ores mined by
that company in the Gogebic district in 1909. Samples of the different ores were taken twice a
week, cpiartered down each month according to the tonnage shipped, and at the end of the
shipping season quartered to 100 pounds of dry ore, on which the tests were made. The fol-
lowing table represents 10 grades of ore, totaling 1,256,557 tons. The texture of the ore is
seen to be similar to tliat of the ores of the Marquette district. A comparison of the textures of
the ores of the several Lake Superior districts is shown in figure 72, page 481.
Textures of Gogebic ores as shown by screening tests.
Per cent.
Held on J-inch sieve 28. 97
|-inch sieve 32. 30
No. 20 sieve. 16. 08
No. 40 sieve 8. 32
No. GO sieve 4. 03
No. 80 sieve 2. 56
No. 100 sieve 1. 89
Passed through No. 100 sieve 5. 92
MAGNETITIC ORES.
At the extreme east and west ends of the Gogebic range the iron-bearing formation consists
of dark-gray, green, or black dense crystalline banded rocks, consisting of magnetite, cpiartz,
amphiboles, and other silicates in varying proportions in different bands and different localities.
Ore deposits are rare or altogether lackmg. For a discussion of i-easons for this condition see
pages 552-553. The average chemical composition of these rocks is as follows:
Analyses of mngnetitic rocks fi
Fe,03 44. 606
FeO 13.811
SiO„ 34. 616
ALO3 588
CaO 1. 802
MgO 2. 166
MnO 1.158
P2O5 018
S 083
HoO 997
99. 845
Metallic iron 41. 95
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 19, 1892, p. 197.
47517°— VOL 52—11 16
242 GEOLOGY OF THE hAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Wlien this composition is compared witli that of tlic fcrruLciiious cherts of the Gogebic
district it is apparent that there is ])ut link' differenco between the two.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF GOGEBIC ORES.
STRUCTURAL CONDITIONS.
The ores of tliis district are probably localized in bands of the iron formation wliich were
originality rich in iron, but for most of the district secondary concentrations have so masked
the primary distribution in bands that the evidence for it is not clear. Probabh' the clearest
case is in the Mikado, Brotherton, and Sunday Lake mines, where the ores seem to follow
certain originally rich horizons in the iron formation, the later concentration apparently not
having seriously modified their distribution.
The secondary alterations of the iron-bearing beds are accomplished (1) by waters follow-
ing the pitching trough formed by the intersection of the dikes with impervious quartzite or
slate beds below the iron formation layers, and (2) by following fissures or beddhig planes
independent of the dikes. The control by the dikes is by far the most conspicuous one for the
district as a whole. The movement of the concentrating waters is in general eastward toward
lower levels, following the eastward pitch of the trouglis fomied by the intersection of the
dikes with foot-waU quartzite or exceptionally foot-wall slate. The waters may thus be brought
beneath other dikes. Tliis explains the common occurrence of ores on several dikes one below
the other. The movement of the water is controlled to an important degree by bedtling planes,
by faults, and by joints, and where so controlled the ores are more or less independent of the
dikes and foot wall. The control by faults is especially well shown in one locahty where faulting
parallel to the bedding has displaced tlie ends of a dike and the ore follo^vs over the broken end
of the dike along the fault plane, obviously a zone followed by percolating waters. Faults and
joints may give an eastward pitch of the ore bodies, for many of the fissures along wliich altera-
tion takes place pitch in the same direction as the dikes; in fact, the dikes have been intruded
along fissures of this kind. That some fissures were there before the intrusion of the dikes is
shown further by the fact that the iron formation near Sunday Lake has been displaced by
faultmg, whereas the Keweenawan igneous beds to the north, with wliich the dikes are genetically
connected, have not been displaced. These early fissures also preceded the Keweenawan folding.
If fissures were present in the rocks before the dikes, there is no reason win" some concentration
should not have been prior to the intrusion of the dikes in the east and west ends of the district,
where the cover of slate was not too great to prevent ingress of water; but evidence of tliis
would be extremely difficult to detect because of later alterations since the dikes were intruded.
The greatest depth to which the w^aters, and therefore the ore concentration, may be car-
ried by the eastward-pitching trouglis or by the fault and joint planes is yet unknown. Large
ore bodies have been found to a depth of more than 2,500 feet; one of the largest deposits thus
far found in the district was recently developed at tliis depth. Theoretically the de])tli of con-
centration is a function of the head detemiuied by the height of the erosion edge of the iron
formation and the lowest point of escape; but the difficulty is to determine where the latter
point is, for reasons stated above. Even if the head were known, there would be difficulty in
calculating the effective depth of the circulation because the medium tlirough which it is flowing
is not homogeneous. Further, if the depth of the active circulation could be worked out witliin
reasonable limits, this would give us only the maximum depth of the ore deposits, for it might
well be that the waters do not carry oxygen abundantly to the maximum dejitli to wliich they
penetrate.
Theoretically the concentration of the ore should be more effective on the middle slopes
of the hills, because these would be places where descending waters are efl'ective, whereas
valleys are places where the waters are ascending unless prevented by other structural condi-
tions, and not so effective for the purposes of ore concentration. It is unlikel_y that each of the
cross valleys should have the same control of the circulation, and it is difficult to tell which of
the valleys has been most effective. Also it is to be remembered that the pitch of the dikes to
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT. 243
the east is greater than the surface slope and that tlierefore the underground waters, where
passing under a valley, would be prevented from escaping b,y the overlying impervioiis dikes,
except where faulting would allow the waters to come tlu'ougli. Mining operations actually
disclose artesian flows through dikes, as at the Germania niiue. Also, ascending waters are
actually observed to follow faults across the dikes, as in the Newport mine. From anything
that is now known to the contrary, the faults in the tlikes may be sufficiently numerous to allow
upward escape of the water somewhat freely along the cross valleys at the surface. This is
especially likely in view of the fact that the cross valleys are observed to have developed along
fault planes. These planes must cut the dikes, though some of them are not observed to do
so. The cross valley under such conditions is simply the surface expression of the weak faulted
zone. It is therefore not to be expected that there is a close relation to be observed between
the topography and the distribution of the ores. The ore deposits extend below both eleva-
tions and minor valleys, but at some of the principal cross valleys ore deposits are small or
lacking. For illilstration, ores extend abundantly under Montreal River at Ironwood, but
east of the Newport mine these ores seem to end at a pronounced cross depression northwest
of Bessemer, through which Black River flows. It is thought by James R.Thompson, formerly
manager of the Newport mine, that the drainage for the Ironwood-Newport group of mines is
probably carried eastward and escapes through tliis channel.
ORIGINAL CHARACTER OF THE IROX-BEARING FORMATION.
Originally the iron-bearing formation consisted largely of cherty iron carbonate inter-
layered with sideritic slates and possibly also with banded chert and ferric hydrates. (See
p. 2.31.) Some layers were probably richer than others. The alteration of the cherty iron
carbonates to ore has been accomplished in the general manner already described as ty|:)ical
for the region — (1) oxidation and hydration of the iron minerals in ])lace, (2) leaching of silica,
and (3) introduction of secondary iron oxide and iron carbonate from other parts of the forma-
tion. These changes may start simultaneously, but change 1 is usually far advanced or com-
plete before changes 2 and 3 are conspicuous. The early products of alteration, therefore, are
ferruginous cherts — that is, rocks in wliich the iron is oxidized and hydrated and the silica is
not removed. The later removal of silica is necessary to produce the ore.
ALTERATION OF CHERTY IRON CARBONATE TO FERRUGINOUS CHERT.
Chemical change. — The alteration of cherty iron carbonate to ferruginous chert involves
the oxidation of iron according to the following reaction:
2FeC03 + nH,0 + O = Fe.Og.nH^O + 200^.
Mineral change. — The cherty iron carbonate is practically identical mineralogically with
the sideritic cherts of the Mesabi range. The constituent minerals are segregated into alternate
layers of siderite and chert. The oxidation of the siderite involves a change to a heavier
mineral. Either introduction or removal of silica may accompany this change.
Volume change. — The volume involved in the alteration indicated in the above ecpiation
is a loss of 49.25 per cent, considering the resulting iron oxide to be anhydrous. If hydration
of the iron oxide takes \Aace, the volume reduction is smaller in proportion to the degree of
hydration, being only 18.3 per cent when the product is limonite. Approximately 60 per cent
of the volume of the cherty iron carbonate is silica; therefore the reduction in volume caused
by the oxidation of the iron is efl'ective on approximately only 40 per cent of the volume of the
rock. The loss in volume, then, for tiie entire rock, taking into account both iron and silica,
ranges from 17.2 per cent to 6.4 per cent, depending on the degree of hydration of the resulting
iron oxide.
Development of ijorvsity.— The decrease in volume, due to the alteration of the iron minerals,
develops pore space in the resulting ferruginous chert. Determinations of porosity on several
typical specimens of cherty iron carbonate showed an average of less than 1 per cent pore space.
244 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
A series of ten determinations on typical specimens of ferruginous chert gave a range of 0.9 to
8 per cent pore space, with an average of 4.1 per cent. Evidently the actual porosity is not
sufficient to iK'count for the tlieoretical volume change. This may be explained in the following
ways: (a) Part of the iron oxide in the ferruginous chert may have been original and not altered
from siderite. As the calculated pore space is based on the assumption that all of the iron
oxide in the ferruginous chert is the result of the oxidation of siderite, original ferric oxide in
the chert would decrease the resulting pore space, (h) Infiltration of iron oxide or silica
subserjuent to or accompanying the alteration may have closed part of the openings formed.
This is certainly true to at least a small extent, as shown by microscopic examination of thin
sections, (c) The difficulty of obtaining saturation and perfect drying in the determination of
porosity in the specimens of ferruginous chert may have made the results too low. (J) In
the rocks under discussion, both original and secondary, the iron minerals tend to be seg-
regated in parallel layers separated by comparatively barren chert. The volume changes
in the alteration of the iron minerals would then be largely confined to the ferrugmous la3-ers.
If these are assumed to be practically pure iron mineral, the cubical slmnkage should vary
between 49.25 per cent and 18.3 per cent (as previously calculated) for the different original
and secondary minerals noted above, the linear shrinkage between 6.5 and 20.3 per cent. The
shrinkage normal to the layers would probably not result in openings to any large extent, as
slumping of the flat layers would close any cavities formed, and as a matter of fact such openings
are not observed. On the other hand, slmnkage parallel to the beds is taken to explain the
common intersecting sets of cracks confined to the ore layers and breaking them into small
parallelepiped blocks when the ore has not suffered general deformation. These by actual
measurement give a volume of openings ranging from 12^ to 36 per cent of the volume of the
iron layers, wliich would be approximately 5 to 14^ per cent of the volume of the rock.
It is believed, then, that the increase in porosity and development of cracks in the ferruginous
chert, together with the slump which has obliterated a part of these openings and the infiltration
of iron salts, fully accounts for the change in volume which accompanies the production of
these cherts from the cherty iron carbonate.
ALTERATION OF FERRUGINOUS CHERT TO ORE.
The alteration of ferruginous chert to ore is almost identical with the secondary concen-
tration of the ores of the Mesabi district. As in the Mesabi concentration, the essential change
is the leacliing of silica. The several possibilities resulting in the leaching of silica are dis-
cussed on pages 537-538. It is seen that the space left by the removal of silica may remain as
pore space and may be partly or entirely closed by slump or may be filled partly or entirely
with infiltrated iron oxide. To determine the relative importance of these possibilities, quanti-
tative methods similar to those employed in investigation of the Mesabi ore were used.
In order to include the factor of porosity in a comparison of ores and cherts, it is necessary
to consider their composition in terms of volume rather than of weight. The volume composi-
tion of any chert or ore is readily calculated from the mineral composition and the porosity.
The volume composition of the average ores anil ferruginous cherts is as follows:
Average volume composition of ores and cherts of Gogebic range.
Femigi-
IIUUS
cherts.
Hematite..
Limonite...
Quartz
Kaolin
Pore space .
37.30
U.9S
10.43
3.25
3-1.00
99.%
19.60
7.23
ti.OO
4.03
4.10
99.96
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT.
245
The above volume composition is expressed diagrammatically in figure 31. The most
important factor in forming ore from the cherts, as sliown by tlie diagram, is tlie removal of
silica.
I
QUARTZ
Finely crystalline quartz grading into
' amorphous forms in Iwth the cherty iron carbonat.
' and the ferruginous cherts
1
Reduction of pore SLUMP
PORE SPACE -~_^rneehanical packing of ore by weight
Porosity is first due to the decrease — ..^matenal above
in volume accompanying the oxidation
of iron carbonate and later to the removal
of silica in solution
Partially replacing volume occupied
by iron carbonate
alterine to clay]
Secondary hydrous iron oxide
Deposited by iron-bearing solutions
from above
HYDROUS IRON OXIDE
The degrees of hydration of the iron o.vide in the
■ ferruginous cherts and ores may be expressed by ratios
of hematite to limonite of -1 .1 and 5 :1 respectively
Average ferruginous chert
Average ore
v^ Average cherty iron carbonate
FiGtJEE 31.— Diagrammatic representation of the changes involved in the alteration of cherty iron carbonate to ferruginous chert and ore, Gogebic
dfstrict. The mineral compositions of the various phases are indicated in terms of volume by vertical distances. The compositions of the cherty
iron carbonate, ferruginous chert, and ore represented are averages of a large number of analyses.
IRON MINERALS
Average ore
(Cargo analysis for 1906)
Average
ferruginous chert
SILICA PORE SPACE
Figure 32.— Triangular diagram showing volume composition in terms of pore space, iron minerals, silica, and minor constituents (clay, etc.) of
the ferruginous cherts and iron ores of the Gogebic range. See page 189 for discussion of method of nlatting.
246
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
TRIANGULAR DIAGRAM ILLUSTRATING SECONDARY CONCENTRATION Or GOGEBIC ORES.
In figure 32 tlie trianfjular method (described on p. IS!)) of i('j)resenting tlie volume
relation of ferruginous cherts and ores and intermediate phases is applied to tiie Gogebic ores.
As already explained, each small triangle within the large one represents an individual specimen
and by its size and position indicates composition in terms of the volume of ])ore space, silica,
iron minerals, and minor constituents. The average ferruginous chert, as indicated, is repre-
sented by a small triangle in tiie lower left-hand side of the diagram, with low pore space and
a large content of silica. The average ore is represented in the upper right-hand j)art of the
diagram, and has more pore space, less silica, and more iron than the average ferruginous chert.
Scattered about in the area between these two points are intermediate phases between ferrugi-
nous chert and ore.
In the alteration of ferruginous chert to ore, as represented in the triangle, the following
changes have evidently taken place: («) Decrease in silica, (b) increase in pore space, and (c)
increase in iron. Obviously the dominant process has been the removal of silica, as this is
necessary to an increase of pore space and iron. Removal of silica alone without introducticm
of iron or mechanical slump would increase the porosity in proportion to the amount of silica
removed. Such a process would be represented on the triangle by a series of small triangles
in a line parallel to the base, as the relative volume of iron would remain constant. In the
actual case kno\\Ti the relative volume of the iron mineral increases from 26.83 per cent in the
cherts to 52. IS per cent in the ores. This could be accomplished in two ways — by mechanical
slumping or packing of the material, weakened by too great a porosity, or by infiltration of
iron. From the diagram it is impossible to tell wliich of these processes, slumping or infiltra-
tion, is more important. Observation shows, however, that slumping has been important, but
that introduction of iron has taken place to a much greater extent than it did in the con-
centration of the Mesabi ores.
ALTERATION OF ROCKS ASSOCIATED WITH ORES DURING THEIR SECONDARY CONCENTRATION.
The various conditions and agencies which were effective in the concentration of the ore
from the cherty iron carbonates and ferruginous cherts caused alterations of a similar nature
in the various rocks associated with the iron-bearing formation — namely, the interbcdded
slates, the basic intrusive rocks, and the slates immediatelj- overlying the iron-bearing forma-
tion. The alteration of the slates produced paint rock or ferruginous slate similar to that of
the Mesabi range. The alteration of the basic dikes by oxidation of the iron, breaking do^\•n
of feldspars, and leaching of soluble constituents formed a soft kaolinic product, locally termed
soap rock or, if iron stained, paint rock. The following anal3'ses of fresh and altered dike
rock are typical of this alteration:
. Analysts of fresh and allcnd dikes associated vilh ore.
1 (fresh).
! (altered).
Assuming
-Vl.Oj
constant.
SiOj...
AI2O3..
FeaOs..
FeO....
MgO...
CaO....
NajO...
KsQ....
HjO-..
H20+.
TiOj...
PzO:, . . .
CO2....
47.90
1,1.(0
3.f0
8.41
8.11
9.99
2.C5
.23
.15
2.34
.82
.13
.38
4B.8S
22. f>2
5.12
2.01
1.25
.80
2.cr.
3.12
8.25
1.12
.ir.
1.89
32.20
l.i. CO
3.53
1.39
.86
.55
1.83
2.15
5.(8
.77
.11
1.30
1. Specimen 12880. Unaltered diabase dike rock in iron-bearing formation, from southeast part of sec. 13, T. 47 N., R. 46 W., Uichigan.
2. Specimen 12S78. Altered diabase dike. Same locality aa No. 1.
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT.
247
A comparison of the two analyses on the assumption that alumina has remained constant
(see third column in the table) shows a loss of silica, iron, magnesia, lime, soda, phosphorus,
and titanium and a gain in potassa, water, and carbon dioxide. Except for the behavior
of potassn, the alteration is typical of weathering under conditions of oxidation, carbonation,
and hydration.
Specific gravity and porosity determinations on the specimens analyzed resulted as follows:
Sptxiftc (jraritij and porosilij of inialtcrtd and allcrcd phases of diabase.
Specific
gravity.
Porosity.
Unaltered diabase
Altered phase of diabase.
2.92
2.76
n.so
28.40
On the basis of the specific gravities ami the assumption that alumina is constant, the
calculated porosity due to leaching of soluble constituents is 27.1 per cent of the volume
/ 15.60 2.92 \
( 1.00 — <jy-^X.Y^ = 0. 271 ), which agrees very well with the actual determinations of porosity,
and also denotes the approximate correctness of the assumption that alumina is constant.
The approximate mineral composition of the fresh and altered diabase, calculated from
the analyses, is as follows:
Mineral composiiion of fresh and altered diabase.
Unaltered
diabase.
Altered
pha-se of
diabase.
Feldspars
Fercoraagnesian minerals
Quartz
Calcium-magnesia carbonates.
Apatite
Magnetite
Ilmenite
Kaolin, chlorite, sericite, etc. .
Limonite
Specific gravity..
Porosity
51.00
40.00
1.00
.90
.31
5.34
1.50
2. 92
.50
6.82
17.00
4.00
.38
2.13
63.00
6.10
2.76
28.40
OCCURRENCE OF PHOSPHORUS IN THE IRON-BEARING FORMATION.
PHOSPHORUS CONTENT.
The phosphorus content of the jirincijial phases of the iron-bearing formation is as follows :
Phosphorus content of the iron-hearinr; Irontrood formation.
Iron.
Phos-
phorus.
Ratio of
phos-
phorus to
iron.
Cherty iron carbonate
Ferruginous chert
Iron ore
Per cent.
24.51
28. 76
68.15
Per cent.
0.020
. 046
. 0C2
Per cent.
0.001000
.001600
.001067
The range in phosphorus. content in the various commercial grades of ore produced in the
district in 1906 was from 0.028 to 0.275 per cent. In the Mesabi ores the jihosphorus content
was found to depend to a large extent on the chemical composition of the ore, high pliosphorus
occurring as a rule in the more hydrous ore and in ore high in alumina. In the Gogebic ores
the increase of phosphorus with the degree of hydration is not apparent, as is sho^\^l in figure 33,
where the relation of phosphorus content to water of hydration is represented graphically.
248
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR liEGTON.
The average degree of liydration of the Gogebic ores is coiisiderahl}- lower liiaii tliat of the
Mesabi ores, and tlie liigh phosphorus ores of the Mesabi range contain more water of hydration
tlian the most liydrous of the GogeI)ic ores.
As in tlie ilcsabi range, the phosphorus content of tlie altered slates or paint rocks and
slaty ores of the Gogebic range is high. These phases are high in alumina and comprise a
complete gradation from high-grade ore to ferruginous clay. The unaltered interbedilcd slates
as a rule have a higher phosjihorus content than the iron-bearing rocks proper and their altera-
tion j)roducts are correspondingly high in phosphorus. Hence an examination of analyses
shows, in a general way, an increase of phosphorus with an increase in the alumina content.
The altered dikes, locally termed soap rock or ])aint rock, are characteristically high in phos-
phorus, evidently owing to the original phosphorus content of the diabase. (See analyses,
p. 246.)
,120
li
IIIIIIIIH
'
•
Uliili
1
-
-
I
: 8
S \i
lot :::::: g
T^irnTTTTTTt*
lA --(
|0: :::::::,
■
-
•
»•
•
•
•
;|
•
"
:
:
[l 1 ! 1 1 i
»
;•
•
^■
1
?
1
1
m
u
::
1
1
i
i;
frrrtT*:-t;;t;;:i"|-';;;;;;it
■^
rrt
::
i
I
p
rt
-: — r--
^
! ■'"" — "
■t
Itiiiil;!
4iiilliiil
9
FiGDEE 33. — Diagram showing relation of phosphorus to degree of hydration in Gogebic ores.
High-phosphorus ores are sometimes found immediately above the dikes and in the angle
of the trough formed b}' a dike and the foot wall. It is not true, however, that all ore imme-
diately overlying dikes is high in phosphorus, the opposite being true in many places.
MINERALS CONTAINING PHOSPHORUS.
The discussion of the occurrence of phosphorus on the Mesabi range (pp. 192-196) applies
practically verbatim to the Gogebic range. No phosphorus-bearing minerals have been iden-
tified in the ores or cherts; hence possible occurrence of ])hosph(U-us must be inferred fi-om
chemical evidence. Figure 34 is similar to figure 23, showing the relation of phosphorus to lime
and the possibility of phos])horus occurring as apatite (calcium phosphate). The diagonal
dotted line indicates the ratio of the two elements in apatite. Points falling above the line
indicate an excess of calcium and points below the line an excess of phosphorus. From the
fact that a number of analyses show' an excess of phosphorus it is to be inferred that phosphorus-
PENOKEE-GOGEBIC IRON DISTRICT.
249
bearing minerals other than apatite are present. It is highly probable that at least pait of
the phosphorus occurs in combination with the hydrates of iron and alumina. The extremely
small percentages present make determination of these minerals practically impossible.
BEHAVIOR OF PHOSPHORUS DTJRING SECONDARY CONCENTRATION.
Examination of the average analyses of the cherty iion carbonates, ferruginous chert, and
ore shows that the ratio of phosphorus to iron has remained practically constant during the
concentration of the ores; in other words, both have been concentrated to essentially the same
degree.
It was found that in the secondary concentration of the ores of the Mesabi district phos-
phorus was actually introduced into the ores from the overlying Cretaceous rocks known to be
FiGUKE 34 — Diagram showing relative amounts of phosphorus and lime in Gogebic ores.
higli in phosphorus. The absence of a source of phosphorus such as the Cretaceous rocks of
the ]\Iesabi district may explain why phosphorus has not been concentrated to a greater degree
in the iron in the Gogebic ores.
It was suggested that the hydrated portions of the Mesabi may have had some effect in
causing this increase in phosphorus. The Gogebic ores are much less hydrous than the Mesabi
ores, and this fact suggests a further possible explanation for the increase in phosphorus in
one case and not in the other.
High-phosphorus ores commonly occur immediately above or below dikes. The dikes
themselves are characteiistically high in phosphorus, and, fuithermore, the alteration of the
dike is accompanied by a loss of phosphorus. (See analyses, p. 246.) It is possible that the
high phosphorus in the neighboring ore may be directly contributed by the altering dike rock.
250 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
SEQUENCE OF OKE CONCENTRATION IN THE GOGEBIC DISTRICT.
Before the deposition of llie Keweenawuu series there had been a sligiit f(jlding of the
upper Iluronian (Animikie group) containing tlie productive iron-bearing Ironwood forma-
tion. A gentle synchne was developed along the present productive area ■w'ith its limbs at the
two ends of the district. Erosion then exposed the iron-bearing formation only at the two
ends of the district, leaving the central and nonproductive part still covered by a considerable
tliiclaiess of slate, and soft ores and ferruginous cherts were developed along erosion surface
and fissures at the east and west ends of the district to a minor extent. The Keweenawan
igneous and sedimentary rocks, laid down upon this gently bowed surface, affected the underly-
ing ferruginous cherts and soft ores at the east and west ends of the district, perhaps tlehydrating
them, and developed red jaspers and hard ores. The iron carbonates at these places were
changed to amphibole-magnetite rocks by contact metamorphism. Igneous intrusives of
Keweenawan age are more abundant at these localities than elsewhere in the district. They
had no contact effect upon the iron-bearing formation in the central part of the district because
it was covered by slate. Then came the great post-Keweenawan folding, resulting in the tilting
of the upper Huronian iron-bearing formation (Ironwood) and Keweenawan beds in the Gogebic
district to angles of 60° and 70° N. The iron-bearing formation underwent dynamic metamor-
pliism at the east and west ends, where it constituted a comparative!}- tliin layer between the
hard rocks of its basement and those of the covering Keweenawan. The follo\\'ing erosion
exposed not only amphibole-magnetite rocks, hard ores, and jaspers previously formed at the
east and west ends of the district but exposed for the first time from beneath the Tyler slate
the unaltered iron-bearing formation, consisting principally of carbonate, in the central and
present productive portion of the region. The concentration of the ore for this district began
at tliis time. It was well advanced before Cambrian time and has continued intermittently
since. (See pp. 557-560.)
CHAPTER XI. THE MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN,
INCLUDING THE SWANZY, DEAD RIVER, AND
PERCH LAKE AREAS.
MARQUETTE DISTRICT."
INTRODUCTION.
Although the following account of the geology of the Marquette district is based mainly
on the work of the United States Geological Survey, we would express our^mdebtedness to
Prof. A. E. Seaman, of the Michigan College of Mines, for important modifications in our ideas
of the structure and distribution of the rocks. Prof. Seaman was the first to prove the
existence of an luiconformity between what is here called middle Huronian and the lower
Huronian, botli of which had been treated together as lower Iliu'onian in the United States Geo-
logical Survey monograph on tlie district. He has also contributed a considerable number of
corrections to the geologic map and a detailed plat of the extensive faulting near Teal Lake
(PL XIX). The Cascade area shows considerable changes in mapping, due to the large amount
of carefid exploration work accompanied by geologic mapping that has been done by mming
companies. We are especially indebted to Messrs. Oscar Rohn, O. B. Warren, and W. 0.
llotchkiss and to the Oliver Iron Mining Company for changes in this area. Other important
corrections on the Marquette map have been furnished by the work of the Cleveland-Cliffs
Iron Company, Longyear & Hodge, and others.
LOCATION, SUCCESSION, AND GENERAL STRUCTURE.
The Marquette district extends from Marquette, on Lake Superior, in longitude 87° 20',
west to Lake Michigamme, in longitude 88°, a distance of somewhat less than 40 miles. The
district roughly follows parallel 46° 30'. (See PI. XVII, in pocket.) It lies wholly in Michi-
gan and derives its name from the city of Marquette. The more important towns besides
Marquette are Ishpeming, Negaunee, Champion, 'and Rep\d)lic. The breadth of Algonkian
rocks, which are the special subject of this chapter, varies from about 1 mile to more tlian 6
miles. From the western part of the main Algonkian area two arms project for several miles,
one to the southeast, the Republic trough, andone to the soutli, the Western trough.
The succession of the formations for the district, from the top downward, is as follows:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene series.
Cambrian system:
Upper Cambrian sandstone (Potsdam sandstone).
Unconformity.
Algonkian system :
Keweenawan series Not identified but probably represented by part of
intrusives in upper Huronian.
Huronian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikio group). .
Greenstone intrusives and exirusives.
Michigi;mme slate (slate and mica schist), locally
largely replaced by volcanic Clarksburg formation.
P.ijiki schist (iron bearing).
Goodrich quartzite.
" For further detailed description of the geology of this district see Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, and references there given.
251
252
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTERIOR REGION.
Algonkian system — Contibued.
Huronian series — Continued.
Unconformilv.
Middle Iluronian.
Unconformity.
Lower Huronian..
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series.
Keewatin series .
Nej^aunee formation (chief productive iron-bearing
formation).
Siamo slate.
Ajibik quartzite.
We we slate.
Kona dolomite.
Mesnard quartzite.
Granite, syenite, peridotite.
Palmer gneiss.
Kitchi schist and Mona schist, the latter banded and in
a few places containing narrow bands of nonproduc-
tive iron-bearing formation.
In addition to the rocks tabulated above, basic igneous rocks in many dikes and bosses,
large and small, intrude all the Archean and Huronian formations.
The central and western parts of the district are bounded on the north and south by more
or less continuous east-west linear ridges of Algonkian rocks. The area between these ridges
is relatively low laying, mth minor elevations. Also these ridges on the whole stand above the
country north and south of the district. The major portion of the district is a bluffy jilateau, for
the most part lying between altitudes of 1,400 and 1,600 feet, but it has points that rise higher
and a few points that reach an altitude of 1,800 feet. The eastern part of tlie plateau slopes
rather steeply toward Lake Superior, and for this part of the area the altitudes of the higher
points are between 800 feet and 1,000 feet. Each of the formations is locally resistant, and
where in this condition constitutes bluffs. One traversing the district from north to south is
almost constantly either climbing or descending a steep slope.
The drainage is largely transverse to the longer dimension of the district. Branches of
Escanaba River, in the Lake Michigan drainage basin, cross the central part of the range at
two places. In tlie eastern part of the district Carp River flows to Lake Superior in a direction
roughly parallel to the strike of the rocks. In the western part of the district Michigamme
Lake, the one large lake in the district, and Michigamme River are purely structural in their
locations, the main arm of the lake lying east and west parallel to the strike of the district and
a north arm swdnging toward the south with the cross fold, which appears at this locality.
Mi(;higamme River, the outlet of the lake, follows the axis of the Rej)ubUc trough and connects
with Lake Michigan waters.
The Archean rocks occur in two areas, one north and one south of the Huronian series.
The northern one is called the northern complex and the southern one the southern complex.
In a broad way the Huronian rocks constitute a great synclinorium between the two areas of
Archean. Superimposed upon the larger folds are folds of lesser orders down to minute plica-
tions. Though it is therefore clear that the folding is extremely complex from Lake Superior
to Michigamme Lake, it maybe said that the Algonkian constitutes a great canoe-shaped basin,
wliich comes to a point at the east end of the district but does not at ilichigamme. As a result
of this, in passing from Lake Superior to the west, one comes to higher and higher formations
and only reaches tlie highest formation of the district west of Ishpeming.
This synclinorium is of peculiar and complicated character. For much of the district the
rocks in the outer borders of the iVlgonkian belt are in a series of sharply overturned folds.
The Algonkian rocks on either side of the trough have moved up and outward over the more
rigid Archean granite, and as a consequence on each side of the Algonkian trough a series of
overfolds, esj)ecially in the softer slates, plunge steeply toward its axis, producing a structure
resem])ling in tliis respect the composed fan structure of the Alps. There is, lu)we\er, this
great dilference between the structure of the Marquette district am! that of the Alps — that newer
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT.
253
^ jW
rocks appear near the axis of tlie trough rather than older ones, as if composed fan folds of
Alpine type were sagged downward into a synclinorinm. Tlie stnicture also differs from the
inverted intermont trough of Lapworth. It may be called an abnormal synclinorium.'^ (See
fig. 35.) This structure prevails in the central part of the area from Ishpeming and Negaimee
westward to Clarksburg, but it does not extend to Lake Superior on the east nor to Lake Michi-
gamme on the west.
Although the more conspicuous folds of the district have in general an east-west axis, the
rocks have also been imder strong east-west compression, as a consequence of which the folds
are buckled so that many of them show a steep pitch. In places the north-south folds become
more prominent than the east-west folds and control the prevalent strikes and dips. This is
illustrated l)y the western trough, at the west end of the district. In certain areas in the
southeastern part of the district the compression has been about equally great in both directions,
producing most irregular strikes and dips.
Minor fracturing in the district has been pervasive, as will be exj)lained in succeeding pages,
but only at a few localities are there faults so extensive that they have been detected in the
mapping of the formations.
Of these major faults, three
at least are of very consider-
able displacement, all in the
eastern part of the district,
one of these being the Carp
River fault (PI. XVIII) anil
the other two in the Cascade
area. A number of less im-
portant faults occur in the
quartzite east of Teal Lake
(PL XIX).
The lower Huronian,
comprising the Mesnard
quartzite, the Kona dolo-
mite, and the Wewe slate,
is confined to the eastern
third of the district. At the
time these rocks were depos-
ited either the western part of the district was not submerged or else the erosion following this
period removed the rocks before the deposition of the succeeding midtlle Huronian beds.
The middle and upper Huronian rocks west of the central part of the district are in linear
belts, one following the other in regular order, but east of the central part of the district the
distribution is less uniform and, because of the somewhat equal closeness of the north-south and
east-west folds, some of the formations lose their linear character and cover considerable areas.
The Marquette district is the type district for the Lake Superior Huronian in that it is the
only district in which the upper, middle, and lower Huronian are well represented. Moreover,
the unconformable relations between the middle and lower Huronian and between the middle
and upper Huronian are demonstrated by the clearest evidence, as is also the unconformity
between the Huronian and the Archean.
Figure 35.— Idealized north-south section tlirough the Marquette district, showing abnormal
type of synclinorium. The axial planes of the minor folds converge downward. The atti-
tudes of the minor folds are detonninod by the differential movements in the more competent
strata indicated by arrows. In general the soft slate layers of the district are the ones best
illustrating the minor folds. The quartzite layers are more competent and therefore more
simple in outline.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
The rocks of the Archean system are so different in character from the Huronian sediments
that there is really no difficulty in distinguishing between them. This discrimination was
made by Brooks and Irving before it was known that an unconformity separated them. The
» Van Hise, C. B., Principles of North American pre-Cambrian geology: Sixteenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Sorvey, pt. 1, 1896, pp. 612, 615-621.
254 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Arclioan rocks arc all crystalline, comprising both massive and schistose varieties. The diflFerent
phases have very intricate relations to one another as compared with the Huronian, and this
led Irviiif^ to designate the whole mass as the "Basement Complex." The rocks of the Archean
are divisible mto two series, Keewatin and Laurentian. This was recognized before the Inter-
national Committee had agreed on the definitions of these terms and to the two divisions were
given the names "Mareniscan" and Laurentian, as m the Gogebic district.
The northern area and southern area of Archean will be se])arately described.
NORTHERN AREA.
KEEWATIN SEKIES.
The Keewatin rocks of the northern area were described in the Marquette monograph
under two divisions — the Mona schist and the Kitchi schist. The Mona schist comprises both
basic and acidic varieties, the former being dominant. The basic schists comprise both dense
and l)an(]e(l forms. In color all are various shades of green. They Vjelong to the general class
whicli lias been described by G. H. Williams " as greenstone schists. The mineral constituents
are mainly epidote, chlorite, hornblende, plagioclase (largely albite), leucoxene, quartz, and
usually calcite. The chloritic and calcitic character of these schists is very widespread, per-
sistent, and characteristic. In general the composition of the schists is very similar to that
of basalts. The banded character of these rocks early led to the belief that they were water-
arranged sediments, but the later studies have shown that while this is true in part they are
largely, though not altogether, schistose basic flows and tuffs.
The basic Kitchi schist differs from the basic Mona schist mainly in that it clearly shows
an agglomeratic and in some places a conglomeratic character. This appearance is typically
shown at the old Deer Lake furnace. A close study of the rocks of this area shows beyond
all question that, while they are largely volcanic conglomerates, some of the material of these
conglomerates has been worked over by water into greenstone conglomerates. Where the
material is comparatively fine they approach in appearance the banded Mona schist.
The change from Mona to Kitchi schist takes place by the appearance of conglomeratic
and agglomeratic bands in the Mona. There is reason to believe that the main mass of basic
schists composing the Kitchi and Mona schists is the same formation, the main difference
being that the Mona schist is more metamorphosed and probably contained a larger proportion
of finer material.
In the areas of both the Mona and Kitchi schists are subordinate areas of acidic rocks
which are largely sericite schists. WTiether these are contemporaneous with the basic schists
or are later intrusives is not altogether clear.
In the area of Mona schist are small masses of ferruginous slate, ferruginous chert, and
magnetite-griinerite schists which are identical in hand specimen and in microscopic character
with similar rocks of the iron-bearing Negaunee formation. These appear in their best develop-
ment within the banded Mona schist adjacent to Lighthouse Point, but are found also in other
locahties, especially north of the old Holyoke mine in sec. 2, T. 48 N., R. 27 W. If these rocks
are supposed to be of the same origin as the similar rocks of the Negaunee formation, and there
is no evidence that they are not, they indicate the presence locally of conditions of nonclastic
subaqueous sedimentation, and if this is so it is probable that much of the banded Mona schist
of this area has been extensively rearranged by water. Therefore, while these schists have
the composition of an igneous rock, it is probable that they partly represent fine volcanic ash
which has been deposited in water and arranged by it without much assortmg.
Near Mud Lake a series of green schists, graywackes, and slates intervenes between the
typical Mona schist on the north and the Iluronian beds on the south. The intervening series
is conglomeratic near its contact with the Mona schist and in turn is overlain imconformably
by the Huronian scries, with basal conglomerate. These green schists and slates look not
<• Bull. U. S. Gcol. Survey No. 6?, 1890.
MONOGRAPH Ul PLATE X
DETAILED MAP OF QUARTZITE RIDGES OF TEAL LAKE, MICfflGAN
SHOWING FAULTING AND UNCONFORMITY OF AJIBIK QUARTZITE
AND MESNARD QUARTZITE
by A.K. Sea
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 255
unlike some of the phases of Kitchi schist farther west, suggesting the possibility that the Kitchi
schist may be partly younger than the Mona schist and may be locally more largely sedimentary
than is apparent in the typical Mona schist area. Indeed, if mapped independently of other
parts of the district, the green schists and slates between the Mona schist and the Mesnard
quartzite of the Mud Lake area would be mapped as sedimentary, probably lying imconformably
below the Huronian and unconformubly upon the Mona schist.
In conclusion it may be said that both the Mona and the Kitclii schists are dominantly
igneous in origin, being mainly a set of lava flows and volcanic fragments which fell upon
water and were more or less arranged by it; locally subordinate amounts of material from
other sources have been contributed.
LAUKENTIAN SERIES.
The Laurentian rocks of the northern area comprise principally granites and grieissoid
granites which include both biotite and muscovite granites. In general these rocks show a
considerable amount of djmamic action and alteration, the schistose phases passing into rocks
which may be called granitoid gneiss. In the western part of the district the Laurentian rocks
are adjacent to the Huronian; in the eastern part between them and the Huronian are inter-
posed the Kitclu and Mona scldsts, into which the Laurentian rocks are batholithic intrusions.
The boundary between the two sets of rocks is not sharp ami defined. Numerous dikes and
bosses of granite are found in the schists along the border, and schist masses are included in
the granite.
Another important variety of Laurentian rock is hornblende syenite, which is found in
the eastern part of the area. This rock has the same relations to the schists as the granite.
It differs from the granite in the absence of quartz, the primary constituents being ortho-
olase, plagioclase, sphene, magnetite, and biotite. The secondary products, plagioclase, micro-
cline, chlorite, quartz, epidote, muscovite, and leucoxene, have developed to some extent.
The structure of the gneissoid syenites is the same as that of the gneissoid granites.
A third class of intrusive rocks m the Keewatin schists is peridotite. One well-known
area of peridotite occurs at Pi'esque Isle, but by far the largest area, between 4 and .5 miles
hi length, is in the central part of the district within the Kitchi schist. These peridotites are
very much altered, the olivine and diallage both being extensively serpentinized and magnetite,
dolomite, and other usual products developing; also uralite and chlorite have formed from the
diallage. Indeed, in most of the specimens the olivine and diallage have entirely disappeared
and secondary products have taken their place.
SOUTHERN AKEA.
The southern area is composed dominantly of granites, granitoid gneiss, and gneissoid
granites which are in most respects not different from the granites of the northern area. Schists
are subordinate, but are found at several places. They include micaceous schists, clilorite
schists, and ampliibole schists similar to those of the northern area. The micaceous scliists
include muscovite schists, biotite schists, feldspathic biotite schists, and hornblende-biotite
schists. They have nowhere sufficient extent to be mapped as formations separate from the
granites. The origin of these schists is not clear. Their foliation is secondary, due to masliing
and recrystalhzation. In places they have a clastic appearance and may be, m jjart at least,
sedimentary in origin. Between the different varieties of schists there are of course gratlations.
There is every reason to suppose that the clilorite schists and hornblende schists are similar in
origin to like rocks of the northern area.
In the eastern part of the district south of the Cascade range and bordering the Huronian
is a narrow and distinct belt of Laurentian rocks which has been called the Palmer gneiss. It is
a gneiss consisting dominantly of quartz with minor quantities of feldspar and mica, the origin
of which is in doubt. Phases of it look like metamorphosed sediments; other parts seem to be
256 GEOLOGY OF THE LAlvE SUPERIOR REGION.
tlie result of motamorphism of granitic and pegmatitir rocks. On the earlier map of the district "
there were included in the west end of tiie Palmer gneiss belt certain metanKirjihic schists wliich
have since been found to re])resent metamorphosed phases of the Siamo slate.
ISOLATED AREAS OF ARCHEAN ROCKS.
In the eastern part of the district, witliin the Algonkian, are small isolated areas of Archean
rocks. Tliese comprise granites, gneissoid granites, and greensto7ie schists in no respect
differing fi'om the corresponding rocks of the main northern and southern areas.
Intrusive in all the previously described rocks are dikes and bosses of diabase and diorite
which are similar to those which intrude the Iluronian rocks, and therefore are much later in
age. They do not properly belong with the Archean.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJRONIAN SERIES.
As already stated, the Huronian series in the Marquette district is divided into upper
Huronian (Animikie group), middle Huronian, and lower Huronian.
LOWER HXTEONIAN.
The lower Huronian consists, from the base upward, of the Mesnard quartzite, the Kona
dolomite, and the Wewe slate. It has been pointed out that these formations appear onlj' in
the northeastern part of the district.
MESNARD QTTARTZITE.
Name and distribution. — The Mesnard quartzite is so named because it composes the
larger part of the mass of Mount Mesnard, south of Marquette. The quartzite borders the
Huronian I'ocks from a locality a short distance east of Teal Lake' east to Lake Superior, thence
south and west to a point 2 miles west of Goose Lake. Also patches of Mesnard are found on
the north margin of the Huronian rocks as far west as 2 miles west of Teal Lake. In the eastern
part of the district the Mesnard cjuartzite is repeated by the appearance of a central anticUne,
so that in making a section north and south just west of Mount Mesnard four belts of the
formation are found. The nature of the structure at this locality is shown by the section on
Plate XVII (in pocket).
LitJiology. — The Mesnard quartzite has three distinct membei's — a lower conglomerate,
a central quartzite, and an upper slate. These members are not separately mapped because
exposures as a whole are not suflicient to make this possible.
The lower conglomerate member comprises conglomerates with subordinate amounts of
graywacke, graywacke slate, and quartzites, with all gradations between the different phases.
Naturally the iiner-grained varieties are more prevalent near the top of this member, and
locally a slate appears between the conglomerate and the quartzite.
The conglomerate adjacent to the southern granite has two different phases. The common
phase is a coarse granite conglomerate, but locally the granite of the Archean seems to have
been disintegrated so that it yielded individual grains of quartz, feklspar, and mica, ^liere
this w^as the case the recomposed rock very closely resembles the original granite. Tiiis is
especially true where the two together have been anamorphosed to schists. Indeed, at such
places it is difTicult to place the exact line between the two formations.
The conglomerates adjacent to the northern Archean bear detritus both from the granite
and from the Mona schist and therefore carry pebbles and bowlders from both of these forma-
tions. The granite pebbles compri.se coarse-grained niuscovite granite anil fine-grained granite.
The pebbles from the Mona schist include various kinds of greenstone schists and cliloritic
scliists identical with the phases of the Mona scliist, so that there can be no doubt as to the
source of the material.
o Mon. U. S. 0«oI. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, atlas sheet IV.
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT.
257
The second member, constituting the great mass of the formation, is dominantly a pure
vitreous quartzite, although locally there are feldspathic quartzites and fine-grained conglom-
erates. In this belt is one laj^er of conglomerate in which cherty jasper, quartz, and ferru-
ginous schist pebbles are characteristic. For the most part the quartzite is indurated by cemen-
tation. Toward the top the quartzite member becomes slaty and finally passes into a gray-
w^acke slate. Tliis rock is from less than 30 to about 100 feet thick and is in fact a transition
pelite member between the quartzite and the Kona dolomite.
Metamorphism. — The Mesnard quartzite as a whole has been much mashed, and the result
is that the conglomerates, quartzites, and graywackes include rocks varying from those which
are indurated mainly by siliceous cementation to those which are crystalline schists. Some of
the rocks have been much shattered, the shattering extending to the individual grains. The open-
ings which have been formed by the shattering have been cemented mainly by quartz and by iron
oxide. So pervasive have been the dynamic effects that not a single clastic grain has escaped.
Wliei-e the pressure has been the least undulatory extinction is shown by the quartz grains.
A large portion of the quartz grains have been sliced by parallel fractures, some in one direction,
some in two directions at right angles to each other. Where the formation is feldspathic the
feldspars have very extensively altered into sericite and quartz. In places where the meta-
morphism is extreme the formation is transformed into a sericite schist by grairulation and
recrystallization. The scliistose varieties of the rocks are especially prevalent along the south-
ern border of the southern conglomerate adjacent to the granite.
Partial analyses of the massive Mesnard quartzite and the schistose phase along its contact
with underlying formations are given below:
Analyses ofmassire and schistose Mesnard quartzite.
[Analyst, R. D. Hall, University of Wisconsin.]
Specimen
24096
(quartzite).
Specimen
24123 (seri-
cite schist).
SiOs...
AljOs-
FsjOs..
FeO...
MgO...
Na20..
K3O...
H20-\
H,0+/
58.85
26.22
3.01
.17
.63
.05
8.44
2.31
Apparently the jnincipal result of the development of schistose structure has been the
loss of soda and sUica and ferrous iron. Alumina, potassa, ferric iron, water, and magnesia
have remained in nearly constant and mutual proportions. This change is similar in all respects
to one shown by the Waterloo quartzite of southern Wisconsin. It is believed to be one due
to metamorphism, but the possibihty can not be excluded that the differences are partly those
of original composition.
Bdations to adjacent formations. — The conglomerates at the base of the Mesnard quartzite,
here adjacent to the Laurentian granite, there next to the scliists of the Keewatin, show that
between the Archean and the Mesnard there is a very great unconformity. It is clear that
the complex history of the Archean was practicalh' complete before the Mesnard quartzite
was deposited. The Keewatin schists had been intruded and metamorphosed by the granites
and the two together had been deeply truncated before the Mesnard was laid down. One of the
conglomerates at the base of the Mesnard is especially interesting, in that it was the first in
wliicli the clear evidence of unconformity was found. This contact is north of Mud Lake and
along an old road known as the State road, and the conglomerate has sometimes been called the
"State Road" conglomerate. Since the discovery of this contact other contacts have been
found along the southern belt of Mesnard at a score of places. The conglomerates adjacent
•17517°— VOL 52—11 17
258 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
to them are splendid granite conglomerates, many of which contain great well-waterwom
bowlders of granite.
On the knobs northeast of the southeast end of Goose Lake quartzite mapped as Mesnard
is found to lie directly upon the Kona dolomite. The quartzite with this relation may be an
interstratified layer m the Kona dolomite similar to quartzite laj'ers seen in this formation in
the Mount Chocolay section. The boundary between the quartzite overlying the Kona dolo-
mite in tliis locality and the true Mesnard quartzite is not known.
TJiickness. — As tlie Mesnard quartzite was the first formation of a transgressing sea, it
naturally varies in tliickness owing to the irregularities of tlie basement upon which it was
deposited. The thickness ranges from 150 feet to nearly 700 feet.
KONA DOLOMITE.
Name and distribution. — The Kona dolomite is given the name Kona from the prominent
hills of that name east of Goose Lake, where it is exposed.
This formation, like the Mesnard quartzite, is confined to the eastern part of the district.
In distribution it constitutes a westward-facing U, the arms of which terminate a short dis-
tance east of Teal Lake on the north and at the east shore of Goose I^ake on the south.
The exposures commonly constitute a set of sharp and abrupt cliffs cut by ravines or
separated by drift-hlled valleys. The formation very well illustrates the complex folding of
the district. In some places the north-south folds are the more prominent, but more generally
the east-west folds are dominant.
Lithology. — The Kona formation is dominantly a dolomite, fjut interstratified %\-itli this are
layers of slate, graywacke, and quartzite with all gradations between the mechanical sedi-
ments and tiie pure dolomites. Thus there are finely crystalline dolomite, chertj' dolomite,
quartzose dolomite, argillaceous dolomite, dolomitic quartzites, dolomitic slates, dolomitic
cherty cpiartzites, and dolomitic chert. The dolomite beds range in thickness from a few inches
to man}- feet, but even the most dolomitic beds contain thin chert}- layers, mingled with which
in some places is clastic material. In color the rocks vary from pink and red to dark brown.
Because of the imjixuities of the dolomite the weathered surface has very characteristically a
jagged appearance, due to the solution of the dolomite and the consequent protrusion of siliceous
phases.
MetamorpMsm. — The dolomite has usually jrielded to the folding without prominent frac-
tures or cleavage, but it has suffered a minute shattering and is cemented by finely crystalline
quartz or coarsely crystalline dolomite, or the two combmed. The slate layers usually have
a slaty cleavage and many of the graywacke, quartz, and cherty quartz layers are brecciated.
These breccias where scliistose are difficult to distinguish from conglomerates. The com-
pleteness of tliis shattering and brecciation was appreciated only by a study of the thin sections,
where eveiy one of the numerous slides shows the phenomena mentioned to a greater or less
extent. Not a half-mcli cube has escaped.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Kona dolomite grades into the Mesnard quartzite
below. Above, by a lessening of the calcareous constituent, it gradually passes into theWewe
slate.
Thickness. — ^Because of the complicated folding of the Kona dolomite it is difTicult to give
an accurate estimate of its thickness, which probably varies greatly. In some places it seems
to be a comparatively tliin formation, not more than 200 to 250 feet thick. In other places where
the wdiole formation is well exposed it appears to be 650 or 700 feet thick, and it may be thicker
than this.
WEWE SLATE.
Distribution. — The Wewe slate, like the Mesnard quartzite and Kona dolomite, is confined
to the east end of the district, making a westward-facing U. The slate, bcmg a less resistant
fornuxtion than the Kona dolomite below or the Ajibik quartzite above, is in general marked
by valleys, and consequently the exposures are few.
MARQUETTE IKON DISTRICT. 259
Liihologij. — The Wewe slate was a pelite formation evidently varying in its character from
a fine mud to a coarse sandy mud with numerous alteration phases. As a result of the com-
pacting and modification .of these beds the formation is now a slate, shale, novaculite, and
graywacke. The color of these rocks varies from red to black, depending on the quantity and
conditions of the iron oxide.
Metamorphism. — In consequence of the folding and metamorphism the slates have devel-
oped a cleavage. The rock locally has been sufficiently metamorphosed to become a mica slate
and even to approach a mica schist, but usually tlie alteration has not gone sufficiently far to
obliterate the bedcUng.
The rocks have been commonly fractured parallel to the bedding or to the secondary struc-
tures whicli intereect the bedding. At some localities fi-acturing has been sufficiently powerful
to shatter the rocks throughout, or even to produce friction breccias. Wliere further move-
ments have rounded the fi'agments of the breccia the rock becomes a pseudoconglomerate.
The openings wliich have been produced by the fracturing have been cemented by (juartz, by
hematite, and by a jaspery mixture of the two. In some places these varieties of material
follow one another and locally the amount of hematite in the breccia is so great as to have led
to prospectmg of the formation for iron ore.
Relations to adjacent formations. — It has been pointed out that the Kona dolomite grades
into the Wewe slate by a disappearance of the calcareous material. The Wewe slate is overlain
imconformably by the Ajibik quartzite. The evidence of this unconformity will be given under
the description of the latter formation.
Thichness. — In one place, where there is an almost continuous exposure of slate, the thick-
ness is calculated at 1,050 feet, but it is entirely probable that there are here subordinate rolls.
The real thickness of the slate is doubtless much less than this. At one place, indeed, the
thickness of the formation does not appear to be more than 100 feet.
MIDDLE HURONIAN.
The middle Huronian of the Marquette district comprises the Ajibik quartzite, the Siamo
slate, and the ii'on-bearing Negaunee formation.
AJIBIK QUARTZITE.
Name and distribution. — The Ajibik quartzite is so named because the predominant rock
is quartzite and because typical exposures of it occur on the bold Ajibik Hills northeast of
Palmer.
The distribution of the Ajibik quartzite is practically coextensive with the outlines of the
Marquette district. For all of the area west of Negaunee it is the Huronian formation wliich
rests against the Archean. For the area east of Negaimee it is separated from the Archean by
the lower Huronian rocks already described. Along the south side of the cfistrict the formation
is very thin, locally not more than a few feet. The Ajibik ci[uartzite, being a resistant formation,
is for the most part well exposed and at various places it constitutes prominent bluffs — as,
for instance, east of Teal Lake.
Deformation. — In general the folding of the Ajibik is that of a great synclinorium, the dips
being south fi'om the great northern belt and north from the southern belt. The Cascade
trough, the Republic trough, and southwestern arms at the west end of the district constitute
subordinate synclinoria. In detail, as at Broken Bluffs, there is secondary infolding of the
formation with i.soclinal dips.
The formation is displaced by at least three great faults — that of Carp River, the east-west
tlu-ow of which apparently amounts to as much as 3,000 feet; the fault along the south side
of the Ajibik Hills, the tlu"ow of wliich is apparently several thousand feet; and the fault at
the Volunteer mine, which again apparently has a horizontal throw of 2,000 feet or more. In
addition to these there are a number of minor faults east of Teal Lake, the character of which
is indicated by Plate XIX (p. 254).
260 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Lithology. — Petrograpliically tlie Ajil)ik formation has two facics — conglomerate, ■which is
in t~uhordinate amount and is at the bottom of the formation, and quartzite, whicii constitutes
tlie major portion of tlie formation. Associated \\itli llie conglomerates are interstratified
shites and graj'wackes.
The conglomeratic phase has two main areas — a western one in wiiicli it rests directly
upon the Archean and an eastern one in which it is underlain hy lower Huronian rocks. Where
the formation rests chrectly upon the Archean its basal part is a conglomerate or recomposed
rock, the material of which is derived mainly from the rocks immeiliately subjacent. This
conglomerate varies from place to place as the subjacent rock varies. In general it is a
granite conglomerate. In the Cascade range such material is derived from the Palmer gneiss
and other igneous formations, and near the Ivitchi schist the material is mainly derived from
that formation. In the eastern part of the district the Ajibik cpiartzite rests upon the Wewe
slate, somewhat farther west upon the Kona dolomite, and still farther west upon the ^lesnard
cpiartzite — that is, it cuts diagonally across these tlvree formations. This ap{)lies to both its
northern and its southern arms. As Mould be expected from this relation, the conglomerate
at the bottom of the formation in tliis area contains dominantly debris from the loAver Huronian,
but includes also material from the Archean.
The basal conglomerates, slates, and gra3*wackes are usually of only moderate thickness,
although the conglomeratic beds are persistent. These rocks grade up mto c[uartzite.
Metamorphism. — The major portion of the formation was a quartz sand. By cementation,
d\-namic action, and recrystallization it has now been transformed to many varieties, of wliich
normal quartzite, cherty quartzite, ferruginous quartzite, ferruginous cherty quartzite, quartz
rocks, quartzite breccia, and quartz scliists, in places sericitic, are the more prominent.
The predominant phase is a typical rather pure vitreous cpiartzite, which locally is conglom-
eratic. This least-altered variety of the quartzite is composed almost wholly of rounded
grains of quartz of somewhat uniform size, which are beautifully enlarged, the enlargements
filling the interspaces. The grains uniformly show undulatory extinction, and some of them
are distinctly fractured. From tliis variety there are all gradations to the other forms
mentioned.
Locally interstratified with the quartzite were mud beds wliich now have become gray-
wacke slate, mica slate, or mica scliist. The micaceous varieties of the rock are especially
abundant where the psammite w-as feldspatliic, the feldspar altering into mica and quartz or
into chlorite and quartz. At the west end of the district, especially in the Republic and West-
em tongues, the masliing has been so great as to transform the rock to a quartz schist, and
where the psammite was impure there were developed t^'pical biotite schists, muscovite scliists,
and chlorite schists, which are in ])laces gametiferous.
In their very general brecciation, with consecjuent abundance of pseudoconglomerates; in
the secondar}' veining, both with coarsely and finely crystalline cjuartz; and in the large cjuan-
tity of secondary hematite and magnetite, these quartzites differ from the Goodrich quartzite
of the upper Huronian.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Ajibik quartzite rests upon both the Archean and
the lower Huronian unconformably. The unconformity bet^veen the Ajibik cjuartzite and the
Archean is conspicuous and was early recognized, but the unconformable relation between the
Ajibik and the lower Huronian was overlooked at the time the Marquette monograph was
MTitten. The careful mapping and studies of Seaman in the eastern part of the chstrict showed
the true relation.
It has already been pointed out that in going from the east end of the Ajibik westward it
is found at first in" contact with the Wewe slate, next with the Kona dolomite, next with the
Mesnard quartzite, which thins westward to an edge. West of the last outcrops of Mesnard
quartzite the Ajibik is in contact with the Keewatia, Kitchi schist, and with Laurentian rocks.
Thus it cuts diagonallj' across the beveled edges of formations varying in age from Wewe to
Keewatin. These relations, together with the presence of conglomerates at the base whicli
bear debris from the lower Huronian, show that the low-er Huronian was sufficientlv indurated
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 261
to yield fragments to the Ajibik before the deposition of that formation. The absence of the
lower Huronian in the western part of the district is douljtk'ss largely if not wholly due to its
removal by erosion between the time of the Wewe slate and the deposition of tiie Ajibik
quartzite.
Wliere mashing and metamorphism have been sufficient to transform the conglomerate
into a schist the Archean has been similarly metamorphosed; conseciuently the Ajibik quartzite
apparently grades down into the Archean.
The Ajil^ik (juartzite in the northern belt and in the eastern part of the district grades
upward into the Siamo slate. This change takes place by a gradual transition of the psammite
into a peUte formation. In the southern belt the Siamo slate is absent and the Ajibik cjuartzite
grades into the Negaunee formation. This gradation may be particularly w'ell seen in the
Cascade area.
Thickness. — The best opportunity to determine the thickness of the formation is at the east
end of the U, where the apparently secondary folding is absent. Here the thickness appears to
be about 700 to 750 feet. Along the south side of the district the formation tliins to a few feet.
SIAMO SLATE.
Name and distribution. — The Siamo slate is so called because abundant and typical exposures
occur on the Siamo Hills southwest of Teal Lake. The formation appears at the northwestern
part of the district, north of the Michigamme mine, and extends in a continuous belt of varying
width to a point nortlieast of Negaunee. Here, owing to the canoe shape of the eastern part
of tlie district, it widens out to broad irregular areas with several arms between the Ajibik
quartzite and the Negaunee formation. There is no southern belt of Siamo slate corresponding
to the northern belt. The slate, being a soft formation, is not well exposed, but where it is
metamorphosed into a mica slate or where it is a coarse graywacke ledges are munerous.
Deformation. — The folding of the formation as a whole corresponds to that of the district.
In detail it is more complex than that of the associated quartzites. The northern belt, with
southern dip, has superimposed upon it isoclinal folds of the second order. In the eastern
part of the district, where the broad area of Siamo slate is situated, the formation is folded into
a series of rolls, indicated by the sinuous contact between the Siamo and Negaunee forma-
tions. The .westward-projecting salients of the Siamo constitute the crests of anticlines and
the reentrants are the synclines.
Lifhology. — The rocks of the Siamo formation are dark gray or greenish gray and some
of the coarser are light gray. They vary from a coarse-grained graywacke, approaching a
quartzite, through massive graywacke to a very fine grained slate. The slates and fine-grained
graywackes are the predominant phases. The finer-grained varieties are in many places
affected by slaty cleavage, which is rather uniform in tlirection for a given area ami thus trav-
erses the bedding. Locally movements later than the development of the cleavage have
resulted in many partings along this secondary structure, giving the rock a fissility.
The less-altered Siamo rocks are composed mainly of well-rounded grains of quartz, a few of
them finely complex and cherty looking, and of grains of feldspar, between which is a sparse
matrix cojisisting of chlorite, biotite, muscovite, finely crystalline quartz, and more or less
iron oxide. Usually the chlorite predominates over tlie muscovite and biotite, but in some of
the rocks the micas are as abundant as the chlorite. Some of the quartz grains are distinctly
enlarged. Most of them show pressure effects by imdulatory extinction and fracturing, the
fractures being locally arranged in a rectangular system. The feldspars comprise orthoclase,
microcline, and plagioclase, in places changed into chlorite and quartz, biotite and quartz, or
muscovite.
Metamorpliism. — The mineral alterations have been noted. In proportion as there is
dynamic action there is a tendency for secondary leaflets of the chlorite, biotite, and mus-
covite to have a parallel arrangement. Where this is well advanced there is also granulation
of the larger quartz grains, and tlie secondary quartz may become as coarsely crystalline as the
original quartz. Wliere all these changes have gone far the rock becomes a mica slate or a mica
262 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKIOK REGION.
schist. The process of development thus Ijiii'fl}' outhned is the same as for the Tj'ler slate of
the Penokee-Gogebic district, described in another place. (See pp. 2.32-233.)
Other phases of the Siamo 1-ocks exhibit very well a fractuic or slip cleavage which may
be in only a single direction parallel l<> the bedding, oi- in two directions intei-secting at angles
varying from nearly right angles where t-lie pressure has been least to acute angles where it has
been strong. In thin section tlie latter rock has an a])i)earanc(' like tjiat of a drawn-out net.
The largest areas of mica scliist, representing the most advanced phase of metamorphism
of the formation, lie nortli of Michigamme. The greater nictamorphism of this part of the
formation is attributed to tlie large masses of intnisive greenstone which have been introduced
roughly parallel to the contact of the vSiamo slate and the Negaunee formation. Other consid-
erable masses of greenstone are also found within the area of the Si;imo. Evidence of the
metamorphic effect of the greenstone is afforded by numerous large secondary crystals of horn-
blende in the slate adjacent to the larger masses of greenstone.
Relations to adjacent formations. — At the upper and lower horizons the slates tend to becom,e
ferruginous. In these phases there is present a considerable cpiantity of iron oxide, generally
hematite but in many places magnetite. In the upper part of the formation especially these
ferruginous slates have interlaminated layers of material similar to the ferruginous and sider-
itic slates and cherts and giiinerite-magnetite schists of the Negaunee formation. The Ajibik
quartzite grades up into tlie Siamo slate. It is apparent from the appearance of interlaminated
layers of material like the Negaunee formation in the upper parts of the Siamo slate that the
transition into the Negaunee is a gradation by interstratification. The fragmental sediments
gradually die out and nonfragmental sediments become dominant; this change takes place
irregularly, producing interstratification of the two forms of sediments.
Thiclcness. — The area perhaps most favorable for detemiining the thickness of the Siamo
slate is that adjacent to Teal Lake. If the formation were there assumed to be monoclinal, the
tliickness would be from 1,250 feet to 1,300 feet, but as there are an unknown number of sub-
ordinate rolls at this locality, and slat}' cleavage has developed, it is probable that the real
thickness of the formation is not more than half of this amount.
NEGAUNEE FORMATION.
Name aiul distribution. — The principal iron-bearing formation of the Marquette district is
named Negaunee because in the town of that name and to the south are typical exposures of
the formation.
The Negaunee formation extends from the northwest end of the district along the north
side of the Huronian to the north side of Michigamme Lake. From this place eastward for a
distance of 5 miles the formation is cut out by the unconformity at the base of the Upper
Huronian. Near Ishpeming it widens out into a broad area and occupies a large portion of the
famous T. 47 N., R. 27 W., and also a considerable portion of T. 47 N., R. 26 W. From this
broad area a short southern arm, known as the Cascade range, extends to the east and a long arm
to the west along the south side of the Algonkian; the formation is found also on both sides of
the Republic and southwestern arms. In the western part of tlie main southern belt and in
the Republic and southwestern arms the formation is apparently al)scnt for distancps varying
from a fraction of a mile to several miles. It is believed tliis lack of continuity is due to the
fact that the Negaunee formation was completely removed by erosion liefore the deposition of
tlie upper Huronian (Animikie group).
Deformation. — The two long arms of the iron-bearing formation of the main belt, as well
as the two belts of iron-bearing formation in the Republic and southwestern belts, are the two
sides of a synclinorium. The two main arms join in the large area of Negaunee at Ishpeming,
showing that it also is in a broad way an east-west synclinorium. This trough pitches to the
west. Thus the lower members of the Negaunee formation outcroj) on the east adjacent to the
Siamo slate and the higher inembers outcrop on the west adjacent to the Goodrich quartzite. The
suiuous contacts between tlie Negaunee and the formations above and below express its folding.
]\IARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 263
The salients to the east into the Siamo slate represent synclines and the reentrants anticlines; the
salients to the west into the Goodrich quartzite represent anticlines and the reentrants synclines.
The Palmer belt of the Negaunee formation, extentling from the main area as a southeastern
arm, is also a synclinal fold, which ends to the east in a canoe with a westward pitch. The
structure of this syncline is modified by a great fault along the south side of the Ajibik Hills
and by faulting at the Volunteer mine.
Lithology, including metamorpJiism . — Petrographically the iron-bearing formation com-
prises sideritic slates, which may be griineritic, magnetitic, hematitic, or limonitic; griinerite-
magnetite schists; ferruginous slates; ferruginous cherts; jaspilite, and iron ores. The ferru-
ginous cherts and jaspilite are commonly brecciated, the other kinds less commonly.
The sideritic slates are most abuntlant in the valleys between the greenstone masses in the
large area south of Ishpeming and Negaunee. These rocks are regularly laminated, are fine
grained, and when unaltered are of a dull-gray color. The purest phases of them are approxi-
mately cherty iron carbonate, as sliown by two analyses made by George Steiger in the laboratory
of the Survey. It is unusual to find exposures of the cherty siderite slates which have not been
more or less affected by deep-seated alteration or by weathering processes. The iron car-
bonates pass by gradations, on the one hand into griinerite-magnetite schists and on the other
into ferruginous slates, ferruginous chert, jasper, or iron ore.
The grunerite-magnetite schists consist of alternating bands composed of varying pro-
portions of the minerals griinerite and magnetite and (|uartz. Where least modified they have
a structure precisely Hke the sideritic slates from which they grade, the grunerite-magnetite belts
having taken the place of the carbonate bands. In some places the grunerite-magnetite schists
are minutely banded, the alternate bantls consisting of dense green griinerite and white or gray
chert, with but a small quantity of magnetite. Certain important kinds appear to be com-
posed almost altogether of griinerite, with a little magnetite. In general the griinerite-
magnetite schists are found at low horizons, below the ferruginous chert and jaspilite — that is,
at or near the same horizon as the sideritic slates. In many places also they are below intrusive
masses of greenstone.
By oxidation of the iron carbonate the sideritic slates pass into the ferruginous slates, the
iron oxide being hematite or limonite, or both. These rocks, in regularity of lamination and in
structure, are similar to the sideritic slates, differing fi'om them mainly in the fact that the iron
is present as oxide. In the different ledges may be seen every possible stage of change from
the sideritic slates to the ferruginous slates. The only necessary change is a loss of carbon
dioxide and oxidation of tlie iron. On Meathered surfaces, along veins, and along some of the
bedding planes the transfcjrmation may be complete, and between this material and the original
rock there are numerous gradations.
From the oxidation of the less slaty phases of the sideritic rocks result tlie ferruginous
cherts, consisting mainly of alternating layers of chert and iron oxitle, although the iron oxide
bands contain chert and the chert bands contain iron oxide (PI. XXXIII, B, p. 466). This iron
oxide is mainly hematite, but both limonite and magnetite are locally present. Rarely mag-
netite is tlie predominant oxide of iron. In such places the silica is usually coai-sely crystalline.
The rocks are folded in a complicated fashion, as a result of which the layers present an extremely
contorted appearance. Many of the folded layers show minor faulting. On account of the
exceedingly brittle character of these rocks, they are very commonly broken through and through,
and some of them pass into friction breccias. In places the shearing of the fragments over one
another has been so severe as to produce a conglomeratic aspect. The ferruginous cherts are
particularly abundant in the middle and lower parts of the iron-bearing formation, just above
or in contact with the greenstone masses. In a number of places they are between the griinerite-
magnetite schists or sideritic slates below and the jaspilite above. The rocks here named
ferruginous chert are called by the miners "soft-ore jasper" to discriminate them from the
"hard-ore jasper," or jaspilite, because within or associated with them are found the soft ores
of the district.
264 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The jaspilites consist of alternate bands composed mainly of finely crystalline, iron-stained
quartz iiiid iron oxide (PI. XXX FT, ]). 4CA) . Tiu^ exposures jiresent a brilliant appearance, due to
the interlaniinationof llie brij,d it-red jasper and tlie dark-red or black iron oxides. Tiie iron oxide
is mainly hematite and includes both red and specular varieties, but magnetite is commonly
present. Many of the jasper bands have oval terminations or die out in an irregidar manner.
The folding, faulting, and brecciation of the jaspilites are precisely like those of the feniiginous
chert, except that in the jaspilite they are more severe. The interstices produced by the dynamic
action are largely cemented with crystalline hematite, but magnetite is present in subordinate
quantity. In the foldmg of the rock the readjustment has occurred mainly m the iron oxide
between the jasper bands. As a result of this the iron oxide has been sheared, and when a
specimen is cleaved along a layer it presents a brilliant micaceous appearance; such ore has
been called micaceous hematite. This sheared lustrous hematite, present as some form of iron
oxide before the dynamic movement, is discriminated with the naked eye or with the lens from
the later crystal-outlined hematite and magnetite which fill the cracks in the jasper bands
and the spaces between the sheared laminse of liematite. The jaspilite differs mainly from the
ferruginous chert, with which it is closely associated, in that the siliceous bands of the jaspilite
are stained a bright red by hematite, and the bands of ore between them are mainly specular
hematite, whereas in the cherts the iron oxide is earthy hematite. The jaspilite in its typical
form, whenever present, usually occupies one horizon — the present stratigrapliic top of the
iron-bearing formation, just below the Goodrich quartzite. In different parts of the district
it has a varying thickness. With this jasper, or just above it, are the hard iron ores of the
district; hence it has been called "hard-ore jasper" by the miners to discriminate it from
the ferruginous chert, or "soft-ore jasper."
Relations to adjacent formations. — The iron-bearing formation rests conformably upon the
Siamo slate or upon the Ajibik quartzite and grades downward into one or the other of these
formations through the increase of clastic material and a lessening of the ferruginous constitu-
ents. The gradation may occur within a few feet or may require 100 feet or more. The transi-
tion is accomplished by interlaminations of material which are alternatively chiefly fragmental
and chiefly nonfragmental.
The overlymg formation, the Goodrich quartzite, rests unconformably u]:)on the Negaunee
formation. The amount of foldmg and erosion of the Negaunee formation accomplished before
the Goodrich quartzite was deposited ditt'ers in diflferent parts of the district. In some places
the erosion has gone so far as to have removed the iron formation entirely. It therefore follows
that the contact between the two formations is here at one horizon of the iron-bearing formation
and there at another, ranging from the highest known horizon to the lowest.
TliicJcness. — It is evident from these relations that the thiclcness of the formation varies
from practically nothing to its maximum. It is, however, difficult to estimate this maximum
because of the pervasiveness of the intrusive rocks in the Negaunee. It is rouglily estimated
that in the Ijroad area to the east of Ishpeming and Negaunee the thickness may be con-
siderably above 1,000 feet, although it is entirely probable that the maximum thickness is
less than this amount.
Intrusive and eruptive rocJcs. — Within the iron-bearing formation there are numerous
intrusive masses of "greenstone," really diabase and its altered equivalents. Tliese occur
in the form of both dikes and bosses, and many of the latter are of large size, running up to
masses 2 miles or more in extent. These rocks are especiaUy prevalent in the broad area of the
iron-bearing formation near Ishpeming, where they occupy between one-third and one-lialf
of the area. In many places the greenstones intrude the sedimentary series in a roughly
laccolithic fasliion. In consequence of this, where the two have been folded together their
relations are roughly similar to those of sedimentary formations, but when examined closely the
greenstones are always found to cut the Negaunee formation to a lesser or greater degree.
Surface eruptive rocks also appear in the formation in the vicinity of Clarksburg. (See
p. 268.)
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 265
UI'PER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GKOXJP).
The upper Huronian is structurally divisible into a lower belt of conglomerate and quartz-
ite, called the Goodrich quartzite, a belt of ferruginous rocks called the Bijiki schist, a belt of
slate and schist kno\vii as the Michigamme slate, and, to the south, a mass of volcanic rocks
called the Clarksburg formation. The Animikie group as a whole occupies the center of the main
Algonkian synclinorium from Ishpeming to the west end of the district. In this part of the
region it is the chief surface rock, occupying all the area between the belts of the Negaunee
formation.
GOODRICH QUARTZITE.
Distribution and structure. — The belt of Goodrich quartzite forms a westward-opening U,
bordered on the outside principally by the Negaunee formation, with its eastern margin near
the city of Ishpeming. The folding is similar to that of the Negaunee formation, though some-
what less complex. The sinuous contact of the two formations in the vicinity of Ishpeming
expresses the complexity of folding at this end of the synclinorium.
Litliology, including metamorphism. — Petrographically the Goodrich is dominantly a quartz-
ite, although usiuxlly there is a conglomerate at the base. As the underlying rock is in most
places the Negaunee formation this conglomerate is an ore, chert, jasper, and quartz con-
glomerate. Wliere the conglomerate is near the Archean this system may furnish material
for it — as, for instance, at Palmer, where there are numerous granite, greenstone, and schist
bowlders derived from the Archean.
Wliere the conglomerate is ore, chert, and jasper conglomerate immediately in contact
with the Negaunee formation, the jiarticles have been flattened and schistosity has developed
in both the conglomerate and the original basement rock, making it difficult to place the exact
line between the two formations. This is illustrated at Ilumljoldt. At several localities the
conglomerate resting upon the Negaunee formation has had quartz leached out and hematite
and magnetite deposited, developing a material rich enough in iron to be an ore. This is illus-
trated at the Goodrich and Volunteer mines. The quartzite is mahily quartz but contains many
particles of chert and jasper and usually considerable amounts of feldspar. Cementation by
enlargement is an important process in the induration of the rock. In the eastern part of the
district dynamic action has not usiuxlly been great enough to give the particles more than
undulatory extinction, or at most fracturing. However, these effects are pervasive, not a single
clastic particle escaping. The mashing in the central and western parts of the district has been
severe and the formation has been transformed to a schist. In the western part of the district,
especially in the Republic trough, the alterations have been so great as to transform the fekU
spathic quartz rocks into micaceous quartz schists, or locally, where the mica is sufficiently
abundant, into muscovite-biotite schists or biotite schists. In this change the feldspar has
usually altered into quartz and mica, including both muscovite and biotite, especially muscovite.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Goodrich quartzite rests unconformably upon the
Negaunee formation. The evidence of this unconformity consists both in the discordance of
strike and dip, varjdng from a few degrees up to perpendicularity, as at the Goodrich mine,
and in the existence of conglomerates derived from the Negaunee formation at scores of locali-
ties along the contact. At many places, as has already been pointed out, the erosion between
Negaunee and Goodrich time cut through the Negaimee formation. In these places the mate-
rial of the Goodrich quartzite comes from the underlying formations, the Ajibik quartzite or
the rocks of the Ai-chean. There are few Lake Superior formations that have a more complete
set of conglomerates at the base or that have clearer proof of unconformity with the rocks
upon which they rest. The Goodrich quartzite, by the diminution of coarse fragmental quartz,
grades above- into the Michigamme slate, the Bijiki schist, or the Clarksburg formation. The
nature of each gradation will be mentioned in connection with these formations.
TliicJcness. — The thickness of the Goodrich quartzite varies greatly from place to ])lace.
At the Goodrich mine it is calculated to be as great as 1,500 feet, but this is probably much
beyond tlie average for the district.
266 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
BIJIEI SCHIST.
• Name and distribution. — The Bijiki schist is given this name l)ecaiisc typical exposures
occur near the mouth of Bijiki River. It is confined to tliree narrow l)elts in tlie nortli western
part of the district. North of tlie northernmost of tliese behs is tlie Goodricii quartzite and
between the north and middle belts is the Michigamme slate. These two belts make a synclinal
structure. Tlie middle and southern belts unite at (lie east and rej)resent the outcrop of an
eroded anticline.
Lithology, including metamorphism. — ^Lithologically tlie Bijiki schist comprises two main
varieties, one of which is characteristic of the eastern ])art of tlie lielts and tlie otlicr of the
western ])art.
In the eastern jiart tlie least-altered phases consist of a sideritic chert interbedded \rith
the Michigamme slate and jirobably representing a slightly higher horizon than the phase of
the Bijiki schist described in the following paragrajiii. Not imcommonly the siderite is the
predominating. constituent. This slate has been extensively altered by weathering and meta-
soniatic changes into ferruginous slates and ferruginous cherts, with .subordinate amounts of
griinerite-magnetite scliist. In a few localities, where the ferruginous material is very abun-
dant and the conditions of deposition are favorable, small ore bodies have been found. These
are illustrated by the North Phenix, Pascoe, Hortense, Northampton, Marine, PhenLx, and
Bessie deposits. These ores differ from the soft ores of the Negaunee formation in that the
iron oxide is largely limonite and the associated slates are carbonaceous and graphitic.
In the western area, which contains the chief exposures of the formation, the Bijiki is
dominantly a banded griinerite-magnetite schist. This rock consists mamly of three miner-
als— -rjuartz, griinerite, and magnetite. Here and there a small amount of residual siderite is
seen. The rock is discriminated from the griinerite-magnetite schists of the Negaunee foimation
chiefly by its exceeding toughness and the dilliculty with which it is broken jiarallel to the
stratification.
One of the most conspicuous mineralogical features of the iron-bearing Bijiki formation
near Michigamme is its content of large garnets, up to 2 inches in diameter, developed late in
tlie metamorphism. These have been apparently altered to clilorite and amphibole, early
described by Pumpelly as chlorite pseudomorphs after garnet." Microscopic examination .shows
that although much of the matrix material is chlorite, the garnet is largely replaced bv green
amphibole and magnetite. Porphyritic biotite in a chloritic matrix is also a very conspicuous
mineralogical feature of these rocks, giving them in the hand specimen a brilliantly spangled
appearance. The garnet may be really a poikilitic development later than clilorite.
The two chief phases of the Bijiki schist may be in part at separate horizons, but there
seem also to be gradations between the ferruginous slates and cherts and tlie griinerite-magnetite
schist. As the schists are largely confined to the western ])arts of the belts, where there are
important masses of intrusive igneous rocks, and occur in the part of the district where the
Negaunee formation is also changed to a griinerite-magnetite schist, it is believed that the
schist represents the original sideritic formation altered under the influence of igneous rocks
while deeply buried and largely by the process of sihcation, whereas the eastern part of the
formation, consisting tif ferruginous slates and cherts and containing ore bodies, was altered
after the formation was exposed at the surface, later than upper Iluronian time, by the proc-
esses of weathering.
Relations to adjacent I'ocks. — ,Uong the northern belt where tlie base of the Bijiki schist
is exposed, roundetl fragmental quartz appears near the bottom of the formation, and with
an increase of this material the member grades downward into the Goodrich quartzite. The
Bijiki schist grades above into the Michigamme slate.
In the central and eastern parts of the ilarquette district the Bijiki has not lieen detected.
Apparently in the greater portion of the district between the time of the Goodrich quartzite
a I'liiiipelly, Riiplmel, On pseudomorphs of chlorite after garnet at the Spurr Mountain iron mine, Lake Superior: .\m. Jour. Sii., lid ser.,
vol. 10, July, isrs, pp. 17-21.
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 267
and tlie Michigamme slate the conditions were not favorable for the deposition of the iron-
bearing formation.
The u-on-bearing Bijiki schist, though not tliick or economically of as great consequence
as the Negaunee, is of considerable significance in the matter of correlation, for it occurs
at tlie same horizon as an important u'on-])oaring formation in other districts — notably the
Menominee, Gogebic, and Mesabi.
Thickness. — The Bijiki schist apparently has a maximum thickness of about 520 feet and
from this it ranges down to the disappearing point.
MICHIGAMME SLATE.
Name, disfrihution, and correlation. — The name Michigamme is given to the upper slate
and mica schist formation because extensive exposures of it occur on the islands of Lake ilichi-
gamme and on the mainland adjacent to the shore.
The ^lichigamme slate is mainly in a single great area, which extends from a ]>oint about
a mile west of Ishpeming along the axis of the Marquette synclinorium to the west end of the
district. To Lake Michigamme the breadth of this belt is for the most part less than 2 miles,
but at Lake Michigamme it broadens out into an area 5 miles or more in width, from which
extend the Republic and southwestern arms. Beyond the limits of the Marquette district
proper the formation continues to widen and covers a great expanse of country, extending to
the Crystal Falls district on the south and well toward the Gogebic district on the west. It is
the ecpiivalent of and is contmuous with the slate to which the name "Hanbury" has been
given in previous reports. It is also probably the equivalent of the Tyler slate of the Penokee-
Gogebic district, to judge from its relations with associated formations and from the probability
(indicated by known outcrops) of direct areal connection, though outcrops are not sufficient h'
numerous to establish this connection absolutely.
Deformation. — The Michigamme slate in most of the district forms a great synclinorium,
the secondary folds of which are, however, not sufficiently large to bring up the lower rocks
to the erosion surface except in a central anticline at the east end of Lake Michigamme,
where the Bijiki schist and Goodrich quartzite appear at the surface.
Litlwlogii. — The formation is a pelite, which now comprises two main ^•arieties — slates
and graywackes and mica schists and mica gneisses — each of which includes both ferruginous
and nonferruginous kinds. The slates and graywackes occur east of Lake Michigamme and
the mica schists and mica gneisses at Lake Michigamme and to the west, including the Repubhc
and southwestern arms. The slates and graywackes differ from each other chiefly in coarse-
ness of grain, the two being interlaminated in many exposures. There are all gradations from
aphanitic black shales or slates to a graywacke so coarse as to approach a cpiartzite or even a
conglomerate. In color the rocks vary from gray to black. Where fine grained they have
a well-developed slaty cleavage. In places they are graphitic, pyritic, and ferruginous. Two
specimens showing the maximum amount of graphite analyzed 15.69 and 18.92 per cent of
carbon.
The slates and graywackes differ in no essential respect fi-om the similar rocks of the Siamo
slate (see pp. 261-262) or from the Tyler slate of the Gogebic district (see pp. 232-233), there-
fore they will not again be described.
MetamorpMsm. — The slates and graywackes by increase in metamorphism pass into chlo-
rite schists, mica schists, and even mto mica gneisses. The process of alteration for the mica
schists is identical with that already described in connection with the development of similar
rocks for the Siamo slate and the Tyler slate. (See pp. 232-233, 261-262.) In many places
where the rocks are completely crystalline garnet, staurolite, chloritoid, and andalusite are plenti-
frdly present. In the more coarsely crystalline rocks much feldspar has developed, and the rock
thus becomes a gneiss. This material appears in bands which seem to be altered beds of the
formation but which resemble granitic material. The appearance is that of a rock pegmatized
throughout. These bands grade into ordmary mica schists. No independent granites have
268 GEOLOCxY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
boon discovered in oonnoction with tliis extremely metamorphosed variety of rock, but it can
not be asserted that such rocks are not somewhere present. Where the rocks have become
schists the ferruginous constituents have been largely transformed to magnetite.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Michigamme slate grades downward into the Bijiki
schist or the Goodrich quartzite.
TliicTcness. — Tlie thickness of the Michigamme slate is considerable, as is shown by the
wide area which it covers. There are, however, so many subordinate folds and the mota-
morphism is so extreme that it is ini|)ossible to make even an approximate estimate of its
thickness. Within the area described the thickness of the formation may not be more than
1,000 or 2,000 feet, or may be greatly in excess of this.
CLARESBXTIIG FORMATION.
Distribution. — ^The Clarksburg formation differs from the other Algonkian formations of
the Marquette district in that it is dominantly a volcanic formation. It is confined to the
south side of the Iluronian area, extending from the region north of Stoneville to a point some-
what west of Champion, the largest and most typical areas being east of Clarksl)urg. It is
clearly a local formation, not only in its eastern and western extent but in being confined tip
one side of the district. This is explained by its volcanic character, the vents being on the
south border of the Algonkian area.
Lithology. — Petrographically the formation comprises massive greenstones of the general
character of diorites; lavas that are interbedded with sediments and tuffs; tuffs that grade off
imperceptibly into sediments, the material of which is mainly of volcanic origin; and, finally,
greenstone conglomerates and fine-grained sediments, the material of which is mainly volcanic
but has evidently been arranged by water. All these rocks are extremely altered and in places
so much so that they are now schistose. The pyroclastic material may have been partly sub-
aerial, but doubtless a large part of it fell upon the water. The volcanoes of Clarksburg time
were very plainly of explosive type. The center of volcanic activit}^ was east of Clarksburg,
and m this vicinity are found the largest amounts of massive and coarse material, lavas, breccias,
and conglomerates. Toward the east and west the formation becomes thinner and its material
finer, imtil it dies ovit in both directions into the Michigamme slate.
It is not the purpose here to describe in detail the many different varieties of rocks of
this volcanic formation. These are discussed in Monograph XXVIII of the United States
Geological Survey." This volcanic formation is similar to that of the volcanic formation at
tlie east end of the Gogebic district, the chief difference being that the latter is much less meta-
morphosed. It is notable that both occur in the upper Iluronian and mainl}- take the place
of the great upper slate formation (Michigamme slate), although the beginning of the volcanic
outbreak was early in upper Huronian time or earlier. In the eastern part of the district
a small amount of volcanic material appears also to be associated with some of the earlier
formations, especially with the Siamo slate.
Eelations to adjacent formations. — The volcanic outbreaks of the Clarksburg began early in
Goodrich time^ or perhaps even in late Negaunee time, but the main volcanic deposits were
in Michigamme time. Later in Michigamme time, by the dying out of volcanic activity, the
sediments became more largety ordmary material, and thus the Clarksburg grades above into
the Michigamme.
Thicl-ncss. — There is no way to ascertain the maximum thickness of tiie formation, but
east of Clarksburg it must be several thousand feet thick. From this maximum it ranges
down to a knife-edge.
INTRUSIVE IGNEOUS UOCKS.
Into all the formations of the Huronian series igneous rocks are intruded. These are of
at least two ages; the older probably belong to the Huronian and the later to the Keweenawan
period. Much the larger number of intrusive masses are distinctly of post-Hin*onian and
1 Van Hise, C. R., and Bayley, W. S., The Marquette Iron-bearing district ot Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, pp. 4(»-186.
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 269
probably Keweenawan age. Many of them are distinctly bo.sses, laccoliths, and sills which
in their upward movement have been stopped by the massive competent layers of the Negaunee
or Goodrich qoartzite, and therefore on the present erosion surface are likely to show close
areal relations with the Negaunee formation. This is especially conspicuous in the vicinity of
Ishpeming, Negaunee, and Spurr.
The intrusive rocks have been described by various authors under the terms diorite, diorite
schist, chlorite schist, magnesian schist, soapstone, and paint rock. Part of them have been
regarded by some geologists as metamorphosed sediments, but microscopical study of all the
varieties shows that they were originally basic rocks of the composition of diabases. The great
bosses of greenstone, commonly known as diorite, are a prominent feature of the topography
in the general area covered by the iron-bearing Negaunee formation, and the relations of these
greenstones to the genesis of the ores has already been described. During the folding there
was much differential movement between the greenstone masses and the surrounding forma-
tions, and also the contact plane is one favorable to the action of percolating waters. As a
result of this it is a common thing for the periphery of the greenstone knobs to be schistose.
In the area around Ishpeming and Negaunee the schistosity has obviously been the result
of differential movement between the greenstones and the overlying Goodrich quartzite. The
Goodrich quartzite has moved in the usual direction upward along the limbs of the folds,
developing cleavage dipping more steeplj- than the contact of the greenstone and the quartzite.
Wliere not heavily stained by iron these rocks are commonly called chloritic schists. Adjacent
to the iron-bearing formation the rocks, besides having a schistosity, have been much leached
and modified m composition and are commonly known as soapstones because of their greasy
feel. The much-altered greenstones that have a strongly developed schistosity and have been
stained by iron oxide are called paint rock by the miners. Even in the massive varieties
of dikes, laccoliths, and bosses the original augite has extensively changed to hornblende and
consequently the rock in the district has generally been called diorite.
In the western part of the district, both within the intrusive greenstone masses and in
the adjacent formations, there have been important contact effects. This is shown by the
extensive development of garnet m both the intrusive and intruded formations, by the less
common development of biotite, and by the metamorphism of the iron-bearing formation
mto griinerite-magnetite schist and of the Michigamme slate into a mica schist. Griinerite
has formed to some extent within the intrusive rocks also.
The intrusive character of these igneous rocks of Huronian age is shown not only by con-
tact effects but by the manner in wliich they cut across the bedding of adjacent rocks and
project dikes into them. However, evidence of this kind is not available for all the igneous
masses, especially those of laccolithic and sheet form, and it is regarded as not at all unlikely
that some of them may be really extrusive rocks put down contemporaneously with the
adjacent sediments.
The latest intrusive rocks are fresh diabase dikes which are probably of Keweenawan
age. They cut all the other formations of the district, including the older greenstones wliich
have just been described. These rocks include diabase, quartz diabase, olivine diabase,
porphyrites, and basalts.
CAMBRIAN SANDSTONE.
Upper Cambrian or Potsdam sandstone is exposed in an east-west belt along Carp River
to the south of the city of Marquette and Mount Mesnard, where it rests unconformably upon
the Kona dolomite.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS.
The district is more or less covered by Pleistocene deposits. On the southeast it is so
thoroughly covered that the bed-rock geology is not well known. The Pleistocene is discussed
in Chapter XVI (pp. 427-459).
270
GEOLOGY OF TPIE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
THE IRON ORES OF THE MARQUETTE DISTRICT.
By the authnr-i and W. J. Mead.
DISTRIBUTION, STRUCTURE, AND RELATIONS OF ORE DEPOSITS.
The cliief iron-bearing formation ul the Marquette district is the Negaunee. It bears ore
at various horizons. Ores also occur at tJio basal horizon of the Goodricli quartzitc, where it
rests upon and h:is derived debris from tlie Negaunoe formation. Snitdl cjuantities of oi-e are
found in tlio iron beds of the Bijiki schist, associated witli the Micliigiumue slate. Workable
iron-oie deposits have been found at many places from a point east of Negaimee to Michi-
gamnie and Spurr. The Marquette district differs from the ilesabi and Gogebic districts in not
having long stretches of nonproducing iron-bearing rocks.
The maximum depth of concentration of ores in the Marquette district is still imknown.
On the Teal Lake range the depth is not more than 700 feet; in the Ishpeming and Nogaunee
areas depths as great as 1,500 feet are known. In the Champion area ore has been foUowed
'ii ore/i
Figure 36,— Ore deposits of the Marqiiettfi district. (Both ore exploited and ore now in mine are represented as ore, as the purpose of this figure
is to show themanner of the development of the ore rather than the present stage of exploitation.)
a, Generalized section in Marquette district, showing relations of all classes of ore deposits to associated formations. On the right is soft ore
resl ing in a V-shaped trough between the Siamo slate and a dike of soapstone. In the lower central part of the figure the more common relations
of soft ore to vertical and inclined dikes cutting the ja,sper are shown. The ore may rest upon an inclined dike, between two inclined dikes,
and upon the upper of the two, or be on bothsidesof a nearly vertical dike. In the upper central part of the figure are seen the relations of the
hard ore to the Negaunee formation and the Goodricjiquartzite. .\t the left is soft ore resting in a trough of soapstone which grades downward
into greenstone. (From Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1S97, PI. XXVIII, fig. 1.)
6, Cross section of Section lij mine. Lake Superior mines, in the Marquette district. On the right is a V-shaped trough made by the junction
of a greenstone mass and a dike. The hard ore is between theseand below the Goodrich quartzite. On the left the hardoreagain rests upon a
soapstone which is upon and contains bands of ore-bearing formation. The ore is overlain by the Goodrich quartzite. Scale: 1 inch=220 feet.
(From Mod. U. S, Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, PI. XXIX, fig. 1.)
down 2,000 feet and is laiown to extend fartlier. The Negaunee formation constitutes a part
of the westward-pitchmg Marquette trough, and west of Ishpeming and Xegaunee the central
part of the trough goes beneath a considerable thickness of upper Huronian sediments. Bectiuse
of this dee]) burial ))ut little drilling has been done to ascertain whether or not the ores go down
here, but the discovery of a large ore deposit at the very bottom of the Xegaunee formation near
Negaunee has led to deep drilling west of Ishpeming and Negaunee with such results as to indi-
cate that the ores extend to unlooked-for deptlis in this direction.
In general the ores come to the rock surface along the middle slopes of the hill.s, l)ut they
In general tlie ores come to
also go under the lowest ground.
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 271
The ore deposits of the Xegaunee formation and the associated ores may be divided, accord-
ing to stratigraphic position, into three chisses — (1) ore deposits at the bottom of the iron-
bearing formation; (2) ore deposits within the iron-bearing formation (these ores in many
places reach the surface but are not at the uppermost horizon of the formation); (3) ore
deposits m the top layers of the Negaunee formation and the bottom layers of the Goodrich
quartzite. (See fig. 36.) This last class of deposits runs past an unconformity. Some of
these ore bodies are almost wholly in the Goodrich quartzite. Stratigraphically these deposits
ought to be separately considered, but they are so closely connected genetically and in position
with the Negaunee ore deposits that they are treated with the deposits of that formation. The
first two classes of ore are generally soft, and the adjacent rock is ferruginous chert or "soft-
ore jasper;" the deposits at the top of the iron-bearing formation are hard, specular ores and
magnetite and the adjacent rock is jaspilite, also called " sjiecular jasper" and "hard-ore
jasper."
Although the larger number of ore bodies can be referred to one or another of the three
classes above given, it not infrequently happens that the same ore deposit belongs partly
in one and partly in another. Also the upper part of an ore deposit may be at the topmost
horizon of the iron-bearing formation and be a specular ore, whereas the lower part may lie
wholly within the iron-bearing formation and may be soft ore. In some places there is a grada-
tion between the two phases of such a deposit, but more commonly the two bodies are sepa-
I'ated by dikes, now changed to soapstone or paint rock.
1. The ore deposits at the bottom horizon of the Negaimee formation have been mined
principally where the lowest horizon of the formation outcrops — that is, they are confined to
that part of the formation resting upon the Siamo slate or the Ajibik quartzite, along the outer
borders of the Negaimee formation. The best examples of these deposits are those occurring
at the Teal Lake range and east of Negaunee. East of Negaunee the ore bodies occur at places
where the slate is folded into synclinal troughs which pitch sharply to the west. Here the iron-
bearing formation is in places cut by a set of steep vertical dikes, and the conjunction of these
dikes with the foot-wall slate forms sharp V-shaped troughs, as in the Cleveland Hematite mine,
where the ore bodies are found between a series of vertical dikes and the Siamo slate. By com-
paring this occurrence with the ore deposits of the Penokee-Gogebic district, it will be seen that
they are almost identical, there being on one side of each of the ore bodies an impervious dike,
the two uniting to form a pitching trough. The ore deposits of this horizon are being found
by deep drilling to be extensive. The opening of the Maas mine at the east end of Teal Lake
and the discovery of ore by deep drillmg at this horizon in the western part of the Ishpeming
area suggest that the beds of this horizon at gi'eat depth may ultimately be foimd to carry a
larger tonnage of ore than those of any of the other horizons.
2. The typical area for the soft-ore bodies within the Negaunee formation is that of Ish-
peming and Negaunee. Here are the Cleveland Lake, the Lake Angeline, the Lake Superior
Hematite, the Salisbury, and many others. The large deposits rest upon a pitching trough
composed wholly of a single mass of greenstone or on a pitching trough one side of which is a
mass of greenstone and the other side a dike joining the greenstone mass. The underlying rock
is called greenstone where unaltered; that immediately in contact with the ore is known by the
miners as paint rock or soap rock or soapstone. The greenstone changes by minute gradations
into the schistose soapstone, and this into the paint rock. Many of the thinner dikes are wholly
changed to paint rock or to soapstone, or to the two combinetl. The larger number of these
troughs are found along the western third of the Ishpeming-Negaunee area. Plate XVII (in
pocket) shows several westward-opening bays occupied by the iron-bearing formation in the
masses of greenstone. Conspicuous among these are the Ishpeming basin, the northern Lake
Angeline basin, the southern Lake Angeline basin, and the Salisbury basin. The iron-formation
embayments open out and pitch to the west. At Lake Angehne an eastward dike cuts across
the basin south of the center, and this combined with the gi-eenstone bluffs to the north and to
the south forms two westward-pitching troughs, the northern of which has the greatest ore
deposits of the Marquette district, containing many millions of tons of ore.
272 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKIOK REGION.
3. The hard-ore bodies, mainly specular hematite but in some deposits including nuuli
magnetite, are at the top horizons of the iron-bearing formation, immediately below and in the
basal members of the Goodrich quartzite. Examples of this class are the Jackson mine, the
Lake Superior Specular, the ^'ohulteer, the Michigamme, the Kiverside, the Champion, the
Republic, and the Barnum. Also, as interesting deposits, giving the history of the ore, may
be mentioned the Klomau and the Goodrich. In all these deposits the associated rocks of the
iron-bearing formation are jaspilite or griinerite-magnetite schist, usually the former. Many
of these ore deposits weld together the Goodrich quartzite and the Negaunee formation and
can not be separated in description. As in classes 1 and 2, all the large ore deposits belonging
to this third class have at their bases soapstone or paint rock. Wliere the soapstone is within
the Negaunee formation it is a modified greenstone mass or this in conjunction wdth a dike or
dikes. Where the ore deposits are largely or mainly in the Goodrich cjuartzite the basement
rock may likewise be a greenstone or it may be a layer of sedimentary slate belonging to tlie
Goodrich quartzite. These different classes of rocks are, however, not discriminated by the
miners, but are lumped together as soapstone and paint rock. Wlierever the deposits are of
any considerable size the basement rock is folded into a pitching trough, or else an impervious
pitching trough is formed by the union of a mass of greenstone with a dike, or by the union
of either one of these with a sedimentary slate. Perhaps the most conspicuous example of
this is at the Repubhc mine, but it is scarcely less evident in the other large deposits. A few
small deposits of ore (chimneys and shoots) occur at the contact of the Negaunee and Goodrich
formations, where no basement soapstone has been found.
As examples of ore deposits which are largely or wholly witliin the Goodrich quartzite
may be mentioned the Volunteer, Michigamme, Champion, and Riverside. These are partly
recomposed ores and differ in appearance from the specular hematite or magnetite of the
Negaunee formation in having a peculiar gray color anil in containing small fragmental particles
of quartz and complex pieces of jasper; in many of them also sericite and chlorite are discovered
with the microscope.
Ore deposits in the Bijiki schist, associated with the Michigamme slate, have slate as foot
and hanging walls. They are illustrated by the Beaufort, Bessie, Ohio, and Imperial mines.
Although these different classes of ore bodies have the distinctive features indicated above,
they have important features in couunon. They are confined to the iron-bearing formations.
They occur upon impervious basements in pitching troughs. The impervious basement may
be a sedimentary or an igneous rock, or a combination of the two. Wliere the ore deposits
are of considerable size the plication and brecciation of the chert and jasper are usual phe-
nomena. In many places this shattering was concomitant wth the folding into troughs or
with the intrusion of the igneous rocks.
In any of these classes the deposits may be cut into a number of bodies by a combination
of greenstone dikes and masses. A deposit which in one part of the mine is continuous may
in another part of the mine be cut into two deposits by a gradually projecting mass of green-
stone which passes into a dike, and each of these may be again dissevered, so that the deposit
may be cut up into a numl)(>r of ore bodies separated by soapstone and paint rock. Some of
the ore deposits have a somewhat regular form from level to level, but the shape of the deposits
at the next lower level can never be certainly predicted from that of the level above. Horses
of "jasper" may appear along the dikes or within an ore body at almost any place. The ore
bodies grade al)()ve and at the sides into the jasper in a variable manner. As a result of the
comljination of these uncertain factors, most of the ore bodies have extraordinarily irregular
and curious forms when examined in detail, although in general shape they conform to the
above descriptions.
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT.
273
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF MARQUETTE ORES.
The following average partial analyses were calculated from cargo analyses in shipments
for 1906 and 1909:
Arcrar/c partial analyses of Marquette orcsfi calculated from cargo analyses for 1906 and lS09.b
Composition of ore dried at 212° F.
Loss on
of total
pro-
Fe.
P.
SiOj.
-\IjO3.
ignition.
duction.
100.0
59.55
0. 107
8.21
2.28
1.66
100.0
57.05
. 105
10.16
2.18
2.31
21. S
59.60
.078
8.47
2.13
.57
37.0
61.40
.094
6.40
2.34
2.61
39.5
59.20
.082
S.U
2.54
2.20
2.0
53.70
.290
11.30
1.17
7.05
Moisture
(loss on
drvinsat
212° F.).
Average of entire district:
1906
1909
Upper horizon. 1906
Middle horizon, 1906
Lower horizon, 1906
Bijiki formation, 1906- . . .
9.04
9. .52
1.24
11.75
11.32
8.30
a Including ores of Swanzy district. ^ Calculated from analyses from I^ake Superior Iron Ore Association booklet.
In addition to the constituents listed above the ores contain small amounts of manganese,
lime, magnesia, sulphur, soda, and jjotassa. The range for the various constituents of the ores
as shown by average cargo analyses for 1906 and 1909 is as follows:
Range of percentage of each constituent in the Marquette ores for 1906 and 1909.'^
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.) .
Analysis of dried ore :
Iron
Phosphorus
Silica
Alumina
Manganese
Lime
Magnesia
Sulphur
Loss by ignition
0.51 to 14. 33
0.50 to 15. 75
90 to 64. 61
029 to .402
21 to 34. 20
.09
.04
.18 to
.09 to
.004 to
.18 to
6.26
2.72
2.00
1.18
.062
7.07
40. 20 to 05. 69
.018 to .387
3.25 to 40. 77
to
to
to
to
.42
.00
.00
.00
.003 to
4.32
2.78
2.09
.039
.10 to 11.40
a Calculated from analyses from Late Superior Iron Ore Association booklet.
The magnetites do not differ essentially m composition from the dommant hematites and
limonites except m having less water.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF IRON-BEARING NEGAUNEE FORMATION.
An average of 1,727 analyses representing 11,025 feet of drilling from the district away from
the available ores gives 35.12 per cent of iron. This includes both the lean jaspers and the partly
altered jaspers, but not the ores. Because of their great mass compared with the ores, this
figure represents nearly the general average composition of the entire formation. If the unal-
tered jaspers alone are taken, the average is somewhat lower.
The composition of a typical amphibole-magnetite-quartz rock is as follows:
Average analysis of griinerite-magnetite schist."
Loss 1. 03
SiO, 50.02
AUOj 97
Fe^Oj 10. 05
Feb 28. 29
MnO 74
CaO 2.63
MgO 4.13
CuO Trace.
Na,0
P265
CO2
H.^6 (above 110°)
0
0,S
09
1
55
42
100. 00
Total Fe 29. 20
It mil be noted that this differs but little from the average composition of the jaspers.
TrMT"
4751
a Calculated from analyses given in Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, p. 338.
-VOL 52—11 IS
274 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
MINERAL COMPOSITION OF MAKQUETTE ORES.
The ores of the Marquette district are doiiiinantly hydrous lieniatites and sulxirdinately
anhydrous specular hematites and magnetites. Owing to the presence of magnetite, tlie mineral
conijjosition can not be calculated fi-om analyses in which ferrous and ferric iion are not
separated.
The coarse specular hematites are made up mainly of large, closely fitting flakes of hematite,
most of which take an imperfect polish and have, therefore, a gray, sheeny, sj)otted appearance.
The flakes, which are parted along the cleavage, reflect the light hke a mirror. The large
number of individuals of this kind is appreciated only by rotating the sections under the micro-
scojje. This In'ings successively different flakes of hematite into favoi-able positions to reflect
the light into the microscope tube. In some sections cut transverse to the cleavage the scliistose
character of the rock is apparent in reflected light, innumerable laminae of hematite giving fine,
narrow, parallel dark and light bands, which are comparable in appearance to the ])oIysynthetic
twummg bands of feldspar. As both the magnetite and the hematite are usuafly opaque, the
two minerals in general can not be discriminated, although in some sections the crystal forms of
magnetite are seen and a small part of the hematite, much of it in little crystals, shows the
characteristic blood-red color. The important accessory minerals are quartz, griinerite, feldspar,
and muscovite. Some of the small, detached areas of cjuartz and feldspar appear to be frag-
mental. The muscovite occurs mainly in small, independent flakes, but some of it is apparently
secondary to the feldspar.
The fine-grained specular hematites dift'er from the so-caUed micaceous hematites chiefly
in that much more of the hematite is translucent and hence at the edges and in sjiots in the
slides is of a l)rilliant red color. The "slate ores" m reflected light show the laminated character
of the rock, while the massive ores give the peculiar spotty reflections, exactly the same as
magnetite.
The mottled red and black specular ores in reflected hght present a pecuhar appearance, the
true specular material giving the usual briUiant, spotty reflections, whereas the soft hematite
has a brownish-red color.
The soft hematites in transmitted light show in many slides the characteristic blood-red
color of hematite, although for the most part the sections are so thick as to give a brownish
appearance or are ojjaque. In the softest ores m reflected light a dark brownish-red color is
every^vhere seen, which is much less lirilliant than that presented bj' the same mmeral in trans-
mitted light. In some of the soft hematites, however, within the mass of red material are
many small areas which reflect the light m the same maimer as the specular ores. The limonitic
hematites differ from the pure hematites onlj^ in that, m both transmitted antl reflected hght,
in many places the reddish colors are not so bright.
Lender the microscope the magnetites are opaque m transmitted light ; in reflected Ught
they give the characteristic spotty appearance of that mineral. Where not pure the usual
mmerals contamed in the iron formation appear with their ordmary relations. Those most
plentifully seen are quartz, griinerite, muscovite, and biotite. Here and there garnet and
chlorite as an alteration pi'oduct are alnmdant. On the borders of the mcluded material the
magnetite invariably shows crystal outlmes. As a result each area of included mmerals has a
serrated form. With the magnetite there is always more or less of hematite, a large part of
wiiicii in many places results from the alteration of the magnetite. The liematite ranges from a
subordinate to an important amount. Also at many places with the magnetite are varying
cjuantities of pyrite and garnet and alteration jiroducts of the latter, chlorite and amphibole.
The magnetites range in color from ])lack to gray.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF MARQUETTE ORES.
The magnetites and specular hematites are called hard ores b}' the miners, and tiie iivtirous
red hematites are called soft ores. The magnetites range from very coarsely granular to finely
granular magnetite.
MAKQUETTE IRON DISTRICT. 275
As the ores are made up essentially of ii'on minerals and quartz, the mineral density varies
directly with the iron content, ranging;; from as high as 5.1 in some of the dense hard ores to as
low as 3.5 m some of the low-grade limonitic ores. Owing to the witle variation iji the mineral
composition of the ores, an average figure for the district would have no significance. The
avei'age density of fhe soft hematites, calculated from the 1906 cargo analyses, is 4.14.
The porosity varies from less than 1 per cent m the hard specular ores to over 40 per cent
in the limonitic ores. The average moisture content of the ores of the middle horizon indicates
a porosity of approximately 35 per cent, assuming the mmeral density to be 4.14. This is
probal)ly n(jt far from the true figure.
The number of cubic feet per ton varies from 7 in the pure hard hematites to as high as
14.5 m the limonitic ores. The average for the soft red hematites is approximately 11.9 cubic
feet per ton, calculated from a mineral density of 4.14, a porosity of 35 per cent, and a moisture
content of 11.75 per cent.
The following table, showing an average of a number of screening tests on the soft ores of
the Marquette district, gives a good idea of the average texture of these ores. A comparison
of the textures of the ores of the several Lake Superior districts is shown in figure 72, page
481. The screening tests, of which the following is an average, were made by the Oliver
Iron Mining Company on 11 typical grades of ore mined in the Marc|uette district in 1909 and
aggregating a total of 746,779 tons. For each grade of ore tested a sample was taken biweekly,
quartered down monthly in proportion to the number of tons mined, and at the end of the year
quartered down to 100 pounds, dried, and tested. The average was obtained by combining
the results of the 11 screening tests in proportion to the number of tons represented by each
of the 11 grades.
Composite of screening tests on typical soft ores of the Marquette district.
Per cent.
Held on J-inch sieve 28. 15
^-inch sieve 42. 22
No. 20 sieve 10. 98
No. 40 sieve 4. 90
No. 60 sieve 2. 90
No. SO sieve 1. 23
No. 100 sieve 1. 15
Passed through No. 100 sieve 7. 19
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF MARQUETTE ORES.
Structural conditions. — The structural conditions controlling the circulation of water in
the Marquette district are various. At the lower horizons of the Negaunee formation the
impervious basement is formed by the pitching folds of the Sianio slate, as on the Teal I^ake
range. At the middle and upper horizons of the Negaunee formation the irregular bosses and
intnisive masses of greenstone constitute impervious basements in the reentrants of which the
ores are found. The greenstone and its altered form, soapstone, accommodated themselves
to folding without extensive fractures and, while probabh" allowing more or less water to pass
through, acted as practically impervious masses along which water was deflected when it came
into contact with them. It is a common opinion among miners that a few inches of soap rock
is more effective in keeping out water than many feet of the iron-bearing formation. On the
other hand the brittle siliceous ore-bearing formation was fractured by the folding to which
it was subjected, so that where this process was extreme water passes through it as through a
sieve. It is evident that the tilted bodies of greenstone, or soap rock, especially those that occur
in pitching S3'nclines or that form pitching troughs bj^ the union of dikes and masses of green-
stone, must have converged downward-flowing waters. It is also clear that the weak contact
plane between the Goodrich quartzite and the Negaunee formation was one of accommodation
and shattering, favorable for the free movement of waters. Finally, the ores in the Bijiki schist
of the upper Iluronian have been developed by the percolation of waters along impervious
slate basements with which the Bijiki schist has been folded.
276
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Chemical and mineralogical changes in secondary concentration of Marquette ores. — The soft
ores and the associated ferruginous cherts of the middle and lower horizons of tlie Negaunee
formation arc similar physically, chemically, and mineralogically to the ores of the Penokec-
Gogebic district. They are derived by the same processes, under similar conditions, from
cherty iron carbonate rocks which arc practically identical with those of that district.
The hard ores have undergone not only this change but the additional anamorphic changes
of deep bu-rial antl igneous intrusion, the result being that the hard ores differ from the soft
ores chemically only in that they have less water and a little less oxygen, mincralogicallv in
that they have developed in them certain anhydrous silicates and some magnetite, and tex-
turally in that they are coarsely crystalline and in places schistose. To some slight extent
also similar hard ores may have been developed directly from the original cherty iron carbon-
ates by deep burial or igneous contact action, but it is shown elsewhere that such action usually
results in lean silicated iron-bearing rock rather than in rich ore bodies. The associated ferru-
Quartz
(chert)
V
N
S
. s
V N
S N
\
Pore space,
slump,
secondary iron
oxide and silica
{relative
proportions not
known )
I>or.^. [>,-.<■.
Ro^uit,I,^■fr..n,
SoIUtl'jn -.'f ;lllL.i
and reduction
in volume of iron
mineral
\
\
\
s
Quartz
(chert)
\
N
Aluminum silicate
Quartz
JS Fore space
QuarU
Iron
carbonate
Kaolin
Secondary iron
oxide replacing
iron carbonate-
Amphibole
Hematite
dehydrated
by pressure
Aluminum silicate
Hydrated
iron oxide
from oxidation
of iron carbonate
Hydra ted
iron oxide
from oxidation
of iron carbonate
Sideritic
chert
Ferruginous
chert
Soft ore
Hard ore
FiGUKE 37.— Graphic representation of the volume composition of the principal phases of the iron-bearing Negaimee formation, showing the
changes in volume and mineral composition involved in the concentration of the ores from the cherty siderite and the production of hard ore
from soft ore by dynamic agencies.
ginous cherts or soft-ore jaspers umlergo similar changes so far as the iron oxide laj-ers are
concerned. The chert beds are recrystallized, but not othermse changed. The result is a
hard-ore "jasper or jaspilite differing from the ferruginous cherts in being more crystalline,
having less pore space, and being less hj'drated, and accorduigly having red rather than yellow
or brown colors.
Volume changes in secondary concentration of Marquette ores. — The volume changes in the
concentration of the ores and the development of the hard ores are shown in figure 37. The
volume composition of the four phases of the iron-bearing formation is represented, thus
permitting a consideration of porosity as well as mineral composition. The mineral compo-
sition of the sideritic chert is calculated from a typical analysis." The mineral composition of
the ferruginous chert is calculated from the sideritic chert analysis, allowing for oxidation of
the iron mineral. The result is about an average for ferruginous cherts, as shown by analyses.
The indicated volume compositions of the soft and hard ores represent actual average partial
analyses of all ore as mined and averages of porosity determinations.
\^^len subjected to oxidizing solutions, the siderite of the chert}'' siderite is oxidized to a
more or less hydrated iron oxide, involving a considerable reduction in volume (see Gogebic
discussion, pp. 242 et seq.) ranging from 49.25 per cent when the product is hematite to 18.3
per cent when limonite is produced. If no iron were introduced, the actual amount of oxide
resulting would be intermediate between these two figures and j)robably would not tlitl'er greatly
o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, p. 337, second analysis.
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT.
277
from the hyclrated oxide of the soft ores, which is represented by a ratio of hematite to Umonite
of 7 to 1. Even if a considei'able amount of iron were introduced, the resulting rock would be
banded ferruginous chert having a larger pore space than the original cherty siderite. The
reduction in volume of iron mineral accompanying the alteration of the carbonate is partly
compensated by several factors, the relative importance of which is not known — by mechanical
slump and by the introduction of secondary iron oxide and quai'tz.
IRON MINERALS
High-grade hard oie
Low-grade hard ore
Soft ore
SILICA
PORE SPACE
Figure 38. —Triangular diagram showing the volume composition of the several grades of ore mined in the Marquette district in 1900, in terms of
pore space, iron minerals, and silica. The altitudes of the small triangles show in each case the amount of minor constituents (amphibole,
clay, etc.)
The development of ore from the sideritic chert involves, in atldition to the oxidation of
the iron in place, the removal in solution of a considerable amount of quartz. This gives a
still larger pore space, which agam is partly compensated by slump and by infiltration of iron.
Observation shows that the oxidation of the iron carbonate in place, producing ferruginous
chert, mainly precedes the removal of the larger amount of silica. The oxidation of the iron
is chemically more readily accomplished than. the solution of silica; and, further, the conse-
quent development of pore space affords opportunity for more abundant flow of solution to
accomplish the solution of silica. When the passage of the ore bodies into the chert or jasper
is examined in detail it is found that a siliceous band, if followed toward the ore, instead of
remaining solid becomes porous and may contain considerable cavities. These places in the
278 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
transition zone are lined with iron oxide. In passing toward the ore deposit more and more of
the silica is found to liavc been removed, and iron oxide has partly replaced it. An exami-
nation at many of the localities shows this transition from the l)andcd ore and jasper to take
place as a consequence of the removal of the silica and the partial substitution of iron oxide.
In many such instances the fine-grained part of the ore is that of the original rock, and the
coarser crystalline material is a secondary infiltration. It is not uncommon, however, for the
ore deposits to terminate abruptly along joint cracks or fractures.
The solution of quartz and the introduction of iron oxide ultimately produce the soft ores
from the ferruginous ciierts. These soft ores, as the diagram shows, have an average porosity
of about 36 per cent and are made up essentially of hydrated iron oxide, quartz, and cla\-. The
iron oxide largely represents siderite oxidized in place, but partly represents iron secondarily
introduced.
The development of the hard ores is accomplished by pressure or igneous contact action on
the soft ores, causing a reduction in volume of approximately 40 per cent or less, by decreasing
the porosit}^, dehydrating the iron oxide, and developing some magnetite and certain meta-
morphic ferromagnesian, aluminum-bearing minerals, such as amphil)ole and garnet.
Representation of ores and jaspers on triangular diagram. — The volume compositions of the
various phases of the iron-bearing formation are represented in the triangular diagram, figure 38.
(For explanation see p. 189.) The lines of demarcation between the hard and soft ores and
between the low and high grade hard ores are not as sharp as the grouping of the small triangles
would indicate. Tyj)ical specimens of each grade were selected and intermediate phases were
neglected. If all phases were represented the entire upper corner of the large triangle would
be covered with small ones, indicating complete gradation between the various classes of ore.
SEQUENCE OF ORE CONCENTRATION IN THE MARQUETTE DISTRICT.
1. The alteration of the Negaunee formation began before upper Huronian time, when
the formation had been slightly folded, eroded, and intruded by igneous rocks. Prior to upper
Huronian time all the phases of the iron-bearing formation now known, except the specular
hematites, had been developed, for all of them appear as pebbles in the basal conglomerate of
the upper Huronian, and it is unhkely that such closely intermingled diversity of pebbles could
have been developed from a single type of iron-bearing material after it had been deposited as
pebbles in the conglomerate at the base of the upper Huronian. Erosion was not deep, and
ores seem to have been developed' only near the erosion surface which bevels at a low angle the
upper beds of the Negaunee formation and now constitutes the horizon exposed nearest to the
overlying upper Huronian conglomerate. That ores M'ere formed at this time and place is
indicated by the fact that at this horizon occur specular hematites having a secondary cleavage
developed during the folding which followed the deposition of the upper Huronian and which
preceded the second great period of ore concentration.
2. Inter-Huronian alteration of the formation was inten-upted b}' the deposition of the
upper Huronian (Animikie group), the base of which was made up of conglomerate carrving
fragments of ferruginous chert and iron ore derived from the Negaunee formation. A higher
formation (Bijiki schist) contained iron carbonate.
3. The deposition of the upper Huronian was followed by severe folding and both intrusion
and extrusion of the basic igneous rocks. Much of the intrusion preceded the folding, for the
cleavage in the sedimentary beds developed during the fokling, and, having an attitude deter-
mined by the differential movement between the folds, affects also the intrusive rocks. Many
of these post-upper Huronian (Keweenawan) intrusive rocks are now found in the area of the
Negaunee formation. It is certain that some of them — as, for instance, those in the vicinity of
Michigamme — represent laccolithic masses which were unable to penetrate above the massive
Goodrich quartzite and spread out in the upper portion of the Negaunee formation. The
intrusion and folding, with varying relative efi'ectiveness in ilifferent parts of the range, anamor-
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT.
279
pliosed the iron-bearing formations, but witli widely differing results, depending on the condi-
tions of the iron formation before the anamorphism. The ferruginous cherts and ores of the
upper horizons of the Negaunee formation were changed to hard hematites and jaspers, becom-
ing specular when folded. The iron-bearing conglomerate at the base of the Goodrich quartzite
was similarly affected. The iron carbonate of the Bijiki schist of the upper Huronian was
changed into a coarsely crystalline amphibole-magnetite rock. Portions of the formations
farther removed from the intrusive rocks were less anamorphosed. These would include the
part of the Bijiki schist near the Bessie mine and the lower part of the Negaunee formation,
both of which up to this time still remained as iron carbonate.
Post-Keweenawan erosion exposed all phases of the iron-bearing Negaunee formation,
together with the ferruginous detrital base of the upper Huronian and the still unaltered car-
bonates higher in the upper Huronian. The iron carbonates, both of the lower parts of the
Negaunee formation and of the Bijiki schist, now for the first time exposed, became altered in
the ordinary manner, producing soft ores associated with soft ferruginous cherts, now found
typically along the Teal Lake range and in the Bessie mine of the western Marquette district.
The other phases of the Negaunee formation, which had been previously altered to chert, jasper
or iron ore, or amphibole-magnetite rocks, were also attacked to some extent, principally by the
leaching of siHca, which can be conspicuously observed in the loss of chert pebbles from the
conglomerate at the base of the upper Huronian, and by alteration of garnets and amphibole to
chlorite. The total effect of the alteration at this time on these harder phases, however, was
probably not so essential in the concentration of the ore deposits as that which had gone on
before.
The great varieties of phases of the iron-bearing rocks of the Marquette district are therefore
the results of katamorphic and anamorphic processes described in earlier pages, acting alone or
successively on different parts of the iron-bearing formations.
OCCURRENCE OF PHOSPHORUS IN THE MARQUETTE ORES.
DISTRIBUTION OF PHOSPHOKUS.
The ores of the Marquette range are as a whole higher in phosphorus than those of the
Vermilion, Mesabi, or Gogebic districts. They also show a greater range in phosphorus content
than the ores of any of these three districts. Of the total shipments of ore from the Marquette
range in 1906 approximately 18 per cent was of Bessemer grade. The lowest phosphorus grade
was Sheffield (Fe = 64.61, P = 0.029, P/Fe = 0.000448), and the highest phosphorus grade was
Cambridge (Fe = 59.60, P = 0.570, P/Fe = 0.00957).
The phosphorus and iron contents of the ores of the Marquette range are shown in the
following table : .
Phosphorus and iron content of Marquette ores.
Iron.
Phospho-
rus.
Ratio of
phospho-
rus to
Average total sliipraents for 1906 ._
Average ore from Ijottom horizon of the Negaunee formation —
Average ore from the middle horizon of the Negaunee formation
Average of ore from upper horizon of the Negaunee formation. . .
Average ores from upper Huronian Bijiki schist
69.55
58.38
57.22
59.00
65.91
0. 1072
.103
.063
.369
0.00180
.00176
.OOlliS
. 00107
.00642
Six hundred partial analy.ses of jasper carrying between 20 and 50 per cent of iron, repre-
senting 10,450 feet of drill holes in the area south of Negaunee, showed an average of 35 per
cent of iron and 0.050 per cent of phosphonis.
280
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The local distribution of phosphorus in the ores is extremely irregular. In many ore bodies
fho pliospliorus coiitont is found to increase as the greenstone or soap roek (altered greenstone)
walls are approached. This is shown by the foUowmg analyses of ore and greenstone collected
from the Cliicago shaft of the Lake Superior Iron Company:
Partial analyses of ore and greenstone from Chicago shaftM
P.
AljO^ CaO.
Ore 2 feet from foot wall
Paint rock (altered greenstone) 2 feet from contact
(Jreen.stune foot wall, soft, S feet from contact
Greenstone foot wall, hard. S feet from contact
Greenstone foot wail, hard, 3;i feet from contact
Greenstone foot wall, hard, 70 feet from contact. . .
Altered greenstone (soap reel;) at contact"
Fresh greenstone 80 feet from contact "
0.112
.192
.132
.134
.064
.106
.181
.090
1.12
4.67
6.41
15.30
0.19
.15
.22
.14
a The last two samples were from another part of the deposit.
^
s
M
3S
T
m
s
m+
rpc
m
s
™
ffi
m
TTTp
m
I
iiiiiiiii
;;;
:
;:
\
:
: : :
;;;;
:::
1
:;;
M
::::
: :::
:::
HI
lli::
V-'
s
i
£
S
■■
j
T-
S
;
ii
i
4
s
izJ
S
^
^
S
- —
-
tttt
!
1 1
x::t: t
— -^
CC
O
I
a.
in
O
X
Q.
U-
O
\-
Z
'
\
j
i
1
,
ii
o
cc
111
a.
1
i
I'.
1
._ __.
— 1 ■ ■
'
mumm
\m\\
^
ftii^
itt
i
:^
m
M
h
1
M
NT
m
LO
as
3N
GN Tl
m
£&
i
a
m^
liiiiiiiFi-i
i ;'i J 1 1 1 1 ;i
ffmff
a
a
ittiiMfTfrtl
-f
iiiiri^H
Figure 39. — Diagram showing relation of phosphorus to degree of hydration in Marquette ores.
Local variations in ])hosiihorus also occur apparently intle])endent of relations to green-
stone walls or channels of flow, being due, perhaps, to origmal difl'erences in the iron-bearing
formation. Typical of this is an occurrence in the Volunteer mine, where high-phosphorus
ore is found against hangmg-wall jasper and low-])hosphorus ore against tlie jasper foot wall.
The increase of phosphorus with degree of h3'dration is showTi in figure 39.
Two wasliing tests similar to those made on Mesabi ores (see p. 193) were made on
sam])les of soft red hematite ore from the Lake Angehne mine and the Hartford mine. The
results of these tests are shown in the following table :
MARQUETTE IRON DISTRICT.
Partial analyses from washing tests on Marquette ores.
281
Fe.
P.
AI2O3.
HjO.
Lake AnReline mine:
Heavy residue
65.00
02.53
61.20
02. 23
00. :i9
60.07
0.078
.100
.100
.120
.100
.080
0.89
1.56
2.20
2.30
2.27
2.64
2 12
2.43
Finest material
3 40
Hartford mine:
1 82
Medium
2 i6
Finest material
2 32
The test on the Lake Angeline ore gave results similar to those obtained from the tests on
Mesabi ore, showing the association of phosphonis with the more hydrated parts of the ore.
The washing test on the Hartford ore, however, does not show this relation.
MINERALOGICAL OCCURRENCE OF PHOSPHORUS.
Phosphoi-us is known to occur as apatite, dufrenite, and as aluminum ])hosphate. It
probably occurs in a variety of combinations with iron, magnesium, calcium, and aluminum
and in forms too minute to be identified. Apatite has been identified by Prof. Seaman "
and others at a number of localities in the Negaunec formation and in the upper Huronian
iron-ore deposits. In the chemical determination of phosjihoiiis it is found that only a part of
it is soluble in hydrocliloric acid, the insoluble portion remaining with the sihceous residue.
Tliis seems to indicate that phosphonis is present in at least two combinations. The soluble
phosphorus may be present in a variety of combmations, as iron phosphate, calcium phosphate,
alid some aluminum phosphates are soluble in hydrochloric acid. Charles T. Mixer and II. W.
Dubois * analyzed the insoluble residue remaining after treating ore with hydrocldoric acid
(1.10 specific gravity) and found its composition in percentages of original residue to be AljOj
9;55, CaO 0.92, P2O5 4.10, from wliich they concluded that the insoluble phosphorus is to a
large extent combined with alumina. What this aluminum phosphate is it is impossible to say.
It is of interest to note that the relative amounts of soluble and insoluble phosphonis are not
uniform in the various ores; in some the insoluble form is entirely absent, but in others it makes
up the greater part of the phosphorus present. It is believed by some of the chemists of the iron
range that the insoluble phosphorus is highest in ores liigh in alumina. In order to ascertain the
possibility of the phosphorus being present as apatite, the percentages of calcium oxide and phos-
phoras, in the difl'ercnt grades of ore produced in 1906, were platted as ordinates and abscissas in
figure 40. The diagonal line indicates the relative amounts of the two constituents in apatite.
It may be seen that most of the points fall below the liuje, indicating an excess of iime over
the amount requii'ed to combine with the phosphorus present as apatite. It is of interest to
note that the high phosphorus ores are correspondingly high in lime, indicating rather strongly
the possibility of at least a large part of the phosphorus being present in apatite.
PHOSPHORUS IN RELATION TO SECONDARY CONCENTRATION.
As shown in the table on page 279, there is apparently a gradation in the phosphorus content
of the ores of the Negaunee formation, from comparatively low pliosphorus in those of the
upper horizon to high phosphorus in those of the bottom horizon. The difference is most
marked between the hard ores of the upper horizon and the soft ores of the middle horizon.
The difference between the ores of the two lower horizons is very small and may be apparent
rather than real. In explanation of the difference in phosphorus content between the hard
and soft ores may be cited the opportunity for leacliing of pliosphorus from the upper strata
during the erosion interval previous to the deposition of the Goodrich quartzite. Another
possibility may be an original difference in the phosphorus contents of the ores at the two
horizons.
a Personal communication.
i> Jour. Am. Chem. Soc, vol. 19, No. 8, p. 619.
282
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
■ti-
+!■■■
fl-
: T,'
; J.
f
i:
1^
jiiip
=^
•
— 1
m
1
-
i - U- "
: O
uJ
-M —
r
ii..-.
'
^
1
—
—
1
"^
'x.
-
■n
-
\s^^^
1
•
iiir
m
i
1 ...-^
' ■■ ,_ i
■ ^^\
SWANZY DISTRICT. 283
The abundant slaty phases of the Michigamme may have some bearing on the high plios-
phorus of the ores, as in all the iron districts the slates are higher in phosphorus than the iron-
bearing formation proper..
The local occurrence of high-phosphorus ore near greenstone contacts is believed to be due
to dh-ect transfer of tliat constituent, leaclied from the greenstone during its alteration to soap
rock or paint rock and deposited in the neighboring oi-es. The analyses on page 280 show tJiat
there is actually a loss of pliosphorus in the alteration of the greenstone if alumina is assumed
to have remained constant, although the actual percentage of phosphorus increases.
Local variations, apparently not related to greenstone contacts, are probably due to origi-
nal differences in the phosphorus content of the formation and not to secondary transfer or
infiltration.
SWANZY DISTRICT.
GEOGRAPHY AND TOPOGRAPHY.
The Swanzy iron district lies about 16 miles south of the city of Marquette, in T. 45 N.,
R. 25 W. (fig. 41). In 1908 the productive area was less than 2 miles long and about half a
mile wide and contained five producing mines. Future exploration and development will
undoubtedly extend the district to the south and east, but northward and westward extensions
are apparently cut off by the granite area that bounds the district on these sides. The towns
within the producing area are Gwinn and Princeton, both reached by the Munising Railway.
The district occupies a range of hills typical of the granite area, and slopes on the south and
east to a flat sand-covered phxin above which stand a few monadnocks of pre-Cambrian rocks.
GENERAL SUCCESSION AND STRUCTURE.
The succession is as follows:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene Glacial deposits.
Cambrian sandstone. ■
Ordovician limestone.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Huronian series:
"Michigamme slate.
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) . .
Bijiki iron-bearing member. In lenses and layers
near ba^^ of Michigamme slate.
Goodrich quartzite. Quartz slate and quartzite, grad-
ing down into arkose or recomposed granite.
Unconformity.
Archean system;
Laurentian series Granite.
The Swanzy district consists of a southeastward-pitching synclinorium of upper Huronian
rocks, bounded on all but the southeast side by Archean granite. It is about 2 miles long; its
width is for the most part not more than three-quarters of a mile, and at the narrowest point,
near the Stevenson mine, is only half a mile. To the southeast it widens, but in this du-ection
the structure is not known because of the deep overburden. The pitches of the minor folds at
the Stegmiller, Princeton, and Swanzy mines are toward the northwest. The slates have
developed a good cleavage, usually crossing the bedding. This structure does not affect the
quartzite and the iron-bearing member.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
The Archean forms the basement upon which the Huronian sediments lie. It is repre-
sented by granites similar to tlie basal granites of the neighboring iron ranges.
The Archean bounds the district on the north, west, and southwest sides. Isolated expos-
ures stand as monadnocks above the flat sand plains of the district.
284
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
NVIWNOOIV
NV3HDyV
1
■s
Si"
• *
4
SWANZY DISTRICT. 285
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HXJRONIAN SERIES.
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
GOODRICH QTJARTZITE.
The Goodrich sediments lie unconformably upon the Archean rocks. They consist of a
coarse arkose or recomposed granite at the base, which grades upward tlirough quartzite and
quartz slate to the Brjiki iron-bearing member of the Michigamme slate. The arkose horizon
represents a shore phase of sedimentation where disintegration was very active and rapid
transportation of the disintegrated material prevented decomposition. In places the arkose is
distinguished from the granite with difficulty. The quartzite is petrographically very similar
to the Goodrich quartzite of the Alarquette range and exhibits all phases of gradation between
the arkose below and a thin-bedded quartz slate above. Both the quartzite and the quartz
slate are locally iron stained, and in places the impregnation is so strong as to have attracted
prospecting operations. The arkose phase is best exhibited in drill cores. The quartzite and
quartz slate phases are well exposed in abundant outcrops on the north slope of the range of
hills wliich crosses sec. 19, T. 45 N., R. 24 W. The quartzite also outcrops in a small hill near
the northeast corner of sec. 18, T. 45 N., R. 24 W.
The thickness of the quartzite and the quartz slate varies and locally the slate and jasper
lie directly oh the recomposed granite or on the granite itself.
MICHIGAMME SLATE.
The Michigamme slate is best exposed at the old Swanzy open pit, near the center of sec.
18, T. 45 N., R. 25 W., where it is found in contact with the Bijiki iron-bearing member. It
both underlies and overlies the iron-bearing beds, which are therefore treated as a member of
the slate. The Michigamme forms much the larger part of the upper Huronian.
The iron-bearing member is a banded ferruginous chert or "soft-ore jasper" similar in
appearance to part of the Bijiki schist of the Marquette range. Locally it grades into a ferru-
ginous slate. It apparently occurs in lens-shaped beds in and near the base of the Michigamme
slate, and therefore it is treated as a member of that formation. Drilling and mining operations
have shown jasper with slate above and below, or slate above and quartzite below, or in places
the iron-bearing member is found directly above the arkose and overlain by slate, the quartzite
and quartz slate being absent. The iron-bearing member is exposed at several places in the
vicinity of the Princeton, Stegmiller, and Austin mines and also in the old Swanzy open pit.
An exposure near the center of the SE. J sec. 18, T. 45 N., R. 25 W., shows typical banded
soft-ore jasper with a nearly vertical dip. Near the southeast corner of the same section, just
west of tlie Stegmiller mine, is a similar exposure. An exposure about 600 feet west of Princeton
station shows the member folded and contorted.
PALEOZOIC SEDIMENTS.
On the east side of the district flat-lying sandstones antl limestones belonging to the Cam-
brian and Ordovician overlap the pre-Cambrian formations unconformabh". The nearest
exposure of limestone is in the northeast corner of sec. 18, T. 45 N., R. 24 W., where a small
hill of quartzite has a few remnants of a limestone capping.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS.
Pleistocene sand flats of glacial origin cover most of the district. (See Chapter XVI,
pp. 427-459.)
286 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
CORRELATION.
Tlie upper Iliironian (Animikie f^roup) is very similar, both in stratigraphy and in litliolojjy,
to the upper Huronian of the Marquette district on tlie north and tlie Crystal Falls and Menom-
inee districts on the south.
THE IRON ORES OF THE SWANZY DISTRICT.
By the authors and W. J. Mead.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION.
The ores of the Swanzy tlistrict are in the Bijiki iron-bearing memljer, which is interbcdded
with the lower part of the Michigamme slate of tlie upper Huronian and rests upcm the Arcliean
o-ranite with only a comparatively thin intervening zone of quartzites, quartz slate, or recom-
posed granite, constituting the Goodrich quartzite. The upper Huronian constitutes 'a south-
eastward-pitching synclinorium, ])ut some of the minor folds on its limbs pitch to tlie northwest.
They are of the drag type so common to the Lake Superior region. (See fig. 12, p. 123.) The
iron-bearing member takes part in this general structure. The ores therefore appear as
much-folded deposits with foot wall of slate, quartzite, recomposed granite, or granite and
with hanging wall of black slate. All the ore deposits reach the erosion surface either at the
border of the s3'nclinorium or on the eroded minor anticlines in the main synclinoriiun.
Five mines are in operation and several additional ore deposits are known. (See map,
fig. 41.)
The ore is a soft hydrated non-Bessemer hematite containing a rather high percentage of
moisture. The following is the average composition of ore sluppetl in 1906:
Average composition of ore shipped from Swanzy district in 1906.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212°) 13. 50
Analysis of dried ore:
Iron 58.60
Phosphorus 211
Silica 10. 20
Manganese 71
Alumina 1. 05
Lime 1. 15
Magnesia 46
Sulphur 012
Loss by ignition 1. 25
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF SWANZY ORE.
The structural conditions governing the concentration of the ores in the Swanzy district
are a foot wall of granite, quartzite, or slate and a hanging wall of slate, conforming to the
structure of a sj'nclinorium that has a gentle southeastward pitch with many minor variations.
Erosion has exposed the iron-bearing member near the borders of the synclinorium and along
the arches of the minor anticlines. The circidation of the iron-bearing solutions has obviously
been controlled n(jt only by the impervious basement but by the overlapping impervious forma-
tions which determined tlieir points of escape.
The ores and ferruginous cherts have been derived from the alteration of sidcritic cherts
and slates, accompanied by the removal of silica and the development of pore space.
MONOGRAPH Lii Plate «»
GEOLOGIC MAP OF DEAD RIVER AREA, MICHIGAN
H^ A.K.SKAMAN
ScalR aiA>(i
s//,r// I I
u.
^k^lii^
LEGEND
ALGONKIAN (Huronlan sei-ies)
UPPER HURONIAN TANIMIKtE GROUP*
OLE HUFtONIA
Aus
N«Ratiiii»« fbniinlii.in
Siamo tilatr-
Q
witk Httfltc
"H;.
,3S ~*. 33*4. * -^-^.^*
'-^. ^
v_ ^-■
-'1' .
'■V-.J.~:-
-:^:
L
s^-^^;;>^r
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION. 287
DEAD RIVER AREA."
The Dead River area lies north of the Marquette district along the Dead River. Its {greatest
extent is 18 miles west-northwest and east-southeast. Its maximum width is 6 miles.
(See PI. XX.) The basin is largely a low, flat sand-covered plain with an amphitheater of
rock-exposed hills about it.
GENERAL SUCCESSION.
The general succession is as follows :
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene deposits.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Huronian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) Slates and conglomerate.
Unconformity.
{Negaunee formation (iron bearing).
Siamo slate.
.\iibik quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Graiiite intrusive into Keewatin series.
Keewatia series, including Kitchi and Mona schifits.
The Laurentian and Keewatin rocks occupy the liills siu-rounding the basin; the middle
Huronian rocks outcrop along the margin of the basin, anci the upper Huronian (xVnimikie
group) occupies nearly all of the basin itself.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
KEEWATIN SERIES.
The Keewatin series forms hills along the northeast and southeast sides of the basin. The
series includes on the south side the Kitchi and Mona schists, already described for the Mar-
quette district, and on the north side schists entirely similar in aspect, even to their content of
iron-bearing sediments consisting of jasper, cherty siderite, and cherty slate. Slate and con-
glomerate are weU exposed at the German exploration in sec. 35, T. 49 N.-, R. 27 W., and in the
Holyoke mine on the south side of the hiU.
LATJBENTIAN SERIES.
Laurentian granites and gneisses bound the Dead River district on the southwest, west,
and northwest and also for a short distance along the southeast end. They are not different
from the rocks of the northern complex of the Marquette district.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
Middle Huronian. — The middle Huronian is exposed along the south and southeast sides
of the district and also at the extreme west end bordering the amphitheater of Keewatin and
Laurentian rocks. The best exposed of these rocks is the Ajibik quartzite, forming the base
of the middle Huronij^n, and showing unconformity between Laurentian and middle Huronian
by discordance in structure and by conglomerates.
The Siamo slate outcrops in a narrow belt along the north side of the Ajibik quartzite
where it follows the south boundary of the district.
The Negaunee formation (iron bearing) is exposed in only one area, in sec. 15, T. 48 N.,
R. 26 W., along the railway track and in pits. Here the iron-bearing formation, mth the under-
o Mapped by A. E. Seaman, Michigan College of Mines.
288 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLIPERIOR REGION.
lying Siamo slate and Ajil)ik quartzite is much folded. Oveilyint; tlie iron-bearin<; formation
(in direct contact in pits) is the basal conglomerate of the ui)per lluronian, containing fragments
both of middle lluronian and Keewatin.
Upper lluronian (Animikie group). — The upper lluronian consists princijjall}- of slates,
similar in all respects to the Michigamme slate of the Marquette district. They outcrop in
isolated exposures over the area and their presence is further indicated by the prevailing low
relief of the basin. The base of these rocks is probabh' marked l)y the conglomerate resting
unconformably on the Keewatin series at the Holyoke mine and eastward at intervals to the
east end of the basin; also by the conglomerate covering the Negaunee formation, alreadj'
referred to. The slates have not been connected directly with tlie conglomerate, l)ut tlie fact
that the conglomerate contains fragments not only of Keewatin but of middle Hurunian rocks
seems to require its correlation' with the upper Huronian.
Greenstone dikes cut the slates. One of them constitutes the falls of Dead River where it
cuts through the slates in sec. 9, T. 48 N., R. 26 W.
PERCH LAKE DISTRICT (IXCLUDIXG WESTERN IMARQl'ETTE).
GEOGRAPHY AND TOPOGRAPHY.
The Perch Lake district includes territory extentlLng west from the Marquette district
and north from the Ciystal Falls and Iron River districts to a line extending from L'^Vnse Bay
on the northeast to the south end of Lake Gogebic on the southwest. The area thus defined
includes roughly 1,200 square miles. (See fig. 42; PI. XXI, in pocket.) A topographic map
has been prepared of the area around Perch Lake, extending from SS° 30' to 88° 45' west and
46° 15' to 46° 30' north. The remainder of the country has not been surveyed topographically.
As a whole the country is characterized by morainal topography with much local irregularity,
but has no consj^icuous ranges characteristic of the principal ore-pi'oducing districts.
GENERAL, SUCCESSION.
The succession is as follows, from the top downward:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene or glacial deposits.
Cambrian sandstone.
Algonkian system:
Huronian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikie group). .
Middle Huronian .
Michigamme slate (slates and graywackes with pos-
sible iron-bearing lenses). Equivalent and areally
continuous with the Michigamme slate of the Crys-
tal Falls, Iron River, and Menominee districts.
Goodrich quartzite (quartzites and conglomerates).
Intrusive diorite.
Xegaunee formation (iron bearing).
Siamo slate.
.\jibik quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series Granite and syenite.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LAURENTIAN SEKIES.
The Laurentian granite and syenite bound the district on the northeast. They show no
features different from the Laurentian of the contiguous Marquette district. The rocks are
abimdantly exposed. The topograph}' of the Archean area is as a whole rougiier and more
irregular than that of the Algonkian on its southwestern margin, affording a very satisfactoiy
guide for discrimination in the field mapping. The Archean underlies the Huronian uncon-
formably.
PERCH LAKE DISTRICT.
289
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HUBONIAN SERIES.
Middle Huronian. — Between the upper Huronian slates and graywackes (Michigamme
slate) and the Archean granite on the northeast there appears a belt about 5 miles long extend-
ing from the Marquette district northwest, in which are exposed middle Huronian sediments
and upper Huronian Goodrich quartzite. (See fig. 42.) The middle Huronian Ajibik quartz-
ite and Siamo slate show no features different from those of the Marquette district. They
rest unconformably against the Archean. On the northwest and along their trend they become
covered by glacial materials until they can no longer be followed. Presumably they extend
R.31 W.
Eruptive diaba-se
aiid diorite
///a
Tvliclii^amme slate
and Bijiki scliist
(iron tjf-'oririg)
Goodrich quartziie
Negaunee formation
{iron hearing)
Siamo slate
Ajibik qiiartzite
1#
Granite
3 Miles
Figure 42.— Geologic map of west end of Marquette district, Michigan. By W. N. Merriara and M. H. Newman.
considerably farther than the map indicates. The Negaunee formation also is similar to the
Negaunee formation of the Marquette district. It is followed, however, principally by mag-
netic observations to the point indicated on the map, where it is lost beneath the covering
of later drift. Wliether it extends farther or whether this represents the end of the originally
deposited iron-bearing lens is not known.
Upinr Huronian {AnimiJcie gi'oup). — The district is underlain principally by upper Hui-o-
nian slates and graywackes, known as the Michigamme slate. On the northeast they rest
unconformably against the Archean granite and middle Huronian rocks. On the northwest
they are overlain by Cambrian sandstone, the relations of the two locally being obscured by
faulting. The Goodrich quartzite of the upper Huronian is exposed only in the northeastern
part of the area bordering the middle Huronian and at the northwest end, presumably over-
47517°— VOL 52—11 19
290 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
lapping on the Archean. Its characteristics are similar to those of the Goodrich quartzite
of the Marquette district. The Michigamme slate covers much the larger part of the Perch
Lake area. Exposures are fairly abundant, especially in the Perch Lake district. Presum-
ably contemporaneous basic volcanic rocks are associated with these slates, to judge from
the facts observed to the south, but their detailed (hstribution is not known. There Ls difli-
culty in identil'ymg horizons in the slate and graywacke, and thei'efore in working out the
structure of this area. From the abundance of exposures, however, it is probable that this
may be accomplished in the future. The locations of most of the exposures have been noted
in commercial surveys, but the Geological Survey has not examined this area in detail to work
out the structure. From the promising development in similar series in the adjacent Iron
River district, it would seem that this area would warrant careful examination for iron-bearing
lenses.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS.
Pleistocene glacial deposits cover all of this area. (See Chapter XVI, pp. 427-459.)
CHAPTER XII. THE CRYSTAL FALLS, STURGEON, FELCH MOUN-
TAIN, CALUMET, AND IRON RIVER IRON DISTRICTS OF MICHI-
GAN AND THE FLORENCE IRON DISTRICT OF WISCONSIN.
The Crystal Falls, Sturgeon, Felch Mountain, Calumet, and Iron River iron districts of
Michigan and tlie Florence iron district of Wisconsin together form the ore-producing area
between the Marquette district on the north and the Menominee district on the south. (See
fig. 43.) The ores of all these districts occur in the upper Huronian (Animikie group) and have
many similarities in kind and relations, and the limits of the several districts are poorly defined.
They are accordingly grouped together in one cliapter.
CRYSTAL FALLS IRON DISTRICT."^
LOCATION AND AREA.
The Cr\'stal Falls district is centered in the town of that name in the Northern Peninsula
of Michigan. (See PL XXII, in pocket.) As the term is here used it includes an area of about
540 square miles, covering all the territory between the Marquette and Menominee districts as •
these have been limited on the maps of the United States Geological Survey. In commercial
parlance the Menominee district includes the Crystal Falls and southwestward extensions, and
reports of shipments for the Menominee district include these districts. However, they are
geologically and structurally more or less independent and have been treated in two reports,'
hence here the Crystal Falls district will be treated independently of the Menominee district.
The Felch, Sturgeon, and Calumet troughs bordering the Crystal Falls district on the southeast
are also discussed in this chapter, as well as the Iron River and Florence districts, which lie to
the south and southwest.
GENERAL, SUCCESSION AND STRUCTURE.
The succession is as follows:
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene drift.
Cambrian sandstone (in southern and eastern parts of district).
Algonkian system:
Huronian series:
Upper Huronian (Animikie group).
Unconformity (?).
Middle Huronian (?)
Volcanic rocks interbedded with slates.
Michigamme slate. Thickness unknown, but proba-
bly several thousand feet.
Vulcan iron-bearing member, 300 feet.
Negaunee (?) formation (iron bearing).
Ajibik quartzite.
Hemlock formation (volcanic), 1,000 to 10,000 feet.
Includes at top iron-bearing slate member, 1 to 1,900
feet thick, formerly called "Mansfield slate."
Unconformity (?).
T Tr • (Randville dolomite, 500 to 1,. 500 feet.
Lower Huronian i . ' ,
[Sturgeon quartzite, 100 to 1,000 feet.
Unconformity.
Archean system :
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses.
o For further detailed description of the geology of this district see Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 36, 1899, and references there given.
6 Clements, I. M., and Smyth, H. L., The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 30, 1S99. Bayley,
W. 8., The Menominee iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 46, 1904.
291
292
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The northeastern part of the area is underlain by Archean granites. Bordering tliis main
Archean area on the southwest, with longer axes parallel and striking north-northwest an,d
c a
.5 3
C P
^'^fl
<
. ^
Vf
"o.!P
■o ^ '^
C 0)
D Q.
O Q.
CD O
•1
S o
1
S>E L
oE
5S
39 N.
N 9VX N SI' J.
M 6C X N 9e i
2 ^
1
south-southeast, are two minor oval areas of Archean granite. Iluronian sediments and basic
igneous rocks, exposed ]irinci])ally in the western part of the district, lap around the Archean
ovals and against; the main Archean area to the northeast, and their general structure is deter-
CRYSTAL FALLS IRON DISTRICT. 293
mined by their relations to the Archean ovals. The Crystal Falls antl Amasa districts are on
the southwest side of one of tlicse Archean ovals. Therefore both tlie di]) and (he pitch of the
minor folds of the upper Iluronian occui)ying these areas are in southwesterly directions.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LAUBENTIAN SERIES.
The Archean or basement rocks occupy the northeastern part of the district, filling the
angle between the Crystal Falls antl Marquette districts. To the west of this they also appear
in two elliptical cores with longer axes north-northwest and south-southeast, approximately
parallel to the axes of the major folds of the district.
The Archean rocks consist mainly of massive and schistose granites and of gneisses. No-
where in them have any rocks of sedimentary origin been discovered. They have been cut by
igneous rocks, both basic and acidic, at diflerent epochs. These occur in the form both of
bosses and of dikes, the latter in places cutting but more ordinarily showing a parallelism to the
foliation of the schistose granites. The Ai-chean granites and gneisses and the earlier intrusive
rocks alike have been profoundly metamorphosed, and at several places have been completely
recrystallized. In the westernmost oval there is to be observed a distinct arrangement of
feldspar crystals with their longer dimensions parallel to the contact with the Huronian rocks.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER HXJEONIAN.
STURGEON QtTARTZITE.
In the central part of the district the Sturgeon quartzite is represented only by thin frag-
mental layers at the base of the overlying Randville dolomite. These are too thin to be mapped.
Its principal outcrops are to the southeast in the Felcli Mountain and Sturgeon districts, de-
scribed later in this chapter.
RANDVILLE DOLOMITE.
The Randville dolomite completely surroimds the Ai-chean oval northeast of the town of
Crystal Falls. Here it constitutes the base of the sedimentary series and rests directly upon
the Archean with only thin intervening layers of fragmental quartzose dolomite and recom-
posed granite, all more or less altered to cpiartz schist and in many places difficult to distin-
guish from schistose phases of the granite itself.
On the west side of the western Archean oval the dolomite is poorly exposed and its thick-
ness is not estimated. On the east side the belt is about half a mile wide and the thickness
about 1,500 feet. The formation constitutes here an eastward-dipping monocline with mmor
plications. In the scattered outcrops of the Michigamme Mountain area the dolomite strikes
and dips toward all points of the compass as a result of the gentle arching from the general
northwest-southeast axis, combined with sharp local folds which run nearly east and west.
Petrographically the formation ranges from coarse saccharoidal marbles, in places very pure
but usually filled with secondary silicates, to fine-grained, little-altered limestones, which are
here and there so impure as to be calcareous or dolomitic sandstones and shales. The prevalent
colors are white, but various shades of pink, liglit and deep blue, anil pale green occur.
Some of the varieties are oolitic. This structure does not seem to have been previously noted
in limestones of pre-Cambrian age in the Lake Superior region.
294 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
MIDDLE HURONIAN (?).
HEMLOCK FORMATION.
Distribution and general character. — The volcanic Hemlock formation occupies a large area
in the Crystal Falls district. It is believed almost to surround the westernmost Archean oval
and also to occur in a great area northwest of Crystal Falls and in one isolated area near the
Mastodon mine, south of Crystal Falls. Its general stratigraphic position is conformably
above the Randville dolomite and beneath the upper Huronian slates, but like most volcanic
formations its relations differ in different parts of the district in ways wliich will appear below.
Well-bedded cherty slates, iron-bearing lenses, and limestone are mterbedded with tlie Hem-
lock foi'iiiation and also both underlie and overlie it. The volcanic extrusions may be
regarded as interruptions of otherwise continuous deposition of sediments. The lack of con-
tinuity of the volcanic flows antl of the interbedded sediments, and the difhculty of correlating
the beds of either in different parts of the district, make it practically impossible to use geologic
names for these sediments which will have anything more than very local significance. One
of the prmcipal local sedimentary units within the Hemlock formation has been described
and mapped in the United States Geological Survey monograph on the Crystal Falls district"
as the "Mansfield slate." Limestone and slate layers appear abimdantly in the Hemlock
formation near Hemlock River immediately northeast of the town of Amasa and in several
other localities.
Area south and west of the westemrnost Archean oval. — Exposures of the Hemlock formation
are numerous west and south of the western Archean oval, and where erosion has removed the
di'ift the formation has a marked influence on the topography. The thickness is estimated
from the dip to reach 23,000 feet, but this is probably illusory because of reduplication due to fold-
ing. The formation here consists mainly of bedded surface basic extrusive rocks and crystalline
scliists derived fi'om them. Sedimentary rocks play a subordinate part. The Hemlock rocks
are similar in all respects to the Keewatin volcanic rocks and to the volcanic Clarksburg formation
of the Marcjuette district. The formation is cut by a few acicUc chkes and by numerous dikes
and enormous bosses of basic rock. On the former Survey map of the district '' certain of
these were discriminated, but they are not discriminated on the accompanying map (PI. XXII,
in pocket), because more study has sho^\^l a most intimate association of extrusive and intru-
sive phases of the formation tliroughout the area. The acidic intrusive rocks mclude rhyohte
porphyry and aporhyolite porphyry. The rhyolite porphyry shows interesting micropoikihtic
textural characters. Acithc pyroclastic rocks are scarce and were derived from the aporh3'olite.
The basic lavas correspond to the modem basalts. They are much altered and are called
" metabasalts." The basic lavas include nonporphyritic, porphyritic, and variolitic and eUip-
soidal types. Clements " has described the ellipsoidal textures and concludes that basalts
possessing this structure were origmally very viscous and correspond to the modern aa lavas,
probably of submarine origin. The pyroclastic rocks comprise eruptive breccia, includiug
friction breccias and flow breccias, and volcanic sedimentary rocks. The colian deposits,
which are described as tuffs, grade from fine dust up to those in which the fragments are bowl-
ders. The water-deposited volcanic fragmental rocks are known as volcanic conglomerates,
and likewise range from those of which the particles are minute to those of which the fragments
are very large. At many places occur clastic rocks which are now schistose and whose exact
mode of origin — that is, whether eolian or water-deposited — could not be determined.
The crystalline schists of Bone Lake include rocks of completely crystalline character,
which by field and microscopic study have been connected Math the volcanic rocks and are
considered to have been derived from rocks similar in nature to them.
In general some of the volcanic rocks are submarine. The greater proportion, however,
were derived from volcanic vents, which could not be located, but were probably situated near
the Huronian shore line. Clements suggested that volcanic activity began in the north and
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 36, 1899, pp. 54-73. b Idem, PI. III. « Idem, pp. 112-124.
CRYSTAL FALLS lEON DISTRICT. 295
moved to the south, and that some of the volcanic deposits to the north are contemporaneous
with the so-called "Mansfield slate."
Fence River area. — In the Fence River area the Hemlock formation occupies a belt between
2,000 and 3,000 feet in width, between the Randville dolomite on the west and the Negaunee
formation on the east. The best exposures occur on the sections made by Fence River. No
folds have been observed within the formation. The tliickness probably ranges up to 2,300
feet as a maximum. The rocks of the formation in tliis area are cliiefly chlorite and ophitic
schists, with which are associated schists bearing biotite, ilmenite, and ottrelite, greenstone,
conglomerates or agglomerates, and amygdaloids. As evidence of the origm of these schists
several facts may be cited. First, they include no rocks possessmg any sedimentary characters;
next, lavas and also greenstone conglomerates or agglomerates are undoubtedly present in the
series; furtherinore, the minerals wliich compose the schist are those wliich would result from
the alteration in connection with dynamic metamorphism of igneous rocks of basic or inter-
mediate chemical composition; and finally, the grain and character of the groundmass and in
some sUdes the presence of plagioclase microlites disposed in oval lines point dii-ectly to an
igneous origin and to consohdation at the surface. The conclusion is reached that the Hemlock
formation of the Fence River area is composed of a series of old lava flows varying in compo-
sition from acichc to basic.
Other areas of the Hemloclc formation. — Other areas of volcanic rocks similar to those of the
Hemlock formation appear to the north and west of the town of Crystal Falls, near the Mastodon
mine, and elsewhere, as shown on the accompanymg general map of the Crystal Falls district
(PL XXII). Wliether these are of the same age as the main mass of the Hemlock formation
and owe their distribution to folding, or whether they are later extrusions, is not yet known.
Ironr-hearing slate member {"Mansfield slate") of the Hemlock formation. — The so-called
"Mansfield slate," wliich is interbedded near the top of the Hemlock formation, is best exposed
in the vicmity of the town of Mansfield. It here occupies a valley through wliich flows ^lichi-
gamme River. Petrograplucally the member includes graywackes, clay slate, phyllite, siderite
slate, chert, ferruginous chert, and iron ores, with several metamorphic products derived from
them. The strike is north and south and the dip on an average 80° W. The maximum thick-
ness of the belt is 1,900 feet. Southward from the point of maximum tliickness it rapidly
thins out and disappears.
The iron-bearing beds form a belt 32 feet wide or less between black slate walls. The
strike and dip are the same as those of the slate. A single ore body of commercial importance
has been mined. (See p. 324.)
The Hemlock formation both east and west of the main belt of this slate carries thm bands
of slate with similar strike and dip. In general, in this vicuiity, there is a monoclinical west-
ward-dipping succession of volcanic rocks extending 2 miles or more east of Mansfield and about
the same distance west, containing interbedded layers of slate, which in the vicinity of Mansfield
are in considerable abundance and include also iron-bearing beds. These rocks may be best
seen on the hill just east of Michigamme River, southeast of the Mansfield mine, where eight or
ten layers of cherty slate from a few inches to 10 feet or more in width are interlay ered with
westward-dipping ellipsoidal basalt flows. The centei-s of the flows are usually homogeneous
and coarse grained, and the ellipsoidal structures appear only within a few feet of the top or
bottom of the flow immediately next to the slate. As a whole the contact between the basalt
and the slate is a plane surface, making it possible to follow a bed of slate even 2 feet thick for
hundreds of feet. In detafl, however, the contact may be very irregular, following interstices
in the ellipsoidal surface as if deposited upon an initially irregular surface.
Slates mapi)ed as "Mansfield" by Smyth also outcrop on Michigamme Mountain and thence
at intervals for 6 miles to the northwest. The area northwest of Michigamme Mountain, mapped
as Pleistocene on Plate XXII, is believed to be largely underlain by slate from its appearance
in a few pits and exposures. The information is so meager, however, that it is not thought
desirable to map this area as slate. On Michigamme Mountain the geologic position of the
296 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEIUOR REGION.
so-called "Mansfield" rocks is free from doubt. In the principal synclinc of sec. 32, T. 44 N.,
R. 31 W., they overhe tlio dolomites and j)ass downward hitcj them hy a relatively slow gradation ;
on the borders of the MicJugamme Mountain syncline they underlie the iron-bearing Negaunee
("Groveland") formation. The j)assagc to the higher formation likewise is graded, though
rapidly, and is marked m certaui bands by an increase m clastic grains and by changes in the
character of the matrix in whicii these are set. The average thickness of the formation in tliis
mountain is not less tliau 400 feet.
NEGAUNEE 0) FORMATION.
Magnetic helts northeast of Fence River. — By reference to tlie map (PI. XXII, in pocket) it
will be noted that there is a magnetic line marked "A" along the west side of the mam north-
eastern area of Ai'chean rocks. That tliis magnetic line is caused bj' and marks the position
of the ii-on-bearing Negaunee formation there can not be much doubt, according to Snij-th,"
for that rock outcrops in a few scattered localities, occurs abundantly in the drift, and has
been found in test pits and drill holes here and there along this Une. The underlying quartzite
outcrops beneath tlie non-bearing formation near the north end of the Une, but farther south
it is entirely covered by the drift, so far as the territory has been examined. The overlying
upper Huronian rocks ai"e also known to be present just west of the Negaunee formation as
far south as sec. 19, T. 46 N., R. 30 W. The dip along the "A" line is probably therefore,
on the whole, toward the west, although the observed dips at the few locahties where deter-
muiations have been made are either vertical or slighth' mchned fi-om the vertical toward
the east. In an east-west section of driU lioles in sees. IS, 19, 29, and 30, T. 46 N., R. 30 W.,
cutting the magnetic belt "A," the iron-bearing formation is found to be amphibole-magnetite
rock cut by intrusives.
Ai-ound the immecUately adjacent Archean oval on the west the magnetic line "B" has
been traced for 25 miles without a single exposure. The known facts with reference to the
"B" line, according to Smyth,'' are these: (1) It represents a magnetic rock; (2) this magnetic
rock completely eucncles an Archean core. It may further be inferred with practical cer-
tainty that this formation, winch carries such constant magnetic properties for 25 miles, must
be sedimentary. With regard to its structure the foregomg considerations would necessarily'
involve the conclusion that it dips away from the Archean core on all sides, ami this conclusion
is fortified by the unsymmetrical separation of the horizontal maxima on tlie magnetic cross
sections.
East of the "B" line, between it and the "A" line, is found the basal member of the upper
Huronian. The rock which is manifest m the "B" Ihie must, therefore, be older than any
member of the upper Huronian. The Negaunee formation, represented in the "A" fine, dips
west, but the rock of the "B" hne dips east. They are both older tlian the basal member
of the upper Huroruan and are both younger than the Archean. They are l)oth strongly and
persistently magnetic. For 8 or 10 miles the}' run parallel to each other less than half a mile
apart. Their broad structural relations to the Archean basement of the region are precisely
similar. Therefore, although the rock that gives rise to the "B" line has never yet been seen,
it may be concluded with confitience that it is the Negaunee formation, and that the "A" and
"B" lines represent this rock brought up in the two limbs of a narrow and probably deep
synclmal fold.
Negaunee (?) formation at MicMgamme Mountain and in tlie Fence Jiiver area. — The known
outcrops of u'on-l)earmg formation (previously mapped as "Groveland" formation) in tlus
belt are limited to three localities — the vicinity of Michigamme Mountain, in sec. 33, T. 44 N.,
R. 31 W., and sec. 3, T. 43 N., R. 31 W.; the exposures and test pits at the Sholdice explora-
tion, in sec. 21, T. 45 N., R. 31 W.; and the test pits at the Doane exploration, in sec. 16,
T. 45 N., R. 31 W. The last two localities are 1 mile apart, and the more southern is 8 miles
north of Michigamme Mountain.
<■ Van Hise, C. U., Clements, J. M., and Smyth, H. L., The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Jlon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 3fi,
1899, p. 453.
b Idem, p. 454.
CRYSTAL FALLS IRON DISTRICT. 297
Magnetic lines connect the outcrops on Micliigamme Mountain witi: tliose to the north.
The magnetic line also extends beyond the outcrops around the north side of the western
Ai-chean oval. The eastern belt was not traced farther than a mile southeast of Micliigamme
Mountain. In the central and southeastern portions of T. 43 N., R. 31 W., however, in the
direct prolongation of the anticlinal axis, is a broad belt of slight magnetic disturbance, along
the western margin of wliich he volcanic rocks, dipping west. In sec. 26, T. 43 N., R. 31 W.,
this magnetic belt splits into two branches, one of which runs directly east for a mile and then
southeast mdefinitely, while the other maintains a general southerly coiu-se to the south luie
of the townsliip. In sec. 26 large angular bowlders, evidently tierived fi"om the iron-bearing
formation, are found in the zone of magnetic disturbance, but no outcrops have been discovered.
There can be little doubt that these disturbances roughly outline the position of the Vulcan
formation m the axial region.
Except in Micliigamme Mountain, the most elevated pomt of the district, the n-on-bearing
formation is not topographically proimnent. In the Fence River area it produces a more
subdued and somewhat lower-lying surface than the underlj-mg formation, but the difference
is slight and is of Uttle moment in comparison with the confusing effects of glaciation.
At Micliigamme Mountam the iron-bearuig formation caps the hill hi a well-marked
syncluie, the axis of which runs northwest and southeast. The structure is distmctly shown
by the attitude both of the ferruginous rocks and of the underlyuig phjdUtes ("Mansfield slate").
At the Interrange exploration, half a mile to the south, is found a secondary but more open
embayment of the same syncluie. These are the only folds of the Micliigamme Mountain area
sufficiently deep to include the iron-bearmg rocks. The thickness of the formation can only
be guessed at, as no complete section is exposed, and the data for determmmg its upper limit
are decidedly shadowy. The magnetic observations mdicate a breadth of 400 to 600 feet,
aind as in the Fence River area it is certainly much thinner than the two lower formations its
thickness may be approximately 500 feet.
The rocks are interbanded ferruginous quartzite and actinolite and griinerite scliists,
which still contain evidence of detrital origin. The formation contains less iron than the Vulcan
formation of the Felch district, and consecjuently the Ughter-colored varieties are niore abundant,
it contains more detrital material, and in the Michigamme Mountain area the texture is generally
closer and less granular. Moreover, in passing north from the Micliigamme Mountain area to
the Fence River area we find at the Sholdice and Doane explorations that the lower portion of
the formation is composed of ferruginous quartzite, which is succeeded higher up by actinolite
schists and griinerite scliists similar in all respects to the characteristic rocks of the Negaunee
formation in the western Marquette district.
The stratigrapliic position of the iron-bearing formation is above the Hemlock formation
on Micliigamme Mountain ; to the west of the mountain the formation is apparently below the
Hemlock formation; to the north of the mountain, in the Fence River area, it is above the
Hemlock formation. In the last-named area nothing is known of the nature of the overljang
rocks.
Tliis iron-beaiing formation is doubtfully called Negaunee because of its lithologic character
and because it comes ^\•ithin 2 miles of the ''B" line of attraction, regarded by Smyth as Negau-
nee, suggesting that it is the same belt brought up again on the west side of this intervening
gap of 2 miles by synchnal structure. On the other hand, it is nearly connected by a magnetic
belt around the north side of the oval with the Vulcan formation and for this reason its correla-
tion has been regarded as doubtful. However, by reference to the map (PI. XXII, in pocket),
it \\"ill be noted that this belt of supposed Negaunee, extending around the north side of the
oval and south as far as the north line of T. 45 N., R. 33 W., fails to connect b}^ nearly 2 miles
with the known Vulcan formation, which is represented by a magnetic line running as far north
as sec. 16, T. 45 N., R. 33 W. Moreover, at the north end, near the Red Rock mine, the Vulcan
is associated with conglomerate carrying fragments of an earlier iron-bearing formation very
suggestive of unconformity. Still further, the iron-bearing Vulcan formation where last seen.
298 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGIOTs^.
is associated with red slates and apparently unaltered, while the rooks associated with the
magnetic line to the north, supposed to represent the Negaunee, are micaceous and amphibolitic
slates and scliists showing a mucii higher degree of metamorphism.
Ferruginous quartzite associated with irorir-b earing formution north of Michigamme Mountain. —
Ferruginous quartzite is found in isolated exposures in sees. 27 and 34, T. 44 N., R. 31 W.,
Michigan, lying inune<liutely east of the eastward-dipping Randville dolomite and west of a
belt of attraction forming the southward extension of a belt tliat is taken to represent the
iron-bearing Negaunee ( ? ) formation.
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
The upper Huronian occupies a large part of the western half of the district, lapping around
the oval areas of older rocks and coming into contact for the most part with tlie Ilendock
formation. It is directly continuous with the upper Huronian rocks of the Marquette district
on the north and with those of the Menominee district on the south and also extends far west
of the boundaries of the area mapped into the Iron River and Florence districts. The exposures
are scanty. The formation influences the topography very shghtly, being for the most part
heavily drift covered.
Tlie upper Huronian in this district is essentially a great slate formation interbedded with
small quantities of graywacke and chert, called the Micliigamme slate, and near its base vnth.
iron-bearing lenses called Vulcan iron-bearing member.
MICHIGAMME SLATE.
General character. — The formation known as the Michigamme slate consists principally of
slates wdth some graywacke, Hke that of the Menominee district. In previous reports on this
distiict it has been called upper Huronian slate, but as the formation seems to be equivalent to
and continuous wdth the Michigamme slate of the Marquette district, the name ilichigamme
will be appUed to it in this monograph. True water-deposited conglomerates are usually
absent in this formation, being known in only two places in this district, and in these places
their stratigraphic position is unknown. For the most part the slates have good cleavage and
locally they are highly graphitic, chloritic, sericitic, and micaceous, and rarely staurohtiferous
and garnetiferous. The cleavage usually stands nearly vertical, but the bedding may have
gentle dips. In general the rocks may be said to lap in broad folds around the lower
Huronian, but everywhere with minor phcations. The result is that in the ore-producing
parts of the district, in the Crystal Falls and Amasa areas, the dip and pitch of the minor
folds are in general westerly and southwesterly directions. Away from the base of the forma-
tion it is difficult to identify horizons in the slates, and tliis fact, together with lack of expo-
sures, has thus far prevented the working out of the structure satisfactorily. In general,
■however, the strikes and dips at these horizons away from the base of the formation are similar
to those near the base; that is, the strikes are in northerly and northwesterly directions, and
the dips and pitches of the minor folds are westerly and southwesterly. The exposures imme-
diately above Crystal Falls seem to be part of a much crenulated southwestward pitching
S3mchne. It has been assumed further that the area of volcanic rocks associated with the upper
Huronian slates northwest of the town of Crystal Falls is of Hemlock age, and hence that it
represents an antichne brought up by folding. If these volcanic rocks should be really later
in age. than the Hemlock, as is entirely possible (see p. 299), then there is left no evidence
for this antichnal structure in this locality. As mining explorations furnish more data it
should be possible to work out the structure.
Vtilcan iron-hearing member. — The Vulcan iron-bearing member is similar to and is correlated
wdth the Vulcan formation of the ]\Ienominee district. In the Crystal Falls tlistrict it consists
principally of ferruginous chert, ferruginous slate, iron ore, and iron carbonate, interbediled
in layers and lenses in the Michigamme slate. It is tlierefore treated as a member of the Michi-
gamme slate m this district. The immetliately adjacent wall rocks of slate are as a rule highly
CRYSTAL FALLS IRON DISTRICT. 299
carbonaceous and pyritiferous. The iron-bt^aring layers range in thickness from a few inches
to 300 feet, and are even thicker where repeated by buckling. This buckling is of a drag type,
giving steep pitches and not materially changing the dip and trend of the member as a whole.
Folds of similar types are characteristic of the Iron River and Menominee districts. (See
pp. 324, 347.) Explorations are not yet sufficient to correlate the individual iron-bearing layers
in different parts of the district satisfactorily, and it is impossible now to say wdiether there are
one, two, or more independent layers separated by slate, though the probabiHty is in favor of
there being at least two principal horizons near the base of the upper Huronian, as in the
Menominee district.
The map of the Crystal Falls district (PI. XXII, in pocket) shows that the distribution of
the Vulcan iron-bearing member has certain linear characteristics. One bolt follows the baSe
of the upper Huronian. Beginning 4 miles north of Amasa, it has been followed by mag-
netic lines and intermittent mines and explorations southeastward past Amasa and Balsam;
thence southeastward to the vicinity of the Holhster and Armenia mines near the east side
of T. 43 N., R. 32 W. ; thence southwestward and westward through the Lee Peck, Hope,
West Hope, Morrow, May, Kimball, and Tobin mines south of Crystal Falls; and thence
southward through the Dunn and Mastodon mines. The real continuity of this belt has not
been estabhshed at every point, but the probabihty of continuity is so great that exploration
is being vigorously conducted at many points along the belt. Another belt of iron-bearing
rocks extends from the Crystal Falls mine east of Crystal Falls westward through the Great
Western, Pamt River, Lamont, and Bristol mines. This belt may be at a higher horizon in the
upper Huronian. It has not yet been cormected with the one previously noted, though it is
too early to say that a connection may not exist. A possibihty of comrection seems to be
indicated by certain explorations between the two belts just east of Paint River east of the
town of Crystal Falls. Developments in the Iron River district have shown the iron-bearing
member to extend eastward toward the Crystal Falls district, raising the question of connection
with one of the iron belts in the vicinity of Crystal Falls, but so far as the Crystal Falls district
itseK is concerned such a coimection is not yet shown by explorations.
The magnetic belt marking the extension of the iron-bearing member of the Amasa dis-
trict to the north and south is caused partly by the iron-bearmg member and partly by mag-
netic surface portions of the ellipsoidal basalts of the Hemlock formation near their contact
with the upper Huronian. At certain places, as in the vicinity of the Hollister mine, there
are really two parallel magnetic belts rather than a single belt. One of these belts follows
the magnetic phase of the greenstone and the other the iron-bearing member immediately
adjacent. It is apparent, therefore, that not much reliance may be placed on the assumption
that the iron-bearing member exists every whei-e beneath the magnetic belt.
It is an imexplained fact that parts of the Vulcan iron-bearing member away from the
Hemlock formation, particulai'ly near Crystal Falls and farther south, are but slightly magnetic.
This is also true of the Vulcan iron-bearing member in the Iron River district to the west.
INTRUSIVE AND EXTRUSIVE ROCKS IN UPPER HURONL&N.
The upper Huronian is penetrated in this district by intrusive rocks of acidic, interme-
diate, and basic composition. wSome of these have been intruded before the folding and are
very schistose. Most of them, however, are later.
Basaltic extrusive rocks, identical in all features with the Hemlock formation, appear in
isolated areas in the upper Huronian. The principal areas are immediately northwest of
Crystal Falls and in the vicinity of the Mastodon mine. There is as yet no evidence to show
whether these extrusive rocks are the correlatives of the main mass of Hemlock formation
and owe their present distribution to folding or whether they are really later extrusives inter-
bedded with the upper Huronian Michigamme slate.
300 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
RELATIONS OF THE UPPER HaRGITIAN TO UNDERLYING ROCKS.
In genonil tho dip and the disLribution of tlie upper Iluroiiian about the cores of older
rocks show it to bo distinctly younger than these rocks. The next underlying rocks for the
most part are those of the Hemlock formation.
The upper Ihiionian is doubtfully unconformable structurally with the Hemlock formation.
In the earlier Geological Survey rej)orts on this district the two were described as unconfornuiljle,
largely because of their marked difference in lithology and because of the fact than an unconform-
ity exists at the base of the upper Huronian of the Marquette district, with which the upper Huro-
nian of the C'r\'stal Falls district is satisfactorily correlated. No direct evidence is j-et available
to show that there is not some time break between the Hemlock formation and the upper
Huronian slates, but the apparent structural conformity, together with the conformable rela-
tions of the upper Huronian to underlying formations in the Menominee and Felch Mountain
districts, seems to point to the possibility of nearly if not quite contiimous deposition of Huron-
ian sediments beginning with the Ranilville and Sturgeon formations and continuing through
the upper Huronian. On the other hand, the existence of an unconformity is strongly sug-
gested by the relations of the two magnetic belts taken to represent respectively the iron-bearing
Vulcan and Negaunee formations northward from tlio Red Rock mine, where there is a break
in the magnetic field and a difl'erence in lithology and metamorphism, and where a conglomerate
at the base of the upper Huronian can'ies pebbles of an earlier (supposedly Negaunee) iron-
bearing formation. (See p. 297.)
CAMBRIAN SANDSTONE.
In the southern and eastern portions of the district the edges of the tilted older rocks are
partly covered by a blanket of gently dipping sandstones of Cambrian age, very soft and easily
dismtegrating. These rocks appear near Michigamme River as detached outhers. To the
south and east from that river the separated patches become larger and more abundant, until
finally a few miles bej^ond the eastern limit of the Felch Mountain range they unite and entirely
cover the pre-Cambrian formations.
STURGEON RF^ER DISTRICT."
LOCATION AND AREA.
The Sturgeon River area of Algonkian sediments, like the Felch Mountain area, is an east-
west tongue, very narrow at its eastern extremity and wadening out toward the west imtil it
finally plimges under drift deposits that separate it from the large Huronian area of the Crystal
Falls district. The tongue occupies the western portions of T. 42 N., R. 27 W., and the central
and northern portions of T. 42 N., Rs. 28, 29, and 30 W. The best exposures of the roclvs
constitutmg the tongue are foimd in sees. 7, 8, 17, and 18, T. 42 N., R. 28 W., and sees. 1 and
3, T. 42 N., R. 29 W., on or near the northwest branch of the east branch of Sturgeon River;
hence the name Sturgeon River tongue.
GENERAL, SUCCESSION.
The succession is as follows :
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series (?) - Sandstone.
Huronian series:
,,.,',, TT . ,„, [Basic igneous rocks, largely intrusive.
Middle Huronian (?) { ^ [■ ,• ^ ■ \
(Negaunee (?) formation (iron bearing).
Unconformity (?).
, . „ . IRandville doli)niile.
Lower Huronian ^ , i ,
(Murgeon quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archcan system:
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses.
a Bayley, W. S., Tho Sturgeon River tongue : Mon. V. S. Ceol. Survey, vol. 36, 1899, pp. 458-487.
STURGEON RIVER DISTRICT. 301
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LAUBENTIAN SERIES.
Laurentian granites and gneisses bound the Algonkian sediments on the north and south.
Also between the northern and the southern boundaries of the sedimentary area as defined,
and in the midst of the sediments, are two areas of granite, the rociv of one of which is unques-
tionably and that of the other presumably older than the conglomerates v/ithin the tongue.
The better dcfuied of these two areas lies in the northern i)ortions of sees. 7 and 8, T. 42 N.,
R. 28 W., and sec. 12, T. 42 N., R. 29 W.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJRONIAN SERIES.
LOWER HUKONIAN.
STURGEON QTJARTZITE.
In this district the Sturgeon quartzite is represented by schists, conglomerates, arkoses,
and quartzites 1,000 feet or more thick. Nowhere is there any marked discortlance between
. the schistosity of the Archean and Sturgeon rocks, but the conglomerate indicates a marked
unconformity.
RANDVILLE DOLOMITE.
In the Sturgeon River trough the dolomites have relatively more fragmental material
with them than in the Felch Mountain trough. Exposures are few and occupy here the central
■portion of the trough. Tlie dolomites do not themselves show the synclinal structure of the
Sturgeon trough, but the fact that they are bounded by the quartzite on the northeast and
southwest and this in turn by the Archean granite suggests trough structure. No definite
contacts of Archean granites and the dolomites are known.
MIDDLE HTJRONIAN (1).
NEGADNEE (!) FORMATIOIT.
Bordering the north side of the dolomite in sees. 34 and 35, T. 43 N., R. 29 W., is non-
magnetic red and black hematitic chert, associated with red slate, shown in the Deerhunt mine
explorations. Neither hanging or foot wall was determined in the exploratory work and
the relations of the iron-bearing formation to the other formations are therefore imknown.
The iron-bearing formation is doubtfully correlated with the Negaunee.
IGNEOTTS ROCKS.
Associated with the sedimentary rocks are great masses of basic igneous rocks. Some of
these are unquestionably intrusive masses, as shown by their relations to the conglomerates;
others appear to be interleaved sheets. A very few, apparently bedded greenstones, on close
examination seem to be composed of intermingled sedimentary and igneous material. These
may be altered tuffs.
KEWEENAWAN SERIES (?).
In the SW. i sec. 34, T. 43 N., R. 29 W., are wliite .calcareous sandstones associated wdth
purple slates, mth dips ranging from 35° to 40°. These are similar in all respects to tlie upper
series in the east end of the Felch Mountain trough, and there are the same elements of doubt
with reference to their correlation. They are provisionally assigned to the Keweenawan, but
they may prove to be of Cambrian age.
302 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTERIOR REGION.
FELCH MOUNTAIN DISTRICT."
LOCATION, STRUCTURE, AND GENERAL. SUCCESSION.
The Felch Mountain district is an east-west synclinorium constituting a narrow strip
nowhere more than 1^ miles and usually less than a mile ^^'ide, which as a whole runs almost
exactly east and west for a distance of over 13 miles. It lies in the southern portion of
T. 42 N., Rs. 28, 29, and 30 W. On tiie north and south it is Ijordcrcd by tlie older Archean.
The lowest member of the Algonkian occupies parallel zones next to the Archean on both the
north and tlic south and is succeeded toward the interior of the strip by the younger members.
Although tlic general structure, therefore, is synclinal, a single fold of sunple type has nowhere
been found to occupy the whole cross section of the Algonkian formations, but usually two or
more svnclines occur, separated by anticlines, which may have diiTerfiit degrees and directions
of pitcli and dilTerent strikes, or may be sunk to different depths, and complicated besides both
by subordinate folds and by faults.
The succession is as follows:
Intrusive rocks (basic and acidic).
Algonkian system:
Ke weenawan series (?) Mica 8chist.s and f erruginou.'i and micaceous quartzites.
Unconformity.
Huronian series:
TT TT ■ / 1 • 1 • \ I Vulcan formation (iron bearing).
Upper Huronian (Anmiikie group).. < „ ... ^ ^'
*^' ^ hi/ [Felch schist.
Unconformity (?).
, „ •. f Randville dolomite.
Lower Uuronian < „
l&turgeon quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archean system:
Laurentian series - Granites and gneisses,
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LAURENTIAN SERIES.
The Laurentian series is the same as that of the other areas in Michigan here described.
The contact between the Laurentian and Hm-onian is not exposed, but the existence of con-
glomerate elsewhere along the contact and tlie fact that the contact is followed uniformly
by quartzite are believed to indicate unconformity.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER IIUROXIAN.
STURGEON QTJAHTZITE.
In the Felch Moimtain district the Sturgeon quartzite, less than 500 feet tliick, forms
two liands in contact with the Archean granite bordering the Felch Moimtain synchne. It is
here principally tjuartzite but contains conglomerate near the contact. It is in most places
extremely diflicult to deternune the attitude of the quartzite owing to its massive and homo-
geneous character. Closely associated with the massive quartzites are mashed quartzites or
micaceous quartz schists.
RANDVILLE DOLOHITE.
Owing both to its great thickness and to its intermediate position, the Randville dolo-
mite in the Felch Mountain range covers a larger share of the surface than any otlier member
of the Algonkian succession. No actual contacts between the Sturgeon and Randville for-
aSmyth, H. L., The Felch Mountain range : Uon. U. S. Oeol. Survey, vol. 36, 1S99, pp. 374-t26.
FELCH MOUNTAIN DISTRICT. 303
mations have been found, but from their close association and continuity, as well as from the
structural characters, where these are determinable, they seem evcrywiicre to be strictly con-
formable. The best sections give a wide range of thickness, from a minimum of about 500
feet near Felch Mountain to a maximum of nearly 1,000 feet in the western part of the district.
Though the discrepancies may be partly due to lack of precision in the data, it is probable
that the tliickness of the formation is not uniform but really increases from east to west.
UPPER HUEONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
FELCH SCHIST.
In the Felch Mountam district schists not more tlian 200 feet thick lie between the dolo-
mite on the one hand and the Vulcan formation on the other. They do not outcrop but have
been piercetl by many drill holes. The greater part of them are fuie-grained mica schists,
containing garnet and tourmaline. Near the contact with the overlying Vulcan formation the
schists become more siliceous and more ferruginous and there is a passage between the two
formations. These schists were called "Mansfield schists" by Smyth" and correlated with
the slates at Mansfield and Michigamme Mountam. The slates at Mansfield, however, are
regarded in this report as older than the schists of the Felch Mountain district, and m any
event not certainly to be correlated with tliem. The new name "Felch schist" is therefore
introduced for tliis formation from its typical development at Felch Momitain.
VTTLCAN FORMATION.
In the Felch Mountain district the Vulcan formation is magnetic and has been traced
by means of compass and dip needle. Excellent natural as well as niunerous artificial expo-
sures render the data concernmg the distribution of the formation very satisfactory.
On the west tlie iron-bearing formation is exposed in ledges and test pits in sec. 5,
T. 41 N., R. 30 W., from which a line of attraction extends southwestward through sec. 6 into
sec. 12, T. 41 N., R. 31 W., where it is lost. The presence of the Vulcan formation through
sees. 34, 35, and 36, T. 42 N., R. 30 W., is shown by one principal and other minor lines of
attraction, as well as by test pits and outcrops. The principal line of attraction begins in
sec. 34, near the southwest corner, and rmis to the northeast, in conformity with the strike
of the northern belt of dolomite, finally ending m the northeastern portion of sec. 36. This
line of attraction is very vigorous and strongly marked. Two other lines, parallel with the
principal line but more feeble and much shorter, cross the boundary between sees. 35 and 36,
and on the northern of these Imes ferruginous rocks outcrop in the western part of sec. 36.
Another line, marking the west end of the Groveland syncline, begins near the center of sec. 36
and contmues for 1^ miles eastward to the eastern portion of sec. 31, T. 42 N., R. 29 W.
Along the western portion of this line are many test pits and in sec. 31 occur the fine exposures
of the Groveland liill.
Another line of attraction begins 400 paces north of the center of sec. 32, T. 42 N.,
R. 29 W., which may be followed eastward without interruption nearly to the east line of
sec. 33 of the same township. Along this line, which is comparatively feeble and crosses wet
ground, there are but few test pits. In the eastern part of sec. 33, beyond the pomt at wliich
the attraction ceases, many pits have been sunk to and into the Felch schist, which is there
somewhat ferruginous. From this point eastward for 4 miles the Vulcan formation has not
been recognized.
In the northern part of sees. 32 and 33, T. 42 N., R. 28 W., the ferruginous rocks are well
exposed on Felch Mountain for nearly a mile along the strike, and may be identified for half a
mile farther by the vigorous disturljances produced in the magnetic neetUes. In the SE. |
sec. 33 the Vulcan formation is again encountered in a small and much disturbed area, in
faulted contact with the Archean.
"Van Hise, C. R., Clements, J. M., and Smyth, H. L., The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 36,
1899, pp. 411-415.
304 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The most prominent hills in the Algonkian belt owe their relief to the fact that tlicy are
underlain by the Vulcan formation.
Petrographically two main kinds of rock may be recognized in tliis formation. The more
common kind consists of quartz and the anhydrous oxides of iron; the other and mucii rarer
Icind consists essentially of an inMi amphibole with quartz and the iron oxides as associates.
Both of these kinds are clearly of detrital origin. The conclusion is reached, based on certain
microscopic structures, .that iron and silica were originally present largely in the form of green-
alite. Between the ferruginous quartzites of the Vulcan formation and the ferruginous cherts
of the Mesabi range there is a very close resemblance, esjjeciall}- in structure. Tiie essential
difference is that the former contain little or no chalcedony, the silica being crystallized quartz,
whereas the latter Imve a great deal of chalcedonic silica. Also the former contain small
amounts of detrital material, wliich the latter generally lack; but the essential difference
between them is one of degree of crystallization only.
In Smyth's report on tliis area" the iron-bearing formation of the Felch Mountain (Ustrict
was called the "Groveland" formation from its occurrence at the Groveland mine. The e\ddence
is now regartled as sufTicient for correlating it with the Vulcan formation of the Menominee and
Crystal Falls districts, and hence the name "Groveland" is discarded.
KEWEENAW AN SERIES (?).
In the east end of the Felch Mountain range the Iluronian rocks are overlain unconfomiably
by a series of soft iron-stained mica scliists, with tliin interbanded beds of ferruginous and
micaceous quartzite. From their structures and general relations they are believed to have been
derived from sedimentary rocks by metamorpliism. At an old open pit just west of Felch, on
the east side of sec. 33, this series may be seen to rest in unconformable contact with the Rand-
ville dolonute, the basal conglomerate being heavily ferruginous and having been mined as iron
ore. These rocks are tentatively assigned to the Keweenawan series, although they may prove
to be of Cambrian age.
INTRUSIVE ROCKS.
Basic and acidic intrusive rocks cut the Huronian at several localities. Some of the basic
intrusives are in the form of sheets, some of them highly schistose and greatly altered.
PALEOZOIC SANDSTONE AND LIMESTONE.
The Paleozoic is represented by the Lake Superior sandstone, supposedly of Upper Cam-
brian age, and the overlying calciferous limestone. These formations were originally laid down
over the upturned edges of the older rocks in flat sheets or with low initial dips and have not
since suffered relative displacement to any notable degree. As has already been stated, sub-
sequent erosion has to a great extent removed this overlying blanket and laid bare tlie older
rocks, except for the covering of recent glacial deposits. The Cambrian sandstone and to a
less extent the calciferous limestone still, however, occupy considerable outlying areas, detached
from one another throughout most of the district but gradually coalescing beyond the east end,
where they completely cover the older rocks and limit all further geologic study of those rocks
in that direction.
CORRELATION.
Laurentian fienes. — The correlation of the main mass of granite gneiss north and south of
the Felch Mountain district with the Laurentian series of the Arcliean is fairly certain in view
of its essential unconformity beneath the Sturgeon quartzite, but granitic dikes also penetrate
the Huronian series, suggesting that a part at least of the Ijaurentian complex may be intrusive.
Such part has not been discriminated.
a The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, toI. 36, 1899, pp. 41&-423.
FELCIi MOUNTAIN DISTRICT. 305
Lower Huronian. — The correlation of the Sturgeon quartzite and the Randville dolomite
respectively with the Mesnard quartzite and the Kona dolomite of the lower Huronian of the
Marquette district seems to be reasonable, the rocks of both areas being highly folded, much
metamorphosed, and near the base of the lower Huronian, and no evidence being known in the
Upper Peninsula of the existence of a second dolomite series.
Upper Huronian {AnimiJcic group). — The Felch scliist grades up into the iron-bearing Vulcan
formation and undoubtedly constitutes a fragmental base of the iron-bearing formation. Con-
tacts of the Felch schist with the 'underl3dng dolomite are lacking. From the sheared nature
of the slate it seems hkely that the contact is scliistose and that any evidence of conglomerate
at the base may have been obhterated, but the structure of the Felch and Vulcan formations
is essentially conformable, so far as can be determined, with that of the Randville dolomite and
Sturgeon cjuartzite below. The two have been folded together. There has been question whether
the Felch and Vulcan formations should be assigned to the middle Huronian, which includes
the Negaunee formation, or to the upper Huronian, which includes the Vulcan formation of the
Menominee district. Both the mitldle Huronian and the upper Huronian have an unconformity
at the base, and hence the lack of evidence of unconformity at the base of the iron-bearing
formation of the Felch Mountain district does not aid in the selection of one of these alternatives.
The iron-bearing formation of the Felch Mountain district is geograpliically separated from both
the Negaunee formation of the Marquette district and the Vulcan formation of the Menominee
cHstrict. At the west end of the Felch Mountain district the formation may be followed by
magnetic work to the west under the Uiain area of the upper Huronian. A few miles south, in
the Calumet trough, an iron formation similar to the Vulcan and underlain by slate and schist of
the Felch variety may be traced to the west and southwest with reasonable continuity and ^vith
uniform lithology into the broad area of upper Huronian joining areally with the upper Huronian
of the Menominee district. To the southeast also there is probable connection with the Menomi-
nee district. The lithology of the iron formation in the Felch Mountain district is more like
that of the Vulcan than that of the Negaunee formation. These facts suggest strongly that the
iron-bearing formation of the Felch Mountain district is an eastward projection of the mam
upper Huronian of Michigan, other eastward extensions of this area being fount! in the Menominee,
Calumet, and Marquette districts. If not, the line of demarkation between the upper Huronian
and the iron-bearing formation of the Felch district is not yet known. The evidence for corre-
lating the iron-bearing formation of tliis district with the Vulcan formation of the Menominee and
Crystal Falls districts is regarded sufTicient, and the old name "Groveland," as heretofore used
in this district, has therefore been abandoned for Vulcan. The apparently conformable relations
of the Felch and Vulcan formations with the underlying Randville and Sturgeon formations do
not disprove unconformity. The relations may really be the same as in the Menominee and
other adjacent districts.
Keweenawan series{1). — The purple sandstones overlying the Vulcan formation at the east
end of the trough look in many of their outcrops like Canabrian rocks, and were it not for their
dip of 30° or thereabouts they would probably be mapped as Cambrian, for farther east the
Cambrian is flat-lying. It is entirely possible that the Cambrian has been tilted up in tliis place.
However, a similar series of sandstones in the Sturgeon trough is also tilted up, and tliis, in
connection with the reddish-purple color of the beds, suggests the possibihty of Keweenawan
sediments intervening between the Huronian on the one hand and the Paleozoic on the other.
Their position above the Vulcan formation and their friable character, however, seem to preclude
the probability of their being Huronian.
47517°— VOL 52—11 ^20
306 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
CALUMET DISTRICT.
LOCATION AND GENERAL SUCCESSION.
Tlio Calumet, district is an east-west trough soutli of the Felch Mountain trough, extending
through T. 41 N., lis. 27 to 30 W. (PI. XXIII).
The succession is as foflows:
Cambro-Ordovician Hermansville limestone. •
Cambrian system Sandstone (Potsdam sandstone).
Algonkian system:
Huronian series:
{Michigamme slate.
Vulcan formation (iron bearing).
Felch schist .
Unconformity (?).
Lower Huronian jRandville dolomite.
ISttu'geon quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archean :
Lauren tian series Granites and gneisses.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LAUKENTIAN SEKIES.
The Laurentian series consists of granites similar in all respects to those of other districts,
and will not be here described. It borders the trough on both the north and tlie south and forms
a nearly isolated area in the vicinity of Granite Bluff.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
LOWER HURONIAN.
STURGKON QTTARTZITE.
The Sturgeon quartzite is exposed principally in the western part of the district. One
belt, contmuous with that of the Menominee district, swings northward from the northwest
side of the Menominee district into sees. 20 and 29, T. 41 N., R. 29 W. Another belt extends
from the southwest end of the southern Felch Mountain-Sturgeon quartzite belt and swings
southward around the granite mass to sec. 20, T. 41 N., R. 30 W. An eastward embayment
carries this belt into sees. 9 and 16, T. 41 N., R. 30 W., and this may possibly also connect
still farther east with quartzite in sees. 9 and 16, T. 41 N., R. 29 W. There is some difiiculty
in all these places in discrinainating this quartzite from the base of the upper Huronian. On
the whole, however, the Sturgeon quartzite is much more massive and cherty and stands at
steeper angles than the upper Huronian quartzite, which is more or less thiidy beddeil with
slate, is infolded into gentle rolls, and has been rendered micaceous and schistose along the
slaty layers.
RANDVILLE DOLOMITE.
The underground workings at the Calumet mine indicate a ih'sccnding succession of upper
Huronian slate, iron-bearing formation, schist, cherty or cjuartzitic rock, and dolomite. The
dolomite occurs, with southward diji, only a short distance south of the Archean granite, and
may with reasonable certauit}' be correlated with the Randville dolomite.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
GEORGE OTtS SMITH, DIRECTOR
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXIH
GEOLOGIC MAP OF THE CALUMET DISTRICT, MICHIGAN
CoBmiledbv'(.'.KLeiHifYxjinaun\'p\'s tn'W'S.Bavi(?v,
H,C.AIleu.Edwar<l Steidtmaim.and olh ers '
Scale soodb
ORDOVtCIAN AND CAMBRIAN
UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKtE GROUP)
1909
LEGEND
ALQONKIAN(HtJRONIAN SERIES)
LOWER HURONJAN
HermaasviHe hmestone and
Upper Canibriaa sandstone
H
Ayv
Ba s alt eactrusive s
MinhiganuQfi slate with
some basalt estrusives
Vul c ail fopniau o n
iron hearing J
Kandville doloimte
Ats
Stair;5^on quart zite
Ejiposure.dip and strike
notsnown
G3q)osurea'wi^ obser\'^d
dip and strike
Shaft or pit
AgCHEAN
'TaURENTiAN SERIES ^
CALUMET DISTRICT. 307
UPPER HUEONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
FELCH SCHIST.
The slate and c[uaitz-scliist formation forming the base of the upper Hurorian is exposed
north of the iron-bearing Vulcan formation and south of the Laurentian granite at Calumet.
Its characters here are identical with those of the Felch schist of the Felch Mountain trougli.
To the south it appears again near tlie south quarter post of sec. 16 and along Sturgeon River
in sees. 19, 20, and 21, where it contains somewhat more quartzite but still maintains its essential
character as a micaceous slate. The formation extends from this locality westward into the
west end of the Calumet trough, where it open.s out into the great area of upper Huronian
connecting with the Michigamme ("Hanbury") slate of the Menominee, Crystal Falls, antl
Florence districts. Quartz schist which may belong to tliis formation appears in the minor
trough extending eastward from sees. 9 and 10, T. 41 N., R. .30 W., but as already indicated in
the discussion of the Sturgeon quartzite, it has not been satisfactorily discriminated from the
Sturgeon quartzite in this trough.
VULCAN FORMATION.
Tlie iron-bearing formation is best exposed at the Calumet mine, where it has been crosscut
for 700 feet. It is here interlayered with slate. Its dip is steep to tlie south. Magnetic attrac-
tions, drill holes, and test pits show iron-bearing formation and ferruginous quartzite also through
the northern part of sees. 16 and 17, a mile to the south, where the dip is low to the north,
suggesting that tliis is the same belt as the Calumet brought up by anticlinal folding. Magnetic
work shows that these two belts extend to the west and coalesce against the soutli margin of
the granite through sees. 14 and 15. West of this locality no trace of it has been found. East
from the Cahmiet mine the belt has been shown, principally l)y magnetic work, to extend for
several miles.
To the southeast, in the southwest corner of T. 41 N., R. 27 W., at the Hancock mine, is
a heavily ferruginous micaceous slate and quartzite which may be correlated with the iron-
bearing formation at the Calumet mine or may belong at a higher horizon in the upper Huronian.
Still farther southeast, in the southeastern part of the same township and tlie north-central part of
T. 40 N., R. 27 W., there is a magnetic field with trend suggesting its correlation with the iron-
bearing formation of the Calumet district. A drill hole on the magnetic belt in sec. 3 of this
township discloses ferruginous slates and quartzites similar to those at the Hancock mine.
MICHIGAMME SLATE.
Slates and micaceous quartzites overlie the iron-bearing formation at the Calumet mine
and occupy most of the Algonkian area of the Calumet trough. Thence they presumably
extend southeastward through T. 40 N., R. 27 W., and probably connect with the Michigamme
("Hanbury") slate of the Menominee district in this direction. West and southwest from the
Calumet mine they also connect with the upper Huronian slate of the Menominee district.
PALEOZOIC LIMESTONE AND SANDSTONE.
Cambrian sandstone (Potsdam) and Cambro-Ordovician limestone (Hermansville) rest
in flat beds over much of the Calumet area and its eastward extensions. They cover most
of the upper Huronian of T. 41 N., R. 28 W., and T. 40 N., Rs. 27 and 28 W., and thicken rapidly
to the east. These rocks form a serious obstacle to exploration in this district.
CORRELATION.
The correlation of the rocks of tliis district is discussed in connection with the Felch trough
(p. 305) as well as in the general correlation chapter (pp. 597 et seq.).
308 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
IRON RIVER DISTRICT.
By R. C. Allkn."
LOCATION AND EXTENT.
The Iron River district lies west of the Crystal Fulls district and extends southward a
few miles beyond Brule River into Wisconsin, to the <^ranitcs and fjrecn schists of the Archean.
North, east, anil west of this boundary, which is a natural one, only arbitrary limits may be
drawn. Recent detailed studies have been made of the area in Michigan extending from
Brule River north to latitude 45° 1.5', east to longitude S5° .30', and west to longitude 85° 45',
embracing an area of 201.5 scjuare niiles. (See PI. XXIV, in pocket.)
TOPOGRAPHY AND DRAINAGE.
The topography is of glacial origin, slightly affected by preglacial forms and modified little
by postglacial erosion. In general the area presents a series of hills or parallel chains of hills
elongated in a direction about S. 20° W., which is the direction of ice movement as recorded
on striated and grooved rock surfaces in the southwestern and northern parts of the area.
The ridges are separated by corresponding hollows, which hold swamps and lakes connected
by creeks forming the minor drainage courses. The major drainage is independent of the
natural northeast-southwest "grain" of the country, for the larger streams, Bnde, Iron, and
Paint rivers, cross diagonally the general southwest trend of the hills and valleys. Paint
River in the northern part of the district follows in general the strike of the underlying rocks,
outcrops being comparatively numerous along its course. The same may be said of the Brule
in the southern part of the district. Both of these streams seem to follow modified preglacial
courses. However, this is certainly not true of Iron River, for this stream is known to cross at
least two well-defined drift-filled preglacial valleys which fall toward the northeast nearly
at right angles to the course of the Iron. These valleys are separated by a rock ridge which
protrudes tlirough the drift in Stambaugh Hillj^ on which is built the village of Stambaugh.
(See PI. XXIV, in pocket.) In contrast to the independence of the major streams, the minor
drainage is controlled absolutely by the topography of the drift mantle, which may be readily
inferred from a study of the map. Many of the lakes occupying depressions between the
ridges are likewise elongated in a northeast-southwest direction. The best examples are Stanley
and Iron lakes; others are Minnie, Chicagon, and Trout lakes, occupying parts of the same
depression in the eastern part of the area. Most of the lakes are drained by streams, but some,
as Bennan, Snipe, and Scott lakes, have no outlets.
The combination of elongated ridges and corresponding depressions above described forms
a distinctly drumloid type of topography. However, there are but few typical drumlins.
The most perfect example occurs just north of Iron River village, crossing the south line of
sec. 23, T. 43 N., R. 35 W. It will be interesting to note that a terminal nioraine formed by
the Langlade lobe (Weidman) of the Wisconsin ice sheet occurs not far to the south in Wis-
consin, following a general course at right angles to the trend of the drumloid hills of this area.
This is the characteristic relation between drumlins and terminal moraine found elsewhere,
notably in New York and southern Wisconsin.
The thickness of the drift ranges from a knife-edge up to more than 300 feet. It is of
course least along the depressions and drainage courses, where the unilerlying rocks are exposed
at many places, and greatest in the hills between them; but this is not everywhere true, as is
abundantly demonstrated in drill borings. Some postglacial and preglacial valleys coincide
in general trend and carry greater thicknesses of drift than the bordering hills. This is true
of the valley extending diagonally northeastward through sec. 1, T. 42 N., R. 35 W., and
sees. 31 and 29, T. 43 N., R. 34 W. (See map, PI. XXIV.) Although the elevation of many of
aState geologisi of Michigan. Based on survey by \\. S. Bayley for the United States Geological Survey, on private surveys by C. K.
Leith and R. C. Allen, and on recent survey for the Michigan Geological Survey by R. C. Allen. See Allen, R. C, The Iron River iron-bearing
district of Michigan: Michigan Oeol. Survey, Pub. 3 (Geol. ser. 2), 1910.
IRON RIVER DISTRICT. :^0'J
the hills is accounted for hy the relatively great thicknesses of drift under them, there is aljun-
dant evidence that the preglacial topography of this region was more rugged and presented
greater vertical range between hills and valleys than does the present surface. The higliest
hills are in the southwestern part of the district and are of preglacial origin. Sheridan Hill,
in sec. 20, T. 42 N., R. 35 W., has an altitude of 1,840 feet and rises 460 feet above the lowest
point in the district, the valley of Paint River, where it leaves the area in sec. 36, T. 44 N.,
R. 34 W. The elevation of the rock surface near the center of sec. 29, T. 43 N., R. 34 W., is
1,280 feet. Thus the maximum difference in elevation was in preglacial time at least 100 feet
greater than it is now.
CHARACTER OF THE GLACIAL DRIFT.
The ridges and higher lands in general are composed of liowlderv till intercalated with
lenses of sand and gravel. The till is in many places composed almost entirely of clay but is
more commonly somewhat sandy and maintains good tilth under cultivation. The soil of the
till areas is, in general, excellent and supports a heavy stand of hardwood. Where cultivated
it ])roduces good crops of small grains, hay, and vegetables adapted to the climate. The gen-
eral abimdance of bowlders is the main obstacle confronting the farmer on the till areas, but
this is not insurmountable, as is abundantly shown by the many prosperous farms in the central
and eastern parts of the district.
The valleys of Brule, Iron, and Paint rivers are partly filled with sandy and gravelly out-
wash of glaciofluvial origin. In places sand and gravel plains of considerable extent have
formed, notably at the junction of the Iron and Brule, in the valley of Net River, and north,
west, and south of the junction of the nortli and south branches of Paint River.
GENERAL SUCCESSION.
The general succession of rocks in the Iron River district from youngest to oldest, is as
follows :
(Quaternary system:
Pleistocene deposits Bowlder till, sand, and gravel.
Unconformity.
Ordovician system Limestone, sandstone, and conglomerate.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
lluronian series:
(Intrusive and extrusive greenstones.
Michigamme slate, containing Vulcan iron-bearing
member.
Unconformity (?).
Lower Huronian Saunders formation (interbedded cherty dolomite
and quartzite and slates, believed to be equiva-
lent of Randville dolomite and Sturgeon
quartzite).
Unconformity (?).
Archean (?) system:
Keewatin series (?) Ellipsoidal greenstone, green schists, and tuffs.
ARCHEAN (?) SYSTEM.
KEEWATIN SERIES (?).
Basaltic extrusive rocks with surface textures similar to those of the Quinnesec schist of
the Menominee district and the Hemlock formation of the Crystal Falls district are exposed
in isolated outcrops north and south of Brule River in an east-west belt across the southern
part of the district. These rocks possess no lithologic or structural characteristics which may
safely be used as a basis for their correlation. Most of the outcrops are north of the adjacent
Saunders formation, but a few are south of it. However, detailed mapping has not been done
south of the Brule, and consequently the extent of the volcanic rocks in this direction is not
yet known. They are nowhere exposed in contact with the Saunders formation, hence their
310 GEOLOGY OF THE LAI^E SUPERIOR REGION.
stratigrapliic position can l)i' determined only bj' their areal relati(jn to tlie Saunders forma-
tion in reference to the structural attitude of the latter. The available data, though not abso-
lutely conclusive for all parts of the Saunders formation, indicate a general northward dip. By
appljang tliis criterion, the volcanic rocks north of the Saunders are stratigraphically above
it and those south of it are stratigraphically below it.
The volcanic rocks in the southern part of sees. 19, 20, 21, and 22, T. 42 N., R. .35 W., are
the only greenstones in the area wliich are known to lie south of the Saunders formation. Being
probably below the Saunders formation they are tentatively correlated with the Keewatin
scliist. It is possible that they may be interbedded with the Saunders formation or they may
be of later age, in wliich case their occurrence here maj'^ be exj)lained as the result of faulting.
The greenstones tentatively referred to the Archean are of basaltic composition. Ellip-
soidal structure is well developed. The elhpsoids have been elongated in an east-west direction
parallel to the east- west axes of major folding in tliis part of the district. Agglomeratic struc-
tures are less common and in one outcrop the rock is a green chloritic shist.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJRONIAN SERIES.
LOWER HUEONIAN.
SAUNDERS FORMATION.
Distribution. — The Saunders formation occurs in a l)elt of varj'ing width extending in a
general direction a little north of west across the southern part of the district and westward
an unknown distance. Outcrops are few, on the whole, and are absent in large areas supposed
to be underlain by this formation. It is well developed in Sheridan Hill in sec. 20, T. 42 X.,
R. 35 W., and vicinity. Tliis Iiill owes its altitude, 1,840 feet, to the resistive ciiaracter of the
Saunders formation. East of Saunders village and south of Brule River in Wisconsin this
formation again assumes topograpliic prominence in an east^west ridge about 2 miles long.
In sees. 26 and 35, T. 42 N., R. 35 W., slatj^ and dolomitic ])hases are exposed in a number of
pits and an outcrop occurs on the west side of Brule River a short distance southwest of the
north quarter corner of sec. 34.
Lithologic characters. — The Saunders formation embraces a wide variety of facies. Cherty
dolomite and quartzite are the most prominently developed. Associated with them are mas-
sive wliite and pink dolomite, impure carbonate slates, and talcose slates.
Cherty dolomite and quartzite are best developed in Sheridan Hill and vicinity and in
the ridge south of Brule River southeast of Saunders. In both these localities the rock is ex-
ceedingly brecciated. The crushed and fractured cherty fragments are embedded in the great-
est confusion in secondarj^ infiltrated silica and carbonate, silica being dominant. In the
Saunders ridge are masses of almost pure quartz associated with pure massive wliite dolomite
and banded chert and cherty dolomite. The more siliceous bands stand out prominently on
weathered surfaces, producing a ribbed appearance.
A liighlj' ferruginous phase of the Saunders formation is exposed in a cut on the Connorsville
branch of the Chicago and Northwestern Railway about 2,100 feet south of its crossing of Brule
River. In general the rock is intensely sheared, with marked slaty structure of nearly vertical
dip and an almost easf^west strike. Here there are gradations to more massive bluish phases,
which are seen under the microscope to consist chiefly of carbonate with coarse interlocking tex-
ture. Inclosed in the carbonate arc areas of fniely granular silica. Sericite occurs as a secontlarv
mineral, ferric oxide is abundant, and pyrite occurs commonlj' in aggregates of small grains.
The ferruginous character of the carbonate is evident from the abundance of ferric oxide devel-
oped in weathering.
The abundance of iron oxide in weathered portions of these rocks has invited explorations
for iron-ore deposits, particularly in the SW. J sec. 26 and the NW. \ sec. 35, T. 42 X.,R. 35
W., where a number of pits have been dug. The deepest of these which have penetrated the
weathered mantle are bottomed in a bluish carbonate rock described above. Apparently inter-
IRON EIVEE DISTRICT. 311
bedded here with the purer carbonate rocks are impure shxty phases showing cruin])lcil bedding
lamina; whicii are cut in general at a high angle by the plane of schistosity.
Scliistose slaty phases of the 8aunders formation are exposetl on the west banli of Brule
River, a short distance southwest of the north quarter corner of sec. 34, T. 42 N., R. 35 W.,
and on the north bank of this stream in the NW. ^ sec. 19 of the same township.
Talcose ferruginous slates are exposed in pits 400 paces west and 75 paces south of the
northeast corner of sec. 20, T. 42 N., R. 35 W.
Stnicture. — Satisfactory structural observations can not })e made on known exposures of
tins formation. In the cherty and quartzitic phases bedding is destroyed by excessive breccia-
tion, in the slaty phases it is obscured by schistosity, and in the purer massive dolomitic phases
bedding is not shown, being doubtless destroyed by recrj^stallization and rearrangement of the
minerals in the rock. In the north face of the ridge southeast of Saunders there are banded
cherty phases showing steep northward dip, but the folding and brecciation are here of such
character as to indicate that these dips may be local. Wliere develoj)ed the schistosity is as a
rule steeply inclined northward and is parallel to the trend of the formation. Distinct bedding
is shown in slaty fragments on the dumps of pits in the SW. \ sec. 26, T. 42 N., R. 35 W., but
here the pits are filled with debris and the rock could not be observed in place. At this place
tiie schistosity cuts the crumpled laminas nearly at right angles. As the scliistosity is elsewhere
steeply inclined northward, it may be inferred that the dip of the bedding is here northward at
a lower angle. These observations are unsatisfactory, but considered with the position of the
Saunders formation between the older rocks south of them and rocks to the north, which are
certainly younger, they seem to indicate a general northward dip.
East of sec. 21, T. 42 N., R. 35 W., the Saunders formation seems to widen and swing
southeastward. This is probably due to flattening of dip on an anticlinal cross fold. If the
axis of this fold is extended northward it coincides approximately with the direction of the axis
of a broad anticline in the northern part of the district. As will be pointed out later, it is prob-
able that the entire district has been folded on this axis thus extended.
TMcl-ness. — A close estimate of the thickness of the Saunders formation can not be made.
If the width of the formation across Sheridan Hill is taken at 4,000 feet and the dip assumed
to be 75°, the thickness will be 3,750 feet. Doubtless the formation is very thick, but the
above figures may be a thousand feet or more too great.
Relations to adjacent formations. — Contacts between the Saunders formation and overlvmg
and underlying rocks are not exposed. The dip of the Saunders is, on the whole, steeply north,
from which it is inferred that it is probably younger than the Keewatin (?) rocks. \\Tiether
the latter are unconformably below or are interbedded with the Saunders formation is not here
apparent. In the southern part of the Florence district the Quinnesec schist is bounded on
the north by quartzites and conglomerates, which are clearly unconformable upon the Quinnesec
schist and whose bedding and contact planes trend northwestward toward the Brule River sec-
tion of the southern Iron River district. The quartzites and dolomites of the Saunders forma-
tion may be the extension of the quartzite and conglomerate belt of the southern Florence
district, and if so they would be unconformably above the Keewatin (?) rocks.
The Saunders formation is structurally beneath the upper Iluronian, with probable con-
formity. It is paralleled on the north by a belt of scattered outcrops of volcanic greenstones,
b_v which it is overlain and with which it may be to some extent interbedded.
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
MICHIGAMME SLATE.
DISTRIBUTION AND GENERAL CHARACTERS.
The Michigamme slate occupies much the larger part of the district. It is limited on the
south by the Saunders formation and extends north, west, and east beyond the hmits of the
district, on the east connecting with the upper Huronian (Michigamme) sRite of the Menominee,
Crystal Falls, and Florence districts.
312 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The rocks of this formation inckulc a wide variety of facies. Graywackes, with textures
varying from oonclomcratic to fine grained, and their schistose equivalents arc dominant in
tiie northern part of tlie area. Here tliey are interliedded with lenses of black pyritiferous and
carbonaceous slates, micaceous and chloritic slates, and narrow iron-bearing lenses which occur
in the vicinity of Atkinson, in sec. 24, T. 44 N., R. 35 W., and doubtless in other areas wliich
are drift covered. Toward the south the clastic rocks become finer grained on tlie wliole and
perhaps less metamorphosed. Slates are dominant and the iron-bearing member is more
extensively developed. However, graywackes and fine conglomerates are not lacking and are
here and there associated with the Vulcan iron-bearing member. Black pyritiferous and car-
bonaceous slates are common associates of the iron-bearing member.
Tlie relations between the various facies of the Michigammc slate are those of gradation
and interbedding. Any single type of the rock may grade by muicralogical and textural varia-
tions into any other type. The variations take place both in the direction of the bedding and
across it, with the result that in general the entire formation is made up of dovetailed lenses of
various dimensions and compositions, with indefinite gradationul borders between them.
Although gradation is the rule, abrupt transitions across the bedding from one type to another
are not uncommon, especially between black slates and iron-bearing beds, the former forming
the footwalls of many of the ore bodies.
Elhpsoidal, agglomeratic, and tuffaceous extrusive basaltic greenstones are interbedded
at various horizons with the Michigamme slate. They seem to be especially abundant at the
base of the formation just north of the Saunders formation and at higher horizons in the northern
part of the district. Of less common occurrence are igneous rocks of similar composition but
with well-developed interlocking crystalline texture. These are probably intrusive.
GENERAL STRUCTURE.
In attempting to work out the general structure there is the same difficulty in identifying
horizons in the slates which has prevented satisfactory structural work in the Crystal Falls
district. Rocks of identical character are repeated at different stratigraphic horizons and the
same stratigraphic Jiorizon may exhibit, even in a small area, facies which are of very different
composition and texture. Inasmuch as this fact is not appreciated by many who explore for
iron ore in this district, it should be emphasized here.
(1) The rocks at any particular horizon of the Michigamme slate can not be depended on
to maintain the same character over an}- considerable area. It follows that (2) cross sections
tlirough the same stratigraphic horizons ma}^ differ widely in a given small area and conse-
quently (3) similar sec[uence of formations in adjacent areas does not necessarily imply strati-
graphic equivalence unless the beds are known to be continuous from the one area into the other.
Especially is this true if the two areas compared are wideh^ separated. Observations in the
field and in mine workhigs and microscopic study of the rocks establish beyond doubt the truth
of the above statement.
Guides to the structure in the southern part of the district are found in the iron-bearing
layers and in the structure of the underlying and presuma])ly conformable Saunders formation.
In the northern part of the district structures are well brought out by graywacke phases, abund-
antly exposed, exhibiting bedding.
The general east-west trend of the steeply inclined Saunders formation and the east-west
strike of the secondai-y structures in it and the adjacent greenstones indicate the main struc-
tural line for . this part of the district. As the upper and lower Huronian are probably in
structural conformity liere as well as fartlier east in the Crystal Falls and ^lenominee districts,
the Michiganune slate, with its interbedded lenses of the Vulcan iron-bearing member wliich are
best developed in the southern part of the area, may be expected to extend beneath the drift
west of Iron River, beyond the limits of the district. The westernmost exposure of tiie Vulcan
member is in the SW.'i SW. { sec. 33, T. 43 N., R. 35 W.
IRON RIVER DISTRICT. 313
The folding along the main east-west axis is considerably nunlilied in tlio central and northern
parts of the district by fokling along an axis trending north of east and south of west. Begin-
ning on the east side of T. 44 N., R. 34 W., along Paint River, the rocks are observed to strike
slightly west of north and to cUp vertically or steeply to the northeast. Upstream along Paint
River to its junction with the Net and thence westward toward Atkinson, the strike swings
sharply westward and then south of west, the dip varying from north to northwest. South-
west of Atkinson, to tlie limits of the district, and at least several miles beyond, the southwesterly
trend becomes more marked ami the dips are to the northwest. Brittle layers have been gashed
by tension cracks, in general normal to the strike. Cleavage is subordinate to bedding in the
nortiieastern part of the district, but toward the west tlie rocks become more and more scliis-
tose until the beddmg is mainly obliterated. This is due chiefly to a change in tlie character
of the setliments. The rocks in the northeastern part of the area are commonly coarse gi'ained
to li:iely conglomeratic, becoming fhier grained toward the west. In this direction the dip of
schistosity becomes on the average flatter and where compared with the bedding the two struc-
tures both dip northward, the schistosity being the more steeply inclined.
From the data given above it seems that the structure of the northern part of the district
is that of a broad northward-pitcliing asymmetrical anticline, with steeper limb on the east
and axis trending 15° or 20° east of north. If this axis is ])rojected southwestward across the
center of the district it will coincide, with slight allowance for change in (hrection, with the
axis of the anticlinal cross fold affecting the Saunders formation and indicated in the widening
and the southeastward swing of the formation in the big bend of Brule River.
The existence of this north-south cross axis of fokling is further indicated by the trend of
the iron-bearmg member, which enters the district from the southeast, bends to the west in the
central part of the district as it crosses the cross fokl, and then extends southwestward.
VULCAN IRON-BEARING MEMBER.
Distribution and exposures. — There are few exposures of the Vidcan iron-bearing member.
Knowledge of its distribution is basetl mainly on occurrences in underground workings and
in drill holes put down in search of iron ore and therefore is largely limited by the extent to
which these operations have been conducted. On the map (PI. XXIV, in pocket) are indi-
cated those areas which are known to be underlam by this member and the position of the
drill holes in which the member has been penetrated. Most of the drill cores were examined,
but some are unavailable; in the latter case it has been necessary to rely on the superintend-
ent's and drUl runner's records. An attempt has been made to discriminate between the more
unaltered iron-bearing rocks on the one hand and ferruginous cherts and slates and iron ores on
the other. There are all gradations between the various phases of the iron-bearmg member,
but as the ores and highly oxidized phases are related to structural conditions that largely
influence ore concentration, it is thought that the discrimination attempted will have some
practical usefulness in suggesting lines for further exploration.
The knowm main occurrences of the Vulcan member may be referred to three different
areas — (1) the Jumbo belt, just south of Brule River in Florence County, Wis., about 1^ miles
east of Saunders; (2) the central area of unestablished boundaries extending north, east, south,
and west of Iron River; and (3) the northern area, including the ilorrison Creek belt, in
sec. 24, T. 44 N., R. 35 W., and the Atkinson belt, southwest of Atkinson.
Possible extensions of these belts are to be inferred from the general structure of the dis-
trict already described. These are specifically discussed under later headings. Of especial
interest in this stage of development are the possibilities of connection with iron-bearing belts
in the Florence and Crystal Falls district, toward which much exploration is being directed.
Relations to Michigamme slate. — All the iron-bearing areas include more or less slate, and
interbedded slate is shown in many of the drill holes which are indicated as cutting the Vulcan
member. It will be seen by a study of the data on Plate XXIV that in the central part of
the district the areal relations between slate and iron member are exceedingly complex and
314 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
for tlie most part it is impossible to exclude the slate from any considerable area. The expla-
nation lies in tlie intcrbedding of the slate and iron-l)earing membex, couphMl with complicated
foldinfj.
From the foregoing statements it is evident that the Vulcan member is not confined to a
single horizon in tlic Michigamme slate. From analogy with the Vulcan bods of the Menomi-
nee and Crystal Falls tlistricts it might be inferred that the meniljer occujiies at least two hori-
zons near the base of the Michigamme slate, but it is reasonably <'ertain that there are at least
four horizons of iron-l)earing rocks in the Iron River district, without making allowances for
the possible occurrence of two or more horizons in the producing part of tlie areas near Iron River
and Stambaugh. From the general structure of the district it is probable that the several areas
of iron-bearing rocks occupy as many different general horizons of the Michigamme slate, the
southernmost belt being at the lowest horizon, the central area being somewiiat higher, and
the northern area being liigher still. In fact, slate and iron-bearing member are interbedded
in such a way that the rocks at any horizon of the Michigamme slate may somewhere become
iron bearing. There are areas where the facts are more nearly expressed by the phrase "Vul-
can formation containing lenses of Micliigamme slate" than ' ' Micliigamme slate containing
Vulcan iron-bearing member," and this is especially true of the central and southern parts of
the district. Any attempt to unravel tlie structure of the slate and the iron-bearing member
wliich does not take into account these relations will certainly lead to erroneous results.
TJiicl-ness and structure .-^T\\c iron-formation bands probably do not exceed .300 feet in
thickness except where repeated by local buckling. They are closely and intricately folded
with the associated slates and are as a rule steeply dipping. Erosion has cut deeply into the
series, doubtless removing the iron-bearing member over considerable areas where it once
existed. Where exj)osed, it occurs at the surface mainly in narrow bands, many of them twist-
ing and contorted, but some retaining an approximately straight course for distances at least
greater than 2 miles. With this general idea in mind, it will be readily understood that any
attempt to draw boundaries of the Vulcan member will be more misleading than helpful. The
major structui'e of the Vulcan member is discussed under the general structure of the district.
Lithologic characters. — The Vulcan member is made up of ferruginous cherts and slates,
cherty iron carbonate rocks, magnetitic sideritic slates, and iron ores. The various facies
possess no characteristics which are peculiar to this district and therefore will not be described
in detail. The relations between the different types are those of gradation. The original
iron-bearing rock was niamly a cherty iron carbonate similar in all respects to those which
occur in neighboring iron-bearing districts.
However, there are two characteristics which arc worthy of notice in this place. Micro-
scopic study of these rocks has revealed the original presence of small quantities of greenalite.
The altered forms of this mineral are abundant in some sections, but generally they are not
shown. It is probable that greenalite was origmally present in much greater abundance than
might be inferred from an examination of the rock sections. It was only after itlentification of
better-preserved forms in a few sections that its original presence in others was determineil.
In the more highly altered ])hases all traces of original greenalite have been obliterated bj'
recrystallization and rearrangement in ilifferent combinations of the elements forming the min-
erals in the rock. Various later stages of the alteration of the greenaUte granules are observable
in tliin sections, but nothing approaching unaltered greenalite has yet been found.
A second characteristic of the Vulcan member which should be noted is the abundance
of associated clastic material and resultmg alteration products. Fragmental quartz grains
are abuntlant in many s])ecimens and are clearly distinguisliable from the matrbc of crystalline
silica of fine interkx'king texture in which they are liK'ally inclosed. Less conunonly there are
grains of feldspar. By increase in the relative proportions of quartz and feklspar grains the
rock takes on the characters of a graywacke. If the intermixed clastic nuitorial is of veiy fine
grain, impure sideritc and ferruginous slates result and these by tiecroase in the carbonate and
the cherty constituents grade into ordinary slate. By metamorphism the impurities in the
iron-boaring rocks give ri.se to secondarj' products, mainly chlorite, which is neaily always
IRON RIVER DISTRICT. 315
associated with biotite and lesser amounts of sericite. Carbonaceous imjjurities are espcciallv
abundant and are responsible for the dark color of much of the cliiMt of tlie iron-bearing member.
Pyrite is a common associate of the carbonaceous impurities l)ut may occur in smaller amount
in the purer phases of the iron-bearinj^ rocks. In the least-altered rocks the iron is present
mainly as carbonate, being changed to limonite and hematite as oxidation progresses, but by
anamorphism occasionally giving rise to magnetitic cldoritic slates, usually carrying more or
less residual iron carl)onate. Such rocks occur on the to]) of Stamljaugh Hill near the village of
Stambaugh and are indicated in a small magnetic field in tlie SW. i sec. 33, T. 43 N., R. 34 W.
(See PI. XXIV, in pocket.)
In short, tlie typical iron-bearing rock of the Vulcan member — mainly a cherty iron carbon-
ate— shows all possible gradational phases, on the one hand to slate, which is nearly always
higlily chloritic, usually biotitic and sericitic, and in places more or less carbonaceous, grading
into highly graphitic varieties, and on the other to graywacke; and further, it is to be noted that
the purer forms of iron-bearing rocks are subordinate in amount. A laboratory study of these
rocks discloses the characters that they may be inferred to possess from their intimate field
relations to various types of interliedded slates and graywackes. It is impossible to describe
the rocks of the Vulcan member without ref -ence to the clastic rocks with which they are so
closely associated.
Distribution and local structure. — (1) The only natural exjiosure on the so-called Jumbo belt
occurs on the east side of Brule River about 200 paces east of the southeast corner of the NE. \
SE. I sec. 22, T. 42 N., R. 34 W. The rock is mainly a finely banded cherty iron carl)onate,
locally altered to ferruginous chert and interbedded with carbonaceous and pyritic black slate.
The strike is east and west and the dip is about vertical on the average, although it varies
widely on the limbs of the minor folds. From this exi)osure the member is traced eastward
for three-quarters of a mile by numerous test pits of the old Jumbo exploration. The pits are
now filled with debris, but the tlumps disclose slate and iron-bearing member of the characters
shown in the outcrop. In the dump of the old Jumbo shaft at tlie east end of the belt are found
an abundance of much altered greenstone, black carbonaceous and pyritic slate, roughly banded
iron-bearing rocks carrying plentiful pyrite and secondary cjuartz and a little lean iron ore.
The relations between the Vulcan member and the greenstone are not shown, but these rocks
are probably interbedded. Interbedded sihceous chloritic pyritiferous slate and much-altered
greenstone are well exposed in an outcrop on the south bank of Brule River just north of the
Vulcan member and seem to lie conformably above it. The Jumbo belt of iron-bearing member
and slate is overlam on the north, in jjrobable conformity, by extrusive ellipsoidal greenstone
which is well exposed in numerous outcrops north and south of the Chicago and Northwestern
Railway. It is underlain by the Saunders formation, which occurs about one-quarter of a mile
farther south. The Jumbo belt extends east and west beyond known limits.
(2) The boundaries of the central area, the iron-ore producing area of the Iron River
district, are not yet definitely known and are being rapidly widened by exploration. If Iron
River and Stambaugh are taken as a center, the iron-bearing member is known to occur north-
ward to the southern part of sec. 11, T. 43 N., R. 35 W.; eastward to the Chicagon mine, in
the NE. i sec. 26, T. 43 N., R. 34 W.; southeastward to the NW. J NW. J sec. 16, T. 42 N.,
R. 34 W.; and westward to the SW. { SW. I sec. 33, T. 43 N., R. 35 W. The area seems to
be Hmited on the south by greenstone. By connecting the scattered outcrops of greenstone
occurrmg just north of the Saunders formation a belt of varying width is outlined extendino^
across the entire district. Although it is certam that this belt as shown on the map (PL XXIV,
in pocket) contains considerable interbedded slate and possibly iron-bearing member, it seems
to mark in a general way the south limit of the main Michigamme slate and Vulcan member.
Beginning at the outcrops in sec. 23, T. 42 N., R. 34 W., a magnetic line probably marking the
nqrtli eilge of the greenstone extends slightly north of west for about 2 miles and dies out.
If extended, this line would pass just north of the greenstone exposure in the NW. J NW. {
sec. 21. Thence the boundary swings more to the north and jiasses through the Wildcat shaft
near the center of the S. J sec. 18, and thence just north of the outcrops of greenstone in the
316 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE Sl'PERlOR REGION.
N. A N. i sec. 13, T. 42 X., R. .3.5 W. F-'arther westwunl tlic Ix.iiiKhiiy can not 1)C followed,
from lack of exposures and ex])loration.
Data for drawirijj a north boundary of tliis area arc entirely iua<lc(juate. Probably it
has no well-defmed north limit. A few greenstone outcrops occur in a broad belt of country
several miles \\ndc, bcfxinning about the middle of the east side of the district, where they
connect with the greenstone ai'ea tiiat extends eastward almost to Crystal Falls, and extending
thence northwestward to the middle of the district and thence southwestward. In this belt
there are a greater number of square miles of territory than there are outcrops, and those
tiiat occur are confmed to the eastern, central, and western parts. However, tlie wide distri-
bution of the few outcrops that are known indicates a belt composed dominantly of greenstone
extending across the district in a curving course in line witii the structure of the graywacke
and slate area north of it.
Of tbe structure and distribution of the Vulcan member within this area the available
information is by no means full. Exploration has been very active for the last few years, but
is still far fi'oni adequate. Locally, in tlie mine workings, the structure is well known, but
it may be very diflicult to comiect the structure and stratigraphy shown in workings on a,
single 40 acres with those of an adjacent 40 acres. The explanation for this complexity ha^
already been discussed. In a later publication details of structure and distribution so far as
known will be given, but here a general outline will suffice.
To begin m the southeastern part of the district, the iron-bearing member is foimd in the
drill iioles m the NW. i NW. i sec. 16, T. 42 N., R. 34 W., and thence, in a cui-ving line parallel
to the north bomidary of the greenstone, northwestward to the Zimmerman mine. Eastward
from sec. 16 the iron-bearing member extends in all jirobability through sees. 1.5 and 14, and
])orhaps still farther east, but in this direction exploration has not yet been cari'ied. It is a
favorable line for exploration. North and east of this belt borings have generally penetratetl
black slate. From the Zimmerman and Baltic mines the general course of the member is
northwestward up the valley of Iron River. In detail the structure is exceedingly complex,
and thorough understanding would involve a description of the structure and succession in
every mine on the belt. The Vulcan member is here very generally underlain and interbedded
with black slate and is usually in a highly inclined position. It attains its greatest known
width on the Caspian mine location, where, ^^dth allowances for repetition by cross folding,
it is probably over 300 feet thick. At the Hiawatha mine and thence westward for about a
mile the Vulcan member strikes a little north of east and seems to dip on the whole steeply
northward. Farther west this belt has not been traced. From the Caspian mine northeast
to the SW. i SW. i sec. 21, T. 43 N., R. 34 W., drill holes have penetrated what seems to be
a more or less continuous belt of the Vulcan member. This belt is about at riglit angles to the
belt along Iron River, Avith which it and the extension of the Hiawatha belt fonn a cross.
North of Iron River the strikes are prevailingly aliout east and west. The ^'ulcan member
occurs in one main belt at least, more than 2^- miles long, extendmg from the James mine
slightly south and east through the Spies and Hall explorations to the NE. \ sec. 19, T. 43 N.,
R. 34 W., and slightly north of west to tlie SE. i SE. i sec. 1.5, T. 43 N., R. 3.5 W. The thick-
ness of this belt in the James muie ajjpears to be not over 250 feet, making due allowance
for thickenmg by minor folding. Black slate here forms both foot and hanging walls. Tlie
di|) varies, but is vertical or steeply southward or northward. Other lenses of the iron-
bearing member occur both north and south of the James belt, but their importance and
extent have yet to be proved by exploration.
(3) In the northern area the Morrison Creek belt is a narrow band of ferruginous chert
and sideritic slate disclosed in the dumj)s of numerous test pits following the north bountlary of
the S. ^ SW. i sec. 24, T. 44 N., R. 3.5 W. A few outcrops of sideritic slates occur on the banks
of Morrison Creek in an east-west line with the pits. The dip is vertical or slightly nortJiward.
The iron-l)eanng member is ■here underlain by and pro])al)ly interlxMlded witii black carbona-
ceous slate. The overlying rock is a scricitic schist, a inctamor])liosc(l e(|iiivalent of tiie gray-
wacke exposed to the east and nortii in numerous outcrops. (Jn the soulii the slate seems to
IRON RIVER DISTRICT. 317
be underlain by volcanic greenstone, which outcrops for about a mile to the soutli along the
line between T. 44 N., R. 34 W., and T. 44 N., R. 35 W.
Southwest of Atkinson the Vulcan member occui's in a double belt, separated by a belt of
volcanic greenstone breccia. The dip of the greenstone and associated iron-bearing member
and slate here seems to be uniformly northwest at an angle of about 55°.
It will be interesting to consider in some detail the Atkinson section, for the interbeddcd
relations of the various rocks in the Michigamme slate are here best exhibited. Tlie southern-
most rock is mainly black slate, carrying considerable but varying amounts of carbonaceous
matter and in places becoming cherty and ferruginous, especially toward the top of tlie forma-
tion, where it gives place to thin iron-bearing rock about 80 feet thick, according to plats of
the McColman exploration furnished by the Verona Mining Company. The Vulcan member
at this horizon has not been followed beyond the McColman workings. The iron-bearing
member, as shown by an examination of the rocks on the dump of the McColman shaft, includes
hard limonitic iron ore, ferruginous chert, and brownish and gray banded sideritic slate. The
slaty phases are sericitic, chloritic, and biotitic, and m one place abundant titanite was found.
The ore occurs in lenses in the slaty phases of the member. From an inspection of the Verona
Mining Company's plats it appears that the highly sericitic, biotitic, and chloritic slates are
abmidant just under the overlying greenstone.
' The greenstone belt extends from the northeast corner of sec. 18, T. 44 N., R. 35 W., north-
eastward into the SW. 5 NE. { sec. 9 of the same township and doubtless farther in both directions
where exposures are lacking. Its thickness ranges fi-om 700 or 800 feet up to possibly 1,400
or 1,500 feet at the northwest end. In places tliis rock is very schistose, but usually its original
agglomeratic structure is retained. Brecciation is common, but the resulting structures can
usually be discrunmated fi-om its original agglomeratic structure, the fractures of the former
cutting indifferently across the latter. The rock is extremely altered. Weathered surfaces
have the green colors of chlorite and epidote and show abundant secondary calcite and dolo-
mite filling fracture planes and disseminated through the rock.
The greenstone is overlam by a belt of ferruginous slates and cherts, which become more
siliceous in the upper horizons. Near the underlying greenstone, black carbonaceous slates
are found, but these seem to be less prominent in the higher beds, which are composed dominantly
of very lean ferruginous granular chert. Only one natural exposure is kno\sii, but numerous
pits and a few drill holes disclose the character of the rocks. This belt is less tlian a cjuarter
of a mile wide. North of it are sericitic slates, and these in tmni grade northward into micace-
ous schists and graywackes, wliich are the dommant rocks in the northern part of the Iron
River district.
While little is known of the extent of the Vulcan member in the Atkmson district, it should
be noted that to the southwest, on the strike of these beds, in the SE. I sec. 14, T. 44 N.,
H. 36 W., lean ferruginous white granular cherty beds of the character of similar beds at Atkinson
are associated with black slate and overlain by micaceous schistose graywacke. Similar
white granular chert occurs on the strike of the Atkinson rocks in the bed of Paint River in
the SW. i NE. i sec. 1, T. 44 N., R. 35 W. These two occurrences seem to be at about the
horizon of the beds in the Atkinson district, but it should not be inferred that the iron-bearing
member is continuous from one locality to the other along tliis indicated belt. The proba-
bilities are that the reverse is true.
Local magnetism in the Vulcan iron-hearing member. — Although in general the Vulcan
member is nonmagnetic, there are a few local areas in which magnetism is well developed.
Other magnetic areas woukl probably be discovered were the district carefully magneticaUy
surveyed. Reference has already been made to the magnetic line apparently following the
northern edge of the greenstone m sees. 21, 22, and 23, T. 42 N., R. 34 W. Wliether this line
is caused b}- magnetism in the greenstone or in one of the lower members of the Jilichigamme
slate is not known.
A magnetic field of irregular and widely varying strength in diff'erent parts covers about 60
acres on the crest of Stambaugh Hill, in the W. i sec. 36, T. 43 N., R. 35 W. (See Pi. XXIV,
318
GEOT>OGY OF THE T.AKE SirPERIOR REGION.
in pocket.) Here tlie rocks are well exposed in numerous outcrops. The dip is about vertical
iind the strike sH<;iitly west of nortli, wliicii is the direction of cloiij^ation of the field. Under
the microscope tlie rocks are seen to contain innumcraljie small f^rains of maf^nctite associated
with iilmndaiit chlorite and finely crystalline quartz and considerable siderite.
A ina<;netic field of about the same size and shape occurs in the SW. \ sec. .33, T. 43 N.,
R. 34 W. (see PI. XXIV), but here the field is elongated in a northwest-southeast direction,
which is likewise believed to indicate the strike of the rocks at this place, although no exposures
occur.
Local magnetism occurs also in separated patches in sees. 35 and 30, T. 43 X., R. 34 W.
Here the magnetic rock is mainly a graywacke carrying abundant magnetite associated with
chlorite, biotitc, and siderite.
To the west of the Iron River district projjcr a belt of magnetic attraction has been
traced in an area of heavy drift from a point near the center of
T. 43 N., R. 37 W., westward to the Michigan boundary and thence
probably into Wisconsin.
Slate and i ■'
graywacke INTRUSIVE AND EXTRUSIVE ROCKS IN THE UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP,.
Igneous rocks of basaltic type are abundant in the upper Hu-
ronian. The distribution of those now known is indicated on the
accompanying map of the Iron River district. (See PI. XXIV, in
pocket.) There is much difficulty in determining the general distribu-
tion of tliese rocks, because the relations to the slates are so intricate
that it is never safe to conclude that adjacent exposures are or are not
separated by slate.
The rocks are principally of extrusive type and have surface
textures, especially the ellipsoidal and agglomj-ratic textures, that
are characteristic of the Hemlock formation and of the volcanic
rocks associated with the upper Iluronian of tlie C'lystal Falls dis-
trict. Some of these extrusive rocks arc distinctly contemjioraneous
with the slates. Southwest of Atkinson agglomeratic and tuffaceous
phases of the greenstone are interbedded with upper Iluronian slate
SE and iron-bearing member (fig. 44). In the southern part of the dis-
FiGURE44.-sectionshomng roughly ^j.^^^^ j,^ gg^. 93 T. 42 X., R. 34 W., elHpsoidal and tuffaceous green-
the succession of beds in the \ i:!- 1 c i tt • 1 • 11
can iron-bearing member near Ai- stoue occurs north of the Upper Huroniau slates m a uorthward-
kinson, in the Iron River district, clipping series. From the lack of contact metamorphism and the
abundance of tuffaceous phases and effusive rocks they were prob-
ably nearly all deposited contemporaneously with the sediments. The deposition was prob-
ably submarine. (See pp. 510-.512.) Definite evitlence of relations is lacking for many of the
greenstones, especially those not adjacent to slates or some of those which have been developed
by mining operations and explorations.
Iron formation
Slate
Iron formation
Tuff
Iron formation
Black slate
RELATIONS OF UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUPS TO UNDERLYING ROCKS.
No direct evidence of the relations of the upper Iluronian with the undcrlnng Saunders
formation is yet available. Certain slates conformable with the Saunders formation in Sheriilan
Hill may be upper Huronian slates and may therefore indicate the conformable relations between
the upper Huronian slates and the Saunders formation. The fact that rocks of the Saunders
type form a continuous belt between the upper Huronian slates and the supposed Archean
shore to the south is evidence of nearly conformable relations. It is noteil in the sections on
the Crystal Falls, Menominee, Felch Mountain, and Calumet districts tluit the succession from
underlying quartzite and dolomite to the upj)er Huronian shows similar relations. (For dis-
cussion of correlation and nomenclature, see pp. 597 et seq.)
IRON RIVER DISTRICT. 319
ORDOVICIAN ROCKS.
Remnants of flat-lying Paleozoic rocks occur in the southern part of the district, on Sheri-
dan Hill and vicinity and farther southwest in the SW. i sec. 27, T. 42 N., R. 35 W., also in
the SE. } sec. 24, T." 44 N., R. 35 W.
The base of these rocks on Sheridan Hill is a conglomerate made up almost entirely of
material from the underlying Saunders formation. Angular fragments of chert and vitreous
quartzite up to 2 inches in diameter lie in a matrix of materials of the same general composi-
tion, but finer grained. The rock is cemented mainly with iron oxide and calcium carbonate.
The tliickness of the conglomerate is unknown but is not great. The rock has not been found
in natural exposure, but is abundant on the dumps of pits wliich have been sunk through it
into the Saunders formation.
The conglomerate is overlain by a coarse quartz santlstone of buff and red color and gen-
erally very friable texture. The cement is mainly iron oxide. Under a slight tap of the hammer
the rock falls apart into its constituent sand grains. The thickness of this sandstone is not
known, but it probably ranges from a knife-edge up to perhaps .S5 or 40 feet.
In the southeast corner of sec. 24, T. 44 N., R. 35 W., a film of red sandstone is found
mantling black slate. Here the rock carries considerable iron oxide, doubtless derived from
the Vulcan member occurring about a quarter of a mile north of it.
The conglomerate and sandstone of tliese areas have the lithologic characters of the lower-
most Cambrian beds in the Menominee district and were formerly correlated w^th the Cambrian.
Also Seaman has suggested that they perhaps represent the base of the upper Iluronian.
Recent fossil discoveries, however, in flaggy limestone beds in the S. 5 SW. | sec. 27, T. 42 N.,
R. 85 W., have fixed witliin narrow limits the age of these rocks. In this area there is one
natural exposure on the east side of Brule River and several pits, all showing nonmagnesian
dove-colored to buff flaggy hmestone of the same general characters. The rock seems to be
flat-l3ang, although the beds iii the outcrop on the Brule, where observations were made and
where most of the fossils were found, have been disturbed by slump, following undercutting
by the river. From the position of this outcrop in reference to an exposure of the Saunders
formation on the west side of the river about 500 paces south, it woul^l seem that these rocks
are not far above the eroded surface of the Saunders formation. 'VMiether they are underlain
by the conglomerate and sandstone of Sheridan Hill is not known. The beds are practically
undisturbed in both areas, but the lowermost kno\vn occurrence of the conglomerate on Sheri-
dan Hill is about 150 feet higher and the uppermost known beds of sandstone are about 300
feet liigher than tjie hmestone outcrops on Brule River in sec. 27. It would seem from this
that the conglomerate and sandstone on Sheridan Hill are stratigraphically higher than the
limestone of sec. 27. Doubtless the conglomerate originally formed a continuous mantle at
the base of the Paleozoic rocks, but owing to the rugged character of the surface over wliich
the sea advanced there was probably a considerable time interval between the submergence of
the lower areas and that of the tops of the liills. Consequently the relative age of the basal
mendaer formed at any point is a function of its altitude at that place. The occurrence of
sandstone on Sheridan Hill at an altitude of about 1 ,760 feet makes it certain that the entire
district was almost if not entirely covered by a Paleozoic sea.
The lowest exposure of the Paleozoic beds is the limestone member in sec. 27, T. 42 N.,
R. 35 W. Tliis hmestone is correlated by E. O. Ulrich on paleontologic grounds with the
Lowville of New York and the Platte\'ille hmestone of Wisconsin — that is, with the Middle
Ordovician. The following is Mr. Ulrich's report to T. W. Stanton:
I beg leave to report as follows on the fossils collected in the Iron River district, Michigan, by R. C. Allen and
forwarded to the Survey for examination and report by C. K. Leith November 18, 1909:
This discovery of fossils in northern Michigan is of great interest, as it adds an important link in proving the
former connection of the early Mohawkian limestone of Minnesota and western Ontario across northern Wisconsin.
In discussing the Lowville limestone in my paper on revision of Paleozoic systems I state my conviction that this
ind perhaps other Mohawkian formations must have originally extended from New York through Ontario, northern
320
GEOLOGY OF THE LAIvE SUPERIOR REGION.
Michigan, and northern Wisconsin to Minnesota and Iowa. Tliis direct westerly connection wa.s indicated by the
great similarity in fauna and lithology noted in comparing the Lowville limestone in New York and the more typical
part of tlie Platteville limestone of southern Minnesota, Iowa, southern Wisconsin, and northwestern Illinois. I
objerted to comraiitiication via southeastern Wisconsin because there the beds supposed to correspond in age to the
Lowville are dolomites instead of pure limestone, with no indication of transition in lithic characters northward.
Hitherto the northern connection could not be established farther west from New York than Escanaba, Mich. This
Iron River occiurence, which is of the .same fine-grained noinnagnesian dove-colored limestone everywhere charac-
terizing the Lowville and lying well up on the old "Wisconsin Peninsula," may therefore ju.stly be regarded as
tending to establish a \iew hitherto based only on inference.
The following 20 species are more or less confidently identified. All are older than the Trenton limestone and
younger than the latest Stones River.
?Coreniatocladus densus.
Tetr.uiium cellulosum (fragment of tube only).
Rhinidictya cf. nicholsoni and mutabilis-minor (fragment).
R. cf. major (fragment).
Escharopora angularis.
?Homotrypa arbuscula.
Raftne?quina minnesotensis.
Strophomena incurvata (Lowville var.).
Zygospira recurvirostris (Lowville var.).
Ctenodonta sp. undet. (near C. levata).
Leperditia fabnlites.
Lcperditella tumida.
L. germana.
Bythocj'pris granti var.
Eurychilinia reticulata.
E. subradiata.
E. n. sp.
Isotelus cf . obtusus.
Thak'ops ct. ovatus.
Pterj'gometopus sp. undet. (pygidium).
The fossils of the above list indicate a horizon at the extreme top of the Platteville limestone in the Lead district.
Compared with the New York section the bed corresponds in age to the uppermost beds of the Lowville, asdescribed
by Gushing, or to the cherty bed at the base of the Black Ri^'er limestone, as defined by the same author.
FLORENCE (COMJklONWEALTII) IRON DISTRICT OF WISCONSIN.
LOCATION AND GENERAL SUCCESSION.
The Florence district is the westward geographic extension mto Wisconsin of the Menomi-
nee district bej'ond Menomuree River. It is essential]}" included between the two tributaries
of the Menominee, the Brule on the north and the Pine on the south (PI. XXV, in pocket).
On the east it is separated from the Menominee district, as this is limited on the geologic map,
by Menominee River, ^he area is one of low relief, hke the Iron River district to the north-
west. Exposures are relatively few except along the rivers and lakes.
Part of the Florence district has been studied by members of the United States Geological
Survey, and a complete outcrop map of the district has been prepared by ^Mi-. W. N. Merriam
and assistants for the OUver Iron Mmmg Company. As yet, however, the district has not been
studied with sufficient exhaust iveness to definite^ estabhsh the succession and structure.
Such a study is now being conducted by W. O. Hotchkiss, State geologist of Wisconsm. So
far as the facts are now known, including those developed in recent work of Hotchkiss, the
succession in the Florence district seems t(5 be as follows :
Quaternary system:
Pleistocene deposits.
Paleozoic rocks Patches of sandstone, probably Cambrian.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan(?) series Granite and gneiss.
(Juinncsec schist, intrusive and extrusive green-
Huronian series: stones and green schists.
Upper Huronian (Animikie group) . . . P> "•'■gamme slate, includmg the \ u can u-on-beanng
member (inlerbedded with base of the slates), and
also quartzites and conglomerates of doubtful age
but believed to be phases of the slate.
FLORENCE IRON DISTRICT. 321
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HtTBONIAN SERIES.
UPPER HUEONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUp).
MICHIGAMME SLATE.
General character and distribution. — The Animikie group seems to occupy nearly all the
area of the Florence district north of the Qumnesec schist belt, except where small patches of
intrusive or extrusive greenstone appear at the surface. Tlie rocks are cliiefly slate. In less
quantity occur conglomerate, quartzite, tuffs, and iron-bearing rocks. It has not been proved
that all these rocks belong to one group, but as yet they have not been certainly separated.
The Michigamme slate is poorly exposed in the district as a whole, except along Brule
River, in the vicinity of Keyes Lake, and northwest and southeast of Florence. It is ahnost
identical in petrographic characters with the u]iper Iluronian slates of the Menominee and
Crystal Falls districts, and has been regarded as belonging to the same formation.
Quartzites, associated with more or less conglomerate, appear m three main areas — (1) at
Island Rapids, on Menominee River, m sees. 1.3 and 14, T. 40 N., R. 18 E.; (2) in a belt
running north of Keyes Lake; and (3) in a belt running through sec. 28, T. 39 N., R. 18 E.,
north of Pine River. The quartzite at Island Rapids stands vertical or dips steeply to the
south, and the top is to the south. In tlie Keyes Lake belt the rock is vertical or dipping
steeply to the southwest. The relations of these two belts witli the slates are not known defi-
nitely, but are probably conformable. The southern belt of quartzite just north of Pine River
dips southwestward at a lower angle. It is thought by Hotchkiss to rest unconformably upon
the slates to the north of it. If this is true the so-called upper Iluronian of this district con-
sists really of two groups, the correlation of which is doubtful. The southern quartzite is
overlain conformably by slates which upward become uiterbedded with tuffs and eruptives
belonging to the Quinnesec schist.
Vulcan iron-hearing member. — The Vulcan iron-bearing formation is somewhat widely dis-
tributed through the upper Huronian area, but here it is so interbedded with the slates that it
is difficult to map independently. In this district, therefore, as in some other districts, it is
treated as a member of the Michigamme slate. In the Florence district tliere are only five
areas in which the ferruginous phases of the upper Huronian are now known sufficiently well
to warrant a separate color on the map — one is immediately northwest of Florence in sees. 20
and 21, T. 40 N., R. 18 E., and in a belt extending northwestward to Brule River; two south-
east of Commonwealth, in sees. 33 and 34, T. 40 N., R. 18 E. ; one extending east and west
south of the greenstone belt in sees. 8 and 9, T. 39 N., R. 19 E. These three exposed areas are
connected by a belt of magnetic attraction, indicating that the ii'on formation is probably
continuous from Brule River on the northwest nearly to Menominee River on the southeast.
Another area is in the vicinity of the Buckeye mine, just to the southwest of Commonwealth.
This connects with a magnetic belt running southeastward to Menominee River, in sec. 22,
T. 39 N., R. 19 E. To the east, across the river, this magnetic line connects with the principal
iron-formation l)elt of the Menominee district. Another belt of iron-bearing formation out-
crops west of Keyes Lake, whence it is followed by magnetic Imes to the southeast to about
the east side of T. 39 N., R. 18 E., and northwestward toward the northwest corner of T. 40 N.,
R. 17 E. Belts of attraction not connected with any well-exposed areas of iron formation are
known elsewhere m the tlistrict. Particularly to be mentioned are the belts extendmg north-
westward from Pine River from sec. 28, T. 39 N., R. 18 E.
The iron-bearmg member is magnetic in places, especially along the contacts with the
intrusive greenstones. The map shows a number of disconnected magnetic lines which have
been traced in this area. Some of these may represent altered iron-bearing rock.
The Vulcan iron-bearing member consists of (1) ferruginous chert, siderite, and hydrated
hematite; (2) various phases intermediate between these and the slates, called sideritic slates
47517°- VOL 52— 11 2]
322 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
and ferruginous slates; and (3) griineritic and magnetic slates. They are similar, except for
type 3, to the rocks of the Vulcan iron-beuring member in tlio Iron River and Crystal Falls
districts. Iron ores are exploited at the Florence mine, immeiliately northwest of the town of
Florence; at the Commonwealth and Badger mines, southeast of the town of Commonwealth;
and at the Buckeye mme, south of Commonwealth. (.See p. 323.) The ores seem to be in
minor drag folds, pitching steeply northwestward m the Florence and Commonwealth mines.
The major trend of the iron-bearing exposures of magnetic belts and of exposures of other
rocks is north of west in this district, a trend which would tend to connect the iron-bearing
belts with those of the Menominee district on the southeast and with those of the Mastodon
area in the southern part of the Crystal Falls district on the northwest. (See p. 292.)
Ex])loration has been very slight, as there has been little to guide it. However, there is a large
territory along the trend here noted which inust soon receive attention.
The horizon in the upper Huronian slates at which the iron-bearing member of this dis-
trict occurs has not been determined. The proximity to the upper Huronian iron formation
of the Menominee district suggests its occurrence near the base of the upjier Huronian.
INTRUSIVE AND EXTRTTSIVE GREENSTONES AND GREEN SCHISTS.
Quinnesec schist. — The Quinnesec schist outcrops in an east-west belt 1 to 3 miles wide
along the south side of the district, probably constituting the northwestern extension of the
southern Quinnesec schist belt of the Menominee district. The best exposures are along Pine
River, especially in sees. 29 and 30, T. 39 N., R. 18 E. The schists are cliiefly hornblendic
gneiss, locally micaceous. They are cut by basic and acidic intrusive rocks, the former being
the more abundant. The detailed petrographic description of these schists given in the Menom-
inee chapter will suffice for this district.
The continuation of these schists along the south side of the Menominee district has been
assigned to the Keewatin series of the Archean in previous reports of the LTnited States Geo-
logical Survey. ° Later work showed this assignment to be a very doubtful one, and the question
of the correlation of the schists has been largely left open for the Menominee district. The
work of Hotchkiss along the south side of the Florence district shows clearly an interbedding
of upper Huronian slate with tuffs and cruptives of the Quinnesec schist in a manner showing the
main body of schist to be later in origin than the upper Huronian to the north of it.
Intrusive and extrusive greenstones and green schists other than Quinnesec. — Massive and
schistose intrusive and extrusive greenstones appear in several small areas in the upper Huronian.
Two of them cross Menominee River on the east, where they join the northern Quinnesec schist
area of the Menominee district. Another group is exposed along Brule River and others
between the Brule and Florence. Isolated outcrops of green schistose and tuffaceous rocks
of doubtful structural relations are somewhat widely distributed through the district. They
are in places associated with amphibole-magnetite schists, some of which represent phase s of the
intrusive rocks, but some of which doubtless also are metamorj)hosed phases of the Huronian
ferruginous slates.
Petrographically these rocks are very similar both to the Hendock formation and to the
Quinnesec schist, and the description of the northern Quinnesec schist area of the Menominee
district will apply to them.
The areas of intrusive rocks are longer from east to west than from north to south. Evi-
dence of the intrusive character of the greenstones is found along Brule and Menonunee rivers
in T. 40 N., R. 18 E. Especially good evidence is the area just west of Keyes Lake. In sec. 9,
at several points along the Brule, are to be found outcrops of the massive greenstones in contact
with the slates. Invariably the slates are more micaceous near the contact than elsewhere.
In fact, they become mica schists, and here and there is seen a slight development of some
secondary niineral, probably garnet. In every outcrop along the Brule the contacts of the
greenstones and sediments are not sharply defuied, the greenstones being schistose and chloritic
at the contacts. In sec. 13, T. 40 N., R. 18 E., greenstone is found in contact with a micaceous
oMon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. !f.. 190^; Monominoo sppclM folio iNo. 02), Geol. Atlas V. S., C. S. r.eol. Survey, 1900.
IRON ORES OF CRYST.-VL FALLS, IRON RIVER, AND FLORENCE DISTRICTS. 32S
quartzitc. The actual well-defined contact may be seen here, and the intrusive character of the
greenstone is clearly shown. A wedge of the greenstone cuts the quartzite at 1 ,650 paces north
antl 200 paces west of the southeast corner of sec. 13, T. 40 N., R. 19 E. The quartzite at this
place is much fissured and shattered.
Brule River, where it crosses the E. i sec. 9, T. 40 N., R. 18 E., is a favorable place
to see the way in which the intrusive greenstones stand out prominently as hills in the slate
area. The river here cuts through the slates and greenstones, giving a well-exposed cross
section. The conclusion is here forced on the observer that the outcrops of the greenstones of
this area represent with a very fair degree of accuracy the actual distribution of the greenstones.
The greenstone outcrops are many times longer east and west than north and south, as has
been noted. This, however, does not justify the correlation of greenstone knobs because they
happen to align in the direction of their long dimensions. The areas mapped as intrusive and
extrusive greenstones and green schists on the Florence map (PI. XXV, in pocket) may there-
fore be regarded as containing much slate in lower, covered ground.
GRANITE AND GNEISS INTB.USIVES.
Bordering the Quinnesec schist on the south is an area supposed to be underlain by granites
and gneisses. Exposures are few, but to the east, south of the Menominee district, they are more
abundant. The relations are those of intrusion into the Quinnesec schist, and the rocks are
doubtfully correlated with the Keweenawan.
PALEOZOIC SANDSTONE.
A few patches of Paleozoic sandstone he unconformably upon the pre-Cambrian rocks.
These are well shown just west of the Buckeye mine and north of Keyes Lake.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS.
This district is covered by Pleistocene glacial drift. (See Chapter XVI, pp. 427-459.)
THE IRON ORES OF THE CRYSTAL FALLS. IRON RIVER, AND FLORENCE,
DISTRICTS.
By the authors and W. J. Mead.
DISTRIBUTION, STRUCTURE, AND RELATIONS.
The principal ores of this region are found in iron-bearing layers infolded \vith upper
Huronian slate in the vicinity of Florence, Commonwealth, Crj^stal Falls, Amasa, and Iron
River, and in the middle Huronian slate near Mansfield. These districts are usually considered
as a part of the Menominee district in returns of ore sliipments, and their ores are similar,
geologically and structurally, to those of the Menominee district. Though not chrectly continu-
ous with the iron formation of the Menominee district, so far as explorations yet show, they
mainly belong in a formation which is closely correlated with that iron-bearing formation (the
Vulcan), and is given the same name. Also the upper Huronian slate with wliich this iron-
bearing formation is associated is similar to and continuous with the Michigamme ("Hanbury")
slate of the jNIenominee district, and is therefore called by the same name.
The Micliigamme slate over this great area is remarkably uniform in character, anil it is
difficult to tell at what horizon in the slate formation the ores occur in any particular locality.
In tlie vicinity of Crj'stal Falls and Amasa the upi)er Huronian slate rests upon greenstones of
the Hemlock formation, so that in tliis part of the district it is easy to determine the base of
the upper Huronian, and the occurrence of the ore at a short though varying distance from the
volcanic Hemlock formation shows that for this locality at least the iron-bearing rocks occur at^
a fairly persistent horizon near the base of the upper Huronian slate.
Most of the ore deposits of these districts are accompanied by black and pyritiferous slate
walls, in places associated with greenstone, or they maj^ be separated from such walls, especially
the hanging wall, by a small amount of lean cherty iron-bearing rock. Along the trend of the
324
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
iron-bearing member and in (l("i)tli the iron-ore layers jiass info lean clierty layers. The ore
bodies throughout show a strong tendency to follow the steeply inclined and uniformly trending
bechiing of the iron-bearing member, liaving tlius distinct linear shape and distribution at the
surface and tabular or lens shape in three dimensions. In certain of the Crj'stal Falls deposits
these characteristics are much more apparent than in others. For instance, the ores at the
Hemlock mine at Amasa constitute a lens in a narrow band of iron-bearing rock, with consid-
erable extent vertically and horizontally, parallel to the strike of the upper Iluronian. The
same is true of the ore deposits in the so-called "Mansfield slate." Though minor folds are
present in both of these deposits, they are subordinate to the general tabular sha{)e of the
deposits.
Other ore bodies follow the axial Hues of drag folds, thus jiitching at various angles beneath
the surface. Their shape, considered in three dimensions, tends to be linear rather than tabular.
As few of these axial lines are uniform for long distances, offsets of the ore body are common.
The ores of the Florence district seem to be in drag folds, with ])itches to the northwest. Their
distribution suggests sharp offsets by drag folding.
The iron-bearing rocks, and therefore the ore bodies, are usually not more than 300 feet
tliick, though locally the thickness may be much increased l)y buckling. It will be noted by
figure 12 (p. 123) that folding of that type multiplies the thickness by 3. The depth to which
mining has thus far extended is 1 ,000 feet, but exploration has shown ore to a greater depth.
It can not yet be said what the maximum depth of the ores may be. At the Florence mine the
formation becomes pyritiferous below this depth, although it is not demonstrated that the
pyritiferous portion continues indefinitely.
The iron formations near the main area of the Hemlock formation in the Crystal Falls
district and part of those in the Florence district are distinctly magnetic. Elsewhere in the
Crystal Falls district and in the Iron River district the formations are weakly or not at all
magnetic.
The structural relations of the ores of this group are less satisfactorily known than those
of almost any other district in the Lake Superior region, partly because of the lack of sufficient
development and partly because of the uniformity of the slate, making it difficult to find recog-
nizable horizons as a basis for working out the structure. Because of the lack of continuity of
the iron formation in tliis great slate area and the covering of a large part of the area by glacial
drift, it seems altogether likely that there are still many deposits to be found through the slate.
Magnetic work sometimes indicates places to begin exploration, but much of the exploration
must begin blindly.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
The ores of these cfistricts, with the exception of the Mansfield deposit and the Amasa-
Porter, south of Amasa, are non-Bessemer hydrated hematites of medium to low grade. The
average composition and range for each constituent of the ores minetl in these districts in 1907
and 1909 are as follows:
Arcniye rhcmicd} composition of ores from carrjo anahjscsfor 1907 arid 1909.
Crystal Falls dLs-
trict.
Iron Kiver dis-
Iriut.
Florence district.
1907. 1909.
1907.
1909.
1907.
1909.
8.46
8.42
8.23
8.34
10.86
9.76
-Analysis of ore dried at 21'2° F.:
54.10
.437
0. 27
1.27
2.94
2. 62
2.15
.050
5. 89
54.79
.495
7.71
.799
2.50
2.63
2.16
.071
4.11
55.70
.390
8.62
.20
2.54
.92
.76
.057
5.25
54.35
.404
8.77
..30
3.07
1.34
1.49
.056
5.74
54.50
.32
0.72
.26
3.35
1.51
2.40
.1.12
5.20
54.70
.319
6.89
.08
4.17
I.ime
1.80
2.86
.173
S.20
IRON ORES OF CRYSTAL FALLS, IRON RIVER, AND FLORENCE DISTRICTS. 325
Range in pcrrentage of each constituent in ores mined in 1909.
Crystal Falls
districl.
Iron River
district.
Florence dis-
trict.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212°)
Analysis of ore dried at 212° F.:
Iron
Phosphorus
Silica
Man^nnese . . . .-
Alumina
Lime
Macnesia
Sulphur
Loss on ignition
2. S3 to 13. 75
35.74 to 57. 20
.04010 1.28
5..';i to 30. .13
.15 to 2.93
1.20 to 3.41
1.20 to 4.96
.71 to 2. NO
.007 10 .100
l..-)S to 7. CO
49.87 to 50. 07
.70910 3.13
5.35 to 14. IB
.18 to 2,10
.99 to
.40 to
.20 to
. 009 to
2.45 to
4. 23
2.74
2.40
8.46 to 9.1
53. .30 to.M.OO
. 297 to . 410
0. .50 lo
.00 to
2.S2 to
1.01 to
2.74 to
.11 to
5.05 to
S.05
.20
4.47
2.03
2.88
1.87
.5.80
MINERAL COMPOSITION.
The ore of these districts is cliiefly soft red hematite, though in places it is hydrated and
graded as brown hematite (limonite). Goethite has been identified at Iron River. In achlition,
there are quartz and some kaoUn, with small amounts of magnetite, calcium, and magnesium
carbonates, and minute amounts of sulphides.
The average mineral composition of the ores of these districts, calculated from average
analyses for 1909 given in the above table, is as follows:
Approximate mineralogical composition of ores, calculated from the average analyses for 1909.
Crystal Falls
district.
Iron River
district.
Florence
district.
71.90
7. 50
4. 311
4.70
3.50
4.00
2. 00
1.44
54.00
27.80
4.82
5.80
3.80
.45
2 12
\.2\
62.42
18.10
1.26
7.70
6.20
2 85
Apatite (all phosphorus calculated as apatite)
1.65
100. 00
100.00
100.18
The above mineral compositions are necessarily only approximate, as ferrous and ferric
iron are not separated, and the combined water, COj, ami a possible small amount of organic
material are included together under loss on ignition. All the phosphorus with proper amounts
of limestone was calculated as apatite; the remaining lime with proper amounts of magnesia
and water was calculated as dolomite. The remaining magnesia with alumina, silica, and
water was calculated as chlorite. The alumina not used in the chlorite, together with sufficient
silica and combined water, was taken as kaolin. Sufficient iron was combined with the remain-
ing water to form limonite and the remaining iron figured as hematite. Hematite and limonite
probably do not exist in the ores, but as a means of comparison and to show the degree of
hydration the hydrated iron oxide is calculated in terms of these two minerals.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS.
The ore is very porous and shows many crystal-lined cavities. At places a hard steel
hematite ore is fomid, which rims high in metallic iron. It breaks into a mixture of small
blocks and soft ore similar to the ores of the Menominee district.
The average mineral density of the ores, calculated from the above analyses, is 4.38 for
the Crystal Falls ores and 4.30 for the Iron River ores.
The porosity of the ores ranges from less than 5 per cent to over 40 per cent of their volume.
The cubic contents of the ores vary from 8.5 to 15 cubic feet to the ton, with an average of
about 1 1 cubic feet. The volume composition of these ores, in comparison with those of the
Menominee district, is represented in figure 50 (p. 352).
326 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE ORES OF THE CRYSTAL FALLS, IRON
RIVER, AND FLORENCE DISTRICTS.
Structural conditions. — The ores of the Crystal Falls, Iron River, and Florence districts are
enrichments of narrow bods and lenses of iron-bearing roc'ks, as a rule not more than 300 feet
wide, usually between steeply inclined walls of slate, generally graphitic and pjTitiferous near
the contact, and commonly associated with greenstone. The iron-lx'aring member Uiay trend
in the same direction for considerable distances and yet be closely corrugated by minor folds of
the drag type illustrated in figure 12 (p. 123). These steeply pitching drag folds furnish an
impervious basement of slate along which the waters have followed the o])enings in the iron-
bearing member in especial abundance and have effected the concentration of the ore. The
iron-bearing rock is brittle, but the slate is not, the result being that breccias are common in
such troughs, greatly favoring the flow of water. The folds are of various magnitudes and the
concentration may follow either the minor or the major folds.
The circulation has been controlled by the fracture openings in the iron-bearing member
and the bedding in it, and the confining strata hav(> been foot-wall slates, hanging-wall slates,
and iron-bearing member. The essential parallelism of the ores to the trend of the iron-bearing
member shows the obvious tendency of the waters to follow that trend but to be deflected by
the minor bends in it. This is especially well seen along the main belt of iron-bearing rocks
along Iron River.
The depths to which the waters have acted is yet largely unknown. The deepest mines
0])erate to a depth of 1,000 feet in the Gystal Falls district, 500 feet in the Iron River district,
and 950 feet in the Florence district. In certain deposits the ore has apparently given out with
depth. It is possible that in some mines it has been lost because of considerable offset by the
folding. Deeper exploration is warranted.
The topographic relief of the region is so great that different ])arts of the iron-bearing
member may differ as much as 300 feet in elevation. The ores are as a rule closely associated
with the hills but seem to follow, indifferently, crests, slopes, and adjacent valleys. In the Iron
River district the ores favor especially the valleys. These are discernible with difficulty tlirough
the thick drift, but are being found by drilling. The depth to which a head given by the observed
topography would carry a vigorous circulation through the iron-bearing member can not be
woi'ked out theoretically because of the imcertamty of the factors mvolved. Certainly nothing
is now known which would prevent exploration as deep as in other districts of the Lake Superior
region, although here, as in other districts, many of the deposits have certainly been found to
be only a few hundred feet deep.
Ohemical and mineralogical changes. — The iron-bearing member was originally pyritiferous
iron carbonate interbedded with more or less slate. The alteration to ore has occurred in two
phases — first, the oxidation of the iron without removal of silica, producing ferruginous cherts;
second, partly simultaneous and more local, the leaching of the silica, leaving the iron oxide
concentrated as ore. The phj^sical and chemical features of these alterations have not been
worked out tjuantitatively as they have for other districts, but qualitativel}' they are knowTi
to be similar to those of other districts in all respects.
Time of concentration. — The ores were concentrated after the upper ITuronian folding and
before the Cambrian deposition, and since their concentration they have been little affected by
further folding.
THE IRON ORES OF THE FELCH MOUNTAIN AND CAI.LTMET DISTRICTS.
By the authors and \V. J. Mead.
The Felch Mountam and Cahmiet districts are eastward branches of the Crystal Falls
district. Except for low grade and low ])hosphorus, their ores are the same in horizon, relations,
and mineralogical and j)liysical character as the ores of the CVystal Falls and Menominee districts.
The shipment from these districts has been small.
IRON ORES OF FELCH MOUNTAIN AND CALUMET DISTRICTS. 327
FELCH MOUNTAIN DISTRICT.
Iron ores have been mined at two localities in the Felch Mountain district near Groveland
and near Felch. In both these localities the iron-bearing Vulcan formation lies in a closely
compressed s\'ncline with basement of impervious slate or schist, called "Mansfield" schist by
Smyth, but called Felch schist in this report. The lenses at the east end of the Felch Moimtain
trough are now largely worked out. At the Groveland mine dikes of granite cut the ore body.
The average composition of the ores mined in the Felch Mountain district in 1907 is as
follows :
Average analysis of ore mined in the Felch Mountain district in 190/.
Mointure (loss on drying at 212°) 4. 05
Analysisof ore dried at 212° F.: ==
Iron 52. 50
Phosphorus 040
Silica 11. 22
Manganese 1. 10
Alumina. . . .- 2. 49
Lime 3. 51
Magnesia 4. 62
Sulphur 008
Loss by ignition 5. 29
The volume composition of these ores, in comparison with the Crystal Falls, Menominee,
Iron River, and Florence ores, is given in figure 50 (p. 352).
CALUMET DISTRICT.
Ore is mined in the Calumet district only at the Calumet mine, a comparatively recent
development, where there is a steeply southward-dipping succession beginning with Archean
granite on the north, followed successively by Sturgeon quartzite, Randville dolomite, Felch
schist, Vulcan formation (iron bearing), and Michigamme slate. The strike of the ore body is
parallel to the bedding. The bedding trends east and west, but has minor folds with steep
pitches parallel to the strike. The ore body with its associated iron-bearing formation is
divided longitudinally into three parts by layers of slate, from north to south 60, 15, and 60
feet thick. The foot wall is slate, quartzite, and dolomite. The hanging wall is slate or iron-
bearing formation. Along the strike the ore abuts irregularly against unaltered iron formation.
The depth of mining operations to the date of writing is 200 feet. The possibilities of the
extension of the deposits are discussed on page 324. The iron ore is banded cherty hematite
and limonite and some magnetite. It is nonmagnetic in individual pieces, but collectively it
exerts a powerful magnetic pull. The ore runs from 40 to 45 per cent of iron and is sold on the
basis of 0.028 per cent of phosphorus. Its density is about 4 and its porosity IS per cent; it
averages about 10.5 cubic feet to the ton.
The average composition of the ores mined in the Calumet district in 1907 is as follows:
Averaije analysis of ore mined in the Calumet district in 1907.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212°) 5. 00
Analysis of ore dried at 212° F.: =^
Iron 42. 82
Phosphorus 028
Silica 32. 27
Manganese 20
Alumina 2. 53
Lime .- .74
Magnesia 1. 06
Sulphur Oil
Loss by ignition 1. 86
The volume composition of these ores, in comparison with Crystal Falls, Iron River, Florence,
and Menominee ores, is given in figure 50 (p. 352).
328 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE FELCH MOUNTAIN AND CALUMET
ORES.
Structural conditions. — Tlie iron-bearing Vulcan formation of the Fclch Mountain district
is in closely compressed synclinal folds in the upper lluronian Felch schist. It stands out as
erosion remnants forming the crests of the hills. The concentration has evidently been con-
trolled bj' the impervious basements of slate, and also to some extent by the o[)enings along
fracture planes, especially north-south fracture planes crossing the axis of the trough. The
granite dikes at the Groveland mine may also have been influential in controlling circulation.
In the Calumet district there is no essential difference in the structural relations governing
the How from those in the Crystal Falls and Iron River districts. The dip is steep and the forma-
tion has the usual drag type of corrugation.
Che^nical and mincralogical changes. — The iron-bearing member was originally iron car-
bonate mterbedded with more or less slate. The alteration to ore has occurred m two phases —
first, the oxidation of the iron without removal of silica, producing ferruginous cherts; second,
partly simultaneous and more local, the leachmg of the silica, leaving the iron oxide concentrated
as ore. The physical and chemical features of these alterations have not been worketl out
quantitatively as they have for other districts, but quahtatively they are known to be similar
to those of other districts in all respects.
CHAPTER XIII. THE MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN."
LOCATION AND EXTENT.
The portion of the Menominee district covered by tiie accompanying map (PI. XXVI, in
pocket) is bounded on tlie west by Menominee River, on the soutli by tlie same river and the
south hne of T. 39 N., on the north by the north Una of T. 40 N., and on the east by the east
hue of sees. 10, 15, 22, 27, and 34, T. 39 N., R. 28 W. The area thus outlined constitutes a
tongue of sedimentary deposits lying between a granite area to the north and a greenstone schist
area to the south.
At about tlie line between Rs. 27 and 28 W. the characteristic rocks of the Menominee
trough become so deeply buried under later sediments that they can be traced no farther by
outcrop. Lines of magnetic attraction, however, have been obtained still farther east, and these
are taken to mean that the Huronian deposits continue for a considerable distance beyond
the places where they are last seen on the surface.
The area of sedimentary rocks belonging in the Menominee trough is about 125 square miles,
entirely within the State of Michigan. This area is narrowest in the vicinity of Vulcan, where
it measures about 4 miles in width from the contact witli the granite on the north to the contact
with the greenstone schist on Menominee River to the south. To the east the area widens
gradually, until m the eastern portion of R. 28 W. its width measures about 7 miles. To the
west it also widens gradually and finally loses its identity as a distinct trough at al)out the
center line of R. 30 W., where it merges, with the Calumet trough, into the wide area of Huronian
sediments on the west.
TOPOGRAPHY.
There are thi'ee important ridges in the district with axes parallel to its length, a northern
one and two others, nearly parallel, near the central part of the district. The northern ridge
is composed of Archean granite and the Sturgeon cpiartzite. The central ridges are composed
of the Randville dolomite and the ii-on-bearing Vulcan formation, capped in much of the dis-
trict by Cambrian sandstone. The higher points of these ridges range in altitude from about
1,000 feet to nearly 1,600 feet. The valleys between the ridges, as well as the valley to the
south of the main central ridge sloping to Menoininee River, are composed mainly of the Michi-
gamme ("Hanbury") slate. The southern lowland area of the Michigamme slate continues into
the area of the Quinnesec schist. The lower areas have altitudes varying for the most part from
800 to 1,000 feet.
The minor streams follow to a considerable extent the valleys of the Michigamme slate,
and the same is true of the chief stream of the district, the Menominee, for a considerable part
of the area, but this and a number of the other more important streams, such as Sturgeon
River and Pine Creek and some of its branches, flow transverse to the ridges. Several of even
the smaller branches break through either one or both of the iron ranges and the cpiartzite and
granite range to the north. Sturgeon River crosses all the formations of the district.
SUCCESSION OF FORMATIONS.
The rocks of the Menominee district belong to the Archean, Algonkian, Cambrian, and
Ordovician systems. The oldest rocks bordering the Menominee tongue are greenstone schists
and granite. These are regarded as Archean. Resting unconformably upon the Archean rocks
o For further detailed description of the geology of this district see Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 46, 1904, and references there given.
329
Huronian scries:
Upper Huronian (Animikie group)
330 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
are Algonkian sediments, which belong to the Huronian series. These are (hvisible into lower
Huronian, middle Huronian, and upper Huronian, and an^ separated by unconfornjities. The
Paleozoic rocks comprise horizontal Cambrian sandstones and Cambro-Ordovician Umestones.
These occur in patches on the tops of the hills, capping the closely folded and truncated Huronian
rocks. The Huronian series is divisible into a number of formations, each representing a time
during which the conditions of deposition were apjjroximately uniform. The following table
gives the list of the formations arranged in descending order according to age. The members
of the Vulcan formation are distinguished in the descriplion but not on the map.
Cambro-Orclo\dcian Uermansvillc limestone.
Cambrian system Lake Superior sandstone.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series Granite (?).
Quinnesec schist and other green schists
representing surface eruptions overlying
and interbedded with Michi<;amme slate.
Michigamme ("Hanbury") slate, including
iron-bearing beds.
Vulcan formation, subdivided into Curry
iron-bearing member, Brier slate member,
and Traders iron-bearing member.
Unconformity.
Middle Huronian Quartzite, not separated from Rand\'ille dolo-
mite in mapping for most of the district.
Unconformity.
T „ ■ [Randville dolomite.
Lower Huronian <„^ ^ .^
ISturgeon quartzite.
Unconformity.
Archean system :
Laurentian series Granites and gneisses, cut by granite and
diabase dikes.
Keewatin series (not separated in mapping from
Laurentian) Green schists.
The Quinnesec schist is so named because the formation is typically developed at the
Quinnesec Falls, on Menominee River. The Sturgeon cjuartzite is so called because this forma-
tion in the Menominee district has been traced almost continuously to a like formation in
the Crystal Falls district which has been called the Sturgeon quartzite. The dolomite in the
Menominee district is called the Randville dolomite because it has been practically connected
with the Randville dolomite of the Crj^stal Falls district.
In the upper Huronian the Vulcan formation is so named because it occurs in typical
development with full succession and fine exposures near the town of Vulcan. The "Hanbury"
slate was thus named because in the vicinity of Lake Hanbury this formation is better exposed
than anywhere else in the district. This slate, however, has been proved to be equivalent to
and continuous with the Michigamme slate of the Marquette district, and the older name,
Michigamme, is therefore used in tliis report.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LAURENTIAN SERIES AND UNSEPARATED KEEWATIN.
The complex north of the Menominee district is composed largely of Laurentian rocks.
They are principally gneissoid granites and finer-grained banded gneisses. In addition to these
there are also present in subordinate qiuintity hornblende schists and certain feklspathic green-
stone schists identical lithologically with some of the mashed eruptive rocks among the Quin-
nesec schist. These are intruded by Laurentian granites and are believed to represent the
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 331
Keewatin series. They have not been sejjarated in map])ing. Mica scMsts arc founfl only in
a few exposures in the interior of the Ai'chean area north of the region shown on the map
(PI. XXVI, in pocket). The granites, gneisses, and schists are cut by small dikes and veins of
granite, pegmatite, and aplite, by numerous quartz veins, and by coarse granite, massive basalt,
diabase, and gabbro.
Some of the hornblende schists (Keewatin) and some of the gneisses appear to be older
than most of the granites. Others of the scliists are unquestionably mashed intrusive rocks
that are younger than some of the granites. The aplites, pegmatites, and some of the basic
intrusives are the youngest rocks belonging exclusively in the complex, but even these, as they
are not known to cut through the Huronian deposits, are thought to have taken their present
position before the sediments were deposited. The latest of all the intrusive rocks are certain
coarse-grained massive diabases and gabbros. These rocks not only occur as members of the
complex but are found also in the lower division of the Huronian series, overlying the Archean
complex. There is no reason to believe that any of these rocks are metamorphosed sediments.
Most of them are clearly of igneous origin.
The massive granites and the gneissoid granites differ from each other in no essential
respect. The latter are merely schistose phases of the former. They both embrace medium-
grained to fine-grained gray and pink rocks with a granitic texture that locally approaches in
appearance the texture of some quartzites.
The banded gneisses consist of alternate bands of pink and gray material, each band having
the look of granite. These bands, though appearing to be approximately parallel in the ledges,
are found on close inspection to run parallel to one another for short distances only and then to
anastomose or interlace. The red layers cut across the gray gneiss as if they were veins of
granitic material. The only difference that can be discerned between the banded gneisses
and the fine-grained gray gneisses cut by red granite veins is that the latter are irregularly
injected by the granitic material, while in the former the injections are largely parallel.
The hornblende scliists (Keewatin) are usually lustrous greenish-black schists with the
normal characteristics of such rocks. They are cut by the granites in some places. In other
places large blocks are found included in granite. Plainly they are older than the granites,
and probably they are the oldest rocks in the northern complex. A second kind of hornblende
sclust exists in which the rocks are so related to the granites and gneisses that they must be
regarded as dikes. In some places they a]^pear as bands cutting across the banding of the
gneisses, and in others as bands conforming in strike and dip with the lighter-colored bauds of
these rocks. These schists are therefore looked upon as mashed intrusive rocks.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
GENERAL CHARACTER AND LIMITS.
The Algonlvian rocks constituting the Menominee trough, though strongly metamorphosed,
are recognized as mainly sediments. The greater mass of these sediments is mechanical, clastic
textures being still plainly apparent. The iron-bearing formation is largely mechanical, but
with the mechanical material an important amount of chemical and organic material was
deposited, and some of the jaspers of the formation may be wholly chemical or organic. The
limestones are chemical or organic sediments. The sedimentary rocks have been intruded by
a few coarse-grained and some fine-grained igneous rocks. The latter are now usually scliistose.
The lowest formation of the Algonkian system has at its bottom basal conglomerates, which
rest unconformably upon the Ai'chean rocks of the northern complex. These conglomerates
may be seen at a number of places along the border of the trough, and notably at the falls of
Sturgeon River.
332 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The formations of the Algonkian system are likewise separated from the overlying
Cambrian sandstone by a profound unconformity. The Algonkian rocks are folded ; the Cam-
brian sandstone is horizontal and thus lies across the truncated ends of the eroded folds. Its
lowt-r layer is formed largely of the debris of the more ancient rocks. Hence the Algonkian
rocks formed a land surface for a vast period of time before the deposition of the Cambrian
sandstone.
HTJKONIAN SEKIES.
LOWER HURONIAN.
SUCCESSION AND DISTRIBUTION.
The lower Huronian is divided into two formations — the Sturgeon quart zite and the
Randville dolomite, the former bemg the older. These formations are observed only in the
center and on the north side of the Menominee trough. On the south side of the trough no
evidence of their existence is obtainable. This may possibly be due to the thick covering of
drift that blankets the rocks north of the southern area of Quinnesec schist ; but it is thought
to be more probable that these formations are not present at the rock surface in this portion
of the district.
STURGEON QUARTZITE.
Distribution. — The Sturgeon quartzite forms a continuous border of bare hiUs on the south
side of the northern complex. The formation lies between the Archean complex and the
northern belt of dolomite. Prominent bluffs of the typical quartzite may be conveniently
studied northeast of the Loretto mine.
Lithology. — At many places at the base of the Sturgeon quartzite there is a conglomerate
made up of bowlders and fragments of granites, gneisses, and hornblende schists identical
with the corresponding rocks in the adjacent Archean complex to the north. The matrix in
which these are embedded is in some places a quartzite, in others an arkose composed of the
fine-grained debris of granitic rocks. In many places this matrix is schistose and a large quan-
tity of a micaceous mineral has been produced by alteration of the feldspar of the original
sediment, so that the matrix is now lithologicaUy a sericite schist.
The major portion of the formation consists of massive beds of a very compact, vitreous
quartzite, usually white, but here and there tinted with some shade of pink or green. In its
upper portion the cement between the quartz grains is locally calcareous. This calcareous con-
stituent increases in quantity as the overlying dolomite is approached, until the rock becomes
a calcareous quartzite and finally a quartzose dolomite. The change from the cjuartzite to the
dolomite is thus a transition. This indicates a gradual deepening of the waters during the
later part of the Sturgeon epoch.
Deformation. — The main belt of the Sturgeon quartzite is a nearly vertical southward-
dipping monochne. The outcrop of this monocline varies in strike, thus indicating that cross
folding has taken place to some extent. At the west end of the district the quartzite turns
northward, ^Tapping around the Archean complex and then passing eastward into the area of
the Calumet trough. On the turn to the north several small folds are developed, the synclines
of which are now represented by embayments extending eastward into the Archean. The dips
of the quartzite beds may vary a few degrees — 25° in one place — from perpendicularity. There
arc almost as many northern dips toward the granite and gneiss complex as there are southern
dips toward the center of the trough.
Relations to adjacent formations. — The Sturgeon quartzite rests unconformably upon the
Archean rocks of the northern complex. This is shown by the character of the lower bed of
the quartzite, which, as already said, is a basal conglomerate. This basal conglomerate con-
tains almost every variety of fragment derivable from the rocks of the northern complex.
Some of this material in its original position must have been formed at great dei)th in the earth.
Therefore there was deep-seated denudation of the Archean before the deposition of the
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 333
quartzite. Upward the Sturgeon quartzite grades into the Randville dolomite. The nature
of ^,he gradation is discussed in tlie section on tliat formation.
Thickness. — Two difficulties stand in the way of determining the thickness of the Sturgeon
quartzite. The first is the inqiossibihty of deciding how much of the apparent thickness of the
many rock layers in a closely folded district, like the Menominee, is due to the duphcation of
beds in consequence of close folds. The other difficulty is the impossibihty of fixing the upper
limit of the formation. There is everywhere between the c[uartzites and the nearest ledges of
the overlying dolomite a belt of country without exposures of any kind. If we assume that
the southward-facing cliffs, which in so many places mark the southern limit of the quartzites,
are cliffs of differential degradation, that the low ground at the base of the cliffs is underlain
by the dolomite formation, and that the exposures are monochnal, the maximum thickness of
the formation is between 1,000 and 1,250 feet.
RANDVILLE DOLOMITE.
Distribution. — The Randville dolomite occupies three separate belts, whose positions and
shapes are determined by the folding to which the formation has been subjected. These will
be referred to as the northern, central, and southern belts of dolomite.
The northern belt is south of the belt of Sturgeon quartzite. Only a few exposures are
found in this area, but they are so uniformly distributed that on the map (PI. XXVI, in pocket)
the whole belt has been colored for the formation. It is quite possible, however, that in some
places erosion has carried away the dolomite and that the upper Huronian rests immediately
upon the quartzite.
The central belt of dolomite borders the north side of Lake Antoine for a portion of its
length, passes eastward between the Cuff and Indiana mines, and ends at the bluff known as
Iron Hill in the E. i sec. 32, T. 40 N., R. 29 W. This belt is well marked by numerous and
large exposures.
The southern belt of dolomite extends all the way from the west side of the sandstone
bluff west of Iron Mountain to the village of Waucedah, at the east end of the district. Where
not exposed the rock has been found in mines, test shafts, and pits, so that there is a reason-
able certainty that it exists throughout this distance of 16 miles. Where there is any doubt of
its existence at the surface this is due to a considerable thickness of overlying Cambrian sand-
stone. From Iron Mountain as far east as Sturgeon River tlie country underlain by the dolo-
mite is a range of high hills, broken only at a few points by north-south gaps. On the southern
slope of this ridge are the principal producing iron mines of the district.
LitTiolo'jy. — The Randville dolomite is composed of a heterogeneous set of beds Lq which
dolomite is dominant. With the pure dolomites are siliceous dolomites, calcareous quartzites,
argillaceous rocks, and cherty quartz rocks. The Randville dolomite, lying upon the Sturgeon
quartzite, grades dowmward into it. The intermediate rock is a calcareous quartzite.
The predominant rock of the Randville dolomite is an almost massive, apparently homo-
geneous, fine-grained white, pink, blue, or bufl' dolomite, occurring m beds from a few inches
to many feet in thickness. This is interstrattfied with beds of siliceous dolomite m which are
observable numerous grams of quartz. In many places on the weathered surfaces of the dolo-
mites are thin projecting Ijands of vein cpiartz parallel to the bedding, which the microscope
shows to be calcareous quartzite. In other places projecting bands anastomose or run irregu-
larly over the weathered surfaces, here and there intersecting the bedding planes of the rock
at acute angles. Their abundance proves clearly that the dolomites, in spite of their homo-
geneous appearance, have been extensively fractured and crushed. In many places the crush-
ing has produced a breccia of dolomite fragments in a siliceous matrix. In a few localities the
fragments are rounded, so that the rock is a pseudoconglomerate.
The greater part of the argillaceous rocks interstratified with the dolomite is soft light-
gray or dark-gray slate. Another part is typical black slate, still plainlj^ marked by bedding
lines. Still other parts are purplish-pink schistose argillaceous dolomite. Many of the thin
334 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
layers of the pui'plisli-piiik shitelike material between massive dolomite beds appear to be-
largely the selvajje of the softer lajers of dolomite, rendered schistose by the movement of
accommodation between the stronger beds.
Dcfommiion. — Structurally the northern belt of dolomite is a southward-dipping mono-
cline. The central and southern belts are anticlines. The three belts are separated by two
sjTiclines.
In the anticlinal belts the beds at first sight appear to bo isoclinal, but a close examination
of the southern belt reveals the existence of a number of minor folds having almost vertical
pitches. In the western part of the district the folds are overturned to the south, the axial
planes dipping northward at high angles. In the central and eastern parts of the district, east
of Quiimescc, the minor and major folds have their axial planes steeply inclined to the south.
Although the minor folds are rather easilj' recognizable, it is only on the south side of the
southern belt that they become prominent. Here the synclines open out, forming basins in
which the ore bodies lie. The small folds, with a few exceptions, pitch west in the western
portion of the range and east in the eastern portion.
The attitude of minor folds is, as is well known, an indication of the attitude of the major
folds on which they are superimposed. By using this principle, it is concluded that the major
anticlines in this district disappear to the east and to the west by plunging beneath the upper
Huronian sediments.
From the above statements it is clear that, in addition to the major east-west anticlines and
synclines that are so prominent in the district, the dolomite formation is also affected by a^
gentle but large cross anticlinorium whose axis runs approximately north and south. It is-
remarkable that eiosion has nowhere exposed the Sturgeon quartzite in association with the
central belts of dolomite.
Relatione to adjacent formations. — The dolomite formation is nowhere seen in actual con-
tact witli the Sturgeon quartzite, nor are ledges of the two formations seen in close proximity.
It is knowii, however, that the upper layers of the quartzite are calcareous and that the lower
beds of the dolomite are quartzose. The inference seems to be safe that the two formations are
conformable, and that they grade into each other through calcareous quartzites. The rela-
tions of the dolomite to the overlying formations are discussed in connection with the upper
Huronian.
Thicl'ness. — At no place i^dthin the area mapped is the dolomite known to be exposed
from the bottom to the top of the formation. On the north side of the trough the formation
is bordered by the Sturgeon quartzite on the north and the Vulcan formation on the south,
but exposures between these limits are so few that it is not ceitain that the dolomite occupies
the entire breadth, and on this account and because of the minor folds it is impossible to give
anything like an exact estimate of the thickness of the formation. By making calculations so
as to obtain a minimum figure, 1,000 feet or less could be obtained. If, on the other hand,
calculations were made on the supposition that all of the isoclinal beds are different layers, the
estimate might be as great as 5,000 feet. Probably the truth is much nearer the lower figure
than the higher. The original thickness of the dolomite is probably somewhere between 1,000
and 1,500 feet.
MIDDLE HURONIAN.
The identified middle Huronian of tJic Menominee district consists entirely of chert}'
quartzite resting in a thin film, from a few feet to 70 feet thick, on the Randville dolomite
near its contact with the upper Huronian (Animikie group), and it is included with tlie Rand-
ville dolomite on the general map of the district (PI. XXYI, in pocket). These rocks were
formerly regarded as a part of the dolomite formation, but recent work has shown them to be
sci>aral)lc from the dolomite. The quartzite has been separated from the dolomite in the
mapping for several small areas near Norway and the east end of Iron Hill. (See fig. 4.').)
The chcrty quartz rocks are fine grained, drusy in places, and white, light red, or dark
purple. The darker colorcil kinds look very much like some varieties of jaspilite. Under th&
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT.
335
LEGEND
Cambrian
sandstone
microscope the cherty quartz rocks seem to be composed almost exclusively of a fine-grained
crystalline aggregate of quartz which incloses a few grains of hematite, magnetite, and other
iron compounds. Here and there a fragmental quartz grain may be seen, but usually no trace
of fragmental constituents can be discerned.
Pebbles in the conglomerate at the base of the upper Huronian are partly jasper and iron
ore, obviously derived from some preexisting formation not now appearing. A reasonable
inference is that these pebbles represent fragments of the Negaunee formation, which would
normally lie above the middle Huronian quartzite. In the previous report on this district"
several masses of iron-bearing rocks were doubtfully referred to the Negaunee. Subsequent
work has demonstrated these to be upper Huronian.
The middle Hiu-onian quartzite rests unconformabl}- on the Randville dolomite, with
discordance in bedding. The quartzite may be observed to fill fissures and depressions in the
dolomite. At Norway Hill erosion
cut ofl^ 100 feet or more of the dolo-
mite before the quartzite was de-
posited. On the south side of
Iron HiU there is a thin film of
conglomerate, taken to represent
the base of the micklle Huron-
ian quartzite, plastered against
the dolomite escarpment. The
quartzite is not shown directly
above the conglomerate but ap-
pears a few hundred feet to the
east, resting against the dolomite
escarpment. (See PI. XVII, ^4, of
Monograph XL VI.) In fact, much
of the mitldle Huronian quartzite
itself on Iron Hill is conglomeratic
and brecciated, and a considerable
part of it may possibly represent a
coarsely fragmental basal phase of
the middle Huronian. The intri-
cacy of the relations of the middle
Huronian quartzite with the Rand-
ville dolomite on Iron HiU is rep-
resented in figure 45. The hill is a normal anticlinorium, of the type to be expected in com-
petent formations of this type. It contrasts in every essential feature with the abnormal
anticlinorium in the weak, incompetent beds of the Michigamme slate on Han bury Hill.
MichigammeC'Hanbury"^ slata
with iron formation
(upper Huronian)
Quart-zite
(^middle Huronian)
Randville dolomite
(lower Huronian)
Direction and pitch of
' axial lines of minor folds
a5|
Strike and dip
Outcrop
Outcrop with strike
^S5S3ffiS3.ff
Figure 45.-
Axis of folds
Cross section A-B, looking east
Geologic map and cross section of Iron HiU, Menominee district, showing
relations of lower and middle Huronian.
UPPER HURONIAN (aNIMIKIE GROUP).
All the formations between the Randville dolomite and the unconformity at the base of
the Cambrian sandstone are placed in the upper Huronian. For the purpose of the present
monograph the group may be divided into two formations; the lower, the Vidcan formation,
includes all the known iron-bearing rocks of the district except the conglomerate beds at the
base of the Cambrian; the upper, the Micliigamme ("Hanbxiry") slate, comprises the great
upper slate formation of the upper Hiu-onian.
VULCAN FORMATION.
Subdivision into members. — The u'on-bearing Vulcan formation embraces tlu-ee members;
these are, from the base up, the Traders iron-bearing member, the Brier slate member, and the
Curiy iron-bearing member. In this monograph the three members are mapped as a single
formation because they are not so well exposed that they can everywhere be separately out-
u Mon. U. S. Qeol. Survey, vol. 40, 1904, pp. 273-279.
336 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
lined. However, at several places the three members are known to exist, and ran be separately
mapped. The Traders iron-bearin<z; member is so named because of its typical occurrence at
the Traders mine, iiortli of Iron Mountain. The Brier slate is so named because it is well
exliibited at Brier Hill. The Curry member is so called because the Curry mine is located at
its horizon.
Distribution. — From the position of the ^ ulcan formation inmiediately upon the lower
and miildle Huronian it would be natural to expect its distribution to be dete'rmined by the
distribution of those rocks, and as a matter of fact, wlien'ver the Vulcan formation occurs it
lies immediately above the Randville dolomite or middle Huronian quartzite and below the
Michigamme slate. But at some places within the district the dolomite or quartzite is in
immediate contact ^\^th the Micliigamme slate or is separated from exposures of it by intervals
so narrow as to show that tlie ^'uk•an beds are lacking.
The principal area of the Vulcan formation extends as a belt from 900 to 1,300 feet wide
along the south side of the soutliern belt of dolomite for nearly its entire extent. The belt
follows the sinuosities of the southern border of the dolomite area rather closelj-, but it is much
wider in the reentrants caused by the pitching synclines of the dolomite than elsewhere. The
widening of the formation at these places is of course due to the repetition of beds in consecjuencc
of close foldmg. Along onl}' one stretch, about a mile in length, is the iron-bearing formation
known to be absent. This is in the W. \ sec. 1 and the E. ^ sec. 2, T. 39 N., R. 30 W., where
the Michigamme slate lies upon ledges of the typical dolomite.
On the north side of the southern dolomite belt, in the central or western part of the dis-
trict, the iron-bearing formation has nowhere been found nor has any indication of its presence
been detected. In the eastern part of the district the Vulcan formation appears at the Loretto
mine in an eastward-pitching syncUne. From this place it extends eastward along the north
side of the dolomite, as shown by a line of magnetic attractions, to a point within a short dis-
tance of the east end of the area mapped, where the thick deposits of Paleozoic beds prevent
ftu-ther tracing.
The second important area of the Vulcan formation is that in which the Traders and
Forest mines are situated. It stretches for about 5 miles along the south side of the central
dolomite belt, running north of Lakes Antoine and Fumec and ending, so far as present informa-
tion indicates, somewhere about the east line of R. 30 W. On the north side of this same dolo-
mite belt the iron-bearing formation is known to extend for only a short distance on both sides
of the Cuff mine, in the southern portion of sec. 22, T. 40 N., R. 30 W.
The tliird strip of country in which the iron-bearing beds are to be expected is that which
borders the northern dolomite belt. This area, however, is in the valley of Pine Creek. The
siu-face is tliickly covered \\'ith sand. There is no indication of the character of the under-
lying rock anywhere west of the Loretto mine except that afforded by a group of pits near the
center of sec. 14, T. 40 N., R. 30 W., at the western extremity of the belt. These pits liave
shown the presence of lean ore associated with cherts, jaspilites, and black slates. Tjie cherts
are filled with the "shots and bands" of ore characteristic of the cherts in the Michigamme
slate and present to some extent in the jaspilites of the Curry iron-bearing member. The
rocks in this locaUty are believed to belong to the Curry horizon.
From the foregoing account of the distribution of the Vulcan formation it will be noticed
that the belts of iron-bearing rocks are not continuous. From the stratigra|)hic relations of
the non-bearmg formation it would be expected to occur as continuous belts surrounding the
dolomite anticlines, bordering the south side of the northern dolomite monocline. In several
places, however, these relations do not exist. It is known that in jiarts of the district the
iron-bearing formation is absent from the position it would naturallj- be expected to occupy,
and that the Michigamme slate, which stratigraphically overlies the ore-bearing strata, is in
immediate contact with the dolomite that underlies tlie Vulcan formation. It is probable that
tlie larger parts of the belts niaj)ped as doubtful — the areas in wliich tlie underlying rock is
unknowTi — are underlain by the Michigamme slate rather than the Vulcan formation, but it
is possible tluit the Vulcan formation underlies a portion of these areas.
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 337
Traders iron-hearing member. — The Traders iron-bearing member of the Vulcan formation
consists of a comformable set of betls composed of ferruginous conglomerates, ferruginous quartz-
ites, heavily ferruginous quartzose slates, and iron-ore deposits. The conglomerates and
quartzites are usually at the base of the member, resting upon the Randville dolomite. These
rocks vary in thickness from a few inches to 20 feet or more. They contain fragments, usually
small but here and there large, of quartzite, jaspilite, white cjuartz, and rocks that make up
the Archean complex. In many places, however, the conglomerate contains so much ore and
jasper that it is an ore and jasper conglomerate or quartzite, of which some is so rich that it is
mined. In these rocks the matrix is a mass of small grains of hematite, embedded in which
are bowlders and pebbles of ore and of jaspilite. The conglomerates and quartzites of this
kind are usually schistose. The ore and jaspilite fragments are mashed into lenticular bodies,
and the matrix into a mass of thin scales like those characterizing the specular ores of the
Marquette district. Typical occurrences of the ore-bearing quartzites and conglomerates may
be seen at the open pits of the Traders mme and at the bottom and along the west side of pit
No. 3 of the Penn Iron Company, in the SW. \ NE. i sec. 9, T. 39 N., R. 29 W. In the vicmity
of the Forest mine are heavy quartzites, some of them white and vitreous, interbedded with
what is taken to be the Traders member. This is the largest mass of quartzite developed at
this horizon in the district.
The conglomerates and quartzites pass upward mto the ferruginous quartzose slates.
These consist of alternating layers of heavily ferrugmous quartzites, iron oxides, and in some
cases jaspilites. The cjuartzose layers are dark red or purple jasper-like beds, from a fraction
of an inch to 18 inches or 2 feet m thickness. Some of them on fresh fractures exliibit the
quartzitic texture very plainlj'. The coarser of them approach ferruginous quartzites. Others,
however, resemble A^ery closely a typical jaspilite, which a number of them are believed to be.
These varieties are m places mottled by red and purple blotches that appear to be due to the
presence of red jaspilite grains in a ferruginous quartzose matrix. Some of these mottlings
are secondary concretions and some are alterations of greenalite granules, more fully described
in connection with the Curry iron-bearing member of the Vulcan formation. As a rule the
motthng is in small elongated areas and the rock possesses an mcipient schistosity in the direc-
tion of the longer axes of the areas. This phenomenon is the result of mashing, which flattened
the jaspilite grauas and the smaller components of the quartzose matrix, producmg a parallel
arrangement of the particles. It is difficult to determine with certainty the relative amounts
of the detrital material and true jaspilite, which is nonfragmental, but apparently the former
is more abundant and it may be dominant.
Brier slate member. — The Brier slate member lies immediately above the Traders iron-
bearing member. The slates are heavj^ black, ferruginous, and quartzose, presenting in many
places a very even and fine banding, due either to the presence of layers richer than the average
in iron oxides or merely to the presence of small quantities of pigments. On exposed surfaces
the banding is emphasized by slight weathering. Wliere the weathering has progressed very
far the slates are stained red. They open along the bedding planes and become very shaly.
In this form they yield an abundant talus at the base of all cliff faces in which they are exposed.
Curry iron-bearing member. — The Curry iron-bearing member consists of interbedded
jaspiUtes and ferruginous quartzose slates, with various mLxtures of the two, and ore deposits.
Many of the jaspilite bands are in the center of the quartzose slate layers, but a few are along
one side; all are parallel to the bedding planes. Both the jaspilites and the ferrugmous quartz-
ose slates are dark red or purple. The two can usually, however, be distinguished. The
jaspilites are homogeneous rocks, with a flinty fracture and luster. They consist as a rule of
very finely crystalline quartz and hematite, with abundant concretionary and granular struc-
tures marked by varying combinations of iron oxide and chert. Some of the concretionarj'
structures are similar to those figured by Van Hise and Irving for the Gogebic district." Much
more numerous granules have the same shape as the concretions but differ from them in lackmg
a Mod. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 19, 1892.
47517°— VOL 52—11 22
338 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
nulial or concentric structures. Such granules are identical in their characteristics witli altered
greenalite granules of the Mesabi district of Minnesota described by Leith " and of tlie Felch
Mountain district of Michigan described by Smytli.''
It is concluded tluit the iron-bearing formation is essentially the result of alteration of
greenalite rocks like those in the Mesabi district and of iron carbonates like those in the
Gogebic ihstrict. None of the original greenahte or. iron carbonate is now present, but
pseudomorjjlis of both of tliem are abundant.
The ferruginous quartzose slates consist largely of plainly fragmcntal rjuartz. The coarser
varieties approach quartzites. Between tlie grains of fragmental quartz tliere is finelj' crys-
talline quartz and iron oxide. What part of the matrLx is truly detrital and what part, like
the jaspilite, is nonfragmental in origin it is difficult to say. Between the bands wliicli are
plainly true jaspilites and nondetrital and those which are ]>lainly detrital there are all grada-
tions. It is difficult to ascertain whether the fragmental or the nonfragmental material is the
more abundant in the Curry iron-bearing member as a whole, for it is poorly exposed. The
ferruginous quartzose slates are beheved to have been derived largely from the erosion of the
lower Iluronian. But mingled with tliis detrital material m many places was apparently- a
considerable amount of nonfragmental material. There are, therefore, in the Curry iron-
bearing member all gradations between clastic and nonclastic sediment.
Deformation. — The Vulcan formation occupies a position on the upper sides of the dolomite
anticlines. Its major folds, or folds of the first order, correspond exactly to the major folds
of the RandviUe dolomite. The folds of the second order correspond also with those of the
dolomite. The troughs on the south side of the southern dolomite area are occupied by the
members of the iron-bearing formation. Moreover, within the Vulcan formation are numerous
still smaller folds of the thirtl order, which, because of the hardness of the rocks and the perfec-
tion of the bandmg, are well exliibited. These small folds may be observed at nearh' every
place where minmg has progressed to any considerable extent and at many other places wliere
only lean ores have been developed. The folds of the third order pitch in the same direction
as those of the second order, upon which they are superimposed, but the strikes of their axes
may diverge slightly.
Still smaller folds are superimposed on the folds of the third order m the same \vay in
which the latter are superimposed on the folds of the second order. On exposed surfaces the
folds of the higher orders appear as a series of crinkhngs or flutings, with heights ranging from
one-quarter inch to 5 or 6 inches from trough to crest. Even in the troughs of these minute
folds, under favorable circumstances, iron ore was deposited, especially where crusMng and
brecciating took place in connection \\\i\\ the folding.
Wherever folding is observed within the iron-bearing formation it is noticeable that the
bedding is best preserved in the siliceous bands. The iron-ore layere between the siliceous
laj^ers, while yielding to the stresses that produced the folding, were mashed and sheared and
became schistose. Where the compressing forces were very powerful a slat}' cleavage developed
in both the iron-ore and the siliceous layers.
In the western part of the south belt of the iron-bearing formation cariying the piincipal
ore bodies the minor folds show considerable regularity of pitch to the west at angles ap])roaching
30°. The ore bodies follow these axial lines. Not uncommonly these nainor folds pass into
overthrust faults. The distribution of the formation suggests that more overthnist faidts are
really present than have been found. In this area the rocks to the south have moved westward
and upward with reference to the rocks to the north, developing drag or buckle folds and
thrust faults in the relatively incompetent upper Huronian beds near the contact with the
relatively competent lower Huronian. The eastern part of the south belt shows some eastward
pitches.
Relations hetween the members of the Vulcan formation and the Michigamme slatt. — Where
the relations between the Traders iron-bearing member and the Brier slate member are normal
o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. '.3, 1903. ' Idem, vol. 3C. 1899.
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 339
the Traders grades into the Brier by diminution of tlie amount of ferruginous material and by
increase in the number and tiiickness of the quartzose beds. At the same time there is an
increase in tlie proportion of shity material. Where the ferruginous material is much reduced
in quantity the Traders iron-bearing bed becomes the Brier slate member. This gradation
occupies only a veiy short vertical range, so that the line between the iron-bearing member
and the slate member is usually determinable within a few feet.
Where marked disturbances have occurred, as in the vicinity of Norway and for several
miles to the east, the relations between the two members are vevy different. Wherever it can
be seen the contact between the Traders and Brier members is shaqj. In many places the
contact seems to be slickensided and locally to be a plane of differential movement. At the
o])en pits of the Norway mine and those north of the Curry mine and between this mine and
the West Vulcan the Traders rocks are in ])laces ])seudoconglomeratic. The Brier slate member
also may be brecciated. Moreover, the brecciation is not confined to these two members, but
the underlying dolomite is at some places likewise brecciated for a short distance beneath its
upper surface. The phenomena wherever studied appear to indicate that at the time of folding
fault slipping occurred along the contact between the upper Huronian and the lower Huronian
and between the Traders and Brier members. The dolomite was brecciated to some extent,
the Traders detrital ores were crushed and brecciated, and in several places the lower portions
of the Brier slate member were likewise included wiihin the zone of movement and were frac-
tured and brecciated. Later the breccias were enriched by the deposition of hematite and
other iron compounds, and both the Traders member and the lower part of the brecciated
Brier slate member became sufficiently ferruginous to warrant mining.
The Brier slate member passes upward into the Curry iron-bearing member by the diminu-
tion of argillaceous material and the introduction of ferruginous material, especially bands of
jaspilite, the somewhat ferruginous quartzose Brier slate meml)er thus becoming heavily ferru-
ginous. At one place this transition is seen to occur laterally as well as vertically. No strati-
graphic break has been discovered anywhere within the Vulcan formation.
The relations between the Vulcan formation and the overlying Michigamme slate are
those of conformity. The contact is usually very sharp. No difficuUy^ is experienced in
defining the upper limit of the iron-bearing formation. The slates, however, are in places so
very schistose on the upper side of the contact that their bedding planes can not be recognized,
suggesting fault slipping. The bedding of tlie iron-bearing formation, on the other hand, is
still almost perfectly preserved and is parallel to the contact.
The relations of the Vulcan formation with the lower and middle Huronian are discussed
on pages 342-343.
ThicTcness. — A number of sections offer opportunities for determining the thickness of the
separate members of the Vulcan formation, but in only a few can its total thickness be deter-
mined. All along the south side of the southern dolomite belt, from the Aragon mine eastward
to Sturgeon River, the iron-bearing formation stretches as a narrow belt, which for much of
the distance appears to be without important folds. At several places mining operations have
afforded excellent sections from the base of the productive portion of the Traders iron-bearing
member to the top of the Curry iron-bearing member, and at a few places the sections extend
downward to the top of the Randville dolomite. At Brier Hill, where practically the whole
formation can be seen on the surface, its thickness is about 600 feet. At the Curry shaft No. 2
it is 700 feet thick and at the Aragon mine about 675 feet.
At a number of sections the thickness of the individual members comprising the formation
is easily measured. The Brier slate member has been measured at seven places, yielding
results between 100 and 360 feet. Five of these measurements fall between 320 and 360 feet.
Eight measurements of the Curry member have given results vaiying between 100 and 225
feet. Six of these fall between 160 and 225 feet. Measurements of the Traders iron-bearing
member have yielded no such concordant results. In the first place, its thiclvness probably
varies widely, as should be expected of a formation composed largely of detrital deposits.
340 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Moreover, only a few sections reach as low as the dolomite; hence the exact position of the
contact between tliis rock mikI the iron-bearing formation must be guessed at. Only three
ineasurement.s have been made from the known top of the dolomite to the known top of the
Traders member. These give 170 feet, 85 feet, and 155 feet.
An interesting feature of these figures apjiears when the estimated thickness of the Brier
and Currj' members is compared with the total thickness of the two. In almost every section
where the estimated tliickness of either of these members falls below tlie average of all the
measurements for that member the tliickness of the other member exceeds the average, and
the total of the two is fairly constant. Thus, whereas seven estimates of the tluckcess of
the Brier slate member vary between 240 and 360 feet, and eight estimates for the Curry iron-
bearing member vary between 112 and 225 feet, measurements of the total thickness of the
two vary only between 400 and 5.30 feet. The apparent greater variation in tliickness of the
two members separately than in that of the two combined may be partly explained as due
to the gradation between the two and the consequent difficulty of fixing the exact place at
which one ends and the other begins.
From a careful consideration of the figures given above and a few others that are not
here recorded, it is estimated that the average thickness of the Vulcan formation is approxi-
mately 650 feet, divided as follows: Traders u-on-bearing member, 150 feet; Brier slate mem-
ber, 330 feet; Curry iron-bearing member, 170 feet — that is, the two ore-bearing members
combined about equal in thickness the intervening slates. It is conceded, however, that the
Traders member departs considerably from this average and that the total thickness of the
ormation varies accordingly.
MICHIGAMME ("HANBURT") SLATE.
Di-ttrihution. — The Micliigamme slate occurs mainly in three large belts constituting valleys
which correspond wdth synchnes between the older rocks. It occupies nearl}- all the low ground
in the Menominee trough, forming a plain broken only by heaps of glacial material deposited
upon it, by the protrusions of a few liillocks composed of the harder slates, or by equally
resistant greenstones. The slate areas are narrowest at the east and gradually' widen toward
the west. The northern belt is divided into two portions by the western area of Quinnesec
scliist. The northern part turns northwest and leaves the Menominee district at the northern
limit of the mapped area; the southern portion coalesces with the middle belt and crosses
Menominee River into Wisconsin. East of Iron Hill the two northern belts again coalesce
and extend as a single belt to Sturgeon River. Near the longitude of Waucedah all the slates
disappear to the east beneath the Paleozoic beds.
Name. — In previous reports on this district this slate has been called the Hanbury slate,
but the formation has been proved to be equivalent to and continuous witli tlie Micliigamme
slate of the Marquette district, and the older name, Micliigamme, is therefore used m this report.
Lithology. — The formation is dominantly a pelite. It comprises black and gray clay slates,
gray calcareous slates, graphite slates, graywackes, tldn beds of cjuartzite, local beds of ferru-
ginous dolomite and siderite, and rarer bodies of ferruginous chert and iron oxide. Tilie
formation is cut by dikes of schistose greenstones, and in one or two places sheets of the same
rock have been intruded between the sedimentary beds. The predominant rocks of the forma-
tion are gray clay slates and calcareous slates. The latter are more abumlant m the lower
portions of the formation and the former in the upper portions. The exact vertical relations
of the two rocks have not been made out, because of the scarcity of exposures and the very
intricate folding to which they have been subjected. The clay slates are normal argillaceous
slates, in wliich there is always more or less ferruginous matter. Those exposed to the weather
are light in color and have a slialy character, iluscovite then becomes prominent. Their
iron components are decomposed to red ocherous compounds. \Yliere most altered the rocks
are light-red sericite slates or shales. The weathering of the slates that contain small quantities
of calcareous components is somewhat different. They tend to bleach to a very ])ale-green
or white color and to become porous tlirough the loss of their calcareous cement. The ferru-
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 341
ginous components oxidize, forming red ocher, and this lies in an irregular pattern on the light-
colored background. The result of tliese changes is a red and wliitc or pale-green mottled
friable slate, known locally as "calico slate."
By the Sedition of carbonates the argillaceous slates pass into the carbonate slates.
These in places contain as much as .50 per cent of carbonate as a cement. With an increase
in the carbona;te the slates lose their slaty character, become more massive, and finally pass
into beds of f#rodolomite and siderite measuring from a few inches to 20 feet in thickness.
On many of the weathered surfaces both the dolomite and the calcareous slates are coated
with a skin of brown ocherous limonite, which on some of the massive dolomites reaches a
tliickness of an inch or more. Much of the limonite is pseudomorphous after the carbonate
siderite.
The ferruginous cherts and u"on oxides are not known to be present in the Michigamme
slate in large quantity. Indeed, they are as a rule only locally developed in association with
the sideritic dolomites and calcareous slates where these have been severely crushed or folded.
The source of the iron oxides is clearly iron-bearmg carbonate in the calcareous slates and
the dolomites. The cherts are wliite or yellow massive rocks with finely granular texture.
They occur as tliin seams and veuis traversing the slates and dolomites, and as tliin beds inter-
laminated with the tlucker beds of the last-named rocks.
Wlierever the cherts occur there is usually found also a greater or less quantity of some
iron oxide. Tliis occurs as small veins of pure hematite cutting through the cherts, as coatings
of hematite on the walls of cracks traversmg the slates, as small vugs inclosed in shattered
cherts, as druses covering the walls of the cavities in an extremely porous chert, m distinct bands
interlaminated with bands of graywacke or cpiartzite, and in the form of a mixture of oxides
anil hydroxides impregnating slaty material. In short, the iron oxitles occur in all forms
characteristic of deposits precipitated from percolating waters. The slates impregnated with
ferruguious matter are naturally dark red. Those that are but slightly ferruginous still plamly
exliibit their true character. In those containing a large proportion of the iron oxides, how-
ever, but few traces of the original slate remain and the rock resembles a slaty ocher.
The grapliite slates are black, very fissile, tliinly laminated rocks. They appear to be
limited to the lower portions of the Micliigamme slate. At any rate, they have been seen
only in association with the underlying Curry iron-bearing member and at horizons a few
hundred feet above the base of the slate formation, but they do not everywhere occur at the
base of the formation. Their association with iron-beaiing beds at many places in tliis and
other districts probably has some significance as to the origin of the ore. (See p. .502.)
The graphite slates appear to grade laterally mto the normal gray slates, of wliich they seem
to be local modifications. The graywackes and quartzites of the Micliigamme slate are normal
rocks of their kind, requiring no special description. They both occur in comparatively tliin
beds, more commonly in the lower part of the formation than in the upper part. The quartzites
are more abundant than the graywackes, but neither are common.
Deformation. — The major folding of the Michigamme slate seems to correspond with that
of the underlying formations, and the slate therefore lies in three major synchnes. This
structure is inferred from areal relations to older rocks rather than from structures seen in
the slates themselves, which are poorly exposed, lack easily identifiable horizons, and have
their bedding much obscured by cleavage.
Many of the folds are of the abnormal type characteristic of incompetent strata. The
hmbs are thinned and the crests thickened, as would be expected in folds of this type, con-
trasting in every essential detail with folds in the competent quartzites and dolomites, as, for
instance, in Iron Hill. (See fig. 45, p. 33.5.)
The strong north-south compression of the slate beds, producing the close east-west folds,
also produced in all the weaker members of the formation a perfect slaty cleavage with a
nearly east-west strike and a dip that varies but a few degrees on either side of the vertical.
There is also a set of fracture planes or joints at right angles to the cleavage. These joints
intersect the rocks at approximately equal intervals of several inches. In some places they
342 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGIOX.
are bordered by narrow shear zones in which the total displacement of tlio slate beds is an
inch or more. On some flat horizontal surfaces two sets of these joints are seen cutting each
other at acute angles, and about each slight faulting has occurred. Extensive thrust faults
are suggested by the close folding of cleavage, but these have not been identified.
Tliickness. — No even approximately correct estimate of the thickness of the Michigamme
slate can at present be made. The similarity of the beds and their redujjhcation in consecpience
of the close folding render it impossible to determine what proportion of the apparent thickness
of the formation is due to folding and what proportion is due to successive deposits. There
is no (l(iul)t that the Michigamme slate is little thicker than any of the other formations in
the district.
RELATIONS OF TIPPER HrRONIAN TO TINDERLYING ROCKS.
Relations between Vulcan formation and the lovxr Ibtronian. — The ir<)n-l)eariIlg^'ul(■an forma-
tion, except in very small areas, rests upon the Randville dolomite or middle Huronian (juartzite.
If the Vulcan formation exists in the do-.btful areas adjacent to the Quinnesec schist, it there
rests against that schist. Where the Vuican formation rests upon the middle Huronian quartzite
or Randville dolomite the lower layers of the younger formation appear to he conformably
upon the older one, with an extremely sharp hne of definition between them. In j)laces the
contact rock is a talc schist derived from the dolomite or cherty cpiartzite. The basal member
of the Vulcan formation is either a quartzite which in i)laces contains ore and jaspilite fragments,
or an ore and jasper conglomerate containing large and small pebbles of ore, or a breccia con-
taining fragments of all the adjacent rocks. The relative abundance of autoclastic rocks
and true water-deposited conglomerates is uncertain. The Traders iron-bearing member
appears to be nearly conformable in attitude with the underlying dolomite, but detailed work
discloses distinct though slight discordance.
Contacts between the Randville dolomite or middle Huronian quartzite and the overlying
formation are found in many of the mines, but they are nowhere discoverable on the surface.
In the little ravine just east of the old Brier Hill mine the dolomite and the lower members
of the iron-bearing formation are very close together, but their actual contact is covered. The
space between the ledges of the two forrnations is filled with loose fragments, and among these
fragments are large pieces of quartzite holding pebbles of jaspilite, quartzite, granite, and
other members of the Archean.
In many of the mines and the open pits a similar conglomerate or a coarse quartzite is
found lying upon the dolomite or quartzite.
The dolomite near the contact is usually schistose, so much so that in most places it is a
pure talc schist. The calcium of the dolomite has been removed and much of it has been
deposited in the ore bodies as calcite, while the magnesium has remained in the talc. A
surprisingl}^ similar schist has been formed from the middle Huronian quartzite, though on
the whole it is more siliceous and less talcose. This talc schist serves as an impervious lining
to many of the folds in which the ore deposits lie, and afforded better conditions for the concen-
tration of the ore material than were afforded by the massive and shattered dolomite under-
lying the ore formation at many places. The schist was probably formed in connection with
movement along the contact plane after the upper Huronian deposits were laid down, contem-
poraneously with the folding and mctamorphism that affected both the lower Huronian and
upper Huronian. The contact between the schist and the superjacent quartzite is extremel}'
sharp, and in many places the plane of contact is slickensided.
In those places where the basal member of the iron-bearing formation is not a coarse
quartzite, it is usually a bedded red slate, or more nearly a schist composed of small grains
of quartz, considerable dolomite, and locally talc. Alternate bands are composed of layers in
which dolomite and talc are predominant and those in wliich siliceous material predominates.
Tlie contacts between the schist and the rocks on both sides of it are usually covered. There
is in some localities an apparent gradation between these underh'ing rocks and the rocks Ij'ing
above them, but in others the line of division between them is well defined.
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 343
In earlier reports certain dense jaspilites were diseriniinated from the fragmental and
micaceous jaspilites of the Vulcan formation above them and were regarded as belonging to
the middle Huronian, unconformably below the Vulcan formation. The principal evidence
of the existence of such a formation is the presence of fragments of jaspilite in the conglomerate
at the base of the Vulcan formation.
In general, then, there is a slight structural discordance between the beds of the Vulcan
formation and the middle and lower Huronian, and schistosity and autoclastic rocks seem to
inilicate that this has been a plane of considerable faulting. Also the fragmental phases of the
Vulcan formation point to a preceding erosion interval, though evidence of great differential
erosion is lacking, and so far as these fragmental j)hases are autoclastic this evidence is weakened.
The general significance of the unconformity will be discussed in the chapter on general
correlation (pp. 597 et seq.).
Relations between AficMgamme {"Ilanbury") slate and the middle or lower Ilurnnian. — The
Michigamme slate rests upon the Vulcan formation conformably. Where the Vulcan formation
is absent the slat.e rests directly upon the Randville dolomite or the middle Huronian quartzite.
This relation is seen for a short distance in the central part of the southern belt of the slate,
and it is the relation which prevails generally in the two northern belts, for in this part of the
district the Vulcan formation occurs only locally. Contacts are not exposed.
At Iron Hill, in sec. 32, T. 40 N., R. 29 W., there is at the top of the middle Huronian
quartzite a conglomerate the debris of which is derived largely from that formation and which
may be a basal conglomerate of the Michigamme slate. At other locahties also there is a
breccia which appears to be a brecciated conglomerate.
The absence of the Vulcan formation east of Quinnesec could be explamed by the hypothesis
that the Michigamme slate had been thrust over the lower formation of the upper Huronian
so as to rest upon the Randville dolomite. The absence of the Vulcan formation between the
Michigamme slate and the middle Huronian quartzite at Iron Hill might be similarly explained
only here it would be necessary to believe that folding accompanied the faulting, else the manner
in which the slate wraps around the east end of the central belt of dolomite would l)e inexplicable.
There are undoubted mmor faults in the Menominee district, but most of them are extremelv
small, that in the Pewabic mine being the only one of sufficient magnitude to be mapped on the
mine plats. It is clear that certain crushed zones of the Traders and Brier members near
Vulcan are due to faulting. Further, there have been marked movements of accommodation
between the different formations at their contacts, which might be called faidting. AJl these
faults are local, and in none of them is the displacement of the faidted beds known to be great.
On the other hand the existence of overthrust folds grading into faults, so clearly indicated
in the distribution of the southern belt of the iron-bearing formation, is the best of evidence
of the extensive relative displacement of the upper and knver Huronian beds, a displacement
brought about largely by the close deformation of the lower beds of the upj)er Huronian as they
are crowded against the competent beds of the lower Huronian. It is entirely likel}' that more
faults are present than ha^-e been found, and there is little difficulty in believing that overthrust
faulting may have been a large factor in this deformation and may have thrust the slate locally
over the iron-bearing formation against the dolomite, or, on the farther side of the fold, may
have carried the dolomite up and over the slate.
Although faultmg is doubtless a factor m determming the distribution of the Vulcan
formation, from present evidence faulting is inadequate to explain the uniform absence of the
formation through such long belts of country where it might be supposed to exist.
The presence of doubtfid conglomerates at the base of the Michigamme slate where it rests
upon the middle or lower Huronian suggests unconformable overlap of the Michigamme. It is
possible also that the iron-bearing formation was originally deposited in discontinuous lenses,
with intervening slate, resting directly upon the lower or middle Huronian.
344 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
IGNEOUS BOCKS IN THE ALGONKIAN.
QtrlNNESEC SCHIST.
The Quinnesec schist lies along and adjacent to Menominee River, from the sharp north-
ward bend in the river due west of Iron ih)untiiin to the eastern limit of the area mapped.
The river is bordered by scliistose greenstones and various rocks that cut them, except at a few
places where rock ledges are absent. The Quinnesec Falls and Sturgeon Falls are on some of the
harder ledges of these rocks. South of the river, in Wisconsin, at a distance ranging from half
a mile to - miles, is the north side of a large area of granite. This granite sends apoi)hyses
into the greenstone schists, and consequently is of later age. For the most part the schists are
arranged in belts striking a little north of west at Sturgeon Falls, but trending more toward
the north as they pass up the river, until at the Upper Quimiesec Falls they strike about north-
west. Their schistosity is, as a rule, nearly vertical.
The Quinnesec schist is composed of schists of two classes, basic and acidic. The ba.sic
scliists comprise greenstone schists, chlorite schists, and amphibolites. Elhpsoidal and other
extrusive structures are common. The acidic schists comprise gneissoid granites, porphyritic
cneisses, felsite schists, and sericite schists. Associated with the schists are both basic and
acidic massive rocks. The basic rocks include gabbro, diorites, diabases, and basalts. The
acidic rocks include granite and granite porphyry. The greenstones and the basic scliists are
closely allied, as are also the granites and granite porphyries and the acidic schists.
A microscopic study " of the basic scliists shows that they comprise schistose gabbros,
diorites, diabases, basalts, and basalt tuffs. Where the schistosity is not strongly developed
the original structures of the massive eruptive rocks may be recognized, so that there is no
doubt that the greenstone schists, chlorite schists, and amphibohtes are merely altered phases
of the greenstones. The amphibolites are limited in their distribution to the neighborhood of
the sreat granite mass of Wisconsin, and nearlv all of them occur directlv in contact with this
granite. It is clear that the schistosity in these rocks has developed in connection with the
folding of the district and that the extreme phase of metamorphism represented by the amphib-
olites has taken place in connection with the intrusion of the great batholithic granite of
Wisconsin.
The acidic schists are limited principally to the neighborhood of Horserace Rapids and Big
Quinnesec. The sericite schists in many places grade into the felsite schists. They occur mainly
in bands parallel to the trend of the bands of basic schists. The coarser-grained gneissoid
granites and porphyritic rocks clearly represent metamorphosed phases of the great granite
mass to the south in Wisconsin, but some of the felsite schists and the sericite schists may
represent acidic lavas contemporaneous with the basic igneous rocks.
From the field relations and microscopic study of the Quinnesec schist and associated
rocks it must be concluded that all are of igneous origin. Many of tlieni were lava flows; some
were beds of volcanic ashes, or tuffs; others were dikes cutting through the bedded deposits.
A few small dikes cutting the scliists are normal diabases and basalts, identical in com-
position with some of the rocks cutting through the iron-bearing beds.
Within the Menominee district itself there are no contacts between the Quinnesec schist
and the Huronian sediments. A sand plane covers the area of contact. Exposures and explora-
tions indicate that upper Huronian slates are the rocks nearest to the Quinnesec scliist, and
these have not been found nearer than 200 3'ards.
In earlier reports on the Menominee district * the Quimiesec schist was provisionally cor-
related witli the Koowatin scries of the Archean because of its relatively high degree of meta-
niori)hisni and similarity to certain schists in the kiio\\Ti ^Vrchean on the north siile of the district.
The apparent absence of the Vulcan formation at the base of the upper Huronian was exjilained
by overlap, and later it was suggested that faulting might play a part. During the simimer
o Williams, G. U.. The treenstone scliist areas of the Menominee and Marquette regions of Michigan ; Bull. V. S. Geol. Survey No. 02. 1S90.
i> Mon. r. S. Geol. Survey, vol. -Id, 1904; Menominee special folio (No. 02), Geol. .Vtlas U. S., U. S. Geol. Survey, 1900.
MENOMINEE IKON DISTRICT. 345
of 1910 the Wisconsin Geological and Natural History Survey, under direction of W. O. Hotch-
kiss, mapped what is prol^al^ly the continuation of the Quinnesec schist to the northwest along
the south side of the Florence district of Wisconsin, and determined the green schists there
clearly to overlie the upper Huronian sediments to the north of them and to be locally inter-
l)cdded with upper Huronian sediments. However, it is yet possible that the Quinnesec schist
in the Menommee district may be really pre-Huronian, for continuous exposures do not connect
the two areas, and green schists of this type are known in at least tlu'ee different horizons in the
pre-Cambrian of Michigan.
GREEN SCHISTS AT FOTJRFOOT FALLS.
Another area of igneous rocks of Algonkian age occupies about .5 square miles, extending
from about the center of sec. 15, T. 40 N., R. 30 W., to Menominee River. The Fourfoot
Falls are on the south side of the area, and the old village of Badwater at its northern edge.
The rocks of this area are mainly schists, but they are cut by altered diabase dikes.
The schists are gi-ayish-grecn fine-grained greenstones, in which schistosity is nearly every-
where noticeable. In some places the rocks are well-defined schists, with a cleavage almost
as perfect as that in slates; in other places they are nearly massive. On many of the exposures
a typical ellipsoidal structure is discernible. The ellipsoids vary in diameter from a few inches
to 3 or 4 feet. There is no striking contrast between the material of the ellipsoids and that
of the matrix between them. In both the rock is a dense grayish greenstone without any
distinct textural features. The matrix is usually slightly more schistose than the ellipsoids,
but otherwise it is like them. At the Fourfoot Falls the exposures consist of alternating beds
of massive, schistose, and slaty rocks, striking about N. 80° W., almost at right angles to the
course of the river, and yet these rocks are mostly schistose on the Wisconsin side of the river
and mostly massive on the Michigan side.
The microscopic examination of tliin sections shows that some of the rocks in the western
area are altered dolerites still preserving their characteristic textures. Others are so much
changed that their original nature can only be inferred fi-om the character of their alteration
products. Some of these appear to have been fine-grained dolerites and others perhaps glassy
basalts. A few others were originally basic tuffs. All are now aggregates of actinolite, uralite,
zoisite, epidote, quartz, and other well-known decomposition products of basic igneous rocks.
TMs area of schists, at the time the Menominee monograph was written, was supposed to
be equivalent in age with the Quinnesec schist of Menominee River, then regarded as
Archean. Later work by G. W. Corey and C. F. Bowen " has shown that they are really intru-
sive and extrusive in the upper Huronian or in part contemporaneous flows. That these igneous
rocks antedate the chief folding of the district is shown by the fact that they are so extensively
transformed to schists.
The only other large masses of igneous rocks which have been found m the Huronian
series are in the Micliigamme slate and the Sturgeon quartzite. In each of these formations
in a number of places are found greenstones, locally in the form of dikes, in other places as
siUs, and in others as interbedded eruptives. In the Michigamme slate the form of the igneous
bodies is known in but few places. In then- present condition they are much-altered diabases
or basalts comj^osed of uralitized augite or hornblende, decomposed plagioclase, and a consider-
able quantity of quartz that is probably entirely secondary.
PALEOZOIC ROCKS.
Small areas of Paleozoic sediments in horizontal sheets lie on the eroded edges of the Huro-
nian and Archean rocks. The Paleozoic rocks are represented by two formations, one of
Cambrian age and the other of Cambro-Ordovician age. The lower formation consists mainly
of red sandstone, and is known as the Lake Superior sandstone. The upper formation is a
porous arenaceous limestone, identified by Rominger as corresponding to the Chazy and "Cal-
ciferous" of the Eastern States, and designated the Hermansville limestone. The sandstones
a Unpublished field notes, 1905.
346 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTPERIOR REGION.
and limestones were at on(> time spread continuously over the entire Menominee district. To
the east of the district tiicy still cover all the older rocks. West of Waucedah, however, they
have been generally eroded from the valleys, leaving remnants as isolated patches on the tops
of the higher hills.
CAMBRIAN SYSTEM.
LAKE SUPERIOR SANDSTOITE.
Lithohr/i/. — The Lake Sii])erior sandstone consists of a lower portion partly cemented
by an iron oxide and conscciucntly red in color and an upper portion in wliich the cement is
partly calcareous and the color white. The total thickness is estimated by Rominger" at 300
feet. Several ])ieces of the sandstone have been obtained, wliich according to reliable authority
came from the ledge tlu-ougli wliich one of the Pewabic mine shafts, near Iron Mountain, was
driven. These contain numerous fragments of fossils, some of which were determined by Wal-
cott as " the heads of small trilobites, probably Dicelhcephalus misa; also fragments of a large
species of DiceUocephalus." According to Walcott, "These indicate tlie Upper Cambrian
horizon of the Mississijipi Valley section."
Relations to adjacent formations. — The relations of the sandstone to the underlying forma-
tions are everywhere practically tiie same. Whetlier on the tops of hills or in tlie depressions
between the hills, the horizontal beds of the younger rock rest unconformably upon tlie up-
turned and truncated layers of the older series. Moreover, the basal layers of the sandstone
contain a great deal of material derived from the immediately subjacent formations. Where the
underlying rocks belong to the Vulcan formation the basal member of the sandstone is an ore
and jasper conglomerate, composed of huge rounded bowlders of ore and large sharp-edged
fragments of ferrughious quartzose slate and jasper in a matrix consisting of quartzose sand,
numerous small pebbles and fragments of ore-formation materials, quartzite, and a few pebbles
of white ((uartz, of granite, or of other Archean rocks. In a few places their proportion of
ferruginous material is so great that they have been utilized as sources of iron ore.
CAMBRO-ORDOVICIAN.
HERMANSVILLE LIMESTONE.
The general character of the Hermansville limestone "is that of a coarse-; rained sandstone,
with abundant calcareous cement, in alternation with pure dolomite or sometimes oolitic beds."
The limestone may be seen near the top of the hill east of Iron Mountain, on the bluff northeast
of Norway, and at several places on the hills north of Waucedah. Its maximum thickness,
according to Rominger,'' is about 100 feet, but this maximum is rarely reached in the Menominee
district. Only a few fossils have been reported from it. Romin^-er states tliat it has yielded
a few fragments of molluscan shells. To these may now be adiled a broken OrtJioceras. a frag-
ment resembling a piece of a fh/rtoceras, a gastropod, am.! several otlier fra.Lrmeiitary forms
found in the top layer on the ])\iiiY northeast of Norway.
THE IRON ORES OF THE MENOMINEE DISTRICT.
By the authors and W. J. Mead.
DISTBIBUTION, STRUCTURE, AMU RELATIONS.
The ore deposits of the Menominee district occur in the two iron-bearing members of the
Vidcan formation known as the Traders iron-bearing member and the Curry iron-bearing
member. These are separated by the Brier slate member. Much the larger tonnage of ore
mined lias come from the Traders member, lying south of the southern dolomite belt. The
ores may occur at any horizon within these members, but otlier comlitions being equal they
are more likely to occur at low and high horizons than at middle horizons. A number of the
o liomlDger, Carl, Paleozoic rocks: Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, pt. 3, 187», p. '<1. » Idem, p. 71.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOQRAPH Lll PL. XXVIl
6 -5
i&im
No 3 SHIFT
Si
0 Ih leittl
/ Un
i V,
s /
\*^
'Ta/c-schist , ^
VERTICAL NORTH-SOUTH CROSS SECTIONS THROUGH THE NORWAY-ARAGON AREA, MENOMINEE DISTRICT, MICH,, ILLUSTRATING GEOLOGIC STRUCTURE.
After Bayley. See page 347
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT.
347
large ore bodies extend entirely across the members in which they occur. The deposits of large
size rest upon relatively impervious formations, which are in such positions as to constitute
pitching troughs. A pitching trough may be made (a) by the Randville dolomite or middle
Huronian, underlying the Traders iron-bearing member of the Vulcan formation; (b) by a slate
constituting the lower part of the Traders member; or (c) by the Brier slate member, between
the Traders and Curry iron-bearing members. (See PI. XXVII; figs. 40, 47, 48.) The dolomite
or quartzite formation is especially likely to furnish an impervious basement where its upper
portion has been transformed into a talc schist, as a consequence of folding and shearing between
the formations.
These pitching troughs are minor folds of the drag type. In tJie western and central
parts of the south belt of Vulcan formation carrying the principal ore bodies there is consider-
► No3 SHAFT
■ No 2 SHAFT
Figure 40.— Horizontal spotion of the Aragon mine at the first level, Menominee tlistrict, Michifran. Scale, 1 inch = 250 feet. After Bayley.
able uniformity of pitch to the west, resulting from the westward and upward shearing of the
southerly beds with reference to the northerly beds. At the east end of tiie district some of the
pitches are eastward. Any portion of the iron-bearing member may have yielded to the shear-
ing by a series of tliese drag folds. The ore bodies following the axial lines may thus be in a
series of parallel shoots, one pitcliing below the other along the strike. This is well illustrated
in the Chapin and Millie mines.
In these folds the strike of the shoots at the surface is at a slight angle from the strike of
the bedding, as shown in 'figure 49 (p. 3.50).
The wall rocks of the ore l)0tlies may be unaltered phases of the iron-bearing member,
especially the ferruginous cherts, or any of the rocks forming the impervious basement. The
be<ls in the ore botly, when followed along the strike and dip, usually pass into ferruginous
cherts or iron carbonates.
348
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
At first sight tlic forms of the ore deposits might be thought to be exceedingly irregular, but
when the above relations are understood they appear to have orderly forms. A main mass of
ore is likely to be at the bottom of a trough, but from this main mass a considerable belt of ore
may extend along tlio limbs of the trough to a much higher altitude than in the center of the
trough. Many of the ore bodies in cross sections thus constitute a U, which is very tliick at the
bottom, the center of the U bcmg occupied by the iron-bearing rocks wliich have not been trans-
formed to ore. If the fold is very much compressed the limbs of the U may unite at the center
and produce a pitching Ions, with its lower extremity rounded to conform with the shape of the
trough of the fold and its upper end, where not at the surface, more or less irregular in shape
in consecjuence of the gradual passage of the ore into jaspihte. The deposits at Chajjui are good
illustrations of such lenses.
N3^.
:--^5«?
400 feet
Randville formation)
trail'" •"<! I"arhg j
Figure 47.— Horizontal section of ttie Aragon mine at the eighth level, Menominee district, Michigan. After Bayley.
Though all the largest iron-ore bodies are confined to the pitchmg troughs with impervious
basements of dolomite, quartzite, or talc scliist, smaller ore deposits occur at contacts between
the different members and at places within the iron-bearing members where severe brecciation
has occurred. The deposits formed at contacts are usually much more irregular than those
formed in troughs. In general, they are broad and thua sheetlike masses with irregular bomnla-
ries on all sides. Their lower surfaces are the more even and the better defined, but even these '
are umlulatory. For the most part they remain near the contact of the iron-bearing formation
with the imderlying rocks, but at many places they leave tliis contact, rise into the iron-bearing
beds, and thus become separateil from the base of the formation by considerable thicknesses of
jasjiilitos. The upper surfaces are much more uneven than tlie lower ones. Not only are they
umlulatory to a greater degree, but ore projections extend upward uito the overlying jaspilites
and, ramifying through these in an extremely irregular manner, in places coalesce and inch)se
lenses of jaspihte and then continue their separate courses until the contact with the overlying
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT.
349
/
■55/
JiGUEE 48.— Vertical north-south cross section through Burnt shaft, West Vulcan mine, Menominee district, Michigan. After Bayley.
350
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
slates is reached, where they again coalesce, spread out, and form a second sheetHke body,
which, however, is usually much thinner and much less extensive than the deposit at the lower
contact. Deposits of this kind occur principally in tiie straight portions of tiic member, where
folding is absent and where the dip is not overturned. A portion of tlie deposits of the West
Vulcan and Verona mines ar(^ of this class.
Tiie Menominee ores rest f(>r the most part on the middle slopes of tlie ridges formed by the
Kandville dolomite and middle Huronian quartzite, but they also go beneath the lower ground.
.... .... V Ol
ii
"%
WMM&MmifimMif^:-iM'Mi0!yMi
"-%.
:'■;.' •.W-.'.';.;.;.V;.'-:.;'.V'
'y\yy:'\:'-'-'^]{-yrr\:\'-:y^-yy^\y\^y'-y'.\-'^-^
fk
fm^i^!Miy^^M$M0-^M^^^
,-—~—~ — ^^
. -___^ — ^^— ^_— ^_
Figure 49. — Sketch to show pitch of a drag fold in a monodinal succession. The ores in some places follow the axis of the fold. It will be noted that:
the strike of the ore body, measured at th? surface, is at a slight angle to the strike of the bedding, notwithstanding the fact that the ore body
follows throughout a single bed or set of beds.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE ORES.
The averages of the cargo analyses of ore shipped from the district in 1907 and 1909, with
the range for each constituent, are as foUows:
Average chemical composition of ores from cargo analyses for 1907 and 1909, with range for each constituent.
Average.
Range.
1907.
1909.
1907.
1909.
Moisture (loss on drying at 212° F.)
5.92
6.67
2.16 to 7.92
1.07 to 8.77
Analysis of ore dried at 212° F:
50.70
.0.38
1.54
21.15
.17
.28
2.12
.013
1.92
52.23
.074
L41
Hi. 77
.19
1.31
2.70
.012
2.52
39.00 to 59. 90
.010 to .084
.80 to 2.73
5.70 to41.M
.03 to .47
.35 to 1.70
.14 to 3.71
.005 to .022
.60 to 3.50
3S. 46 to 01. 20
Phosphorus
008 to 620
.86 to 2.28
Silica
4 ''t to "iQ 14
.07 to 1.27
Lime
63 to 2 90
.70 to 3.9S
Sulphur
. 006 to . 041
Loss on ignition ,
90 to 4 30
Comparison of analyses of all the ores of the district shows tlie rich ores to consist principally
of slightly hydrated hematite, witli additional varymg amoimts of magnetite, silica, alumina,
lime, magnesia, carbon dioxide, phosphorus pentoxide, and water. Most of the ores contairt
also manganese, potash, and soda, and a few of them titanium and carbon.
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT.
Following are three complete analyses of high-grade Menominee ore:
Complete analyses of Menominee ores."
351
1.
■ 2.
3.
Fe '
60.64
65.63
o7 03
FP.O3 ■
85.44
.47
L.'iS
.76
1.26
3.02
.004
.060
4.M
.15
.002
91.51
1.97
1.53
80 15
FeO
1.10
AI^Gi
3 88
MiijOj
CaO
..■i6
.21
.57
.03
3.03
.021
.099
.38
.27
.17
MgO
.48
K.O
2 29
Na.O
.30
SiC).
10.72
.074
P^Oi
s
146
CO,
.08
H-OCabove 100°)
2.75
56
99. 842
99.980
99.950
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 40, 1904, p. 383.
1. Chapin ore: analysis furnished by E. E. Brewster.
2. "Soft specular" Quinnesec ore.
3. "Soft specular blue ore" from Cornell ir.ine.
AVERAGE IRON CONTENT OF THE IRON-BEARING FORMATION.
An average of 1,681 analyses, representing 5,287 feet of drilling from the district away
from the available ores, gives 37.93 per cent of iron. Ores of this class are so much more
abundant than the "available" ores that the average of the entire formation, including ores,
is not much higher than this figure. The composition of the lean, unaltered jaspers where
not altered to ore' has not been averaged, but presumably the iron content is about 25 per cent,
as in other districts.
MINERAL COMPOSITION OF THE ORES.
The approximate mineral composition of the average ores of the Menominee district,
calculated from the preceding average chemical analysis, follows:
Approximate mineral composition of average Menominee ore, calculattrl from average cnemical analysis.
Hematite (including a small amount of magnetite) .
Limonite
Quartz
Kaolin
Serpentine and talc
Dolomite
Miscellaneous
100.00
The richer ores are usually bluish black, porous, fine-grained aggregates of crystallized
hematite. These rich ores grade into leaner phases containing more or less hydrated hematite,
with varying amounts of quartz, soijientine, talc, clay, and carbonates of calcium and magne-
sium, rangmg in color from the bluish black of the richer ores through various shades of red
and brown to yellow.
All the minerals occurring as constituents of the ores are found also as visible masses either
hi veins cuttmg the ore bodies or in ^'ngs or pores within them. Dolomite, calcite, and pyi-ite
occur locally in excellent crystals, and serpentine as large, white, almost pure masses. Talc
also occurs in thick scams of almost ideal jiurity, and chalcopyrite in small crystals associated
with pyrite. The carbonates and sulphiiles are found near watercourses and the silicates
mainly in the lower portions of the ore bodies.
352 GEOLOGY OF TPIE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Tlie ores when exposed to the action of the atmosphere become coated with a white
elllorescence, consistiiifi of a mixture of the sulphates of sodium, magnesium, and calcium, in
wliicli tire sodium sulpluito is greatly in excess.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ORES.
The lean ores differ vcmt little in appearance from the jaspilites, of which they are essentially
a part. They are banded, brecciated, and m places specular. The brecciated ores may consist
of jas})er fragments in a mass of hematite, or of hematite fragments in a mass of dolomite, or
fragments of ore, jasper, and slate m a mass consisting largely of slate debris that has been
strongly ferruginized.
IRON MINERALS
SILICA PORE SPACE
Figure 50.— Triangular diagram representing the volume composition of the various grades ot ore mined in the Menominee. Crystal Falls, and
neighboring districts in 1907. M, Menominee; CF, Crj'stal Falls; IR, Iron River; F, Florence; FM, Felch Mountain: C. Calumet. The pore
space fur each grade was calculated from the average moisture content, and hence represents the true pore space only when the moisture in a
particular grade was at a maximum. The true porosity of the various grades of ore would therefore be slightly greater than is shown. For
description of the method of platting on triangular diagram, see page 189.
The average texture of the Menominee ores is shown by the following table of screening
tests, made by the Oliver Iron Mming Companj' on six typical grades of ore representing a
total of 1,033,491 tons. Each test was made on a sample of 100 pounds, representative of the
entire 3-ear's output of that grade. A comparison of the textures of the ores of the several ranges
is shown in figure 72 (p. 481).
MENOMINEE IRON DISTRICT. 353
Textures of Menominee ores as shown by screening tests.
Per cent.
Held on ^-inch sieve 39. 44
^-inch sieve 30. 63
No. 20 sieve 11.56
No. 40 sieve 4.73
No. 60 sieve - 1-31
No. 80 sieve !■ I'J
No. 100 sieve 1-35
Passed through No. 100 sieve 9-67
The mineral density of the ores varies with the iron content. The average mineral density
of the ores calculated from the average of the cargo analyses for 1907, by computing the mineral
composition and properly combining the densities of the component minerals, is 4.28.
To test the accuracy of this method of computing mineral density, pycnometer determina-
tions were made on the average pulp samples '^ of Ajax antl Cluipin grade for 1907, with the
following results:
Mineral density of Menominee ores.
Determined by means of pycnometer.
Calculated from chemical analysis ....
Ajax grade.
4.21
4.34
Chapin grade.
4.601
4.607
The porosity of the ores ranges from 1 per cent or less in some of the lean jaspilite ores to
as much as 45 per cent in some of the richer hematites and especially in the limonitic ores.
The cubic contents of the ores vary greatly. The bulk of the ores, however, lies between
9 and 14 cubic feet to the ton.
Volume comparisons of the Menominee ores with each other and with ores of the Crystal
Falls, Iron River, Florence, Felch Mountain, and Calumet districts are made in figure 50.
IRON ORE AT BASE OF CAMBRIAN SANDSTONE.
The basal conglomerate of the Cambrian sandstone where it rests upon tlie iron-bearing .
formation contains abundant fragments of that formation. In a few places the proportion of
ferruginous material is so great that the conglomerates have been utilized as sources of iron ore.
A deposit of this kind was formerly worked by the operators of the Quinnesec inine, and another
has recently been worked by the Pewabic company. The latter was reached by the open pit
in the SE. J sec. 32, T. 40 N., R. 30 W., known as the Pewabic pit. Although at this place
the rock immediately underlying is dolomite, the amount of iron ore in the conglomerate is so
great that the company operating the pit felt warranted in erecting concentrating works on the
property for the separation of the ore from the sandstone.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE MENOMINEE ORES.
Structural conditions. — The ore deposits in the Menominee district rest upon steeply dipping
impervious basements of sheared dolomite or slate. The hanging wall may be of slate or iron-
bearing formation. The greater dimensions of the deposits are parallel to the bedding. Fold-
ing, of the type illustrated in figure 12 (p. 123), develops minor corrugations in the foot wall and
other rocks, with pitches parallel to the main strike of the formation. In tliese pitching folds
the ore deposits are hkely'to be larger and better concentrated than elsewhere. It is obvious that
the flow of water concentrating the ore has been principally parallel to the bedding, that it has
been especially strong where the bedding has been folded into pitching troughs, and that the
fracturing of the brittle iron-bearing rocks during tliis folding has aided greatly in the circu-
lation of waters in pitcliing troughs and elsewhere in the formation. The ores are associated
with marked topographic relief, affording abundant head for the waters. The larger number
o Kindly furnished by Mr. J. H. Hitchens, chief chemist for the Oliver Iron Mining Company at Iron Mountain.
47517°— VOL 52—11 ^23
354 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
of them are on the upper or middle slopes of the rock elevations, though some of them extend
})eneath tiio depressions.
Mincralofjical and chemical changes.— The iron-bearing formation was originallj' iron car-
bonate and greenalite interbedded with more or less slate and containing much detrital ferric
oxide at the base of the formation. The alteration of the chcrtj' iron carbonate and greenalite
to ore has been acconij)lisiic(l in the general manner already described as typical for the region —
(1) oxidation and hydration of the iron minerals in place, (2) leadiing of silica, and (3) intro-
duction of secondary iron oxide and iron carbonate from other parts of the formation. These
changes may start simultaneously, but 1 is usually far advanced or complete before 2 and 3
are conspicuous. The early products of alteration therefore are ferruginous cherts — that is,
rocks in which the iron is oxidized and hydrated and the silica not removed. The later removal
of silica is necessary to produce the ore.
SEaUENCE OF ORE CONCENTKATION IN THE MENOMINEE DISTRICT.
The first considerable concentration of ore in the district which is now minetl did not take
place until the erosion period following upper Huronian time. As indicated in the general
discussion, the process was well advanced before Cambrian time and has practically continued
to the present.
CHAPTER XIV. NORTH-CENTRAL WISCONSIN AND OUTLYING PRE-
CAMBRIAN AREAS OF CENTRAL WISCONSIN.
NORTHERN WISCONSIN IN GENERAL.
The only work done by the United States Geological Survey in northern Wisconsin is in
the Florence district; the southern extension of the Menominee district, in the northeastern
part of the State ; the Penokee range, in the northern part of the State ; and the Keweenawan
belt crossing the northwest corner of the State. These districts are described on other pages.
Other areas in northern Wisconsin have been examined in reconnaissance work by members
of the Survey, but no detailed mapping has been done. Outside of the areas named, the chs-
tribution of the rocks of northern Wisconsin shown on the general map (PI. I) is taken from
the Wisconsin Geological Survey reports, particularly that of Weidman '^ for north-central Wis-
consin. The recent map of Douglas County made by Grant '' for the Wisconsin Geological
Survey is used in place of the earlier map by Irving.
Granites and gneisses, with subordinate amounts of sedimentary rocks and basic igneous
rocks, constitute a highland in the northern part of the State, roughly oval in its outline, extend-
ing from the vicinity of Grand Rapids and Stevens Point, on the south, to the State boundary,
on the north, and from Barron County eastward to the Micliigan boundary. The area is bounded
on the northwest by the Keweenawan rocks described in Chapter XV, and on the north and
northeast by the Huronian formations of Michigan; on the southeast, south, and southwest it
is overlapped on the lower ground by Paleozoic sediments which outcrop in wide belts sur-
rounding the pre-Cambrian core. The predominating granites and gneisses were called Lauren-
tian and the sedimentary rocks Huronian by the geologists of the first Wisconsin Geological
Survey (1882). The highlands as a whole have been often referred to as a "Laurentian liigh-
land." The drift cover is heavy, exposures are few, except in certain localities, antl much of it
has been difficult of access even to the present time. The only published detailed work is that
of Weidman, ° which is summarized below.
WAUSAU DISTRICT.
LOCATION, AREA, AND GENERAL GEOLOGIC SUCCESSION.
The pre-Cambrian area in north-central Wisconsin mapped and described by Weidman
includes the counties of Marathon, Portage, Wood, Clark, Tajdor, Lincoln, and adjacent parts
of Ru.sk, Price, and Langlade, containing in all about 7,200 square miles. From 90 to 95 per
cent of the pre-Cambrian rocks of this area are of igneous origin.
The following table is compiled from the succession worked out by Weidman. The rocks
he classes doubtfully as lower and middle Huronian we classify doubtfully as middle and upper
Huronian, respectively. The names of the formations are those used by Weidman.
Quaternary system:
"Wisconsin drift.
Pleistocene series.
Third drift.
Second drift.
First drift.
Alluvial deposits (contemporaneous with drift).
a Weidman, Samuel, The geology of north-central Wisconsin; Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16, 1907.
t Grant, U. S., Preliminary report on the copper-bearing rocks of Douglas County, Wisconsin; Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
No. 6, 2d ed., 1901.
355
356 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Unconformity.
■ Cambrian system Upper Cambrian or Potsdam sandstone.
Unconformity.
Algonkian system :
Huronian series:
fNorth Mound oonglomerate and quartzite.
Upper Huronian? ("Middle Huronian?" or
"Upper sedimentary group," of Weid-
man). (Stratit;raphic relations unknown;
formations presumably contemporaneous.)
Arpiu conslomorate and quartzite.
Mosince confjlomerate.
Marshall Hill conglomerate.
Marathon conglomerate.
Unconformity.
, . f3. Granite and nepheline syenite series.
Intrusive igneous rocks. (In order of in-L, ^ , , i ,• •,
^ " ^ ^2. Gabbro and diorite senes.
trusion)
Middle Huronian? ("Lower Huronian?" or
"Lower sedimentary group," of Weid-
manV (Stratigrapliic relation.^ unknown.)
1. Rhyolite series.
Rib Hill quartzite.
Powers Bluff quartzite.
Hamburg .slate.
Wausau graywacke.
Unconformity.
Archean system (?) Gneiss and schists.
ARCHEAN (?) SYSTEM.
The basal rocks, believed to be the oldest aud to belong to the Archean system, consist
of a complex mixture of rocks, such as contorted and crumpled granite gneiss, diorite gneiss,
granite scliist, syenite scliist, and diorite schist. The gneisses and scliists form a belt which
can be fairly well outlined, extending from the vicinity of Stevens Point and Grand Rapids
in a northwesterly chrection through Neillsville. The rocks are closely intermingled with one
another, and have been subjected to extensive folding and metamorphism. The zone in which
they are largely comprised lies between areas of later igneous and sedimentary rock to the north
and to the south, and hence appears to have the position of the arch of an anticline. These
basal rocks are intruded by later formations of rhyolite, diorite, and granite. Sedimentary
rocks have not been found in contact with the basal rocks.
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HURONIAN SERIES.
MIDDLE HUKONL\N (?).
The rocks next succeeding are of sedimentary origin, and consist of quartzite, slate, and
graywacke. They include the quartzite of Rib Hill and ^^cinity, the quartzite of Powers
Bluff and in the vicinity of Junction and Rudolph, a wide belt of slate in northwestern Mara-
thon County, and graywackes in the vicinity of Wausau. These rocks are almost entirely of
fragmental origin, and only rarely contain phases of carbonaceous, calcareous, and ferruginous
deposits. The basement upon which these sediments were deposited can not be defuiitely
determined, for all the observed contacts with associated rocks are those either of later intru-
sive igneous rocks or of later overlving conglomerate. The quartzites are throughout extremely
metamorphosed and to all appearances completely recrystallized. The slates and gra3'wackes
do not reveal as much metamorpliism as the quartzite, although in places rocks presumably
belonging with the slate have been changed to schists bearing staurolite, cordierite, and garnet.
These sedimentary rocks appear to bear the relation of great fragmentary masses intersected
and surrounded by later igneous intrusive rocks. They constitute the lowest and oldest sedi-
mentary rocks of this area.
NORTH-CENTRAL WISCONSIN AND OUTLYING PRE-CAMBRIAN AREAS. 357
ROCKS INTRUSIVE IN MIDDLE IIURONIAN (?) AND ARCIIEAN ( ?).
The next younger rocks are of igneous origin. They form about 75 per cent of the rocks
of the area, and in the order of their intrusion arc (1) rhyoHte; (2) a basic scries of diorite,
gabbro, and peridotite; (3) a series consisting of granite, quartz syenite, nephehne syenite,
and related rocks. Of these the last-named series is the most abundant, the granite alone
forming about 50 per cent of the surface rocks of the area. The three series are intrusive in
the Archean(?) of the area and also in the middle Huronian (?). They are in turn overlain
by later Algonkian sediments. The period involved in the intrusion of the igneous formations
must have been a very long one, and evidently constituted an important portion of the pre-
Cambrian era, for the granite and syenite series itself represents a complex magma of varymg
though related rocks, intruded at different dates. In the stratigraphy of this area, therefore,
these igneous intrusives play an important part and occupy a well-defined position between
the upper Huronian ( ?) and the middle Huronian ( ?) sediments.
UPPER HURONIAN (?).
The latest Algonkian rocks of the area consist mainly of conglomerate and quartzite over-
l3dng all the other rocks above referred to. North of Wausau, at Arpin, and at North Mound
they are represented by conglomerate and quartzite, and at Marathon City and Mosinee by
conglomerate.
CAMBRIAN SYSTEM.
In the north-central area the pre-Cambrian was worn down to base-level by subaerial
erosion before the much later Upper Cambrian or Potsdam sandstone '^ was dejjosited upon it.*
BARRON, RUSK, AND SAWYER COUNTIES.
In Barron, Rusk, and Sawyer counties the pre-Cambrian rocks are largely of igneous
origin. The most prominent sedimentary areas are the prominent ridge of quartzite at the
junction of Flambeau and Chippewa rivers and the numerous quartzite I'idges along the divide
of Cliippewa and Red Cedar rivers. In general, these quartzites dip westward, away from the
crystalline and schistose area, with strongly marked eastward escarpments overlooking the
nearly flat plain of older rocks. Although no final conclusion has been reached concerning the
relative age of these quartzites, Weidman is of the opinion that there are here represented at
least two and probably three series. The quartzite in the small outcrops along the railroad
about .3 miles east of Weyerhauser is greatly metamorphosed and is correlated with the Rib
Hill quartzite at Wausau. The prominent ridge of quartzite at the junction of the Flambeau
and the Chippewa is correlated with the upper sedimentary series in north-central Wisconsin
and the Baraboo quartzite. The prominent ridges of quartzite in eastern Barron County and
in the adjacent parts of Rusk and Sawyer counties are but slightly metamorphosed, the bedding
is in general nearly flat-lying, and the formation has a much younger aspect than the other two
quartzite formations in the region and may be Keweenawan.
o The term Potsdam sandstone is here used in a quotational sense from the Wisconsin Geological Survey.
<> Weidman, Samuel, The pre-Potsdam peneplain of the pre-Cambrian of northKjentral Wisconsin: Jour. Geologj', vol. 11, 1903, pp. 289-313.
358
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
VICINITY OF LAKE WOOD.
Quartzites arc known in the, vicinity of Lakewood, indicating the presence of Huronian
rocks in tliis district. Practically all that is known concerning the distrii)iition and structure
of these quartzites is shown on the accompanying sketch (fig. 51). They stand up as monad-
R. 16 E.
R.I7 E.
20
21
22
?3
24
19
20
P P
21
22
23
24
19
20
21
22
29
28"
27
26
, 25
30
29 26
27
26
25
29
b\°*'S'?b
?27
32 Gr
33
34
3S
36
31
32
%
^V
35
*
Or
32
33
34
/^
Gr*Gr
4
.8
^B
2
1
6
5
4
3
Z
1
6
5
4
3
8P*
9
10
M
12
7
8
9
10
II
12
7
6
9
10
17
16
15
14
13
18
17
16
15
14
13
IS
17
16
15
FlGtTRE 51.— Sketch map showing occurrence of quartzites of Huronian age in Tps. 33 and 34 N., Rs. 15, 16, and 17 E., Wisconsin. B. Quartzite
and quartzite breccia; C, conglomerate; D, diabase; Gr, granite; P, porphyry.
nocks above the surrounding drift-covered surface. Associated with them are granite, por-
phyry, and diabase in isolated exposures.
NECEDAH, NORTH BLUFF, AND BLACK RIVER AREAS.
At Necedah, in Juneau County (see figs. 52 and 53), and at North Bluflf, in Wood Count}'-,
are quartzite exposures projecting tlirough the Cambrian.
R. 3 E.
R. 4- E.
DRILL HOLE
O
Quartz dionte at 229'
14
23
D/f/LL HOLE
o
Granite and diorite^
at 202' 13
Necedah,
NIV ft
24 "
DR/LL HOLE
O
Quartz dionte
at 192'
1/2
zMiles
FiatniE 52.— Sketch map shownng occurrence of Huronian quartzite near Necedah, Wis.
Drilling at Necedah has cUsclosed the presence of granite, probably intrusive into quartzite.
The quartzite is highly metamorphosed and is lithologically similar to the Huronian rocks.
BAEABOO IRON DISTRICT.
359
111 the Black. River vallej', north of Black River Falls, are exposures of gneiss, granite,
hornblende schist, magnesian schist, and ferruginous quartz schist, mapjied l)_y Irving ° in 1873
and by Hancock * in 1901. The relation of these rocks to one another is not defmitely Ivnown.
All are pre-Cambrian.
BARABOO IRON DISTRICT.'^
LOCATION AND GENERAL GEOLOGIC SUCCESSION.
The Baraboo district constitutes an outher in the Paleozoic rocks and centers in tlie town
of Baraboo, in the south-central part of Wisconsin. (See fig. 53.) It is south of the area
R.4-E;. R.SE.
PALEOZOIC
R.6E.
R.7E. R,8E. R9E.. RIOE.
HURONIAN SERIES fMIDDLE ?)
RUE, R.IZ.E. R.I3E. R.I4-E.
LAURENTIAN? SERIES
(This also covers
part of areas
mapped as Huronian)
<%'
Seeiey slate, Freedom
dolomite, including
iron-bearing member
Granite and
metarhyolite
ZO MILES
FiGUEE 63.— Sketch map showing Baraljoo, Fox lliver valley, Necedah, Waushara, and Waterloo pre-Cambrian areas o( south-central Wisconsin.
shown on the general Lake Superior map (PI. I), but a brief description is here given because
the district is producing iron ore and is similar lithologically and structurally to the iron-
producing area of the Lake Superior region.
a Irving, R. D., The Necedah quartzite: Geology ol Wisconsin, vol. 2, 1873-1877, pp. 523-524.
6 Hancoclv, E. T., The geology of the area at Blacli River Falls, Wisconsin: Unpul)lished thesis, Geol. Dept. Univ. Wisconsin, 1901.
cSee Weidman, Samuel, The Baraboo iron-bearing district of Wisconsin: Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 13, 1904.
360
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The area is elliptical in outline, extending 20 miles east and west and ranging in width
from 2 to 12 miles. It is essentially a quartzite syncline.
The succession is as follows:
Quaternary system Pleistocene deposits.
{Trenton limestone. <"
St. Peter sandstone.
" Lower Magnesian " limestone.
Cambrian system Potsdam sandstone."
Unconformity.
Algonkian system:
Hurouian series:
Upper Huronian (?).. .Quartzite.
Unconformity.
fGranite, intrusive into lower formations.
Freedom dolomite, mainly dolomite, including an iron-bearing
member in its lower part.
Seeley slate, 500 to 800 feet.
Baraboo quartzite, 3,000 to 5,000 feet.
Middle Huronian (?).
Unconformity.
Archean system :
I.aurentian (?) series Granites, rhyolites, tuffs, etc.
The principal structural feature is an east-west synclinorium of middle Huronian ( ?) rocks
resting on the -Archean basement, carrying in the trough unconformable upper Huronian ( ?)
c[uartzite and Paleozoic sediments, and surrounded by Paleozoic sediments. The edges of the
basin, composed of hard, resisting middle Huronian (?) c[uartzite, form ridges known as the
north and south Baraboo ranges, standing 700 to 800 feet above the surrounding country and
the intervening valley. (See fig. 54.)
10000
500O
4.00O
-3000
-2000
4-1000
0 SealeveZ
1000
HOOO
-3000
..+000
Lsooo
4 Miles
Figure 54. — Generalized cross section extending north and south at-ross the Baraboo district. 1, Potsdam sandstone; 2-4, Htironian
(2, Freedom dolomite; 3, Seeley slate; 4, Baraboo quartzite); 5, rhyolite and granite (Laurentian?). Alter Weidman.
ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
LATJBENTIAN SEKIES.
The Laurentian roclis outcrop in isolated areas bordering the outside of the Baraboo
syncline. The surface volcanic phases are best exposed west of the Lower Narrows of Baraboo
River on tlie northeast .side and near the town of Alloa on the southeast side. Thov are
similar to tlie surface volcanic rocks of the Fox River valley. Granitic rocks appear in isolated
areas on the south side of the belt. Some of these rocks, previously considered as Archean,
have recently been found to be intrusive into the rhiddle Huronian ( ?) .
o Used la a quotational sense from the Wisconsin Geological Survey.
BAEABOO IRON DISTRICT. 361
ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
HTJKONIAN SERIES.
MIDDLE HURONIAN (?).
BAEABOO QUARTZITE.
The Baraboo quartzite is a massive though well-bedded formation, considerably jointed,
faulted, and brecciated, but showing no cleavage as e\ddence of rock flowage except along certain
thin slate beds in which readjustment has been concentrated during folding. Cross-bedding,
ripple marks, and thin conglomeratic layers are numerous. In the north range the beds stand
nearly vertical; in the south range they dip gently toward the south. Isolated exposures in
the north-central side of the trough are thought to be brought up by minor folds. There is,
however, a possibihty that faulting has been a factor.
SEELEY SLATE.
The Baraboo c{uartzite passes up into the Seeley slate, a soft, gray, finely banded chlorite
slate, known principally by drilling along the south hmb of the syncline. The cleavage is some-
what steeper than the bedding, corresponding to the normal development of cleavage in such
relation to a syncline.
FREEDOM DOLOUITE.
The Freedom formation consists principally of dolomite but contains near its base slate,
chert, and iron ore and all gradational phases between these kinds of rocks. The lowest mem-
ber is a ferruginous kaolinitic slate, well exposed in the Illinois mine, representing a fernigi-
nated gradation phase of the Seeley slate into the Freedom dolomite. The next overlymg
member of the Freedom dolomite is banded ferruginous chert and iron ore, known principally
along the south hmb of the syncline, but occurring also in the east end of the basin and in
several explored areas on the north side. Interbedded mth tlie chert, especially near its upper
parts, are calcite, siderite, kaolin, and dolomitic slates. Minor folding and brecciation are
conspicuous in this member, part of it at least resulting from secondary chemical changes,
causing slump in the formation.
The cherty dolomite making up the upper member and by far the greatest part of the
Freedom formation is a fine-grained banded rock similar in some of its phases to the ferruginous
cherts but usually softer. It grades locally into ferrodolomite.
UPPER HURONIAN (?).
Upper Huronian (?) cjuartzite has been found only by drilhng in the deeper parts of the
east end of the trough. Only recently has it been discriminated from the Cambrian sandstone
above it or the middle Huronian ( ?) quartzite below. When the drill penetrated tlie Cambrian
sandstone and conglomerate and reached quartzite below it was usually assumed that this was
-the middle Huronian ( ?) quartzite and the drilling was stopped. When tliis quartzite was pen-
etrated by the drill, however, it was found to overlap the edges of all the middle Huronian (?)
rocks and to have conglomerate at its base. The thickness of tliis quartzite, as shown by
the drilling, is not more than 50 feet. Its attitude is not definitely known, but from the way
it lies over all the earlier formations it is beUeved to be not much tilted. No exposures of the
formation are recognized as sucli. It seems to remain simply as a residual patch in the deeper
part of the trough where protected from erosion. However, some of the quartzite on the
so-called Baraboo ridges may be upper Huronian ( ?) rather than middle Huronian ( ?) . Still
more recently red slate has been found above tliis upper Huronian (?) quartzite. .
PALEOZOIC SEDIMENTS.
The Paleozoic rocks consist, from the base upward, of the Potsdam sandstone, the "Lower
Magnesian" Umestone, the St. Peter sandstone, and the Trenton hmestone. The Potsdam
sandstone occurs on the lower flanks of the quartzite ranges and in the valley bottom; the
362 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
succeeding formations lie at higher elevations. The Paleozoic beds rest horizontally uj)on the
more or less folded Huronian beds, a conspicuous basal conglomerate marking the great uncon-
formit}'.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS.
Pleistocene deposits cover about the northeast half uf tlie district. (See Chapter ^Yl,
pp. 427-459.)
THE IRON ORES OF THE BARABOO DISTRICT.
l»y the authors and W. J. Mead.
OCCURRENCE.
The iron-bearing beds, which are a part of tiic Freedom dolomite, have been productive
thus far on the south limb of the basin. They dip northward at angles ranging from .50° to
70°. The foot wall is Seeley slate; the hanging wall is cherty dolomite, with small amounts
of slate and iron carbonate. The iron-bearing member itself consists of ferruginous chert,
iron carbonate, ferruginous slate, and iron ore. There is a gradation from this member into
both hanging and foot walls. It is thin, for the most part not more than 200 feet thick, and
the productive ore bodies are still thinner, 20 to 30 feet. The ores stand as lenses arranged
end for end or overlapping paraUel to the layers of chert. These have been found by drilling
at a maximum depth of 1,500 feet, but mining operations do not yet go beyond 500 feet. Their
lateral extent has been found to be at least 2,000 feet. Deep drilhng down the dip discloses
minor folds. Also to the south of the main outcrop the ore may be repeated by an additional
minor fold.
The iron-bearing member has been found also on the north side of the basin, where it
stands almost vertical or dips south, but so far it is nonproductive here.
Only one mine has operated to the present time, the Illinois mine (see fig. 55), although
three other shafts are now being sunk.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.
The following is a complete analysis of the Baraboo ore : "
Chemical composition of the Baraboo ore.
Ferric oxide (FejOs) 88. 62
Ferrous oxide (FeO) 92
Alumina (AUOj) 68
Manganese monoxide (MnO) 26.5
Silica (SiO,) K06
Lime (CaO) 12
Magnesia (MgO) None.
Titanium oxide (TiOo) None.
Sulphur (S) Trace.
Chromium oxide (CrjOj) None.
Water at 110° 21
Water at red heat 55
Carbon in carbonaceous matter 04
Carbon dioxide (CO,) 51
Phosphoric oxide (P2O5) 004
99. 979
Total iron 62. 75
o Weldman, Samuel, The Baraboo iron-bearing district of Wisconsin: Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 13, 1904. p. 12S.
BARABOO IRON DISTRICT. 363
A commercial analysis showing the average grade shijDped for 1007 is as follows:
Partial analysis showing average grade of ore shipped for 1907.
[Sample dried at 212° F.]
Fe 53.47
P 043
StO, .' 18. 51
Mn 22
Moisture U. 36
An average of 1,517 analyses, representing 4,814 feet of driUing in the iron-bearing member
away from the available ores, gives 36.40 per cent of iron. This includes both the lean jaspers
and the partly altered jaspers but not the ores. Because of their great mass compared with
the ores, they represent nearly the general average composition of the entire iron-bearing member.
MINERALOGICAL CHARACTEB.o
The Baraboo iron ore is mainly red hematite with a small amount of hydrated hematite.
There are also small amounts of iron carbonate in isomoiphous combination with varying
amounts of manganese, calcium, and magnesium carbonate. Next to hematite in abundance
is quartz or chert, which occurs either in bands in the ore or somewhat uniformly distributed
throughout the ore. Chlorite, mica, and kaolin also occur in the ore in vaiying but usually
small quantities.
The vein material in the ore is to a very large extent quartz, to a small extent calcite or
ferrodolomite, and to a very small extent iron sulphide and iron oxide. The quartz of the
veins has the usual interlocking granitic texture of vein quartz and is generally very much
coarser than the finelj^ granular cherty quartz in the ore and in the banded ferruginous chert.
The carbonate of the veins is also much coarser than the carbonate of the beds.
PHYSICAL CHARACTER. 6
The common phases of the Baraboo ore are soft granular ore, hard banded ore, and hard
Uue ore. The soft granular phases generally carry the highest percentage of iron, the banded
and hard blue ore containing usually a larger amount of silica. The ore in its prevailing aspects
is more like the hard varieties of ore of the old ranges of the Lake Superior district than the
soft, hydrated hematite ore of the Mesabi district.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION.
Structural conditions. — The circulation of waters in this district is controlled by the imper-
vious foot-wall slate on the one hand and the impervious dolomite on the other. The zone
between is a narrow one. The shaft of the Illinois mine (see fig. 55) goes down in the foot-wall
slate. In walking from the shaft in the drift toward the ore body one notes the conspicuous
dryness of the slate as contrasted with the extreme wetness of the drift where it passes through
the iron-bearing member. Water is circulating at the present time through the iron-bearing
member with great rapidity. The point of escape of the waters is not known; neither is it
possible to tell what the depth of circulation has been. Ores have been found to a depth of
1,500 feet, but the deep ores were not so rich as those at the surface. The Baraboo quartzite
ridges control the major circulation. The ores, however, are a considerable distance from the
foot wall of these ridges on a comparatively flat area, although the hanging walls are usually
in still lower ground.
Original character of the iron-hearing member. — The iron-bearing member was at -least in
larger part iron carbonate, as shown by the residual iron carbonate into which the member
grades below, but it may have consisted also in part of banded ferric hydrate and chert.
o Weidman, Samuel, op. cit., pp. 127-128. l> Idem, p. 127.
364
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Mineralogical and chemical changes. — The alterations of tlie iron carbonate have been
accomplished through the usual processes as described on earlier pages. All stages of altera-
tion arc to be observed and all criteria for determining these alterations are known to be
present. Weidman believes that the iron ore of the Baraboo district was originally a deposit
of ferric hydrate, or limonite, formed in comparatively stagnant shallow water under condi-
tions similar to those existing where bog or lake ores are being formed to-day, and that J^hrough
subsequent changes long after the iron was deposited as limonite, while tiic member was
deeply buried below the surface and subjected to heat and pressure, the original limonite
became to a large extent dehydrated and changed to hematite, and that therefore its structural
relations are not j)rimarily con-
trolled by the necessity of later
water circulation.
Though this district is widely
separated from the principal Lake
Superior ranges and may have
the different origiji outlined by
Weidman, its close similarity in
lithology and stnicture to the
Lake Superior ranges is believed
to be a priori evidence of simi-
larity in origin. The theorj* of
origin of the Lake Sujierior ores
adequately explains the origin of
the Baraboo ores and is combated
by no facts yet shown in the
Baraboo district. Moreover, recent deep drilling has shown an abundance of original iron
carbonate. Certainly development work has not been nearly sufficient in the Baraboo dis-
trict to warrant any conclusions at variance with those for the older Lake Superior ranges
at the present time.
Shale bed -V^
^V//////////Ai
-— ^ -— •— /'//Second /eve/
FlOUBE 55.— Vertical section of liilnoismine. (After Weidman, Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and
Nat. Hist. Survey No. 13, 1904, fig. 1, pi. 15.)
WATERLOO QUARTZITE AREA.
The mapping of the Waterloo quartzite at Portland, Hubbleton, Mudlake, and Lake
Mills (see fig. 53) by Buell ° and subsequently by J. H. Warner * shows that the outcrops of
this quartzite have a distribution and stiiicture such as to suggest that they represent part
of a great eastward-pitching syncline of quartzite. The quartzite is lithologically almost
identical with the Baraboo quartzite and its synclinal axis has the same direction as the axis
of the Baraboo syncUne. There is little reason to doubt that the Baraboo and Waterloo
quartzites are of the same age. If this is the case, one would expect to find slate and ferru-
ginous dolomite formations within the Waterloo quartzite syncline, as in the Baraboo syn-
cline, but drilling has thus far failed to locate them. Like the Baraboo quartzite, the Waterloo
quartzite is referred to the Huronian, and its similarity with the middle Huronian is emphasized.
Well drilling outside of the Waterloo syncline shows the presence of a granite basement.
a Buell, I. M., Geology of tlie Waterloo quartzite area: Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci., vol. 9, 1893. pp. 255-274.
i Warner, J. n., The Waterloo quartzite area of Wisconsin: Unpublished bachelor's thesis, Dept. Geology Univ. Wisconsin, 1904.
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION. 365
FOX RIVER VALLEY."
Several small isolated outcrops of pre-Cambrian crystalline rocks project through the
PAleozoic sediments in the Fox River valley at Berhn, Utley, Waushara, Marquette, Montello,
Observatory Hill, Marcellon, and Endeavor. (See fig. 53, p. 359.) The rocks are mainly acidic
extrusives; metarhyolites, showing gradation mto rocks of more deep-seated origin; rhyolite
gneiss; quartz rhyolite; and granite, all of them cut by basic dikes. The characteristic fea-
ture in the metarhyolites is the presence of abundant and well-jircserved surface volcanic
textures, such as fluxion, perlitic, spherulitic, and brecciated textures. The hthologic simi-
larities of the rocks, the presence of the surface textures, and their composition, as shown
by analysis, indicate clearly their consangumity with one another and with certain of the
igneous rocks on the north and south sides of the Baraboo range. In the Baraboo district
these rocks have been found by Weidman '' to lie unconformably below the sedimentary rocks,
and hence the volcanic rocks of Fox River may be supposed to be pre-Huronian.
a Hobbs, W. H., and Leith, C. K.. The pre-Cambrian volcanic rocks of the Fox Eiver valley, Wisconsin: Bull. Univ. Wisconsin No. 158 (Sci.
ser., vol. 3, No. G), 1907. pp- 247-27S.
b Weidman, Samuel, The Baraboo iron-bearing district of Wisconsin: Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 13, 1904, p. 21.
CHAPTER XV. THE KEWEENAW AN SERIES."
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS.
The Keweenawan is tlie upper series of the Aljjonkian sj^'stem in the Lake Superior region.
Its most cliaraeteristic feature is that its abunchint effusive rocks are as widespread as the series
itself. Indeed, they probal)Iy compose from a third to a lialf of the series. The Keweenawan
contrasts with the Huronlan in that in tlie latter scries tiie efTusive rocks are largely concen-
trated m a number of localities, although in these areas they may he of veiy great thickness.
In short, the Keweenawan was a period of regional volcanic activity and the Huronian was a
period of local volcanism. It results from these facts that in the earliest studies of the Kewee-
nawan the igneous rocks were noted and described. In the Huronian, on the other hand, the
sediments were more conspicuous and were especially studied in the early years, and it is only
recently that the extent and magnitude of the igneous rocks of that period have been appreciatctl.
In the following discussion of tlie Keweenawan no attempt will ho made to give detailed
petrographic descriptions. The most salient petrographic features will be mentioned, and a
review of the petrography and chemistry, with reference to nomenclature, \\'ill be presented by
A. N. Wmchell. In order to give a somewliat more definite impression of the series, the more
important districts will be briefly described.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Keweenawan rocks border the major part of the shore of the western half of Lake
Superior, occupy islands in the eastern half, and are found on the mainland at the extreme east
end of tlie lake. They extend to a maximum distance of 120 miles northwest of Lake Superior.
To the southwest Keweenawan rocks have been penetrated by drills at Stillwater, and still
farther southwest, at St. Paul and vicinity, certain red sandstones have been drilled which
may be Keweenawan. On the south side of the lake they occur mainly witliin 12 miles of the
shore. Sandstones, Keweenawan or Cambrian, are known also at the east end of the Felch
Mountain trough. This distribution shows that tliis series once occupied the greater portion
of the Lake Superior basin and from it extended for varying distances. In much of the basin
at present the Keweenawan rocks are overlain by Cambrian sandstone.
The total present exposed area of the Keweenawan rocks is approximateh" 15,000 square
miles. To obtain tlie original, area there must be added a very large but unknown portion of
the Lake Superior basin. Further, there must be added the numerous masses, large and small,
of the rocks of Keweenawan age intrusive into the Huronian and Archean of the Lake Superior
region. Irving '' estimated the area of the Keweenawan, aside from the rocks intrusive in
older series, at 41,000 square miles.
It is thus evident that Lake Superior in Keweenawan time was an aiea of regional activity
extending east and west for more than 400 miles and north and south for scarcely a less distance.
SUCCESSION.
A broad study of the several Keweenawan districts leads to the conclusion that a threefold
division of the seiies as a whole may be made, beginning at tlie bottom, as ft)lIows: (1) Lower
Keweenawan, comprising conglomerates, sandstones, dolomitic sandstones, shales, and marls;
a For further detailed description of the Keweenawan rocks of the Lake Superior region see Mon. C S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, and references
there ^iven. In the descriptions of the. several districts accounts of local features of the Keweenawan are given.
^ Irving, K. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, voL 5, 1SS3, p. 27.
366
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 367
(2) middle Keweenawan, comprising extrusive and intrusive igneous rocks with Important
amounts of interstratified sandstones and conglomerates and subordinate amounts of shale;
and (3) upper Keweenawan, comprising conglomerates, sandstones, and shales, represented
in northern Wisconsin and Michigan. In only one district, nortliern Wisconsin and Michigan,
is the full succession found. In the area of Black and Nipigon bays and Lake Nipigon, in
Minnesota, and at the east end of Lake Superior the lower and middle Keweenawan appear.
On Isle Koyal the upper and middle Keweenawan occur, and on Michipicoten Island only the
middle Keweenawan is found.
BLACK AND NIPIGON BAYS AND LAKE NIPIGON.
LOWER KEWEENAWAN.
The rocks belonging to the lower Keweenawan occupy the peninsida between Thunder
and Black bays and the neck between Nipigon and Black bays from the northwest corner of
Nipigon Bay to a point 20 miles west of Black Sturgeon River. They consist of quartzose
sandstones, dolomitic sandstones, and red marls. According to Logan ** their thickness is from
800 to 900 feet. Bell, however, estimated it from 1,.300 to 1 ,400 feet. Bell's section' is as follows :
Section of lower Keweenawan rocks near Black and Nipigon bays.
Feet.
Alternating red and white dolomitic sandstone, with a red conglomerate layer at the bottom,
occurring on Wood's location, Thunder Cape"^ 40
Light-gray dolomitic sandstone, with occasional red layers and spots and patches of the same
color. These sandstones occur along the southwest side of Thunder Bay and on Wood's loca-
tion d 200
Red sandstones and shales, interstratified with white or light-gray sandstone beds, frequently
exhibiting ripple-marked surfaces, and also with conglomerate layers composed of pebbles and
' * bowlders of coarse red jasper in a matrix of white, red, or greenish sand 500
Compact light-reddish limestones (some of them fit for burning into quicklime), interstratified
with shales and sandstones of the same color , 80
Indvu'ated red and yellowish-gray marl, usually containing a large proportion of the carbonates of
lime and magnesia. « This di\dsion runs through the center of the peninsula between Thunder
Bay and Black Bay, and may, in this region, have a thickness of 350 feet or more 350
Red and white sandstones, with conglomerate layers, the red sandstones being often very argil-
laceous and variegated with green spots and streaks, and having many of their surfaces ripple-
marked. These rocks are found all along the northwest side of Black Bay as far up as the
township of McTa\-ish 200
There are no lavas interstratified with the Black Bay and Nipigon Bay rocks, but at
numerous places they are cut by diabase dikes similar to those which cut the upper Huronian
(Animikie group) .
The lower Keweenawan occurs on the shore of the southwestern part of Lake Nipigon in
relatively small areas and irdand from Lake Nipigon in a large area of which Black Sturgeon
Lake is the center. This division is called the Nipigon formation by Wilson./^ It comprises
basal conglomerates which rest unconformably upon the Archean, sandstones, shales, and
dolomites — green, ferruginous, and white. For this area Wilson gives the succession, in
descending order, as follows:
Section of lower Keweenaioan rods in Nipigon basin.
Feet.
Dolomites and dolomitic shales 400
Grits and sandstones 150
Basal conglomerate 4-6
o Logan, W. E., Report of progress to lS(i3, Geol. Survey Canada, 18fj3, p. 70.
t Bell, Robert. Report of progress from 1800 to 18C9, Geol. Survey Canada, 1870, p. 319.
c Macfarlane finds the red sandstone to contain 12.5 per cent of carbonate of lime and 11 percent of carbonate of magnesia.
d Macfarlane found them to contain 13 percent ofcarl)onate of lime and 12 percent of carbonate of magnesia.
c The amount varying, in the specimens analyzed by Macfarlane, from 21 to 34.5 per cent of the carbonate of lime, and from 7.5 to 13.5 per cent
of the carbonate of magnesia.
/Wilson, A. W. G., Geology of the Nipigon basin, Ontario: Canada Dcpt. Mines, Geol. Survey Branch, Memoir No. 1, 1910, pp. 69-70.
368 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Nothing is said by Wilson as to the dips of the lower Keweenawan rocks, but it is apparent
from liis descriptions that they are relatively flat.
The district al)ovo described is of interest as being the only district in wliich the accu-
mulation of detrital material before the outbreak of the Keweenawan lavas covers any
considerable area. It is believed that these rocks really represent the first deposits of the
transcressin"' Keweenawan sea and antedate the igneous epoch of the Keweenawan altogether.
The absence of material derived from the Keweenawan lavas led some of the earlier geologists —
for instance, Macfarlane" and Hunt'' — to question whether these rocks really belong with 'the
Keweenawan. These lower Keweenawan rocks pass under the middle Keweenawan diabases
and amygdaloids, which form the southern half of the peninsula southwest of Black Bay. On
the north they are overlain, according to Bell,'^ by columnar trap.
MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN.
Aside from the area occupied by the lower Keweenawan sediments the remainder of the
Black and Nipigon bays and Lake Nipigon district is occupied by the middle Keweenawan,
consistmg of basic igneous rocks with subordinate amounts of interstratified clastic material.
These igneous rocks are partly flows and partty intrusions.
BLACK AND NIPIGON BAYS AND ADJACENT ISLANDS.
Black and Nipigon bays are noted for their conspicuous and interesting topography, wliicli
has originated in essentially the same way as the topography of Thunder Bay. In both locahties
the sediments are interleaved with great sills of diabase, sedimentary and igneous rocks ahke
being in nearly horizontal attitude.
The rocks of the middle Keweenawan constitute the shores of the outer parts of Black and
Nipigon bays and of the adjacent islands, including those from the size of St. Ignace to small
rocks, and from the shore they extend considerable but varying distances inland. Over large
areas these rocks present f acies which are similar to those of the Beaver Bay area of the Mimiesota
coast, described on pages 371-374. Locally they show spheroidal weathering, as at Fluor Island.
They are cut by red rock, which metamorphoses the diabase to an orthoclase gabbro, just as on
the Minnesota coast. The sediments are subordinate. In places the diabase clearly intrudes
the sediments and locally the latter are somewhat modified at the contact, the color changmg
toward the intrusive rock from red to gray or white.
For the most part the dip of the rocks of the areas of Black and Nipigon bays is very gentle,
here m one direction and there in another, but near the shore of Lake Superior there is the usual
gentle and persistent lakeward slant of 8° to 10°. Locally, however, the dips go up to 20° or 30°,
to 60° or 70°, or even to the vertical. These steep dips occur at places where the diabases
intrude the sediments or the amygdaloids, and thus disturb their normal attitudes.
LAKE NIPIGON.
The middle Keweenawan igneous rocks extend tliroughout the Lake Nipigon district, except
in the areas of the lower Keweenawan already mentioned. They occupy about half of the
shore line on the east and north sides of Lake Nipigon, where they mainly constitute the pen-
insulas and headlands. North of the lake they extend 40 miles or more to the Hudson Bay
divide. They occupy all the hundreds of islands of the lake, varying in size from those which
are several miles long and wide to those which are mere rocks.
The midtlle Keweenawan of Lake Nipigon consists mainly of great masses of diabase,
which Wilson says are in sheets and dikes, and with these are later acidic dikes. English Bay
is an area of granite porphyry, which Wilson places with the Archean, but which, it may be
suggested from the association, may. belong with the Keweenawan.
0 Macfarlane, Thomas, Canadian Naturalist, new ser., vol. 3, 180S, p. 2S2; vol. 4, 1809, p. 38.
b Hunt, T. S., Special report on the trap dikes anil Azaie rocks of southern Pennsylvania, pt. 1: Kept. E, Second Geol. Survey rennsyl\-ania,
1878, p. 241.
c Bell, Robert, Report of progress from 180C to 1809, Geol. Survey Canada, 1870, p. 338.
THE KEWEENAW AN SERIES. 369
There has been much discussion as to whether the great diabase sheets are intrusive or
extrusive rocks. Wilson" summarizes the evidence in favor of extrusiqn as follows:
1. The very widespread occurrence of unconformities between diabase sheets and underlying formations.
2. The occurrence of bowlders of granite and gneiss and schist in diabase, the latter resting on similar rocks in situ
in localities where there is direct evidence that before the advent of the trap the underlying rocks were buried beneath
the sediments similar to those now present, near by, under the same diabase sheet.
3. The occurrence of old soils in situ at the bases and on the sides of sedimentary ridges, the whole being covered
in places with a diabase cap.
4. The nicety of the adjustment by which the diabase sheets have fitted themselves to the underlying topography.
MTiile the upper surfaces of the residuals of the capping sheets are everywhere fairly uniform in height, the base of the
sheet has adju.sted itself to a topography where the relief was at times as much as 300 feet.
5. The mechanical problem which arises in explaining the numerous unconformities, especially those on the
embossed Archean surface, by the theory of intrusion vanishes completely on the theory of surface erosion prior to
surface extrusion.
6. The features characteristic of the upper surface of sills — the occurrence of overlying beds or fragments thereof,
aphanitic structures, included fragments of an old cover in the upper parts of sheets — are not found.
7. The medium to coarse texture, which characterizes the sheets, would be found at the base of thick surface
flows as well as in sills, being dependent not on the nature and thickness of the cover so much as on the rate of cooling.
8. A glassy matrix, amygdaloidal or porous structure, basaltic texture, flow structure, and associated volcanics
would not be characteristic features of the under parts of surface flows, and the ujiper parts of these sheets are unques-
tionably removed, without a single exception.
In favor of intrusive sills are:
1. Entire absence of any of those features that are usually associated with the upper parts of a surface flow — glassy
matrix; amygdaloidal, porous, or basaltic texture; flow structure; associated volcanic rocks, either lava breccias or
pyroclastic rocks.
2. A medium to coarse crystalline texture, usually indicative of a slow rate of cooling, such as would normally
take place only at some considerable distance below the surface.
From the evidence presented Wilson draws the following conclusions : *
It seems that we have no data relative to the actual character of the upper surface of the trap "caps;" such negative
evidence as is available is equally applicable to both theories. With regard to the texture of the residual basal por-
tions of the sheets there are no recorded differences which would indicate that it belonged to a flow and not to a sheet.
On the other hand, numerous unconformities exist, and the diabases are known to rest successively upon Laurentian,
Keewatin, Huronian (possibly middle, certainly lower, and Animikie), and Keweenawan (lower, middle, and upper
beds), and these unconformities are very widely distributed. Owing to the mechanical difficulties involved by any
other interpretation it seems to the writer that the balance of evidence available is distinctly in favor of considering
these capping sheets as the basal residuals of a once very extensive flow or series of flows of a very fluid diabase over
the well-dissected topography of a previous cycle.
It may be suggested in this case, as in so many others, that the diabases of the Keweenawan
sheets are not exclusively intrusive or extrusive.
It has heretofore been the prevailmg view that the cappmg diabases, so characteristic of
the step topography of the Animikie area and of the Keweenawan area on the northwest side
of Lake Superior, are sills down to which erosion has worked. Wilson has held that some are
not sills but are flows upon an old erosion surface. His conclusion Ihat the flows are as late as
Cretaceous rests on very slender evidence — that is, on the identification of the plane on which
the flows rest as of post-Cretaceous age. He presents no evidence to show that the flows are
not Keweenawan or some of them even Animilde. The view that they are Keweenawan is
favored by their petrologic, areal, and structural relations with known Keweenawan rocks of
the northwest and south sides of the Lake Superior basm.
RELATIONS OF THE KEWEENAWAN OF BLACK AND NIPIGON BAYS TO OTHER
ROCKS.
As the sediments of Black and Nipigon bays are at the bottom of the Keweenawan series
their relations to the underl_yTJig rocks are important. At the very base of the series occur
conglomerates the debris of wMch is derived from the underlying Huronian series, including the
a Wilson, A. W. G., Geology of the Nipigon basin, Ontario: Canada Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Branch, Memoir No. 1, 1910, pp. 94-95.
' Idem, pp. 95-96.
47517°— VOL 52—11 24
370 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Animikie group, showing that there is an unconformity between the normal sediments making
uf) the earhpst Kcweenavvan and the latest Iluronian. One of the best exposures of this uncon-
formity is at a cliff adjacent to Surprise Lake, a short distance from Silver Islet village. Here
in actual contact with the slates of the Animikie group is a conglomerate about G feet in thickness,
which is largely composed of angular fragments of slates from the Animikie with, however,
detritus from granites, mica schists, vein quartz, etc., but no fragments of any of the Keweena-
wan lavas. The contact between the conglomerate and slate is knifelike in shar[)ness. Locally
the matrix of the conglomerate is limestone. The conglomerate grades upward into wliite
qiiartzite interstratified with slaty layers, over wliich are bands of red and white dolomite.
Here, as is common between the Keweenawan and Animikie, the discordance is shown mainly
by the conglomerate and not by an important difference in dip, but in a number of places the
conglomerate cuts across the slate bands in a minor way.
Other very satisfactory contacts between the Keweenawan and Animikie are those in a cut
of the Canadian Pacific Railway about a mile west of Loon Lake and at the south shore of
Deception Lake. Here the conglomerate of the Keweenawan resting upon the Animikie con-
tains bowlders as much as 2 feet in diameter. At the railway cut the phenomena are very
similar to those at Surprise Lake, but at Deception Lake the Animikie rocks have been some-
what sharply folded, and the conglomerate rests horizontally upon the truncated beds of the
Animikie.
The debris of the Keweenawan conglomerate at these localities includes the slates from the
underlying Animikie, material from the iron-bearing formation of the Animikie, and granites
and scliists from the lower Huronian or Archean. At all these localities the completely indu-
rated pebbles of the Animikie as compared with the much less cemented Keweenawan are
notable. Tliis, combined \vith actual discordance, would indicate an important time break
between the two series, an inference wMch is confirmed by the relations of the two in the
Penokee-Gogebic district.
According to Wilson, in the Nipigon basin diabases rest unconformably on the Keweena-
wan, Animikie, and Archean rocks.
NORTHERN MINNESOTA.
THE KEWEENAWAN AREA.
The Keweenawan rocks of northern Minnesota he in a great crescent-shaped area, opening
lakeward, extending from Fond du Lac, on St. Louis River, at the southwest to Grand Portage
Bay at the northeast. Both the lower and the middle Keweenawan are represented.
This area of Keweenawan rocks is undoubtedly the largest continuous area of the series.
It covers approximately 4,500 square miles. "^ As yet tliis great region has been too insufficiently
studied to jiermit a satisfactory account of it, and many points remain doubtful. Granites and
diabases intrusive into the Animikie of the Cuyuna and St. Louis River areas are probably of
Keweenawan age.
LOWER KEWEENAWAN.
The lower Keweenawan is represented by the Puckwunge conglomerate. AccorcUng to
Winchell,'' tliis conglomerate is seen in various locahties at tlic top of the .Vnimikie group from
Grand Portage Island, in Grand Portage Bay, as far west as the middle of R. 3 E., a distance of
about 20 miles. He states that the basal rock of the Keweenawan is a conglomerate which
grades up into sandstone. The thiclcness of the conglomerate is not determined, but tliis forma-
tion is just what one would expect between the Animikie group and the Keweenawan series
from the character of the lower division of the Keweenawan about Black and Nipigon bays.
Winchell "^ also states that a (|uartzite conglomerate which he regards as Puckwunge occurs in
a Elftman, A. H., The geology of the Keweenawan area in northeastern Minnesota: Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1898, p. 175.
6 Winchell, N. H., The geology of Minnesota, vol. 4, 1899, pp. 307, 327, 517-519; vol. 5, 1900, pp. 50-52.
c Idem, vol. 4, p. 13.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
371
sec. 1, T. 48 N., R. 16 W., on St. Louis River, and that its total tliickness is nearly 100 feet.
There are, however, rare pebhles of Keweenawan rocks in this formation. It is conformable
below the younger beds. The pebbles of this conglomerate are largely derived from the quartz
veins of the slates of the underlying Animikie, and the conglomerate therefore lies unconform-
ably on the Animikie. The formation grades into a white sandstone and then into a shale.
Thus the sechmentary formation is seen at the base of the Minnesota Keweenawan at both the
northeast and the southwest ends. In the intervening stretch of more than 100 miles the exact
base of the sedimentary or volcanic Keweenawan has not been traced because of lack of expo-
sures and because of the intrusion of the great Duluth gabbro to be mentioned later.
MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN.
The middle Keweenawan rocks comprise all of the Keweenawan in Minnesota except the
relatively insignificant Puckwunge conglomerate. They represent the volcanic epoch of the
Keweenawan. Broadly the middle Keweenawan of northeastern Minnesota may be divided
into two great divisions — (1) the effusive rocks and the associated sediments and (2) the intru-
sive rocks.
EFFUSIVE BOCKS.
The effusive rocks occupy the larger part of the Minnesota coast and extend for varying
distances inland. The Minnesota coast line, looked at as a whole, presents a flat crescentic
shape, with the concavity
toward the lake. The same is
true of the courses of the effu-
sive rocks, but the crescents
formed by them have a smaller
radius and hence intersect that
formed by the coast line, trend-
ing more to the north at the
Duluth end and more to the
east at the Grand Portage end.
In following the coast, then,
from Duluth to Grand Portage,
we ascend in geologic horizon to a point near Two Islands River and descend from a point
just east of Temperance River to Grand Portage.
These rocks consist dominantly of a well-stratified series of volcanic flows having a
gentle lakeward dip, winch commonly is from 8° to 10° but locally is as low as 5° or 6° and
as high as 25° or 30°, or rarely even 45° or 60°. Numerous minor bowings and corrugations
may be seen in the incUvidual layers and sets of layers, which may be followed for some miles.
These may be seen rising into arches, locally of short span, and sinking into synclines to reappear
as anticlines a short distance away.
The lavas are diabases which are commonly amygdaloidal. Many of these amygdaloids
are very scoriaceous. These rocks are softer than the intrusive rocks and are especially Ukely
to constitute the" bays. There are subordinate masses of intermediate rocks, wliich usually
have not been separated on the maps from the basic flows. At one place, east of Kadonces
Bay, tins intermediate rock has a peculiar spheroidal weathering similar to that of the Ely green-
stone, a structure which has been regarded as evidence of subaqueous extrusion.
Associated with the basic lavas are masses of acidic lavas represented by quartz jaor-
phyrites and felsites. One of the more notable locahties for these rocks is the great Palisades
(fig. 56).
The conglomerates and sandstones interstratified with the lavas are subordinate in amount.
In the lower part of the series they are either absent altogether or are represented by very thin
beds. In the upper part of the series, especially the portion to which Irving "■ has given the
Water line
Figure 56. — Section on south cliff of Great Palisades, Minnesota coast. (After Irving.) a,
Amygdaloid; 6, columnar diabase-porphyrite; c, mingled amygdaloid and detrital matter;
d, quartz porphyry.
" Irving, B. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 323-329.
372 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
name Temperance River group, the sandstone and conglomerate beds are numerous. Most of
these beds are only a few inches to a few feet in thickness, but there are some beds which arc 100
feet tliick, and according to Elftman" one wliich is 250 feet thick. Lawson** estimates that
the sandstones and conglomerates oceupy less than 0.5 per cent of the coast line.
INTKUSIVE BOCKS.
The intrusive rocks comprise both basic and acidic types.
BASIC KOCKS.
The basic rocks include the Duluth laccolith, the Beaver Ba)^ and similar laccolitlis and
sills, the anorthosites, and the dike rocks.
DULUTH LACCOLITH.
Area and character. — The Dulutli laccolith is a gabbro. It extends from St. Louis River
to the northeast, grtuiually widening until in the center of the belt it is 30 miles wide. From
this maximum breadth it narrows toward the east until it makes a point at the Minnesota coast.
It is not our purpose here to give anything more than a most general petrographic account
of the Didutli gabbro. It is, for the most part, normal gabljro, but it has many facies. Min-
eralogically it ranges from a very magnetitic gabbro through olivine gabbro hi wliich the feldspar
is subordinate and ordinary ohvine gabbro to olivine-free gabbro, or ordinary gabbro, and
finally to a rock m which feldspar is the dominant mineral, the rock beuig a labradorite or an
anorthosite. The anorthosite masses vary from those a few feet across to those liundieds
of feet in diameter. The anorthosite appears to be but a diH'erentiation phase of the gabbro,
there being every gradation between it and both coarse and fine grained phases of the main
mass of the rock. These relations are particular]}- well seen at Little Saganaga Lake,
where, accordmg to Clements," the anorthosite unquestionably shows gradations into the
surroundmg basic masses. Nowhere is there a sharp line of contact between the two rocks.
In these respects the occurrences are in sharp contrast with the anorthosite and the diabase of
the Minnesota coast, to be later described.
Structurally the gabbro is ordinarily massive. However, at manj^ places, especially near its
borders, it has a sheeted structure. Some of the sheets are verj' tliui and strongly resemble
bedded rocks. This variety may be very well seen in the north bay of Basliitanequeb Lake.
In addition to this sheeted structure there is a banded structure, due to the parallel arrangement
of the mineral constituents.
TexturaUy the gabbro varies from a rock of very coarse grain to one that is almost
aphanitic. All varieties, coarse and fine, are granulitic.
Relations to other formations. — The structural relations of the Duluth gabbro are veiy
interesting. On the north, in passing from St. Louis River to Grand Portage, the gabbro is in
contact for a long way with the upper Huronian, then for many miles with the several members
of the lower Huronian and the Archean, and finally for many miles again with the upper Huronian.
It thus cuts diagonally across the upper Huronian in its northern and southern parts and in
passing toward the center of the area goes through the lower Huronian and deep into the Archean.
Evidence of its intrusive character is afforded bj' its coarse crystallization; by the presence
of numerous subordinate bosses and dikes, offshoots of the gabbro mass, in the Huronian series;
by the inclusion of isolated masses of upper Hiu'onian near its margin and the profound meta-
morphic effects of the gabbro, the rocks being changed to schists or gneisses or even to com-
pletely granular crystalline rocks for distances up to half a mile or a mile from the main gabbro
mass, an effect not to be expected from a rapidly cooling extrusive; and finally by the higher
density of the gabbro than of the hitruded rocks.
a Elftman, A. H., The geolqgy of the Keweenawan area in northeastern Minnesota: Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1898, p. 185.
!> Lawson, A. C, Sketch of the coastal topography of the north side of Lake Superior: Twentieth Aon. Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey
Minnesota, 1893, p. 190.
c Clements, J. M., The Vermilion Iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, pp. 402-103.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 378
The relations of the gabbro to the hivas of the coast have not been satisfactorily deter-
mined. Their contact is mainly in the plateau of the interior, is very poorly exposed, and has
not been sufficiently studied. However, it is believed that when these relations are worked out
it will be found that the galibro is intrusive and has produced profound metamorphic effects.
If this inferred intrusive relation is confirmed, the Duluth gabbro is a great laccolith, which
has as a basement the Huronian and Archean and as a roof the Keweenawan lava flows. The
relations of the Duluth gabbro to the Puckwunge conglomerate at the base of the Keweenawan
and to the earlier Keweenawan lavas have not been established. Until this is done it is impos-
sible to gain any definite conception as to how far Keweenawan time had advanced before the
appearance of the gabbro. If the Duluth gabbro is interpreted as a laccolith it surpasses in
magnitude any other yet described. With a maximum diameter of 100 miles, if its thickness
has approximately the ratio shown in the typical laccoliths of the Henry Mountains," the thick-
ness would be 75,000 feet. If an average dip of 10° for 50 miles on the north shore is assumed
the thickness would figure 45,000 feet.
The intrusion of so vast a mass of material must have required a long time. The parts
earlier intruded were doubtless solidified long before magma ceased to enter. Thus, offshoots
of these later parts would be found as dikes in the earlier solidified parts. There would be great
variation in its coarseness of crystallization. Ample time would be afforded for differentiation
by fractional crystallization, separation by gravity, and other processes, and thus is explained
the structural complexit}^ of the gabbro and its great variation in mmeral and chemica
character.
THE BEAVER BAY AND OTHER LACCOLITHS AND SILLS.
Intruded in the lavas of the Minnesota coast are a great many laccoliths or sills of diabase.
These intrusive rocks are especially ])revalent in the lower pait of the lavas, and particularly in
the part below the Temperance River group. In textiue these rocks vary from diabases to
gabbros and include the so-called black gabbros of Irving.* The diabases in many places show
a remarkable luster mottling due to the inclusion of numerous individuals of plagioclase in large
individuals of augite. Not uncommonly the augites are several inches in diameter and include
hundreds of lath-shaped feldspars.
Many of these laccoliths and sills were supposed by the earlier geologists' to be lava flows,
but when exammed closely they are found to cut the lava beds by passing gradually across their
edges and by sending out dike offshoots. In not a few places they show a distmct columnar
structure at right angles to their borders.
The local steep dips of the lava beds mentioned in the previous section are apparently all
due to the influence of the intrusive masses and thus their exceptional character is explained.
A typical illustration of these laccoliths is seen at Beaver Bay. The center of this laccolith
extends from a point near Beaver Bay to a point near Two Harbors Bay. In this distance it
occupies the entire coast. Neither its top nor its bottom is seen. In this part it is not luster
mottled but is the coarse black gabbro of Irving.'' Its central part is sheeted and in general has
a coarse or imperfect columnar structure at right angles to the horizon or nearly so. Wliere it
is foiuid in association with the lavas farther east and west, as at Split Rock and Beaver Bay,
its structure corresponds with the bedding of the amygdaloids, so that it was natural for Irving
to regard it as a bedded flow, although even he recognized that at some places it cut the amygda-
loids in a curious way. Indeed, locally it cuts the amygdaloids in a most intricate fashion,
following the joints, wmding around the blocks, intruding itself as films between the plating of
the amygdaloid, but always with sharp contacts. It is a significant fact that near the lavas
the laccolith is luster mottled. Very close to the amygdaloid it is locally fine grained. In
places it retains its coarse texture, even in narrow strmgers. The laccoliths and sills, being
resistant rocks, usually make the major headlands of the coast, just as the lavas usually
constitute the bays.
a Gilbert, G. K., The geology of the Henry Mountains, 2d ed.: U. S. Geog. and Geol. Survey RockT,- Mtn. Region, 1880, p. 55.
4 Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 6, 1883, pp. 267-268.
374 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The Logan sills jiiul capping rocks in the Animikie and Keweenawan of northeastern
JVlinnosota should be ])articularly mentioned. These aic doubtless to be correlated with the
great gabbro mass. In fact, in the Gunllint Lake district tliey seem to l)e directly connected.
To these sills are due the step topography of tiiis region. Wilson " has concluded that farther
to the east in the Nipigon basin some of tlie capping steps instead of ])eing sills are really
flows. It is possi})le that tliis conclusion may be applied to j)art of the caj)j)ing rocks in north-
eastern Minnesota.
. ANORTHOSITES.
The anorthosites of the Minnesota coast early attracted attention because of their brilliant
light color. They may be well seen at Split Rock, BeaVer Bay, and Carlton Peak. At these
places a large portion of them are inclusions in the basic laccolitlis and sills, such as the BeaA'er
Bay laccolith. Indeed, at many jilaces they form a stucco in this diabase laccolith. In size
the inclusions range from those which are minute, being no more than indiviihial ciystals of
fclds])ars, to great masses .50 or 60 feet in diameter. In adtlition to these masses, wliicli are
plamlj' inclusions, there are other masses which are so large that they can not be a.sserted to
be inclusions. These are mantled by the Beaver Bay laccolitli, as described by Lawson,' the
relations at the bottom, however, not being exposed. Some of these masses on the Minnesota
coast are as large as a cathedral, and the largest masses are found at Carlton Peak, the different
points of which are composed entirely of anorthosite. The anorthosite inclusions are not con-
tained in tlie central part of the Beaver Bay laccolith, but in its upper part, where it is in
contact with or near the anwgdaloids.
The relations above described conclusively show that the anorthosite, as a rock, antedated
the including rocks. Lawson '^ has interpreted this to mean that the anorthosite marked a
pre-Keweenawan terrane, but from our point of view the anorthosite is but a facies of the
great Duluth gabbro mass which had been segregated before the diabase intrusions (seep. 372),
and therefore has been included in the diabase, as above described.
It is conjectured that the very abvmdant diabase laccoliths and sills at Beaver Bay and
other localities are but later offshoots of the original reservoir of magma from which the Diduth
gal)bro was also derived. The alliance between the diabase intrusives of the coast and the
Duluth gabbro is shown by their chemical and mmeralogical likeness.
BASIC DIKES.
Diabase dikes cut the lavas and sills at numerous places. As a rule they are nearly vertical.
Many of them lie approximately at right angles to the coast, and are likely to make projections
into the water. Others run approximately parallel to the coast. These dikes conform to the
sets of strike and dip fractures which were produced by the deformation. Commonly these
diabase dikes are less than 50 or 60 feet across. At some places they have a columnar stracture
at right angles to the walls, parallel to the bedding of the lavas, and consequently at right
angles also to the coluimiar structure of the laccoliths.
ACIDIC KOCKS.
Along the northwest shore of Lake Superior and back from the coast are many areas of
acidic rocks, collectively mapped as red rock, because of their jirevaUing red color.'' The red
rock consists of intrusives, mainly granite and augite sA'enite, and their equivalent elTusives,
quartz porphyry. These are later than the associated basic extrusive and intrusive rocks,
succeeding the Duluth gabbro and the diabase of the Beaver Bay laccolith. The red rocks
range in size fi-om considerable masses to minute stringers. In many places the intrusives
intricately cut tiie basic rocks. This is well illustrated at Beaver Bay, where both the amygda-
loidal lavas and the diabase are intruded. Dikes of the red rock, great and small, cut the diabase
a Wilson, A. W. G., Geology of the Nipigon basin: Canada Dept. Mines, Geol. Survey Branch. Memoir No. 1. 1910, pp. 95-%.
i> I.awson, .\. C, The anorthosites of the Minnesota coast of Lake Superior: Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 8, 1S93. p. 1&
(■Idem, p. 19.
d Klftmau, \. 11., The geology of the Keweena*an area in northeastern Minnesota: Am. Geologist, vol. 22, 1898, pi. 7.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 375
through and through, and have produced an important exomorphic effect. Where thus altered
the diabase grades into a rock of a somewliat more acidic aspect and becomes the ortlioclase
gabbro of Irving. ° Wherever we have seen tliis rock it is but a facies of the diabase, produced
through the minute penetration of the acidic magma of the red rock. It is clear that the
chemical com])osition of the diabase has been affected by minute penetration of the acidic
magma and its emanations.
KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN THE CUYUNA DISTRICT OF NORTH-CENTRAL
MINNESOTA.
Granite, diabase, and gabbro cut the slates of the Animikie in the great north-central area
of Minnesota, including the Carlton, Cloquet, Cuyima, and Little Falls areas. Being later than
the Animikie, they are probably to be correlated with the Keweenawan intiiisive rocks of north-
eastern Mimiesota. They are probably to be regarded as the plutonic equivalents of the Kewee-
nawan flows. In the Cuyima district there is also a thin layer of amygdaloidal acidic rock, 15
feet thick, resting upon the eroded edges of the slates and iron-bearing formation of the Animikie
group. Drilling in this district discloses many masses of basic and acidic rock intricately asso-
ciated with the slates of the Animikie, but the relations are not yet determined.
THICKNESS OF THE KEWEENAWAN OF MINNESOTA.
Irving,* in his monograph on the copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior, makes a formal
division of the Keweenawan of the Minnesota coast into six groups, for which he estimates
thicknesses as follows, from the top down:
Feet.
Temperance River group 2, 500-3, 000
Beaver Bay group 4, 000-6, 000
Agate Bay group 1, 500
Lester River group 2, 600
Duluth group 5, 000
St. Louis gabbro [now called Duluth gabbro] Thickness uncertain.
Excluding the gabbro, Irving'^ estimates the total thickness to be between 17,000 and
IS, 000 feet. It is to be remembered that these estimates of thickness include large masses of
intrusive rocks, as, for instance, the Duluth gabbro and the diabase of Beaver Bay. Also
it is far from certam that the lavas on the Minnesota coast have the regidarity of superposition
supposed bj' Irving. Finally, it is imcertain what part of the present dip of the lavas is initial.
Elftman, the one other geologist who has made an extensive study of the Keweenawan of
the Minnesota coast, gives the following order:''
1. Later diabase member.
2. Temperance River member.
3. Red Rock member.
4. Beaver Bay diabase member.
5. Gabbro member.
This is the structural order. It is clear that the order is only partly one' of age, for before
the gabbro and other laccoliths and sills could be intruded in the Keweenawan a certain amount
of sediments and lavas must have been buUt up. This succession, as well as that of Irving,*
ignores the Puckwimge conglomerate.
Elftman supposed that between the "Temperance River, member" and the "Red Rock"
member there is a considerable unconformity, because at the bottom of the "Temperance
River member" is a conglomerate 100 feet thick. This conglomerate contains fragments of
diabase similar to the diabase of Beaver Bay, and also many fragments of red rock, indicating
a Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 50 et seq.
(■ Idem, pp. 200-268.
<■ Idem, p. 260.
<i Elftman, A. H., The geology of the Keweenawan area in northeastern Minnesota: Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1S9S, pp. 1S3-185.
376 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
tluit tliese lavas were formed before the deposition of the "Temperance River member." As
the "Temperance River member" is cut by otlicr diabase dikes and ])y red rocks, liowever,
there is no reason to behove tliat the sui)posed unconformity is diileicnt from tliat marked
elsewhere in the Keneenawan by the appearance of considerable beds of sediments. The vol-
canic epoch had not ceased.
In view of the great uncertamty as to the exact succession, relations, initial dips, and
faulting of the Minnesota rocks, it is almost impossible to give any estimate of their thickness.
Probably if the lavas and sediments only were considered, tlie tliickness woidd be very much
less than tlie amount that Irving " mentioned, but if the thickness of tlie intrusive rocks,
includin" the Duluth gabbro, were computed, and this added to the thickness of the extrusives,
an amount vastly in excess of 20,000 feet would be ol)tained.
NORTHERN WISCONSIN AND EXTENSION INTO mNNESOTA.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Keweenawan rocks of northwestern Wisconsin and their extension into Minnesota
include an area estimated at over 5,000 square miles. The greater extent of the area is m a
northeast-southwest direction. At the southwest end the Paleozoic strata make a deep embay-
ment, thus partly dividing the area mto two belts crossing St. Croix River. Farther to the
southwest the Keweenawan has been found by deep drilhng at Stillwater, and it is not impossible
that the red sandstone fomid at St. Paul and to the southwest may belong to the same (hvision.
Granites of probable Keweenawan age occupy a considerable area in the Florence district of
northeastern Wisconsin.
STRUCTURE.
Tlie Keweenawan area of northeastern Wisconsm is a synchnorium, the axis of which
extends southwest from Chequamegon Bay and at its southwest end bends more to the south.
On the northeast, in the vicinity of Ashland and Clinton Point, the work of Thwaites* m 1910
has disclosed minor folding and possibly faultmg m tins synchnorium, the steeper dips of the
minor folds being to the north. On the southwest end of the district in Minnesota, along St.
Croix River, the work of Grout <^ has disclosed similar complexity of structure.
The synclinorium is bordered for its entire length on the north by a fault agamst wliich
the Cambrian is faulted down. The fault plane dips 38° to 45° S. It dies out in Ba3-ficld County.
The Lake Superior sandstone beds are buckled along the contact. It is not known to what
extent the movement has been vertical or horizontal, although striations m at least one place
point to a vertical movement. The net result in any case has been to bring the traps up over
the Cambrian or Lake Superior sandstone. Muior dip faults have been noted m northern
Iron Coimty similar to those on Black River m Micliigan.
The dip of the upper as well as the lower divisions of the Keweenawan is as high as 90°, but
averages about 70° to 80° at the east end of the southern part of this area. In the bottom of the
synchnorium, as has been noted, a series of muior rolls show dips up to 90° on the north hmbs
and as low as 25° on the south sides, while in the Apostle Islands to the north the overlying quartz
sandstone (Lake Superior) dips about 1° to 5° SE. To the west, along the sjmchne, the dips
become less until inclmations of only 15° occur, but in Minnesota much liigher ones are recorded.
On the north hmb in Douglas County are foimd dips of 30° to 70° S.
LOWER KEWEENAWAN.
At only one place in northern Wisconsm is the lower Keweenawan known to be e.xposed.
This is in the southeastern portion of sees. 11 and 12, T. 45 N., R. 1 W.,west of a small lake.
At this point there is a considerable mass of coarse conglomerate, the pebbles of which are mostly
" Irvin. n. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. V S. Gcol. Siurey, vol. 5. 1SS3, p. 266.
ft Tliwaites. l'\ T.. nnpul)lislied fiel<i noles for Wisi-oiisiii < !eol. and Nat. Hist. Survey. 1910.
c Grout. !•'. F., Com ril>ut ion to the petrography of the Keweenawan: Jour. Geology, vol. IS, 1910, pp. 63S-657.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 377
white quartz, some of them being 8 or 10 inches in diameter. FUnt and black hornstone pebbles
are also plentiful. This conglomerate gradesup into a coarse quartzite, and this mto a fine-grained
compact quartzite. Immediately to the north of the latter formation are the basic flows of the
middle Keweenawan, and 400 or 500 feet south of the conglomerate are upper Huronian mica-
ceous gravAvackes. The thickness of the conglomerate and quartzite exposed is probably from
300 to 400 feet.
The quartzites adjacent to the Keweenawan in Barron. County, Wis., may be in part Kewee-
nawan. There are here at least two series of pre-Cambrian quartzites, the upper of which is
reddish, feldspathic, and not strongly consohdated, and has comparatively low dips. These
facts, together with the position of the quartzites on the southeast side of the Keweenawan
syncline, have suggested to Weidman'^ the possibility that they represent lower Keweenawan
sediments, but this has not been proved.
MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN.
The general characters of the middle Keweenawan in this region are substantially the same
as those of northeastern Muuiesota. The igneous rocks comprise both plutonic and volcanic
masses. The volcanic series covers a much greater area than the plutonic rocks. At the sec-
tions which have been studied, Potato River, Tylers Fork, and Bad River, the igneous rocks,
accorduig to Irving,' consist dominantly of beds of diabases, diabase amygdaloids, and mela-
phyres. With the basic igneous rocks are subordinate masses of felsite and quartz porphyry.
Interstratified with the lavas are subordinate beds of conglomerate and sandstone. Along the
north side of the Keweenawan of Wisconsiji, in Douglas County, the lower part of the series is
coniposed wholly of igneous rocks, but at higher horizons in the southeastern part of the district
conglomerates are interstratified with lava flows. On the whole the interbedded detrital rocks
of tliis area are apparently less abundant than on Keweenaw Pomt but more abimtUxnt than
in Minnesota. The hthology of the interstratified conglomerates and sandstones is in no respect
pecuhar.
So far as we know, there has been no approximately accurate determination of the entire
thickness of the lava flows and interstratified sediments of the middle Keweenawan in Wisconsin.
Berkey has estimated the thickness of the Keweenawan emptive rocks exposed along the St.
Croix Dalles as 4,000 feet. Hall"^ estimates a thickness of 20,000 feet on Snake and Kettle
rivers in Minnesota.
On the south side of the synclme at the base of the Keweenawan m Wisconsin is a great basal
gabbro, which in every respect is equivalent to the Duluth gabbro described on pages 372-373.
Tliis gabbro has been traced from Black River in Micliigan as far west as R. 7 W., but how much
farther it extends is unknown. Thus it has an extent northeast and southwest of 60 miles or
more. For most of the distance the belt is from, 2 to 5 miles broad. The I'ocks of the mider-
lying upper Huronian along most of tliis gabbro belt dip about 75° N. If the thickness of the
gabbro mass were calculated at right angles to the dip of the underl;y'ing Huronian rocks, this
would give a thickness of 9,500 to 25,000 feet.
It has been explamed in connection with the Penokee-Gogebic district that this gabbro
cuts diagonally across all the formations of the Huronian series and down into the Archean;
also that adjacent to the contact the upper Huronian rocks are profomidly metamorphosed,
the Tyler slate into mica slates and mica schists, the iron-bearmg Ironwood formation into
actinolite-magnetite schists, the Bad River hmestone into a coarsely crystalline tremolitic lime-
stone. Further, witliin the Huronian and the Archean are smaller masses of intrusive gabbro
which doubtless are offshoots or necks of the main mass. Thus in every respect the relations
of tliis basal gabbro to the underlying rocks are the same as in northern Minnesota.
a Personal communication.
b Irving, R. D., Tlie copper-bearing rocks of Lalce Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 230-231.
cBerkey, C. P., Geology of the St. Croi-x Dalles: Am. Geologist, vol. 20, 1897, p. 382.
d Hall, C. W., Keweenawan area of eastern Miimesota: Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 12, 1901, p. 331,
378 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Unfortunately the relations between the gabbro mass and the lavas of the Keweenawan
have not been closely studied. Irving ° represents this gabbro as feathering out into a series of
points to the east, suggesting very strongly its intiusive character. However, iiis descriptions
scarcely correspond to that distribution. He says:"
The coarse gray gabbros so largely developed in the Bad River country of Wisconsin, at the base of the series, present
the appearance of a certain sort of unconformity with the overlying beds. The.se gabbro.s, which lie immediately upon
the Iluroniaii ."latos, form a belt which tapers out rapidly at both ends and seem.s to lie right in the course of the diabase
belts to the east and west, since these belts, both westward toward Lake Numakagon and eastward toward the Montreal
River, lie directly against the older rocks, without any of the coarse gabbros intervening.
The coarseness of grain, the perfection of the crystallization, the abrupt terminations of the
belts, the complete lack of structure, and the presence of intersecting areas of crystalline grani-
toid rocks led Irvrng** to the beUef that these rocks were not ordinary lavas, but had solidified
at a great depth.
The acidic rocks cutting these coarse gabbros are clearly intrusive.
The gabbro in Wisconsin, Uke the Duluth gabbro, is behoved to be a great laccolith, which
was intruded in Keweenawan time after a considerable thickness of Keweenawan lava beds
had been built up, and, as in Minnesota, it roughly followed the contact at the base of the Kewee-
nawan and penetrated diagonally across the lower formations as well as irregularly across the
Keweenawan beds themselves. It has since been turned up at angles of 75° or 80° and trun-
cated by erosion.
Gabijro on the north side of the Keweenawan trough in Douglas County, Wis., is described
by Grant," but its extent has not been determined. It dips to the south and its relations to
the lavas are similar to those of the gabbro on the south side of the Douglas County syncline.
It is faulted on the north against the Cambrian rocks, which are on the downthrown side. It
dips in the same direction as the Duluth gabbro, and the displacement of the fault is in such a
direction as to show that it may have been originally continuous with the Duluth gabbro.
UPPER KEWEENAWAN.
The upper division of the Keweenawan in this area consists of red sandstones, shales, and
conglomerates, divided, in the eastern part of the district, into several distinct members.
Beginning at the base are found conglomerate 300 to 1,200 feet in thickness, black shales up
to 400 feet, about 19,000 feet of red arkose sandstone, grading up to more siUceous sandstone,
red and green shales, and coarse arkose. Above tliis is quartz sandstone, somewhat feldspathic
at the base, nearly 4,000 feet thick, here called the Lake Superior sandstone. These beds
appear to thin rapidly toward the west. These figures make no allowance for initial dip.
RELATIONS OF THE KEWEENAWAN TO OTHER SERIES.
The only places at which the relations between the Keweenawan and lower series are
shown are in Wisconsin. Here, as has been seen, the lowest formation of the Keweenawan is
made up of conglomerate and coarse sandstone and is overlain by the lava flows of the middle
Keweenawan. The coarse conglomerate of Potato River is evidence of the erosion interval
between the Keweenawan and the upper Huronian, but the magnitude of the imconformity is
realized only bj^ a study of the relations of the two along the strike, which gives evidence of a
large amount of erosion of the Huronian series before Keweenawan time. The details proving
the greatness of this unconformity are given in the chapter on the Penokee-Gogebic district
(pp. 2.34-2.35).
As to the relations of the middle Keweenawan %\ith the Upper Cambrian sandstone along
St. Croix, Kettle, and Copper rivers (of Minnesota), there is no difference of opinion. The
Upper Cambrian sandstone, in horizontal attitude, rests upon the steeply tilted and eroded
a Mon. U. S. Oeol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 155-156.
t> Idem, p. 144.
c Grant, U. S , Preliminary report on the copper-bearing rocks of Douglas County, Wis.: Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Xat. Hist. Survey Xo. 6
(2ded.), 1901, pp. 31-32.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 379
edges of the middle Kewecnawan rocks and bears abundant detriius from them. It is there-
fore perfectly clear that before the sandstone was laid down the middle Keweenawan had been
placed at its present angles and had been profoundly eroded. The relation is very well illus-
trated at Taylors Falls on St. Croix River, where the Cambrian sandstone is fossiliferous and
has been certainly determined as of Upper or Middle Cambrian age. The relations between
the diabases and the Cambrian here are shown by figure 57.
The relation of the upper Keweenawan feldspathic sandstone and the quartz sandstones,
here called the Lake Superior sandstone, has long been a subject of dispute, but the discovery
by Thwaites in 1910 of outcrops on Fish Creek near Ashland has thrown new hght on the
question. At this point the layers are steeply inclined to the north, exposing about 1,400 feet
of strata and disclosing a transition between the red shales, arkose sandstones, and conglom-
erates of the upper Keweenawan and the Lake Superior sandstone. A deep well at Ashland
passes into these red shales at a depth of 2,670 feet.
A reexamination of Middle River in Douglas County north of the great fault showed that
the sandstone beds are inverted." About 3,100 feet of strata have been turned up by the
faulting, exposing mud-cracked and ripple-marked green and red shales and arkose sandstones
of the usual Keweenawan aspect, grailing above into the Lake Superior sandstone such as is
found in horizontal attitude along the shore of the lake. On St. Louis River, Minnesota,^ a
similar transition occurs between red shales and brown sandstones. Clinton Point, where
somewhat quartzose sandstones are found, does not belong to
the Lake Superior sandstone but is the crest of a minor anti-
cline in the lower beds. Nearly 2,000 feet of similar rocks he
some distance beneath the red shales on Fish Creek. Carnt
The contact with the flat-lying quartz sandstones (Lake
Superior sandstone) along the north side of the area of middle
Keweenawan in Douglas County has long been known to be a
fault. The best exposures are on Black, Copper, Amicon,
and Middle rivers. That on Middle River has been described
above. At all other points the sandstone is turned up sharply
. , ,. ', ii-jii-i i-iT 1 FiGUEE 57.— Sketch showing unconformable
tor a short distance to the north Ot the fault, which dips, where contact between Keweenawan diabase por-
expOSed, 38° to 45° S. At all places the trap is intensely P^^^y '^'"^ Cambrian sandstone at Taylors
, . , 1 , , • 1 1 rp 1 ,^ T.1 1 Falls, Minn. (After Strong.)
brecciated, but the sandstone is much less attected. On Black
and Amicon rivers the sandstone is conglomeratic for a few feet from the contact. The pebbles
are usually small and are not matched in the neighboring igneous rocks.
Within the trap breccias are found large blocks of sandstone. The view in the past has
been that this contact was an unconformable one along a fault scarp, and that movement had
taken place along the fault since the deposition of the sandstone, thus comphcating the simple
unconformable relations. An alternative view, supported by considerable evidence, is that the
conglomerate has been faulted up by parallel faults from conglomerate found at lower horizons
in the sandstone, and in jiart dragged up along the fault plane. The displacement must be at
least equal to the thickness of the beds turned up at Middle River — 3.100 feet.
The significance of the relations of the Keweenawan to the Lake Superior sandstone is
discussed on pages 415-416.
KEWEENAWAN GRANITES OF FLORENCE COUNTY, NORTHEASTERN
WISCONSIN.
The granite along the south side of the Florence district of northeastern Wisconsin is
intrusive into green schists which are interbedded with upper Huronian slates. These granites
are probably part of the same mass that intrudes the Quinnesec schist of the Menominee
district, where the relations are similar. These granites of northeastern Wisconsin, therefore,
" Grant, U. S., Junction of Lake Superior sandstone and Keweenawan [raps in Wisconsin: Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. IS. 1902, pp. 6-9.
' Winchell, N. H., A rational view of the Keweenawan: Am. Geologist, vol. 16, 1895, p. 150; Geology of Miimesota, vol. 4, 1899, p. 15.
380 GEOLOGY OF THE LMvE SUPERIOR REGION.
like those south of the Cuj'una district in central Minnesota, arc to be regarded as the phitonic
eciuivalents of igneous flows. In both areas these plutonic masses have greatlj' metamorphosed
the invaded strata.
NORTHERN MICHIGAN.
DISTRIBUTION.
The Keweenawan rocks of northern Michigan ()ccu])y a broad belt running continuously
from Montreal River, the boundary between Michigan and Wisconsin, along the lake shore to
the outer extremity of Keweenaw Point and including Manitou Island and Stannard Rock.
Tills belt ranges in breadth from 15 or 20 miles west of Lake Gogebic to about 6 miles at the
outer part of Keweenaw Point. Approximately one-half of Keweenaw Point is occupied by
rocks of the Keweenawan series. The general strike roughly follows the coast. In passing
from the southwest the strikes gradually change from about N. 45° E. to east-west, and at the
extreme outer part of the point the rocks swing south of east, here having a northwesterly
strike. This curved outer area of the end of Keweenaw Point beyond Portage Lake corresponds
almost exactly with the strike of the rocks. Except in one fold in the Porcupine Mountains
the dips are always to the north or northwest.
The dips of the middle and lower divisions are in general lower toward the east end of
Keweenaw Point, the steepest dips ranging from nearly vertical on the Gogebic Range to 27°
at the end of the point. There is a somewhat regular decrease in the dip of each of the sections
in passing from lower to higher horizons. The best illustration of this is furnished by the
section at Black River in Michigan, which shows a continuous succession from the base of the
series to and including a part of the upper sandstone. According to Gordon," at the base of
the series the dips are from 75° to 78° N., whereas the highest strata show a dip of about 20° N.
The change in dip in passing from the lower to the higher members is gradual. Further illus-
trations are furnished by the sections on Keweenaw Point; for instance, at the Portage Lake
section the dips of the lower beds are as high as 55°, whereas in the lower part of the upper
series they have dropped as low as 7°. At the outer part of Keweenaw Point the dips of the
lowest part of the series there exposed are from 51° to 57°, but according to Hubbard,* the dips
of the higher beds constituting the outer front of the point do not average more than 23°.
In this region, as in northern Wisconsin, the lower, middle, and upper Keweenawan are
all represented. The general characterization which has been made for these divisions (see
pp. 376-379) applies to the northern Michigan area.
The Keweenawan of Micliigan will be more specifically discussed below.
KEWEENAW POINT.
SUCCESSION AND CORRELATION.
On account of the occurrence of great and valuable deposits of copper on Keweenaw Point,
more detailed studies have been made of this than of any other of the Keweenawan districts,
with the possible exception of Lsle Royal. Areas which have been studied with consiiierable
detail are the outer part of Keweenaw Point, especially Eagle River, by Mai-^ine ''■ and Hubbard; <*
Mount Bohemia, by Wright; <^ and the Portage Lake area, where the important deposits of
cop])er occur, by Pumpelly-'^ and Hubliard.'^ Studies of intermediate areas have been less
detailed but still suflicient for Irving,'' Seaman,'' and others to attempt to correlate the differ-
ent formations for Keweenaw Point. (See PI. XXVIII.)
o Gordon, W. C, assisted by A. C. Lane, A geological section from Bessemer down Black River: Rept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 1906, 1907,
p. iKS.
t Michigan Geol. Survey, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, p. 53.
c Marvinc, A. U., Ocol. Survey Michigan, 1869-1873, vol. 1, pt. 2, 1873, pp. 47-01, 95-140.
"1 Hubbard, L. L., Keweenaw Point, with particular reference to the felsites and their associated rocks: Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, p*. 2,
1898.
t Wright, F. E., The Intrusive rocks of Mount Bohemia, Michigan : Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1908, 1909, pp. 361-402.
/ Pnmpclly, Raphael, Geol. Sur%'ey Michigan, 1S()9-1873, vol. 1, pt. 2, 1873, pp. 1-46, 02-94.
e Irving, R. D., Copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. II. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1SS3.
"Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, pp. 8SO-095.
u s. afOLoan:*!. SURVEY
JIEQBGE OtiS SUirx. QIBECtOW
MONOGmpH ui mie I
GEOLOGIC MAP OF KEWEENAW POINT COPPER DISTRICT, MICHIGAN
Rovis.-il I'v A !•: Seaman. Mirhigan Coflego oPMmes
Sonir lulaaci
n
KEWICNWflW
V^m* WPVIENAWAN
SiuiilHlunra AJid lanAlomrrsIrs
Lovnn-MioDLE wpwtm*w*w
Acidic]' lavDaond ininiai"
])IMIiliily iinciudiH* »oni
llUrrbeddoil nin^unurale;
niimbcr^d iiccordijil lu Irvuii*
._v.. •"■ii.V,p1S>+- ""
Lonaotiii-iaii-li
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
381
Below are given the successions of Irving ° for the entire point and of Hubbard'' for the
outer part of the point, with their corrchition.
Sections of rocks on Keweenaw Point.
Irving.
Hubbard.
12. Eastern sandstone.
Keweenaw scries.
Upper division:
U. Red sandstone.
10. Black shale and gray sandstone ("Nonesuch belt").
9. Red sandstone and conglomerate ("Outer conglomerate").
Outer conglomerate.
Lower division:
S. Diabase and diabase amygdaloid, including at least one conglomerate belt
("Lake Shore trap").
Lake Shore trap (upper).
Middle conglomerate.
Lake Shore trap (lower).
7. Red sandstone and conglomerate ("Great conglomerate").
Great conglomerate.
6. Diabase and diabase amygdaloid, including several sandstone belts (Mar-
vine's " Group C " of the Eagle River section).
5. Diabase and diabase amygdaloid, including conglomerates.
4. Luster-mottled melaphjTes and coarse-grained gabbros and diabases (" Green-
stone group").
Ophites and porphyrites witli interbedded conglomerates
and sandstones.
3. Diabase, diabase amygdaloid, and luster-mottled melaphyre, including a
number of conglomerate beds.
Melaphyres and interbedded conglomerates.
2. Quartz porphyry and felsite.
(a) Bohemia conglomerate.iLocallv Mount Houghton fel-
(6) Melaphyre. I site replaces a and 5.
(c) Porphyrite and felsite porphyrite.
-;l
1 1. Diabase, diabase amygdaloid, melaphyre, diabase porphyry, and orthoclase
'•'■ gabbro, including also conglomerate beds and beds or areas of quartz porphyry
and granitic porphyry (■' Bohemian Range group").
Ophite belt.
Lac la Belle conglomerate.
LOWER AND MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN OF KEWEENAW POINT.
ORDER OF EXTRUSION.
Hubbard ■= lias studied the order of extrusion for the outer part of Keweenaw Point. He
finds the oldest lavas to be melaphyres and these are interstratified with melaphyre conglomer-
ates. Following the melaphyres are porphyrites and interstratified with the porphyrites are
porphyrite conglomerates. Next come the felsites and interstratified with these and above
them are the felsite conglomerates. All these rocks are at very low horizons. Above them lies
a great mass of melaphyres, ophites, and porphyrites with their various interbedded conglom-
erates and sandstones. Still higher are the "Great" conglomerate and tlie "Lake Shore" trap
with the "Middle" conglomerate. Thus Hubbard's studies of Keweenaw Point led him to the
conclusion that there was a regular order of extrusion of the igneous rocks — (1) basic melaphyres,
(2) intermediate porphyrites, (3) acidic felsites and porphyries, and (4) the upper basic rocks
represented by melaphyres, opliites, porphyrites, etc.
PRESENCE OF BASIC INTRUSIVE ROCKS.
Curiously the descriptions of the basic rocks of Keweenaw Point mention no interstratified
intrusive sills, all the basic rocks being assumed to be flows. However, certain groups, as for
instance the greenstone group, are described as contrastmg sharply with the rocks above and
below them. They contain no mtercalated amygdaloidal beds. They consist of massive laj^ers.
In texture they vary from diabases to gabbros. Although this and other masses were not sufii-
ciently examined to make any positive assertion possible, it is our impression that a large part
of the greenstone is an intrusive sill. The other masses of rocks which have been described as
gabbro or orthoclase gabbro, especially those on the southwestern part of the point, are intrusive.
o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, PI. XVII.
6 Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, PI. IV.
c Op. eit.
382 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION'.
On Mount Bohemia the intrusive gabbro has produced contact effects on the invaded ophites.
Tlic prolilem of separating the intrusive basic rocks from the extrusives remains partly to be
accompUshcd. '
ACIDIC INTRUSIVE ROCKS.
Hubbard's'* studies show that the felsites of Bare Hill and West Pond at ver\' low horizons
are intrusive. Tiic fclsite of Bare Hill, when mapped in detail, is seen to cut across the beds of
other rocks, although in a single section near its center it would seem to be interstratified. The
felsite of West Pond has disturbed the beds in its immediate area. They are broken into frag-
ments and in places are even changed into typical breccias, some of which are almost undistin-
guishable from the conglomerates. These intrusive rocks were perhaps correlative with the
extrusive felsites of Mount Houghton and others of approximately the same age found at higher
horizons. The intnisive nature of these felsites explains the absence of pebbles derived from
them ill the melaphj-re conglomerates interstratified with the melaphyres adjacent to and at
horizons above the felsites. Wliile some of the felsites and por[)liyries are extrusive, even these
have a very minor extent. This is very well illustrated at Mount Houghton, where the felsite
locally replaces the "Bohemia" conglomerate and the melaphyre flow below. (See preceding
table.)
NATURE AND SOURCE OF DETRITAL MATERIAL.
It is well known that the felsite and porphyry pebbles are ver}- prevalent and in places
dominant in the numerous conglomerate beds interstratified with the basic rocks at the higher
horizons of Keweenaw Point, and even in the "Great" conglomerate, "Middle" conglomerate,
and "Outer" conglomerate. There seems to be an enormous amount of felsite and porphj-ry
detritus in the sediments as compared with the known original areas from which it may have
been derived. Doubtless a part of the acidic detritus of Keweenaw Point may have been derived
from porphyries farther east and west than the point, as, for instance, those of the Stannard Rock
area to the east and the Porcupine Mountains to the west. But also the lack of large areas of
felsites may be due to the exceptional erosion to which they have been subjected because of their
viscous and bunchj' character, which raised them and made them the objects of excessive
attack. Finally, a considerable portion of the acidic detritus may have been in the form of
volcanic fragmental material that was scattered far and wide from the original cones from
which it was ejected and therefore never formed a part of any continuous solid intrusion or
extrusion.
Lane* states that the detritus of several conglomerates, especially of the "Great" conglom-
erate, includes numerous pebbles of intnisive red rock and gabbro. He says that if he is correct
in his identification of the materials there is evidence of an erosion of sufficient magnitude dur-
mg middle Keweenawan time to expose these plutonic rocks at the surface. He also finds agate
pebbles which he believes to have formed in the lavas lower in the series, and thus he concludes
that extensive metasomatie changes have taken place in this part of the series before the liigher
interstratified conglomerates were laid down.
VARIATIONS IN THICKNESS OF SEDIMENTARY BEDS.
Close studies of Keweenaw Point show rapid variations m the thickness and character of the
interstratified sedimentary beds. These have been especially studied in the mineraUzed area.
Many illustrations coukl be given, but perhaps one of the clearest is that of the "Great" conglom-
erate wliich Hubbard '^ says tliins 400 to 700 feet in passing from Copper Harbor to a pouit 7
miles farther east. Not only do the beds change in their character, but a single sedimentary
1)0(1 may be split into several beds separated by lava flows. Thus m the Bohemia basin a con-
glomerate is first split mto two parts by a bed of melaphyre and the lower part is in turn split
into two beds by a mass of felsite. The beds are in general lenticular, broadly consitlered, but
some of these lenses ma}- be onh* a few miles in length, as illustrated by the Calumet and Hecla
conglomerate.
a Uuhbaril, L. L., Michi;;an Geol. Survey, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, pp. 35, 43.
ti Lane, .\. C Geology of Keweenaw Point: Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 12, 1907, p. 93.
c Op. ell., p. «4.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 383
FAULTS.
Hubbard's " detailed studies of small areas have led also to the conclusion that the middle
Keweenawan has been displaced by a very large number of dip faults, the throws of which, how-
ever, are of minor extent. These have been worked out in great detail with reference to the
melaphyre and melaphyre conglomerates at West Pond. Here are figured no less than twelve
cross faults, the throws of which, however, are not sufficiently great to be traced into the thick
overlying formations, and hence they do not appear on liis general map. Similarly Lane ^ states
that there are a large number of small transverse faults in the mining district. The throws of
most of these faults are not more than 2.5 feet and very few exceed .50 feet. However, the
presence of many faults at each of the two areas that have been closely studied on Keweenaw
Point suggests very strongly that when like thorough studies are made of other areas on this
point similar faulting wUl be found.
In the mining district there are also many slide faults. According to Lane,"^ the dip of
many of these slide faults is somewhat steeper than the bedding, so as to cut diagonally across
the beds at acute angles. As to the direction of movement along these dip faults, he thinks it
is more commonly down than up on the hanging-wall side, for beds are more likely to be cut out
than repeated. Hubbard" described one very important slide fault, the major movement of
wliich, instead of being parallel to the dip, is nearly parallel to the strike. Tliis is the fault at
the top of the Kearsarge conglomerate, whicli is well illustrated in tlie Central mine. Hubbard
makes a calculation of throw and reaches the conclusion that "the part of the Keweenawan
series that lies above the Kearsarge conglomerate has moved from its original position, in a
northerly direction, horizontally, about 2.7 miles, or along an inclined plane its equivalent dis-
tance of about 2.9 miles." Such a slide fault as this approaches the ordinary strike faults, the
chief difTerence being that of hade, the bedding fault having such a hade as not to intersect the
bedding, whereas ordinaiy strike faults do intersect the bedding. Although the Kearsarge shde
fault is nearly in the direction of the strike, it is believed to be probable that the most common
direction of movement in the faults of this area is parallel to the dip. In this case the move-
ments are largely explained by the natural adjustments which are necessary when a set of beds,
is folded.
UPPER KEWEENAWAN.
The upper Keweenawan consists, from the base upward, of three members — (1) the " Outer"
conglomerate, (2) the Nonesuch shale, and (3) the Freda sandstone.
The "Outer" conglomerate is found at the north side of the east end of Keweenaw Point
as far as Gate Harbor, where it passes under the water; it reappears on the point some miles
west of Eagle River and continues along to the point and westward through Michigan into
Wisconsm. It is in no respect different from the underlying "Great" conglomerate or other
conglomerates interstratified with the Keweenawan, except that, accordmg to Lane,'* it contains
near its top fragments derived from the jaspery and other Huronian formations.
The Nonesuch formation ranges from a soft, fine-grained, highly argillaceous shale to a sand-
stone. The shale is predominant, the sandstones bemg mterbedded. In color the shale is dark
purplish gray to nearly black and the sandstone dark gray to black. The thin sections of the
sandstones show detritus from the porphyries and other acidic original rocks of the Keweenawan.
With these materials in all the sections is mingled more or less basic detritus. Indeed, the basic
material is usually abundant and not uncommonly becomes dominant. The basic material is
more abundant in the darker-colored rocks. In these rocks there is also a plentiful calcite
a Hubbard, L. L., Michigan Geol. Survey, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, pp. 87-91.
!> Lane. A. C, Geology of Keweenaw Point: Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 12, 1907, pp. 83-84.
c Idem, pp. S4-85.
d Lane, A. C, Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, p. 690.
384 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
cement filling all interstices between the fragments. The basic detritus appears in the .shape of
particles of the basic rocks, showing more or less plainly the several ingredients, always much
altered, and of particles of the single minerals — augitc, almost wholly altered to a greenish sub-
stance triclinic feldspar, and magnetite. The formation also contains materials which must
have been contributed by the Ihironian, Kewcenawan, and Laurent ian rocks. The Nonesuch
shale therefore differs from the sediments interstratilied with the Kewcenawan m the greatly
decreastid amount of acidic material, the abundance of basic material, and the presence of detri-
tus derived from other formations than the Kewcenawan.
The Freda sandstone is in no respect different from the sandstone of the liCfger areas in
Wisconsin, which are a continuation of the sandstone in Michigan. It need here be only remarked
that the materials have the same varieties of sources as the Nonesuch' shale, but the materia
derived from the basic lavas seems to be even more prominent.
BELATIONS TO CAMBRIAN BOCKS.
On the north and west sides of the Kewcenawan the series nowhere comes into contact with
the Cambrian. The possible relations between the two are discussed in another place. (See pp.
415-416.)
On the southeast side the Kewcenawan is in contact with the Cambrian. Irving and
Chamberlin," in their bulletin on this contact, conclude that the sandstone was deposited uncon-
formably against an ancient fault scarp of Kewcenawan rocks and that it was subsequently
faulted dowTi along the old fault plane. This relation is apparently similar to those observed at
the fault on the north side of the Keweenawan syncline in Douglas County, Wis., and thence
southwestward into Minnesota.
MAIN AREA WEST OF KEWEENAW POINT, INCLUDING BLACK KIVER AND
THE PORCUPINE MOUNTAINS.
A very detailed study of the entire Keweenawan section at Black River has been made by
Gordon.'' According to him, this river shows the following descending succession,*^ the classifi-
cation into middle and lower Keweenawan being added by us.
Section of Keweenawan rocks at Black River, Mich.
Upper Keweenawan:
I. Upper sandstone lacking. leet.
II. Nonesuch formation 500
III. Outer conglomerate o, 000
5,500
Middle Keweenawan:
IV. Lake Shore trap, consisting of five flows, having from the top downward the
following thicknesses: 35, 35, 115, 85, 130 feet, respectively 400
V. Conglomerate 350
VI. Mixed eruptives and sedimentaries ■">, ■'>00
VII. Felsite •. ^50
VIII. Eruptives with very few sedimentaries 2G, 000
IX. Mixed eruptives among which are conspicuous labradoritc porphyrites 4, 800
X. Gabbro 200
XI. Melaphyres and labradorite porphyrites that are not conspicuous 4, 500
42, 200
Lower Keweenawan:
XII. Basal sandstone 300
48,000
"In'ing, R. D.,and Chimlwrlin, T. C, Observations on the junction between the Eastern sandstone and the Keweenaw series on Keweenaw
Point. Lake Superior: Bull. U. S. Ocol. Survey No. 23, 18.S5.
i> Gordon, W. C, assisted by A. C. Lane, A geological section from Bessemer down Black River: Kept Michigan Geol. Survey tor 1900, 1907,
pp. .197-507.
cidem, p. 421.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 385
Throughout the Black River section there is no evidence of a physical break in the Kewee-
nawan. Lane," because of the character of the formation, suggests that possibly there might
be a slight break at the base of the Nonesuch shale, but Gordon's detailed descriptions give no
evidence in support of this view.
It is known that in this district dip faults occur. According to Gordon,*" at least four such
faults traverse the Trap Range north of Bessemer, the throws of three of which are 80, .350, and
1,500 feet, the throw of the fourth not being determinable. It is very likely that strike faults
occur, for great strike faults occur elsewhere in the Keweenawan. (See p. 38.3.) Though
such faults have not been detected, they may very readily occur at any of the very numerous
stretches of the river where exposures are lacking. The presence of faults at these places is very
probable because of • the brecciation and consequent more easily erosible condition of rocks
along fault planes.
In the Porcupine Mountains the same divisions of rocks occur as in Keweenaw Point, but
the order is only in a general way similar to that on the point, the difference being that compara-
tively high in the series are large masses of quartz porphyry and felsite, and the acidic rocks at
these horizons perhaps largely explain the source of the abundant felsite, quartz porphyry, and
augite syenite pebbles in the "Great," "Middle," and "Outer" conglomerates.
In the Porcupine Mountains the great synclinal basin of Lake Superior, which controls
the general dip of the Keweenawan rocks about the lake, is disturbed by a subordinate fold,
so that in a section diagonally northeast and southwest across the mountains the lower beds
are regarded by Irving "^ as repeated. He shows a subordinate anticline and sj'ncline between
the monoclinal beds north of Lake Gogebic, at tlie south side of tlie middle division and the
northward-dippmg beds at tlie lake. This area is a forest-covered one in which the exposures
are somewhat imperfect, and it is hinted by Hubbard <^ that possibly the abundant felsite and
porphyry here are intrusive, as they are at Bare Hill and West Pond, and that the unusual
structure may be explamed by these intrusive masses rather than by exceptional orogenic
movement. This suggestion is made because of very considerable disturbances in the regidar
bedding of the rocks about the intrusive felsite of Bare Hill. The Porcupine Mountains are
now being studied in detail by F. E. Wright for the Micliigan Geological Survey, but the results
of his work have not been available in the preparation of this monograph.
The upper Keweenawan of this area is the same in all respects as that described for Kewee-
naw Pomt.
THE SOUTH RANGE.
Beginning in T. 47 N., R. 44 W., Michigan, from the lower Keweenawan, which there
consists of diabase, diabase amygdaloid, melaphyre, and a few coarse interbedded thin con-
glomerates, an arm projects to the east and south nearly to Gogebic Lake and east of this
lake again for some distance. This is the so-called South Range. It is separated fi-om the
main range of the Keweenawan by the Jacobsville or "Eastern" sandstone. At the eastern
point the South Range is 18 miles south of the northern area of the Keweenawan. This range
varies from less than half a mile to 2 miles or more in breadth. The rocks of the South Range
dip to the north at angles of 30° to 50°. At some places at the base of the Keweenawan series
in the South Range there is a coarse sandstone. At other places the lowest rock is a basic lava.
Locally sediments are hiterstratified with the lavas. Thus the conditions prevalent in early
Keweenawan time, as indicated by the rocks at the base of the Keweenawan of the South Range,
are similar to those of other tlistricts. In no respects do these rocks differ from those near the
base of the Keweenawan to the west. West of Gogebic Lake the Keweenawan rocks rest
directly upon the upper Huronian. The western part of this belt of Keweenawan rests directly
upon the Tyler slate. When followed to the east it is seen to pass diagonally to lower and
lower horizons, imtil at Sunday Lake it is in contact with the Ironwood formation. These
relations have been more fully described in connection with the Penokee district.
a Lane, A. C, Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, p. 091. " Irving, R. D., Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 209-225.
i> Op. oit., pp. 464-465. d Hubbard, L. L., Geol. Survey Micbigan, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, pp. 5-8.
47517°— VOL 52—11 25
386 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
It is believed that the separation of the South Range from the mam range is due to a great
strike fault between the two which results in a repetition of the beds of the main range in the
South Range.
ROCKS OF POSSIBLE KEWEENAWAN AGE IN OUTLYING AREAS.
Certam reddisli feklspatliic and little-consolidated sandstones of low dip, lying uncon-
formably across the end of the upper Iluronian of the Felch Mountain trough, may possibly be
classed as Keweenawan. Similar rocks are known also in the Sturgeon trough to the north.
THICKNESS OF THE KEAVEENAWAN OF MICHIGAN.
Irving" gives an estimate of the thickness of the Keweenawan of northern Michigan at
Eagle River and Portage Lake, and Gordon' estimates a section on Black River.
EAGLE RIVER SECTION.'
Irving's section at Eagle River,'' based largely on the detailed work of Marvine, is as follows:
Section of Keweenawan rods at Eagle River, Michigan.
Upper division: Feet.
Outer conglomerate;, porphyry conglomerate and sandstone; about 1, 000
Lower division :
Lake Shore trap; very plainly bedded fine-grained diabases, strongly marked amygda-
loids, and one or more thin porphyry conglomerates; about 1, 500
Great conglomerate ; jjorphyiy conglomerate and sandstone 2, 200
Marvine's group "c;" plainly bedded and separable fine-grained diabases, with strongly
marked amygdaloids, predominatingly calcitic; and some 850 to 900 feet, in all, of inter-
stratified sandstones 1, 417
Marvine's group "b," or the Ashbed group; made up mostly of thin, fine-grained diabases,
which vary a good deal in appearance, but are generally provided with distinct amyg-
daloids; including some beds of the peculiar tj'pe known as ashbed diabase; also several
Bcoriaceous amygdaloids, being intermingled sandstone and amygdaloid; also one thin
sandstone seam 618
Marvine's group "a;" made up of relatively heavy beds without strongly developed
amygdaloids; including one thin seam of .sandstone 925
Greenstone group; made up of relatively heavy beds, without amygdaloids, of rocks for
the most part relatively coarse grained;, these belong mostly to the coarse-grained
olivine-free diabases and gabbrosand to the luster-mottled melaphyres, or fine-grained
olivine-diabases, the greenstone at the base of the group being of the last-named class. . 1, 200
Subgreenstone group, in which all of the fissure-vein mines are working; having at top a
thin conglomerate, the equivalent of the "Allouez" and "Albany and Boston'' con-
glomerates in the Portage Lake district; composed of fine-grained diabases, with not
very strongly developed amygdaloids; about 1, COO
Central Valley beds; the layers not well exposed, but evidently chiefly fine-grained dia-
bases and amygdaloids, with a number of thin porphyry conglomerates, in all respects
like the overlying group; about 5, 540
Bohemian Range beds; made up chiefly of diabases and melaphyres in all respects like
the higher layers, and including .some of the usual porphjTy conglomerates; but also in
part made up of quartziferous porphyry, felsite, nonquartziferous porphyry, and coarse-
grained orthoclase gabbro; in all. al)c)ut 10, 000
26, 000
Of this thickness, the "Great" conglomerate and the ten conglomerates and sandstones in
"group c" together constitute 3,100 feet. These sediments are all in the upper 5,000 feet of
the lower Keweenawan. The lower part contains only a few seams of detrital material. The
lower five-si-\ths of the lower Keweenawan for this section is therefore almost exclusively vol-
canic, and of the total lower Keweenawan somewhat less than one-ninth is sediment arA", the
remaining eight-ninths being igneous.
" In-ing, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. .Survey, vol. 5, 1883. pp. lGf>-I97.
b Gordon, W. C, assisted by .\. C. Lane, A geoiogica! section from Bessemer down Black River; Rept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 1906, 1907,
p. 421.
clrvlng, K. D., op. cit., pp. lso-187.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 387
PORTAGE LAKE SECTION.
At Portage Lake the section is as follows:
Section of Keweenawan rocks at Portngc Luke. a
Upper division: ■ peet.
Larijely covered, but apparently for the most part red shales and sandstone; toward the
base there is a considerable thickness (upward of 200 feetj of dark-colored, fine-grained
sandstone and black shale, in which the usual porphyry detritus is mingled with more
or less basic detritus; the lowest layers are also conglomeratic; in all about 9, 000
Lower division:
Covered space of some 1,200 feet, in which must be the equivalents of the outer trap of
the eastern part of Keweenaw Point, corresponding to a thickness of about 500
The Great conglomerate, including the sandstone and conglomerate at the Atlantic mill
and conglomerate 22 on the south side of Portage Lake, with some intervening ex-
posures, about I ^ 500-
Diabase Og
Conglomerate 21 15
Diabase and amygdaloid 51
Conglomerate 20 19'
Diabase 100'
Conglomerate 19 13-
Diabase 94
Conglomerate 18 I55.
Diabases and amygdaloids 34O
Conglomerate 17 (Hancock West) 32:
Diabases and amygdaloids; including the South Pewabic cupriferous amygdaloid at 50
feet below 17 55O
Conglomerate 16 (not seen on south side of Portage Lake) lO-
Diabases and amygdaloids; including, at 400 feet above conglomerate 15, the Pewabic
cupriferous amygdaloid or "lode" so largely worked for copper on the west side of
Portage Lake 900
Conglomerate 15 (Albany and Boston conglomerate on the north side of Portage Lake). . 3S
Diabases and amygdaloids 33O
Conglomerate 14 (the Houghton conglomerate of the north shore) 2
Diabases and amygdaloids 1_ 400
Conglomerate 12 (north side of Portage Lake) 3
Diabases and amygdaloids 680
Conglomerate 11 20
Diabases and amygdaloids 200
Conglomerate 10 gO
Diabases and amygdaloids 46Q
Conglomerate 9 (sandstone seam).
Diabases and amygdaloids; including, at 670 feet above conglomerate 8, the Grand Port-
age cupriferous amygdaloid, and at 510 feet the Isle Royal cupriferous amygdaloid,
largely worked on the south shore of Portage Lake 2, 05O
Conglomerate 8 12
Diabases and amygdaloids 420
Conglomerate 7 24
Diabases and amygdaloids 260
Conglomerate 6 3
Diabases and amygdaloids IgX
Conglomerate 5 24
Diabases and amygdaloids 240
Conglomerate 4 12
Diabases and amygdaloids 1 149
Conglomerate 3 5g
Diabases anct amygdaloids 37O
Conglomerate 2 35
Diabases and amygdaloids 1 140
Conglomerate 1 97
Amygdaloid 14
22, 680
' Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1S83, pp. 194-195.
388 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
In tlio above section of tlio lower Keweenaw an the thickness of tiie c()n<;lomeiates amounts
to 2,125 feet, leaving 11,555 feet for the igneous rocks. Thus the lower Keweenawan is about
one-sixtli sediment and about five-sixtlis igneous.
The Portage Lake section differs in one important respect from the Eagle River section.
At Portage Lake the interstratified conglomerates extend to the bottom of the section, whereas
at Eagle River the conglomerates and sandstones do not occui' in the lower five-sixths of the
section, tlie thickness of which as a whole is al>out the same as at Portage Lake.
BLACK RIVER SECTION.
In the Black River section the total thickness, according to Goi-don," is 48,000 feet.
Irving* estimates the thickness of the upper sandstone at Montreal River, a few miles west of
Black River, at 12,000 feet. This part of the section is absent on Black River, and if it were
ailded to the Black River section this would give for this district a thickness of 60,000 feet for
the entire Keweenawan series.
In the middle Keweenawan of the Black River section (p. 384) the sediments are mainly in
the upper 6,000 feet, and of this amount sedunents are known to make up 575 feet, distributed
as follows:
Feet.
In V, conglomerate 350
In VI, mixed eruptive and sedimentary rocks:
Sandstone .30
Conglomerate 20
Sandstone 2.5
Sandstone 30
Sandstone 20
Conglomerate 100
225
575
As a space corresponding to .3,000 feet is not exposed, doubtless the total thickness of the
sediments is much greater than tliis, though a part of this .3,000 feet is certain to be volcanic.
However, the addition of all of it would make the maximum possible thickness of sediment
3,575 feet. Thus the sediments at most make up only about one-twelfth of the middle Kewee-
naw^an and are largely concentrated in the upper sixth of the division.
The question now arises whether this apparent thickness for the several sections repre-
sents the real thickness of the series as laid down. It is believed to be probable that the real
thickness is less than the apparent thickness. The reasons for this belief apply as well to the
estimated thicknesses of other districts, and therefore they are given later. (See pp. 418-419.)
RELATIONS OF THE KEWEENAWAN OF MICHIGAN TO UNDERLYING AND
OVERLYING FORMATIONS.
The only locality in which the relations of the Keweenawan with the underlying forma-
tions are shown is in the Penokee-Gogebic district. It has been stated (pp. 234-235) that these
relations are those of unconformity, erosion amoimting to several thousand feet having taken
])lace after Iltironian time and before the deposition of the Keweenawan. Still, the strike
and di|) of the two series are very nearly the same, and the greatness of the break between the
two appears only b}" their stratigraphic relations.
The Upper Cambrian ("Eastern") sandstone comes against the lower part of the Keweena-
wan from the outer end of Keweenaw Point to the region west of Gogebic Lake. It is agreed
by all who have studied this contact that it marks a great fault. The Keweenawan along
the contact has its usual steep northern dips. The sanilstone at the contact is bent and locally
broken, so that it strikes and dips in various directions, in some places dipping away from the
o Gordon, W. 0., assisted by A. C. Lane, A geological section from Bessemer down Black River: Kept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 1906, 1907,
p. 421.
l> Irving, U. D., The copper-bcnring rocks ol L:iko Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1S83, p. 230.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 389
Keweenawan and in others apparently dipping under it. A short (Hstance away from the
Keweenawan, usually within a few hundred feet, the sandstone assumes its normal horizontal
attitude.
At only a few localities has the Upper Cambrian sandstone been found in close relations
with the rocks of the South Range. Irving '^ concluded that in the South Range this sand-
stone rests unconformably against the Keweenawan rocks. However, the particular locality
he described as showing unconformable relations has been interpreted differently by Seaman,*
who finds there a dike of igneous rock penetrating the so-called "Eastern" sandstone and
spreading out above. Seaman regards the "Eastern " sandstone here as probably Keweenawan
and believes that there is no way of proving that it is of different age from the "Western"
sandstone (upper Keweenawan).
ISLE ROYAL.
Isle Royal is 45 miles in length and varies in width from 3 to 8 miles. From the Rock
of Ages, the farthest outlying reef to the southwest, to the Gull Island rocks on the northeast,
the distance is 57 miles. The island lies off Thunder Bay, northwest of the outer part of Kewee-
naw Point. The strike of Isle Royal and Keweenaw Point are substantially the same, north-
east and southwest. This island has been mapped geologically by Lane.'' His succession
in descending order is as follows:
Section of Keweenawan rocks on Isle Royal.
Sandstone and conglomerate ("the Great conglomerate"?).
Ophites dowfl to Island mine conglomerate (Marvine's group C).
Intercalated sandstones and conglomerates.
Melaphyre porphyrites and scoriaceous conglomerates ("Ashbed" group).
"The greenstone" — thickest ophite.
Amygdaloids and thin ophites down to Minong breccia (Kearsarge conglomerate).
Minong porphyrite and Minong trap.
Ophites and conglomerates, including Huginnin porphyrite, down to felsite.
It is clear from the general character of the succession that it is like that of the middle
Keweenawan of the remainder of the Lake Superior region; that is to say, it consists of igneous
rocks and sediments. The igneous rocks are dominantly basic. They are all regarded as
extrusive by Lane.*^
However, the same question may be raised with reference to the greenstone, wliich is
given a tliickness of 2.33 feet, as was raised concerning that of Keweenaw Point. Is it an extru-
sive or is it a later intrusive ? Certainly it has all the characteristics of the diabase of Beaver
Bay on the Minnesota coast, which is almost certainly intrusive.
The intercalated sandstones and conglomerates, from lowest to highest, contain a much
greater proportion of material from acidic rocks than would be expected from the small pro-
portion of original acidic rocks. The sandstones and conglomerates are subordinate in amount
in the major portion of the section and only become of great volume with the appearance of
the "Great" conglomerate. The field terms for the igneous rocks and their relations are
expressed by Lane<* as follows:
Felsite Melaphyre
Trap — nonamygdaloidal dark rocks
Amygdaloid
Porphyry Porphyrite Ophite
Lane' gives one very detailed section based largely on drill records. Its thickness is 9,000
feet. In this section the felsite flows are confined to the lower 150 feet, but at a high horizon
one bed of porphyry tuff 10 feet thick is noted. This tuff may be regarded as a confirmation
"Irnug, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior; Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 360-361.
6 Personal communication.
c Lane, A. C, Geological report on Isle Royale, Michigan: Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898, 281 pp.
dldem, p. 53.
c Idem, pp. 27 et seq.
390 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
of the suggestion made in another place (p. 382) that volcanic fragmental rocks of the acidic
type are nuich more abundant in the Keweenawan than had been supposi'd. Most of the
interstratifiod sedimentary beds are conglomerates and, with three exceptions, they range from
a knife-edge to 50 feet in thickness. Two of the thicker beds are mainly sandstone. In addition
to a number of seams which were too small to be measured, the total number of sedimentary
beds in the district is 24 and the total thickness is 430 feet. To the "Great" conglomerate
is given a thickness of 2,600 feet, making a total thickness of sediments of 3.030 feet. This
leaves 5,970 feet for the lavas.
In the matter of correlation. Lane " assumes that the thick conglomerate at the top of
the series is a continuation of the "Great" conglomerate of Keweenaw Point, and with this
horizon as a starting point he attempts to correlate somewhat closely the h6x\s of Isle Royal
with those of Keweenaw Point, as is indicated by the succession given on page 389, the names
in parentheses being those of formations on Keweenaw Point. Although it is probable that
the top conglomerate corresponds to the "Great" conglomerate of Keweenaw Point, and
although it may be possible that the formations are to some extent equivalent, it maj- perhaps
be doubted whether the correlation of individual thin beds, such as the interstratified conglom-
erates, is justified, especially as. there is so remarkable a likeness in the petrography of the beds
of the Keweenawan at difterent horizons in the several districts of Lake Superior. If the bed
of greenstone more than 200 feet thick is really intrusive, as suggested, its correlation with the
greenstone of Keweenaw Point on a stratigraphic basis is very questionable.
In any section on Isle Royal there is a lessening of the dip in passing from lower to higher
horizons, just as at Keweenaw Point and at Michipicoten. For instance, at the west end of
the island on the north side the dips are 16° S. and on the south side in the "Great" conglom-
erate 8° S., a difference of 8°. Toward the east end of the island the dips on the north side are
26° and on the south side 18°, again a difference of 8°.
MICHIPICOTEN ISLAND.
The folio whig account of Michipicoten Island is taken almost wholly from Burwash,'
who alone has made a close study of this area. However, it should be said that Logan's general
accoinit of this district " is remarkably accurate.
The island is roughly ellipsoidal in shape, about 16| miles long by 6 miles in greatest width.
Its longer axis lies east and west parallel to the coast, and its west end is south and a httle west
of Pukaskwa River.
The Keweenawan rocks occupy the entire island as well as the row of smaller islands off
its south shore. They are confined wholly to the middle Keweenawan. The igneous rocks
overwhelmingly dominate in mass. They are described as extrusive, no intrusive rocks being
mentionetl. Lithologically they include all the varieties of the ordinary extnisive rocks,
ophitic and diabasic melaphyres, amygdaloids, porphyrites, felsites, and quartz jiorphyries.
The acidic rocks are much more readily eroded than the basic rocks. In consequence they
usually occupy depressions, whereas the basic rocks constitute the ridges. In this respect
there is a contrast between Micliipicoten Island and Keweenaw Point, where the acidic rocks
constitute elevations. It may be suggested that the difference is due to the fact that the-
Michipicoten acidic rocks are largely extrusive, while those of Keweenaw Point are largelj'
intrusive. No order of extrusion of the lavas is suggested, the acidic and basic rocks both
occurring from the higliest to the lowest horizons. As to volume, there does not seem to be
much difference between tiie basic and acidic varieties. Selwyn and Coleman state that pyro-
clastic rocks occur on Michipicoten Island, but such rocks were not observed by Burwash <*
and if ])resent are certainly extremely insignificant in amount. The lava ])eds attain their
maximum thiclaiess in the eastern and central parts of the island and are thinner toward the
a Lane, A. C, Geological report on Isle Royale, Michigan: Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898, pp. 99 et seq.
6 Bnrwa.sh, E. N., The geology of Michipicoten Island: Univ. Toronto Studies, Geol. ser., No. 3, Toronto, 1905, with map.
« Logan, W. E., Report of progress to 18G3, Geol. Survey Canada, 1863.
dOp. clt., pp. 27, 47.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 391
west, where they are interstratified with the conglomerates. The lower beds strike approxi-
mately northeast and southwest. In passing to higher horizons the strike approaches east and
west. Thus there is an appearance of minor unconformity between the lower and upper beds.
The debris of the conglomerates is as usual derived largely from the acidic rocks, but with
them are included granites, greenstones, and biotite gneisses derived from pre-Keweenawan
formations. Abundant material derived from the basic rocks is also recognized. The sedi-
mentary rocks occur mainly at lower horizons, although one conglomerate is foimd at a com-
paratively high horizon. These conglomerates are confined to the nortliwestem part of the
island, being thickest at the west and thinning out to the northeast.
These facts suggest that the central and eastern parts of the island formed a center of
volcanic dispersion, that the lavas flowed toward the west, and that in the part of the area
somewhat removed from the main volcanic outbursts there was opportunity to build con-
glomerates between the successive lava flows.
The dip of the beds on the north and northwest sides of the island is 55° S. From this
there is a steady decrease in dip until on the islands off the south shore of Michipicoten the
dips are about 14° S., the lessening of dip across the series being therefore 40°.
Burwash" gives the following descending succession:
Section of Keweenawan rods on Michipicoten Island.
Feet.
1. Felsite of islands off the south shore 1, 000
2. Pitchstone bed 530
3 . Quartzless porphyry of Quebec Harbor 695
4. Melaphyre porphyrites of Channel Lake 1, 660
5. Quartz porphyries ; 1 355
2 • 1,160
3 1,493
6. Beds exposed at lake on road 1, 575
7. Felsite 513
8. Diabase porphyrite •. 463
9. Beds underlying farm (three) 1, 140
10. Several beds at mine 645
11,230
This result, obtamed by accurate measurement of three sections and by careful studies, is
a remarkable confirmation of the judgment of Logan,'' who states that the thickness of tlie
formations developed in Michipicoten Island, at the most moderate dips observed, would not
fall far short of 12,000 feet.
It is stated that on the mainland near the mouth of Pukaskwa River there are rocks of
Keweenawan age, and this leads to the suggestion that the Keweenawan constitutes a mono-
clinal succession from the north shore of Lake Superior to the south side of Michipicoten.
For the intervening distance between the mainland and the island an estimated thickness is
given of 34,000 feet, and thus a suggested thickness for the entire Keweenawan series of 45,000
feet. But it seems to us more probable that between Michipicoten Island and the main shore
there is a strike fault and that therefore the Micliipicoten rocks may be near the bottom of
the Keweenawan series. This idea is perhaps confirmed by the presence in the conglomerates
of the Michipicoten district of material from pre-Keweenawan sources.
EAST COAST OF LAKE SUPERIOR.
Several prominent points along the east coast of Lake Superior exliibit Keweenawan rocks.
While none of these areas are large, they are significant, extending along nearly the entire east
coast of Lake Superior from Cape Choyye, near Micliipicoten Harbor, to Gros Cap, intervening
locaHties being Cape Gargantua, Pointe aux Mines, and Mamainse Peninsula. At all these local-
n Op. lit., pp. 40-41.
6 Logan, W. E., Report of progress to 1803, Geol. Survey Canada, 1863, p. 82.
392 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR- REGION.
ities the rocl« belong to the middle Keweenawan. They consist of basic lavas, including mela-
pliyres, porphyritos, and amygdaloids, and interstratified sandstones and conglomerates. The
sandstones and conglomerates tlillVr from the ordinary sculimentary rcjcks interstratified with the
lavas in that they contain a consitlerable amount of detritus derived from the subjacent Archean
rocks. This is particularly noticeable at Mamainse. For the most part the masses exposed
are small, but Logan" estimates the tliickness of the series at Pointe aux Mines to be 3,000 feet.
At Mamainse Peninsula the Keweenawan rocks occupy much the largest area along the east
coast. Macfarlan(\ * calculates a total thickness in this locality of 16,208 feet, of whicli inter-
stratified conglomerates make up 2,138 feet. Macfarlane's section, from the base upward, is
as follows:
Section of Keweenawan rods on Mamainse Peninsula.
Feet.
1. Granular melaphyre, coilsisting of a small-grained mixture of dark-brown feldspar with
angular grains of a dark-green chloritic mineral. It varie.s frequently in its structure,
and in the upper part contains amygdules of calc spar and delessite (iron chlorite) 3, 930
2. Brown argillaceous sandstone, striking N. 20° W. and dipping 35° SW 12
3. Compact greenish-gray melaphyre, with grains of feldspar, iron chlorite, and hematite;
strike N. 10° W.; dip 32° SW 1,787
4. Conglomerate holding granitic or gneissoid bowlders 852
5. Granular melaphyre, containing feldspar, which weathers white, and dark-green chlorite. 426
6. Sandstone 20
7. Dark-brown compact trap 71
8. Conglomerate 70
9. Dark-green melaphyre, slightly amygdaluidal 710
10. Conglomerate 43
11. MelaphjTe, striking N. 5° W., dip 30° W. ; fine grained and of a dark-brownish color 1, 207
12. Conglomerate 71
13. Granular melaphyre, containing brownish-red feldspar and abundance of delessite 355
14. Conglomerate 35
15. Fine-grained greenish-red melaphyre, becoming amygdaloidal in the upper part of the
bed. Strike N. 20° W., dip 35° SW., where it adjoins conglomerate N. 15° W.>45° SW. 489
16. Conglomerate, with a small layer of sandstone, the latter striking N. 17° W., dip 40° SW.. 163
17. Compact dark-brown crystalline trap 340
18. Conglomerate 170
19. MelaphjTe 100
20. Conglomerate, striking N. 5° W. and dipping 42° W. at junction with overlying rocks 204
21. Melaphyre 240
22. Conglomerate, striking N. 12° W. In this bed the bowlders are smaller than in those
hitherto mentioned 34
23. MelaphyTe, striking N. 23° W. and dipping 37° SW 682
24. Conglomerate and sandstone, striking N. 14° W. and dipping 44° SW 12
25. Melaphyre; strike N. 33° W.; dip 28° SW 250
26. Measures concealed 160
27. Melaphyre, granular and of a reddish-green color, striking N. 30° W. and dipping 18° SW. 25
28. Measures concealed 125
29. Melaphyre; strike N. 33° W.; dip 28° SW 272
30. Mea-sures concealed 180
31. Melaphyre, amygdaloidal in part 436
32. Measures concealed 400
33. Conglomerate, consisting of bowlders of Laurentian rocks in matrix of red sandstone 330
34. Measures concealed 172
35. Melaphyre, strikingN. 35° W. and dipping 20° SW 100
36. Conglomerate, in which the bowlders consist to a much greater extent than heretofore of
amygdaloidal and other varieties of melaphyre. Strike N. 20° W.; dip 25° SW. at the
junction with the overhang rock 50
37. Reddish-gray granular melaphyre, becoming amygdaloidal in the upper part 200
38. Sandstone, strikingN. 30° W. and dipping 24° SW : 12
39. Conglomerate, containing here and there layers of sandstone, striking N. 40° W. and
dipping 15° SW 30
u I.ognn, W. E., Report of progrc-is to lSf.3, Oeol. Siin-ey Canada, 1S63, p. 82.
1> Mactarlaiie, Tlioimis, Report of progress from 1SG3 to 1860, Geol. Sur\'ey Canada, 1866, pp. 132-134.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 393
Feet.
40. Dark-green glittering nielaphyre, striking, at its junction mth the underlying conglom-
erate, N. 50° W. and dipping 30° SW 114
41. Measures concealed 137
42. Melaphyre, striking N. 50° W. and dipping 29° SW ;. 16
43 . Measures concealed 114
44. Melaphyre, dark reddish green, striking N. 50° to 55° W. and dipping 21° to 25° SW 300
45. Dark-green and glittering melaphjTe; N. 25° W.>20° SW 250
46. Compact fine-grained trap, containing geodes of agate, in which calc spar frequently
occupies the center 350
47. Porphyritic conglomerate and sandstone; N. 8° W.>21° W 30
48. Compact fine-grained trap, containing agates in many places 72
16, 208
This thickness does not inchide the basal sandstone to be mentioned below. It is to be
noted that in the 5,729 feet at the bottom of the section there is only one layer of sediment — a
sandstone 12 feet thick. In the remainder of the section, 10,479 feet, conglomerates and sand-
stones are interstratified at several places, the thickest bed being S.52 feet thick and lying at the
bottom of the part containing sandstones and conglomerates. Thus the lower third of the
middle Keweenawan is essentially igneous and the upper two-thirds consists of igneous and
sedimentary rocks.
At Mamainse, Pointe aux Mines, and Cape Choyye the lower Keweenawan beds are con-
glomerates and sandstones. At Mamainse these basal beds of sandstone, according to Mac-
farlane," seem to have a very considerable thickness. At Pointe aux Mines, according to
Logan,* there are sandstones at the base of the series nearly in contact with the gneiss. At
Cape Choyye the basal bed is a red sandstone of considerable thickness. However, at Cape
Gargantua and at Batchewanung Bay the amygdaloidal trap rests unconformably upon the
Archean, and thus at these points igneous rocks are at the lowest horizon of the Keweenawan
series.
Thus for eastern Lake Superior the Keweenawan may be divided into lower Keweenawan
and middle Keweenawan, the former being represented by the sediments at the bottom of the
series and the latter by the lavas and interstratified sediments.
The dips at Mamainse are 20° to 30° lakewartl, and fi'om these amounts on the east coast
they range up to 60°, as at Gros Cap. In general direction the strike of the strata of the Kewee-
nawan of the east coast curves in and out, corresponding to the minor folds of the synchnorium,
but the average strike is somewhat west of north, corresponding with the general direction of
the east coast, and the dips are to the west, varying from as low as 10° at Cape Choyye to as
high as 45° or even 60° at Gros Cap. The usual dips, however, run between 20° and 35°.
From the general relation of the Cambrian sandstone (Sault Ste. Marie, "Eastern" or Pots-
dam sandstone of several wTitcrs) and its extensions adjacent to the Keweenawan, Logan con-
cluded that there was an unconformity between the two. He says:''
The contrast between the general moderate dips of these sandstones and the higher inclination of the igneous
strata at Gargantua, Mamainse, and Gros Cap, combined with the fact that the sandstones always keep to the lake side
of these, while none of the many dikes which cut the trappean strata, it is believed, are known to intersect the sand-
stones (at any rate on the Canadian side of the lake), seems to support the suspicion that the sandstones may overlie
unconformably those rocks which, associated with the trap, constitute the copper-bearing series.
GENEEAL CONSIDEEATION OF THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
LOWER KEWEENAWAN.
In reference to the lower Keweenawan, it need here only be remarked that these sediments
are in no way pecuHar. They are derived from the preexisting Huronian and Archean precisely
as similar detrital formations are built up. At the bottom are conglomerates ; over these lie
sandstones; and in the Black and Nipigon bay districts above these are interstratified marls,
hmestones, shales, and sandstones.
a Report of progress from 1863 to 1S06, Geol. Survey Canada, ISGO, p. 134.
t> Report of progress to 1803, Geol. Survey Canada, 18G3, p. 82.
c Idem. p. 85.
394 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Thoui^li it is not known that sediments were everywhere deposited at the base of the Kewee-
nawan, it is a remarkable fact that in most places where the actual contact between the non-
intrusive ])arts of (ho Keweenawan and the next underlyinfj rocks can l>e seen such sediments
occur. Those deposits liave their greatest vohnne and widest extent in tlie n-gion about Black
and Nipigon bays, where the tliickness is variously estimated from 550 to 1,400 feet. In north-
eastern Minnesota, at the base of the series is the Puckwunge conglomerate. In Micliigan, at
Black River, at the bottom of the succession is a basal sandstone known to be 300 feet thick,
and it may be considerably thicker than this, occupying a part of the unexposed area to the
soutli. How far this sandstone extends east and west is not known, as the formations next
underlying tlie Keweenawan are not usually exposed. However, the formation is known to be
present north of Ironwood and also in sec. 11, T. 45 N., R. 1 W., near Potato River, in Wisconsin,
more than 20 miles west of Black River (Michigan). At the latter place the conglomerate and
quartzite below the lavas are probably as tliick as at Black River. On the east side of Lake
Superior the actual contacts between the pre-Keweenawan and the Keweenawan are found
at a number of localities, and at the more extensive of these exposures the lowest formation
of the Keweenawan is a conglomerate, although at other locahties the lavas he directly against
the gneiss. Where the lowest Keweenawan rock is an intrusive, as for instance the Duluth
gabbro, this must of course be excluded from all consid<>ration in connection with the oldest
formation of the Keweenawan. Also there must be excluded from consideration the localities,
such as Keweenaw Point and western Wisconsin, where the base of the Keweenawan is not
exposed.
MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN.
The middle Keweenawan was the great epoch of combined igneous and aqueous activities.
There are two divisions of its rocks — original igneous and derived sedimentary.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
VARIETIES.
The igneous rocks constitute a province of rather remarkable uniformity. The different
kinds anil their relations are substantially the same in each of the important districts. Chem-
ically the igneous rocks include basic, acidic, and intermediate varieties. The basic materials
overwhelmingly dominate, the acidic rocks are considerable in quantity, and the intermediate
rocks are few and local. Each variety of rocks includes both intrusive and extrusive facies,
so that the basic, acidic, and intermediate gi'oups all have textures characteristic for plutonic
and volcanic rocks. Barring the work of KIoos and Streng," which was limitetl in scope, Pum-
pelly* made the first careful petrographic study of the Keweenawan rocks. In general Irving'
followed PumpeUy in the use of terms, but his studies were more extensive and disclosed new
variations.
According to Irving, the basic plutonic igneous rocks comprise olivinitic and nonolivinitic
gabbros, olivinitic and nonolivinitic diabases, and "anorthite rock." Tiie surface varieties
include melaphyres, porphyrites, and amygdaloitls. The coarser-grained melapluTes have
often been called dolerites, diabases, or ophites, depending on their texture. The deep-seated
phase of the acidic rocks is granite, augitic, or Jiornblendic, and the extrusive phase is made up
of porpliyry, cjuart ziferous and nonquartziferous, and felsite. The intermediate rocks occur in
subordinate amounts. The most important intrusive phases of them are described by Irving
as augite syenites and orthoclase gabbros, and the extrusive varieties as porjiliyrites. The term
"trap" is used by Irving in its usual sense to include both basic and intermediate fine-grained
rocks.
<■ Slreng, A. , and KIoos, J. H. , tjber die krystallinisohcn Gcsteine von Minnesola in Nord-Amerilta: Neiies Jahrb., 1877.
ii Pnmpelly, Rapliael, Copper-bearing rocl<s: Gcol. Survey Mii-tilgan, vol. 1, pt. 2. 1873, pp. l-)(i, 62-94.
c Irving, R. D. , Tlie copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Oool. Survey, vol. 5, 1SS3.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 395
The plutonic ijineous rocks arc. very little altered. The very readily changeable ohvine
may be altered to cldorite, serpentine, etc., to a small extent. The augite and plagioclase are
locally chloritized, but still these alterations are purely sul)ordinate.
The volcanic rocks are much altered. This is especially true of the vesicular amygdaioidal
basic lavas. In these rocks the original minerals, which were dominantly augite, olivine,
plagioclase feldspars, magnetite, and glassy base, have been extensively altered and the vesicules
of the amygdaloids filled with secondary j)roducts. These are mainly alterations of the belt of
cementation m the zone of katamorphism. A complicated set of secondary minerals has been
produced, of which the following are very common: Various zeolites, such as laumontite,
thomsonite, stilbite, and mesolite; also calcite, chlorite, epidote, quartz, prehnite, orthoclase,
hematite, and limonite. '
The acidic rocks, the origmal minerals of which were mainly quartz, orthoclase, plagioclase,
and glass, have also been extensively decomposed, with the development of much secondaiy
quartz and other alteration jiroducts, which are not always completely determinable but which
certaml}' include epidote and chlorite. Hematite and limonite are common. Many microliths
Jiave formed, the exact nature of which it is difficult to determine.
REVIEW OF NOMENCLATURE OF KEWEENAWAN IGNEOUS ROCKS."
By Alexander N. Winohell.
The Keweenawan igneous rocks of the Lake Superior region have been studied and dis-
cussed by many geologists during the past thirty years. At the beginnmg of that period
microscopic petrography' was in its infancy and mmor errors, due to faulty methods, inevitably
resulted. In the course of the years these have been gradually corrected, involving changes
of nomenclature. Some variations in nomenclature have resulted from the varying points
■of views of the authors. But the general progress of petrography has brought more numerous
and important modifications.
In order to make the names used by the prominent writers on the subject more readily
intelligible, a correlation of these names is presented herewith. It must be remembered that,
since the basis of petrographic classification used by the authors has varied somewhat, such a
correlation can be only an approximation, but it will nevertheless serve the purpose of showing
the various changes that have occurred and of presenting, at least in its outlines, the main facts
of nomenclature of each writer.
In order to give precision to such a correlation, it is desirable that the nomenclature of
each writer be compared, not simply with that used by other authors but also with an expressed
and definite classification. Therefore the following classification has been prepared, on the
basis of textures and mineral composition. It is not a general classification of igneous rocks
but is intended to include merely the tyj^es represented in the Keweenawan of the Lake Supe-
rior region.
a Revision of article published in Jour. Geology, vol. 16, 1908, pp. 765-774. Originally prepared for this monograph.
396 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Mineralogical classification of Keweenawan igneom rocks of the Lnl-e Superior region.
Texture.
Chief feldspar orthoclase.
Orthoclase with
equal plagioclase.
h Quartz.
-Quartz.
± Mica± Amphibolei Pyroxene.
± Microcllne.
Granitic.
Granite.
Ophitic.
Porphyritic (pheno-
crysts prominent).
Felsitic or porphyritic
(phenocrysts tew).
Fragraental.
Glassy.
Rhyollte porphyry
(quartz por-
phyry).
Rhyolite.
+Anorthoclase.
Soda granite.
Quartz kerato-
phyre.
Quartz kerato-
phyre.
± Microcllne.
Syenite.
Trachyte por-
phyry.
Trachyte.
Monzonlte.
Chief feldspar plagioclase.
With quartz.
+MonocIinic pyroxene.
+ Orthoclase.
Orthoclase gabbro
Orthoclase diabase
-Orthoclase.
Quartz gabbro.
Quartz diabase.
Acidic tufls.
Obsidian.
Texture.
Granitic.
Ophitic.
Chief feldspar plagioclase — Continued.
With quartz— Continued.
Without quartz.
+ Orthorhombic
pyroxene.
Quartz norlte.
Quartz-enstatite
diabase.
Porphyritic (pheno-
crysts prominent).
Felsitic or porphyritic
(phenocrysts few).
Fragmental.
-l-.\mphiboIe. , No ferromagnesian
± Biotite. ' mineral.
Quartz diorite.
Dacite.
Plagloclasite.
-(-.\mphibole.
± Biotite.
Diorite.
Andesite por-
phyry.
Andesite.
-I-Monocllnic pyroxene.
-Olivine.
Gabbro.
Diabase.
Augite andesite
porphyry.
Augite andesite.
+ Olivine.
Olivine gabbro.
Olivine diabase.
Basalt porphyry.
Basalt.
Basalt tuffs.
Glassy. . |
Tachylyte.
Chief feldspar plagioclase— Continued.
No feldspar.
Without quartz— Continued.
-l-OUvme.
± Pvroxenei .\mphibole± Biotite.
Texture.
-1- Orthorhombic pyro-xene.
+ Monoclinic py-
roxene.
-Olivine.
-1- OIi\-lne.
-OUvine.
-1- OUvine.
Granitic.
Augite norlte.
Norlte.
Olivine norlte.
Troctollte.
Pyroxenite.
Peridotlte.
Ophitic.
Hypcrsthcne diabase
PorphyrKlc (pheno-
crysts prominent).
Felsitic or porphyritic
(phenocrysts few).
1
Fragmental.
Basalt tuffs.
Glassy.
Tachylyte.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 397
Macfarlane," in 1S66, described the Keweenawan rocks of Michipicoten Island. He found
melaphyre, trap, amygdaloid, quartz porpliyry, porphyrite, and trachytic phonolite. His
"quartz porphyry," which occurred at the contact of the sandstone and trap, was doubtless
a modified quartzite. His "trachytic phonolite" is not fully described, and correlation is
uncertain.
Kloos,'' in 1871, described gabbro or hypersthenite, black porphyry or melaphyre, por-
phyry, and amygdaloid. The first named was probably a gabbro and the second a diabase.
Pumpelly,'^ in 1873, described melaphyre, trap, and amygdaloid without microscopic
study; ho distinguished three kinds of melaphyre — coarse grained, fine grained, and melaphyre
porphyry. Correlations of these names are impracticable and woukl bo misleatiing rather than
helpful.
Marvine,'* in the same year, described melaphyre, trap, diorite, and amygdaloid. Pum-
pelly later claimed, probably correctly, that Marvine's diorite mcluded samples of diabase,
melaphyre, and gabbro, but no true diorite.
Strong,*^ in 1877, described melaphyre, melaphyre porphyry, and hornblende gabbro from,
the Keweenawan of Minnesota. He published chemical analyses of two of these, which permit
their correlation on the quantitative basis. (See table on p. 402.)
Pumpelly,/ m 1878, described the alterations which some of the Keweenawan rocks had
siiffered in great detail, but brought to light no additional varieties of the unaltered rocks.
The same author,!' in 1880, identified eight or ten kinds of igneous rocks in the Keweena-
wan. (See table on p. 400.) He distinguished diallage from augite by means of the parting in
the former, and, in accordance with the usage at that time, called a massive igneous rock con-
taining plagioclase and diallage a gabbro, wliile one containing plagioclase and augite he called
a diabase. But all the diabase covered by his descriptions and illustrations seems to have an
opliitic texture. liis identifications of the plagioclase feldsijars were all based on incorrect
methods, so that his so-called albite and oligoclase are actually andesine-oligoclase, his lab-
radorite is andesine, and his anorthite is chiefly labradorite -with some bytownite.
Irving'* followed the practice of Pumpelly, but described about twice as many petrographic
varieties. He protested agamst the practice of basing rock names on any such distinction as
that between diallage and augite, but followed the custom , nevertheless, in the main, although
he tried to discriminate between diabase and gabbro on the basis of coarseness of crystalhzation,
assigning the name gabbro to the coarser grained varieties. Irvuig's orthoclase gabbro has
been called hornblende gabbro by Wadsworth and porphyritic gabbro by N. II. Winchell; it
is nearly the same as Lane's gabbro-aplite ; recently it has been called oligoclase gabbro by
F. E. Wright.*'
N. H. Winchell,-' m 1881, described thin sections of dolerite, labradorite rock, hyperite,
and gabbro. He made the name "dolerite" so general in meanmg as to include gabbro, diabase,
olivine gabbro, olivine diabase, augite andesite, and basalt. His "labradorite rock" was called
"anorthite rock" by Irving and is now called plagioclasite (or anorthosite) ; his hyperite is
now known as norite.
Wadsworth,* in 1887, proposed a new classification of the Keweenawan igneous rocks on
the basis of the alterations wluch a given type has undergone. Thus a gabbro whose augite
had altered to hornblende he would call a gabbro-diorite. A peridotite may by alteration
become a serpentine or a talc schist ; in either case Wadsworth would call it still a peridotite,
addmg a name to indicate its present condition. Consequently, a rock called, for example, a
a Macfarlane, Thomas, Report of progress from 1863 to 18fi6, Geol. Survey Canada, 1868.
b Kloos. J. II., Zeitschr. Deutsch. geol. Gesell., 1871, p. 417.
c Tumpelly, Raphael, Geology of Michigan, vol. 1, pt. 2, 1S73.
d Marvine, A. R., idem.
' Streng, A., Neues Jahrb., 1877.
/ Pumpelly, Raphael, Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci., vol. 1.3, 1878, p. 285.
g Pumpelly, Raphael, Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 27-49.
Ii Irving, R. D., Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 107-200; Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. ,'>, 1883; Geology of Wisconsin, vol. 1,1883, p. 340.
>■ Wright, F. E., Science, vol. 27, June, IMS, p. 892. .
i Winchell, N. n., Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 30, 1881, p. 100.
i Wadsworth, M. E., Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota No. 2, 1887.
398 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
gabbro by Wadswortli may belong to any one of a dozen types as commonly recognized. Never-
theless, Wadsworth's names as actually applied in tliis case may be correlated approximately
with the names of otlier writers, as shown in the tal)le on page 400.
Wadswortli huiorsed Irving's protest against using the distinction between augite and
diallage as a basis of rock classification, and yet, like Irving, he used it. He did not discrimi-
nate sharply between the ophitic and the poikilitic textures, both of which may be found,
sometimes together, m jMimiesota diabases.
Bayley," in 1889-1897, described the gabbro batholith of Minnesota in considerable detail
and also studietl tlie peripheral phases of the ga})bro. To emphasize the close connection in
origin between the peridotite and the gabbro of tlie district, he called the former nonfeldspathic
gabbro. Although some of the peripheral phases described by Bayley may be of later date
than the gabbro, if we assume that they all belong in the Keweenawan, we fbid that Bayley
recognizes not only the augite syenite of Irving, but also a porphyritic equivalent which he calls
quartz keratophyre on account of the presence of anorthoclase. He speaks of ohvine-pyroxene
aggi'egates which should apparently be correlated with wehrhte, dimite, and pyroxenite.
In tlie peripheral phases he finds a texture which he considers somewhat characteristic;
it consists of the presence of many rormded grains of the more important constituents inclosed
by other minerals. Bayley calls it the granulitic texture. It has been called the contact
structure by Salomon and the globular by Fouque. It is well described by the term globular
or globuhtic.
Grant,' m 1893 and 1894, described gabbro, diabase, granite, and fuie-grained rocks pre-
viously called muscovadites in the Minnesota reports. Grant's granite is the equivalent of
Irving's augite syenite, later called soda-augite granite by Bayley. (See table on p. 400.) The
fuie-grained rocks, called muscovadites, mclude border facies of the gabbro mass of various
types, but especially norite, fuie-graiiied gabbro often with hypersthene, ohvuie norite, cordierite
norite, etc.
Hubbard,<^ in 1898, described various types of the Keweenawan of Keweenaw Point. His
melapliyre is cliiefly andesite or basalt; Ms doleritic melaphyre is a coarser basalt or a gabbro;
his ophitic nielaphyre is a poikilitic and luster-mottled diabase; and liis porphyrite is cliiefijr
andesite and trachyte.
Lane,"^ in 1898-1906, described the Keweenawan rocks of Isle Royal and northern Micliigan.
His melapliyre porphyrite is the equivalent of Pumpelly's "Ashbed" diabase and Ii-ving's
diabase porphyrite. Lane's melapliyre ojjhite is an olivine diabase, luster-mottled by means of
poikilitic textures; his doleritic melaphyre is a basalt porphyry. Lane would confine the name
diabase to dike rocks. His augite syenite is said to be at least in part an equivalent of Bayley's
quartz diabase. He uses the term ophitic in a narrow sense, not justified b}'' the original defi-
nition of Michel Levy,* nor by his usage./ He applies it to those luster-mottled rocks in which
single pyroxene individuals inclose several plagioclase crystals, usually lath-shaped and irregularly
placed. It denotes thus, for Lane, a variety of the poikilitic texture. In its original meaning,
still commonly used by many and adopted here, it refers to that texture of a basic igneous
rock produced when the plagioclase crystallizes in lath-shaped forms before the pyroxene
solidifies.
A. N. Winchell,^ in 1900, described in detail a few samples of the Keweenawan rocks of
Minnesota. He used the new term jdagioclasite for the rocks previously known usually as
anorthosites.
a Bayley, W. S., Am. Jour. Sol., 3ci ser., vol. 37, 18S9, p. 54; vol. 39, 1890, p. 273; Bull. U. S. Oeol. Surrey No. 109, 1893; Jour. Geology, vol. 1,
1893, p. 433; vol. 2, 1894, p. S14; vol. 3, 1895, p. 1 ; Mon. U. S. C.eol. Survey, vol. 2S, 1S97, p. ,il9.
ft Grant, U. S., Twenty-first Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1893, p. 5: Twenty-second Ann. Rept., 1894, p. 70.
I- lluhbani, L. L., Oeol. Survey Michigan, vol. (1, pt. 2, 1898.
d Lane, A. C, Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898; Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 14, 1903, pp. 369, 385; Jour. Geology, vol. 12, 1904, p. 83;.
Ann. Kept. Geol. Survey Michigan for liKB, 1905, pp. 205, 239; idem for 1904, 1905, p. 113; I'roc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 12, 1906, p. 85.
c Bull, Soc. gSol. I'"rance, vol. 0, 1878. p. 158.
/ Min(?raIogie micrographuine. 1879, ?1. XXXVI. See also p. 153.
0 Winchell, .\. N., Am. Geologist, vol. 20, 1900, pp. 151 (197), 261, 348.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 399
N. H. Winchell and U. S. Grant" publislied in 1 noo hy far the most complete accounts of
tlie peti'ogiaphy of the Keweenawan igneous rocks. Theii- nomenclature varies very little
from that commonly in use at present. They described practically all the petrographic types
of the Keweenawan ])reviously known and added some half dozen new varieties. They used
diorite-porphyrite or diabase-porphyrite to designate more or less ophitic types of andesite
porphyry or augite andesite porphyry. They used Wadsworth's name zirkelite for a devitri-
fied basalt, basaltic tuff, or tachylyte; devitrified obsidian they called an apobsidian, and a
devitriftod rhyolite an apoi-hyolite, as suggested by Bascom. Wadsworth's quartz-biotite dio-
rite is called syenite by Grant. It is an intermediate type corresponding to a monzonite.
o Winchell, N. H., and Grant, U. S., Final Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, vol. 5, 1900.
400
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Rl
i
•a
(9
i
s
2
1
1
i
.a
•a
i
w
5
3
2
2
g.
0
i
a
S
o
s
1
Pi
a
3
§
1
o
eg
.1
p.
S3
2
o
1
o
1
1
05
U
M
C3
a
0*
2
a
B
1
2
5
OS
II
H
i
2
i
■3
0
ill
0
a
a
ft
2
S
-<
2
1
<
■o
li
1
>>
o
p.
1
2
1
3
O
(X
03
1
— .2
o
2
t
1
2
1
i
>>
Eh
o
a
eg
U)
o
9
1
>»
a
a
1
1
S
1
5
2
.£3
II
s
.1
•3
i
2
!
0
2
1
«-
g .
a
6
2
^
g|
g
a
a
1
z
1
i
«;
■C
a
O
§
S
g
1
b
9
>>
&
a
3
li
III
C
ag'S-S
sfsg
o
ft
1
(3
3
2
0) «-.
1
it
3.2 (-.
G?0
.2
■3
2
1
2
•E
a
>>
ft
If
<
c?
-.JcJcc
^ciw-v
G?
woi
o
^cJ
H
C?
1-4 C4
CO
o
£
2
CO
>»
tJ
^
li
1-. 0
03
«
0 K
^
i p->> 1
^
b
0
2S
a
e;
.
d
H
3-2
j'
1
i
+^
0
SI
i4
p
&
(S
Q
-^ci
s
d
1
3
i '
1
03 00
. 5t
C OS
2
■3
-
o
^"
1
2
5
^"
o
9
i
S9
o .
d
■T-
^s
2
t-
s
•a-S .
^
c c «
>-t^
o
t
0 £3
2|s:.
Is
1
0)
03 3
oaf
li-g.
S
<§"
<
<-4«
-^oi
.1
03
.u
J3
1
a
g
o
1
O.
o
1
a
1
a
11
■a <D
11
ao
1
5
1
i
1
Q
1
^
OS
s
i
X
t^
e
'H
s.
t^
A
J3
.2 £
&
&
•3 >.
1.
M
a
2
2^
3 a>
Ph
1
1
<s
M
a
S
^ci
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
401
s
03
a
a
s
'i
■a
§
<!
s
<
1
.9
>
o
0
o
Im
t
«
3
2
1
■5
2
i
a:
a
'C
0
p
P
'.E
0
a;
P
X
2
1
1
Oh
on
n
2
a
a
">
o
1
o
Q
■m
0
1
s
a
o'3
P-.
0
fp
3
.1
2
bC
0)
P
<o
JZ
1
>
s
2
0
.2
■3
C
1
1
a
6
a
0
2
0
p
£3
6 '
1
2
Ph
0
Oh
e
O
0}
S
X!
ta
bD
CD
9
>
o
'2
§
0
m
2
1
8
0
1
•3
i
.2
o
&
sS .
lis.
2
1
§
'So
<
eg s
mm
"» "33 'ji! :i: tj
SS 0
.-H c-i CO
S
s
•§
£
p.
.2
a
^ 1^
p. °
£ ■- •
x 0 -^
^£2 TD't.
■1t.2||
x;
a
i
"0
1
i
t
•c
V
o
0
£
1
a
5
P.
s
1
0
1
1
1
1
£
1
a
s
1
1
Ml
.3
>
s
u
00
p
1
1
K
a
Ph
_o
c 0
g£
0
s
•i
P.
p
0
2;
5
1
if
GO
-4 01 ,
i
«a
ll
52
fee
.-"'ct
li
rH(N
li
ID
t
e-
o
Ph
H
if
•<.2
: a
^c4
is
C P
o5
is
00a
.— 'cicc
1
P
1
& .
d p,
— ■ C3
OS
.1
0
■5-3
— (S
ii
i
o
n
s i
Ml
ca
XJ
M
47517°— VOL 52—11-
-26
402
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
■'S>
ex
S
S5,
3
CO
s
o
Is
§1
3 a
^1
^ 1
^ 3
si
=11
CO 2
cm' g
'1
"^ o
^1
J
Mug
-J-—
•J- c
'^* o
^rt
. 0.3
■ s
.^
• a
. » 03
.-^
C-o
>-;a
-;►-)
r-;3
.-;h
s.<
Ke-
==>
5<:
«-*;
Sn
«^
sj,
.TiJ=«
— O ■
p «
0<3 —
cj 0
III
<S
•53 5
'^
0
_
_ .
_ , „
« j^
.aj5
P es «
1'-
■§=:
a=
.So
lid
III
25 gi
^2
txr S
->i""
Ph
0
o*
•o"
i«
* A fl
•ij-
■lia'
(D & R,
Sa.
1.2
"Wo
°%a
oW-3
•^ «';d
.^ o
z f^
Z,''-
0. 1^
T 0 Si
IE
«^.
-51 =
W o
2.11=.
.iJ
s^*
ojcc c:j3
ffirf , ^
— (- aj::
P-S.9
^2 0) u
^ S S t>
!« >, 0) 0
^x
^iai
.^i^ pa
Sw£
h3
s
fe
£
fe
'^
>s .
wtn.n
qT
CJ
■3^
i3 .
s-^
1>-S
.«
= .«. aT" og''.
i c'-
ar»J
sic-o 2 So
= 3 3^ ^-^'^
2|g
— a
SI
^^1
1^
0'-.
« n? C
a
o?
■ «3i
Bn
•^ S
f- r^
td =
. a>
!5-g
_'-^
ci^:
«g
K- 00
doT
M
^X
id
ac
a?"
■a tj
Sf a
22.::
OS ^-^
£^^
«^.^
2g
Sil
s s
la'"'
O
5=^
^.
V
V
*".
me
E^"
w
ts
lsgi.2
Is
3«
tf
D._ tX-J © u
•
w.
xtxa"
.li
i
5|
ft.g
«:>
— a^S
a,e<^
CO
£5a
-e^
<
0
K
0
THE KEWEENAW AN SERIES.
403
"1
da
" OJ
=? = §
5S"
2 OS
SO
"1 •
a<!
s n "f^ 0) J o o
0» - ~»^'^.>i,3
o-£x-|S^--fc. >-C-
O Q O
So of
•a ft"
o
o
A nr o ^ <» • +^
= »|-5gao.g
o^-|;5go._g.g
S25Si2o5&a
wo3
si
—Co) 03
t- — r
o o
o.d d o2h a
.saas -a
o o
^ffl.^o'o
C3
.22«Ooa
g £ Q cJja
=* -S <»2
S £■ a oj .-s
Q
="". roo
a
S a-'O •
acj &£+^ So
« K « a o~
■sswgsa
a
•
•
o .
£!'->■
tJ CO
O^
.BJ S=2MO-g
?■ ^^ tt-T « o '^
-■E-h o" .-=0> •-
O -*• C3
= a . g
't> a (B a
~~ ^ ^ _~
o .03;
a eft:
M £: o 3
fe^Sfeg:
c5 "^ _r p, . . 00 t3 c,r
bc^
'to 00
^ CD O)
^ -k^ ■- fe .- •
iffc. •
£•■- r; o oiS OS -av'
p.oft>aj^aciooiHHffi
^<; O^goo^i>gcoo3g
^S==:Da .3oo>73'»
^ 3 S = 2 • " O
a a .sat- .^aiMM .< ^
■^ r- r-" r-*0 2; ■ • - •,'Z>^^i~'^
r..- .55 - >t">>^.a .'■•NiN
=^ 00*— ..._--_,i-ap.
a a oi2-ii oi ji; j.i: o L.^ a a a
is 3 fe.?i°' a— a a a ;! a-i
2 ^
o.5f -CT ..^
a o a< . "3"^
o ^-'^ o o
• - . ."^ S tn'o
f^o-ag?.;^
'n;5 >>. a ft
--•g&ao
a 3 o o "S—
^^ ^ J o»
- r"- a o wi
'^''<;<;-^ ft.
!<!■<
:udo =
0*0 o oTo S
&• t- «s •« 3 ^
&
404
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The quantitative classification of igneous rocks as proposed by Cross, Iddings, Pirsson,
and Wasliington may be used as the basis of a correlation of the Keweenawan igneous rocks.
With respect to chemical comi^osition such a correlation (see table on pp. 402-403) is more
exact than one based on the mineral composition and texture, but it can include only those rock
types of which satisfactory quantitative analyses are available.
An exammation of the table of correlation on this basis will reveal the fact that the num-
ber of satisfactory analyses available is not great, especially when compared with the descrip-
tions previously mentioned. Several of the early analyses arc not included in the tabulation
because of manifest inaccuracy or incompleteness.
The analyses of Streng and Pumpelly are good for the time at which tlicy were made.
Calculation of the norms of the analyses made for Pumpelly by R. W. Woodward yields the
results tabulated below in columns 1, 2, and 3:
1.
Andose,
middle of
bedS7.
2.
Camptonosc
bottom of
bed S7.
3.
Auvergnose,
lower part
of bed 64.
4.
Hessose,
Cleveland
mine.
5.
Vaalose,
Houghton
County, Mich.
5.10
8.34
16.77
32.25
8.46
7.78
42. a
17.24
7.23
22.01
23.91
4.26
22.55
0.56
16.24
36.97
8.90
23.06
10.40
di
15.88
20. .■M
l.U
3.71
1.98
11.02
9.90
13.75
V,v
1.30
17.97
4.41
4.41
20.82
°f
7.47
4.18
5.32
mt
8.45
5.17
5.80
.34
Wio'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'.'..'.
4.51
3.25
2.73
2.W
1.39
100.06
100.18
99.52
99.64
98.92
Sweet published two analyses of Keweenawan rocks. One, of diabase from the Ashland
mine, Ashland County, Wis., is wholly unsatisfactory; the other, which represents a "greenish-
gray diabase" from the Fond du Lac copper mine, Douglas County, Wis., seems to be approxi-
mately correct. As it stands it classifies as bandose, but this is on the basis of a content of 13
per cent of magnetite and 10 per cent of quartz. Both of these figures are extremely improbable
for this rock, and point to an error in the determination of the state of oxidation of the iron.
If the analysis is corrected in tliis particular it classifies as hessose.
The analyses of gabbros published by Wadsworth are recalculated in Washington's tables
of chemical analyses of igneous rocks ;° the norms of his diabase-granophyrites from the Cleve-
land mme and from Houghton County are given in columns 4 and 5 of the table above. Wash-
mgton's tables give full details regarding the recalculation of the analyses of Keweenawan
rocks pubUshed by Van Hise, N. H. Winchell, and Bayley.
The norms of the analyses reported by Hubbard may be summarized as foUows:
Magdebur-
gose.
Tehamose.
Lebachose.
Umptekose.
Akerose.
No. 17039.
No. 17007.
Q
38.58
1.94
39.48
10.77
48.90
18.60
1.14
c
26.13
18.34
3.61
70.61
.52
20.57
57.64
1.67
20. .57
57. M
15.01
ab.
48.21
7.78
2.27
3.70
3.69
4.16
3.66
1.43
.86
di
.12
5.62
2.70
.43
5.18
hv
of
3.22
5.57
5.92
1.23
5.32
.46
1.92
.41
.70
1.28
1.03
d.ra
3.04
2.23
8.12
4.00
HjO
.42
2.76
99.56
lOO.U
100.27
100.64
. 100.55
100.07
o Washington, H. S., Prof. Paper U. S. Geol. Survey No. 14, 1903.
THE KEWEENAW AN SERIES.
405
It is to be remarked that not one of these rock types described by Hubbard corresponds
chemically with any variety described by any otlier author. The fact suggests possible inaccu-
racies in Hubbard's analyses.
Lane's analyses, as well as Hubbard's, were overlooked and omitted from Washington's
tables. Recalculations of the anatyses given by Lane yield tlic following norms:
Tonalose-
dacose.
Andose.
Beerba-
chose.
Hessose.
Auvergnose.
No. V.
No. VI.
No. IV.
No. VII.
No. 8
Light-
house
Point.
St. Mary
Land Co.
Mount
Bohemia.
o
13.08
1.02
17.79
36.15
16.90
1.80
6.12
28.82
24. 19 .
2.84
3.80
6.12
23.58
30.30
4.26
18.41
2.78
46.59
20.02
1.67
28.82
34.19
2.78
21.48
41.14
3.89
18.35
36.14
1.C7
20.96
31.41
10. OL
ab
18.34-
31.69'
di
1.30
2.76
12.58
11.37
10. 06
1.56
12.97
6.50
10. 64
5.76
6.01
10.44
13.62
10.77
13. 06
3.71
i2.74
12.20
1.36.
hv
11.00
21.62
o\
23.25
3.94
2.10
11.14
2.08
2.32
10.67
2.24
4.10
.34
1.10
.10
.67
7.42
il
1.98
4.71
.34
.90
2.30
2.00
.70
.36
HjO
5.01
3.49
2.82
3. 90
1.83
100.30
98.87
101.62
101.22
100.27
100.78
100.14
100.00
97. 2J
Lane's gabbro-aphte differs in its norm from the orthoclase gabbro of Duluth in having
a greater abundance of quartz and also a greater proportion of alkalies as compared with salic
lime. His porphyrite VI, on the contrary, belongs to the same type (andose) as the orthoclase
gabbro. His porphyrite No. 1 is a beerbachose; the others belong to the classes hessose and
auvergnose, so well represented in the Keweenawan.
The analyses published by A. N. Winchell in 1900 were recalculated by Washington with the
exception of that of the troctolite, the nOrm of which is given with those derived from the new
analyses of diabase in the secoml table below.
In view of the scarcity of analyses of the typical volcanic rocks of the Keweenawan the fol-
lowing new analyses are of much interest. They were made by George Steiger in the laboratory
of the Survey.
Analyses of Keweenawan diabase.
1.
2.
1.
2.
Si02
47. 69
16.02
2.41
8.70
8.31
10.54
2.44
None.
.44
2.04
1.38
50.07
12. 63
3. 84
10.30
5.23
6.65
3. .53
1.90
.86
1.96
2.50
ZrOj
None.
None.
.06
None.
None.
.26
None.
None.
None.
MjOj
CO2
FejOs
PoOj
02
FeO
SO3
M^O
s
None.
CaO
MuO
.42
lsja.,0
BaO
.02
KsO . ..
SrO
TI2O
H2O+
100. 29
100.03
TiOs
1. Olivine diabase from bed 108, Eagle River section, Greenstone Cliff, Keweenaw Point, Mich. Sample No. 5 of Rohn's collection of Lake
Superior rocks. Rock powdered to pass a 100-mesh sieve before analysis.
2. "Ashhed" diabase from bed i'..i, Ea^Ie River section, Keweenaw Point, Mich. Sample No. 7 of Rohn's collection of Lake Superior
rocks. Rock powdered to pass a 100-mesh sieve before analysis, thus improving the accuracy of the figures for ferrous iron and water.
406
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Recalculation of these analyses, together with that of the troctolite, on the basis of the quan-
titative classification gives the following norms:
Olivine
dial)ase.
"Ashbed"
diabase.
Troctolite.
or
11.12
29.87
13.07
2.22
ab
20.44
32.80
7.86
an
28.63
5.11
dl
15.60
15.04
7.08
3.48
2.74
.14
15.12
15.32
2.00
.5. 57
4.71
.50
5.91
hy •
of
30.21
10.67
il
4.41
MnO
.18
HjO 1.
2.48
2.82
6.23
100.38
lOO.lO
100.43
The olivine diabase belongs to the same class as the olivine gabbros of Birch Lake, the dia-
base of Lighthouse Point, ami several others — that is, to the auvergnose type, which seems to be
the dominant ty])e of the Keweenawan, although the hessose type, which differs only in having
a greater proportion of salic minerals, is also fairly abundant. But the "Ashbed " diabase classi-
fies as a camptonose, very near a kilauose. It is therefore related to Irving's melaphyre of bed
87 of the Eagle River section, and to the more basic phases of the orthoclase gabbro of Duluth.
On summarizing the results of this correlation of chemical analyses of Keweenawan igneous
rocks on the basis of the quantitative classification, it appears that eight analyses belong toClass I,
the persalanes, in wliich less than one-eighth of the rock consists of ferric minerals; 22 analyses
fall in Class II, the dosalanes, in wliich more than one-eighth and less than three-eighths of the
rock consists of ferric minerals; 14 analyses belong in Class III, the salfemanes, in wliich the salic
and ferric constituents are in nearly equal proportions; while the single remaining rock represents
Class IV, the dofemanes, in wliich the ferric constituents make up about three-fourths of the
whole.
Barring the peculiar analyses of Hubbard and the hypersthene gabbro of Bayley, which is
kno^\^l to be a border facies, several general characteristics of the Keweenawan igneous rocks
appear. The salic constituents always make up at least one-half of the rock; they are usually
all feldspar and everywhere are dominantly feldspar; quartz is nowhere very abundant: and the
lenads are almost unknown in the norms, as they are also in the modes. In all except the Pigeon
Point rocks and one sample from Mount Bohemia, the anortliite molecules either equal or domi-
nate over the alkali feldspar molecules and the albite molecules dominate over orthoclase.
Still other relations may be brought out by considering separately the analyses belonging to
each class.
Class I. The eight persalanes fall in six subrangs, half of wliich are due to Hubbard's
analyses. They range from the quartz-rich felsites of Hubbard to tlie quartz-free plagioclasite.
The four intermediate types, belonging to two subrangs, are all derived from Pigeon Pouit.
In all the rocks of tliis class except the plagioclasite, alkali feldspar molecules greatly pre-
dominate over anortliite, and orthoclase is notably abundant in only two of the rocks.
Class II. The 22 dosalanes fall in nine subrangs, but these would be reduced to seven if
compound names like beerbachose-andose were omitted. These rocks are chiefly perfelic, con-
taining no quartz, but four samples are quardofelic, from the presence of small amounts of
quartz. The silica in no case falls so low as to produce lenails. Here, as in (Mass I, the anortliite
molecules dominate over the alkali feldspars in only one subrang, in (his case hessose. The
albite molecules always dominate over the orthoclase.
Class in. The 14 salfemanes fall in four sui)rangs, and 10 of them fall in a single subrang,
namely auvergnose, wliich undoubtedly represents the prevailing rock tA'pe of the Keweena-
wan of the district. The commonest variation from this type is an increase of salic constitu-
ents, with no other change. Tliis produces hessose, of which eight analyses are recorded. The
silica content of the rocks of Class III is high enough in all cases to prevent normative lenads;
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 407
6nly one analysis shows any normative quartz. In tlic felilspars tlie albitc molecules again
dominate clearly over the orthoclase.
Class IV. The single analysis falling in Class IV is clearly not representative; it is a border
facies of the great gabbro intrusion. It is characterized by dominance of ferric constituents, of
which pyroxene is the most important. It is low in soda and lime and liigh in ferrous iron, and
especially in magnesia.
It is to be expected that additional analyses of the Keweenawan volcanic rocks would disclose
still other types, especially such as would parallel the Ivnown plutonic types. The parallelism in
composition already established is remarkable, considering the relatively small number of analyses
available. Thus it appears that Lane's porphyrite (No. IV) and opliite (No. VII), as well as
Sweet's Douglas County diabase and Wadsworth's diabase-granophyrite from the Cleveland
mine, are the chemical equivalents among the volcanic and dike rocks of Bayley's olivine gabbro
from Pigeon Point and from T. 61 N., R. 12 W., and of A. N. Winchell's ohvine gabbro and
diabase from Birch Lake among the plutonic rocks. Again, Pumpelly's melaphyre from the
middle of bed 87 and Lane's porphj'rite (Nos. V and VII) from Isle Royal correspond chemically
with the coarse hornblende gabbro and orthoclase gabbro from Duluth. Finally, the same
chemical type, auvergnose, includes plutonic rocks such as Bayley's gabbro and olivine gabbro
from Birch Lake, N. H. Winchell's gabbro from Bashitanaquab Lake, and A. N. Winchell's
troctolite, together with volcanic or dike rocks, such as Pumpelly's melaphyre from bed 64, Van
Hise's Gogebic County diabase, and Lane's ophite from the property of the St. Mary Land Com-
pany and from Mount Bohemia.
THE GRAIN OF KEWEENAWAN IGNEOUS ROCKS THE PRACTICAL USE OF OBSERVATIONS. "
A. C. Lane has found that the grain of the Keweenawan igneous rocks has sufficiently close
relation to the size and tliickness of the masses to be of some jiractical importance in explora-
tory work. Lane's theory of the causes of the variations in grain is not here discussed; it may
bo found in his papers.' The facts which he has developed are briefly as follows:
The Keweenawan igneous rocks most commonly occur in dikes, sills, sheets, and lava floods.
It is found in most places in the Lake Superior region that crystallization in such forms has
resulted in finer grain near the margin and coarser grain near the center. "The relative coarse-
ness of crystaUization may be determined by measuring grains of any mineral, but experience
shows that in the Keweenawan rocks of the Lake Superior region measurement of the grains of
pyroxene (augite) is usually most feasible and most satisfactory. Such measurements show
that the size of grain in narrow dikes increases from the margin to the center, the size at any
point being approximately proportional to the distance from the margin. In wider dikes
measurements show a coarse central zone of variable width in which the pj^roxene grains have
approximately equal size or increase much more slowly. On each side of this central zone the
law already stated is found to hold approximately. In surface flows, where convection was
probably active, the size of grain of the augite increases usually all the way from the margin
to the center. In wide dikes and thick flows the augite is found to increase in size at a rapid
rate near the margin and at a much slower rate near the center. The rapid rate of increase is
confined to a marginal zone, usually less than 10 feet wide. The slower rate of increase is
fairly uniform for any one flow, and in the luster-mottled melaphyres or ophites is usually
between 1 milUmeter in 10 feet and 1 millimeter in 20 feet, or say 1 millimeter in 3 to 5 meters.
In more feldspathic flows it is less. The very highest rate of increase in the inner zone is
1 millimeter for each 8.5 feet, but in most cases the rate comes out as 1 millimeter in 11 to
16 feet. This refers to the linear diameters of the augite grains, as indicated by the mottlings
on the drill cores. It makes some difference whether they are measured in this way, or by the
luster mottUngs due to the Hashes in the sunlight, or by the knobs in the weathered surface.
a Adapted from article by A. C. Lane.
liBull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 8. 1S9G, pp. 403—107; Geological report on Isle Royalei Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, 189S, pp. IDiVlol; Am.
Jom-. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 14, 1902, pp. 39.3-395; Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 14, 1903, pp. 309-400; Ann. Kept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1903,
1904, pp. 205-237; idem for 1904, 1905, pp. 147-153, 163; idem for 1908, 1909, pp. 380-384; Am. Geologist, vol. 35, 1905, pp. 05-72; Jour. Canadian Miu.
Inst., vol ?, Die Korngrosse der .\uvergnosen: Suppl. to Rosenbusch Festschrift, 1900; Tufts' College Studies, ITI, pp; 41-42.
408 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The practical applications of this study of the size of augite grains in mining have been
numerous, especially where contacts of igneous rock are an important factor, as in the Keweenaw
copper mines, where the desire is to find the amygdaloids at the tops of massive lava flows.
1. One may distinguish in drill cores between amygdaloid streaks or inclusions in the body
of a flow and the main amygdaloid top by the fining of the grain of the rock as a whole toward
the latter. There is also a finer grain just around individual amygdules, but in a zone of only
microscopic breadth.
2. Extra wide flows may be itlentified by the relative coarseness in all parts, the maximum
orain, and the rate of increase of grain. Of course such flows will run out or grow tliinner in a
sufiicient distance. For instance, an ophite attaining an augite grain of 7 millimeters is rather
persistent just about 200 feet above the Baltic lode. The coarsest ophite of all, attaining a
maximum augite grain of 76 miUimeters (3 inches), is several hundred feet thick out on Kewee-
naw Point and runs over to Isle Royal, but diminishes in thickness to 50 feet at Portage Lake.
It lies just above the Allouez conglomerate and a group of former mines, and where thickest
is easily identified by its grain.
3. With due regard to the possibihty of being deceived by an extra feldspatliic bed, it is
possible from a slow increase in coarseness of grain in the thamond-drill cores to infer that the
bed is being traversed obUquely and to obtain an idea of its true dip. L. L. Hubbard had to
open the Challenge exploration through a heavy covering of drift in a region where no outcrops
were near. The first drill hole was put down vertically. The rate of coarsening of grain in
normal-looking ophites being about half what would be expected, a dip of about 60° was
inferred — correctly, as it proved later.
4. A shaft sinking through drift entered massive trap. The question arose, "Which way
lies the nearest amygdaloid ? A drift in the direction of the finer grain soon found it.
5. A crosscut encountered a clay seam in a heavy trap, wliich was proved to be more than
a mere seam, a displacement, by a marked difference in the coarseness of grain on the two sides.
This difference acted as a guide until the displaced lode was found.
6. It is possible to tell how far one has to go through a bed already more than half pene-
trated. For instance, Kearsarge shaft 21 of the Calumet and Hecla did not strike the lode
where it was expected, owing to an unknown displacement. Search was made in two opposite
directions. Neither drill hole reached the lode, but it was possible from the grain to say
that the lode was probably about 30 feet beyond the end of one hole, which had penetrated
the foot-wall trap.
7. A regularity and harmony in grain may distinguish obscure outcrops from casual bowl-
ders. In the case just mentioned some insignificant outcrops were found which passed this test
and indicated from their fineness that they were in the hanging wall of the lode, a little above
it. The lode was thus found in a week, when it might have taken months without this means
of testing.
8. Conversely a very coarse gram indicates a hea\y bed of trap, and thus gaps and covered
spots in a section may be bridged.
9. The ways of recognizing extremely feldspathic beds and intrusives have already been
mentioned.
THE EXTRUSIVE MASSES.
The extrusive rocks are almost altogether lava beds, piled one upon another, the volcanic
clastic rocks being insignificant in quantity. The total volume of the extrusives is vast.
The basic lavas greatly predonunate. They occupy about 6,000 square miles. It is
scarcely necessary to describe them in full, for notwithstanding their age they show all the
textures and structures characteristic of the Tertiary volcanic basalts of the West, the only
important difference between the two being that the Keweenawan lavas have suffered exten-
sive metasomatic alterations. The beds vary from those less than 2 feet to those which are
100 feet or more hi thickness, although lava beds thicker than 100 feet are rather rare and those
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 409
200 feet thick very rare. Lane'' mentioned two ophites in the Bhick River section, each of wliicli,
accoriling to liim, has a thickjiess of at least 500 feet, and Wilson * describes a known tliickness
of more than 500 feet of apparently one mass in the Nipigon basin.
The textm-es exhibited by the lavas are to a considerable extent a function of the thick-
ness of the flows. The surfaces of the flows show an aplianitic or glassy texture. In the thin
beds the aphanitic texture may prevail to the center of the flow. In many of the beds of mod-
erate thickness, from 10 to 20 feet, there is a well-developed opliitic texture. As already noted,
Lane ''has worked out very carefidly the relations between the te.xtures exhibited by the lava
flows and their thickness, and he holds that the textures are defhiite functions of the tliickness.
The borders of the flows are commonly amygdaloidal. As a rule the amygtlaloidal borders
are thicker at the upper parts of the flows than at the lower parts. This texture may extend
2 to 10 feet, or even to 20 feet, from the tops of the flows. The amygdules decrease in size in
passing fi'om the surface inward. In many places the lower borders showing this texture
exhibit the peculiar type known as the spike amygdule. Where the lava beds are thm the
amj'gdaloidal texture may extend to the centers, but this is not common.
The lavas show in places the usual volcanic structures. Many of the betls are columnar.
Some flows present ropy surfaces. The iipper parts of many flows have a fragmental appear-
ance. In some flows this is due to the brealdiig up of the upper part of the lava mass while
it was still liquid or semiliquid, and in such places the debris is likely to be cemented by the
other parts of the lava. Here and there the broken material at the top of the lava beds seems
to be truly volcanic. In other places the broken fragments, whether formeil by flowage or by
the action of air and water, are cemented by their own debris. More rarely volcanic fragmental
deposits, bombs and ashes, seem to have been laid down upon the surface of one flow between
the time of its consohdation and the extrusion of the next flow. While there is undoubtedly
some volcanic fi-agmental material, as, for instance, the tuff at Taylors Falls on St. Croix River
described by WincheU,'' on the whole for the basic lavas this is extraordinarily small in amount,
consitlering the great extent and volume of the igneous series.
The distance for which a single bed can be followed is to a considerable extent a frmction
of its thickness. The thin flows have a very moderate extent, and even the thicker flows for
the most part have not been traced for any great distance. The greatest distances for single
flows which have been recorded are 30 miles, by Irving,^ for the greenstone, and 22 miles, by
Grant, ^ for one of the melaphyres of the St. Croix Range. Irving'' says that he has traced
individual flows with certainty on the Minnesota coast for 10 to 15 miles. Groups of lava beds
have been traced for much greater distances. For instance, the thin belt of amygdaloids and
diabases above the "Great" conglomerate of Keweenaw Point has been traced uninterruptedly
for 150 miles. Although a group of lava beds may be traced throughout a district, no group
is known to be regional in extent; so that in general it is impossible to correlate lava groups
from district to district, as, for instance, those of Keweenaw Point with those of the Mmnesota
coast. The only such correlation yet attemjjted is that by Lane 9 between the flows of Keweenaw
Point and those of Isle Royal.
The acidic flows differ physically from the basic flows. In general they appear to have
been much less fluid, and therefore have a much shorter lateral extent in proportion to their
thickness. In fact, a bunchy or lenticular form is characteristic of these flows, as is illustrated
by Mounts Houghton and Bohemia on Keweenaw Point. Amygdaloidal textures are not so
common in the acitlic as in the basic lavas. A flowage structure, on the other hand, is much
more prevalent in them than in the basic lavas, and glassy textures are exceedingly common.
a Gordon, W, C, assisted by A. C. Lane, A geological section from Bessemer down Black River; Kept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1906,
1907, p. 461.
b Wilson, A. W. G., Trap sheets of the Lake Nipigon basin: Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 20, 1909, p. 198.
c Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898, pp. 123 et seq.
i Winchell, N. H., The significance of the fragmental eruptive debris at Taylors Falls, Minn'.: Am. Geologist, vol. 22, 1898, pp. 72-78.
f Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, p. 140.
/ Grant, U. S., Preliminary report on the copper-bearing rocks of Douglas County, Wis.: Bull. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Wisconsin
No. 0, 2d ed., 1901, p. 12.
9 Lane, .V. C, Geological report on Isle Royale, Mich.: Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898, pp. 99-102.
410 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The basic and acidic extrusives may correspond roughly to the gabbro-like intrusives, which
are regarded by Wriglit " and others as differentiates from the same magma.
As a rule the dijjs of the lava beds range between 10° and 4.5°, but locally they go beyond
these extremes, sinking to liorizontal and rising to 80° or even to vertical. A mass of rock
made up of lava beds having moderate dips gives a very characteristic topography, which may
bo described as ste])likc or savvtoothed. Where the beds are thin the steps are low; where
thick, they are high. When one walks across a set of lava beds in the direction of the dip,
as he approaches a lava flow he finds a steep slope, or even a precipitous wall, which indicates
approximately the thickness of the flow. As he climbs to the top of this wall he finds a gentle
slope, which corresponds I'oughly with the dip of the rocks, and down wluch he may travel until
he comes to the next flow, where he will encounter another steep wall, and so on. The char-
acter of this topography has been very well figured by Irving '' for the sawtooth range of Mm-
nesota and for the Eagle River section of Keweenaw Point.
THE INTRUSIVE MASSES.
Chemically the intrusive rocks include basic, acidic, and intermediate varieties. Struc-
turally they comprise every laiown form of intrusive rocks except bathohths. There are great
laccoliths, many large bosses, numerous and extensive sills, and abimdant dikes, fi-om those of
small size to those hundreds of feet across. Many of the dikes and sills beautifully show a
columnar structure. In some of the earUer studies the sills were not separated from the lava
flows.
As to magnitude, the masses vary from the Duluth gabbro of Minnesota, wliich, as showr
in another place, has an exposed area of 2,000 square miles and a possible diameter of 100
miles, to emanations so small as to be lost in the intruded rocks. It appears probable that the
volume of the intrusive rocks within the previously formed extrusive lavas and conglomerates
is really greater than the volume of the lavas themselves.
The greatest of the intrusions of late Keweenawan time are basic. These are represented
by the gabbro laccoliths of Minnesota and Wisconsin. Some of the acidic masses also are
large, but they are likely to occur in bosshke forms. Representatives of these are the masses
at Bare Hill and West Pond on Keweenaw Point.
In the description of the areas of Huronian and Archean rocks it has been shown that
varying quantities of the Keweenawan igneous rocks intrude all the previous formations. In
these great series throughout the Lake Superior region is a mass of Keweenawan rocks wliich
is perhaps as great as the lavas. The most conspicuous examples of this class are the intrusive
siUs of the Ammikie group, called the Logan sills, which are conspicuously illustrated at Thunder
Bay. Larger masses of granite intrude and highly metamorphose the Animikie rocks west-
ward from St. Louis River in central Minnesota through the Cu^^una and Little Falls areas.
The granite of northeastern Wisconsin intrudes green schists, wliich are interbedded ^\■ith the
Animikie group, and is probably of the same age as the central Minnesota granites. Both are
regarded as Keweenawan.
Wright " regards the aplite of Mount Bohemia as differentiation from the gabbro magma.
The aphte antedates the gabbro sUghtly in its period of crystallization. The apUte occurs not
ordy as a central large mass but also as small dikes and patches in the gabbro mass itself and
as small apophyses of gabbro in the adjacent ophites. Wright suggests that the gal)bro and
aphte are respectively the deep-seated equivalents of the basic and acidic flows of the Keweena-
wan series.
The close genetic association of the aphtes and gabbros has been recognized at many
places in Minnesota, AVisconsin, Micliigan, and Ontario. The a])lite was regarded as efl"used
acidic sediment by Bayley ' in his studies on Pigeon Point and by Bowen <* in his studies on
a Wriglil. F. E., The inlrnsivc rocks of .MoiHil Bohemia. Michigan: Ann, Rcpt. Geol. Survey Michigan for loas, 1909, p. 393.
b Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Ctol. Survey, vol. ,5, 18S3, lig. 1, p. 142: fig. 2, p. 178.
c Hayley, W. S., The eruptive and seilinu-ntary rocks on I'igeon Point, Minnesota, ami their contact plienoroena: lUiU. C S. Geol. Survey
No. 109, 1893.
■f Bowen, N. L., Diabase and granophyre of the Gowganda district, Ontario: Jour. Geology, vol. 18, 1910, pp. (V)S-C74.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 411
the Cobalt district, but practically all others who have studied the subject, including Wright,
Collins," and the authors, regard the aphtes and gabbros as magmatic differentiations from a
single magma.
In general, the later intrusives have not greatly metamorphosed the early Keweenawan
rocks intruded by them, but there are some exceptions. The far-reaching metamorpliic effect
of the great laccohths and bosses upon the lower scries has already been described in connection
with the Penokee, Vermilion, and Animikie distiicts. It is probable that future studies will
also show pronounced metamorpliic effects of these laccoliths on the intruded Keweenawan
rocks. Already tliis has been found to be true for the gabbro of Black River.
In several places the acidic and especially the granitic rocks have produced notable meta-
morpliic effects on the Keweenawan as well as on the lower series. Indeed it is believed that
the so-called orthoclase gabbros of Irving *" at several places, at least, along the Minnesota
coast are due to the granitization of ordinary gabbros by the acidic rocks.
SOURCE OF LAVAS.
As to the location of the fissures from wliich the lavas issued it is not possible to make
any very definite statement. It has been suggested that they were situated along the south
shore of Lake Superior. It seems to us that a much more probable suggestion is that the
entire border of Lake Superior, with the possible exception of the south side of the east end,
was the locus of a series of great fissures which extended inland from the lake for a very con-
siderable distance, certainly in Wisconsin and Minnesota for at least 100 miles. That such
fissures existed on an extensive scale is shown by the numerous dikes cutting the Huronian of
the Gogebic district, presumably constituting necks for the flows of the Keweenawan just to
the north. Some upper Hui-onian dikes in the ]\Iarquette district may also be so classed.
Along the north shore of Lake Superior are many dikes wliich may well be related to the flows
as necks. Farther to the west both basic and acidic intrusive dikes cut the flows of the Mesabi
and Cuyuiia districts. The convex outline of the Dulutli gabbro laccolith away from the Lake
Superior shore suggests a source somewhere in the direction of Lake Superior. It is not certain
that similar vents may not underhe the lake.
No evidence has been found of volcanic vents. Fragmental ejectamenta of volcanoes are
very subordinate in the Keweenawan lavas, and the extent of the lavas is greater than is usual
for lavas coming from ordinary volcanoes.
So far as evidence is available, the lavas welled through widely distributed fissures cer-
tainly bordering and possibly underlying the present area of the lake.
It is well known that volcanism is a function of orogenic movements. In tliis connection
it is to be noted that Keweenawan volcanism followed in general the axis of the Lake Superior
synchnorium. Plutonic intrusives, probably equivalent in age to the Keweenawan flows, are
the large granite masses cutting the slates of the Animikie group in the Cuyuna and St. Louis
districts in central Mimiesota, near the principal axis of deformation of the Lake Superior
syncUne. The lavas issuing from the many laiown fissures bordering the synclinorium doubtless
flowed down the slopes toward the Lake Superior basin. The movement would be to the south
from the north side, to the northwest from the south side, and to the west from the east side
and not improbably northeastward from the west end of the basin.
How far out into the basin of what is now the lake the orifices went is uncertain, but Stan-
nards Rock, Micliipicoten, and Isle Royal show that if they did not extend some distance beyond
the shore the lavas have flowed a considerable distance. As the orogenic movements which
produced the Lake Superior basin occurred largely during middle Keweenawan time the con-
ditions would continue to be favorable for the further issuance of lava and the slopes would
n Collins, W. 11., The quartz diabases of Nipissing district, Ontario: Econ. Geology, vol. 5, 1910, pp. 538-550.
b Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 50-56.
412 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
remain adequate to coiilrol its flows, notwithstanding the tendenc\^ for tlic earlier lavas to-
lessen the slope. It is bcUeved that the analogy of the Kewceiiawari lavas is with the Tertiary
volcanic rocks of the West, such as those of the Snake and Columl)ia River plateaus, which were
poured out from parallel and intersecting lines of fissures scattered over a broad area. In short
the middle Keweenawan is believed to have been a time of fissure erui)tion, comparabh; with the
great Tertiary outbreaks rather than with local volcanism, such as occurs at the present time.
SEDIMENTARY ROCKS.
SOURCE AND NATURE OF MATERIAL.
The sedimentary rocks of the middle Keweenawan are dominantly conglomerates and
sandstones. Shales are subordinate. A light-red to dark-red color is very characteristic for
the Keweenawan detritus mterstratified with the lava beds. Among these rocks gray sand-
stones are unknown. The conglomerates range m coarseness from great bowlder conglomerates
to fine conglomerates and these grade into sandstones and the sandstones into shales. All the-
sediments are interstratified with the lava beds.
The detritus of the sandstones and conglomerates is dominantly derived from the Keweena-
wan igneous rocks themselves. It comprises bowlders, pebbles, and grams of sand and includes
materials from all varieties of the basic^ intermediate, and acidic rocks. The ease of recognizing
the fragments, wliicli are of considerable size, has led to a closer study of the conglomerates than
of the sandstones and shales.
Usuall}' the coarse detritus of the conglomerates is largely or even dominanth' from the
acidic group of lavas — felsites, porphyries, and granites — and in places also from the intermediate
rock, augite syenite, even where the sedimentary beds are between basic lavas. This is doubtless
explained in a measure by the more resistant character of these formations as compared with
the basic rocks, but it is also probable that the explanation rests partly in the fact that the
acidic lavas were viscous and therefore they built up mountains wliich rose to great height and
were subject to exceptional erosion, wliile the basic lavas formed areas of relatively low relief.
Not uncommonly, however, where the conglomerates immediately overlie basic or intermediate
rocks, detritus from tliis source is especially likely to be present and may be dominant. In
some places, as in the localities near the mouth of Little Montreal River on Keweenaw Point,
described by Hubbard," the pebbles and bowlders are derived wholly from the earlier beds of
lava. Thus between beds of melaphyre are melaphyre conglomerates and between beds of
porjihyrite are porphyrite conglomerates. Similarly between beds of felsite are felsite con-
glomerates. There are, however, all gradations from conglomerates whose pebbles and bowlders
are derived largely or exclusively^ from the immediately subjacent flow to those in which the
pebbles are from various sources and thus comprise basic, acidic, and intermediate materials
all mingled in different proportions.
In the conglomerates the finer material between the pebbles is usually composed of detritus
from the same rocks as the pebbles themselves. However, in a particular conglomerate the
matrix may include material from different sources and in diiTerent proportions fnun that of
the pebbles. Thus even in the melaphyre and porphyrite conglomerates described b}' Hubbard*
the matrix is derived largely from acidic rocks.
Commonly man^' of the particles, even in the matrix, are sufTieiently coarse to be composed
of more than one mineral. But where the mechanical subdivision of the material has gone far,
the original rocks are broken into their constituent minerals and thus in the matrix of the con-
glomerates (here are likely to be minerals from the cliief varieties of the original igneous rocks.
Generally the original minerals from the acidic rocks are more noticeable, as the basic con-
stituents are more subject to alteration. Still it is usually easy to recognize constituents from
the basic rocks. Of these, magnetite, being the least destructible, is especially hkel}- to be
conspicuous.
a Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1898, p. 38. K Idem, p. 21.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 413
As a rule there have been extensive alterations of the (constituents of the conglomerates.
These are more pervasive in the matrix than in the original pebbles, l)ut may extend throughout
even large bowlders. As a result of tliis alteration there are commonly present the secondaiy
minerals zeolite, chlorite, epidote, calcite, cjuartz, and in places copper, which have been brought
in by infiltrating waters or have formed in place by metasomatic changes. Lane " has discussed
the chemical features of one of these alterations.
The sandstones, so far as they have been studied, seem to have aljout the same variations
as the conglomerates. In general the particles are composc(L largely of fragments of the same
acidic rocks whose fragments compose the conglomerate. Tliis means that their dominant
constituents are feldspar and r|uartz, with which there is always more or less clayey material and
abundant ferrite. Ordinarily also there are subordinate contributions from the basic rocks,
wliich furnish feldspar, augite, and magnetite. Hematite staining the grains is also pervasive.
Perhaps their most characteristic feature as compared with common quartzose sandstones is
the fact that quartz is not a dominating constituent. As in the conglomerates, so also in the
sandstone beds, secondary calcite, chlorite, epidote, and the other alteration products of the
original rocks are common, and even copper is to be found here and there.
EXTENT OF SEDIMENTS.
As to the extent of the sediments interstratified with the lavas, tlie same statements may
be made as with reference to the lavas; none of them are regional. In proportion as they are
tliick they naturally have a greater lateral extent. The thickest of these formations, the "Great"
conglomerate of Keweenaw Point, which has a maximum thickness of 2,300 feet, has been
traced for over 100 miles, and one of the comparatively thin conglomerates lying immediately
under the greenstone of Keweenaw Point has been traced for a distance of 50 miles. A con-
glomerate bed may vary greatly along the strike in the proportion of the constituents from a
particular source; also in thickness and coarseness. At many places where conglomerate beds
thin they run laterally into sandstones or shales, the coarser fragments failing altogether.
Finally, a single sedimentary betl along the strike may be split into more than one bed by inter-
leaved lavas.
UPPER KEWEENAWAN.
The upper Keweenawan is confined to northern Wisconsin and ]\Iichigan, where it con-
stitutes a great sedimentarv division, consisting of conglomerates, sandstones, and shales.
It extends from Manitou Island, east of Keweenaw Point, along the border of the outer end of
Keweenaw Point, where its strike carries it out into the waters of Lake Superior at Gate Hai^bor.
It reappears about 6 miles west of Eagle Harbor and extends contmuously as a northwestward-
dipping monocline to the head of Chequamegon Bay in Wisconsin, the other side of the syn-
clinal fold being under the waters of Lake Superior. The peninsula north of Chequamegon
Bay brings to the surface the north side of the syncline, so that inland to the southwest in
Wisconsin the full fold is present in a canoe-shaped area.
The upper Keweenawan consists from the base up of the "Outer" conglomerate, the
Nonesuch shale, and the Freda sandstone.
The "Outer" conglomerate on Keweenaw Point has a thickness of 1,000 feet. To the
west it increases in thickness and at Black River apparently attains 5,000 feet. Farther Avest
it becomes tliinner, the tliickness at Potato River being 800 to 1,200 feet and at Bad River only
350 feet. The "Outer" conglomerate has thus been traced from the east side of Manitou
Island to Penokee Gap, a distance between 175 and 200 miles. Petrographically tliis con-
glomerate is like the conglomerate interstratified with the lavas and is therefore composed
mainly of detritus from the acidic rocks.
Above the "Outer" conglomerate is the Nonesuch shale, which has been traced from
Portage Lake to Bad River, a distance of 125 mUes. Its thickness at Portage Lake is about
a Lane, A. C, The decomposition of a bowlder in the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate: Econ. Geology, vol. 4, 1909, pp. 158-173.
414 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
200 feet, at Montreal River 500 feet, at Potato River from 250 to 400 feet, and at Bad River
125 feet. Altliou<;h this formation is diiefly shiilo it lias interstratifie<l sandstone hu'ers, and
unlike tiae sandstones and conglomerates interstratified with the lavas it contains large amounts
of basic detritus. In places, indeed, the basic material is so abundant as almost to exclude the
acidic. Thus at the base of the Xonesuch shale there is an important change in the character
of the material of the Keweenawan sediments.
The Freda sandstone composes much the larger portion of th(^ up]>er division of the Kewee-
nawan. The apparent thickness of the entire formation is not less than 19,000 feet. Irving "
gives the thickness of the sandstone exposed at Montreal River as 12,000 feet, and 7,000 feet
of overl3dng beds are seen near Ashland. Accortling to Irving it is a characteristic feature of
this sandstone tjiat quartz is ver\' subordinate. Indeed, in jilaccs it is nearly quart zless. The
detritus has therefore been derived tlominantly fi'om the basic igneous rocks and only subordi-
nately from the acidic igneous rocks of the Keweenawan, and apparently the pre-Keweenawan
rocks have contributed but small amovuits of material. However, Lane* states that pebbles
of banded jaspery hematite and other .iron-bearing rocks occur abundantly in the "Outer"
conglomerate and further that the detritus of the sandstones themselves is derived predomi-
nantly from the Iluronian and Keewatin rocks. Proljably the statements of Irving and Lane
were made with different areas in mind, and more ex,tensive studies of the upper Kew cenawan
are perhaps necessary in ordjer to make exact general statements concerning the sources of its
detritus.
As the upper Keweenawan is confined to Michigan and Wisconsm, it, like the middle and
lower Keweenawan, fails to be regional in extent, although it has a greater linear and surface
extent than the other two divisions. It is probable, however, that the upper Keweenawan
origmally occupied a large part of the Lake Superior basin. It is the softest division of the
series and was therefore more deeply eroded than the others. At present the area once prob-
ably covered by tliis sandstone is occupied by the Cambrian sandstone or the waters of the
lake.
RELATIONS TO UNDERLYING SERIES.
The Keweenawan rests unconformably on all of the lower series with wliich it comes into
contact. This unconformity is so perfectly cle^ar for the Archean gneisses that it has been
recognized since the days of Logan, "^ that great geologist having noted tliis relation at Granite
Island, on the north side of I^ake Superior, and at several points on the east shore of the lake.
The Keweenawan has unconformable relations vritli each of the Iluronian liivisions with which
it comes into contact, but in earlier days the unconformity between the Keweenawan and the
upper Iluronian was not recognized.
The relations of the Keweenawan series and the Animikie group have been especialh'
studied north of Thunder Bay, and here the Animikie was indurated and yielded well-rounded
fragments to the Keweenawan basal conglomerate at many points. Details as to these rela-
tions are more fuUy given on pages 207—208. In the Penokee district the Keweenawan extends
for many miles along the upper Huronian, and here there is evidence of even a greater erosion
interval between the two series than on the north shore.
It has been noted that the Duluth gabbro at its bottom is in contact at many places with
the Iluronian and with the Archean. Near its bolder, in areas occupied by the rocks of these
periods, are numerous dilces and bosses which are identical in chemical composition and even
correspond very closely in mineralogical character with the Duluth gabbro. Indeed, some of
the masses may be actually connected with the Duluth gabbro. There can scarcely be any
doubt that these intrusive rocks in the lower series are of Keweenawan age.
The Keweenawan ago of the great dikes and sills of diabase, which are so abundant in the
Arumikie group, is scarcely less clear. These ilikes and sills are Identical in their chemical and
o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, p. 230. c Logan, W. E., Report oJ progress to 1863, Geol. Survey Canada, 1863, p. "S.
6 Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, p. 090.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 415
mineralogical composition and in their structural and textural characters with those which
are found in the Keweenawan itself east of the Animikie at Thunder anil Black bays and west
of the Animikie in ]\Iinnesota. Some of the capping diabases of the Nipigon basin may be
flows resting unconformably upon lower Keweenawan, Huronian, and Archean rocks.
In the Penokee-Gogebic district numerous diabase dikes cut the iron-bearing formation.
These have attitudes at right angles to the dips and in chemical composition are like the basic
lavas on the overlying Keweenawan traps. It can hardly be doubted that these are the pipes
through which the lavas issued.
The Animikie group, including the latest Huronian formations, is cut by acidic intrusive
rocks which are almost certainly Keweenawan. The largest of these that has been recognized
is the Embarrass granite of the Giants Range, the granites south of the Cuyuna district of
Minnesota, and the granite intrusive into the Quinnesec schist of northeastern Wisconsin.
Dikes of granite are known to cut the Animikie group along the Giants Range.
RELATIONS TO OVERLYING SERIES.
The lowest fossiliferous Cambrian rocks in the Lake Superior region are of Upper Cambrian
age. These rest unconiormably upon the middle Keweenawan in the St. Croix Valley and
on the southeast side of Keweenaw Point. In the former locality an actual unconformable
contact is observed, but in the latter the relations are complicated by faulting. The middle
Keweenawan throughout is considerably tilted, wliile the Upper Cambrian beds are uniformly
flat-lying. These facts prove only that the middle Keweenawan is pre-Upper Cambrian.
The upper Keweenawan is in contact only with the Lake Superior sandstone (supposedly
Upper Cambrian), a red, quartzose sandstone outcropping along the southwest shore of Lake
Superior. The feldspathic sandstones and shales of the upper Keweenawan grade conformably
up into the red quartzose Lake Superior sandstone. Exposures of the gradation are observed
on Fish Creek, on Middle River, and on St. Louis River. The only possible doubt about the
gradation is the fact that the feldspathic sandstones and mud-cracked shales have not been
absolutely proved to be Keweenawan, although from their character, distribution, and rela-
tions to the Keweenawan there is every reason to believe that they are the uppermost Kewee-
nawan. At no place are there fragments of the Keweenawan sandstone within the Lake
Superior sandstone. Finally, the upper Keweenawan sandstone and the Lake Superior saml-
stone are closely related in their deformation, for whUe the upper Keweenawan as a whole is
folded, and the Lake Superior sandstone as a whole is flat-lying, along the axis of the synclino-
rium in the vicinity of Asliland and eastward, both are tUted. The western Lake Superior
sandstone seems to be areally connected with the known Upper Cambrian of the St. CroLx
River valley and has been correlated with the Upper Cambrian. However, it is nonfossiliferous,
areal continuity with the known Cambrian is not established, and it is entirely possible that the
western Lake Superior sandstone as a whole may be older than the Upper Cambrian. If the
Lake Superior sandstone is Upper Cambrian, as it is now correlated, then the upper Keweenawan
is pre-Upper Cambrian.
In the absence of the Middle and Lower Cambrian, it is difficult decisively to prove that
the Keweenawan is pre-Cambrian rather than Middle or Lower Cambrian. It has seemed
to us, as it has to Irving," to ChamberUn,'' and, in fact, to most of tlie geologists who have
studied this area, that in hthology, lack of fossils, deformation, and separation of the middle
Keweenawan from the Upper Cambrian by unconformity the Keweenawan series as a whole
is much more closely allied to the pre-Cambrian than to the Cambrian. Another group of
geologists, while admitting all these differences, nevertheless hold that the Keweenawan is
probably Cambrian.
Our reasons for assigning the Keweenawan as a whole to the pre-Cambrian rather than to
the Middle or Lower Cambrian are summarized below. While we assume the Upper Cambrian
"Irving, R. D., Mod. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883. tChamberlin, T. C, Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 23, 1885.
416 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ao-o of tlio Lake Superior sandstone, these conclusions are no^ wiiolly dcnendcnt upon such
interpretation of age of the Lake Superior sandstone.
The Cajnl)rian is fossihferous-. the Keweenawan is not.
The Canihrian is largely a subacpieous deposit; the Keweenawan is largely subaorial.
The Cambrian contrasts with the Keweenawan in lacking volcanisni.
The known Upper Cambrian is almost flat-lying. The same is true for niost of the Lake
Superior sandstone. The Keweenawan as a whole is tilted. In the few localities where the
Lake Superior sandstone and upper Keweenawan are tilted together, this may be due partly to
movements as late as the Cretaceous. Also, as already noted, there is possible doubt about the
Upi)er Cambrian age of the Lake Superior sandstone. It is agreed by all that the known
Upper Cambrian rests unconformably upon middle Keweenawan beds.
The Cambrian rests upon a peneplain of continental extent, over which the Paleozoic sea
swept and deposited Paleozoic sediments, with overlap relations to the pre-Cambrian rocks.
This sea did not reach the Lake Superior country until Upper Cambrian time, and parts of
Canada were not reached until Ordovician time. If the Keweenawan is Cambrian it constitutes
a marked local variation from the general uniform conditions of overlap. The upper Kewee-
nawan sediments rest on a plane which cuts the pre-Cambrian peneplain at a considerable
angle, as is well shown on Keweenaw Point. (See p. 97.) If the Keweenawan were to be
regarded as MidiUe or Lower Cambrian, it would be necessary to conclude that the Middle or
Lower Cambrian in this district had taken on remarka])le local characteristics different from
those of the Middle and Lower Cambrian elsewhere. On the other hand these local character-
istics are accordant with those of the pre-Cambrian rocks of this area.
The similarity of lithology and accordance of structure between upper Keweenawan and
Cambrian are the natural sequence of transgression of a sea over fiat-lying sediments. The
conditions are not different from those that would prevail if the ocean were to transgress to-day
from the Gulf of Mexico across the flat-lying and little-consolidated Paleozoic sediments of the
upi)cr Mississippi Valley. It would be extremely difflcult to prove the unconformity in any
limited area, especially where exposures are not numerous. In fact, it is known that the
Lake Superior basin was formed during Keweenawan time, and it is entirely probable that
local sedimentation within this basiii would merge upwards into tlie sedimentation from the
overlapping Upper Cambrian ocean, while upper Keweenawan beds may locaUy have uncon-
formably overlapped the lower-middle member, from whose detritus they are in large part
built up. It is concluded that the Keweenawan is mainly pre-Cambrian.
Our view of the sequence of deposition is this: The main portion of the Keweenawan was
put down in pre-Cambrian time. During and subsequent to its deposition folding developed
the Lake Superior basin. In late Keweenawan time erosion of the lower beds near the rim of
the basin and deposition of the upper beds within the basin were going on simultaneously.
The deposition within the basin continued nearly or quite to the time that the Paleozoic sea,
encroaching from the south, reached the basin. The Paleozoic sea then deposited its beds
with marked structural discordance upon the lower-middle Keweenawan, and with substantial
accordance upon upper Keweenawan beds in parts of the Lake Superior basin in wliich deposi-
tion was continuous up to the time of the arrival of this sea.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
The r|uestion now arises as to the i)hysical conditions under whicli the Keweenawan was
laid down. According to the standard interpretation the widespread sandstones and con-
glomerates at the bottom of the Keweenawan would be taken a,s evidence that at the beginning
of Kc'weenawan time this region was submerged. Under this interpretation the occurrence of
sandstones and conglomerates between the lavas has been taken as evitlence that the ellusive
rocks were largely submarine. The persistence of sedimentary beds such as those that occur
at the up])er iiorizons and es|)ecially the "Great" conglomerate of the middle Keweenawan has
usually been taken as decisive evidence of this conclusion. However, work by Medhcott and
THE KE WEEN A WAN SERIES. 417
Blanford," Walther,'' Passaige/ Davis,'' Huntington/ Johnson/ Barrell/ Chamberliii and
Salisbuiy,^ and others has emphasized the importance of continental sedimentary deposits.
As yet the criteria for discriminating continental and submarine deposits have not been fully
worked out, and therefore there must be considerable uncertainty as to our conclusions upon
this matter concerning the Keweenawan, especially as the Keweenawan sediments have never
been studied with reference to this particular point.
The following evidence we take to favor the terrestrial oi-igin of at least a part of the
Keweenawan :
1. The thickness of the sediments.
2. The repetition of conglomerate beds at many horizons through several thousand feet.
This would involve too rapid fluctuation of water level for the beds to be satisfactorily explained
as aqueous deposits. The continuity of thick beds of conglomerate also is in accord with ter-
restrial sedimentation, for subaqueous sedimentation is more likely to develop thick beds over
only local areas, as about steep shores.
3. The feldspathic, poorly assorted, and almost completely oxidized character of the
Keweenawan sediments, as shown by their prevailing red colors and lack of graphitic material.
They also show locally alternating beds of red, yellow, and purple, suggestive of seasonal varia-
tions.
4. Many ripple marks in the Freda sandstone are of the horseshoe shape made by rills of
water at the surface. These contrast with the ripple marks made by wave action.
5. The fact that except for alterations, the basic flows are in all essential respects like the
subaerial basaltic lava flows of Tertiary time. Their upper and lower surfaces are amygdaloidal.
Although in places their surfaces have a broken or pseudoconglomerate appearance, they usually
lack the peculiar ellipsoitlal structure wliich is "characteristic of the Keewatin and Huronian
basic lavas described in another place (pp. 510-512) and which has been shown to be especially
characteristic of subaqueous basic lava flows.
6. The fact that the matrix of the basal conglomerate on the north shore is in places a lime-
stone, suggesting deposition of evaporation under surface arid or semiarid conditions, as may be
observed to-day in the Bighorn Mountains and elsewhere in the West.
7. The lack of fossils.
8. The general contrast with the underlying Huronian sediments, in which evidence of
water deposition is faii'ly good.
9. Mud cracks are common in some shales.
10. The rapid alternation of thin beds of coarse unweathered debris with fine red mud-
cracked and ripple-marked shales.
We are therefore inclined to believe that terrestrial deposition has played an important
part in the development of this portion of the Keweenawan, but with the information now avail-
able we are unable to say how much of a part it has played.
The truth probablj' lies between the two extremes of the subaqueous and subaerial Iiypothe-
ses; that is, the Keweenawan lavas and sediments were neither exclusively terrestrial nor exclu-
sively subaqueous, though too little is known to warrant definite statements concerning their
origin. For the middle and upper Keweenawan it is believed to be largely subaerial, but also in
considerable measure subaqueous. When the orogenic movement and the period of volcanism
of middle Keweenawan time were well under way it would be very natural that the areas where
oMedlicott, H. B., and Blanford, W. T., Geology of India, 2d ed., revised by E. D. Oldham, 1S79, pp. 149-150, 391-458.
1) Walther, Johannes, Das Gesetz der Wiistenljildung, Berlin, 1900.
c Passarge, Siegfried, Die Kalahari, Berlin, 1904.
d Davis, W. M., The fresh-water Tertiary formations of the Eocky Mountain region: Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci., vol. 35, 1900, pp. 345-373;
Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 11, 1900, pp. 590-COl, 603-604; A journey across Turkestan: Carnegie Inst. Washington, Pub. 26, 1905.
« Huntington, Ellsworth, Pulse of Asia, 1907.
/Johnson, W. D., The High Plains and their utilization: Twenty-first Ann. Eept. U. S. Geol. Survey, pt. 4, 1901, pp. C09-741.
9 Barrell, Joseph, Origin and significance of the Mauch Chunk shale; Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 18, 1907, pp. 449-476; Belations tetween
climate and terrestrial deposits: Jour. Geology, vol. 16. 1908. pp. 159-190, 255-295, 363-384.
liChamberlin, T. C, and Salisl)ur>-, E. D., Geology, vol. 2, 1906.
. 47517°— VOL 52— 11 27
418 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
tlie flexures were large and where the lavas were issuing rapidly, that is, along the border (jf the
lake, should be above the water. However, the movement producing the synclinal Imsin would
certaiidy make a depression in the center of the lake whicli would naturally be Idled with water.
Thus along the borders of the Keweenawan the conditions may have favored terrestrial deposits
and in the basin of the lake the conditions may have favored subaqueous deposits, and at the
shore zone there were various combinations of the two.
If these tentative conclusions are correct, the question still remains open as to whether the
water-deposited parts of the Keweenawan were submarine or continental, for deposits laid down
in great lakes are usually classed as continental. Wliethcr tJiis basin connected with a sea or
was inclosed there is now no means of knowing, unless the possible extension of the Keweenawan
into central Minnesota, cited on ])ages 376-379, may indicate such a connection.
THICKNESS OF THE KEWEENAWAN ROCKS.
In the descriptions of the individual districts the estimated thicknesses of the Keweenawan
have been given. Wherever there is a fidl section the estimated thickness is verj' large. For
northern Minnesota it is 17,000 or 18,000 feet exclusive of the gabbro laccolith, for northern
Wisconsin and Michigan a maximum of 60,000 feet, and for Mamainse, at the east end of Lake
Superior, 16,000 feet. Only relatively small parts of these thicknesses are made up by the
sediments. There are a number of factors which make all these estimates of very uncertain
accuracy. The more important of these factors are faults, intrusive rocks, arid initial dips.
It has been seen that during the formation of the Lake Superior syncline strike, dip, and
bedding joints and faults were produced, and that some of the strike faults are of great magni-
tude. The different conglomerates and lava beds of the middle Keweenawan are very similar
litliologically and it is therefore extremely difficult, indeed usually impossible, to recognize the
individual beds except those of large size, like the "Great" conglomerate. Hence, it has only
been in the vicinity of the mining areas, where studies of the most detailed nature have been
made, that the extent of the faulting is appreciated. There can be no doubt that strike faults
have repeated the beds at numerous localities. It is to be said that the close studies of Hubbard °
on Keweenaw Point, those of Gordon'' at Black River, those of Lane*^ on Isle Royal, and those
of Burwash"* at Michijjicoten have not discovered faults which have repeated the beds of
these areas to any considerable extent. It has been seen, however, that the strike fault between
the north and south ranges of Keweenaw Point reproduces the lower parts of the rocks of
the Keweenawan in the south range. Similarly it is probable that 1)etween Isle Royal and
Black and Nipigon bays is a great strike fault which results in the repetition of the Black and
Nipigon bays Keweenawan on Isle Royal.
In the estimates of the thickness of the Keweenawan the intnisive rocks have been ignored.
It is certam that in northern Minnesota the intrusive lavas constitute a considerable proportion
of the igneous rocks of the Minnesota coast. Also it is suspected that closer studies will show
that the intrusive rocks are more extensive in other areas, as, for instance, at Keweenaw Point,
than has been supposed. Indeed, the recent studies of Hubbard" have shown tlus to be true
for the acidic rocks, but as yet studies have not been made along the same lines for the basic
rocks.
In estimating the thiclcness of these rocks no account has been taken of initial dips. It
is well known that the initial dips of basic lavas and all coarse conglomerates are in many
places higher than 10°, and they may be more than 20°. This statement applies both to sub-
aqueous and to subaerial deposits.
oHiibbard, L.L., Keweenaw Toiat, with particular reference to the felsites and their associated rocks: Gcol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 2, 1S98.
l> Gordon, W. C, assisted by A. C. Lane, A. geological section from Bessemer down Black River: Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1906, 1907,
pp. 397-507.
cLanc. .\. C. OeoloKical report on Isle Royale, Michigan: Geol. Snrvey Michigan, vol. R, pt. 1, 1S9S.
li Burwash, E. N., The geology of Michipicotcn Island: Univ. Toronto Studies (Geol. scr.), No. 3, 190S; with map.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
419
_^i1_^^
r
'^V;vv:l"v„v^^^^^W
^^
^'vv???:-\
c'
FiGUBE 58.— Diagrammatic section illustrating the assigned change of attitude of a series of beds,
like the Keweenawan, from an original depositional inclination (B-C) toa more highly inclined
attitude (B'-C), a comparatively simple change. If the beds were laid down horizontally in
a sinking basin, as illustrated at the right ( F-G), it is obvious that a greater and a more com-
plicated movement would be necessary to bring the Ijcds into the attitude represented in the
lower figure at the left, which represents the present attitude of the Keweenawan beds. (After
Chamberlin, T. C, and Salisbury, R. D., Geology, vol. 2, 1900, fig. 110.)
There thus arises, in connection with the middle Keweenawan especially, the same problem
that arises in determming the thiclaiess of a delta deposit, the larger portion of which (the
foreset beds) in a great delta has rather steep initial dips. If such a delta coulil be truncated
through its central part and the thickness of the beds determined on the basis of dii> it might
be calculated that the delta represents many thousands of feet of strata, although as a matter
of fact the deposit might not be vertically more than a few hundred feet thick. (See fig. 58.)
Plowever, there are reasons
for believing that a large
angle of dip is due to erogenic
movements, and such an
angle is sufficient to allow a
large thickness.
Because of the factors
named above it is extremely
probable that aU the esti-
mates of the thickness of
the Keweenawan based on
appearances are excessive.
To what extent they are ex-
cessive is a matter of con-
jecture, but we suspect that the vertical thickness of the Keweenawan at the tune it was
formed was probably not more than half and possibly only a third of the apparent thickness.
AREAS OF KEWEENAWAN ROCKS.
The areas of the different phases of the Keweenawan in square miles are as follows:
North shore:
Basic intrusive rocks 2, 170
Acidic intrusive rocks 550
Basic extrusive rocks 1, 950
4, 670
Sediments 752
5, 422
South shore:
Basic intrusive rocks 95
Acidic intrusive rocks 145
Basic extrusive rocks 4, 500
4, 740
Sediments ' 2, 070
6, 810
East shore:
Basic extrusive rocks 145
Grand total 12, 377
Total area of basic intrusive rocks 2, 265
Total area of acidic intrusive rocks 695
Total area of basic extrusive rocks 6, 595
Total area of sediments 2, 822
VOLUME OF KEWEENAWAN ROCKS.
From the foregoing figures of tliicltncss and area it is apparent tliat the volume of the
Keweenawan rocks is very large. For the extrusive rocks an area of 6,000 square miles and a
thicliness of 4 miles would give a volume of 24,000 cubic miles. For the sediments an area of
2,800 square miles and a thickness of 4 miles would give a volume of 11,200 cubic miles.
These figures leave out of account the enormous masses of intrusive rocks. If the
gabbro has a circular outline, as indicated by the convex border of Minnesota, and if its southern
border is indicated by the Gogebic district, the diameter would be about 100 miles. With the
420 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ratio of thiclmcss to diameter given by Gilbert " for the Henry Mountains the maximum tliick-
ness would be 15 miles. On calculating the thickness in another way, by assuming an average
dip of 10° for a distance of 50 miles on the north shore, si maximum tluckncss of 8t miles is
obtained. With a thickness of 8^^ miles at the center and a diameter of 100 miles approximately
30,000 cubic miles may be figured for these intrusive rocks.
Althougii these figures merit little consideration as actual measurements, it is beheved that
they are of value in showing the enormous donunance in volume of tiie igneous rocks over the
sediments and of the mtrusive igneous rocks over the extrusive igneous rocks. Reduced to
terms of mass, these figures would be somewhat changed, but the essential conclusions would
not be altered.
LENGTH or KEWEENAWAN TIME.
Because of the facts discussed in the foregoing section on thickness it is of course impossible
to give any estimate of the time involved in the deposition of the Keweenawan series, but
allowing a wide margin for overestimates of thickness we can hardly escape the conclusion that
the Keweenawan probably required as long a time for its formation as the average geologic
period, such as the Silurian, Devonian, and Carboniferous, and it may have been as long as the
Cambrian.
JOINTING AND FAULTING.
Commonly, where the dip of the lava beds is considerable, the beds are cut by two sets of
joints, one of strike joints and the other of dip joints. Both sets are approximately at right
angles to the beds, but the plane of the strike joints contains or does not vary greatly from the
line of strike, and the plane of the dip joints contains or does not vary greath" from the line of
dip. These positions for the joints have been noticed by Grant ^ for northern Wisconsin and by
Hubbard '^ for northern Michigan. In many places there are also joints parallel to the beds or
between them, and these may be called bedding jomts. Where the intrusive rocks have dis-
turbed the lava beds the jomtmg is very much less regular.
As would be expected in a fractured series of rocks, there is also somewhat extensive faulting.
Indeed, faulting has been discovered in almost every locahty where close studies have been
miade, but usually the greater number of the faults are not of sufficient magnitude to be an
important factor in the stratigraphy. Like the joints, the common faults may be divided into
strike faults and dip faults, there being a general correspondence between the planes of the
faults and those of the joints. Most of the dip faults have no great throw, although locally
the displacement may be very considerable. A beautiful illustration of the dip faults is fur-
nished by Hubbard '' for the West Pond area on the south side of Keweenaw Pomt. (See
p. 383.) F. E. Wright's detailed mapping of the Porcupine Mountains and vicinity*
discloses a large number of both strike and dip faults.
Some of the strike faults are of great magnitude and extent. The greatest of these known
is that at the southeast side of the Keweenawan series, extending from the end of Keweenaw
Point along the border of the Keweenawan to Gogebic Lake. Another great strike fault is
known in Douglas Coimty, m northern Wisconsin, and in Minnesota along the northern border
of the Keweenawan. Both of these faults are at the contacts of the Keweenawan and the
Lake Superior sandstone, a,nd it is beheved that the newer series represents the downthrow side.
If so, this downthrow was to the south of the Keweenawan at Keweenaw Point and to the north
of it in Douglas County. The latter fault plane dips 38° to 45° S. and in Wisconsin at least has
aspects of an overthrust fault.
Martin (see pp. 112-115) concludes on physiographic groimds that there is a fault along tiie
Minnesota coast havmg a throw of at least 1,000 feet. There is notliing to show that the throw
a Gilbert, G. K., The geology o( the Uenry Mountains, 2d ed.: U. S. Oeog. and Geol. Survey Rocky Mtn. Region, 1880, p. 55.
6Granl, U. S., Preliminary report on the copper-bearing rocks of Douglas County, Wis.: Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Kat. Hist. Survey Xo. 6,
2ded., 1901, p. 21.
cHubbard, L. L., Keweenaw Point, with particular reference to the felsites and their associated rocks: Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 6, pt. 2,
1898, pp. 19, 2>1, 35.
didem, pp. 87, 91.
« Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1908, 1909, PI. I.
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 421
is not much greater than tliis amount. The evidence given by Martin confirms what was before
a behef as to the existence of this fault, based on the fact that if there were not such a fault
between Isle Royal and the mainland, repeating the beds, it would be necessary to accept an
almost iiicredible tliickness for the Keweenawan. The faults in the zone between Isle Royal
and the Miimesota coast are probably an extension of that in Douglas County, Wis., or, if not,
they accomphsh for the jVIumesota area correspomling adjustment of the Keweenawan during
deformation.
Just as there are bedcUng joints there are also bedding faults. These are especially likely
to occur between the diiferent beds of lava or of lava and conglomerate. In many of them the
dip is slightly steeper than the beddmg. The direction of movement along these beddmg faults
may be parallel to the strike, parallel to the dip, or at any angle between them. Although this
is true, it woukl be natural to expect that the most common movement along the beddmg faults
would be approximately parallel to the dip, this being the natural direction of differential
movement between beds in a folded series. As to the direction of movement along the dip, by
differential movement in a fold of ordinary magnitude the higher bed moves upward as compared
with the lower bed, but it is far from certain that tliis rule would hold in a great simple syn-
clinorium like that of Lake Superior. It might be that gravity would be more important than
the strength of the beds and that the upper members woidd move downward as compared with
the lower.
Hubbard " and Lane * conclude from their close study of the Keweenawan district that
bedduag faultmg or slide faulting is very common. Hubbard finds that at least one slide fault
substantially parallel to the dip has a very large movement. Lane'' says that many of the
shdo faults have a slightly steeper hade than the dip. The details of these occurrences are given
in the section on Keweenaw Point (p. 383).
Along any of the faults there may be slickensides or even brecciation. Such brecciation
is especially prevalent at the bedding faults, wliich follow an amygdaloidal lava surface, one
of their most common positions, because the amygdaloidal belts are planes of weakness.
It will be seen on pages 575-576 that the several classes of fractures and faults have a very
important bearing on the development of ore bodies.
The time of the fracturmg is partly contemporaneous with the folding of the series and
partly later; how much later is not known. Some of the faults, notably the great faults
bounding the Keweenawan series on Keweenaw Point and in Douglas County, Wis., are partly
post-Cambi'ian. It has been suggested by Wilson"^ and Weidman,'' from work m other areas,
that faulting may have affected these rocks as late as Cretaceous time.
THE LAKE SUPERIOR SYNCLINAL BASIN.
It is little short of certam that the great Lake Superior synclinal basin beg> n to form
during middle Keweenawan time. The general character of tlris syncline is admirably exhib-
ited in figure 59, from Irving, and by the sections on the general map, Plate I. This synclinal
basin is rather remarkable for its simplicity. Indeed only at one place does Irving figure a
subordinate fold, that at Porcupine Mountains. The strikes and dips of the rocks show several
prominent flexures, however, as, for instance, along St. Croix River of Wisconsin, near Ashland and
Clinton Point at the head of Lake Superior, and at Michipicoten Harbor. Later strike faults
have considerably modified the syncline. Doubtless future close studies will show that the
Lake Superior synclmorium has a greater complexity in detail than has been supposed. Cer-
tainly one very important subordmate basin, that of Lake Nipigon, must be attached to the
major synclinorium. It is to be remembered that along the main shore line and outer islands
of Black and Nipigon bays the middle Keweenawan is found with lakeward dips at angles of
nOp. cit., pp. 87-91.
t> Lane, A. C, Geology of Keweenaw Point, a l)rief description: Proc. Lake Superior Miu. Inst., vol. 12, 1907, pp. S3-S4.
c Geol. Soe. America, winter meeting, December, 1908.
d Personal communication.
422
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
^ s
'A
c
_o
>
£
_H
rs
f/l
^f
o
'k
!rr
§
\n
•^
TJ
■-1
1
(^
^
QJ
s
>
b.
t;
Si
r/.
o
a
%
s
3
§3=§
-MO
■ ^ .2
K '5 -^
« 2 c
^^!
iSS
t«l
r- ?; o
« -2 5
5 a
° S S
a P g
o .a
3 ^
f II
S « E
B2 S
5-E|
■3 o c S
fj en a* 3
<u <y m
o .5 x> ^
1.1 .si
g p. ■" aj
2-S
2 .^5 a a
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 423
8° to 10°. In the peninsulas between Thunder, Black, and Nipigon bays the lower Keweena-
wan hes substantially flat. Farther to the north the middle Keweenawan reappears, overlying
the lower division \\'ith northern dips. It thus appears that at Black and Nipigon bays there
is a subordinate anticlinal arch,' which separates the great synclinal fold of Lake Superior from
the subordmate synclinal fold of Lake Nipigon. The latter lake is in a subordinate basin of
Keweenawan rocks, just as Lake Superior is in a great basin of that series.
Similarly Batchewanung Bay, at the east side of the Lake Superior basin, is a subordinate
synclinal fold. A part of the shore is Archean. Inside of this is a fragmentary border of Huronian
almost cut away; inside of this a partial border of Keweenawan, and the center of tlic basin is
fiUetl wath Cambrian. In short this bay is a miniature of the Lake Superior basin, containing
the four great divisions of rocks of the region — the Ai'chean, Huronian, Keweenawan, and
Cambrian — in a synclmal basin.
It has been seen that in general in any one section the dips are much steeper at the lower
horizons than at the higher horizons. It is certain that the present dips at the lower horizons
are largely due to the folding wliich formed the Lake Superior basin. To illustrate: The
Keweenawan lava flows and sediments north of the Gogebic range have the same dip as the
upper Huronian sediments, and therefore the main dips of both must have been produced by
orogenic movements. Indeed it is thought probable that in general the major portion of the
dips of tlie most steeply' mclined lavas is due to orogenic movements, for the natural position
of repose for basalts, such as those of Ivilauea, is with dips of 10° to 18°. It is reasonably
certain that if 15° is subtracted from the lakeward dip of the basic lavas the remainder of the
dip is due to orogenic movement. The steadily lessening dips of the lavas at liigher horizons
are therefore to be largely explained by the progress of the orogenic movement which pro-
duced the Lake Superior basin, although they are doubtless in part explained by the natural
lessening of the dip toward the center of a syncUnal fold.
To Ulustrate again: In the Black River section the dips at the base are from 75° to 78° N.,
and at the highest strata exposed on the "Outer" conglomerate only 20°. In the Keweenaw
Point section the lavas at the south side dip 55° N. and those of the middle division at the north
side cUp 25°, and it may be supposed that during the time in wliich the lavas and conglomerates
of the middle Keweenawan in this area were built up the synclinal movement had tilted the
lower beds 30° as a maximum, but from this amount to obtain the actual tilting there must
be subtracted the unknown amount which is due to the normal decrease in dip toward the
center of a syncline. Similarly at IMichipicoten, on the northwest side of the synclinorium,
the basal beds have a dip of 55° SE., and at the top of the exposed sections on the islands
south of Micliipicoten the dip is 14°, a inaximum difference of 41°, wliich may be attributed
to orogenic movement during the formation of the middle Keweenawan in this part of the
region. The same thing is illustrated at Isle Roj^al, where at the southwest end of the island
the dips on the north side are 16° and on the south side 8°, and at the east end of the island
the dips on the north side are 26° and on the south side 18°. It thus appears that the decrease
in dip from the north to the south side is 8°, without reference to the steepness. Tliis fact
strongly suggests that the steeper dips at the northeastern part of the island as compared with
the southwestern part are to be explained by greater orogenic movements in that part of the
island, and thus gives a confirmation to the suggestion made that the steep dips are mainly
due to orogenic movement rather than to the original angle of deposition. The foldmg of the
basin was practically complete at the end of Keweenawan time, but in post-Cambrian time
and possibly in post-Cretaceous time the region suffered the great strike faulting already noted.
METAMORPHISM.
For the most part the metamorphism of the Keweenawan igneous rocks is that of the
zone of katamorphism. The alterations, fully described byPumpelly" and Irving,* have pro-
duced very extensive changes in the lavas, especially those wliich were scoriaceous. The
a Pumpelly, Raphael, Metasomatic development of the copper-bearlBg rocks of Lake Superior; Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci., vol. 13. 1878,
pp. 253-309.
I> Irving, R. D., Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883.
424 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
important secondary minerals produced in the basic rocks are the zeolites, epidotes, chlorites,
calcite, quartz, laumoutito, prclinite, datoUte, etc. Man}' of tlio thin vesicular })eds are largely
transformed to these substances and the vesicles have been filled with them, forming amygdules.
Although the porous beds are extensively altered, the massive centers of the thick lava flows,
the dike rocks, and the sills and laccoliths are ver}' fresh; indeed some of them are almost as
little altered as similar rocks of Tertiary age. The felsitc and (|uartz {)orphyries have undergone
the usual metasomatic alterations for ancient acidic lavas. The glasses have devitrified. A wide
variety of secondary minerals have formed, but they occur usually in such minute particles as
to be determinable with difliculty.
The alterations of the Keweenawan lavas doubtless began as soon as they were consohdated.
The process continued tlirough Keweenawan time and the great erosion period between the
Keweenawan and Cambrian, and indeed is still going on.
The alterations of the sedimentary rocks vary greatly in degree. The lower and middle
Keweenawan sediments are much more changed than those of the upper Keweenawan. In the
sandstones and conglomerates interstratified with the lavas the same metasomatic change took
place as in the lavas, resulting in the formation of a hke group of secondary minerals. The
filling of the openings between the grains and pebbles, strictly analogous to the filling of
the openings in the vesicular lavas, has been nearly complete, thus thoroughly indurating the
rocks. The cementing materials in the sandstones and conglomerates interstratified with the
lavas are much more varied than those of ordinar}^ cementation. It was in these rocks tliat
the senior author first noted the secondary enlargement of detrital feldspar. So thoroughly have
the clastic materials been cemented that where the rocks have not been weathered fractures
commonly pass across both pebbles and matrix. The sandstones are intermediate between
sandstones and quartzites in their cementation. Though these sediments are well indurated
they certainly are less metamorphosed than similar secUments of the Animikie group. Inasmuch
as the conditions since they have been laid dowTi have been practically the same as those that
have affected the Animikie beds, upon which they rest, this difl'erence in metamorpliism confirms
the conclusion as to a considerable time break between the two series.
The cementation in the sandstones of the upper Keweenawan has not proceeded so far as
m the detrital rocks of the middle tlivision. Indeed these sanilstones are very similar to those
of Cambrian age. The individual particles of these sandstones, bemg largely basic, are usually
much altered, but it is difficult to say what part of these changes have taken place since they were
deposited as sandstones and what part took j^lace before they were broken from the lavas from
which they came.
The segregation producing copper ores was an incident of the metasomatic changes above
summarized, and the details of it are considered in another place (pp. 580 et seq.)
The intrusive rocks, especially the great basal gabbros, and the large masses of acidic rock,
as has been noted in another place (p. 411), produced profound anamorphic changes in the
pre-Keweenawan rocks which they cut. It is believed that later studies will show that in con-
nection with the deep-seated bathohths of Minnesota and Wisconsin anamorphic changes will
be found in the intruded Keweenawan lavas and sediments, but as yet studies have not been made
along the border of the gabbros in order to ascertain whether or not this conjecture is correct.
Tliis suggestion gains much probability from the fact that along the borders of the much smaller
laccolith of Black River in Michigan F. E. Wright has found the intruded Keweenawan lavas
and sediments to be greatly metamorphosed.
RESUME OF KEWEENAWAN HISTORY.
From the facts which have been presented we ma^- make the following general statements:
After the great epoch of upper Iluronian deposition the Lake Superior region was raised
above the sea and was sul)jected to denudation for a long time, duiing which the erosion amounted
to thousands of feet. The Keweenawan period was begun by the deposition of sediments, con-
sisting of conglomerates, sandstones, shales, and limestones, now found generally at the base of
THE KEWEENAWAN SERIES. 425
the known intrusive part of the Keweenawan where it has been looked for. These may be
subaeiial deposits.
After the deposition of sediments of very moderate tliickness occurred the events of the
middle Keweenawan, which especially characterize the series. The chief event was the out-
break of regional volcanism in the larger part of the Lake Superior basin.
In a large part of the region, and perhaps all of it, igneous rocks practically excluded sedi-
ments in the lower portion of the middle Keweenawan. Igneous rocks, with an almost inappreci-
able proportion of sediments, constitute the Minnesota coast, the lower eight-ninths of the Eagle
River section, nine-tenths of the Portage Lake section, all of the Douglas County range of Wis-
consin, all of the 4,000 feet of the Taylors Falls section, more than eleven-twelfths of the section
at Black River, and about 4,000 feet, or one-fourth of the section, at Mamainse. It does not
follow that the time represented by the sediments may not be as long as or even longer than that
represented by the lavas. After the period of dominating volcanism had continued until
thousands of feet of lava had been built up, there was a decrease in volcanic activity and the
sediments again became of sufficient importance to be recognized in the section. This was the
later part of the middle Keweenawan.
The change in conditions in the niiddle Keweenawan by wliich the sediments, insignificant
in the lower part, became important in the upper j)art is not supposed to have occurred at
the same time over the entire Lake Superior basm. Indeed, it seems extremely probable
that the change was not simultaneous in all parts of the region. This niay be illustrated by
the Portage Lake and Eagle River sections on Keweenaw Pomt. The alterations of notable
masses of sediments with the lavas seem to have become important in the Portage Lake section
before they did in the Eagle River section, for at Eagle River lavas, to the practical exclusion
of sediments, constitute all but the upper 5,000 feet of the middle Keweenawan, whereas at
Portage Lake the portion containing sediments is much thicker.
As the middle Keweenawan epoch neared its close igneous activity ceased. In northern
Michigan the longest cessation of volcanism was marked by the deposition of the "Great"
conglomerate, which is locally more than 2,000 feet thick. After this conglomerate was laid
down there were further outbreaks of volcanic activity, which resulted in the "Lake Shore"
trap. But tlie outbreaks represented by tliis formation were relatively feeble, as is indicated
by the fact that the lava beds are separated by conglomerates of considerable thickness. For
Michigan tliis "Lake Shore" trap represents the last dying effort of the epoch of regional volcanic
activity.
Thus middle Keweenawan time witnessed a sudden begmning of volcanic activity, which
was dominant for a long time, then intermittent volcanic activity, then total cessation. Evi-
dence has been presented which seems to favor the view that the midtUe Keweenawan was
deposited largely imder subaerial rather than subaqueous conditions.
The present distribution of the middle Keweenawan shows that much, if not all, of the
Lake Superior basm must have been covered by volcanic flows, for the igneous material,
besides occurring along the rim of the lake, constitutes Isle Royal, Micliipicoten, and Stannard
Rock, off Marquette.
During middle Keweenawan time there were at least two alternations of basic and acidic
rocks, and locally between basic and acidic rocks of the first cycle there were intermediate
rocks, as on Keweenaw Point and Isle Royal. Whether these cycles were general for the
Keweenawan over the Lake Superior region and whether there were more cycles than two
is as yet undetermined.
As already stated (p. 410), during middle Keweenawan time, contemporaneous with and
followmg the extrusions of the lavas, there were also mtrusions, and these mtrusive rocks
are of very great quantitative importance. In many places m the lava series the mtrusions
in the form of beds and dikes compose a considerable percentage of the mass. Although the
mtrusives to a large extent rose into the middle Keweenawan beds, still greater masses spread
out approximately along the contact between the Keweenawan and the lower I'ocks, and also
426 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
between the laj^ers of the lower formations. The vastest intrusive body of this class is the
great Duluth laccohth, which extends from Duhith to the international boundary and has a
breadth reaclung 30 miles. Another of these great intrusive masses is that at Bad River.
The bodies intruded between the beds of the Animikie group are so prominent that they have
been called the Logan sills. The so-called crowning overflow of Thunder Cape may fall here.
The peculiar topography of the steep cUfFs about Thunder Bay and Pie Island is due largely
to these mtrusive flat-lying sills. The acidic rocks intrusive in the lower Keweenawan are also
important. Granite bosses of considerable size intrude upper Huronian rocks in central Minne-
sota and northeastern Wisconsin.
During middle Keweenawan time progressive folding of the Lake Superior basin went on,
with the result that the upper beds have a lower dip than the lower ones.
Conformably upon the rocks of the middle division were built up the sediments of the
upper Keweenawan. These sediments consist, in ascending order, of the "Outer" conglomerate,
havmg a maximum thickness of 5,000 feet; the Nonesuch shale, having a maximum tliickness
of 500 feet; and the Freda sandstone, having a maximum tliickness of 19,000 feet. As the
"Outer" conglomerate hes directly upon the basic lavas and in its main mass is lithologically
like the conglomerates interstratified with the lavas there is no reason to suppose that the
conditions at the time tliis conglomerate was deposited were in any way different from those
prevailuig at the time of the earher conglomerates, except that late m the epoch detritus
from pre-Keweenawan rocks appeared. ^Beginning with the Nonesuch shale, the sediments are
of a different character from those lower in the Keweenawan series. This formation and
the Freda sandstone are largely and in places mainly composed of detritus derived from the
basic lavas. ^Vlso, they contain contributions from the Huronian, Keewatin, and Laurentian
rocks. This means that by the erosion of the basic lavas, or by tliis cause combined with
uplift, the pre-Keweenawan became the subject of attack by atmospheric agents. The
relative lack of abundance of material from the acidic lavas may also mean that the volcanic
mountains composed of acidic rocks had by late Keweenawan time become so reduced as
to yield only a small amount of material.
As the change in the nature of the materials of the sediments from those mterstratified
with the lavas to the Freda sandstone was gradual, there is no reason to place a break at any
defuiite horizon. Volcanic activity gradually died out, orogenic movement and erosion con-
tinued, and these afford sufficient explanations for the increasing variety of the detritus of
the upper Keweenawan.
As the Nonesuch shale and Freda sandstone together are of very great thickness and are
made up of fine-grained sediments, there must have been steady and long-continued subsidence
of the basin where these formations were deposited. Also, their volume is so great as to indicate
steady upfift in some other part of the region, exposing the lavas and other rocks to erosion.
The development of the Lake Superior syncline continued to the end of Keweenawan time
and w'as then substantially complete. The basm was modified afterwards only by post-Cambrian
faulting.
Keweenawan sedimentation was largely subaerial, but it may have become subaqueous
toward the close of the period in the water-filled Keweenawan syncline and may have ultimately
merged into Upper Cambrian subaqueous deposition.
CHAPTER XVI. THE PLEISTOCENE
By Lawrence IMartix.
' THE GLACIAL EPOCH.
PLAN OF PRESENTATION.
The statement that the Lake Superior region has been invaded and profoundly modified
by a continental glacier or ice sheet docs not require proof. It will- suffice to name some of the
locahties in wliich the proofs are found and to describe the glacial phenomena and their effects
on the present topography and the Ufe of the region. °
The ice, wliich advanced from two centers, one east and one west of Hudson Bay, in a series
of lobes, oscillated so that glacial deposits thought to be of two or more ages were produced.
The latest of these are called the deposits of the Wisconsin stage of glaciation and cover the
greater part of the area here discussed. In advancing, the ice produced striae, roches moutonnees,
cirques, broadened, deepened, and hanging valleys, etc. It transported great quantities of the
materials eroded in producing these forms. As the ice melted, these materials were deposited
as an overmantle of glacial drift. The drift, which is partly stratified, was formerly known
as modified and unmodified drift. Later studies show, however, that the largely unstratified
(unmodified) drift, including terminal or recessional moraines, ground moraine, and drumhns,
was deposited directly by the ice. The drift deposited by rumiing' water either under or in front
of the ice or in standing water is stratified, though not essentially modified, and includes out-
wash deposits, lake deposits, loess, kames, eskers, etc. Most of these varieties of drift are
found both in the older and in the latest glacial drift, as will be discussed. In all the glaciated
area the drainage was greatly modified by the erosion and deposition due to the ice. During
deglaciation there was a great series of marginal glacial lakes, the ancestors of the present
Great Lakes. Since the glacial period there has been warping in the region, resulting in tilting
of the shore Unes of the former lakes. Streams have made sfight modifications of the glacial
drift and of the topography of the land. The lake shores, especially those of Lakes Superior and
Michigan, are the seat of active work, and in these lakes the detritus carried from the land by the
rivers and from the shores by waves and currents is being deposited.
ICE ADVANCES.
The scratches and grooves upon the ledges in the Lake Superior region aH'ord the ])rincipal
evidence of the direction of movement of the glaciers, and the sketch map (fig. 60) is a generaliza-
tion based on these marks. It will be seen that in general the ice moved in a series of lobes
of which those in the Lake Michigan basin, the Lake Superior basin, and the valley of Red
River were the most important, the lobes between these, especially one extending from the
highland region of northern Wisconsin, known as the Chippewa-Keweenaw lobe, and one extend-
ing from the highland region of northern Minnesota, known as the Rainy Lake lobe, being less
extensive.
a The author is indebted to Messrs. Frank Leverett aad W. C. Alden, of the United States Geological Survey, who have more recently done
detailed work on the glacial features of the south coast of Lake Superior and in eastern Wisconsin, respectively, for critical suggestions concerning
this chapter. The author, however, assumes responsibility for any errors in interpretation.
427
428
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The ice whicli overspread the Lake Superior region came from two principal sources, one in
the highlands of eastern Canada, generally called the Labrador glacier, and one in the region
west of Hudson Bay, usually kno%\Ti as the Keewatin glacier. It seems probable that fully
two-thirds of the ice which covered the Lake Superior basin came from the Labrador glacier.
It is supposed, however, that this glacier was not the first to spread over the region, but that the
Keewatin glacier, while largely synchronous and confluent with the Labrador glacier, arrived
earher and stayed longer, probably advancing over parts of the region formerly covered by lobes
of the Labrador glacier after these lobes had retreated to the northeast. WTiether or not the
ice advance from the northwest covered all the Lake Superior region is unknown.
In the area covered by this monograph the glacial lobes were profoundly affected by the
areas of highland and lowland, and, as would naturally be expected, the ice was the thickest
and moved fastest in the tleepest depressions; consequently, the Lake Michigan lobe of the
Labrador glacier (figs. 4, p. 87, and 60) extended farther south than any of the others, and the
FiGVRE GO. — Sketch map showing the glaciation of the Lake Superior region, giving names of lobes and probable directions of ice flow. There
may have been an earlier stage with ice advance from the northwest through a large part of tbe area.
Green Bay lobe of the Labrador glacier, also having a deep axis of flow, extended nearly as
far south as the Lake Micliigan lobe. The Keweenaw and Chippewa lobes of the Labrador
glacier, being obhged to advance over the highland region of upper Micliigan and northern
Wisconsin, cUd not advance as far south as the lobes to the east, though the Chippewa lobe over-
rode the i)art of Keweenaw Peninsula west of Ontonagon River and advanced farth(>r south than
the atljaceut Keweenaw lobe. The Lake Superior lobe of the Labrador glacier, turned west-
ward by the topography, advanced to the west end of Lake Superior, where it escajied from the
confining walls of the rift valley or trough near Duluth and spread out in a much broader lobe
(fig. 60), part of which advanced nearly westward in the region south of Leech Lake, probably
moAnng southwest in the region of Mille Lacs and swinging round to the south, and even to the
southeast in the vicinity of St. Croix Falls. The Rain}' Lake lobe, which seems to have come
partly from the Labrador and partly from the Keewatin center, moved south and southwest
THE PLEISTOCENE. 429
over the hills of northern Minnesota (fig. 4). The Red River lobe, the principal division of the
Keewatin glacier, often referred to as the Minnesota lobe, advanced southward in the valley of
Red River. Although these lobes are described and discussed as somewhat separate glaciers,
too much emphasis should not be placed on their separate existence. It would naturally be
true that as the Labrador glacier advanced from the northeast it would project farthest where
the deepest valleys existed and would have reentrants where the hills caused obstruction to
free glacial advance. It therefore seems probable that the Lake Michigan and Lake Superior
lobes actually did advance independently over the regions described ; but it must also be remem-
bered that with farther advance to the south the lobes in the Great Lakes basins and those on
the hills would coalesce until the hilly region was completely covered by one confluent ice sheet.
For example, after the Lake Superior lobe had advanced westward from Duluth and the Rainy
Lake lobe had advanced over the highland area of northern Minnesota and the international
boundary, their farther advance would cause these short lobes to become confluent and form
one great ice cap.
DRIFTLESS AREA.
If there was not time enougli for two lobes to become confluent before the retreat of the
ice, there would be left between them an area where the soil, the ledges, and the drainage bore
no evidence of the glacial advance. Such an area might have been formed in northern Minne-
sota if the Lake Superior lobe and the Ramy Lake lobe had never coalesced. They did coalesce,
however, but in one small area at the extreme northeastern part of Minnesota, described by
N. H. Winchell " and U. S. Grant, * the drift is so thin that, although the topography, striated
rock surfaces, and scattered foreign bowlders definitely prove glaciation of the area, the fact
that the residual soil has not all been removed and the absence of nearly all glacial deposits
have led to the description of the locality as " a possibly driftless area." Part of the Marquette
district is an area of very thin drift, as near the Mansfield mine, on Michigamme River. Similar
areas of tliin drift are described as occurring in Canada.
In western Wisconsin and the adjacent parts of Minnesota and Iowa there is a true driftless
area, and this was recognized in 1852 or earher by D. D. Owen" and has been studied and fully
described by Chamberlin and Salisbury.'* A portion of the Driftless Area (fig. 68, p. 45.3) is
included in the southwestern part of the region described in this report. Recent studies by
Weidman^ and by Leverett and Alden are somewhat modifying the ideas previously held as to
the shape and boundaries of this area, although the main fact of its existence and the assign-
ment of its cause to insufficient time for the reduced supply of ice from the north, retarded by
the higlilands, to reach this driftless region still stand approved.
RETREATING ICE.
The so-called retreat of the ice sheet was not an actual backward motion, the opposite of
the forward motion of the advance, but a melting back of the front of the ice sheet. Wliile the
front of the continental ice sheet was retreating from tliis region, the highlands first emerged
from the ice cover because the ice was thinnest above their tops, and valley glaciers or lobes
lingered longest in the valleys because it was there that the ice was thickest and, after tliinnuig
by ablation, most protected by the load of soil and stones which it was carrying. Accordingly
during the retreat the ice front was always lobate. The lobes in the Lake Michigan and Lake
Superior basins were much more extensive than those in the northern Minnesota and northern
Wisconsin liiglilands, as the glacial deposits that have been left in the region prove. There
were probably slight readvances during the retreat of the ice sheet south of Lake Superior.
a Filteenth Aim. Rept. Minnesota Geo!, and Nat. Hist. Survey, 1S87, p. 350.
6 Am. Geologist, vol. 24, 1899, pp. 377-381; Final Rept. Minnesota Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey, 1899, pp. 421, 437-438.
c Geological survey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1S52.
d Chamberlin, T. C, and Salisbiu-y, R. D., Tlie driftless area of the upper Mississippi Valley: Sixth Ann. Rept. U, S. Geol. Survey, 1884, pp.
199-322.
« Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16, 1907, pp. 548-565.
430 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
A study of thcso deposits also suggests that the ice lobe whic^h advanced down the Red
River valley, moving southward and southeastward in the area discussed in this monograph,
came after the Lake Superior and Lake Micliigan lobes had retreated for some distance," perhaps
into the basins of the present lakes. Moreover, glacial grooves and stria; on the ledges seem to
show the same thing. In the St. Croix Dalles region glacial scratches on the rock are associated
with the deposits made by the Lake Superior lobe of the Labrador glacier in such a way as to
suo'i-est that they wore made during a first glacial advance, while striations associated with
overlying glacial deposits made by the Red River lobe of the Keewatin glacier differ in direction
and were probably made after the first set.*" The relation of moraines of red and of gray drift
near the south boundary of the upper peninsula of Michigan, west of Crystal Falls, suggested
the possibility to I. C. Russell <^ that the Chippewa (or Keweenaw) lobe of the Superior glacier
was still advancing after the Green Bay lobe of the Lake Michigan glacier had partly retired
from the- area.
That there were slight rcadvances of the ice during its general recession is indicated in
several places, as in eastern Wisconsin, where red till moraines of the Green Bay and Lake
Michigan lobes overlie the earlier moraines of the Wisconsm glaciation. Certain stages of the
marginal glacial lakes discussed later also indicate a halt in Lake Michigan in the latitude of
Manistee and a subsequent slight readvance. These readvances durmg the deglaciation of
the region, however, do not seem to have been very many or very great, so far as the preliminary
studies thus far made give evidence.
CONTRASTED GENERAL EFFECTS OF GLACIATION.
In general the glacial invasion stripped the peneplain of its soil in the area north of Lake
Superior, while south of the lake, in the highland region of northern Wisconsin, it removed
the soil but left a heavy mantle of glacial deposits. Nevertheless, tliroughout this area the
influence of glaciation on topography was minor, while the effects on soU, drainage, forests, and
the subsequent pursuits of man were most profound. WTiat was a hill in this upland area
north of the lake before the glacial advance is still a hUl; what was a vaUey is almost without
exception still a valley, but it may be marsh or lake, or stony soil, and so useless for agriculture.
It may have had a fertile soil before glaciation, or may have contained some evidence of an
adjacent body of u-on ore, and this the glacier has taken away, leavmg as compensation per-
haps a sandy soil supportmg a splendid pine forest, possibly a ledge from which the location of
the ore body may be inferred, perhaps only a clogged valley, a chain of lakes, and broad, loiter-
mg stream courses along which the prospector or geologist may travel by canoe, and so reach
regions of mineral wealth that otherwise might have lain hidden to this day. Quite in con-
trast to tliis pre-Cambrian area, the horizontal Cambrian rocks of the south shore of Lake Superior
near Duluth and Ashland and eastward from Marquette to Sault Ste. Marie, the belted plain
of Wisconsin and Michigan, and the flat-lymg Cretaceous deposits of east-central Minnesota
are deejDly obscured by glacial drift. Throughout nearly all these areas the rocks were so
readily abraded by the ice and the hills were so little higher than the adjacent valleys that the
glacial deposits have entu-ely covered the preglacial topography ami molded a new topography
of their own. Moreover, the draming of the glacial lakes which occupied the basin of the
present Lake Superior and overlapped its shores has permitted streams to produce a peculiar
topograpliy of scidptured lake clays.'*
DESTRUCTIVE WORK OF THE GLACIERS.
Removal of weathered rock. — Glacial erosion removed quantities of weathered rock, includ-
ing the nonrcsistant iron ores, perhaps truncating the iron-bearing roclvs to a lower level ui
Canada than in tlie United States, and hence maldng the Canadian mines less productive, as
a Weidman, Samuel, Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16, 1907, fig. 21, p. 434, and map in pocket. Berkey, C. P., Jour. Geology,
vol. 13, ISIII.'i. pp. .15, 39.
6 rhamberlin, R. T., Jour. Geology, vol. 13, 190), pp. 249-251.
c Ann. Kept. Cieol. Survey Michigan for 1906, 1907, pp. 47-52.
d Irving, R. D., Geology ot Wisconsin, 1873-1879, vol. 3, 1880, p. 69.
b
THE PLEISTOCENE. 431
Van Hise° has suggested. Lawson,* however, brmgs evidence to show tliat there was no
very material reduction of level.
Striee and roches moutonnees. — The scratches or strias and the smoothly polished surfaces
which were made by the ice advancing over the region are to be found throughout the Lake
Superior region wherever there are ledges of hard rock which will preserve them. On the
Archean and Algonkian ledges these striae are exceeduagly common. The advance of the
glaciers over these ledges modified them, producmg the rountled forms known as roches mouton-
nees. Some of these have longer axes in the direction of ice movement and steep or even pre-
cipitous slopes on the lee side, due to a process called plucking, in which large blocks of ice
are rasped or torn away by the glacier. In the pre-Cambrian areas these roches moutonnees
are exceedingly common, although in the main rather low and not very prominent.
• Broadened and deepened, valleys. — In certain favorable localities, either where the ice flow
is very strong or where the rock is exceptionally weak, glaciers broaden and deepen their
valleys. Clements'' suggests the possibility that in the Vermilion district "glacial erosion
was also active in widening and deepenmg these preglacial valleys, changing V-shaped into
U-shaped valleys." The overdeepening of certam parts of the bottoms of valleys results
in the production of basins in the solid rock, and these are afterward occupied by lakes.
(See PI. VI, p. 118.) The rock basins of this description are very common m the Lake Superior
region, and glacial erosion has probably caused the deepenmg of many of the lakes in the
granite area of northern Minnesota, where it is possible to go all around the lake shores on
ledges, demonstratmg that the lake basins are lower than the surrounding country. Lake
Superior was somewhat deepened by glacial erosion at the time when the ice was advancing
through it (PI. II, p. 86), and Lake Michigan and Green Bay,'^ like the Wumebago Valley,
were also somewhat deepened in this way, although, as previously stated, these depressions
must have existed before the glacial ice advanced through them.
Glacial erosion also broadened and rounded out the great transverse valley of Portage
Lake, which crosses Keweenaw Pomt at Houghton, as well as many other valleys in the region,
especially in the more hilly areas. The overdeepening may be seen west of Houghton, where
Huron Creek occupies a hanging valley (PI. XXX, B, p. 434).
The effect of glacial erosion on the Duluth escarpment northwest of Lake Superior, where
Thimder, Black, and Nipigon bays occupy submerged hanging valleys, has already been dis-
cussed (p. 114).
Glacial rock basins. — The rock-basLn lakes occupymg depressions produced by glacial
erosion are numerous in the areas of pre-Cambrian rocks. (See PI. VIII, in pocket.) Their
character and origm may be inferred from one specific illustration. In the Michipicoten
district a series of lake basins entirely rimmed by rock has been studied by Coleman,^ who
concluded that these basins have been formed by chemical action and are not due to glacial
erosion.
The writer visited the Michipicoten district durmg the summer of 1907 and after a study
of these rock basins came to a conclusion different from that of Coleman. For a number of
reasons it seems probable that Hematite Mountain, at whose base is the Helen iron mine and
one of the rock basins, was the seat of a local glacier that probably came into existence as the
ice was advancing over southern Ontario and lingered as the ice sheet was retreating, because
of the height" of the hill (1,700 feet). The north and northwest slopes of the hill would receive
less sunlight and heat than the south slope and the snow and ice would therefore Imger there
longest. The local glacier would naturally be on that side. The shape of the depression in
which the Helen mine is situated is such as to suggest that it is a glacial cirque (fig. 61), and
the rock basin is of exactly the kind which is made by small glaciers m tlieii' cirques. A
a Van nise, C. R., Twenty-flrst Ann. Kept. U. S. Geol. Survey, pt..3, 1901, pp. 411-412.
6 Laws»n. A. C, Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 1, 1890, p. 169.
c Clements, J. M., Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, p. 43.
d Winchell, N. H., Am. Jour. Sci., 3tl ser., vol. 2, 1871. pp. 15-19. '
e Coleman, A. P., Rock basins of Helen mine. Michipicoten, Canada: Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 13. 1902, pp. 293-304; Univ. Toronto
Studies, 1902, pp. 5-6, 26; Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 15, pt. 1, 1906, pp. 187, ISS; Econ. Geology, vol. 1, 1906, p. 522.
432
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ledge separates it from an adjoining rock basin a little farther down (a normal glacial rock basin
relation of which many examples are known) and a rather marked hanging valley (PI. XXIX, ^)
connects the depression in which these two lakes are situated with a lower trunk valley in wliich
lies still another lake (fig. 61). The existence of this hanging valley indicates glacial erosion
in the region. The glacial striae in the upper part of the valley, which occasioned one of Cole-
man's difficulties in believing this a glacial rock basin, are oblique to the trend of the valley,
as would be natural during the higher stages of the continental glacier, but the lowcrstriajrun
in the proper direction for the later stages of a local glacier. Ice would naturally excavate
HefTjatitc Mtn
Glacial rock basins I700
Hanging SnvrsZ-
Grade .of main valley to which hanging valley is tributary valley ^^-■ISSS''
Talbot Lake BOO'
0 1000 2000 3000 -WOO FEET
FiGUKE 61.— Sketch showing the glacial cirque, the rock basins, and the hanging valley near the Helen mine, Michipieoten.
along the zone of weak iron-bearing rocks, which were possibly somewhat prepared for the
excavation by chemical action of the sort that Coleman suggests. °
The real crux of the determination of these lake basins as of chemical or glacial origin lies
in the fact that the iron ore remaining in the basins is found in just that locality where a small
glacier in a cirque would protect it, although removing the rest of the iron ore, whereas if a
chemical origin is thought plausible, the selective chemical action in preserving the ore at just
this point and removing it elsewhere in the basin must be accounted for.
TRANSPORTING WORK OF GLACIERS.
It is well established that the deposits carried by the glaciers have been worn by the ice
from the .ridges over which the ice sheet advanced and that in any place where glaciers have
been the rocks brought by them are apt to be of an entirely difjFerent sort from the ledges which
underlie them, although a large part of the material in the drift may be of local derivation.
This transportation of foreign material was early observed in tliis region, though explained
by Bigsby '' as due to "an earthquake sea wave" or "loaded icebergs." When rocks of a
distinctive kind are found in an area where no similar rocks normally occur and the striae
indicate that the glaciers moved in the proper direction to carry these rocks, it may be con-
sidered demonstrated that glacial ice has moved the material from one place to the other. The
early students lacked this conception of moving glaciers. Devonian limestone Math fossils
was thus brought into the Micliipicoten district from a locality some 150 miles to the northeast,
and iron ore was thus transported in the upper peninsula of Micliigan."^ Cambrian or Silurian
limestone pebbles "* from ledges in Manitoba seem to have been brought to the Lake of the
Woods region of old crystalhne rocks bj" a later movement of the Keewatin glacier after the
chief northeast-southwest movement of the Labrador ice sheet. Many fragments of the granites
anil gneisses of the Archean and the por]:)hyrites and quartzites and jaspers of the Lake Superior
region were transported by the glaciers and are now foimd in the region of horizontal Paleozoic
rocks to the south, fragments of tliis kind coming from both the north and the south shores of
Lake Superior. It is sometimes an aid to the iron prospector to study the stones in the glacial
drift in order to determine where possible ledges of iron-bearing formations may be found.
The most notable case of glacial transportation of iron ore is that of the 30,00()-ton mass south
of the Fayal mine, on the Mesabi range, which Leith « describes as being entirely inclosetl in
the glacial drift and hence evidently transported bodily from the ledges to the north.
<■ Coleman, .\. P., Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 8, pt.2, 1899, pp. 156-157
l> Bigsby, J. J., On the erratics of Canada: Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., vol. 7, 1S51, pp. 215-238. '
c Brooks, T. B., Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1, 1873, pp. 76-79.
dLawson, A. C.. Gcnl. anrt Nat. Hist. Survey Canada, vol. 1. 1885, p. 132cc.
' Leith, C. K., The Mesabi iron-bfearing district of Minnesota: Men. U . S. Geol. Survey, vol. 43, 1903, p. 263.
U. S- GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. XXIX
A. HANGING VALLEY NEAR HELEN MINE, MICHIPIGOTEN.
Talbot Lake in foreground. See page 432.
B. LAKE CLAY OVERLYING STONY GLACIAL TILL IN MOUNTAIN IRON OPEN PIT, MESABI
RANGE, MINN.
See page 443.
THE PLEISTOCENE. 433
Among the distinctive materials wliich are found in the glacial drift are diamonds and
native copper. The copper is of course traceable to the copper-bearing rocks of northern
Wisconsin and Michigan and Michipicoten Island, but the source of the diamonds is not loiown."
CONSTRUCTIVE WORK OF GLACIERS.
GROUND MORAINE.
Much of the material carried by the ice sheet is ground finer and finer until it is reduced to
clay, and this clay with the included stones of various sizes which were not ground up so fine
forms the most widespread of the deposits left by the glaciers. It is generally called till or
bowlder clay and was formerly known as unmodified glacial drift. It reached its present
position simply by being dropped from the melting ice, and forms the great mantle of ground
morame and parts of the ridges of terminal or recessional moraines. The present thickness
varies with the former tliickness of the ice, the amount of such debris which was contained in
the ice, and the amount of erosion by running water either in connection with the melting ice
or subsequently. Tliis glacial till is found with varying tliicknesses in every part of the Lake
Superior region, overlymg the Archean, Algonldan, Paleozoic, and Cretaceous rocks, being
entirely absent or represented only by scattered stones in some rock ledges, and covering other
areas and completely obscuring the bed rock by an overburden 200 to 300 feet thick.
The type of topography produced by the glacial till in the ground-moraine areas depends
largely on whether enough of it accumulated to bury the preglacial topography or not. Many
hills in the glaciated area still have the form of their bed-rock cores or are merely thiidy veneered
with the bowlder clay. Many vaUeys also are only partly filled by the tdl (fig. 55, p. 364) and
remain as vaUeys, though not now as deep as before the glacial advance. On the other hand,
more commonly the topography was so mild before the glacial advance and the accumulation
of glacial deposits was so thick that an entirely new topography is modeled by the ice. (See
Pis. XI, p. 180, and XXXI, A, p. 436.) This topography is generally of the "moderately rolhng,"
"undulating or rolling," and "flat or undulating" types described by Warren Upham and others.''
DRUMLINS.
A class of till, or unassorted ground moraine, which deserves special mention is the drum-
lin. Drumlins in only one or two areas within the field of this report have yet been described,
but they doubtless exist at numerous other points. The drumlins of the Lake Superior region
are lenticular hills of bowlder clay or till, varying m shape from that of half of an egg that has
been bisected lengthwise to that of half of a cigar cut in two in the same way. They character-
istically have one rather steep side and one gentle slope, the steep slope being on the side from
wliich the ice came. The long axis of the drumlin is invariably parallel to the direction of the
latest ice movement.
Three areas of drumlins in Micliigan have been described. The first is in the Menominee
district,'^ where the drumUns are found over an area of about 150 square miles and have an
average height of about 40 feet. The second area is also in the upper peninsula of Michigan,
including Les Cheneaux Islands and a portion of the adjokdng mainland on the north shore of
Lake Huron.*^ The tliird drumhn area is in the Grand Traverse region,^ in the northM'estern
part of the southern peninsula of Michigan.
oSalishury, R. D., Notes on the dispersion of drift copper: Trans. Wisconsin Acad. Sci., Arts and Letters, vol. 6, 1SS6, pp. 42-50. Ilobbs,
W. H., Emigrant diamonds in America: Ann. Rept. Smitlisonian Inst., 1901, pp. 359-366; Am. Geologist, vol. 16, 1894, pp. 31-35; Jour. Geology,
vol. 7, 1899, pp. 375-388. Farrington, O. C, ( orrelation of distribution of copper and diamonds in tbe glacial drift ol the Great Lakes region: Proc.
Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci. vol. 58. 190S, p. 288.
i> Final Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota, te.xt accompanying county maps.
"•Russell, I. C, The surface geology of portions of Menominee, Dickinson, and Iron counties, Mich.: Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for
1906, 1907, pp. 8-91.
d Russell, I. C, A geological reconnaissance along the north shore of Lakes Huron and Michigan: .\nn. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 1904,
1905, pp. 39-150.
elxverett, Frank, Science, new ser., vol. 21, 1905, p. 220; Water-Supply Paper U. S. Geol. Survey No. 183, 1907, pp. 333-335.
47517°— VOL 52—11 28
434 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Geologists have, not tliorouglily agreed as to the origin of ch-umlins. Two theories have
been held. One holds that the drumlins are constructed under the ice by the accumulation of
material there, the material being derived by the ice sheet from the land from wliich it is
advancing and the drumlins being built somewhat like bars in a river. The alternate hypoth-
esis ascribes drumUns to a dcstnactive action, the ice sheet being supposed to carve drumlins
from a preexisting mass of tUl laid down by a previous ice sheet. The drumlins of the first
two areas described seem to have been formed by the destructive process, as very decisive
evidence by Russell proves, but Leverett tliinks that some of the drumlins in the Grand
Traverse region are constructional rather than destructional.
ESKERS.
Another glacial feature to be described, the esker, is a fossil stream course formed in or under
the ice by a stream flowing in a tunnel and depositing its load of sediment, wldch is preserved
on the surface as a low winding ridge after the ice has melted away. Eskers in many parts of
the Lake Superior region, as in northeastern Miimesota " and the Menominee district,* have
been described. Russell describes them as low, serpentine gravel ridges in the valleys between
the drumlins. They are doubtless also present in many other areas. They are mentioned here
rather than with the other stratified drift dejjosits, like outwash plains, because in this area
they are commonly associated with the ground moraine rather than with the outwash of the
valleys.
TERMINAL MORAINES.
The deposit piled up at the end of the ice tongue or lobe is called a terminal moraine, and
the name ds applied not only to the deposit made at the farthest advance of the ice but also to
those made at any point where the ice halts. The latter are also sometimes called recessional
moraines. The only terminal moraines in the Lake Superior region wliich mark the farthest
advance of the ice lie aroimd the borders of the Driftless Area, but recessional moraines are more
abundant. Some of them, so far as mapped, are shown in figure 68 (p. 453). These recessional
moraines may be made up of two rather different kinds of material — the glacial till, or unmodi-
fied drift, and the drift which is assorted and stratified by running or standing water. A termi-
nal or recessional moraine in the Lake Superior region usually consists of a series of ridges or
knolls (PI. XXX, A), in general constituting a long, narrow zone of hilly country, which may
be in a single ridge, but is more commonly an irregular belt of ridges and valleys. The charac-
teristic terminal moraine is made up largely of laiobs and kettles. The belts of terminal morauie
range from several hundred yards to several miles in width but are rarely over 4 or 5 miles wide
and generally a mile or less. A great terminal moraine of course indicates that the edge of the
ice remained at one point for a considerable length of time. During this time, if the glacier was
moving, it would be constantly bringing material up to tliis point, dropping the material
there, and perhaps, by slight readvances, shoraig ahead the material wliich had prcA-iously
been deposited by the melting ice, and all this material would be subject to constant removal
or rearrangement by the running water that issued from the ice as the glacier was melting.
These terminal morames are therefore made up of a mixture of unmodified till and stratified
sand, gravel, and clay deposited by running water, with variations of the two as the ice may
have advanced, or as the water may have cut chamiels in the deposits, or as portions of the ice
may have been buried beneath the deposits made by the melting of the upper ice layers or laid
down by the streams. The subsequent melting of these buried ice blocks has caused the glacial
drift to slump down, forming broad hollows and steep-sided pits. This is the general origin of
the kettles which are found in terminal moraines.
o Elftman, A. H., Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1898, p. 97.
b Russell, I. C. The siirface geology of portions of Menominee, Dickinson, and Iron counties, Mich. : Ann. Kept. Geol. Survey Michigan for
190(5, 1907, pp. 8-91; .Vm. Geologist, vol. 35, 1905, pp. 177-179; Science, new ser., vol. 21, 1905, pp. 220, 221.
(5 IV^o
O «
THE PLEISTOCENE. 435
KAMES.
Karnes, or irregular hummocks of waterworn sand and gravel, are present throughout the
morame belts of the Lake Superior region, many of them at the borders of valleys, as if formerly
at the margin of an ice sheet whose melting has caused the edges of marginal terraces to slump
down into irregular hummocks and kettles. Russell describes irregular hillocks of rounded kame
gravels in the Menominee area and ascribes them to accumulation beneath wells, or moulins, in
the ice sheet, where streams on or in the glacier fell vertically and deposited their load.
BECESSIONAL AND INTERLOBATE MORAINES.
The recessional moraines formed at temporary terminal points of the ice sheets during the
Wisconsin stage are seen from the map (fig. 68, p. 453) to be definitely related to the larger
lowland and highland areas, and it is by a study of these moraines that some of the conclusions
as to the behavior of the different ice lobes in the Lake Superior region have been reached.
As the ice retreated from the maximum stage of a confluent ice cap and once more resolved
itself into lobes, some very distinctive deposits were formed between the adjacent lobes, and
these are called interlobate moraines. An example of the moraines of this kind is found in the
interlobate (kettle) moraine of eastern Wisconsin, which was accumulated between the Green
Bay lobe and the Lake Michigan lobe. Other interlobate moraines were formed between the
Chippewa lobe and the Superior lobe in Bayfield and Douglas counties, Wis., west of Ashland,
and between the Superior and the Rainy Lake lobes m northeastern Minnesota.
DRAINAGE OF DRIFT-COVERED AREAS.
The accumulation of till over this great area has modified the drainage, and one of the most
prominent effects of this accumulation is the destruction of mature or submature preglacial
drainage and the superposition of young drainage on the drift, causing gorges, waterfalls, and
the great numbers of lakes and swamps for which the region is noted. (See PI. XXII, in pocket.)
These lakes and swamps are due to a common cause — mterference with the free run-off of rain
by the irregular deposition of the drift. Among the most common kinds of lakes and swamps or
muskegs (PI. XXXI, B) are those wliich are produced by the accumulation of water m shallow
depressions in the undulating or mildly irregular till sheet. As the material of the till was
largely clay, it would naturally be difficult for the water to escape tlirough it. Another com-
mon cause of lakes is the accumulation of a greater thickness of the glacial till in one part of the
valley than in another, producing an obstn.iction to drainage. Many of the streams were also
forced out of their preglacial courses by the deposits of glacial till, and numerous rapids and
waterfalls are due to this cUsplacement. Clements " has described Deer River, Michigan
(PI. XXII), as typical of a stream with associated swamps and lakes in a till-covered area and
has outHned the life history of such a dramage system. The normal type of preglacial drain-
age of the entire Lake Superior region is illustrated in Plate XXXI, A, showing part of the
Driftless Area. Plate XXXI, B, shows the young drainage of the glacial drift which now covers
the greater part of the region.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN YOUNGER AND OLDER DRIFT.
There is evidence in the central United States which has been interpreted as indicating that
the glacial period, instead of being simple, was decidedly complex. It is thought that the
ice did not advance from the Labrador and Keewatin centers once and retreat once, but that
instead it underwent a series of oscillations so that glacial deposits were laid down under or in
front of the ice, the ice retreated from them, and then the weathering and erosional agencies
acted upon these deposits. This is the reason why the lakes among the older glacial deposits are
largely either filled or drained, the till-veneered liillsides are cut by streams, the stones in the
drift are weathered and disintegrated, and the soluble constituents have been leached out of the
soil by percolating water. After all this had taken place the glaciers are thought to have read-
vanced and covered the older drift with a sheet of new till, etc., wliich in some places extends
■■ Clements, J. SI., Mon. U. S. Geol. Surrey, vol. 30, 1899, pp. 32-30; Am. Geologist, vol. 17, 1890, pp. 120-127.
436 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
farther out tliaii tlio older drift and in olliers has left a Ijroad zone of it exposed. Tliis fresh,
unweathered, young till forms a decided contrast to the older drift.
Only the extreme southwestern part of this region contains any of what has been inter-
preted as older drift. In the greater part of the region the drift seems to be solely the work of
the Wisconsin ice sheet. The drift near the borders of the Driftless Area has been ascribed to
two or three earlier glacial epochs, but most of the Lake Superior region furnishes no evidence
whatever of more than one glacial advance, eitiier in the deposits or in the topograph}'.
EFFECT OF NUNATAK STAGES ON DISTKIBUTICN OF DRIFT.
In spite of the lack of detailed studies in a large part of this region, it seems probable that
the behavior of the ice in retreating can be somewhat discriminated, ^^^len an ice sheet covers
an irregular land surface, there are two ways in which it may retreat. It may disappear grad-
ually from the lowlands and linger longest in' the upland regions, as is the case in the Rockies,
in Norway, in Alaska, and in Switzerland to-day. It does this, however, only where the elevated
areas are high enough to become centers of local glaciation and to supply new ice. The con-
trasting condition is found where the highland areas are not sufficiently elevated to retain snow
through the summers and therefore to supply ice. Where the latter condition prevails, the
glacier does not continue to be active up to the very time of its extinction, as in the Rocky
Mountains at present, but becomes stagnant because there is no fresh supply of ice. When an
ice sheet becomes stagnant, the high areas are first exposed by melting, because over them the
ice is thinnest, and they rise out of the ice sheet as nunataks. These nunataks gradually
increase in size, and eventually the ice shrinks until it is found only in the valleys, where it
was thickest.
The conditions just described seem to have prevailed in parts of the Lake Superior region.
Northwest of Lake Superior the Giants Range was a nunatak (figs. 60 and 6;?), emerging in the
interiobate area between the Rainy Lake glacier and the Lake Superior glacier. These lobes
gradually retreated to the Lake Superior basin and to the valley of Red River, respectivclvj
marguial lakes being formed as described in another section (p. 441). North and northeast of
Lake Superior, in Ontario, the conditions maj^ possibly have been similar, the ice shrinking
away from an interiobate area near the Height of Land and occupying the basin of Lake Superior
largely as a stagnant mass.
South of Lake Superior, however, the highland area seems to have had a sonjewhat different
history. The ice from the Chippewa and Keweenaw lobes, which advanced over the highland
region of northern Wisconsin and somewhat down its southward slope, probably retreated
northward over the same slope without the emergence of the northern Wisconsin highland as a
nunatak area, although the Porcupine Mountains were probably uncovered as a nunatak region
about the time the glacier became lobate in the valle3's east and west of Keweenaw Point. The
Huron Mountains aeem also to have first emerged as a nunatak area," lying between the Kewee-
naw and Green Bay lobes. Some of the earliest drift deposits were developed about these
emerging nunataks.
VARIATION OF DEPOSITS WITH SLOPES.
When a glacier is retreating — that is, melting back faster than the ice advances, or melting
back with no advance, as in a stagnant. ice sheet — two rather different kinds of deposits are
made in association with two diverse topographic conditions. One kind is formed where the
land slopes away from the ice, allowing a free run-off of the glacial streams which are fed by the
melting ice. The other kind is formed where the land slopes toward the ice and the drainage
from the ice is detained in a glacial lake imtil it rises to a sudiciently high level to flow over a
neighboring divide. The first condition was well exemplified by the t'hippewa-Keweenaw lobe
as it retreated from the highland region of northern Wisconsin, when its streams flowed freely
awaj-, carrj'ing great quantities of gravel, sand, and cla}'^ that were deposited in outwash plains
» Davis, C. \.. N'inth Rept. Michigan Acad. Scl., 1907, pp. 132-135.
\:^M*H>'ii>
.♦i'.'.V-'" +.
X . — r-r.i.\ /j-. .: I > 1 1 X — ^ — -^^
pqi
o
'"^m
D X.
3
0
iJ
THE PLEISTOCENE. 437
or valley trains, a number of which cross the Driftless Area of Wisconsin. At later stages such
outwash gravels are likely to be so dissected by stream erosion that terraces are formed at
higher levels than the present stream. This is believed to be the origin of the terraces in the
valley of Wisconsin River near Wausau, in that of the St. Croix near the Dalles, and along
several other stream courses of the region.
OUTWASH DEPOSITS.
Wlien several streams flowing out side by side build up a broad plain of the same kind as the
valley trains, but not confined to a valley, the deposit is called an outwash plain (PI. XXX, A).
Outwash plains of this type are found in the Upper Peninsula of Michigan, in Ontario, in Minne-
sota, and in northern Wisconsin. Weidman " has described some of them as "alluvium" and
believes that these deposits are associated with (a) uplift of the land, rejuvenating the streams
and causing intrenchment; (6) lowering of the land, permitting aggradation, during which
these so-called alluvial deposits were laid down; and (c) later uplift, permitting reintrenchment
of the streams, and terrace cutting. The age of this alluvium he is- inclined to place as perhaps
pre-Iowan, between his "Second" and "Third" drift sheets. It may be pointed out that the
alluvium is in places directly associated with terminal moraines, and Weidman has not brought
forward evidence to show that it extends beneath them or is plowed up by them. After short
field studies by the writer it seems more probable that nearly all of this material is normal
outwash.
In view of some of the most recent conclusions concerning the conditions that determine
stream work, it may be conceived that the volume and load of the streams have varied, rather
than the grade. The advance of ice sheets, with increased supply of water, would perform the
same work of intrenchment as the uplift postulated by Weidman, if indeed this intrenchment
is not preglacial. Later the increased load of the streams, supplied with debris from the melting
ice, would necessitate aggradation and the formation of outwash deposits, exactly similar to
Weidman's alluvium and such as are knowTi in association with existing ice fronts the world
over. Still later the diminution of the debris furnished to the streams by melting ice would
result in their relief from overloading and in a return to processes of intrenchment and terrace
cutting. More than this, Weidman's alluvium, where supposedly overriden by the ice depositing
the "Third" drift in the Wisconsin River valley, seems to lack entirely the broad truncation
and grooving characteristic of gravels overridden and eroded by ice, as they are known in Alaska.
Again, Weidman has not shown that the terraces are gullied or the drift in them weathered and
leached as it should be if they are pre-Wisconsin in age. Lastly, if these so-called alluvial
deposits are not outwash and mostly of Wisconsin age, it may be asked. What became of the
water and debris from the melting Wisconsin ice sheet ?
I. C. Russell *> described a series of interesting outwash deposits in the valley of Menominee
River (PL XXVI, in pocket). They he in a series of steplike levels associated with moraines,
marking recedmg stages of the border of the Green Bay lobe. The angular turns of Menominee
River seem also to be related to these receding stages.
At Grantsburg, Wis., in the valley of the St. Croix, C. P. Berkey" has studied a series of
laminated red and gray clays, judged to have been formed in a glacial lake whose deposits over-
lie Wisconsin till. He reaches the conclusion that the clays were derived fi-om the melting of
an oscillating ice sheet and estimates a greater length of time than is usually thought of since the
retreat of the ice, on the theory that each of the laminae represents a year of melting interrupted
by freezmg and supply of finer sediment. He has also compiled an excellent sketch map<^
showing the relation of recessional moraines west and south of the end of Lake Superior in
Wisconsin and Muinesota.
1 Weidman, Samuel, Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey, vol. 16, 1907, pp. 418-421, 425, 477, 497-498, 5Dl, 504, 506, 514-547, 569-571,
609-610, 622-624.
b Ann. Rept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 1906, 1907, p. 65.
c Jour. Geology, vol. 13, 1905, pp. 35-44.
dldem, flg. 1, p. 43.
438 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
PITTED PLAINS.
There is one phase of the btiikling of outwash gravel deposits or valley trains which deserves
special mention. In numerous places these gravel deposits arc deeply pitted. Such pits or
kettles are well dcvel()])e(l, for example, near Negaunee, m the Marquette <Ustrict; all through
the valley of Michigamme River; m the Perch Lake district (Pi. XXI, in pocket) ; in the Crystal
Falls district, between Randville and Witbeck (PI. XXII, in pocket) ; in the valley of Menominee
River south of Iron Mountaui (PI. XXVI, in pocket); m the lowland region of the northern
peninsula of Micliigan, east of Marcjuette; in the Michipicoten district of Canada; and doubt-
less elsewhere. As the glaciers in these regions retreated small tongues or isolated blocks of ice
were buried beneath the gravels of the glacial streams. Subseijuently, when these detached ice
blocks melted, the gravel layers slumped and the kettles which pit the surface of the gravel plain
were formed. Many of the gravel kettles contain lakes (PI. XXX, A, p. 4.34) and a considerable
number of the small lakes of northern Micliigan and Wisconsin are of tliis origin.
LOESS.
In the southwestern part of the area is a fuie clayey or sandy material called loess, formed
possibly from the rock flour carried by the streams flowing from the retreating glaciers or
transported by winds. Its distribution witlun tliis area is not well known as yet.
VALLEY LAKES DUE TO VARIATION IN STREAM LOAD.
There is a striking contrast between the streams that were the outlets of marginal glacial
lakes and the streams that flowed directly from the ice, the former being relatively clear streams
and the latter bemg heavily loaded with sediment. Accordmgly it was possible for Chippewa
River, with its heavy load of glacial material, supplied directly by the melting ice, to build its
outwash plain right across Mississippi River in western Wisconsin in spite of the fact that the
volume of the Mississippi was probably much larger, so that it should have been able to carry away
the sediment supplied by a small tributary like the Cliippewa. Many of the streams feeding the
upper Mississippi were, like the outlets of Lake Agassiz, Lake Nemadji, and Lake Duluth, out-
lets of glacial lakes in which the sand, gravel, and clay had all been strained out. Accordingly
the small Chippewa, with its heavy load, aggraded at its confluence with the Mississippi and
was able to dam back the Mississippi itself in a narrow, lakeUke expansion more than 25 miles
long, called Lake Pepin (PL II, p. 86).
Farther up the ^^ississippi, on the Wisconsin-Minnesota boimdary near St. Paul, the process
just outlined was reversetl, the maua stream havuig more load as well as more volume than its
tributary, the St. Croix (PI. II). Accordmgly the Mississippi outwash plam and more recently
the modern flood plain have retarded the outflow of the St. Croix, so that a lake is formed in its
valley fi-om the mouth, where a modern sandbar surmounts the flood plam, to a point about 30
miles upstream, the head of the present Lake St. Croix.
Similar valley lakes on the Minnesota side of the Mississippi have been described by Win-
chell." During the summer of 1908 the writer observed a similar series of lakes in the tributary
valley mouths on the Wisconsin shore of the Mississippi. These are in the Driftless ^\j'ea. They
were formed during glacial time by the greater buiklmg up of the mam glacier-fed Mississippi
(through outwash) than of its rain-fed tributaries. The assumption by Wmchell of a long, nar-
row ice tongue m the Mississippi Valley, however, seems to the writer uiuiecessary. The out-
wash itself, carried by the great volume of water from the melting glaciers and not by the more
slender stream of the motlern Mississippi, could perfectly well accomit for these glacial materials
in the Driftless Area and for the shallow lateral lakes, like Waumandee Lake in Wisconsui,
across the river from Wmona, and numerous imnamed ponds and swamps in side valley mouths.
aWinchell, N. H., BuU. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 12, 1901, pp. 127-128.
THE PLEISTOCENE. 439
DISTRIBUTION OF GLACIAL DRIFT.
The detailed work on the distribution of the morainic deposits in this region has not covered
anything like the whole area. It is of mterest to note that the first man to present a correct
explanation of the glacial phenomena in America, Louis Agassiz," was one of the first to make
observations in the Lake Superior region, as did James Hector,* Sir William Logan, '^ J. J.
Bigsby,'' J. W. Foster and J. D. Whitney,* E. Desor,/ D. D. Owen,ff J. G.Norwood,'' C. Whit-
tlesey,* B. F. Shumard,-* G. M. Dawson,* C. T. Jackson,' W. A. Burt,™ and many other early
observers who observed many of the facts of transported bowlders and soil, waterworn mate-
rials, smoothed and striated rocks, etc., without recognizing or being willing to accept their
glacial origin, as Agassiz and some others had done.
The Pleistocene deposits of the Ashland region, Penokee range, etc., in Wisconsin, were
early described by R. D. Irving," who distinguished the glacial drift and the lacustrine clay and
showed their distribution on Ms map. E. T. Sweet " briefly refers to the unstratified glacial
deposits, the moraines, and the stratified drift (lake clays) farther west, in Bayfield and Douglas
counties. T. C. Chamberlin v made a report based on notes of Moses Strong,P concerning the
glacial features in the upper St. Croix district, including the strise, the kettle moraine, the
bowlder clay, and the "barrens." The glacial deposits, lakes, morainic belts, etc., in the upper
Flambeau Vallej' of Wisconsin are described by F. H. King.? The glacial deposits in eastern
Wisconsin are described by T. C. Chamberlin.'" The glacial features of an area in the upper
Wisconsin Valley are briefly described by T. C. Chamberlin from notes by A. C. Clark.' R. D.
Irving * described and mapped the glacial deposits in central Wisconsin and part of the Drift-
less Area. The glacial phenomena of all Wisconsin are reviewed by T. C. Chamberlin," who
has also correlated the glacial features of the southern part of the Lake Superior area in Minne-
sota, Wisconsin, and Michigan." Samuel Weidman has recently done detailed work over an
area of about 7,200 square miles in north-central Wisconsin, and has published descriptions ^
of the terminal moraines, the ground moraine, the older drift, etc. He has also surveyed the
glacial geology of a nearly equal area west of this, within the region discussed in this monograph,
but his report on it is not yet published. C. P. Berkey^ and R. T. Chamberlin 2' have each
discussed the glacial geology of a small area near the St. Croix Dalles. The detailed mapping
of the glacial deposits of the south half of the Green Bay glacier by W. C. Alden, of the United
States Geological Survey, not yet published, extends up to the south boundary of the area here
discussed.
The glacial deposits in Michigan were examined in the early surveys by T. B. Brooks,^
Carl Rominger/" and others. More recently A.C. Lane*"* has described the glacial deposits on
0 Agassiz, Louis, Lalte Superior, its physical character, vegetation, and animals, 1850, pp. 395-416.
^ Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc, vol. 17, 1861, p. 393.
I- Geology of Canada, 18C3, pp. 888-893, 904-908, 912-913, and plate in atlas showing superficial deposits.
d On the erratics of Canada; Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc, vol. 7, 1851, pp. 215-238.
e Report on the geology and topography of a portion of the Lake Superior land district, vol. 1, 1850, pp. 186-218.
/Idem, vol. 2, 1851, pp. 2.32-247.
g Report of a geological survey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, pp. 32, 36, 141-145, etc.
h Idem, pp. 298, 329-330, 348, etc.
ildem, pp. 426-429, 435-436, 462-466, etc.
; Idem, pp. 515, 517, etc.
* Geology and resources of the region in the vicinity of the forty-ninth parallel, 1875, pp. 217-254.
1 House Ex. Doc. No. 5, 31st Cong., 1st sess., pt. 3, 1849, pp. 388-389.
m Idem, p. 820.
" Geology of Wisconsin, 1873-1879, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 211-214, PI. XX.
o Idem, pp. 352-356.
V Idem, pp. 382-387, PI. XXXVH.
9 Idem, vol. 4, 1882, pp. 611-613.
rldem, 1S73-1877, vol. 2, 1877. pp. 199-246.
sidem, 1873-1879, vol. 4, 1882, pp. 717-721.
1 Idem, 1873-1877, vol. 2, 1877, pp. 608-635.
u Idem, 1873-1879, vol. 1, 1883, pp. 261-298.
f Terminal moraine of the second glacial epoch: Third Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1883, pp. 315-330, 381-393.
KiBull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16, 1907, pp. 433-513.
1 Am. Geologist, vol. 20. 1897, pp. 355-369.
1/ Jour. Geology, vol. 13, 1905, pp. 238-256.
2 Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1. pt. 1, 1873, pp. 72, 76-79.
aa Idem, vol. 1, pt. 3, 1873, pp. 15-20; vol. 4, 1881, pp. 1-2, 40-41.
bb Idem, vol. 6, pt. 1, 1898, pp. 183-184, 193.
440 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION'.
Isle Royal and has published some brief notes on the glacial deposits of parts of Keweenaw
Point." Besides this ho lias written a sliort description and ]nil)lished a }2;hicial map of the
deposits in the Lower Peninsula,'' the nortliwestcrn i)art of whicli comes within the area of this
report, from published and unpul)lislied data by Messrs. Gordon, Leverett, Sherzer, and Lane.
He also treats the drift in las summary of the surface fijeolofry of Michigan.'^ I. C. Russell has
stu<licd the glacial features of the south border of the Upper Peninsula from St. Mar\- River
to a point west of Crystal Falls. Ilis map shows the distribution of the moraines in this region,
and ids work lias been continued by C. A. Davis "^ west of Marquette and south of the Huron
Mountams. Frank T^everett has studied in detail the glacial deposits there and in the eastern
lowland portion of the Upper Peninsula, but has pubhshed no report as yet except a brief review. '
The glacial dei)osits north ami northeast of Lake Superior in Ontario are not known in
detail, though A. B. Willmott,^ A. P. Coleman,!' E. S. Moore,'' and J. M. Bell,' have made obser-
vations in the Michipicoten district. Coleman also briefly refers to the glacial deposits near
Lake Nipigon,.' as does E. S. Moore * to those in the Windegokan district east of Lake Nipigon *
and W. H. Collms ' to those west of Lake Nipigon.
Northwest of Lake Superior the glacial phenomena in the Ijake of the Woods region have
been described by G. M. Dawson,™ and the glacial features there and in the Rainy Lake region
have been treated fully by A. C. Lawson."
To the east, north of the international boundar\', the glacial geology of Hunters Island
has been descril)ed by W. H. C. Smith" and that of the area covered by the Seine River and
Lake Shebandowan map sheets by William McInnes.P
In Minnesota the glacial deposits have been studied extensively by Warren Upham, N. H.
Winchell, L^. S. Grant, J. E. Todd, A. H. Elftman, and others. Their discussions are found
in the annual reports of the Minnesota Geological Survey and in the volumes of the final report,
including a series of detailed county maps and descriptions. This is the most detailed series
of studies of the glacial deposits thus far made within the area here considered, though without
sufficient correlation. II. V. Winchell and U. S. Grant have described some of the glacial phe-
nomena in Miimesota, near Rainy Lake.?
In a preliminary report "■ Warren Upham has described the moraines of northeastern
Minnesota and published a map of part of the Lake Superior area. The location of the cliief
morainic deposits on this map seems to have been accurate, but there have been some dilTer-
ences of opinion as to the interpolation between morainic belts and the correlation and inter-
pretation of the moraines. Upiiam indicated by his map that the ice all retreated northward,
no special influence being exerted by the Lake Superior basin, the valley of Red River, or the
liighlands of northern Minnesota and the international boundary. But this would mean that
the ^lesabi, Itasca, and Leaf Hills moraines had the ice on the wTong side, as is proved by the
superposition of lake clay on glacial till south of the Mesabi range, a relation that would not
exist if the ice had retreated northward over the range. (See figs. 62, p. 443: 68, p. 45.3: and
PI. XXIX, B, p. 432.) J. E. Toild " subsecjuently pointed out this discrepancy anil A. H.
o Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 12, 1907, pp. 101-104.
6 Water-supply Paper U. S. Geol. Survey No. .TO, 1899, PI. II, pp. 58-67, 75-77.
<; Ann. Rept. Geol. Survey Michigan (or 1907, 190.S, pp. 97-143.
i Ninth Rept Michigan Acad. Sci., 1907, pp. 132-1.15.
« Sixth Kept. Michiga Acad Sci., 1904, pp. 100-110; Water-Supply Paper U. S. Geol. Survey No. UiO, 1900, pp. 29-33. with contour map; Water-
Supply Paper U. S. Geol. Survey No. 183, 1907, pp. 4-0.
/ Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 7, 1898, pp. 204-205.
■ B Idem, vol. 15, pt. 1, 1905, pp. 192-193.
» Idem, p. 200.
"Idem, vol. 14, pt. 1, 1905, p. 288.
/Idem, vol. 10, pt. 1, 1907, p. 135.
*Idem, pp. 147-148.
'Summary Rept. Geol. Survey Canada, 1906, pp. 103-104, 108.
m Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc, vol. 31, 1S75, pp. 007-008.
» Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Canada, vol. 1, new ser., pt. CC, 1886, pp. 25-26, 130-140; vol. 3, pt, F. 1890. pp. 10. 20-21, 163-176.
o Gcol. Survey Canada, new ser., vol. 5, pt. 1, 1893, pp. 71G-74G.
pidem, vol. 10, 1899, pp. 5in-54II.
jTwenly-lhird Ann. Rept. Minnesota Geol. and Nat. Hist. Sur\'ey, 1895, pp. 08-09.
r Twcnty-se('ond Ann. Rept. Minnesota Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey, 1S94, pp. 31-54.
• Am. Geologist, vol. IS, 1890, pp. 225-226; Am. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 6, 189S, pp. 409-477 (with map).
THE PLEISTOCENE. 441
Elftman " has discussed it furtlier and published a revised map of the moraines northwest of
Lake Superior.
The geologists of the United States Geological Survey have referred briefly to tiie glacial
deposits,* and their work is cited more specifically in other parts of this report. On only two
of their geologic maps '^ are glacial deposits separately shown (Pis. XVII and XXII, in pocket),
though a special map'^ of a third region shows the distribution of the recessional moraines, and
there are detailed maps for the Marquette district.
The map of the Marquette district (PI. XVII) gives a separate color to "undivided Pleis-
tocene" without specifically stating of what tliis consists. The areas so mapped are those in
which no ledges whatever are found because of the thickness of the glacial drift and modem
stream and swamp deposits. Accordingly it is evident that these areas do not include all the
Pleistocene deposits of the district, but merely the places where they are continuous and thick,
completely obscuring the older rocks. Pleistocene deposits are found throughout the district,
but in other places are discontinuous or very thin. The undivided Pleistocene of the Mar-
quette area, which is confined cliiefly to the lowland south and east of Marquette, includes,
where mapped, glacial till, morainic deposits, stream-assorted glacial outwash deposits, beaches
of higher levels of Lake Superior, and lake-bottom clays, besides small areas of modern swamp
accumulations, like peat and marl, and stream deposits.
The undivided Pleistocene of the Crystal Falls area (PI. XXII) where mapped in the
Micliigamme River valley west of Floodwood and farther south near Channing and Sagola
includes glacial till, recessional moraines, flat sandy outWash-plain deposits, and various swamp
and stream deposits.
On the sketch map (fig. 68, p. 4.53) it has been thought wise to distinguish three facts con-
cerning the distribution of the drift and the terminal moraines — (1) the distribution of the
outermost moraine, whether of the last glacial advance or of an earlier one; this is the boundary
of the Driftless Area; (2) the boundary of the Wisconsin stage of glaciation, the latest stage;
(3) some of the more prominent recessional moraines, so far as their location is known. The
locations assigned to the more important recessional moraines inside the border of the terminal
moraine of the Wisconsin stage are of varying degrees of accuracy, because, although the reces-
sional moraines in Minnesota are fairly well known and well mapped, those in Wisconsin, Mich-
igan, and Ontario have been mapped only in small areas. In fact, comparatively Uttle is
known of the episodes accomjianying the withdrawal of the ice sheet from the portions of the
Lake Superior region not l3'irtg in IMinnesota, save Ln regard to the association of the ice with
the marginal lakes that were the predecessors of Lake Superior and Lake Michigan.
MARGINAL LAKES.
In places where the land slopes toward the ice so that glacial lakes are formed, deposits
of a quite different tyj^e from the outwash are accumulated, and deposits of this kind were
formed in the glacial lakes now to be described.
WTiile the ice sheet was retreating into the basin of I^ake Superior marginal lakes were
formed between the ice front and the adjacent higher land. Such lakes were of course formed
also during the advance of the glacier, but the evidence of them was later destroyed. An
early nunatak, already referred to as rising through the ice, was the long, narrow Giants Range
(figs. 4, p. 87; 5, p. 88; 62, p. 443), which had been completely buried by the glacier, but because
it stood highest in the ice was the first to emerge after the ice became stagnant and began to
melt. The emergence of this range divided the ice sheet into two separate glaciers — the Kee-
watin or western continental glacier (Rainy Lake or Red River or Minnesota lobe) and the
a Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1898, pp. 91-109.
bUon. U. S. Geol. Siirvej-, vol. 36 (Crystal Falls district), 1S99, pp. 29-30, 332-333: vol. 43 (Mesabi district), 1903, pp. 22, 24, 191-194, 199; vol.
45 (Vermilion district), 1903, pp. .39, 425-130; vol. 46 (Menominee district), 1904, p. 500; Nineteenth Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Survey, pt. 3, 1899,
pp. 25-26; Menominee special folio (No. 62), Geol. Atlas .U. S., 1900, p. 12.
c Van Hise, C. R., Bayley, W. S., and Smyth, H. L., The Marqnette iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 28, 1.897,
atlas, sheets 4, 25-.39. Clements, J. M., Smyth, H. L., and Bayley, W. S., The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol.
Survey, vol. 36, 1899, PI. lit.
"i Clements, J. M., The Vermilion iron-bearing district of Minnesota: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 45, 1903, fig. 23, p. 427.
442 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Lauren tian glacier CLake Superior lobe), the two probably coalescing some distance to the
northeast, perhaps north and oast of Gunflint Lake. The Lake Superior lobe filled all of the
Lake Superior basin, extending down over part of the Archean area of northern Wisconsin and
southwestward beyond Carlton, Minn. The Minnesota or Red River lobe extended north and
west from the Giants Range.
GLACIAL LAKE AGASSIZ.
In the valley of Red River, where the Red River lobe of the Keewatin glacier probably
retreated some time after the Lake Superior lobe had gone back, the topographic conditions
were such that a great marginal glacial lake was formed. These conditions consisted in the
presence of a broad valle}' with gently sloping sides and a slight slope toward the north, and
of a low divide between its headwater region and the headwaters of the Mississippi. Until
the ice had retreated up to this low divide, which was in the vicinity of Bigstone and Traverse
lakes, northwest of St. Paul, near latitude 45° 30', the streams from the melting Red River
glacier had a free outflow to the south (glacial River Warren) and built up valley-train deposits
of the kind already described. As soon as the ice had retreated to this divide, however, an
entirely ditferent condition was introduced. The ice sheet was now retreating down the valley
and the waters emerging from it were temporarily detained in a marginal glacial lake. With
successive stages of retreat of this glacier the lake became enlarged, although probably con-
tinuing to overflow southward through the valley into Mississippi River until some lower outlet
to the northeast, whose location is as yet unknown, had been uncovered. To this great glacial
lake (fig. 65, p. 446} the name Lake Agassiz has been given. Warren Upham has described the
lake and its abandoned, tilted shore lines, etc., in a monograph" that contains a fxdl bibli-
ography of earlier publications on the lake. The whole lake as commonly shown on maps
probably never existed at one time. It is not definitely known to have been contemporary
with glacial Lakes Duluth and Chicago, as the sketch map (fig. 65) shows it for convenience.
The features associated with the several stages of Lake Agassiz were beaches and lake-
bottom clays. The beaches are found in the Lake Superior region as far east as Red Lake and
Rainy Lake,* northwest of Lake Superior; the lake clays overspread all the areas below these
beaches and form the fertile lowland in the wheat lands of the Red River valley in Minnesota,
North Dakota, and Manitoba.
MARGINAL GLACIAL LAKES.c
Before or durmg the early stages of Lake Agassiz in the area just north of the Giants Range
the glacial Lakes Norwood, Dunka, Elftman, and Onnamani were the first ones held between
the east end of the Giants Range and the Rainy River lobe of the Red River glacier, outflowing
southward and cutting channels across the Giants Range. (See fig. 4, p. 87; 5, p. SS; PI. 11^
p. 86.) The present Lake Vermihon is a smalLremnant of the last of these glacial lakes. Glacial
Lake Nicollet <* was held in by the Red River glacier and the encircling land. Leech, Cass, and
Winnibigoshish lakes are remnants of it. To the north glacial Lakes Big Fork, Beltrami, and
Thompson were small margmal stages of glacial I^ake Agassiz. Rainy Lake and Red Lake
probably occupy parts of the basin of Lake Thompson and of the later Lake Agassiz, as do also
the Lake of the Woods, etc. All these glacial lakes were held between a northwestward-
retreatmg ice front and the -Height of I^and, overflowmg southwartl to the Mississippi drauiage
basin.
South of the Giants Range the Superior lobe similarly held up glacial lakes, the fu'st notable
one beuig a long, narrow margmal lake, as yet imnamed, parallel to the Giants Range (fig. 62).
This lake received the drainage from glacial lakes north of it, as described by Leith,« and in
o The glacial Lake Agassi?.: Moii. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 25, 1890.
t Lawson, ,\. C, Report on the geology o( the Lake of the Woods region, with special reference to the Keewatin (Uuronian?) belt of the Archean
rocks: Ann. Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Canada for 1885, vol. 1, new ser., 1880, pp. 139-HOCC; Report on the geology of the Rainy Lake
region: Idem for 1887-88, vol. 3, new ser., 1S90, pp. 109-17GF.
c Winchcll, N. H., Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 12, 1901, pp. 109-12S.
d Not to be confused with glacial Lake Jean Nicolet in Wisconsin.
« Mon. U. S. Oeol. Survey, vol, 43, 1903, pp. 193-194.
THE PLEISTOCENE.
443
it were deposited the lake clays that overlie the stony drift in most of the open-pit mines on
the Mcsabi rann;c. The relation of. stony till and lake clay shown in Plate XXIX, B (p. 432), is
explained by the halt of the ice front south of the Giants Range and the bidlding of the Mesabi
moraine (fig. 62, a), after which a withdrawal of the ice toward the south made possible the
formation of the glacial lake and the deposition of the clay overlying the till (fig. 62, h).
VERTICAL SCALE
500 1000 1500
H0F?IZONTAL SCALE
4 MILES
Glacial till Debris-laden ice Clear glacier ice Stratified lake deposits
FiGiJHE C2.— Sketch shoning the origin of the drift deposits overlying the ore in the Mesabi iron range.
With farther retreat of the Lake Superior glacier southeastward, the unnamed marginal
lake mentioned above was drained and a new glacial lake, Lake Upham, was formed, its south-
ernmost ice barrier being near the upper bend of the present St. Louis River, while the gabbro
highland to the east, the granite range to the north, and the morainic highland to the west and
south held it in. Lake Upham had an elevation of about 1,300 feet and its bottom forms the
flats traversed by the Duluth^ Missabe and Northern Railway in the great muskeg area where
the railway is so straight. At about this same time glacial Lake Aitkin was formed farther
west. The obstruction on the site of Mille Lacs produced glacial Lake Issati. Afterward
glacial Lake St. Louis was formed in the St. Louis Valley, draining out over a low col near Bar-
num and Carlton, at an elevation of about 1,135 feet, and having an area of about 40 square
miles.
Many glacial lakes, includmg Lake Minnesota, were formed in southern Mmnesota in asso-
ciation with the Red River lobe. Lake Agassiz, already referred to, was similarly formed in
the Red River valley at a little later stage, and glacial Lake Jean Nicolet ** occupied Green
Bay and the Fox River valley in Wisconsin, drauiing westward into Wisconsin River at Portage.
The present Lake Winnebago lies in its basin.
LAKE NEMADJI.6
Glacial Lake Nemadji (fig. 63) was formed between the ice bai'rier of the Lake Superior
lobe on the northeast and east and the higher land west of Lake Superior in Minnesota. Tliis
lake, which was about 65 feet lower than Lake St. Louis and may have had a slightly greater
area, drained through another col near Barnum and Pickering, southwest of Carlton, mto the
Mississippi.
As the ice retreated still farther to the northeast '^ there were changes in the levels and in
the outlets of the glacial lakes that he between ice dams and the surrounding land. The first
a Upham, Warren, Am. Geologist, vol. 32, 1903, pp. 105-115, 330-331.
!> Winchell, N. H., Final Kept. Geol. and Nat. Hist, Survey Minnesota, vol. 4, 1899, pp. 2-3, 18-20.
cT. B. Taylor (A short history of Oie Great Lakes: Studies ip Indiana geography, 1897, chapter 10, pp. 1-21) has written a review of the
various lake stages and the outlets, etc., associated with the different positions of ice fronts and levels of the land.
444
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
consequence of the retreat of the ice barrier would he tliat lower valleys across the hills to the
south or east might h(; exposed, and as a result of tliis the waters of the lake would fuid a way
out throujfh the new divide and the lake would fall to a new level. The earliest glacial lakes
in northern Wisconsin, hkc; tlie predecessor of Lake Gogebic and the great marginal lake in the
Ontonagon Valley," probably began to exist before or tluring the Lake Xemadji stage.
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 MILES
Figure C3.— Glacial Lake Nemadji.
LAKE DTJLUTH.
As the ice retreated northeastward, after the Lake Nemadji stage, it soon retired to a point
far enough to the northeast to expose the col now crossed by the Chicago, Minneapolis, St.
Paul and Omaha Railway. As a result the outlet near Carlton was abandoned and the waters of
this lake outflowed directly southward through the St. Croix to the Mississippi (fig. 64) through
a channel ''419 feet above the present Jjake Superior, between the headwaters of the Brule and
those of the St. Croix. Exactly where the ice front of the Lake Superior glacier stood at this
stage can not be stated, but it probably halted at several points east of the Apostle Islands and
perhaps as far east as Keweenaw Point, the other margin resting against the north shore of Lake
Superior at several points in Minnesota, smaller marginal lakes being held on each shore between
the ice and the land in Mmnesota, Wisconsin, and Michigan.
The great glacial lake of this stage is called Lake Duluth,'= although Upham "^ had previously
named it the West Superior glarial lake. It is evident that this lake existed for a longtime, and
there are three kinds of dejiosits which indicate that this was so. One kmd consists of the
elevated beaches which are still found along the liillsides at the level of the St. Croix outlet and
which are so broad and well developed on the escarpment face above Duluth that the Boulevard
« Lane, A. C, Summary of the surface geolopy of Michigan: Ann. Kept. Geol. Survey Michigan for 19(17. 190.S, pp. Hl-l-l?.
& The elevation of this channel is (liven as 1,070 feet by Warren I'pham (Twenty-second .Vnn. Kept. Oeol. and Xat. Hist. .Purvey Minnesota.
1893, p. 55: Final Kept. Geoi. and Nat. Hist. .Purvey Minnesota, vol. 2, 1SS8, pp. (>-I2-G43). The aUitiule of the stunmit in this channel is stated
by I.cverett to be 1,021 feet, as shown in a profile in House! Doc. 330. ,Wth Cong., 1st scss., 1890.
c Taylor, F. B., Studies in Indiana geography, 1897, fig. 1, p. 10.
i Twenty-second Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Minnesota. 1894. pp. 54-55.
THE PLEISTOCENE.
445
Drive follows one or two of them for miles. This aliore can be traced from a point east of
Ashland westward to Brnle River and on the other side around the head of the lake to a point
some distance east of Dulutli. Similar beaches or terraces in the Lake Superior basin were
observed early in the ex])loration of the region " and were explained as wave-wroutrht forms.
The second class of deposits indicating that the glacial lake at Duluth existed for a long
time comprises the deltas that were l)uilt where streams flowed into the lake at the level of the
Boulevartl beaches, as at Thomi)son east of St. Ijouis River, on Tischers Creek, and on Chester
Creek at Duluth. »
The third class of these deposits consists of the lake clays, which without question accumu-
lated in later periods as well as in this, but which would of course have formed to a considerable
depth when the ice front stood across the lake and was discharging icebergs with glacial material,
and when streams from the hills to the north, south, and west contributed their load of sediment.
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 MILES
Figure 04.— Glacial Lake Duluth.
INTERMEDIATE GLACIAL LAKES.
As would naturally be expected, with the continued retreat of the Lake Superior and Lake
Michigan ice lobes, the lake levels were falling lower and lower. One of the next levels at
which there was a notable stand of the ice was when the waters of the western Lake Superior
basin escaped past Chicago through Illinois River to the Mississippi. This was probably some
time after the early Lake Duluth stage (fig. 65). Whether there were intermediate outlets
between the two stages referred to is not known, but it seems probable that the ice in retreating
northeastward gradually exposed the highland of northern Wisconsin and Micliigan so that
" Logan, W. E., Report on the geology of the north shore of Lake Superior: Geol. Survey Canada, 1847, p. 31. Hubbard, Bela, House Ex.
Doc. No. 1, 31st Cong., 1st sess., pt. 3, 1849, pp. 910-911. Foster, J. W., and Wlutney, J. D., Report on the geology and topography of a portion of
the Lake Superior land district, vol. 1, 1850, pp. 194-197, 211-213. Desor, E.. idem, vol. 2, 1S51. pp. 248-255, 268-270. Whittlesey, Charles, idem,
pp. 270-273. Agassiz, Louis, Lake Superior, 1S50, pp. 00, GO, lOO-lOl, and frontispiece.
i Upham, Warren, Twenty-second Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Uist. Survey Minnesota, 1893, pp. C5-06.
446
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
eventually the waters from the enlarged Lake Duluth abandoned the St. Croix outlet for some
lower ones in northern Wisconsin and Michigan, and still later outflowed southward along the
margin of the ice sheet into Lake Jean Nicolet, in eastern Wisconsin, which drained into Wis-
consin and Mississippi rivers. Still later the drainage went into the enlarged Lake Chicago.
It is Icnown that there were a number of intermediate stages due either to lowering of the ice
barrier, to discovery of lower outlets, or to tilting of the land, because the beaches preserved
on the hillsitles below the upper Lake Duluth beach indicate other stands of the lake waters
for considerable periods of time. The beaches associated with these intermediate stages are
found at several levels below the Boulevard Beach, as shown in the ta])le (p. 4.51).
It seems likely that some of the intermediate stages, like the Lake Duluth stage, were of
considerable duration, because the beaches that were built are broad, the cliffs that were cut
are well marked, and good-sized deltas were formed at the mouths of the streams. Of these
deltas that of Dead River at Forestville near Marquette and those of Swedetown and Huron
creeks near Houghton are good examples." The fine material carried beyond the deltas into
Figure 65.— Hypothetical intermediate stage with the expansion of glacial Lalce Chicago and the later stage of glacial Lake Duluth; part of
glacial Lake Agassiz near the northwest corner. Xn isolated stagnant ice block is shown in the Lake Superior basin.
the lake formed thick deposits of glacial clays, of which some are now exposed and others are
still below lake level.
LAKE ALGONQUIN.
After the episode of the Chicago outlet the glacial barrier continued to retreat to the north-
east, and the glacial lake, which came into existence gradually, occupied all of the basin of the
present Lake Superior, its waters covering parts of the peninsula of upper Michigan west of
Marquette and being confluent with those in the basins of the present Lakes Michigan and Huron
(fig. 66). This is called the Lake Algonqum stage. . At this time the ice barrier stood east of
North Bay in the Ottawa Valley, and had retreated from Lake Superior north of the Height of
n Lane, A. C, Sunuuary of the surface geology of Michigan: .Vmi. Kept. Michigan Geol. Surrey (or 1907, 190S, p. 142.
THE PLEISTOCENE.
447
Land. Possibly there was a stagnant isolated ice block in the Lake Superior basin at this time
or just before. During the Lake Algonquin stage, which of course came after a series of inter-
mediate stages in which Lakes Chicago and Duluth were enlarged as recorded by the successive
beach levels one below the other, the waters deserted the outlet past Chicago to Illinois and
Mississippi rivers because lower outlets were uncovered to the east. Lake Algonquin had two
such outlets. The first led past Port Huron through the present Lake St. Clair and Lake Erie
into glacial Lake Iroquois, which covered more than the basin of the present Lake Ontario;
the second outlet also led into Lake Iroquois tlirough the Trent River valley from Georgian
Bay. There were several oscillations with one or both of these outlets running during the Algon-
quin stage. The Lake Iroquois waters flowed eastward through Mohawk River to Hudson
River and New York Harbor. All around the Lake Superior basin the strongest Lake Algon-
quin beaches are well-marked shore lines elevated high alcove the waters of the present lake.
At this stage glacial lakes probably occupied the Kaministikwia and Nipigon River valleys,
including all the basin of the present Lake Nipigon.
Figure 66.— Glacial Lake Algonquin.
NIPISSING GREAT LAKES.
With the continued retreat of the ice sheet to the northeast, a still lower outlet than that
tlu'ough Mohawk and Hudson rivers was exposed. This was along the present Lake Nipissing
near North Bay and down Ottawa River to the lower St. Lawrence. This is called the stage
of the Nipissing Great Lakes. With the uncovering of the Ottawa River outlet the waters of
the Lake Superior basin fell to a considerably lower level than that occupied before and accord-
ingly regions about the shores of Lake Superior which had been submerged or had groups of
islands were wholly uncovered. The largest area of this sort was the lowland east of Mar-
quette, in the Upper Peninsula of Michigan (fig. 67). Romiuger, who described the superficial
deposits of this region," was somewhat at a loss to explain the mi^iture of ground moraine, reces-
o Kominger, Carl, Geol. Survey Michigan, vol. 1 1873, pp. 15-20.
448
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
sional moraines, assorted drift, and lake clay witli wliicli tlie region is covered as a result of its
occupation first by ice, then by melting ice fronts, and later by glacial lakes.
One notable change was the temporary abandonment of the outlet from Lake Iluion jjast
Detroit to Lake Erie. Lake Erie continued to drain into Lake Ontario, which may have been
an arm of the sea, while Lakes Superior, IMichigan, and Huron (the Nipissing Great Lakes)
drained independently to the Ottawa. Another marked change was the disconnection of the
Lake Nipigon basm so that Lake Nipigon at tliis time first assumed somewhat its present form
and was independent of Lake Superior. Isle Royal, the site of several small islets at the Algon-
quin stage, assumed form as one large island of nearh' its present area. All about the lake shore
the waters stood at lower levels. The beaches built at the Nipissing stage seem to be the largest
that were formed at any time in the history of the Lake Superior basin. The.se beaclics are so
broad and the chfTs cut by the Nipissing waves are so high that it has been inferred that this
stage of the lake was continued for a very long time — longer, in fact, to judge from the strength
FiGUEE 67.— Part of Nipissing Great Lakes.
of the shore lines, than the present level of Lake Superior has been maintained as yet, though
postglacial gorges are cut back much farther at the present level than they were at the Nipissing
stage.
EFFECT OF TILTING ON GLACIAIi LAKES.
Up to this point in the histoiy of tlie Lake Superior basin the lake waters fell every time a
lower outlet was exposed by the northeastward retreat of the ice sheet. For some time before
this there had been going on a broad warping winch was producing an uphft of the region to the
north or a sinldng of the region to the south. The e^adence of this disturbance is found in the
fact that the beaches of the glacial lakes, wliich must have been originally horizontal in jjosition,
for the waters of the lake were hoi-izontal, are now inchned from north to south at a sUglit angle.
It was not until after the clo.^e of the Nipissing stage that this war])ing of the lake basin had any
very profound efiects, except to produce a fanhke splitting of glacial-lake hhore lines and to
THE PLEISTOCENE. 449
cause temporary oscillations in the outlets of the Algonquin and Nipissing stages. During and
after the Nipissing stage, however, the tilting became sufficient to bring about a new and rather
dramatic change in the history of the glacial lakes. It has been stated that the lake levels
had fallen because lower and lower outlets toward the northeast were exposed by the ice sheet
(figs. G3-0()). The normal result of such a series of changes would be the establishment of a per-
manent outlet of the Great Lakes along the line of greatest depression between the uplands of New
England and the Adirondacks on the one hand and the Height of Land of Canada on the other.
The Lake Nipissing and Ottawa River outlet was so situated; but after the occupation of this
outlet for what may have been a longer time than the present St. Lawrence outlet has been
occupied, to judge from the strength of the beaches, as already stated, the uphft of the land
toward the north became sufficient to raise the Nipissing-Ottawa Valley to a liigher level than
another valley farther south, and the latter valley became the outlet of the Great Lakes. The
three upper Great Lakes at this time, instead of draining through Lake Nipissing to Ottawa
River or through Trent River and Georgian Bay to Lake Ontario, were once more turned south-
ward and drained through Lake St. Clair past the present site of Detroit into Lake Erie, whence
the waters of the four upper lakes once more passed over Niagara Falls to Lake Ontario and
down the St. Lawrence by the present route. The amount of tilting necessary to accomplisli
this result was not very great, although that it was greater than the i)revious tilting is proved by
the fact that in places these lower beaches are more liighly inchned than any above them. That
it did not affect the whole region is shown by the horizontality of some of the beaches.
This tilting has continued up to the present time and is still going on, as is proved by several
kinds of evidence. One proof is found in the fact that on the south side of Lake Superior and
the other Great Lakes the waters are being canted into bays and river mouths, so that what
were formerly valleys are now becoming bays and estuaries (PI. II, p. 86), as noted in northern
Wisconsin by the land surveyor G. R. Stuntz" in 1869. In these southern rivers the lake water
extends backward far enough to make river navigation possible for some distance, as from
Duluth 17 miles up St. Louis River to Fond du Lac; but in all except the largest rivers on the
north side of the lake the water cascades down in falls and rapids almost directly into the basin
of the lake itself. The lower courses of many rivers on the south side of Lake Superior are so
broad that it requires a double line to represent them on the map, whereas on the north side of
the lake practically all the rivers are so narrow that they are represented by a single line. Tliis
canting of the lake waters into the river valleys on the south side of the lake has had a very
important effect in connection with man's occupation of the region, by producing good harbors,
and of such harbors that at Duluth and Superior is the best (figs. 69, p. 457, and 70, p. 458;
PI. V, A, p. 112), having been protected by the sub.gequent building of great sandbars. To
the submergence of old stream valleys during this tilting are due the Apostle Islands, wliich
have been briefly described by Whittlesey ' and Irving. "=
PKESENT POSITION OF RAISED BEACHES.
The effect of the tilting of tliis elevated shore line has been to sid)merge some of the beaches
of the former lakes, so that the Nipissing shore line, for example, is elevated many feet above
the level of Lake Superior on the north shore of the lake, whereas on the south shore it is now
submerged in places b}^ the lake waters. It has been estimated that the shore line of the Nipis-
sing stage in Lake Superior is 25 feet below the present water surface at Duluth and that this
shore line appears above the present water surface at Beaver Baj-, beyond which it rises with
an average slope of about 7 inches to the mile."*
Numerous observations and notes on these abandoned strands were made by pioneers
in the region. Some of these by Sir William Logan, Foster and Wliitney, Bela Hubbard,
a Stuntz, G. R., Some recent geological changes in northeastern Wisconsin: Proc. Am. Assoc. Adv. Sci., vol. 18, 1870, pp. 205-210.
& Whittlesey, Charles, Geological sur\-ey of Wisconsin, Iowa, and Minnesota, 1852, pp. 437-438.
c Irving, R. D., Geology of Wisconsin, 1873-1879, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 72-76.
d Taylor, F. B., Am. Geologist, vol. 15, 1895, p. 307.
47517°— VOL 52— 11 29 .
450 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
W. A. Burt, Agassiz, Desor, Whittlesey, and others have already been alluded to. None of these
furnish very specifu; data or contain more than scattered observations. A. C. Lawson," how-
ever, made a very painstaking stiuh' and instrumental measurement of these elevated shore
lines on the northern shore of Lake Superior, and concluded that these strands were horizontal
and wore formed in a great lake, held in bj^ a land barrier that was progressively lowered by
warping. He rejected tlie idea of an ice barrier. Subsequently F. B. Taylor ** pointed out
that Lawson and also Warren LTpham,<= who supported Lawson's conclusion as to the hori-
zontality of these shore lines, though recognizing the glacial-lake condition, had not sufficiently
considered the possibility that the sliore lines observed from point to point along the shore of
Lake Superior were inclined instead of being horizontal. By field study Taylor demonstrated
that the shore Imes Avhich Lawson interpreted as horizontal were indeed inclined at a small
angle, and pointed out conclusively that they were formed in a glacial lake wliose barrier was
an ice dam to the east."*
These raised beaches on the north shore of Lake Superior, especially in the Michi])icoten
district, have also been studied by A. B. WiIlmott<^ and by A. P. Coleman,/ who has noted
very many more shore lines than were measured by Lawson. Near Lake Nipigon Coleman
has also measured many new shore lines, ^ and a number were noted by C. R. Van Ilise and
J. M. Clements'' in a trip around northern Lake Superior in 190L Observations on the raised
beaches in northern Lake Michigan, Green Bay, and western Lake Huron have been made
by Taylor,* Russell,^' Goldthwait,* and others.
The writer took a hasty trij) around the north shore of Lake Superior from Duluth to
Saidt Ste. Marie in 1907 and visited a number of the localities described by Lawson. Although
feeling that Lawson's observations in general were most thorougli and accurate, he believes
that the conclusion suggested by Ta^'lor is fully warranted and that at least the lower beaches
of this region show a decided tilt to the south and southwest. In evidence of the tilting and
the long duration of the Nipissing stage established by Taylor, he found that near Duluth and
northward from that city to Beaver Bay the mouths of the small postglacial gorges contain
no bed rock but are uniformly either filled with gravel deposits or occupied by the waters of
the lake, as at Lester Creek, north of Duluth. Northeast of Beaver Bay most of the small
stream valleys are found to have no gorges extending down to or below the present lake level,
but instead the streams flow over the bare rock surface of the hillside. An especially good
illustration of this is Current River, northeast of Port Arthur, Ontario. Good ev-idence was
found that the Nipissing shore line dips under the lake at Beaver Ba}', Minnesota.
It has been shown by G. K. Gilbert ' that the canting of the lake basins is still in progress,
and his estimate of the rate of tilting is that the north end of a south-southwest line 100 miles
long in the Great Lakes region would in a centurj' be tilted 0.42 foot above the south end.
This amount of tilting, of course, is small, but it would be sufficient to divert the waters of
Lake Superior again, just as they were once diverted from the Nipissing Valley to the St. Law-
rence Valley, turning them southward to Chicago River, where the waters would once more
flow southward rather than over Niagara and through the St. Lawrence. More recent studies
o Sketch of the coastal topography of the north side of Lake Superior; Twentieth Ann. Kept. Geol. and N'at. Hist. Survey Minnesota, 1893,
pp. 230-282.
Ii The Nipissing Beach on the north Superior shore: Am. Geologist, vol. 15, 1895. pp. 304-314.
c Am. Jour. Soi., 3d ser., vol. 49, 1895, p. 7; Twenty-second Ann. Kept. Geol. and Nat. Uist. Survey Minnesota, 1S94, pp. 54-66; Bull. Geol. Soc
America, vol. 6, 1895, pp. 21-27.
i Taylor, F. ]!., .\m. Geologist, vol. 15, 1895, pp. 304-314; vol. 20, 1897, pp. 111-128.
e Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 7, 1898, p. 193.
/ Idem, vol. 8, pt. 2, 1S99, pp. 150-158; vol. 9, 1900, pp. 175-170; vol. 11, 1902, p. 181; vol. 15, pt. 1, lOOC, pp. 193-199.
c Idem, vol. 10, pt. 1,1907, p. 135.
* Unpublished MS.
■ Taylor, F. B., The abandoned shore lines of Green Bay: Am. Geologist, vol. 13, 1S94, pp. 316-:i27; A rcconnalsfsance of the abandoned shore
lines ol the south coast of Lake Superior: Idem, p. 3fi5; The highest old shore line on Mackinac Island: \m. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 43, 1892, pp.
210-218; The Munuscong Islands: .\m. Geologist, vol. 15, 1895, pp. 24-33; The great ice dams ol Lakes Mauniee, Whittlesey, and Warren: Idem,
vol.24. 1S99 pp. (■)-38.
J Ru.'iseli, I. C, Ann. Rept. Michigan Geol. Survey, for 1904, 1905, pp. 83-93; idem for 1906, 1907, PI. III.
* Goldthwait, J. W.. .\handoned shore lines ol eastern Wisconsin: Bull. AViscon.sln Geol. and Nat. lli-st. Survey No. 17, 1907, pp. 43-119; Jour.
Geology, vol.14, 190fi np. 411-124; Bull Illinois Geol, Survey No. 7. 1908, pp. M-6S; lour Geology, vol. ir.. 19I1.S, pp. 4,i9-476.
' Modification ol the Great Lakes by earth movement, Nat. Geog. Mag., vol. 8, 1897, pp. 233-247; Recent earth movement In the Great Lakes
region: Eighteenth Ann. Rept. 1'. S. Geol. Survey, pt. 2, 1898, pp. li01-(>47.
THE PLEISTOCENE.
451
by J. W. Goldthwait" indicate that the abandoned shore Hues in the southern ))art of the Lake
Aiichigan basin are horizontal. The axis of tilting runs south of Green Bay. The effect of
the presence of this hinge Ime will be to postpone very much the time before the tilting can
be sufficient to divert the drainage of Lake Superior and the other Great Lakes to the Chicago
outlet.
A series of observations as to the fluctuating level of Lake Sujierior have been made by
Capt. J. H. Darling, of the L^nited States engineer office, at Duluth, who comes to the conclu-
sion that so far as evidence from two stations nearly on an east-west line, Duluth and Marquette,
for eighteen years indicates, there is no adequate proof of a cliange in the level of the present water
surface. It seems possible to the writer, however, that this fact of no variation at two points,
one almost directly west of the other, would indicate that the axis of tilting runs nearly east
and west in the Lake Superior basin, as it seems to run in Lake Michigan.
One of the great unsolvetl problems of the glacial-lake history in the Superior and upper
Lake Micliigan basins concerns the stages intermediate between Lake Duluth and Lake Cliicago
or Lake Algonquin. Between the time of the St. Croix outlet and the Hudson River outlet
Lake Duluth must have had an outlet to Lake Chicago through a series of lakes and straits,
including Portage Lake on Keweenaw Pomt, the possible marginal channel east of Manjuette
in the Au Train and Wliitefish valleys to Green Bay,'' and perhaps a channel through Sturgeon
Bay in the Door Peninsula of Wisconsin. Nothing conclusive can yet be said as to tlie halts
of the ice front or the time of shifting from the St. Croix outlet to the temporary initial Lake
Algonquin outflow past Chicago, a stage which preceded the double outlets to Lake Iroquois
and thence to the Hudson. Further observation, however, will settle these questions.
Another interesting possibility, at present merely a hypothesis, is that which supposes
stagnant ice in the deep eastern part of the Superior basin with retreat southward from the
Height of Land, instead of northward toward it as has always been inferred. No evidence
known to the writer disproves this possibility and certam unusually high beaches in the Mar-
quette and Michipicoten districts suggest it. It is jiossible that this stagnant mass may have
become completely detached from the retreating ice sheet. At the beginnmg of this withdrawal
marginal lakes of high level were formed in the Micliipicoten district, just as Lakes Omini and
Kaministikwia were formed earlier on the northwest side of the lake.
The following table shows some of the ju-esent altitudes of the abandoned shore lines, the
discrepancies in elevation in the same beach proving the tiltmg and indicating how the warping
varied from the earlier to the later stages and from one part of the region to another. Not all
the higher isolated beaches are listed, and some of the correlations are tentative.
Elevations above Lake Superior {602 feet) of some of the abandoned beaches.
Glacial Lake Duluth (or
highest early lake recorded).
Glacial Lake Algonquin.
Nipissing
Great
Lakes.
Satilt stage.
Duluth
632-535, 510-515, 470-475
410-415
314(?)
203-315.380
400-4.50
-25
0
30
60
90
105-110
110-115
Beaver Bay
467-498
482
Port Arthur
Nipigon
28
JaokHsh
418
410
Peninsula Harbor
40-45
Michipicoten
728,843.470
315,534,543
Old \v Oman River
Root River
212-266
414
412
85-148
10-34
Sault Ste. Marie
49
35
25
Grand Marais
Munising ■
Marquette . . .
590
338
260,240.236,3.35
338
Huron Mountains
25
20
L' Anse
590
718
Ontonagon Valley
Houghton
410
25
40
Lac La Belle
Pnrnnpine Mniintain«!
561
570
510
535
419
470-535
Iron River
Maple Ridge
Brule-St. Clair outlet
Duluth
<• Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 17, 1907, p. 42; Jour. Geology, vol. 14, 1906, pp. 411^24, vol. 16, 1908, pp. 459-476.
t Winchell, N. II., Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 2, 1871, p. 19.
452
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Elevations above Lake Michigan {580 feel) of some of the abandoned beaches.
Glacial Lake
Algonquin.
Nlpissing
Great Lakes.
Sault Sle. Marie
Detour
Oediirviile
St. Icnace
Miiiiiiscon^ Islands.
Mackinac
Cooks -Mills
KnsiKii
Ganlen liluH
Fayette
Burnt, liluir
Escanaha Hlver
Gladstone ,
Ford River
Pine Kidf-'e
Birch ('reck
Rock Island
WasIiinf:lon Island.
Dcatlis Door Bluff..
p^phraini
Egg Harbor
Graceport
Sturgeon Bay
Wilco.v
Sawyer
Clay Banks
Little Suamico
Dykesville
Cormier
Two Rivers
412-434
280
200
170
120
120
130
125
140
120
ino
110
50
99
95
79
62
51
40
61
40
45
30
30
24
20
GLACIAL LAKE DEPOSITS.
Tlie deposits laid dowii in the glacial lakes differ from the deposits now being made in the
Great Lakes in the rapidity of accumulation and in the character of materials laid dow-p in
water which was fed by melting ice and in which icebergs floated. The deposits made in these
glacial lakes were predominantly clay, although sands and gravels were laid down near the lake
shores. Great thicknesses of these clays were accumulated at the west end of Lake Superior
during the Nemadji, Duluth, and Algonquin stages and acquired a prevailing red color by
derivation from the Keweenawan rocks. These clays form a distinctly different soil from that
found in the region not covered by marginal lakes. Well boruigs near Ashland and Sujjerior,
Wis., show thicknesses of 100 to 150 feet or even more of red clay, in places with a little blue
clay, generally without any stones, overlying what is reported as sand and "hard])an." the
latter possibly glacial till. The total thickness of clay and sand in one boring is 193 feet and in
others is over 200 feet. West of Duluth and Superior and extending eastward from Superior
on tlie south shore of the jn-esent lake, these thick lake clays, overlying the horizontal Cambrian
sandstone, form a plain which ajipears horizontal though sloping imperceptibh" northward."
This ])lain has been cut by ])ostglacial streams into a series of rather deep, steep-sided gullies,
which necessitate the buikling of a great number of ])ri(lgos l)y the railroads: for oxamjile. the
Duluth, South Shore and Atlantic between Ashland and Duluth and the Northern Pacific and
Great Northern between Duluth and Carlton, Minii. The highways extending east and west
across this region, where the streams generally flow from south to north, are continually going
up and down hill in crossmg ridges and valleys. West of Duluth and south of Fond du Lac,
^linn., tlicse gullies are of very great depth, some as deep as 200 feet, so that the railroads swing
far southwaixl in order to cross the gullies near their heads, reducing the number and height of
the bridges which must be built. The bridges on the Great Northern Railway are in striking
contrast with those on the Northern Pacific, both in their number and in their height above the
streams, tlic latter railway crossing nearer the headwaters of the streams. The flat ])lain of
these clays is not es])ecialh' suited for agriculture and has not been cleared. The clays were
covered with timber, but have been devastated by fire and at present constitute a rather deso-
late countiT that is traversed in the first hour of the ride from Duhitli to St. Paul.
o Grant, U. S., Bull. Wisconsin Geoi. and N'at. Hist. Survey Xo. il, 19U1, p. ti.
THE PLEISTOCENE.
453
North of Duliith, as previously indicated, tlie ice retreated southward toward the Lake
Superior basin, and between the Mesabi range and Lake Superior the area of flat-lying lower
Huronian rocks was the bed of a great glacial lake, called Lake Ui)luuu, which gradually increased
in size as the ice retreated, and in which great quantities of clay were accumulated: The inter-
ference with drainage in this lake-clay ]>lain has brought about the great prevalence of muskegs
along the Duluth, Missabe and Northern Railway, which pursues an almost mathematically
straight course for over 25 miles because of the levelness of the lake-bottom plain. Nearly all
of tins distance is through muskeg swamps, mterrupted here and there by low gravel ridges,
whicli are believed to be portions of recessional moraines built at temporary halts of the ice
during this southward retreat and later jtartly submerged by tlie accumulation of lake clay.
The bed of glacial Lake Agassiz is similar in nature.
THE FOUE PLEISTOCENE PROVINCES.
GROUNDS FOR DISTINCTION.
In review of the conditions prevaUmg in the Lake Superior region as regards minor topog-
raphy and soil, it may be stated that this region includes four distinctive ])rovinces — (1) the
Driftless Area, (2) the area of the older drift sheets, (3) the area overlain by tlic till and the
0
25
50 75
100 125
150 MILES
m
%.
^
-r:;.v:^^'''
^^
Driftless Old drift Last drift Lake deposits
(tv/th known moraines)
Figure 08,— Sketch map showing Driftless Area and regions of older drift, last drift, and lake deposits.
assorted glacial deposits of the last (late Wisconsin) stage of glaciation, and (4) the area where
glacial-lake deposits predominate. (See fig. 68.) These provinces are bounded respectively
by the terminus of the outermost of the older drift deposits, by that of the glacial lobes of the
Wisconsin stage, b}' the border of the highest shore lines of the great glacial lakes in the Lake
Superior and Lake Michigan basins, and by the highest shore of Lake Agassiz. Not all the
454 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
glacial lobes, and by no means all the glacial lakes, were contemporaneous, so the map should
not 1)0 understood as roprcscnting conditions that were ])roducpd at any one time. It merely
rc])roscnts four groups of areas witlun each of which tlie average conditions are strikingly
similar and wliich contrast vnth one another.
DRIFTLESS AREA.
In the Driftless Area the minor topographic conditions are intimatel_v related to the undcr-
Ij^ing rock. The drainage is mature (PI. XXXI, A). The valleys are cut almost entirely' by
streams. Resistant rocks make prominent ledges with castellated forms, and weak rocks arc
worn to insignificant relief. Waterfalls and rapids in the streams are rare. Lakes are absent.
The soil consists of the materials of the underlying rock or of some adjacent material from a
source uphill from its ])resent location. It usually grades downward with coarser and coarser
fragments to the undecayed ledge from which it has l)een derived by disintegration. It is
a typical local or residual soil.
AREA OF OLDER DRIFT.
The province of older drift includes the regions adjacent to the Driftless Area where deposits
were left by one or more of the earlier glacial advances before the Wisconsin. The topography
and soil of this proN-ince are contrasted with that of the Driftless Area on one hand and with
that of the area of Wisconsin glaciation on the other. The preglacial topography is partly
obscured. The valleys are due in part to ineriualities in glacial accumulation as well as to
stream cutting. The streams may have rapids or waterfalls, though these are rarer than in
the region of latest drift. Lakes are rather rare, and many lakes and swamps have been filled
and drained. The glacial topography has slumped down to a softened outline. The soil is
distinctly a transported soil, containing foreign fragments quite different in composition from
the un<lerh'ing bed rock, overlying it unconft)rmably as glacial soils always do, and not grading
into it. This soil, however, contrasts with the soil of the area of youngest drift, which is fresh
and unweathered. Indeed, the soils of the areas of older drift are leached of their soluble
constituents to some extent by the action of percolating ground water, although the degree
of solution is naturally less than in the Driftless Area. Tliis might be called a modified,
transported soil.
AREA OF LAST DRIFT.
As already described, the minor topography in the province of latest drift is of the various
kinds characteristic of a region overridden by glaciers. The province has a mildly irregular sur-
face, covered by the till or ground moraine, which in some places completely' mantles the ledges
(Pis. XXIX, A, p. 432; XXXI, B, p. 436), in others covers them thinly (Pis. V, p. 112; XVI,
in pocket), and in still others is almost al)sent (Pis. IV, B, p. 90; XVII, in pocket). It contains
drumlins, terminal and recessional moraine deposits (PI. XXX, A, p. 434), and the many assorted
glacial deposits Uke the outwash. These minor topograpliic forms and the transported soil,
which is fresh and still retains its soluble constituents, make up the surface of the great pro^-ince
of the Wisconsin drift, which includes the greater part of the Lake Superior region. The
important feature about this province is its contrast with the adjacent areas, where there is
either no drift or the older drift or where even tliis youngest drift is overlain by glacial-lake
deposits. The contrast with the topography of the older drift has already been emphasized
and may be dismissed with the statement that here the irregularity is greater and the asjiect
of the topography is distinctly fresher. The young streams have cut relatively insignificant
courses in the latest tlrift, except along the largest rivers, and the lakes and swamps mostly
exist as at the close of the glacial period, though some are ])artly filled.
AREAS OF GLACIAL-LAKE DEPOSITS.
The fourth Pleistocene province includes not tlie areas covered by the numerous small
inland lakes, but the area fornierlj- occupied by the larger glacial lakes which ovcrsj)read the
margins of Lake Superior and Lake Micliigan and extended some distance northward from
Duluth, as well as the bed of the large glacial Lake Agassiz.
THE PLEISTOCENE. 455
In this province the deposits consist chiefly of assorted glacial drift of lacustrine types,
showing a predominance of clay and silt, although in the region between Marquette and Sault
Ste. Marie sandy deposits cover large areas. The minor topography in this province contrasts
strikingly with everytlung else in the whole Lake Superior region. In places there is an exceed-
ingly smooth, monotonous surface of lake clay or sand covered with muskegs or forests, with
insignificant stream valleys, as south of the Mesabi range, in Minnesota, and in the eastern
part of the northern peninsula of Micliigan; elsewhere there is a similar clay or sandy surface
which stands at a high enough level above the present lake for streams to have cut deep, steep-
sided gorges and gulhes in the clays, as west and south of Duluth. The soils of this lake-bottom
plain vary greatly in character, being in some places exceedingly fertile, as in the valley of
Red River and on the bed of the extinct Lake Agassiz;in others sandy, originally supporting
an excellent forest, as in the eastern part of the northern penmsula of IVIichigan ; and in still
others of the clayey character wliich is here fertile and there sterile, as near Superior, at the
head of the lakes, and around Green Bay and Lake Winnebago. Tlic distriljution of these va-
rieties of soil has not yet been determined in the greater part of the Lake Suijerior region.
POSTGLACIAL MODIFICATIONS.
Since the retreat of the ice normal jirocesses have begun to work upon the region. These
are cluefly the atmospheric agencies that accomplish weathering and denudation, including
the chemical work of air, of surface water, and of ground water; the work of vegetation and
animals; and the erosive and constructive work of streams and waves. The most notable
results thus far accomplished are the modification of the glacial drift and the bed rock by
weathering and by stream work and the work of lakes in their beds and on their shores.
MODIFICATIONS ON THE LA.ND.
The modification of the glacial deposits since the retreat of the Wisconsin ice sheet has
been exceedingly shght. Weathering has done relatively httle, not even erasing dehcate
glacial striae except on the more friable rocks.
The deposits of older drift, however, as described by Samuel Weidman" and others, seem
to have been much more modified since their formation. The older drift now contrasts with
the last drift in showdng a greater amount of modification by stream action and very much
less rehef. Its composition has been changed, the more soluble constituents of the clay in
the till and of certain of the bowlders having been leached out by percolating water. Streams
have filled or drained the many shallow lakes wMch may have existed in inequalities in the
older drift sheets, and swampy areas are much less prevalent.
The Wisconsin drift sheet, which covers the greater part of this region, contrasts strikingly
with the older drift in standing at a lugher elevation, in being essentially unmodified by streams
and in having relatively few of its lakes and swamps filled or drained. Many of the shallower
lakes, however, have probably been converted into swamps by silting up and by encroacliing
vegetation. Doubtless many of the muskeg areas of the Lake Superior region were previously
areas of shallow water. Hall has estimated that in northern Minnesota the shallow glacial
lakes, whose numbers have probably been greatly exaggerated, are being extinguished at a
rate of about sixty a year.*" The outwash deposits are in places the only ones that have been
very much modified by stream work, and the change in these consists principaUy of the cutting
of terraces,*^ as in the lower St. Croix district of western Wisconsin and along Wisconsin, Cliip-
pewa, Mississippi, and other rivers. The greater part of these terraces were probably developed
during and at the end of the glacial period, when the streams carried much more water from the
melting of the retreating ice sheet. There has been considerable postglacial stream guhjang,
especially in the lake deposits. The composition of the glacial drift of Wisconsin age has
o Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. 16, 1907. pp. 435-488.
6 Hall, C. W., The geology and geography of Minnesota, 1903, pp. 178, 181-183.
c Wooster, L. C, Geology of Wisconsin, 1873-1879, vol. 4, 1882, pp. 134-138.
456
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
remained essentially unchanged in the comparatively brief time since the retreat of the ice.
Alluvial deposits are present and are being formed constantly, but arc confined largeh" to the
valleys. As alrcad}^ stated, however, part of what VVcidman" discusses as alluvial material
is certainly glacial outwash.
MODIFICATIONS IN AND AROUND THE GREAT LAKES. 6
Since the Nipissing stage, as already stated, the waters of Lake Superior have been mark-
edly fluctuating in level, occupying lower and lower points on the north shore of Lake Superior
and higher and higher points on the south shore of Lake Superior and tlic shores of the adjacent
parts of Lakes Michigan and Huron, as the warping of the earth's surface in tliis region gradu-
ally tilted the water southward. This tilting has caused a gradual postglacial emergence
of the northern coast and a gradual submergence of the southern coast. In northern Micliigan,
for example, A. ('. Lane has observed dead trees now standing out in the waters of Lake Superior.
,
V
\
7\[y^
I Yi 0
z
3 4 Miles
\_/
jy
^
LAKE SUPERIOR
A
A. T
NIPIS SING S TAGE
\
2
^r^
yRapid^i 1
1
^"^
' w
Figure 69. — St. Louis River at the stage when it cut its valley and emptied directly into Lake Nipissing.
Although the recent beach levels have not aU continued to be occupied by the lake waters
at exactly the same level, some rather distinctive shore deposits of the normal type have been
built up. On the headlands chffs have been cut, and of these chffs those on the south shore
of Lake Superior in the Pictured Rocks region "^ are famous. Because of the character of the
Lake Superior sandstone, the attack of the waves upon it has developed overhanging cliffs
o Weidmnn, Samuel, Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey No. in, 1907. pp. 5I4-M7.
f> fidouard Desor was the first to dcscrihe the Lake Superior shore features ( Foster, J. W., and Whitney, J. D., Geology of the Lake Superior
and district, vol. 2, 1851, pp. 2.W-268), as Charles Whittlesey (idem, pp. 270-273) did for Lake Jtichigan. In 1880 R. D. Irving dcscrilwd the coast in
the .Vshland region (Geology of the eastern Lake Superior district: Geology of Wisconsin, 1873-1879, vol. 3, 1880, pp. 70-72). I. C. Russell has described
some recent changes on the north shores of Lakes Huron and Michigan (.\nn. Rept. Michigan Gcol. Survey for 1904, 1905, pp. 102-105). .V. C. Law-
son has described the modern cliffs, beaches, etc., of the north shore of Lake Superior (Twentieth .\nn. Rept. Minnesota Geol. and Nat. Hist. Snr\ey,
1893. pp. 197-230), discussing the shore contours and the coaslal profiles in the various kinds of rocks. G. L. Collie (Bull. Geol. Soc. .\merica, vol.
12, 1901, pp. 197-211'.) has done some work on the modern shore lines of tlie soulh const of Lake Superior in Wisconsin. G. K. Gilbert used many
Illustrations from Lake Superior and northern Lake Michigan in his Topographic Features of Lake Shores (Fifth .\nn. Rept. W S. Geol. Survey,
1885, pp. 75-123).
c Foster, J. W., and Whitney, J. D., op. cit., pp. 124-129, plates.
THE PLEISTOCENE.
457
and caves, as well as isolated stacks and, still farther out in the lake, reefs. The attack of
the waves upon Cambrian sandstone, upon the Keweenawan lavas, and upon the Algonkian
and Archean rocks has produced different styles of coastal topogra{)hy, and the cHffs cut in
the glacial drift are different from all others. On the north shore of Lake Superior the relative
position and resistance of certain dikes and sills have modified the shore topography, as was long
ao'o described by Agassiz." Logan * carried the idea of coast control by dikes still further —
further, indeed, than Irving'^ thought justified. The bold north coast forms a striking scenic
contrast to the mild south shore of Lake Superior, as Irving <* lias pointed out.
Between the headlands beaches have been formed, and these beaches are of the usual
sand and gravel and bowlder type, associated with spits, hooks, bars, and sand dunes. In
places where such beaches have been built across the mouths of valleys or bays and separated
them from the lake, ponds have been held in, as on the south shore of Lake Superior or the
4 Miles
FiGUKE 70.— The present St. Louis River, which has been converted into an estuary by post-Nipissing lilting.
of sand spits which have been buHt.
The figure also shows the two sets
east shore of Lake Micliigan near Grand Traverse Bay, where some very large ponds of this
sort are found. Elevated examples of these ponds were observed by C. R. Van Hise and
J. M. Clements in 1901 on the north shore of Lake Superior, along the Black Bay coast, form-
ing a pecuUar type of lakes associated with the raised beaches." In the Micliipicoten district
a bar of this kind was thrown across the bay now occupied by Wawa Lake at the time of one
of the higher lake stages, as described by A. P. Coleman.-'' The modern and abandoned beaches,
chffs, caves, and skerries on Isle Royal have been described by Lane,? and the older and
modern beaches at Pigeon Point, Minn., by Bay ley.''
lAgassiz, Louis, Lake Superior, its physical character, vegetation, and animals, 1850, pp. 420-425.
b Logan, W. E., Geology ol Canada, 1803, p. 72.
c Irving, R. D., Mon. V. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 336-337.
<ildeni,pp. 260-2r,l.
e From unpublished field notes.
/ Rept. Bur. Mines Ontario, vol. 15, pt. 1, 190B, p. 19(1; Univ. Toronto Studies, Geol. Series, 1902, p. 5.
e Lane, A. C, Geel. Survey Michigan, vol. fi, pt. 1, 1898, pp. 184-186.
iBayley, W. S., Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 109, 1893, F- 15.
458 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Among the striking shore deposits of Lake Superior now being formed are the two great
bars or spits wliich extend across the liead of Lake Superior at Duluth — Minnesota Point and
Wisconsin Point. (Sec figs. 4, p. 87, and 70, p. 457.) Their ends are separated by a narrow flian-
nel wliich formed the only entrance to the Bay of Superior until the Government dredged the
canal near the Duluth shore. These bars have a total length of atiout 10 miles (Minnesota
Point 6i miles, Wisconsin Point 3^ miles) and a width varnng from a little over an eighth
of a mile to less than a hundred yards (PI. V, A, p. 112). They have been built up above the
water by a combination of two causes. The first and more important is the interference of
the shallowdng lake bottom with the passage of waves, causing waves to be overturned on the
site of the present Minnesota and Wisconsin points. The overturning stirred up the depo.sits
at the bottom of the lake and caused the waves to heap up material at tins locality. The
continued accumulation of material along tliis narrow line gradually built up a deposit tliat
approached the surface of the water and was augumented b}' the deposits of the second kind,
namely, the materials derived from the shores of the lake, which were transported outward
along the submerged embankment, under the influence of the shore currents. The combina-
tion of these two agencies soon carried the spits a great distance out frona the lake shores, and
they were eventually built up above water for a greater part of the distance and finally con-
nected, except for a narrow outlet.
Drill holes put down near the Goverimient canal at Duluth and at the newer jetties between
Wisconsin Point and Minnesota Point have shown that the points are built upon a base of fine
lake clay, overlain near the shore by very coarse material, which a short distance out is replaced
by fine sand. On the Minnesota side no pebbles are found on the present beacli at a greater dis-
tance from the shore than three-quarters of a nule, showing that the contribution of the coarse
along-shore drift in the middle of the point is not very great and that the larger part of the mate-
rial is washed up by the waves, although probably augmented by the material driftetl along the
beaches. The higher parts of these points, which rise 20 or 30 feet above the lake level, consist
of very fuie sand, built up into sand dunes by the wind, and upon these dunes evergreen trees
have been able to grow.
About a mile back from Minnesota and Wisconsin points another pair of points (Rice Point
and Connors Point) has been built, separating St. Louis Bay, where most of the ore boats are
loaded, from Superior Bay. These were doubtless formed as spits at an earher date, in an
exactly similar manner to the outer spits, though they have never been connected.
StUl farther up St. Louis River there are projections from the sides of the valley, like Grassy
Point and others, in some respects similar to these points but probably of an entirely different
origin. It seems probable that in the post-Nipissing tilting of the lake waters into the valleys
the St. Louis Valley, which had been rather deeply cut in the lake-clay plam and which had
developed to the stage of a flood plaui with a meandering stream (fig. 69), has been drowned,
so that portions of the spurs on the valley sides now emerge from the water and resemble bars
(fig. 70). Farther up the St. Louis the deposits in the vicinity of Spirit Lake and above to Fond
du Lac form a very characteristic tlrowned flood plain.
Smaller bars, similar to these at Duluth, have been formed in several bays on the shores of
Lake Superior, especially on the south shore, where the rocks are weak and easily suji])ly mate-
rial for the waves and currents to move. The most notable of these spits is Cliequamegon
Point," near Ashland, and there are numerous smaller ones, as on Au Train Island. In Grand
Traverse Bay, Lake Michigan, a great hook is formed by the curving of a similar sjjit.
It is a rather notable fact that almost none of the streams flowing uito Lake Superior have
been able to build deltas. Naturally the streams on the south side of the lake, lil^e St. Louis
River, could not build deltas fast enough to keep up with the gradual submergence of the region
in connection witii the tilting of the land. On the north shore, however, there seem to be special
conditions which prevent the building of deltas by several large sti'eams. Nipigon River would
not build a delta because it is a relatively clear stream, having been strained of all sediment
o Collie, O. L., null. Geol. Soc. .\nierica, vol. 12, 1901, pp. 200-207.
THE PLEISTOCENE. 459
before it flows out of Lake Nipigon. This is also true of Michipicoten Eiver and of a great num-
ber of smaller streams which at present carry rather small amounts of sediment because they
flow through so many lakes. The Kaministikwia, at Fort William, has the only delta of any
notable size in Lake Superior, and tliis seems to have been formed mostly at an earlier time,
relatively little sediment being carried* by the Kaministikwia at present.
Of the offshore deposits less is known specifically. As already suggested, these deposits are
accumulating more slowly than when melting glaciers furnished both water and sediment in
greater quantities and when stones dropped by floating icebergs differentiated the silts from
tliose now going down. Coarse deposits like gravel and sand predominate near the beaches and
the river mouths, and rocky accumulations are probably growing near the cliffs. In deep water
fine clay and silt predominate, as the detailed soundings of the Lake Sui'vey charts show. The
several areas of sand, clay, etc., on the lake bottom show appi'opriate relationsliips to the rocks
and the glacial deposits of the adjacent shores, the drainage basins, the lake currents, etc.
Deposition here contrasts with the postglacial weathering, erosion, transportation, and slighter
deposition on the land.
SUMMARY OF THE PLEISTOCENE HISTORY.
The Pleistocene epoch in the Lake Superior region witnessed four rather different sets of
conditions — (1) in preglacial time, when the topography was much as it is now except for cer-
tain valleys that have since been deepened by glacial erosion, broad areas that have been covered
by glacial drift, and an entire contrast of drainage; (2) in the time of advancing glaciers, when
the land was gradually being covered and eroded by an ice sheet, drainage was being modified,
and plants and animals were being driven out; (3) in the time of retreating glaciers, when from
an extreme stage of glaciation with nothing uncovered except the Driftless Area the present
topography was revealed by the gradual melting of a largely stagnant ice sheet, with the several
marginal lake stages, etc., and the attendant warping of the earth's crust; (4) in the present
stage of modification of glacial deposits, building of stream and lake deposits, return of plants
and animals, and a general attempt to restore the normal conditions that were prevalent before
the interruption by glaciation.
CHAPTER XVII. THE IRON ORES OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
By the authors and W. J. Mead.
HOEIZONS OF IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
The ages and names of the iron-bearing formations of the Lake Superior region are as
follows :
Brown ores associated with Paleozoic and Pleistocene deposits (Spring Valley, Wis.).
Cretaceous detrital ores of the western Mesabi duitrict of Minnesota.
Clinton ores of the Silurian of Dodge County, Wis.
Algonkian system:
Keweenawan series: Titaniferous gabbros of Cook and Lake counties, Minn.
Huronian series:
I Upper Huronian (Animikie group):
Biwabik formation of the Mesabi district of Minnesota.
Animikie group of the Animikie district, Ontario.
Ironwood formation of the Penokee-Gogebic district, Michigan and Wisconsin.
Vulcan formation of the Menominee and Calumet districts, Michigan.
Vulcan iron-bearing member of the Crystal Falls, Iron River, and Florence districts, Michigan
and Wisconsin.
Gunflint formation of the Gunflint Lake district, Canada, and VermDion district, Minnesota.
Bijiki schLst of the Marquette district, Michigan.
Deerwood iron-bearing member of the Cuyuna district, Minnesota.
Middle Huronian:
Negaunee formation of the Marquette district, Michigan.
Freedom dolomite of the Baraboo district, Wisconsin.
Archean system.
Keewatin series:
Soudan formation of the Vermilion district, Minnesota.
Helen formation of the Michipicoten district, Ontario.
Unnamed formation of Atikokan dLstrict, Ontario.
Several nonproductive formations in Ontario.
The ores of these horizons fall into natural groups on the basis of general characters and
origin as follows:
(1) The ores of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian sedimentary iron-bearing formations,
including practically all tiie ores produced from the Lake Superior region.
(2) Titaniferous magnetites constituting magmatic segregations in Keweenawan gabbros.
Nonproductive.
(.3) Magnetic ores representing ])egmatite intrusions in basic igneous rocks. Doubtfully
represented by Atikokan and certain nonproductive Vermilion ores.
(4) Residual or bog ores of the Paleozoic at Spring ■\':dloy, in northwestern Wisconsin.
Slightly ])roductive.
(5) The Clinton ores of the Paleozoic in Dodge County, southeastern Wisconsin. Slightly
productive.
■KO
THE IRON ORES.
461
■^GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF ORES OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR PRE-CAMBRIAN
SEDIMENTARY IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
INTRODUCTION.
The ores of the pre-Cambrian sedimentarj- type comprise 99 per cent of the productive
ores of the region. They occur in the Keewatin series, the niichlle Iluronian, and the upper
Huronian (Animikie group). Tlie following table shows the percentage of ore which has been
rained from these rocks, by districts, from the opening of mining in the (Ustrict to the close of
1909:
Percentages of ores mined from pre-Cambrian sedimentary rocks in Lake Superior region to close of 1909.
Per cent
of total
to close
of 1909.
Per cent
of 1909
ship-
ments.
Geologic horizons.
District.
Kee-.vatin series.
Middle Huronian.
Upper Huronian.
Per cent
of lolal
to close
of 1909.
Per cent
of 1909
.ship-
ments.
I'er cent
of total
to close
of 1909.
Per cent
of 1909
ship-
ments.
Per cent
of tolal
to close
of 1909.
Per cent
of 1909
ship-
ments.
Minnesota:
43.57
6.49
66. 41
2.61
43. .57
66.40
6.49
2.01
50.06
69.02
Michigan:
11.48
20.45
14.71
7.90
9.99
10. SO
■
1
11.48
.54
14.47
7.90
19.91
.24
9.21
.37
.78
10.43
40.64
28.09
Wisconsin:
1.17
2.07
.06
.67
1.62
1.17
2.07
.67
1.62
.06
3.30
2.29
Total .. .
100.00
100.00
6.49
2.01
20.21
9.58
73.30
87.80
a Including Swanzy district.
& Includes Iron Kiver and Crystal Falls districts.
A comparison of the total production from each of the geologic horizons with the i)ro(luction
for 1909 shows that in the past the Keewatin and middle Huronian iron-bearing formations were
more productive relatively than they are now; and that the upper Iluronian is increasing its
proportion. A further increase in percentage of the upper Huronian ores is probably to be
looked for.
Notwithstanding the fact that the iron-bearing formations are contained in three different
groups, separated by great unconformities, tliey are remarkabh^ similar in their lithology, making
it possible to discuss them essentially as a unit. These formations are unic|ue among most of the
sediments of the globe with which we are familiar. The early geologic conclusions relating to
their structure were based on the assumption that formations so peculiar were developed at one
and the same time, an assumption which of course led to inuch confusion in the interpretation
of the stratigraphy of the region.
An attempt is made under the following headings to summarize the salient features of the
ores of the region as a whole. In earlier chapters the ores of the several districts are separately
discussed.
KINDS OF ROCKS IN THE IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
In the simplest terms the iron-bearing formations of the Lake Superior region consist
essentially of interbanded layers, in widely varyang proportions, of iron oxide, silica, and com-
binations of the two, variously called jasper or jaspilite, where anhydrous and crystalline
462 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
(Pis. XXXII and XXXIII), and ferruginous chert" (PI. XXXI\', A, B), taconite, or ferruginous
slate (PI. XXXIV, C), where softer and more or le.ss hydrous. These rocks become ore by local
emichment, largely by the leaching out of silica and to a less extent by the introduction of iron
oxide. There are accordingly complete gradations between them and the iron ores. Many of
the interme<liate phases are mined as lean siliceous ores. In the following descriptions, therefore,
the ores are not in all cases sharply dilferentiated from the iron-bearing rocks. Local phases
of the iron-bearing formations are amphibolitic and magnetitic cherts and slates (PI. XXXY),
cherty iron carbonates (PL XXXVI), ferrous silicate or greeiudite rocks (PI. XXXVII), pyritic
quartz rocks, and detrital iron-bearing rocks derived from older iron-bearmg formations. All
these phases are found in each district, but in considerably varying ])roportions. One of the
most significant variations with reference to the origin of the ore is in the relative abundance of
greenalite rocks and siderite.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
The average iron content of all the original phases of the iron-bearing formations for the
region, not including interbedded slates, as shown by all available analj-ses, is 24.8 per cent.
The average iron content of the ferruginous cherts and jaspers, from which there has been but
httle leaching of silica, as shown by all available analyses, is 26.33 per cent. The amphibole-
magnetite phases of the formations show approximately the same percentage. The average
iron content of the formations, as shown by all available analyses, different phases, including
the ores, being taken in proportion to their abundance, is 38 per cent for the Lake Superior
region. (See table, p. 491.) A comparison of this figure with 24.8 per cent for the original
siderite and greenalite (see pp. 167, 527) and 26.33 per cent for the ferruginous cherts and
jaspers from wliich silica has not been removed (see pp. 181, 238) will show what has been
accomphshed in the secondary concentration of the ores. It is possible, however, that the ores
have in part been derived from the richer phases of the iron-bearing formations. So far as
this is true, the secondary concentration accomplished has been less than the comparison of
these figures might indicate.
RATIO OF ORE TO ROCK IN THE IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
It may again be noted that the iron ores, though important commercially, form but a very
small percentage of the rocks of the iron-bearing formations. The deposits are very large, but
are relatively insignificant as compared wdth the great adjacent masses of ferruginous cherts
and jaspers making up the bulk of these formations.
The percentages of iron ore to rock, by weight (see p. 492 for depths), calculated from esti-
mates of tonnage given on other pages, are as follows:
Proportions of ore to rock, by weight, in the iron-bearing formations of the Lake Superior region.
Per cent.
Marquette district 0. 110
Penokee-Gogebic district 165
Menominee and Crystal Falls districts 183
Mesabi district 2. 000
Vermilion district 0G2
STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF ORE BODIES.
It will be shown later that the iron ores are the result of subsurface alterations of richer layers
of the iron-bearing rocks and are localized at places in these layers where these alterations
have been most effective, particularly where the ordinary ground waters are converged within
o Chert, as deftned In the text-books, is an amoriihous and hydrous variety ot quartz, but in the field the term has Ijeen very generally applied
to siliceous bands, such as those found in limestone, with little regard to their microscopic or chemical characteristics. Some of the so-calleil cherts
and limestones are very fine grained or amoqihous. The cherts of the iron-bearing formations are similar in every respect to those of the limestones.
They show the same irregularity of texture, interlocking of quartz grains, and in places very fine grains. However, it can not be said that any ot
the so-called chert in the Lake Superior region has been found to be truly amorphous and hydrous
PLATE XXXII.
463
PLATE XXXII.
Jaspilite.
A. Folded jaspilite from Jasper Bluff, Ishpeming, Marquette district, Michigan. The illustration beautifully shows
the secondary infiltration of iron oxide and deformation by combined fracture and flow. By close obsen'ation
iron oxide of three different ages may be seen. The oldest is the dark -gray hematite. Intersecting this is the more
brilliant steel-gray hematite and magnetite, and cutting both of the former are other veins of brilliant hematite
and magnetite. The history of the rock seems to be briefly as follows: Banded hematite and jas]5er was bent by
folding, probably while the rock was deep seated. During this folding the hematite was mashed. In a later
stage, when the rock was more rapidly deformed near the surface, fracturing occurred. This gave the conditions
for the first infiltration of iron oxide, and later, when the rock was perhaps still nearer the surface, further defor-
mation resulted in new fractures. Finally, the crevices thus formed were filled with the latest iron oxide.
B. Brecciated jaspilite from Jasper Bluff, Ishpeming, Marquette district, Michigan. The illustration gives e\-idence
of the history as shown by A. However, during the final process the layers of ja.sper, which were bent at the
earlier stage, were broken through and through, jiroducing a breccia. The same evidences are seen of three stages
of iron oxide as in A. The less brilliant gray is the earliest-mashed hematite; the intermediate gray represents a
first infiltration; after this there was shattering; and finally the breccia was cemented by brilliant steel-gray
hematite and magnetite.
464
z
■<
e3
h-
3
-^
o
IT
a.
PLATE XXXIII.
47517°— VOL 52—11 30 465
PLATE XXXIII.
Jaspilite and iiematitic chert.
A. Folded and brecciated jaspilite of the Soudan formation, Vermilion district, Minnesota. (After Clements.)
B. Hematitic chert from Negaunee, Marquette district, Michigan. The bands of chert are so broken by movement
that they are in some places difficult to follow. Many of the fragments have roundish outlines, due to their partial
Bolution and replacement by iron oxide. The material illustrated is frequently found very close to the ore bodies.
If a portion of the remaining silica were removed and iron oxides introduced in its place, it would become iron
ore. The hematite is soft and the material illustrated is therefore called soft-ore jasper by the miners.
466
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXXIII
(A) FOLDED AND BRECCIATED JASPILITE OF THE IRON -BEARING SOUDAN FORMATION,
VERMILION DISTRICT, MINNESOTA,
fB) HEMATITIC CHERT FROM NEGAUNEE, MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN,
PLATE XXXIV.
467
PLATE XXXIV.
Ferruginous chert and slate of iron-bearing Biwabik formation.
A. Gray ferruginous chert (specimen 45027) from Chicago mine, in sec. 4, T. 58 N., R. 16 W. Mesabi district, Minne-
sota. Natural size. This is one of the characteristic aspects of the ferruginous chert.s of the iron formation. Under
the microscope iron oxide and chert can be seen still marking the shapes of the greenalite granules. Described
on pages 168-170.
B. Ferruginous chert (specimen 4.5588) from Mahoning mine, Mesabi district, Minnesota. Natural size. The rock
shows interbanding of chert with iron oxide. Described on pages 168-170.
C. Banded ferruginous slate (specimen 45594) from Penobscot mine, 298 feet below ferruginous chert. Me.sabi district,
Minnesota. Natural size. Described on pages 170-171.
468
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Ul PLATE XXXIV
(Ai
FERRUGINOUS CHERT AND SLATE OF IRON-BEARING BIWABIK FORMATION
MESABI DISTRICT, MINNESOTA
PLATE XXXV.
469
PLATE XXXV.
Ferruginous chert and schist.
A. Amphibole-magnetite chert (specimen 48571) from Republic, Mich. Note coarsely crystalline anhydrous character
as compared with ferruginous cherts and jaspilites. For discussion of origin, see pages 545 et seq.
B. Sideritic magnetite-griinerite schist from sec. 13, T. 47 N., R. 27 W., Marquette district, Michigan. The different
bands consist mainly of griinerite, hematite, magnetite, and quartz, in varying proportions. The darker-colored
bands contain much of the iron oxide. In the lighter bands griinerite is abundant. In all the layers there is a
sufficient amount of residual siderite to show that from this mineral and silica the griinerite formed, and from
the griinerite, with jiartial or complete oxidation, the magnetite and hematite developed. Most of the hematite
is of the si)ecular variety, liut in places l)lood-red flecks of hematite may be seen, and parts of the specimeiu are
stained by limonite. This is doubtless the result of weathering. Natural size.
470
U S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXXV
fAJ
'BJ
(A) AMPHIBOLE- MAGNETITE CHERT FROM REPUBLIC, MICHIGAN.
(B) SIDERITIC MAGNETITE-GRUNERITE SCHIST FROM MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN.
PLATE XXXVI.
471
PLATE XXXVI.
Jaspery filling in amygdules and cherty siderite.
A. Jaepery filling in amygdules from ellipsoidal basalt of the Crystal Falls district, Michigan. (Specimen 47554.)
B. Cherty siderite from sec. 19, T. 47 N., R. 27 W., Marquette district, Michigan. This is one of the purest cherty
siderites found in the Marquette district. The gray material consists almost wholly of very finely crystalline and
opaline silica and of siderite. The liluish-gray layers contain some silica, the greenish layers some siderite. On
the weathered siuface the siderite is entirely decomposed and in place of it is hematiteand limonite. The begin-
ning of the same kind of alteration may be seen to affect some of the siderite belts quite to the center of the speci-
men. As examined in thin section the secondary limonite is found to be in pseudomorphous areas after the
siderite. Between the unaltered siderite and that which is completely decomposed there is every gradation,
different granules showing all stages of the transformation. Natural size.
C. Cherty siderite from sec. 13, T. 47 N., R. 4G W., Penokee district, Michigan. (See Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey,
vol. 19, 1892, PI. XXI, fig. 4.) The original cherty siderite of the Penokee district is represented perfectly by
the grayish-green material. Its very close similarity to that of the Marquette siderite represented in Bis notice-
able. The beginning of the transformation of the siderite to limonite and hematite is beautifully shown. The
transitions between the two are clearer than in B. The processes of change begin along the bedding planes and
along intersecting veins. These two together make two sets of nearly right-angle planes, which doubtless are
shearing planes. The veins are entirely filled with limonite and hematite and therefore are minute layers of
ore. The changes along the bedding illustrate the beginning of the process which results in the formation of
the iron-ore deposits. It is noticealile that, as a result of the alterations, the original banding of the rock is
emphasized, although the emphasizing bands are not so regular as the original sedimentary laminse. This
emphasizing of the original banding of the iron-bearing rocks by metasomatic changes is a general law for the
iron-bearing formations of the entire Lake Superior region. Natural size.
472
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXXVI
(J) JASPERY FILLING IN AMYGDULES FROM ELLIPSOIDAL BASALT OF THE
CRYSTAL FALLS DISTRICT, MICHIGAN.
( B) CHERTY SIDERITE FROM MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN.
(C) CHERTY SIDERITE FROM PENOKEE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN.
PLATE XXXVII.
473
PLATE XXXVII.
Geeenalite kock.
A. Greenalite rock (specimen 45647) from locality near Duliith, Missabe and Northern Railway track, 1 mile south
of Virginia, Mesabi district, Minnesota. Granules of greenalite, but little altered, stand in a matrix of chert.
Described on pages 165-168.
A' . Portion of surface of specimen shown in A, slightly magnified to show greenalite granules to better advantage.
B. Interbanded greenalite and slate rock (specimen 45176) from 100 paces north 500 paces west of southea-st corner of
sec. 22, T. .59 N., R. 15 W., Mesabi district, Minnesota. Natural .size. The black portion of the rock is slate and
the green portion is made up of greenalite granides lying in a matrix of chert. Greenalite is characteristically
associated with slaty layers in the iron-bearing formation; indeed it is due to their protection that greenalite has
been retained in comparatively unaltered form. Described on pages 165-168.
474
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXXVII
GREENALITE ROCK FROM MESABI DISTRICT, MINNESOTA
THE IRON ORES. 475
the formation, owing to various structural conditions. Rarely are tne original layers of iron
formation rich enough to be mined when they have suffered only minor secondary concentration.
Because of secondary concentration the ores are usually in the upper parts of the formations
and always extend to the surface, though they may reach depths of 2,000 feet or more. It
may readily be conceived that there are a great variety of structural conditions which deter-
mine the circulation of the altering waters and therefore the localization and shapes of the ore
deposits witliin the formations. Such structural features are joints, faults, folds, intersection
by igneous rocks, impervious sedimentary layers within or below the iron-bearing formations,
and area of exposure.
The structural features of the ores are described principally in the detailed descriptions
of the ores of the several districts, but some of the more salient features of the structural
relations are summarized below.
The development of ore within the richer layers of the iron-bearing formations depends
on their accessibility to altering solutions from above, and the largest result is given by a wide
area of exposure of the formations, which is in turn a function of the dip. The flat-lying
iron-bearing formation of the Mesabi district exposes a greater surface to concentrating agents
than the steeply dipping formation of the Gogebic district, of similar thickness and character,
with the result that the proportion of the formation altered to ore is much greater in the Mesabi
district. A comparison of the actual areas of the dift'erent iron-bearing formations with their
total shipments to date and with their probable reserves shows a close relation between area
and amount of ore developed.
Of more immediate and practical importance in relation to the distribution of the ores
are the structural conditions, such as impervious basements and fractures, which determine
the location of ores within a given area of the iron formation.
Impervious basements for the ore body may be formed (1) by the intersection of the foot-
wall quartzite with an igneous dike, as in the Gogebic district; (2) by irregular intrusive masses
of basic igneous rock, as in the Marquette district; (-3) by dolomite, as in the Menominee
district; (4) by slate, as at the lower horizons of the Negaunee formation in the Marquette,
Crystal Falls, Iron River, and Florence districts, and at the upper horizon of the Vulcan forma-
tion in the Menominee district; (.5) by slate layers within the iron-bearing formation, locally
developed in the Gogebic and Mesabi districts; and (6) by granite, as in the Swanzy district
of Iklichigan and very locally in the Mesabi district. Most of these basements have the config-
uration of pitching troughs.
The ores are likely to be closely associated with fractures in the iron-bearing formation
which give access to altering solutions, as is particularly well illustrated by certain of the
deposits of the Mesabi district and by parts of the deposits of the Gogebic district which pass
through faults in the impervious basement, and indeed is illustrated to a greater or less extent
by practically all the iron deposits of the region.
The relative importance of the several structural features of the ore deposits varies widely
from place to place. In the Gogebic district the existence of impervious basements in the form
of pitching troughs seems to be the essential structural feature of the ore deposits. Localization
of the ores within and adjacent to fissures in the iron-bearing formation is also apparent. On
the other hand, in the Mesabi district the conspicuous feature is the localization of the ores
by fractures in the iron-bearing formation, the impervious basement being so gently flexed
as to make it difficult to ascertain whether or not it forms pitching troughs that control the
localization of the ore body.
SHAPE AND SIZE OF THE ORE BODIES.
Because of the wide variety of conditions outlined under the preceding heading, the
shapes of the deposits of this region are so various that they may collectively be designated
by the term "amoeboid," though there are several groups of more uniform shape, as described
below. They may be roughly tabular in a horizontal plane, as in the Mesabi district, or
47(i GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
roughly tabular in steeply inclined planes, or in steeply pitc-hin<r linear shoots, as in the
Menominee district, or they may assume almost any conihination of these shapes. The mine
cross sections (Pis. X, XXVII; figs. 14, 29, 36, 46, 47, 48) will give the best notion of the
sha])es of the ore bodies.
The horizontal dimensions known at the surface range up to a mile. Indeed, in the Ilibbing
area of the Mesabi district the deposits are more or less connected for a distance of 10 miles,
and the horizontal area would range up to 2 square miles. The maximum depth of iron mining
in the Lake Superior region at the present time is 2,200 feet, in the Gogebic district.
It is therefore apparent that the size, shape, and structural relations of the Lake Superior
ores are of widest variety. In the flat-lpng formations of the Mesabi district the ore bodies
have wide lateral extent as compared with depth, have extremely irregular outlines partly
controlled bv jointing, abut irregularly on the bottom and sides against unaltered portions of
the iron-bearing formation, and when the glacial overl)urden is removed are accessible to surface
operations with steam shovels. Steeply dipping formations, comprising most of the formations
of the districts other than the Mesabi, have greater vertical dimensions as compared with hori-
zontal dimensions, usually abut not only against unaltered parts of the iron-bearing formation
but against well-defined impervious walls consisting of slate, r|uartzite, dolomite, or bosses or
dikes of greenstone, and must be worked by underground mining.
TOPOGRAPHIC RELATIONS OF THE ORE BODIES.
The ore deposits are associated with hills or ranges, a fact that explains the common use
of tlie term "range" in connection with the ore-producing districts. There are, however,
exceptions to this relation in the Cuyuna district of Minnesota and perhaps elsewhere, as sho\vn
in the detailed descriptions. The ore deposits occur in places on the top of the lull, a.s in the
Vermilion district; commonly in the middle slopes, as is well illustrated by the Mesabi district,
and on the low ground adjacent to the hills, as in parts oi the Gogebic, Marquette, and Menom-
inee districts. In general the middle slopes seem to be favored, but there are so many exceptions
to this that there is no warrant for limiting prospecting to such localities. As the formation of
the ore bodies is a function of the rapid circulation of waters from above, it is believed that
the common association of the ore deposits with hUls mnj be due to the fact that these are
places where the circulating waters have considerable head. It would not follow that ore deposits
should for this reason be confined entireh' to the vicinity of liills, for circulation, perhaps less
deep, seems to be effective also in relatively flat areas, as in the Cuyuna district of Minnesota.
The efl'ectiveness of the head at different elevations and with different structural relations is
not well known. It is to be remembered, also, that the ore deposits have not been concentrated
entirely in relation to the present topograph)-, but that when these deposits were formed the
topography was more or less different, and that, therefore, ore deposits now found independent
of topographic elevations may still have originated under control of an elevation which has
since been removed. Notwithstanding these various limit ations, to be considered in the inter-
pretation of the relation of ore deposits to topography, the present prevalence of by far the
greater number of ore deposits on the middle slopes of the ranges is extremely suggestive, for
these are the places where the flow of meteoric waters directly from the surface should be at a,
maximum.
OUTCROPS OF THE ORE BODIES.
By far the greater number of the Lake Superior ore dejiosits are softer than at least one of
their walls. Thej' therefore (jccupy depressions which are largely covered with glacial drift and
generally they do not outcrop. A few of the ores, such, for instance, as the hard ores of the_ Ver-
milion and Marquette districts, are nearly or cpiite as hard as the wall rock, have resisted erosion,
and here and there project above the mantle of drift. Considering the nund)er of ore bodies in
the Lake Suj)erior region and their variety- of structural relations, it is surprising that so few have
been found to outcro]). The lean siliceous and magnetic parts of the iron-bearing formations
have withstood erosion to such an extent that they outcrop rather commonly. These, together
THE IRON ORES.
477
with magnetic variations, have served as guides to the locati<5n of the iron-bearing formations
and have led to the discovery of ores in the covered areas by underground work.
In the iron-ore deposits that have their greatest tlimensions on the erosion surface the ratio of
area of iron ore to area of iron-bearing formation is greater than the ratio of tonnage of iron ore
to tonnage of iron-bearing formation. In the Mesaln district the forjiier runs up to nearly S per
cent for the jiroducing part of the district ; in most of the other ranges it is far smaller, usually
less than 1 ])er cent.
CHEMICAL COMPOSITION OF THE ORES.
The average composition of the iron ore mined in the I^ake Superior region during the years
1906 and 1909, as shown in the table below, has been calculated from the cargo analyses published
by the Lake Superior Iron Ore Association, of Cleveland, tt)gether with analyses of ores of different
mine grades furnished by individual mining companies. The averages are obtained by combining
all grades in proportion to their tonnage, and the talile represents more nearly the average com-
position of all the ore mined in the Lake Superior region in any one year than anything before
attempted. Analyses of iron ore used in other ])arts of this report are also taken from the Lake
Superior Iron Ore Association's tables unless otherwise stated.
Analyses of iron ore may represent the composition of a dried ore (dried at 212° F. or 100° C),
or they may show the composition of the ore in its natural moist condition as it comes from the
ground. The latter are designated natural analyses and include the moisture or uncombined
water as one of the constituents of the ore. The natural iron content is the basis on wliich the
value of ore is figured commercially. It may be computed from the hon content of the dried
ore and the moisture, as follows: Percentage of natural iron = percentage of iron in dried ore
X (100 — pei'centage of moisture). The following average analyses represent the dried ore:
Average composition of total yearly production of Lake Superior iron ore for the years 1906 and 1909.
1906.
1909.
11.28
Analysis of ore dried at 212° F. :
59.80
.0810
6.83
1.60
2.70
3.92
58.45
.091
Silica
7.67
2. 23
.71
.64
) .55
.060
4.12
The range in percentages shown by the analyses from which the foregoing averages
derived is as follows :
are
Range in percentage for each constituent of ores mined in 1906 and 1909, as shown by average cargo analyses.
.
1900.
1909.
0.60 to 17. 40
Range in composition of ore dried at 212* F. :
Iron
38.15 to 66. 07
. 0O8 to . 850
3.21 to 40. 97
35. 74 to C5. 34
.008 to 1.28
2. 50 to 40. 77
.00 to 7.20
Alumina
.20 to 3.59
. 16 to 5. 67
.00 to 4.96
.00 to 3.98
.003 to 1.87
0.00 to 10.0
. 40 to 11. 40
The sulphur in the Lake Superior ores ranges from a trace to 1.87 per cent and in some of
the ores of the Florence, Iron River, and Crystal Falls districts it is present in sufficient cjuantity
to affect the value of the ore. Titanium is not present in the Lake Superior sedimentary ores in
amounts sufficient to be harmful. The titanium content of the ores varies from 0.1 to 0.2 per
cent, TiO,, but in some of the hard magnetite ores of the Marquette district it is found to run as
478
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
high as 1 .() i)cr cent. Titanium is higher in the paint rocks and interbedded slates than in the ores
themselves.
The ])roportions ami ranges of the constituents for the individual districts are given under
the discussions of the districts. Figure 71 shows the chemical compositions of all grades of ore
mined in the region in 19()(), in terms of ferricoxide, silica, ami minor constituents. This average
is lower in iron than those of previous years. (See pp. 493-494. )
The gratle of ore shipped and its general uniformity for given districts and periods are pri-
marilj' controlled by the nature of the ores available, yet the commercial conditions to some extent
FERRIC OXIDE le
Mesabi
Vermilion
Gogebic
Marquette
Menominee
Canadian
MINOR
CONSTITUENTS
Figure 71.— Triangular diagram showing chemical composition, in terms of ferric oxide, silica, and minor constituents, of all grades of iron
ore mined in the Lake Superior region in 1906. The ores of each district arc indicated by distinct ive s j-mbols. For descript ion of this method
of platting, see p. 182.
determine the grade shipped. For instance, if high, medium, and low grade ores are available,
a period of financial depression may make it possible to ship only the highest grade ores, whereiis
business prosperity may make it jiossible to mix considerable quantities of lower grade ores
with those of higher grade, thereby lowering the average grade. This control b\- comniercial
conditions is further illustrated by the fact that the acid Bessemer steel process for years deter-
mined that an unusually high proportion of low-phosi)horus ores were to be slui)ped." The
a A Bessemer ore is one which will with a proper flux and coke make a pig Iron in which the phosphorus does not exceed 0.1 per cent. It is
approximately true that a Bessemer ore is one in which the content of phosphorus divided by the content of iron gives a quotient not exceeding
O.noOT.i. This ralio may be chani;eil. hoHevcr, by the phosphorus content of the coke and limestone used with the ore in tl>e furnace, as it is
necessary to figure on the phosphorus in the flux and fuel as well as that in the ore itself.
THE IRON ORES.
479
recent rapid development of the open-hearth pr>_.pess has allowed shipment of ores higher in
phos])horus. The tlevelopment of the basic open-hearth process depends ultimately on the
availability of large reserves of non-Bessemer ore, but in turn the develojmient of the open
hearth reacts upon and determines the grade of ore shipped from any district or for any period.
MINERALOGY OF THE ORES.
The iron-ore minerals in general are as follows:
Magnetite: Magnetic oxide (FejOi), including titaniferous magnetite. Theoretical iron content
of the pure mineral, 72.4 per cent; generally containing some feematite.
Hematite: Anhydrous sesquioxide (FCnOj), including specular hematite, red fossil ore, oolitic ore,
etc. Theoretical iron content of the pure mineral, 70 per cent.
Brown ore: Hydrous sesquioxide (FejOj.nH^O), including turgite, limonite, goethite, or a mixture
of these minerals, known locally as brown hematite, bog ore, gossan ore, etc. Theoretical iron
content of iron minerals, 59.8 to 66.2 per cent, depending on degree of hydration.
Carbonate: Siderite, iron carbonate (PeCOj), known locally as spathic ore, black band ore, etc.
Theoretical iron content of the pure mineral, 48.2 per cent.
The Lake Superior iron ores are (1) soft, brown, red, slaty, hydrated hematites; (2) soft
limonite; (3) hard massive and specular hematites; (4) magnetites; and (5) various gradations
between the other classes. The proportions for the entire region of these different classes
shipped in 1906, as calculated from average cargo analyses, are as follows:
Total production of iron ore in Lake Superior region, by grades, for 1906.
Class of ore.
Soft brown, red. slaty, hydrated hematite
Soft limonite ores
Hard massive and specular hematite
Magnetite (less than 1 per cent; included with hard ores)
35,652,174
2,741,323
38,393,497
Per cent
of total.
93
7
100
The approximate mineral composition of the average ore of the entire region for the years
1906 and 1909, calculated from the average analyses, is as follows:
Approximate mineral composition of average iron ore of Lake Superior region for 1906 and 1909.
Hematite 1 (more or less hydrated), with some magnetite (SFejOs.HjO).
Quartz
Kaolin
Chlorite (and other ferromagnesian siUcates)
Dolomite
Apatite (all phosphorus figured as apatite)
Miscellaneous
100.00
a The iron minerals may be expressed in terms of hematite and limonite as follows: 1906, hematite 66.60, limonite 22.00; 1909, hematite 66.75,
limonite 19.70. These minerals do not, in fact, exist in these proportions, there being a number of hydrates between hematite and limonite.
The mineral compositions above given are necessarily only approximate, as ferric and
ferrous iron are not separated in the chemical analysis, and water, carbon dioxide, and pos-
sibly a small amount of organic matter are all included under loss on ignition. The mineral
compositions were calculated from the average analyses, as follows: All phosphorus was figured
as apatite; the remaining lime was combined with the proper amount of magnesia and COj
to form dolomite; the remaining magnesia was combined with the proper amounts of alumina,
silica, and water to form chlorite; the alumina not -used for chlorite was taken with sufficient
silica and water to form kaolin; the remaining water, combined with the iron figured as ferric
oxide, was figured as hydrated hematite.
The proportions of the different minerals for the individual districts calculated in the same
way are given in the discussion of these districts.
480 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
In the above table are mentioned the abundant minerals associatetl with the iron, such
as quartz, kaolin, and chlorite. Many of the minerals termed miscellaneous ' in the table
arc present in small aniounts at a few places. Some of these minerals arc apatite, adularia,
wavellite, calcite, dolomite, siderite, pyrite, marcasite, chalcopyrite, tourmaline, masonite,
ottreUte, chlorite, mica, garnet, rhodochrosite, manganite, pyrolusite, barite, gypsum, martite,
aphrosidcrite, analcite, goethitc, and turgite.
Though many of the Lake Superior ores are slightly magnetic, there are only two mines in
the region which ship ores classed as magnetite ores, the Republic and Champion, and even
these ores are largely specular hematite with considerable quantities of magnetite. There are
in the region, however, great quantities of lean nontitaniferous magnetic iron-bearing rocks,
as at the east end of the Mesabi range and in the Gunflint district, where the Duluth gabbro
cuts and overlies the iron-bearing formation; at both the east and west ends of the Gogebic
range, where Keweenawan intrusive rocks cut the iron-bearing formation, and in parts of the
Marquette district.
The magnetite ores consist of coarse-grained magnetite-quartz rock caiTving a considerable
variety of metamorphic silicates, including amphiboles, pyroxenes, garnets, chlorites, olivines,
cordierite, riebeckite, dumortierite, etc. (See pp. 545 et seq.) Locally pyrite, pyrrhotite, and
iron carbonate are pj-esent. The minerals show greater variety and more complex chemical
constitution than those of other phases of the iron-bearing formation. Where altered at the
surface the magnetite may be locally coated with limonite and the silicates may have gone
over to chlorite, epidote, and calcite. The yellowish-green colors so develoj)ed are extremely
characteristic of the surface of the exposures.
PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ORES.
GENERAL CHARACTER.
The ores range from the massive and specular hematite and magnetite tlu-ough ores which
are partly granular and earthy and partly in small hard chunl<s to ores which are almost entirely
soft and earthy (Pis. XXXVIII and XXXIX). There is no very sharp distinction between
the hard ores and the soft ores. The latter make up the great bulk of the annual shipments;
of the ore shipped in 1906 fully 03 per cent would be classed locally as soft ores. The principal
hard ores come fi'om the ^'ermilion district and fi-om the upper horizons of the Xegaunee forma-
tion in the Marquette district. Most of the soft ores contain small hard chunks, usually
bounded by parallelepiped phases due to being broken up in the bed by minute joints. Screen-
ing tests showmg the textures of the typical ores for each of the districts are given in the chapters
on the individual districts. A sununary of these screening tests for all the Lake Superior ores
is shown graphicaDy in figure 72. The data of the screening tests on the diflerent ores were
kindly furnished by the Oliver Iron Mining Company.
Thei-e is a striking contrast in the coarse texture of the magnetite oi-es and the fine cherty
textures of the other phases of the iron-bearing formation. The cpiartz grains in the jaspere
of the eastern part of the Marquette district average from 0.01 to 0.03 millimeter, whereas in the
western and southwestern portions of the same district in the amphibole-magnetite phases of
the iron-bearing formation the quartz grains average about 0.1 to 0.4 millimeter and run as high
as 1 millimeter. The quartz grains of the amphibole-magnetite rocks may thus have a million
times the volume of those of the jaspers. The rjuartz grains near the gabbro in the eastern part
of the Mesabi district reach a diameter of 3 or 4 millimeters, but in the central and western por-
tions of the district they are in general not greater than 0.1 millimeter. In a given amjihibole-
magnetite rock the grains are fairly uniform in size and have a tendency toward polygonal
shape (see PI. XIjVII, A, p. 548), whereas in the other parts of the formation they are most
irregular in size and shape (see PI. XIjIV, p. 534) and show the characteristic scalloped
boundaries of cherts.
The mineral density of the ores ranges from 3.5 to 5.0 and averages about 4.30; the pore
space ranges from less tl\an 1 per cent to 60 per cent and averages about 35 percent; and
the free moisture held in this pore space ranges from 0 to 16 per cent and averages about 10.42
per cent.
PLATES XXXVIII-XXXIX.
PLATE XXXVIII.
Characteristic specimens of iron ores.
.•1. Soft hcmatile fnim Mesabi district, MiniU'sola.
B. Hard lienialile I'mm Ely, l^Iinnosola.
C. Hard hematite from Gosebic district, Michif;an.
Ores of these kinds furm 93 per cent of the Lake Superior shipiueuts.
PLATE XXXIX.
Characteristic specimens of iron ores.
A. Hard hematite from Marquette district, Michigan.
B. Specular hematite from Marquette district, Michigan.
C. Ma.2:netite from western Marquette dis'rict. Michisran.
These ores form 7 per cent of the Lake Superior .shipments.
U S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXXVIII
'A^JJ^SSlA
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIMENS OF IRON ORES.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH LI I PLATE XXXIX
CHARACTERISTIC SPECIMENS OF IRON ORES
U. S. QEOLOQICAL SURVEY
6.0 5,5
CI- 50
24 26 30 35
380
360
340
320
300
280
250
240 220 200
Pounds per cubic foot
Cubic feet per long ton (2240 pounds)
\S 17 IS 19 M . 21 . ?2
r4 l'5 l'6 17 I'S l'9
Cubic feet per short ton (2000 pounds)
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
DIAGRAM SHOWING RELATION OF DENSITY, POROSITY, AND MOISTURE TO CUBIC FEET PER TON.
See page 432.
THE IRON ORES.
481
^
o
>
01
o
PJ
6
z
X
70
60
50
40
30
20
o
o
X)
>
o
6
z
c
o
■o
o
00
>
o
o
o
z
o
■a
>
S
o
o
6
z
■00
10
\y
%
\0>
■•o
\'£.
■.(0
^ /
\ A'
\
Me_sa,^i.djst.__.
/
/'
/
\
X
/
\
^\'^"
'~~~~-^^^:^^ ■- -'^-:
FiGUKE 72.— Textures of Lake Superior iron ores as shown by screening tests. Biweekly samples, representing 43 grades of ore and an
aggregate of 22,376,723 long tons, were taken by the Oliver Iron Mining Company during 1939, and tests were made on the average year's
sample. The results of mine tests are averaged for each district in proportion to the tonnage mined to give the figures shown on the diagram.
CtTBIC CONTENTS OF ORE.
RANGE AND DETERMINATION.
The cubic content per ton ranges from 7 cubic feet for the hard ores to 17 cubic feet for
the soft ores. It depends on the density, the jjore space, and the moisture and may be cal-
culated directly according to the methotl following.
47517°— VOL 52—11-
482 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The cubic content of an ore is a direct function of (a) true specific gravity of the material —
that is, the specific gravity unaffected by porosity or moisture; (6) porosity of the material, in
terms of percentage of volume occupied by pore space or voids; (c) percentage of moisture in
the material — that is, the percentage loss in weight on drying at 110° C.
To facilitate the determination of the cubic content of ores the diagram or graphic equation
shown in Plate XL was devised, expressing the relation between these tliree factors and the
number of cubic feet per ton. Actual determinations in the ground are unsatisfactory in that
they do not show the individual effects of the three factors mentioned, especially moisture
content, which may vary widely at different times and jilaces. By use of the diagram the three
factors are considered separately and their individual, relative, and net effects may be obser^'ed.
The use of the diagram is not confined to iron ores but is also applicable to other ore or mineral
substance in the ground.
USE OF THE DIAGRAM.
The operation of the diagram may perhaps be made clear most easily by applying a con-
crete problem as an illustration. Given an ore with a specific gravity of 4. ,5, |)orosity .30 per
cent, and moisture 7 per cent. Select a point on the upper edge of the diagram indicating the
given specific gravity (4.5) ; from this point move downward, as indicated by the dotted line,
to the line representing the given porosity. (There are two sets of inclined lines crossing the
upper part of the diagram; the less steeply inclined set, numbered at the left side of the dia-
gram, indicates degree of porosity.) From this point move upward to the right along the more
steeply inclined lines to the edge of the diagram. This point (3.1.5) indicates the specific gravity
as corrected for porosity. From this point move directly downward! to the lower edge of the
diagram, where the number of cubic feet per ton is indicated. This shows 11.4 cubic feet per
ton of dry material. The factor of moisture has not yet been considered. Wlien moisture is
present tlie material is heavier and consequently the volume per ton smaller. To introduce tliis
factor of moisture, move directly upward from the last point (11.4) to the horizontal line indi-
cating the given percentage of moisture (7), and from tliis point down the inclined Une to the
lower edge of the diagram, where the number of cubic feet per long ton is found to be 10.6.
At the lower edge of the plate is a transformation table sho^ving the relation between cubic
feet per long ton (2,240 pounds) and cubic feet per short ton (2,000 pounds). For example,
10.2 cubic feet per long ton is equivalent to 9.1 cubic feet per short ton.
CONSTRUCTION OF THE DIAGRAM.
The following discussion of the derivation of the diagram is given with the idea that one desir-
ing to make use of it would first wish to be assured that it rests on a rational mathematical basis.
The top and bottom Imes of the diagram proper, labeled respectively "Specific gravity"
and "Cubic feet per ton" and connected by parallel vertical lines, constitute a transformation
table by means of which the number of cubic feet per ton of a material of a given density may
be at once determined (or \'ice versa) by moving vertically between the upper and lower edges
of the diagram. Immediately below the edge of the diagram proper is a scale of pounds per
cubic foot, wliich may be used by moving vertically downward from any point on the ' ' specific
gravity" or "cubic feet per ton" scales.
Effect of porosity. — The effect of porosity is to decrease the density of a substance, hence
rock specific gravity is less than mineral specific gravity m proportion to the degree of porosity
of the material considered. To introduce the factor of porosity in the diagram, the upper
line was extended to the right to the point indicating a specific gra^^ty of zero (not shoMii on
the diagi-am). The Une at the left edge of the diagram was dra\ni perpendicular to the upper
edge and divided into 100 equal divisions, representing percentages of pore space. Each of the
points of the vertical "porosity" fine was then connected with the point mdicating a specific
gravity of zero. Hence on moving vertically downward from any point on the ■"specific grav-
ity" line, a succession of equally spaced lines are crossed indicating percentages of pore space.
To enable the diagram to show automatically the change in specific gravity resulting from a
given porosity of a substance of known mineral specific gravity, a set of parallel lines was drawn,
properly connecting pomts on the "porosity" and "specific gravity" fines. These lines were
THE IRON ORES. 483
drawn parallel to the line connecting 100 per cent porosity with zero specific gra%dty and agree
with the following formula:
G, = G^{\ -P)
where G^ = rock specific gravity, G^ = mineral specific gravity, and P = porosity. The
diagram then automatically shows the relation between mineral specific gravity, porosity, and
cubic feet per ton. To illustrate, a certain ore with a mineral specific gravity of 5.0 has 40
per cent of pore space. Beginning at the point 5.0 on the upper edge of the tliagram, move
downward to the line indicating a porosity of 40 per cent; from this point move along the
parallel inclined lines upward to the right, to the edge of the diagram, where the specific gravity
as reduced by pore space (rock specific gravity) is found to be .3.0; immediately below this
point, on the lower edge of the diagram, it is seen that the ore runs 11.95 cubic feet per ton and
187.25 pounds per cubic foot.
Effect ofmmsture. — The diagram so far takes no account of moisture and hence is applicable
only to perfectly dry material. Moisture when present in an ore or similar substance occupies
the pore space. When the pore space is filled with moisture the material is said to be saturated.
As the moisture occupies the natural openings in the ore, its presence affects the weight of the
ore and not its volume, hence its effect is to increase the density and ilecrease the number of
cubic feet per ton. Moisture is expressed in percentage of total weight.
Let D= density as affected by porosity; then, as a cubic foot of water weighs 62.5 pounds,
Cubic feet per ton = jp~^^
When moisture (M) is present the above equation becomes —
^ , . , , ^ 2,240 (l-M)
C u Die reet per ton = r>^ „„ - —
. r x>X62.5
The lower part of the diagram is crossed by a set of parallel horizontal lines indicating per-
centages of moisture, as showTi at the right-hand edge of the diagram. Follo^\'ing the above
equation, a set of inclined lines were drawn, properly connecting points on the "moisture" and
"cubic feet per ton" lines. Given the numlser of cubic feet occupied by a ton of any porous
material when dry, the effect of any percentage of moisture is indicated automatically by the
diagram. For example, a certain ore when dry occupies 12 cubic feet per ton; it is desired to
know the effect of 10 per cent of moisture. From the point 12 on the lower edge of the diagram
move vertically upward to the horizontal line indicating 10 per cent moisture; from this point
move downward along the inchned line to the edge of the diagram, where it is found that the
moist material occupies 10.8 cubic feet per ton.
Moisture of saturation. — Up to this point it has been shown that, given the mineral specific
gravity, porosity, and moisture content of an ore or similar substance, the diagram automatically
indicates the number of cubic feet per ton. In many classes of ore the factor of moisture is the
most variable of the three named above. The mineral specific gravity and porosity of an ore
determine the amount of moisture which it can hold. This maximum, or moisture of saturation,
may be calculated as follows:
6-'„j = mineral specific gravity.
D = density of dry porous material.
P = porosity.
M = moisture of saturation.
D =GM-P).
D P
from which P=l — rr- and M =
Substituting the value above given for P —
M-
1-^
Gm.
484 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
By substituting values for D and G^ in the above equation tlie curves for moisture of satura-
tion were constructed across tlie lower part of the diagram. Those, curves enable one to determine
at once the moisture of saturation of any material, given tlie mineral specific gravity and porosity.
Each cui^ve corresponds to a certam mmeral specific gravity, and the moisture of saturation
is found by moving vertically from the point indicating the number of cubic feet per ton of the
dry material to the proper curve for moisture of saturation. For example, an ore with a mineral
specific gravity of 4.0 and a porosity of 36.0 per cent occupies 14 cubic feet per ton if dry; its mois-
ture of saturation is found by moving upwanl from the point 14 to the curve (/ = 4.0, and reading
the indicated moisture — 12.2 per cent; that is, 12.2 per cent of moisture would fill the pore
space of tliis ore.
Excess of moisture Tmndled in mining. — It frequently happens in mining tliat ore as hoisted
to the surface contams a larger percentage of moisture than it did before it was mined; m fact,
it may contain a percentage of moisture greater than the moisture of saturation of the unmined
ore. This may be caused by the handling of broken ore on undrained mine floors. The ore
after being broken doAVTi has a much larger percentage of voids than before and hence a greater
ability to absorb and retain moisture. The diagram is useful in this connection in showing,
from determuiations of specific gravity and original porosity of hand specimens, the moisture
of saturation of the ore in place. Tliis figure compared with tlie percentage of moisture of ore
as it leaves the mine teUs at once whether or not an unnecessary amount of water is being hoisted
with the ore, owing to improper drainage.
EXPLORATION FOR IRON ORE.
The location of explorations within the areas of the iron-bearmg formations is determined
by outcrops, by magnetic Imes, by mining, and by general geologic structure. It has been
possible to confine most of the exploration to the area of the iron-bearing formations, but in
certain districts, notably the Cuyuna, Florence, Crystal Falls, and Iron River districts, the
distribution and limits of the iron-bearing formation are so uncertain that much exploratory
work has had to be done even to locate the formation. All the facts bearing on the distribution
of the iron-bearing formation discussed in this monograph are taken into account in choosing
areas for exploration. Some of the larger mining companies employ their own geologists to
make special reports on the geology of given areas as a preliminary to underground explora-
tion, and nearly all the explorers make liberal use of all the geologic information available in
localizing their work.
As the few ore deposits exposed at the surface were found years ago, explorations are
now largely conducted by drilling and sinking test pits and shafts. The large size of the
iron-ore deposits makes it possible to find and outline them by drilling to an extent not
possible in smaller ore deposits, with the result that the greater number of ore bodies, especially
in recent years, are thorouglily explored by drilling before mining begins. It has usually
been assumed that if drilling does not locate an ore body it is useless to sink a shaft for tliis
purpose. Mming operations have necessarily disclosed much ore which hail not previously
been found by drilling, especially in certain districts like the Menominee or the Gogebic, where
the structural conditions are such as to make the location of ore by drillmg extremely dillicult.
In the region as a whole mining operations have almost evervwhere disclosed greater reserves
of ore than the drilling had indicated.
The great dependence placed on drill work has resulted in enormous expenditure for
this purpose. Accurate estimates of the amount of drilling done so far in the region can not
be made, but a rough estimate compiled from tentative estimates of engineers of the several
districts is as follows:
THE IRON ORES.
Drilling done for iron ore in the Lake Superior region.
485
District.
Number of
drill holes.
Average
deptii of
drill iioies
(feet).o
Mesabi
Vermilion
Cuyima
Marquette
Otber Michigan ranges and Wisconsin ranges
15,000
1,000
1,500
5,000
4,000
175
600
250
500
300
26,500
1 Estimates probably low.
This totals 7,200,000 feet, or about 1,363 miles of drilling. At an average cost of $3 a
foot, which is a low estimate, the total expenditure has been roughly $21,600,000.
It is estimated that at the present time there are 400 drills in operation in the region. In
the earlier days of exploration test pits were relied upon to a large extent, especially in areas
where the surface drift is thin and the water level below the rock surface. This method of
exploration, however, is unsatisfactory because of the great depth of the drift at many places,
the difficulty of handling water, and the difliculty after finding the ledge of penetrating it by
this method. In later years the use of test pits has been largely superseded by drilling.
Both diamond and churn drills are in use. Through surface and soft-ore formations the
churn drill is used. Much of the Mesabi district may be so explored. The cost of churn
drilling has ranged from -fl to $3.50 and averaged about $2.50 a foot, varying from district to
district according to accessibility and cost of transportation ai)d other factors. The cost of
diamond drilling has ranged from $2.25 to $8 a foot and averages at present about $3.75, but
varies from district to district. Test pits are cheap, averaging perhaps $1.25 a foot.
The necessity for the most careful study of the structural geology in drilling is illustrated
by the frequent failure of drills to locate ore deposits even after what seemed to be careful
drilling and the subsequent discovery of the deposits either by further drilling or by mining
operations. Indeed, as one comes to realize the variety and complexity of underground
structural conditions, he is likely to become more and more disinclined to submit a negative
report on any property, no matter how extensively it has been drilled. This difficulty is
illustrated by the ore shoots in the Gogebic and Menominee districts, many of which have
been missed by drilling and picked up in mming operations. Many of the ore shoots m the
Vulcan member of the upper Huronian slate of Michigan pitch beneath the surface, following
the axes of drag folds, and it is easy for drills to pass one side or the other, or, if the drill
hole is inclined, to go above or below them. On examination of drilling plats of exploration
areas it is easy to see where linear shoots of ore might pass through at places not penetrated
by the drilling. In fact, drilling in some of these localities is almost as uncertain as shooting
a bu'd on the wing. There are many ways of missing the ore. As knowletlge of structural
conditions increases, however, adverse chances diminish, with the result that in certain areas
after the local structural problems are solved, it is possible to drill with a high degree of success.
A higher average of success in drillmg would unquestionably result if greater care were
taken in the interpretation of drill records. The drill runner is often allowed to report the
character of the drillings and the samples are not kept, with the result that many valuable
inferences that might be drawn from the lithology, the dip and strike of beilding and cleavage,
and other features are lost. Not infrequently also failure to plat drill records in such a maimer
that they may be considered in three dimensions may cause promising chances for ore to be
overlooked.
There has been a considerable tendency to generalize the principles of ore occurrence and
in exploration to carry such principles fi'om one district to another. As a matter of fact, although
some of the basic principles are general for the region, the local variations of structure require
the most careful study of each area to prevent mistakes in interpretation. When explorers
of the Gogebic district, where the ores lie in regular, impervious, pitching basins, went to the
486 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR JtEGIOX.
Mesabi district, where the rocks are of tlie same age, tiiey naturally attempted to use the same
methods in exploration. But here the flatter dip of the formation, the shallowness of basins,
the effect of overlying slates in ponding waters, and the unusually large influence of joints in
localizing the concentration of ore made the finding of ore largely a new j)rob]em, which was
solved at much expense and trouble. Recognizing the danger of carrying the method of explo-
ration of one district into another, certain explorers have gone to the other extreme and have
attempted to disregard all guides derived from the study of tlie structural geology, with results
even more unsatisfactory than if they had used principles developed for other districts.
Much the greater part of the exploration of the region has been conducted without taking
the fullest advantage of all geologic knowledge available, but there has been a rapidly increasing
tendency to follow geologic structure and therefore an increasing demand for geologic informa-
tion, as shown by the cordial support that the mining men have given to the efforts of the
United States and State surveys in this region and by their considerable expenditures for private
geologic surveys. Certain of the drilling companies doing contract work now have geologists
on their staff to aid in the interpretation of records, notwithstanding the fact that such inter-
pretation is primarily in the hands of their clients. The problems of underground exploration
are followed keenly, intelligently, and energetically by a large number of skilled men in the
employ of mining companies, with the result that advances are being made ^^^th a rapiditj'
which is sometimes almost bewildering. Six months may see the development of new facts
requiring changes in the interpretation of the drilling of a district. The statements as to struc-
tural conditions ]>resented in another chapter of this book may require some modification b}'
the time the book is given to the public, because of the amount of rapidly accumulating
information in the interval between the writing and the printing.
MAGNETISM OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES AND IRON-BEARING
FORMATIQNS.
All ores of iron are found to be magnetic when tested by sufficientlj^ delicate means. Ordi-
narily magnetite is the only iron mineral which causes conspicuous disturbance of the magnetic
needle. Practically all the Lake Superior iron-bearing formations contain at least minute
quantities of magnetite, and hence all exert an influence on the magnetic needle, but in ^\-idely
varying degree. The iron-bearing formation of the Vermilion district and other Keewatin
areas is strongly magnetic. The same is true of the formation in the east end of the Mesabi
district, the Gunflint district, the Cuyuna district, and the east and west ends of the Gogebic
district, and of most of the Negaunee formation of the Marquette district. Less magnetic
parts of the iron-bearing fonnations are those producing principally hematite and limonite,
as the central and western parts of the Mesabi, the central part of tha Gogebic, and parts of
the Menominee and Crystal Falls districts. The iron-bearing member of the Iron River district
of Michigan affects the magnetic needle onl}' 'jcaUy and slightly.
Every known iron-bearing formation ' i the Lake Superior region, Anth the exception
of that in part of the extreme west end o'' the Mesabi district, has been outlined partly as a
result of magnetic surveys. In some of t/ie districts, as, for instance, the Iron River district,
the magnetic variation is slight, but careful observations will detect it. In addition several
magnetic belts are known in wliich exploration has not yet showTi the character of the iron-
bearing formation. On the general map (PI. I, in pocket) magnetic belts are not indicated
over all of the iron-bearing formations. They are showTi only in places where the formation
is not naturally exjiosed or uncovered by exploration.
Strong magnetic disturbance does not necessarily mean ore, and, vice versa, ore does not
necessai'ih' cause strong magnetic disturbance. Lean amphibolitic schists may be highly
magnetic, while rich hydrated soft ore has but little effect on the needle. Although magnetic
disturbance is usually caused by an iron-bearing formation, it is also caused by certain basic
igneous rocks, like the ellijjsoidal basalts of tlie Keewatin or gabbro intrusives. There is Uttle
THE IRON ORES. 487
difficulty in ascertaining the cause of tlie attractions, however, for somewhere along most of the
magnetic belts in the Lake Superior region there are outcrops which indicate the nature of the
rock causing the disturbance. If the rock is entirely covered, it may still be possible to deter-
mine whether the disturbance means iron-bearing formation or some other rocks. The iron-
bearing formations are sedimentary deposits with certain linear characteristics of distribution,
giving even lines or "belts'" of magnetic attraction, whereas the basic igneous rocks are likely
to cause a much more irregular magnetic field.
Because of the conditions above outlined, it is seldom practicable in the Lake Superior
region to draw from magnetic observations inferences with regard to the shapes of the iron-
ore deposits themselves as distinguished fi-om the rest of the iron-bearing formation — such
inferences as have been drawn by magnetic surveys of deposits in eastern Canada, Sweden,
and elsewhere. In those regions the ores consist of magnetite associated with relatively non-
magnetic wall rocks, and the magnetic disturbances are produced by the iron ore itself, not by
u-on ore and wall rock; hence it is possible to draw satisfactory inferences as to the shape and
attitude of the iron-ore deposits. In the Lake Superior region the magnetic attractions are
useful in locating iron-bearing formations and thus ultimately the iron ore by underground
exploration, but do not directly point out the iron-ore deposits themselves. The highly- devel-
oped Swedish methods of determining both the intensity and the direction of the magnetic pull
are therefore unnecessarily detailed and slow for use in the Lake Superior region, and when
attempts have been made to locate ore deposits by them the results have been disappointing
Although the iron ores may not be discriminated by means of the magnetic disturbances,
it is possible under some conditions to draw useful inferences frona them as to the dip or folding
of a buried iron-bearing formation. A sharp, narrow belt of magnetic attraction leading up
to a definite maximum usually means a liighly tilted formation presenting a narrow erosion
edge at the rock surface, as in the Gogebic or Vermilion district. A wide, more irregular,
and less well defined belt of attraction is ordinarily associated with a flatter dip, exposing a
greater area of iron-bearing formation to the erosion surface. The producing part of the iron-
bearing Biwabik formation of the Mesabi district illustrates tliis. Unequal magnetic gradient
on two sides of a maximum may indicate the direction of dip of the iron-bearing beds. The
outward dip of the iron-bearing formation about the Archean ovals of the Crystal Falls district
is so indicated. Several roughly parallel, more or less discontinuous magnetic belts, here and
there converging and joining, may indicate repeated pitcliing folds, as in the Cuyuna district.
General laws of interpretation of magnetic attraction require much local mochfication.
It is usually riecessary to ascertain for each locality the magnetic character of the iron-bearing
formation, to correlate tliis with known facts fi'om outcrops or underground workings, and
from the knowledge thus obtained to interpret the results of the magnetic formations in
covered parts of the area where the magnetic reachngs alone are available. H. L. Smyth," in
connection with much magnetic field work in the Lake Superior region, has developed mathe-
matical relations between magnetic fields and various attitudes of the rock beds which may
serve as a useful guide in detailed surveys.
The instruments wliich have been used in Lake Superior magnetic surveys are the dip
needle and the dial compass. The dip needle determines the vertical component of the mag-
netic pull, as well as the direction of the horizontal pull; the dial compass determines only
the direction of the horizontal pull. Methods of using and interpreting these instruments are
discussed in detail by Smyth. The dial compass is essential in most of the work because it
affords means of keeping accurate directions necessary-for location and of reading the horizontal
component of the magnetic variation. It may be used only on sunny days, and thus mag-
netic work in the Lake Superior region is likely to be slow and expensive. The dip needle
may be used at any time, but in a disturbed field it affords no means of keeping horizontal
directions, and hence location. This is an essential defect in a country in wliich the roads
and other works of man afford little aid in keeping location.
In theory the use of the magnetic needle is simple, but much practice is required to insure
uniformly accurate observations. The unskilled observer finds many pitfalls in the mechanism
cMon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 36. 1899, pp. 335-373.
488 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
of the instrument, in the manner of holding it, in the effects of temperature, in electrification
from rubbing the glass, etc. There is much opportunity for the exercise of good judgment in
the determination of the intervals at wliich reachngs shall be taken, the direction and number
of runs, etc. These should be varied for different areas, depending on the structure found or
suspected. Finally, the interpretation of the results calls for consideration and careful bal-
ancing of a great variety of^ factors, capacity for wliich is acquired only by wide experience
and painstaking observation.
MANGANIFEROUS IRON ORES.
All the Lake Superior iron ores contain minute quantities of manganese, and certain ores
carry as high as 20 to 25 per cent. In the Cuyuna district of Minnesota a drill hole in the
iron-bearing member averages 13 per cent for the upper .35 feet and about 2 per cent below.
Another hole, in sec. 28, T. 47 N., R. 29 W., has an average of 11.33 per cent for the upper 30
feet. Similar results have been obtained from drilling in the Baraboo district.
The larger part of the manganiferous ores shipped so far have come from the Gogebic
district. Manganiferous ores are often not discriminated from the iron ores in figures of
slupment, and tliis makes it difficult to estimate the tonnage of manganese iron ore and the
average percentage of manganese in so-called manganiferous iron ores. E. C. Eckel ° estimates
that during 1906 the Lake Superior region produced about 1,000,000 long tons of low-manganese
iron ore with an average manganese content of about 4 per cent and ranging as sliipped from
1 to 8 per cent. According to Burchard,* the total production of manganiferous iron ore in
the Lake Superior region from 1885 to 1909, inclusive, has been 8,968,449 long tons, or about
77 per cent of the total production for the United States during that period.
The percentage of manganese in the manganiferous ores of the Lake Superior region is
so low that the ore may not be classed either as a manganese or a liiglily manganiferous iron
ore hke those of Arkansas and Colorado. It produces a basic pig. None of the ore shipped
from the Lake Superior region has been liigh enough in manganese to be available for ferro-
manganese or spiegeleisen, which require at least 15 per cent of manganese.
Mineralogically the manganese is mainly in the form of pyrolusite (MnOj). In the Cuyuna
district this has been found at the surface to be mixed with rhodochrosite (MnCOj). The
psilomelane so commonly associated with pyrolusite in the Appalachian manganese ores has
not been especially looked for in the Lake Superior region but is probably present.
The conspicuous association of manganese with the upper parts of the iron-ore deposits
seems to prevail in the Lake Superior region, as in deposits of manganiferous iron ore in other
parts of the United States.
IRON-ORE RESERVES.
DATA AVAILABLE FOB ESTIMATES.
Up to 1910, 335 mines have been in operation in the Lake Superior region, and many thou-
sands of test pits and churn and diamond drill holes have been sunk. The mines and explora-
tions, together with natural exposures, afl'ord data for a fair estimate of ore reserves in the
producing areas. There are considerable areas not yet explored.
AVAILABILITY OF OKES.
Evitlently the question of the present and future availability of the iron ores is one of costs —
in mining, in transportation, and in the furnace. The costs are determined —
(1 ) By the character of the ore itself, its percentage of iron and deleterious constituents, and
the nature of its principal ganguc material.
(2) By the cost of mining, whether, for instance, by open pit or underground mothoil.
(3) By whether or not the ore must be concentrated, as, for instance, the sandy taconites
of the western Mesabi.
o Mineral Resources U. S. for 1906, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1907, p. 106.
SBurcbard, E. F., The production of manganese ore In 1909: Extract from Mineral Resources U. S. for 1909. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1911, p. 10.
THE IRON ORES. 489
(4) By the cost of transportation to the furnace. Between Vermihon and Marquette ores
there is a difference of about 75 cents a ton in the cost of transportation to the lower lakes.
Viewed in another way, the cost of transportation is the amount necessary to bring together
the coal, limestone, and iron and to transport the finished product to consuming centers.
This introduces another set of costs for ores smelted at the upper lakes.
(5) By the cost of reduction in the furnace, depending on the character of the ore and on
the success in modifying and applying furnace practice to local conditions. For instance, the
use of by-products from coke in certain furnaces in the Lake Superior region makes approxi-
mately the difference between profit and loss for the combination of conditions there existing.
(6) By the nature of the ownersliip. A large corporation holding a variety of ores and
equipped to assemble the raw material under the existing conditions can handle ore which
would not be available to a smaller company not equipped to control the situation in a large way.
In recent years the average percentage of iron in the ore shipped has varied between 60
and 54 per cent for the ore in the natural state (see pp. 477, 493), the grade on the whole low-
ering. These grades may be regarded as approximately the lowest average grades available under
the conditions prevaihug in those years. Low-grade, high-sihca ores, running as low as 40 per cent
in iron, favorably located for cheap mining and transportation, have been used to a small
extent for mixtures, as, for instance, ores in the Palmer area of the Marquette district and in
the Menominee district. In most of the region at the present time ore running 50 per cent
(natural) in metaUic iron is considered of about as low grade as is at present available, and
estimates are made accordingly. Locally ores of lower grade are included as available ores,
either because of favorable conditions of niirdng and transportation, because of differences in
the policy of the companies making the estimates, or because they may be concentrated by
washing, as in the western Mesabi.
The table of production (see pp. 49-69) shows what has been the relative availabihty of
ores of the different districts, all factors considered.
BE SERVES OF ORE AT PRESENT AVAILABLE.
ESTIMATES.
• The authors have made no independent detailed estimates of Lake Superior iron-ore
reserves for this monograph. "They have, however, had access to the detailed estimates of
the principal mining companies and to the records of the Mnnesota Tax Commission and are
from their field study famihar with most of the large deposits or groups of deposits. The
estimates here given represent their judgment as to the approximate tonnage of ore now avail-
able, based on the above information. The variations in the independent estimates of mining
companies and the difference of opinion as to how low a grade of ore in any given place is to
be included in the available ores give latitude for considerable variations in estimates. The
authors can claim no finality for the figures published. They are what seem to them reason-
able approximations.
Estimates of the available pre-Cambrian iron ore of the Lake Superior region.
Long tons.
Marquette district 100, 000, 000
Gogebic district 60, 000, 000
Menominee and Crystal Falls districts 75, 000, 000
Mesabi district 1, 600, 000, 000
Vermilion district 30, 000, 000
Cuyuna district 40, 000, 000
1, 905, 000, 000
The reserve reported includes about 1.30,000,000 tons of washable ores from the western
Mesabi, averaging 46 per cent of iron (dry) of non-Bessemer character. Of the remainder of
Mesabi ores, approximately 40 per cent are Bessemer.
There is a further low-grade reserve in the CUnton ores of Wisconsin which may be of con-
siderable magnitude. (See pp. 566-567.)
490
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
LIFE OF ORE RESERVES AT PRESENT AVAILABLE.
Figure 73, prepared hy II. M. Roberts, shows the total production of ore from the Lake
Superior region for 30 years before 1907 and the rate of increase of production. To the close of
1910 20.5 per cent oi' the known reserves had been consumed. If the above ostiniates of
100
90
80
70
60
to
Id
Z
Id
U
50
40
30
20
10
/
/
/
«
/
/
1
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
'
i
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
/
1650
I860
1870
1860
1890
1900 1910
YEARS
I9Z0
1930
1940
1950
I960
FlGtntE 73.— Diagram showing relation between estimated ore reserves of the Lake Superior region and rate of production. The estimated reserve,
1,905,000,000 tons, plus the total amount of ore miued to the end of 1910, is represented as 100 per cent on the vertical line. For each year
there is shown the percentage of this total which had been removed to the end of that year. For example. 15.9 per cent of the kno«-n ore was
removed to the close of 1907. For the last five years, 1905 to 1910, the curve is practically a straight line. If this line is projected at a
uniform slope, it indicates complete exhaustion of the known reserves in 1960. Reasons are given in the text, however, for the belief that
the date of exhaustion will be later.
reserves at present available are even approximately correct and the rate of jiroduction remains
the same as that in 1910, the hfe of the ore deposits as now estimated will be 45 years— that
is, to 1956. If the rate of production increases in the future this time will obviously be
shorter. As some increase in the rate of pi-oduction seems Hkely in spite of the ])robable
temporary recessions due to business dei)ressions, if onty liigh-grade ores are mined the exhaus-
tion of the existing deposits, or, if not these, of the amount of high-grade ore equivalent to
that now in sight, will probably occur earlier than this date. But even this conclusion must
be modified by the fact that In proportion as the inadequate supply of liigh-grade ores becomes
THE IRON ORES.
491
depleted there wall be an increased use of lower-grade ores with the high-grade material, whose
life will be thereby prolonged. This factor is regarded as so important as to rendoi- it probable
that the use of the high-grade ores will be distributetl through a much longer period than 45
years, just as there will be first-growth white pine remaining uncut long after the date when
all the white pine would be gone at the present rate of use. Also new discoveries of ore of jires-
ent commercial grade are made yearly. Prior to 1911 the discoveries have kept well ahead of
the sliipments. The region is now so well known that there is httle likelihood of discovering
another Mesabi range. Though it is not impossible that in the next few years the reserves
may be sufficiently increased by discovery to keep pace with the sliipments, this is rather
unhkely. Still less Ukely is it that the increase of reserves will keep pace with an acceleration
of production. If, for instance, the increase of production for a year amounts to 2,000,000
tons, and it is estimated that the present reserves will last 20 years at the lower rate, it will be
necessary in that year of increase to discover 40,000,000 tons of ore in order that the life of the
reserves may not be lessened.
RESERVES AVAILABLE FOR THE FUTURE.
ESTIMATES.
Reserves available for the future must be considered as having a present small and
intangible value, for the reason that the estimates of ores at present available include all
ores wliich can be immediately mined or wliich will be taken out in the normal course of
development of present mines. When we remember that iron is one of the most widely
disseminated metals of the earth's crust (by actual analysis constituting 4 per cent of all the
rocks of the earth), it is apparent that only the most arbitrary limits can be placed on future
reserves. In the following estimates of future reserves are included rocks containing a per-
centage of iron lower than the percentage in the reserves at present available but sufficiently
liigher than that in the common rocks of the earth's crust to give them future priority in use as
iron ores over the average rocks of the earth's crust. It will probably be many hundreds of
years before any but an insignificant portion of these reserves available for the future are
utihzed. The additional discovery of liigh-grade ores — as, for instance, those of the great field
in Brazil — the enormous quantities of low-grade ores now available from Alabama and Cuba,
the extension of the known high-grade reserves of Lake Superior, and the increased use of
scrap iron and steel will postpone the use of the bulk of the low-grade Lake Superior reserves
available for the future. On the other hand, the diminution in supply of the reserves at
present available will lead gradually, and probably in the not far distant future, to the drawing
on minor amounts of these future reserves for mixtures.
It is to be remembered that the available ores are associated with iron-bearing formations,
which differ from the ore mainly in having more silica and which show all gradations to the
ore. The character of these formations, so far as iron is concerned, is best shown by the fol-
lowing table of analyses from drill sections compiled by the Oliver Iron Mining Company:
Character of iron-bearing formations in Lake Superior region (not including available ore).
Diamond-drill Averages.
Range.
Number of
holes.
Total
number
of feet.
Number of
analyses.
Average
percentage
of iron.
Gogebic
15
30
32
30
24
5,890
4,814
11,025
5,287
5,400
490
1,517
1,726
1,681
1,094
36 65
Baraboo .
36.40
35.12
Menominee , .
37. 93
Mesabi
3S. 00
Other Sources.
Marquette
Trenches
Levels
975
94
905
41.53
Menominee.
Zfi 40
492
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
These analyses include both the lean and the partly concentrated parts of the iron-bearing
formations, but do not include the available ore. If tlic partly concentrated parts of the forma-
tion are left out of consideration, the average would be 2.5 per cent of iron.
In the following table column 4 contains a rough estimate of the tonnage of all iron-
bearing formations outside of "available" ore to a (U-pth of 1,2.50 feet for the steeply dipping
formations and to a depth of 400 feet for the Mesahi district, where the thickness ranges from
a knife-edge to 900 feet. Column 5 contains a rough estimate of the tonnage of the part of
the iron-bearing formations which will run above 35 per cent in iron.
Total tonnage of iron-bearing formations to given depths and tonnage estimated to run 35 per cent or mare in iron.
District.
(1)
.\roa.
(2)
Depth.
(3)
Volume.
(4)
Quantity of iron
formation.
(5)
Quantity con-
tainini; 35 per cent
or more of iron.
Michifran;
Crystal Falls
Sq. mi.
7.8
28.5
5.6
5.8
1.0
127.0
15.6
.7
5.S
11.0
10.0
6.6
30.0
Feet.
1,250
1,250
1,250
1,250
1,000
400
1,250
1,250
1,250
3.i0
100
1.250
1,250
Cu. mi.
1.85
&75
1.30
1.40
.20
9.M
3.70
.16
1.40
.70
.19
1.57
7.10
Tons.
24.100.000.000
sr.SIXI.UIM.l.lMMJ
16. !«KI. I«K1.I«)0
IS, 200. QUI 1.01)0
2,600,000,000
125, 000. 000. 000
4,S, 100, 000, 000
2,1.50.000,000
IS, 200. 000. (KK)
9,100,000,000
2.500,000.000
20.400.000.000
92,400,000.000
Tons.
I,.5or).ono.nno
10,000.(Ml<l.ll(IO
Menominee
3,.50(>. (HKI.OIIO
l,2.'i0.l-K10.l»«
Swanzy
260, iKlO.noO
Minnesota:
Mesabi
30,000,flf)i).OOO
1,023,000,000
Wisconsin:
215, OM. 000
Penokee
1, 250, (KH 1.000
910,000.000
Ontario:
250.000.000
2,040.000.000
North shore of Lake Superior
9,240,000,000
200.000,000
255. 40
35 92
467,4.50,000,000
67,640,000,000
We may conclude, therefore, that while the ores at present available would probabl_y be
exhausted within about 50 j-ears if they alone were drawn from, the increasing use of lower-
grade ores, already begun, will lengthen this jjeriod many times.
COMPARISON OF LAKE SUPERIOR RESERVES WITH OTHER RESERVES OF THE UNITED STATES.
For comparison a table showing ores available at present and in the future in different
parts of the United States is given below. The figures, with the exception of those for Lake
Superior, are those of the National Conservation Commission."
Iron-ore reserves of the United States available at present and in the future.
Commercial district.
Ore at present
available.
Ore available
in the future.
Long tons.
•29S.000.000
53S. 440. 000
1,905.000.000
315,000,000
57. 760, 000
68,950,000
Long Ions.
1 . 095. 000. 000
2. Souttieastern
1 276 5'X) 000
67, 640, tmO. (XX)
4. Mi.ssis.sippi Valley
570 000 (XX)
120. 665. (XX)
6. Pacific slope -
23,905,000
3,183,150,000
70,726,070,000
1. Vermont. Massachusetts, Coimecticut, New York, New Jersey. Pennsylvania. Maryland, Ohio.
2. VirEinia. West VirRinia. eastern Kentucky, North Carolina, South Carolina, Georgia, .Vlabama, eastern Tcimessec.
3. Micnijian. Minnesota, Wisconsin.
4. Northwest .\labama, western Tennessee, western Kentucky. Iowa, Missouri. .Vrkansas. eastern Texas.
5. Montana, Idaho, Wyoining. Colorado, Utah, Nevada, New Mexico, western Te.xas, .\rizona.
C. Washington, Oregon, California.
It appears from this table that the Lake Superior region contains approximately 60 per
cent of the reserves at present available and 96 per cent of the future reserves, as figured
in tons. If measured in units of iron, the Lake Superior reserves form a still larger proportion
of the total.
oBull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 394. 1909, p. 103.
THE IRON ORES.
493
LOWERING OF GRADE NOW DISCERNIBLE.
Lower and lower grades of ore are being included in successive estimates of available ores.
A comparison of the iron-ore tonnage of the United States with the production of pig iron for
the last 20 years shows a distinct increase in the number of tons of iron required to make a
ton of pig iron, and thus a lowering of the grade of iron ore mined. Figure 74, prepared by
H. M. Roberts, compares the pig iron and tons of ore used and shows an average annual drop
in grade of tiie ores for the last 20 years of 0.3.5 per cent in iron. Each temporary increase of
100
90
80
70
60
10
o
Sso
o
a:
LJ
40
30
20
10
^'^
l''
''. /
V
\
\
i
-I
1
1
r-A / .
~~~1'
w^
V
V
A
V
■ —
1886
1890
IS94
1898
1902
1906
YEARS
1910
1914
1916
1922
I9E6
Figure 74.— Diagram representing decline in grade of Lake Superior iron ore since 1889. The light black line represents the approximate average
percentage of metallic iron in the total production for the United States for each year. The heavy black line is the average slope computed
liy method of least squares, from the variations of the light continuous line. It represents the average decline of grade since 1S89, which amounts
to about 0.35 per cent per year. The broken line shows the percentage of the entire production of the United States which comes from the
Lake Superior region. As this proportion has steadily increased, it is apparent that the drop in grade of the iron ores, figured for the entire
United States, is shared by the Lake Superior ores.
production has been followed by a lowering m grade, and decrease of production has meant
raising of the grade in about the proportion that might be calculated from the general drop
in grade with mcrease in production for the last 20 years. It is not likely that the grade will
lower as rapidly in the future as in the past, for as successively lower grades of ore are utilized
the amounts available are larger.
As the Lake Superior region produces nearly 80 per cent of the iron ore of the United States,
the conclusion as to lowering of grade drawn from the diagram may be taken to apply conspicu-
ously to this region.
494 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Tlie present marked tcudeucy toward the use of lower-grade ores docs not necessarily mean
that the higher-grade supplies are exhausted, but simply that they are being conserved for
the future. In working a series of deposits ranging from the highest to a low grade, in strong
financial hantis, it is regarded as the best business policy not to rob the deposits of their liighest
grade, as was formerly done, but so to mix the high and low grades as to give the maximum
tonnage of an ore just rich enough to be commercially available. The prospective short life
of the highest-grade ores, probably not more than .50 years, is undoubtedly influencing the
present conservative action. The conservation of the higher-grade supphcs is favored by the
marked concentration of control of the industry in a few hands. When the ore was held by
many owners the range of grade available to each owner was necessarily limited; when it is in
few hands the range is greater and correspondingly greater care can be taken in the proper
mi.xing of grades in order to yield a maximum amount of the lowest grade which the market
will stand. In the discussion of mining methods (p. 498) some reference is made to the care
taken in getting out the proper grades from kny individual deposit. The same general methods
are apj)lied by the United States Steel Corporation in apportioning the desired ores among the
different deposits available.
EFFECT OF INCREASED USE OF LOW-GRADE ORES.
If it is established that the high-grade ores have a limited life and that the direction of the
development of the ore industry is now toward the use of lower-grade ores and is likely to be more
so in the future, and that this tendency will lengthen greatly the life of the ore deposits, there
are certain consequences which may be expected.
• 1. The distribution of the production of iron ore is likely to be modified and the relative
importance of iron-mining centers will vary somewhat. As the grade falls, new "low-grade"
districts will come into existence and some old districts which have had a somewhat precarious
existence in competition with higher-grade districts will be enabled to meet them on less unequal
terms. This will be the effect not only locally within the Lake Superior region, but also in the
relations between the Lake Superior and other regions. Western iron ores not now mined
will come into the market. Appalachian ores, which can even now, in spite of their low grade,
compete with Lake Superior ores because of favorable conditions of transportation and prox-
imity to smeltmg materials and consuming centers, may in the future attain an even stronger
position, for the difference in composition of the ores marketed is sure to become less, in view of
the fact that the change toward low grade in the Lake Superior region is likely to be much more
rapid than it is on the large low-grade supplies of the SoutheJist. The same general arguments
will apply to the large Cuban reserves.
This increased use of lower-grade southern Appalachian ores is further favored by the
distribution of the population of the United States and the prevailing freight rates. In a
personal communication Judge E. H. Gary, chairman of the board of directors of the United
States Steel Corporation, says :
Under the existing freight rates for the cruder forms of steel products, if the freights from Birmingham be taken
to a series of points extending approximately east and west, so selected that the rate from Birmingham to each point
is the same as the rate from Chicago to that point or the rate from Pittsburg to that point, and a line be drawn connecting
these points, more than 30 per cent of the population of the United States lives in the territory south of the line so
formed, and the rail freight rates from Birmingham to all points in this territory are lower than the freight rates from
either Pittsburg or Chicago to these points.
If a line be located approximately north and south by selecting the points reached at equal freight rates from Chi-
cago and Pittsburg, about 32 per cent of the population of the United States lives in the territory west of this Pittsburg-
Chicago line and north of the Birmingham line, and about 38 per cent of the population of the United States lives east
of the Pittsburg-Chicago line and north of the Birmingham line.
The preeminence of the Lake Superior region is due to the riclmess of its ores, wliich offsets
relatively adverse conditions of distance and transjiortation. The lowering of the grade of
ore will undoubtedl}' for a time favor other regions more than the Lake Superior region, but it
would be rash to assume that the preeminence of the Lake Superior region will be lost. The
lower-grade su])plies of the Lake Su))erior region will not bo called into use until long after
those from other districts, and this will make it possible to maintain for a long time a liigher
grade of output in the Lake Superior region tlian in other ilistricts.
THE IRON ORES.
495
2. As a result of the increasing use of low-grade ores, tne distribution of blast furnaces
and steel plants may be changed. At present the higher transportation charges on ores to
lower lake ports as compared with upper lake ports are just about counterbalanced by increased
cost of fuel and flux for smelting at upper lake points as compared with lower lake points. As
the grade of ore is lowered this equilibrium will be disturbed.
3. As a result of decrease in reserves of low-phosphorus ores, the change from the acid
Bessemer process to the open-hearth process of steel making will continue. The amount of
high-grade Bessemer ore now in sight is scanty. Attention should be called, however, to the
fact that the low-grade ores which may be drawn upon in the future are not necessarily high in
phosphorus. In fact, the ratio of phosphorus to iron remains substantially the same whether
the ore is lean or rich, the difference between grades of ore being mainly in the percentage of
silica present. Lowering of grade may call into use new methods of smelting iron.
4. The. lowering of the grade of the ore may favor combination of capital in the mining
industry if such combination will make possible additional economies and the use of a wider
range of ores.
COMPARISON WITH PRINCIPAL FOREIGN ORES.
The large deposits of low-grade limonite in Cuba have already been mentioned. These
will doubtless be largely developed for use of the iron industry along the east coast of the
United States. The local ore supplies of England and Germany are of low grade. Both
countries import high-grade ores for mixture, partly hematites from Bilbao, Spain, and partly
magnetites from northern Sweden and Lapland. The high-grade Bilbao deposits are nearly
exhausted. Sweden limits the exports of its magnetite ores. Bessemer hematites of the
highest grade are known in enormous quantities within 300 miles of the coast in Minas Geraes,
Brazil. vSteps are now being taken to develop these deposits. They are likely to be an
important factor in the future in the British and German markets, and it is not improbable
that they may be used on the east coast of the United States, especially for mixture with the
Cuban ores.
TRANSPORTATION.
The transportation of tlie Lake Superior ores is one of the most important factors determin-
ing their availablity. They 'have been able to stand high transportation charges because of
their high grade.
MINE TO BOAT.
The following table shows the principal ore-carrying railways, distances, rates, and the
total tonnage hauled to December, 1 90S :
Ore-carrying railroads of the Lake Superior region.
Railroads.
Ranges supplying
traffic.
Principal range shipping
points.
Lake termini at which
ore docks are located.
Average
haul.
Approximate
average cost
per ton from
mine to dock.
Total iron
ores hauled
to December,
1908.
fVerrailion
Tower, Ely
{■Two Harbors, Minn. . .
Duluth Minn
Miles.
f 70-90
\ 66
SO
120
40
70
45
45
80
S3
03
12-15
$0.90-11.00
.80
.80
.80
.40
.25
.25
.40
.40
Tons.
} 75,153,936
79,118,051
'■40,268,854
Eveleth,Sparta.Biwabik.
Virginia, Hibbing, Cole-
raine.
Virginia, Hibbing, Nash-
wauk.
Hurley , Tronwood , Besse-
merj Wakefield.
Michigamme, Negaunee. .
DuluthjMissabe and Northern
Mesabi
Great Northern .
Mesabi
Sunerior Wis
fGogebic
Ashland Wis
Chicago and Northwestern
Marquette
Escanaba, Mich
Marquette, Mich
Menominee
Crystal Falls
Iron River
Iron Mountain, Norw'ay..
Crystal Falls, Amasa
6131.219,397
Duluth, South Shoreand* Atlantic.
Marquette
/Marquette
/Ishpeming, Negaunee
28,493,359
Lake Superior and Ishpeming
Negaunee, Ishpeming
Marquette, Mich { ^~-\f.
17,420.583
Wisconsin Central
Gogebic
Menominee
Bessemer, Hurley, Iron-
wood.
Crystal Falls, Iron Moun-
tain.
Ashland Wis
50
40-60
16.592,713
Chicago, Milwaukee and St. Paul.
Escanaba, Mich
a Since January 1, 1897.
ti Since ISSO. Includes ores other than iron ores between June 1, 1888, and July, 1903.
496
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Eighty-five per cent of the tonnage has been hauled .'iO miles or more and 15 per cent has
been hauled less than 50 miles. The average cost for hauhng the ore to the lake has been 60.42
cents a ton.
Four of the railways hauling the ore are controlled directly hy the companies owning or
mining the ore. The United States. Steel Corporation owns the Duluth, Missabe and Northern
and the Duluth and Iron Range railroads; J. J. Hill controls the Great Northern Railway; and
the Cleveland-Clill's Company the Lake Superior and Ishpcming Railway.
DOCKS.
The docks antl their capacities are as follows:
Record of ore docks on the Great Lakes.
[Revised to May 1, 1909. Table furnished by Oliver Iron Mining Co.]
Kaikoad.
Location.
Dock
No.
Num-
ber of
pock-
ets.
Storage
capacity.
Height
from
water to
center
hinge
hole.
Height
from
water to
deck of
dock.
Width
of dofk
from out-
side to
outside of
partition
posts.
Length
of
spouts.
Length
dock.
Angle
pockets
Capacity
per
pocket
to bot-
tom of
stringers.
Chicago and Northwestern . . .
Do
Escanaba, Mich
do
I
3
4
5
6
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
be
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
1
1
1
2
1
cl
184
226
250
202
320
234
234
Tons.
21,143
28, 792
34.923
29,310
69, 760
42,120
42, 120
Ft. in.
28 10
31 2
36 6
28 6
40
40
40
Ft. in.
48 G
52 8
59 2
53 3
70
70
70
Ft. in.
37
37
37
37
50 2
50 2
50 2
Ft. in.
21
27
30
21 8
30
30
30
Feet.
1,104
1,356
1.500
1.212
1,920
1,404
1,404
0 ,
39 30
45
43
40
45
45
45
Cubic/eet.
1,918
1,969
Do
do
2.191
Do
do
2,8.?2
Do
... .do
4.114
Do
Ashland. Wis
3,915
Do
do
3,915
Two Harbors, Mum. . .
do
1.630
268, 170
Duluth and Iron Range
Do. .
202
208
170
108
168
148
40, -100
41.600
34, 000
36,960
35,450
43,246
35 5
33 5
40
37
39
40
39 6
57 6
66
62
66 9
73
49
49
49
49
49
53
27
27
27
29
30
32 4
iil.,38.S
1,280
1,054
1,042
1,050
920
38 42
38 42
43 32
38 42
43 32
45
3,006
3,006
Do...:
do
3.006
Do
do
3.270
Do
do
3,126
Do
do
4.272
Duluth, Minn .
1.0B4
231,656
Duluth, Missabe and North-
384
384
384
69,120
80.640
119,274
32
40 7
41 9J
57 6
67 J
72 6
49
59
57
27 9
27 9
30 IJ
2,336
2,304
2,304
45
45
45
2,363
ern.
Do
So
2.782
Do
. ..do
3,867
1.152
269.034
374
. 350
326
100,980
94.500
88.020
40
40
40
73
73
73
62 8
62 8
62 8
32 4
32 4
32 4
2.244
2,100
1.956
4S
45
45
4,972
Do
do
4.972
Do
.do
4.972
Marquette, Mich
. .do
1,050
200
200
400
283,500
Duluth, South Shore and At-
lantic.
Do .
28,000
50,000
27 9
40
47 3
70 10
36 8
51
21 1
32 4
1,200
1,236
39 45
45
1.839
3,848
do
78,000
LakeSuperiorand Ishpemlug.
WiSGonsui Central
200
314
36,000
48,356
30 9
40
54
66 2
50
36
27 7
27
1,232
1.908
38 40
50 45
2.713
Ashland, Wis
2.435
Escanaba, Mich
do ■
Chicago, Milwaukee and St.
Paifl.
Do
240
240
50,400
63,500
40 2i
40 Hi
66 6
69 2
52
54
120 27
120 29
30 4i
1,500
1,500
45
45
2,900
3.150
Michipicoten, Ontario.
Key Harbor, Ontario. .
480
113,900
Algoiiia Central and Hudson
12
20
34
43 4
61 9
■ 25
28
22 6
30
311t
240
44
Bay.
2,000
o312 feet single pockets: 1.070 feet double pockets.
t> Steel superstructure on concrete.
c Pockets ailed by belt conveyor from stock pile trestle 30 feet high.
The cost of unloading from train to dock and from dock to boat aggregates 4 cents a ton.
Most of the structures up to the present time have been made of wood and are so inilammable
as to require almost prohibitory insurance rates, are easily choked in cold weather by the
freezing of the water in the ore, and are easih^ lied up by strikes. Tlic destruction or tying up
of a dock is a most serious setback to the iron-ore industiy and one which can be less easily
(. S. GEOLOGICAL SUfivE
O^JOGt'sPH LI' fl_ 1
A ORE DOCKS AT TWO HARBORS, MINN.
See page 497.
Jl EXCAVATIONS AT STEVENSON, MINN.
See page 497,
THE IRON ORES. 497
avoided and less quickly remedied than any other of the misfortunes affecting the industry.
Steel is used in new docks at Two Harbors, Minn. (PI. XLI, A), and this may be the beginning
of a revolution in dock building. The docks have undergone little stractural modification since
they were first used in the Lake Superior region. There "is still room for mechanical improve-
ment to make the movement of ore more certain and continuous between the train and the boat.
BOATS.
The ore is carried on the Great Lakes by a fleet of vessels numbering 660 in 1907. Of the
total tonnage which has gone dowm the Great Lakes much the largest percentage has gone to
Cleveland and a small percentage to Chicago. The proportion going to Chicago is constantly
increasing. The following table shows tonnage and rates from upper Lake ports in 1907:
Quantity of ore shipped from upper Lake ports in 1907, with rates per ton.
ERRATUM.
The rate stated on page 497, in the last sentence under the heading
"Dock to furnace," is incorrect. In 1910 the rate per ton from Lake Erie
docks to the Youngstown district was 64 cents, to Pittsburgh $1.04, and
to Philadelphia $1.53.
DOCK TO FURNACE.
Still another transportation charge to be added to the ore is that of unloading at the
Lake docks and short rail transportation to lower Lake furnaces. From Conneaut and
Ashtabula to the furnaces the distance is 50 miles and the charge 50 cents a ton.
TOTAL COST OF TRANSPORTATION.
The average cost of transporting Lake Superior ores to the furnaces during 1907 was
$2.14 a ton. When it is remembered that approximately three-fourths of the transijortation
is done by companies controlling the ore and that this transportation charge contains a con-
siderable profit for the mining companies, the real cost of carrying ore to the furnaces is seen
to be considerably lower.
Although the cost of transportation for the ore has been high, on the other hand the
furnaces have been located fairly close to the distributing centers for finished materials, so
that transportation of the finished material has been correspondingly less. As the center
of population has moved westward, the smelting in the vicinity of Chicago has become propor-
tionally more important and the cost of transportation of the ore proportionally less.
METHODS OF MINING.
It is the purpose here mere.ly to mention some of the most elementary features of the
mining methods used in the Lake Superior region. The ores in general are taken from the
ground by open-pit and underground methods or some combination of them. By far the larger
number of mines are underground mines. Most of the open-pit mines (see Pis. XI, p. ISO; XLI,
B) are in the Mesabi district, where, in 1908, 63.7 per cent of the ore was so produced. The pro-
duction of the Mesabi open-pit mines is so large that, notwithstanding their small number as com-
pared with the total number of mines in the region, they produced, in 1908, 42 per cent of the
47517°— VOL 52—11 32 •
THE IRON ORES.
497
avoided and less quickly remedied than any other of the misfortunes affecting the industry.
Steel is used in new docks at Two Harbors, Minn. (PI. XLI, A), and this may be the beginning
of a revolution in dock building. The docks have undergone little stnictural modification since
they were first used in the Lake Superior region. There is still room for mechanical improve-
ment to make the movement of ore more certain and continuous between the train and the boat.
BOATS.
The ore is carried on the Great Lakes by a fleet of vessels numbering 660 in 1907. Of the
total tonnage which has gone down the Great Lakes much the largest percentage has gone to
Cleveland and a small percentage to Chicago. The proportion going to Chicago is constantly
increasing. The following table shows tonnage and rates from upper Lake ports in 1907:
Quantity of ore shipped from upper Lake ports in 1907, with rates per ton.
Port.
Shipped in
1907.
Percent-
age of
total.
Rate per
ton to
lower
lakes.
Rate
times
peroent-
age
carried.
Escanaba
Tms.
5,7(3,988
3,013,826
3,437,672
8,188.906
7,440,386
13.445,977
13.95
7.30
8.43
19.79
18.00
32.00
SO. 60
.70
.75
.75
.75
.75
837
511
Marquette
Ashland
1,485
Superior
Duluth
2,400
41,288.755
99.47
7.216
72.16
The average cost per ton of transporting all the ore shipped in 1907 from the upper to the
lower Lake ports was 72.16 cents.
DOCK TO FURNACE.
Still another transportation charge to be added to the ore is that of unloading at the
Lake docks and short rail transportation to lower Lake furnaces. From Conneaut and
Ashtabula to the furnaces the distance is 50 miles and the charge 50 cents a ton.
TOTAL COST OF TRANSPORTATION.
The average cost of transporting Lake Superior ores to the furnaces during 1907 was
$2.14 a ton. Wfien it is remembered that approximately three-fourths of the transportation
is dcfne by companies controlling the ore and that this transportation charge contains a con-
siderable profit for th^ mining companies, the real cost of carrying ore to the furnaces is seen
to be considerably lower.
Although the cost of transportation for the ore has been high, on the other hand the
furnaces have been located fairly close to the distributing centers for finished materials, so
that transportation of the finished material has been correspondingly less. As the center
of population has moved westward, the smelting in the vicinity of Chicago has become propor-
tionally more important and the cost of transportation of the ore proportionally less.
METHODS OF MINING.
It is the purpose here merefy to mention some of the most elementary features of the
mining methods used in the Lake Superior region. The ores in general are taken from the
ground by open-pit and underground methods or some combination of them. By far the larger
number of mines are underground mines. Most of the open-pit mines (see Pis. XI, p. 180; XLI,
B) are in the Mesabi district, where, in 1908, 63.7 per cent of the ore was so produced. The pro-
duction of the Mesabi open-pit mines is so large that, notwithstanding their small number as com-
pared -with the total number of mines in the region, they produced, in 1908, 42 per cent of the
47517°— VOL 52—11 32 •
498 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTPERIOR REGION.
entire Lake Superior shipments. Stripping operations in the Mesabi district, taking into
account the removal of ore, are far more extensive than the work conducted at the Panama
Canal, the total material removed during 1909 in the Mesabi district being 49,750,000 cubic
yards as compared with 35,100,000 cubic yards at the Panama Canal."
The underground metliods have in common the general use of gravity in milling the ore to
lower levels fi'om which it may be trammed to the shaft and then hoisted to the surface.
The ores are taken out by square-set rooms running up from sublevels, or by top and side slicing
downward from the upper parts of the deposits, or by milling through untimbered chutes to
levels below after the surface material has been taken from the top. The cost of this work
has ranged from 40 cents to $1.60 a ton, or even higher. An average figure would be perhaps
$] a ton.
The essential feature of open-pit mining is the removal of the surface material and the
transfer of the ore directly to railway cars wthout the intermediate use of the tram or shaft,
and without the loss due to leaving pillars. The thickness of drift removed ranges up to
100 feet or more. The general method of work is much more scientific than would at first
appear, for it is not a matter of shoveling ore at random onto cars. The character and physical
conditions of the deposits are determined by drilling, and the steam-shovel cuts and tracks are
distributed so as to reach the desired grades of ore by handling the least possible amount of
waste. The possible grades which the mine may produce are ascertained, and when a certain
grade is desired by the market the greatest care is taken to extract this grade from the ore
body without leaving undesirable ores which must be later moved at a loss. It would be
obviously undesirable to take out a high-grade ore and leave a low-grade ore adjacent which
could not be sold because of its low grade when by mixing a high and low grade it would be
possible to get a medium gi'ade which could be sold. Extreme care is taken to match the
different grades in such a manner as to leave them accessible at proper times. The prob-
lem is primarily an engineering problem and is worked out by engmeers from most careful
measurements and calculations. "Wlien a request for a certain grade of ore comes to an open-
pit mine, orders are sent out to load so many cars from a certain cut and so many cars from
another cut, or to make a steam-shovel cut in a certain position; and it is kno'mi in advance
that the analysis of the ore thus ordered mil run very close to that required. The grading
of the ore is becoming closer every year. In the utilization of expert engineering help the
open-pit mines are fully as far advanced as any other form of mining.
In connection with grading the ore accurate analytical chemical work on a very large
scale is necessary. The work of sampling and analyzing the ores, both at the mines and at
the works, has been developed to a remarkable degree of accuracy. An illustration of tliis is
shown by the following pairs of analyses, representing the total average of 21,030,909 tons of
ore shipped by the Oliver Iron Mining Company from the Lake Superior region in 1909. The
average from mine analyses was iron 59.19, phosphorus 0.068^ moisture 12.22, silica 6.38; and
the average of the same ore as analyzed at the smelting plants was iron 59.04, phosphorus
0.068, moisture 12.33, silica 6.66. This is an exceedingly close check on perhaps the largest
piece of quantitative chemical work recorded.
The cost of open-pit work depends primarily on the amount of overburden to be removed
and the ratio of tliis to the size of the ore body. The average cost of loading on the car may
be only 4 or 5 cents a ton. The average cost of stripping, however, to uncover a ton of ore
may run from 20 to 30 cents. It is obvious that the figure would be small where the drift is
thin or where the amount uncovered is large in proportion to the thickness of the cover, so
that the cost of surface removal may be charged against a large number of tons. In general
the cost of steam-shovel mining has probably averaged less than 30 cents a ton.
With this great difference in cost in favor of the open-pit method of mining, the question
may naturally be asked why any of the Lake Superior ores are mined by underground methods.
For many of the deposits the answer is obvious. Their larger dimensions are vertical rather
aMin. and Sci. Press, vol. 101, 1910, p. 769.
THE IRON ORES. 499
than horizontal, requiring hoisting apparatus to get them to the surface. But even in the
Mesabi district 37 per cent of the ores are mined by underground methods and for such mines
the reason is perhaps not so obvious. It may be that the drift is too thick; that the topog-
raphy does not afford a sufficiently gentle slope for the approach of the track; that adjacent
land for a proper approach is owned by others; that the deposit may have a considerable amount
of low-grade material on top which must be moved before the material of better grade can be
obtained. It may be that the company has insufficient financial resources to make the large
initial expenditure necessary for the open-pit method before ore is mined or sold, or it may be
that the deposit is not sufficiently large in proportion to the expense of preparing it for the
open-cut method to warrant piHng up this great advance charge against the ore deposit.
It may be noted that the percentage of ore uncovered by open-pit methods is being rapidly
increased and that conditions which a few years ago were regarded as insuperable obstacles to
open-pit handling are now easily managed. It may be pointed out further that tliis change
in methods has accompanied the combination of mining capital, strong concerns being able to
do what the weaker concerns could not attempt.
RATES OF ROYALTY AND VALUE OF ORE IN THE GROUND.
The ores of the Lake Superior region are leased at royalties ranging from 10 cents to .fl..35
a ton. The average for the region is somewhere between 30 and 50 cents a ton. The liigher
figures appear in the later leases. The Mesabi range has the highest general average of royal-
ties. Here the Oliver Iron Mining Company pays the J. J. Hill ore interests a royalty of 85
cents a ton on a muiimum of 750,000 tons for 1907; this minimum to be increased by 750,000
tons annually until it reaches 8,250,000 tons a year, after which it remains constant, the royalty
to increase 3.4 cents a ton per year for ore carrying over 59 per cent in iron.
The royalty rate practically measures the value of the ore in the ground to the fee oWTier.
The fee owner demands on an average as high a price as the leaseholder can afford to pay for
the ore. On tliis basis the value of the ore in the ground is between 10 cents and $1 a ton.
The value is liigh in proportion as grade is liigh and costs of mining and transportation are low.
The Minnesota State Tax Commission has adopted an excellent classification of ore reserves,
based on compulsory returns from the mining companies, and has valued the ores for purposes
of taxation at 8 to 33 cents a ton, this valuation being 40 per cent of what is regarded as the
real value. The tax-commission figures would therefore indicate that the value of the ore in
the ground is from 20 to 75 cents a ton in Minnesota.
The present cash value of a ton of ore is obviously less than the value which will ulti-
mately be reafized from royalty after a period of years. If it be assumed, for instance, that
the ore must lie in the ground 15 years before the royalty is received, its present cash value
would be roughly 42 per cent of its ultimate royalty value.
ORIGIN OF THE ORES OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR PRE-CAMBRIAN SEDIMENTARY
IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
OUTLINE OF DISCUSSION.
Under the above heading are included all the productive pre-Cambrian ore deposits of the
Lake Superior region. It is proposed to sliow in the following discussion —
That these iron ores are altered parts of chemically deposited sedimentary fonnations,
originally consisting mainly of cherty iron carbonate and greenahte.
That a few of the iron-ore deposits represent originally rich layers of iron formation, in
which secondary concentration has made only minor changes.
That in by far the greater number of deposits, mcluding all the larger deposits, the second-
ary concentration has been the essential means of enrichhig iron-formation layers to iron ores.
That the conditions of sedimentation of the iron formation may be roughly outlined.
500 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPEKIOK REGION.
That tlic weatlicring and erosion of bed-rock surfaces of average composition would be
iniido()uate as a source of tlic materials of tlie iron-bearini; sedinipnts, and lliat the materials
fortliose formations have been derived largel}' from basic igneous rocks.
That some parts of the sedimentation accompanied or immediately followed the several
introductions of jjre-Cambrian l)asic igneous rocks into the outei- zone of the earth and another
part came under ordinary weathering concUtions later than tlie extrusions of the parent basic
igneous rocks.
That the chemistry of deposition of the iron-bearing fomiations under such conditions
may be approximated and that original jjhases of the sedimentary iron-bearing formations
may be synthesized in the laboratory.
That the subsequent oxidation of the iron-bearing formations, the transfer of iron salts,
and the leaching of sihca by agents carried in the meteoric waters have secondarily concen-
trated the ores and developed all but an insignificant portion of the ore deposits now mined.
That tliis second concentration has been localized by a considerable variety of structural
and topographic conditions.
That in some places before and in other places after concentration the iron-bearing
formations have been extensively modified by mechanical deformation or by igneous intrusions,
with contact effects such as to prevent the further concentration of ore deposits.
That the sequence of events developing the present features of the ore deposits may be
outlmed for each district and for the region as a whole.
That the development of the ores in general represents a partial metamorphic cycle.
THE IRON ORES ARE CHIEFLY ALTERED PARTS OF SEDIMENTARY ROCKS.
The iron-bearmg formations are bedded and locally cross-bedded. The Iluronian iron-
bearing formations are conformable to other sedimentary formations — quartzite, conglomerate,
slate, and limestone — and are not diiTerent from those of the Keewatin, which are associated
with but little fragmental sediment. They contain recognizable sedimentary material, such as
iron carbonate, greenalite, shale, sand, and conglomerate. We may anticipate our discussion
of the secondary alterations of the ores by stating that the original constituents of the iron-
bearing formations were domuiantly cherty iron carbonate and iron silicate (greenalite), with
minor amounts of hematite and magnetite and with varyuig amounts of the constituents of the
mechanical sediments — mud, sand, and gravel. In tracing the development of the iron-bearing
formations we must therefore inquire principally into the derivation of the cherty iron carbonate
and greenalite. These two substances are nonclastic, though locally some clastic material
appears in them; as will be shown later, they are chemical sediments.
The sedimentary nature of the iron-bearing formations scarcely needs more elaborate
proof. It is so obvious in the field that it has been doubted by only three geologic observers.
Whitney, Wadsworth, Winchell, and Hille have held these formations to be of surface igneous
origin (see pp. 569-570), but as these views are not now regarded seriously by most men who
have studied the subject, and as they liave been abandoned b\' Wadsworth, it will be unnec-
essary here to marshal evidence against them.
CONDITIONS OF SEDIMENTATION.
IRON-BEAKING FORMATIONS MAINLY CHEMICAL SEDIMENTS.
The iron-bearing formations are regarded mainly as chemical sedipients (1) because they
consisted originall\' of iron carbonate and ferrous silicate and possibly some iron oxide, similar
to substances known elsewhere to be tieposited as chemical sediments; (2) because they may
be synthesized in the laboratory by the simple chemical reagents which were probably ])resent
where the iron-bearing rocks were formed; and (3) because they usually lack fragmental ])ar-
tides. To a minor extent they are fragmental sediments derived from the erosion of earlier
iron-bearing ami other formations.
THE IRON ORES. 501
ORDER OF DEPOSITION OF THE IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS.
The greater mass of the Keewatin iron-bearing rocks, as exhibited in the Vermihon dis-
trict, lies above the Keewatin basalts and porphyries and is infolded with them. Another part
is interbedded with the basaltic flows. This general association is believed to hokl as a rule
for the Keewatin of the pre-Cambrian shield of North America. The Keewatin iron-bearing
formations are in beds of limited and irregular extent and thickness. It is concluded that
the dej)osition of a few feet of iron-bearing sediments directly in shallow depressions bottomed
by basalt was followed by the superposition of another lava flow, and this in turn by more iron-
bearing sediments, and so on. Later, when the outflow of lava practically ceased, the main
mass of the iron-bearing formation was deposited. Locally a little fragmental material went
down immediately upon the basalt basements before iron deposition began.
The deposition of the middle Huronian, containing the iron-bearing Negaunee formation
of Michigan, began with a coarse conglomerate and sandstone (Ajibik cpiartzite), changing
somewhat gradually into a mud (Siamo slate), and this in turn into a chemically deposited iron-
bearing formation (Negaunee). In the Cascade or Palmer portion of the Marquette range
fragmental quartz sand and ripple marks are conspicuous in the iron-bearing formation. South,
of the Marquette district the fragmental beds untlerlying the Negaunee formation are thin or
lacking. In certain districts the iron formation is replaced over large areas by basic volcanic
rocks (Clarksburg and Hemlock formations and perhaps others unknown). In general, then,
during middle Huronian time local sedimentation of sand and clay was followed by more
widespread deposition of chemical iron-bearing sediments lacking fragmental material and by
simultaneous igneous flows.
The iron-bearmg formations of the upper Huronian are the most widespread of the pre-
Cambrian. Quartz-sand deposition (Pokegama quartzite. Palms formation, and Goodrich
quartzite) was followed suddenly by the widespread deposition of chemical iron-bearing sedi-
ments (Biwabik, Ironwood, Bijiki, Vulcan, etc.), with very msignificant amounts of clastic
material, and this in turn gave way somewhat gradually to the deposition of mud of probable
delta origin (see pp. 612-614) in masses so thick that the thin iron-bearing formations and
quartzites previously deposited may be regarded as forming the lower selvage of a mud forma-
tion. Thin slate layers and a few quartzite layers are interbedded with the upper Huronian
iron-bearmg formations, especially in their upper portions, and the formations locally show a
tendency to be replaced along the strike by slate, as in the Mesabi, Gogebic, and Menommee
districts. In the Menominee district slate divides the iron-bearing formation, and in addition
there are considerable quantities of fragmental quartz sand, iron oxide, and ferruginous slate
near the base of the iron-bearing formation.
In the Crystal Falls, Florence, Iron River, and Cuyuna districts the ore is in siderite lenses in
the upper Huronian slate, and the basal fragmental quartzite has been only locally recognized.
These occurrences are apparently farther from the base of the formation than those in the Mesabi,
Gogebic, Felch Mountain, and Menominee districts, where quartz sand, iron-bearing formation,
and slate were successively deposited as distinct formations.
On the south side of Lake Superior, in the western Marquette, eastern Gogebic, and north-
western Menominee districts the deposition of the upper Huronian iron-bearing formations was
interrupted by the contemporaneous extrusion of great masses of submarine ellipsoidal basalts.
These extrusions may have been more extensive than now appears, because evidence of them may
be buried or may have been removed by erosion.
ARE THE IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS TERRESTRIAL OR SUBAQUEOUS SEDIMENTS?
It is beUeved that the iron-bearing formations are subaqueous for the following reasons:
1 . They were originally ferrous compounds in major part. Terrestrial sedimentation usually
produces ferric oxides — hematite or limonite and laterite, except in bogs — and reasons are
advanced elsewhere to show that only a part of the Lake Superior iron-bearing formations may
be so developed.
502 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
2. Tlio middlo and upper Iluroniau ir<)ii-l)Paring formations arc parts of sedimentary groups
containing quartzites and slates of probable subaqueous origin. The slates are essentially delta
dojiosits.
3. All the iron-l)('ariag formations are associated with basalts having conspicuous ellipsoidal
structures, which can be best explained as developed by flowing out under water. They contrast
in this regard with tiio basic lavas of the Keweenawan series.
4. Between the underlying basalts, which are probably subaqueous extrusions, and tlie
iron-bearing formations in. the Keewatin series neither weathering nor erosion has taken place
except very locallj'. The two are conformable.
BOG AND LAGOON ORIGIN OF PART OF THE IRON-BEARING ROCKS.
The iron-bearing members of the Crystal Falls, Iron River, and Cuyuna (Ustricts are asso-
ciated with slates of probable delta origin, which near the iron-bearing rocks arc so uniformly
black and graphitic and generally pyritiferous that black slate is usually regarded as a favorable
intlication in jirospecting for ore. Much black slate in the upper Huronian is not associated
with the iron-bearing formations, but ore is almost never found without the black slate. The
iron-bearing rocks in such associations with black slate are originally carbonate. Smaller
amounts of graphitic slates are found also in connection Avith the Keewatin iron-bearing forma-
tions. The thicker iron-bearing formations of the Mesabi, Gogebic, Marquette, and Menominee
districts are associated with black slates to a less degree.
It is suggested elsewhere that some of the slates most abundantly associated with the
iron-bearing formations may represent delta deposits, and that the carbon content of the iron
formations is probably to be explained as organic. So far as direct evidence is concerned, the
organic origin of the graphite and sulphides in the black slates, notwithstanding its probabilit}',
should not be regarded as proved, although there is no reason to doubt such an origin. Similar
associations elsewhere, as in the Carboniferous, have been shown to be truly of organic origin.
On the other hand, in the Lake Superior black slates, as in all other Lake Superior pre-Cambrian
formations, no organic forms have been found.
These facts raise the question whether the carbon of the slates may not have been effective in
the original deposition of the iron-bearing formations, as bog or lagoon deposits, in the manner
of Carboniferous and Cretaceous carbonates — that is, by the progressive burial of ferric oxide
with organic material, resulting in the reduction of the oxide and the formation of iron carbonate.
The way in which reducing organic substances aids in dissolving and transporting iron salts is
discussed on pages 519-520.
This is probably the origin of the discontinuous carbonate lenses in the carbonaceous slates of
probable delta origin in the upper Huronian, but difficulties appear when we attempt to exj)lain
in the same waj' the main, tliick, continuous masses of iron-bearing formation of the Keewatin,
middle Huronian, and upper Huronian.
HYPOTHESIS OF BOG AND LAGOON ORIGIN NOT APPLICABLE TO THE MAIN MASSES OF THE
IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS.
The main masses of the iron-bearing sediments are not closely associated with carbonaceous
slates; they are not characteristically discontinuous or lens-shaped, but are extensive and tliick;
they rest with sharp contacts on quartzite, conglomerate, or basalt. The Lake Superior iron-
bearing formations also carry more chert than deposits of known bog origin of the carbonate type.
The bog theory of origin involves the assumption that the Lake Superior region may have
been, during each of the iron-depositing periods, covered by great bogs or lagoons in wliich vege-
table matter could grow at or near the surface of the water over great areas, as in lagoons in
ai-lvance of barriers thrown up b}" the sea encroaclung over a gently sloping surface, or under
delta conditions. As a process necessarily confined to a shallow zone near the surface, its con-
tinuous operatiiju would involve continuous and uniform su])sidence at a rate connnensurate
with tlie deposition of the iron salts in t)rder to j)roduce the thicknesses now Icuown. iUthough
THE IRON ORES. 503
this theory is probably' applicable to some of the thin lenses of small extent associated with car-
bonaceous slates, it is not clear how this process could produce a thousand feet of iron-bearing
sediments sliowing uniformity of lithology and bedding and having so little extraneous material
through hundreds of square miles.
HYPOTHESIS OF GLAUCONITIC ORIGIN NOT APPLICABLE.
The greenaUto of the iron-bearing formations of the ]\Iesal)i and other districts is so similar to
glauconite as to suggest similarity in conditions of origin — that is, as filUngs of cavities in or
replacements of Foraminifera in deep-sea deposits. Dredgings have brought up glauconite from
deep and quiet waters but not from places of rapid sedimentation. No glauconite is laiown
with so little foreign material as the greenalite beds of the iron-bearing formations. The thick-
ness of the deep-sea glauconite beds is not known. In geologic sections the thickest known
deposit is 35 feet. The deposition of 1 ,000 feet of greenalite beds in the same manner as glaucon-
ite is known to be deposited would require a development of Foraminifera in the prc-Cambrian
not known in any other geologic period.
IKON-BEARING SEDIMENTS NOT LATERITE DEPOSITS.
In many parts of the world, especially in tropical climates, there are bedded iron ores of the
laterite type, presumed to develop from the katamorphism of basalt or other basic igneous rock
in place. They are characteristically associated with bauxite, clay (lithomarge or bole), usually
resting on it. Gradational tyj^es between lateritic iron ore and igneous rock have been described.
The Lake Superior iron beds associated with basalts can not in any considerable part be referred
to decomposition of the basalt in place after the manner of laterite deposits; the almost complete
absence of clay associated with the iron ores and the presence of abundant chert preclude this
explanation. Although lateritic decomposition of basalt surfaces may have been an ultimate
partial source of the iron ore, transportation and sorting have eliminated the clay, which would
be present if the iron beds resulted from lateritic decomposition. The principal impurity in the
Lake Superior iron is silica. Tliis could not have developed from decomposition of the basalt
in place.
In reading accounts of the origin of iron beds associated \vith basalts in different parts of the
world," one notes a tendency to ascribe a lateritic origin to the iron beds, even in places where
the iron lacks the associated clay to be expected from such a mode of origin. It would seem
necessarj' at least to introduce the factors of sorting and transportation to explain these ores.
Clay is as stable as iron oxide under surface conditions, and so far as quantitative evidence
goes, it remains with the residual iron oxide in a more or less uniform proportion throughout
a cycle of decomposition.
Finally the evidences of water sedimentation and physical separation of most of the iron
formations and basalts are not in accord with the hypothesis of lateritic origin.
IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS NOT CHARACTERISTIC TRANSPORTED DEPOSITS OF
ORDINARY EROSION CYCLES.
The oxidized carbonate lenses associated with the grapliitic slates (see p. 501) may be
regarded as one of the mcidental results of a normal erosion cycle. The fragmental bases of
the Vulcan formation in the Menominee district, of the Bijiki scliist in the Marquette district,
and of the Cretaceous rocks in the Mesabi distiict contain a great deal of detrital ferruginous
chert and iron ore derived from the breaking up of iron-bearing rocks that he unconformably
below, but all these phases of the iron-bearing rocks are of minor importance as compared
with the thick masses of iron-bearing formation derived from the alteration of iron carbonate
and greenalite rocks.
"Cole, G. A. J., The red zone in the basaltic series of the county ot Antrim: Geol. Mag., decade 5, vol. 5, No. 530, 1908, pp. 341-344.
504 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
L It has long been recognizctl tlmt tliere are dilliculties in tlie way of explaining the
thick and uniform masses of chemical sediments constituting the thicker iron-bearing forma-
tions, accompanied by so Uttle mechanical sediment, on the assumption that the kon-bearing
formations have been derived from the weathering of average hind areas. If the pecuHar
character of chemical sediments depends on depth of water and distance from the shore, then
the great thickness of the formations involves uniform subsidence over a great area to keep the
conditions uniform.
2. The iron-bearing formations may or may not be associated with ordinarj' clastic sedi-
ments. In the Keewatin they usually are not. The middle Huronian consists, from the base
up, of quartzite, slate, and iron-bearing formation. The upper Iluronian where best exposed
consists of quartzite, iron-bearing formation, and slate. The association of the Keewatin iron-
bearing formations with extrusive basalts and not with other sediments shows that the iron
ores of the Keewatin, at least, are not the result of dejjosition in any ordinarj^ cycle of erosion
and deposition, and tliis strongly suggests that the variety of succession in the sedimentary
iron-bearing formations of the Iluronian is also not due to ordinaiy cycles of erosion and depo-
sition, and that the deposition of the iron-bearing formations probably was not uniformly
related to sea transgression or recession or any other one phase of a topographic cycle.
The fact that in many places the sediments above and below the Huronian iron-bearing
formations are different is the only feature which suggests that the deposition of iron-bearing
sediment is a part of a cycle of erosion and deposition, though it is conceivable that volcanism
itself would cause this change, either by efl'ecting changes of levels of land and water or by
introducing new rocks for erosion to work upon.
Until investigation has disclosed all the different combinations of factors wliich may pro-
duce a particular order of sedimentation, it is unsafe to be too positive in concluding that the
varied relations of the iron-bearing formations to the order of sedimentation indicate their
deposition under exceptional conditions. The conditions producing alternations of iron-bearing
sediment with other sediments in varying succession may not be necessarily difi'erent from
those favoring the deposition of limestone with a variety of associations — for instance, the
Paleozoic Hmestones, which in some places overlie sand and in others mud and are in turn fol-
lowed by sand or mud. But the lack of uniformity in the relations of the iron-bearing forma-
tions above noted is taken to indicate a probability that conjunction of their deposition with a
certain phase of a topographic cycle is not an essential condition to their development.
3. Were the iron-bearing formations derived from the weathering of the older rocks against
which they he, it would be diflicult to explain the complete absence of weathered material
between certain bands of Keewatin iron-bearing formations and the associated basalts, or of
erosion irregularities in the underlying surface.
4. The surface streams are only locally carrying iron in quantity at the present tune. All
available analyses of river waters show a lack of iron, with the exception of minute quantities
in Ottawa and St. Lawrence rivers. Many of the springs carry iron, but this is conspicuously
deposited at the point of escape and does not join the run-off. These facts are correlated with
known observations of the maimer of weathering of rocks. The ferrous iron becomes oxidized
and, next to alumina, is the most stable of all substances under surface conditions. In fact,
so little iron is lost by weathering that Merrill, Watson, and others have used both iron and
alumina as a basis against wliich to measure the loss of other constituents.
5. If it is regai'dod as possible that the iron-bearing formations are derived from the weath-
ering of ordinary land surfaces, why should the ii-on-bearing formations not be reproduced on
the same scale in the Paleozoic rocks, which were deposited on pre-Cambrian rocks similar to
those beneath the iron-bearing formations ? The deposition of the Paleozoic rocks was preceded
by perhaps the longest period of weathering of which there is record in the Lake Superior coun-
try. In many parts of the United States Paleozoic and later sediments contain thin beds of
sedimentary iron-bearing formation, but these beds are at their maximum insignificant in thick-
ness as comiiared with those of the Lake Superior region.
THE IKON ORES. 505
6. A comparison of the composition of the iron-bearing series with the possible sources
from which they might be derived by ordinary weathering further shows that the iron is present
in higher ]:)ercentage in the iron-bearing formations than in the rocks from which they may
have been so derived.
The jaspers of the Keewatin series of the Vermilion district average between 28 and 38
per cent in iron, but the associated basalts average 0.56 per cent. The jaspers have little other
sedimentary material with them to be figured in this comparison. Therefore the jaspers pi'obably
derived their iron from some other source than the weathering of the adjacent basalts, or the
complementary fragmental detritus was washed away.
The middle Huronian, containing the iron-bearing Negaunee formation, has an average
iron content of 11.72 per cent, as indicated by the available figures of composition of the three
formations of the middle Huronian and their relative tliickness. Because of the unconformity
at the top there is a question as to what factor should be added for materials that have been
eroded, but there is no evidence that any large amount of material has been taken away, and as
part of the material which has been removed belonged to the iron-bearing formation, this
factor can not be assumed to cause much change in the figures given.
The composition of the rocks of the ancient land area from which the middle Huronian may
have been derived by weathering is not definitely known, but it may be supposed to be not far
from the average given by Clarke" for igneous and crystalhne rocks, in which the iron content
is 4.46 per cent. Were the shore made up of basic rocks such as the Kitchi schist or Mona schist
the iron content would be about 9 per cent. It is thus apparent that, whether we regard average
igneous rocks or basic rocks as representing the original land from which the middle Huronian
may have been derived by weathering, the sediments contain a considerable excess of ii'on not
accounted for.
The iroii content of the upper Huronian of the Mesabi and Gogebic districts ranges from
6 to 9 per cent, depending on the thickness of slate which is chosen for the calculation. The
smallest percentage is liigher than that of the average igneous rock that may be supposed to
represent the land area from which these sediments were derived. The highest is about equal
to the percentage of iron in the greenstones.
In general, then, if it is assumed that all of the iron of the ancient land areas was trans-
ferred and contributed to the iron-bearing formations that were being deposited in neighboring
submerged areas (which, as above shown, it was not), this would not be enough to account for
the iron in the iron-bearing rocks when the associated sediments are taken into account and
allowance made for complementary secUments deposited elsewhei'e.
The major part of the iron of the iron-bearing formations was originall}' deposited as a
chemical secUment from solution. In view of the fact that in weatheiing only a small propor-
tion of the iron present is observed to be carried off in solution, the rest remaining as insoluble
ferric oxide, it becomes even more apparent that the iron-bearing formations were not derived
by chemical solution and deposition of the materials of average land areas. A similar conclu-
sion is to be drawn from the silica content in the iron-bearing formations. ■
Sihca of course is derived abundantly from the weathering of rocks in cold solutions and is
precipitated principally in the form of chert in limestones. The part mechanicall}' carried is
deposited as c^uartz sand, differing in texture from the chert. The latter mode of derivation
is practically excluded for the iron-bearing formations of the Lake Superior region because they
contain only small amounts of fragmental quartz at a few localities and horizons. If we
attempt to ascribe the cherts of the iron-bearing formations to weathering, we ma}' look only
to the sihca carried in solution. To have produced the thick iron-bearing formations contain-
ing an average of about 70 per cent by volume of chert, the. solution of silica must have pro-
ceeded on an enormous scale, probably too large to be explained by ordinary weathering.
That some chert was so derived, just as some iron and some fragmental quartz were so derived,
is altogether likely, and it would be difficult to prove the contrary. The percentage of chert
in the iron- bearing groups described on page 461 ranges upward from 63 per cent in weight,
o Clarke, F. W., The data of geochemistry: Bull. U. S. Geol. Surrey No. 330, 1908, p. 26.
506 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
wliile Clarke's average of igneous and crystalline rocks, which jpoight represent the composition
of an average surface under weathering, is a little less than 62 per cent in silica and the basic
wreenstones contain less than 50 per cent in silica. Hence, even if all the siUca had been leached
(together witli the iron) from these rocks (which never happens), it would not j-icld a percent-
age of silica as large as that known in the iron-bearing groups. Organic agencies might
locahze precipitation of silica in certain areas, but not enough to account for existing pro-
portions over tlu^ entire region.
The calcium-magnesium content furnishes still another argument. In the average crj^stal-
line or igneous rocks or in the basic igneous rocks or in sediments derived from the igneous
rocks, calcium preponderates over magnesium, but in the iron-bearing formations the average
proportion of magnesium to calcium is over 5 to 1 .
It appears m general that the composition of the pre-Cambrian sedimentary groups con-
taining the iron-bearing formations (Uffers from that of the average crystalline rocks wliich
formed the shores at those periods in having a liigher content of iron and sUica and in having
a tlifTcrent calcium-magnesium ratio. It might be that the extensions of these iron-beaiing
sedimentary groups outside of the Lake Supeiior region would be of such different composition
as to brmg the average more nearly down to what would be expected from derivatives of the
crystallme rocks. Yet it is beUeved that the excess of certain constituents in the Lake Superior
sedimentary groups that carry the iron-bearing formations over those wliich seem to have been
probably available from ordinary weathering is not counterbalanced by corresponding defi-
ciencies elsewhere, for the reason that the sections on which these figures are based are taken
through a wide area in the Lake Superior region, and for the further reason that this peculiar
composition is repeated over this wide area in the rocks of three successive geologic epochs.
If the occurrence of iron-bearing formations in the Lake Superior region is simply a matter of
areal segregation,and concentration of the normal products of weathermg, it is verv remarkable
that this areal concentration should always have resulted in bringing these peculiar iron-
bearing phases in the same region. We conclude, therefore, that the excess of iron and silica
and the reversal of the calcium-magnesium ratio in the sedimentary groups carrying the iron-
bearing formations, as compared with the average crystalline rocks from wliich they might
have been derived by erosion, is probably to be regarded as evidence that some unusual source
of material was available.
7. It appears, then, from the foregoing paragraphs that there are objections to regarding
the iron-bearing formations entirely as sediments produced by weathering of the rocks that
were most abundant in the adjacent lands. It is not meant to imply that ordinary erosion
and katamorpliic processes which are known to segregate iron-bearing sediments were set
aside in this region. Indeed, as already indicated, there is definite evidence that some of the
kon-beaiing sediments were so produced. But it seems that these processes are not adequate
to explain the facts. In character and size the iron-bearing formations are unique as chemical
sediments and differ from other chemical sediments derived by normal weathering processes.
Some unuSual and additional factor seems to be required to explam them. Such a factor is
discussed under the following headings.
ASSOCIATION OF IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS WITH CONTEMPORANEOUS ERUPTIVE
ROCKS.
•
All the Lake Superior iron-bearing formations are more or less closely related in time and
place to basalt Hows, usually rich in iron at j)resent and giving evidence of having exudetl
iron salts at the time of their consolidation. The iron-bearkig formations of the Keewatin
series have such relations to the associated ellipsoidal basalts as to point to their do]iositionin
the short periods separating the successive flows of basalt or inimediatel}- followmg (ho prui-
cipal extnisions. Detailed evidence of this has been noted in a number of places and especially
in the Vermilion distiict. (See pp. 126-127.) The Negaunee fornialion of the middle Iluronian
is associated with abundant contemporaneous igneous activity, iiroducing ellipsoidal basalts of
submarine origin and other extrusive rocks similar to those in the Keewatin series in many
THE IRON ORES. 507
places in the Marquette district, especially at the west end (the volcanic Clarksburg forma-
tion), and in the Crystal Falls and adjacent districts (the Hemlock formation). The iron-
bearing formations of the upper Huronian (Animikie grou]^) are associated with igneous activity
similar to that of the preceding periods in the Marquette district (the Clarksburg formation),
in the Gogebic district (the volcanic rocks of the east and west ends of the district) , and in the
Menominee, Florence, and Iron River districts. The iron-beaiing formation of the Animikie
group on the north shore of Lake Superior is not associated with basic greenstones of known
contemporaneous development, but as shown on pages 213-214 there is little doubt of its direct
contmuity with the rocks of the Cuyuna district and the upper Huronian of the south shore,
wliich are associated with basic volcanic rocks.
Especially remarkable are the evidences of the close association of iron-bearing sediments
and basaltic flows in the upper Huronian of Michigan. Here ellipsoidal basalt, basalt tuffs,
and ashes are so intermuigled with the iron-beariiig formation and stained by secondary alter-
ation that there is difficulty in discriminating them. Recent work has shown the existence of
more of the igneous rocks than had before been suspected. Drill holes in tlie Iron River and
Amasa areas of Michigan pass through igneous beds from 2 to 50 feet thick in the midst of the
iron-bearing formation. In these places the eye can scarcely detect the break between the
grayish and greenish carbonate slates of the iron-bearmg sediments and the fine-grained greenish
basalts and tuffs. Under the microscope the surface of contact is seen to be an extremely irregular
one, the carbonate apparently irregularly replacmg part of the greenstone. This replacement
has not been accompanied by any oxidation. It is found in drill holes hundreds of feet beneath
the surface, apparently in an association determined at the time of the deposition of the iron-
bearing formation. In the Keewatin of the Vermilion district of Minnesota similar close asso-
ciation may be observed between the jaspers and the basalts. (See PI. XLVIII, p. 564.)
The significance of the apparent gradation of carbonate of iron and siUca and their altera-
tion products into the greenstone is not yet fuUy apparent. It can scarcely be doubted that
tliis relation was developed at the time of the deposition of the iron-bearing formation, prob-
ably soon after the extrusion of the igneoiis rocks. It is suspected that these phases represent
a transition between reactions associated with the hot igneous masses and the normal precipi-
tation of a sedimentary formation. Attempt has been made in the laboratory to reproduce
these remarkably close relations by some combination of igneous and sedimentaiy processes,
but thus far without successful results.
Probably of significance in connection with the derivation of the iron-bearing formations
is the fact that in many places acidic intrusive and extrusive rocks of the porphyry type closely
foUo^v extrusive basalts and are locally even more closely associated with the iron-bearing for-
mations than the basalts themselves. This relation is well illustrated in the Vermilion district,
where, in a series of mterbedded basalt flows, jaspers, and amygdaloidal porphyries, the igneous
rock immediately next to the jaspers is commonly porphyry as weU as basalt. (See fig. 13,
p. 123.) Similar conditions appear in the Woman River district of Ontario" and elsewhere.
It is suspected that this relation is more general than is yet known. (See p. 513.)
The amount of igneous material extruded is not measured by the areas of upper Huronian
volcanic rocks now exposed, for extensive extrusive rocks were undoubtedly present in parts
of the formation that have been removed by erosion and exist in parts not yet uncovered. It
is suggested in the chapter on the Keweenawan (Chapter XV) that the present shore of the Lake
Superior basin was the locus of the extrusion of the Keweenawan igneous rocks. If the basin
began to form in Animikie time, as is thought possible (see pp. 622-623), a siiaular suggestion,
for similar reasons, might be made for the Animikie group, in which case the north shore Ani-
mikie may really not be so distant from igneous rocks as now appears. The iron-bearing
formation of the Animikie group of the north shore is thus associated in time with igneous
extrusions, but may be somewhat distant in place.
a Allen, R. C, Iron formation of Woman Elver area; Eighteenth Ann. Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, pt. 1, 1909, pp. 254-262.
508 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The deposition of the lower Huronian was not accompanied by basic flows, and it does not
contain a well-developed iron-bearing formation. The Paleozoic of the Lake Superior region
lack.s basic igneous rocks and also lacks iron-bearing formations like those of the pre-Cambrian.
ASSOCIATION OF IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS AND ERUPTIVE ROCKS OUTSIDE OF THE
LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The derivation of the iron-bearing formations from the associated igneous rocks is sug-
gested by the close association of these rocks not only in the Lake Superior country but in
other ])arts of the world.
Practically all the numerous iron-beaiing sediments extending through the Height of
Land country of Canada, as far east as the Quebec boundary, are interbedded with basalt flows.
Most of these belts, in the writers' judgment, belong in the Keewatin.
On the east coast of Hudson Bay there are younger Algonkian rocks containing an iron-
beaiing formation, interbedded wdth fragmental sediments and elhpsoidal basalts. As Low "
had called attention to the similarity of these iron-bearing sediments to those of the upper
Huronian or Animikie of the Lake Superior region, the junior author visited them in 1909 and
found a veiy close similarity, even to the possession of carbonate and greenalite phases. Freedom
from vegetation and precipitous shores afford fine exposures for study. Fragmental sediments
of the type- now bemg formed along the shores are interbedded with extiiisions of elhpsoidal
basalt which give evidence by their textures and associations of having been extruded along
tidal flats, and by their high content of jasper and magnetite of having been rich in iron
salts at the time of their extrusion. Immediately following the basalt comes the iron-bearing
formation, closely associated with volcanic muds. It requires no preconceived hypothesis to
lead the observer to the view that the extrusion of the igneous rocks was the variant in the
normal conditions of sedimentation necessary to produce the iron-bearing formations. The
story is so clear that it is possible to outhne the probable conditions of sedimentation in some
detail."
Geikie "^ remarks concerning lower Carboniferous basalts of the Fife coast:
These lavas are thin sheets, often not more than 15 or 20 feet in thickness, and they, as well as the associated tuffs
are intercalated among shallow-water deposits, such as cyprid shales and limestones, coal seams with fire clays, thin
sandstones, and ironstones. Some of the basalts have caught up portions of the mud on the sea bottom, but in others
the muddy, sandy, or ashy sediment of the next deposit has fallen into the interspaces between the pillows.
He also says'* concerning the basaltic lavas of County Tyrone, Ireland:
These greenish lavas are occasionally interleaved with gray flinty mudstones, cherts, and red jaspers, which are
more particularly developed immediately above. In lithological character, and in their relation to the diabases, tliese
siliceous bands bear the closest resemblance to those of Arenig age in Scotland, but no recognizable Kadiolaria
have yet been detected in them.
Describing the Carboniferous volcanoes of the Isle of Man, Geikie e says :
Pauses in the succession of eruptions are marked by the intercalation of seams of limestone or groups of limestone,
shale, and black impure chert. Such interstratifications are sometimes curiously local and interrupted. They may
be observed to die out rapidly, thereby allowing the tuff above and below tliem to unite into one continuous
mass. They seem to have been accumulated in hollows of the tuff during somewhat prolonged inter\-als of volcanic
quiescence, and to have been suddenly brought to an end by a renewal of the eruptions. There are some four or five
such intercalated groups of calcareous strata in the thick series of tuffs, and we may regard them as marking the chief
pauses in the continuity or energy of the volcanic explosions.
Again, Geilde ^ states that in the Carboniferous volcanoes of Devonshire —
Bands of black chert and cherty shale are interpolated among the tuffs, which also contain here and there nodular
lumps of similar black impure earthy chert — an interesting association like that alluded to as occurring in the l"ar-
lK)niferous volcanic series of the Isle of Man, and like the occurrence of the radiohirian cherts with the Lower Silurian
volcanic series.
o Low, .V. p.. Report on an e>qiloration of the east coast of Hudson Bay from Cape Wolstcnholme to the south end of James Bay: .\nn. Kept.
Geol. Survey Canada, vol. 13, new stT., pi. L), l'ju;i, pp. 45—10.
<> I.cith, C. K., .\n .Mgonkitin liusin in Hudson Hay — a comparison with the Lake Superior basin: Econ. Geology, vol. 5, 1910, pp. 227-246.
c .\bstracts I'roc. Oeoi. Soc. London, session 19()T-S, London, 1908, p. 42.
d Geikie, j\jchil)ald, Ancient volcanoes of Great Britain, vol. 1, London, 1897, pp. 240-241.
<• Idem, vol. 2, 1897, p. 24.
/ Idem, vol. 2, 1897, p. 36.
THE IRON OKES. 509
The following section in Tertiary volcanoes of the Antrim Plateau of Ireland is described
by the same author:"
Upper basalt, compact and often columnar sheets.
Brown laminated tuff and volcanic clays.
Laminated brown impure earthy lignite, 2 feet 3 inches.
Brown and red variegated clays, tuffs, and sandy layers, with irregular seams of coarse conglomerate
composed of rounded and sul>angular fi'agments of rhyolite and ba.salt, 3 feet 4 inches.
Brown, red, and yellowish laminated tuffs, mudstones, and bole, with occasional layers of fine con-
glomerate (rhyolitic and basaltic), pisolitic iron-ore band, and plant beds, 8 feet 10 inches.
Lower basalt, amygdaloidal.
The pale and colored clays that occur in this marked sedimentary intercalation have doubtless been produced
by the decomposition of the volcanic rocks and the washing of their fine detritus by water. Possibly this decay may
have been in part the result of solfataric action. * * *
* * * The original area over which the iron ore and its accompanying tuffs and clays were laid down can hardly
have been less than 1,000 square miles. This extensive tract was evidently the site of a lake during the volcanic
period, formed by a sulisidence of the floor of the lower basalts. The salts of iron contained in solution in the water,
whether derived horn the decay of the surrounding lavas or from the discharges of chalybeate springs, were precipitated
as peroxide in pisolitic form, as similar ores are now being formed on lake bottoms in Sweden. For a long interval
quiet sedimentation went on in this lake, the only sign of volcanic energy during that time being the dust and stones
that were thrown out and fell over the water basin or were washed into it by rains from the cones of the lava slopes
around.
Concerning the Tertiary volcanoes of the plateau of Small Isles, Geikie* writes:
It is a noteworthy fact that the sedimentary intercalations among the Canna basalts generally end upward in
carbonaceous shales or coaly layers. The strong currents and overflows of water, which rolled and spread out the coarse
materials of the conglomerates, gave way to quieter conditions that allowed silt and mud to gather over the water
bottom, while leaves and other fragments of vegetation, blown or washed into these quiet reaches, were the last of
the suspended materials to sink to the bottom.
The Arenig eruptions in the Silurian of North Wales contain interesting sediments, described
by Geikie '^ as follows:
Many of the tuffs that are interstratified with black slates (? Lingula flags) at the foot of the long northern slope of
Cader Idris consist mainly of black-slate fragments like the slate underneath, with a variable proportion of gray volcanic
dust. * * *
One of the most interesting deposits of these interludes of quiescence is that of the pisolitic ironstone and its
accompanying strata on the north front of Cader Idris. A coarse pumiceous conglomerate with large slaglike blocks
of andesite and other rocks, seen near Llyn-y-Gadr, passes upward into a fine bluish grit and shale, among which lies
the bed of pisolitic (or rather oolitic) ironstone which is so widely diffused over North Wales. The finely oolitic
structure of this band is obviously original, but the substance was probalily deposited as carbonate of lime under quiet
conditions of precipitation. The presence of numerous small Lingidie in the rock shows that molluscan life flourished
on the spot at the time. The iron exists in the ore mainly as magnetite, the original calcite or aragonite having been
first replaced by carbonate of iron, which was subsequently broken up so as to leave a residue of minute cubes of
magnetite.
Radiolarian cherts are characteristically associated with sandstones and basalts, partly
ellipsoidal, at Point Bonita,'' Angel Island,^ and at many other points in the Coast Ranges of
California. In describing the eruptive rocks of Point Bonita, Ransome saj's: ^
Spheroidal basalt, apparently similar to that described, has been noted by the writer at Tiburon, Marin County
at Port Harford, San Luis Obispo County; and on the summit of the north peak of Mount Diablo. It is noteworthy
that in these widely separated occurrences the rock is always associated with the red jaspers, and with what is apparently
the San Francisco sandstone.
These cherts were called "phthanites" by Becker ff and regarded as due to secondary silici-
fication. Lawson '' and Ransome,^' on the other hand, regard them as original siliceous deposits
a Geikie, Arcliibald , Ancient volcanoes of Great Britain, vol. 2, 1897, pp. 204-205.
t Idem, vol. 2, 1897, p. 223.
c Idem, vol. 1, 1897, pp. 180-lSl.
dRansome, F. L., The eruptive rocks of Point Bonita: Bull. Dept. Geology, Univ. California, vol. 1, 1893, pp. 71-114.
e Ransome, F. L., The geology of Angel Island; Bull. Dept. Geology Univ. California, vol. 1, 1S94, pp. 193-240.
/ Ransome, F. L., The eruptive roclcs of Point Bonita: Bull. Dept. Geology Univ. California, vol. 1. 1893. pp. 109-110.
e Becker, G. F., Geology of the quicksilver deposits of the Pacific coast: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 13, 1SS8, pp. 10.5-108.
* Lawson. A. C, Sketch of the geology of the San Francisco peninsula: Fifteenth Ann. Kept. U. S. Geol. Survey, 1895, pp. 420-426.
< Ransome, F. L., The geology of Angel Island: Bull. Dept. Geology Univ. California, vol. 1, 1894, p. 200.
510 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
which are changed into red jaspers and glaucophanic jaspers here and there at igneous contacts.
These cherts locally pass into iron ore and are characteristically associated with njanganese
beds." The cherts are characterized by mbiute oval spots found in part to represent radio-
larian remains, but in part of unknown origin. Lawson'' discusses their origin as follows:
It thus seems to the writer that the bulk of the silica can not be proved to be the extremely altered d(5bris of
Radiolaria. The direct petrographical suggestion is that they are chemical precipitates. If now we accept this hj^poth-
esis, it becomes apparent that there are three possible sources for the silica so precipitated, \'iz, (1) siliceous springs
■in the bottom of the ocean, similar to those well known in volcanic regions; (2) radiolarian and other siliceous remains,
which may have become entirely dissolved in sea water; and (3) volcanic ejectamonta, which may have become
similarly dissolved. The last is the least probable, because we are not actually familiar with such a reaction as the
solution of volcanic glass by sea water. Our ignorance is, however, no proof that such solution may not take place
under special conditions. * * *
The hypothesis of the derivation of the silica from siliceous springs and its precipitation in the bed of the ocean
in local accumulations, in which radiolarian remains became embedded as they dropped to the bottom, seems, there-
fore, the most adequate to explain the facts, and there is nothing adverse to it so far as the writer is aware. The abun-
dance of the Radiolaria may be due to the favorable conditions involved in the excessive amount of silica locally present
in the sea, or simply to the favorable conditions for preservation afforded by this kind of rock. If the springs were
strong, the currents engendered might in some places have been sufficient to deflect sediment-laden counter-currents,
and this may serve to explain the general absence of clastic material in the chert.
The Pilot Knob deposits of Missouri are interbedded with porphyry flows, tuffs, and ashes,
suggesting close genetic relation between igneous rocks and sediments.
Illustrations could be multiplied, but enough have been cited to show that basalts, espe-
cially the ellipsoidal phases, are characteristically interbedded with more or less graphitic
slates, clays, cherts, jaspers, volcanic tuffs, iron ores, and in places sandstone. Practically all
the features of the association of basalt with sediments described for the above-mentioned
districts are to be seen in the Lake Superior region. The explanations of these associations
in other regions therefore become significant in the study of the origm of the Lake Superior ores.
In general there seems to be little doubt that some genetic relationship e-xists among
surface basalts, carbonaceous slates, cherts, and jaspers, to which attention has been called by
several writers worldng from different standpomts."^ They agree that most of the carbonaceous
materials are organic, that the deposition is largely subacjueous, and that some of the associated
iron is deposited partly through the agency of weathering assisted by organic means. Lawson
suggests that the cherts and jaspers may be the result of inorganic chemical deposition by hot
solutions. In the Lake Superior region the iron-bearing formations are much thicker and
they have certain phases, notably the greenalite or ferrous silicate phase, which are not common
elsewhere, all these features seeming to favor the hj-pothesis that the iron formations are in part
related to the more or less direct contribution of the iron-bearing materials by hot concentrated
solutions from the igneous roclis.
SIGNIFICANCE OF ELLIPSOIDAL STKUCTURE OF EBtTPTIVE ROCKS IN RELATION TO ORIGIN
OF THE ORES.
The basalts associated with the iron-bearing formations have so commonl}' the peculiar
ellipsoidal or pillow structure that one is led to assume that conditions favorable to the develop-
ment of the ellipsoidal structure may be also favorable to the deposition of the iron ore in this
district. Clements ** has described the structure in some detail for the Crj'stal Falls district,
and from comparison with occurrences elsewhere concludes it to have been probably a submarine
extrusive, similar to the aa lavas of Hawaii described by Button.'' Dah^ f reaches the same
a Lawson, A. C, op. cit., pp. 423-424.
b Idem, pp. 425-42C.
c Wo have received too late for discussion a paper on British pillow lavaa and the rocks associated with them, by nenrj- Dewey and J. S.
Fleet (Gcol. Mag., vol. 8. Dec. 5, 1911, pp. 202-209, 241-24S), emphasizing the genetic association of cherts and ellipsoidal iHisalts. .Vlbilization of
thefeldspars of the basalts is regarded as evidence of pneuraatolytic emanations, containhig soda and silica in solution and possibly other sub-
stances. The cherts are deposited by those emanations. This independent conclusion is remarkably in accord with the inferences drawn in this
monograph.
<l ricments, J. M.,The Crystal Falls iron-bearing district of Michigan: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 30, 1899, pp. 112-124.
tDutton, C. E., Hawaiian volcanoes: Fourth .\nn Rcpt. U. S. Oeol. Survey, 1884, pp. 95-90.
/ Daly. R. .\., Variolitic pillow lava from Newfoundland: .\in. Geologist, vol. 32, 1903, p. 77.
THE IRON ORES. 511
conclusion for the variolitic pillow lavas of Newfoundland. Later, from a personal studj- of
Hawaiian volcanoes, Dal}^" regards the ellipsoidal and aa lavas as different, though he is not
disposed to question the subaqueous origin of elli])soidal lavas. Geikie* repeatedly cites the
probable subaqueous origin of the ellipsoidal structure, based on his observations in Great
Britain and Ireland. Clement Reid " has recently concluded that the pillow lavas near Port
Isaac in t'ornwall are of submarme origin, and in the discussion of Reid's paper Geikie '' remarked
that all the examples of pillow lavas with which he was acquainted were undoubtedly true lavas
and belonged to submarine eruptions. Some of them, however, must have been poured out in
shallow water, as is particularly ob.servable in the case of the lower Carboniferous basalts of the
Fife coast. (See quotation on p. 508.)
Femier^ concludes that ellipsoidal and other structures in the traps of the Newark group
are evidence of flowage of the traps into lakes. He says:
When we came to examine the lava itself we saw that it carried in its own mass plain evidences of the structural
changes which were produced by the presence of the lakes and of the water-bearing strata beneath. Whereas beyond
the borders of the lakes the lava was of a close, firm texture and showed a condition of quiet and tranquillity during
the process of cooling and hardening, over the area of lake bottom there was evidenceof violent agitation having affected
it during the initial flows, and rapid cooling and the production of much glaesy material during succeeding flows, fol-
lowed still later by the crystallizing effects wrought by heated waters and the production of secondary minerals.
By others the ellipsoidal structure has been regarded as the result of rapid coolmg or rapid
flow developmg large blocks that have rolled one over another, a process which may have been
subaerial or subaciueous, or both. This is the explanation offered by Cole and Gregory.^ Ran-
some ^ concludes for the ellipsoidal structure in the basalt of Point Bonita, California, that one
sluggish outwelliiig of lava was piled upon another to form the whole mass of the flow, the
blocks or ellipsoids being incidental to the cooling and movement. He makes no reference to
submarine or subaqueous origin. Russell '' observes that the ellipsoidal structure found locally
in the Snake River basalts is developed by the flowage of the basalts into lake basms, but con-
cludes *' that whether the lava develops the ropy or pillow or block structure is determined by —
the ratio between rate of cooling and the rate of motion. But this ratio is not the same for different lavas, ^\^len a
lava sheet cools without motion, neither a characteristic pahoehoenor anaa surface is produced. Many of the older
sheets of Snake River lava illustrate this; they are simply plane surfaces, composed of either vesicular or compact
granular basalt.
The explanation of the origin of aa adopted above was not accepted by Dana, J who suggests that the breaking of
a lava crust may be due to moisture derived from the rocks over which lava flows and leading to quicker cooling in
certain areas than in others. Such an occurrence, however, even if proved to exert an influence, seemingly introduces
a variation into a more general process without supplanting the controlling conditions.
Dr. Tempest Anderson and Dr. Flett * describe such structure developing subaerially at
Mount Pelee, and Anderson ' describes it also developing subaerially in Iceland.
The evidence seems to be that the ellipsoidal structure is both subaqueous and subaerial
in its development, that it is produced by the rolling of blocks developetl during the flow of the
lava as a result of cooling, and that its development is therefore determined bj^ the speed of
flow and the rate of cooling, which in turn may be aflfected by entrance into water. Where
associated with sediments, the structure seems to be with little doubt subaqueous in origin,
as concluded by Geikie. In the Lake Superior region the interbedding of ellipsoidal basalts
with sediments of subaqueous origin, according well with the associations of basalt flows
and sedimentary rocks that are observed elsewhere, seems to be adequate evidence that the
o Verbal communication.
(> Geikie, .\rchibald, Ancient volcanoes oJ Great Britain, London, 1897. i
cReid, Clement, and Dewey, Henry, The origin of the pillow lava near Port Isaac in Cornwall; .\bstracts Proc. Geol. Soc. London, session
1907-8, London, 1908, p. 42.
rfldem.
eFenner, C. N., Featuresof trap extrusions in New Jersey: Jour. Geology, vol. ll'i, 1908, p. 320.
/Cole, G. A. J., and Gregory, J. W., On the variolitic rocks of Mont Gen(>vre: Quart. Jour. Geol. Poc, vol. 40, 1890, p. 310.
ffRansome, F. L., The eruptive rocks of Point Bonita, California: Bull. Dept. Geology, Univ. California, vol. 1, 1S93, p, 112.
^ Russell, I. C, Geology and water resources of the Snake River plains of Idaho: Bull. U. S. Geoi. Survey, No. 199, 1902, pp. 82 e( seq.
ildem, p. 98.
; Dana, J. D., Characteristics of volcanoes, New York, 1890, pp. 242-244.
i- Cited in .Vbstracts Proc. Geol. Soc. London, session 1907-8, London, 190S, p. 42.
Udem, p. 44.
512 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ellipsoidal structure of the Lake vSuperior basalts is largely of subaqueous origin. It should
not be a.ssumed, however, that all the ellipsoidal basalts of the Lake Superior region are neces-
sarily subaqueous. The region is a large one, the conditions arc varied, the ellipsoidal struc-
tures are locally associated with structures ordinarily regarded as of subaerial origin, ellipsoidal
structure is known elsewhere to develop subaerially, hence it is rather likely that a part of
the structures in the Lake Superior region are of subaerial origin. There is little prospect that
evidence will be forthcoming to determine exactly the quantitative importance of the subaerial
deposit as compared with the subaqueous deposit; indeed, there seems to be little need of such
determination wlien it is recognized tliat both are present. Qualitativel}' the evidence favors
the subaqueous origin of the major part of the ellipsoidal basalts.
ERUPTIVE ROCKS ASSOCIATED WITH IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS OF LAKE SUPERIOR
REGION CARRY ABUNDANT IRON.
Abundant sulpliides and associated magnetite are disseminated in quartz veins and irregular
quartz masses through the ellipsoidal greenstones of the Lake Superior region antl of much of
the pre-Cambrian shield of Canada. The abundance of these sulphides through all parts of
these greenstones has been noted by many observers. They are exceptionally conspicuous in
the Canadian part of the region, where erosion has cut down into the fresh rocks and exposed
sulpiride veins that have not had time to be deeply oxidized at the surface since the glacial epoch.
That certain of the sulpliides and the associated magnetites of the basic igneous rocks crystal-
lized soon after the crystallization of the igneous roclcs, and are not later secondary replacements
of such rocks, is shown by evidence of several kinds, as follows:
1. They are minutely disseminated tlirough the greenstone and grade into pegmatitic veins.
2. The sulphides and the greenstones of this t^i^e are colimital, and the sulphides are not
found so abundantly in any other rocks, a fact wliich would be difficult to explain were the
sulphides the result of later introduction by percolating meteoric waters or by later extrusions.
3. The matrix of the ellipsoidal basalt flows is in places so higlily charged with magnetite
as to disturb the magnetic needle greatly, and the amount of magnetite is much less at the
ellipsoids. Illustrations of this are found in the Hemlock formation in the vicinity of the
Armenia and Mansfield mines, in the Crj'stal Falls district of Michigan, and in the Keewatin
basalts associated with jaspers southwest of Elyj in the Vermilion district of Minnesota. The
matrix being the last part of these masses to crystallize, the magnetite is obviously introduced
late in the extrusion of the mass. Sulphide of iron is present in the same relations.
4. Many of the amygdules in the basalts are wholly or partly filled \\dth magnetite or
jasper, or both. Near the Gibson mine, south of Amasa, in the Crystal Falls district of ilichi-
gan, red jasper fillings in amygdaloids are verj' conspicuous. The amygdule fillings in general
are characteristic of hot solutions such as would accompany the extrusion of the mass and not
of cold meteoric solutions. (See PI. XXXYI, A.)
5. Plate XLVIII (p. 564) shows a Keewatin basalt with gradation phase through siliceous
basalt into banded sihceous iron-bearing formation. In the area from wluch these specimens
were taken, as well as in other parts of the Iveewatin, it is practically impossible to draw a line
between unaltered basalt and the iron-bearing formation. Tliis gradation seems to be one
developed on the original sohdification of the mass. The fi-eshness of the basalt, the lack of
katamorphism along the contact with the quartz, and the extremely vague surfaces and general
lack of vein structures are not characteristic of later introductions of the quartz after weathering.
6. Some parts of the magnetic iron-bearing formations are so related to the associated
basalts as to suggest that the iron represents pegmatitic vein material wliich developed directly
from the igneous rock. Such instances are cited for the Atikokan and Vermilion districts.
Evidence is everywhere to be found that these various iron salts associated with the surface
extrusive rocks represent remnants of outpourings of concentrateil iron solutions after the main
mass of the basalt had crystallized. Deep-seated equivalents of the basaltic extrusive rocks
are believed to bo the gabbros which carry large masses of titaniferous magnetite representing
iron salts that diil not have an opportunity to escape at the surface.
THE IRON ORES. 513
The fact that in some places the iron-bearing formation seems to be related to late acidic
phases of extrusions, us has been noted on page 507, suggests the extrusion of the iron and the
acidic phases as extreme differentiation products from the magma. The association of extremes
of this type is not uncommon.
GENETIC RELATIONS OF UPPER HURONIAN SLATE TO ASSOCIATED ERtTPTIVE ROCKS.
The iron-bearing formations of the upper Huronian are so closely associated with slate
that evidence bearing on the origin of the slate throws light on the origin of the associated
iron-bearing formations. In figure 76 (p. 612), prepared by S. II. Davis, the miner-ilogical com-
position of the upper Iluronian slate, calculated from chemical composition, is compared graphi-
cally with that of a variety of other claj^s and soils. It appears from this comparison that the
slate as a whole gives evidence hj its composition of bemg less leached of its bases than average
slates or residual clays and that it has been derived from basic rocks. It may be due partly
to weathering of the greenstones, to direct contribution of volcanic ash and muds, and possibl}'
even to direct reaction with sea water. (See pp. 610-614.)
MAIN MASS OF IRON-BEARING SEDIMENTS PROBABLY DERIVED FROM ASSOCIATED
ERUPTIVE ROCKS.
The close association of iron-bearing sediments with contemporaneous basic eruptive rocks
in the Lake Superior region and in other parts of the world, the riclmess of these eruptive
rocks m iron salts, and the probable derivation of the upper Huronian slates associated with
the iron-bearing formations from the eruptions make it a plausible hypothesis that these iron-
rich eruptive rocks were the principal source of the iron in the iron-bearing sediments. As
to the manner in which the iron was transferred from the eruptive rocks to the place of sedi-
mentation, there are several possible hypotheses. (1) It may have been transferred in hot
solutions migrating from the eruptive material during its solidification, carrying iron salts
from the interior of the magma which had never been crystallized; (2) so far as the lavas were
subaerially extruded, iron may have been transferred by the action of meteoric waters working
upon the crystallized iron minerals in the magma, either hot or cold; (.3) the iron may have
been transferred by direct reaction of the hot magma with sea water, in which the iron-bearing
sediments were deposited.
DIRECT CONTRIBUTION OF IRON SALTS IN HOT SOLUTIONS FROM THE MAGMA.
That the igneous rocks contributed some of their iron solutions directly to the water in
which the iron-bearing sediments were being deposited is suggested by the fact that basic
extrusive rocks have a widely developed ellipsoidal structure, which has been ascribed by many
observers to submarine extrusion. (See pp. 510-512.) If these lavas are submarine, then
any iron salts extruded must have been contributed directly to the ocean. It will be shown
in the following pages that if the salts were so contributed simple and probable chemical
reactions would develop the original greenalite or iron silicate phases of the iron-bearing
formations. Such phases largely lack the carbonaceous slates so closely associated with the
carbonates. It was found in the laboratory that the precipitation of the greenalite phase of
the iron-bearing formations required heat in the presence of carbon dioxide and the probable
presence of salt water, in both contrasting with the precipitation of iron carbonate, wliich goes
on in cold solution, favored by the presence of reducmg organic agencies. Direct contribution
would favor the deposition of the iron salts in a ferrous condition in the absence of reducing
carbonaceous material and would avoid the oxidation and precipitation which they woiUd
undergo if partly carried subaerially.
Further, the fact that iron-bearing formation seems to be lacking in association with
certain similar greenstones in the Lake Superior region and Canada may be evidence that the
iron-bearing formations derive tlieir materials by direct magmatic contributions. Such con-
47517°— vol. 52—11 33
514 GEOLOGY OF THE LAIvE SUPERIOR REGION.
tributions are known to be local and variable in composition, and this may explain the localized
distribution of the iron-bearing formations. If derived entirely by weathering of basic igneous
rocks, iron-bearing formations should be more abundant in association with igneous rocks
outside of the Lake Superior region.
The percentages of both iron and silica in the iron-bearing formations seem to be too high
for direct derivation from crystallized basalt by weathering. Tiioy soeni to accf)r(l better with
the hyi)othesis that the iron and silica, especially tlie silica, were precipitated from concentrated
solutions coming directly from the magma. The local presence of acidic igneous rocks between
the lavas and the basalts and tlie fact that the acidic rocks are slightly later than tlie basalts
suggest that the development of the iron-bearing formation came at a time when acidic phases
of the extrusion were coming out. The iron salts and the acidic phases then might represent
the extreme differentiation products of a primary magma of which the basalt was the first
extrusion.
Favoring the hypothesis of direct contribution of the iron salts from the lava to the sea
water into which it was poured is the lack in many places of any fragmental material between
the ia'on-bearing formation and the contemporaneous lava on which it rests, the mutual con-
formity at these places, and the absence of any erosion channels in tlie greenstones. In the
Vermilion district of Minnesota bands of iron-bearing formation have been traced for consider-
able distances resting directly upon the amygdaloidal upper surface of a lava How, showing no
evidence of intervening erosion and having a contact like a knife edge.
The subacpieous extrusion of igneous rocks would mean the sudden destruction of any
organic material m the near-by sea, to judge from results observed near present-day extrusions.
It has been shown that after an eruption the sea floor has been covered to a depth of several
feet off Hawaii by dead fish and other organic material. It is entirely jjossible that this may
explain the origin of some of the carbonaceous materials so closely associated with the iron-
bearing formations, especially in the Keewatin, where seams of rich graphitic slate are locally
associated with the iron-bearing formation and the basalt. It is possible also that this material
might be a source for the carbon dioxide necessary for the formation of the iron carbonates.
Quantitatively it is probably inadequate to explain either the amount of carbon dioxide neces-
sary for the formation of the iron carbonates or the amounts of carbon to be seen in the
associated slates. It is mentioned merely as a possible source of a part of these substances.
Its importance can not be quantitatively demonstrated.
So far as the parent igneous rocks were extruded subaerially, the escaping iron solutions
would be mingled with meteoric waters, perhaps deriving additional iron salts from the breaking
up of crystallized minerals described under the next heading.
CONTRIBUTION OF IRON SALTS FROM CRYSTALLIZED IGNEOUS ROCKS IN METEORIC WATERS.
Some of the basaltic extrusive rocks have textures indicative of subacrial crystallization.
Atmospheric agencies, therefore, have been applied during the transfer of the iron solutions
to the ocean. Weathering agents would effectively attack sulphi<les at or above the surface
of the water, especially when aided by organic material and residual heat. Umler ordinary
weathering these sulphides oxidize and form soluble iron sulphate, which becomes available
for the sedimentation of the iron-l)earing formations. The same reaction iilierates free sul-
phuric acid, which may attack the iron in the adjacent rocks. Still further, it has been
found that acidic gaseous emanations from igneous rocks attack readily tiie adjacent rocks,
leaching from them their iron, partly depositing it in place as hydrated oxide and partly
carrying it away in solution as a sulphate. A highly instructive cpiaiuitative study of the
Hawaiian basalts by Maxwell " shows the effectiveness t>f acidic solutions of tliis kind in
decomi)osing the rocks antl segregating the iron. The marked softening and disintegration of
the rocks nuij^ furnish a source for the unusually large amount of basic mud associated with
o Maxwell, Walter, Lavas and soils ot the Hawaiian Islands! Rept. Exper. Sta. Uaivaiian Sugar Planters' Assoc, Div. Agr. and Chem., Special
Bull. A, Honolulu, 1905, pp. S-22.
THE IRON ORES. 515
the iron-bearing formation. It is entirely conceivable that some of the thin bands of the
iron-bearing formation interbedded with basic flows, with little other sedimenta,ry material,
may be essentially residual iron oxide or laterite deposits developed in this way. This seems
especially likely where the iron-bearing formation is high in alumina, as, for instance, in some
of the hornblendic Keewatin belts or in the iron ranges near Lake Nipigon, where E. S.
Moore" has found dumortierite. However, the generally low percentage of alumina in the
iron-bearing formations seems to show that for the most part they may not be regarded as
metamorphosed residual products of rock alteration.
Vegetation is known to develop on basic extrusive lavas with great rapidity, as indicated
by the cultivation of the slopes of Vesuvius and Hawaiian volcanoes m an incretUljly short time
after eruptions, and hence organic agencies may have aided in the transfer. The chemistry of
the transfer of iron salts through these agencies is discussed elsewhere (pp. .519- .520). Favor-
ing the view that weathering is a factor in the process is the fact that parts of the original
rocks of the iron-bearing formation are made up of iron carbonate associated with black car-
bonaceous slates, such as may have developed in delta deposits. (See p. 502.) There is no
more reason to doubt the organic origin of the carbon in these slates than that of the carbon
in the carbonaceous slates, iron-bearing formation, and basalts in County Antrim, Ireland,
and elsewhere, except that definite organic forms are lacking.
The iron-bearing formations grade locally into phases rich in calcium and magnesium
carbonates, as at Guniiint Lake and in the east end of the Gogebic cUstrict. It is usually
assumed that calcium antl magnesium carbonates are ordinary products of weathering and
sedimentary deposition.
It may be asked why weathering did not also deposit iron abundantly in the Paleozoic
sea when it advanced later on these same rocks. To some slight extent iron was so deposited
at the Chnton horizon. The answer is believed to lie partly in the essential contemporaneity
of the basic extrusive rocks with the associated iron-bearing formations, indicating that the
process of derivation of the iron salts and deposition went on soon after the extrusion of the
igneous rocks, very rapidly at first owing to juvenile contributions and to leaching during the
residual heat, but slowly later when the rocks were colder and the easily accessible sulpliides
had been reached. Still later, when the Paleozoic sea came over the area, while it derived some
iron fi-om these rocks, it was unable to do the work on the same scale as was accomplished
immediately after their extrusion. Since glacial time alteration of pyrites in the pre-Cambrian
sliield has penetrated only a fraction of an inch or at most a few inches below the striated
glacial surfaces, indicating a relatively slow alteration of these substances under ordinary
weathering — probably too slow to account for the heavy and rapid chemical deposition of
iron-bearing formation without admixture of fragmental material.
Powdered Keewatin rocks containing abundant iron sulphide have been treated with
oxygenated waters and kept agitated for a period of six weeks. A slight amount of sulphuric
acid was also introduced to accelerate the alteration. At the end of this time barely enough
iron had gone into solution to be detected by the most refined methods.
The slate that is so abundantly present with the ujiper Huronian iron-bearing formations
gives evidence in its composition of derivation from the greenstone. (See p. 612.) It is in
part doubtless derived by weathering of the type here described. In part also the slate repre-
sents volcanic dust and mud directly deposited from the volcanic extrusions, and in part it
may result from reaction between the hot lavas and sea waters described below.
CONTRIBUTION OF IRON SALTS BY REACTION OF HOT IGNEOUS ROCKS WITH SEA WATER.
When basaltic magmas are extruded into the ocean there is reaction with the salt water.
The behavior of basic lavas when extruded into salt water has not been carefully observed.
There seems to be a tendency in Hawaii and Iceland for rapid powdering and disintegration at
these contacts. What the chemical results are is not apparent. When pottery is sprayed
» Geology of Onaman iron range area: Ann. Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, vol. 18, pt. 1, 1909, pp. 212-215.
516 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SITPERIOR REGION.
with salt water wliiie hot, a glaze of sodium siUcatc (water glass) is formed, which is more or
less soluble. In connection with the present study fresh basalts were heated in a muffle furnace
to a temperature of 1,200° C, a temperature sufficient to fuse the exterior, and then i)lunged into
salt water of the composition of sea water, the result being a violent reaction, producing princi-
pally soilium silicate (see p. 525) but also bringing a small amount of iron into solution.
From the available evidence it seems likely that such a process may account for part of the
sodium silicate wliich, by reaction with ferrous salts, produces the greenalite with excess of
silica. (See pp. 521-523.) The experiment does not seem to suggest an adecjuate source for
the iron in this reaction. There was also during tliis reaction a tendency toward disintegra-
tion. Tliis may indicate ar partial source for some of the muds so closely associated with the
iron-bearing formations.
CONCLUSION AS TO DERIVATION OF MATERIALS FOR THE IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS.
Ordinary processes of weathering, transportation, and deposition of iron salts from terranes
of average composition were as effective in the pre-Cambrian of the Lake Superior region as in
other times and ])laces, but these processes account for only thin and relatively unimportant
phases of the iron-bearipg rocks; for instance, the lenses of iron carbonates associated \\ith
graphitic slates of the upper Huronian, probably deposited in lagoons and bogs of a delta.
For the derivation of the unique thick and extensive iron-bearing formations of the Lake Supe-
rior region it is necessary to appeal to some further agency. This is bebeved to be furnished
by the large masses of contemporaneous basic igneous rocks. The association of sedimentary
iron-bearing formations and basic igneous rocks is known in mam^ localities outside of the
Lake Superior region. The iron salts have been transferred from the igneous rocks to the
sedimentary iron-bearing formations partly b}' weathering when the igneous rocks were hot
or cold, but the evidence suggests also that they were transferred jjartly by direct contril)ution
of magmatic waters from the igneous rocks and perhaps in small part by direct reaction of the
sea waters upon the hot lavas.
VARIATIONS OF IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS WITH DIFFERENT ERUPTIVE ROCKS AND
DIFFERENT CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
The basalts contributmg the iron being both subaerial and subaqueous in their extrusion, it is
to be expected that the contribution of iron to the bodv of water in which the iron-bearing forma-
tions were being deposited was both direct and indirect. Evidence is not available which wUl
clearly discriminate iron-bearing formations contributed to the ocean in these two ways. In
general the parts of the iron-bearing formations originally consisting of carbonate seem to be
related to the indirect contribution from the igneous rocks through the agencies of weathering,
and the parts of the iron-bearing formations originally consistmg of greenalite or iron silicate
seem to have been contributed in the main directly to the waters without intervening atmos-
pheric or organic agencies. The locally close association of these two types of the original
iron-bearuig rocks indicates the close association of direct and iiidirect methods of contribu-
tion of iron-bearing materials. The fact that the upper Huronian iron-beaiing formation in
the ilesabi district was largely greenalite, while the upper Huronian iron-bearing formation of
the Gogebic district was lai'gely carbonate, might therefore signifj'^ simply that in one district
the salts had been derived primarily from subaerial weathering and in the other from sul>-
acjucous contribution, but in each district partly in both ways and in both districts essentialh'
from the same I'ocks. It is noted elsewhere that in many places where the greenahtc anil
carbonate occur together the greenalite occupies the lower horizon. Tliis might be explained
.not only l)y conditions of sid)aerial contribution succeedmg subaciucous contribution, but,
as explauied elsewhere, by the more rapid settling of the greenalite when i)recij)itated simul-
taneously with the carbonate.
The iron-1)oaring lavas extnided at three widely separated jierioils could scarcely be expected
to produce iron-bearing formations of exactly the same character, even were the conditions of
THE IRON ORES. 517
deposition the s;ime, for in so far as the ores were directly contributed by magmatic soUitioiiSj
they were subject to extreme variations in composition.
The conditions of deposition of iron salts were also different during these three periods of
volcanism. The Keewatin lavas were extruded in larger quantities than at any later time and
the associated iron-bearing formations constituted only discontinuous beds between the hot
extrusives, but in the middle and upper Huronian the extrusions were much less abundant and
sedimentation proceeded on a larger scale and less directly under the influence of igneous rocks.
Although some of the differences between these three formations are explained by later alteration,
it is believed that the highly amphibolitic and magnetitic character of the Keewatm was
partly determined at the time of, or soon after, its deposition, in contrast with the prevailing
deposition of ferrous carbonate and ferrous silicate at the later periods. In the discussion of the
secondary concentration of the ores it will "be shown that the ores of the Keewatin have under-
gone far less secondary concentration than the later ores. This is certainly in part due to
anamorphic changes before the katamorphic agents had an opportunity to work, but possibly
in part also to original differences in texture and composition, possibly because the Keewatin
as a whole seems to contain a lower percentage of iron than the succeeding formations, and
partly because of the small area of the formations exposed to concentrating agencies. (See
pp. 474-475.) The Keewatin series had produced only 6.5 per cent of the total shipments to the
close of 1909. The Keewatin seems to occupy the same subordinate position in Canada, and
as the area of Keewatin in Canada is relatively greater than that of later iron-bearing forma-
tions, the chances of finding ore- there are relatively smaller than in other parts of the Lake
Superior region.
It would be expected also that the iron salts closely associated with the igneous rocks would
be less regular in their thickness and more generally separated into different belts by intercalated
igneous rocks than those at a distance from the areas of extrusion. The latter seem to be illus-
trated by the Animikie ores, which attain their maximum development on the north shore of
Lake Superior, tlie nearest Icnown extrusive rocks being west of the lake or possibly under the
lake. The remarkably uniform character of the iron-bearing formation and the rest of the
Animilde group, distinguishing it from all other pre-Cambrian iron-bearing formations, may
well be due to its distance from the contemporaneous volcanic activity, for, in view of the con-
nection of the ores with igneous rocks above outlined, it would seem to be more than a coinci-
dence that the most uniform and widespread of the iron-bearing formations should be the
farthest removed from volcanic activitj'. Variation in the iron-bearing formations with varying
distance from the igneous rocks is more definitely shown by the iron-bearing formation of the
Gogebic district, which at the east end of the range, where associated with extrusive rocks,
is extremely varied in its composition and is broken into different belts by other sediments
and by igneous beds. The material of this portion of the formation may also originally have
been deposited in small part as magnetite or hematite rather than sideriteor greenalite. The
irregularity diminishes toward the west, though still existing at Sunday Lake. For many miles
west of Sunday Lake the iron-bearing formation was deposited as a continuous thick formation
with less amounts of other sediments. These differences may be j^artly due to varying condi-
tions of temperature and materials present, as discussed on page 526, and are undoubtedly
due in part to the fact that near the exti-usions there were sudden and violent oscillations in
level, requiring frequent alternations of sediments, while farther away these oscillations were
less marked and the movement was a comparatively uniform one of sinking, perhaps due to
the general extrusion of the lavas from the region.
Moreover, shore conditions of deposition may well have been different from those offshore.
It has been noted that the upper Huronian iron-bearing formations in the Mesabi, Gogebic,
ilenominee, and Felch ^fountain districts are clearly defined formations originally contaming
greenalite and carbonate between quartz sand below and shale above, and that in these districts
they come relatively close to the older rocks, suggesting a possible shoi-e comlition. In the
Cuyuna, Florence, and Iron River districts the iron-bearing members, originally sideritic, are
518 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
in numerous layers and lenses in the slates. These are probably higher in the series and may
also represent offshore conditions.
It may be argued that similar basic igneous rocks elsewhere extruded near or under the sea
are not accompanied by deposition of iron-bearing formation on such a scale. That iron-bearing
rocks are present on a smaller scale in such association elsewhere is shown on pages 508-510. It
should be remembered that only veiy exceptionally do igneous rocks of any sort carry ores with
them. There are many areas of Tertiary eruptive rocks and but few Goldfield camps. So far as
the Lake Superior iron-bearing formations derive their materials from direct magmatic contrilni-
tion of igneous rocks, they are likely to be localized by reason of these exceptional contributions.
Tliis may explain why all of the similar pre-Cambrian basalts in Canada or elsewhere in the
Lake Superior region are not associated with iron ores, though the geologic conditions are
apparently the same. It follows from the foregoing statements that the ores are not derived
from basic igneous rocks in general but from certain ones.
It may be further argued that wliile the iron-bearing formations of the Keewatin may
have readily been derived from the relatively abundant associated greenstones, the iron-bearing
formations of the Huronian are so extensive as compared with the contemporaneous volcanic
rocks that they could scarcely have been derived from those rocks. Such an argument would be
without definite basis, however, because there is no known quantitative relation between volume
of igneous rock and volume of materials derived from it as igneous after-effects. The iron ores
of the Iron Springs district of Utah show a wide range in abundance as compared with the
parent igneous rocks. The contemporaneous volcanic activity in the midille Huronian was
extensive, being represented by the Hemlock, part of the Clarksburg, and other volcanic
formations. That in the upper Huronian was less in amount, but is represented by most of
the Clarksburg, in the eastern part of the Gogebic district, and some of the greenstones of the
Menominee district; moreover, it may well be that the present Lake Superior basin was the
locus of much more abundant upper Huronian flows, for reasons wliich are mentioned on
pages 507-508.
CHEMISTRY OF ORIGINAL DEPOSITION OP THE IRON-BEARING
FORMATIONS.
NATTJKE OF THE PROBLEM.
The experiments specifically described in the following paragraphs, if not otherwise cred-
ited, have been made in the geological and chemical departments of the Universit}^ of Wisconsin,
principally by M. E. Diemer, in cooperation with W. J. Mead, R. D. Hall, and others, to meet
conditions specified by the authors.
The problem is to explain the original deposition in tliick formations of greenalite ([FeMg]
SiOj.nHsO), siderite (FeCOj), chert (SiOj), and perhaps some hematite, magnetite, and limonite,
in intercalated layers of varying proportions, under conditions, if our preceding conclusions are
valid, ranging from ordinary cycles of weathering, transportation, and deposition to direct con-
tribution of iron solutions from the hot igneous extrusives to the water in which the sediments
were deposited.
Obviously a wide range of chemical processes has been involved in the development of the
iron ores. It is unlikely that all are known. It is the aim of the following paragraphs to
indicate as definitely as possible certain processes wMch seem likely to have been important,
without impHcation that these are necessarily the only ones contributing toward the observed
results.
The iron may have been carried as a ferrous salt of silicic, carl)onic, sul]>huric, hj-drochloric,
or other acids present, or as FeO in presence of IIjO at liigh temperatures it may have been in
excess of the available acid radicles. It appears now as an origmal constituent of basic extru-
sive rocks in the form of sulpludos, magnetite, hematite, chlorite, and the pyroxenes ami amplii-
boles. The absence of greenalite and ferrous carbonate as such among these ^original constitu-
ents, and also the absence in the ferrous silicate and carbonate of alkalies, which are associated
THE IRON ORES. 519
with the iron as original constituents in the igneous rocks, seem to prechide the direct contri-
bution of the iron as ferrous sihcate or ferrous carbonate from tlie igneous rocks and to require
certain sifting ami simplifying reactions by outside agencies to explain the composition of the
original iron-formation rocks. It will be assumed in the following discussion that the iron
is carried as a ferrous salt. From the abuntlance of iron sulphides in the original igneous rocks
and in their pegmatitic after-effects it will be assumed further that the acid radicle is sulphuric.
This is done also for convenience in experimenting. It is not meant to exclude other possible
combinations of tlie iron above mentioned. Carbonic acid was doubtless present. Other combi-
nations than these would serve fully as well in the essential steps of tlie process below outlined.
FORMATION OF IRON CARBONATE AND LIMONITE.
The close association of man}- of the thinner carbonate ))ands of the upper Huronian
with black carbonaceous and pyritiferous slates, an association similar to those found in the "Coal
Measures" and elsewhere, suggests that the iron carbonate may be the result of reduction of ferric
hydrate by organic material buried with it in deltas, bogs, or other similar places. Hydrogen
sulphide characteristic of these conditions would react upon part of the carbonate of iron, pro-
ducing the iron sulphide, thereby giving both iron carbonate and ii'on sulphide in association
with carbonaceous rocks.
Van Hise " says :
As to the form in which the iron salts enter the seas, we can judge only by analogy, but if the present be a guide to
the past, the iron was chiefly as a carbonate and to a subordinate extent as a sulphate, although it might have been in
part in the form of other salts. When the iron salts reach the lagoon, they are precipitated under favorable condi-
tions as ferric hydrate or possibly in part as basic ferric sulphate. Supposing the iron salt to be carbonate, it would be
precipitated according to the following reaction:
4FeC03+3H20+20=2Fe,03.3HoO+4C02.
Where this process goes on, on an extensive scale, limonite bodies are built up.
It was formerly supposed that this reaction took place as a result of the work of oxygen and moisture alone, and this
is true to some extent. But recent observation has shown that where in lagoons iron carbonate is abundant the oxidation
is largely performed through the agency of a class of bacteria called the iron bacteria. It has been found thatthese bac-
teria are unable to exist without the presence of iron carbonate or manganese carbonate, but the iron carbonate is the
chief compound used. This material they absorb into their cells. There the iron carbonate is oxidized and the limonite
is precipitated. Says Lafar:
"The decomposing power of these organisms is very great, the amount of ferrous oxide oxidized b>' the cells being a
high multiple of their own weight. This high chemical energy on the one hand, and the inexacting demands in the
shape of food on the other, secure to these bacteria an important part in the economy of nature, the enormous deposits of
ferruginous ocher and bog iron ore, and probably certain manganese ores as well, being the result of the activity of the
iron bacteria. "6
Evidence is furnished of the precipitation of the limonite of bog iron-ore deposits in this manner by the discovery
in some of them of large numbers of the sheaths of the iron bacteria. <^ Further evidence of the importance and
activity of these bacteria is furnished by their partly or completely closing water pipes of cities where the water con-
tains a considerable amount of iron carbonate. ^
The iron part of the salts carried down to the sea as a sulphate would be likely to be thrown down as basic ferric
sulphate,'' according to the following reaction:
12FeS04+60-|-(x-F9)H,0=Fe,(SOj3.5Fe,,03.xHoO-|-9H.,S04.
The material thrown down as a hydrated ferric oxide and basic ferric sulphate is mingled with more or less of organic
material, and a deposit of considerable thickness may thus be built up. This depcj.sit is below the level of ground water
and is therefore in the zone of incom])lete oxidation, or is under the conditions of the belt of cementation. The oxygen
required for the partial oxidation of the organic material is derived in part from the ferric oxide, and the iron is reduced
to the ferrous form; but probably this reaction does not take place on an important scale at the surface. The reducing
agent may be regarded as carbon, carbon monoxide, or some of the hydrocarbons, such as methane. The result is the
same in any case. The oxygen and the carbon produce carbon dioxide, and thus the conditions are reproduced for the
production of iron carbonate. A representative reaction may have been as follows:
2Fej03-3H,0+3C02-fC=4FeC03-l-3H20.
u Van Hise, C. R., k treatise on metamorphism: Mon. V. S. Geol. Survey, vol. AT, 1904, pp. 825-827.
ii Lafar, F., Teclinical mycology, vol. 1, Lippinrolt <t Co , 1S98, p. 361.
c Fischer, .V., The structure and functionsof bacteria, trans, by A. Coppen Jones, Clarendon Press, Oxford, 1900, p. 09.
d Lafar, F., op. cit., p. 3r.l.
« Pickering, S. P. U., Ontheconstitutionofmolecularcompounds; the molecular weight of basic ferric sulphate: Jour. Chem. Soc. London, vol.
43, 1883, p. 182.
520 GEOLOGY OF THE I^VKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Beck summarizes the conditions of solution, transjiortation, and deposition of iron under
weatherinfi; processes, especially witii reference to organic agencies. In his discussion of the origin
of lake and bog ores, he sa^-s:"
What was the nature of the solutions? The following are the chief solvents:
1. Sulphuric acid formed by the decomposition of iron-bearinf; sulphides.
2. Carbonic acid supplied by the air and by decaying organisms, and to some extent by the living animals. This
enables it to attaclv various silicates.
3. Organic acids also play a part. These are, moreover, transformed into carbonic acid by oxidation, when v^e-
table masses decompose. In the presence of decaying vegotaVjle matter deprived of an adequate oxygen supply, iron
sesquioxide is reduced to ferrous oxide, which forms .soluble double salts, with humus acids and ammonium.
The precipitation of iron from these dilute solutions may take place in various ways.
In solutions of iron sulphate the mere addition of ammonium humate, which is always present in the brown waters
of peaty areas, effects a precipitation of iron oxide and later on of ferric hydrate.
From carbonated solutions the iron is precipitated as ferric hydrate by the escape of carbonic acid into the air, or by
its absorption by plant cells. The deposition of iron carbonate is only possible when the air is excluded or in the pres-
ence of organic matter, which seems to harmonize with the known facts concerning spherosiderite and black-band ores.
From humates and other organic compounds the ferric hydrate is precipitated by the oxidation of the humus acids
and their decompo-sition into carbonic acid and water. Here, too, the plant cell accelerates this process by furnishing
oxygen. Lastly, by the mingling of iron humates anS sulphates, the sulphuric acid, which kept the iron sesquioxide
in solution, unites with ammonium, and iron is precipitated as hydroxide or as ferric humate.
In this action, the life processes of plants take a part, entirely independent of any products of plant decay. Accord-
ing to Ehrenberg, the algae, especially the so-called iron alg;e, Galionella Jerruginea Ehrenb., are active ore precipitants,
coating their cell walls with ferric hydrate and opaline silica. This alga is abundant on the sea bottoms. According
to the recent works of Molisch and Winogradsky, these and most other supposed algse are ciliated bacteria of different
kinds, especially Lcptothrix ochracea.b
The silica of these ores may originally have been held in solution as alkaline silicates, which are supposed to be
decomposed by carbonic acid. This silica is precipitated simultaneously with the ferric hydrate. The phosphoric
acid was certainly present as ammonium phosphate and is precipitated at first as iron phosphate and as calcium phos-
phate in calcareous ores. * * *
We saw that in the case of lake ores the deposition took place quite slowly. This process is more rapid where the
drainage from the gossan of a lai^e pj-rite deposit is carried into a lake basin, or into the sea, or where mining operations
produce an inflow of great quantities of iron-bearing mine waters. Thus the bottom of Lake Tisken, near P'alun, is
covered with a layer of ocher mud several meters thick that has been furnished by the neighboring pyrite stock.
The bed of the Rio Tinto carries ocher mud and diatoms derived from the waters of the copper mines as far as Palos in
Huelva Bay. That this was the case even before mining began at that locality is proved by the deposit of iron ore on
the Mesa de los Pinos and the Cerro de las V'acas. These limonite deposits were formed in a bog which was afterwards
dissected by the river. The ironstones contain plant remains of the same character as the present flora. Slabs of tliis
ore were used by the Romans for tombstones.'^
Iron carbonate is Iviiown to be directly ]ircciijitated when a ferrous salt comes into contact
with calcium carbonate, as, for instance, when ferrous solutions from intrusives penetrate
a limestone. The presence of any calcium carbonate in the waters or sediments at the time
of the deposition of the Lake Superior iron formations may have reacted with any ferrous
salts present to produce carbonate, but we have no direct evidence of this.
The above-noted processes do not seem adecjuate to account for all the iron carbonates
of the Lake Superior region, for some of them, as, for instance, in tlic (n)gebic district, are in
much thicker masses than have been found elsewhere associateil with carbonaceous seams,
are comparatively free from carbon and sulphides, and, moreover, show remarkablj' close
association witli certain iron silicates called greenalite, to which they are partly secondary
ami which are thought to develop in another wa}-. Laboratorj- reactions between iron silicates,
iron carbonates, and carbon dioxide, discussed under another heading (p. 526), suggest other
processes of iron carbonate deposition.
NATURE OF CARBONATE PRECIPITATE.
The precipitate of ferrous carbonate is apple-green in color, is flocculent, settles slowly,
and shows a distinct tendenc}' in settling to segregate into bands separated by greater or less
oBcck, Richard, Tlienatureof ore depositsCtr. by W.H. Weedi, vol. 1,1905, pp.lOl-lOi. See also Van Jlise, C. R., A treatise on nletamo^
phlsm; Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 47, 1904, p. 550.
6 Weed, W. II., GeoloKical work of plants: Am. Geologist, June, 1S94. Walther, liinleitung indieGeoiogie, Jena,lS93-94,p.65S.
e Louis, H., Ore deposits, 2d ed., 1896, p. 41.
THE IRON ORES. 521
amounts of free silica. No tendency is observed in this substance toward the development
of globular forms, antl in this connection it is suggested, in view of Lehniann's inferences cited
on page 525, that tlie iron carbonate lias a strong tendency to crystallize.
PRECIPITATION OF GREENALITE.
PROCESSES.
Evidence has been presented elsewhere (pp. 166-16S) to show that ' greenalite
(Fe(Mg)Si03.nH20) is different from glauconite and probably from other green silicate
granules which have been described. It may be reproduced in the laboratory.
In all the reactions and experiments in which silicic acid was used, it was in aqueous
solution aloi.g with sodium chloride. This was for two reasons: (1) The silicic acid was
prepared by neutralizing sodium silicate of the composition Na^O.-SSiOj with hydrochloric
acid. Thus:
Na^O.SSiOj + 2HC1 = 2NaCl + SSiO^.H^O.
(2) The methods of experimentation chosen approximated the natural conditions under which
the greenalite was deposited, and, to our belief, this was in the presence of sea water. On
starting with a soluble ferrous salt, for convenience ferrous sulphate, the following reactions
are found to be significant with reference to the origin of greenalite:
1. A solution of ferrous salt when boiled with silicic acid (prepared as above stated) pro-
duces (in the absence of air) no precipitate, showing that silicic acid and a ferrous salt do not
react to form greenalite.
2. Ferrous sulphate reacts directly with solutions of silicates of the alkalies, producing
a granular precipitate corresponding in composition to the water glass used in the precipitation.
Thus:
FeSO, + Na^O.SSiOj = Fe0..3SiO, + Na^SO,.
It is shown on page 522 that this precipitate is composed of ferrous silicate (FeSiOj) and
free silica.
If a soluble magnesium salt is present with the ferrous salt in the above reaction, it will
be precipitated as MgSiOg (or the silicate corresponding to the composition of the water glass
used), explaining the presence of some MgO in the greenalite.
3. That the precipitate FeO.-SSiO, consists of ferrous silicate (FeSiOj) and free silica is
shown by the following experiments:
When the precipitate (FeO.SSiOj) formed under the given conditions is dissolved in strong
NaOH and reprecipitated by neutralization of the large excess of alkali by hydrochloric acid,
the composition of tlie resulting precipitate is FeSiOj (by analysis), and the remaining silica
of the FeO.SSiO, is held in solution as colloidal silicic acid.
Furthermore, when FeO.SSiOj is boiled with water silica is taken into solution, while the
iron remains in the precipitate, and the ratio lFeO:3Si02 becomes gradually less and approaches
Fe0:Si02. This process can not be carried to the extent of FeO:SiO,, however, as the iron
of the compound oxidizes, and when it oxidizes the combined silica becomes soluble, so that
no distinction can be made between the silica of the compound and the uncombined excess
silica. When greenalite (FeO.SiO,) alone is boiled with water no silica goes into solution.
The composition of the greenalite is shown further by the fact that when boiled with
water tlu-ough which carbon dioxide is being passed, iron and silica go mto solution in the
proportions 1:1.
4. When the proportions of silica and alkali are varied in the water glass, there is variation
in the total amount of silica precipitated.
5. Wlien the ferrous salt is in excess, in the precipitate the proportion of the iron to
total silica precipitate is relative to that of the sodium silicate, but when the water glass is
in excess, the proportion of iron and silica is variable, depending on the tem])erature at whicli
it is formed. This is shown by the precipitates resultmg from mixing solutions of ferrous
sulphate and water glass.
522 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Tlic ])recipitatcs arc mixturos of ferrous silicate iiiid fi-ee silica:
(a) The precipitate from cold solutions witii ferrous suit in excess may be expressed as
FeO.SSiO,.
(b) The precipitate from cold solutions with water glass in excess mav lie expressed as
FeO.oSiO;.
(f) The ))recipitate from hot solutions with ferrous salt in excess may be expressed as
FeO.SSiO^.
(d) Tlie precipitate from liot solutions with water f!;lass in excess maj' be expressed as
Fe0.1t)SiO,.
6. RegartUess of the various proportions of iron to total silica obtained under the conditions
stated in jtaragraj^hs 4 and 5, the iron silicate formed has the character of greenalite and the
variation in composition is entirely in the amount of free silica precipitated.
7. The precipitation of ferrous silicate requires neutral or slightly alkaline conditions.
The substance is soluble in acids and strong alkalies. When water glass is added to a ferrous
solution which is acid with hydrochloric or sulphuric acid, there is no precipitation, but when '
this is neutralized with alkali, a ferrous silicate precipitate results. LTnder stronglj- alkaline
conditions it will not precipitate, being held in more or less of a colloidal solution, which has a
greenish niuddj' appearance.
Thus the materials necessary to make greenalite might be carried for some distances in acid
or alkaline solutions before precipitation. Hydrochloric acid is formed simultaneously with
the sodium silicate. This would act as a solvent. If the solution were alkaline, deposition
would come by neutralization with an acid, such as carbon dioxide.
8. The iron of the ferrous silicate precipitated in the absence of oxygen is entirely in the
ferrous condition. The freshly precipitated ferrous silicate was thorougldy wasiied, dissolved
in sulphuric acid, and the ferrous iron titrated. This gave the ferrous iron of the salt — 0.154
per cent. Then the total iron was calculated as FeO, the result being 0.159 per cent.
9. When oxygen is available, variable percentages of ferric oxide develop in the silicate.
10. Greenalite may also be produced by using other ferrous salts as cliloride, according to
the reaction —
FeClo + Na^SiOg = FeSiO^ + 2XaCl.
11. As first precipitated the greenalite and silica are hydrous. If they are allowed to
stand and dry, out of contact with the air, the percentage of water becomes progressively less.
Presumably this loss may go on for an indefinite time and to an indefinite extent. Analyses
of greenalite rocks of the Mesabi district show considerable variation in the amount of combined
water.
12. Greenalite may be formed by the reaction of alkaline silicata and iron bicarbonate."
NATURE OF GREEN.A.I.ITE PKECIPIT.XTE.
When formed by any of the processes above mentioned the greenalite and associated silica
first constitute a green, flocculent precipitate. As this precipitate settles a granular structure
practically identical with that observed in the Mesabi slides is ile\eloped. The optical properties
also are the same. The precij^itate has been pressed and dried, a slide cut from it, and a photo-
micrograph taken (PI. XLII, B). A comparison of this plate with one taken of the greenalite
rock (PI. XLII, A) shows identity of textures which csin not be mistaken, in spite of the
imperfections of the granules developed artificially in cutting the slides. As the precipitate
settles, there is also to be observed a distinct tendency toward banding.
The only feature in which the artificial greenalite granules diil'er from those of the Mesabi
district is in lacking the small ])ercentage of magnesia found in Jlesabi granules. No attempt
was made to introduce magnesia artificially, but there would seem to be no inherent chemical
difficulty in the association of the magnesium with the iron, an association characteristic of
silicate rocks.
oBischof, Gustav, Elements of chemical and physical geology (tr, by B. 11. Paul), vol. 2, London, 1S55, p. 71.
PLATE XLII.
523
PLATE XLII.
Photomicrographs of natural and artificial greenalite granules, cherty sedeeite,
AND concretionary FERRUGINOUS CHERT.
A. Greenalite granules (specimen 45705, slide 16395) from Cincinnati mine. Without analyzer, X 40. The granules
are for the most part unaltered, and are dark green, light green, or yellow. Some of them show alterations to
iron oxide and to dark-green chloritic material. \Miere altered they become dark brown, black, or dark green.
The matrix is entirely chert. Evidence of crushing is to be observed in minute cracks ramifjang through the
elide. Note the remarkable similarity in shapes of these granules to those of the green granules in Clinton ores,
illustrated in Plate XLV (p. 536).
B. Greenalite granule in matrix of silica artificially produced in the laboratory. Without analyzer. See description
(pp. 522-523).
C. Photomicrograph of cherty siderite altering to ferruginous chert (specimen 6138, slide 1173), from north shore of
Gunflint Lake, T. 65 N., R. 3 W., Minnesota: Animikie group. In ordinary light. X 25. The figure illustrates
the formation of iron oxides, pseudomorphous after siderite. A background of chert contains nimierous small
roundish and rhombohedral areas of siderite and ii'on oxide. Between the little-altered and wholly-altered
siderite a complete gradation is seen.
D. Concretionary ferruginous chert, developed from alteration of cherty siderite (specimen 9048. slide 28S6), from
the SE. i sec. 27, T. 46 N., R. 2 E., Wisconsin. In ordinary light, X 25. In a cherty background are beautiful
concretions, which are composed of concentric rings of iron oxide and chert. One concretion particularly is very
fine, 'showing many closely packed concentric rings. Silica is seen breaking across these rings in a few places.
524
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. XLII
PHOTOMICROGRAPHS.
D.
THE IRON ORES. 525
The reason for the greenalite taking the globuhir form is probably found in the surface
tension between the precipitate and the hquid, which tends to make the smallest possible
surface of contact between them, just as mercur}- in contact with the air will tend to take a
globular form in response to surface tension. Such forms are commonly observetl in precipi-
tates. Lehmann ° has investigated them extensively and finds them to develop characteristi-
cally in preci])itates which lack strong crystallizing tendency. He also finds such forms in
other precipitates to be intermediate steps toward crystal form, and presents interesting photo-
micrographs of incipient development of these forms from these intermediate globular stages. He
has used the expressive term " liquid crystals " for these intermediate globular stages. Correlat-
ing the development of liquid crystals as intermediate steps in the formation of crystals, where the
substances are of strong crystallizing power, with the fact that similar forms and not cr3'stals
are likely to be the permanent form taken by substances of low crystallizing ]:)Ower, he is led
to suggest that the permanent retention of globular forms is a consequence of low crystallizing
power, the substance in its attem]5t to organize itself having reached the stage of a liquid crystal
but not having gone further.
Hydrated iron oxide also tends to take on globular forms when precipitated.
SOURCE OF AT.KALINE SILICATES NECESSARY TO PRODUCE GREENALITE.
The above-described reactions indicate that it is necessary to account for the ])resence of
alkaline silicate rather than free silicic acid to produce the desired results. Soluljle alkaline
silicates are laiown to be one of the common results of rock decay, but a comparison of the
amount of silica available from the basic rock by weathering with that concentrated in the
iron formations shows such an excess in the iron formations, as well as absence of alkalies, as
to lead us to search for another possible source for the alkaline silicates. Sodium silicate is
furnished by the reaction of sea water upon hot silicate magmas of extrusive basalts or por-
phyries or upon the siliceous solutions coming from these extrusives as igneous after-efi'ects or
forming a part of them. Abundant vein quartz inclosing iron sulphides in the basalts and
porphyries is taken to represent remnants of siliceous solutions which did not escape. These
reactions were suggested by the common practice in pottery making of producing a water-glass
glaze by spraying salt water against the hot silicates. Under ordinary conditions hydrochloric
acid is much stronger than silicic acid, decomposing many of the silicates, but when heated
hydrochloric acid is volatile and silicic acid is not, hence silicic acid may then displace
hydrochloric acid from its salts and produce alkaline silicates.
By neutralization of water glass with hj'drochloric acid a solution of silicic acid is obtained,
along with sodium chloride formed in the reaction. To obtain the neutral point — that is, the
point where the sodium silicate is just decomposed — methyl orange may be used as an indicator.
This solution is boiled for sonje time, and the indicator shows that the solution has become
alkaline, showing that alkaline silicate has formed. If again neutralized by hydrochloric acid
and strongly boiled, the alkalinity returns. A solution of sodium chloride when boiled without
the addition of the silicic acid shows no such alkalinity.
A solution of silicic acid and sodium chloride, if evaporated to diyness and heated, but not
to fusion, has considerable alkalinity when redissolved in water, showing that alkaline silicate
has formed.
From these experiments it appears that sodium chloride can be slightly decomposed by
silicic acid or silica in boiling solution, forming sodium silicate, but when heated to a higher
temperature sodium* chloride decomposes more readily.
In addition to conducting the reactions with free silicic acid, salt water was spra^^ed upon
a hot Keewatin basalt, with the result that a water-glass glaze was produced by reactions
similar to those above described.
o Lehmann, O., Fliissige Kristalle sowie Plastizitat von Kristallen im Allgemeinen, molekulare Umlagerungen und Aggregatzustandsander-
ungen, Leipzig, 1904.
526 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
REACTIONS BETWEEN GREENALITE AND IKON CARBONATE, OR CARBON DIOXIDE.
1. A source of tlic injii carboiiiitc appears in tlic I'cactiou of carbon dioxide upon the ferrous
silicate (f^reenaiite), either cold or hot, as follows:
FeSiOj + CO2 = FeCO, + SiO^.
L'. Solid FeSiO., and free silica boiled with water through which carbon dioxide is passed
shows iron and sihca in solution in the ratio FeOiSiO,: : 0.0320 -.0.0.302, indicating that the
greenalite, and free silica to only a slight extent, are taken into solution.
3. If carbon dioxide is passed through water in the cold containing solid gi-eenalite (FeSiOj)
for twenty liours, iron and silica are taken into solution in about the proportions 1 to 1. Less,
however, is dissolved than when tlie solution is hot.
4. If precipitated ferrous carbonate and precipitated ferrous silicate of the composition
FeO.SSiOj, instead of ferrous silicate and carljon dioxide, are boiled in water, carbon dioxide is
given olT and greenalite remains according to the foUowhig reaction:
2FeC03 + FeO.SSiO^ = SFeSiO, + 2C0,.
In the cold solution l)otli remain. This reaction is similar to 5, below, as it is probable that
part of the silica is in the form of silicic acid and not combined with the iron.
5. A solution of silicic acid was boiled with precipitated ferrous carbonate. The composition
of the precipitate from several determinations was variable but in each case showed decomjx)-
sition of the ferrous carbonate by the silicic acid, producing greenalite. This decomposition
continues until the sdicic acid is entirely precipitated as ferrous silicate.
6. Alkaline silicate and iron bicarbonate react to form iron silicate."
These results show that carbon dioxide will break up precipitated ferrous silicate, either
cold or hot, producing iron carbonate, which is probably m solution as the soluble bicarbonate.
The precipitation of the iron carbonate would follow from the loss of carbon dioxide.
The experiments show further that when carbonate is actually thrown out it may be reacted
upon by silicic acid or alkaline silicates when heated, drivmg oif carbon dioxide, indicating that
the silicate is the more stable under such conditions. In the cold no reaction takes place; the
silicate and carbon dioxide may exist side by side. In short, there is a constant tendency for
the development of a bicarbonate and the precipitation of a carbonate of iron in the presence of
carbon dioxide, but the precipitate is stable only when cold.
It appears, therefore, that the probable chemical result of the extrusion of the igneous
rock into salt water carrying ferrous salts, with or without free silicic acid, is the formation of
ferrous silicate with the simultaneous precipitation of free sdica in proportions varying with
conditions; that of the soluble salts of the bases which may have been simultaneouslv delivered
the salt of magnesia would form an insoluble compound with the alkaline silicate and be pre-
cipitated with the iron; that such iron silicate is the first and nio.st stable salt to form under
conditions of heat; that so far as carbon dioxide is present it will tend to dccom])ose the silicate,
taking the iron into solution as iron bicarbonate, which, however, will remain as iron carbonate
after precipitation only when cold, being decomposed when hot by reaction with silicic acid, or
alkaline silicates. The first precipitate after the extrusion of the lava wouUl tlierefore tend
to be greenalite, unless the solution is acid or strongly alkaline, preventing i)recipitation
until neutralized. It is likely to be acid from the presence of hydrochloric acid formed as a
by-i)roduct of the reactions above described. Removal of this acid by heat would lead to pre-
cijjitation of greenalite. Tiie presence of a large amount of carbon dioxide, also, would ])revent
the jjrecipitation of greenalite, holding the sid)stance in solution until loss'of carbon dioxide
from the bicarbonate allowed the ])recipitation of the carbonate. The deposition of green-
alite therefore depends on the absence of carbon dioxithi or other acid; the deposition of
carbonate depends on the ai)unclant jiresence of carbon dioxiile. In the last analysis tiie law
of mass action determines wliich of the two shall form. Iron carbonate replacing greenalite is
often observed in the Mesabi district.
" Bischof, Custav. Elements of choiiiical anJ physical geology (tr. by B. IT. Paul), vol. 2, 1855, p. 70.
THE IRON ORES. 527
SOUUCE OF CARBON DIOXIDE FOB REACTIONS WITH GREENALITE.
The reactions above describeil require a source for tlie carbon dioxiile. One source may
be the carbonaceous shites so abumhmtly associated with the carbonates. Their distilhition
during the period of deposition of the carbonates woukl furmsli carbon dioxide -for these reac-
tions. Another source may be the igneous rock from vvliich the greenahte solutions are held
to have come. To quote Chamberhn and Salisbury,"^ "The chita now at command seem to
indicate tliat carbon choxide increases greatly in relative abundance as volcanic action dies away.
Great quantities of this gas are often given forth long after all signs of active volcanism have
disappeared."
DEPOSITION OF HEMATITE, MAGNETITE, ANI^ SILICA DIRECTLY FROM HOT SOLUTIONS.
Certain facts have been described for the Keewatin iron formations indicating that the
present hematitic and magnetic jaspers may not be the result of alteration of earlier ferrous
compounds, but are original precipitates in the present form. The same kinds of solutions from
these igneous rocks being postulated as seem to be required to produce the greenahte and
carbonate, the iron oxides could be produced by the following reactions:
6FeS0, +.30 = 2Fe,(SO,)3 +FeA-
9FeS0, +40 = 3Fe.(SO,)3 +Fe30,.
Magnetite may be formed in high temperatures by the reaction of ferrous iron and water,
according to the following reaction:
3FeO + H^O = FegO, + H^.
Tills reaction is reversible. As it tloes not require change in volume, probably pressure does
not control it. As the development requires evolution of heat, the formation of magnetite is
favored by lowering of temperature. Travers ^ and, later, R. T. Chamberlin*^ have showm
that the free hydrogen in rocks may be developed in tiiis manner by artificial heating.
Tliis carries us a step farther back toward the direct pegmatitic after-effects and magmatic
segregations producing the magnetites discussed on pages 561-562.
DEPOSITION OF IRON SULPHIDE.
Iron sulphides are exceptionally abundant in connection with the carbonaceous slates and
iron carbonates, presvnnably deposited in bogs or deltas. Hydrogen sulphide characteristic of
these conditions would react upon iron carbonate and produce iron sulpiride.
Hydrocarbon distillates from muds or shales, such as are commonly given off in marshes,
would accompUsh direct reduction of soluble iron sulphates to iron sulphides.
The existence of iron sulphides as magmatic segregations and deep-seated contact minerals
points to another mode of origin of iron sulphide. The ferrous sulphate and silicic acid solu-
tions coming from extrusives being again postulated, the reduction of ferrous sulphate directly
to the sulphide could be brought about in the presence of hydrogen sulphide or hydrogen, both
of which might be emanations from the same mass.
The reaction of ferrous sulphate and magnetite would produce iron sulphide, according
to the following reaction:
FeSO, + sFcjO^ = FeS + 1 2Fe203.
CORRELATION OF LABORATORY AND FIELD OBSERVATIONS.
It appears, therefore, that the principal original iron-bearing constituents of the iron for-
mations, greenahte and carbonate, as well as the suborilinate ones, may be produced in the
laboratory with comparatively simple reactions under conditions ranging from those similar
o Chamberlin, T. C, and Salisbury, R. D., Text-book of geology, vol. 1. 1904, p. 590.
i> Travers, II. ^ .'., Proc. Roy. Soc., vol. 04, 1S98, pp. 130-1-12.
cChamberlin, R. T., The gases in rocks: Pub. Carnegie lust. So. lod, 1908.
528 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
to weathering, transportation, and deposition at ordinary temperatures, aided Ijv organic
reducing materials, to conditions of direct contribution of iron-bearing salts from the hot igne-
ous rocks to the locus of deposition. Carbonate or greenalite might develop under either set
of conditions, but on the whole tlie. former set seems to be more favorable chemically to the
development of iron carbonate associated with the carbonaceous slates and the latter set
more favorable to the development of greenalite. It also appears that iron carbonate may
develop from reactions of greenalite with carbon dioxide, and this is regarded as an adequate
though not necessary means of precipitation of iron carbonate knowTi to be more or less free
from carbonaceous material and in close association with greenalite. Iron carbonate secondary
to greenalite is commonly observed. It maj^ be noted that when carbon dioxide reacts upon
greenalite, carbon dioxide is introduced and nothing is taken awaj'. The percentage of silica
in the cherty carbonate is therefore less than the percentage of free silica in the original cherty
greenalite. The exact difference in percentage will dej)end on the proportion of greenaUte to
free sihca chosen for the reaction. An average of all the iron carbonate analyses available from
the Lake Superior iron formations gives iron 24. .56 per cent, silica 4L15 percent. An aver-
age of all the greenalite-chert analyses gives iron 2.5.05 per cent, silica 55.80 per cent. These
figures are derived from a sufficiently large number of samples to make them fair averages.
Their validity is strengthened also by their accordance with the comjiosition of the alteration
products, the ferruginous cherts and jaspers, the average composition of which has been closel}'
ascertained. The lower relative silica content of the iron carbonates is thus suggestive though
not decisive evidence of the derivation of some of the carbonates from the greenalite rocks.
A condition also pointing to reactions between iron silicate and carbon dioxide to produce
iron carbonate is the conspicuous absence in the greenalite and in some of the iron carbonate of
the bases which form soluble compounds with the silicates, especially calcium and the alkalies,
and the presence in the greenalite and iron carbonate of magnesia, a substance wliich forms an
insoluble compound with the alkaline silicates. The average content of these minor con-
stituents in the greenalite and carbonate is as follows: .
Average magnesium, calcium, sodium, and potassium content in greenalite and cherty carbonate.
Greenalite
rock.
Cherty
carbonate.
Magnesium
Calcium
Sodium and potassium.
Per cent.
4.20
.08
None.
Percent.
S.20
.86
None.
The above argument will not apply to the exceptional iron carbonates which show gradations
into limestones and ferrodolomites, as, for instance, at Gunflint Lake and at the east end of the
Gogebic district.
Wlaether u-on carbonate develops by reaction of greenahte upon carbon dioxide or under
the ordinary surface weathering conditions in the presence of organic material, when we look
into the probable sequence of events following the extrusion of the original iron-bearing igneous
rocks and leading up to the deposition of the iron formations, we note that in either case the
probable tendency would be to develop greenahte first and then carbonate. Also so far as the
two arc precipitated at the same time, the higher density of the greenalite would make it settle
first, the carbonate following later, as shown by laboratoiy c.xperuuent. ^^^len the ingretlients
of the upper Iluronian (quartz sand, mud, greenalite, and iron carbonate) are shaken up
together m a vessel of water and allowed to settle, a clean layer of sand is fonned at the bottom,
showmg a most distinct contact with the la3'er next above. Then follows greenalite with some
carbonate and mud, then carbonate and mud with some greenalite, and finally mud with some
carbonate.
Thus, whatever emphasis is put upon the different ways of producmg iron carbonate, it
seems probable that in any iron-bearing formation greenalite materials would be more abundant
near the bottom of the formation, or near shore, and the carbonate higher up, or offshore.
THE IRON ORES. 529
The distribution of the greenalite and carbonate rocks in the upper Huronian is remarkably
in accord with inferences drawn from the chemistry of tiieir deposition. GreenaHte is as yet
known only at the lowest horizons of the upper Huronian and is exposed in tlie Mesabi, Felch
Mountain, and Menominee districts and to a slight extent in the Gogebic district. In the upper
part of the iron formation of the Mesabi district iron carbonate becomes relatively more abun-
dant, and just beneath the overlying Virginia slate forms a layer up to 20 feet in thickness. la
higher parts of the upper Huronian associated with the slate in the Cuyuna, Crystal Falls, Iron
River, and Florence districts the iron formation consists dominantly of iron carbonate.
The presence of the carbonate near the base of the series in the Gogebic district would
imply under the above principles a proportionally greater abuntlance of carbon dioxide there
than in the Mesabi district, for unknown reasons.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE ORES.
GENERAL STATEMENTS.
The secondary alteration of the iron formations to ore has been accomplished by both
chemical and mechanical processes, under conditions of weathering, with modifications due to
folding, deep burial, and proximity to igneous intrusions.
All the ores are partly the result of secondary concentration, but some have suffered more
and some less concentration. Layers of iron formation origmally rich in iron hav become
iron ores by less concentration than liave layers of iron formation originally poor in iron. In
a few places in the region, as in the east end of the Gogebic district and in parts of the Mesabi
district, there is evidence that certain layers of iron formation were originally nearly rich
enough in iron to be mined as iron ores, after only a slight amount of secondary alteration. In
such places the shape and dimensions of the original layers determine essentially the shape and
dimensions of the iron ore deposits. Wliere secondary concentration has been largely effective
ill producing the iron ore, as it has in most of the larger deposits of the region, the shape and
distribution of the ore bodies are determined by the structural conditions which localize the
secondary concentration, rather than by the ]>rimary bedtling of the iron formation.
The essential secondary changes in the development of the ores have been effected by
weathering. The ores once formed, alterations effected by dynamic action, igneous intrusion,
or redeposition as fragmental sediments may be regarded as for the most part subsequent and
modif3'mg factors, tendmg to change somewhat the character of the ores and ore deposits,
but adding little to their size or richness. Dynamic and igneous metamorphism actmg before
the concentration of the ores tends to inhibit ore concentration by making the iron forma-
tion refractory to weathering agencies. In the following treatment emphasis will be placed
accordingly.
CHEMICAL AND MINERALOGICAL CHANGES INVOLVED IN CONCENTRATION OF THE ORE
UNDER SURFACE CONDITIONS.
OUTLINE OF ALTERATIONS.
It requires only the most general field observation to bring out the fact that the iron forma-
tions are being and have been rapidly altered by percolating waters carrying oxygen, carbon
dioxide, and other constituents from the surface and that the present characteristics of the
formations are considerably different from those they had when they first became consolidated.
Now they consist mainly of ferruginous chert and jasper, uith subordinate quantities of iron
ore, paint rock, greenalite, iron carbonate, amphibole-magnetite rock, etc. Formerly they
were more largely cherty iron carbonate or greenalite. Fortunately the alterations have not
everywhere gone far enough to obhterate all the original phases of the iron formations. Grada-
tions may be observed between original cherty iron carbonate or greenalite phases of the forma-
tions and the dominant alteration products, ferruginous cherts and jaspers and iron ores. The
47517°— VOL 52—11 34
530 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
former are found in protected places beneath slate or other impervious cappings; the latter
occur in portions of the formations exposed to percolating oxidizing waters. The former are
ferrous compounds, unstable under conditions of surface weathering; tiu' latter are the stable
oxides, end products of weathering. The ferruginous cherts, jaspers, and iron ores furthermore
retain textures characteristic of carbonate and greenahte, thereby betraying their derivation
from these substances. This is especially noticeable in the ores and cherts derived from green-
ahte, the pecuhar granular shapes of the greenahte being conspicuous in its derivatives. The
red, brown, and j'ellow colors of the altered phases of the formations, the ores and ferruginous
cherts, contrast strongly with the gray and green of the original cherty carbonate and greenahte,
making the alterations conspicuous to the eye, especially along fissures in the original rocks.
The secondary alterations of iron carbonate and greenahte rocks to iron ore involve (1)
oxidation and hydration of the iron minerals in place, (2) leaclaing of sihca, and (.3) introduc-
tion of secondary iron oxide and iron carbonate from other parts of the formations. These
changes may start simultaneously, but the first is usually far advanced or complete before the
other two are conspicuous. The early products of alteration therefore are ferruginous cherts — •
that is, rocks in wliich the iron is oxidized and hydrated and the sihca not removed. The
later removal of sihca is necessary to produce the ore. The secondary introduction of iron
oxide and iron carbonate in cavities left by the leaching of sihca is of httle importance in the
alteration of the greenahte rocks to ore. In the alteration of the carbonates to ore it is fre-
quently a conspicuous feature. The alteration of the original rocks of the iron formations to
ore may therefore be treated under two main heads — (1) oxidation and hydration of greenahte
and siderite, producing ferruginous chert; (2) alteration of ferruginous chert to ore by leaching
of sihca, -with or without secondary introduction of iron.
OXIDATION AND HYDRATION OF THE GREENALITE AND SIDERITE PRODUCING FERRUGINOUS CHERT.
The oxidation of the cherty iron carbonates and greenahtes to hematite or hmonite pro-
duces ferruginous cherts of varying richness. (See Pis. XLII, C, D; XLIII-XLY.) During
these changes tlie iron minerals for the most part are altered in place, but iron ma}' also be
transported and redeposited. Evidence of this is abundant in the stalactitic and botryoidal
ores lining cavities or incrusting secondary quartz crystals and numerous veins of ore cutting
across the beddmg of the formation. It will be sho\\^^ in the follo^v•ing discussion, however, that
the principal enrichment of the ore takes place in connection with the removed silica, although
in several districts the introduction of iron is very important. The oxidation and hydration of
the original iron imnerals are expressed in the following reactions:
4FeC03 (siderite) + nHjO + 20 = 2Fe203.nH20 + 400^.
4Fe(Mg)Si03.nH20 (greenahte) + 20 = 2Fe203.nH,0 + 4SiOj.
The alteration of the iron minerals is facUitated by smaU amounts of acids carried by per-
colating waters. Carbonate of iron is soluble ^nth difficulty in pure water and not easily soluble
with an excess of carbon dioxide. On the otlier hand, it is easil}' soluble in either of the stronger
acids, sulphuric or hydrocliloric. Sulphuric acid results from the decomposition of the iron
sulphide in the original carbonates and in the adjacent pyritiferous greenstones and slates.
The reaction may be^
FeS^ + H,0 + 70 = FeSO, + H,SO, . ,
This is aided in turn by carbon dioxide in the water. Thus the iron sulphide is oxidized to
ferrous sulphate^ ^\^th the simvdtaneous production of sulphuric acid, wliich attacks the iron
carbonates and changes them to soluble ferrous sulphate. In the Micliipicoten ihstrict, where
glacial erosion, has cut deep, sulphides are found abundantlv with the carbonates. Sulphate
of iron is present in veins in the ores of the Iron River chstrict. Baj-ley " found the white
efBorescence characteristic of Menominee ores to be essentially sochum sulphate with tlie for-
mula of Glauber salt, Na^SO, + lOHjO, which he regards as the result of decomposition of pyrite
oBayley, \V. S., The Menominee iron-bearing district ot Michigan: Mon. I'. S. Geol. Survey, vol. K\ 1904, pp. 390-391.
PLATE XLIII.
531
PLATE XLIII.
Photomicrographs of greenalite granules.
A. Greenalite rock (specimen 45178, elide 15652) from 100 paces north 500 paces west of the southeast corner of sec. 22,
T. 59 N., R. 15 W., Mesabi district, Minnesota. Without analyzer, X 50. The slide is selected to show both
the fresh and the slightly altered granules. Note the peculiar greenish-yellow color of the granules, their
irregular shape, and their curving tails, some of which seem to connect with adjacent granules. The homogeneous
greenish yellow colors represent the unaltered parts. The bright-green and dark-green colors represent grunerite
which has been developed from the alteration of the greenalite. The dark green is perhaps in small part iron
oxide. Described on pages 165-168.
B. The same with analyzer, X 50. The unaltered portions of the granules are nearly or quite dark under crossed nicols.
^\^lere the granules have altered to griinerite the polarization colors appear. The matrix consists of fine-.grained
chert in which the individual particles are very irregular in shape and size. Described on pages 165-168.
532
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XLIII
PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF GRUNALITE GRANULES.
PLATE XLIV.
533
PLATE XLIV.
Photomicrographs of ferruginous chert showing later stages of the alteration of
greenalite granules.
A. Ferruginouschertwith granules(8pecimen 45063, slide 15563) from nearcenterof sec. 22, T. 60 N., R. 13\V. With-
out analyzer, X 50. The granules are outlined and in part replaced by iron oxide. The matrix is chert. The
complex nature of one of the granules is to be noted. Apparently one complete small granule is entirely inclosed
in another large one. Described on pages 168-170.
B. Griineritic ferruginous chert (specimen 45603, slide 15974) from Clark mine. With analyzer, X 50. The rock
consists of chert and iron oxide and griinerite. The iron oxide is a yellowish-brown hydrated variety, which
is with difficulty distinguished from the griinerite. The granules have been entirely obliterated. Described
on pages 168-170.
634
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. XL!V
PHOTOMICROGRAPHS.
PLATE XLV.
535
PLATE XLV.
Photomicrographs of granules and concretionary structures in Clinton iron ores.
A. Granules in Clinton iron ore, from lower bed, Sand Mountain, New England City, Ga. Loaned by C. H. Smyth, jr.
Without analyzer, X 40. Granules of black and dark-brown hydrated hematite stand in a matrix of calcite.
The latter areas within the granules are also calcite. Traces of organic shells in these slides are abundant. The
granule a little to the right of the center shows this especially well. There can be no doubt as to the fact that the
granules are for the most part replacements and accretions about shells and particles of shells. It is apparent
also that there is a marked tendency for the granules to take on rounded and oval forms regardless of the shape
of the original particles of shell. Note the remarkable similarity of these granules in shape to the greenalite
granules illustrated in Plate XLII, A, B.
B. Green oolites in Clinton ore, from Clinton, N. Y. Loaned by C. H. Smyth, jr. With analyzer, X 40. Concen-
tric layers of chloritic and siliceous substance, of various shades of green and yellow, surround angular, subangular,
and rounded grains of quartz . The concentric greenish and yellowish bands under crossed nicols show black crosses
characteristic of concretionary structures. The matrix is mainlycalcite. but there are present also small particles
of quartz.
536
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. XLV
PHOTOMICROGRAPHS.
THE IRON ORES. 537
and muscovite. Iron sulpliides and chalcopyrite are also common as vein fillings. Sul])hates
are found in mine waters. (See pp. 54.3-544.) Humus acids are also well known to aid in
the solution of the iron.
Precipitation of the iron from ferrous solutions would be caused (1) by direct oxidation
and precipitation as limonite; or (2) by reaction with alkaline carbonate, producing iron car-
bonate, which in this form in the presence of oxygen alters almost immediately to hydrated
iron oxide; or (3) by loss of carbon dioxide. A small amount of secondary iron carbonate,
where iron is carried in solution as bicarbonate, observed locally in each of the districts, is
incidental to the mam process of oxidation producmg ferruginous cherts.
The oxidation of the iron in the carbonate and greenalite goes on much more easily and
rapidly than the removal of the silica and may afl'ect most or all of the carbonate or greenaUte,
producing ferruginous cherts, before the removal of the silica has gone fai' enough to be appre-
ciable. , An epitome of the storey for the formation is presented by almost any hand specimen of
iron carbonate or greenalite. The ferruginous cherts are, therefore, intermediate phases between
the original greenalite or siderite and the ore, and the principal removal of the silica is subse-
quent to the formation of the ferruginous cherts. Given sufficient time and the other necessary
favorable conditions and any part of them may become ore. In districts where greenalite
is the dominant origmal iron compound, so far as can be determined, the layers of chert in
the ferrugmous cherts prior to their alteration to ore are not veiy different m number, iron
content, and degree of hj'dration from those in the greenalite rocks, indicating but little
transfer of iron, though localh^ the segregation of silica and iron oxide into bands is more
accentuated. In districts where carbonate is an important original iron salt, the rearrange-
ment, transportation, and introduction of iron salts are quantitatively important. This is
probal)ly due to the structural conditions described on page 538. Slight rearrangements of
the iron ore are to be seen in the concretions composed of alternate concentric laj'ers of chert
and iron oxide developed during the alteration. These develop both from the iron carbonate
and from the greenalite.
Not uncommonly oxidizetl greenahte cherts are found alongside of unoxicUzed iron car-
bonate cherts. At first thought this would seem to indicate the readier oxidation of the
greenalite than the carbonate, but it is not certam that this is the case, for it is sometimes
found that the carbonate in these relations is secondary, and another possibility is that the
greenalite was oxidized at the time of its precipitation rather than secondarily.
ALTEKATION OF FERRUGINOUS CHERT TO ORE BY THE LEACHING OF SILICA, WITH OR WITHOUT
SECONDARY INTRODUCTION OF IRON.
PROCESSES INVOLVED.
Ore may be formed (1) by taking awa}' silica from the ferrugmous cherts, leavmg tlie
iron oxide; (2) by taking out silica and introducing iron in its place; or (3) by adding iron
to an extent sufficient to make the percentage of sdica a small one. In the last case there
would necessarily be a large increase in volume. Quantitative tests show that (1) is of greatest
importance, that (2) is effective only in some of the ores derived from carbonates, and that
(3) is practically negligible.
Measurements of pore space of the ores derived from the alteration of ferruginous cherts
of greenalitic origin brmg out the facts that pore space approximates the volume of silica
which has been removed (see pp. 184-185), when there has been little slump; in other words, the
filling of the pore space in the ores by sUica would nearly reproduce the composition of the fer-
ruginous cherts. It wHl be shown also that the leaching of silica from the ferruginous cherts
derivetl from greenalite alterations does not materially affect the character of the iron oxides,
especially their degree of hydration, and that therefore the nature of the ore of the deposit
is primarily determined by the changes which the greenalite undergoes when it alters to the
oxide bands of the ferruginous cherts.
Measurements of pore space in ores derived from ferruginous cherts, which in turn have
been derived from the alteration of iron carbonate, show that the pore space is less than the
538 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
volume of the silica wliieh has beeu removed. (See p. 24L) This is due i)artly to shimp,
but mamly to the fact that secondary iron oxide partly fills the openings.
The ran<^o in wliich there is conspicuous absence of evidence that iron has been transported
to any considerable extent is the Mesabi, where the flat dip exposes a larye portion of tlie for-
mation directly to oxidizing; waters, and oxidation works down more or less uniformly from the
surface, leaving; few imoxidizcd portions to contribute soluble iron salts to be earned down
and mixed witli deeper oxidizing solutions following cluuincls from the surface. In the other
districts, where the evidence of the carrying of iron is ])Iiiin, the formations are so tilted that
the underground courses of oxidizing waters from the surface pitch deeply, lea^-ing unoxi-
dized iron formation above as a source for soluble iron salts, which may be taken into solution
and carried down, and, by reaction wdth oxidizing waters, precipitate the iron oxide. This
deej) circulation of oxidizing waters afforded by steeply tilted formations permits the leaching
of silica at tlepth, thus providing openings in wliich the iron carried m solution from the upper
unoxidized portions of the formation may be deposited. It is m tliis essential that the ilesabi
conditions differ from those of the other ranges.
Silica dissolved from the iron formations has been in small part redeposited in veins, both
in ore and rock and in the crystallized quartz linings of uiany cavities in the ore, and in part
has joined the run-off. The process is going on to-day, for mine and svirface waters carry'
siUca (see pp. 540-544), an<l quartz linings of cavities may be seen to have developed since mining
explorations began. It has been suggested that the abundant chert in the ferruginous cherts
themselves might represent materials previously leached from other parts of the formations
and redeposited. As the cherts are very dense (see p. 545), there would be no room for the
addition of secondary silica except that made by the volume change in the alteration of iron
minerals or by the previous leaching of silica. Undoubtedly cavities of both sorts have been
filled to a certain extent by silica. But the process of the average increase of silica would
involve a reversal of the one which is actually observed to occur — that is, the leaching of silica
from tlie ferruginous cherts, producing the ores. We are forced to the conclusion that while
as in any metamorphic process in the belt of weathering silica is removed and silica is
deposited, the former change is predominant. A parallel may be cited in the development of
caves in limestone by solution and deposition, the process of solution predominating.
CONDITIONS FAVORABLE TO LEACHING OF SILICA.
The loss of silica from the ferruginous cherts on a large scale requires exceptionally favorable
conditions. These conditions seem to be (1) the ready access of dissolving solutions to large
surfaces of the chert and (2) the alkaline character of the dissolving solutions.
The fine and irregular grain of the cjuartz in the ferruginous cherts affords large surfaces
of contact with the water, thereby favoring solution. It is noted that where the cherts have
been coarsely recrj'stallized under the influence of intrusives there is much less tendency for the
silica to go into solution. Much of the silica in the cherts is cherty or opahne and thus easily
soluble.
The conditions favorable to rapid and abundant flow of water are due largely to structural
causes, wliich are discussed on pages 474-475. A large amount of water is needed to effect the
removal of silica. Merrill " estimates that the removal of a unit of silica requires 10,000 times its
weight in water. The removal of a large amount of silica from the iron format ions wliich has been
necessary to produce the ore deposits has therefore required a large amount of water for each
unit removed^n other words, free and vigorous flow. Thus is explained the concentration
of the ores along zones of easy flow Mhcre water is abundantly concentrated.
SOLXTTION OF SILICA FAVORED BY ALKALINE CHARACTER OF WATERS.
The solution of silica is favored by the alkaline character of the waters. Alkaline car-
bonates react upon quartz, forming soluble alkaline silicates with release of carl)ou dioxide.
Sodium carbonate may not stand in a glass bottle without dissolving it. Well waters in the
o Merrill. G. P., Rocks, rock weathering, and soils, New York, 1897, p. 238.
THE IRON ORES. 539
vicinity of Ironwood, Mich., obviously the same waters that are entering the formations, are
throughout alkahne in their reactions. Many solution cavities left by the leacliing of silica
are lined by ailularia crystals (potassium feldspars), as in the cavities left by the leacliing of
quartz pebbles from the ore at the base of the upper Iluronian of the Marquette district.
All the ore deposits of the Lake Superior region are close enough to igneous roclcs to have
been altered by waters which have probably derived an alkaline content from the leaching of
the igneous rocks. In the Mesabi district all the waters entering the iron formation have pre-
viously come down across the Giants Range granite and in a few places have jnet granite dikes
within the formation and thoroughly leached them of their bases. In the Goge])ic tlistrict the
dikes (see analyses, p. 240) closely associated with the ores have been so thorouglily leached oi
their bases that the residual clayey material is known as paint rock or soaps tone. A glance at
the maji of the Marquette district (PI. XVII, in pocket) will show the abundance of basic
intrusive rocks in the iron-bearing areas. These again near the contact with the ores have been
altered to soap rock and- paint rock, thereby delivering their bases to the solutions which have
developed the ore. In the Crystal Falls district the relation is not less obvious. The ores are
throughout not far from the basic eruptive roclvs. In the Cuyuna district intrusive rocks
are everywhere associated with the ores. In the Menominee district the relation is not so
obvious, although the igneous rocks appearing on both sides of the Menominee trough may
well have afl'ected the character of the water in the ores. Probably, however, tlie waters have
been rendered effective principally by solution of the dolomite associated with or immediately
underlying nearly all the deposits. It is noted in nearly all the districts that where the ore
comes into contact with slate the slate has been altered to paint rock. A comparison of the
composition of paint rock and the unaltered slate shows that alkalies have been taken out in
the development of the paint rock. Here again, then, is a factor favoring the alkaline character
of the waters.
TRANSFER OF IRON IN SOLUTION.
So far as iron is carried in solution it is probably in the early stages of the alteration of any
particular part of a formation, when there are still ferrous compounds to work upon. AVlien
nothing but ferric iron remains, this is insoluble and the princi})al further alteration is the
removal of silica. If the iron finds lodgment in the formation before the silica is taken out it
can be only on a small scale, for the voids are not large enough to contain much ore. When iron
is introduced after all the silica is taken out, its introduction may not materially change the
percentage of iron in the ore. It will merely reduce the pore space.
SECONDARY CONCENTRATION OF THE ORES CHARACTERISTIC OF WEATHERING.
Quartz is ordinarily regarded as practically insoluble in surface waters. It might be
argued that the conditions above cited are not peculiar to iron formations alone but may be
found elsewhere, and the question is raised whether elsewhere quartz is largely taken into solu-
tion. We believe that quartz is taken into solution under ordinarj^ conditions of weathering
to a larger extent than is general^ recognized, and that it is apparently stable because it is
usually associated with more soluble constituents, thereby contrasting with the iron formations,
where the quartz is associated with less soluble constituents against which the loss of quartz
may be measured. A series of three analyses of fresh granite, partly altered granite, and much
weathered granite from Georgia published by Watson," when recalculated in terms of minerals,
shows that in the early stages of the alteration the quartz is but little affected, but that in the
last stage there is unquestionable evidence of considerable leaching of free quartz.
In general comparison of analyses of fresh and weathered igneous and other rocks shows
that iron and alumina are the two most stable constituents and that in weathering under oxidizing
conditions silica is lost more readily than the iron. The iron formation, consisting principally of
iron minerals and silica and lacking alumina, would therefore be expected to retam its iron
« Watson, T. L., Granites and gneisses of Georgia: Bull. Geol. Survey Georgia No. 9A, 1902, p. 302.
540 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
under weaLliering to a greater extent than the sihca, and in so doing has followed the general
laws of katamorphism. The absence of evidence of transfer of iron during secondary concentra-
tion on a large scale is in strong contrast with its transportation in large amounts in the primary
concentration. The secondary local transfers of iron in the fcn-ous condition before it is oxidized
to the stable form are characteristic of both tlic iron formation and igneous rocks and do not dis-
prove the general ]iiinciple above stated.
In general the same processes of weathering that have j)r()duced residual clay from igneous
rocks are the ones which have secondarily concentrated the iron ores. Most igneous rock con-
tains so little iron and so much alumina and silica that secondary concentiation fails to ])roduce
an iron ore directly from it; it produces an iron-stained clay. Exce])tionalIy, however, as from
the serpentine rocks of Cuba, which have a low content of alumina, secondary concentration
has produced a mixture of iion ore and clay, and the clay, by extreme weathering at the surface,
has broken down further, by loss of sUica, to bauxite. The result is a lateritic iron ore."
MECHANICAL CONCENTRATION AND EROSION OF IRON ORES.
The loosening of silica grains by solution locally makes it possible for them to be carried
mechanically by the meteoric wateis. This jjiocess becomes one of some importance when the
openings have been made sufficiently large by solution. Where the mine waters are dammed,
there is very commonly a considerable sediment of fine-grained chert sand. This process
probably also exjilains the occurrence of finely granular chert sand in seams and crevices in
certain Mesabi ore deposits. The process is probably more conspicuous now tlian it was before
mining ojjenings gave a chance for the accumulations of these silica sands. It is diflicult to see
where, under original conditions, these sands could have been deposited. The}' are found filling
openings underground only to a very small extent, and it is unhkely tliat they would follow
the underground waters into the run-ofl'.
So far as pore space has been lessened by mechanical slump anywhere througli tlie iron
formation, this amounts to a decrease in volume antl increases the amount of iron in a given
volume of iron formation. It is shown in the chapters relating to the difl'erent districts that
this j)rocess has gone on to a consideral)le extent.
Locally, as at the base of the Vulcan formation in the Menominee district, at the base of
the Goodrich (juartzite in the Marcpiette district, and in the Cretaceous of the Mesabi district,
there is fragmental detritus deriveil l)y the processes of disintegration, transportation, and
sedimentation from earlier-formetl iron-bearing formations. T\liere this includes sorting, it
amounts to mechanical concentration (PI. XL VI).
Artificial concentration of ore by removal of the chert through washing is now being practiced
on tiie western Mesabi, where the chemical processes have gone just far enough to loosen tlie
chert. There is an enormous mass of material available. In fact, this is the partly altered
iron-beaiing formation itself, rather than concentrations within the fornuition. A consiilerable
amount of iron is lost during the process, because the iron and chert are attached to each other.
Much of the silica in the ferruginous cherts is so very fine grained and so intimately associ-
ated with the iron that it could probably never.be se|)arated by crushing anil washing. That
separation is possible on tiie western Mesabi is due to the banded nature of the ferruginous
chert and the fact that the finer-grained portions have been removed by solution, leaving the
larger j)ieces of chert loose.
GENERAL CHARACTER OF MINE WATERS.
Tlie mine waters of all but tlie deepest jiaits of some of liie mines are characterized by
considerable contents of carbonates of the alkalies ami alkaline earths, together with silica.
Iron is usually present only in traces or entireh' lacking.
The shallower mine waters are represented bj- the following analyses:
oLelth.C. K.,an(l Mead, W. J., Origin ol the Iron ores of central and northeastern Cuba: Bull. .\in. Inst. Min. Eng. No.51, 1911, pp. 217-229.
PLATE XL VI.
541
PLATE XLVI.
Ore and jasper conglomerate and ferruginous chert.
Ore and jasper conglomerate from Saginaw range, Marquette district, Michigan. This is a t\pifal basal conglom-
erate of the Goodrich quartzite of the upper Huronian. The detritus consists almost wholly of various materials
denved from the Negaunee formation, including jasper, chert, and ore. There is present, however, some quartz
derived from the Archean. A close examination of the illustration shows that secondary hematite and ma-netite
have largely formed in the spaces between the grainsabout many of the jasper fragments, and, indeed have'partly
replaced the jasper fragments themselves. This is beautifully shown at the lower left-hand comer of the fi-iu-e
In the places where the basal conglomerate is fine grained these replacements by iron oxide may be almost com-
plete, m which case an iron-ore deposit is formed. Of such an origin is the iron ore of the Volunteer and some
other mines.
Ferruginous chert from point south of Jackson mine, Marquette district, Michigan (sec. 1, T. 47 N., R 27 W )
The iron oxide and chert were largely concentrated into bands before the last folding. At the time of the folding
radial cracks were formed, especially in the chert layers, owing to the position of the rock on the rrown of an
anticline. Along these cracks the silica has to some extent been leached out and iron oxide introduced One
light-colored area of chert appears to be a secondary infiltration, but it was apparently present before the last-
folding, as it is fractured in the same way as the other layers. Natural size.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XLVI
(A) ORE AND JASPER CONGLOMERATE FROM MARQUETTE DISTRICT, MICHIGAN
fBj FERRUGINOUS CHERT
THE IRON ORES.
543
Analysis of water from a drift between the Hull and RuM mines west of Ribbing , Mesabi district/^
[Parts per million.]
CO2 71
SiOj 22. 35
SO, 2.2
PO4 Trace?
Fe Not a trace.
Ca 10.1
K .97
Analysis of water from Newport mine, Gogebic district.
[Parts per millioD. Analyst, R. D. Hall, University of Wisconsin.]
SiO, 8. 43
Fe^Oj 1. 23
AI2O3 6
CaO 21. 3
MgO 16.1
NajO 5. 4
K,0 1.83
CI 6.0
SO3 .■ 10.8
CO2 (combined) as carbonate 30. 5
CO2 (free) as bicarbonate 18. 0
PA None.
Drying at 100° 108. 3
Ignited ' 68. 6
Some of the deep mine waters have been found to be highly concentrated solutions of
calcium and sodium chlorides, according to the following analyses. Such waters are extremely
corrosive in boilers and pumps.
Analyses of Michigan iron mine waters."
Vulcan.
Ishpem-
ing.
Iron-
wood.
Hurley.
Bessemer.
Cham-
pion.
Republic
Total solids (soluble)
0.340
.2.'i0
.052
0.344
0.232
0.142
.0876
1.493
0.309
7.15
Organic
(.020)
.055
.051
.061
.060
(?)
.038
Tr.
.000
. ori4
Tr.
.043
.163
.019
.062
.006
.028
.013
.010
.018
.171
(.007)
.062
.011
.030
.004
.011
.002
.046
.034
.022
(.047)
.005
/ With
t ?Na
.010
.001
.070
.016
.025
.003
.009
} (?)
.012
.001
(.037)
.638
.220
.081
.073
Tr.
.010
.020
(.050)
.060
.040
(.039)
.008
Chlorine (CI)
3.061
.817
25 36
7 202
Sodium (Na) . .. ..
7 ^^9
.500
Pnta.<y:inm (K).
Silica (Si02)
Alumina (AI2O3).
.003
Not det.
0
.37
700
Tr.
Sulphate ion (SCO
.013
.011
.040
.005
.058
.040
1 045
.263
.99
0
.70
.332
3.2
.315
.68
.309
8.9
1.8
(1.47)
.205
.65
1.38
1.18
.141
1.56
.187
.31
1.137
.345
.127
.092
Ratios:
Ca : CI2
.66
.65
.66
.27
Na:Clj
''84
SO, :C1
.12
a Furnished by A. V. Lane, State geologist of Michigan. Mnrch, 1909.
Highly mineralized waters have also been found on the eighth level of the Great Western
mine, in the Crystal Falls district of Michigan. No analyses are available, but tests by the
mine chemists showed the presence of calcium chloride and magnesium sulphates.
The upper carbonate waters are abundant, rapidly flowing, dilute, and more or less direct
from the surface, carrying gases of the atmosphere. They are the w aters which accomplish the
major part of the secondary concentration of ore, as showTi by the limitation of the ore deposits
to places of rapid circulation of these waters and further by the known chemical eflfects of
waters of this type upon the original iron-bearing formation.
o Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey vol. 43, 1903, p. 264.
544 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The deep chloride waters are relatively minute in quantity and liigldy coneentratecl. Their
distribution is very irregular. Small reservoirs may be tapped and exliausted alongside of
flows of fresher water. Waters of very similar characteristics are found in the deep copper
mines of the Lake Superior region, in the deep levels of the Silver Islet silver mine," on the
north shore of Lake Su|>erior, in deep wells in the Paleozoic of the upper Mississippi Valley, in
the granites of the Piedmont area of Georgia, and elsewhere. Their characteristics seem not
to be related to certain kinds of rocks or ore deposits, but to depth and stagnant conditions.
Chlorine is present in minute quantities in original igneous rocks and in nearl}' all surface waters.
Its salts tend to remain in solution, while the salts of other acids are more largely precipitated.
With a given amount of water, there seems likely to be, therefore, a progressive relative accumu-
lation of chlorine salts. Such is the case in salt waters at the earth's surface, where a large
factor in the accumulation is the lack of sufficient circulation to carry off and dilute the salt
waters that are developing by evaporation. In deep underground Maters there is essentially
the same condition of stagnancy, and therefore we suggest jirogressive accumulation of soluble
chlorine salts. In the shallower mine waters the rapid circulation and accession of fresh waters
from the surface prevent such accumulation of salt.
The proportion of sodium chloride to calcium cliloride in deep mine waters in the Lake
Superior region becomes relatively less with increase in depth, indicating that the increasing
content of chlorine is able to hold not only all sodium present but larger amounts of calcium.
The materials in solution under any conditions must be regarded as representing the residual
solutions from which all possible insoluble minerals have already crystaUized out. All the
Lake Superior mines, both iron and copper, are associated with basic rocks in which calcium
greatly predominates over the sodium, so that whenever the sodium is taken care of by the
clilorine present there should always be a considerable excess of calcium available.
Lane, who has given special attention to deep mine w* aters and who has brought together the
analyses above quoted, otl'ers quite "another explanation for the characteristics of these deep
waters. He beUeves them to be connate or fossil sea waters, included in the rocks, both igneouf
and sedimentary^ during submarine deposition. The fact that they differ from present sea
water in having so large a proportion of calcium chloride he ascribes to a possible change in
composition of the sea water during geologic time in the direction of increasing the proportion
of sodium chloride as compared with calcium chloride to the present known proportion of sea
water. We do not follow him in this conclusion because of the fact, already cited, that these
pecuhar salt waters seem to be characteristic not only of marine sediments but of sediments of
subaerial origin, of surface eruptives, and of plutonic igneous rocks. They are related to depth
and stagnancy rather than to kind of rock or geologic horizon. There seems to be no adequate
reason for regarding these waters as fossil sea waters, for all the essential kinds of conditions
which produce the salt water of the ocean are present.
LOCALIZATION OF THE ORES CONTROLLED BY SPECIAL STRUCTURAL AND TOPOGRAPHIC
FEATURES.
From the foregoing discussion it appears that the iron ores constitute concentrations in the
exposed parts of the iron-bearing formations accomplished on the average mainly b}^ the removal
of associated silica, leaving the iron oxidized and in larger percentage, but to an important
extent accomplished also by solution, transportation, and redeposition of the iron when it was
still in its soluble ferrous condition. The agents of alteration are surface waters carrying oxygen
and carbon dioxide from the atmosphere. The accessibihty to the iron-bearing formations of
these agents therefore determines the location, shape, and size of the deposits. The structural
conditions favoring such accessibihtj' have been summarizeil in the earlier part of this chapter
(see pp. 474-475), and are discussed in some detail in connectit)n with the ores of the individual
districts. They may be merely mentioned here. The most favorable condition is afforded
by wide area of exposure of the formation, which in turn is a function of the dip. Fractures,
» iDgall, E. D., Report on mines and mining on Lake Superior: Ann. Rept. Oeol. Survey Canada for 18$7-SS, vol. 3, pt. 2, 1889, p. 2SB.
THE IRON ORES. 545
impervious basements, and varying porosity also serve to concentrate the circulation. Ores
are not found, however, in some places where area, fractures, and impervious basements seem
to be favorable for ore concentration. This is beheved to be due in some part to the denseness of
the cherts in these places, preventing access of water. Wherever the rocks are dense the silica
is not removed. The amphibole-magnetite cherts, the unaltered greenalite and siderite rocks,
and the quartzites associated with the iron-bearing formations all have very Uttle pore space, as
shown by a considerable number of determinations. Silica is not removed directly from these
rocks. On the other hand, the ferruginous cherts, resulting from the alteration of cherty iron
carbonates and greenalites, contain pore space averaging about 5 per cent, developed by the
lessening of the volume of the iron minerals during their alteration from the ferrous to the
ferric form. Tliis pore space is so distributed as to give the water access to all parts of the
rock mass. The size of grain is so small that for each grain there is a large surface in proportion
to volume. But even the ferruginous cherts are locally so dense that they do not allow ready
access of water. Several possible reasons may be suggested for this unusual density. (1) The
ferruginous cherts at these places may not have been derived by alteration from cherty car-
bonates or greenahtes but may have been deposited directly in their present form as chemical
sediments mth small pore space. It has been shown that this could easily go on with the
deposition of greenahte and carbonate. This explanation would seem to be especially Ukely
to hold for certain of the amphibohtic cherts of the Keewatin, wliich are intimately associated
with basalt flows both above and below and wliich it is entirely conceivable might have been
originally deposited in a condition different from those of the cherty carbonates and greenalites
of the later iron-bearing formations. (2) Metamorpliism of the cherts under pressure after pore
space had been developed by oxidation of the iron minerals may have closed the openings before
the siUca had been taken out. Cherts wliich have been much folded and contorted at so great
depth as to be deformed without fractures are almost invariably dense. The Keewatin iron-
bearing formations are the oldest and have naturally suffered more from such metamorpliism
than the later formations, and this may be a factor in the barrenness of the Keewatin. On the
other hand, larger areas of the upper Huronian are comparatively Uttle deformed and pore
spaces formed by the oxidation of the iron minerals have remained substantially open since
upper Huronian time. (3) The openings may have been closed by infiltrated sihca and iron.
In the Marquette jasper, secondary materials completely heal the rock. The relative importance
of these conditions affecting pore space varies from place to place and between the different
iron-bearing formations, and this variation is beheved to account in large measure for the marked
differences in enrichment of different formations and different parts of formations.
Undoubtedly the processes of secondary concentration above described tend to affect to
a greater or less degree all the exposed surface of the iron-bearing formations. It is not unlikely
that in long periods of slow denudation ores may have actually covered all of this surface.
It is equalljr obvious, however, that the covering had various depths, depemlmg on a consider-
able variety of structural conditions. The glacial denudation has scraped off ore which may
once have developed at the surface, and little has developed since. There remam only
the lower parts of the deposits left by denudation. A discussion of the structural conditions
governing the ore deposits is therefore really a discussion of the conditions determining their
lower limit and configuration. The structural and topographic conditions of each of the dis-
tricts are summarized in other chapters.
QUANTITATIVE STUDY OF SECONDARY CONCENTRATION.
The nature of the secondary concentration of Lake Superior iron ores has been in the
past inferred almost entirely from qualitative evidence. The extensive commercial develop-
ment of the ores of this region during recent years now makes available data for quantitative
study of the origin and concentration of the ores. Although there is a great similarity in the
secondary concentration of all the iron ores of the Lake Superior region, certain local difler-
47517°— VOL 52—11 35
546 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ences require that each of the several districts be discussed independently. This is done in the
chapters on the several districts.
The average change in secondary concentration, based on all available analyses (seep. 181),
is graphically expressed in figures 20 (p. 189) and 31 (p. 245).
ALTERATIONS OF IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS BY IGNEOUS INTRUSIONS.
ORES AFFECTED.
The changes described in the foregoing sections have completed the development of the
ore deposits of the Mesabi, Gogebic, Menominee, part of the Marquette, Crystal Falls, Iron
River, Florence, and Cuyuna districts, wliich yield roughly 93 per cent of the total ore mined
annually in the region. Other ores, such as the hard ores of the Marquette and Vermihon
districts and the magnetic rocks of the Mesabi and Gogebic, have suffered certain additional
vicissitudes of anamorphic alterations by igneous intrusion, thus becoming the hard, dense,
recrystalhzed, more or less magnetic, dehydrated, and silicated ores described below. (See
Pis. XXXV, p. 470, and XLVII.) The development of some of these characteristics may have
been synchronous with the deposition of the iron-bearing formation under the influence of
contemporaneous igneous extrusives, discussed on page 527, but whatever the probabiMty
of this there is no doubt that characteristics of this kind have been developed mamly bv later
intrusives.
The intrusion of small masses of igneous material, as the dikes in the Gogebic district and
certain of the bosses in the Marquette district, has apparently but slightly' metamorphosed
the iron-bearmg formation, ^\^lere great masses of igneous material have come into contact
with the iron-bearing formation, however, marked results have followed, as near the Duluth
gabbro, the gabbro of the western Gogebic district, and the intrusives of the western Marquette
district.
POSSIBLE CONTRIBUTIONS FROM IGNEOUS ROCKS.
The characteristic features of the amphibole-magnetite rocks of the iron-bearing forma-
tions described above become more accentuated in approach to the igneous rocks, leaving no
doubt that they are the metamorphic result of the intrusion of the gabbro. The facts available
indicate to some extent also the processes through which this result is accomplished. The
question first to be answered is whether or not the iron-bearing formation owes its character-
istics near the contact to direct contribution from the hot intrusives or to the recrystallization
of substances already in the iron-bearing formation. The essential similarity of composition
of the amphibole-magnetite rocks with that of the ferruginous cherts (see p. 204) argues against
large introduction of materials from the gabbro. Had such materials been introduced on a
large scale they would probably have considerably changed the proportions of the elements
present, for otherwise it would be necessary to assume that the materials contributed from the
gabbro had been in the same proportion as those originally present in the iron-bearing forma-
tion. The magnetite in the gabbro is titanic, while that in the adjacent iron formation is not.
The higher sulphur content in tlie amphibole-magnetite rocks may mdicate direct contribution
of sulphur, though this may also be original in the iron-bearmg formation. (See pp. 550, 552.)
Wliether or not there was some small introduction of materials from the gabbro, the bulk
analyses of the amphibole-magnetite rocks are so similar to those of the other phases of the
iron-bearing formation as not to require the assumption of delivery of hot solutions from the
gabbro to the iron formation.
Furthermore, there is no regular variation in the composition of metamorphic phases of
the iron-bearing formation through the several hundred feet from the contact for which these
phases are known in many places to extend. Finally, the very fact that the metamorphic
phases of the iron formation extend so far and so uniformly from the gabbro contact argue
against their development by accession of materials from the gabbro.
It is conchuled, therefore, that the princijial efl'ect of the intrusion of the gabbro into the
iron-bearing formation was that of recrystallization of substances already present and not by
contribution of solutions.
PLATE XL VII.
547
PLATE XLVII.
Photomicrographs of ferruginous and amphibolitic chert of iron-bearing Biwabik
formation near contact with duluth gabbro.
A. Actinolitic, griineritic, and magnetitic chert (specimen 45141, slide 15621) from southeast of center of sec. 17,
T. 60 N . , K. 12 W. , Mesabi district, Minnesota. Without analyzer, X 50. This rock is close to the contact with
the Duluth gabbro and shows the tj-pical alterations characteristic of the contact. The chert is in much larger
particles than in the western portion of the range away from the contact. The particles fit in somewhat regular
polygonal blocks. The iron oxide is magnetite instead of hydrated hematite, and actinolite and griinerite are
present. The amphiboles are in small quantity in the slide shown, but the short actinolite needles may be seen
inclosed in the quartz. (See PI. XXXV.)
B. Actinolitic slate (specimen 9555, slide 3190) from Penokee Gap, NW. \ sec. 11, T. 44 N., R. 3 W., Wisconsin. In
polarized light, X 165. The section is a typical actinolitic slate. The quartz is completely crystallized. The
magnetite has mostly well-defined crystal outlines and is manifestly the first mineral to crystallize, being scat-
tered uniformly through the section without any regard to the actinolite and quartz and therefore included by
both of them. The actinolite is in its characteristic blades and sheaf-like forms, hav-ing a radial arrangement of
its fibers. It is as plainly the second mineral to crystallize, as needles of actinolite everjTvhere penetrate the
quartz, but never the magnetite. The quartz constitutes a background for the magnetite and actinolite and
includes them in such a manner as to make the. conclusion certain that it must in the main have crystallized
subsequently to the formation of the magnetite and actinolite. (See PI. XXXV.)
548
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH LH PLATE XLVII
PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF FERRUGINOUS AND AMPHIBOLITIC CHERT OF IRON-BEARING
FORMATION NEAR CONTACT WITH DULUTH GABBRO.
THE IRON ORES.
549
TEMPERATURE UNDER WHICH CONTACT ALTERATIONS WERE EFFECTED.
The significant discovery by Wright and Day," of the geophysical hiboratory of tlie Carnegie
Institution of Wasliington, that quartz crystalhzed below 575° dift'ers in its properties from
quartz crystallized above tliis temperature affords a satisfactory means of determining tlie
temperatures at which the quartz of the iron-bearing formation has crystallized. Doctor Wright
has kindly determined for us the properties of the quartzes in specimens from different parts
of the Lake Superior iron-bearing formations, some of them clearly developed under katamorphic
conditions, some of them near the contact with the gabbro. His observations are as follows:
Properties of quartz crystals from iron-bearing formations.
Speci-
men No.
Number
of sec-
tions cut.
Average
diameter
(mm.).
Circular polarization.
Twinning, etch flgures.u
R.
L.
H.-fL.
Character
of inter-
growth.
Number
not
twinned.
Number
twinned.
Character of twinning.
A
B
29955
29450
5
6
4
6
7
5
1.5
2.0
4
1
6
Regular
do
2
3
fi
4
4
Regular large patches.
Do.
Regular.
Often irregular and small.
3
3
1
3
2
n Etched 1} hours in cold commercial hydrofluoric acid.
.\. Crystalline quartz in ore from Vermilion district.
B. Crystalline quartz in ore from Mesabi district.
29955. Coarsely recrystallized iron-bearing formation, 300 feet from gabbro contact, northwest of Paulson mine camps, Gnnflint district, north-
eastern Minnesota.
29450. Coarsely recrystallized iron-bearing formation in actual contact with Duluth gabbro at east end of Fay Lake, Gunflint district, north-
eastern Minnesota.
The quartz of Nos. A and B occurs in clear crystals and free from fracture.s. The usual -f- and — unit rhomlio-
hedrons are present; also the prism faces. On A crystals there is also present the rhombohedron (1121) and a trigonal
trapezohedron form; this in itself is proof that the A quartz was formed below 575°.
The aljove observations show conclusively that the A, B, and 29955 quartzes [distant from gabbro contacts] have
not been heated above 575° ; that they were formed below that temperature. Specimen 29450 [at gabbro contact] is less
regular in its behavior and resembles in that respect the quartz of .some pegmatites. It is not as shattered as granite
quartzes usually are and yet is not so regular as the definitely lower temperature quartzes. I concluded that in the
pegmatites such quartz was formed probably near the inversion temperature 575°, because pegmatite dense quartz
is definitely the low a form while some pegmatite quartz is definitely high 6 quartz. This was proved on one and
the same dike.
It seems to me probable, therefore, that the temperature of formation of the quartz band in specimen 29450 was
not far from 575°.
It is obvious from these results that the iron-bearing formation as a whole has not been
fused, for its fusion temperature is certainly higher than 575°. This conclusion, together with
the one above referring to the lack of transfer of material from the gabbro to the iron-bearing
formation, emphasizes strongly the probabihty that the metamorphism of the iron formation
near the gabbro was primarily the result of recrystallization below fusion temperature, with
the aid of heat from the gabbro.
CHARACTER OF IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS AT THE TIME OF INTRUSIONS OF IGNEOUS
ROCKS.
Wliat were the constituents originally present in the iron-bearing formations at the time
of the intrusion? Were they the ferruginous cherts earlier developed from the alteration of
cherty carbonates or gi'eenalite rocks, or were they the chcrty carbonates and greenalite rocks
themselves? If prior to the intrusion of the igneous rock the iron existed as ferric hydrate,
then the change to magnetite involved deoxidation. This, according to Moissan,'' will occur
at .300° in 30 minutes in a hydrogen atmosphere. The presence of an actively reducmg agent
of tliis type along igneous contacts, wliile perhaps locally probable, can not be proved on any
a Wright, F. E., and Larsen, E. S., Quartz as a geologic thermometer: Am. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 27, 1909, pp. 421-427.
6 Moissan, H., Compt. Rend., vol. 84, p. 129C.
550 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
large scale. If prior to the intrusion of the igneous rock the iron was in the ferrous condition,
either as greenahte or carbonate, then moderate heat was sufficient to produce magnetite by
robbing the associated water of part of its oxygen. (See p. 526.) This alteration is thought
in general to be a more common one than the reduction of iron to magnetite from the ferric
state. In the Lake Superior region there is field evidence also that the development of the
amphibole-magnetite rocks has been more largely accomplished by partial oxidation of the
ferrous iron than by the reduction of ferric oxide. In places in the Lake Superior region, where
there is good field evidence that the iron-bearing formation had been exposed and altered to
ferruginous cherts before the introduction of igneous rocks — as, for instance, in the eastern part
of the Marquette district or at Sunday Lake in the Gogebic district — it is found that the contact
effect of the intrusives has been to produce the bright-red banded specular jaspers or black
magnetitic jaspers rather than ampliibole-magnetite rocks. In the Marquette district it was
long ago noted that the lower parts of the Negaunee formation in contact with intrusives devel-
oped amphibole and magnetite, while the upper parts developed the banded specidar jaspers.
The cement in these rocks is usually magnetite. Smyth" argued that tliis present ditference
in the character of the rocks at upper and lower horizons, especially for the Republic trough,
is so uniform as to indicate an original difference in the beds at these horizons. The magnesia
content of the ampliibole-magnetite rocks for the most part seems to be like that of the original
greenalites and carbonates rather than that of their altered derivatives, ferruginous cherts.
In the alteration of carbonates or greenalites to cherts magnesia is lost. (See p. 528.) Had
the ampliibole-magnetite rocks developed from the ferruginous cherts, it would be necessary
to assume that magnesia had been introduced in just the percentage of the original siderite
and greenalite rocks.
Sulphur is also more abundant in the original phases of the iron-bearing fonnation than
in its katamorphosed products, though no figures are available to show what the average sul-
phur content is, because analyses have ordinarily been made of the greenalite and siderite
where free from sulphur. Contact or deep-seated mctamorphism would not remove this sul-
phur, and this is thought to be the probable explanation of the high sulphur in the amphibole-
magnetite rocks. The alternative explanation is that sulphur had been introduced directly
from the igneous rocks.
CHEMISTRY OF ALTERATIONS.
The chemistry of the alterations from original ferrous compounds, greenalite and siderite,
to ampliibole-magnetite rocks presents less difficulty than that of the alteration of ferruginous
cherts, or ferric compounds, to the amphibole-magnetite rocks. The former alteration requires
partial oxidation of a ferrous compound ; the latter requires reduction of a ferric compound,
which is thought to be much less common.
On the assumption that the ampliibole-magnetite rocks had developed directly from the
cherty iron carbonates and greenalites, the changes would be substantially as follows: *"
Where the carbonate is nearly pure siderite, griinerite is produced, according to the following reaction:
reC03+Si02=FeSi03+COj,
with a decrease of volume of 32 per cent, provided the silica be a solid and the carbon dioxide escape. Where the
original material was hydrous ferrous silicate, greenalite, simple dehydration only is necessary to form the griinerite.
Where the iron-bearing carbonate bears calcium and magnesium in considerable quantity, instead of griinerite
being produced sahlite or actinolite may be formed. Supposing the carbonate to be normal ankerite, sahlite is pro-
duced, according to the following reaction:
CaFeCACaMgCjOe-|-4Si02=Ca2MgFeSi40,j-l-4C02,
with a decrease in volume of 37 per cent, provided the silica lie solid and the carbon dioxide escape.
From ankerite actinolite may be produced, according to the following reaction:
3(CaFeC20„.CaMgC20e)-|-8Si02=Ca2Mg3Fe3Si024-t-SCOo+4CaC03,
with a decrease in volume of 23 per cent, provided the silica be a solid, the CaCOs formed remain as a solid, and the
carl)ou dioxide escape.
o Mon. IT. S. Oeol. Survey, vol. 28, 1897, p. 530.
» Vau Hlse, C. R., A treatise ou metaraorphism: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 47, 1904, pp. S34-S37.
THE IRON ORES. 551
If a more ferriferous and less calcareous iron-bearing carbonate be taken, it would not be necessary to suppose any
calcium carbonate to have separated.
The iron-bearing carbonates may be very impure, just as limestones may be impure; and in this case there may
develop various other minerals. In proportion as impurities are mingled with the carbonates, other amphiboles and
the pjToxenes, micas, garnets, and other heavy minerals such as olivine may abundantly develop; and thus there may
be produced a great variety of rocks, such as garnetiterous magnetite rocks, micaceous griinerite rocks, etc. As the
impurities become abundant and the silicates other than griinerite, sahlite, and actinolite more prominent, the altera-
tions become nearly those of the fragmental rocks. Between the two there are, of course, all gradations.
But as a matter of fact, the two silicates which most extensively form by the alterations of the iron-bearing carbon-
ates in the zone of anamorphism are actinolite and griinerite. Where these reactions are complete we may have, in
place of the iron-bearing carbonate, actinolite rocks, griinerite rocks, and all gradations between them.
Where the iron-bearing formation is originally greenalite, the alteration to the amphiboles
would be simply one of dehydration.
The development of magnetite directly from the iron carbonates is possible by the following
reactions;
2FeC03 + FeSj -f 2H2O =Fe30, + 2H2S + 2C02,°
3FeC03 + H,0 =Fe30, + 3C0. + H,
3FeC03 =Fe30, + CO + 2C02,°
BFeCOj -t- O =Fe30, + BCO^."
Carbon dioxide is driven off at temperatures probably as low as 400°. At these and higher
temperatures the ferrous iron remaining will rob the water of its oxygen, forming magnetite.
Siderite at red heat passes into a magnetic oxide with the formation of both carbonic acid and carbonic oxide.
According to Dobereiner this reaction takes place as follows :o
5FeC03=3FeO.Fe203+4C02+CO.
Glasson.b however, says that 4FeO.Fe203 results, at first giving two parts of CO., and one of CO, but that later the
proportion changes to five parts of COj and one of CO."^
Van Hise " says, again :
Observation in the field show.s beyond question that the change fi'om iron carbonate to magnetite takes place on
an extensive scale. Wliich of the above reactions is tlae more important may be an open question.
The alteration of greenalite to magnetite is possible by the following reaction:
3FeSi03nH20 + O =Fe30, + SSiO, -f nH^O.
■^Tiich of the above rocks develops at a given place depends not only upon the original composition of the rocks,
but upon the nature of the alteration. For instance, where in the original rock silica is subordinate and nearly pure
siderite abundant, a quartzose magnetite may develop, as at various places in the Lake Superior region. WTiere the
conditions are such that the silicates form, the development of the actinolite or gi-iinerite uses up both the iron carbonate
and the silica, and an actinolite rock or a gi'iinerite rock may be produced. Wliere silica was originally an abundant
constituent both magnetite and the silicates are likely to develop. Thus we have various proportions of all the min-
erals, producing the magnetite-quartz rocks, the actinolite-magnetite-quartz rocks, the griinerite-magnetite-quartz
rocks, the actinolite-quartz rocks, and the griinerite-quartz rocks. <2
BANDING OF AMPHIBOLE-MAGNETITE ROCKS. <■
Usually a given formation, or member, does not show a perfectly homogeneous arrangement of the mineral particles.
The original sedimentary rock is banded, and the different bands have different compositions. Naturally the trans-
formation of these bands produces different combinations of minerals. Moreover, during the recrystallization there
is a tendency for minerals of the same kind to segregate. Hence, in any of the above cases, where as a whole a certain
Bet of minerals are dominant within a rock, a single mineral, or two combined, may be largely segregated in bands; and
in the alternate bands the other minerals be largely segregated. Thus a banded rock, consisting mainly of magnetite
and quartz, may have a banded appearance as the result either of the segregation of the quartz and magnetite in sepa-
rate bands or, more commonly, the segregation of more quartz and less magnetite in one band and less quartz and more
magnetite in another band. In a similar manner alternate bands may be made up of actinolite or griinerite with quartz
o Van Hise, C. R., op. cit,., p. 838.
b Cited by Gmelin- Kraut, Anorganisehe Chemie, vol. 3, p. 319.
c Chambcrlin, R. T., The gases iu rocks: Pub. Carnegie Inst. No. 106, 1908, p. 61.
d Van Hise, C. R., op. eit., p. 8.39.
'Idem, pp. 839-840.
552 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
in variiius proportions, and of actinolite or griinerite with magnetite in various proportionp. In still other instances
the bunding may be due to the combining of actinolite or griinerite, magnetite, and quartz in various proportions.
In general, therefore, the alterations of the rock do not destroy the original sedimentary banding, but, on the contrary,
emphasize it. The staking banded appearance of actinolitic and griineritic rocks is one of their most characteristic
features.
BECRYSTALLIZATION OF atTAKTZ.
The recrystallization of quartz under these anamorphic reactions has multiplied the size
of the prain maiw times, as mentioned in the discussion of the individual districts. The rccrj-s-
taUization of quartz has largety followed the development of magnetite, for magnetite with
crystal outlines is often observed to be completely inclosed in large clear quartz crystals with
no strain effects.
HIGH STTLPHXTB CONTENT OF AMPHIBOLE-MAGNETITE ROCKS.
The amphibole-magnetite rocks usually carrj^ a higher percentage of iron sulphide than
other phases of the iron-bearing formations. If iron sulphide plays the important part assigned
to it in the early portion of this discussion (see pp. 518-519), iron sulphides may be supposed
to have been locally deposited throughout the iron-bearing formations with the carbonates and
greenalites. These would be the first substances to be altered by the surface waters and, going
quickly into solution, would greatly accelerate the concentration of the ore, but during the
alteration of iron carbonate or greenalite to amphibole-magnetite rocks there is no opportunity
for oxidizing solutions to get at the sulphides and hence the}" remain. The refractoriness of the
amphibole-magnetite rocks also prevents subsequent oxitlization. In the Gunflint Lake dis-
trict of Minnesota the sulphide is in the form of pyrrhotite, which, according to Moissan " and
Allen, * is developed through the application of heat to pyrite.
An alternative explanation of the high sulphur is that it was secondarily contributed by
the hot intrusives. For this there is no direct evidence.
SECONDARY IRON CARBONATE LOCALLY DEVELOPED AT IGNEOUS CONTACTS.
In a few localities, as at Gunflint Lake, Minnesota, in the Animikie district, and at Sunday
Lake, in the Gogebic district, coarsel}^ crystallized iron carbonate is found close to the igneous
rock, this material doubtless being produced by recrystallization of the original finer carbonate.
CONTACT ALTERATIONS NOT FAVORABLE TO CONCENTBATION OF ORE DEPOSITS.
The anamorphic changes above described do not fav'or the transfer and segregation of con-
stituents of the u'on-bearLng formations. They tend rather to combine them. Localh* there
is evidence that iron is carried in solution under these conditions, in the fact that cements in
fractures are largely magnetite and the iron is usually in coarser bands. If the intrusions come
before the original iron-bearing formation has become porous tlu'ough the loss of its silica,
the rocks do not have the openings for the transfer of solutions. Even had openings existed
in some places, the deep-seated pressures exerted by great batholiths, like the Dulutli gabbro,
have been sulficient to make tlie rock undergo rock flowage, thereb}- closmg openmgs. If
other conditions were favorable there would still be the lack of abundant surface waters to
leach the silica. So far as the iron-bearing formation ]ia<l been previously altered and con-
centrated to ore under weathering conditions, the intrusions of the igneous rocks woidil have
the effect of dehj^drating and recrystallizing the ores, but not of further concentrating them.
There are but two highly magnetic deposits in the Lake Sui)erior country which have been
mined as ore. In the Republic district of Michigan magnetitic specular hematite is interlayered
with bright-red and black jaspers in which the iron oxide is hematite and magnetite. Near
the base of the formation amphiboles arc abundant and the formation is lean in iron. The
upper part of the formation seems to be essentially the result of anamorphism of a previously
a Moissan, n., Traitd de clilmie minCralc. vol. 4, Metamorphism, p. 565.
* Allen, E. T., Sulphides of iron : Summary in Ann. Kept. Geophys. Lab. Carnegie Inst., 1910, pp. 104-105 (reprint).
THE IRON ORES. 553
formed iron oxide and jasper zone in which there lias been some concentration of iron ore. The
lower portion of the formation is regarded as the result of the anamorphism of an original
carbonate formation not exposed to weathering prior to the introduction of the igneous rocks.
In both cases conditions of rock flowage incident to the folding and intrusion have aided the
direct contact effects. The upper part of the formation has suffered most from the readjust-
ment along the surface of the contact between the unconformable middle and upper Huronian.
The probable sequence of events is discussed on pages 277-279.
At Champion, Mich., in the Marquette district, the development of the magnetite-ore
deposit is explained in much the same way. These ores have been found to contain a larger
percentage of titanium than is usual in the Lake Superior ores of the sedimentary type, some
samples of the Champion ore containing as much as 1.66 per cent of TiOa. It is possible that
this may represent a direct contribution from the intrusive.
The titaniferous magnetite deposits in the Lake Superior region are not results of the con-
tact alteration of an iron-bearing formation, but are rather magmatic segregations in the igneous
rocks. Also certain of the black magnetite rocks of the iron-bearing formations closely asso-
ciated with surface extrusive rocks may have been the result of direct contribution from the
igneous rocks and not contact metamorphism, as already indicated. (See p. 527.)
The alterations above described are essentially constructive or anamorphic in their nature,
tendmg to produce more complex mineral substances, and do not accomplish simplification
and segregation sufhcientty to develop ore deposits, in these respects contrasting markedly
with weathering alterations which the formation undergoes at the surface away from the
influence of igneous rocks.
Therefore, so far as the amphibole-magnetite rocks contain ores, these ores are probably
originally rich iron layers in the iron formation which may have been partly concentrated
durmg katamorphism precedmg anamorphism. The anamorphic processes have not aided
their concentration.
SURFACE ALTERATIONS OF AMPHIBOLE-MAGNETITE ROCKS.
After the griineritic or actinolitic rocks have developed in the zone of anamorphism, in
consequence of denudation they may pass into the zone of katamorphism, or even into the belt
of weathering. Then will begin the processes of oxidation, hydration, and carbonation, as a
result of which the magnetite is slightly changed to hematite or limonite and the amphibole or
other silicates may decompose into clilorite, epidote, and calcite. However, as magnetite
and the iron-bearing ampliiboles are very refractory, tliis process is exceedingly slow and usually
has affected only comparatively thin layers of materials adjacent to the surface or adjacent to
openings in the rock. Indeed, the reactions of the belt of weathering and the upper part of the
belt of cementation, wliich may produce lai-ge iron-ore bodies where they have the original
iron-bearing carbonates or the hydrous ferrous silicates to work upon, have nowhere in the
Lake Superior region formed large ore bodies where they are working upon the griineritic and
actinolitic rocks.
The iron content of the ampliibole-magnetite rocks is not materially different from that
of the ferruginous cherts, allowance being made for a slight difference in degree of oxidation
and hydration of iron. The leaching of silica from tliis rock would produce -an ore as rich
as that derived from the alteration of cherts, but as a matter of fact the silica is usually not
leached from these rocks and ore deposits derived from them are small and rare. The external
conditions for their alteration are essentially the same as those for the alteration of the cherts,
topograpliically, structurally, and chemically, and so the failure of the waters to leach the silica
from them and concentrate the iron must be ascribed to the condition of the rock. Microscopic
examination shows that the quartz is much more coarsely crystallized than in the ferruginous
cherts. The grains will average a thousand times the mass of those of the cherts. (Compare
Pis. XLIV and XLVII.) It has undergone marked recrystallization, winch has completely
obliterated the minute particles or any pore space that the cherts may have had, and also
554 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
crystallized any amorphous chert originally present. The pore space is less than 1 per cent,
as compared with about 5 per cent in the ferruginous cherts. The result is that the waters
have fewer openings into which to penetrate and far less surface of quartz upon which to work.
This fact alone is believed to be sufficient to account for the lack of leaching of silica. However,
it may be also pointed out that some of the silica has combined with the iron in resistant
ampliiboles which do not yield readily to the surface waters. The rocks are hard, dense, and
crvstalline, being obviously much more diflicult for the waters to attack either mechanically
or chemically than the ferruginous 'cherts. They usually stand at a liigher elevation, other
structural conditions being approximately the same, indicating their resistance to erosion.
In the Mesabi district the elevation of the upper Iluronian iron-bearing formation where it is
altered to ampliibole-magnetite rock at the east end of the district is fulh' 200 feet higher on
an average than that farther west, where the rock is altered to ferruginous chert.
It follows from the foregoing that anamorpliic processes of the original iron carbonates
and greenalites producing amphibole-magnetite rocks are not only unfavorable to the direct
development of ores, but they put the formation in condition to resist the action of ordinary
katamorphic concentrating agencies.
SXJMMABY OF ALTERATIONS OF IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS BY IGNEOUS INTRUSIONS.
As a result of igneous intrusions, iron-bearing formations become recrystallized and coarser
in grain.
The average chemical composition is not essentially changed except bv dehydration, and
perhaps locally by introduction of sulphur or other constituents, but the mineral composition
is greatly changed.
The density has been increased and the pore space lessened.
The alterations of the carbonate and greenalite rocks have produced ampliibole-magnetite
rocks. The alterations of the ferruginous cherts and soft ores have produced banded red
jaspers and hard ores.
The changes under the influence of intrusions are those of anamorphism unfavorable to the
development of ore deposits, but originally rich iron la3"ers may remain as ores. The anamorpliic
products, once formed and exposed at the surface, are found to be too refractory to undergo
alterations to ores.
ALTERATION OF IRON-BEARING FORMATIONS BY ROCK FLOWAGE.
Mechanical deformation has accomplished different changes in the iron-bearing formations,
depending on whether it is effected by fracture or by flowage and whether the iron-bearing
formation Was in its original carbonate or greenalite form at the time of the deformation, or
had been altered to ferruginous chert and ore or to actinolitic and griineritic rocks. Fracturing
has opened up avenues for water circulation, as discussed on pages 474-475. Here is consid-
ered the effect of rock flowage only.
The iron carbonates and greenalites were not considerably altered by rock flowage, for
subsequent to the folding they unilerwent the normal alterations to ores and ferruginous cherts.
Tliis is especially well illustrated by the folded upper Huronian iron-bearing formation, in
which original carbonates are still found where the surface alterations have not reached them.
The alterations of the ferruginous cherts and ores under mechanical pressure have been
very conspicuous in the Keewatin ores of the Vermilion district, in parts of the Negaunee
formation nearest the contact with the upper Iluronian in the Marquette district, and else-
where. (See PI. XXXIX, B, p. 480.) The Vermilion ores have been rendered hard, crystal-
line, dehydrated, locally somewhat schistose, more or less magnetic, locally brecciated, and
cemente(l by vein quartz and later by iron oxide (hematite and magnetite). As the ores stand
in the Ely trough they contain much pore space because of their coarsely brecciated condition.
The ferruginous cherts of the Vermilion district have simultaneously been recrystallized and
cemented, and the iron minerals have gone through the same series of physical and chemical
THE IRON ORES. 555
changes as in the ores. The net result is the production of a rock having a composition similar
to that of ferruginous chert, with a large proportion of magnetite and with a small amount of
pore space.
In the Marquette district the post-Iiuronian folding developed a marked shear zone at
the contact of the Negaunee formation with the overlying detrital ferruginous base of the upper
Huronian, with the result that the ore was dehydrated and rendered crystalline, developing
coarsel}' crystalline specular hematite or micaceous hematite and porphyritic magnetite, accom-
panied by a marked elimination of pore space. The extent of the mashing is best indicated by
the quartz pebbles in the detrital base of the upper Huronian, some of which are much flattened.
The effect on the ferruginous cherts or jaspers has been to make the iron bands brightly
specular.
Aside from these effects noted near tlie contacts of tlie upper and middle Huronian, the
later folding has not essentially changed the characters of the iron-bearing formation. Smyth "
discusses it thus:
It has been said that the griinerite, quartz, and iron oxides of the iron-liearing member have a verj' distinct banded
arrangement and yet are not original minerals, and that this Ijanding is parallel to the upper and lower boundaries
of the formation. It is probaljle that a set of parallel structural planes has controlled the segregation of the present
constituent minerals during the changes through which the rock has passed, and that these planes must have been
original bedding planes. As the parallel Ijanding is confined to this one direction, it is certain that during its devel-
opment no other system of parallel planes existed in the rock. The last severe folding, which has determined the
larger structural features of the Marquette district, has also affected the rocks in a more intimate way. In certain
localities strong minor, even minute crenulations have been produced, and also parallel cleavage, which sometimes
traverses the lianding of the rock at right angles, The little folds are often broken and faulted and the siliceous banda
reduced to fragments. Along the parallel cleavage planes movement has often taken place, as is shown by the dis-
placement of a particular Ijand on the two sides. Along this secondary cleavage, which dates from the period of gen-
eral folding after upper Marquette time, no great development of new minerals, except the iron oxides, has taken
place, while the displacement which the minute faulting has caused in the banding conclusively proves that this
structure was present before the folding.
Allen'' finds similar conditions in the Woman River district of Ontario, where riebeckite
and magnetite are cut by later cleavage.
The effects of mechanical deformation in the zone of flowage may be summarized as follows :
As a result of mechanical deformation the ores have become dehydrated, crystalline, in
some places specular and schistose, lacking pore space, locally brecciated, and irr part rece-
mented by quartz and iron oxide.
The ferruginous cherts have become recrystallized and deliydrated, in some places sliglitly
deoxidized, tending to produce the banded red' and black jaspers. These alterations of the
cherts are not certainly discriminated from those due to the intrusion of igneous rocks.
Deformation by flowage does not aid concentration by surface waters, but on the other
hand it does not so affect the original carbonates and greenalites that surface waters may not
later alter them to ores.
. CAUSE OF VARYING DEGREE OF HYDRATION OF LAKE SUPERIOR ORES.
The Lake Superior iron ores include both hydrous and anlij^drous varieties — magnetite,
hematite, limonite, and several intermediate hydrates. The iron ores of tlie region as a whole
are low hydrates of iron, containing an average of about 2 per cent combined water. The most
hydrous of the pre-Cambrian ores are those of the Alesabi range, which average an amount of
combined water equivalent to a ferric hydrate having 4.5 per cent. Locally ores containing
almost as much water as limonite are fouitd, but this is exceptional. Some of the ores are
crj'stalhne hematite and magnetite.
Are the differences in hydration of the different beds due to differences in original char-
acter, or to differences in secondary alterations? These questions are answered only in part.
a Smyth, H. L., The Republic trough: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 2S, 1S97, pp. 531-.'>32.
t> Allen, R. C, Iron formation of Woman River: Eighteenth Ann. Rept. Ontario Bm-. Mines, pt. 1, 1909, pp. 254-262.
556 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Guy II. Cox lias assembled tlie vjirious experimental data on the su})ject and supplemented
them b_y laboratory experiments of his own.
From meteoric solutions under ordinary temperatures at the surface the precipitates of
iron are ferric hydrates containing 29 per cent of water, which rapidly changes in contact with
water into limonite. containing 14.44 per cent of water.
The presence of alumina, lime, and magnesia to combine with the iron may prevent dehy-
dration." If left for several years, the ore becomes dehydrated and crystalline.*
Increase in temperature and pressure on the solutions at tlie time of precipitation will
lower the hj'dration of the precipitated salt. At a temperature of 500° magnetite may be
precipitated directly from solution. Slight variations in the degree of hydration in a precipi-
tate are determined by tlie form in which the iron is held in solution, by the precipitating
agents, and by the strength of the solutions, though so far as experimental data go the range
of variation due to these causes is small.
Secondary alterations have little eflFect on anliydrous ores, but liydrous ores may easily
lose part of their water by moderate increase in temperature and by pressure such, for instance,
as that involved in freezing, where the water is allowed to escape. It appears also that in an
ore containing various hydrates, solution will dissolve the highest hydrates, leaving the residue
in a lower state of hydration, but that the redeposition of tlie dissolved part as a higher hydrate
may result in net increase of hydration for the residue and dissolved parts combined.
It appears, therefore, that conditions of high temperature and pressure, either during the
original deposition of the iron salts or during their secondary alterations, favor the development
of anliydrous salts, thereby explaining the occurrence of crystalline hematite and magnetite
in the iron-bearing formations near igneous contacts or where djmamically metamorphosed.
It is shown elsewhere that [magnetite, perhaps even hematite, may have been precipitated
directly from the hot solutions coming from some of the basic igneous rocks, or that the iron
salts may first have been deposited as greenalite and iron carbonate which subsequently altered
under conditions of high temperature and pressure to magnetite and hematite, or that the
iron salts were first deposited as greenalite and hematite, subsequently altered to limonite, and
then dehj'drated by the high temperature and pressure of anamorphic conditions to hematite
and magnetite. In all these cases the heat from some adjacent igneous rock or the pressure
developed from rock flowage seems, from field evidence, to be an essential factor.
However, hematite and various hytlrates are found minutely interliedded in parts of the
iron-bearing formations where there is no evidence of the effect of unusual heat or pressure.
A hand specimen may show several layers of iron oxides with varymg degrees of hydration.
These differences persist in the ferruginous cherts and jaspers and in the ores into which the
ferruginous cherts and jaspers grade. Moreover, they seem to be independent of distance from
rock surface and of dip of beds. In steeply inclined beds layers with different degrees of hydra-
tion may be found to continue from the surface to great depth with no relative change in
hydration.
These remarkable and persistent variations in hydration in closely associated layers ma}'
have been due to —
1. Differences in the original substances in different layers, whether carbonate or greena-
lite. The iron-bearing formations were originally anhydrous iron carbonate and hytlrous
silicate, both of which have altered when weathered to hydrous oxides. It has not been ascer-
tained that there is any specific difference in degree of hydration of the alteration products of
the greenalite and carbonate, though on the whole the beds in the Mesabi district, containing
the most greenalite, are the most hydrous.
2. Difference in time of alteration of the greenahte and carbonate, vnth accompanying slight
variations of temperature and pressure. The hydration of different layers has taken place at
o Spring, W., Neues Jahrb., vol. 1, ISDO, pp. 47-ti2 (cited by Moore, E. 8., Eighteenth Ann. Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, pt. 1, 1909, p. 194).
t> Wittsteln. G. C, Vierteljahresschrltt fiir Pharmacie, vol. 1, 1852, p. 275 (cited by Moore, E. S., Eighteenth Ann. Rcpt. Ontario Bur. Mines,
pt. 1, 1909, p. 194).
THE IRON ORES. 557
different times when the temperature conditions anil jiressure conditions may have been
sHghtly diflferent, although of these differences we have no knowletlge.
3. Selective secondary alterations of the iiydrates formed by the first alteration of the green-
alite and carbonate. Freezing (seasonal and glacial) and moderate depth of cover may tend
to dehydrate the ores and probably have contributed to the low average degree of hydration of
the bedded hematites. So far as experimental evidence goes, these ores would have their
highest degree of hydration at the time of precipitation, and all influences acting upon tliem
subsequent^, even moderate seasonal variations in temperature and moderate depth of burial,
would tend toward lowering the degree of hydration.
It might be expected that the result of seasonal variations in temperature and the pres-
sure of overlying rocks would result in a uniform variation in hyth'ation from the surface down-
ward. No evidence of this sort has been found in the ore bodies. It should be noted, however,
that the effect of freezing would be toward dehydration at the surface and the effect of pres-
sure would be toward dehydration with depth. Instead of uniform change iia hydration one
way or another from surface to depth, the most conspicuous change in hydration is between
closely interbedded layers of the iron-bearing formations.
I The selective effect of solution and redeposition might have influence; for instance, waters
percolating rapidly along a certain bed or fissure might dissolve the more hydrated ores, carry
them off, and redeposit them, leaving the residue with a lower degree of hydration. Slight
original variations in hydration would thereby be emphasized. Other unknown causes may be
operative.
According to Stremme," hydration is favored by salt content and carbon dioxide content
of the altering solutions. The salt and acid content apparently influence the degree of hydra-
tion of the u'on oxide by lowering the vapor pressure of the solution. Each ii-on hydrate is
supposed to have its own vapor pressure, which is the minimum pressure of water vapor with
which the hydrate can remain in equilibrium at any given temperature.
We may conclude in general that the hydrous ores of the Lake Superior region have devel-
oped under ordinary concUtions of temperatiu'e and pressure near the surface, that the anhy-
drous ores exhibit the effects of heat and pressure, and that the differences in hydration of closely
intermingled layers of the iron-bearmg formations have requu'ed some influence of a selective
sort, the nature of wliich may be suggested but not proved.
SEQUENCE OF ORE CONCENTRATION.
We have touched upon each of the factors going to determine the present character and
structural relations of the ores. To complete the picture we have now to dwell upon the chron-
ologic development of the ores.
The beginning of the processes of secondary concentration must be placed for the Archean
ores in early Huronian time and for the middle Huronian ores in the time between the middle
and upper Huronian. Iron-formation fragments in the basal conglomerates of these divisions
tell to some extent what had previously happened to the iron-bearing formations of the ohler
land. At the base of the upper Huronian rich ferruginous detritus was formed at the beginning
of upper Huronian time. In certain places the iron-bearing formation within the upper Huro-
nian was exposed by erosion before Keweenawan time and went through a set of changes in the
time interval between the Huronian aiid Keweenawan similar to those that affected the lower
Huronian iron-bearing formation in inter-Huronian time. This is shown by the detritus of the
Keweenawan basal conglomerate and by the development of red jaspers and hard ores from
the soft varieties near the contact of Keweenawan and upper Huronian in eastern .Gogebic dis-
trict. In those districts in which great masses of Keweenawan rocks were laid down upon the
Huronian rocks before the iron-bearing formation had been exposed to weathering, the concen-
tration of the ore could not have begun until the Keweenawan was cut through in the erosion
a Strenime, H., Zur Kenntnis der wasserhaltigen und wasserfreien Eiseno.xydbilduDgen in den Sedimentgesteinen: Zeitschr. prakt. Geologic
vol. IS, No. 1, 1910, pp. 18-23 (reviewed in Econ. Geology, vol. 5, 1910, p. 499).
558 GEOLOGY OF THE LAIvE SUPERIOR REGION.
period precedincr Cambrian time, and it is rather probable that this hmitation also applies to
other districts. Clearly the process in each district began when, as a result of the great oro-
geiiic movements and the attenilant denudation, the iron-hearing formation was exposed to the
weathering forces. In most of the districts this occurred in the great time gap represented by
the unconformity between the Keweenawan and the Cambrian. At this time were concen-
trated most of tlie great ore deposits of the upper lluronian of the region and the ores at the
middle and lower horizons of the Negaunee formation of the micklle Huronian.
Wherever the Cambrian remains in or near the iron districts it contains iron-ore frag-
ments, jaspers, and clierts in its basal conglomerate. In the Menominee district these are rich
enough to be mined. The process of ore concentration was therefore well advanced before
Cambrian time.
In the Alesabi district remnants of Cretaceous beds overlie some of the ore deposits, par-
ticularly in the western parts of the range. At the basal horizons of these beds are detrital
iron ores derived from the Biwabik formation. Here, then, the concentration was well
advanced as early as Cretaceous time, and there is little doubt, from the similar relations of
the ores to the Cambrian in other regions, that the ores of tiie Mesabi district were well
concentrated even by Cambrian time.
The process of enrichment has undoubtedly continued until the present time. It there-
fore appears that the circulating waters have had eras in which to perform their work; indeed,
a part of pre-Paleozoic time and all of the Paleozoic, Mesozoic, and Cenozoic.
Frequently during pre-Cambrian time the ii-on-bearing formations were metamorphosed by
igneous intrusions, the principal effect of which was to recrystalUze the original phases of the
iron-bearing formations, yet unaltered, to refractory ampliibole-magnetite rocks able to resist
the ordinary katamorphic ore-concentratmg agencies. The alteration to ores of portions of the
iron-bearing formations so modified was practically stopped at the times of the intrusions.
In all the districts since the beginning of final concentration many thousands of feet of
strata have been removed by erosion. During the process of denudation the ore deposits in
each district began to be secontlarilj- concentrated shortly after the iron-bearing formation was
exposed at the surface and for a long time they continued to increase in size. It is probable that
after a sufficiently long period the growth of the deposits practically ceased, for denudation
would finally remove the ores at the surface as fast as they formetl below the surface. However,
change would not stop. The ore deposits formed would continue to migrate downward pari
passu with denudation. On account of the pitch, lateral migration would accompany downward
migration. At any given time the masses of ore would extend from the surface to the depth at
which descending waters were effective. We therefore must conceive of the secondarily concen-
trated iron-ore deposits as slowly migrating downward through thousands of feet, being always
just in advance of the plane of erosion. So far as the original iron-formation layers were rich
enough to be ores without secondary concentration, these statements do not apply. The
amount of ore existing at an}^ one period tlirough much of preglacial time may have been
roughly constant, although there was doubtless considerable variation depending on topo-
grapliic and climatic conditions.
At times the processes of denudation would go on rapidly; at other times they would be
stayed for long periods, depending on the post-Keweenawan history of the Lake Superior
region.
The important steps of tliis history are (1) the great pre-Cambrian mountain making and
erosion, (2) subsidence and Paleozoic sedimentation, (.3) the post-Paleozoic uplift and denuda-
tion, (4) the deposition of Cretaceous rocks upon parts of the region, (5) the post-Cretaceous
uphft and succeeding denudation, and (6) the Pleistocene ice incursions.
1. In the pre-Cambrian period of mountam making and denudation the ore deposits
probably reached their full development, and indeed they maj^ during the latter part of this
ancient time have been of greater magnitude than they are at present, although possibly not
so rich. In the Menominee district the Upper Cambrian sandstone and the Ordovician lime-
stone cap the Huronian formations and even some of the ore deposits. The upward extension
THE IRON ORES. 559
of the iron-bearing formation was removed before Upper Cambrian time. It is clear, therefore,
that the main concentrations of iron oxide for these deposits must have taken place in pre-
Cambrian time. The basal conglomerates of the Cambrian carry ore fragments from previ-
ously altered formations. If, as is probable (see below), Cambrian and Ordovician or Silurian
strata capped the beds in other iron-bearing districts of the Lake Superior region, it is all but
certain that ore concentration was equally advanced in these other districts, although where
erosion has extended farther below the Paleozoic than in the Menominee district later events
have had a greater influence upon the present condition of the ore deposits. The later stages
of this period of denudation were marked by the development of a great peneplain, over which,
it may be assumed, the ore-concentrating processes acted slowly.
2. After this period of denudation the Paleozoic sea encroached upon the Lake Superior
region. Where the iron-bearing formations were reached by the sea, detrital ores were formed
at the base of the Cambrian. The entire region was deeply buried beneath the Paleozoic
deposits. Probably so long as the region remained below the sea the processes of concentra-
tion practically ceased antl the mass of the ore deposits remained nearly stationary. Sea
water does not chemically affect the iron oxides.
3. Wlien after Paleozoic time the region was again raised above the sea and denudation
began, little enrichment took place until the major portion of the Paleozoic rocks was stripped
from the region. Over much of the region these Paleozoic rocks were entirely removed, and
the pre-Cambrian Huroniau surface again emerged from below the Cambrian deposits. In
the Menommee district and the southeastern part of the Crystal Falls district the Paleozoic
deposits were not completely removed from the iron-bearing formations, and here considerable
quantities of detrital ores are found at the base of the Cambrian. In most of the region
erosion did not stop at the Paleozoic but extended downward for a greater or less depth into
the Huronian rocks, and it is presumed that where this took place the ore deposits migrated
downward precisely as durmg the pre-Cambrian period of denudation.
4. Erosion continued until the end of the Cretaceous period of base-leveling, when the
area was again reduced nearly to an uneven plain and locally was overridden by the sea and
capped by Cretaceous rocks, at least as far east as the Mesabi district. The basal strata of
these beds carry detrital iron ore from the Biwabik formation. At the end of this period the
processes of downwartl denudation and concentration were greatly diminished in speed.
5. Durmg the period of the post-Cretaceous uplift denudation and the migration of the
ore deposits again went on, but to what extent is uncertain. It is highly probable that m the
Menominee district the topography of the Huronian rocks is largely pre-Cambrian and the
present depressions to a large extent are reexcavated pre-Cambrian valleys. The same is true
of the Felch Mountain tongue of the Crystal F^lls district. On the borders of the Marquette
district, also, Cambrian deposits are found. However, it is now a matter of conjecture as to
how far the present topography is redeveloped pre-Cambrian topography and how far it is
post-Cretaceous.
6. The last great event in the development of the ore deposits was the glacial incursion of
Pleistocene time. So far as the ore deposits are concerned, the work was of two kinds, glacial
denudation and glacial deposition. The quantity of ore which was removed during the first stage
of Pleistocene time, that of glacial erosion, was enormous. Almost the entire zone of decom-
posed rocks which must have been adjacent to the ores has been removed. The ore deposits
were certainly truncated to at least an equal depth. Glacial erosion also in many places cut
deeper into the soft ore bodies than into the adjacent hard rocks, and thus produced subordinate
valleys, as is finely illustrated in the Mesabi district. The abundant fragments of hard iron ore
in the glacial drift furnish evidence of the large amount of ore wliich has been removed b\' the
glaciers. It is certain that still greater quantities of soft ore have been removed, although on
account of its softness it has been broken into minute fragments and therefore furnishes little
evidence of its removal. The foregoing considerations lead to the certain conclusion that the
glacial truncation seriously reduced the amount of available iron ore in the Lake Superior
region. WTiile the pi'ocess of concentration has continued since glacial time and has tended to
560 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
enrich and deepen the deposits, there is no doubt that the gain since the glacial incursion is
insignificant as compared with the loss of rich material during the glacial period. Wlien the
glaciers receded, the clean-cut ore bodies were covered to a greater or less depth by deposits of
glacial drift. This relation may be seen to the best advantage in the great open pits of the
Mesabi district, where the soft, clean ore extends directly to the drift, not derived from the ore
but brought from the north. The contacts in many places are of almost knifeUke sharpness,
there being practically no ore in the basal layers of the drift.
It appears from the foregoing discussion that wliile the quantity of ore in the Lake Superior
region has alwaj^s been large since Cambrian time, there have been numerous vicissitudes in its
history during which the quantity of ore alternately increased and decreased.
ORIGIN OF MANGANIFEROUS IRON ORES.
Manganese exists in a series of minerals remarkably similar to and usually in association
with those of iron. The origin and secondary concentration of the manganese minerals have
been regarded in general as following very closely those of the iron. The subject has not been
specifically studied for the Lake Superior region. It may be noted here merely that the man-
ganese tends to be concentrated in the upper parts of the Lake Superior iron-ore deposits, and
that as secondarily concentrated it consists piincipally of manganese dioxide (pj-rolusite) and
subordinately of manganese carbonate. In the general study of the manganese deposits of
the Appalachians and other parts of the United States it has been found that this is a common
but not invariable relation of iron and manganese. In some deposits also the relation is
reversed, the iron being above, the manganese below. Where they are associated with clay,
not in the Lake Superior region, thei'e seems to be a tendency for the concentration of clay at
the surface relative to the manganese. Iron and manganese oxides and cla}- are the most
stable of the common constituents of the belt of weathering, and hence all of them tend to
become residually concentrated as compared with other substances originally associated wnth
them. The vertical distribution of these three substances is taken to be a function of their
relative stabihty under various conditions of weathering, but the available information does not
seem to warrant more specific statements.
PART OF THE METAMORPHIC CYCLE ILLUSTRATED BY THE LAKE SUPERIOR
IRON ORES OF SEDIMENTARY TYPE.
Starting with the ferrous iron and dominance of silicates in the original igneous rocks, the
development of the ore deposits is a process of continuous katamorphism. From the original
igneous rocks and their included veins containing a small percentage of iron there is developed
an iron-bearing formation — cherty iron carbonate or greenaUte — containing 25 or 30 per cent
of iron, which, on further alteration at the surface, becomes concentrated to 50 or 60 per cent or
more. The iron-bearing formation and included ores may themselves be broken up to yield
materials for later sedimentary iron-bearing formations. The upper Iluronian iron-bearing
formations, the greatest and most i^roductive of the Lake wSuperior region, ma}- be regarded as
including materials not only from the chemical alterations of the older greenstones but from the
destruction of the older iron-bearing formations of the middle Iluronian and Archean. These
formations have undei-gone the extreme of katamorphism. Nature's great concentrating mill
has developed a liigh-grade end product, both chemical and mechanical, through a series of
concentrations. The changes have been those of simplification and segregation of mineral
compounds, mai'ked increase in volume, when all substances entering into the reaction are
taken into account, incoherency of substance, and net liberation of heat, all of them typical of
the katamorphism or destructive processes affecting the earth's surface.
No sooner have the ores reached their maximum incoherency through katamorphic changes
than constructive agencies begin their work. It may be more correct to say that they begin
before the destructive agencies have finished. The ores become cemented and strengthened;
they tend also to become dehydrated and more or less magnetic. As they become buried
THE IRON ORES. 561
beneath the surface, owing to the deposition of later sediments, and as they become folded, their
volume is decreased by an elimination of pore space and moisture, they are recrystalHzed, are
shghtly deoxidized to magnetite, in small part combine with siUceous and other impurities to
produce sihcates, and are frequently rendered scliistose, producing the hard specular ores. The
mineralogical change is one froin simple to less simple compounds. The net change in energy
is loss, due to the energy given off in volume decrease. The process is a characteristic one of
anamorphism, which affects all rocks under similar conditions. The anamorphic changes in
the ores are best shown in the oldest or Aixhean iron-bearing formations.
More marked anamorphic results are produced under the influence of igneous intrusions.
The contrasting katamorphic and anamorphic changes affecting the ore deposits constitute
a partial metamorphic cycle." Beginning with a coherent igneous rock, incoherent ore deposits
are developed through kataniorphism and in turn a part are rendered coherent again through
anamorphism. The mineralogical changes are at first from complex to simple and later from
simple to complex. The changes at first are essentially those of simplification and segregation
and later this process is arrested and on a smaller scale reversed in the development of the
complex silicates. The ores are not essentially dispersed to again become constituents of igne-
ous rocks, although certain of the amphibole-magnetite rocks associated with the ores are not
easily distinguishable from igneous rocks. The cycle, therefore, so far as observation goes, is
not complete. There is throughout a net loss of energy.
TITAXIFEROUS MAGNETITES OF NORTHERN MINNESOTA.
The great gabbro mass of Lake and Cook counties, i\Iinn., contains much magnetite, both
disseminated and segregated into ore deposits. Complete gradation may be observed between
gabbro carrying little magnetite and magnetite carrying little of the ferromagnesian con-
stituents and feldspars. The knowai deposits are extremely irregular, with gradations between
themselves and the gabbro and containing within themselves much gabbro material. They
weather very much like the gabbro and might be easily unnoticed on the weathered surface.
There has been little exploration for these ores. A few drill holes have been sunk in the region
south of Gunfhnt Lake, some of them revealing depths of ore aggregating several hundred feet.
The known deposits seem to be distributed in irregular zones roughly parallel to the north or
basal margin of the Duluth gabbro.
The composition of the ore averaged from 3,556 feet in 14 drill holes is 43.8 per cent of iron.
The range is from 54 to 20 per cent. The high titanium content renders the ores of doubtful
value for the present.
Where the gabbro comes into contact ^vith the iron-bearing Gunflint formation both
formations carr}' magnetite so similar in texture that it is difficult to tell one from the other.
However, on analj'sis the gabbro magnetite is found to be titaniferous, while that of the Gunfhnt
formation is not titaniferous. This fact seems to argue against any considerable transfer of
material from the gabbro to the iron-bearing formation during its alteration.
The titaniferous magnetites of northeastern Minnesota are direct magmatic segregations
in the Duluth gabbro, according to all geologists who have studied them, including Irving,
Merriam, Bayley, Grant, Winchell, Clements, Van Hise, Leith, and others. The complete
gradation from gabbro with a small amount of original magnetite to a magnetite with small
amounts of amphibole and other gabbro minerals can be seen in almost any part of the titanif-
erous magnetite deposits. It is scarcely necessary to repeat the detailed petrologic evidence so
fully given by the writers named.
Evidence is given elsewhere for the intrusive character of the Duluth gabbro. It cooled far
beneath the surface, where there was not easy escape for its solutions. This fact is taken to
explain its retention of its iron oxides. It has been argued under an earlier heading that where
basic rocks of similar composition reached the surface large quantities of iron escaped and
became available for ordinary sedimentary' deposition.
o Leith, C. K., The metamorphic cycle: Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, pp. 303-313.
47517°— VOL 52—11 36
562 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SIJPEIIIOR REGION.
IVLVGNETITES OF POSSIBLE PEGMATITIC ORIGIN.
The ore in the Atikokan district is a magnetite, higiil^- iinprcgnatcd with amphibolos and
sulphides and showing extremcl}' close and intricate relations to associated diorite. It difFers
from the magnetite of the gabbro of Minnesota in being nontititniferous and in being separated
by defmite boundaries — in many places plane surfaces — from the adjacent wall rock. The
apparent absence of iron-bearing formation, the general lack of banding, the high content of
amphibole corresponding to that in the associated diorite, the content of sulphides, and the
extremely intricate structural association with the diorite are not easy to explain if the ore is
sedimentary and owes its character to complex intrusion by the basic igneous masses. Nowhere
in the Lake Superior region is intrusion known to completely destroy banding, nor does it
develop so much coarsely crystalline amphibole and iron sulphide with lack of parallel texture.
On the other hand, both character and relations suggest pegmatitic intrusion or igneous after-
effects, similar to those described by Spencer " for the New Jersey magnetites or by Leith * for
certain western magnetites.
The evidence for pegmatitic origin of the ores of the Atikokan district is weak. This
district lies outside of the principal area studied in connection with this report, but from our
examination of it we suggest this origin as a plausible one from the facts available. Certainly
this district seems to show marked variations from most of the districts of the Lake Superior
region — variations which seem to call for another mode of derivation.
Minute pegmatitic veins of quartz or iron oxide or both are common in the ellipsoidal
basalts of the Vermilion district. In the coarser phases they may be seen to be intimately and
irregularly mixed with the rock, and grading out toward the finer phases they tend to take on
more definite vein outlines. In the Keewatin series as represented in tlie Vermilion district it is
in many palces dilhcult to determine whether the iron-bearing formation is a magmatic segre-
gation of greenstone, a vein material of a pegmatitic nature, or an ordinary iron-bearing sediment
derived from them. In Plate XLVIII are shown gradations from the basalt through siliceous
and jaspery phases to ordinarj' banded iron-bearing formation. These intermediate phases
seem to be of a pegmatitic nature.
BROWN ORES AND HEMATITES ASSOCIATED T^^TH PALEOZOIC AND PLEISTO-
CENE DEPOSITS IN WISCONSIN.
ORES IN THE POTSDAM.
In the driftless portion of the Potsdam area north of Wisconsin River in western Wisconsin
there are many small patches of hematite and brown ore, closely associated with upper horizons
of the Cambrian (Potsdam) sandstone. Many of these patches lie on the tops and slopes of liills,
but some of them follow the valleys. During the early days of mining in Wisconsin these ores
were smelted locally at a furnace in Sauk County, but for 30 years they have not been mined,
principally because of the small- amounts available.
The origin of these ores is not clear. Occurring near the upper horizons of the Potsdam,
some of them may represent residual accumulations due to erosion of the overh'ing Ordovician
limestone. Samuel Weidman "^ believes that part of them at least are results of later valley
filling by spring and bog solutions.
BROWN ORES IN "LOWER MAGNESIAN " LIMESTONE.
At Spring Valley, in Pierce County, Wis., are notlules and irregular masses of limonite in
clays, resting upon the eroded surface of the "Lower Magnesian" limestone, particularly in old
drainage courses on the surface of this lunestone. Quoting from .Mlcn:<*
o Spencer, A. C., Franklin Furnace lolio (No. 161), Oeol. Atlas U. S., U. S. Geol. Survey, 1908, pp. 6, 7.
t Loilh, C. K., Bull. V. S. Geol. Survey No. 338, 1908, pp. 75-89.
« PersonaU'oiumunication.
d Allen, U. C, statement prepared for this monograph. See also Allen. R. C, The occurrence and origin of the brown iron ores of Spring
Valley, Wisconsin: Eleventh Keport. Michigan Acad. Sci., 1909, pp. 95-103.
.'
PLATE XL VIII.
663
PLATE XLVIII.
FeREUGINOUS chert or JASrER, OF POSSIBLE PEGMATITIC ORIGIN, IN BASALT.
A. Partly silicified basalt (specimen 2S564) from Vermilion district, Minnesota. In the ledge this is observed to
grade imperceptibly into the little-altered basalt of the region.
B. Chert, green silicate, and iron oxide (specimen 28565) from Vermilion district, Minnesota, more definitely seg-
regated into bands, grading imperceptibly into the rock sho-mi in A on the one hand and into that shown in
C on the other.
C. Same (specimen 28566), with larger proportion of iron in bands. This is an amphibolitic ferruginous chert or
jaspilite of a type often seen in the iron-bearing formations.
In the ledge from which this series of specimens was collected, it was quite impossible to find any plane of
separation between basalt and iron-bearing formations.
564
U. S GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XLVIII
FERRUGINOUS CHERT OR JASPER, OF POSSIBLE PEGMATITIC ORIGIN, IN BASALT.
THE IRON ORES.
565
Spring Valley ia a small town on Eau Galle River reached by a spur from Woodville, on the Chicago, St. Paul,
Minneapolis and Omaha Railway. Iron ores were discovered in the vicinity of Spring Valley about 20 years ago.
Thorough prospecting developed a number of deposits, two of which, known as the Oilman and the Cady deposits, are
being mined. The Oilman was opened about 1890 and has been in operation more or less continuously since that time.
In 1893 a furnace was erected at Spring Valley tor utilizing the Oilman ores and numerous charcoal ovens were built
in the vicinity for supplying fuel for the furnace. Wood soon became scarce and coke supplanted charcoal as a fuel.
The original plant has been partly replaced by a more modern one.
GEOLOGY AND TOPOGRAPHY.
The Upper Cambrian sandstone underlies the valleys and lower hill slopes. The uplands are formed by limestone
of Lower Ordovician age. The strata are conformable and flat-lying.
The topography is that of the maturely dissected plateau, and is essentially of preglacial origin. Eau Galle River
and its tributary creeks are flowing through partly filled valleys. If the valleys were to be filled to the average height
of the ridges the resulting surface would be a plain. A plain probably once existed here as part of a greater one which
extended over a surrounding broad area. The present topography may lie explained as resulting from the uplift of
this -ancient plain, giving the streams new erosive power. Before glacial time the streams had sunk their valleys
through the Ordo\dcian limestone and well into the underlying Cambrian sandstone. During the glacial epoch the
valleys were partly filled by glacial wash.
OILMAN BROWN-ORE DEPOSIT.
The Oilman deposit rests upon an eroded surface of the Ordovician limestone, near its base, on the upper slopes
of a ridge above the valley of a small creek tributary to Eau Oalle River. It is on the railroad and is li miles west
of Spring Valley. The deposit covers several acres and in outline is very irregular, as shown liy the mine workinos
which are open shallow excavations, the deejjest being not more than 30 feet. The ore is a brown hj'drated hematite
and occurs as nodules and concretions mixed irregularly with ocherous clay, sand, chert fragments, and nodular con-
cretions of sand and clay. Locally the deposit shows rough and irregular bedding, but the general absence of beddin"
is conspicuous. The limestone presents an uneven surface to the bottom and sides of the deposit. In one place a wall
of limestone some 6 or 8 feet high, showing undoubted e\ddence of having been eroded while exposed to the air, abuts
directly against the ore. In places the ore comes quite to the surface, but as a rule it is covered by a foot to several feet
of clay. All the mining is done by hand. The larger nodules of ore, called "rock " ore, are picked by hand from the
clay and sand in which they are embedded. Some of them are very large and need to be broken up by blasting.
But most of the ore in the Oilman mine is removed with the impurities in which it occvu's and put through barrel
washers. The following is the analysis of a three months' sample of "rock" and "wash" ore:
Analysis of ore from Gilman mine.
Fe 43. 6
SiO. 24.00
A1263 2.3
CaO 58
MgO.
P....
S
Mn..
0.30
. 14
.018
.80
CADY BROWN-ORE DEPOSIT.
The Cady deposit is 2i miles northwest of Elmwood and about 5 miles southeast of Spring Valley. It covers several
acres on the top and upper slopes of a hill that rises steeply some 200 feet above the valley of Cady Creek. As in the
Gilman deposit the ore rests on the Ordovician limestone. At the time of visit in 1906 the deposit had not been opened,
l)Ut the ore was exposed in numerous pits and trenches. According to W. H. Foote, a shaft went down through 80 feet
of ore and struck a face of limestone at that depth which was at an angle of 60° with the horizontal. Ore was followed
down this face for 40 feet more with no bottom. The following analyses indicate the character of the ore in this shaft:
Analyses of Cady Creek ore.
Thickness
(feet).
Fe.
SiO..
Mn.
P.
10
10
16
22
2S
34
40
45
50
55
60
65
59.12
49.96
47.79
32.96
46.56
52.02
37.91
55.11
53.66
52.02
52.22
54.18
9.0
14.33
20.5
45.25
22.17
U.82
35.34
2.03
.83
1.39
2.13
2.47
2.51
1.82
1.73
2.72
2! 25
1.91
1.33
Brown lump ore. . . .
073
Do
Do ...
077
Do
054
Do . ■ . . .
068
Do
Do .....
062
Do
Do.. . . . . ....
063
Do
566 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The ore contains a Bomewhat higher percentage of iron, has a greater proportion of rock ore, and is associated with
a less amoiint of impurities (sand, clay, etc.) than the Oilman ore, but is otherwise exactly similar to it. Mining has
recently bc},'uii. The oro is delivered to the bins at the base of the hill by an aerial tram. The descending loaded
buckets return the empties to the to]) of the hill,
ORIGIN OF SPRING VALLEY BROWN-ORE DEPOSITS.
The ores near Sprinj^ A'lilley are of superficial ori^jjiii, beiuf^ deposited upon the eroded
surface of limestone and other rocks. Allen has shown, from a consideration of the thickness
of the strata once overlying the present ores and their probable content of iron, that the now
known dejjosits were probabl_y not the result of direct downward slump of residual materials
but are rather sediments transported laterally along drainage channels after the country hud
been cut down to the elevation of the ores. Allen shows further that since the formation of
these deposits erosion has cut through them and around them, with the result that the adja-
cent territory has been lowered, leaving the deposits on the tops or slopes of hills. He con-
cludes that the ore deposits of Spring Valley were laid down in lakes or marshes that existed
along the drainage courses on the old post-Devonian peneplain, or on the valley bottoms, as may
have been the case in the Giiman and Cadj- deposits, where the ore abuts directly against eroded
limestone faces. The marshes and lakes were finally drained as a result of uplift of the land
which enabled the streams to erode vertically at a greatly increased rate. Narrow valle3^s
were formtd in the older, broader ones. The outer margins of the old valleys correspond with
the upper slo]>es of the hills forming the present valley sides. It is on tliese upper slopes that
the ores characteristically occur. As erosion progressed ore-covered areas would naturally
come to occupy liigher and higher relative elevations, owing to the resistant nature of the ore
beds. In this way would result ore-covered hilltops, as illustrated by the Cady deposit.
Weidman," who has made a survey of the region surrounding Spring Valley, while accepting
the general view that tiie Spring Valley ores are of superficial origin and were deposited upon
the eroded surface of the limestone and associated rocks, is inclined to place the date of their
origin long after the period of peneplanation of tlie region. This alternate hj^iiothesis supposes
the ore to have been formed in these valleys after they were eroded to a considerable depth —
200 to 300 feet — in the peneplain and perhaps even at the still later stage when the valleys were
in the process of being filled again with alluvial material. The deposits lie in secondary and
tertiary valleys and on slopes opening outward toward larger valleys, and the massive, lumpy
character of the ore indicates that it may very well have originated in the manner of iron-spring
deposits, accompanied by more or less slope wash and slumping of clay and sand wliile the
valleys were bemg filled. Since the valley's were partly filled and the ores formed, erosion has
removed 30 to 40 feet of alluvial material from the valleys and a variable amount of the ore.
This explanation as to the date of origin of the ore — namelj', at the time when the valleys were
well developed — seems to apply very well to the Giiman ore deposit, where most of the ore has
been removed and where the relation of the ore deposit to the topography can be clearly observed,
• and it jirobably also applies equally well to the Cady deposit, where mining is not sufficiently
advanced to show the actual conditions.
POSTGLACIAL BROWN ORES.
Postglacial iron ores are known in many parts of the Lake Superior region. They are
ordinary bog deposits to which iron is being contributed in solution under the influence of organic
material and deposited by oxidation. Nowhere is their thickness known to be over a few feet.
Lj'ing, however, directly at the surface, they frequentlj' attract attention and for man}' years
have been subject to intermittent exploration.
a Weidman, Samuel, Geology of northwestern Wisconsin: Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey. (In pi«paration.)
THE IRON ORES. 567
CLINTON IRON ORES OF DODGE COUNTY, WIS.
OCCURRENCE AND CHARACTER.
Iron ores of Clinton age, similac to ores of the same horizon in the Appalacliian region,
appear in Dodge County, in soutlieastern Wisconsin. The shipments to the end of 1909, wliich
figure in the total for the Lake Superior region, have aggregated 570,886 long tons."^ The ores
outcrop in a narrow belt extending for about a mile north and south on a westward-facing scarp
caused by the overlying Niagara limestone. The underlymg rock is Ordovician shale. The
dip is eastward at the rate of about 100 feet to the mile. The beds are lens shaped along the
outcrop and range in tliickness up to a maximum of 37 feet. Mining operations have followed
them 400 feet down the dip, and they are known by drilUng to extend farther. Wells have
shown the occurrence of ore m the southeast corner of the county and near Hartford in tluck-
nesses ranging from 4 to 20 feet, and a diamond-drill hole near Kenosha, 60 miles to the south-
east, cuts 18 feet of ore. The iron beds, if continuous eastward to Lake Michigan, a distance
of 35 miles, are nowhere more than 800 feet below the surface, for the Niagara limestone which
overlies them has this thickness and it outcrops all the way to the lake.
If we assume an average tliickness of 10 feet, an extension down the dip of 2,000 feet, and
contuiuous extension southward to Kenosha (which is doubtful), the amount of ore in these
deposits would be 600,000,000 tons.
The ore is a slightly hydrated hematite, running from 29 to 54 per cent m iron and aver-
aging perhaps 45 per cent, high in phosphorus, with the typical granular, oolitic, or flaxseed
forms so characteristic of the ores of the Appalacliian area. The matrix is calcite. Bedding
is distinct and false bedding is common. The granules he vnth their flat sides parallel to the
bedding. The individual granules have been worn shiny by water action and aggregates of
them have been rounded into pebbles.
Under the microscope the iron-oxide granules are found in part to be amorphous and in part
to have the concentric structure of ooUtes. Clastic grains of quartz or of iron oxide commonly
form the nucleus, surrounded by alternate layers of iron and siUca. On treatment with hydro-
chloric acid the iron is dissolved, leaving little globular particles of amorphous siUca, forming
at first casts of oolites but on drying falling in, giving a basin-shaped indentation on one side.
In the Clinton formation of the East some of the granules have the structures of replaced marine
shells, but these have not been noted in the iron-bearing formation of this horizon in Wisconsin.
The origin of some of the amorphous granules is observed in experimental precipitation
of ferric hydroxide in laboratory solutions where the precipitate is allowed to settle slowly.
There is then observed a marked tendency fc^r the aggregation of iron oxide into granules
identical in shape and size with the granules observed in the Chnton ores. These granules
are of the type regarded by Lehmann'' as liquid crystals, a globular form precedmg develop-
ment of crystal structure and indefinitely grading into it. In materials that have- strong
crystalHzmg power this globular stage is soon passed or is not even observed. In substances
weak in crystallizing power, such as iron oxide, the tendency inherent in the substance itself
to group or crystallize does not go beyond this stage of globular aggregation.
Along the top of the ore body, at the contact with the overlying limestone, is a thin layer,
rangmg from less than an mch to 6 inches m tliickness, of a hard, compact bluish hematite,
heavier than the oolitic ore and ruiming about 10 per cent higher in metallic iron than the main
body of oolitic ore. In this hard bed there is no trace of the oolitic structure. However, there
is an apparent gradation from one to the other.
The contact between the ore and the Niagara limestone might be termed a "knife-edge,"
as it is perfectly well defined, showing no gradation whatever from the iron into the limestone.
The lower contact of the ore body mth the underlying calcareous shale is similar to the upper
contact. Under the microscope some of the calcite grains in the limestone near the contact are
a Lake Superior iron ore shipments for 1909 and previous years, compiled bj' Iron Trade Review, Cleveland.
' Lehmann, O. , Fliissige Kristalle sowie Plastizitat vpn Kristallen im AUgemeinen, molekulare Umlagerungen und Aggregatzustandsander,
angen, Leipzig, 1904.
568 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
observed to be partly replaced by iron oxide, while other large calcite grains are the result of
recrystallizntion. However, those are not common. In the lower contact the calcito Ls dis-
colored by tlie iron oxide, but where tliis iron stain occurs we do not always find any evidence
of replacement. For the most part the surface of contact of ores and overlying limestone is
even, but locally the beds finger into one another.
ORIGIN OF THE CLINTON IRON ORES.
For a fuller discussion of the origin of the Clinton iron ores the reader is referred to the
pubUcations of the geologists who have studied the Clinton ores of the Appalachians, especially
to the recent work of Burchard in Alabama." The ores are not minetl on a large scale in the
Lake Superior region and have not been studied in the same detail as those of the Algonkian
and Archcan.
However, a comparison with the ores of the Algonkian and Archean in the Lake Superior
region iliscloses certain contrasts, wliich are probably significant of origin. The Clinton ores
constitute beds uniform in lithology, with no evidence of local concentration or replacement or
residual masses of unaltered material, and the adjacent beds are not altered or iron stained, as
they are where secondary concentration has occurred. The hematite is therefore probably
not the residual result of the alteration of preexisting rocks. On the other hand the granules
and aggregates of granules making up the ore are distinctly weatherworn and he with their
flat sides parallel to the strongly marked bedding and current bedding, pomting strongly to
the deposition of the iron in essentially its present mineralogical condition in shalhnv waters.
The Clinton ores therefore differ from the Lake Superior Algonkian and Archean ores in
being deposited as ferric hydroxide under shallow-water or shore conditions rather than as some
ferrous compounds in quiet water, as is characteristic of the pre-Cambrian iron tleposition.
That the waters were marine is indicated by the character of the beds both above and below,
carrying marine fossils, and also by the similarity of these ores to Clinton ores of the eastern
United States, in which marine fossils are plentiful. It is also clear from the waterworn granules,
current bedding, and oohtic structure that the waters were movuig, suggesting shore conditions.
The discontinuity of the beds aiid their variation in thickness also suggest locally varying shore
conditions. But many features of the history of the deposition of these ores are yet obscure.
No satisfactory answer has yet been made to the question why these ores have developed at
this particular horizon in the Paleozoic and not at other horizons.
The final answer to this problem must involve the study of the Clinton ores of all of North
America.
SmiMARY STATEMENT OF THEORY OF ORIGIN OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR IRON
ORES.
The Lake Superior iron ores include the genetic types described in the follo-n-ing paragraphs.
1. Lake Superior sedimentary type: Iron brought to the surface by igneous rocks and con-
tributed either directly by hot magmatic waters to the ocean or later brought by surface waters
under weathering to the ocean or other bodj' of water, or by both; from the ocean deposited as a
chemical sediment in ordinary succession of sedimentary rocks; later, under conditions of weath-
ering, locally enriched to ore by percolating surface waters. To tins class belong most of the
producing iron ores of the Lake Superior region, those of the Michijucoten district of Canada,
and most of the nonproducing banded iron-bearing formation belts of Ontario and eastern
Canada.
2. Magmatic segregation type: Ores brought to the outer part of the earth in molten
magmas but were retained in them during crystallization, with the result that the ores form
part of the rock itself, just as do the feldspar and other minerals. Such are the titaniferous
magnetites, which contain refractory silicates and in places sid])hur and ])hos]diorus in dele-
terious quantities. Although these ores are known in enormous quantities in the Duluth gabbro
of northern Minnesota they are not mined.
o Burchard, E. i'., The Clinton or red ores of the Binningham district, .Mabaina: Bull. U. S. Gcol. Surrey Xo. 315, 1907, pp. 130-151.
THE IRON ORES. 569
3. Pegmatite tyjDe: Ores which are carried to or near the surface in magmas and are
extruded from them in the manner of pegmatite dikes, after the remainder of the magma has
been partly cooled and crystallized. They are deposited fi'om essentially aqueous solutions
mixed in varying proportions with solutions of quartz and the silicates and have had no second
concentration. To the pegmatite tyjje are doubtfully assigned the ores of the Atikokan dis-
trict of Ontario, and possibly also certain magnetites of the Vermilion district. (See p. 562.)
No detailed study of the Atikokan ores has been made. Ores of tliis type have been mined in
small cjuantity in the Atikokan district.
4. Clinton setlimentary type: Sedimentary "flaxseed" ores deposited in shaQow waters,
presumably from weathering of the land areas in wliich the iron is either disseminated in igneous
rocks or has undergone some of the concentrations outlined in the three preceding paragraphs.
They have suffered no essential second alteration. These are the ores in the vicinity of Iron
Ridge, Wis.
5. Brown or hydrated ores, associated with Paleozoic and Pleistocene deposits: Residual
or bog deposits in limestone as at Spring Valley, Wisconsin, or in glacial drift. Also abundant
in ores of the Lake Superior sedimentary type. The associated substance is largely clay and
they are therefore not susceptible of second concentration.
Each of these classes of ores has counterparts in ores mined elsewhere in the country,
except the Lake Superior sedimentary ores, the only ones which have undergone a second con-
centration. From this class have been produced 99 per cent of the iron ores sliipped from the
Lake Superior region and annually 80 per cent of the iron ores mined in the United States, a
fact that indicates the great importance of a second concentration.
All the ores have been derived ultimately from the interior of the earth, whence they were
delivered by igneous eruptions to ])oints near or at the surface, there to undergo various dis-
tributions and concentrations under the influence of meteoric waters acd gases. The varia-
tions in composition, shape, and commercial availability of an ore have been controlled by
variations of conditions untler which the ores have reached the surface and have been dis-
tributed. The titaniferous magnetites rejiresent ores brought nearly to the surface but not
aUowed to escape. The pegmatites rejiresent ores which have been crystallized in the act of
escape. The pre-Cambrian sedimentary formations of the Lake Superior region were derived
largely from basic rocks of not dissimilar composition that reached the rock surface, though
usuaUy under water, in wluch case they crystallized as ellipsoidal basalts.
The eruptions to which is due primarily the introduction of most of the known ores have
come up along the zone of the present Lake Superior basin. The copper ores of Keweenaw
Point and the silver ores of Silver Islet have been brought up by similar igneous rocks at a
httle later date along the same zone. Along the strike of the Lake Superior zone during Kewee-
nawan time igneous rocks also brought up the cobalt, nickel, and silver ores of Sudbury and
Cobalt. The minerals and petrographic relations of the Keweenawan, cobalt, and nickel ores
bear many similarities, suggesting possible differentiation from essentially the same magma.
It is suggested that the entire Lake Superior and Lake Huron region is a great metallographic
province from which the early extrusions brought up iron salts and the later extrusions were
differentiated into the copper, silver, cobalt, and nickel ores.
OTHER THEORIES OF THE ORIGIN OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR PRE-CA]\ffiRIAN
IRON ORES.
Whitney," Wadsworth,* Winchell,"^ HiUe/ and others have held the Lake Superior pre-
Cambrian ores of the sedimentary type to be of igneous origm. Winchell's arguments are
nearly aU based on the similarity of the textures of the iron-bearing formations to those of
a Foster, J. W., and Whitney, J. D., Report on the geology and topography of the Lake Superior land district, pt. 2, The iron region: Sen-
ate Docs., 32d Cong., special sess., 1851, vol. 3, No. 4, 406 pp.
6 Wadsworth, M. E., Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. 20, 1881, pp. 470-479; Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Geol. ser., vol. 1, 1880, p. 75.
<; Winchell, N. H., Structures of the Mesabi iron ore: Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 13, 190S, p. 203.
d Hille, F., Genesis of the Animikie iron range, Ontario: Jour. Canadian Min. Inst., vol. 6, 1904, pp. 245-287.
570 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
igneous rocks. For instance, the concretions are compared with bombs, the spaces left by the
leaching of silica are regarded as amygdahiidal cavities, tlie breccias are regarded as volcanic
breccias, the bedding is regarded as flow structure, the slump of the ores in contact with wall
rocks is regarded as the result of flow of lava over the bluff represented by the wall rock.
In this view Winchell practically reaches a conclusion similar to that of Wadsworth, who
believed that theores and jaspers are cliiefl\' eruptive and described the jasper and ore as intruded
into the country rocks in wedge-shaped masses, sheets, and dikes.
These resemblances between iron ores and igneous rocks are so superficial that they would
scarcely be taken seriously by most ol)servers, and conclusions as to igneous origin ignore so
many fundamental facts of composition, texture, and structural relations described in these
reports that it is not believed necessary to attempt to refute them.
In earlier reports Winchell " presents a different view of the origin of the ores, as follows:
A chain of active volcanoes, having explosive emissions, extended across northeastern Minnesota about where
the Mesabi iron range is found. This was near the shore line of the Taconic ocean, and was accompanied by land-
locked bays and perhaps by fresh-water lakes. Such marginal volcanoes had a chemical effect on the oceanic water,
causing the precipitation of silica and probably of iron. Its basic lavas and obsidians were attacked by the hot waters
and were converted by encroaching silica into jaspilite. Near the shore such glassy lavas were eroded by wave action
and distributed so as to form conglomerates and sandstones. Such action would have distributed lavas wholly silici-
fied as well as those which were yet glassy, and the detritus of both would necessarily mingle with detritus from
the Archean. Such lavas would exhibit great contortion and in places great brecciation, the same as later lavas,
and these breccias must have been mingled sometimes with the products of detrital action. After prolonged activity
of the volcanoes most of the deposits and of the lavas which were submarine would be permeated by secondary
silica, but carbonate of iron would permeate the mass where carbonic acid had freer access, as in the lagoons into
which streams drained from the land surface to the north.
This view Winchell also applies to the Vermilion range. He argues that the iron of the
iron-bearing formation was first deposited as a ferric oxide and that the ferruginous cherts
making up the greater part of the formation to-day are origmal oceanic deposits laid down
essentially in the present form.
In volume 6 of tlie "Geology of Minnesota" he argued that the solutions formed from
the igneous rocks acciunulated in the rocks to the point of saturation and that precipitation
came later as a result of cooling.
This discarded view of Winchell obviously has more points in common vnth the theory
of origin outlined in the present monograph than his more recent views, although important
differences are still to be noted.
In a report on the Baraboo range Weidman * reached the conclusion that the iron ores
of that district were originally precipitated in bogs and shallow waters as limonite and hematite
associated ^nth slate, that they were then covered by the dolomite, tilted up, and ernded,
and that the deposits to-day are essentially the same in lithology as they were when depositeil
with the exception of certain minor vicissitudes in the way of dehydration, recrystallization,
etc. The deposits might under this theory extend to indefinite depths — indeed, as far as anj'
of the sedimentary formations of the district — and in this way the}' would contrast with the
distribution of the ores determined primarily by a secondary concentration from the surface.
In view of the evidence of secondary concentration found in other parts of the Lake Superior
region the burden of proof must rest with one who attempts to exclude secondary concentra-
tion of the Baraboo ores. Deep drilling in the Baraboo district has seemed to show a diminu-
tion in thickness and grade of ore beds and a relative increase of iron carbonate with increase
in depth, pointing to secondary concentration from the surface as the agency which has been
largely responsible in developing the ore bodies. The dilVcrence in opinion as to tlie origin
of Baraboo ores here indicated is really one primarilj' of emphasis. Weidman emphasizes
the primary deposition in rich beds; we believe that the primary deposition, wliile a large
factor in localizing ores, has been supplemented by considerable secondary concentration to
develop the commercial ore deposits.
o The geology of Minnesota, vol. 5, 1900, pp. 997-99S.
6 Weidman, Samuel, Bull. Wisconsin Geol. and Nat. Uist. Siu-vey No. 13, 1904, pp. 142-14(3.
THE IRON ORES. 571
GENETIC CLASSIFICATION OF THE PRINCIPAL IRON ORES OF THE WORLD.
Iron ores are known to have been developed by a great variety of igneous and metamor-
phic processes. In almost any genetic classification of ore deposits iron ores will be repre-
sented in each of tlie divisions, contrasting thereby with the less abundant precious metals.
Moreover, it is likely that certain iron-ore deposits would fall outside of any such classifica-
tion and others would require assignment to two or more of the divisions. The following
classificatioa of the iron ores of the world has been constructed with the idea of showing the
correlatives of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian ores and the wide range of conditions under
which the larger and better-known deposits have developed.
1. Macmatic segregations, usually in basic rocks. Titaniferous and silicated magnetites,
weathering to limonites, epidotic and chloritic magnetites. On disintegration yielding mag-
netic sands.
Titaniferous magnetites of northeastern Minnesota and Adirondacks.
Magnetite of Vysokaya Gora and Gorolilagadot of the Uralo, Russia.
Silicated magnetites and specular hematites of pre-Cambrian of Kiirunavaara, Gellivare, etc.,
Sweden.
Silicated magnetites of Kiirunavaara, Loussavaara, and TuoUavaara, Sweden.
Titaniferous magnetites in Taberg, Sweden.
2. Igneous after-effects, usually from acidic rocks (pneumatolytic, pegmatitic, etc.), usually
deposited ^^^thin or near parent igneous mass.
Certain silicated magnetites of Vermilion and Atikokan districts of Adirondacks .and New
Jersey, of Iron Mountain. Missouri, and of Iron Springs, Utah.
Contact-silicated magnetites of Christiania, suggested by Backstrom and DeLaunay to be
aqueous sediments contriljuted by associated jjorphyries.
3. Residual limonites resulting from weathering of igneous rocks.
In this class are most of the laterite deposits resulting from the weathering of basic igneous
rocks in tropical regions. The limonites of northeastern Cuba, constituting the weathered
mantle of serpentine rock, are in enormous tonnage.
4. Sedimentary.
A. Iron oxides, mainly syngenetic.
Crystalline hematites of Minas Geraes, Brazil, the largest and richest known deposits of
this type in the world.
C'ambro-Silurian micaceous hematite and magnetite of Norway.
Oolitic limonites, containing subordinate quantities of iron-silicate granules of various
descriptions and iron carbonates, in Silurian Clinton rocks of Wisconsin and Appa-
lachians and Newfoundland; in Jtirassic of Luxemlnirg, Lorraine, and elsewhere in
Germany and in Cleveland district of England; in Tertiary of Louisiana, Texas, and
Bavaria.
Bog and lake limonites, sometimes in granules. In glacial lakes and bogs of Lake Superior
j-egion. Small and nonproductive. Represented by Scandinavian lake ores, Finnish
lake ores, lake and bog ores of eastern Canada, Massachusetts, and elsewhere.
A 1. Iron oxides, developed mainly by secondary surface alterations of sedigenetic carbonates and
silicates.
Pre-Cambrian hematites and limonites of Lake Superior region.
Paleozoic limonites of Spring Valley, Wisconsin.
Brown ores of southern Appalachians, etc.
A 2. Iron o.ridcs. resultinr/ from anamorphic alterations of sedimentary iron-bearing formations.
Specular hematites and silicated magnetites derived from deep-seated anamorphism
of oxides, especially of carbonates and silicates by deep burial, intrusion, or both.
Marquette specular hematites. Hard lilue hematites of Vermilion.
Silicated magnetites of Gunflint district of Minnesota, eastern Mesabi, western Gogebic,
western Marquette, etc.
B. Iron carbonates. Usually associated with coal or carbonaceous slates. Also various inter-
mixtures of calcium and magnesium carijonates, with minor amounts of oxides and silicates.
Huronian original iron carbonates of Gogebic, Marquette, Menominee, and other districts of
Lake Superior region, altering at surface to limonites and hematites, and nt depth or by
igneous intrusion to silicated magnetites and hemitites.
Carlioniferous 1ilack-band ores of Pennsylvania, Ohio, and Kentucky, altering at surface to
brown ores or pot ores in clay.
572 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Tertiary black-band ores of Marj-land.
Carboniferous lilack-hand ores of Germany.
Carboniferous blatk-band ores of Wales and Scotland.
Permian lilack-liand ores of district of Erzberg, in the northern Alps.
C. Iron silicates. Greeiialite, glauconite, chamosite, thuringite, etc., with minor mixtures of
iron oxides and carlionates.
Hiironian original greenalite rocks of Mesabi district of Minnesota, derived largely from direct
igneous contributions, as indicated under 2. .Mtering to hematites and limonites at sur-
face and to silicated magnetites at depth or at igneous contacts.
Lower Silurian chamosite ores of central Bohemia and chamosite and thuringite ores of
Thuringerwald and vicinity, in Germany.
D. Various combinations of above.
It will be noted that the Lake Superior ores are represented in most of the princi})al classes
here given. They also constitute an important subclass, the greenalite ores, developed by
ac[ueo-igneous processes, not yet certainly idcntilicd elsewhere.
Much the largest part of the world's production of iron ore has come in recent years from
the sedimentary ores. The largest reserves are in that class. Also important for the future
are the resiilual weathering ores of the laterite type, such as are found hi northeastern Cuba.
The highest grades are reached in the sedimentary ores which, in addition to some 'purification
by weathering in place in a parent rock, have been sorted and segregated during transporta-
tion and deposition as sediments, and in the Lake Superior type, when again exposetl to the
surface, have undergone further purification through katamorphjsm. These successive concen-
trations have removed deleterious constituents, broken up complex silicates, and left the ores
with a porous texture better adapted for furnace reduction than the ores of classes 1 and 2.
The iron ores therefore illustrate both a wide range of ore-depositing agencies and the
great increase of values effected by the reaction with meteoric waters and the atmosphere in
the zone of katamorphism.
One of the most striking features of the ore deposits of the sedimentaiy class is the preva-
lence m them of granular textures, both oolitic and amorphous. The principal types of gran-
ules are as follows :
Green ferrous silicates:
Greenalite, Fe(Mg)Si0^.nH20, amorphous.
Glauconite, hydrous silicate or iron and potassium, amorphous, resembling earthy chlorite, in
granules.
Thuringite, 8Fe0.4(Al,Fe)203.6Si02.9H20, related to prochlorite, massive and fresh, oolitic when
altered.
Chamosite, SiOj 29 per cent, AljOj 13 per cent, FeaOj 6 per cent, FeO 42 per cent, H2O 10 per
cent. Related to prochlorite. Oolitic.
Oolites with concentric rings of quartz and some green silicate, of chloritic nature, undetermined.
Found in Clinton and other ores.
Hematite and limonite:
Oolites consisting of concentric rings of silica and iron oxide.
Amorphous granules .representing oxidation of scjme of the ferrous silicate granules mentioned
above or replacing sliells.
All the above granules lie in various cements of silica, iron oxide, and calcium carbonate.
The correlation and origin of these various granular forms present an interesting field for
monographic study. It is known that some are organic, as, for instance, tite glauconite and
certain of the amorphous iron-oxide granules replacing shells. It is known further that proba-
bly the larger part are inorganic, including the oolites and amorphous greenalite and iron
oxide. As shown in another place (p. 525), both the greenalite ami iron-oxide granides form
in ordinary chemical j)recipitates, and it is further suggested that they are perhaps related to
Lehmaim's liquid crj'stals. It may be of interest to note that of the three common iron com-
pounds, oxides, silicates, and carbonates, the two former appear in granules, while the last does
not. The oxides and silicates have weak crystallizing power, which, according to Lehmann,
is usually a.s.sociated with tlic (Ipvel()|)ment of granular or amorphous forms; the carbonates
have strong crystallizing power, tending to give the surface definite and angidar outlines.
CHAPTER XVIII. THE COPPER ORES OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR
REGION.
By the authors, assisted by Edward Steidtmann.
THE COPPER DEPOSITS OF KEWEENAW POINT.
GENERAL ACCOUNT.
Although the authors have studied the copper of the Keweenawan series in many parts
of tlie Lake Superior region and have visited the copper deposits frequently, they have made no
systematic investigation of the ore deposits themselves. Since the publication of Irving's
monograph" on the district by the United States Geological Sui'vey, the detailed mapping
done by the Survey in this region has been confined to the iron deposits. It is nevertheless
thought desirable to include in this monograph a general account of the copper deposits in
order to summarize, as fully as possible, the present state of knowledge of the geology' of the
Lake Superior region. The portion of tliis chapter dealing with the origin of the ores con-
tains certain new features.
The fallowing description of the ores is based jiartly on our own observations and largely
on the published descriptions of Irving,"^ Rickard, '' Lane/' Graton/ and others.
The copper-producing district of Keweenaw Point follows the axis of the point in a general
northeasterly direction for 70 miles and has a width of 3 to 6 miles. The richest portion of the
belt is the central portion, in Houghton County, adjacent to Portage Lake (see PI. XLIX), in
association with the upper lava flows.
The copper is metallic. With the exception of the comparatively small amount of coarse
copper — "mass" and "barrel work" — sorted out at ^he mines, all the ores are subjected to
crushing by steam stamps, followed by concentration.
The principal gangue minerals of the copper of this district are calcite, quartz, prelmite,
and laumontite, with smaller but still considerable quantities of analcite, apophyllite, natro-
lite and other zeolites, orthoclase, datolite, epidote, chlorite (delessite), and native copper.
Rarer associates are, according to Prof. A. E. Seaman, of the Michigan College of Mines,*
ailularia, agate, anliydrite, algotlonite, azurite, aragonite, argentite, amethyst, annabergite,
ampliibole, ankerite, barite, braunite, biotite, bornite, cerargyrite, chalcocite, chloanthite,
clu^'socolla, chalcopyrite, clilorastrolite, cuprite, covellite, clinochlore ( ?), dolomite, domeykite,
fluorite, gypsum, hematite, iddingsite, jasper, kaolinite, keweenawite, limonite, magnetite,
martite, marcasite, malachite, melaconite, muscovite, mohawkite, niccolite, pyrite, pyrrhotite,
phillipsite, powellite, saponite, selenite, stibiodomeykite, semiwhitneyite, serj)entine, silver,
siderite, talc, whitneyite, thomsonite, wad, and wollastonite. Though this group of minerals
a Irving, R, D., The copper-bearing rocks of Lake Superior: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883.
b Rickard, T. A., Tile copper mines of tlie Lake Superior region, New York, 1905.
c Lane, A. C, Tlie geology of Keweenaw Point — a brief description: Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 12, 1907, pp. 81-104: The geology of
copper deposition: Am. Geologist, vol. 34, 1904, pp. 297-309.
ti Graton, L. C, Silver, copper, lead, and zinc in the Western States: Mineral Resources U. S. for 1907, pt. 1, U. S. Geol. Survey, 1908 (Michigan,
pp. 496-523; Copper, pp. 571-644).
' Personal communication, 1910.
573
574
GEOLOGY OF THE LAIvE SUPERIOR REGION.
is cliaracteristic of the deposits in general, they may vary in importance in the difTeront
tyi)es as well as in tiie difTerent parts of the distrirt. Calcite is the most abundant associated
mineral in the transverse vems and conglomerates; ejjidote is the most abundant in the
dipping veins. The genetic sequence of these minerals is discussed uniler the origin of the ores.
The copper constitutes (1 ) veins intersecting the northwestward dipping beds of the
Keweenawan series described in Chapter XV and (2) beddeil deposits formed by infiltration or
replacement of both the conglomerate and amygdaloidal beds of the Keweenawan series,
chiefly in the beds below the "Great" conglomerate, which is the dividing line between the
lower part of the Keweenawan, where traps predominate, and the upper part, where sediments
predominate. (See fig. 75.) Copper deposits have not been found in felsitic beds and compact
traps, except in minute quantities in the latter, where they are closely associated with amygda-
loid beds. Rich cores of native copper are reported to have been drilled ,on the Indiana
property, in 0nt6nagon County, from a verj^ dense felsite, which appears to be intrusive.
Development, however, has not reached the productive stage. Only one bed above the "Great"
conglomerate contains copper, and this is the Nonesuch shale, which carries a little disseminated
copper throughout its extent and has been worked m the Porcupine Mountain district.
_o*^o° Basicflows with
. Level of Lake Superior ,o*,e»interbedded conglomerate
'{< __!;gl,^,;^^!^^tar?— ,■ y j„y^^ yy/Ata^^ Cambrian sandstone
Copper-bearing lodes
KEWEENAWAN SERIES
Figure 75.— Cross section of Keweenaw Point near Calumet, sliowing copper lodes in conglomerates and amygdaioids.
The deposits earliest exploited were the veins transverse to the strike of the beds in the
Eagle River area at the northeastern extremity of the district ; the next were the veins parallel
to the strike, though not uniformly to the dip, in the Ontonagon area at the southwest end of
the district. The vein deposits, especially those in the Ontonagon district, are characterized
by masses of copper, being in this respect distinguished from the amygdaloidal and conglomerate
copper deposits, in which the copper is, as a rule, much more minutely disseminated. The
amygdaloidal deposits were the. next to be opened, principally in the central portion of the
district, but also in the Ontonagon area. The conglomerate deposits occurring only in a small
area in the vicinity of Calumet, in the central portion of the district, were the last to be opened.
(For summary of history see pp. 35-37.) In 1907 73.1 per cent of the ore mined came from
amygdaloidal lodes and 26.9 per cent from conglomerate lodes, the vein deposits at present
being practically nonproducing, although of the total production from the district approximately
3 per cent is sorted out at the mines as coarser mass material.
The grade of the ores is low and is becoming lower. In the early days of mining much
ore above 3 per cent was mined. In 1906 the average grade for the district was 1.26 per cent,
and in 1907 it dropped to 1.1 per cent, and to 1.05 per cent in 1908. Onlj' four mines in 1908
worked ore yielding an average of 1 per cent or more in metallic copper. In 190S the richest
iodes mined carried less than 2 per cent metallic copper, while the poorest yielded but little
over 0.5 per cent. The grades and amounts mined from the principal mines in 1907 are as
follows:"
o Mineral Resources U. S. for 1907, pt. 1, V. S. Geol. Survey, 1908, p. 500.
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MONOGRAPH Lll PL. XLIX
Veins
See list below for
explanation of numbers
LIST OF VEINS
Lake lode (amygdaloid)
Nonesuch lode (conglomerate and sandstone)
Arnold lode (ash bed amygdaloid) (Equivalent to No. 1 1?)
Forest lode (amygdaloid)
Branch lode (amygdaloid)
Calico lode (amygdaloid)
Evergreen lode (amygdaloid)
Butler lode (amygdaloid)
Knowlton lode (amygdaloid)
Winona lode (amygdaloid)
Atlantic lode (amygdaloid)
Pewabic lode (amygdaloid)
Allouez or Boston and Albany lode (conglomerate)
Calumet and Hecia lode (conglomerate)
Osceola lode (amygdaloid)
Kearsarge lode (amygdaloid)
Isle Royale lode (amygdaloid)
Baltic lode (amygdaloid)
R27W
R26W
MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF COPPER-BEARING LODES AND MINES ON KEWEENAW POINT.
See page 573.
THE COPPER ORES.
Ore output and grade of the principal Michigan lodes in 1907.
575
Lode.
Ore
(tons).
r.rade
(per cent).
Calumet .■
2,400.000
1,900.000
2,350.000
1.250.000
750.000
1.835
1.06
.87
Baltic
Kearsarge
Pewabic a
Osceola '.
895
Actual total and average
8.041,361
1,250,853
1 67
All other lodes
.62
a Partly estimated.
A little native silver occurs with the copper in some lodes. Averaojed on the total tonnage
in 1908, the silver yield was 0.023 ounce to the ton. Native silver is present in all the deposits,
but is particularly characteristic in the veins of the Eagle River and Ontonagon areas, where
also mass copper is abundant.
The amygdaloidal and conglomerate deposits have great extent along the strike, the
Kearsarge lode, for example, being actively mined almost without break for a distance of
12 miles and other lodes being mined for 2 miles along their strike. They have been followed
down the dip to a maximum distance of more than 1^ miles and a vertical depth of about a
mile, making these mines among the deepest in the world, and are still found to be productive,
although of somewhat lower grade. The depth to which mining may be carried is not yet
known. That it should be possible to mine at a profit ores as low as 0.5 per cent at a depth
of a mile is due to the remarkable uniformity and continuity of the deposits along both strike
and dip. Shoots of richer ore pitching parallel to the strike of the beds — as, for mstance, the
northward-pitchmg shoot of the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate — are known in a few places,
but these are themselves so extensive that their existence and alternation with leaner portions
of the beds have been ascertained only after years of extensive mining.
TRANSVERSE VEINS OF EAGLE RIVER DISTRICT.
The veins of the Eagle River district, in the northern part of Keweenaw Peninsula, cut
vertically across the strike of the betls of sediments, traps, and amygdaloids. The veins are
not commonly formed by the filling of a simple fissure, but by a large number of subparallel,
anastomosing fissures with blocks of small rock inclosed between, forming rather a fracture
zone. The productive zone is i-n the amygdaloid beds immediately below the Allouez con-
glomerate and above the greenstone. The veins vary fi-om mere seams to those 20 or 30 feet
wide, being widest where they cut across loose-textured amygdaloidal beds and not exceeding
a width of 3 feet where they are in contact with compact traps. The greatest depth reached La
the minmg of transverse veins is 1,600 feet, in the Cliff mine. The texture of the rock traversed
by the veins also controls the ore content, the veins being rich where they cut porous amyg-
daloidal layers and poor where they cut compact layers. Many of the amygdaloid beds them-
selves are rich enough to be productive adjacent to transverse veins.
The gangue materials associated with the copper of the Eagle River veins are mainly
calcite, quartz, prehnite, and laumontite, but analcite, apophyllite and other zeolites, orthoclase,
datolite, epidote, natrolite, and other minerals are found. Native silver is present. Veins
containing only calcite are generally bare of copper.
The copper is scattered through the gangue in thin films penetrating other minerals or in
coarser fragments filling interstices between other minerals, or occurs in lenses, in this occurrence
usually with a crystalline form. Mass copper also is found here, the masses ranging up to
many tons in weight and many of them containing fragments of wall rock.
Irving " believes that these veins are replacements along fissured zones rather than fillings
of open fissures. As evidence he cites the gradation between vein and wall rock, the replacement
of wall rock by copper masses, the occurrence of fragments of wall rock in the vein and in the
1 1rving, R. D., Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 422-426.
576 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
copper masses, and the greater width of the veins adjacent to amydgaloidal beds than of those
in contact with dense traps. The origin of tlie copper ores is discussed on pages 580 et seq.
Transverse lissure veins are not restricted to the Eagle River district, but are present
in nearly every mine on Keweenaw Peninsula. In the southern districts, however, these
veins, as a rule, contain no copper, or at least not enougli to make them productive. Many
of them are barren even where they cross productive beils of amygdaloids.
No mines are now operating in the Eagle River district. Explorations have recently
been conducted there with a view to further mining. The mines which have produced ore
in this district are the ^tna. Empire, Delaware, Amygdaloid, Copper Falls, Central, Phoenix,
and Cliff.
DIPPINO VEINS OF ONTONAGON DISTRICT.
The dipping veins of the Ontonagon district are noted chiefly for the great amount of mass
copper that has been removetl from them. Tiie principal "mass " deposits are in tiie group
of amygdaloids, traps, and conglomerates corresponding roughly to the strata between Portage
Lake and the area covered by the u})per sediments. The veins are fillings of fractures following
the strike of the beds. Many of those within weaker portions of the bed — for instance, along
amj'gdaloidal layers — have a dip steeper than the bedding. Those that lie between two
different beds are likel}' to dip at the same angle as the beds.
The veins vary in width from a few inches to many feet. The veins between different
beds are more lO'cely to be narrow; those cutting amygdaloidal beds may consist of a wide
fracture zone, with fi-agments of rock interspersed with vein minerals. Slickensided walls
locally bound the veins, but on the whole the contact is irregular. Irving'^ believed these
veins, as well as the transverse veins of the Eagle River district, to be largely replacements of
wall rock.
Transverse veins (crossing the strike) are present also throughout the mines of the
Ontonagon district, but they are unproductive except where they cross dipping veins.
The chief vein materials associated with the copper are epidote and calcite, but the other
minerals above named as generally associated with copper are present. The copper occurs in
irregular hackly masses, some of wliich are many tons in weight. One mass found in the
Minnesota mine in 1857 weighed 420 tons. The large proportion of mass copper originally
mined in this district gradually decreased and the production of amygdaloidal copper increased.
In 1908 the production was derived wholly from amj'gdaloid lodes. The principal producing
mines are the Adventure, Mass, Michigan, and Victoria. Recent explorations have shown
additional copper deposits.
AMYGDALOID DEPOSITS.
The copper deposits in am3'gdaloids are by far the most numerous and most productive in
the Keweenaw Point region. The amygdaloids are the uj^jier, and in some places the lower,
vesicular portions of the many lava flows, vnth here and there an interbedded detrital la^'er.
The thickness of the productive portion of the amygdaloids varies from a few feet to 35 or 40
feet. The depth to which amygdaloid beds are productive has not been determined : the greatest
depth yet reached is shown in the Quincy mine — 5,280 feet along the incline, or 4,008 feet
vertically.
The copper deposits in the amygdaloids, though lean in places, are much more continuous
along the strike than those in the conglomerates, several mines miles apart working the same bed.
There are very unusual variations in strike in the vicinity of the Baltic, Trimountain, and
Champion mines.
The dip of the amygdaloids flattens out below and also to the northeast along the strike.
The Quincy lode has a dip of 55° at the surface and 37° at a depth of about 5,000 feet along the
inchne. The Atlantic lode dips 54°, the Wolverine 40°, and the "Baltic" 70°, the dip thus
showing a considerable variation even in a small area, tliough in general being stec])er in the
southern part of the region.
11 Irving, R. D., Mon. U. S. Oeol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 422^36.
THE COPPEK ORES. 577
In amygdaloidal beds the copper occurs in cavities in amygdules partly filled by other
minerals, alon"; cleava<j;c or fracture phmes within these minerals or replacing tliem partly or
com])letely. The minerals associated with the copper are prelmite, chlorite, calcite, and cjuartz.
According to Irving," considerable portions of the beds have lost all semblance to their original
amygdaloidal structure and now consist of clilorite, epidote, calcite, and quartz intimately
associated or forming separate masses of the most indefinite sliape merging into one another.
In places portions of partly altered prehnite occur associated with copper, but as a rule prelmite has
given waj' to its alteration products. In these liighly altered masses cojiper crystallized free wJiere
it had a chance, but more commonly it rei)laced other minerals. In calcite bodies it formed those
irregular, sohd brandling forms locally known as horn co])])er, some of them many hundred
]>ounds in weiglit; in e])idote, quartz, and ])rehnite bodies it occurs as thread and flakelike
impregnations; in fohaceous, lenticular chloritic bodies it forms flakes between cleavage planes
and oblique jomts, or here and there — this is more particularly true of fissure veins — it replaces
the chloritic selvage-like substance till it forms literally pseudomorphs, some of which are several
hundred tons in weight.
In the Baltic and adjacent mines are considerable quantities of black sulphides near the
surface, but even here they are not in sufficient amount to have economic value. The amount
of these sulphides decreases greatly with increasmg depth.
The amygdaloids are productive only where broken. Usually they have both strike and
dip fractures in addition to very irregular fracturing. Commonly the strike fractures are not
exactly parallel to the beds but cut across them at acute angles. Many of these fractures show
shckensiding, ]iroving considerable differential movements. At the Quincy and Baltic mines the
amygdaloid is lean where there are cross fractures, but a little distance away from the cross
fractures it is rich.
In some places the copper goes down into the compact rock beneath the amygdaloid,
following zones of Assuring, alteration, and replacement.
In a number of places productive amygdaloid occurs below a heavy trap bed, as at the
Winona, Quincy, Atlantic, Wolveiine, and Baltic mines.
The mines operating in the amygdaloidal deposits and ]iroducing 60 per cent of the total
output of the Keweenaw Point district in 1908 were the Calumet and Hecla, Tamarack, Osceola,
Quincy, Centennial, Wolverine, Tecumseh, Franklin, Isle Roy ale, Atlantic, Baltic, Trimountain,
Champion, Winona, Allouez, Ahmeek, Mohawk, Adventure, Mass, Michigan, and Victoria.
The distribution of these mines and the lodes upon which they are operating are shown on
Plate XLIX (p. 574). The Calumet and Hecla, Osceola, Ahmeek, Wolverine, and Mohawk are
on the so-called Kearsarge lode, wliich has been developed for an extent of about 14 miles, the
largest deposit in the district. The Wolverine has the richest deposit, running about 1.35 per
cent of refined copper. The ore runs as low as 0.7 per cent in other mines. Below 0.7 per
cent it has not been found profitable to mine. South of Portage Lake the only lode which has a
large production is the Baltic. Its surface extent is about 4 miles and the yield averages about
1.1 per cent.
COPPER IN CONGLOMERATES.
Only two workable beds of conglomerate have been found among thirty or more beds
distributed through the Keweenawan series untlerneath the "Great" conglomerate — the Allouez
("Boston and Albany") conglomerate and the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate — and even
these are workable only in a small area. A number of other conglomerate beds have been found
to contain small impregnations of copijer but not enough to be proiluctive. The Allouez
conglomerate is being worked by the Franklm Junior mine and the Calumet and Hecla con-
glomerate by the Calumet and Hecla and Tamarack mines. (See PI. XLIX.)
The Calumet and Hecla conglomerate is the richest and largest copper lode in the district
and ranks among the fii'st two or three lai-ge copper deposits of the world. It is famous as the
principal source of copper of the Calumet and Hecla Company, which has been the greatest
ttOp. cit.,pp. 421-422.
47.517°— VOL 5-2—11 37
578 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
ilividend payer in the history of mining. This conglomerate thins both to the north and south.
At the North ITeclti nime it is not more than 8 feet wide in one place. It tliuis so ra])i(lly \o
the soutli that on tlie Osceola property it has not been discovered. Thus the Calumet and
Hecla conglomerate is essentially a lens.
The Calumet and Ilecla conglomerate bed is prochictive only in the 2 rrules covered by
the Calumet and ILecla and Tamarack pioperties. Nortli of this area the bed was mined by
the Centennial mine without success, and to the south it was mined by the owners of the Osceola
before they sunk down to the Osceola amygdaloid.
The conglomerate dips 39° W. at the surface, flattening to 36° with depth. It is followed
down the dip from the outcrop to a maximum depth of 8,100 feet by the Calumet and llecla
Company, representing a vertical depth of 4,748 feet. A vertical shaft belonging to the same
company about a mile from the outcrop on the hangmg-wall side passes through the lode at a
depth of 3,287 feet and goes to a depth of 4,900 feet. One of the Tamarack shafts reaches a
depth of 5,229 feet, being the deepest shaft in the world. The conglomerate lode has increased
in tldckness from 13 feet at the surface to 20 feet in the deepest workings. The upper half
(stratigraphically) is richer than the lower half of the bed.
The copper content of the Calumet and Ilecla conglomerate was formerly about 4 per cent
near the surface, and now a mile verticall}' below the siuface is 1 to H per cent and averages
for the mine shipment 1.83 per cent. The copper is of lower grade and less regularly dis-
tributed in the Tamarack part of the same bed. This decrease in grade of the ore worked
with increase in depth is partly a real one and jiartly due to improvements anil lower costs,
enabling lower-grade ores to be worked. The richer ores of the Calumet and Ilecla conglom-
erate constitute a shoot pitching to the north and extending to the Centemiial ground. The
upper half of the conglomerate bed is finer grauied than the lower half. It contains more
interstratified sandstone layers, called sandstone bars, which are usually barren but in places
are verj' rich. In some places they separate the conglomerate into two parts ami in such places
the values may be either above or below the sandstone. The conglomerate is well cemented
to both foot and hanging walls.
Below the conglomerate are several amygdaloidal beds. Immediately over the conglom-
erate is a trap, 300 or 400 feet tliick, which separates it from the fu-st amj'gdaloid. The cross-
section maps of the formations, made from the drifts of the deep shafts intersecting the beds
for thousands of feet above and below the conglomerate, divide the lavas into two classes,
traps and amygdaloids. The traps form the greater part of the sections and man}- of them are
hundreds of feet in thickness. The amygdaloids compose a much smaller portion of the sections
and are usually thin. The copper values are very small in the trap and amygdaloids, both above
and below the conglomerate.
The rich portions of. the conglomerate are usuall.y light colored; the poor portions are dark.
Tliis is a practical distinction by mining men, who speak of the lean conglomerate as "black"
and mean by tliis that wherever it is m tliis condition the values are low or lacking. Tliis
difference in color is due to the fact that the alterations, a jiart of wliich resulted in the deposition
of the copper, have bleached the conglomerate. In many jilaces in the rich conglomerate
aureoles of hghter-colored material ma}^ be seen at the outer parts of pebbles and bowldei-s.
The Allouez conglomerate, worked by the Franklin Junior mine, varies between 8 and 25
feet in thickness, with 3 to 4 feet of sandstone at the base. It is of lower grade than the Calumet
and Hecla conglomerate, averagmg about 0.5 per cent in copper.
The pebbles in the conglomerates are mainly porphyritic felsite with diabase and amvgda-
loids m subordinate amounts. Locallv, as m the Calumet and Hecla conglomerate, granitic and
quartz porphjny pebbles are abundant. The original cementing materials were siliceous and
feldspatlvic particles, l)ut these have been replaced largely by secondary calcite and cpidote,
with chlorite, and where the conglomeiates are pro<hictive the copper is an important or the
ciuef cementmg juaterial. Copper also replaces pebbles to varymg degrees, in this process
the pebble first becomes porous and discolored and is altered to a mass of epidote and chlorite
with a spongelike skeleton of copper associated with calcite. As a rule epidote and clilorite
THE COPPER ORES.
579
first replace the matrix and porphyritic feldspars and later copper replaces them, but often
copper replaces feldspar directl_y, penetratmg m tliin fdms along cleavaije planes. Pebbles like
these, some of them as large as a man's head, are found m both the Calumet and Pleela and the
Allouez conglomerates, being composed of copper in various degrees up to nearly solid bowlders
of metal. In some pebbles the copper has almost entirely replaced the original material as well
as tlie epidote alteration, but more commoid}^ the copper skeleton contains in its cavities
unaltered crystals of orthoclase and quartz, surrounded by a crust of epidote and chlorite.
Few fractures are noted in the conglomerate, nor is there evidence of slippmg or faults at
contacts with walls. The hanging wall is not safe, tending to fall down. Whether this is due
to the weakness of the rock when the stopes are taken out so that new fractures are formed, or
whether incipient fractures were present, has not been determined. Certainly the distribution
of values is not a fimction of exceptional shattering.
In the Nonesuch shale of the Porcupine Mountain district copper is found as a cementing
mateiial, as a replacement of cementmg material, and as a replacement of rock particles. Many
of the copper fragments in tins bed are pecuHar in having mmute cores of magnetite.
COMPOSITION OF COPPER-MINE WATERS.
Lane has assembled a large number of analyses of copper-mme waters. He finds that
in the upper levels of the mines, to depths varying from 500 to 1,000 feet, the waters are abun-
dant and fresh, though on the whole somewhat softer than the river waters of the Mississippi
Valley. Below these depths the waters are much less abundant and more highly concen-
trated and contain principally chlorides of soda and calcium. At the deepest levels the cal-
cium and soda may be in about equal proportions, or the calcium may predominate over the
soda. At intermediate levels the soda predominates over the calcium. The contrast in com-
position of the upper and lower waters slightly resembles that of the waters of the upper and
lower levels of the iron mines. Reference is made on pages 543-544 to possible causes of this
difference in composition.
Of the several analyses available, three are selected as typical of the three classes of water.
Analyses of copper-mine ivaters.'^
[Parts per million.]
Deep
water.
Inter-
mediate
water.
3.
Surface
Cl
SO)
CO3
PC,
Na
K
Ca
Mg
Al
Fe
Mn
SiOs
(FeAljzOa.
FeiOa
AI2O3
Sum.
Difference. .
Total solids determined .
134,910
2,123
2,123
None.
11,592
None.
65,346
2,12J
None.
None.
None.
2,123
702
75
414
91.2
35
30
1,347.2
2.8
212,300
1,350
'3.0+
6 +
40 +
''2.3+
19
4
10
1.6
a Lane, A. C, Mine waters: Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 13, 1908, pp. 74-126.
b If contaminated.
1. Water from one of the lower levels of the Quincy copper mine, Hancock, Mich. Analysis by George Steiger. Cited in Bull. U. S. Geol.
Survey No. 330, 1908, p. 144.
2.' Water from South Kearsarge mine. Keweenaw Point, No. 1 shaft, ninth level, dripping collected by F. W. McNair and C. D. Hohl.
Analysis given by Lane, A. C, Proc. Lake Superior Min. Inst., vol. 13, 1908, p. 116.
3. Water from Tobacco River, Michigan. Analysis given by Lane, A. C., op. cit., p. 90.
580 GEOT.OGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOIl REGTOX.
COPPER IN KEWEENAWAN ROCKS IN PARTS OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION
OTHER THAN KEWEENAW POINT.
Copper is known in small quantities in the KeweenaAvan 1ia])s and sediments in Doii<;las
County, Wis., in adjacent parts oi' Minnesota, on Isle Royal, on Michipicoten Island, and else-
where. These occurrences are not essentially different from those of Keweenaw Point in their
niiiioralogical and geologic associations. The copper occurs piincipally in fissure veins cutting
the Jjedding of the traps and to a less extent in the amygdaloidal openings and interbeddcd
sediments. Exploration has been carried on intermittently in all the areas named. On Isle
Royal a considerable amount of metalhc copper has been mined. (See pp. 37-38.) None of
these districts are now producing copper.
ORIGIN OF THE COPPER ORES.
COMMON ORIGIN OF THE SEVERAL TYPES OF DEPOSITS.
The copper ores of the Lake Superior region are in part replacements of conglomerates and
cementing material filling the original openings in the conglomerate, in part fillings of amygda-
loidal openings and replacements in traps, to a slight extent fillings of veins and replacements
of adjacent wall rock, and finally cement and replacements of a basic sandstone liigh in the
series. The copper is an integral part of the cementing material of these rocks.
In a discussion of origin the three types of deposits must be considered as essentially a
unit. Irving " sees in them —
simply the results of a rock alteration entirely analogous to that which has brought about the deposition of copper
and its associated vein-stone minerals within the cupriferous amygdaloids. They are alteration zones which traverse,
instead of following, the bedding, simply because the drainage of the altering waters has been given this direction by
the preexisting fissures. * * * Thus the differences in origin of the several classes of copper deposits — conglomerate
beds, cupriferous amygdaloids, epidote veins parallel to the bedding, and "fissure" veins transverse to it — which
at first sight seem to l>e great, on closer inspection for the most part disappear.
That much of the copper was introduced as filling and replacement of wall rocks admits
of no doubt. Several hypotheses are still open as to the source of the copper and the manner
in which it was transferred and redeposited.
PREVIOUS VIEWS OF NATURE OF COPPER-DEPOSITING SOLUTIONS AND
SOURCE OF COPPER.
Irving,'' Wadsworth,'' and nearly all other geologists who have studied the copper-bearing
rocks believe that the source of the copper was in the basic igneous rocks, and that so far as it
was derived from the sediments, its ultimate source was still the basic igneous roclcs, because
tlie sediments came from those rocks. This belief is founded principally' on the uniform and
close association of copper with the basic igneous rocks and the known existence of copper
sulphides minutely disseminated through some of the coarser igneous rocks. The source of
the copper was believed by Pumpelly '^ to be in tiie overlying sediments.
Smyth « believed that the ores did not come from the adjacent wall rocks but from a deep-
seated source, the nature of wliich does not appear from his report.
The conditions and agents under which the copper has been supposed to have been taken
from the adjacent rocks and concentrated have been variously mterpreted. Irvmg,/ Pumpelly, "
<" Irving, R. D., The copper-bearing roelis of Lake Superior: Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 5, 1883, pp. 424-428.
I> Idem, pp. 425-420.
<■ Wadsworth, M. E., The origin and mode of occurrence of the Lake Superior copper deposits: Trans. .\ni. Inst. Mln. Eng., vol. 27, 1S98,
pp. 694-090. See also Miiller, Albert, Verhandl. Naturf. (lesell. Basel, 1857, pp. 4U-4.'i.S; Hauermann, Hilary, (Jiiart. Jour. Geol. Soc., vol. 22, 1886,
pp. 448-403; Wadsworth, M. E., Notes on the iron and copper districts of Lake Superior: Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool. Harvard Coll. Geol. scr., vol. 1,
1880, p. 126.
d Pumpelly, Raphael, The paragenesis and derivation of copper and its as-sociates on Lake Superior: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d scr., vol. 2, 1871, pp.
188-198; 24.3-258; 347-355.
'Smyth, n. L., Theory of origin of the copper ores of the Lake Superior district: Science, new ser., vol. 3, 1S90, p. 251.
/ Irving, R. D., op. cit., pp. 419-420.
f Pumpelly, Raphael, op. cit., pp. 353-355.
THE COPPER ORES. 581
Wadsworth," Lane,'' and others have been inclined more or less strongly to the theory of
concentration under the direct downward movement of meteoric waters. Pumpelly has also
implied that concentration may have occurred when sediments were still below sea level.
Lane "^ has suggested that the waters were salt waters of the type now found in the deep copper
mines, and that they represent fossil sea waters or fossil desert waters, which in the tilting of
the series have migrated downward. Van Hise'' has argued that while meteoric waters have
done the work, it has been during their upward escape after a long underground course. Smj'th^
assigned the first concentration of the ores to ascending solutions from a deep-seated source
not specified.
OUTLINE OF HYPOTHESIS OF ORIGIN OF COPPER ORES PRESENTED IN
THE FOLLOWING PAGES.
The copper ores are characteristically associated with basic igneous rocks. The source
of the copper-bearing solutions lies in these igneous rocks. The original copper-bearing solu-
tions were hot. These solutions may be partly direct contributions of juvenile water from the
magma, partly the result of the action of meteoric waters on crystallized hot rocks.
ASSOCIATION OF ORES AND IGNEOUS ROCKS.
From 60 to 70 per cent of the copper produced in this region comes from the amygdaloids.
The veins of mass copper also are all in igneous rocks and these veins are richest where they
lie parallel to or intersect amygdaloidal beds. The ore-bearing rocks are characteristically
near thick rather than thin flows. Barren conglomerates are interbedded with productive flows.
The only productive conglomerates, the Calumet and Hecla and the Allouez, are associated
with thick flows. Especially is the overlying flow tlaick.
Not only is the association of the ores and the igneous rocks cons])icuous in the producing
district, but throughout the Keweenawan area of Lake Superior traces of copper are widely
distributed in the igneous rocks.
Copper is associated principally with basic igneous flows, but it is now reported in drilling
in felsite, supposedly intrusive, at the Indiana mine. Copper sulphide is also reported by
Wright ^ in association with intrusive gabbros and ophites of Mount Bohemia.
ORB DEPOSITION LIMITED MAINLY TO MIDDLE KEWEENAWAN TIME.
It is beheved that the original deposition of the copper was limited mainly to middle
Keweenawan time, or, if not, at least to the cooling period of the igneous rocks of that time.
As shown below, the wall-rock alterations associated with the ores seem to be characteristic of
hot water. Some of the gangue minerals are hot-water deposits. Bowlders of some barren
conglomerate beds show mineralization wliich was developed before they were broken from
the parent underlying ledge. The deposition of the copper was an episode in the work of
cementation of both sedimentary and igneous rocks, which certainly began as soon as the beds
were deposited but which continued to the end of the volcanic period of the middle Keweenawan
and even longer. Pumpelly's work, mentioned below, shows that the copper was relatively
late among the minerals introduced. The same thing is shown in some places by the absence
of deformation effects upon the copper. The late introduction of the copper is argued by
Smyth B from the contrast of minerals first deposited in the copper-bearing series with those
coming later and carrymg the copper, the first, accortlmg to him, bemg developed under condi-
tions of weathering before the series was folded, and the second being developed after the series
was folded.
n Wadsworth, M. E., The originand mode of occurrence of the Lake Superior copper deposits: Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng., vol. 27. 1S9S, p. 695.
6 Lane, A. C, The theory ot copper deposition; .\ni. Geologi-st, vol. 34, 1904, pp. 297-.'!09.
(■Lane, A. C, The chemical evolution of the ocean: Jour. Geology, vol. 14, 1906, pp. 221-225.
d Van Hise, C. R., .\ treatise on metamorphism: Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 47, 1904, p. 11.3G.
t Op. cit., p. 251.
/ Wright, F. E., The mtrusivc rocks of Mount Bohemia, Michigan: .\nn. Kept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 190S, 1909, pp. 301-.TO7.
ffSmytii, H. L., Theory of the origin of the copper ores of the Lake Superior district: Science, new ser., vol. 3, 1896, p. 251.
582 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Wadsworth " cites tlie extension of copper in a continuous mass from one flow to another
as cvidonco of introduction "after tlie copppr-l)cann<i; series was complete."
Wright '' finds veins of iron and copper suli)iii(Ies dcveloj)ed in the intrusives of Mount
Bohemia, but is uncertain whether they are closely related in time with the consolidation of the
intrusives.
It may well be that the introduction of the copper, begun relatively caily in the middle
Kcweenawan, was to a considerable extent the work of hot solutions after the entire middle
Keweenawan was piled up, when relatively quiescent conditions had been reached; for the
lavas, the slowly cooling, deep-seated intrusives, and the underlying reservoir would be sources
of heat and hot solutions for a long time after active volcanism had ceased.
On the wliole. the evidence seems to indicate clearly that part of the copper was deposited
soon after the extrusion of the associated igneous rocks, but late in the cycle of mineral deposition
in which copper was formed, and that much of the deposition of the copper followed the folding
and deformation of the Keweenawan rocks. As this deformation undoubtedly accompanied
and immediately' followed the deposition of the Keweenawan series, the fact that copper deposi-
tion followed deformation does not necessarily remove it much in time from the formation of the
adjacent rocks. But, on the other hand, there is no evidence which fixes the close of this period
of deposition.
DEPOSITION OF THE COPPER ACCOMPLISHED BY HOT SOLUTIONS.
That the copper was deposited by hot solutions seems to be established b}^ the facts stated
below.
NATURE or GANGUE MINERALS.
Prehnite, epidote, chlorite, laumontite, and other gangue materials of the copper are
aluminum silicates. Alumina is not ordinarily transported by cold pluvial waters, and. specifi-
call}', it Ls not trans])orted by the fresh mine waters near the surface at the present time in any
but the most minute quantity. (See analyses, p. 579.) In the deeper, warmer, heavily concen-
trated chloride waters (see analyses) alumina and ferric oxide are in larger though still small
amounts. The analyses report the alumina and ferric oxide together, and the proi)ortion which
is alumina is not known.
Other characteristic associates of the copper are datolite, containing boron, and apophyllite,
a fluorine mmeral — both substances which are not ordinarily ascribed to solution, transportation,
and deposition by cold solutions. Mine waters working on the gangue materials, which may
be said to contain a concentration of boron and fluorme, even now contain onh' traces of the
boron and fluorine minerak, not enough to afford materials for their precipitation.
NATURE OF WALL-ROCK ALTERATIONS.
The wall rocks are obviously altereil by the same solutions that have dei)0sited the copper.
The bleaching of the wall rock is so characteristic of copper vems that it is regarded as a favorable
sign in exploration. This bleaching alteration, when measured quantitatively, is found to vary
in several important respects from alterations which would be typical of surface waters carrying
the agencies of the atmosphere. Below is a table containing two pairs of analyses of the fresh
and altered wall rocks, selected carefully to eliminate, so far as possible, variations in original
composition; a group of analj'ses made under the direction of Pumpelly, which indicate the
general Uend of chemical change m the trappean beds; an analysis of an altereil Calumet and
Hecla conglomerate bowlder described by Lane; a group of analj'ses by Lmdgren illustrating
the changes in chemical composition of basic igneous rocl<s altered by hot solutions: and two
analyses of fresh and weathereil basic igneous rocks given by Merrill.
» Wadsworth, M. E.,Theori!!inandmodeofoccuTrenceof the Lake Superior copper deposits: Trans, Am. Inst, Uin. Eng.,vol. 27, 189S, p. SG.'i.
b Wri-lit, F. E., op, cit., p. 392.
THE COPPER ORES.
Analyses of fresh and altered ivall rocks compared icilh other rock alterations.
583
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
SiOj
45.83
18.92
6.02
C.24
8.49
9.28
2.10
.32
.60
2.70
49.40
16.12
11. 51
2.13
3.52
10.90
3.02
.58
.10
2.30
46.78
17.04
7.95
6.31
6.31
0.94
3.44
1.10
.66
3.62
46.66
16.97
9.52
4.16
5.02
9.37
4.08
.44
.91
2.79
47.74
16.75
2.55
6.31
8.32
11.40
1.93
.14
( 2.73
42.71
14.93
7.45
3.48
2.70
22.76
.54
.04
/ 3.56
42.83
16.58
4.42
3.81
6.96
14.11
1.29
1.39
f 6.48
46.32
15.95
2.86
8.92
4.08
10.28
3.56
1.23
f 3.25
49.20
AljOs
16.00
Fe^Oj . ..
3.03
FeO
7.10
MeO
6.98
CaO
3.44
NaiO
5.05
K2O
1 31
H2O—
f 4.51
HsO+
TiO.
1.02
^ 1.29
^ 1.36
2.78
2.26
PjOs
COs
.10
.59
.08
.02
S
1
SOa
1
Cii
.017
.04
MnO
.52
.22
.87 . .89
1.17
FeS-i
'
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17. 1 18
19.
SiOz
AljOa
52.83
Ifi. 30
9.60
2.48
3.98
2.98
0.54
2.49
1 2.76
31.42
10.83
15.58
12.08
3.36
2.84
1.98
1.04
f 14.52
45.70
20.44
9.50
8.95
2.24
7.46
.80
.28
.35
2.78
1.10
46.22
10. 22
12.88
7.45
.84
15.56
.18
1.04
.58
3.91
.95
45.50
14.15
11.20
9.83
6.76
2.30
1.57
1.18
.23
4.84
1.11
.14
3.04
37.01
12.99
.43
3.57
5.49
9.78
.13
4.02
.13
1.92
.85
.06
15.04
61.01
11.89
1.57
6.08
8.87
10.36
4.17
.15
.24
2.09
.98
.17
45.74
5.29
.13
2.06
.94
23.85
.11
1.29
.22
1.07
.36
.07
18.91
47.00
15.70
4.78
9.96
6.36
8.96
2.77
1.23
{'3.' 24'
42.50
17 00
FeO
2 70
CaO
4.20
1 50
KjO
70
H2O—
{■■■g.'so
H2O+
PjOs
S
SO3
.03
.04
Cu
Trace.
Trace.
1
MnO
.25
7.86
.24
7.99
■ 1
FeSj
1. specimen 475006. country rock 70 feet Irom the lode, seventh level of Winona mine, Keweenaw Point, Mich. Analysis by R. D. HaII»
University of Wisconsin, 1909.
2. Specimen 47499, center of lode, same locality. Analysis bv R, D. Hall, University of Wisconsin. 1909.
3. Specimen 47506, 12 feet from footwall of sLxtv-third level of Quincy mine, Keweenaw Point, Mich. Analysis bv R. D. Hal!, University of
Wisconsm. 1909.
4. Specimen 47505, footwall near lode, same locality. Analysis by R. D. Hall, University of Wisconsin, 1909.
5. ilelaphyre, lower zone of bed 64, Eagle River section, Mich. Pumpelly, Raphael, Metasomatic development of the copper-bearing roclvs
of Lake Superior: Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sci., vol. 13, 1878, p. 293.
6. Prehnitized upper zone of bed 64, same locality. Idem.
7. Pseudo-amygdaloid, middle zone of bed 64, same locality. Idem.
8. Bottom of bed 87, same locality. Idem., p. 285.
9. Middle of bed 87, same locality. Idem.
10. Diabase porphyrite. regarded by Lane as the original of the altered conglomerate. Lane, A. C, The decomposition of a bowlder in the
Calumet and Hecla conglomerate: Econ. Geology, vol. 4, 1909, p. 161.
11. Altered conglomerate. Idem.
12. Fresh basaltic rock from center of flow, 15 feet from lode. Dingle Creek mine, Douglas County, Wis. Analysis by W. G. Wilcox, LTniversity
of Wisconsin, 1910.
13. Superjacent amygdaloidal lode, same flow. Analysis by W. G. Wilcox, University of Wisconsin, 1910.
14. Amphibolite schist. Mina Rica vein, Ophir, Placer'County, Cal. Fairly fresh, but contains some calcite and pyrite. Lindgren, Waldemar,
Metasomatic processes in fissure veins: Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Ehg., vol. 30, 1901, p. 666.
15. Completely altered amphibolite schist, Conrad vein, Ophir, Placer County, Cal. Idem.
16. Fresh diabase, Grass Valley, Cal. Idem.
17. Altered diabase. North Star mine, Grass Valley, Cal. Idem.
18 and 19. Average of five fresh (16) and weathered (17) basic igneous rocks— diabase from Spanish Guiana, diabase from Medford, Mass., basalt
from Bohemia, basalt from Crouzet, France, and diorite from Albemarle County, Va. Calculated from analyses given by G. P. Merrill in Rocks,
rock weathering, and soils.
In the following table the fu'st two pairs of analyses given above are calculated as closely
as possible into the minerals actually observed in the rocks :
Mineral compositions of fresh and altered wall rocks calculated from first two pairs of analyses given above.
Minerals.
47500B.
47499.
47506.
47506.
1.67
17.82
25.02
9.30
27.09
13.60
.50
.01?
5.00
2.78
25.15
20. 29 ■
6.67
28.82
22. 24
2.00
30.74
12.90
.66
2.22
Albite molecule
33.54
25.02
Olivine
Augite
1 88
Chlorite
13.41
20.58
Water . . . . ...
.91
.04
5.28
15.22
7.66
1.40
9.33
Hematite
4.64
2.88
Prehnite
Epitlote
13.05
Calcite.. . . . ......
.20
.05
100.01
100.73
100.87
100. 13
584 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
Analj'ses representing; ordinary weathering alterations indicate a uniformit}'^ of results
which may serve as a basis for comparison with alterations of unknown cause. Comparin^i
the alterations of the wall rocks of the copper deposits of unknown origin with the known
results of weathering of similar types of basic rocks and the results of the alteration of similar
basic igneous rocks by thermal solutions, tlic following conclusions seem justified:
1. The changes in the chemical composition of the Lake Superior copper rocks lack
uniformity.
The changes in the composition of basic igneous rocks by thermal solutions lark uniformity.
The weathering of basic igneous rocks, as well as tlie weathering of all other rocks, causes
certain changes in the chemical composition, which are almost rigidly uniform.
2. The changes effected in the silica content of the Lake Superior (•oj)per rocks adjacent
to the deposits are not governed by silicate ratios in the original rock.
The changes effected in the silica content of basic igneous rocks elsewhere by their
alteration by thermal solutions are not controlled by silicate ratios in the original rocks.
The changes effected in the silica content of basic igneous rocks by weathering, as well
as those effected ])y the weathering of all other silicate rocks, are governed by the silicate
ratios in the original rocks.
3. The changes in the chemical composition of the Lake Superior copper rocks show local
concentration of lime or alkahes, depending on the stage of mineral paragenesis represented
by the analysis. There has been an increase in the ferric iron and water content throughout ;
FeO appears to have been consistently removed or rather oxidized in place. There Ls evidence
of both the removal and the introduction of AI2O3.
The changes in the chemical composition of the rocks altered by thermal solutions elsewhere
show a consistent increase in KjO and a consistent decrease in Na,0, FejOs, and MgO. AljO,
has suffered considerable decrease in some rocks. In others the eAadence for the decrease,
■increase, or stability of ALO3 is not very clear.
The changes m the chemical composition of basic rocks by weathering consist in a uniform
decrease in CaO, MgO, NajO, KjO, and SiOj; AI2O3 remains nearlj^ constant and water is
introduced.
It follows from the facts presented that the changes in the chemical composition of the
Lake Superior copper rocks effected by their alteration adjacent to the copper deposits are
fundamentally different from those which are known to have been caused by the action of
weathermg solutions. On the other hand, these changes present similarities to the changes
effected by thermal solutions.
4. Coincident with the changes in the chemical composition of the Lake Superior copper
rocks, the tendency of their mineralogical alteration is not in accoixl with the change produccii
by weathering, but it is in harmony with the mineralogical alterations effected by thermal
solutions.
The weathering of basic igneous rocks results in the development of kaolin, quartz,
carbonates, and other sunple compounds and the decomposition of all minerals not in the list
of secondary minerals. The development of kaolin in the absence of the tlevelopnient of other
secondar}^ silicates is one of the best-esta])lished criteria of the decomposition of rocks untler
the influence of meteoric solutions.
The mineralogical changes caused by the alteration of the Lake Su|ierior copper rocks
adjacent to the deposits can be generalized as a progressive development of cldorite. prelmite,
epidote, quartz, and the alkaline silicates in succession, witli more or less overhi]), in place of
the origmal mineral constituents of these rocks — plagioclase feldspars, augite, some magnetite,
olivine, and otiier accessory minerals.
The mineralogical changes of the basic igneous rocks altered elsewhere by hot solutions
consist in the development of sericite and calcite from augite, hornblende, epidote, biotite, and
feldspars. The ferromagnesian minerals alter also to chlorite, which in turn ciianges to
muscovite. Magnetite alters to siderite, and ilmenite to rutile. The final product is essentially
sericite, carbonates, quartz, and sulphides.
THE COPPER ORES. 585
The results of the alteration of tlie copper-bearing rocks by the solutions which deposited
the copper and gangue minerals have been found to contrast with the efTects of weathering
in a manner similar to the results of the alteration of certain basic igneous rocks by thermal
solutions elsewhere. A fuller discussion of these contrasts will be found in a paper by
Steidtmann."
PARAGENESIS OF COPPER AND GANGUE MINERALS.
A study of the paragenesis of copper and gangue materials, according to Pumpelly,''
discloses the following order of deposition of the minerals: (1) Cldorite and some laumontite;
(2) laumontite; (3) laumontite, prehnite, epidote; (4) quartz and a green earth mineral;
(5) calcite; (6) copper and calcite; (7) calcite, alkaline minerals, orthoclase, analcite, apoph-
yllite, datolite. The members of tlus order overlap one another. Copper was largely deposited
after the development of ferrous iron-bearing minerals, chlorite, and epidote and is more
intimately associated with these iron-bearing minerals than with non iron-bearing minerals,
except prehnite.
The phenomenon of mineral paragenesis in deposits derived from solutions indicates that
the parent solutions have experienced certain definite physical and chemical changes. Depo-
sitional cj^cles are as certainly related to changes in concentration of the solutions, changes in
temperature or pressure, changes in chemical composition, etc., as cycles of sedimentary depo-
sition are related to certain definite changes in physiographic conditions. It is difficult to see
how present pluvial waters could develop such a depositional cycle.
Smyth '^ argues that, of the above-named series of minerals, the first deposits, principally
chlorite with other nonalkaline, hydrous silicates, were developed by ordinary weathering
immediately after the igneous rocks were extruded at the surface; that the copper and later
associated minerals were introduced later, after the folding of the Keweenawan series; that
therefore the succession of minerals does not, as Pimipelly ^ supposed, represent a continuous
march of alteration. The minerals of the second period are sharph' separated from the alter-
ation products of the first period, which they often replace, by their richness of alkalies and by
the presence of fluorine and boron. Smyth's ^ argument is essentially that copper was intro-
duced Ln solutions contrasting with ordinary meteoric solutions and of later origin. Still fur-
ther, Smyth " cites the occurrence of copper under impervious layers of greenstone as evidence
of arrest of solutions coming from below.
CONTRAST WITH PRESENT WORK OF METEORIC SOLUTIONS.
In general, the kind of work done by the waters which de])osited the copper contrasts with
that being accomplished to-daj- by meteoric waters. It is true that the minute quantities of
sulphides in the basic igneous rocks are oxidized to the sulphates of copper, transported, and
redeposited by coming into contact with ferrous solutions in the presence of alkaline carbonates.
Evidence of solution at the surface is to be seen at many places in the stains of carbonates of
copper, and yet there is no evidence that ground or surface waters are at present segregating
copper deposits firom tlie country rocks. Pluvial solutions now active in the copper ores are
not known to carry copper. The concentrated solutions of the deep mines, which can not,
under any hypothesis of deposition from meteoric solutions, be regarded as the normal meteoric
solutions from which the co]i])er was derived, are known to deposit small amounts of copper
on mine tools, but analyses of these waters show only a very small percentage of copper. It
seems evident that if pluvial solutions are so inefficient in carrying copper from the concentrated
materials at the present time, their inefficiency in leaching the sparsely disseminated primary
a Steidtmann, Edward, A graphic comparison of the alteration of rocks by weathering with their alteration by hot solutions: Econ. Geology,
vol. 3, 1908, pp. 381-109.
6 Pumpelly, Raphael, Paragenesis and derivation of copper and its associates on Lalje Superior: .\m. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 2, 1871, p. 350.
' Smyth, H. L., Theory of origin of the copper ores of the Lake Superior district: Science, new ser., vol. 3, 1S9G, p. 251.
J Pumpelly, Raphael, op. cit.
'Op. cit., p. 251.
586 GEOT.OGY OF THE LAXE SUPERIOR REGION.
copjxT of the igneous I'ocks of the series would be a thousandfold greater. Waters away from
the miiu's, even wliere tiu\v are running through the basic igneous rocks, are found to be nearly
if not quite lacking in cojipor.
SOURCE OF THERMAL SOLUTIONS.
THREE HYPOTHESES.
Three hy])Otheses as to tlie source of the thermal solutions suggest themselves — that they
were juvenile solutions, a(|ueous or gaseous, given off by tlie igneous rocks on cooling; that
they were meteoric waters heated by contact with igneous rocks; that they were some com-
bination of the two. That both juvenile and meteoric sources contributecl to the thermal
solutions would be expected from the general conditions of sedimentation of the Keweenawan
series. Lava beds were piled one above another at comparatively short intervals, separated
by the dejjosition of coarse fragmental sediments, probably developed subaerialjy. Simulta-
neously, or later, intrusives penetrated the interbedded igneous and sedimentary rocks, both
parallel to and across the bedding. The waning of igneous activity allowed sediments to accu-
mulate in thicker beds and finally, in the upper Keweenawan, without interru])tion. The
igneous rocks may be supposed to have carried with them the usual complement of magmatic
waters and vapors. They were fluid and became amygdaloidal. Such solutions would be
speedily mixed with surface meteoric waters. The rapid jiiling up of beds would imprison both
juvenile and meteoric waters under conditions that would cause them to lose their heat only
slowly. The maximum bleaching and cementation of both igneous rocks and sediments and
the simultaneous deposition of copper may be supposed to have occurred at this time. Tilting
of the beds, with accompanymg fractures and faults, began early in Keweenawan time and
continued throughout the period. The tilting may be supposed to have slowly moved the con-
tained solutions, and when erosion had beveled the beds, access for more meteoric waters was
given. At tliis time, when the elevations were certainly mountainous and the openings in the
rocks not cemented, as at present, meteoric solutions would have a vigorous and deep circu-
lation. These general facts lay the burden of proof heavily on anyone attempting to show
that the thermal solutions were juvenile or meteoric alone. They seem to show that the
meteoric solutions were in the greater abundance. They do not show whether the distinctive
work of copper deposition accomplished by these solutions was due to the juvenile or the
meteoric contributions, or both.
This leads us to the question whether the copper was contributed directly in hot juvenile
solutions escaping from the igneous rock, or whether it was leached from crystalline wall rocks
by hot solutions of both juvenile and meteoric nature. In the nature of the case, quantitative
evidence with which to answer this question is difficult to obtain.
The view that at least some of the ore-bearing solutions were magmatic is favored b}'
the evidence cited on foregoing pages that the ores are associated in place and time with
igneous extrusions, that the ore-depositing solutions were hot, that they carried fluorine and
boron, and that the ores were deposited in mineral cycles showing rapidly changing conditions.
Of similar import is the apparent scarcity in the crystaUized wall rocks of copper wliich
could be leached and concentrated in sufficient amounts to explain the present deposits. Cop-
per has been found most sparingly as a primary constituent in the fresh igneous rocks. It
has not been reported from microscopic examination of the fine-grained surface rocks, and
in only a few cases, in minute quantities, have sulpliides of copper been found in the coareer
igneous rocks. No evidence has been thus far adduced that such minutely ilisscmmated cop-
per is more abundant in the igneous rocks in the copper-bearing areas than in igneous rocks
outside the copper-bearing areas. The few copper determinations which have been made in
the analyses of fresh igneous rocks show either no copper or but little more than a trace. On
the other hand, analyses are few, and the final word as to the original copper eontent of the
fresh igneous rocks can not be saitl until more analyses are available.
THE COPPER ORES. 587
There is no reason to believe from present known facts that the unleached wall rocks are
any richer in copper in the vicinity of productive lodes than they are in other parts of the
Keweenawan series throughout the Lake Superior region. In northern Minnesota and other
known nonproductive areas there seems to be fully as much copper in the igneous rocks as in
those of Keweenaw Point. If it is assumed that the copper deposits have been concentrated
entirely by the action of meteoric waters on the basic igneous rocks, it is difficult to account
for the absence of deposits tliroughout mucli of the Keweenawan and also in certain porous
■strata witliin the producing district. The exti-eme localization of the deposits in time and
place seems to be something more characteristic of highly concentrated magmatic solutions
than of a universally acting agent like meteoric waters working down from tne surface.
But granting that the fresh igneous rocks contain minute quantities of copper, which may
have been picked up and concentrated by meteoric solutions later, is not their pi-csence in
these wall rocks evidence that during the cooling of these lavas ccmcentrated copper-bearin"
solutions were present, some of which may have escaped from the parent rock during crystal-
hzation ? The inherent probabihty of such an origin of the solutions is increased by consid-
eration of the evidence derived from certain western copper deposits, where a fairly good case
has been made out for the direct contribution of copper salts in juvenile solutions, as, for
instance, in the Clifton district of Arizona by Lindgren.
\one of the evidence above citeil for the direct contribution of copper salts in juvenile
solutions entirely excludes the hypothesis that meteoric waters, aided by the heat of the
lavas, may have accomplished the result by leacliing of wall rocks. From the known conditions
of extrusion of the lavas and the association of the sediments it is practically certain that
meteoric waters were present, that they were hot, and that therefore they were able to accom-
plish some alterations. To what extent they may have concentrated copper we have no
apparent means of knowing. They were probably effective in rearranging the copper to give
the present variation in grade with depth. This change in depth is the one fact which seems
to be more closely related to the activity of meteoric solutions than to the deposition from
juvenile solutions.
On the whole the evidence is taken to point to a probable original concentration of cop-
per by hot solutions largely of juvenile contribution, but more or less mixed, necessarily, with
meteoric waters and a later working over of the deposits by waters dominantly of meteoric
source. In any case there is a high degree of probabihty that the associated basic igneous
rocks are the source of the copper deposits. The doubt arises only as to the manner of their
derivation from these wall rocks — whether they are due to the escape of solutions of a juvenile
nature before or during the crystalhzation of the lavas, or whether on the breaking up of the
crystallized rocks by katamorphic alterations the minute portions of copper they contained
were concentrated in t!ie deposits.
WERE THE THERMAL SOLUTIONS DERIVED FROM EXTRUSIVE OR FROM INTRUSIVE
ROCKS?
The attempt to ascertain the particular igneous rocks from which the copper ores were
contributed and the conditions favoring the release of the copper solutions leads first to a
scrutiny of the conditions under which the igneous rocks associated with the copper ores cooled.
Most of the igneous rocks containing the copper deposits or associated with them are clearly
surface flows, with typical surface textures, interbedded with other flows and with setliments.
So clear is tliis origin and so uniform the bedded succession that it has been commonly assumed
that most of the igneous rocks associated with the ores are flows, yet some undoubted intrusive
rocks are known and some of the bedded traps lack specific e\ndence of extrusive character
and may possibly be sills or laccohthic intrusives, such as are known to be present in other
parts of the Keweenawan of the Lake Superior region. Certain irregularities in the strikes,
dips, and thickness of the igneous beds may be thus explained.
Was the copper brought in by the extrusive rocks which are interbedded with the sechments,
or was it subsequently introduced by intrusives* The evidence available is not conclusive.
588 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
There are perhaps IVwcr jjarallels elsew^here of the deposition of jactisllic ores in quantity from
surface extrusive rocks than from intrusives, though it has been shown definitely that some
ores have been derived from cxtrusivcs.
At the base of certain barren conglomerates occur copper-bearing amygdaloidal pebbles
that are apparently ich-ntieal in character with an underlyint; amygdaloidnl flow, from which
they seem to have been derived. In such cases mineralization has evidently taken place before
the development of the conglomerate, which points to the effusive rock as the source of the
copper-bearing solutions, for the conglomerates closely followed the lavas in deposition.
Copper-bearing amygdaloidal traps have been found in jUaska" in which a similar hne
of evidence points to the trap as the direct source of the copper.
SIGNIFICANCE OF SULPHIDES OF COPPER IN THE INTBUSIVES AND LOWER EFFUSIVES.
The intrusive rocks carrying sulpliides are possibly the deep-seated equivalents of the
lavas which carry metallic copper. Wright so regards the intrusives of Mount Bohemia. The
absence or subordination of native copper in tlie intrusives may be due to the temperature
conditions of tlie rocks when copper deposition took place. If hot cuj)rous sulphates were
dehvered from the intrusive rocks, they may have been deposited as sulphide in the highly
heated intrusive, and partly as native copper in the equivalent traps, where there was more
rapid cooling and where a lower temperature prevailed. (Sec p. 5S9.) Another speculation
is that the extraordinary differential concentration of native copper in the upper lavas may
have been due to a process of magmatic differentiation. The intimate relation of the ores with
basic igneous rocks anrl their general absence from the felsites is further .suggestive of this.
CONCLUSION AS TO SOURCE OF COPPER-BEARING SOLUTIONS.
It is concluded, therefore, that the copper-bearing solutions were hot, that they were both
juvenile and meteoric, that the copper probably was in part contributed directly in juvenile
waters and in part by leaching of wall rocks bj' the hot solutions, the evidence developed being
as yet insuliicient to enable quantitative statements as to the relative importance of the two.
It is known that magmas expel on consolidating all constituents which can not assume
stable mineral form under the existing chemical and physical conditions. Water, copper, and
numerous other substances belong to this class. Such a source for ore-bearing solutions has
been repeatedly appealed to in the search for the origin of western copper and other ores. Posi-
tive evidence for such contribution is in the nature of the case extremely elusive. As a rule
the best that can be done is to present evidence ehniinating the hypothesis that meteoric waters
are accomplishing the work, and to show that direct igneous contribution is a possible alter-
native source. For the Lake Superior copper this explanation of source meets the objections
which have been cited against tlic deposition of the copper by meteoric solutions and best
explains the transportation of abundant alumina silicates, fluorine, and boron, the remarkable
concentration of copper as compared with other constituents, the cycles of mineral deposition,
the pecuhar alterations of the wall rocks, the facts that the period of ore deposition was largely
limited to middle Keweenawan time and that ore deposition at the present time is almost nil,
and finally the extreme localization of the copper lodes, a localization which seems to be char-
acteristic of the association of ores of all kinds with igneous rocks. The conclusion tliat the
ore-depositing solutions have been contributed hot by the igneous rocks does not exclude
the cooperation of hot and cold nu'teoric waters, either in the primary deposition of the ore or
in further segregation and modification of it.
It is suggested later that the present deep mine waters rejiresent the residuum or brine of
tliese solutions, possibly more or less mixed with jiluvial waters. We are unable to follow Lane *"
in his conclusion that the waters represent fossil or connate waters either of the Keweenawan
sea or of the arid conditions under whicii tlie Keweenawan nuiy iiave been deposited.
II Knopf, Adolph, The copper-bearinK amygdaloids of the White River region. Alaslia: Econ. Geolog}-, vol.3, 1910, p. 251.
6 Lane, A. C, The chemical evolution of the ocean: Jour. Geolos.v, vol. 14, 1900. pp. 221-225.
THE COPPER ORES. 589
CHEMISTRY OF DEPOSITION OF COPPER ORES.
The uncertainty of the conditions of deposition of tlie copper of course requires tliat any
discussion of the chemistry of the deposition of these ores be tentative and that a witle range
of processes be taken into consideration. A hypothesis of the chemical processes of copper
deposition may be based on the postulates that the hot solutions which deposited the copper
derived part of their constituents, notably boron, fluorine, and perhaps copper, directly from
the igneous rocks as magmatic emanations; that they may have partly derived the alkalies,
alkahne earths, alumina, silica, and perhaps some copper, from the decomposition of the wall
rocks, affected by the thermal solutions, and that these solutions probably carried the copper
as the chloride and possibly as the sulphate. The sparseness of sulphides in the deposits seems
to imply that the primary solutions were either lean in sulphates or else the conditions were
unfavorable to the deposition of sulphides. The abundance of chlorides in deep-mine waters
of possibly residual origin suggests that the copper was carried as chloride.
The deposition of metallic copper from such solutions has been accomplished experi-
mentally in these ways and perhaps others. First, Fernekes succeeded in precipitating metallic
copper from a cupric chloride solution with ferrous chloride at a temperature of 200° to 250° V.,
in the presence of prelinite and other silicates, which neutralized the hydrochloric acid resulting
from the reaction." Second, Stokes obtained metallic copper by the cooling of a hot solution of
cuprous and cupric sulphate; by the action of ferrous sulphate on cupric sulphate at 200° C; and
by the action of hornblende and siderite on cupric sulphate at 200° C* Third, Biddle suc-
ceeded in throwing down copper from a solution of ferrous and cupric chlorides in the presence
of an excess of alkaline carbonate at ordinary temperature.'^ Fourth, Sullivan'' finds that
various silicates — feldspar, biotite, shale, prehnite, augite, amphibole, etc. — will throw out copper
from copper sulphate solutions by an act of double decomposition. The bases of the silicates
pass into solution in very nearly the same proportion as copper is taken out. The mineral form
of the copper deposited in this manner is unknown, but the process may bear some relation to
the problem in hand.
Lane* suggests that eleotrochemical action between the copper solutions and the wall
rock may have caused the precipitation of copper. Pumpelly^ regards the intimate associ-
ation of copper with protoxide silicates, in which the replacement of alumina by ferric oxide is
especially favored, as indicative of a close genetic relation between the ferric condition of the
iron oxide in the associated silicates and the metallic state of the copper, and believes that the
higher oxidation of the iron was effected through the reduction of the oxide of copper at the
expense of the oxygen of the latter. Van Hise^ believes that the reducing agents which pre-
cipitated native copper were ferrous solutions derived from the iron-bearing silicates and fer-
rous compounds in the solid form, magnetite and silicate. This view is in accord with the
findings of Sullivan.
The geologic relations of the copper which are especially applicable to the problem are
these: First, copper is intimately associated with and preceded by ferrous silicate minerals;
second, it was deposited with calcite, it is known to replace cjuartz, and its deposition was
usually followed by the development of alkaline silicates.
A tentative hypothesis of the chemistry of the deposition of the ore may be built on the
preceding postulates as follows:
Hot solutions containing copper chlorides, boron, and fluorine compounds, CO2, and pos-
sibly other magmatic emanations entered the porous parts of the formations, where they began
a Econ. Geology, vol. 2, 1907, p. 580.
6 Stokes, n. N., Experiments on the solution, transportation, and deposition of copper, silver, and gold: Econ. Geology, vol. 1.1906, pp. 644-650.
c Biddle, II. C, The deposition of copper by solutions of ferrous salts: Jour. Geology, vol. 9, 1901. pp. 430-436.
d Sullivan, E. C, The interaction between minerals ami water solutions: Bull. U.S. Geol. Sur\'ey No. 312. 1907. p. 64.
« Ann. Kept. Michigan Geol. Survey for 1903, 1905, p. 249: Econ. Geology, vol. 4, 1909, p. 170.
/ Pumpelly, Raphael, The paragenesis and derivation of copper and it« associates on Lake Superior: Am. Jour. Sci., 3d ser., vol. 2, 1871, pp.
353-3.54.
B Van Hise, C. R., A treatise on metamorphism: Men. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 47, 1904, p. 1136.
590 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
the work of deposition and tlic solution and replaccnu-nt of tlie wall rock. Hot solution';, in
•general, remove lime and soda with great rapidity. Pressure and CO^ alone could eause tlie solu-
tion of alumina." In general, there would lie a tendency for the decomposition of all minerals
in the wall rocks, and a consequent enrichment of the solutions in the constituents taken out of
the wall rocks. However, as Lane* suggests, the calcium silicate and sodium silicate in the
solution would tend to keep magnesium out of solution. These processes would tend to develop
chlorite by replacement and to keep magnesia permanently out of solution. In general, chlo-
rite is the most stable mineral form which magnesia assumes in the presence of hot solutions.'^
This first step in the cycle of deposition thus accounted for left the solution rich in lime, iron,
and aluminum silicates. Changing conditions, perhaps, of concentration, heat, and pressure
brouglit about the saturation of these constituents, and a generation of laumontite, prehnite,
and epidote followed the development of chlorite. Silica became insoluble in this solution
after the deposition of the lime-aluminum silicates, which resulted in the precipitation of c|uartz.
Tlie individualization of cjuartz was followed by the deposition of copper. It is suggested that
the solutions were relatively rich in alkalies, probably the carbonates and chloride both, when
the period of copper deposition began, for the deposition of copper accompanied the solution
of ((uartz and' was followed by the deposition of alkaline silicates. Under these conilitions
copper-bearing solutions reacting with the ferrous silicates of the wall rock and perhaps with
ferrous salts in solution in presence of alkaline carbonates caused the precipitation of copper.
It is furthermore suggested that the deposition of calcite, coeval with the deposition of copper,
was due to the interaction of alkaline carbonate and calcium chloride. As calcium chloride
is a solvent of copper, its precipitation as a carbonate would give additional impetus to the
precipitation of copper.
It is quite possible that the progress of the cycle of deposition of the copper outlined on
page 585 was accompanied by a gradual loss of heat and pressure and that tlus loss was
greatest where the solutions were nearest the surface. According to Soret's principle "* when
two parts of a solution have different temperatures, there will be a concentration of the dissolved
parts in the cooler portion. This concentration tends to bring about deposition of some of the
dissolved parts. This is shown also by the work of Stokes « on the interaction of cuprous and
cupric sulphates. Consequently, deposition of copper may have begun in the upper zones
of the solution and gradually extended downward. Diffusion and convection currents would
tend to keep the composition of the solutions uniform. However, when the deposition of
copper began at the lower horizons the richness of the solutions was diminished. It is possible
that such a process caused the gradual diminution of the richness of the ore deposits with
increase in depth.
Tliroughout this process there was a continual concentration of the alkalies in the solutions.
After the deposition of copper these alkahes became partly insoluble in the solution under the
existing physical and chemical conditions and were tlirown out as analcite, orthoclase, lluorine-
bearing apophyllitc, and other alkaline zeoUtes. The boron silicate, datolite, was thrown out at
the same time. It is also possible that the major precipitation of the datolite ami ap()i)hylUte
took place in the upper zones, as appears to have been the case with copper, for Lane and
other observers are incUned to believe that certain alkaline silicates are more abundant in the
upper levels of the mines.
This closes the cycle of deposition of the copper and gangue minerals. The general results
of the process suggest that tiie present deep mine waters represent the more or less modified
residuum or brine of the solutions that accomplished the deposition of the copper.
oGawalowski, A., Chem. Centraltil., pt. 1, 1900. p. 640.
6Lanc, .\. C. Eeon. Geology, vol. 4. 1109. p. l(l(i.
c Steidtmann, Edward, A graphic comparison of the alleralions of rocks liy weathering with their alterations by hot solutions: Econ. Geology,
vol. 3, 1908, p. 398.
d Sorct, Charles, .Vnnales chim. phys., ."ith ser., vol. 22, 1881, p. 293.
' Stokes, U. N., Econ. Geology, vol. 2, 1907, p. 580.
THE COPPER ORES. 591
CAUSE OF DIMINUTION OF RICHNESS AVITH INCREASING DEPTH.
There is little in the Lake Superior copper deposits in the nature of the oxide or weathered
zone so characteristic, of sulphide deposits. Possibly' glaciation has removed marked evidences
of surficial change. In a few places the upper few hundred feet of the lodes is less rich than the
parts below, suggesting a leaching from the upper part of the lode. Below this the ores very
gradually and uniformly diminish in richness with increase in depth, a diminution which is
caused mainly be slight changes in proportions of minerals rather than by differences in kinds
of minerals in the ores.
The relation of the richer portions of the lotle to the erosion surface suggests at once a
do^\^lward concentration by meteoric waters such as has been demonstrated to explain this
relation in so many mimng districts. But this explanation presents many difficulties. The
present underground waters near the surface do not carry copper in abundance, nor can we
suggest any probable chemical reaction which would explain the solution of metallic copper.
The ore diminishes in value far below the depth of the present meteoric circulation. There
is no sharply discriminated oxide zone. The kinds of minerals are essentially the same from the
top down, and the changes in proportions and values are much more gradual than the changes
ordinarily ascribed to secondary concentration from the surface. The diminution of value
with increase in depth has been demonstrated so generally to be the result of concentration
from dowmward-moving meteoric waters that one hesitates to offer any other explanation
except on most decisive proof. Such decisive proof is here lacking. But nevertheless another
hypothesis seems to us reasonable — that the richness of the ore near the surface was due to a
precipitation of copper from primary solutions near the surface, where they were cooled under
less pressure and became mingled with oxidizing waters. It would be necessary to assuiiie
that convection and diffusion would tend to equalize the concentration of the copper solutions,
thus causing some migration of copper salts toward the zone of precipitation and thus diminishing
the amounts of salts precipitated from solutions lower down. The oxidation of cuprous salts
in solution, effected by the mingling of meteoric waters, would develop cupric salts wliich in
moving down and by reacting with the cupric salts would deposit metallic copper, as noted
on page 5S9.
Tliis hypothesis avoids the difficulty of getting the copper into solution from the metallic
form, which would have to be assumed on the hypothesis of a downward concentration by
meteoric waters.
In this hypothesis of deposition of richer copper ores by primary solutions near the surface,
there is no emphasis on the direction of movement of the solutions. It is conceivable that they
may have been upward-movuig waters, that at the time of deposition the waters may have been
moving little or none at all, or possibly that the waters had begun to take a downward movement
as a result of the cooling and contraction of the lavas. Lane " has estimated such downward
movement as amounting to possibly a mile do\via the dip in the vicinity of the present erosion
surface. So far as the currents were downward moving, there may have been upward artesian
flow through fissures in impervious beds overlying pervious betls. Wadsworth '' cites as
evidence of dowiiward-moving waters the occurrence of spikes of copper and calcite which
extend from one bed down into others, with the small end downward, like an icicle.
RELATION OF COPPER ORES TO OTHER ORES OF THE KEWEENAWAN.
It. is an interesting and significant fact that rocks of probable Keweenawan age are closely
associated with a considerable variety of ores on the north and east sides of Lake Superior. On
Silver Islet, on the northwest side of the lake, and thence westward on the main shore are igneous
dikes of probable Keweenawan age cutting the slates of the Animikie group and carrying native
silver and other minerals. (See pp. 593-594.) On the north shore of Lake Huron basic igneous
bosses and dikes of probable Keweenawan age are associated with quartz veins carrying chal-
oLane, A. C, Econ. Geology, vol. 4, 1909, p. 164.
6 Wadsworth, M. E., The origin and mode of occurrence of the Lake Superior copper deposits; Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eug. . vol. 27, 1898, p. 695.
592 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOK REGION.
copyrite, which is tlie source of the copper ores of the Bruce mines and many small jirospects
in this district. In the Sudbury (Ustrict, to the northeast, basic i<;;neous rocks of probable
Kewcenawan age are closely associated with the nickel deposits; and still farther to the northeast
basic igneous rocks, probably of Kcweenawan age, are associated with cobalt-silver deposits.
The main structural lines in all these districts trend north of east and south of west, correspond-
ino- to the axial line of tlie Jjake Superior syncline. All these districts have certain ore-bearing
minerals in common. The difference is primarily a difFerence in proportion. For instance, the
Lake Superior copper deposits are associated with metallic silver and a minute amount of cobalt
and nickel. The silver (lei)osits of Silver Islet carry small amounts of copper, cobalt, and nickel.
The Sudbury nickel deposits carry considerable copper and a small amount of co})alt and native
silver. In the Cobalt district the native silver and cobalt ores carry considerable amounts of
nickel and copper. In the discussion of general geology (Chapter XX) it will be shown that this
general region was probably a geosynchne of deposition during pre-Cambrian time, affected
by repeated foldings along axes parallel to the shore, and a locus for igneous activity. The
distribution and character of the ores through this general zone further suggest the generaliza-
tion that here is a metallographic province along which igneous rocks have brought u]) cpiite
different but still related ores, these ores taking a considerable variety of structural, mineralog-
ical, and chemical characteristics, partly because of original differences in the composition of
the ore-bearing sohitions in these different districts and partly because of the different con-
ditions under which they approached the surf ace, those in Canada remaining as intrusive beneath
the surface and those at Keweenaw Point coming largely to the surface.
Still further, in pre-KeM^eenawan time this same general region was a shore line of deposition
with repeated outbursts of volcanism. The attempt has been made to connect the iron-ore
de})osits of tlie Lake Superior region with this volcanism. Thus along this great geosyncline
earlier volcanism was associated with extrusion of iron salts and later volcanism with a variety
of cobalt and silver, copper, and nickel salts.
CHAPTER XIX. THE SILVER AND GOLD ORES OF THE LAKE
SUPERIOR REGION.
SILVER ORES.
PRODUCTION.
Mention has already been made of the mming of silver with the Keweenaw Point copper
ores. The total value of silver thus mined from 1887 to the end of 1909 is $1,805,308.50.
In addition to this, vems in the slates of the Animikic group on the northwest side of
Lake Superior have yielded silver ores, principally from Silver Islet, as follows:
Silver produced from veins on northwest side of Liil-e Superior.'^
Produced by Silver Islet, from commencement to close of mining ^3, 250, 000
Produced by the mainland group to 1903, including the Shuniah, Rabbit Mountain, and
Silver Mountain groups of mines 1,885, 681
5, 135, 681
SILVER ISLET.
The following account of Silver Islet is largely quoted from Ingall.* »Silver Islet is a small
island of nearly flat-lying Animikie slates about a mile out in Lake Superior off Thunder Cape.
The silver-bearing vein cuts the Animikie slates and a diorite dike, but its principal value
is found within the diorite dike. This dike dips from 60° to 75° SE. The dikes in the AnimUvie
of this part of the Lake Superior region are connected with the Logan sills, of Keweenawan age.
The vein strikes N. 35° W. and tlips 70° to 80° SE.; its thiclvness averages about 8 to 10 feet,
but in some places it has shown from 20 to 30 feet of solid vein stuff. Two bonanzas were
found in the vein; the first, yielding over -12,000,000, was shaped like an irregular pear with
its large end down; the second bonanza, found considerably later, was shaped like an inverted
cone. The gangue of the vein consists of calcite, quartz, and dolomite, the dolomite varying
in color from cream to pmk according to the varymg amounts of manganese it carries. The
relative quantity of calcareous and siliceous matter varies, however, in different parts of the
vein, and in places streaks of cjuartz have preponderated to such an extent as to make some of
the ore highly siliceous. The metallic minerals are native silver, argentite, galena, blende,
copper, and iron pyrites, with marcasite. Macfarlane also mentions tetrahedrite, domeykite,
niccolite, and cobalt bloom, the two latter probably o.xidation products of a peculiar mineral
called macfarlanite, containing arsenic, cobalt, nickel, and silver. Two new minerals are also
said to have been found in the ore by Wurtz, called by him huntelite and animikite. The
three minerals last named, according to Lowe, "are now [October, 1881] the principal produc-
ing silver ores of the mine." Besides the above, Courtis found in the ore shipped to the Wyan-
dotte smelting works rhodochrosite, annabergite, antimonial silver, and cerargyrite, the last
"where the rock has been decomposed." The native silver is generally disseminated through
the ore in more or less dendritic masses, the points of native silver forming nuclei for the deposit
of niccolite and sulphurets. Graphite also occurs in considerable quantity and seems to be
connected in some way with the occurrence of the silver. Silver does not occur without
graphite, but graphite may be present without silver. Out of the whole series of twenty-one
n Eighteenth Ann. Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, pt. 1, 1909, p. 12.
b Ingall, E. D., Report on mines and mining on Lalte Superior: Ann. Rept. Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of Canada for 18S7-S8, vol. 3, new
ser., pt. 2, 1888, pp. 27H-40H.
47517°— VOL 52—11 38 593
594 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
dikes cut by the vein the Silver Islet, carrying the ore, is the only one impregnated strongly'
with grapliite and ])yrito.
A curious feature of the vein is the combustible gas which has been encountered in large
quantities in the workings. This gas is accompanied by water containing calcium chloride in
solution. The gas and water are confined ]5rinci[)ally in large vugs oi' cavities in tlie vein,
under great pressure in the deepest workings. Above tiie eighth level all water infiltrating
into the mine is pure lake water. An analysis of the water is as follows:
Analysis of ndlcr from Silver Islet minefi
Chloride of potassium 0. 4582
Chloride of sodium 16. 8098
Chloride of calcium 17. 0807
Chloride of magnesium 1. 2937
Sulphate of lime 0672
Carbonate of lime 2936
Silica 0540
GENERAL ACCOUNT OF SILVER IN TIIE ANIMIKIE GROUP.
Passing over Ingall's detailed description of mines and prospects, his summary of the
occurrence of silver in the Animikie group northwest of Lake Superior is partty as follows :
The veins, as regards their strike directions, resolve themselves into three series — a north-
west series, a northeast series, and an east-west series. The northwest direction of strike
characterizes the Coast group of mines, of which the famous Silver Islet vein is the most
striking example. The vein of the Beaver mine also has this trend.
All the veins of the Rabbit Mountain group of mines, Math the exception of the Beaver,
may be classed as northeast; the vein in the Thunder Bay mine also belongs to tlus series.
The veins of the third series do not run in general due east and west, but a httle north of
east and south of west. To tliis series belong nearly all the chief veins of the Port Arthur
mines, with the exception of the Thunder Bay, just mentioned, and nearly all the Silver Mountain
group of mines.
The vein-fUhng minerals consist in general of quartz, barite, calcite, and fluorite consti-
tuting the basis of the gangue, in which occur the different metallic minerals: — blende, galena,
pyrites of several species, and here and there some sulphurets of copper; the silver in the orey
parts occurs as argentite and in the native state, the former being the more common. At some
places the veins carry a dark-green, probably chloritic material which on some surfaces has a
bright, waxy luster. Locally a soft, greasy talcose material, probably saponite, accompanies
the ore, notably at the Beaver nunc and to a lesser extent at one or two other places. Carbon
in various forms has also been found here and there. In some of the vugs in the veins, which
have been found near the surface, stiff clay and ocherous material have sometimes been obtained,
along with nuggets of argentite, the former, however, having evidently been washed in from
the surface and having thus embedded the silver minerals already existing in the vugs.
The Silver Islet vein was somewhat exce{)tional in carrying, besitles the minerals above
noted, various arsenical and antimonial ores of silver, with compounds of nickel and cobalt
and other metallic minerals which have, so far, not been found in the rest of the veins. Other
salient features of this vein were the pink and cream-colored dolomite spar which formed a
characteristic and jirominent constituent of much of the gangue of the rich ore and the pre-
ilominance of native silver in the rich parts, whereas in the rest of the veins, though native
silver occurs in considerable quantity at some places, yet argentite seems to be the form hi
which it is generally fount!.
It is interesting to note that both the mineral waters and the mflammable gixs that were
found in opening the Silver Islet mine have also been encountered at other points in the dis-
trict. Inflammable gas comes up at several points in and around Thunder Bay, causing con-
siderable ebullition in the water and keeping it open all winter. At one of these points has been
a Ingall, E. D., op. cit., p. 29H.
THE SILVER AND GOLD ORES. 595
placed a small tank connected with an inverted funnel anchored on the bottom, and it affords
sufficient gas to keep a good-sized light burning. At the Rabbit Mountain mine, in one of tlie
lower levels, water running over the breast of the drift gave off a faint odor of sulphureted
hydrogen and was depositing a white flocculent material, and both here and at the Beaver
mine it was reported that small quantities of inflammable gas had been struck.
ORIGIN OF SILVER ORES IN THE ANIMIKIE GROUP.
The origin of the silver ores in the Animikie group has not been studied by the writers.
The ores have been regardetl by some observers as brouglit up by thermal waters accompanying
the trap intrusions. All the ore bodies found so far occur near or within a moderate distance
of trap in some form, either in dikes, as in the Coast group of mines, or in sheets, as in the other
groups. Many similarities to the Sudbury and Cobalt ores further suggest this origin. Ingall
argues," on the other hand, that as the fissures intersect and dislocate the trap sheets and dikes
equally with the other rocks the traps must have been formed and solidified long before the
fissures. He suggests that the silver may be derived from the traps through decomposition of
some of their mineral constituents carrying minute quantities of silver by waters infiltrating
do^\'nward through all their joints and pores, and that these waters, passing onward and soaking
into the permeable parts and minerals in the gangue of the veins, have there deposited their
silver contents, the various forms of carbon present in the sedimentary rocks having had some
influence in effecting this preci])itation. The presence of the soft talcose and the various
chloritic materials in tliis connection he regards as favorable to this assumption.
GOLD ORES.
Low-grade, free-milling gold-quartz ores have a widespread distribution in the Lake
Superior region. The best Ivnown of them are the Rainy Lake deposits, the Ropes gold mine
in the Marquette district of Michigan, and many gold prospects on the northeast shore of Lake
Superior, includmg the Grace mine near Michipicoten. The gold-bearing quartz veins of
Ontario are principally in the Laurentian and to a less extent in the Keewatin series. Cole-
man'' classifies them as follows (his "Huronian" includes Keewatin):
1. True fissure veins.
a. In granite and gneiss.
b. In Huronian ma.ssive or schistose rocks.
2. Bedded, lenticular, or segregated veins.
a. In gneissoid rocks.
6. In Huronian schists.
3. Contact deposits between granite or gneiss and Huronian rocks.
4. Fahlbands in Huronian schists.
5. Dikes of porphyry or felsite with associated quartz, mainly in Huronian rocks.
6. Eruptive masses.
7. Placer deposits of Pleistocene age.
The Rainy Lake and Michipicoten gokl ores are mainly in rocks of the Laurentian series.
Though containing rich shoots, the ores are as a whole of low grade, yielding less than $12 a
ton, and theii- mass is not large enough for profitable mming of ores of this grade. A large
number of mines and plants have been equipped at much expense for the mining and extraction
of these ores, but thus far none have apparently been put on a reasonably profitable basis.
Mining began in 1S91 and reached its maximum in 1899, since which it has waned and is now
almost • abandoned.
Gold mining on the northeast side of Lake Superior is yet in the exploratory state, no con
siderable shipments having been made.
a Op. Cit., p. H3H.
IiColeman, A. P., Third report on the west Ontario gold region: SLxth Rept. Ontario Bur. Mines, for 1890, 1897, p. 115.
596 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The total production of gold in Ontario since 1891 has been $2,281,292."
Tvikc the gold oi'PS of the north shore of Lake Superior, the ores at the Ropes mine consist
of inctaUic ^old in quaitz veins in peridotitc in the Laurentian rocks. Their grade is low and
it is doubtful whether there has been a profit on the ore taken out. Mining was conducted
intermittently at the Ropes mine from 1882 to 1897. During this period of activity the mine
produced gold (with some silver) to the value of about •SO.'JO.OOO. Sinc'e that time some gold
has been taken out of the tailings.
A small amount of gold has been taken out of similar quartz veins in the pcridotitcs at the
Michigan mine, about .3 miles west of the Ropes.
a Report on the mining and metallurgical industries of Canada, 1907-8, Dept. of Mines, 1908, p. 307.
CHAPTER XX. GENERAL GEOLOGY.
INTRODUCTION.
In the early chapters of this volume the general geography and physiography of the Lake
Superior region have been treated, and a liistory of the development of knowledge concerning
the region, as well as the views of various authors, has been given. In the chapters on tlie
individual distiicts have been considered the geologic succession, topography, deformation, and
the lithology, metamorphism, relations, and thickness of each of the formations. Also the
formations have been classified by groups and series, and the relations of these groups and
series have been discussed. Finally, a resume of the geologic history of each district has been
given. In short, each chapter treating of a district is substantially independent, giving briefly
a complete discussion of the geology.
It therefore remains for this closmg chapter to consider the broader features of the Lake
Superior geology, and especially the comparative features. The fundamental thought of this
chapter will be the comparison of the tlifferent districts with one another from several points
of view. This comparison will be essentially confined to the principal ore-producing districts
which have been studied in detail by the United States Geological Survey. Several outlying
areas, including north-central Wisconsin and the Baraboo and Minnesota River districts, are
so isolated that attempts at correlation are largely speculative in the present state of knowledge.
These districts, therefore, will be referred to only incidentally in the following discussion, and
the reader is referred to Chapters IX and XIV for the available information concerning them.
In Bulletm 360 of the United States Geological Survey the reasons are fully given which
lead to the major division. of the pre-Cambrian rocks mto Archean and Algonkian. The dis-
cussion leading to this conclusion will not be here repeated. Those who are interested in it
may refer to that volume. ° The general succession of series of the Lake Superior region pro-
posed by the United States geologists has been agreed to by an international committee of
geologists. (See p. 84.) This succession has been established in the Lake Superior region
since 1904. It has now been found to apply to parts of Canada, and has been recently applied
by Adams ^ to the entire Canadian shield. But Canadian geologists have not grouped the
series into the major systems of Archean and Algonkian, as has been done for the Lake Superior
region.
It remains to distribute the formations that occur m each of the districts of the Lake
Superior region between the broader divisions of Archean and Algonkian, and to correlate the
series and, so far as possible, the formations which occur in one district with those found in
another. Our classification and correlation of the Lake Superior pre-Cambrian rocks are given
in the accompanying table.
PRINCIPLES OF CORRELATION.
The lowest rocks found in the region are those of the Archean system or basement com-
plex, consisting of the Keewatin and Laurentian series, with their characteristic features and
relations. This system gives us a horizon from which to work upward. At the top of the pre-
Cambrian is the Keweenawan series, which occurs mainly in a great continuous area, and which
gives us a horizon from wliich to work downward. Between the Archean and the Keweenawan
a Van Hise, C. R., and Leith, C. K., The pre-Cambrian geology of North America: Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey No. 360, 1909, pp. 19-25.
i> Adams, F. D., Jour. Geology, vol. 17, 190!), pp. 1-18.
597
598 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
is the Iluronian series. The Kewecnawan and Huronian series together make up the Algon-
kian system. In certam districts the Iluronian is separable into three divisions, marked by
uucotd'ormities; in other districts it is separable into two divisions, and in still other districts
it is not yet divisible. The most serious questions therefore arise in the correlation of the
Huronian formations of the several districts.
In correlating the Huronian rocks the following principles are used:
1. Relations to series or groups of known age; that is, to recognizetl horizons. In using
this criterion the relations of the Huronian to the Arcliean and to the Keweenawan are especially
helpful, for these rocks are readity recognizable and afford datum planes from which to work
up and down. The upper Huronian (Animikie group) adjacent to Lake Superior, being con-
tinuous through so much of tlus region, is also very helpful as a recognizable datum plane.
2. Unconformities. The unconformities between the divisions of the Iluronian are of
great assistance in correlation. Wliere all of the Huronian is pi'esent, separated by two uncon-
formities, there is naturally no difficulty in separating it into lower, middle, and upper. T\niere,
however, the Huronian has only one unconformity or where in a disconnected district only one
division of the Huronian is present, the unconformities fail to be a determinmg factor.
3. Lithologic likeness of the formations. Tliis criterion is of assistance, but it clearly has
severe Imiitations, because again and again the geologic conditions have been the same, pro-
ducing like formations at different times. This is illustrated by the remarkable similarity of the
iron-bearing formations of the upper Huronian, middle Huronian, and Archean. The natural
behef that they were of the same age long acted as a bar to progress.
4. Like sequence of formations. Similar sets of formations in the same order are of much
greater unportance as a criterion for correlation than the likeness of single foimations. But
conditions producmg similar sets of formations have frequently recurred tluring geologic time.
For instance, when a sea transgresses over a land area, there are normally formed in ortler a
psephite, a psammite, a pelite, and a nonclastic formation.
5. Subaerial or subaqueous origm. Closely connected with the third and fourth criteria is
the question whether the deposits were formed under air or under water. It is clear that the
conditions of the formation of these two classes of deposits are so different, and therefore
the nature of the formations wliicli maybe contemporaneous so variable, that there is difficulty
m correlating the two. Also it is plain that the difficulties in correlating disconnected conti-
nental deposits are scarcely less great. On the other hand, the correlatmg of subaqueous
deposits with one another is relatively easy.
6. Relations with intrusive rocks. The older the series the more intricately it is likely to
be cut by intrusive rocks, and this relation is of assistance in connection with the other criteria.
However, as there have been igneous intrusives, both acidic and basic, in great quantities up
to middle Keweenawan time, this criterion has relativeh' small utility in the correlation o^ the
Lake Superior Huronian.
7. Deformation. The amount and nature of deformation are of assistance in correlation.
On the whole the older the series the greater and more intricate the deformation. Thus in
this respect the Archean rocks exceed all later series. The Keweenawan is much less deformed
than the other pre-C'ambrian series. But the differences in deformation of the Huronian divi-
sions may not be so marked in a single district as to give unportant assistance in the discrimi-
nation of these divisions from one another. AJso a particular division of the Huronian may
be much deformed in one district and not in another.
8. Degree of mctamorphism. The degree of mctamorphism is of some assistance in cor-
relation. On the whole the older rocks are more metamorphoseii than the younger rocks, but
this criterion has limitations, since witliin comparativeh' short distances the closeness of folding
and the quantity of igneous intrusions may greatly vary, and tliese are very important factors
in ])roducing metamorphism.
The criterion relied on more than all others in the correlatioii of the Cambrian and post-
Caml)rian formations — that of fossils, showing similaiity of the life on the earth at the time
the equated formations were laid down — is not available for the pre-Cambrian rocks of the
Camlation of ]irt-C<nnlirianTOcki of the Lake Superior Ttffion.
1
fl
B«i4aaad(r«Dp.
Uimanw-uitncL
CryiMinUxlbMeL
SturtKiD lUlUlCI.
Fdcb Uounitln dji-
utei.
CaJiiinaldWrtfl
Honjne« dlrtrlel.
Iioo m*or dUlrlct.
PanokwOogDlilc
dtelrlct.
K.M^hAntrnl wiHWB ' UarTttn, ItiuK, and
vldnUf.
Nccodnh. NoflU
JJluD. >Dd Dlack
Klvuraiou
«„^».».
Waterloo ana, WIkod-
»1Q,
¥vx River valley.
Utnbldliulct.
QiinnirK Lake db-
trkt.
PlEton Point.
Anlmlkleor Loon Lake
dUirtct.
Cnyuoa dUlrfel.
VmnlUoodlilttei 's^^r^SS UlehlplcwtendltirtBi
North gaw^arUta
Uppw,
Not MHilinnJ. tiul
gtnulvM In upper
Nol Idmlinw]
Uoulilfullr pnuDi
boubltully isoenl
A twill
OnaSiaOl.
it).
Abunt.
AbKOt.
AbMM.
Ab«nt
AbMnt.
AbMnf,
Ab«n>.
Abral.
Oabbro*. dlaba«j,
»lc.
EmtMrru* gnniu (In-
mislvf).
Dululli EBbbro.
Unoootmrnlly
Acldlfi and butc In-
vStsr
BIwjblk rormalloti
(Iran beaiUic and
Pokeg^^iarUlt*.
ilisntinioiEPCnuille,
Imnitlvc Into rocks
Sutltomli (slalp.
KluiDcroU-i! whJrh
or IhF Kulrt Lakr
slfllp and OgUhlic
caiiKlunieniti' ol llie
Vermilion dUttlot.
C'aiiriL™
(Diii'iiFbj. *°
Onbluo and "red
Conglomerole, saad-
Bailo and aeldic la-
trutlva and oitru-
Ulddlft.
AbK'Dl.
"tS-^u'^Tt.^
1
a
Lo-».
1 onelamaraloi.
troup).
and uiruilta.
MlcUcuom.- .J. 10
To 0)* toulh pully
npLuwl b> IhB vot
nuranlu CUiki-
0«^<* qiurtill*
rlnvoilonglalnulra
and nlnirira
iHvlnf mtmbor.
VuiuantonMlloo
UklUfunmtilaK.
FakhK^lil
IninuKai ond ot-
MIcftlBuniiiB (-nan-
V'ulrw) fontia Una .ni ti-
dlvldsl loiu Ida
J^bar'.Tii'iirijI.W
m»nb«, and Tiad-
Uncntonnlty
(julnueicT viii>i,
;,',ria!.m,'r-
MlflilncnniBilBla. Ill-
du.lliwinwulWioI
dOUllthll BfT. utd
IIIB r.t.d OIlIW
Mlu'lilcuniiig alalB.
Inrludlnx \nleui
Iron-bwrlniniBin-
Uncnitone Inlnj.
Htm and oxtru-
Tjl^ilate.
North Moond con-
ElomcialB and
Arpln roDflODionto
andqua^ulte.
Uarahaliumconclam-
Uualhan conttotnef-
alo.
- — rnwrnfonnlly^
niironUin <|iiarltlli4.
Paalbly U.H„dloi(
KeAOHiiiwoniiiiniU
jlbly (Ubdlvldwl
Huronlan qunrliltm.
Buronlan qUBrti-
KB.™-'-
<)iiulill>< (uprar
Oninlli-, Inlnulvo
Fnwloni dolomlto,
maliilv ituroRilIu,
iDcliiJlne lion-
liMrlnsiiuinibiirla
Its lowr liorlion,
Swloy slnie.
DantlMu i]iiar1>1lu.
IVAterlw ijuartilu;
piadblymlddlallii-
(Iran bautni).
lultrbnldcdquani-
Itnamltlates.
Black Ilale
Vlrtlnl«("BvU)uli-l
9law.lacludlncl>»r-
aunntui ransailds
(Iron bearlog. but
nan prod uctlvB).
AbBDl.
\bwll.
SodlMiU uat Sod-
UMdlalluroDlui,
NaiBuno' totmiiJon
lion)
BJuaa sJsts.
AJIblk qunritlt..
NfcaiiDH a) (utma-
llaii(lmnl>wrtn(j.
AJlblk quuldlf
ivokMilo) •lllilrun-
Wrtu (falo nivrn-
bm aw lop,
RaDdvfltv daloiiillA
— I'mmnfonnliyr —
lUndvlIlF ilolomlK.
einrunn quaruJi*.
^lotonlonnliy^
Abwnt.
— Dnmnronullyt-
RandrtUfdolamll*
SluiKOoa quaniil*
^Itneonlofmlljr^
AUanl.
BEurtnfi quartili*.
<juarUlu; In moil ot
dQlonilla.
NotlilmllOtd
Nulldruimud,
Alaani.
— Uoconlornitty^
Had tllror 11m*-
tlone),
Sunday qufltUIU.
Galibio-dMrlle s(r-
Ithyomojorln
IntniiiTu nlo-
UoH'.
Poivore Bill 11
quanilte.
Ilamlmic ilnUi.
UnoooloriD Uy
nrenlK- Inlnulvn.
fJniywiiuke
Oianlle and gretn-
Hone.Inlnulvelnto
rociw b»low.
Btole.myMraoke.and
pbyrloi.dolaWtra,
lamnropbyres, In-
tnulie liito rocks
KnltoLflkcsbjle-
ApwmormBtlon (Iron
Wriiic. but 000-
ptoductlvsj,
Oftsbke MDglomenile.
UnuUtraaadalbjerU-
Inulve rocks-
sodlincnu. taalnly
<|B1« and mils
whbts, wllb In-
imjln- Uld ox-
truilvD nckf.
lawar-mldJlo Hu-
ronlan ("lipvr
ColorojimndWUI-
CntnllD and
lotT^va Inlo
Ooti ™H«lom.
BMLmanU. wlib In-
iruilre aud ailni'
ii™ rocks
,„.,.-.
UVirr tla'f
KODB dokitnlii-
Uanaril ijuartuia
KMidvlllodolaiiillo-
MMiamllflwl
Houndaii (onnmitin
irlW and quarU-
Ita. lAtlBinl to >m
til* «i|iilva1«nl 'If
ooilla and fliur-
Eton quutilU).
.^u
lAurooUui Hirln ilo-
tniiltt lolo K*-
wlllDj.
OnnliF, •vMillr. tut-
Idoill*
FBimM snelM.
dUbuaSlkai.
(iranHa and psnl-
a».,.-^.
rsjs; '■■"'■
Aelillrfolcanlcrwin.
probably l^uita-
Granitej uid pocphy-
UranllsindcnrUin.
inlnulTo into K^
waltn.
OrBnK.aDdp-1-s. "r^-^ne^KS:
1
hatVDiln ivliii
»lil>l. tht JBllir
bnaati ofiii In a tn
n^JToar haiuU of
bot^lonnailaD-
anwn rUIil*.
"assss/ffl"
UrMutDoa and
Goclo and kIiHW.
fiitlidTwilito. SSd
OrMnichliu.FMO-
glnncHndnuuIied
Umn Khtita. tnta-
porpli>rl»*
Soadan lormatlaD
>li0D btarlne and
J^SddSr'pStrt
boilD Icneoos and
iMjalyvolewIorwik
OrwD KhEiu and
<bi«' riid Ireo-
bcallne lockl.
Slw."l
rl<mtr Huronlan"
Hon 1 l°i o n
bnilnc and
tV^ira lull
Ofoi (lap raen-
lEonn.
lions and crasti
-■hUt., maoped by
17517«— VOL 52— n (Tf. Inrt. paRi- 59» I
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 599
Lake Superior region. Recognizable fossils have not yet been discovered in these rocks,
although the carbonaceous slates which extend back to the Archean seem to show that life
existed at the tmie of the earliest pre-Canibiian series.
The correlation of the pre-Cambrian roclcs is not as definite as that for fossiliferous rocks —
a fact which makes it desirable to retain local names to an extent not warranted were fossil
evidence available. The use of local names is desirable in this region also for the reason that
the districts in which they are applietl are separated by considerable areas that are much less
known. The geologist or mining engineer is seldom interested in the general correlation of
formations and finds it convenient to have local terms which have areal as well as stratigraphic
significance. Ivocal terms have been used in the six preceding reports on this region by the
United States Geological Survey, have become permanently entrenched in the literature, and
are known and understood by the local mining n^en. To discard these terms in favor of more
general terms would, it is believed, introduce confusion and perhaps vagueness. At some
future time, when explorations shall have made the areal connection so definite that there can
be no question about correlation, a sweeping change in names might be introduced to advan-
tage. At present, with so many unsolved problems and with possibilities for changes in views
of correlation, there can be little advantage in substituting general names, even for formations
whose correlation is regarded as reasonably well established.
GENERAL CHARACTER AND CORRELATION OF THE ARCHEAN.
The Archean system comprises the Keewatin series and the Laurentian series.
KEEWATIN SERIES.
The Keewatin series, wherever it is found in a relatively unchanged condition, is remark-
ably uniform in its general character, and even the portions that have been metamorjihosed
show features that are consistent with the theory that before metamorphism they had the
same general character as the less altered portions. The Keewatin comprises two great forma-
tions, a dominant igneous formation and a subordinate sedimentary formation. It is found in
its most typical facies in a comparatively unaltered condition in the Vermilion and Lake of the
Woods districts. The characterization of the Ely greenstone for the Vermilion district, given
on pages 119-122, might be applied to each of the other districts without important changes.
The Keewatin is a great volcanic series, composed dominantly of basalts and intermediate
roclvs. For all of these regions where" the rock is lava and is least metamorphosed, a peculiar
ellipsoidal or ])illow structure is characteristic. It has been pointed out (see pp. 510-512) that
this structure and the relations of the Keewatin to the iron-bearing roclvs are evidences that
the eruptions were at least in part subaqueous. Associated with the lavas are vast quantities of
volcanic fragmental rocks. In some districts — for instance, the Marcpiette and the Menominee —
the tuffaceous variety of greenstone appears, but tlie ellipsoidal structure is not common.
However, in these districts the Keewatin is much noetamorphosed by dynamic action and by
later intrusions, so that the ellipsoidal structure would have been largely destroyed even if it
once existed, as it has been where the Keewatin rocks lie close to similar large intrusive masses
on the north shore. Barring the changes due to metamorphism, there is a very remarkable
likeness of the dominating igneous portion of the Keewatin in the different parts of the I^ake
Sujjerior region.
A.ssociated with the igneous roclcs of the Keewatin are subordinate masses of sediments.
These sediments comprise slates, iron-bearing formation, and dolomite. The slates that have
been metamorphosed are so similar to the schistose phases of the greenstone itself that they
are in places difficult to recognize. They have been found in almost every district. The
iron-bearing formation is the prominent sedimentary one in the Vermilion, Atikokan, Kamin-
istikwia, and Michipicoten districts. It occurs very subordinately in the Marquette district.
la the Lake of the Woods district the iron-bearing formation has not been found, but small
masses of dolomite occur. In all the districts the iron-bearing formation and the dolomite are
600 GEOLOGY OF THE I^AKE SUPERIOR REGION.
associated with the slates. It is beUeved that in areas where these sedimentary formations
are of considerable extent and thickness they represent later Keewatin time. The chief reason
for this belief appears in the Vermilion district, wliere the iron-bearing format if )n is thick and
large masses of it occur adjacent to the Huronian, in both the Lake Vermilion and the Ely
areas, showing that the main mass of this formation was at the top of the series at the beginning
of Huronian sedimentation.
The Keewatin is the oldest series in the Lake Superior region. It is dominantly volcanic.
Moreover, the lavas were poured out mainly below the water. Thus for the earliest time of
wliich we have record in this region the surface conditions were those of submarine, regional
volcanism. Sedimentation was local and subordinate, and the sediments of the Keewatin are
believed to have a close genetic connection with the associated volcanic rocks. (See pp. 126-127.)
The Keewatin locally is schistose and the original textures and structures are discernible
with difficulty. Where not schistose the Keewatin may be separated into distinct lava flows and
beds of pyroclastic rocks, with interleaved sedimentary beds for which strike and dip are deter-
mined. The folding is usuall}' close and the beds stand at steep attitudes. To])ographically
the Keewatin, though rough in detail, has on the whole less bold rehef than the Algonkian
sediments. The schistose phases are in general less resistant to weathering and stand lower
than the massive phases. The Keewatin occupies a part of the great Archean peneplain.
LAURENTIAN SERIES.
The Laurentian series is dominantly represented by great masses of granite, granitoid
gneiss, and syenite — all acidic rocks. Intermediate and basic rocks are subordinate. The
Laurentian intrudes the Keewatin series, the intrusive masses ranging from great bathohths
many miles in diameter to dikes and minute injections, even to "ht par lit'' intrusions. The
great batholiths are perhaps best illustrated and have been most accurately described for the
region north of Lake Superior, particularly near Lake of the Woods and Rainj- Lake, by Law-
son.° These intrusive rocks, in connection with the concurrent dynamic action, have pro-
duced profound metamorpliic effects in the older Keewatin rocks, which in consequence have
been changed over extensive areas to hornblende schist and hornblende gneiss. In many
considerable areas the Keewatin and Laurentian are so intimately mixed that it would be
difficult to give an estimate of the relative proportions of the two. In some places there is
evidence that the Keewatin has actually been absorbed to some extent and thus modified
the composition of the Laurentian intrusives. This, combined with the intricate relations
along the contacts of the two formations, gives locally an appearance of gradation from the
massive Laurentian granite through the gneiss containing various mixtures of intrusive and
intruded rocks to the extremely metamorphosed variety: These facts have led Lawson * to
his theory of subcrustal fusion, according to which all the acidic material is but the fused
Keewatin. From our point of view, however, the evidence for such a conclusion is inadequate,
the most fundamental point against its correctness being the very great difference in chemical
composition of the Laurentian and Keewatin. T\Tiere not influenced by each other, the
Laurentian has the chemical composition of ordinary acidic igneous rocks, whereas the Keewatin
has the average composition of a basic rock of the basalt type. If, as Daly "■ suggests, the
Laurentian is supposed to have invaded the Keewatin by a process of overhead stoping and
the slope blocks have sunk, the contrast in composition near contacts is explained. In the
nature of the case, evidence for tliis kind of subcrustal fusion is chiiicult to obtain, and so far
as the Lake Superior region is concerned this hypothesis ma\- be noted merel}- as an interesting
guess.
dLanrson, A. C, Report on the geology of the Lake of the Woods region, with special reference to the Keewatin. (Huronian) belt of the
.Vrchean rocks; .\nn. Repl. Cieol. and Nat. Hist. Survey Canada for !S8o, new ser., vol. 1, ISSfi, pp. 5-131 cc, with geologic map; Report on the
geology of the Rainy Lake region; Idem for 1887-88, new ser., vol. 3, pt. 1, 18S8, pp. 1-182 r, with 2 maps.
t> Op. clt., 1S8.S, p. i:u F.
cDaly, R. A., The mechanics of igneous intrusion: .\ni. Jour. Sci., 4th ser., vol. 26, 1908, p. 30. .
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 601
The Laurentian of the Lake Superior region as a whole is characterized by both massive
and schistose phases. It is perhaps surprising that so large a proportion should be massive.
I It is topographically rough in detail, the massive parts usually standing somewhat higher than
the schistose parts, but altogether it forms a part of the Archean peneplain.
GENERAL STATEMENTS CONCERNING THE ARCHEAN SYSTEM.
Both Laurentian and Keewatin rocks appear in each of the important districts that have
been considered in the detailed chapters. Manifestly the wide and irregular distribution of
the Archean is a natural consequence of the fact that these rocks constitute the basement com-
plex upon which later formations were laid down. Whether or not they are now at the sur-
face at any particular locahty depends on subsequent deposition, folding, and denudation —
that is, it depends on whether geologic agencies have brought them to the surface.
If, in the future, erosion should cut the Lake Superior region to a depth of several thousand
feet below the present surface, it would probably be seen that much the larger part of the area
would be occupied by the Archean, and it is believed that the Archean everywhere underhes
all later rocks.
It appears from the foregoing characterization of the Keewatin and Laurentian that the
Archean as a whole was a period of regional igneous activity. All succeeding series contain
sedimentary rocks in large or dominant proportions; they are treated essentially as sedimen-
tary series and the igneous rocks are considered with reference to the sediments. In the
Archean, on the other hand, the igneous rocks, which make up more than 90 per cent and
probably more than 95 per cent of the area, are primarily considered, and the subordinate
masses of sedimentary rocks are discussed in reference to the igneous rocks.
The igneous activity of Archean time was both plutonic and volcanic on a tremendous
scale. Probably at present the plutonic igneous rocks of the Archean occupy a much larger
area at the surface than the volcanic rocks, but this is doubtless due in large measure to the
very profound erosion which has taken place since Archean time, and which has in consider-
able measure removed the volcanic rocks and exposed the plutonic rocks. .
A very characteristic feature of the Archean of the Lake Superior region is its likeness
from one district to another, and this is so whether the lithologic types of rocks or their relations
are considered. The foregoing description of the intrusive relations between the Laurentian
and Keewatin is applicable with scarcely a change to each of the several districts. If a set of
specimens from the Laurentian or Keewatin south of Lake Superior were unlabeled, they could
not be disci'iminated from a set of specimens from the Archean northwest or east of the lake.
There are, of course, some exceptional types of rocks which occur only locally, but these are
extremely subordinate in their mass. This extraordinary paralleUsm of phenomena of the
Archean of one part of the Lake Superior region with that of another part — and, for that matter,
with the Ai'chean of other parts of the world — has led to the phrase that the Archean is "homo-
geneous in its heterogeneity" — that is, while it is heterogeneous for any one district, it shows
the same kind of heterogeneity in each of the other districts.
Topographically also the Archean is a unit. Though rough in detail it is a great peneplain,
the UTCgularities of wliich do not constitute regular lineaments, and it is thus m contrast to the
Algonkian rocks, part of which usually stand above the peneplain surfaces with conspicuous
linear features.
Whether or not it is generally accepted that the Archean, as the term is here used, can be
safely correlated with similar rocks of other geologic provinces, it can hardly be doubted that
the Archean rocks of the different districts of the Lake Superior region form parts of a single
great system. This conclusion is supported by substantially all the criteria in reference to cor-
relation given on pages 597-599. The system wherever it occurs is in a basal position. It rests
unconformably below all the series with which it comes into contact. The general lithologic
hkeness of the heterogeneous mass is remarkable. The Keewatin rocks are largely submarine.
The complexity of intrusives is greater than that m any other series. The deformation is
602 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
greater than in other pre-Camhrian series. The metamorphism is profound. Similarity of
sequence of formations in difTerent areas of the Kcewatin is lacking, but in place of this are
the prevalent intrusive relations which exist between the Kecwatin and Laurcntian.
It is of interest to note that the oldest recognized Archean rocks are basalts, with tex-
tures indicating both subaqueous and subaerial extrusion. The basement upon which they
rest has not been identified. It is natural to turn to the Laurentian granites and gneisses, but
wherever these are found in contact with the Kecwatin they are intrusive into it. "VMietlier
some parts of the Laurentian represent the original basement or whether the Laurentian as a
whole has formed the basement and has been subsequently fused, there is no evidence to
show.
GENERAL STATEMENTS CONCERNING THE ALGONKIAN SYSTEM.
CHARACTER AND SUBDIVISIONS.
The Algonkian system on the whole contrasts with the Archean in being dominantly sedi-
mentary rather than dominantly igneous, in being less metamorphosed, in having distinctly
recognizable stratigraphic sequence, and in topography. The sediments are largely water
assorted and deposited but in part are probably subaerial. The iron-bearing formations are
regarded as having an exceptional character, being derived partly from submarine volcanic
rocks either in magmatic solutions or by the reaction of hot volcanic material with sea water,
or both. (See p. 516.)
The Algonkian system comprises in its fullest development in the Lake Superior region four
unconformable divisions — lower Huronian, middle Huronian, upper Huronian, and Keweenawan.
The Keweenawan series is essentially a unit geographically and lithologically and is considered
as such in the following discussion. The Huronian series, especially the lower and middle
Huronian, presents such variation in lithology and succession as to require its consideration
under two main geographic subprovinces — (1) the northern subprovince, including the north
shore of Lake Superior and westward extension into Minnesota, and (2) the southern subprov-
ince, including the Gogebic and Marquette districts of the south shore of Lake Superior and the
continuation of this belt eastward to the north shore of Lake Huron, and the Menommee,
Crystal Falls, and Iron River districts of Michigan.
NORTHERN HURONIAN SUBPROVINCE.
LOWER-MIDDLE HTJRONIAN.
LITHOLOGY AND SUCCESSION.
The Huronian rocks unconformably above the Archean and unconformably below the upper
Huronian (Animikie group) of the north shore of Lake Superior are extensive and thick. The
unconformities above and below are great. At many places the comparatively flat-lying
Animikie group may be seen resting upon the steeply inclined or vertical truncated edges of
the middle or lower Huronian. The latter rocks consist mainly of conglomerates, graywackes,
slates, and mica schists. In some places it is possible to divide them into two formations, the
lower consisting dominantly of conglomerates and the upper dominantly of graywackes and
slates and their metamorphosed equivalents.
The most characteristic and widespread of these rocks are the conglomerates of the lower
formation. Those which lie near the subjacent rocks from which they are derived are commonly
coarse bowlder conglomerates. Their fragments vary in lithology, depending on the under-
lying formation. They may be dominantly from granite, from greenstone, or from gneiss,
or mixtures of these three in viirious proportions and also with other materials. Many of
the conglomerates at .higher horizons have a fine-grained matrLx. Some of them have a
slate matrix through which very nunu>rous isolated i)ol)l)los and bowlders are scattered in
an irregular manner. These have bt'en called slate conglomerates. In certain localities the
GENERAL GEOLOGY. G03
slate conglomerates are the only rocks found. Associated with the slate conglomerates in
many places are beds of well-laminated slate and schist.
As has been intimated, the upper formation consists commonly of pelites. The most
extensive areas of pelite are those of the Vermilion, Rainy Lake, and Hunters Island districts..
At the west end of the Vermilion district, between the conglomerate (there called the Ogishke
conglomerate) and the slate (known as the Knife Lake slate) is a thin iron-bearing formation
(called the Agawa formation) which appears to grade toward the southwest into a calcareous
slate. The latter is the only known representative of a limestone in the lower or middle Huro-
nian of the northern subprovince. At this particular locality the succession is in certain respects
similar to that of the middle Iluronian of the Marquette district, but by far the greater areas
and masses of these, rocks in the northern subprovince exhibit no close analogy in succession
or lithology with either the lower Iluronian or the middle Huronian of the south shore.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
During the time of the deposition of the rocks under discussion there were very great
outbreaks of igneous rocks, basic and acidic, plutonic and volcanic. Contemporaneous volcanic
detritus is mingleil in varying proportions with ordinary sedimentary material, from a subor-
dinate to a dominant amount, as at Kekekabic Lake. The contributions of volcanic material
were so great as to make them quantitatively very important. Some of the larger of the plutonic
masses are the intrusive granites in the Mesabi and Vermilion districts. The slates that have
been intruded by great masses of granites and have been deformed have become pelite schists
(mica schists). This phase is extensively illustrated in the Rainy Lake and Namakan Lake
areas. The conglomerates under similar circumstances are metamorphosed to psephite schists
or gneisses, as illustrated by the schistose conglomerates adjacent to the Snowbank granite in
the Vermilion district.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
Coleman" holds that the lower Huronian slate conglomerate at one locality in the Cobalt
district of Ontario is a glacial till. He points out the likeness of the great masses of the slate
conglomerate to modern glacial till and to the Dwyka glacial deposits of South Africa, and con-
cludes that they are all till. However, even if the glacial origin of the conglomerate-bearing
striated and grooved bowlders at Cobalt is accepted — geologists are not all agreed as to tliis —
it does not follow that the Huronian conglomerate of the northern subprovince as a whole is of
this origin, because, among other reason's, the Cobalt area is a long way east of the Lake
Superior region.
Wliether or not Coleman's conclusion as to origin applies to the lower-middle Huronian
in tliis subprovince, it is regarded as likely that these rocks are essentially of terrestrial tleposi-
tion because of their unassorted character, being made up principally of conglomerate and
graywacke, lacking quartzite and limestone; because of the recurrence of conglomerates at
many horizons through several hundred feet; because the extensive conglomerate beds, like
the Ogishke, have a thickness and extent which are more easily explained by terrestrial than
by subaqueous sedimentation, which, according to Barrell,'' is not likely to produce conglom-
erates over 100 feet tlnck; and finally because the part of the lower-middle Huronian nearest
the granite or greenstone of the Archoan is locally a recomposed rock, which has not been sorted
CORRELATION.
The criteria under which the formations under discussion are classed as middle or lower
Huronian are the following: They rest upon the Archean and are below the Animikie group,
or upper Huronian; they are separated from these rocks by unconformities; they are exten-
sively cut by both basic and acidic igneous rocks; they are similar in their deformation and
oColeman, A. P., The lower Huronian ice age: Jour. Geology, vol. 16, 1908. p. 154.
6 Barren. Joseph, Relative geological importance of continental, littoral, and marine sedimentation: Jour. Geology, vol. 14. 1900, pp. 433-446:
also personal communication.
GO-t GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
degree of metamorphisiii. It thus appears that the assignment of the rocks under discussion
to the general place of lower Iluronian and middle Iluronian is unquestioned. But as large
portions of these rocks may be land formations, they can not be exactly correlated with the
aqueous de])osits of the middle and lower Huronian to the south. The deposition of land sedi-
ments may well have begun earlier than that of the aqueous deposits or it may have continued
later. On earlier maps jjublished by the United States Geological Survey the rocks here named
lower-middle Iluronian appear as lower Huronian. As earlier continental deposits are likely
to be removed by later erosion, however, it is probable that part, probably the larger j)art, of
these rocks are of middle-Huronian age. It has already been noted that in northeastern
Minnesota there is a similarity in succession to the middle Huronian of the Marquette district.
UPPER HTJBONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP).
LITHOLOGY AND SUCCESSION.
The upper Iluronian of the northern subprovince extends from a point some distance east
of Nipigon Bay, on the north shore of Lake Superior, westward through Thunder Bay to the
Mesabi cUstrict of Minnesota, thence southwest and south to the Cuyuna, Little Falls, ("arlton,
Cloquet, and St. Louis River cUstricts of Minnesota. The belt extending from Nipigon Bay t^)
the Mesabi district consists from the base up of the following rocks:
L Conglomerate, quartz slate, and quartzite. These reach a tliickness of 200 feet on the
Mesabi range. Farther east, in the vicinity of Gunflint Lake antl Thunder Bay, the tluckness
becomes only a few inches or a few feet.
2. Iron-bearing formation, 700 to 1,000 feet thick in the Mesabi district and thinning
somewhat toward the east and west.
3. Slate, best exposed in the Thunder Bay district. Thickness unknown, but large.
Throughout the northern part of this belt the sediments are gently inclined to the south at
angles ranging from 5° to 20° and locally even up to 4.5°, with pitches of gentle minor folds in
the same direction. In general the upper Huronian is not schistose but has' suffered contact
metamorphism where it is in contact with the Keweenawan gabbro and granite and other large
intrusive masses. It rests unconformably against the older rocks to the north, the unconformity
being marked by areal relations, differences in steepness of dip, amount of schistosity, kinds
of metamorphism, relations to intrusive rocks, basal conglomerates, and topogra])hy. The
unconformity is one of the most conspicuous in the Lake Superior region. The line of contact
is easily recognized by casual field observation. That the essential continuity of the upper
Huronian is obvious is indicated by the early use of the term Animikie not only for the upper
Huronian rocks on Thunder Bay, but for those in the Mesabi chstrict.
In the area southwest of the Mesabi district, in the St. Louis River and Cuyuna districts and
the country to the west, the upper Iluronian consists principally of slate, carrying lenses of iron-
bearing formation, with many intrusive and possibly extrusive rocks and certain rare quartz-
ites, the horizon of which is not satisfactorily determined but wliich are probably basal to the
division. The upper Huronian in this area contrasts markedly with that along the Mesabi range
and farther east in being closely folded, in the abundance of its intrusive rocks, and in possession
of cleavage, as well as in the differences in lithologic character just noted. It is suggested
i])]). 214, 528, 611) that the structural differences may be related in some way to proximity to
the axis of the Lake .Superior syncline, or that the Mesabi and eastward belt of the upper
Huronian may represent a shore phase of deposition, while the upper Huronian of the Cuyuna
area to the south may be an offshore phase.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
Intrusive into the upper Huronian are the great Duluth gabbro of northern Minnesota,
the basic siUs of the Gunflint and Animikie Bay liistricts (Logan sills), a few basic dikes and
possibly sills in the Mesabi district, a granite mass on the east end of the Mesabi range, and
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 605
more abundant basic and intrusive masses in the Cuyuna district. Most of the intrusives are
of Keweenawan age. Contemporaneous volcanic rocks have not been recognized.
Extrusive rocks rest on the Animikie in the Cuyuna district. It has been shown that
many of the capping chabases of the Nipigon area may be extrusive. These are doubtless
middle Keweenawan, but some of them may be late Animikie.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
The upper lluronian is a unit for the region, hence the conditions of deposition are dis-
cussed on pages 612-614, after the southern subprovince has been treated.
CORRELATION.
The correlation of the upper Huronian of the northern subprovince with that of the
southern subprovince is discussed on page 610.
SOUTHERN HURONIAN SUBPROVINCE.
LOWER HXrnONIAN.
LITHOLOGT AND SUCCESSION.
The lower Huronian of the southern subprovince reaches its fullest development in the
Marquette district, where it consists, from the base up, of the Mesnard quartzite, Kona dolomite,
and Wewe slate. In the Gogebic district the lower Huronian includes similar quartzite and
doloinite named respectively the Sunday quartzite and the Bad River limestone, but the slate
overlying the limestone is absent.
Although the north shore of Lake Huron does not fall within the area covered by this report,
it is desirable to consider the position of the series there because that is the district to which
the term Huronian was first applied. The lower Huronian of the north shore of Lake Huron
includes a great clastic formation above wliich is a limestone. In most places the clastic forma-
tion comprises a conglomerate at the base, above this a quartzite, and above this a slate. In
other places the conglomerate is almost immediately overlain by the Umestone. The succession
is very similar in its essential features to that of the lower Huronian of the Marquette district.
The lower Huronian is represented in the Menominee, Iron River, and adjacent districts
of Micliigan and Wisconsin. It consists of a quartzite (the Sturgeon quartzite) followed by a
dolomite (the Randville dolomite); but in the Iron River district the quartzite and dolomite
are interbedded and for them the new name Saunders formation has been introduced.
The lower Huronian partakes of the major structure described for each of the districts.
As a whole the folding is not as intense as in the Archean. Cleavage is usually lacking, jointing
is abundant, and bedtling is easily discerned.
The quartzite of the lower Huronian of tliis subprovince represents a cleanly assorted sand,
now strongly indurated, more or less iron stained, and locally showing fracturing and rock
flowage, but retaining its original bedding structure as a conspicuous feature. It therefore
contrasts in many respects with the lower Huronian of the northern subprovince. The dolomite
overlying the quartzite is very cherty and shows more evidence of deforn^ation than the quartzite.
The weathering of this dolomite emphasizes the folded and brecciated chert layers and serves
to make the formation easily identifiable.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
In the areas which are certainly known to be lower Huronian, contemporaneous igneous
activity was not important. This applies to all the districts south of Lake Superior, as well as
to the area north of Lake Huron. In this respect the lower Huronian contrasts with the miildle
and upper Huronian and to a more marked degree with the Archean. The contrasts between
606 GEOLOGY OF THE hAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
the Archean and tlie li)\ver Huronian in tliis respect are contributory evidence of the uncon-
onuity l)et\veeii tlie two. (See pp. 617-018.) The volcanic activity of Archeun time appar-
ently liad died out comi)letely in this Huronian subprovince before tlie dej)osition of the rocks
unquestionably belonging to the lower Huronian.
Later intrusive rocks cut the lower Huronian in small dikes. The [)ost^Huronian or
Keweenawan granites of the Florence district of Wisconsin doubtless also cut the lower Huronian,
but exposed contacts are only those of the granite and upper Huronian.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
It has appeared that the lower Huronian south of Lake Superior and on the north shore of
Lake Huron comprises first a great clastic formation consisting from the base up of conglomerate,
rpiartzite, and slate. Over this is a largely nonclastic formation now represented by a dolomite,
and localy above tliis in the Marquette district is another clastic slate formation.
The essential subaqueous origin of the lower Huronian is believed to be showTi by the
cleanly assorted nature of the sediments, the ripple marlcs of a shore rather than a stream type,
and extensive beds of hmestone. It remains to be proved that such thick and continuous
Umestone formations may be produced as terrestrial formations. Finally the conglomerate
at the base of the group contrasts stronglj^ with the arkose and thick conglomerate masses at
the base of the middle-lower Huronian of the north shore, and is beUeved to be more character-
istic of aqueous sedimentation.
It therefore appears that at the beginning of lower Huronian time the conditions in the
southern subprovince had become those of normal sedimentation in which the material destroyed
by the epigene agents was sorted and hiid down in beds one upon another, the lithologic character
varying from time to time. This is evidence that the erosive forces of air and water were
working as at ])resent. Moreover, as emphasized by Chamberlin and Salisbur}'," it is evidence
that the weathering processes possessed their full efficiency, and this would favor abundant
vegetation.'' With the beginning of Huronian time at the latest commences the part of the
history of the world to which Lyell's principles of uniformity'^ are apj)licable. These ancient
Huronian rocks have no lithologic peculiarity which can discriminate them from the rocks of
much later age; indeed, there is notliing to indicate that when they were laid down the con-
ditions were in any respect different from those which prevail to-day, ^\-ith the sole negative
point that fossils have not been found.
CORRELATION.
The Gogebic, Marquette, and original Huronian districts are approximately in an east-west
line and the prevailing strikes of the lower Huronian in all but the Crystal Falls and Iron River
districts are in the same general direction, favoring the correlation of the rocks of the different
districts.
In each district the lower Huronian rests with profound unconformity upon the underlying
Archean or basement complex, the unconformity being marked where ex])osed by differences
in lithology, by metamoqahism, and by the presence of a basal conglomerate, and being shown
also by the areal relations and relations to intrusive rocks.
The lower Huronian is overlain unconformably by the upper Huronian (Animikie group)
in all the districts, and by the middle anil upper Huronian in the Marquette, Crystal Falls,
original Huronian, and Menominee districts.
The lower Huronian of the southern sub])rovince has no counteipart in the northern sub-
province, though it occu]Hes the same general position in the succession as the lower-middle
Huronian of the northern subprovince.
a Chamberlin, T. C, and Salisbury, R. D., Geology, vol. 2, 1900, pp. KS-ltB.
b Van Hise. C. R.. A treatise on metamorphism: Mon. U. S. Geo!. Survey, vol. 47, 1904, p. 477.
<: Lycll, Charles, Principles of geology, vol. 1. 10th ed., lSii7, pp. 305-326.
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 607
MIDDLE HURONIAN.
LITHOLOGY AND SUCCESSION.
The middle Huronian is represented in the ilarquette, original Huronian, Crystal Falls,
and ilenominee districts. In the Marquette district, where it was iirst discriminated and is best
developed, it consists from the base up of the Ajibik quartzite, Siamo slate, and iron-bearing
Xegaunee formation (nonclastic). On the north shore of Lake Huron the broader features of the
middle Huronian are analogous with those of the Marquette district — that is to say, the rocks
comprise a clastic formation below, consisting of a conglomerate at the base and over this a
quartzite, both so thick and extensive that they have been mapped separately, antl above these
clastic formations a clierty limestone.
In the Crystal Falls district the middle Huronian is represented principally by the volcanic
Hemlock formation, containing iron-bearing slate near the top. The iron-bearing Xegaunee
formation is doubtfully, present; the Ajibik quartzite is present near the northeast corner of
the district, near the Marquette district. Volcanism seems to have intervened between the
deposition of the lower Huronian antl the u])per Huronian, making lithologic correlation diffi-
cult. It is to be noted, however, that the Clarksburg volcanic rocks of the Marquette district
began to be extruded in middle Huronian time, and tljese are therefore to be partly correlated
with the Hemlock volcanic rocks of Crystal Falls.
In the Menominee tlistrict the miildle Huronian is taken to be represented by cherty quartz-
ite, heretofore not separated from the Randville dolomite of the lower Huronian. There is
evidence also in the jasper and iron pebbles in tlie conglomerate at the base of the upper Huronian
that an iron-bearing formation corresponding in position and character to the Negaunfie was
present in the district before upper Huronian time, but no remnants of this are now known.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
In the Marquette district the middle Huronian is associated with part of the Clarkslaurg
formation of basic intrusive and extrusive rocks. In the original Huronian district igneous
rocks are lacking in the middle Huronian. The presence of igneous rocks in the middle Huronian
of the Marquette district and their absence in the middle Huronian of the original Huronian
district may perhaps be correlated with the presence in the former, and the absence in the latter,
of an iron-bearing formation. (See pp. 506-507.)
Hemlock volcanic rocks form the princijjal part of the middle Huronian in the Crystal
Falls district. In the IMenominee district volcanic rocks are absent from the division. The
Keweenawan ( ?) granites of Florence County doubtless also cut the midtlle Huronian, though
they nowhere come into contact with it at the surface.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
The extensive formations of cleanly assorted, well-rounded, ripple-marked sands, now
quartzites, of the middle Huronian, both south of Lake Superior and north of Lake Huron,
point toward subaqueous deposition. The pure nonclastic iron-bearing formation south of
Lake Superior and the cherty limestone formation north of Lake Superior point in the same
direction. Still further is this shown by the association of these rocks with partly subaqueous
volcanic rocks of the Clarksburg formation. The iron-bearing formation and possibly some
of the associated slates have a close genetic connection with some of the associated volcanic
rocks.
In the Crystal Falls district the middle Huronian was principally a time of extrusive
volcanism, partly subaqueous. The volcanic rocks are interbedded with the slates and iron-
bearing rocks, subaqueously deposited. In the Menominee district the middle Huronian is
represented only by shreds of quartzite and perhaps by the iron-bearing Negaunee formation.
608 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTERIOR REGION.
The quartzite is very cherty, as if derived from decomposition of the Randville dolomite,
against which it rests. It is well betlded and well assorted. At one locality there seems to l)e a
conglomerate with well-rovmdcil bowlders near its base.
On the whole the evidence favors subaqueous deposition of the middle Huronian.
CORRELATION.
The middle Huronian rocks in the Marquette and original Huronian districts are correlated
on the basis of similar succession of clastic and nonclastic rocks, similar relations to the lower
Huronian, similar east-west trend, similar metamori^hism, and the fact that they are subaqueous
in both districts. They diiVer in that the nonclastic formation of the Marfiuette di.strict is an
iron-bearing formation and that of the original Huronian district a limestone, that associated
igneous rocks are present in the Marcjuette district and not in the original Huronian district,
and that in the Marquette district the overlying rocks are upper Huronian and in the original
Huronian district no upper Huronian is present, although to the northeast in the Sudbury
basin rocks probably to be correlated with the mitldle Huronian are overlain unconformably
by rocks with upper Huronian characteristics.
The middle Huronian of the Crystal Falls district, being largejy volcanic, may be correlated
lithologically with the lower part of the Clarksburg formation of the Marquette district. So
far as the Ajibik and Negaunee formations are present in this district they are correlated
directly with formations of the same names in the Marquette district. They occur, however,
in the northeast corner of the Crystal Falls district, the area nearest to the Marquette •district,
and the correlation is of little aid in correlating the middle Huronian as a whole. The middle
Huronian of the Crystal Falls .district is principally a great assemblage of volcanic rocks Ij'ing
between the lower Huronian and upper Huronian and differing from the dominantly sedi-
mentar}^ middle Huronian of other districts. Its correlation is therefore based principally on
its position in the geologic column.
The middle Huronian of the Menominee district is correlated with the middle Huronian
of other areas almost entirely on the basis of its stratigraphic position, unconformably above the
lower Huronian and unconformably below the upper Huronian. As it consists only of a rem-
nant of quartzite, lithologic comparison with the middle Huronian of other districts is of no
value.
The equivalents of the middle Huronian have not been identified in the other districts of
the Lake Superior region, though it is possible that future work may result in its identification
in the Florence and Iron River districts.
trPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP).
LITHOLOGY AND SUCCESSION.
The upper Huronian of the southern subprovince consist mainly of a thick slate foimation
carrying two or more iron-bearing beds or lenses near its base ami possibly othei-s higher in the
group.
In the Gogebic district it consists from the base up of the Palms formation, the iron-bearing
Ironwood formation, and the Tyler slate.
In the Marquette district it consists from the base up of the Goodrich quartzite, the iron-
bearing Bijiki schist, and the Mchigamme slate.
In the Menominee district the lower iron-bearing part of the upper Huronian is called the
Vulcan formation and the upper slate the Michigamme ("Hanbury") slate. The Vulcan
formation is subdivided, from the base up, into the Tradere iron-bearing member, the Brier slate
member, and tlie Curry iron-bearing member.
In the Crystal Falls district a similar subdivision into Vulcan and ^lichigamme is made,
but there not only are the members of the Vulcan formation not discriminated, but the forma-
tion is iuterbcdded near the base of the slate and is treated as a member of the .Micliigamme
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 609
and not as a distinct formation, although it is mapped separately. On former maps of the Crys-
tal Falls district" the iron-bearing rocks were not given a separate name, but were mapped with
the slate as upper Huronian. In this report they are correlated with the Vulcan formation
and called the Vulcan iron-bearing member.
In the Calumet district the upper Huronian is divided into the Michigamme slate, the
Vulcan formation, and a third formation at the base, the Felch schist. The Vulcan formation
is subdivided into three iron-bearing beds and two slate beds.
In the Felch Mountam district the slate is absent except where the district opens out to the
west; the Vulcan formation is not subdivided and the Felch schist forms the base of the upper
Huronian. The Vulcan and Felch formations of this district correspond respectively- with the
"Groveland" and "Mansfield" formations of the earlier mapping of the district. The reasons
for the change of names are given on ])agcs 303-305.
In the Iron River district the upper Huronian is represented by the Michigamme slate, inter-
bedded near the base of which is an iron-bearmg member that has been correlated with the
Vulcan formation, although the evidence is not conclusive that certain iron-formation bands
classed as Vulcan may not belong stratigraphically higher than the Vulcan formation as typically
developed in the Menominee district. The same remarks may be made concerning the Florence
district in Wisconsin.
Throughout the southern subprovince the Michigamme slate is closely folded and in much of
the area, especially in the vicinity of the intrusive rocks it has a strongly developed cleavage.
Bedding is usually to be observed except in places where there has been exceptionally good
development of cleavage. The iron-bearing formations and quartzites also have been closely
folded, but lack cleavage.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
Basic intrusive and extrusive rocks in the upper Huronian are represented in this subprov-
ince by the Clarksbuj'g formation of the Marquette district; by the Prescjue Lsle area of the
Penokee-Gogebic district, where volcanic rocks, lavas, and tuffs were built up during the larger
part of uppei' Huronian time, and by basaltic schists of the Menominee^ Crystal Falls, Iron River,
and Florence districts. In individual occurrences it has not been found possible to determine
whether these basic igneous rocks are intrusive or extrusive or even to exclude the possibility
of the rocks being pre-Huronian. Some of the intrusive rocks are probably of Keweenawan
age. Granites of probable Keweenawan age intrude the upper Huronian and associated basaltic
extrusives in the Florence district.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
The conditions of dei^osition of the upper Huronian ui this subprovince are discussed on
pages 612-614.
CORRELATION.
There can be little doubt about the correlation of the upper Huronian in the several districts
of the southern subprovince. The rocks as a whole are easily eroded and heavily drift covered
and therefore have few outcrops, with the residt that areal connections have not been every-
where traced, although they probably exist. The upper Huronian of the Marquette district
opens on the west and southwest into a gi-eat slate area, which, so far as Icnown, is the same
slate area as that surroundmg the Crystal Falls district, and thence extends south and south-
west into the Menominee and Iron River districts. Tlu-oughout the subprovince the greater
part of the upper Huronian is slate and the u'on-bearing formation is characteristically near
the base of the gi'oup. In metamorphism, folding, amount of intrusive rocks, and relations to
intrusive rocks the upper Huronian within the province is a unit.
a Mon. U. S. Geol. Survey, vol. 36, 1899.
47517°— VOL 52—11 39
610 GEOLOCIY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR KEGTOX.
From a study of the structural facts alone it may not be aflirincd tliat the unconformity at
the base of the upper Iluronian of the southern subprovince represents a considerable time
interval. However, when this unconformity is considered in connection with the deep erosion
and local absence of the middle Iluronian between two divisions, which are identified on satis-
factory evidence, as upper Iluronian and lower Iluronian, it is evident that the time break
represented may be a large one. Great time intervals are known to be represented in other
parts of the geologic column, as, for mstauce, between the Paleozoic and Mesozoic in parts of
the West, where structural evidence is slight.
The correlation of the upi)er Huronian of the southern and northern subprovinces is scarcely
less clear. In each subprovmce the basal member is quartzite and slate, followed by an iron-
bearing formation and then by thick slate. The differential metamorphism Ls similar m the
two subprovmces. In both the upper Huronian rests with strong unconformity upon Archean
or middle or lower Iluronian. In both it is unconfonnably beneath the Keweenawan. On
the north shore it dips gently to the south under the Lake Superior syncLine ; in the northern
part of the southern subprovince the upper Huronian of the Gogebic district dips steeply to
the north under the same syncline. The identity in the succession of formations in these two
subprovinces, their position immediately below the Keweenawan, and their general structural
alliances with that series give such strong evidence of equivalence that no one can seriously
doubt that the upper Iluronian of the two regions is essentially contemporaneous.
If one saw the flat-lymg, little-altered upper Huronian at one locahty and the most folded
and metamor])hosed phases at another far distant and had not proved their continuity, he
might think that the rocks of the different localities belonged to different divisions, but in
many places the various metamorphosed and unmetamorphosed phases have been found to
connect.
GENERAL REMARKS CONCERNING THE UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE
GROUP) OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
CHARACTER.
The Animikie is the only group that is continuous throughout the Huronian subprovinces.
It is the principal iron-bearing group. Although it has been described m connection with each
of the subprovinces, a further general description is here presented to emphasize its unity over
the Lake Superior region.
The upper Huronian was deposited on a remarkably uniform peneplain. Remnants of
this peneplain appear from beneath the upper Huronian hi the Mesabi, Anhiiikie, and Gogebic
districts. The post-Animikie and post-Keweenawan folding have resulted in the tdting of this
plam to various angles and it is truncated by later peneplains. In each of the districts in
which a full succession is found there is a clastic formation at the bottom, a niiddle iron-bearing
formation, and an upper slate formation. The bottom chxstic formation consists of a con-
glomerate at the base, which m the northern subprovince and the northern part of the southern
subprovince passes up into a shale or slate and in most places linally into a quartzite. In the
different districts, and in the same district, the relative proportions of conglomerate, quartzite,
and slate vary, as does also the particular phase which Ls adjacent to the iron-bearing formation.
For instance, m the Marquette district conglomerate and quartzite are domuiant hi the Goodrich
quartzite and there is comparatively little slate. In the Penokee-Gogebic district conglomerate
and slate are dominant in the Palms formation and the quartzite is a thin formation at the
top. In the Mesabi district the Pokegama quartzite is somewhat similar. In the Animikie,
Menominee, and Crystal Falls districts the clastic formation is very tlihi hideed.
Over the clastic formation is the iron-bearmg formation, which hi the Marquette district
is known as the Bijiki schist, in the Menommee district as the ^■ulcan formation, in the Crystal
Falls, Iron River, ami Florence districts as the Vulcan iron-bearing member, in the Gogebic
district as the Ironwood formation, in the Mesabi district as the Biwabik formation, and in the
Cuyuna district as the Deerwood iron-bearmg member. This u'on-bearuig formation is by far
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 611
the most persistent and important oi' those of the Lake Superior region. In it are probaljly 9.5
per cent of the known ore reserves. It is not a pure nonchistic formation, but has interstratified
slaty hi vers of variable thickness. A number of these layers have been recognized in the Mesabi
and Gogebic districts. In the Menominee district one of them is of sufficient thickness to
constitute a distmct member of the formation and is known as the Brier slate member; it sepa-
rates the two ore-bearing momljers of the Vulcan, the Curry and Traders. The maximum
tliickness of the u'on-bearing formation for the region is 1,000 feet.
In parts of the region the iron-bearing formation does not lie at a definite hoi-izon l^etween
the coarse clastic sediments at the base and the shales aljove, but appears as more or less isolated
and overlapping lenses entirely withm the slate which forms the upper part of the upper
Huronian. This is the characteristic occurrence of the iron-bearing formation of the upper
Huronian m the great area extending south and west from the Mesabi and St. Louis River
districts, including the new Cuyuna range, and of the triangular area of Michigan between the
Marquette, Menominee, and Gogebic districts, mcluding the Florence, Iron River, and Crj^stal
Falls districts. The iron-bearing formation in this relation to the slate appears also in the
western part of the Marquette district. Iron-bearing lenses of this kind seem on the whole to
be more numerous near the base of the slate than elsewhere, but in many places it is not known
what their stratigraphic position really is, the rocks both above and below them being slate.
It will be noted that the sharply delimited, extensive ii-on-bearmg formations, occurrmg at a
defuiite horizon above the lower clastic formations of the upper Huronian, border the okler
formations on the northwest and southeast sides of the Lake Superior syncline, and that the
discontinuous lens-shaped parts of the formations in the slate are located far from the contacts
with the older formations. The suggestion is made that this ilifl'erence may be due to original
difference of conditions of deposition near the old shore against which the upper Huronian
sea washed, as compared with the conditions off shore.
Above or associated with tiie iron-l^earing formation is the upper slate formation known
as the Michigamme slate in the Marquette, Crystal Falls, Calumet, Menominee, Iron River,
and Florence districts, the Tyler slate in the Penokee-Gogebic district, the Virginia slate in
the Mesabi, Cuyuna, and adjacent districts, and the Rove slate in the Vermilion district. It
occupies a large area in Michigan south of Lake Superior, an immense area west of Lake Supe-
rior extending far into central Minnesota, and a very large area about Thunder Bay and vicinity.
It probably extends westward beyond the western boundary of Minnesota and widens out in
this direction. It is entirely possible that this formation wiU ultimately be found to connect
beneath the later formations with the slates of the Black Hills of South Dakota and even with
the Belt series of Montana. Indeed, the areal extent of this formation is far greater than that
of all the other Huronian sediments of the Lake Superior region.
The formation being for the most part a slate and so soft as to be extensively covered
by the drift, exposed sections in which to measure its thickness are rare. Also cleavage in
these sections has so obscured bedding that estimates are worth little. In the Penokee-Gogebic
district, where such a section is exposed, the possible maximum thickness has been estimated
at about 12,000 feet, but this is probably too large. Seaman and Lane "^ suggest 4,000 feet.
The rocks of this formation in the Mesabi and Animikie districts are principally shales.
Elsewhere they are principally slates. At Carlton and Cloquet, on St. Louis River, tlie forma-
tion is niuch folded and has a slaty cleavage, and farther to the southwest, where intruded liy
masses of granite and diorite, it locally becomes so metamorphosed as to pass into a schist.
A like change is noted in the character of the upper formation, the Tyler slate, at the west end
of the Penokee district, where it is intruded by igneous rocks.
Conspicuous in the slate at many horizons are seams and lenses of pyritiferous and gra-
phitic slates. These are so characteristically associated with some of the discontinuous non-
bearing lenses, originally iron carbonate, as to serve as guides in exploration.
u Lane, A. C, and Seaman, A. E., ^ioles on the geological section of Michigan: Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, p. 686.
612
GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
The slate as a wliole gives evidence by its composition of being less leached of its bases
than average slates or residual clays. The cojnposition also sliows that it must have been
derived from rocks on an average more basic than granites. In figure 76, prepared Ijy S. H.
Davis, the mineralogical composition of the upper Huronian slates, calculated from chemical
composition, is compared graphically with that of a variety of other clays and soils.
The upper Huronian slate and ii'on-bearing formations arc interbe(hled locally with
abundant basaltic extrusive rocks, partly subaqueous, and tuffs in the southern subprovince.
In the northern subprovince these are yet known definitely only in the Cuyuna district of
Minnesota.
QUARTZ
CLAY AND FERRIC OXIDE SILICATES
Figurl; 7ti. — Triangular diagram comparing the amounts of undecomposed silicates, quartz, and residual weathered products, siit-li as clay and
ferric oxide, in dilTerent kinds of muds, shales, and weathered rocks. For description of method of platting see page 182. The mineral com-
positions are calculated from chemical analyses. Dotted lines with arrows indicate the progressive change in proportions of constituents
between the unaltered and altered rocks. The diagram brings out clearly the fact that the upper Uuroniau shale represents the little-
decomposed ddbris of a basic igneous rock.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION OF THE UPPER HXTRONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROTTP).
Any hypothesis of the conditions of deposition of the upper Huronian must be built around
the following salient facts:
The succession of a thin fragmental base, an iron-bearing formation, and a thick mud
deposit, and the tiiinness, evenness, and wide extent of the basal conglomerate and quartzite.
The fact that the upper Huronian rests upon a Hat plane beveling alike hard and soft,
resistant and nom'esistant rocks, without residual or terrestrial deposits at the base.
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 6L3
The association of discontinuous iron carbonate lenses with graphitic slates at different
horizons, pointing strongly to bog or lagoon conditions.
The lack of sorting or decomposition in the slates as shown by analyses.
Contemporaneous volcanism, partly submarine, probably relatetl to the deposition of the
ore, so associated with the upper Huronian as to indicate subaqueous origin for at least a part
of it.
The hypothesis which seems to fit this group of facts better than others which have suggested
themselves to us is this:
1 . The first upper Huronian event was the advance of the upper Huronian sea to a shore line
somewhere north of the present northern boundary of Lake Superior. In the area of Michigan
and Wisconsin it passed over middle and lower Huronian rocks which were nearly flat-lying and
perhaps not much eroded. On the north shore it passed over middle and lower Huronian rocks
which had been closely folded and deeply eroded. This advance was perhaps accompanied
by some planation or scouring of the land area, as suggested by the evenness of this plane
and the manner in which it bevels alike soft and hard formations and by the absence of residual
or terrestrial deposits beneath the cleanly assorted fragmental base of the upper Huronian.
Had the land been base-leveled by terrestrial erosion prior to the advance of the sea, that advance
would seem likely to have flooded the river mouths and required them to build' up to grade,
resulting in the development of terrestrial deposits, including much mud, in advance of the
encroaching sea, to be ultimately covered by it, and not removed. It is entirely conceivable
that farther to the south the upper Huronian sea may actually have advanced over this zone
of terrestrial deposition, but that in the Lake Superior region the sea had encroached upon
the upper portions of the rivers and was cutting into the rock. There seems to be an absence
of sea cliffs to the north of the present upper Huronian beds, but this may be explained by
later erosion.
The advance of the sea over a gently sloping surface was accompanied by deposition of a
thin conglomerate and sand formation spread evenly over a large area. Barrell " has shown
that \\'ith tlie low gratlient characteristic of such advance the conglomerate at the base is likely
to be very tliin, if not altogether lacking, being worn out by littoral abrasion, and in modern
instances being observed to disappear a short distance from the shore. Conglomerates of this
sort may be thick and coarse only around monadnocks standing above the plane of transgression.
The deposit of the upper Huronian sea seems to be similar to the thin fragmental base of the
Cambrian, which was laid down by the Paleozoic sea advancing also from the south over a flat
surface. The absence of conglomerate in the Cambrian except around monadnocks is well
known.
2. Then came the deposition of the iron-bearing material. Tliis is a chemical precipitate
requu'ing either quiet conditions of deposition or extreme rapidity of deposition to account for
the lack of interbedded coarse fragmental sediments. It has been argued in another place
(pp. 506 et seq.) that the thick iron-bearing formations near the base of the upper Huronian,
such as those of the Mesabi, Gogebic, and Menominee districts, find their essential explanation
in their genetic relation with basic volcanism, wluch furnishes sources for unusually abundant
deposition of iron salts. The abruptness of the change from quartz sand to iron-bearing forma-
tion and the usual lack of any fragmental material in the iron-formation layers seem to imply
some unusual change of conditions, probably not related to topographic or climatic changes.
3. The advance of the upper Huronian sea overlapped the Lake Superior region but may
not have progressed much farther north. We fuid no record of it farther north, though allow-
ance must be made for much erosion. The flatness of the plane would require that planation or
scouring should l)e weakened diu-ing the northward transgression. The rivers would then be
able to hold their own against the sea, and deposition of river alluvium in the form of great
deltas may be supposed to have predominated over marine fragmental deposition. Then were
o Barren, Joseph, Relative geological importance of continental, littoral, and marine sedimentation: Jour. Geology, vol. 14, 1906, pp. 433-446;
also personal communication.
614 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTPERTOIl REGION.
built up the thick masses of mud deposits characterized by discontinuous, pyritiferous, {):raphitic
seams, and iron-car))()iia(o lenses at different horizons, wliich seem better explained by delta
and lagoon contlitions than by any other hypothesis tliat has been suggested. A.ssociation
with subaqueous extrusions is thus explained. So far as deltas are terrestrial the upper Huron-
ian muds are terrestrial.
The lack of tlecomposition of the muds and the graphitic material associated with iron
carbonate, indicating the probable existence of peaty material associated with bog deposits,
favor the view tliat the climate may have been contimiously cool and wot, for nowhere are
the conditions for hick of decomposition, bog formation, and absence of oxidation of carbon so
well developed as in a district where a continuous covering of water prevents the access of
oxj'gen. In warmer regions or in those in whicii a part of the year .is hot and dry the organic
material is likely to be oxidized, giving an abundance of carbon dioxide for attack of the rocks.
Contemporaneous basic igneous extrusions, so abundant in the upper Hiu-onian, doubtless
furnishetl an unusual source for mud, by their decomposition when hot," through the agencies
of acid solutions, through the agencies of the atmosphere acting upon sulpliides and thereby
freeing sulphuric acid for attack on the adjacent rock, and finally perhaps by reaction of the
hot lavas with sea water. In figure 76 (p. 612) is indicated the direction of alteration of basalt
by hot sulphuric-acid solutions of the Hawaiian Islands. The most altered pliase represents
rock which has not been transported. It is to be noted that the direction of alteration is some-
what dilTerent from that of weathering. It is entirely possible, if not probable, from the posi-
tion of upper Huronian slates in the diagram, that they have been derived from the katamorphism
of basic igneous rocks, both by ordinary weathering and by the unusual alteration of hot acid
solutions associated with the igneous rocks themselves.
The upper Huronian sediments are therefore regarded as the combined result of an advanc-
ing sea scouring, perhaps cutting the old surface, of a source in which basic volcanic rocks form
a distinctive part, and of the final deposition of a great mud delta.
The building up of the upper Huronian, developing terrestrial conditions toward the close,
fm-nishes an appropriate setting for the inauguration of the great Keweenawan period of terres-
trial sedimentation which followed after an interval of erosion.
KEWEENAWAN SERIES.
As the Keweenawan is a unit to a greater extent than the Huronian or the Archean, being
located along the border of Lake Superior with large inland extensions, and as the general out-
line of the history of the Keweenawan has been given in Chapter XV, we give here only the
briefest summary of the salient features of the series.
LITHOI.OGT AND SUCCESSION.
It has been seen tliat the Keweenawan is separable uito three divisions, a lower, middle,
and upper. The lower Keweenawan was formed during a period of sedimentation and con-
sists of conglomerates, sandstones, shales, and limestones. This division of the Keweenawan
is not very thick, but it is widespread. The maximum measurement is 1,400 feet. The michlic
Keweenawan represents a time of combined sedimentary and igneous action, containing many
alternations of sedimentary and igneous deposits. In general the igneous activity greatly domi-
nated in the early part of middle Keweenawan time, but was less dominant in the later part.
Upper Keweenawan time was again a period of normal sedimentation. At the base of the
upper Keweenawan are thick conglomerates, which are overlain by shales and these bj- a very
thick sandstone formation.
As contrasted with the Huronian the Keweenawan sediments are dominantly clastic. Xon-
clastic sediments are found only in one locality, in the Nipigon-Black Bay district. Moreover,
the clastic formations are coarse, being dominantly either psepiiitic or psammitic. Only sub-
a Maxwell, Walter, Lavas and soils of the Hawaiian Islands: BiUl. A, Exper. Sta. Hawaiian Sugar Planters Assoc., 1905, pp. 8-22.
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 615
ordinately are pelites present, the single important representative being the shale of the upper
Keweenawan.
Another feature in which the Keweenawan sediments contrast with the Huronian is tliat
they are largely derived from the igneous rocks of the series itself.
IGNEOUS ROCKS.
Tlie igneous rocks of the middle Keweenawan are both plutonic and volcanic. They include
basic, acidic, and intermediate varieties, the basic rocks being dominant. As the detritus of the
middle and upper Keweenawan is derived largely from the igneous rocks of the period itself, in
arriving at an estimate of the mass of igneous intrusions and extrusions of this time we must
consider not only the original igneous rocks, but the sediments wliich are derived fi-om them.
The mass of the Keweenawan volcanic and ])lutonic facies is enormous.
CONDITIONS OF DEPOSITION.
It is probable that the sediments of the Keweenawan were largely land deposits. (See
pp. 416-418.) The principal arguments for this conclusion are their prevailing red color, their
little-assorted, feldspatliic nature, and their rapid alternation with abundant extrusive rocks
having textures that are ordinarily associated \vith subaerial cooling, in contrast with the tex-
tures of subaqueous cooling so common in the volcanic rocks of the lower Huronian and the
Keewatin. But it is also probable that a portion of them were deposited under water. In
the discussion of orogeny (pp. 622-623) it is shown that the Lake Superior basin was formed
largely in Keweenawan time, and it is highly probable that this basin contained water.
CORRELATION.
The correlation of the different areas of the Keweenawan is a simple problem. The great
area of Keweenawan, extending from Keweenaw Point through northern ^Michigan into Wiscon-
sin ami Minnesota and thence northeastward to the Thunder Bay district and Lake Nipigon, is
almost continuous. Therefore the only problem of correlation so far as the general series is con-
cerned is that of the rocks of Isle Roj'al, Michipicoten, and the areas on the east coast of Lake
Superior. The placing of these rocks in the Keweenawan is based on their position at the top of
the pre-Cambrian, the unconformity at their base, and their remarkable likeness in litliology,
succession, deformation, and metamorphism to the rocks of the main Keweenawan area.
Though all these points bear on the question, it was the likeness of the lavas of these areas to
those of the main area and their interstratification with red sandstones and conglomerates
which led the earlier geologists who worked in the Lake Superior region to recognize the identity
of the separated areas of Keweenawan rocks.
The problem of fixing the exact relations of the Keweenawan and Cambrian is not so
simple The evidence as given in Chapter XV is in favor of the Algonkian age of the main part
of the Keweenawan.
PALEOZOIC ROCKS.
The Keweenawan is the latest period which this monograph treats in detail. On the gen-
eral geologic map (PI. I, in pocket) the Paleozoic and later rocks are shown as covering a large
part of the area south of Lake Superior, but they are all represented l)y one color, for it is not
our purpose to consider the post-Algonkian formations separately. The Paleozoic rocks are
mentioned only in so far as they are related to the Proterozoic — that is, the Algonldan and
Archean.
For the most part the formation which overlies the Proterozoic rocks is a sandstone, which
is generally recognized as of Cambrian age. Its basal portion where in contact mth iron-bearing
formations consists of detrital ferruginous rocks. This formation is everywhere in a substan-
tially horizontal attitude, thus conti-asting strongly with the Proterozoic rocks. In general the
relations between this sandstone and the Proterozoic rocks are those of most profound uncon-
616 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
formity, luid tliis is true whichever of the more ancient series undeilics the sandstone. The
manner in which tiu^ ('ambrian sandstone cuts unconformahly across tiie several series of the
pro-Cumbrian is well illustrated on tlie east side of the ])re-Cumbrian area of the Upper Penin-
sula of Michigan and northern Wisconsin. Here the Cambrian is fossiliferous. The uncon-
tormnblo relation to the Arcliean is splendidly illustrated alono; the Lake Superior shore north of
Mar<iuotte. The discordant relations with the Iluronian are shown at many localities in the
Menominee district. At some localities in northern Wisconsin tiic sandstone rests upon the
Kewoenawan. The discordant relation between the Cambrian sandstone and tlie Keweenawan
is particularly well seen at Taylors Falls, on St. Croix River. Here the sandstone rests upon the
tilted edges of the lower Keweenawan. At this locality the sandstone has been found to con-
tain fossils wliicii have been determined by Berkey ° to combine "to a certain tlegree character-
istics of both the ;\Iiddle and Upper Cambrian," wliich "do not as a whole present a primitive
faunal aspect." Apparently the earliest Paleozoic rocks here are either those of the upper part
of the Mitldle Cambrian or the lower part of the Upper Cambrian, or both.
Adjacent to Lake Superior is an area of sandstone, about the age and relations of which
there is room /or difference of opinion. Tiiis area of sandstone is south of the west end of
Lake Superior, making the shore of Chequamagon Bay, the south shore of the west end of Lake
Superior, and the Madaline Islands (Lake Superior sandstone). In this area the Lake Superior
sandstone does not carry fossils and is possibly Keweenawan, but it has been regarded by alias
pro])ably the efjuivalent of the fossiliferous Upper Cambrian to the south and is so treated
in this monograj)h. That these sandstones liave relations to the Archean and Iluronian hke
those described for the more extensive areas of Cambrian sandstone to the south has been
agreed to by all observers from early days. It is also agreed that tliese sandstones are certainly
later than and have unconformable relations with the midtUe and lower Keweenawan. Follow-
ing Irvuig, we have incUned to the view that the same relation exists between these sandstones
and the upper division of the Keweenawan. However, Lane and Seaman '' believe tliat the
Upj)er Cambrian sandstone of Checjuamagon Bay and the Madaline Islands grades down into
upper Keweenawan sandstone (which they call Freda). Tliis has been confirmed by recent
work of Thwaites, of the Wisconsin Geological Survey (unpublished). The significance of tiiis
relation in the correlation of the Keweenawan series is discussed in the chapter on the Keweena-
wan (pp. 415-416).
The Paleozoic rocks of this region, except in the area above noted, contain marine fossils
at several horizons and are therefore in large part submarine deposits. They form a portion
of the great series of Paleozoic rocks which has been traced in continuous overlap over a large
part of the North American continent. That any of them are of terrestrial origin is not proved,
though it is not impossible that part of the samlstone bordering the southwest shore of Lake
Superior may be terrestrial. The abundant- partly decomposed feldspar in the Cambrian of the
Lake Superior region is probably derived largely from the Keweenawan below, which is beheved
to be in part a terrestrial deposit.
CRETACEOUS ROCKS.
In northern Michigan, Wisconsin, and eastern Minnesota the Paleozoic are the fossiliferous
formations that rest upon the pre-Cambrian, but in northern Minnesota there are local ])atches
of Mesozoic (Cretaceous) rocks which have tliis position. These show that in such areas either
Paleozoic rocks were never deposited over the pre-Cambrian, or else, and tliis is more probable,
they were deposited and removed by erosion before Cretaceous time. The Cretaceous carries
marine fossils. Its basal portion contains detrital ferruginous sediments.
a Berkey, C. P., Geology of the St. Croix Dalles: Am. Geologist, vol. 21, 1898, p. 292.
^ Lane, A. C, and Seaman, .\. E., Notes on the geological section of Michigan; pt. 1, The pre.Ordovician: Jour. Geology, vol. 15, 1907, pp. 680-69S.
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 617
PLEISTOCENE DEPOSITS.
The Pleistocene deposits of the Lake Superior region are separately treated in Chapter XVI
(pp. 427-459) and will not be summarized here.
PRE-CAJMBRIAN VOLCANISM.
It is by contrasting the volcanism of the different pre-Cambrian periods tliat we gain an
idea of their relative importance. The volcanism of the Archean is unicjue, botii as to volume
and as to extent. If we may presume that the Archean which is buried is of the same character
as that which is now at the surface — and this has been shown in some })laces by drilling — it would
follow that the Archean rocks not only once covered the entire Lake Superior region but extended
to an indefinite distance in all directions. They are composed dominantly of igneous rocks,
volcanic and plutonic. The mass of igneous rocks of this time is immeasurably greater than that
of any succeeding pre-Cambrian epoch; indeed, much greater than tiiat of all of them put
together. Evidence has also been given (pp. 510-512) in favor of the idea that some of the
basic volcanic rocks are submarine.
In the Iluroniau also there are intrusive and extrusive, rocks of both basic and acidic
character in vast volume, but far less in amount than the enormous masses of the Archean.
The basic extrusive rocks are abundant in the middle and ui)per Huronian of the southern
subprovince and especially in the upper Huronian, but their distribution is local. Like the
extrusive rocks of the Keewatin, those of the Huronian are partly submarine. They are repre-
sented by the Clarksburg formation of the Marquette district, the Hemlock formation of the
Crystal Falls district, the volcanic rocks of Brule River in the Florence district, the volcanic
rocks of Presque Isle in the Gogebic district, and many unnamed greenstones in the Crystal
Falls and Iron River districts. In the lower Huronian basic extrusive rocks are subordinate.
Granites are extensively intruded into the Huronian.
The Keweenawan was a time of volcanism, plutonic and surface, wliich extended over the
entire Lake Superior basin and to varying distances inland — indeed, a time of regional volcanism
which can be fairly compared with the outbreaks of Tertiary volcanoes in parts of the western
United States. In northern Canada and in the southwestern United States are large areas
showing many volcanic rocks which may belong to this same period. The basic extrusive
rocks of the Keweenawan contrast with those dominant in the Huronian and Keewatin in
exhibiting textures peculiar to subaerial cooling instead of textures characteristic of subaqueous
cooling.
pre-ca:vibrian life.
No fossils definitely recognizable as such have yet been found in the pre-Cambrian of the
Lake Superior region. The greenalite granules of the Mesabi district, first called glauconite
and thought possiblj' to be of organic origin, are now known to be chemical precipitates. The
carbon that is so abundant in the shales, a part of it in the form of hydrocarbon, is probably
of organic origin. The limestones give no decisive proof one way or the other, but they are
evidence of extensive carbonation of the rocks, which is now largely accomplished by the
assistance of organisms. The probable existence of life is also indicated by the well-assorted
nature of the sediments of some of the series, implying the presence of vegetable life to assist
in rock decay.
unconformities.
UNCONFORMITY BETWEEN THE ARCHEAN AND LOWER HURONIAN.
Unconformity may signify discordance of structure and intervening erosion with or without
great time lapse, or great time lapse with or without great discordance in structure or erosion,
or both. The lapse of time may be measured by the extent of the intervening deformation
and erosion or by the absence of beds known to have been deposited elsewhere during the interval,
618 GEOLOGY OF THE LAI^E SUPERIOR REGION.
which iiiav or iiiav nut have covered the area in question. "Great unconformity" as the term
is onhnarily used means structural discordance, deep erosion, long time interval, and lack of
deposition of sediments known to be deposited elsewhere, or some coint)inati<jn of these
conditions. Of these criteria, the first three are the ones here emphasized. Tlie correlation
of the pre-Caml)rian between widely separated areas is still so uncertain in tiie lack of fossils
that the last criterion can not be satisfactorily used.
Wlierever the lower Huronian is distinctly recognized as such, there is an unconformity
at its base. The rocks on the two sides of the unconformity contrast ^\■idely. Those on one
side of it are dominantly igneous rock§, partly plutonic; tliose on the other side are doniinantly
sedimentary. During the time represented by tliis unconformity what seems, from present
evidence, to have been a great world period of volcanism ceased and the conditions became
such that normal sedimentary rocks were formed.
Contrast in the character of the rocks on the two sides of the unconformity is correlated
with other evidence of the greatness of the break. Before the lowest Huronian was deposited,
the Keewatin and in places the Laurentian rocks had taken on a schist osity. The plutonic
rocks of Archean time had been brought to the surface by erosion. The basal conglomerate
beds of the lower Huronian rest upon the Keewatin schists at various angles. It is not easy to
conceive of a physical break more indicative of lapse of time than that, for instance, which is
shown w-ith diagrammatical sharpness at the east end of the Gogebic district between the lower
Huronian Sunday quailzite and the Keewatin scliists. Of course where the folding has been
close and the shearuig between the Huronian and the Archean very great, the evidence of
unconformity may have been paitly obliterated and the two series appear to grade into each
other — for instance, at certain places near Teal Lake, but even here the unconformity may be
recognized.
On the north shore of Lake Superior the unconformity at the base of the Huronian is not
conspicuous but is as certainly existent as that south of I^ake Superior. In the 'S'ermilion district
the Huronian series is a definite succession beginning \\ith conglomerates and passing up mto
slates. The discrunination between the basal complex and the Huronian is an easy one. The
break usually has the aspect of one of the first magnitude. In some YermiUon localities, espe-
cially where only the conglomeratic and arkosic faciesof the Huronian are found, and these are
largely composed of the immediately underlying rock, the break could not l)e asserted to be of
great magnitude. If the suggestion is correct that in lower Huronian tune the region north of
Lake Superior was in large measure a land rather than an oceanic area, tliis, combuied -with the
fact that basaltic tuffs and conglomerates occur in the Archean, is sufficient to explain the
confusion and the apparent insignificance at some places of the unconformity at the base of the
Huronian. It is entirely possible that mistakes have been made in the placmg of certam con-
glomerates in the Huronian. If it is admitted that there may be locaUties in which the relation
is confused, whereA'er the Huronian is represented by a great series of sediments, as m the
Vermifion district, tlie Michipicoten district, and the Cobalt tlistrict, there is no difliculty what-
ever in discriminating between the Archean and the Huronian as a whole and in proving that
a profound unconformity separates the two.
UNCONFORMITY BETWEEN THE LOWER AND MIDDLE HLTRONIAN.
E-vidence of the unconformity between the lower Huronian and the middle Huronian is
plain in the Marquette district, where the basal conglomeratic formation of the middle Huro-
nian cuts diagonally across all the formations of the lower Huronian and downi to the Archean.
This means that after the lower Huronian was deposited antl before middle Huronian time
the lower Huronian Was indurated and brouglit to the surface, and difi'erential erosion occurretl
sufficient to cut througli the entire division into tlie Archean. The disconlance of strike jmd
dip between the two divisions at any one locality is shght.
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 619
In the Ciystal Falls district the mitldle Iluronian is composed mainly of volcanic rocks.
So far as its structure can be worked out it is nearly accordant with tlie lower Huronian, but
in the nature of the case conformity or unconformity is difficult to prove. In tlie Menominee
district the middle Iluronian cjuartzite rests on the Kaudville dolomite of the lower Huronian
with sUght though distinct structural discordance. Conglomerate is found at one locality in
this cUstrict.
UNCONFORMITY AT THE BASE OF THE UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE
GROUP).
The unconformity at the base of the upper Iluronian is easily recognized as extending over
the Lake Superior region. The upper Huronian rests at different locahties on each of the
more ancient tUvisit)ns of middle Iluronian, lower Huronian, and Archean, tnnicating and
derivmg detritus from whichever of these divisions it overlies. Tiie erosion precedmg upper
Huronian time apparently reduced the larger part of the Lake Superior region to a peneplain.
The best illustration of this is furnished by the Penokee-Gogebic, Mesabi, and Animikie dis-
tricts, m each of which the c^uartzite at the bottom of the upper Iluronian does not vary more
than 200 feet m tliickness for a distance of more than 80 miles and is in contact here with the
Keewatm, there with the Laurentian, and in still other places with the lower Huronian. This
shows that the maxinuim elevations of these heterogeneous rocks at the time of the encroach-
ment of the upper Huronian sea did not exceed a few hundred feet. Even after the deformation
wliich the deposition plane has undergone, it is still to be recognized in the Mesabi and Gogebic
districts as a remarkabh' even surface.
In the Crystal Falls district the relations of the upper Huronian (Animilde group) to the
underlying rocks are obscured by the fact that the immediately underlying rocks are those of
the volcanic Hendock formation, and lack of exposures makes it extremely difficult to ascertain
the relations, but there is some evidence of unconformity. (See p. 300.) The unconformity
between the upper Iluronian and underlymg rocks in the Menominee district is marked bj-
discordance of structui-e, basal conglomerates, and overlap.
On the south shore of Lake Superior the discordance m strike and dip between the upper
Huronian and the middle and lower Iluronian is not strong, but nevertheless is distmct. On
the north shore of Lake Superior before upper Iluronian time the earlier Huronian had been
closely folded and a nearly vertical schistosity developed, so that at many places the upper
Iluronian (Animikie group) rests upon the edges of the metamorphosed Huronian below.
UNCONFORMITY AT THE BASE OF THE KEWEENAWAN.
The upper Huronian and Keweenawan have an approximately similar strike and dip,
and it was oidy slowh' recognized tJiat the two series are discordant. The best evidence of
tliis, so far as contacts are concerned, is found on tha north shore of I^ake Superior, in the
Thunder Bay and Nipigon districts, where the basal Keweenawan contains abundant detritus
derived from the upper Iluronian (Animikie group) and rests upon its eroded edges, showing
that the older series was deposited, indurated, and eroded after having been formed before
Keweenawan time. However, the depth of erosion between the two is best shown on the
south shore of Lake Superior, where, in the Penokee-Gogebic district, the differential erosion
of the upper Huronian apparently amounts to several thousand feet witliin a few miles.
UNCONFORMITY AT THE BASE OF THE CAMBRIAN.
All the pre-Cambrian formations are in a more or less tilted position, the dip varymg from
a few degrees in the newest parts of the Keweenawan to veiticality m jxirts of the Huro-
nian and Archean. The Cambrian, on the otlier hand, is horizontal or nearly so. More-
over, the Cambrian is nowhere cut by igneous rocks. These relations give evidence that the
.orogenic movements and igneous intrusions so characteristic of the pre-Cambriau had ceased,
620 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
and tliat tlie coiHlitions liail iurivcd wliich marked the n;reat Cambrian transgression. Tlie
Cambrian rests upon a roniari<ably iinifonn ])ro-Canibrian ])ene])lain, wliich is known to extend
far to the north and soutii of the Lake Superior region. Ths uncoiiforniity at tlie base of the
Cambrian is evidently one of the great breaks in the geologic coiunin.
A possible exception to the above general statements may exist in the relations of the
Cambrian and upper sandstone beds of the Keweenawan. From the bottom to the top of
tiie Keweenawan there is progressively less tilting. The structural discordance between the
Canibiian and the middle and lower Keweenawan is therefore much more cons|)icuous than
that between the Cambrian and ui)i)er Keweenawan, wliicii are perhaps conformable. The
significance of this local conformity is discussed on pages 415—116.
DEFORIVIATION AND META.MORPHISM.
GENERAL CONDITIONS.
From the preceding section on unconformities it is evident that during or after the forma-
tion of each of the pre-Cambrian series, or both, there was a time of orogenic movement which
produced folding, faulting, and metamorphism. Of the several periods of deformation, three
stand out conspicuously — that at the close of the Archean throughout the region, that at the
close of the lower-middle Huronian, mainly on the north shore, and that at the close of the
Keweenawan on the south shore. As a result of these successive deformations the Lake
Superior region is essentially an asymmetric s3Ticlinorium with nearly east-west axis.
The amount of deformation in each series is partly a function of the age of the series, as
after its formation each series was subjected to all the movements wliich followed. One would
expect the complexity of structure to be the greatest in the Archean and least in the Keweena-
wan, and such are tlie facts. But it does not follow that each series has a characteristic degree
of deformation and metamoiphism corresponding to its position in the geologic column. The
difference in deformation of different parts of the Huronian series may be nearly as great as the
difference between the deformation of the Archean and that of the Keweenawan.
The Lake Superior region exhibits every varietj' of folding, from the most intricate plica-
tion of the Archean and lower Huronian to the broadest open folding of the upper Keweenawan.
The major structure of the region is unrjuestionably controlled by folding rather than by fracture
deformation, but the latter is not unimportant. Every district which has been considered in
detail shows faults of greater or less magnitude and exhibits innumerable joint fractures. For
the most part these faults are comparatively small and do not greatly modifj' the general dis-
tribution of tlie formations, although many produce considerable displacements which are impor-
tant in the detailed geology of the districts. Exceptions to the above statement are to be made
in reference to the great faults of the Keweenawan, of which one runs tlirough the center of
Keweenaw Point and another extends along the northern part of northern Wisconsin and is
believed to be continuous between Isle Royal and the mainland of Minnesota. These faults
result in the repetition of the Keweenawan rocks and give them a wider present distribution.
The competent strata controlling the deformation of the pre-Cambrian rocks of this region,
whether by foldmg or bj' faulting, have been the quartzites and the plutonic rocks, especially
the granites. These rocks show on the whole more simple folding and faulting than the softer
beds associated with them. The slate formations especially have accommodated themselves
to tliis control by close folding and development of cleavage. For instance, in the ilarquette
district the Archean and the overlying quartzites are folded into a broad composite .syncline
with considerable faulting. The 'intervening and overlying slates, on the other hand, ap])car
in close folds, characteristic of mcompetent strata. Their deformation has been obviouslj-
controUed by the readjustments between them and the quartzites. It may be assumed that,
so far as the competent quartzite is concerned, the develo|)ment of the ^larciuette syncline
has required movement of the upper beds upward and outward from the syncline as compared
with the lower beds, as indicated by arrows in figure 35 (p. 253). The major readjustment has
resulted in the overthrust or drag folds in the slate. This is the essential explanation of the
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 621
abnormal fan-shaped folding of the Marquette district- Simihir drag folds in the soft laj^ers
between the competent strata may be found in almost any part of the Lake Superior region
where competent and incompetent layers have been folded together.
In coimection with the folding, faulting, and intrusions there have developed slaty, schistose,
and part of the gneissose structures. All these structures are common in the Archean and are
widespread in the lower and middle Iluronian. In the upper Huronian slatiness occurs rather
extensively and schistosity is common where the rocks have been intruded by granite, as in
northern ^Minnesota and Florence County, Wis. The Keweenawan does not exhibit any of these
secondary structures.
Thesii structures are all characteristic of the zone of flowage, in wliicli the alterations are
anamorphic. During their formation all the phenomena of granidation and crystallization of
the iuthvidual mineral constituents are exhibited in very diverse rocks and m widely varj'mg
degrees, from moderate changes to complete recrystallization. Where the I'ocks have been
imder deep-seated conditions and these secondary structures are not found the changes may be
moderate, but on the other hand they may be extreme.
In connection with the faults, joints, and other fractures all the alterations of the zone of
katamorphism have taken place. These are perhaps best illustrated in the Keweenawan
series.
In general in the zone of observation more or less extensive katamorphic changes are super-
imposed upon the anamorphic changes above mentioned, for the once deep-seated rocks, now
near the surface, have long been in the zone of fracture, where the changes are katamorpliic.
It thus appears that various combinations of the alterations of the zones of anamorpliism and
katamorpliism are exhibited b\' the same rocks.
PRINCIPAL ELEMENTS OF STRUCTURE.
The major axes of the orogenic movements in this region have been in general parallel to
Lake Superior, producing a synclinoriimi. But the eastern and western parts of Lake Superior
show a difference in trend, the dividing north-south line bemg at about 88° longitude, wliich
cuts Keweenaw Point a few miles west of its end. West of tliis line the trend of the axis of the
lake is about .30° north of east. East of it the trend of the axis is south of east. To these
trends the strike of the rocks corresponds almost exactly for the west half of Lake Superior and
approximately for the east half. The average strike for the region is nearly east and west.
This prevailing structure is represented in the Lake Superior trough itself, m tlie IMesabi and
Aniniikie monocline, in the repeated fokls of the Cuyuna, Iron River, Crystal Falls, and Florence
districts, in the Gogebic monocline, and in the Marquette, Menominee, Felch Mountain, Calumet,
and Sturgeon s\aiclinoria.
The strikes of the Lake Superior rocks are in accord with those in the greater part of the
pre-Cambrian sliield to the northwest, north, and northeast, even as far north as the Hudson
Bay region.
Locally the strikes varj' greatly from the genei'al (hrections mdicated, and they may be
even north and south, as is conspicuously illustrated in the Republic trough and the Archean
oval of the Fence River area in the Crystal Falls district. The local variations in strike and dip
are partly explained b^' original configuration of the basement rocks. They are more largely
explained by the cross folding of the region. The axis of one great cross fold runs north and
south through Keweenaw Pomt and the eastern part of the Crystal Falls district. Another
crosses the Marquette district in a north-south direction ui the vicinit}' of Ishpeming. Others
cross the Mesabi district from northeast to southwest.
The intrusive rocks are also important factors in producing the variations of the strike of
the folds from the major Lake Superior structure. Very commonly the strikes of the strata
a})out massive laccoliths, bosses, or batholiths are much influenced by the igneous rocks, there
being a marked tendency for the strikes to be peripheral or tangential to the intrusives. This
relation is illustrated in all the districts m wliich the mtrusive rocks occur m large masses, but
is best exemplified in the region northwest of Lake Superior. Here the intrusive masses are
622 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SLTERIOR REGION.
so large as to be the most important factor iir the control of the local strikes and dips, although
even here there is an unquestioned tendency for the general east-west strike of the region to
mamtain itself.
The cross sections A-A. and B-B on the general map (PI. I, in pocket) give the best conception
of the dips of the formations. It will be noted that the Archean, lower ITuronian, and middle
Huronian beds have steep dips in northerl}- or southerly directions, that tlie upper Iluronian
beds are as a whole less steeply inclined and have in part a definite relation to the synclinal
structure of the T^ake Superior region, and that the Keweenawan beds are still less steeply
inclined and arc entirely in accord with the synclinal structure of the basin. All tliis ileforma-
tion was complete before Cambrian time except tiie faulting. There is no evidence that the
faulting was not much later than the Cambrian — possibly post-Cretaceous.
THE LAKE SUPERIOR BASIN.
The structure of the Lake Superior basui is well shown by the cross sections on the general
map (PI. I, m pocket). The basin is essentially an east-west asymmetric synclmorium with
steeper dips on the south than on the north side, shown principally in the Keweenawan and
upper Huronian rocks bordering the lake.
The upper Huronian of the Penokee district dips north, toward Lake Superior, at a steep
angle, varying considerably but for the most part between 55° and 80°. The upper Huronian
of the north shore in the ]\Iesabi and the Animikie districts dips .south, toward Lake Supeiior,
at comparatively flat angles, ranging from substantial horizontaUty up to 45°, the more common
dips bemg between 8° and 20°.
The folding of the Keweenawan has a ver}" close relation to the I^ake Superior trough. On
the south shore of Lake Superior the Keeweenawan rocks dip northwest, toward the lake, at
angles var\Tng from as high as 80° in the lower part of the series to extremely flat angles in the
upper part of the series. On the north shore of Lake Superior and on Isle Royal they dip at
moderate angles to the southeast, toward Lake Superior. Thus the Keweenawan at Keweenaw
Point and its extension to the southwest and the Keweenawan of the north shore constitute
a clearly marked synclinal trough which extends inland in ^Michigan, Wisconsin, and Minnesota.
The axis of this syncline lies about halfwa}' between Isle Royal and Keweenaw Point. It does
not ran to the head of the lake, but to the head of Chequamegon Bay and thence far inland to
the southwest. Here it carries minor folds.
To the southeast of the synclinorium in ]\Iicliigan there is one great fault, and probably two.
To the northwest of it in Wisconsin there is another great fault, and this fault, or another, is
supposed to continue between Isle Royal and Thunder Bay. The Keweenawan rocks nearest
the axis of the sjmcline are on the upthrow sides, and the "eastern" and "western" sandstones
southeast and northwest of the synclinorium, respectively, are on the downthrow sides of the
faults. Consequently the Keweenawan of northern Wisconsin and Isle Royal is probably
repeated, at least in part, on the Minnesota coast, and below the rocks thus repeated the Miiuie-
sota Keweenawan extends down to the base of the series. Similarl}- a part of the Keweenawan
rocks of Keweenaw Point are probably repeated in the "South Range."
At Michipicoten the dips are to the south. On the east shore of Lake Superior the Kewee-
nawan dips westward toward the lake. Some thrusting and buckling have accompanied the
faulting along the north side of the synclmorial axis in Wisconsin.
Wherever there is a thick succession of Keweenawan rocks the dips are steeper at the base and
grow flatter at the top. This is best illustrated by Keweenaw Point, Isle Royal, and Michipi-
coten. Elsewhere the changes of dip are not .so great. This general lessening of the dip of the
Kew-ecnawan in passing from lower to higher horizons is regarded as evidence that the folding
of the series which caused the Lake Superior basin took place largely during Keweenawan
time.
The development of the Lake Superior basin in Keweenawan lime has tended to give paral-
lelism of strike to all the rocks of the region but is not regarded as sufficient to explain the
remarkable parallelism actually observed in older rocks. The trend of the axial lines of the
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 623
Lake Superior s\nicline is in accord with that of tlie folds tliroiip;li a hirge part of the pre-
Cambrian shiekl of Canada. It is cK)ul)tful if the Keweenawan fohUng ever affected a hirge
part of tliis sliield. Much of the folding is unquestionably earlier. Therefore it is reasonable to
assume that the dominant trend in the Lake Superior folds, as well as in the pre-Cambrian of
Canada, was pi'obal)!}' establisiied before Keweenawan time.
Bordering the main Lake Superior basin are minor synclinal folds of the Marquette, Felch
Mountain, Calumet, Menominee, and Mesabi-Cuyuna districts, with axes nearly parallel to the
longer axis of the I^ake Superior basin. These districts present evidence that they were folded
to their present attitude in considerable part at the same time as the main Lake Superior basin;
that is, in Keweenawan time. Another fact seems to relate them even more closely to the Lake
Superior basin of Keweenawan age. The minor synclinoria are asymmetric and tend to have
their steeper sides toward the lake. This may be observed in the Marquette, Felch Mountam,
and Calumet districts, principally in the upper Huronian rocks. The upper Huronian of the
nortli shore has a gentle soutiiward dip along the Alesabi, Gunflint, antl Animikie ranges, wiiich
changes to steeper dips near the axis of the basin in tlie Cu3'una district. The Vermilion district
shows evidence of a similar structure in the Keewatin schists. The normal development of a
great syncline of the Lake Superior type would ])e accompanied by a differential slipping between
the competent layers, whereby the upper .layers would move up and away from the syncline as
compared with the lower layers, just as has been already described for the Marcjuette district.
So far as there is failure of the beds taking part in tliis movement, it is likely to lie influenced by
this differential movement and to result in minor folds with steeper sides toward the axis. It is
believed that the accordance of structure of the districts mentioned with the requirements of
this general principle is more likel}^ to be a natural and necessary secjuence than a coincidence.
It may be noted that the displacement of the beds in this type of fokling has nearly the same
direction as the displacement along the main fault lines already mentioned.
The departures from this control of minor folds by the Keweenawan fold of the Lake Supe-
rior basin are due to original configuration of basement, to plutonic intrusive rocks, or to cross
folding.
The asymmetric character of the Lake Superior basin itself may have interesting significance
as to the general orogen}- of the region. If, as suggested in the following pages, the Lake Superior
basin has been essentially the locus of a shore zone against the continental area to the north, then
the gentle southward slope of the north limb of the Lake Superior syncline is awav from the old
shore line and the steeper dip of the south limb of the S3aicline faces the shore, as if there had been
a thrust from the south toward the continental area to the north.
The extrusions of the volcanic rocks along the borders of the lake on an extensive scale of
themselves gave opportunity for subsidence elsewhere. It may be that the depression of the
center of the Lake Superior basin was a correlative of the outflows of lava along the border, the
two together and tlie inciting or attendant epeirogenic and orogenic movements lowering the
center of gravity of the Lake Superior masses. This movement of subsidence for tlie basin would
be assisted by tiie deposition of lava beds and of setliments within the basin, although these are
regarded as accessory rather than as prime factors in the development of the basin.
RESUJiIE OF HISTORY.
TJiis monograph may close with a brief resume of the great events of the pre-Cambrian
period in the Lake Superior region. Early in the history of the earth, when the Lake Superior
region was at least in part below the sea, there were great outbreaks of volcanic rocks, which
continued for an indefinite time and as a result of which the Keewatin was mainly built up.
Subordinate masses of sediment — conglomerate, slate, and iron-bearing rocks — were laid down,
especially late in Archean time. The beginning of the Keewatin period we can not even dimly
see, for we do not recognize the basement on which the Keewatin rests. Later, or contempo-
raneously at least with the later stages of the vast regional extrusions, which, as has been
explainedj were of a magnitude never subsequently approached, was the intrusion of enormous
ma.sses of aciilic rocks, including great batholiths, bosses, stocks, and dikes. These rocks consti-
624 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
tute the Laurentian series. For some unknown reason the extrusive rocks of the Keewatin were
dominaiilly of the basic and intermediate tyjics, and the Laurentian intrusive rocks dominantly
of the acidic type, althougii all tliese types occur both as oxtrusives and intrusives.
In Archean time the Keewatin rocks were greatly deformed and extensively metamorphosed,
largely imder the influence of the Laurentian intrusions. It is extremely probable that during
Archean time at many places the land was raised above the sea l)y the upbuilding of the lavas,
the intrusion of the batholiths, and the folding. But the Keewatin rocks now observable are
largely submarine, and contemporaneous sediments knowTi to result from erosion are rare or
lacking.
Finally there came a time when a general epeirogenic movement, perhaps in connection
with the orogenic movements and intrusions, raised the entire Lake Superior region above the
sea. This gave the conditions for deep denudation which removed a great but unknown thick-
ness of the Archean rocks, exposing the schistose Keewatin rocks and the coarse, massive tex-
tures of the Laurentian batholiths.
The lower Iluronian sea then advanced over the region fi-om the south, extending at least
as far north as the present south shore of Lake Superior. Lender the water of the advancing
sea the lower Huronian sediments were laid down. These are of a normal subaf[ucous U~pe,
consisting, first, of a psepliite, followed by a ])sammite, next a pelite, in places carlionaceous, and
finally a limestone. The character of these sediments proves beyond question that at the
time of their deposition the conditions had become similar to those whicli prevail to-day, both
as to the agents concerned in erosion and as to those concerned in deposition.
Tlie de])ositi()n of the lower Huronian was followed by an uplift and recession of the sea.
The area of the southern Huronian subprovince and ])erhaps also that of the northern subprov-
ince were gently folded. Erosion locally cut through the lower Huronian of the Marquette
district, but in most of the southern subprovince it has not gone through the Randville dolo-
mite. The next period of deposition was that of the middle Iluronian, evidence of which is
found only in the southern Huronian subprovince. The middle Huronian here consisted of
subaqueous sediments — psephites, psammites peUtes, and a nonclastic iron-bearing formation —
indicating that the sea had again advanced.
It is believed that durmg lower and middle Huronian time the sea did not advance over
the area north of the present Lake Superior, that this was a land area, and that the great rivers
flowed to the south into the Iluronian sea. On this northern liighland were deposited an exten-
sive and peculiar slate conglomerate and httle-assorted graywackes, slates, and conglomerate,
which in their general characteristics and associations are taken to be subaerial and delta
deposits.
After middle Huronian time the northern and southern Huronian suljprovinces were raised
above the sea, folded, and eroded. The northern subprovince was much more affected at this
time than the southern subprovince. The advance of the upper Huronian sea from the south
across the area brought about the deposition of upper Iluronian sediments upon a remarkably
plane surface, with elevated areas that were perhaps not covered in several places in northern
Wisconsin and south of the Manjuette district of Michigan. To what extent this surface was one
of previous base-leveling by subaerial erosion and to what extent by marine planat ion is not
known. The fresh surface of contact, the manner in which the plane truncates hard and soft
rocks, tlie lack of residual soils or sediments, and the thimicss, evenness, and wide area of the
fragmental base of the upper Iluronian seem to favor the view that the surface may have been
finally cleared by marine scouring, whatever the extent of earlier erosion. In the southern
Huronian subprovince the rocks had not been ]ireviously folded as mucii as in the northern
subprovince, in consequence of which erosion and ])lanation accom])lisheil less conspicuous, or
less easily identified results, though erosion seems to have removed nearly all of the middle
Huronian in the Menominee district. The upper Huronian was thus laid down, ^vith conspic-
uous unconformity in the nortliern part of the I'cgion, because of the folding of earlier rocks,
and with far less discordance in the southeiii ])art of the southern Iluronian subprovince, where
the earlier rocks hat! not been so much folded.
GENERAL GEOLOGY. 625
The shore deposits of the advancing upper Huronian sea were thin psephites, which were
followed by psammites or ])elites, and these very extensively by an iron-bearing formation,
locali}^ alternating with pelites. This is the formation containing the great deposits of Lake
Superior ores, in the Mesabi, Penokee, Menominee, Cuyuna, and other districts. The depo-
sition of the iron-bearing rocks to a tliickness of nearly a thousand feet, with so little frag-
mental sediment, is not duplicated elsewhere in the geologic record and seems to require some
unusual condition. The explanation is believed to lie in the great basic extrusions both pre-
ceding and accompanying the upper Huronian deposition, furnisliing an unusual source of mate-
rials for the iron-bearing formation. (See pp. 51.3 et seq.)
The alternations of iron-bearing formation and ]ielite were followed by a very tliick pehte,
the greatest of the Huronian formations. The contUtions allowing this unusual accumulation
of mud may have been those of delta deposition. The sea seems not to have advanced much
farther north than the Lake Superior region, and it is conjectured that when the advance stopped,
the rivers were able to make headway against the sea and build u]) great delta and mud deposits
over the jireviousl}' deposited iron-formation sediments. The character of these deposits is
perhaps related to volcanism. The existence of abundant discontinuous pyritiferous and
gi'apliitic lenses in the slate, associated with lenses of iron carbonate, seems to be evidence of
lagoon conditions accompanying delta deposition. As in most deltas, a considerable part of the
deposits may be regarded as terrestrial.
At the close of upper Huronian time the land was raised or built above the surface by
delta dejDosition and the upper Huronian beds were very gently folded and deepl^^ eroded, the
differential erosion amounting apparently to thousands of feet. Then followed the events of
Keweenawan time, which were first those of terrestrial de])osition, associated with enormous
extrusions of igneous rock, merging later into conditions of subaqueous deposition in the Lake
Superior syncline.
During the time tlie Keweenawan series was being built up the Lake Superior basin was
formed, resulting in marked diminution of dip in passing from lower , to upper Keweenawan.
The folding of the lower Keweenawan and middle Keweenawan rocks which produced this
basin deformed also tlie adjacent rocks, especially the upper Huronian of the west half of the
basin, so that they share in the synclinorial structure. The antecedent movements were
probably along axes parallel to that of the Lake Superior syncline, but the present marked
parallelism of axes of folds in all of the jire-Cambrian is probably due largely to Keweenawan
folding.
At the end of the Keweenawan period the land was raised for the fourth time above the sea
and the long-continued denudation preceding the Cambrian period took place, developing a
peneplain that is even yet largely preserved. The Cambrian transgression began far to the south
and finally overrode the entire Lake Superior region. The floor for the Cambrian deposition
was composed of tilted rocks with the exception of the upper Keweenawan sandstone. The
structural and lithologic accordance of the Cambrian with tlie upper Keweenawan beds raises
the question whether the deposition of the upper Keweenawan sediments in the Lake Superior
basin did not continue until the Cambrian sea readied them and gradually merged into Cam-
brian deposition. The Cambrian was succeeded by the later Paleozoic deposits.
After Paleozoic time the region was again raised above the sea and eroded. Since then
there have been many episodes of uplift, subsidence, and warping. At one time the Cretaceous
sea covered the western part of the region. Erosion has removed all but small patches of the
Cambrian from the uplands, and reexhumed and modified the pre-Cambrian topography.
Faults developed in ])Ost-Cambrian and perhaps in post-Cretaceous time.
It thus appears that in the Lake Suj)erior region, from the earliest time to the Cambrian,
there were five great periods of rock formation separated and followed l>y jjeriods of epeirogenic
movement, orogenic movement, and erosion, each of these intervals being markctl by an
unconformity. The first of these unconformities, tliat at the top of the Archean, is the most
conspicuous, represents a strong lithologic contrast, and lias been by all geologists taken as an
47517°— vol52— 11 40
626 GEOLOGY OF THE LAKE SUPERIOR REGION.
essential datum plane in mapping and working out the geologic history. The unconformities
separating the divisions of the Iluronian and the Iluronian from the Keweenawan are of differ-
ing value, but all represent important structural and time breaks. The unconformity at the
base of the Cambrian is one of the first magnitude and is coextensive with the great uncon-
formity at this horizon outside of the Lake Superior region.
Of the five periods of deformation, three stand out consi)icuously — that at the close of the
Archean tliroughout the region, that at the close of the lower-middle Huronian principally on the
north shore, and that at the close of the Keweenawan priiicipally along the axis of the Lake
Superior basin and on the south shore. These areas of folding had been shore zones of heavy
Huronian and Keweenawan deposition. As is common, the shore zone was a place of recurrent
upheaval and subsidence, marked orogenic movement, igneous activity, and sedimentation.
To these many causes combinetl is due the complexity of the geolog}' of the region.
These shore conditions may bear some relation to the tact that part of the Lake Superior
region south of the international boundary is one of the great iron-producing areas of the world.
It has been a source of surprise to many that the adjacent Canadian region, in which the geology
seems to be in a general way similar, has not been found to bear iron ore in anytlung hke the
abundance of the States to the south. But by far the larger ]>art of the iron-ore deposits in the
States occur in the middle Huronian and dominantly in the upper Huronian formations. The
middle Huronian is known in a general belt fringing the main pre-Cambrian area of Canada along
the north shore of Lake Superior and extending northeastward tlirough Lake Tiniiskaming.
It may exist also farther north in the interior of the Canadian pre-Cambrian, but, to judge prin-
cipally from the facts observed on the north shore of I^ake Superior, the interior jjre-Cambrian
region of Canada was probably above the sea during middle and upper Huronian and Kewee-
nawan time and only continental deposits were formed in it. The up])er Iluronian, the {)rin-
cipal iron producer, is but scantily represented along the soiithem margin of the Canadian pre-
Cambrian. The only iron-bearing formation which has an extensive occurrence in the great
pre-Cambrian shield of Canada is tliat of the Keewatin series. The Keewatin iron-bearing
formation has not been largely productive. If the apparent scarcity of middle and upper
Huronian rocl<s over this area is a real one, which is not yet finally proved, it can not be
expected that in the central highlands of Canada will be found iron-bearing formations that are
to be paralleled with those of the middle and upper Huronian south of T.,ake Superior.
But it may be that in Huronian time the central highland area had a shore zone to the north
as well as to the south. The occurrence of probable late Algonkian sediments on the east coast
of Hudson Bay and In the Copper Mine region, on the west side of the liay, give color to this sug-
gestion. The Hudson Bay region seems, from available facts, to be another geosyncline of
sedimentation and folding corresponding somewhat to that of the Lake Superior and Lake
Huron regions. An iron-bearing formation, remarkably similar to the Animikie, is here known."
If this hypothesis proves to be true, this northern region warrants careful exploration for min-
eral wealth.
Attention has been called on pages 591-592 to the possible genetic association of the Lake
Superior copper ores with the Georgian Bay copper ores, Silver Islet silver ores, Sudbury nickel
ores, and Cobalt silver-cobalt ores. This suggests an hypothesis as a reasonable basis for
further geologic work. Huronian and Keweenawan rocks seem to be more abundantlv present
in the Lake Superior, Georgian Bay, and Tiniiskaming areas than farther to the north. They
have been folded along })arallel axes in all of these districts. Volcanism has been an impor-
tant accompaniment of this deformation. Earlier volcanism has been associated with the
(lejiosition of unique iron-bearing formations owing their wide distribution to the agency of
sedimentation intervening between their contribution by igneous masses and their final deposi-
tion. Later volcanism developed copper, nickel, cobalt, and silver ores, showing some evidence
of genetic relationship. The Lake Superior region, then, may be regarded broadly as a ]iart of a
great metallographic province containing a variety of ores associated with volcanism, which mav
be related with folding along an old shore zone.
a Leith, C. K., An Algonkian basin in Hudson Hay— a comparison with the Lalte Superior basin: Econ. Geology, vol. 5, 1910. pp. 227-246.
INDEX.
A. Page.
Abbott, C. E., mine sections by 138
Acl;nowledgment5 to those aiding 30, 427, 573
Adams, Cuyler, discovery by 44
Adams, F. S., on geology of Cnyuna range 219
Agassiz, Lalie. description of 442. 443
Agawa formation, correlation of l35, 598
distribution and character of 132, 603
topography of 94
Agawa Lake, geology near 132
Ajiijik Hills, geology at 259
Ajibik quartzite, correlation of 598, 007, 608
deposition of 501
distribution and character of 252. 259-201, 287, 2S8, 289, 007
relations of 200-261, 204
structure of 259
topography of 105
Alden, W. C, on glaciation 439
Algonkian rocks, correlat innof 598-599, 602-015
distribution and character of 85, 123-137.
146-1.50, 169, 161-178. 198-208. 212-215, 226-235, 251-252,
256-269. 283-323, 339-345, 366-357, 360-361, 598, 002-015
igneous rocks in 344-345
iron horizons in 460, 508
Algonquin. Lake, description of 440-447
map of ■- 447
Allen, R. C, on Iron River district 308-320
on Spring Valley ores 505-506
on Woman River district 555
Alloa, geologj' at 360
Allouez conglomerate, copper in 575, 577, 578
production from 37
Alteration. 5fc Secondary concentration: Weathering, etc.
Amasa, geology near 293. 298, 299. 323. 607
u-on near 324
Amicon River, geology on 379
Amphibole-magnetite rocks, banding of 551-552
formation of 558
sulphur in 552
surface alteration of 553-554
Amygdaloid deposits, character of 670-577
copper in 574, 576-677
distribution and character of .578-579
plate showing 472
production from 37
.\mygdules, filling of 512
Anderson, T., on ellipsoidal structure 511
Angeline Lake, geology at 271
Animikie district, correlation of 598
description of 208-209
extension of 209
geology of 205-208,611
iron ores of 206-207. 209-210
analyses of 210
concentration of 210
map of 200
physiography of 208-209
reserves of 492
structure of 208
Animikie group, correlation of 213-214, 598, 608-614
deposition of 176-177, 278, 610, 612-614
distribution and character of 130,149,
159,163-177. 198-201. 204-209, 212-214. 225. 229-234, 251-2,52,
265-268, 283-290. 298-299. 306-307. 309. 311-323. 410, 608-liI4
intrusions in 197, 208, 215. 290, 318, 370, 372-375. 426
iron in 42,46,206-207,460-461,507,515,610
naming of 42
Page.
Animikie group, relations of.. . . 170, 203-203, 234,318, 370-371, 414,513,019
silver in 46, 593-595
origin of 595
structure of , 175-176
unconformity at base of 619
See also Iluronian..
Antoine Lake, geology near 333, 336
Apostle Islands, geology of 3711, 449
Aqueous sediments, character of 501-502
Aragon mine, geology near 339
sections of, figure showing 347, 348
Aragon region, cross sections in, plate showing 346
Archean system, correlation of 599-602
deposition of 623-624
distribution and character of 85, 118-
129, 144-154. 100-101 , 198. 205, 225-227. 252-253. 283. 287-288, 291-
293, 300-302, 30(i, .309-310, 329, 331. 356, 357, 300, 597, 699, 601-002
igneous rocks of 601, 617
iron of 460
relations of 230, 617-618
structure of 161
unconformity at top of 617-618
view showing rocks of 112
.\rchean time, volcanism in 617
-Vrpin quartzite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 366. 357
topography on 108
Ashland , geology near 376, 379, 415, 421 , 452
Ashland mine, section of, figure showing 237
Atikokan district, geology of 149.599
iron ore of 149, <00, 561, 569
.\tikokan mine, history of 46
Atikokan River, iron on 149
Atikokan series, distribution and character of 148
Atkinson, geology near 313, 317
section near, figure showing 318
Atlantic mine, geology at 238, 576
history of 36
iron ore of, analysis of 238
Aurora, geology near 178, 236
Austin mine, geology at 285
B.
Bad River, geology near 228, 232, 378, 413
Bad River limestone, correlation of 598, 605
distribution and character of 225, 228, 605
relations of 228, 230
Bad Vermilion Lake, geology at 146
Balsam, geology near 299
Baltic amygdaloid, description of 37.576,577
Banding, cause of 551-552
Baraboo district, correlation of 598
description of 359
geology of 360-362
iron ores of 362-364, 570-571
analyses of 362, 363, 491
production of 461
reserves'of 492
secondary concentration of 363-304
manganese in 488
map of 359
mining in, history of 45
section of, figure showing 360
Baraboo quartzite. correlation of 357.598
distribution and character of ? 360-361.354
Bare Hill, geology at 382,385,410
627
628
INDEX.
rage.
Barrel], Joseph, on deposition IJI3
Basalt, decomposition of 50;i,514
Basement Complex, definition of 2'A
Basswood Lake, geology near 119,121, 128-129
graniteof. 12S-129
relations of -. 129
topography of ; 128
Batchewanung Hay , geology at 42.'i
Banldry Lake, geology near 1.13
Bayley, W. S., on Keweenawan series 398, 400-401, 410
on Menominee district 90,100-107
Bayley, W. S., and Van Hise, C. R., on Maniuettedistrict. . ., 96, 105-100
Bayley, W. S., Clements, J. M., and Smyth, H, L., on Crystal
Falls district 96-97, 107
Beaches, old, elevation of 451-452
formation of 449-451
Beaver Hay. geology at 373-374
laccolith at 373
Beck, Richard, on limonite 521
Becker, ll. F., on iron ores 509
Bell, J. M., on region northeast of Lake Superior 95, 155-1.56
Belted plain, origin of 109-110
Berkey, C. P.. on Cambrian series 616
on glaciation 4.37, 4.'i9
on Keweenawan series 377
Bessemer, geology near 234, 236, 243
Bessemer ore, definition of 478
exhaustion of 495
Bessie mine, geology at 279
Bibliography of region 73-84
Biddle, H. C, work of 589
Bigsby, J.J.. on glacial erratics 432
Bijiki schist, alteration of 279
correlation of 598. 608,fllft-Cll
distribution and character of 251, 266-267, 283, 285. 608
garnet in 260
iron ore in 266,270,272,275,278,283,280,460,603
relations of 265, 266-267. 208
topography of 106
Bingoshick Lake, geology on 202
Birch Lake, geology near .' 126, 162, 164, 177
Birch Lake area, mining in, history of 42
Bittern Lake, Iron near 207
Biwabik formation, circulation in, figure showing 180
correlation of 598, 010-<U1
distribution and character of 159. 164-171
folding in, plate showing 180
greenalite in 105-108
intrusions In 171-172
iron ore of 104-172, 400
plates showing 408, 548
paint rock in 171
phosphorus in ,* 194,195
relations of 174
section of, plate showing 180
Biwabik mine, geology near 160. 170
history of 43
Black Bay, geology at 367-370, 393-394, 422
section at 367
Black River, correlation near 598
geology near 359, 377, 379, 384-385, 411, 413, 423, 424, 425
section on 388
Black Sturgeon River, geology at 367
Bogs, iron in 502-503, 516, 569
Bohemia, geology near 385
Bohemia conglomerate, distribution and character of 381
Bone Lake, geology near 294
Bone Lake schist, topography on 107
Bowen, N. L,, on igneous rocks 410-^111
Bowen, C. F., and Corey, G. W., on Menominee district 345
Boyer Lake, geology at 153, 157-158
iron at 150
mud and rock at, analyses of 157.1.'iS
Braal'., iron ores of 495
Breccia, dist ribiit ion and character of 127
Brier 1 1 ill , geology at 339, 342
Brier slate member, correlation of ". 598. OH
distribution and character of 335-340
Page.
Broken Bluffs, geology at 259
Brooks, A. II., on Marquette district 96
Brooks Lake, geology near 153
Brotherton mine, geology at 236,238
Brown iron ores, mining of, lilstory of 45
occurrence and chanicter of 479, 564-506,569
Bruce mines, copper ores of 592
Brule River, geology near 310,313,317,319.321,322-323.017
Burchard, E. F., on production of manganiferotis iron ores 488
Burntside Lake, geology near 129
Burt, \V. A., discoveries of 38
Burt mine, iron ore from, analyses of 193
Burwash, E. N., on Michipicoten Island 390-391
By-products, recovery of 48
C.
Cacaquabic granite, distribution and character of 136
intrusions by 136
topography of 94
Cache Bay, geology at , 131
Cady deposit, iron ores of 565
iron ores of, analysis of 565
Calumet and Hecla conglomerate, distribution and character of. . 382, 575
copper in 577-578
Calumet and Hecla mine, production from 37
Calumet district, geology of 306-307, 609,611
iron ores of 327
analysis of 327
secondary concentration of 328
volumetric diagram of 353
copper ores in 574
correlation in 598, 609
location and area of ' 32, 306
map of ■ 306
section of, figure showing 574
stmcturein 623
Cambrian system, deposition of ■ 625
distribution and character of 225,235,251,269,283,285,291,
300. 302. 304, 306, 307,329-330, 332, 345-346,355, 356, 360, 015-616
iron ores at base of 352-353
relations of 384, 415-416, 615-616, 619-6-20
unconformity at 619-620
Canadian shore, geologic work on, history of 70
Cape Choy ye, geology at 391, 393
Carbonate ores, greenalite and, relations of 525
nature of 520-^521
occurrence and character of 479
origin of 502,503,507,514,516,519-520,571
secondary development of 552
Carbon dioxide, source of 527
Carlton district, geology of 213, 214, 215.375
Cariton Peak, geology of 92, 374
Carp River, fault at, map showing 252
geology at 253. 259
Caspian mine, geology at 316
Chamberlin, T. C, on glaciation 439
on Wisconsin topography 98, 100
Chamberlin, T. C, and Irving, R. D., on physiography 115
Champion, geology near 268
Champion location, discovery of 37
Chandler mine, iron ores of 480,553
section of, figure showing 138
Chapin , iron ores at 347, 348
Chequamcgon Bay, geology near 376, 413
Chert, definition of 462
distribut ion and character of 462, 529
Chert, ampliibolitic, photomicrographs of 548
Chert, ferruginous, composition of 528
leaching of S37-S39
photomicrographs of 524. 5.34.548
plates showing 466. 468. 470. 542. 564
Chester, A. U., on Giants Range ores 42
Chicago Lake, formation of 446
map of 446
Chicago mine, iron ore from, plate showing 468
Chicagon mine, geology at 315
Chippewa R i ver, deposition by 438
geology on 357
INDEX.
629
rn,- T- Page.
l^Bippewa- Keweenaw lobe of Labrador glacier, extent of. . . . 427, 428, 441
CSnrinnati mine, history of ' 43
ore from, photomicrograph of; 524
Clarksburg formation, correlation of 007, 609, 017
distribution and character of 251 , 2(5si 607^ 609
iron ores in ' cq-,
"''^t'^sof "-'^^'!'!'!;;;;;;;;;;;;'265,268
topography on. jgg
Clements. J. M., on Crystal Falls district -'.. '....^294^295,510
ouglaciation 431 435
on physiography !'! 91,' 92,93-94,98! 102
on Vermilion district.
„, 40-41
t lements, J. M., and Smyth, H. L., on Crystal Falls district. 39^0. 107
Clements, J. M., Smyth, H. L.. and Bayley, W. S., on Crystal
Falls district 9g_97 jq^
Cleveland mine, geology at " '271
historyof... ^
575
36
460
45
568,569
, on Michipicoten ranges.
end mine, description of
historyof,
Clinton iron ore, deposits of
distribution and character of. 567-568
historyof
origin of.
photomicrographs of "536
shipmentsof ..,_
_ 567
Chnton Point, geology near 376,379 4'>1
Cloquet district, geology of 213. 214,215 375
Cobalt district, geology of. ' ' 'g^j
^ °"'''"-; :!:;;!:::!:::::::::;:'592,626
Coke, use of ., ,„
^ ,, . . 4/-4S
Colby mme, geology at 03^
Cole, G. A. J,, and Gregory. J. W., on ehipsoidal structure 511
Coleman, A. P., on gold ores -nj
on lake basihs
on northwestern Ontario 1 jo.
Coleman, A. P., and Willmott, A. B
Coleraine, building of
Collins, W. H., on region north of Lake Superior
Commonwealth, geology near
Commonwealth district. See Florence district.
Competition in mining, effects of
Concentration, mechanical, process of 539-540
Concentration, secondary. See Secondary concentration; Weath.
ering.
Conglomerates, copper in
Copper ores, area of, extent of V-Za
area of, map showing ' c- .
association of, with igneous rocks 5gj
chapter oa
See also Keweenaw Point, copper ores of.
character 01 -„„
0/3
deposition of, chemistry of 589-590
"<'^'^°' ■..'.'-.'.'..'.... 582-586
, t™"^"' : 5S1-5S2
deposits of, types of jjp
depth and, relations of -„,
e.xtentof „.
0/5
grade of ^^^
mine waters from c-q
mineralogy of '"!-'"!!!;!;!;!!!;;"573^574,582
mining of, history of 3j_3g
occurrence of 3„,
modeof ' „,
origin of ! . 569
production of
431
-150, 603
95,160
44
95
. 321
41
577-57!
573-593
Cretaceous rocks, deposition of . ^fjs
detritaiorcsm '.y^'.'.'.'.'. ::.'::::.:.:::: i9^m
analysis of
distribution and character of '.'.■.■.■ 'i59,'l'78^i79,'2U,'21S, 616
"°°-°': ■. 178-179, 196-197, 460*503
phosphorus m jg '
Crj'stal Falls, geology near 295 323
Crystal Falls district, correlation in
exploration in .
.TOS, 606, 610-011,617
484
eO^^OSyot 291-300, 441, i;07-609, 619
map showing ,^,
iron ores of, alteration of
character of
546
323,325
composition of 324-32'
magnetic phases of ^g
plate showing .„
proportion of
relations of
reserves of
462
501 , 507, .i59
489
secondary concentration of 326 5.39
volumetric diagram of
location and area of ... ;
map of
580-592
575
relations of, to other ores 691-S9'>
wall rocks of, alteration of 582-585
Copper Lake, hon at jj„
Copper River, geologj- near 378-379
Cordierite homstone, distribution and cliaraoter of. ■. 173-174, 200
Corey, G. W., and Bowen. C. F., on Menominee district '345
Correlation, chart showing 59g
details of. See particular systems, etc.
principles of .„-
Courtis. W. M., on silver minerals
Coutchiching schists, correlation of
occurrence and character of •j.jg
599
593
598
147
Cox, G. H., on hj'dration of ores 556^557
Creosote, recovery of 48
353
- 32,291
mining in, history of 3„ '
physiography of !!!!!!!"!! 90^97 ,07
Cuba, iron ores of 495
CuB mine, geology near „„g
Current River, geology near "" 205 206
Curry member, correlation of 'ggg
distribution and character of. 335^340 347
,-, "•™°'-<'<" ;::;::;;:::;;: '345
(. iirry mine, geology near 339
Cuyuna district, correlation in ; 698 610-611
description of " ' ' 32 211
exploration in 484^485
S™l°Sy<" !!!!!!. '211-216,' 375. 604-605
iron ores of, alteration of ,,„
, „ 646
analyses of 220
character of ' 2I9_2')o
composition of 2''0-223
figure showing 221 222
distribution of 'jig
magnetic phase of 217-219 486
phosphorus in ' oon
■"'^■''"^sof !!!!!!!!!!!!!!;!;;;;'5oi,507
reserves of ,„„
J 489
secondary concentration of 223-224 639
section of, figure showing '210
structure of 216 223
topography on '^^g
manganese in " ^^
maps of 212
mining in, history of ^^ ^g
phosphorus in " 224
physiography oi jn
213-214
623
D.
Daly, R. A., on intrusion
on lavas
Uam Lake, geology near Xil
Darling, J. n., on earth movement
Davis, C. A., on Marquette district
Davis, W. M., on physiography
Dead River area, description of
geology of ^y_;
, '"'^Po' ■■ -.'^''''^''^^:'... 286
Deception Lake, geology near 208 370
iron near ..!...!... 207
Deerhunt mine, geology at
Deer Lake, geology near
Deerwood, iron near nig
Deerwood member, alteration of 223-224
correlation of ..!!.'.'.'.'.'.'.'."598,610-611
distribution and character of 212-216
'■■™.i° -!!!!!!!'!!!;!;;;;;;;;.. "460
magnetic rocks in 216-219
structure of ,^7
rocks of, correlation of. .
structure of.
600
510-511
451
96
110
287
301
254
630
INDEX.
Page.
Deformation, changes due to ^^
description of 620-621, B2Wafi
Deltas, formation of 45^459
Doming, A C, aid of ^"
Density, relation of , to cubic feet of ore, diagram showing 480
Dialjase, composition of • ■"'
Diamonds, discovery of in drift *^^
Diemer, M. E., work of ^^^
Dilces, distribution and character of 136,236,411
Dip needle, use of, in prospecting ■'■'
Disappointment Lake, geology at 129, 131, 133, 134, 199
Disappointment Mountain, geology at H^
Districts, ore-bearing, list of 31-32
Docks, ore, list of ■•*
Mewol *^
Dog River, geology on \^
Dori5 conglomerate, correlation of °^^
distribution and character of 150, 151, 154-155
petrography of 154-lo5
Douglas County, Wis., copper of ^5*0
Drag folds, description of 347-348
figure showing 350
Drainage, character of 8'
description of 33-.J4
Drainage, ancient, character of 8G-87
modification of 113. 435
figures showing 1'3
Drift, ages of 435-436
areas of 4o4-45o
deposition of ^'■- 435-437
distribution of 439-441
drainage of areas of ^5
obscilration by ■*30
stratification of *27
topography of 454-455
modification of 455-459
See aim Pleistocene; Glaciers: Moraines; Kamcs: Outwash
plains, etc.
Driftless Area, lakes in 438
location of ^^
map showing ^8
physiography of 454
view of ^"i
Drilling, exploration by 484-485
Drumlin.s, formation of 433-434
Dubois, II. W., and Mixer, C. T., analysis by 281
Duluth. geolog>- near 452-453. 458-459
physiography near 458
Duluth, Lake, formation of 444-445
map of : 445
Duluth escarpment, description of 112-115
glaciation of 431
view of If 2
Duluth gabbro, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 137,
159, 177, 198. 201-202, 372-373, 410, 414-415
dikes of 137
intrusion by 1.31,137,372-373,426,561
metamorphism by - 546
plate showing 548
relations of 202-203,372-373
segregations in 561
view of .- 112
Dumortierite. occurrence of 515
E.
Eagle TI arbor, geology near 413
mining near 36
Eagle U iver district, copper veins of 575-576
geology of 425
section in 380
silver In 575
Eames, II. H., on Mcsabi district 42
Eastern sandstone, relations of 388-389
Eeliel, E.C., on production of manganiferous iron ores 4.S8
Eleanor. Lake, geologj- near 153, 154
Eleanor slate, correlr tion of 598
distribution and character of 160, 154
Page.
Elevations, height of , 33,86,94
EHtman, ,\. TI., on Minnesota geology 371,:i7.')-376
Ellipsoidal structure, occurrence and character of 120, 148, 151
origin of 502,511-512
plate showing 120
significance of. In ore genesis 510-512
Ely, geologj- near 119,122,123,124.126
iron ores near 1.37-138
character of 140
composition of 139, 140
secondary concentration of 142-143
changes in 142-143
figure showing 143
Ely greenstone, acidic flows interliedded with 121
age of 127-128
clastic rocks associated with 121
correlation of 598
distribution and character of 119-122
intrusions in 121-122, 128-129
mineral composition of 120-121
relation of, to Soudan formation 124-128
topography on 93, 119
Ely Lake, geology near 122
Embarra,ss granite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 159, 178, 415
intrusions l)y 178
Embarrass Lake, geology near 160, 176
Emerald Lake, geology near 122,123,126
England, iron ores of 495
English Bay, geologj' at 368
Epsilon Lake, geology near 136
Erosion, amount of 89-90, 109,558-559
relation of, to iron-bearing sediments 50S-506, 5.58-559
topography due to 86,98-99,109
Eruptive rocks, iron in 512-513, 569
mineralization of 569
relations of, to iron ores 506-516
solutions from 587-588
See also Lavas; Igneous rocks.
Escarpments, age of 116
description of -• 112-116
distribution and character of 110-111
origin of 111-112, 117
structural relations of 116-117
Eskers, formation of 434
Exploration, cost of 47
methods of 484-1S6
Fall Lake, geology at 119
Faulting, description of 620
evidence of .' 87, 104, 114, 117
Influence of, on physiography 87, 98-99, 101 , 104, 112-115, 1 17
figure showing ! 112
Fault scarps. Sec Escarpments.
Fay Lake, geology near 131
Felch, iron ore near 327
Felch.Mountain district, correlation in 598,609
geology of 302-305,386,609
iron ores of 326-327
analysis of 327
relations of 501
secondary concentration of 328
■ volumetric diagram of 353
location and area of 32, 302
physiography of 107
stnut lire in 623
Felch schist, correlation of 327, 609
distribution and character of 302, 303,306,307, 609 '
relations of 305
Felsite, copper in 574
Fence River district, geology of 293,295,296-298
Fence River, physiography of 107
Fenner, C. N.,on igneous rocks 511
Fernckes, G . , work of SS9
Field work, correlation of laboratory e.xperiments and 527-529
Fish Creek, geology on 379, 415
Flambeau River, geology on 357
INDEX.
631
Page.
Florence district, correlation in 598,610-611,617
exploration in 484
geology of 320-323, 376, 379-380, 606
iron ores of, alteration of 546
character of 323- 325
composition of 324-325
production of 461
relations of ,' 601 , 507
reserves of 492
secondary concentration of 326
structure of 475
volumetric diagram of 353
location and area of 32, 320
map of ! Pocket.
mining in, history of 39-40
Flowage, rock, alteration by 554-555
Fluor I.'iland, geology on 368
Folding, extent of 123, C20-622
, figure showing 123
Fond du Lac, physiography near 452
Foster. J. AV., and Whitney, J. D.. on Marquetle district 96
Fourfoot Falls, geology at 345
Fox River valley, correlation in 598
geology of 365
map of . . .^ 359
Freda sandstone, deposition of 426
distribution and character of 384, 414, 417, 426
Freedom dolomite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 360-361
iron in 460
Freight rules, relation of. to grade of ores 494
Fuel, nature of 47-48
Fumee. Lake, geology near 336
G.
Gabbro. metamorphism by 546
Gabbro plateau, character of 91-92
monadnocks on 92
Galiimichigami, Lake, geology near 131, 136, 199, 202
Gary, E. n., on iron ore and freight rates 494
Gate Harbor, geology near 413
Geikie, A., on igneous rocks 511
on iron ores 508-509
Geography, maps showing 31, 32
outline of 30-32
Geologic history, rgsumfi of 023-026
Geologic map of Lake .Superior region Pocket.
Geography, physical, account of ■ 85-117
Geologic knowledge, growth of 72-73
Geologic work, history of 70-84
Georgian Bay. copper ores at 626
Geology, general 597-1)26
Germany, iron ores of 495
Giants Range, definition of 41
description of 169
geology of .' 160, 172-173, 176, 177, 178, 179
Iron of 165
mining on, history of 42
physiogiaphy of 103-105
structure of 175
Giants Range granite, correlation of J9S
distribution and character of 135-136, 162
intrusions of 170
phosphorus in 194
relations of 162-163
topography on 94
Gilbert, G. K., on glaciation 450
Gilman deposits, iron ores of 565
iron ores of, analysis of 565
Glacial deposits, distribution and character of 179,
216, 308-309, 355, 559-560
See also Pleistocene deposits; Drift; etc.
Glacial epoch, description of 427-453
See also Pleistocene.
Glacial lakes, beaches of 449-452
deposits in 452-453, 455
distribution and character of 441-448
Page.
lilacial lakes, formation of 427 4,3^
tilting of, etiect of 448^449
Glaciation, effects of 33,91,92,98,106,114-116,427-453
erosion by ■_ 427
period of 427
Glaciers, advance of 427-429
advance of, map showing 428
effects of 427
contrasts in 43Q
constructive work of 4.33-441
See also Moraines, etc.
erosion by 43(^32
melt ing of 435
retreatot !'! 429-435
soiu-ce of 427
transportation by 432-433
See also Drifts.
Glauconite, relation of, to iron 503
Goetz Lake, geology near 153
Gogebic district, correlation of (joe 617
geology of 214, 380, 423! 600
iron ores of, alteration of. 54(5
analyses of 4gi
magnetic phase of ^gQ
production of 49-51,69,461
relations of 601 .507
reserves of 489^92
secondary concentration in 475 539
structure of 475 4gg
manganese in 4gg
mine waters in, analysis of ,-. 543
mining in, history of 40
See also Penokee-Gogebic.
Gogebic Lake, geology- near 385, .388
Gold ores, distribution and character of 595-596
Gold, mining of, history of 46
Goldthwait, J. W., on glaciation 451
Goodrich mine, geology near 265
Goodrich quartzite, correlation of. 598, 608
distribution and character of 251, 265, 283, 285, 288, 289, 608
iron ores in 270-272
relations of 264, 265, 266-267, 268
topography of 106
Goose Lake, geology near 258
Gordon, A. T,, analysis by 179, 191, 193
Gordon, W. C on Black River geology 384-385,388
Graben faulting, description of 112
figure showing 112
Grace mine, gold in 595
Grand Portage Bay, geology at 370
Grand Rapids, geology near _ . 164
iron near 164
Grand Traverse, physiography near 433
Granite Bluff, geology at 306
Granite Island, geology at 414
Grant, U. R., map by 355
on Gunflint Lake district 201
on Keweenawan 398-399. 400-401
on physiography 91, 92, 9,S-99, 100
on Wisconsin geology 378
Grant^burg, glaciation at 4.37
t treat conglomerate, deposition of 425
distribution and character of 381-387, 390, 413, 416, 418
relations of 574
Great Lakes, drainage to 33-34
history of 448-449, 456-459
maps showing 457, 458
structural relations of m
transportation on 490-497
Great Palisades, geology near 371-372
section at, figure showing 371
Greenalite, alkaline solutions producing, source of 525
alteration of 187, 197, 210, 530, 5.37
chemistry of 550-551
plate showing 532, 534
analyses of 1G7
carbonate ores and, relations of 526
632
INDEX.
Page.
Greenalite, carbon dioxide producing, source of 527
conii»os:tion of 528
dei)osition of 503. 521-522
distribution and character of 165-108, •102, 572
iron in 10.^108
nature of 522. 525
oxidation ancl hydration of 530,537
phosphorus in ^^^
photomicrofiraphs of 524. .'532
plates showint; 120.474
Green Bay lobe of Labrador glacier, extent of 428
Greens'one conglomerate, correlation of 59S
distribution and character of '-^^
iron in ^' -
Oreenwater Lake, iron of '50
Gregory, J. W., and Cole, G. .\. J., on ellipsoidal structure 511
Gros Cap. geology at 151, 152, 153, 154. 393
Gros Cap greenstone, correlal ion of 598
distribution and character of 150-151
intrusions of '54
petrography of 151
Grout, W. F., on the Kewecnawan 376
Groveland, iron ores near 327
Gi-ovcland formation, distribution and character of 296, 304, 305
topography of - '^^
Gunflint formation, analysis of 204
correlation of 598
distribution and character of 198, 199-200
iron ores in 200, 203-204, 460. 480
magnetite in 501
metamerphism of 200
phosphorus In 1^5
relations of 203
section of, figure showing 199
structure of 199-200
topography of 102
GunHint Lake district, correlation in 598
description of 198
geology of 136, 172, 177, 198-203. 209. 604
iron ore from 203-204
photomicrograph of 524
physiography of 101, 1U2
H.
Hall, C. W., on Cuyuna district 213
on glaeiation "155
on Kewecnawan series .- 377
Hall, R. D., analysis by 158, 173, 518
Hamburg slate, distribution and character of 356
topography of 108
Hanbury n ill, geology at 335
Hanbury slate, correlation of 267, 307. 330. 340. 598
topography of 1"^
Hancock mine, geology at 307
Hanging valleys, submerged, occurrence of 114
Hartford mine, ore from, washing tests on 281
Hawkins mine, folding at, view of 180
Helen fonnation, correlation of 598
distri bution and character of 150, 152-153, 155
intrusions in 154
iron in 152,155.460
petrography of ■ 153
relations of 153-154
Helen mine, description of 150. 157
geology near 152, 154
hanging valley near, view of 432
history of 45-16
Hematite, deposition of 527
mining of, history of 45
occurrence and character of 479, 534-566. 572
Hematite Mountain, glaeiation near 431
Hematitic chert, plate showing 406
Hemlock formation, correlation of 598, 007,617
distribution and character of 291,294-296,323,607
relations of 297,300,507
topography of ' 107
Hcnnansvllle limestone, distribution and character of 306,
307,330,345-346
Heron Bay, topography near 95
Page.
nibbing, Minn., geology near 105,10
iron ores near 476
section near, figure showing 180
Highlands, elevations in 86
rocks oJ 85
subdivisions«f 85
topographic development of 85-89
Sec a^so Uplands; Monadntxjks; Peneplain.
History, geologic, rfoumfi of 623-026
History of mining 35-<J9
Holyokemine, geology near 254.287
Hot«hkiss, \V. O., work of 320,345
Houghton, Douglass, in vest igal ions by 35.38,71
Hubbard. L. L.,on Kewecnawan rocks 381-382,
3S5, 398. 400-401 . 404-405. 418, 421
Hudson Bay, drainage to 34
geology of 626
glaciers from 427, 428
iron-bearing rocks in region of 026
Ifuinboldt, geology at 265
Hunt, T. S.,on N'ipigon Bay 368
Hunters Island, geology of 122, 126, 130
physiography of "■ - 94-95
Hunters Island series, distribution and character of 118
Huron Creek, view of ; 434
Huronian series, correlation of 305, 598-599. 002-614
defonnation of - 624-^)25
deposition of 176-177. 603. (iOO-OOS. 024-fi25
distribution and character of 129-137. 146-1 50,
159, 101- 177. 198-201 . 205-207. 212-214, 224-234,
251-269,283-323.329-344.350-357,598.602-014
igneous rocks in -. 176,
178, 197, 206, 268-269, 299, 304, 318, 322-323, 603, 609, 614,617
iron horizons in 460-461
iron ores of 501.504.505,513
relations of 170, 230,300, 318.372, 617-619
map showing 292
structure of 175-176,225,286
unconformities at and in 617-619
topography of 92,94,98.102-108
view of 112
Huronian, upper. S{c .\nimikie.
Hydration, variation in. cause of 555-557
I.
Ice. Sue Glaeiation: Glaciers: etc.
Igneous rocks, alteration by intrusions of 545-554
association of. wit h copper ores 581
with iron ores 506-510
calcium-magnesium content of 506
copper in 581 . 588
derivation of iron from 500,506-518,568.571
distribution of 85, 507-508
erosion of 507
iron in ? - 505,512-513,566
metamorphism by 545-554, 558
mineralization by 569
nomenclature of 395-407
physiography of 108
solutions from 587-588
Sec also .Solutions.
weathering of 503-505, 514-516
See also Eruptive rocks: Intrusive rocks; Lavas.
Illinois mine, section of, figure showing 304
Indiana claim , copper on 574
Indians, use of copper by 35
Industry, changes in. history of 47
influence of physiography on 48
Ingall. E. D.. on .■silver ores 593-595
International Geological Committee. cited 145,147.597
Intrusive rocks, distribution and character of 135-1.30.614
relation of. to structure 621-<i22
solutions from 587-588
See also Igneous rocks.
Iron, salts of 51S-519
source of 502,518
conclusions on 516
transportation of S3*
INDEX.
633
Page.
Iron-bearing formations, alteration of 500, 529
alteration of, by igneous rocks 545-554
chemistry of 550-551
analyses of 491-492
association ^ f. with igneous rocks , 602-5IS, 611
character of 461-462, 549-550
composition of 462, 500
correlation of 610-011
deformation of 600
deposition of 499, 50O-5I8, 013. 625
character of 500-506
distribution and character of 620
horizons of 460, 491-492, lila-611
magnetism in _ 4S(W488
ore in, proportion of 462. 611
outcrops of 476^ 477
topography of 470
weathering of 502-505, 516. 539-540
See also particular formation.-.
Iron Belt 'nine, geology at 236
Iron carbonate. See Carbonate ores.
Iron II ill. geology near 333, 334-335, 340, 341, 343
map and cross section at 335
Iron ores, analyses of 477
bodies of. See Ore bodies
chapter on 460-571
character of 480-484
chemical composition of 477-479
representation of Igo
figures showing 182,221,223,478.480
chemical origin of 500-518
contents of 481-484
determination of 481-482
diagram for 480
deposition of 499-51S
chemistry of 518-528
order of 501
genetic classification of 571-572
grade of 493-495
figure showing 493
horizons of 460
hydration of, variation in 555-557
localization of 518, 544-545
magnetic phases of 185-186. 486-488
magnetitic phases of 480
manganese in 488
mechanical concentration of 540-541
metamorphism of , 500, 549-550. 560-561
mineralogy of 479-480
mine waters of, composition of 540,543-544
mining of, history of 38-69
methods of 497-499
occurrence of 236-237
in pitching troughs, figure showing 236
origin of 499-570
summary of 568-569
plates showing 480, 542
production of 49-79, 490-491
by grades 479
figure showing 49, 490
proportion of , in formations 462
reserves of 488-495
availability of 488-490, 491-492
comparison of, with other regions 492
grade of 493-495
life of 490-491
royalties on 499
secondary concentration of. See Secondary concentration,
structure of. See particular districts.
texture of 480
chart showing 481
transportation of, cost and methods of. 495-497
by glaciers 432. 559-560
value of - 499
views of 480
volume of, relation of. to cubic feet of ore, chart showing 480
5ff fl/w Hematite; Limonite: Clinton ores; Brown ores, etc.;
particular districts.
Page.
Iron ores, foreign, consumption of 495
Iron ores, manganiferous, origin of. 488, 5ti0
Iron River, geology near 313, 315-3I6, 507
Iron River district, correlation in 598,606,609-«ll,617
exploration in 484
geology of 309-320,605,009
iron ores of, alteration of 540
character of 323-325
composition of 324-325. 501
relations of 501.507
secondary concentration of 326
structure of 475
volumetric diagram of 35;{
location and area of 32 308
mapoS Pocket.
mining in, history of ' 39-40
physiography of 308-309
Iron sulphide, deposition of 527
Ironwood, geology near 243, 394
Ironwood formation, alteration of 243-245
alteration of, figure sliowing 245
correlation of 598.608-611
distribution and character of 225. 230-232
'■•on of 235-247, 250, 460
phosphorus in 247-249
figin-es showing _. 248. 249
relations of 232. 385
structure of 235-236. 250
Irving. R. D., on copper ores 575,577,580-58
on glaciation 439
on Keweenawan series 366, 372-378. .381,385-389, 394, 397, 409, 414
on Keweenaw district loO
on Lake .Superior basin 421.457
on physiograpliy 97, 98, 102-103. 104
work of 29. 30, 71
Irving. R. D., and Chamberlin, T. C, on Keweenaw Point... 115,384
Irving, R. D.,and Van Ilise, C. R., on physiography 103
Ishpeming. geology near 263, 265, 267, 269, 270, 271
jaspi tite from, plate showing 464
Ishpeming formation, topography of 106
Isle Royal, copper ores of 530
escarpment of 115-116
geology of 389-390, 408, 418, 421, 425
correlation of 615
mining on 530
history of 37-38
physiography of. 99. 1 16. 457
ridge on. view of 90
Isle Royal location, history of 36
Issati, Lake, formation of 443
J.
Jacobsville sandstone, distribution and character of 385
Jasper, analyses of 139, 140, 505
distribution and character of 124-125. 461-462
origin of 650
plates showing 464, 466, 472, 564
section of, figure showing 123
Jasper Bluff, jaspilite from, plate showing 464
Jasper conglomerate, plate showing 542
Jasper Lake, geology at 126
Jasper Peak, description of 90
geology of 122
view of 88
Jaspilite. See Jasper.
Joseiihine mine, history of 46
Jiimlio, geology near 313,316
K.
Kakabeka Falls, Ontario, geology near 149
Karnes, formation of 435
Kaministikwia district , geology of 149-150, 599
Kawishiwi River, geology on 133, 134, 201
Kearsargelode, description of 575
Keewatin glacier, advance of 428
Keewatin series, age of 146
correlation of 549-600
deformation of 624
634
INDEX.
Paj,'<-.
Keewatln scries, distribution and cliaracter of 119-128,
1 44-145. 148. 150-154. 100. 198. 20&-2CI6. 225. 22f>. 2.';2,
254-255, 287, 309-310, 322, 330-331, 597, .59»-li(XI
extension ol 623
gold in 595
iron ores of 46,149,460-461,501,507,517-518,626
alteral ion of. 554-555
proiiuction of 517
relations of 504. 506
relations of 227,257,260.504.506
Sc( also particular formalions.
Kekekaliic. L.ike, geology near 133, 134. 130, 603
Kettle Kiver, geology near 378-379
Kettles, format ion of -• 438
Keweenavvan series, age of 415-416, 420
area of 419
copper ores in 574, 580, 581-582
correlation of. 305.598. B14-G15
deposition of 416-418,424-125, 426, 615. 025
distribution and character of 137,
159.177-178.198.201-209.212.215.224-220,2(4-
235,250,251.300-305,366-420, 597, 602, 614-(il5
faulting of. 420-421 , 620, 622, 6M
folding in 622
grain of 407-408
Ustory of, r&iunfi of 424-426. 615
igneous rocks in .395-412, 425. 615
nomenclature of 395-407
source of 411-412
intrusions of 171-172, 197, 215, 278-279, 377-378, 418, 424, 425-426
iron horizons in 460
jointing in 420
metamorphism of 423-424
relations of 202-203,
234-235, 378-379, 384-386, 388-389, 414-416, 420, 619
section of 384
figure showing 99
sediments in 412-413
structure of 376,383,620-625
figure showing 419
subdivisions of 366-367. 614
thickness of 418-419
topography on 98, 99-102
unconformity at 619
volume of 419-120
See aho particular fonnafions.
Keweenaw district, location and area of 31
mining in, history of 35-37
physiography of. 97, 100, 116
production of 36
topography of 91-92, 94, 100
Keweenaw escarpment, description of 115
Keweenaw lobe of Labrador glacier, extent of 428
Keweenaw Point, copper ores of 573-593
copper ores of, character of 573
extent of 573
grade of 574
minerals of 673-574
occurrence of, mode of 574
production of 575
geology of and near 380-385. 408, 409, 412-413, 415, 418, 425
maps of 380,574
section of, figure showing 99,574
silver at 575
structure on 383
veins on 574.575-576
Kcyes Lake, geology near 321,322
Kimball Lake, geology near I53
King, F. II., on glaeiation 439
Kitchi schist, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 262, 254-255, 260, 287
Kloos, J. II., on Kcwecnawan series * 397
Knife Lake, geology near X19
Knife Lake slate, correlation of 593
distribution and character of 132-135
intrusion of 133-134
lithologyof 133-134
mlner.il character of I34
Page.
Knife Lake slate, relations of 135
structure of 133
thickness of 135
topography of 94, 119
Kona dolomite, correlation of ^ 598.605
distribution and character of 252-25.3.258.605
relations of 258, 200,305
topography of 105
L.
Laboratory sTOthesis, correlation of field work and 527-529
Labrador glacier, advance of 428
Lac la Belle conglomerate, distribution and character of 381
Lake Angeline mine, washing tests on ores from 281
Lake basins, formation of 431-432
section of, figure showing '. 432
Lake Huron shore, correlation on 598
Lake Michigan lobe, extent of 428
Lake of the "Woods, geology at 122
Lake of the Woods district, correlation of 69<i. .599. ooo
descript ion of 144
geology of 144-1 47
iron absent in 144
physiography of 94
Lakes, origin of 91
Lakes, glacial. See Glacial lakes.
Lake Shore trap, distribution and character of 381.384.425
Lake Superior, east coast of, geology of 39^-392
Lake Superior basin, character of 33. 110-111 . 421 . 423
escarpments of 112-116
age of 116
relations of 116-117
views of 112
formal ion of 622-023.626
map of 422
origin of 1 11-112. 426
physiography of 100. 45tv-459
Lake Superior lobe of Labrador glacier, extent of 42S. 442
Lake Superior sandstone, distribution and character of 109,
225, 2ai, 302, 304, 330. 346, 37S. 379. 456. 61 6
relations of 379.415.420.616
Lakewood, geology of 358
geology of, map showing 358
Lane, A. C, on copper ores 5S1..=>,s8-590
on glaeiation 439-440
on Isle Royal 389-390
on Keweenawan series 382.383,385,398.400-403.405.407 414,421
on mine waters 644
Lane, A. C, and Seaman, A. E., on Lake Superior sandstone 616
Larsen, E. S., and \Vright, F. E., on quartz crystallization 549
Laterite, association of, ^vjth iron ores 503
Laurentian liighlands. location of 355
Laurontian peneplain, extent of 88
Laurentian scries, batholiths of 145
correlation of 304. 000-601
deposition of 023-<i24
distribution and character of 119,
128-129, 145-150, 154-155, 160, 198, 205, 225-227, 252,
255-250. 283-293, 300-302, 306, 330-331, 360, 597, 600-602
gold in 595-596
intnisions of 145, 600
relations of 227, 200
Lavas, extension of. periods of 5lt>-517
variation in. relation of. to iron 510-518
See also Eruptive rocks: Igneous rocks.
Lawson. .\. C. on glaeiation 450
on iron ores 509-510
on Lake of the Woods and Rainy Lake districts 144-145, 147
on Minnesota 371,374
on physiography 94, 98, 101, 1 12, 450
on subcrustal fusion, theory of 146
Leaching, process of 537-539
Lee Hill, geology near 119, 122, 123, 127. 131
Lehmann. O.. on liquid crystals .'V2.5, 572
Leith. 0. K.. on physiography 103-104,432
work of 30,44-45
Lerch Brothers, analyses by 193, 238
INDEX.
635
Page.
Life, pre-Cambrian, existence of 617
Lighthouso I'uint, Kcology near 254
Lime, relation of, to phosphorus 196, 249, 282, 281
figure showing 190. 249, 282
Limonite, formation of 519-520, 571
natiH-e of 620-521
Linear monadnocks. See Monadnocks, linear.
Literature, list of 73-84
Little Falls district, geology of 213, 214, 375
Little Presque Isle River, geology near 227
Loess, distribution and character of 438
Logaa, W. E., on Keweenawan series » 392, 393
on Michipicoten Island 391
section by 367
Logan sills, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 198, 202, 208, 374, 410
intrusion of 208, 420
relations of 202-203, 593
silver in 593
topography on 101, 102
Long Lake, geology near 119, 132, 153
Loon Lake, Mich., geology near 201, 370
iron at 4G, 209
Sfc fl/so Anlmikie district.
Loretto mine, geology near 332, 330
Low, A. P., on iron ores 508
Lower Magnesian limestone, distribution and character of . . 300,361-3(12
iron ores in 504-565
Lowlands, description of 108-110
geologj^ of : 108-110
M.
McFarlane, Thomas, on Keweenawan series 397
on Maniainse Peninsula 392
on Nipigon Bay 308
on silver 593
Mclunes, William, on Tlunters Island and Thunder Bay region. 94-95, 101
McKays Mountain, geology of 209
McKenzie, geology near 206
Magma, iron from 513-514, 568, 571
solutions from. S(c Solutions.
Magnetic phases of ore, occurrence of 185. 216-219
5fc aZso Amphibole-magnetite rocks.
Magnetic survey, prospecting by 44, 48tV-488
Magnetite, deposition of 527
occurrence and character of 479, 480, 486
origin ol : 562
Magnetite, titaniferous, character of 561
origin of 501 , 568
Magpie Valley, geology near 151
Mahoning mine, concretions in 192-193
concretions in, analyses of 193
geology near 165
iron ore from, plate showing 468
Maniainse Peninsula, geology of 391-393, 418, 425
section on 392-393
Manganiferous ores, occurrence and character of 488, 560
Mansfield, geology near -• 295
Mansfield slate, iron in 295-296, 324
occurrence of 294, 295-296, 303
relations of 296
topography of 107
Map of Lake Superior region 86
showing topographic development 87
showing topographic provinces 88
Maps, geologic, accuracy of 73
of Lake Superior region Pocket
Map, index, of region 31
Marathon conglomerate, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 356,357
Mareniscan series, name of 226 . 254
Marenisco, geology near 226
Mariska, geology near 162
Marquette district, acknowledgments concerning 251
correlation in 598, 599, 606, 610-611, 617
exploration in 485
geology of 251-269,429. 441,605-610,618,620-621
gold of 595
Page.
Marquette district, iron ores of, alteration of 546, 554, 610-611
iron ores of, analyses of 273, 491
character of , 274-275. 503
classification of 271-272
composition of 273-274
distribution of 270
magnetic phases of 486
occurrence of 270-271
figure showing 270
phosphorus in 279-283
concentration of 281 . 283
figures showing 280. 282
plates showing 464. 468. 470
production of 461
proportions of 402
relations of 507
reserves of 489-492
secondary concentration of .' 275-279, 539
conditions of 275
sequence of 278, 279
volume changes in 276-277
figures showing 276, 277
section of, figure showing 270
structure of 475
topograph y of 476
location and area of 31-32. 251
map of Pocket
mining in, history of 38-39
physiography of 96, 10.'i*-106. 252
production from 39. 51-00.69
structure of* 252-253. 623
figure showing 253
Marshall Hill graywacke, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 356,357
topography of 108
Martin, L., on Keweenawan series 420-421
on physical geography 85-117
on Pleistocene -127— i59
Mass mine, geology at 271
history of 36
Mastodon mine, geologj' at 295
Matawin district, geology of 149-150
iron of 150
Mead, W. J., diagram method devised by 182-183
on iron ores 137-143,
179-197, 235-250. 270-283. 286, 323-328, 346-3.54. 3(;2-365. 460-571
work of 518
Meadow mine, phosphorus in 194
Meeds, A. D.. analysis by 191
Menominee district, correlation of 59S, 599, 610-611
cross sections in, plate shovilng 346
geology of 329-346, 605. 007-609, 616
iron ores of. alteration of 546
analyses of 3.50-351. 491
character of 352. .503
composition of 350-352
magnetic phases of 486
position of ^59.610-Gll
production of 461
proportion of 462
relations of 501 . 507
reserves of '. 489-492
secondary concentration of 3.53-354. 539
structure of 346-350. 475-476, 623
figures showing 346,347,348,349
volumetric diagram of 353
location and area of 32. 329
map of Pocket
mining in, history of 39
physiography of 96. 105-106. 329. 433
production of 39,61-65,(19
Menominee River, geology on 321,322,344-.345
Merriam, W. N.. map by 320
on Steep Rock Lake district 147-148
Merritts, discovery by 43
Mesaba, iron at and near 44, 172, 185
meaning of name 159
Mesabi district, correlation in 598, 610-611
definition of 41, 159
636
INDEX,
Page.
Mesabi district, description of 159
exploration in 47, 485
geology of 159-179, 604-605
glaciation in, map showing 443
history of 41-44
iron ores of, alteration of 545
alteration of, plate showing 548
analyses of 181, 183, 185, 193, 197, 491
characteristics of 183-185,503
composition of 180-183, 193, 197, 555
figure showing 182
distribution of 179-180
niagnetio phases of 185,480
phosi)horus in 192-19G
concentration of 194-195
figures showing 192, 190
plates showing 468, 474, 532
production of 401
proportion of 462, 477
relations of 180, 501
reserves of 489-492
rocks associated with, alteration of 191-192
secondary concentration of 186-191, 475, 538, 539, 558
figu7 P showing ISO
sequence of 197
structure of 180, 475-476, 4S(J
figure showing 180
volume changes of 188-191
figures showing ' 188. 189, 190
location and area of 32
map of '. Pocket
mining in, history of 42-44
magnetic portion of, character of 43
development of 43-44
mine waters in, analysis of 543
mining in 497-498
physiography in : 105
plate showing 532
production of 05-68, 09
structjre in 623
view of 180
Mesas, distril)ution and character of 100-102
structure of, figure showing 101
Mesnard quartzite, analj'ses of 257
correlation of 598, 605
distribution and character of 252-253, 250-258, 605
relations of .• 257-258, 260, 305
topograph y of 105
Metamorphism, cause of 545-554, 559, 582
cycle of 5a)-561
effects of 545-554, 559,582-586
relation of, to secondary concentration 552-553
temperature of 549
See also Igneous rocks.
Michigamme Lake, geology near 262.267
Michigamme mine, geology at 261
history of 38
Michigamme Motmtaui district, geology of 293, 295-298
physiography of 107
Michigamme River, geology on 295
Michigamrn/? slate, correlation of 267. 323, 598, 608-609, 611
distribution and character of.... 251, 2G7-268, 283, 285, 288, 289, 291
298-299, 306, 307, 309. 31 1-318. 321-323. 330. 340-342. 608-609
intrusions in 345
relations of 265, 206-267,268,313-314, 338-339, 343
structure of 312-313.341-342
topography of 100. 329
Michigsm, bibliography for 74-77
geology of 380-414
investigations in 35. 38. 71-73
iron ores of 461.507
production of 401
physiogniphy of 100. 433
Sec also pnrticular districts.
Michigan mine, gold of 596
See aho Minnesota mine.
Michipicoten district, copper ores of 580
correlat ion in 598-599, 615
description of 150
Page.
Michipicoten d istricl, extensions of 155-156
geology of 150-156,390-391,423,425
gold of 505
iron ore of, analyses of 156
distribution and character of 156-157
reserves of 492
secondary concentration of 157-158
location and area of ' 32
map of 88
mining in, history of 45-40
physiography of. 95,150,431,456
section in . . 391
Michipi(roten Harbor, geology near 151, 154, 155
Middle cont^lorncrate, distribution and character of 381-387
Middle River, geology on 379.415
Mikado mine, geolog>' at 230.238
Minerals, source of 509
Mine waters, analyses of 543.579
composition of 540, 543-544. 579
Mining, history of 35-09
See also Copper; Iron: Silver; Gold.
Minnesota, bibliography for 78-^
copper ores of 580
geology of 307-379, 425, 429
investigations in 72
iron ores of * 401
production of 461
lowlands of 110
map of 212
physiography of 91-92, 99, 110-117
titaniferous ores of 501
See also particular districts.
Minnesota lobe of Labrador glacier. See Red River lobe.
Minnesota mine, history of 36
ores of 36, 576
See also Michigan mine.
Minnesota River valley, geology of 224
Mirmpsota tax commission, aid of 30
Misquah 11 ills, elevations in 92
Mississippi River, drainage to 34
pond ing of 438
Mixer. C. T.. and Dubois, H. W., analysis by 281
Mohawk mine, geology at 178
Moissan. H., on metamorphism 549-550
Moisture, relation of, to cubic contents of ore 483-484
relation of. to cubic contents of ore. figure showing 480
Mokoman. Ont.. geology near 149
Monadnocks, character and cause of 90
Monadnocks, Unear, descriptions of 98-106
structure of. figure showing 101
Mona schist. coiTelation of 598
distribution and character of 252. 254-255. 287
Monoclinal ridges, distribution and character of 99-100, 102-108
structure of. figure showing 101
Monopoly in mining, effects of 41
Monroe mine, folding at, view of 180
Montreal River, geology near 413,414
Moose Lake, geology near 119.127.129,131
Moraine, ground, formation of 433
topography of 433
view of 436
Moraine, recessional and interlobate, formation of 435
Moraines, terminal, formation of. 434
view of 434
Morrison Creek, geology on 313. 316-317
Morton, geology near 224
Mosinee conglomerate, correlation of. 598
distribution and character of 356, 357
Motley, geology near 215
Mountain Iron mine, geology near 160,162,164
history of 43
views in 180. 432
Mount Houghton, geology at 382
Mount f Tough ton felsi tc. correlation of '. 382
distributiim and character of 381
Mud Lake, geologj' near 254, 257
Musse.v. IT. R..on Marquette district 38
on Vermilion district 41
INDEX.
637
N. Page.
Namakon Lake, geology at 146
Nashwauk, geology near IfiO
National mine, history of 3li
Necedah, correlation at 598
geology near 358
maps showing 358, 35<J
Negaunee, geology near 259, 261, 263, 269, 270, 271
hematitic chert from, plate showing 466
Negaunee formation, altera! ion of 276-270
alteration of, figure showing 276
analysis of 273
composition of 273, 505
correlation of 126, 132, 598, 607, 60S
deposition of 501
distribution and character of 252. 262-264,
270-272, 287-289, 291, 296-298, 300-301 , 607
intrusions in 264
iron ores in 263-264,270-271,278,279.400
alteration of. 554-555
phosphorus in 279
relations of 262,264,265,269,296,297,305,506-507
structiu-e of 262-263
topography on 105
Nemadji, Lake, formation of 443-444
map of 444
Newport, geology near 227, 236, 243
New Ulni, geology near 224
Niagara limestone, relations of, to ore 567
topography on 109
Nicollet, J. N., map by 41-42
Nicollet Lake, fonnation of 442
Nipigon Lake, geology near 368-370,421,423
physiography near 95
Nipigon Bay, geology near 367-370, 393-394, 422
sections near 367
physiography near 95
Nipigon series, nanie of 207
Nipissing Great Lakes, description of 447-448
map of 448
Nonesuch shale, copper ores in 574. 579
deposition of 426
distrilmtion and character of 382-384, 385, 413-414. 426
Norrie m ine, geology at 236. 238
iron ore of, analyses of 238
section at, figure showing 237
North Bliill, correlation near 598
geology near 358
North Mound quartzite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 356, 357
topography of 108
Norway, cross sections near, plate showing 346
geology near 334, 335, 339
Norwood, J. A., on Mesabi district 42
Nunataks, effects of 436
Ogishke conglomerate, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 129-132
intrusions in 131
lithology of 130-131
metamorphism of 131
relations of 130, 132
structure of 129-130
thickness of 132
topography on 1 19
Ogishke Lake, geology at 119.129.130
Oliver mine, phosphorus in 193
Oliver Mining Co., aid of 30
area controlled by 47
Ontario, bibliography for 81-83
gold of 595-596
map of 58
pre-Animikie districts of 144-158
•Ontonagon district, copper ores of 574,576
mining in, history of 36
silver in 575
Page.
Ordovician system , distribution and character of 283,
285 , 309, 319-320, 329-330, 345-340
fossils of 320
Ore-bearing districts, list of 31-32
Ore bodies, fonn of 475-476, 529
structure of 474-475
outcrops of 476-477
topography of 47(5
Ore deposits, knowledge of, growth of 73
Ore docks, list of 495
view of 490
Ores. Sec Iron ores; Copper ores; Silver ores.
Ortonville, geology near 224
Osceola amygdaloid , distribution and character of 30
Osceola mine, history of. ., 30
Other Mans Lake, geology near 132
Otter Track Lake, geology near ug^ 127
Outer conglomerate, deposition of 426
distribution and character of 381-387, 413-414
Outwash plains, formation of 436-437
pitting of 438
view of 434
P.
Pabst mine, geology of 236 237
Paint River, geology near 299
Paint rock, analyses of 191
distribution and character of 171
phosphorus in 195
Paleozoic rocks, distribution and character of lOS-llO, 615-616
Palmer, relations at 265
Palmer gneiss, correlation of 593
distribution and character of 252, 255-256
Palms formation, correlation of 598,608
distribution and character of 225, 229-230, 608
relations of 230
Palms mine, geology at 229, 236
Paragenesis of copper ores, data on 585
of iron ores, data on 570-572
Paulson mine, geology near 199, 200, 202
iron of 204
Pegmatitic origin of ore, evidence of 502
nature of 569
Pelites. deposition of 625
occurrence of 603
Peneplain, age of 8»-89, 116-117
map showing gg
modification of 85-87
origin of. 85, 90, 559
relations of, figure showing hq
See also Highlands.
Penobscot mine, iron ore of. plate showing 468
Penokee Gap. geology at 229,231
slate from, photomicrograph of 548
Penokee-Gogebic district, correlation of 598
description of 32.225
geology of 225-235, 414-415, Oil
iron ores of, analyses of. 238, 239, 240, 241 , 244
character of 240-242
composition of 238-240. 244
figures showing 239, 246
distribution of 235
magnetitic phases of 241-242
analyses of 241
phosphorus in 247-249
figure showing 248, 249
plate showing 472
production of 461
proportion of. 462
reserves of 492
secondary concentration of 242-250, 475
conditions of 242-243
sequenceof 2507
rocks associated wi th , alteration of 245-247
analyses of 246
structure of 235-238
figures showing 236,23
638
INDEX.
Pago.
T'enokee-Oogebic d istrict , map of 226
physiography of 102-103.225-226
section of. figure showing 237
Sec also Gogeliic district.
Penolcee Range, description of 102-103
Perch Lake district, description of 288
geology of 288-290
map showing 289
map of Pocket.
Pewabic location, history of 36
Phosphorus, concentration of 194-195,249.281,283
distribution and character of 143,192.220.224.247.279-281
figures showing 192.190.248,249,280
relation of lime and 196. 249, 282
figure showing , 196. 249, 282
source of 195-190.248-249,281
Physical geography, account of 85-117
Physiography, influence of, on development 48
Pie Island, geology of 209, 426
Pigeon Point district, geology of 204-205
map of 204
physiography of ^^^
Pine Creek, geology near 3.36
Pioneer mine, phosphorus in 143
section of, figure showing 138
Pitching troughs. See Iron ore; Drag folds.
Pleistocene deposits, distribution and character of 179,211,216,269,
283, 285, 287, 288. 290, 323, 355. 360. 362. 427-459, 359-560, 617
map showing 453
discussion of 441
modification of 455-459
provinces of 453-455
Tlewsof 432,434.436
See also Glaciation: Glaciers; Drift; etc.
Pleistocene history, chapter on 427-4.59
simunary of 459
Plucking, explanation of 431
Point airs Mines, geology at 392.393
Pokegama Lake, iron near 44
Pokegama quartzite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 164, 177, 178
Porcupine Mountain district, copper in 579
geology of 380, 385, 421
physiography of. .'. 97
Porosity, relation of, to cubic contents of ore 482-483
relation of, to cubic contents of ore, figure showmg 480
Porphyry, age of 128
distribution and character of 128
Portage Lake, copper near 577
geology at 380. 408, 425
section at 387
view at 434
Port .\rthur, geology near 205, 206, 209
iron near 209
Potato River, geology at 229.230.378,394,413-414
Potsdam sandstone, distribution and character of 251,
269,307,355,356,360
iron ores in , 564
Powers BUift quartzite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 356
topography of 108
Pre-Cambrian rocks, investigation of 29
Presque Isle, geology near 255,609,617
Presque Isle River, geology near 229
Princeton mine, geology at 283,285
Prospecting, glacial drift in 432
methods of 484-486
Puck\vunge conglomerate, distribution and character of 370-371,394
relations of 372
Purapelly, U.,on copper ores 580-581
on Keweenawan series 397, 400-403
Quartz, crystallisation of 549, 552
Quincy amygdaloid, distribution and character of 36
Quincy mine, history of 36
ores in 576,577
Quinnesec, geology near ; 334, 343
Page.
Quinnesec schist, correlation of 344-345,598
distribution and character of 322, 329, :):«), 344-.345
intrusions in 323
relations of 311, 342
R.
Rabbit Lake, geology near 213, 214
iron of 220
composition of. figures showing 221,222
Rabbit Mountain, silver at 594-595
Railroads, ore-carrying, list of 495
Rainy Lake, formation of 442
Rainy Lake district, correlation in 598
description of 144
elevations in 94
geology of 122, 146-147
gold in 46,595
physiographj* of 94
R.uny Lake lobe, extent of 427.428-429, 441
Randall, geology near 215
Randville dolomite, correlal ion of 598,605.607
distribution and character of 291,
293. 300-303, .306, 330, 333-334, 342, 605, 6O7-C08
relations of 305. 333. 334, 342, 343
topography on 107,328
Ransomc, F. L. , on ellipsoidal structure 511
on iron ores 509-510
Rat Portage, geology near 145
Red Cedar River, geology on 357
Red Lake, formation of 442
Red River, lakes in 442
Red River lobe of Labrador glacier, extent of 429. 430, 441-442
Red Rock mine, geology at 297, 300
Redstone, geology near 224
Reid, Clement, on lavas 511
Relief, character of 33.90-91
measure of 89
Republic mine, geology at 2?2
history of 38
iron ores of 480, 552-553
Republic, chert from, plate showing 470
Repulilic trough, physiography in IWi
Rib Hill, map of 90
Rib Hill quartzite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 356
topography on lOS
Roberts, II. M., on production of iron ore 490-491
Robinson Lake, geology of 127
Rock flowage, alteration by 554-555
Rocks, depths of formation of 89-90
Rominger, Carl, on Marquette district 96,105-
on Menominee district 346
Ropes mine, gold of 595, 596
production of 46
Rove slate, correlation of 598. 611
distribution and character of 198,200-201
metamorphism of 201
topography on 102
Russell, I. Con ellipsoidal structure 5U
on glaciation 430,435,437.440
on physiography 1 10
S.
Sabawe Lake, iron near 149
Saganaga Lake, geology at 119,1.30
Saganaga Lake granite. See Basswood Lake, granite of.
St. CroLx River, geology near 376,378-379, 409, 415, 421
section on, figure showing 379
St. Ignace Island, geology on 368
St. Lawrence River, drainage tributary to 34
St. Louis Lake, fonnation of 443
St. Louis plain, character of 92
St. Louis River, channel of. changes in 112-113, 457 458
channel of, maps showing 113,457,458-
geology near 371, 372, 379,41.'*
St. Louis slate. See Virginia slate.
St. Marys River, description of •«
INDEX.
639
PaRp.
St. Peter sandstone, distribution and cliaracter of 300, 361-3(12
Salt waters, distribution and character ol 5M
Sault Ste. Marie, physiography north of 95-9B
Saunders, geology near 310
Saunders formation, correlation of 598, 005
distribution and character of 309, 310-311, 605
relations of 311,318,319
Savoy mine, section of, figure showing 138
Sawteeth Mountains, physiography of 99
Sayers Lake, geology near ] 52
Scotty Islands, geology on 145
Seaman, A. E., on Iron River district ."... 319
on Keweenawan series 389
on Marquette district 251, 260
Seaman, A. E., and Lane, A. C, on Lake Superior sandstone 616
Sea water, reaction of, on hot igneoios rocks 515-516
Sebenius, J. U. aid of 159
Secondary concentration, alteration due to 186-188, 529
character of 529-539
alterations due to 180-188
condition of 186
depth of 186
methods of 529-545
quantitative study of. 545
relations of contact alteration and S52-553
sequence of. 557-560
volume changes due to 188-191
figure showing 188, 189, 190
See also paTtkvlaT districts.
Section 16 inine, section of , figure showing 270
Section 30 mine, geology of 139
Sections, geologic, of Lake Superior region, map showing Pocket.
Sedimentation, conditions of 600-518
Seeley slate, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 360-361
Sellers mine, iron ore from, analyses of 193
Shebandowan River, iron on 150
Shenango mine, view in 1,S2
Sheridan Ilill. geology of 310, 319
Siamo slate, correlation of 598, 607
deposition of 501
distribution and character of 252,261-262,287,288,289,607
relations of 261 , 262, 264
topography of IO5. loo
Sibley mine, section of, figure showing 138
Siderite, alteration of 53O 537
alteration of, chemistry of 550-551
plates showing 532,534
oxidation and hydration of. 530. 537
plates showing 472, ,^24
Silica, deposition of 527
leaching of 537-539
transportation of 505-506, 537-539
SiUcate ores, distribution and character of 571-572
Silver Islet, geology at 37O
silver ores of 46, 591-592, 593-594, 626
analysis of 594
Silver Lake, iron near 207
Silver ores, distribution and character of 593-595
mining of 575
history of 46
origin of. 595
production of 593
source of 5(i9
Slate, composition of 513, 612
composition of. diagram showing 612
correlation of 611-612
iron associated with 502,515.011
Slate, ferruginous, distribution and character of 462
plates showing 408, 470
Smelting, by-products from 48
history of 47-48
Smith, W. H. C, on Hunters Island .• 94-95
Smith mine, history of 39
Smyth, H. L., on copper ores 580, 581, 585
Page.
Smyth, II. L., on folding ; 555
on physiography igg
on Steep Roelc Lake district i4g
Smyth, H. L., and Clements, J. M., on Crystal Falls district, . . . 39-40, 107
Smyth, U. L., Bayley, W. S., and Clements, J. M., on Crystal
Falls district 96-97 107
Snowbank granite, distribution and character of 136
intrusions by .■ 131^ 135
topography of 94
Snowbank Lake, geology near 119, 129, 131, 132-134, 136
Soils, character of 91
Solutions, hot, metasomatism by 513-514, 582-586, 614
source of 586-588
Soret, C. A., law of 590
Soudan, geology near 126
phosphorus at 143
Soudan formation, age of 127-128
analogy of, to Negaunee formation 126
breccias in 126-127
correlation of 593
defonnation of 12^124
figure showing 123
distribution and character of 118, 122-128
intrusions in 129
iron ores of. analyses of 139-140
character of : 140-141.460
secondary concentration of ." 141-142
structure of 137-139
jaspilite from, plate showing 466
origin of 126
relations of, to Ely greenstone 124-128
structure of 123-124
topography of 93,119
See also Jasper.
Soudan Hill, geology near 119,122,123,127,137
iron ores near 137-138
South Range, geologj' of 385-386, 389
Spain, iron ores of 495
Split Rock, geology at 374
Spring mine, history of 44
Spring Valley, iron ores at 46O, 564-666
Spurr, ,T. E. , on greenalite 167-168
Spurr mine, history of 33
Stambaugh Hill, geology at 315, 317-318
Stannard Rock, geoiogj- of 42s
Stanton, T. W., fossils determined by 179
Steep Rock Lake district, Ontario, geologj^ of 147-149
iron of ? 46, 148, 149
Steep Rock group, distrilmtion and character of 148
Stegmiller mine, geologj- at : 283,285
Steidtmann, Edward, on copper ores 573-593
Steiger, George, analyses by 166, 173, 191, 405-406
Stevens, H. .1. , on copper mining 35-36
Stevenson mine, excavation of, views of 495
ores from, analyses of igg
figure showing 188
Stillwater, geology at 375
Stokes, H. N., analyses by 191,689
Stone\'ille, geology near 268
Straw Hat Lake, geology near 148
iron near 149
Stream capture, description of u^
figure showing ii3
Stream systems, character of 91
Stremme, H. , on hydration ; 557
Streng, \., on Keweenawan series 397,402
Stria?, evidence of 430
formation of 431
Structure, development of 621
elements of 621-622
figures showing 99, 101, 112
relation of. to iron ores 544-545
Stuntz Bay, geology near 128, 129, 131
Stuntz conglomerate. See Ogishke conglomerate.
Sturgeon quartzite, correlation of 59s, 605
distribution and character of . . . 291, 293, 300-302, 306, 330, 332-333, 605
640
INDEX.
Page.
Sturgeon quartzito, intrusions in 345
relations of 305,332-333,334
topography on 107,328
Sturgeon Uiver district, correlation of 599
description of 300
geology of 300-301,333
Subcrustal fusion, tiieory of 146
Sudbury district, copper and nickel ores of 592,626
Sullivan, E. C. work of 589
Sulphur, metamorphism and : 550
occurrence of 477
Sunday Lake, geology near 227,229,230-232.236,238,242,385.517
Sunday quartzite, correlation of 227, 598, 605
distribution and cliaracter of 225,227-228, 605
relal ions of 228
Superior, geology near 452
Superior escarpment, description of 115
Surprise' Lake, geology at 370
Surveys, progress of 29
Swamp Lake, geology at 131
Swauzy district, description of . . . i 283
geology of 283-2S0
iron ores of 286
analysis of 286
reserves of 492
secondary concentration of 286
structure of 475
history of 39
map of 284
production of 39
Swanzy mine, geology at 283, 285
Sweden, iron ores of 495
Sweet, E. T.,od glaciation 439
on Keweenawan series 402, 403, 404
Swineford, A. P. , on Menominee district 39
Taconite, alteration of 187-188
analyses of 181
composition of 181-183
distribution and character of 207, 462
utilization of 44
See also Iron ore.
Talbott Lake, geology near 151
Tamarack njine, history of : 37
Taylor, F. B., on glaciation 450
Taylors Falls, geology near 379, 409, 425, 616
section at, figure showing 379
Teal Lake, geology at 253, 256, 258, 259, 261 , 262, 271, 275, 279, 618
geology at, map showing. ..' 254
Temperance River group, distribution and character of. 371-372, 375-376
Terrestrial sediments, character of 501-502
That Mans Lake, geology near 132
Thessalon group, correlation of 598
This Mans Lake, geology near .' 132
Thompson, Lake, description of 442
Thunder Bay. geology near 209, 410, 426,604
physiography near 94, 100-101
silver at 594-595
See also Animikie district.
Thunder Cape, geolog>' of 209, 426
Thwaites, F. T.,on Wisconsin geology 376,379
Tilden mine, geology at 236
Titanium, occurrence of 477, 533, 561
Topographic development, history of 85, 90
map showing 87
Topographic provinces, types of 85
map showing 88
See filto Pleistocene, provinces of.
Topography, character of 33-34
modification of 455-459
relation of, to iron ores. ..; 544-545
Tower, gcologj- near 119, 122, 123, 124, 131, 133, 134
Tower Hill, geology near 122, 123
iron ores near 137
Traders mcrabor, correlation of 598
distri\)ution and character of 335-3^0, 346-347
iron ore of 346
relation of 342
Page.
Traders mine, geology near 33(^337
Transportation, methods and cost of 495-197
Trap Range. gcoIog>- of 226-226. .385
Trenton limestone, distribution and character of 360.361-362
Two ltarl)ors Bay. geology near 373
Tyler slat^-, correlation of 598, 608, 611
distribution and character of 225-226,227,232-233.(308
relations of 233, 385
U.
Ulrich, E. O. , fossils determined by 320
on Iron Mountain 319-320
Unconformities, description of 617-620, 62Mi26
United States, iron reserves of 492
United States Gcologicjil Survey, work of 72-73
l^pham. Lake, description of 443. 453
Upham, W., on glaciation 440.442
Uplands, development of 89-90
districts of, description of 91-98
glaciation of 91
monadnocks on 90
position of ; 89
relief in 89
soil of 91
valleys in 90-91
Upson, geology near 230
V.
Valleys, character of 90-91
Van Ilise. C. R., on copper ores 581
on formation of ILmonite 519
on Keweenawan series 402
on metamorphism 551
on phj'siography 116
work of 29. 92-93
Van llise, C. R.. and Bayley, W. S., on Marquette district 96, 10.V106
Van Ilise, C. R., and Irving, R. D., on physiography 103
Veins, copper. Sec Eagle River; Ontonagon; Keweenaw Point.
Vermilion district, correlation in 598.599-600.611
exploration in 47. 485
geology of 118-137, 603.61 1. 618
intrusive rocks of 135-136
iron-bearing rocks of 118
iron ores of 137-143. 4Sfi
alteration of 554-555
characteristics of 140-141
composition of 139-140
origin of '. 570
plates showing 466.564
production of ; 461
proportion of 462
relations of 506. 507
reserves of 1 4S9
secondary concentration of 141-143
changes in 142-143
figure showing 142
structiue of 137-139
topography of 476
location and area of 32.118
map of 118
mines in, sections of, figures showing 138
mining in, history of 40-41
phosphorus in 143
production of 68, 69
physiography of 92-94. 431
structure of 123-124
figure showing 123
topography of 119
Vermilion Lake, formation of 442
geology near 119.122,129,131,132
gold near 40
Vermilion range, mining on. history of 42
Virginia, greenalite from vicinity of, plate showing 474
Virginia slat e, analyses of 1 73
correlation of 598.611
distribution and character of 159, 172-174. 212-213
phosphorus in 194
relations of 174
INDEX.
641
Volcanic vents, distribution and character of • 411-412
Volcanism, occurrence of *''17
Volume changes. Sec Secondary concentration.
Volunteer mine, geology at 259,2fj5
Vulcan formation, alteration of. ■ 354
correlation of 598, 60S, OlO-Gll
distribution and character of 302-304,.10G-307, 327, 330, 008
iron ore in 303-304, 335-340, 346, 351 , 460, 503
relationsof. . 305,334,338-339,342-343
structure of 314,338
topographyon . .■. 107,329
Vulcan member, correlation of 59S,G10-G11
distribution and character of 291 , 297-299, 312-318. 321-322. 323
iron ore in 299, 314-315, 323
magnetic phase of 317-318
relations of 313-314
structure of 315-317
W.
Wadsworth, M. E., on copper ores 580-582
on iron-bearing rocks 500
on iron ores 570
on Iveweenawan series 397-398, 400-403, 404
Walcott, C. D., on fossils of Lake LSuperior sandstone 340
Wall rock, alteration of 582-585
alteration of. analyses showing 583
"Warping, elTects of. ._ 44s_449
evidence of _ 87,450
Water, circulation of, in rock 186
circulation of, figure showing 186
Waterloo district, correlation in * 598
geology of 3G4
map of 359
Waterloo quartzite, correlation of 598
distribution and character of 364
Waucedah. geology near 333^ 340
Wausau district, geology of 355-357
Wausaugraywacke. correlation of 593
distribution and character of 356
topography on 108
Waushara district , map of _ 359
Wawa tuff, coiTelation of 598
distribution and character of 150, 151-152, 153
petrography of 151-152
Wawa, Lake, geology near 151,152
Weathering, absence of 502
effect of, on concentration _ '. 500
processes of 585-586
relation of, to iron ores 503-505, 516, 539-540
Weidman. S., on age of peneplain , . 88
on drainage 91
Pago.
Weidman, S., onglaciation 4.37.439
on iron ores : 564,566,570-571
on physiography . . 98, 107-108, 116
on Wisconsin geology 35S-365, 377
West I*ond, geology near 382, 3a3, 385, 410
West Seagull Lake, geology at 131
West Vulcan mine, section of, figure showing 349
Wewe slate, correlation of 598,605
distribution and character of 252-253,258-259,605
relations of 259, 2C0
topography on 105
Weyerhauser. geology near 357
While Iron Lake, geology near 119, 122
Whitney, J. D.. and Foster. J. W., on Marquette district 96
Whittlesey, Charles, on Mesabi district 42
Willmott, A. B., and Coleman, A. P., on Michipicoten ranges 95
Wilson, A. W. G., on Minnesota geology 367-369,374
Winchell, A. N., on ICeweenawan series 360, 395-410
on nomenclature 395-407
Winchell, N. H., pnglaciation 438
on iron ores 56^-570
on Iveweenawan series 397, 399
on Mesabi district 42
on Minnesota geology 370
on physiography 92. 98, 104
Wirmebago, Lake, formation of 443
Wisconsin, bibliography for „ 77-78
correlation in 598
Clinton ores of 45
copper ores of 580
geology of 355-365, 376-380, 413-414, 429
hematite in'. 45
investigations in 72, 73
iron ores of 461
production of 461
physiography of 97-98, 100, 107-108
figure showing 116
See also particular disfiicts.
Wisconsin stage, glaciers of 427, 454
Wolverine mine, history of 36
ores of 576, 577
Woman River, geology near 126,507,555
Wood alcohol, recovery of 48
Woodward, R. W., analyses by.' 404
Wright, F. E., on igneous rocks 410-411,424,582
Wright, F. E , and Larsen, E. S., on quartz crystallization 549
Wurtz, H., on silver minerals 593
Z.
Zenith mine, sections of, figures showing 138
Zapffe, Carl, on Cuyuna district 216-224
47517°— VOL 52— 11-
-41
O
]■■ ■•v«|i>iij*lu|1
c
I Zaurvntfttfi
Suronian wflTTj*
ginnlj[ulm»^
l[v
^IIB
is? I,
liiiiiiiiQ
9 0.
ALCONKIAN
U. S. GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
MESABI DISTRICT
KEWEENAWAN SERIES
MINNESOTA
ByC.Iv-Leith
(Corrected toJamiaryl. 1911)
Scale esTfiro
Conlour interval 20 fcei
Dolum is mean eea le*^„ .
BlevBlionorLala-SiirprioriBoOSftjet
190S
LEGEN D
ALGONKIAN
HURONIAN SERIES
ARCMEAN
LAURENTIAN SERIES KEEWATIN SERIES
UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKIE GROUP)
j KmlHrmss^mlc Plabaac andDuluUi gBbliro Vli-giiUa nlme Bivmblk^^i^ui"
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE '
U. S- GEOLOGICAL SURVEY
GEORGE OTiS SMITH. DIRECTOR
GEOLOGIC MAP AND SECTIONS OF THE MARQUETTE IRON-r
Oi-ij^inallyprepHi-'Ml b\(".W A:im IIihc iiiul W.S.n;iylev.JH!Kl.U.'viscil LnUcccm
urClfvelH-nd CUVls lion rmn(>,in,v. Oiivni-lron Mii)inii Compniiy.aiul j»p"l«if*'f
Si-al*' snhr.o
QUATERNARY
CAMBRIAN
ALGONKIAN
Contour interval 60 feel
LEGEND
HURONIAN SERIES
ERUPTIVE
UPPER HURONIAN (ANIMIKlE GROUPJ
MIDDLE HURONIAN
W/jfJ/////A\
\ ZT
nSM
liiiiki srhist Coodrith quail/.iii- Negimnt-f fnimaiini.
W'rwe slule
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XVII
; OF THE MARQUEITE IRON-BEARING DISTRICT, MICHIGAN
p Mild W..S,naylev.I»M(> Ur•^^se(i in Di^<(jinl)tM- 1.I.910. In iiulude <*xplnrn|]<»ns
)livpi'Ii'oil MiijJnjS ) ■oiiipmiy.njid gpologicaJ vi-ork orA.K.SpujjiH ii uikI nUioi-s
Scale RrJ^O
Contoiii inti'i-\'al !,0 ft-el
LEGEND
ARCHEAN
LAURENTIAN SERIES
J<EEWATIf4 SERIES
UNCLASSIFIED
LOWER HtJRQNIAN
W/M///,
Ajibik qufirtT:
■WVwo BlalP Kiniii iliilDinitc Mi'Sititiit inmrlz
I'ulntcr i^neisK
Kiichi si-his
Mi>ii» HchiHl
'%'
.^'-
LEGEM D
ALGONKIAN
unONIAN SERIES
KEWELNAWAN I?) SERIES
, „^„ ^„ „, UinliigiuiiiUK dliUi-' ViOi-iuiii-rm-li"un.ii;5
[..tlilT tfr^Mi s<.-lii«lH iiu-l>uii£g ^HVurackcH, ,, membri- of
[v]
! I*
UONOGIUPH Lll fUTE '
OUTCROPS
mi MIc* tilt*
irit£ Mignatlte
S Quango
qe QusrU con£lomerMo
q"c Qustti jchm
qm*c Quart; fnici tchist
1 Slile
IC2 .Schistote gieenitons
«>.. ActinolltB tchiit
• ic ActmolitB JChiit ind Conglomerii
c ..Conglomerile
ct Cirbon>c«ou( ttate
CSC Carbantceout ichut
c(» Cherty fetrugmouj slate
Cg» .Chorty grlinente Schid
mo Iron sUte and non ore
'e Fragmont.
g»i )c Garnotifp'ous ithiat
6" Gfaywactio
gd G'eenatonedior.te
v^ji msC.Gatnetiferoui rn<i:i ich>it
■/■■; \ ii..,G'o«fi ichiit and iton slal«
.■ GreenitonB
,;r Granite
g & a Gteenstons and ilate
hie Hoinblenda ichitt
hmii:. ... Harnblarda<riik* ichiil
n^n Hornblenda gnai)a
}
OUTCROP MAP OF THE FLORENCE IRON DISTRICT, WISCONSIN
PHi.M MAI- llV W N MKKKiAM lr)o4-, l-.\i(Tl.\' HJvXaSKH 1!V Wn R. rnUKISS.lyH •
ON0Gb»PM tu blatek
GEOLOGIC MAP OF THE CRYSTAL FALLS DISTRICT, INCLtTDING PARTS OF THE FELCH MOUNTAIN AND MARQUETTE DISTRICTS, MICHIGAN
>i Air lES'ooo
Contour uiUi-*b1 40(hot
ItKK)
MONOGRAPH Lll PLATE XXVI
SEDIMENTARY ROCKS
1
?l
«s
s
i
f
$
*
1
1
»
5
"■
••MMMiMMa^Mfvm««ai^>ViqMa
ii!i
'nnuiiit
;iii
,!
11
ail
{ill
t ; . » ;
iiii
iliiilWililiii'
iiiiiiliiiiiiliiil^
:>:ii>iti.'^'i'i'i
iWl
iii
w
Fi!J
ilpilWiiiiliiiiiiii
mm
M
Mmy
ItUUIIiiitlilili
mm